โครงการกอสรางทางรถไฟ สายเดนชัย-เชียงราย-เชียงของ สัญญาที่ 2 ชวงงาว-เชียงราย เอกสารประกวดราคาจาง ดวยวิธีประกวดราคาอิเล็กทรอนิกส (e-bidding)

ราชอาณาจักรไทย
กระทรวงคมนาคม
การรถไฟแหงประเทศไทย
โครงการกอสรางทางรถไฟ สายเดนชัย-เชียงราย-เชียงของ
สัญญาที่ 2 ชวงงาว-เชียงราย
เอกสารประกวดราคาจาง
ดวยวิธีประกวดราคาอิเล็กทรอนิกส (e-bidding)
เลม III (ขอกําหนดรายการจําเพาะดานเทคนิค)
BOOK 1/3 (SECTIONS 1 – 4)
BOOK 3/3 (SECTIONS 8 –10)
บริษัท เอ็ม เอ เอ คอนซัลแตนท จํากัด

บริษัท เอพซิลอน จํากัด
บริษัท เอ็มเอชพีเอ็ม จํากัด
ธันวาคม ๒๕๖๓
การรถไฟแห1งประเทศไทย
โครงการก'อสร*างทางรถไฟ สายเด'นชัย-เชียงราย-เชียงของ
สัญญาที่ 2 ช'วงงาว-เชียงราย
เอกสารประกวดราคาจ*าง
ด*วยวิธีประกวดราคาอิเล็กทรอนิกสD (e-bidding)
เล#ม III (ข(อกำหนดรายการจำเพาะด(านเทคนิค)
บริษัท เอ็ม เอ เอ คอนซัลแตนท2 จำกัด

บริษัท เอพซิลอน จำกัด
บริษัท เอ็มเอชพีเอ็ม จำกัด
ธันวาคม 2563
Tender Documents Technical Specifications
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Contents
Page
SECTION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1-1
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK 1-1
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS 1-5
1.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 1-8
1.4 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1-10
1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS 1-17
1.6 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 1-19
1.7 MOBILISATION AND DEMOBILISATION 1-24
1.8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1-26
1.9 CONSTRUCTION SURVEYS 1-55
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING LABORATORY 1-61
1.11 PROJECT RECORDS 1-76
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 1-82
SECTION 2: EARTHWORKS 2-1

2.1 EARTHWORKS DEFINITIONS AND CLASSIFICATIONS 2-1
2.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 2-3
2.3 EXCAVATION 2-5
2.4 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 2-10
2.5 EMBANKMENT 2-16
2.6 SUBBASE AND SUBBALLAST 2-25
2.7 TOPSOIL AND GRASSING 2-29
2.8 CUT SLOPE PROTECTION 2-31
SECTION 3: ROADWORKS 3-1

3.1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 3-1
3.2 SHOULDERS FOR ROADS 3-4
3.3 SCARIFICATION & RECONSTRUCTION OF EXISTING PAVEMENT 3-5
3.4 PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT 3-6
3.5 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3-14
3.6 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENT 3-37
3.7 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3-49
3.8 CONCRET KERB AND GUTTER 3-72
Track Doubling Project: Den Chai – Chiang Rai – Chiang Khong Section Volume III : Book 1/3
Contract : 2 Ngao -Chiang Rai Section i
3.9 SLOPE PROTECTION 3-73

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES 3-78
3.11 CONCRETE SIDEWALK 3-79
3.12 GRASSING 3-80
3.13 TOPSOIL 3-81
3.14 GUARD RAILS 3-82
3.15 FENCING 3-83
3.16 MARKERS AND GUIDE POSTS 3-83
3.17 ROAD SIGNS 3-84
3.18 ROAD LIGHTING 3-86
3.19 ROAD MARKING 3-86
SECTION 4: STRUCTURAL WORKS 4-1

4.1 FORMWORK AND FALSEWORK 4-1
4.2 REINFORCEMENT 4-4
4.3 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES 4-8
4.4 PRECAST CONCRETE 4-26
4.5 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 4-29
4.6 DAMPPROOFING AND MEMBRANE WATER PROOFING 4-36
4.7 JOINTS, BEARINGS AND SUNDRIES 4-40
4.8 PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE DRIVEN PILES 4-46
4.9 BORED CONCRETE PILES 4-53
4.10 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK 4-64
4.11 BRIDGE RAILINGS 4-96
4.12 REVETMENTS 4-98
Contract : 2 Ngao -Chiang Rai Section ii
SECTION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Tender Documents Section 1: General Requirements
SECTION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

1.1.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1.1.1 Scope
The work covered by this Specification consists of the furnishing of all labour, supervision,
transport, tools, supplies, materials and equipment to furnish, fabricate, transport, install, test and
commission comprises the construction of a metre gauge railway track running in parallel with the
existing track, and connections with the existing main line track, complete with all works necessary
in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications to facilitate operation of the railway.
The Works include the supply and installation of signal and telecommunication equipment and
cables, and the provision of temporary signalling arrangements for temporary diversions and
phased diversion works during construction.
1.1.1.2 Work Included
(1) The Contractor shall carry out under this contract:
(a) Detailed topographical and geotechnical surveys.
(b) The setting-out, excavation, disposal of materials, import of suitable fill material,
backfilling and compaction to graded elevations, earthworks, embankments.
Construction of foundations, cable trenching, concrete roughing, and surface water
drains. Control of surface, stream, and river, water flows during the Works, including
pollution control requirements
(c) The supply, forming, placing, curing, and protection of all concrete work in bearing
slabs, transition structures, bridge abutments and piers, prestressed and reinforced
concrete beams, culverts, bases, walls etc, including driven and bored piling.
(d) The procurement, supply, fabrication, and installation of ballasted track with
continuously welded rail on concrete sleepers, including connecting to, and modifying
of existing tracks. Arrangement of temporary operation routes, and temporary track
diversions, in order to maintain the uninterrupted operation of the existing tracks.
(e) The design supply and installation of complete signalling and telecommunications
systems, including the relocation and modification of signal circuits, plant and
equipment.
(f) The construction of the station complexes and improvements to existing stations as
stated.
(g) The construction and improvements of railway bridges (if appliable)
(h) The provision, installation and testing of mains electric power for lighting and power
purposes and distribution to SRT property from the Provincial Electricity Authority.
Contract: 2 Ngao - Chiang Rai Section 1-1
(i) Diversion of roads including the supply, spreading and compacting of road surfacing
materials and highway facilities. Marking of road surfaces.
(j) The supply, excavation, laying, jointing, backfilling, compacting and testing of the water
supply systems including water pipes connecting into the Provincial Water Authority's
water mains.
(k) The supply, excavation, laying, jointing, backfilling, compacting and testing of sewage
systems.
(l) The supply, excavation, laying, jointing, backfilling, compacting and testing of surface
water systems.
(m) Supply and installation of fencing and gates.
(n) Design and provision of temporary roads, detours, access roads and other temporary
works during the Works.
(o) Protection, warning and lighting to protect the public from danger during the Works, and
compliance with all regulations and requirements issued by competent authorities.
(p) Installation of buried signalling and telecommunication fibre optic and copper cable
route in the Right of Way.
(q) The provision of lookouts and hand signalmen for the protection of train movements
and Contractor’s staff and equipment.
(r) The provision of updated programmes of the work, including Critical Path Networks,
cash flows and balances, materials and plant manufacturing programmes and delivery
and progress reports at monthly intervals. The cash flow forecast shall be revised to
reflect current programming and future programming every 3 months.
(s) The provision of a comprehensive Quality Assurance programme and testing
laboratory. The testing of materials.
(t) The provision of a Site Environmental Plan and regular Environmental monitoring
reports.
(u) The submittal for review by the Engineer of all designs, drawings, tracings, and
technical information as specified herein and as may be deemed necessary by the
Engineer for the construction, installation and future maintenance of the railway.
(v) The provision of as-built drawings.
(w) Provision and maintenance of services to the Engineer, and Engineer's Representative
(SRT’s Site staff).
(x) Submission of all applications for obtaining necessary permits and approvals together
with the payments of necessary fees etc. as required for the performance of the
Contract.
(y) Coordination and cooperation with SRT, including the SRT Traffic Department, the SRT
Operation Centre, the SRT Signalling and Telecommunication Department, SRT
maintenance operations and any other agency concerned.
(2) Facilities Provided by SRT

(a) Provided that the Contractor submits for the Engineer's approval a detailed drawing
of the layouts, designs, and the times and duration of occupation SRT will make the
Right of Way available within the following:
(i) Temporary sites for the construction of stores, the stockpiling of materials, plant
and equipment.
(ii) Sites for the construction of temporary buildings for offices.
(iii) Track possessions in off peak periods for the Contractor to undertake works free
from SRT rail traffic. Provided that the Contractor submits at least 30 days prior
to the commencement of the work, for the approval of the Engineer, a detailed
schedule showing the areas, times, and dates required for each track
possession. Track possessions shall be of three hours maximum duration per
day.
After the SRT Handing over the area and took possession, it in sole responsibilities by the
contractor to secure the area and agilities free handful to lifers, properties and environment
1.1.1.3 Quality Assurance
(1) Contractor's responsibility
(a) The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for ensuring that the Work throughout is
executed in the most timely and substantial, proper and workmanlike manner, with
the required quality of materials and conforming to the best engineering practice. That
the Works, through Quality Control, is performed or made in accordance with the
Contract and those services reasonably expected to be furnished, though not
specifically provided in the contract, are furnished, all to SRT's entire satisfaction.
1.1.1.4 Programme
(1) All Works shall be completed within the period as stated in the Contract Agreement from
the date of Commencement of the Works.
(2) For the purposes of Clauses 22 and 23 of the General Conditions of Contract, the "Section
of the Works" as defined in Clause 1 of the General Conditions of Contract shall mean the
entire Works.
(3) The Contractor shall submit the Project Schedule as described in Section 1.6 “Construction
Schedule” within 45 days of the Date of Notice to proceed. A cash flow forecast in Baht
shall be submitted with the project schedule.
1.1.2 PRODUCTS
Shall be provided as required by the various Sections of these Specifications.
1.1.3 EXECUTION
1.1.3.1 Performance
(1) The Contractor shall undertake, as a remeasured fixed price project, the whole of the civil
and structural Works. Trackworks, Signalling and Telecommunications items will not be
remeasured. In any event the Contractor shall provide and install all Works of which the
detail may not be specified but which are necessary to complete the Works and are
required and are consistent with the intent of the specification for reliability, and the
operational and technical requirements for the completion and safety of the railway.
(2) The Work shall be carried out as required by the Contract Agreement to the technical
requirements of these Specifications.
(3) The Work shall be carried out by the Contractor employing or in partnership with approved
specialist contractors to carry out specialised work required by these Specifications.
1.1.3.2 Safety
(1) The Contractor shall be solely responsible for complying with the requirements of the
Contract Documents concerning Interference with the Public.
(2) The work under the Contract involves working on and alongside SRT's operating Railway.
(3) The Contractor shall ensure that no activity is undertaken or performed that will place in
jeopardy the safety of the public, SRT's trains or staff.
(4) No work may be undertaken on the existing railway track except under a "track possession"
approved in advance by SRT.
When heavy construction equipment is used the following conditions will be strictly
enforced:
(a) No work may be undertaken within 2.5 metres of the centreline of any operational
track and no part of such equipment will be permitted within 2.5 metres of the track
centreline except under a "track possession" approved in advance by SRT.
(b) When work with heavy construction equipment is carried out between 2.5 and 5
metres of the track centreline all work must cease when trains are passing the area,
equipment must be slewed away from the track and personnel stand more than 2.5
metres from the centreline of the track. The Engineer must be informed at least 7
days in advance of such work.
(c) Work more than 5 metres from the centreline of the track may, in general, proceed
without restriction subject to the Engineer's approval.
(5) When any work is undertaken on or in the vicinity of the railway track the Contractor shall
employ a lookoutman or more than one as necessary to give warning of the approach of
trains, and shall fully comply with SRT procedures and rules.
(6) The Contractor shall erect suitable warning markers to ensure that equipment and
personnel stand more than 2.5 metres from the centreline of an operational track as trains
pass when work is carried out between the passages of trains.
1.1.3.3 Damage to Railway Operations
(1) The Contractor shall on demand pay to the Employer any loss of revenue and additional
expenditure which in the opinion of the Engineer has been incurred by the Employer by
reason of the rescheduling of services by the Employer due to the Contractor obstructing
the Railway or interfering with the control or signalling system or electrical equipment other
than for a period for which a Restriction and/or Possession and/or Isolation has been given.
(2) In the event that damage is caused by the Contractor to the Railway such that
rescheduling/suspension of services by the Employer has to be made, then the Contractor
shall on demand pay to the Employer any loss of revenue and additional expenditure
which in the opinion of the Engineer has been incurred by the Employer in making good
the damage and in rescheduling/suspending the services
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

1.2.1 DESCRIPTION
1.2.1.1 Scope
Throughout the Contract Documents, reference is made to codes and standards which establish
qualities and types workmanship and materials, and which establish methods for testing and
reporting on the pertinent characteristics.
Where materials or workmanship are required by these Contract Documents to meet or exceed
the specifically named code or standard, it is the Contractor's responsibility to provide materials
and workmanship which meet or exceed the specifically named code or standard.
Specific naming of codes or standards occurs in the Drawings and in other Sections of these
Specifications. However, the standards and practices established by major national Railways shall
be accepted where these are equivalent to or exceed the quoted standard.
(1) Units
The ISO metric system of units shall apply to all sections of the Specifications. Where
figures are stated in imperial measurement the Contractor may use a metric equivalent
subject to the prior written approval of the Engineer.
(2) Familiarity with Pertinent Codes and Standards
In procuring all items used in this Work, it is the Contractors responsibility to verify the
detailed requirements of the specifically named codes and standards and to verify that the
items procured for use in the Works meet or exceed the specified requirements.
(3) Compliance
The Contractor shall, when so required, by the Contract Documents or by written request
from the Engineer, deliver to the Engineer all required proof that the materials or
workmanship, or both, meet or exceed the requirements of the specifically named code
or standard.
(a) Such proof shall be in the form of a Submittal as described in Section 1.4 Submittals
and Substitutions.
(b) Generally, these will be required to be copies of a certified report of tests conducted
by a testing agency approved for that purpose by the Engineer.
(c) Certificates of Compliance issued by the manufacturer of products supplied for use or
installation by the Contractor.
(d) Non-compliance: The Engineer reserves the right to reject items incorporated into the
work which fail to meet the specified minimum requirements.
(e) Applicable standards listed in these Specifications include, but are not necessarily
limited to, standards promulgated by the following agencies and organisations:
(i) TIS = Thai Industrial Standards Institute, Ministry of Industry, Rama VI
Road, Bangkok 10400, Thailand.
(ii) JIS = Japan Standards Association, 1-24 Akasaka 4-Chome,
Minatoku, Tokyo 107, Japan.
(iii) AASHTO = American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials, 341 National Press Building, Washington D.C., 20004,
USA.
(iv) ASTM = American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street,
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, 19103, USA.
(v) BS = British Standards Institution, Mayiands Avenue, Hemel
Hempstead, Herts HP2 4SQ, UK.
(vi) DOH = Highway Construction Standards Department of Highways,
Thailand.
(vii) AREMA = American Railway Engineering Association, 50F Street,
N.W., Washington, DC 20013, USA.
(viii) UIC = Union International des Chemins de fer
(International Union of Railways)
(f) Any standard or code of practice referred to in the Contract or any other standard or
code of practice that may be substituted therefore shall be the latest edition. All
relevant particulars and conditions in any standard or code of practice referred to in
the Contract relating to material, quality and workmanship shall be complied with and
all tests specified shall be conformed to.
(g) Where any standard or code of practice is referred to in the Contract, other appropriate
national or international equivalents may be substituted subject to the approval of
the Engineer as described in Clause (3) hereof. Where other appropriate national or
international standards are offered the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
approval a copy of the alternative standard or code of practice in English and shall
provide such further information as is required to enable the Contractor to
demonstrate to the Engineer that the alternative national or international equivalent
may be substituted.
(h) Accepted Railway Engineering Practice
(i) Where not otherwise defined in this Specification, the design, material and work
shall conform to the principles and practices established in an accepted major
railway's engineering practice.
(ii) This shall mean the standards and practices followed by one or more railways
for systems and conditions similar to those described herein.
(iii) The adoption of a particular practice must be consistent with the intent of
these Specifications and is subject to specific approval.
(4) Deviations
(a) The Contractor shall comply with these Specifications in all respects. It is therefore
required that all works, procedures and plant supplied by the Contractor are in
compliance with these Specifications.
(i) The Contract shall be based on the provision of equipment, materials and
services with a performance equivalent to or better than those specified. Any
deviations offered shall be given with full and clear reasons for the change in
the specification with references to the affected clauses of these Specifications.
(ii) Should equipment, material or methods not conform to those specified in
these documents, deviation will be permitted provided that
• the deviation is consistent with the general intent of this Specification;
• justification of such deviation is made on the basis of improved safety,
operational performance, reliability or simplicity of maintenance;
• the deviation represents accepted railway engineering practice meeting the
requirements of Section 1.2.1.2(3)(h);
• any deviation from, or alternatives to the Specification shall be clearly
stated and supporting information shall be provided.
(5) "Or Equal"
(a) in all cases where the name of a particular type or make of equipment or item is
referred to in the Contract, this indicates the acceptable standard.
(b) The Contractor may offer equipment or materials other than those specified and in
all such cases the Contractor's offer shall be of at least equal quality. When
alternatives are offered, the Contractor shall include full technical descriptions,
drawings and specifications, and shall provide such further information as is required
to demonstrate to the Engineer that the alternatives are equivalent to the items
specified.
1.2.2 PRODUCTS
Except where otherwise specifically approved by the Engineer, all materials used in the Works
shall be new, unused of the best quality of their respective kinds as specified or described in the
Specifications, Drawings and Bills of Quantities and shall comply wherever possible with the
appropriate current Standard. Refurbished, "As New", rebuilt or second hand, or rejected material
or components shall not be used. All proprietary materials, plant, or equipment used on the
Works shall be used, fixed or applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.2.3 EXECUTION
Not relevant to this Section
1.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

1.3.1 DESCRIPTION
1.3.1.1 Scope
(1) The Contractor is required to provide Project Management of the Contract.
(2) Definitions
"Prime Contractor" shall mean the entity signing the Contract. In the case of a Joint Venture,
Consortium or other association of firms it shall mean the firm taking the lead role, in
addition to having signed the Contract.
(3) Policy
The Prime Contractor shall establish a Project Management team under a Project Director
supplied from the staff of the Prime Contractor. The objective of the Project Management
team is to furnish all documentation, plant, materials, labour and other facilities requisite
or incidental to the successful completion of the Works and in carrying out all duties and
obligations imposed by the Contract Documents.
(4) Organisation
(a) A typical Management Structure shall include subcontractors and be engaged in
design, manufacture, transportation, construction and installation. The organisation
shall allow for off-site and on-site functions.
(b) Off-site Function
The off-site function is one of Procurement and Construction Management,

incorporating documentation, design, manufacturing and transportation. Each function
is typically controlled by a Manager and supported by experienced Engineers and staff.
The Quality Control off-site team shall have an adequate number of Quality Control
staff. The Quality Control Manager shall be on-site.
(c) The on-site function shall have the responsibility to construct, install, test and
commission the Works. This is typically controlled by a Project Site Manager who shall
be on site during the whole time that any works are in progress in Thailand. The Project
Site Manager shall be supported by installation engineers and the Quality Control
Manager.
(d) The Project Site Manager shall be the "Authorised Representative" of the Contractor
and shall be the only person authorised to communicate with the Engineer and shall
have adequate delegated authority from the Project Director for contractual and
financial control of the project to be able to manage the progress of the Contract
without frequent reference to an off-site Director.
(1) Qualifications
(a) All Managers shall be experienced in their professional discipline and have previous
line-management experience.
(b) Senior Engineers shall have had at least 10 years experience in their professional
discipline.
(2) Language Qualifications
(a) The Project Director and Project Site Manager shall possess a good command of
spoken English and be able to communicate in written English.
(b) Key site staff shall be able to communicate in English.
(3) Project Site Manager
(a) The Project Site Manager shall be experienced in construction projects and shall be
responsible for all aspects of the Contract such as, but not limited to; quality control,
project planning work, procurement, design, manufacturing, approval, shipping,
delivering, construction work, installation work, safety, testing, commissioning,
progress monitoring, payments, technical documentation and correspondence etc.
1.3.1.3 Submittals
(1) Submittals shall conform to the requirements of Section 1.4: Submittals and Substitutions.
(2) At least 10 days prior to the Pre-construction meeting the Contractor shall submit a final
Project Management Organisation structure plan, giving lines of authority and for each
organisation or sub-organisation the c.v.'s of expatriate and local engineers employed on

the project and complete details and structure of the Contractor's on-site organisation.
1.3.2 PRODUCTS
Not relevant to this Section.
1.3.3 EXECUTION
1.4 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

1.4.1 DESCRIPTION
1.4.1.1 SCOPE
Wherever possible throughout the Contract Documents, the minimum acceptable quality of
workmanship and materials has been defined by reference to recognised industry and national
standards, manufacturer's name and product, or description of required attributes and
performance.
To ensure that the specified products are furnished and installed in accordance with design intent,
procedures shall be established for advance submittal of design data procedures and other
requirements and for their review by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall make all submittals required by the Contract Documents, and revise and
resubmit as necessary to establish compliance with the specified requirements.
Individual requirements for submittals are described in pertinent Sections of these Specifications.
(1) Co-ordination of Submittals
Prior to each submittal the Contractor shall carefully review and coordinate all aspects of
each item being submitted and verify that each item and the submittal for it conforms in
all respects with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The affixing of the
Contractor's signature to each submittal certifies that this coordination has been performed.
(2) Certificates of Compliance
(a) The Contractor shall certify that all materials used in the Work comply with all
specified provisions thereof. Certification shall not be construed as relieving the
Contractor from furnishing satisfactory materials if, after tests are performed on
selected samples, the material is found to not meet specified requirements.
(b) The Contractor shall show on each certification the name and location of the Work,
name and address of Contractor, quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery
to which the certificate applies, and name of the manufacturing, fabricating company
or supplier. Certification shall be in the form of letter or company-standard forms

containing all required data. Certificates shall be signed.
(c) In addition to the above information, all laboratory test reports submitted with
Certificates of Compliance shall show the date or dates of testing, the specified
requirements for which testing was performed, and results of the test or tests.
1.4.1.3 Submittals
(1) Submittal Schedule
Within 60 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, and before any items are submitted for
approval the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two copies of the schedule described
in Section 1.4.2 herein.
(2) Certificates of Compliance
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all Certificates of Compliance for products and
materials as part of submittal procedure.
(3) Procedures
(a) The Contractor shall make submittals in strict accordance with the provisions of this
Section.
(b) Any work performed by the Contractor prior to the approval of the Engineer, or before
drawings and specifications are submitted or approved, shall be at the Contractor's risk.
1.4.2 PRODUCTS
1.4.2.1 Submittal Schedule
(1) General
The Contractor shall compile a complete and comprehensive schedule of all submittals
anticipated to be made during progress of the Work. Include a list of each type of item for
which Contractor's drawings, shop drawings, certificates of compliance, material samples,
guarantees, or other types of submittals are required. Upon approval by the Engineer this
schedule will become part of the Contract and the Contractor will be required to adhere
to the schedule except when specifically otherwise permitted.
(2) Coordination
The Contractor shall co-ordinate the schedule with all necessary subcontractors and
materials suppliers to ensure their understanding of the importance of adhering to the
approved schedule and their ability to so adhere. Co-ordinate as required to ensure the
grouping of submittals as described in Part Ill herein.
(3) Revisions
The Contractor shall revise and update the schedule on a monthly basis as necessary to
reflect conditions and sequences. Promptly submit revised schedules to the Engineer for
review and comment.
1.4.2.2 Drawings
(1) Shop and Working Drawings
(a) Scale and Measurements
The Contractor shall make all Drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show
all pertinent aspects of the item and its method of connection to the Work.
(b) Type of Prints Required
The Contractor shall submit all Drawings in the form of one negative on stabilised film
of each sheet plus three blue line or black line prints of each sheet and two (2) sets
of AutoCAD Files, or otherwise as specified by the Engineer. Blueprints will not be
acceptable.
(c) Reproduction of Review Drawings
The review comments of the Engineer will be shown on the negative and returned to
the Contractor. The Contractor shall make and distribute all copies required for his
purposes.
(d) Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in the Specifications the Contractor shall submit
drawings of any part of the Works to the Engineer for his approval at least such days
described herein prior to the commencement of the work to be detailed by said shop
drawings.
1. Earthwork 30 days
2. Structural work 60 days
3. Utility work 60 days
4. Building work 60 days
5. Tunnelling works 60 days
6. Track works 60 days
7. Signalling and Telecommunications works 60 days
Within 30 days after submission to the Engineer, the Engineer may, if necessary, in his opinion
modify or instruct the Contractor to modify or revise the proposed shop drawings. If the Contractor
is instructed to revise or modify, he shall resubmit revised or modified shop drawings for the
Engineer's approval within 7 days after such instruction is made.
1.4.2.3 Manufacturers' Literature
(1) General
Where contents of submitted literature from manufacturers include data that are not
pertinent to the submittal, the Contractor shall clearly indicate which portion of the
contents is being submitted for review.
(2) Number of Copies Required
The Contractor shall submit the number of copies which are required to be returned plus
two copies which will be retained by the Engineer.
1.4.2.4 Samples
(1) Accuracy of Samples
Samples shall be of the precise article proposed to be furnished.
(2) Number of Samples Required
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall submit all samples in the quantity required
plus one that will be retained by the Engineer.
(3) Reuse of Samples
In situations specifically approved by the Engineer sample may be used in the construction
as one of the installed items.
1.4.2.5 Colours and Patterns
Unless the precise colour and pattern is specifically described in the Contract Documents, and
whenever a choice of colour or pattern is available in specified product, the Contractor shall
submit accurate colour and pattern charts to the Engineer for review and selection.
1.4.2.6 Substitutions
(1) Approval Required
(a) The Contract is based on the standards of quality established in the Contract
Documents.
(b) All products and materials proposed for use, including those specified by required
attributes and performance shall require approval by the Engineer before being
incorporated into the Work.
(c) Codes and Standards, materials, equipment, or methods shall not be substituted
unless such substitution has been specifically approved for this Work by the Engineer.
(2) "Or equal"
(a) Where the phrase "or equal" or "or equal as approved by the Engineer" occurs in the
Contract Documents, materials, equipment, or methods will be accepted only after
specific approval for this Work by the Engineer.
(b) The decision of the Engineer shall be final.
1.4.3 EXECUTION
1.4.3.1 Identification of Submittals
(1) General
Consecutively number all submittals. Accompany each submittal with a letter of transmittal
containing all pertinent information required for identification and checking of submittals.
(2) Internal Identification
On at least the first page of each copy of each submittal, and elsewhere as required for
positive identification, clearly indicate the submittal number in which the item was
included.
(3) Re-submittals
When material is resubmitted for any reason, transmit under a new letter of transmittal
and with a new submittal number.
(4) Submittal Log
Maintain an accurate submittal log for the duration of the Contract, showing current status
of all submittals at all times. Make the submittal log available for the Engineer's review
upon request.
1.4.3.2 Coordination of Submittals
(1) General
Prior to submittal for approval, use all means necessary to fully coordinate all material
including, but not necessarily limited to:
(a) determine and verify all interface conditions, catalogue numbers, and similar data;
(b) coordinate with other trades as required;
(c) clearly indicate all deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents.
(2) Grouping of Submittals
Unless otherwise specified, make all submittals in groups containing all associated items to
ensure that information is available for checking each item when it is received. Partial
submittals may be rejected as not complying with the provisions of the Contract
Documents and the Contractor shall be strictly liable for all delays so occasioned.
1.4.3.3 Timing of Submittals
(1) General
Make all submittals far enough in advance of scheduled dates for installation to provide
all time required for reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revisions and
re-submittals, and for placing orders and securing delivery.
(2) Engineer's Review Time
Thirty (30) calendar days will be required by the Engineer following his receipt of the
submittal.
(3) Delays
Delays caused by tardiness in receipt of submittals will not be an acceptable basis for
extension of the Contract completion date.
1.4.3.4 Engineer's Review
(1) General
Review by the Engineer shall not be construed as a complete check, but only that the
general method of construction and detailing is satisfactory. Review shall not relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for errors which may exist.
(2) Authority to Proceed
The notations "Reviewed, no exceptions noted" or "Reviewed, exceptions noted" authorise
the Contractor to proceed with fabrication, purchase or both, of the items so noted, subject
to the revisions, if any, required by the Engineer's review comments.
The Contractor shall not commence work for which shop drawings are still to be reviewed
by the Engineer.
(3) Revisions
Make all revisions required by the Engineer. If the Contractor considers any required revision
to be a change, he shall so notify the Engineer as provided for the General Conditions of
Contract. Show each drawing revision by number, date, and subject in a revision block on
the drawing. Make only those revisions directed or approved by the Engineer.
(4) Revisions after Approval
When a submittal has been reviewed by the Engineer, re-submittal for substitution of
materials or equipment will not be considered unless accompanied by an acceptable
explanation as to why the substitution is necessary.
(5) Drawings on Site
Only drawings stamped and signed by the Engineer may be used for construction,
manufacture and installation. Any work executed utilising unauthorised drawings may, at
the discretion of the Engineer, be replaced by work conforming to approved drawings.
1.4.3.5 Technical Submittals
Submittal schedule required by Section 1.4.2.1 herein shall include at least but not be limited to
the topics listed in the sub-clauses below:
(1) Survey Report (Existing Conditions Survey)
(a) Plan and profile of the existing track including location of turnouts, platforms, level
crossings, over and under bridges, box culverts and other drainage structures, and
other information necessary for the preparation of shop/working drawings.
(b) Other site survey data required by Section 1.9: Construction Surveys for preparation
of designs, shop/working drawings.
(c) Location of signalling and telecommunications equipment, poles and open-wire
routes and depth of buried cables.
(d) Plan, profile and cross-section of level crossings including the roadway over the
crossing.
(e) Plans and profiles of Station Plazas where buildings are to be constructed and facilities
provided, or layout improvements to the Plazas.
(2) Geotechnical Investigation Report

(2.1) The report
(a) Soil Investigation report required for the preparation of shop/working drawings for
piled foundations, bridges and other structures.
(b) Investigation Report of Existing Structure. Study on existing bridges, including
location of foundation piles, for use in preparation of shop/working drawings for
new track alignments.
(c) Other reports as required for completion of design and preparation of shop/working
drawings
(2.2) The site investigation
The detail geotechnical site investigation shall be performed in order to verify the
soil condition for piling construction, excavation work and stability analysis of the
permanence or temporary work. The soil boring shall be carried out every 500 m
where there is no detail geotechnical site investigation presented in the design
drawing or designed reports or otherwise directed by the Engineer. The depths of
the site investigation shall be greater than the bottom of piles or foundation of
any structures not less than 3 time of their widths or otherwise directed by the
Engineer. The detail boring consists of collecting the undisturbed samples in soft
to medium clay and doing the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) with collecting the
disturbed samples at 1.5 m. interval in stiff silty clay and sandy soil layer. For
stability analysis and shallow foundation works, the field test and sample
collection shall be performed at interval 1.0 m for the depth of 3 m from the
ground surface.
The laboratory test consists of the natural water contents, total unit weight and
unconfined compression test of all undisturbed samples. The Atterberg limit is
performed for each clay layer. The sieve analysis shall be carried out for each sand
layer. The boring log of each borehole as well as soil profile for all borings shall
be made. The full report including boring log, soil profile and summary of test
result as well as a necessary analysis (example: pile capacity and settlement) shall
be submitted
(2.3) Settlement indicator
Upon the completion of all columns in portal frame or single pier, the settlement
indicators made of brass, size, thickness and configuration to be approved by the
Engineer, shall be installed at every one kilometer. The level shall be marked on
the level plate to an accuracy of +/-1 millimeter. The level shall be read and
recorded in every 6 months for a period of 2 years. Thereafter, the final record
shall be carried out and submitted to the Engineer at the end of Defect Liability
Period. The cost incurred shall be borne by the Contractor.
(3) Technical Data

(a) All technical and back up data including all necessary information shall be attached
to the submittals or correspondence.
(b) All these technical data shall be provided in English.
(4) Shop/Working Drawings
(a) Plans and profiles of the new track alignment. To provide all necessary information to
establish the mathematics of the new track alignment.
(b) Detailed Bridge Drawings. To include calculation sheets for design of steel truss bridge,
substructure with piled foundations and other details required for review by the
Engineer.
(c) Embankment cross-sections for bearing slab and piled foundations including design
calculation for pile lengths at different locations. Detailed drawings with plans and
details for slabs and piles. Detailed design of transition units with calculation sheets.
1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

1.5.1 DESCRIPTION
1.5.1.1 Scope
The Engineer will conduct project meetings throughout the construction period to enable an
orderly review of the progress of the Work to be undertaken, and to provide for systematic
discussion of problems.
The meetings will include; Pre-construction Meeting; Monthly Progress Meeting; Weekly Site
Meetings and Ad-Hoc Meeting.
(1) Persons designated by the Contractor to attend and participate in the project meetings
shall have all required authority to commit the Contractor to solutions agreed upon in the
project meetings.
(2) Sub-Contractor's representatives may attend as necessary for discussion of matters relative
to their work only and shall not be present at the time of any other discussions.
1.5.1.3 Submittals
(1) Agenda Items
To the maximum extent practicable, advise the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of
project meetings regarding all items to be added to the agenda.
(2) Minutes
The Engineer will compile minutes of each project meeting and will furnish three copies to
the Contractor. The Contractor may make and distribute such other copies as he wishes.
1.5.2 PRODUCTS
1.5.3 EXECUTION
1.5.3.1 Meeting Schedule
Project meetings will be held monthly and site meetings weekly. Necessary co-ordination shall be
made to establish a mutually acceptable schedule for meetings. Ad-hoc meetings shall be held
as necessary for discussions on any subject at any time called by the Engineer or the Contractor.
1.5.3.2 Meeting Location
To the maximum extent practicable, meetings will be held at the site office of the Engineer.
1.5.3.3 Pre-Construction Meeting
(1) Attendance shall be by authorised representatives of the Contractor and all major
subcontractors. The Engineer will advise other interested parties and request their
attendance.
(2) Minimum Agenda
Distribute data on, and discuss:
(a) Organisational arrangement of Contractor's resources and personnel, and those of
subcontractors, materials suppliers, and Inspection committee.
(b) Channels and procedures for communications.
(c) Construction schedule, including sequence of critical work.
(d) Contract Documents, including distribution of required copies of original documents
and revisions.
(e) Submittal of Codes and Standards to be substituted for referenced Codes and
Standards.
(f) Processing of Shop Drawings and other data submitted to the Engineer for review.
(g) Processing of site instructions and Variation Orders.
(h) Rules and regulations governing performance of the Work.
(i) Procedures for safety and first aid, security, quality control, housekeeping, and other
related matters.
1.5.3.4 Project Meeting
(1) Attendance
To the maximum extent practicable, assign the same person or persons to represent the
Contractor at project meetings throughout progress of the Work. Subcontractors, material
suppliers, and others may be invited to attend those project meetings in which their aspects
of the Work are involved.
(2) Minimum Agenda

Minimum Agenda is formed by:
(a) Review, revise as necessary, and approve minutes of previous meeting.
(b) Review progress of the Work since last meeting, including status of submittals for
approval.
(c) Identify problems which impede planned progress.
(d) Develop corrective measures and procedures to regain planned schedule.
(e) Complete other current business.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

1.6.1 DESCRIPTION
1.6.1.1 Scope
(1) This Section specifies the requirements for scheduling the Works to assure adequate
planning and execution of the Work so that the Work is completed within the completion
period given in the Contract, and to assist the Engineer in appraising the reasonableness of
the proposed schedules and reports described in this Section.
(2) Definitions
(a) "Day" used throughout the Contract, unless otherwise stated, means "Calendar Day".
(b) "Month" unless otherwise stated means "Gregorian Calendar Month".
(1) Qualifications of Scheduling Personnel
The scheduler shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in compiling construction
schedule data, in analysing by use of Critical Path Method or PERT, and in the preparation
and issue of periodic reports as required below.
(2) Reference Standards
Perform all data preparation, analysis, charting, and updating in accordance with all
recommendations contained in the current edition of "CPM in Construction" manual of
Associated General Contractors (USA), or in accordance with other standards approved by
the Engineer.
(3) Reliance upon Approved Schedule
(a) The construction schedule as approved by the Engineer will be an integral part of the
Contract, and will establish interim Contract completion dates for the various activities.
(b) Should any activity not be completed within 15 days after the stated scheduled date,
the Engineer shall have the right to order the Contractor to expedite completion of
the activity by whatever means the Engineer deems appropriate and necessary,
without additional compensation to the Contractor.
(c) Should any activity be 30 or more days behind schedule, the Engineer shall have the
right to perform the activity or have the activity performed by whatever method the
Engineer deems appropriate.
1.6.1.3 Submittals
(1) General
Comply with the provisions of Section 1.4: Submittals and Substitutions.
(2) Preliminary Analysis
Within 60 days after receipt of the Notice of Award, submit one reproducible copy and four
prints of a preliminary construction schedule, plus four prints of proposed format for
Materials Status reports, prepared in accordance with Section 1.6.3 herein.
(3) Construction Schedule
Within 30 days after receipt of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit one
reproducible and four prints of construction schedule prepared in accordance with Section
1.6.3 herein.
(4) Periodic Reports
On the first working day of each month following submittal of the construction schedule,
the Contractor shall submit four prints of the construction schedule updated as described
in Part Ill herein and shall include four prints of the Materials Status Reports updated as
described in Section 1.6.3 herein.
(5) Reviews
The Engineer shall review all construction schedules within 14 days. The Contractor shall
resubmit any modification incorporated into the schedule within 7 days of receipt of the
Engineer's comments.
1.6.2 PRODUCTS
1.6.2.1 Construction Analysis
(1) Diagram
(a) The Contractor shall prepare diagrams graphically showing the order and
interdependence of all activities necessary to complete the Works, and the sequence
in which each activity is to be accomplished, as planned by the Contractor in
coordination with all subcontractors whose work is shown on the diagram. Activities
shown on the diagram shall include, but are not necessarily limited to:
(i) Project mobilisation;
(ii) Submittals and approvals of Shop Drawings and Samples;
(iii) Procurement of equipment and critical materials;
(iv) Fabrication of special material and equipment, and their installation and testing;
(v) Construction activity;
(vi) Final inspection and testing;

(vii) Demobilisation;
(b) All activities directed by the Engineer that affect progress, required dates for
completion, or both, for all and for each part of the Work.
(2) The detail of information shall be such that duration times of activities shall normally range
from one to 15 days. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to the
Engineer's approval.
(3) As a minimum for each activity, the preceding and following event numbers, description of
each activity, cost, and activity duration in calendar days shall be submit on AO sheet.
(4) For each of these categories the planned construction rate shall be specified, together with
resources (plant, labour, etc.) to be employed.
(5) The Contractor shall allow for bad weather, holidays, moving equipment about the Site,
difficult access and any other such factors and contingencies in his estimates of activity
duration's.
(6) The duration of tunnel excavation work, as a part of activities to complete the Works within
Contract Period, shall be determined by using advance rate and cycle time derived from
geological information available and/or provided during Tender period. In case of adverse
geological conditions encountered during tunnel excavation, the Contractor shall use his
best endeavor to solve the problem and maintain the excavation progress. However, if the
tunnel excavation is unavoidably delayed due to such unanticipated geological conditions,
the Contractor may request for Extension of Time under GCC Clause 20. The details of
adverse geological conditions and its impact to working schedule shall be prepared,
analyzed and concluded by Third Party, to be approved by the Engineer prior to employed
by the Contractor with the Contractor’s own expenses. The Contractor shall submit the full
and detailed particulars to the Engineer for his consideration and approval.
1.6.2.2 Mathematical Analysis
(1) The Contractor shall submit a mathematical analysis of the diagram by manual or computer
aided means, including a tabulation of each activity. Show the following information as a
minimum for each activity:
(a) Preceding and following event numbers;
(b) Activity description;
(c) Estimated duration of activities;
(d) Earliest start date (by calendar date);
(e) Latest start date (by calendar date);
(f) Earliest finish date (by calendar date);
(g) Latest finish date (by calendar date);
(h) Slack or float (in calendar days);

(i) Monetary value of the activity;
(j) Percentage of activity completed;
(k) Cash flow based on portion of activity completed.
(2) The means used in making the mathematical analysis shall be capable of compiling the
total value of completed and partially completed activities, and be capable of accepting
modifications approved for time and logic adjustment.
1.6.2.3 Periodic Reports
(1) If computer-aided means are used the activities list in printout shall be sorted as follows:
(a) By the preceding event number from lowest to highest, and then in order of the
following event number;
(b) By the amount of float, then in order of preceding event numbers, and then in order
of succeeding event numbers;
(c) In order of preceding event numbers, and then in order of succeeding event numbers
(show the amount earned to date for each activity);
(d) Other sorts requested by the Engineer.
(2) If computer-aids are not used, provide equivalent information to the approval of the
Engineer.
1.6.2.4 Materials Status Reports
(1) Format
The Contractor's standard materials status report form will be acceptable if, in the
Engineer's judgement, it provides sufficient pertinent data to determine that materials
procurement flow is adequate for all needs of the Work.
(2) Content
As a minimum the following information shall be provided:
(a) item description, listed in accordance with specifications section number in which the
item is called for;
(b) purchase order number and date of issue;
(c) vendor name and quantity ordered;
(d) date shipped, and shipping means utilised;
(e) estimated date of arrival at job site;
(f) actual date of arrival at job site, and receiving report number.
1.6.3 EXECUTION
1.6.3.1 Preliminary Analysis
(1) Contents
(a) Show all activities of the Contractor under this Work for the period between receipt
of Notice to Proceed and submittal of construction schedule required under Section
1.6.1.3 above.
(b) Show the Contractor's general approach to remainder of the Work.
(c) Show cost of all activities scheduled for performance before submittal and approval
of the construction schedule.
(2) Submittals
Shall be in accordance with requirements for Preliminary analysis.
1.6.3.2 Construction Schedule
Within 30 days after receipt of Notice of Award, complete the action analysis described in
Section1.6.2 herein, in preliminary form. At Pre-construction meeting, review contents of proposed
construction schedule, and make all revisions agreed upon. Submit in accordance with Section
1.6.1.3 herein.
1.6.3.3 Materials Status Reports
At the Pre-construction meeting, review contents of proposed Materials Status Reports, and make
all revisions to format agreed upon.
1.6.3.4 Periodic Reports
(1) Construction Schedule
(a) The contents of the Construction Schedule are listed below:
(i) Report actual progress by updating the mathematical analysis.
(ii) Note on the summary report, or clearly show on a revised issue of affected
portions of the detailed diagram, all revisions causing changes in the detailed
program.
(iii) Revise the summary report as necessary for clarity.
(iv) Show dates of activities or portions of activities completed during the reporting
period, and the actual value.
(v) State the percentage of Work actually completed and schedule as of the report
date, and the progress along the critical path in terms of days ahead of or
behind the allowable dates.
(vi) If the Work is behind schedule, also report progress along other paths with
negative slack.
(vii) Include a narrative report which shows, but is not necessarily limited to:
• a description of the problem areas, current and anticipated;
• delaying factors, and their impact;
• an explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed.
(b) Show the date of latest revision. Submit in accordance with the provisions of Section
1.6.1.3 herein.
(2) Materials Status Reports
(a) On the letter of transmittal accompanying periodic reports, on an accompanying
summary sheet, or by other means acceptable to the Engineer clearly indicate those
items the deliveries of which are critically overdue or otherwise hazardous to
maintenance of the approved schedule.
(b) Submit in accordance with the provisions of Section 1.6.1.3 herein.
1.6.3.5 Revisions
(1) Make only those revisions to approved construction schedule and approved Materials
Status. Reports as are approved in advance by the Engineer.
(2) In case of any event which delays the Contractor in his execution of any part of the Works,
it is the Contractor's responsibility to revise his program in order to minimise the effect of
any such delays.
1.7 MOBILISATION AND DEMOBILISATION

1.7.1 DESCRIPTION
1.7.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the preliminary activities expected in the preparation for construction work
under the Contract; and of carrying out final close-out activities in preparation for completion of
construction work under the Contract; all in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Work Included: The furnishing of all services, labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals,
and for providing or performing all of the work involved in mobilisation and demobilisation work
as specified.
1.7.2 PRODUCTS
1.7.3 EXECUTION
1.7.3.1 Mobilisation
(1) Mobilisation shall commence no later than the date given for Commencement of the Works
in the "Notice to Proceed". It shall consist of preparatory work and operations, including
but not necessarily limited to, those necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment,
supplies, and incidentals to the work site; for the establishment of offices, buildings and
other facilities necessary to commence work on project; and for other work and operations
which must be performed or costs incurred prior to beginning work on the various contract
items on the project site.
(2) Mobilisation shall be completed when the Contractor can satisfactorily demonstrate to the
Engineer compliance with the respective requirements under the Contract, and the arrival
on site of sufficient plant and equipment to commence the work in accordance with the
construction schedule.
(3) Mobilisation shall include providing prerequisite submittals prior to starting work, including
but not necessarily limited to the following:
(a) Organisation Chart;
(b) Shipping Schedule;
(c) Construction Schedule;
(d) Survey Programme;
(e) Supplier Inspection Plan;
(f) Safety Programme;
(g) Quality Control Programme;
(h) Quality Assurance Programme;
(i) Copies of Insurance Policies and Premium receipts;
(j) Signed Agreement with S&T Sub-Contractors;
(k) Site Environmental Plan;
(l) Commission Schedule.
1.7.3.2 Demobilisation
(1) Demobilisation will be considered as complete when all of the Contractor's equipment,
materials, personnel, construction plant or otherwise belonging to the Contractor not
required for the Defects Liability Period have been removed from the project site, and the
requirements specified under Section 1.7.3.3 herein have been satisfied.
(2) Demobilisation shall include providing required submittals prior to close out of the work,
including but not necessarily limited to the following:
(a) Spare Parts, tools and equipment as required;
(b) Operating and Maintenance Data as required;
(c) Project Records and Project Drawings (CAD format) as required;
(d) Railway equipment as required under these specifications
(e) The contractor shall provide asset list for the work done according to SRT standard
form;
(f) For signalling and telecommunication system, the subcontractor shall provide all
necessary software for the installed computer systems such as CBI, CTC,
Telecommunication, etc. (Not Used)
1.7.3.3 Conditions Prerequisite to Completion Inspections

Written notice submitted by the Contractor requesting any total or partial Completion Inspection
shall mean that the work is substantially completed and the Contractor has inspected and
checked all work installed;
(1) compared all work with the drawings, specifications, and submittals as approved;
(2) confirmed that all conditions, provisions and requirements of Contract Documents have
been fulfilled, other than any maintenance and incidental work and procedures necessary
to follow;
(3) completed all cleanup and cleaning operations;
(4) properly disconnected and removed temporary facilities and utilities;
(5) properly adjusted, serviced, tested and made fully operable all systems, equipment and
devices;
(6) complete equipment instructions and identification labelling;
(7) repaired or replaced as required all broken or damaged work;
(8) delivered and stored as required all spare parts;
(9) assembled and delivered to the Engineer all test reports and other required
documentation;
(10) assembled and delivered to the Engineer all operation Maintenance Manuals and
Warranties;
(11) filed with the Engineer written notice of readiness for completion inspections;
(12) Inspected and Checked all Work installed.
1.8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

1.8.1 DESCRIPTION
1.8.1.1 Scope
(1) This Section describes the temporary facilities and safety measures required to be provided
for the Works. These include, but are not necessarily limited to:
(a) Temporary utilities such as water, electricity and telephones.
(b) Site depot, site offices, huts, laboratory, and stores for the Contractor's use.
(c) Site project offices for the use of Engineer and the Engineer's Representatives.
(d) Labour camps, sanitary and medical facilities.
(e) Enclosures such as tarpaulins, barricades, canopies, main gate and fencing.
(f) Detours, temporary access roads and traffic control. Temporary re-routing of trains,
temporary track diversions.
(g) All equipment and procedures used in performance of the Contract shall comply with
all requirements of internationally recognised safety regulations. Including
requirements for lifting plant, ladders, planks, hoists, scaffolding and similar items.
(h) Permanent installation and connection of the various utility lines are described in the
pertinent other Sections of these Specifications.
(i) Making applications, obtaining and paying all fees, for all necessary permits, approvals,
and authorisations for the temporary utilities.
1.8.1.2 Maintenance of Facilities
(1) Use all means necessary to maintain temporary facilities and in proper and safe condition,
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Relevant Authorities throughout progress of the
Works.
1.8.1.3 Utility Connections
(1) Make all required connections to existing utility systems with minimum disruption to
services in the existing utility systems. When disruption of the existing service is required,
do not proceed without the Engineer's review and, when required, provide alternate
temporary service.
1.8.2 PRODUCTS
1.8.2.1 General Safety
(1) The Contractor shall provide and enforce the wearing of efficient safety helmets, and where
necessary, eye goggles, ear protectors, safety harnesses, and other personal protection
equipment for all personnel.
(2) The Contractor shall submit for the review by the Engineer detailed proposals for safety
regulations and emergency procedures.
(3) Reviewed copies of such safety regulations and emergency procedures shall be produced
by the Contractor and distributed and displayed at each place of work, together with any
other documents, posters, notice boards, or other items of a like nature which are required
by law. The Contractor shall revise, replace, maintain, or remove the notices, regulations
and the like as required by legislation.
(4) First Aid
The contractor shall provide at each place of work copies of publications dealing with fire,
gas, and electric shock precautions and treatment, together with a telephone, suitable
accommodation, transport, and first aid equipment including stretchers.
(5) Fire Protection
The Contractor shall construct, equip and administer at his own cost, fire control points in
such positions and of such size as will provide adequate service for the protection against
fire at each site, and in accordance with local fire regulations. He shall provide and maintain
a proper warning system to ensure that fire fighting equipment can be concentrated on a
fire before it has had time to spread.
1.8.2.2 Utilities
(1) General
All temporary facilities shall be subject to the Engineer's review.
(2) Water
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary temporary water lines and water
supply and, upon completion of the Work, remove all such temporary facilities.
(b) The Contractor shall furnish all water needed for construction and the Engineer's Site
Offices at no cost to the Employer.
(3) Electricity
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary temporary wiring and, upon
completion of the Work, remove all such temporary facilities.
(b) The Contractor shall furnish all electricity needed for construction and the Engineer's
Site Offices at no cost to the Employer.
(4) Telephone and mobile phone
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements and pay all costs for operation and
installation of telephone service and mobile phone to the Contractor's and Engineer's
offices at the site.
(5) Utilities for testing:
Payment for utility connections required to make final tests of completely installed systems
shall be by the Contractor at no cost to the Employer.
1.8.2.3 Enclosures
Provide, install and maintain for the duration of construction all required scaffolds, tarpaulins,
barricades, canopies, warning signs, steps, bridges, platforms and other temporary construction
necessary for the protection of the public and the proper completion of the Works in compliance
with all safety and other regulations.
1.8.2.4 Project Signs
No signs or advertising of any kind shall be permitted on the work site except those specifically
reviewed in advance by the Engineer, which shall be removed upon Completion of the Works.
1.8.2.5 Temporary Buildings
(1) The Contractor shall provide, maintain, move as required during the construction of the
Works, and remove on completion, all necessary temporary offices, buildings, ablutions,
water closets, sheds, stores, and storage areas. No structure shall be erected or storage
area laid out by the Contractor within the Site without the Engineer's prior written review.
Such review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for siting temporary structures
clear of the Works or other obstructions.
(2) Provide site and mobile site offices, as described herein for the Engineer's site supervision
staff at locations to be decided by the Engineer.
(3) Labour Accommodation
(a) The Contractor shall make arrangements for the housing, feeding, and welfare of his
employees by providing, servicing, and maintaining camps where necessary.
(b) The accommodation shall comply with the relevant government Regulations. No
dwelling shall be constructed with non-insulated metal walls, and thatch will not be
permitted. Married quarters shall be provided as necessary in the Contractor's camp.
All buildings shall be adequately equipped and furnished. The Contractor shall also
construct and maintain adequate roads or paths to serve the buildings.
(4) Sanitation
The Contractor is to arrange for a high standard of sanitation to be maintained throughout
the camp and the Works. He shall construct and maintain at his own cost a system of
surface drainage and waste disposal which shall be subject to the review by the Engineer
before any work commences. Sanitary conveniences for the use of persons employed on
the Works shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor in accordance with the
appropriate laws and regulations in force in Thailand to the extent and in such manner and
at such place as may be reviewed by the Engineer. All persons connected with the Works
shall be obliged to use them.
1.8.2.6 The Engineer's Offices
(1) Temporary offices
(a) The Contractor shall provid rent for temporary office for accommodate 30 employees.
For the Engineer and his Representatives use before the project office is completed.
The temporary offices shall be in such location and position as directed by the
Engineer, accessible by motor vehicle from adjacent public roads along a temporary
all weather access road.
(b) Temporary offices shall have the gross floor area not less than 200 sq.m. with the
facilities space required following:
• Air conditioners purifier
• Desk table and Chair
• Kitchen area
• Toilets washroom
• Potable water supply and plumbing
• Carking for at least 20 car
(c) The temporary offices running costs, including all consumables, shall be borne by the
Contractor during use.
(2) Project Office
(a) The Contractor shall build and equip one fully air conditioned Project Office
accommodation (capable of being maintained at 20˚C) for the sole use of the Engineer
and his Representatives for the duration of the Works. The Office shall be in such
location and position as directed by the Engineer, accessible by motor vehicle from
adjacent public roads along a temporary all weather access road, and with adequate
paved yard free from flooding., road and car parking area concrete slab 100 mm. thick
with wiremesh, at least 70 vehicles for the Site Office., Concrete drainage channel and
with grating.
The Project Office shall be constructed and designed to be suitable with the climatic
conditions office with adequate water and electricity supply, sanitary ware, sinks,
drains and all other facilities required for the Project Office which shall be used
exclusively for the project. The building shall be painted inside and outside.
(b) The Project Office running costs, including all consumables, shall be borne by the
Contractor throughout the Contract
(c) The Project Office shall have the gross floor area not less than 1,995 sq.m. with the
facilities space required following:
• 1 Conference hall for 80 attendees space 240 sq.m. including table microphone
conference and equipment with the requirement of Section 1.8 Schedule 1.8-1
• 4 Meeting rooms for 20 attendees space 50 sq.m. for each room.
• 5 Storage rooms space 20 Sq.m. for each room.
• 1 IT room space 20 Sq.m. for each room.
• 2 Reception room 15 Sq.m. for each room.
• 4 Kitchen room 25 Sq.m. for each room.
• 4 Male toilets washroom 45 Sq.m. for each room.
• 4 Female toilets washroom 25 Sq.m. for each room.
• 8 Shower with water heater with including toilets
• Comprising room divider and partition (1.2 m. high) as requried
• Ventilation fans
• Sun shades to windows
• All necessary power and lighting for office, parking, all area adequately
• Open space washing
• Office Signboard
• Covered parking for at least 70 car
• Fence, main gates with Guard hut
The floor covering shall be Vinyl 2 mm. thick. floor tiles or equivalent. The floors of the
wet areas shall be waterproofed. decided by the Engineer
(d) Equipment with the requirement of Section 1.8 Schedule 1.8-1

(e) Not less than 30 days after the Notice to Proceed the Contractor is to submit to the
Engineer for approval scaled drawings of the Office area showing its location, access
route, constructional details, floor plans and room layouts, internal finishes, and
services.
(f) The Contractor shall have the Offices ready for occupation and use, complete with
all furniture and facilities, as soon as practically possible, but in any case not later
than 60 days after the Notice to Proceed.
(g) Until the specified project office and telephone facilities are provided the Contractor
shall provide at his expense within 1 week after the date of the Notice to Proceed
reasonable alternative office accommodation, with Fax and telephone, in a suitable
location
(h) The Project Office shall be return to the Contractor within two months after the issue
of the Completion Certificate. directed by the Engineer.
(3) Engineer’s Central Offices
The Contractor shell provide, erect and equip one fully air conditioned Site Office for the
sole use of the Engineer for the duration of the work, The office shell be in the land and
rent provided by the Contractor, the location of the land and the office shell be approved
by the Engineer,accessible by motor vehicles from adjacent public roads along all warther
access road, and with adequate paved yard parking area, free from flooding, with roof for
at least vehicles and parking area without roof for at last vehicles.
(a) Location at Bangkok railway station or The Engineer’s Central Offices shall be in such
location and position as directed by the Engineer
(b) The Engineer’s Central Offices running cost, all service, driking water, coffee and tea,
including all consumables in requested by the Engineer shell be borne by the
Contractor throughout the Contract.
(c) The Engineer’s Central Offices shall have the gross floor area not less than 150 sq.m.
with the facilities following:
• Parition walls (as required)
• Storeroom
• Kitchens
• Male toilets
• Female toilets
• All necessary power and lighting
• Protable water supply and plumbing
• Air conditions
• Parking capable for at least 15 (fifteen) cars

• Other office’s facilities directed by the engineer
(d) The Engineer’s Central Offices shall be return to the Contractor after the issue ofthe
Completion Certificate. approved by the Engineer
(4) Permanent Document Container
(a) The Contractor shall provide 7 (Seven) container steel cargo type (3x6x2.5 m.) with
waterproof, lined with 6mm smart board, Steel door and key look. The Permanent
document container for SRT Use. Shall be in such location, placing and position as
directed by the Engineer. with placing container and space required following:
• Concrete slab 100 mm. thick 190 Sq.m.
• Steel support container 0.5 m high
• Steel stairs and ramp
• Steel document shelf
• Fence, main gates
• Termite protection
(b) The permanent document container shall be hand over to the SRT after the issue
ofthe Completion Certificate. approved by the Engineer
1.8.2.7 Office Containers (Mobile office)
(1) The Contractor shall rent or build and equip one fully air conditioned Office Containers
accommodation for the sole use of the Engineer and his Representatives for the duration
of the Works. The Office Containers shall be in such location and position as directed by
the Engineer, accessible by motor vehicle from adjacent public roads along a temporary
all weather access road, and with adequate paved yard free from flooding., road and car
parking area concrete slab 100mm. thick, at least 12 vehicles for the Mobile office.
(2) The Office Containers running costs including all consumables, expenses for the office
container shall be borne by the Contractor throughout the Contract.
(3) Office Containers per set with 2 (two) container shall be 3x6x2.5 m. and 2 (two) Toilets
Container shall be 2.5x3x2.5 m., function as approved by the Engineer, with the following
facilities:
• All necessary power and lighting for Office Containers and parking, All area adequately
• Washing area 15 Sq.m.
• Toilet and wash area located nearby the container
• Parking for at least 6 car
• Fence, main gates

(4) Equipment with the requirement of Section 1.8 Schedule 1.8-1
(5) Upon completion of the Works, Office Containers shall be removed from the site, and the
areas shall be reinstated. approved by the Engineer
1.8.2.8 Site Laboratory
(1) The Contractor shall provide, erect, staff and maintain Laboratory Testing with testing
equipment throughout the Contract period. the duration of the Works. The Laboratory
Testing shall be in such location and position as directed by the Engineer, accessible by
motor vehicle from adjacent public roads along a temporary all weather access road, and
with adequate paved yard free from flooding., road and car parking area concrete slab
100mm. thick, at least 7 vehicles for the laboratory.
The laboratory shall be of a construction and design suitable for the climatic conditions
prevailing, be provided with adequate water and electricity supply, sanitary ware, sinks,
drains and all other facilities required for a laboratory and shall be used exclusively for the
project. The building shall be painted inside and outside.
(2) The Laboratory Testing running costs including all consumables, expenses for the
Laboratory Testing shall be borne by the Contractor throughout the Contract.
(3) The Laboratory Testing shall have the area not less than 200 sq.m. for each laboratory.
with the facilities space required following:
• Office room with air condition purifier 30 Sq.m.
• Male toilets washroom 12 Sq.m.
• Female toilets washroom 7.5 Sq.m.
• Washing area 20 Sq.m.
• Kitchen room 10 Sq.m.
• Concrete specimens curing area 100 Sq.m.
• All necessary power and lighting for Office, parking, All area adequately
• Open space washing
• Open space with shed for testing
• Covered parking for at least 4 car
• Fence, main gates with 1 Guard hut
(4) Equipment with the requirement of Section 1.8 Temporary Facilities and Controls, Schedule
1.8-1, Schedule 1.8-2, Section 1.10 Quality Assurance and Testing Labboratory and Schedule
1.10.
(5) Upon completion of the Works, Laboratory Testing shall be removed from the site, and the
areas shall be reinstated. approved by the Engineer
1.8.2.9 Equipment for the Engineer
The office and laboratory equipment and vehicles to be provided and maintained for the Engineer
are given in Schedules 1.8-1, 1.8-2, and 1.10.
1.8.2.10 Staff
The following staff are to be provided continuously from the Date of Commencement until each
of the Engineer's site supervision offices is closed. The staff will be required to work in the offices
during the operation period. Paid overtime should be provided to the staff on a regular basis.
(a) Assistant engineer: The Contractor shall provide should be provided to the SRT’s site
office. with the required as follows:
(i) For civil work: 3 (three) persons.
(b) Technicians: The Contractor shall provide should be provided to the SRT’s site office.
with the required as follows:
(c) IT technician: The Contractor shall provide should IT technician who are competent is
computer systems, software, hardware and networks to the Engineer's Offices. with
the required as follows:
(i) For Project office: 1 (one) persons.
(d) Computer Graphic Designer: The Contractor shall provide computer graphic designer
who are competent is Microsoft Power Point, Adobe Photoshop and Adobe Illustrator
and 3D design in presentation works to the SRT office. with the required as follows:
(i) For civil work: 1 (one) persons.
(e) Secretaries: The Contractor shall provide experienced secretaries who are fluent in
English (speaking, writing, and comprehension skills), and competent in Microsoft
Word, Microsoft Excel and Microsoft PowerPoint to the Engineer's site office and SRT
(i) For civil work: 2 (two) persons.
(ii) For signalling work: 2 (two) persons.
(f) Administrators: The Contractor shall provide should be provided to the SRT’s site
(g) Administrator Assistants: The Contractor shall provide should be provided to the for
the SRT’s site office. with the required as follows:
(ii) For signalling work: 1 (one) persons.

(h) Messengers: The Contractor shall provide should be provided to the for the SRT’s site
(i) Office maids:
Daily office cleaning services shall be provided by 8 (eight) full time maids during the
time that the Engineer's Offices and Office Containers are in use. Inspector's huts will
be cleaned and serviced on a daily basis but will not require full time attendance. as
required by
(j) Drivers
The Contractor shall provide an experienced driver for each vehicle listed in Schedule
1.8-2 for full period from initiation until completion of the Works. Drivers shall have
held a driving licence for at least three years, have good eyesight and be in good
health. Drivers will be subordinate to the Engineer's site supervision staff for 10 hours
per day, 6 days a week plus reasonable overtime hours, when necessary. The
Contractor shall provide his employed drivers suitable clothes, driving with sandals is
strictly prohibited.
(k) Security guards
The Contractor shall establish security system including emergency communication
network and provide 24-hour security services, reviewed by the Engineer, for the
Engineer's Offices and Office Containers during the time that the office is under
operation.
1.8.3 EXECUTION
1.8.3.1 Procedure
(1) Before any temporary Works are commenced, the Contractor shall submit, at least 30 days
in advance, to the Engineer for review, his proposals for all temporary Works including
drawings and calculations.
(2) Before commencing the several parts of the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for his review plans showing the proposed disposition of all site offices, stores,
mixing plants, casting and bending yards, spoil heaps, and ancillary buildings, roads and
other temporary works and structures and installations which the Contractor proposes to
provide for the construction of the Works. Such plans may be amended from time to time
subject to the review of the Engineer.
(3) Notwithstanding the review by the Engineer of any submitted design for any of the
temporary Works, the Contractor shall remain entirely responsible for such works in all
aspects. The Engineer shall be at liberty to require modifications to the Temporary Works
in accordance with the Conditions of Contract. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor
shall carry out such modifications at no cost to the Employer.
(4) In the event of the Contractor considering that such modifications required by the Engineer
affect the security of the Temporary Works or increase the Contractor's liability under the
Contract, he shall give notice in writing to the Engineer within seven days. The Engineer will
thereupon reconsider the matter.
1.8.3.2 Use of Permanent Materials for Temporary Works
Materials for the Permanent Works shall not be used for Temporary Works unless otherwise
reviewed by the Engineer.
1.8.3.3 Protection of Existing Features
The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to protect from damage all existing trees, shrubs,
fences and paved areas which are to remain during the Contract period.
1.8.3.4 Maintenance and Removal
(1) The Contractor shall maintain all temporary facilities as long as needed for the safe and
proper completion of the Work and remove all such temporary facilities as rapidly as
progress of the Work will permit, or as directed by the Engineer.
(2) The Contractor shall keep all work areas, offices, stores, labour camps, and canteens clean
and litter free, and they shall be run and maintained in an efficient condition in accordance
with the standards of the appropriate authority during the period of the Contract. All
hutments and buildings must at all times be open to the inspection of officers of the public
health authorities. Any instruction given for the proper cleaning, disinfection and general
maintenance in a sanitary and hygienic condition of any hutment or building must forthwith
be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for dealing with all
forms of vermin at site during the Contract to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(3) The Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance costs and charges arising from facilities
provided or used by him and Engineer's site supervision staff until contract demobilisation.
(4) The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining and removing, at his own cost, vehicular
and foot access to the work areas, offices, stores, labour camps, and canteens.
1.8.3.5 Medical Arrangement
The Contractor shall have adequately trained personnel available for the on-site treatment of
casualties and sick persons in first-aid units, and shall provide the means whereby injured or sick
personnel may be removed expeditiously to hospital or receive the necessary medical attention.
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable local regulations and recommendations for first
aid practice for the time being in force.
1.8.3.6 Naked Flame

No naked flame shall be used by the Contractor on the Site other than in the open-air without
special permission in writing from the Engineer.
1.8.3.7 Detours and Temporary Access Roads
(1) General
(a) The Contractor shall co-ordinate with police and highway authorities and shall bear
all responsibilities and expenses for providing for public convenience and safety and
for maintaining public traffic over the railway under construction and for constructing
and maintaining such temporary bridges and approaches, intersections, level crossings,
drainage and other features as may be necessary.
(b) Where detour access roads are situated outside the right-of-way, the Contractor shall,
at his own expense, make all necessary arrangements with the landowners for
permission to build and/or use and maintain such roads.
(c) Detours and access roads shall be constructed in accordance with the Standards of
the Department of Highways, or as directed by the Engineer.
(d) The Contractor shall bear all the expenses of maintaining traffic over those sections
of road crossed by the railway including the provision and maintenance of temporary
road crossing over the formation as well as those roads used for the transport of
materials. The Contractor shall maintain such sections of the road in a condition at
least as good as its normal condition prior to the commencement of the Works.
(e) The Contractor shall provide and maintain detours to by-pass public traffic in lieu of
maintaining such traffic along its existing line. The Contractor shall construct and keep
all detours and temporary roads in use by public traffic in such a way that such traffic
is at all times reasonably accommodated.
(f) Where diversion of traffic is necessary, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a
detailed programme of the various stages of construction and details of the
arrangement for directing the traffic.
(g) Temporary service roads over the whole stretch of project section along the Right of
Way shall be established and maintained by the Contractor for the haulage of materials
and equipment for the Works, and for the Engineer to access the Works at all times in
accordance with the Contract.
(2) Traffic Control
(a) Where the construction works interfere with road traffic the Contractor shall, at his
own expense, provide and maintain all necessary barricades, suitable and sufficient
lights, danger signals and other signs, provide a sufficient number of watchmen and
take all necessary precautions for the protection of the work and the safety of the
public. Roads closed to traffic shall be protected by effective barricades and

obstructions shall be illuminated at night by lanterns, or flares. All lights for this
purpose shall be kept burning from sunset to sunrise.
(b) The Contractor shall erect warning signs in advance of any place on the Works where
operations interfere with the use of the road by traffic and at all intermediate points
where the work crosses or coincides with an existing road. Such warning signs shall be
constructed and erected in accordance with the standards of the Department of
Highways, or as directed by the Engineer.
(c) Where needed, the Contractor shall provide personnel for directing traffic and
maintaining barricades and warning signs at all hours during the day or night.
(3) Highway Traffic
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility at all times during the period of the Contract to
control traffic over the works so as to avoid any damage or failures. Any such damage or
failures shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and shall be repaired to the
satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
(4) Removal
Upon completion of the Works, all temporary detour roads, service roads and structures,
including piles above ground and river beds, shall be completely removed and approach
ramps for temporary bridges shall be levelled. All materials shall be removed from the
right-of-way or spread on the neighbouring ground, if agreed by the Engineer, and due care
shall be taken that no materials are spilt into streams or rivers.
(5) Access to Site
(a) The Contractor shall make all arrangements and assume full responsibility for
transportation to the Site of all plant, equipment, materials and supplies needed for
the proper execution of the Works.
(b) The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for ingress to and egress from the
Site and submit them to the Engineer for review. The Engineer reserves the right to
amend, restrict or curtail any access to the Site.
(c) The Contractor shall not make use of public or private rights of way for depositing or
storing plant or materials and the Contractor shall maintain those parts of the public
or private rights of way not temporarily occupied by the Works in a clean, passable
and safe state at all times. If it is necessary to occupy the public or private rights of
way the Contractor shall first obtain reviews from the Engineer, and construct and
maintain a temporary detour.
(d) The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Relevant Authorities or
other written directives regarding any special traffic arrangements which may be
necessary.
(e) Where works traffic has to proceed via a public highway the Contractor shall take all
precautions to prevent damage to roads and footpaths by restricting the maximum
axle load and length of lorries, dump trucks and trailers and by laying timber mats or
steel plates under tracked vehicles.
(f) The Contractor shall examine all existing bridges and ascertain any weight restriction
imposed by the Relevant Authorities and make arrangements and pay all costs and
charges in connection with any repair or strengthening necessary for use by his
construction traffic.
(g) Access to properties affected by the Works shall be maintained to the same opening
width and to the same standards as those presently existing unless otherwise specified
or directed by the Engineer.
(h) The Contractor shall ensure that no vehicle or plant leaves the Site with mud, debris
or rock that may drop or be deposited on to the public highway or private right of
way.
(i) The Contractor shall reinstate roads, carriageways, kerbs, footpaths and landscaped
areas affected by the Works to the extent required by the Relevant Authorities. The
standard for reinstatement shall be to the current construction requirements of the
appropriate Relevant Authority.
1.8.3.8 Drainage
(1) No interruption of the free flow of irrigation or drainage water or of navigation on canals,
streams and rivers can be allowed. The Contractor shall, therefore, provide and maintain
temporary R.C. pipe culverts where the service road will cross minor streams, ditches and
the like.
(2) All drains, pipes, channels, temporarily disturbed by the Works are to be restored so that
the water flowing in them may continue to flow in as full and free a manner as it did before
the disturbance.
1.8.3.9 Care of Utility Services
(1) The Contractor shall exercise due care and attention at all times to avoid damage to, or
interference with, Utility Services, which include but are not limited to SRT signal and
telecommunications cable routes, equipment and plant; TOT, CAT, and Corn Link
communication cables; PEA and EGAT power cables; water mains; and PTT fuel lines. The
Contractor shall be responsible for any damage and/or interference, or loss, caused by him
or his agents directly or indirectly arising from anything done or omitted to be done.
(2) Within 90 days of receipt of the Notice to Proceed the Contractor shall submit for the
reviews of the Engineer his proposals for all precautions, protection, and diversion of Utility
Services including drawings and calculations, arrangements and programmes showing by
when each diversion within the Site is to be carried out. His programme shall show all
restraints, particularly notices to Relevant Authorities or utility companies and delivery of
materials. No claims for extra costs incurred by the failure of the Relevant Authorities or
utility companies to comply with the utility programme will be considered.
The Contractor shall note that the Com-Link cable may only be repositioned once at any
one location. It is considered that a move to a temporary location and eventually returned
to the original location is not acceptable.
During the progress of the Works the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his reviews,
details of any proposed amendments to the agreed utility realignment drawings, or utilities
programme.
The Contractor shall prepare drawings giving details of all utilities as located in or adjacent
to the Site.
(3) Before excavations are carried out near Utility Services by means of mechanical plant, the
Contractor shall carry out full and adequate preliminary investigations to locate Utility
Services by means of hand-dug trial holes and trenches. Any such services at risk will be
re-exposed and adequately protected immediately prior to commencement of such
excavation.
To prevent accidental damage to overhead Utility Services the overhead clearance height
of vehicles, plant, and equipment shall be monitored by the erection of "goal posts," of a
height to be agreed with the Engineer. At the access points to the parts of the Site all
vehicles, plant, and equipment must pass through goal posts. Any over height vehicles,
plant and equipment shall not be permitted to enter the Site.
(4) Where Diversions are necessitated by the Works, no adjacent work shall be commenced
until the alterations have been made, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
(5) If, in the Engineer's opinion, damage may be caused to Utility Services by the operation of
mechanical plant in their vicinity the Contractor shall execute that part of the works by
hand.
(6) The Contractor shall afford and provide access to plant routes, and the free use of the Site
facilities, at all times to representatives of the Engineer and the Relevant Authorities as may
be necessary for the inspection, operation, repair, curtailment, making of additional
connections to and maintenance of their installations and services within the Site.
(7) The Contractor shall protect, including supporting where necessary, all Utility Services liable
to remain exposed during construction of the Works in a manner reviewed by the Engineer.
(8) The Contractor shall submit for reviews by the Engineer details of his proposals for dealing
with such Utility Services as are to be supported during the construction of the Works. The
methods of support shall conform to the requirements of the appropriate Relevant
Authority and the Engineer.
(9) The design of such supports shall take into account all forces of whatever nature including
plant and traffic vibrations (where applicable) acting on or produced by such Utility Services.
(10) The Contractor shall likewise submit for reviews by the Engineer details of the method of
supporting Utility Services during the backfilling and compaction of the ground under, over
and around the Utility Services concerned. The method of support shall conform to the
requirements of the specifications and the appropriate Relevant Authority, and the Engineer
and shall be such as to ensure that subsequent to the completion of the backfilling and
compaction the equipment shall in no way suffer distortion.
1.8.3.10 Site Safety
(1) The Contractor shall take all measures necessary to safeguard the health and welfare of
all persons entitled to be upon the Site and shall ensure that the Works are carried out in
a safe and efficient manner.
(2) The Contractor, his Sub-contractors and all persons employed by him on the Site shall
comply in every respect with the provisions of any relevant statutory regulations as may
be considered applicable to the Works.
(3) The Engineer may require the immediate removal from Site of any person who, in the
opinion of the Engineer, fails properly to observe the provisions of any statutory regulations
which from time to time may be in force. Such person shall under no circumstances be
employed again on the Site without the prior written agreement of the Engineer.
(4) Safety Enforcement
(a) In addition to all other actions which the Contractor may take to meet his obligations
under the Contract he shall be represented on a Site Safety Meeting (chaired by the
Engineer's Representative). The Contractor shall submit the names of his
representatives who shall not normally exceed 2 in number including their proposed
terms of reference to the Engineer for reviews within 30 days of receipt of the Notice
to Proceed with the Works. The meetings will include, when required by the Engineer's
Representative, representatives of major Sub-contractors of the Contractor, other
contractors and such other advisers, specialists and persons as the Engineer's
Representative may require. The Contractor shall act without delay upon such
decisions or recommendations as may from time to time be made by the meeting
with regard to general or particular matters of safety and health. The Contractor shall
comply with the provisions of SRT's regulations and any relevant statutory requirement
relating to safety considered by the Engineer as applicable to the Works.
(b) The Contractor shall employ full time qualified and experienced safety officers and
assistants whose names shall be advised to the Engineer in writing for ensuring that
the Works are carried out in a safe manner, including the preparation and enforcement
of all necessary site and SRT safety regulations.
1.8.3.11 Construction Plant

(1) The Contractor shall provide and maintain safe and sound condition mechanical cranes,
hoists and conveying facilities for the lifting and transportation of materials. All cranes,
hoists and the like shall be fitted with overload warning devices. All such equipment shall
be regularly maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended practices
and standards, having regard to any legislation and recommendations from Relevant
Authorities.
(2) Competent operators shall be provided for the control of all lifting and hoisting equipment,
with at least one banksman present at all times.
(3) Prior to its use on Site all lifting and hoisting equipment shall be tested to an approved
safety margin and suitably identified in accordance with existing legislation. The test
certificate shall be submitted to the Engineer for reviews prior to entry in the Site Register
of Approved Lifting Equipment referred to in Section 1.8.3.11(5) below.
(4) The Safe Working Load shall be clearly and indelibly marked on all lifting equipment either
by stamping or by the addition of permanently secured tag labels. Stamping shall not be
permitted on any stress-bearing part.
(5) The Contractor shall prepare and maintain an up-to-date register containing test certificates
of all lifting and hoisting equipment used on the Works. The register shall be available on
Site from the commencement of construction for inspection by the Engineer and any
Relevant Authorities and shall be entitled "Site Register of Approved Lifting Equipment".
(6) The Contractor shall provide adequate stand-by plant to ensure the safety of personnel,
the Works and the public. These measures shall include, but shall not necessarily be
restricted to, the following:-
(a) stand-by pumping and generating plant for the control of water;
(b) stand-by generating plant, equipment and spares for illumination of the Works;
(7) Temporary Electrical Installations
Within 30 days of receipt of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall appoint a
responsible person whose name shall be advised in writing to the Engineer to be solely
responsible for ensuring the safety of all temporary electrical equipment on the Site.
Provision and maintenance of all temporary electrical installations and connection to the
Public Supply shall be in accordance with the Relevant Authorities' regulations.
(8) Plant and equipment forming part of the Permanent Works may be used by the Contractor
only with the approval of the Engineer and if so used, the Contractor shall be responsible
for restoring to as new condition before being handed over for completion tests.
1.8.3.12 Sub-contractor's Safety
The provisions listed herein regarding safety shall apply to and be binding upon any
Sub-contractor employed by the Contractor for any part of the Works on the Site and the
persons employed by such Sub-contractor. The Contractor shall ensure that proper and adequate
provisions to this end are included in Sub-contracts placed by him.
1.8.3.13 Safety of Contractor's Rail Traffic
(1) General
(a) The safety of rail traffic is of paramount importance at all times, and consideration of
such safety shall take precedence over any and all other considerations.
(b) The Contractor's proposal for a safety system shall be submitted to the Engineer for
reviews not later than one month before work commences. The Engineer's review of
the safety system shall in no way release the Contractor from his responsibility for
safe operations on the track.
(c) The Contractor shall not enter upon the tracks of SRT's operating railway with his rail
vehicles unless permission has been obtained from the Station Master.
(2) Requirements
(a) All works in the tracks shall be carried out under conditions of total occupation or
permissive occupation between trains.
(b) The safety system shall basically comprise:
(i) Typed safety regulations and operational instructions in English and in Thai
which shall be issued to all personnel working on the system, and this shall be
reinforced by verbal instructions to the staff.
(ii) A qualified and experienced Works Train Superintendent shall be employed by
the Contractor and the costs of such employment and that of a specified
number of assistants shall be borne by the Contractor.
(iii) An efficient temporary communication system shall be provided for the control
of operations. The type shall be reviewed by the Engineer, and the system shall
be maintained at the expense of the Contractor in a good working condition for
as long as necessary for the purposes of efficient control.
1.8.3.14 Site Restrictions
(1) The particular use to which the Site is put shall be subject to the Engineer's written consent,
and the Contractor shall :-
(a) Confine his use of the areas of the Site to purposes reviewed by the Engineer who
reserves the right to extend amend or restrict the uses to which areas of the Site will
be put, which right shall not be unreasonably applied.
(b) Provide and maintain reviewed fencing and lighting around the areas of the Site when
or where necessary for the safety and convenience of the public or others or as
directed.
(c) Refrain from depositing rubbish or causing nuisance or permitting nuisance to be

caused and, except where reviewed by the Engineer, depositing earth on or removing
earth from areas of the Site.
(2) Work other than that forming part of the Works shall not be carried out on Site.
(3) Except where specifically reviewed by the Engineer in writing, the Contractor shall not
permit any person to reside on Site.
1.8.3.15 Accommodation for Watchman, Workers and Emergency Personnel
Temporary living accommodation for the use of watchmen, security guards and a limited number
of workers and emergency personnel only may be provided within the Site and then only with
the specific approval of the Engineer as to the number of persons to be accommodated. The
accommodation shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer and kept in a clean and sanitary
condition at all times.
1.8.3.16 Site to be kept clean
The Contractor shall keep the Site in a clean, tidy and sanitary condition. Rubbish shall be cleared
daily and not allowed to accumulate on Site. Any Temporary Works, Constructional Plant,
materials or other things which for the time being are not required for use shall be stored on Site
in an orderly manner.
1.8.3.17 Contractor's Working Area
(1) Working areas will be available for use by the Contractor as granted by the Employer. The
Contractor will have exclusive use of these areas during the period of the Contract. Access
to the working areas will be available at all times of day and night.
(2) Immediately on gaining possession of a working area the Contractor shall erect a work
compound surrounded by a 2.4-meter-high unclimbable fence of chain link wire netting.
Gates in the fence shall be adequate to maintain the security of the area and shall be
subject to the review of the Engineer. Upon completion of the Works the temporary fence
shall be removed.
(3) The Contractor shall pay all rates and charges, if any, of any nature whatsoever arising out
of his use of any Works Areas provided under the Contract.
SCHEDULE 1.8-1
OFFICE EQUIPMENT FOR THE ENGINEER
1. Furniture
The Contractor shall provide and maintain for the duration of the Works, and the furniture returned to
the Contractor to be Handover.
1.1 The Engineer's Offices:
Eng.
Equipment (Minimum sizes shown) SRT
Rep.
Desk table 25 mm. thick top with PVC (150x170x75 cm.) 8 6
Chair (63x65x121 cm.)
Conference table 25 mm. thick top with PVC (240x1460x75 cm.) 40 seat 1 -
Upright Chair (50x52x78 cm.)
Conference table 25 mm. thick top with PVC (240x540x75 cm.) 15 seat 2 2
Upright Chair (50x52x78 cm.)
Multipurpose Folding Table (180x60x75 cm.) 20 20
Multipurpose Folding Table (120x60x75 cm.) 20 20
Catering Chair (45x40x90 cm.) 30 30
Plastic Chairs (50x47x81 cm.) 20 20
Sliding Glass Door Cabinet (1500x450x1100 cm.) 30 34
Sliding Steel Door Cabinet (1500x450x1100 cm.) 30 34
Open Shelves Cabinets (90x45x185 cm.) 20 15
Filing Cabinet (46.1x62x99.1 cm.) 20 25
Whiteboard Thick 1 cm. (120x240 cm.) 4 5
Softboard 4 5
Cupboard top with PVC stainless sink and drainer for kitchen table 2 3
(180x60x84 cm.)
Cupboard with laminate post form for kitchen (240x60x84 cm.) 2 3
1.2 Office Containers (Mobile office):

Steel Desk (135×80×75 cm.) 12
Chair (60×64×93 cm.) 12
1.3 Laboratory Testing for Engineer:
Steel Desk (135×80×75 cm.) 2
Chair (60×64×93 cm.) 2
Whiteboard Thick 1 cm. (120x240 cm.) 4
Filing Cabinet (464x616x1015) 4
1.4 Engineer’s Central Offices:
Desk table 25 mm. thick top with PVC (150x170x75 cm.) 7
Chair (60x64x93 cm.) 7
Desk table 25 mm. thick top with PVC (165x80x75 cm.) 4
Chair (60x64x93 cm.) 4
Conference table 25 mm. thick top with PVC (240x540x75 cm.) 15 seat 1
Upright Chair (50x52x78 cm.) 1
Filing Cabinet (46.1x62x99.1 cm.) 7
Whiteboard Thick 1 cm. (120x240 cm.) 1
Softboard 2
Cupboard top with PVC stainless sink and drainer for kitchen table (180x60x84 cm.) 1
Cupboard with laminate post form for kitchen (240x60x84 cm.) 1
2. Office Equipment
The Contractor shall provide and maintain until after issue of the last Completion Certificate, The
Contractor shall provide equipment for reserve use while maintenance period more than one day, the
equipment described below Upon completion, ownership shall revert back to the Contractor.
2.1 Engineer's Office
Equipment (Minimum capacity shown) Requirement
Facilities
Electric Water Heater 4500 watt 8
Refrigerator 12 cu.ft. Capacity 5
Electric kettle 4 litre Capacity 10
Water dispenser 6
Microwave Oven 23 litre Capacity 5
Electromagnetic Hot Plate cooke 2100 watt 5

Conference room
Audio System for conference room amplifier, mixer, speeker hall, 1
2 mic wireless and completed with accessories
Control microphone digital system and completed with accessories 1
Chairman microphone speaker 1W, LED ring ON active, Push to Talk/Lock 3
Delegate microphone speaker 1W, LED ring ON active 40
LED 60" UHD/4K Digital TV HDMI+USB Video Player 6
Projector WXGA at least 4,000 Lumens (ANSI), HDMI, LAN, Wifi, Motor 1
Screen with Wireless Remote Control 150" Ratio 16:9
Projector WXGA at least 3,500 Lumens (ANSI), HDMI, Screen 4
Video conference equipment Full HD, optical zoom, Audio 5
Computer
Desktop PC with the latest generation of intel core i7, RAM 16GB (8x2), 96
Graphics Card 4 GB 256 bit, M.2 SSD 500GB (OS+Software), HDD 1TB
(storage), Audio, LAN RJ45 Gbit, USB 3.1, Power Supply, Monitor LED 23"
75Hz, Keybord, Mouse, UPS 800VA, License software Windows OEM,
Kaspersky Antivirus, pdf viewer software, Office software and accessories
or latest technology
Notebook / Laptop Computer with the latest generation of intel core i7, 14
RAM 8 GB, Graphics Card, 512 GB SSD, Display 15.60 Full HD IPS, Audio,
LAN (RJ45) Gbit, Wifi, USB 3.1, HDMI, License software: Windows OEM,
Kaspersky Antivirus, Office software and accessories or technology
External Harddisk 4 TB 2.5" USB 3.0 8
Software Licensed
Licensed Adobe Acrobat Pro DC or latest (Hand Over) 4
Licensed Autocad LT 2020 or latest 4
Zoom meeting 5
SketchUp Pro 4
Network (One completed set of server shall be handed over to SRT once
completion of the Works)
Server: Intel Xeon E-2124 RAM 8 GB DDR4, HDD 480 GB SSD + 4 TB SATA, 3
Windows Server STD, Firewall Network, RACK 42U
Network Storage (NAS) Core i3 Processor, 8GB DDR4, Gigabit RJ45, HDD 4
20TB (5 x 4TB 128MB Cache SATA for NAS) (Hand Over)
Baseline Switch Rack Layer3 RJ-45 Gbit 24 port, SFP 2 Port, Base and 11
minor rack

Wireless Access Point Dual-Band 2.5/5Gbps, WiFi 6, IEEE 802.11ax 8
Load Balanced Router 4 WAN, SFP 4 Port, Ethernet 8 ports Gbit 1
Network Video Recorder HDD 4TB, MP4 (H.264/AAC), RJ-45 Port Gbit 1
IP Camera 1080p Full HD POE Injector Indoor/Outdoor 28
UPS Rack Backup 3000VA/2700Watt 5
Printer, Photocopier and Shredder Machine
Laser Fax machine 250 Sheet Paper Capacity 4
Color Black-white Laser Printer for A3, 4A size, printer 20 sheets (A4) per 5
minute
Colour copier, printer, scanner quality A3, A4 size with both-side scan 5
copying, automatic feeding, copier and printer Color/Back-white 70
sheets per minute, Scan 250 sheet (A4) per minute
Shredder Machine Auto Feed Capacity 130 sheets (70 gsm) 5
Electric Binding Machine Maximum 21 Selector pins, paper sizes A4, 5
Punching Capacity 20-30 sheets (80 gsm)
Electronic
UAV camera 4 rotor 20-megapixel 4K Video Sensor 1” CMOS, 1 for SRT
Stabilization 3-axis, Remote control screen full HD, 3 Pack Battery 30 2 for Eng. Rep.
min. per fly by Pack, 256GB UHS-I, NBTC and CAAT license, insurance
Digital camera APS-C 24 megapixel, LED Display, Lens 8
Audio Recorder with USB Audio 4 GB 5
Phone
5G Smart Phone with 5G SIM cards (500 mins voice call and unlimited 83
data with the minimum requirement of 40 GB at max speed and 10
mbps FUP) for the Engineer’s Staff
Telephone TOT or other phone service operators 4
FAX TOT include service fee 4
Internet Fiber Optic 1000/500 Mbps for Load Balanced Router 3
Safety
Fire Extinguisher 10 Lbs. 20
First Aid kit 9
Megaphone as required
Flashlight as required
Safety Shoes as required
Waterproof top-coats as required
Gumboots as required

Helmet as required
Safety Vest as required
Safety Belts as required
Mask as required
Safety glasses as required
2.2 Office Containers (Mobile office):
First Aid kit 4
2.3 Laboratory Testing for Engineer :
Industry Fan 30" 2
Assorted Cutlery and Crockery for 10 people 1
First Aid kit 1
2.4 Engineer’s Central Offices:
Water dispenser 1
Microwave Oven 23 litre Capacity 1
LED 60" UHD/4K Digital TV HDMI+USB Video Player 1
Projector WXGA at least 3,500 Lumens (ANSI), HDMI, Screen 1
Video conference equipment Full HD, optical zoom, Audio 1
Desktop PC with the latest generation of intel core i7, RAM 16GB (8x2), Graphics 4
Card 4 GB 256 bit, M.2 SSD 500GB (OS+Software), HDD 1TB (storage), Audio, LAN
RJ45 Gbit, USB 3.1, Power Supply, Monitor LED 23" 75Hz, Keybord, Mouse, UPS
800VA, License software Windows OEM, Kaspersky Antivirus, pdf viewer
software, Office software and accessories or latest technology
Zoom meeting 1
Laser Fax machine 250 Sheet Paper Capacity 1

Colour copier, printer, scanner quality A3, A4 size with both-side scan copying, 1
automatic feeding, copier and printer Color/Back-white 70 sheets per minute,
Scan 250 sheet (A4) per minute
Telephone TOT or other phone service operators 1
FAX TOT include service fee 1
Internet Fiber Optic 1000/500 Mbps for Load Balanced Router 1
3. Office Consumables
The Contractor shall supply office consumables on a reasonable monthly basis, solely for use in the
Engineer's Site Supervision Offices.
• Copier paper A4, A3 cover sheet and binding band
• Toners for copiers
• A4, A3 File covers, hole punchers
• CD, DVD and Flash Drive
• Notebooks, exercise books, Multipurpose box
• Ball points and roller ball pens. Pencils, staplers and staples (3 sizes)
• Erasers, rubber bands and other stationery.
• Potable water, coffee, tea, creamer, sugar.
• Mosquito spray, air freshener, cleaning materials, brooms, dustpans, etc.
• Tissues Toilet rolls.
• Other as require by the Engineer’s Representative as appropriate.
4. Protective Clothing
The Contractor shall provide of protective clothing for the use of the Engineer and his staff, plus such
other persons as the Engineer authorises. A set of protective clothing shall include items such as Safety
Shoes, Waterproof top-coats, Gumboots, Safety Helmet, Safety vest, Safety belts, Mask, Safety glasses
and other safety equipment Number as required by the Engineer in connection with the Contract.
Sufficient protective clothing shall be provided for all Guest at Contractor Office for their visiting.
5. Site radio system (Not Used)
(1) General
The Contractor shall provide site radio system and maintain until after issue of the last Completion
Certificate, for their use on the Project. the equipment described below. Upon completion handed
over to SRT
(2) Requirements
(a) The Contractor shall provide handsets radio, install, maintain a complete DIGITAL VHF
"Walkie Talkie" radio system with spare battery pack. The Frequency of Site Radio
System shall be specified by SRT. The system shall be used by Engineer's Site Staff for
operations over the whole length of the Contract Site. The system shall include base
stations, repeaters, relay stations etc. (if required) to cover all the site area as required.
Thereafter the DIGITAL VHF "Walkie Talkie" radio system with all handsets shall be
handed over to SRT immediately after purchase.
The Contractor shall apply for necessary permission licenses, etc. from the NBTC
Suitable supporting documentation shall be submitted to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide 30 handsets, 30 of which shall be issued to the Engineer's
Site Staff for their use on the Project.
(c) The Contractor shall provide radio base station 2 (two) station, install, maintain a
complete DIGITAL VHF "Walkie Talkie" Radio base station. The Frequency of Site Radio
System shall be specified by SRT. The system shall be used by Engineer's Site Staff for
operations over the whole length of the Contract Site. The system shall include base
stations, repeaters, relay stations etc. (if required) to cover all the site area as required.
Thereafter the DIGITAL VHF "Walkie Talkie" radio system with all handsets shall be
handed over to SRT immediately after purchase.
The Contractor shall provide fixed radio base station 2 (two) location, Electrical
system, Central attendant console, Antenna tower, Lightning protection, Obstruction
light, Feeder cable, room base station 3x3 m. of location which shall be issued to the
Engineer's Site Staff for their use on the Project.
(d) The Contractor shall apply for necessary permission licenses, etc. from the NBTC
Suitable supporting documentation shall be submitted to the Engineer.
SCHEDULE 1.8-2
ROAD VEHICLES FOR THE ENGINEER AND THE ENGINEER'S SITE STAFF
The Contractor shall provide necessary number of brand-new vehicles based on vehicle list and rent to the
Employer in each months as requested with an approved first class insure on the following, and make available
within 30 days of the Contract Signing. The Contractor shall provide all oil and fuel necessary for 7,500 km. per
vehicle per month until return vehicle to the Contractor after completion of works. Vehicle usage schedule as
directed by the Engineer.
1. For use by SRT
(a) D-segment sedan with cylinder displacement capacity of not less than 1,990 cc., maximum
output ECC net of not less than 105(140) kW(PS), maximum torque ECC net of not less than 170
N-m, power steering system, E-CVT (Electrical Continously Variable Transmission) gear system, and
central display supporting Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
(i) For civil work 1 (one) car.
(b) PPV 4x4 with cylinder displacement capacity of not less than 1,990 cc., maximum output ECC net
of not less than 130(180) kW(PS), maximum torque ECC net of not less than 420 N-m, 4-wheel
drive system, diesel engine, power steering system, automatic (AT) gear system and central display
supporting Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
(ii) For signalling work 1 (one) car.
(c) Double Cap Pick Up 4x4 with cylinder displacement capacity of not less than 1,990 cc., maximum
N-m, 4-wheel drive system, diesel engine, power steering system, automatic (AT) gear system, and
central display.
(i) For civil work 4 (four) car.
(ii) For signalling work 3 (three) car.
(d) 12-passenger Seated Van with cylinder displacement capacity of not less than 2,400 cc.,
comfortable interior design, diesel engine, power steering system, and automatic (AT) gear.
2. For use by the Engineer’s Representative staff
(a) D-segment sedan with cylinder displacement capacity of not less than 1,990 cc., maximum
N-m, power steering system, E-CVT (Electrical Continously Variable Transmission) gear system, and
central display supporting Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

(b) PPV 4x4 with cylinder displacement capacity of not less than 1,990 cc., maximum output ECC net
of not less than 130(180) kW(PS), maximum torque ECC net of not less than 420 N-m, 4-wheel
drive system, diesel engine, power steering system, automatic (AT) gear system and central display
supporting Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
(i) For civil work 3 (three) car.
(c) Double Cap Pick Up 4x4 with cylinder displacement capacity of not less than 1,990 cc., maximum
N-m, 4-wheel drive system, diesel engine, power steering system, automatic (AT) gear system, and
central display.
(i) For civil work 16 (Sixteen) car.
(ii) For signalling work 3 (three) car.
(d) Space Cap Pick Up 4x4 with cylinder displacement capacity of not less than 2,100 cc., maximum
N-m, 4-wheel drive system, diesel engine, power steering system, and central display.
(i) For civil work 18 (Eighteen) car.
(ii) For signalling work 2 (two) car.
(e) 12-passenger Seated Van with cylinder displacement capacity of not less than 2,400 cc.,
comfortable interior design, diesel engine, power steering system, and automatic (AT) gear.
(ii) For signalling work 2 (two) car.
3. Number and types of the listed vehicles, especially their quantities in a unit of vehicle/month (VM),
may be adjusted upon the contract period and instructed by the Engineer to the Contractor at it deems
appropriate.
4. The Contractor shall keep the vehicles fully insured, maintain and keep in good repair until completion.
5. The Contractor shall maintain vehicle logbooks which shall record mileage, fuel consumption,
maintenance records repairs and replacements.
6. The Contractor shall provide vehicles for reserve use while maintenance period more than one day.
7. The Contractor shall replace tire of vehicles at least every 35,000 km. or when required. Wheel and
tire balance should be conducted for all vehicles at least every 40,000 km. or when required together
with replacing batteries. All lubricants shall be changed when necessary. The Contractor should provide
temporary-used car to the Engineer and SRT’s personnel during maintenance.
SCHEDULE 1.8-3
VEHICLES FOR INSPECTION
1. Rental Electric ATV Vehicles with maintenance for Tunnel Inspection
(1) General
The Contractor shall provide rental electric ATV vehicles together with maintenance and drivers for
tunnel inspection since the tunnel face is ahead from the tunnel portal more than 300 m. until the
completion of concrete lining installation.
(2) Requirements
The contractor shall provide electric vehicles at least 2 (two) machines and Electric charger station per
one tunnel Portal for the purpose of inspection of tunnel construction. Electric All-Terrain Vehicle or
electric ATV shall be always available at the Portal. The following lists are minimum requirement for
the vehicles.
• 2-seated
• Battery use 40 km per one charge
• Head light, Sien light
• Vehicles
2. Motor Trolleys for Inspection
The Contractor shall provide 4 (Four) seated motor trolleys for inspection for the engineer and the
engineer’s representative staff 2 (two) cars shall be provided on site with drivers. The trolleys shoube
be driven by fuel engine and be properly assembled with gears, brake, horn and lighting system.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges, drivers, wages, including overtime for drivers, costs,
maintenance and repairs, lift up and lift out of railroad for regular usage, transportation of motor
trolleys, insurances and safety equipment. The driver shall be provided on site by the contractor.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain the trolleys for the entire project period until the
Completion Certificate issued. Upon completion, ownership of the trolleys shall belong to the
Contractor.
1.9 CONSTRUCTION SURVEYS

1.9.1 DESCRIPTION
1.9.1.1 Scope
(1) To provide and perform all construction surveys necessary to lay out the work, to control
lines, levels and grades. Checking of the Engineer's design track alignment and redesign as
necessary to the Engineer's approval.
(2) To monitor the existing embankment, railway tracks, adjacent structures and utilities, for
settlement and movement.
(3) Work includes: Providing qualified survey crews as necessary for the survey work. Furnishing
equipment and chainmen to the Engineer. Existing condition surveys and as-built surveys.
1.9.1.2 Definitions
(1) "Original Surface" means the surface of the ground before any work has been carried out.
(2) "Final surface" means the surface indicated in the Drawings to which construction is to be
carried out.
(3) "Commencing Surface" means, in relation to an item in the Bill of Quantities, the surface
of the ground before any work covered by the item has been carried out.
(4) "Excavated Surface" means, in relation to an item in the Bill of Quantities, the surface to
which excavation included in the work covered by the item is to be carried out. In relation
to filling work shall mean the ground level from which filling will commence after topsoil
removal and clearing and grubbing have been carried out.
Each crew shall be directed by a well qualified party chief who is competent in the English
language.
1.9.1.4 Tolerances
Allowable error in profile levels between consecutive benchmarks shall not exceed 1 in 90,000.
Error shall not exceed 11 mm in 1km.
1.9.1.5 Survey Programme
Prior to construction, the Contractor shall develop and submit to the Engineer an overall survey
programme clearly showing where surveys will be performed, and the co-ordinates and elevation
data for all benchmarks. Such programme shall include a description of all survey work to be
performed and, in particular, including the survey requirements under this Section, and as may be
specified under this Section, and as may be specified elsewhere under these technical
Specifications. The programme shall also include the name and qualifications of all party chiefs
responsible for directing the survey work. This programme shall be approved by the Engineer
before the field work is implemented.
1.9.2 PRODUCTS
1.9.2.1 Drawings
Shall be prepared according to standard engineering practices and professional standards.
1.9.2.2 Equipment for the Engineer
The Contractor shall furnish and maintain the survey equipment itemised in Schedule 1-9 for the
exclusive use of the Engineer's Site Staff.
1.9.2.3 Chainmen for the Engineer
(1) The Contractor shall provide the services of at least two experienced chainmen for
attendance upon the Engineer's Site Staff.
(2) Inclinoneters, shall be approved by the Engineer as being suitable for their purpose.
1.9.3 EXECUTION
1.9.3.1 Preservation of Reference Marks
The Contractor shall be responsible for preserving all supplied benchmarks. If the benchmarks are
destroyed or disturbed the Contractor shall replace and re-survey them.
1.9.3.2 Field Surveys
(1) The Engineer will set out and issue to the Contractor prior to the Pre-Construction Meeting
the necessary monuments and benchmarks for the Contract. The Contractor shall be
responsible for field survey verification of all survey control stations within and adjacent to
the Right of Way. The field survey verification shall be conducted in accordance with
procedures approved by the Engineer.
(2) The Contractor shall lay out the work in accordance with the lines and grades shown on
the drawings.
(a) The Contractor's level party shall take readings at each station location, at all breaks
in the ground, and at critical points, for the purpose of drawing profiles.
(b) Benchmarks shall be established by the Contractor, at the beginning of work and
starting from the limits of work, to provide for one benchmark every 500 metres. Check
levels shall be run over the entire lines.
(c) All rod readings at ground points shall be taken to the nearest 10 mm., while those
on turning points and benchmarks shall be taken to the nearest millimetre. Allowable
error in profile levels between consecutive benchmarks in millimetres shall not
exceed 1 in 90,000.
(d) The Contractor shall establish all slopes, grades, cut and fill lines and control rough
grade elevations from the benchmarks provided.
1.9.3.3 Existing Conditions Survey

(1) Cross-sections shall be taken at each 20 metres or less according to terrain conditions, and
at all breaks in the centreline profile, or as otherwise approved by the Engineer.
(2) Cross-sections shall extend either for the full Right-of-Way width or to include all the works
carried out at that section, whichever is the more extensive.
(3) Cross-sections shall also be taken at each drainage structure, and the distance out shall be
extended in the case of relocation.
(4) This survey shall be based on "Commencing Surface" after stripping and grubbing has been
performed.
(5) The levels and positions of the existing embankment, railway tracks, adjacent structures
and utilities, shall be recorded.
(a) The Contractor shall submit his proposals for the positioning of monitoring points and
instruments to the Engineer for his approval before works commence.
(b) The Contractor shall locate monitoring points to suit the site conditions and structural
form. The existing embankment shall be monitored at not more than 100 metre
intervals for level and lateral movement.
(c) The following parameters shall be checked on the existing railway tracks, gauge,
longitudinal level, cross level, alignment, and twist. These parameters shall be
checked for the entire length of existing track adjacent to the works.
(6) Recordings from the monitoring points shall be made at the following intervals:
(a) Settlement points and lateral movement points on adjacent structures and utilities;
not less than weekly throughout the construction period. If the difference between
two consecutive readings is greater than 5 mm the Contractor shall take readings daily
until the rate of movement measured over seven consecutive days is less than 5 mm
per week.
(b) The existing railway track parameters shall be measured not less than weekly in the
vicinity of the works, with a visual inspection daily.
(7) Three copies of each set of readings shall be promptly submitted to the Engineer.
(8) The original recording form shall be submitted to the Engineer upon completion.
1.9.3.4 Settlement and Damage to Adjacent Structures and Utilities and Rail Tracks
(1) The Contractor shall monitor existing embankments, structures and utilities to determine if
settlement and movement is occurring. The monitoring shall be at fixed reference points
to be established by the Contractor as agreed with the Engineer.
(2) Monitoring shall be conducted on a routine basis of at least once a week but the Engineer
may instruct that it is to be carried out on a daily basis if the particular situation indicates
that settlement or movement is excessive.
(3) Monitoring shall commence at least two weeks before any work begins in the vicinity and
shall continue until at least two months after completion of all work that may cause
movement or settlement, or until such time as the Engineer is satisfied that settlement or
movement is within acceptable limits.
(4) If the Engineer, in his opinion, feels that the indicated movement is, or is likely to become,
excessive then he may instruct that the points to be monitored for embankments and
utilities are reduced to 5 metres, or greater, intervals.
(5) The Contractor shall submit for approval the equipment and methods that are intended
to be used for this work. The standards of accuracy are to be 0.5mm measured in the
vertical plane and 0.5 mm in the horizontal plane.
(6) Structures and Utilities
Should the following criteria be exceeded for any structure or critical utility adjacent to the
Works then the Contractor shall stop work in the affected area immediately and submit
proposals to the Engineer to limit further movement. The Engineer's approval is required
before work can re-commence.
(a) 10 mm total settlement from commencement of the works.
(b) 2 mm of settlement per day.
(c) Rotation or distortion of 1:1000.
(7) Existing Rail Tracks (Not Used)
If the movement of existing rail tracks be exceeded 50 mm. in the horizontal plane, then
the Contractor shall stop work in the affected area immediately and submit proposals to
the Engineer to limit further movement. The Engineer's approval is required before work
can re-commence.
1.9.3.5 Quantity Surveys
(1) The Engineer shall be responsible for all surveys necessary for determining quantities for
payment.
(2) During progress of the Existing Conditions Survey, the Contractor shall prepare ground
profile and cross section drawings and make calculations necessary to determine the
quantities of earthwork involved under the Contract, and shall submit the drawings and
calculations to the Engineer for review and check.
(3) Quantities of earthworks shall be based on the average end area method. The
"commencing surface" shall be that obtained after clearing and grubbing has been carried
out within the specified grubbing depth. For filling embankments, the "excavated surface"
shall be that obtained after clearing and grubbing has been carried out.
SCHEDULE 1.9
Schedule of survey equipment to be furnished by the Contractor for the exclusive use of the Engineer when
requested. The equipment shall be returned to the Contractor after completion of the Works. Survey
Equipment for each site consist of:
Qty Equipment Description
2 set Automatic Level
- Automatic Level with stands
- Natural vertical visual system
- Zoom 30x
- Diameter of mount lenses not less than 35 mm.
- Picture seen in 100 meter not less than 2.30 meter or 1º 20’
- Nearest sharp seen pictures not more than 2 meter
- Constant multifier 100
- Compensator automatic system +/- 12’
- Tolerant of level in 1 km. +/- 1.5 mm.
- Sensitivity of Bubble not more than 10’ in 2 mm.
- Reading horizontal plate 360 with label every 1º
- Diameter of degree plate not less than 80 mm.
- Direct angle reading not more than 1 degree
- Approximately angle reading not more than 6’
- ISO 9001 certificate is required
- Complete set of accessories
- etc.
2 set Automatic Total Station: Accuracy 5” (Automatic)
- Target visual seen vertically system
- Zoom 30x
- Diameter of mount lenses not less than 40 mm.
- Width of picture seen in 100 meter not less than 2.30 meter or 1º 20’
- Nearest sharp seen pictures no more than 2 meter
- Constant multifier 100
- constant additional 0 (Zero)
- Reading 0º_/_” display on LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
- Angle accuracy reading not more than 5”
- Sensitive of Circular bubble 10”/2 mm or better
- Sensitive of long bubble 40”/2 mm. or better
Qty Equipment Description

- Display both horizontal and vertical angle
- Inside battery can be seen
- ISO 9001 certificate is required
- Complete set of accessories
- etc.
2 set Handheld GPS
2 set Reflector Sheet
6 set Staff 4 m.
2 set Graduated steel 30 m.
2 set Graduated steel 100 m.
4 set Poles 3 m.
4 set Unbrella
4 sets Laser Distance Meter: with measurement range 0.05 m to 200 m, reflectorless, accuracy
1 mm at least 30 recordable data and data interface cable or bluetooth
2 Nos. 50 m Steel Tape: 50 m long graduated steel measuring tape
4 Nos. 30 m Stilon Tape: 30 m long Nylon coated steel tape
8 Nos. 5 m Measuring Tape: 5 m long steel measuring tape: full-featured handled with GPS,
GLONASS and wireless connectivity, high-sensitivity receiver
1 Nos. Handled GPS: 65-K colour TFT display, AA battery, interface high-speed USB and NMEA
compatible, built-in worldwide base map, at least 2 GB of onboard memory and micro-
SD
4 sets Tablet: at least 8 inches display, Quard Core or better, 2 GB-Ram, 16 GB-Rom, OS,
Internet connection (4 GB or better), A-GPS Glonass, 5 M-pixel (Digital Camera), battery
4 pairs Cell Phone: at least 2G, call fee 300 minute/month
8 pairs Safety Shoe: standard, available replacement when needed
8 Nos. Safety Hat: standard, available replacement when needed
8 Nos. Safety Glass: standard, available replacement when needed
8 No. Safety Vest: standard, available replacement when needed
4 units 70 cc or better, including gasoline (20 liters/month), maintenance or
replacement
Consumable Materials: marking pens, paint markers, spray colours etc, as needed
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING LABORATORY

1.10.1 DESCRIPTION
1.10.1.1 Scope
(1) Throughout the Contract the Contractor is required to provide Quality Assurance through a
Quality Control programme for the manufacture and installation of the plant, equipment
and materials provided by the Contractor and for general installation work under the
Contract.
(2) Work includes but is not limited to:
(a) General Quality Control of Materials and Workmanship.
(b) Manufacturer's Instructions.
(c) Manufacturer's Certificates.
(d) Manufacturers Site Services.
(e) Laboratory Testing Services, Equipment and Staff.
(f) Engagement of Independent Testing Agency
(g) Engagement of Independent Inspection Agencies
(h) Attendance upon SRT's Site Supervision Team and Work Inspection and Acceptance
Committee.
(i) Provision of Samples for Testing.
1.10.1.2 Definitions
(1) "Independent Inspection Agency" - A firm that is independent from the Contractor and is
hired by the Contractor to carry out Quality Inspections as required by these specifications.
(2) "Independent Testing Agency" - A firm that is independent from the Contractor and is
hired by the Contractor to carry out check testing or unspecified testing as required by the
Engineer.
(3) "Independent Quality Control Organisation" - A section or department of the Contractor's
organisation that carries out Quality Inspections or Testing and reports to a management
that is independent from the Contractor's site management structure.
(4) "Clarification" - A written Engineer's Instruction that is in response to a written request from
the Contractor where there is ambiguity or apparent conflict in requirements.
(5) "Deviation" - (Also "Substitution") A written Engineer's Instruction in response to a written
request from the Contractor for a change in the technical requirements before manufacture
or installation.
(6) "Concession" - A written Engineer's Instruction in response to a written request from the
Contractor for acceptance of an installed item of work where the required quality has not
been achieved.
1.10.1.3 System Description

(1) The Contractor shall provide and operate an approved Quality Control Programme.
(2) The Contractor shall provide, equip and operate a site materials laboratory, including
provision of all furniture. The Contractor shall furnish all water, electricity, gas and other
consumables necessary for the operation of the laboratory.
(3) Requirements for testing are described in other parts of the Specifications.
(4) Where no testing equipment is provided in Schedule 1-10 but the Engineer decides that
testing is required, the Engineer may direct that such testing be performed under current
standards for testing at an Independent Testing Agency which he shall nominate.
(5) Routine testing and the testing as required by the Specifications shall be performed entirely
at the Contractor's cost.
(6) Testing by the Independent Testing Agency which is not required by these Specifications
but is deemed necessary by the Engineer shall be reimbursed through the item in the Bills
of Quantities.
(1) The procedures established by the Contractor shall ensure consistency in the quality of
materials, manufacturing processes, constructions and installation procedures required to
conform to these specifications. Procedures shall be approved by the Engineer.
(2) The standards for materials and workmanship shall conform to the requirements of Section
1.2: Applicable Standards.
(3) The Quality Control programme shall take due account of the supervision of the Works and
witnessing of tests by the SRT and the Engineer's Representative.
(4) In procuring all material and plant used in this work, it is the Contractor's responsibility to
verify the detailed requirements of the specifically named codes and standards and to
verify that the items procured for use in this Work meet, or exceed, the specified
requirements.
(5) Except where otherwise specifically approved by the Engineer, all materials used in the
Works shall be new, unused of the best quality of their respective kinds as specified or
described in the Specifications, Drawings, and Bills of Quantities and shall comply wherever
possible with appropriate current Standard. Refurnished, As New", rebuilt or second hand,
or rejected material or components shall not be used on the project. All proprietary
materials, plant, or equipment used on the Works shall be used, fixed or applied strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.10.1.5 Submittals
(1) Programmes
(a) Off-site quality control programme.
(b) On-site quality control programme.

(c) Quality Control Organisation.
(2) Certificates and Reports
(a) Where required by individual Specification Sections the Contractor shall submit
manufacturer's Certificates of Compliance that products meet or exceed specified
minimum requirements.
(b) Certificates shall consist of written releases, permits, warranties, bonds and specimens
of bonds, and other documents which contain certified statements. Unless otherwise
specified in the several Sections of these Specifications or required by law, certificates
need not be notarised.
(3) Reports shall consist of written accounts of damaged materials received at job site, written
results of site and shop tests and inspections including those on materials production and
installation and other quality control tests, and written statements of manufacturing
procedures, transportation and handling procedures, and qualification tests.
(4) Certificates and Reports shall reference pertinent Specifications Section numbers. Changes
in products, firms, or persons for which certificates and reports have been accepted will
not be permitted unless those changes have been accepted, in writing, by the Engineer.
Submittals shall show the following information:
(a) Applicable specifications Section numbers and Contract Drawing numbers.
(b) Applicable standards, such as those listed in Section 1.2: Applicable Standards.
(c) Identification of proposed deviations from the Specifications.
(d) Contractor's stamp, initialled or signed, certifying review of submittals, verification of
field measurements, and approval for compliance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications Sections.
(5) Contractor Responsibilities: Certificates and reports shall be reviewed, stamped, and signed
as reviewed, approved, and accepted by the Contractor's designated representative before
those certificates and reports are delivered to Engineer. Coordinate each submittal
requirements of Work.
(a) The Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals shall not be
relieved by the Engineer's review and acceptance of submittals.
(b) The Contractor's liability to the Client in case of deviations in submittals from the
requirements of Contract Documents will not be relieved by the Engineer's review and
acceptance of submittals containing deviations, unless the Engineer expressly
approves by issuing an Engineer's Instruction of Clarification, Deviation or Concession.
(6) Testing Laboratory
The Contractor shall:
(a) Submit to the Engineer copies of testing equipment calibration certificates;
(b) Provide timely notice of inspections, tests and sampling to permit the Engineer to
witness such activities;
(c) Submit to the Engineer all laboratory reports of inspection, test, sampling and
observance of work irregularities and deficiencies.
1.10.1.6 Quality Control, General
(1) The Contractor shall maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturer's products,
services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality.
(2) Good practice: where and to the extent that materials, products and workmanship are not
fully specified they shall be:
(a) Suitable for the purpose of the Project stated in or reasonably to be inferred from the
Contract Documents.
(b) In accordance with good practice.
(3) Workmanship shall comply with Industry Standards (i.e. documents issued by the
organisations referred to in Section 1.2: Applicable Standards except when more restrictive
tolerances or specified requirements indicate a higher standards or more precise
workmanship.
1.10.2 PRODUCTS
1.10.2.1 Programme
(1) General
(a) The Quality Control programme shall contain procedures adopted to ensure that all
materials, systems and sub-systems forming part of the Contract are properly
specified, designed, purchased, recorded, inspected and tested at all appropriate
stages, in accordance with the Specification and to the Engineer's satisfaction.
(b) The programme shall ensure that established requirements are maintained and
upheld, and that handling, storage and delivery arrangements are satisfactory.
(c) The Engineer reserves the right to examine the Contractor's capability and the
effectiveness of his quality assurance system after the date of commencement of the
Works as described hereof.
(d) The Contractor shall assure and control the quality in respect of all matters covering
design, manufacturing, furnishing, installing, testing and commissioning etc., in
accordance with the approved Quality Control programme throughout the Contract
period.
1.10.2.2 Organisation
(1) The Contractor shall provide an Independent Quality Control organisation staffed by as
many inspectors and equipped to the extent deemed necessary by the Engineer to support
the programme. On application by the Contractor, the Employer may permit the Contractor
to employ his own Quality Assurance organisation, in carrying out the function of an
Independent Inspection Agency, provided the Engineer is satisfied that the Quality
Assurance organisation is recognised by an International Standards Organisation listed in
Section 1.2: Applicable Standards.
(2) Such support facilities shall include but not be limited to:
(a) Adequate equipment for testing.
(b) Qualified personnel in adequate numbers to inspect and evaluate work performed.
(c) Clearly defined acceptability criteria for all work performed.
(d) Responsibility and authority of quality control and inspection personnel to reject
unsatisfactory work and have it corrected.
(e) System for identifying, reporting, controlling, processing, correcting and documenting
of non-conformance's and their resolution.
(f) A system of reporting and recording to fully document inspections and tests made
and quality levels attained.
(3) The Contractor shall nominate a person of sufficient management status as the Contract
Quality Control Manager to be responsible for advising the Project Director on quality
procedures and for auditing the quality of the products, materials, and workmanship. Any
problem between supplier and the Contractor relating to these procedures or to the quality
of the products shall be referred to the Engineer.
(4) No other duties or responsibilities shall be assigned to the Quality Control Manager or to
his staff unless expressly authorised in writing by the Engineer.
(5) The Quality Control Manager, or his approved Quality Control Supervisor, shall be on site
all the time while work is in progress.
(6) The Engineer may appoint a Quality Assurance Engineer to visit the Contractor's
manufacturers and sites at any time during the contract to ensure that the supplies are of
the required quality. He may also assess the capabilities and performances of the
Contractor, and liaise with the Contractor on matters relating to these Quality Assurance
procedures.
1.10.2.3 Testing Laboratory Services
(1) Independent Testing Laboratory
The Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory
where tests by the Site Laboratory are not approved by the Engineer, or the Site Laboratory
does not have the appropriate capability. Employment of an independent testing
laboratory does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for performing the work in
accordance with Specifications and Contract Drawings.
(2) Qualification of Site Laboratory and Laboratory Personnel:
The Laboratory's technical supervisor's years' of experience may be waived by the Engineer
if it can be demonstrated that the supervisor possesses a degree of competence in testing
procedures and applying test results acceptable to the Engineer.
(3) Laboratory's Duties:
(a) Provide all necessary assistance to the Contractor and Engineer and furnish qualified
personnel promptly on notice.
(b) The Contractor shall provide free access to the laboratory at all reasonable times for
the Engineer or his Representative.
(c) The Contractor shall perform specified inspections, sampling, and testing of materials
and methods of construction in accordance with applicable standards, and compare
results of inspections, sampling, and testing with requirements of Specifications.
(d) The Contractor shall promptly report Work irregularities and deficiencies which are
observed during testing, inspecting, and sampling.
(e) The Contractor shall promptly submit copies of each inspection, sampling, and testing
report through Contractor to Engineer. Reports shall include, but not necessarily be
limited to, the following:
(i) Date of issue.
(ii) Project title and number.
(iii) Testing laboratory name and address.
(iv) Name and signature of testing laboratory's inspector and of Contractor's
representative on duty when sample is taken and test is made at the work site.
(v) Date of inspection and sampling.
(vi) Record of temperature and weather.
(vii) Date of test.
(viii) Identification of product and Specification Section.
(ix) Location from which sample was taken or test or inspection was made. Location
shall be specific to the extent that it may be identified on the Project Drawings.
(x) Reference in specifications to stated standard or other recognised national
organisation's test.
(xi) Observations regarding compliance with requirements of Specifications and
Contract Drawings.
(xii) Serial number of equipment used for test.
1.10.2.4 Systems
(1) Inspection
The Engineer at all times reserves the right to carry out full inspection and/or witness testing
of any items of manufactured plant before delivery.
(2) Controls
(a) The Contractor through his Quality Control Manager shall ensure that only materials
and plant complying with drawings, specifications or other ordered requirements are
despatched to site.
(b) The Contractor's Quality Control system shall be designed to ensure that a high
proportion of compliant products are manufactured and shall detect and identify non-
conforming products which shall be segregated until instructions are available
indicating rectification or disposal.
(c) The Contractor shall identify and plan the production and installation processes which
directly affect quality and shall ensure that these processes are carried out under
controlled conditions. These controlled conditions shall include, but not be limited
to:
(i) Documented work instructions defining the manner of production and
installation, where the absence of such instructions would adversely affect
quality, use of suitable production and installation equipment, suitable work
instructions compliance with reference standards/codes and quality plans.
(ii) Criteria for workmanship which shall be stipulated, to the greatest practicable
extent, in written standards or by means of representative samples.
(3) Sampling
Statistical sampling procedures used shall conform to approved standards or equivalent,
as approved by the Engineer.
(4) Documentation
The Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer all required proof that the materials or
workmanship, or both, meet or exceed the requirements of the specifically named code
or standard.
Such proof shall be in the form of a Submittal as described in Section 1.4: Submittals and
Substitutions.
1.10.2.5 Reports
(1) Quality Assurance Certificates
The Contractor shall inspect each shipment received and prepare receiving inspection
reports as a result of those inspections. Separate inspection reports shall be prepared for
major items of plant and equipment. These reports shall indicate the items which have
been inspected and conform to the appropriate standards and specifications and comply
with the ordered requirements. These reports shall be signed by the Quality Manager or
his approved Quality Supervisor.
(2) Test Certificates
Records of on-site and off-site testing shall be kept on forms of approved format. Test
reports shall be signed by the Tester. Tests witnessed or performed by the Independent
Quality Control Organisation shall be reported separately. Test Certificates for groups of
test reports shall be certified by the appropriate responsible person. All Test Certificates
shall clearly indicate the items which have been tested.
(3) Inspection Reports
Records of inspection and testing shall be prepared in a timely manner. These records shall
be signed as required by these specifications, and submitted as directed by the Engineer.
1.10.3 EXECUTION
1.10.3.1 Contractor's Responsibilities with Respect to Testing
(1) Cooperate with laboratory personnel and the Engineer, and provide access to the Work for
those personnel.
(2) Furnish preliminary representative samples of materials to be tested, and copies of mill
test reports to laboratory.
(3) Furnish casual labour and facilities to laboratory and the Engineer:
(a) Provide access to the Work to be tested.
(b) Obtain and handle samples at the work site.
(c) Facilitate inspections and tests.
(d) Assist laboratory personnel and Engineer in storing and curing test samples.
(4) Notify laboratory and Engineer sufficiently in advance of operations to allow laboratory
personnel and Engineer to arrange scheduling of tests.
1.10.3.2 Programme
(1) Within 45 days after the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit for the
Engineer's review a detailed outline of the quality control programmes proposed.
Completed procedures for each element of the outline shall be submitted for review and
shall be implemented before any items of work begin.
(2) Implementation
(a) The quality control programme approved by the Engineer shall be followed
throughout the performance of the Contract, unless specific approvals or instructions
to the contrary are issued by the Engineer in writing.
(b) The Contractors quality control personnel shall maintain close liaison with the
Engineer at all times.
1.10.3.3 Control of Suppliers and In-Coming Material

(1) The Contractor shall ensure that the materials and workmanship of his suppliers or sub-
contractors conforms to the requirements of this document and the approved quality
programme.
(2) The Contractor shall possess and operate an effective control and inventory programme
over all plant, material and supplies received at the Site. Records shall be kept to indicate
the origin, quantity, serial numbers, quality and condition of such incoming plant, material
and supplies. An inspection procedure shall operate which is able to verify to the Engineer
that the quality and condition of the plant, material and supplies conforms to the specified
requirements.
(3) Notwithstanding any examination test or certification that the Engineer may direct to be
carried out on any materials or finished articles previous to their despatch to Site, the
Engineer will be at liberty to carry out or to arrange any further tests he may consider
desirable after delivery of such materials at the Site and to reject any materials which fail
to comply with the required quality or conditions, notwithstanding any approval before
despatch to Site.
1.10.3.4 Calibration
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, controlling, calibrating and maintaining
inspection and measuring equipment suitable to demonstrate conformance of supplies to quality
requirements. Equipment must be used in a manner to ensure the required measurement
capability in accordance with the specific testing standard.
1.10.3.5 Inspection
(1) The Contractor shall perform all off-site inspection, testing etc. at his and other
manufacturer's factories. The Engineer shall perform inspection, testing etc. at site, or off-
site, as he feels necessary to ensure that the work is executed in accordance with the
drawings and the specifications.
(2) Special attention shall be given to the inspection and testing of critical items and those
which may involve special process and inspection techniques.
1.10.3.6 Records
(1) The Contractor shall maintain records. The minimum requirement shall be to show the
nature and number of deficiencies found, the rate of observations or checks made, the
signature of the persons making the checks, the quantities approved or rejected together
with a record of preventative or corrective action taken.
(2) All tests performed on materials, equipment and installations shall be recorded. The test
reports shall be signed by the person conducting the test and endorsed by the SRT
representative if the test is witnessed.
1.10.3.7 Deviations
(1) The Contractor shall comply with these Specifications in all respects. It is therefore required
that all works, etc. provided or installed by the Contractor are in compliance with these
Specifications.
(2) The Contract will be based on the provision of equipment, materials and services with a
performance equivalent to, or better than, those specified. Any request by the Contractor
to substitute any Code, Standard, materials, equipment, or methods shall provide full and
clear reasons for the change in the specification with references to the affected clauses of
these Specifications.
(3) Such request for the deviation will be granted provided that:
(a) The deviation is consistent with the general intent of this Specification.
(b) Justification of such deviation is made on the basis of improved safety, operational
performance, reliability or simplicity of maintenance.
(c) The deviation represents accepted railway engineering practice meeting the
requirements of Section 1.2: Acceptable Standards, clause 1.2.1.2 (h).
(d) Any deviation from or alternatives to the Specification shall be clearly stated and
supporting information shall be provided.
1.10.3.8 Concessions
(1) In certain circumstances, at the discretion of the Engineer, concessions may be granted for
items not strictly conforming to drawings, specification or order requirement.
(2) In such case the Contractor shall maintain a record of any item found to contain a defect
which, though undesirable, may not in the opinion of the Engineer render the item
unusable. Also for such items, not fully complying with the Specification but are considered
by the Engineer to be capable of use may be considered for concessions.
(3) This record should be in the form of a concession certificate which should state the details
and be approved by the Engineer.
1.10.3.9 Rejection
The Engineer reserves the right to reject items incorporated into the Work which fail to meet the
specified minimum requirements. The Engineer further reserves the right, and without prejudice
to other recourse the Engineer may take, to accept non-complying items by concession as
described in Section 1.4: Submittals and Substitutions.
SCHEDULE 1.10
EQUIPMENT TO BE PROVIDED IN TESTING LABORATORY
The minimum standard of equipment to be provided for each site laboratory is as follows. All equipment will be
returned to the Contractor after the completion of the Works.
1. Natural Water Content: AASHTO-T 265
4 Oven capable of maintaining temperatures of 110 ± 5oC
4 Balance (Digital scales) with capable to readable to 0.1 percent of the sample mass
60 Container made of material resistant to corrosion and not subject to change in mass
2. Liquid Limit: AASHTO T-89
2 set - Liquid Limit Set, consisting of:
1 Standard Liquid Limit Device with ASTM Tool
1 Mixing Dish
1 Flexible Spatula
1 100 cc Graduated Cylinder
2 Dozen - Moisture Content Cans
3. Plastic Limit & Plasticity Index of Soil: AASHTO-T 90
2 set - Plastic Limit Set, consisting of:
1 Plastic Limit Plate
1 Mixing Dish
1 Flexible Spatula
1 25 ml. Glass Graduate
1 Dozen 2-ounce Moisture Cans
4. Unit Weight of Aggregate: AASHTO-T 19
2 ea.- Measure, 1/10 cu.ft
2 ea.- Measure, 1 cu.ft
4 pcs- Tamping Rods
2 set- Laboratory Vibrator 230/50/1 ph AC
2 set- Metric Platform Scale 100 kg capacity
5. Compaction Test
a) Standard Proctor Compaction Test: AASHTO T- 99
3 - Standard Compaction Mould
3 - Standard Compaction Rammer (5.5 lb weight)
2 - Straight Edge, Steel, 12 inch

2 - Mixing Spoon
2 - Mixing Trowel, 2-1/2" x 4-1/2" blade
2 - Spatula, 4 inch
2 - Trimming Knife, 6 inch blade
2 - Sample Ejector
2 - Single Wall Oven 230/50-6-/1 ph AC
2 - Balance, 1610 gram, by 0.1 gram
2 - Metric Multi Purpose Scale 16 kg capacity by 4.5 gram
2 - Mixing Pan, 18" x 3" deep
6 - Pan, 10" dia., 2" deep
2 - Dozen - Moisture cans, 3 ounce (85.1 gm.)
2 - Wash Bottle
b) Modified Proctor Compaction Test AASHTO-T 180
3 - Compaction Mould
3 - Compaction Rammer (10 lb weight)
6. CBR Test: AASHTO-T 193
CBR Laboratory Set, Mechanical, consisting of:
2 Mechanical Loading Press
27 CBR Mould
10 Space Disc.
12 Filter Screen
27 Swell Plate
10 Tripod Attachment
10 Swell Dial Indicator
27 Surcharge Weight
27 Slotted Surcharge Weight
4 Dial Gauge
2 10,000 lb capacity proving ring
7. Los Angeles Abrasion Test: AASHTO-T 96
2 Set - Los Angeles Abrasion Machine 220/50/1 ph AC
8. Soundness of Aggregate AASHTO-T 104
Fine Sieve Size 8" dia. Brass Sieves, consisting of:
2 Set - Sieve No.8, No.16, No.30, No.40, No.50
Coarse Sieves
2 - Set - Sieve Size No. 4, 5/16", 3/8", 1/2", 5/8", 1", 1-1/4", 1-1/2", 2", 2-1/2"
2 - Sieve No. 100
2 - Sieve No. 200
2 - Brass Pan
2 - Brass Cover
2 - Motorized Dynamic Sieve Shaker 220/50/1 ph AC
2 - Triple Beam Balance
2 - Thermometer readable to 0.1 oC
2 - set - Sodium Sulfate / Magnesium Sulfate
9. Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregate
Aggregate Shaker 220-240v 50/60Hz AC Screen Trays
4 Set - Coarse Series (10 pcs) :
4"
3"
2-1/2"
2"
1-1/2"
1"
3/4"
1/2"
3/8"
No. 4
4 Set - Medium Series (4 pcs):
No. 6
No. 8
No. 10
No. 16
4 Set - Fine Series (8 pcs) :
No. 18
No. 20
No. 30
No. 40
No. 60
No. 80
No. 100
No. 200
2 - Brass Pan
2 - Brass Cover
10. Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate: AASHTO-T 84

Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate: AASHTO-T 85
1 Set - Dunagan Test Set
11. Specific Gravity of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Method A: AASHTO-T 166
Balance Density Basket
12. Plastic Fine in Graded Aggregate and Soil by Use of Sand Equivalent Test: AASHTO-T176
Sand Equivalent Test Set
13. Slump Test of Concrete Compression: AASHTO T-119, 3 sets comprising:
Slump Test Set
Galvanised Steel Slump Cone
Machine Steel and Cadmium Plated Tamping Rod
Galvanised Steel Metal Cement Pan, 24" x 24" x 3"
Stiff Brass wire bristled brush
All Steel trowel with wooden handle
14. Compression Test of Concrete Cylinders: AASHTO T-22
Compressive Strength of Concrete Cylinder
18 - Cylinder Moulds, 6" Heavy Duty
2 - Concrete compression machine digital type, 2,000 KN. capacity, with a Electric Pump attachment
(220-240V 50Hz AC)
15. Making & Curing of Concrete Specimens: AASHTO T-23
1 Set Vertical Capping Set, consisting of:
1 - Vertical Cylinder Capper and Capping Ladle, 6" by 12" cylinder
1 - Capping Compound Warmer, 4 qt capacity
1 - Capping Ladle
1 - 50 lb Concrete Capping Compound
1 - Cylinder Carrier for 6" by 12" Cylinder
16. Standard Marshall Method: ASTM-D. 6927
Marshall Asphalt Stability Test Set, consisting of:
2 - Stability Compression Machine
1 - Standard Water Bath 110v, 60 Hz., 1ph AC
1 - Stability Compaction Rammer
1 - Stability Compaction Moulds
1 - Compaction Mould Holder
1 - Extractor for Stability Mould
1 - Stability Mould
1 - Asphalt Flow Indicator
1 - Compaction Pedestal
1 - Step Down Transformer
(for 220v, 50/60 cy. operation of AP-160 Water Bath)
17. Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures Method A: AASHTO T-164
Bituminous Extraction Set
Centrifuge Extractor 220/50-60/1 ph AC
100 Filter Disc for AP-175
Methylene Chloride or Normal-Propyl Bromide
18. Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Paving Mixtures: AASHTO T-209
1 Balance
1 Weight 2,000 grammes
2 Weight 1,000 grammes
1 Vacuum Pump 230 V 50 cy. 1 ph AC
1 Filter Pump
1 Water Bath
19. Moisture or Volatile Distillates in Bituminous Paving Mixtures: AASHTO T-110
1 Set Water in Petroleum Products
2 Set Petroleum Thermometers
1.11 PROJECT RECORDS

1.11.1 DESCRIPTION
1.11.1.1 Scope
The requirements for drawings and documentation prepared by the Contractor during the Contract
Period. The recording of events and significant facts relating to the Works.
Work Includes: "As-Built" Drawings; Reports; O&M Manuals; Video Record; Record Documents.
Work not included: Test results.
In the Contract Documents reference is made to the submittal to the Engineer of notices, etc.
without a precise interval of time being given between the event occurring and the notice thereof.
Accordingly, the following time intervals shall be used between the event occurring and a record
made in the Contractor's monthly report:
"without delay" - Within the calendar month following the month of the event occurring. Unless
otherwise notified by the Engineer.
“timely manner" - Within thirty (30) days of the event occurring.
"Record Documents" - shall mean records of the commencement and completion of items of
work, changes in the design, location of work, weather records, the recording of any events having
effect on the performance of the Contract.
(1) The Contractor shall delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Documents to persons
on the Contractor's staff as approved in advance by the Engineer.
(2) Documents
Following the Notice to Proceed, and in accordance with the Contract the Contractor shall
obtain from the Engineer two sets of all Documents comprising the Contract.
All documentation prepared by the Contractor shall be in English unless otherwise required
by these specifications.
Format of technical manuals prepared by the Contractor shall conform to a recognised
International or National Standard.
(3) Drawings
(a) All drawings prepared by the Contractor shall be in conformity with the best drawing
practice, to a scale large enough to convey all information adequately.
(b) All drawings shall be prepared on international paper size drawing sheets in
accordance with ISO 'A' paper sizes unless otherwise specially approved by the
Engineer. All signalling circuit drawings shall be on 'A3' size sheets.
1.11.1.4 Submittals
All drawings and documentation specified in this section shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval as required by Section 1.4: Submittals and Substitutions.
1.11.2 PRODUCTS
1.11.2.1 Drawings to be furnished after Contract Award
(1) Control Chart
Within 60 days of the date of issue of Notice to Proceed:
The Contractor shall submit a drawing control chart listing all drawings to be prepared with
their scheduled date for submission to the Engineer for approval. This chart shall be
submitted, be updated and resubmitted each 60 days thereafter or as required by the
Engineer.
The chart shall enable subsequent recording of each drawing, its number, the planned date
for submission, the actual date of submission, the 'Approved for Construction' date, the 'As-
built' date and remarks columns.
(2) Drawings for Submittal
Within 60 days from the date of issue of Notice to Proceed:
(a) The Contractors shall commence to submit to the Engineer working drawings and
detailed designs.
(b) Drawings shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be submitted as
required by the various sections of these specifications.
(c) The following shall be subject to the prior approval of the Engineer:
(i) Project schedule.
(ii) Shop drawings.
(iii) Working Drawings.
(iv) Temporary building details including utilities and service connections.
(v) Shop drawings showing details of circuitry.
(d) The Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of all drawings furnished by
him, even though the drawings may have been approved by the Engineer.
1.11.2.2 Drawings to be furnished after Completion of the Works
(1) One complete set of 'As-built' full size, stable, high density line, high contrast drawings shall
be of polyester film. The delivery of these drawings shall be affected within 30 days of the
issue of the Taking-over Certificate for the Works or section of the Works. The drawings shall
show all changes that occurred during construction, and include details of layout,
alignments, dimensions, finishes, materials, fixings, and plant used in the Works. In particular
the track drawings shall provide the following information.
(a) Longitudinal profile and straight line diagrams of the project alignment showing rail
levels; vertical and horizontal curves and radius; intersection points; curve survey data;
start and end of fishplated track; location of compromise rails; location of insulation
joints; location of toe of switch and nose of crossing.
(b) Signal drawings of details; circuits; locations of junction boxes etc.
(c) The Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of these drawings in all
aspects. If the Engineer should require further additional drawings in complete sets,
or individual drawings, the Contractor shall supply the same at an agreed additional
charge.
1.11.2.3 Reports
(1) The Contractor shall submit monthly reports of work progress to the Engineer which shall
be in an approved format. The Contractor report shall be subject to review by the Engineer
as a Submittal under Section 1.4: Submittals and Substitutions.
(2) Monthly reports shall be submitted by the 10th working day of each month.
(a) Monthly reports shall contain at least the following:
(i) Introduction.
(ii) Progress.
(iii) Activities.
(iv) Three months forward forecast of installation work progress.
(v) Significant events having potential for Claims.
(vi) Record of Payments.
(vii) Weather.
(viii) Photographs.
(ix) Video Record.
(x) Minutes of Weekly Site Meetings.
(xi) Summary List of Correspondence.
(xii) Updated Submittal List.
(b) No claims arising from delays or other causes shall be considered unless it has been
first reported without delay by the Contractor in the Monthly Report, and the progress
by the Contractor in processing the claim is to be reported each month. Failure to
report on the claim in two consecutive monthly reports shall indicate that the
Contractor has officially withdrawn the claim. No further consideration shall then be
made by the Engineer on the claim.
(3) Completion Report
Submit prior to demobilisation. The report shall include, but not be limited to:
(a) Complete installation schedule.
(b) Summary of test results.
(c) Highlight installation problems and the methods used to overcome the problems.
(d) Summary of all variations made to the installation works.
(e) Payments received schedule.
(f) Final Construction Cost.
1.11.2.4 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
(1) General
Manuals shall contain complete and accurate information for operating and maintaining all
equipment and plant provided by the Contractor. Material not contributing to the
understanding of the design, operation or maintenance of the plant shall be excluded.
(2) Format
The manuals shall be submitted in the following format:
(a) Size - A4.
(b) Paper - White bond at least 100 g/m2 weight.
(c) Text - Neatly typewritten in approved font.
(d) Drawings - Of same size as report format bound in with the text. Fold-out drawings are
acceptable. Larger drawings shall be folded to A4 format size and provided in a
drawing pocket inside the rear cover.
(e) Flysheets - Each portion of the manual shall be separated by coloured flysheets,
describing contents of ensuing portion.
(f) Bindings - Strong durable imitation leather covered ring binders in a form which will
readily permit replacement or addition of individual sheets.
(g) Covers - Shall provide the following information:
STATE RAILWAY OF THAILAND
(NAME OF PROJECT)
(NAME OF DOCUMENT)
(NAME OF CONTRACTOR)
(3) Operation Manuals
(a) General
(i) The operation manual shall indicate the purpose and use of all controls and
indications provided.
(ii) The operation manual shall at least contain operating and handling instructions
including precautions and critical points to be observed.
(b) Translation
The manuals shall be in English and Thai. The Engineer will offer assistance to ensure
that the translation into Thai and reference to railway documents, rules, orders etc.,
are accurate and correctly represent SRT working procedures.
(c) Numbers
Twenty-five copies of each manual shall be provided.

(d) Maintenance Manuals
(i) The Maintenance Manual shall differentiate between first-line and second-line
maintenance and shall include the recommended routine and periodic
maintenance, testing and replacement of all components, together with details
of the setting up and commissioning procedure for each item of equipment.
(ii) A section on fault finding with specific, typical and usual failure diagnosis and
rectification including step by step procedures and flow charts shall be
provided for all equipment, systems and circuits.
(iii) The Maintenance Manuals shall at least include:
• General descriptions of all components, overall design concepts and
specific features of design.
• Design data for all plant and systems, specifying power voltage and current.
• Performance specifications for all plant stating the basis for calculations
and allowable variations.
• Maintenance instructions, including scheduled preventive maintenance,
lubrication instructions etc., necessary to keep the system in good working
order, schedules covering tests and inspections to be performed after
various periods of operation of all plant.
• A general description and identification of special tools and test equipment
required or furnished for maintenance.
• A circuit drawing and circuit description required for maintenance.
• System test instructions.
• Specific, typical and usual failure diagnosis and rectification including step
by step procedures and flow charts for all plant and systems.
• Replacement parts for all component assemblies and sub-assemblies, in
adequate detail for ordering, such as part name, part number, component
serial number, manufacturer's name and address and normal delivery time.
(iv) Twenty copies of maintenance manuals for each type of plant shall be supplied
to the Engineer.
1.11.2.5 Video Record
(1) The Contractor shall provide professionally-edited VDOs for both monthly and final video
with proper format and storytelling illustrating details, information, pictures, long-take
video, bird’s-eyes views, including scripts, manufacturing, installation activities, of all
construction and its related works.
(2) The company employed to carry out the filming and editing shall be approved by the
Engineer. A filming schedule shall be provided for approval by the Engineer before the
commencement of production work.
1.11.3 EXECUTION
1.11.3.1 Drawings
(1) Timing of Drawings
(a) All drawings shall be in the hands of the Engineer within the date stated in the drawing
control chart approved by the Engineer. Drawings shall be submitted regularly and at
a rate in accordance with the above chart to allow for satisfactory checking and return
by the Engineer.
(b) Failure to receive approval for drawings not submitted at reasonable periods and in
accordance with the drawing control chart will not be considered sufficient excuse for
extensions of Contract Period.
(c) Drawings will be reviewed by the Engineer as described in Section 1.4: Submittals and
Substitutions.
(2) Numbers
In accordance with the requirements of Section 1.4: Submittals and Substitutions.
1.11.3.2 Documentation
(1) Timing
(a) Draft Record Documents shall be submitted at such time that review comments can
be incorporated before the completion of the last Taking Over Certificate.
(b) Final sets of approved and updated documents shall be delivered to the Engineer
within one month after the completion of the last Taking Over Certificate.
(2) Numbers
(a) As described in Section 1.11.2 herein.
(b) Documents will be reviewed by the Engineer as described in Section 1.4: Submittals
and Substitutions.
(3) Final Record
The purpose of the final Record Documents (including "As-Built" Drawings) is to provide
factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable
future modification of design to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement,
investigation, and examination.
(a) Carefully transfer all change data shown on drawings and other documents, co-
ordinating the changes as required, and clearly indicating at each affected detail the
full description of the changes made during construction/installation and the actual
location of items described. Call attention to each entry by drawing a "Cloud" around
the area or areas affected.
(b) Submit the completed total set of Record Documents to the Engineer. Participate in
review meetings as required by the Engineer, make all required changes in the Record
Documents, and promptly deliver the final Record Documents to the Engineer.
(c) The Contractor shall have no responsibility for recording changes in the Works
subsequent to acceptance of the Work by the Engineer, except for changes resulting
from replacements, repairs, and alterations made by the Contractor as part of his
maintenance work under Defects Liabilities Period.
1.11.3.3 Video Record
A VDO record, of not less than 90 minutes duration, shall be made of all significant items of
construction to show the Contractor's method of construction manufacture and installation,
equipment used, specific testing and progress of the Works. Filming shall be carried out at frequent
intervals from commencement of work to completion. Two editions shall be made, one narrated
in Thai and the other in English.
The outline script and storyboard for VDO monthly and final of the filming schedule shall be
approved by the Engineer before the commencement of construction.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

1.12.1 DESCRIPTION
1.12.1.1 Scope
The works covered by this Specification consist of the protection of the environmental resources
within the project boundaries and those affected outside the limits of the Permanent Works during
the entire duration of the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable environmental
laws and regulations. The Contractor shall minimise environmental pollution and damage that
may occur as the result of construction operations. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
delays resulting from failure to comply with environmental laws and regulations.
The Contractor shall ensure compliance with this section by subcontractors.
The provisions of this Section however, shall not be applicable in the case of emergency works
necessary for saving of life and property or safety of the Works.
(1) "Environmental Protection" means the prevention/control of pollution and habitat
disruption that may occur to the environment during construction. The control of
environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of land, water, and air;
biological and cultural resources; and includes management of visual aesthetics; noise;
solid, chemical, gaseous, and liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well
as other pollutants.
(2) "Hazardous and Toxic Waste" means materials that, if abandoned or disposed of, may
meet the definition of a hazardous waste. These are specified in the regulation. These waste
streams would typically consist of material brought on Site by the Contractor to execute
work but are not fully consumed during the course of construction. Examples include, but
are not limited to, excess paint thinners (i.e. methyl-ethyl-ketone, toluene etc.), waste
thinners, excess paints, excess solvents, waste solvents, and excess pesticides, and
contaminated pesticide equipment rinse water.
(3) "Site Environmental Plan" means the contract specific Site Environmental Plan which the
Contractor shall submit for review prior to the completion of Mobilisation. The Plan shall
include all aspects of environmental measurement, including all aspects of recording and
measuring the environmental conditions continuously through the project.
(1) The Contractor shall conform to the Government of Thailand's Environmental Laws and
Regulations as applicable. The current national standards established by the National
Environmental Committee and other government agencies for control of environmental
pollutants of air, water, and noise shall be followed for compliance during project
construction.
(2) The Contractor shall comply with all Acts and Government Decrees that shall include but
are not limited to:
(a) Air Quality
(b) Noise
(c) Ground Water Quality
(d) Water resources - Dwelling System
(e) Transportation
(f) Waste Management
(g) Economic and Social Conditions
(h) Immigration and Settlements
(i) Public Utilities
(j) Historic places/sites
1.12.1.4 Tolerances
No requirement in this Section shall be construed as relieving the Contractor of any applicable
local environmental protection laws and regulations. During construction, the Contractor shall be
responsible for identifying, implementing, and submitting for review any additional requirements
to be included in the Site Environmental Plan.
1.12.1.5 Submittals
All drawings and documentation specified in this section shall be submitted to the Engineer for
review as required by Section 1.4: Submittals and Substitutions.
(1) Site Environmental Plan
(a) The Contractor shall submit his Site Environmental Plan to the Engineer for his review,
within 90 days of the date of the Notice to Commence. The Contractor shall resubmit
his Plan, modified as necessary until the Engineer shall issue a Notice of No Objection.
(b) The Site Environmental Plan shall consist of, but not limited to, the following issues:
(i) Contractor's Environmental Management System
Contractor's Obligation, Environmental Policy, Organization, Persons Responsible,
etc.
(ii) Implementation Plan for Environmental Protection
Environmental Control/Mitigation Plan, Environmental Management Plan
Documentation, Reporting and Check System
(2) Monitoring Report
(a) The Contractor shall submit a monthly monitoring report to the Engineer for his
inspection in order to ensure that Contractor's activities for the Environmental
Protection are adequately taken and to clear environmental problems.
(b) Monitoring Report shall consist of, but not limited to:
(i) Construction Activity;
(ii) Environmental Protection and Monitoring Activity;
(iii) Monitoring Result and Examination;
(iv) Corrective and/or Preventive Action, if necessary;
1.12.1.6 Environmental Programme
(1) The Contractor shall undertake environmental monitoring as required under the Contract,
including setting up of monitoring stations.
(2) The Contractor shall ensure that audits of all the activities detailed in his Site Environmental
Plan are carried out at weekly intervals or at such intervals as the Engineer may require
ensuring the continuing effectiveness and compliance with the Site Environmental Plan.
The Contractor shall make available on request any document which relates to his recent
internal audits.
(3) The Engineer may conduct quarterly Audits of the Contractor's Site Environmental Plan and
its effective implementation on the Site. The Engineer will give not less than fourteen (14)
days notice. During the audit by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide suitably qualified
staff to accompany the auditor.
(4) Requirements established in this Section shall apply to all sites and all activities of the
Contractor, and shall supplement the Technical Specifications.
1.12.2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable to this Section
1.12.3 EXECUTION
1.12.3.1 Air Quality
(1) The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to minimise fugitive dust emissions from
operations involving excavation, grading, and clearing of land and disposal of waste. He
shall not allow emissions of fugitive dust from any transport, handling, construction or
storage activity to remain visible in atmosphere beyond the property line of emission source
for any prolonged period of time without notification to the Engineer.
The Impact Characteristic is the dust from construction and the trucks used in the
construction process.
(2) Measurement of Impact Mitigation
(a) A fence shall be erected at least 20 metres from all construction activities including
open-cut, dismantling, building demolition, material piles excavation, concrete mixing.
(b) Spray water 3 times daily over materials including soil, sand or other materials which
produce dust and also provide covers.
(c) Eliminate soil, sand, and mud outside the fence around the site by vacuum in dry
weather or sweep in wet weather.
(d) Clean all vehicles' wheels in the site area before going outside the site.
(e) In order to open new roads, the road surface must be covered to prevent dust
distribution with concrete mix or asphaltic concrete, and which shall be finished before
05.00 hrs.
(f) In order to process construction on an existing road, the Contractor shall clean the
road at least 4 times per week at night.
(g) Provide dust protection equipment to workers during surface opening, building
demolitions, excavation, and concrete mixing.
1.12.3.2 Noise
(1) The Contractor shall consider noise as an environmental constraint in his planning and
execution of the Works. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, take all appropriate
measures to ensure that work carried out by the Contractor and by his sub-contractors,
whether on or off the Site, will not cause any unnecessary or excessive noise which may
disturb the occupants of any nearby dwellings, schools, hospitals, or premises with similar
sensitivity to noise.
The Impact characteristics are the noise from piling, steel sheet transportation, and trucks.
(a) Require a concrete mixing area to be at least 100 metres remote from a community
or provide a fence of at least 3 metres high around the area.
(b) Check all vehicle engines and all equipment to produce noise not more than the
Department of Land Transport's Standard.
(c) Mitigate noise impact by using bored piles.
(d) Avoid using steel sheet to cover road surface. If necessary, use thicker steel case with
rubber supports to prevent noise.
(e) Provide ear plugs for workers who work with riveting hammers, diesel powered
generator, bulldozer, truck crane, backhoe, and asphaltic plant.
(f) When a complaint about noise impact is received, the Contractor must resolve the
problem immediately.
(g) Provide a sign in an area where noise level is more than 90 dBa.
(h) Rotate all workers to mitigate an impact on workers who work in a noisy area.
1.12.3.3 Vibration
(1) The vibration level limits from construction equipment shall conform to applicable
standards.
The scheme for monitoring vibration levels shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
consent.
The Impact Characteristic arises from vibration of construction equipment.
(2) Measurement of Impact Mitigation.
(a) Check all vehicle engines, equipment, and truck weights to be under the Department
of Land Transport's standard.
(b) Using bored piles or piling with less vibration at daytime to avoid a noise impact.
(c) In order to open a public road surface, permission must be received as an approval
from a related party.
(d) All trucks in a construction area must run at low speed on a smooth road surface.
(e) In cases where vibration is more than a provided standard, the Contractor must
provide a ditch between the sources and the area which would be affected to reduce
the disturbance caused by the vibrations.
(f) To be careful with vibration from bored pile or piling in a sensitive area such as
hospital, temple, and school.
(g) A dilapidated road surface for use by trucks must be improved immediately i.e. pave
with asphaltic concrete.
(h) Using ditches to reduce vibrations.
(i) Using low speeds for all vehicles.
1.12.3.4 Ground Water Quality

(1) The Contractor shall discharge wastewater from daily use of workers arising out of site
offices, canteens or toilet facilities provided by him into sewerage system after obtaining
prior approval of agency controlling the area. A wastewater drainage system shall be
provided to drain wastewater into a sewerage system.
The Impact Characteristic is waste water arising from the daily use of water by workers.
(a) Using a pail for waste matter in the toilet and pumping out sewage from septic tanks
or cess pits every 6 months or when full by using a service from the local
administration organisation.
(b) Using a prefabricated plant to treat waste water discharged from daily use which can
reduce waste water with BOD>250 mg/litre to <30 mg/litre and also can treat waste
water from at least 80% of all workers use. The waste water after treatment can be
kept in a polishing pond for not more than 3 days.
1.12.3.5 Water Resource - Dwelling System
(1) Contractor shall at all times is to ensure that all existing stream courses and drains within
and adjacent to the Site are kept safe and free from any debris and any excavated materials
arising from the Works. The Contractor shall ensure that earth, bentonite, chemicals and
concrete agitator washings etc. are not deposited in the watercourses but are suitably
treated and effluents and residue disposed off in a manner approved by local authorities.
The Impact Characteristic is the sediment washed from a construction area into a water
resource along the project alignment and irrigation channels
(a) Avoid construction during the rainy season such that rain would be likely to wash
sediment into a nearby water resource.
(b) Provide a system to trap and reduce sediment occurring from a construction site which
could be washed into a nearby water resource.
1.12.3.6 Land Transportation
(1) The Contractor shall take measures to ensure that construction traffic is reasonably
controlled and directed on the roads and for sites where the new alignment crosses existing
roads.
The Impact Characteristic is the traffic volume on roads, at which Track Doubling crosses
roads with both interchange and at-grade intersection.
(2) Impact Mitigation Measurement
(a) Plan to use haul roads on by-pass highways, the consideration should stress on the
nearby material sources, by using highway and haul in off-peak traffic hours.
(b) At the rail-road intersections, the Contractor shall install warning signs 2 weeks before
the start of construction, and signs to be placed at 2 km from the intersection, both
ways, in order to guide the road users onto other routes.
(c) In case it is necessary to close existing roads, this shall be done after 22.00hrs and re-
open again to traffic in day time hours.
(d) If a detour is required the traffic signs and lighting should be appropriately equipped
and clearly visible at night to prevent accidents, the traffic signs should be placed
about 1 km from the detour, or at least 300 m.
(e) Trucks hauling construction equipment, soil, sand should be covered with canvas to
stop dust and spillage.
(f) For hauling large construction equipment, the Project Manager should request local
police to provide either escort car or to close the road to traffic.
(g) The loading should follow the Land Transport's Department's Regulations.
(h) Avoid the transport of construction materials in peak traffic hours such as 06.00 - 09.00
hrs and 15.00 - 18.00 hrs.
(i) Construction material trucks shall have the wheels and tyres washed on entering and
leaving the construction area, in a cleaning facility inside the construction site.
(j) Checks shall be performed on engines and equipment to ensure that noise levels and
emissions are not in excess of the standards established by the Land Transport
Department.
(k) When complaints are made by the public to the Contractor about transportation of
construction materials, the Contractor shall immediately implement remedies to
resolve the complaint.
1.12.3.7 Waste Management
(1) The Contractor shall ensure that the Site is free of trash, garbage, debris and weeds. He
shall provide and ensure proper uses of refuse containers to ensure that rodents, fleas and
other pests are neither harboured nor attracted.
The Characteristic Impact is from the garbage of the labour camps.
(2) Measurement of Impact Mitigation.
(a) Provide at Site, metal or heavy-duty plastic 200 litre 'Refuse Containers' with tight-fitting
lids for disposal of all garbage or trash associated with food. The containers shall not
have openings that allow access by rodents.
(b) Arrange daily garbage collections or every other day, in order to prevent the pile of
garbage accumulating, and the disposal shall be co-ordinated with the appropriate
local organisation.
1.12.3.8 Economic and Social Conditions

(1) The Contractor shall minimise any negative perception from local government,
communities and any other others regarding environmental impact caused by his activities.
Therefore, the Contractor shall carry out social approaches in order to nourish and to
maintain community perception towards the Project.
Impact characteristics to be mitigated are:
(a) Disputes between Labourers;
(b) Large movements of labour into the labour camps with consequential problems; and
(c) Environmental problems of increased dust, noise and traffic occur
(a) Monitor the behaviour of labour in the camps.
(b) Establish labour camps away from existing communities.
(c) to give continuous attention to the social communication, and to accommodate
public opinion in order to avoid misunderstanding and any conflict that may arise;
(d) to assign adequate staff responsible for the best public relations;
(e) to give respect to the local community's traditions;
(f) to assist the Engineer and the Employer in implementing social and/or related
community development program; and to minimize traffic disturbance.
1.12.3.9 Settlement and immigration (Not Used)
(1) The Characteristic Impact is from the people who dwell on the land. Land may have to be
acquired. Their livelihoods and homes could be lost.
(2) Measurement for Impact Mitigation
(a) The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with the special committee
established to take care of the settlement and immigration of people; for them to be
compensated; forward planning in advance for settlement and immigration for the
people involved to resolve the problems and mitigate their circumstances.
(b) Compensation shall be generous.
(c) Resolution: The people settled in the SRT right-of-way should be considered and
concluded by the committee to solve the problem on a request from a master leasing
on SRT's Land No. 1/2000 and No. 1/2001.
(d) In case SRT can provide land for these people, consideration should be given for these
people to settle in the same locality.
1.12.3.10 Public Utilities
(1) The Characteristic Impact is the removal of existing utilities due to the double tracking
works.
(a) The Contractor shall, under the control of SRT, undertake a survey of the area within
20 metres of the existing track centre line on the side of the line where the additional
track will be constructed, before commencing any construction work associated with
the Track Doubling Project, Nakhon Phatom - Hua Hin, for the area under investigation.
(b) The SRT and the Contractor shall coordinate with the utility authority for the moving
of the utility away from the area of construction if any.
(c) Depending on the survey result, damaged utilities shall be repaired immediately on
discovery.
(d) On completion of the project SRT will plan for future maintenance.
1.12.3.11 Historic Sites
(1) The Characteristic Impact arises from vibration during construction activity that may affect
the site.
(a) if during excavation works the Contractor reveals relics that may be associated with
an historic place, SRT shall order the cessation of activities at that site and inform the
Fine Arts Department immediately.
(b) When work is progressing alongside a nearby temple work trains shall be operated at
slow speed and prohibited from using the horn.
1.12.3.12 Noise Barrier
(1) General
(a) Scope
This work shall consist of the erection of the dispersion or/and absorption types noise
barrier to the location, line and level of type indicated on the Drawings and required
by this Specification.
(b) Submittals
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer's Representative for approval at least 60
days before the date of commencement of noise barrier works:
(i) Three copies of literature on the noise barrier panels from the panel
manufacturer.
(ii) Details of all components of the noise barrier works, including any related test
methods and results of the proposed materials.
(iii) Three copies of full detailed design, drawings and calculations demonstrating
the adequacy of all components of the noise barrier.
(iv) Three copies of drawings showing the plan sections and elevations of the noise
barrier at a scale of not less than 1:100. Exact location and spacing of the
structural frames shall be clearly shown.
(v) Three copies of drawing showing all details necessary for the complete
installation of the noise barrier.
(vi) A certificate for each type of noise barrier panel showing the manufacturer's
name, the date and place, of manufacture and showing that the panels comply
with the requirements stated in the Contract.
(c) Samples
(i) The Contractor shall supply the Employer's Representative with 3 sample
panels of at least 0.5 m2 for each type of noise barrier panel for approval of
their finish, colour and quality 30 days before the date of commencement of
noise barrier works. Once approved by the Employer's Representative, these
samples shall be retained as the quality standard throughout the Contract.
(ii) The colour reference of each type of the noise barrier panels and of the
structural steel members shown on the Drawings is subject to confirmation by
the Employer's Representative. The colour reference shall be confirmed by the
Employer's Representative as part of the approval of the sample panel and the
Contractor shall obtain the confirmation prior to placing his order.
(iii) The Contractor shall provide a full size mockup sample of all of the panels and
supporting posts. The mockup sample shall be at least 3 bays wide and in full
height or as directed by the Employer's Representative, and identical to the
permanent noise barrier to be installed. The mockup sample shall be used to
demonstrate workmanship. Location of the mockup sample shall be agreed
with the Employer's Representative. The mockup sample may be incorporated
into permanent works if approved by the Employer's Representative.
(2) Materials
(a) Noise Barrier Panels
(i) General
The noise barrier panels shall be metal of approved type and dimensions,
complete with accessories to perform the dispersive type or/and absorptive
type to attenuate noise level design to withstand the minimum wind pressure
of 150 kg/m2. The noise barrier panels shall be manufactured from durable
material with high resistance to weather and air pollution to last a long service
life of at least 10 years with minimum maintenance.
The panels shall be supplied with dimensions to suit the framing arrangement
as specified on the Drawings. Unless specially approved by the Employer's
Representative, alternative panel sizes requiring changes in the framing or sub-
framing arrangement shall not be allowed.
The manufacturer shall have proven experience and history in manufacturing
and supplying noise barrier works, and shall satisfy the Employer's
Representative with proven track record of successful projects conducted in

similar weathering conditions.
(ii) Inspection and Testing
The manufacturer shall allow the Employer's Representative to enter the
factory and witness the manufacturing and the testing of the materials to be
used in the work at all working time.
Upon delivery of the noise barrier panels on Site, the Employer's Representative
shall at his discretion select random samples from each type of noise barrier
panel and order any of the tests to be carried out on the selected samples as
a quality control and continued monitoring of the barrier panels.
The approved manufacturer shall inform the Employer's Representative at least
14 days before commencing manufacturing. The wall panels shall not be
delivered to the site prior to the Employer's Representative's approval. Once
arrived at the site, only the acceptable panels without any damages shall be
permitted for installation. Defective panels shall be rejected and shall be
replaced at the Contractor's expense.
(iii) Acoustic Performance
The noise barrier system supply shall be tested for acoustic performance to
ensure efficient and effective noise attenuation properties requirements as
specified below
• Acoustic Testing
• Procedure
Tests shall be conducted by an independent testing laboratory registered
for testing Airborne Sound Transmission Loss and Sound Absorption in a
Reverberation Room.
Tests shall be carried out on prototype panels prior to the
commencement of production.
• Test Method
Panels shall be tested for Airborne Sound Transmission Loss using ISO
140-1 and ISO 140-3 "Acoustics - Measurement of sound insulation in
buildings and of building elements". The Sound Transmission Class shall
be determined according to ASTM E413 "Classification for Rating Sound
Insulation".
Absorption Panels shall be tested to determine their Sound Absorption
Coefficient according to ISO 354 "Acoustics - Measurement of sound
absorption in a reverberation room".
• Test Results Criteria Sound Transmission Loss

Panels shall exhibit a Sound Transmission Class of at least 34 and shall
have Airborne Sound Transmission Losses of no less than the values
listed below:
Frequency (Hertz) Airborne Sound Transmission Loss (dB)
100 17
125 20
160 22
200 25
250 29
315 31
400 35
500 37
630 39
800 41
1,000 43
1,250 46
1,600 48
2,000 50
2,500 52
3,150 54
4,000 55
5,000 56
• Sound Absorption
The Sound Absorption Co-efficient of the Absorption Panel shall be no
less than the values listed below
Frequency (Hertz) Sound Absorption Coefficient (Alpha)

125 0.29
250 0.96
500 0.98
1,000 0.85
2,000 0.64
4,000 0.71
• Submittal
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer's Representative, test
certificates verifying the acoustic performance of panels, before
production commences.
(iv) Steel Components of Noise Barriers
Steel components of the noise barrier wall shall be as shown on the Drawings
and shall comply with the requirements in Section 4.10 of this Specification.
(b) Steel Frame
All steel frame, fixings, spacers and bolts shall comply with the requirement of Section
4.10: Structural Steel Works of these Specifications and the Drawings.
Painting system to be used for steelwork shall be in accordance with the requirements
of Section 4.10: Structural Steelworks.
Supporting frames and foundation details shall be in accordance with the Drawings.
The Contractor shall review the compatibility of the frame design with the noise barrier
panels. Any modifications to the frame design to suit the noise barrier panels should
be proposed to the Employer's Representative for approval.
(3) Execution
(a) Storage and Protection
Panels shall be stored under cover, on the platform above the ground as
recommended by the manufacturer. They shall be protected all times from damage
and when placed in position on the structure, they shall be free from dirt, grit, oil
grease or other foreign substance to cause rust staining.
(b) Installation
Panels shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and approved Drawing.
As panels are erected, they shall be securely held in position until connections and
fastening are sufficiently complete to enable the panels to stand freely in total safety.
Provisions shall be made for both the horizontal and vertical adjustments of the
structural frame and the noise barrier panels during installation.
Special provisions shall be made for panel installation so that, in case of accident,
separation of panels from steel frames can be prevented.
Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the concrete parapets. Fixing positions shall be
set out to avoid clashes with parapet reinforcement, handrail on parapet wherever
possible.
(c) Clean-Up
After installation, framing members and accessories shall be cleaned by approved
method. Abrasive materials of any kind and sharp instruments shall not be used in
cleaning surfaces. Benzene, leaded gasoline, acetone, carbon tetrachloride and
cleaning liquids containing abrasives or powder cleaners shall not be used in cleaning
surfaces.
All rubbish, cartons crates and any excess materials from the manufacture, delivery
and installation shall be removed.
END OF SECTION 1
SECTION 2
EARTHWORKS
Tender Documents Section 2: Earthworks
SECTION 2: EARTH WORKS
2.1 EARTH WORKS DEFINITIONS AND CLASSIFICATIONS

2.1.1 DESCRIPTION
2.1.1.1 Definitions and Classification
The following definitions of earthworks materials shall apply to this and other Clauses of the
Specification in which reference is made to the defined materials.
(1) "Top Soil" shall mean the top layer of soil that can support vegetation, and shall include
turf.
(2) "Suitable material" shall comprise all that which is acceptable in accordance with the
Contract for use in the Works.
(3) "Unsuitable material" shall mean other than suitable material and shall comprise:
a) material from swamps, marshes and bogs;
b) organic soil, peat, logs, stumps, perishable and toxic materials;
c) material susceptible to spontaneous combustion;
d) clay of liquid limit exceeding 80% and/or plastic limit exceeding 55%;
e) soil containing soluble material (e.g. rock salt or gypsum), or material which contains
appreciable amounts of mica, or material with finely dispersed mica and of liquid
limit exceeding 40%;
f) material having a loss on ignition greater than 2.5% by weight;
g) material with a CBR of less than 2.0% (when compacted to 95% of the maximum dry
density determined by AASHTO T99 and CBR shall be tested in accordance with
AASHTO T193).
Note: Materials that are soft or unstable merely because they are too wet or dry shall not
be classified as unsuitable material unless otherwise in writing by the Engineer.
(4) "Rock" shall comprise material found in ledges or masses in its original position.
a) Soft Rock
Shall include all excavation except that classified as hard rock or earth. To prove as soft
rock, the material shall be excavated by using a crawler tractor perfect equipped with
ripper condition, the engine power shall be not less than 270 horse power and the gross
weight shall be not less than 28 metric tons. After proof, the soft rock excavation can be
done with any equipment.
b) Hard Rock
The work shall consist of the excavation which excavated material is hard rock or boulders
each having a volume of 1.0 cubic meters or more. Drilling and blasting shall be required.
In the judgement of the Engineer, hard rock can be loosened with a tractor mounted and
drawn ripper of the following description:
(I) Tractor Unit: Equipment with a minimum weight of 17 tonnes and net horse power
rating of 150 HP or more. The tractor unit is to be in good condition and operated
by experienced personnel skilled in the use of ripping equipment.
Contract: 2 Ngao -Chiang Rai Section 2-1
(II) Ripping Unit: The ripper to be attached to the tractor shall be the most efficient
parallelogram type recommended by the tractor or ripper manufacturer. The
ripper shall have a single shank in first class condition with sharpened cutting
point.
(5) "Rock Fill" shall be clean well graded material provided by the Contractor from sources
outside the Site or from rock excavation. The maximum size particles in the material shall
pass through a rigid 200 mm square grid and the largest dimension of any particle shall
not exceed 300 mm.
(6) "Waste" shall be unsuitable material. if not required by the Employer shall be the property
of the Contractor. The Contractor shall remove and dispose at the areas outside the Right-
of-Way at his own expenses including claims arising from the use of private land.
(7) "Formation" shall be the portion of the layer beneath the Subballast section and within
the zone of influence of live traffic loads, including foundation support. The Subballast,
Subbase, Sand Drain, Prepared Subgrade and other Fill Material are in accordance with
Section 2.5 : EMBANKMENT and Section 2.6 : SUBBASE AND SUBBALLAST.
2.1.1.2 Plant
The Contractor shall employ only plant which is suited to the soils to be handled. He shall be
responsible for maintaining the nature of suitable material so that when it is placed and compacted
it remains suitable in accordance with the Contract.
2.1.1.3 Removal of Suitable Material
No Excavated suitable material other than surplus to the requirement of the Contract shall be
removed from the Site except on the direction or with the permission of the Engineer. Should the
Contractor be permitted to remove suitable material from the Site to suit his operational procedure,
then he shall make good at his own expense any consequent deficit of filling arising therefore.
2.1.1.4 Pollution Control
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval measures to be undertaken by the
Contractor to prevent water pollution of the environment and erosion of earthworks. No earthworks
may commence until such approval has been completed for all pollution and erosion controls.
The Contractor's proposals shall include but not be limited to:
(1) Stream turbidity.
(2) Sedimentation.
(3) Siltation.
(4) Erosion of cut faces.
(5) Erosion of embankments.
(6) Diesel and oil pollution.
(7) Flooding.
2.1.2 PRODUCTS
Not relevant to this section.
2.1.3 EXECUTION
2.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

2.2.1 DESCRIPTION
2.2.1.1 Scope
This section specifies clearing and grubbing which shall include clearing the designated areas of all
trees, down timber, snags, vegetation, rubbish and objectionable material and shall include grubbing
stumps and roots and disposing of all material resulting from the clearing or grubbing. It shall also
include the demolition, removal and disposal of structures that obtrude into or encroach upon or
obstruct the work and the removal of existing road surfaces, except where provided for otherwise.
Clearing shall include the removal and disposal of everything above ground level including
overhanging branches except those things the Engineer directs are to be left undisturbed. The material
to be cleared shall include but not necessarily be limited to trees, stumps, logs, brush, undergrowth,
grass crops, loose vegetable matter, structures (other than those structures where removal or
clearance is separately specified and measured).
2.2.2 PRODUCTS
2.2.3 EXECUTION
2.2.3.1 General
(1) Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, outside the limits of the earthworks, and under
embankments more than 1.5 m. high, trees and stumps shall be completely removed and
place outside the clearing and grubbing area. Elsewhere shall be cut to ground level.
(2) Clearing shall include but not necessarily be limited to removal and disposal of topsoil, trees,
stumps, brushes, vegetation and roots.
(3) Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of stumps, roots, existing foundation and
underground structures to a depth of at least 300 mm below ground level or in cut area, 600
mm. below the clearing level of existing ground.
(4) Clearing and grubbing of pits, channel changes, and ditches will be required only to the depth
necessitated by the excavation within those areas.
2.2.3.2 Topsoil
(1) In order to reduce the risk of erosion no topsoil shall be removed from the areas outside the
limits of earthworks. Any topsoil outside these limits, which is inadvertently removed during
clearing and grubbing operations or otherwise, shall be replaced immediately by the Contractor
and at his expense.
(2) All topsoil (including turf) shall be removed from areas of cuttings and embankments and
stockpiled if required for re-use for the soiling to slopes, berms, verges and for the provision of
beds for the cultivation of trees and shrubs. The following conditions shall apply.
(a) Before commencement, the storage area for topsoil shall be proposed by the Contractor
and approved by the Engineer.
(b) The storage of stripped topsoil shall be to a maximum height of 3 metres and shall on no
account be consolidated or trafficked by heavy machinery.
(c) The storage of topsoil shall be kept completely separate from that of the fill material.
(d) Material thus removed may be used as topsoil for slope protection if it, in the opinion of
the Engineer, is suitable for use. Topsoil will be measured and paid for as such in
accordance with the Bill of Quantities, but removal and replacement of such material
shall be considered incidental to clearing and grubbing and shall not be measured for
payment. Materials not used as topsoil, indicated in writing by the Engineer, shall be
removed and disposed in the areas outside the Right-of-Way at the Contractor’s expenses
including claim arising from the use of private land.
(e) The use of topsoil shall be restricted to surface layers not subject to loading by pavements
or structures.
2.2.3.3 Embankment
(1) The clearing and grubbing within areas under embankments shall include the removal of all
vegetation, roots and stumps from trees and palms, garbage, rubbish, etc., remnants from houses
and structures and the like. Holes left after such removal shall be backfilled with acceptable
materials and compacted to the density prescribed for layers at the depths concerned below pf
existing ground, and this backfilling shall be considered incidental to the works of clearing and
grubbing and shall not be measured and paid for.
(2) Ditches, streams and ponds in the embankment areas shall be properly cleared, drained and
dried out prior to being measured for payment of embankment quantities to be filled in.
(3) Where existing roadway or railway embankments shall be raised or widened, all vegetation and
topsoil shall similarly be completely removed from shoulders, slopes and ground under the
widening before the operations of actual widening can be commenced.
(4) Materials below original ground level within embankment areas which are removed during the
operation of the clearing and grubbing equipment shall be replaced by acceptable fill materials
which shall be compacted to the density prescribed for layers at the depths concerned below
clearing level of existing ground. Such removal and replacement of materials is considered
incidental to the works, of clearing and grubbing and shall not be measured and paid for, except
in cases where the Engineer has issued a written instruction to the effect that materials deemed
unsuitable by him shall be removed to depths from the original ground level as directed by the
Engineer. All unsuitable materials shall be removed and disposed in accordance with Section 2.1:
EARTHWORKS DEFINITIONS AND CLASSIFICATIONS, Sub-Clause (6) of 2.1.1.1 Definitions and
Classification.
2.2.3.4 Excavation
(1) Where railway or roadway excavations are made, and where channels, ditches, streams and
rivers are diverted, all vegetation, roots, stumps and the like shall be completely removed and
placed outside the excavation area concerned before the excavation works proper can be
commenced.
(2) At all remaining areas inside the Right-of-Way, the works of clearing and grubbing shall, unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer, include the levelling of obsolete dikes, terraces and
ditches, the neat and complete removal of all remnants from structures and buildings, roots,
stumps, untidy vegetation, rubbish, garbage and the like, to such an extent that these matters
will not, in the opinion of the Engineer, obstruct future maintenance by machines of the Right-
of-Way area.
(3) Included in the clearing and grubbing is the removal of all existing structures within the Right-
of-Way to a depth not less than 600 mm. from the original surface
2.2.3.5 Finish
The entire Right-of-Way area shall be left with an orderly and neat appearance.
2.3 EXCAVATION
2.3.1 DESCRIPTION
2.3.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the requirements for excavation, handling and utilisation or disposal of all
excavated materials.
Work Includes:
(1) Shaping and preparation of exposed excavated surfaces;
(2) Excavating in all materials for formation work, railway, roads, gutters, ditches, berms, drains and
flumes;
(3) Removal and disposal of existing surfacing, footpaths, curbs and gutters within the limits of
construction;
(4) The demolition, removal and disposal of all foundations, foundation walls, basement or ground
level floors, timber, rubble, masonry pipe, pipe structures and pipe culverts within the limits
of construction and otherwise provided for in the Contract;
(5) Excavation for slides, breakages and cave-ins;
(6) Excavation for streams and channels;
(7) Excavation required in cuts or under embankments below the lowest normal limit of excavation
indicated on the Drawings or below ground line, for the removal of unsuitable material, and
below the ground line under embankments where benching is required, or as otherwise
directed; and
(8) Prevention of erosion of exposed surfaces.
2.3.2 PRODUCTS
2.3.2.1 Materials
(1) Classified Excavation
Shall include all earth excavation except that classified as Soft Rock and Hard Rock as described
in Section 2.1: EARTHWORKS DEFINITIONS AND CLASSIFICATIONS.
(2) Unsuitable Material
Shall be material described as unsuitable material in Section 2.1: EARTHWORKS DEFINITIONS
AND CLASSIFICATIONS.
(3) Unclassified Excavation
Shall include all materials to be excavated in accordance with the Specifications apart from
Sections 2.1 and 2.2 above.
(4) Soil Tests
The Soil Tests in this clause shall be performed to Sub-Clause (2) and (7) of 2.3.1.1 Scope, Shall
After clearing and grubbing finished, the soil samples shall be collected at least one sample
per 1,200 square meters for laboratory test as follows:
- Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates by AASHTO

- Atterberg’s Limit Test by ASTM D4943, ASTM D4318
- Standard Compaction Test by AASHTO T99
- California Bearing Ratio (CBR) Test by AASHTO T193, or equivalent
2.3.2.2 Limits of Classified Material
The actual location, shape and inclination of limits between Earth, Soft and Hard Rock are to be
established as and when excavation proceeds and the character and behaviour of the soils can be
observed.
Actual limits between Earth, Soft Rock and Hard Rock shall then be surveyed and introduced on the
alignment sheets, and calculation of quantities of the different classes of excavation shall be based
on the thus revised alignment sheets.
On establishing the limits between Earth, Soft Rock and Hard Rock the Engineer shall review the
preliminary limits of excavation and shall issue written instructions concerning the final limits of
excavation which shall constitute the basis for measurement and payment of quantities of excavation.
2.3.3 EXECUTION
2.3.3.1 General
(1) All excavation and embankment construction shall be performed as specified herein and in
Section 2.5: EMBANKMENT, and the complete earthwork shall conform to the required
alignment, levels, grades, and cross-sections.
(2) Before commencement, the storage area for excavated material shall be proposed by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
(3) Where the excavation reveals a combination of suitable and unsuitable materials the
Contractor shall, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, carry out the excavation in such
manner that the suitable materials are excavated separately for use in the Works without
contamination by the unsuitable materials.
(4) Where any material under embankment or below formation level in cuttings is required to be
excavated, it shall be removed to such depth and over such areas as are indicated on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer and disposed of in a manner depending on its nature
and condition at the time. The excavation shall be kept free of water by pumping unless in the
opinion of the Engineer the inflow into the excavation exceeds 50 litres/m2/second. The whole
of the excavation shall not be carried out in one operation but shall be progressively excavated
and filled one width at a time, such that the excavated surface is not left exposed or
unsupported during wet weather, or overnight. All excavation below embankments shall take
place from ground level unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to ensure the stability and safety of the excavation at all times.
The resultant excavation shall be backfilled with suitable material as defined in Section 2.1:
EARTHWORKS DEFINITIONS AND CLASSIFICATIONS. Nevertheless, where in these circumstances
such backfill has to be deposited below standing water the Contractor shall use only sand as
defined in Section 2.5: EMBANKMENT. Such material may be deposited below water without
the associated use of compaction plant.
(5) Where shown in the Contract or directed by the Engineer, Rock Fill or suitable material shall
be placed directly on the naturally occurring weak material. The backfill material shall be
deposited in accordance with the requirements of Sections 2.4: STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND
BACKFILL and 2.5: EMBANKMENT for the compaction of fill.
(6) If after the removal of unsuitable material the Contractor allows the material so exposed to
reach a condition where compaction of backfilling complying with Section 2.5: EMBANKMENT is
impracticable he shall make good at his own expense either by additional excavation and filling
in the manner specified, or by waiting until the condition of the exposed material is fit to
receive the approved backfill.
2.3.3.2 Excavation in Cut
(1) Where cuttings having two or more different slopes are identified in the Contract Documents,
cutting shall commence at the slope indicated for the underlying strata. The depth at which a
change of slope occurs shall be verified by the Engineer when sufficient depth has been
excavated to enable the full depth of the layer of soft to stiff material to be identified by the
Penetrometer or Torvane or equivalents. The Contractor shall then re-excavate to the upper
slope as indicated in the Contract.
(2) Erosion protection measures shall be carried out immediately after trimming of the cutting
slope.
(3) Where materials having a CBR value (when compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density
determined by AASHTO T 99 and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 193) lower than 3.0%
are found in the layer of the finished Subgrade, the finished Subgrade layer shall be further
excavated to a depth not less 600 mm but not more than depth of 1500 mm from bottom of
ballast layer and replaced by suitable materials (which shall be paid as embankment fill) having
a CBR value 3.0% or more or as be indicated on the drawings. These excavated materials shall
be classified, used, measured and paid for in accordance with the relevant items of the Bill of
Quantities. Each layer after compaction be not greater than 150 mm thickness shall be
compacted and tested as follows:
- Compacted to a dry density not less than 95% determined by AASHTO T 99
- Field density tests determined by AASHTO T 191, one test hole shall be made for about
1,200 square meters of the compacted area.
- The material. Which is soft rock or hard rock, shall be densely compacted by approval of
the Engineer.
(4) In case of the Prepared Subgrade is not required, the cut areas of railway construction, the
"final surface" on which Sand Draining layer or Subbase is to be placed shall be processed as
necessary and compacted to a minimum depth of 150 mm to not less than 95% of the
maximum dry density of the materials as determined by AASHTO T 180.
(5) Any excess depth excavated below the formation level shall be made good by backfilling with
suitable material of similar characteristics to that removed and compacted in accordance with
Clause 2.3, at the Contractor’s expense.
(6) Hauling of materials from cuttings or the importation of fill material to the embankments or
other areas of fill shall proceed only when sufficient compaction plant is operating at the place
of deposition to ensure compliance with the requirements of Section 2.5: EMBANKMENT.
(7) Construction traffic shall not use the surface of the bottom of a cutting unless the cutting is in
rock or the Contractor maintains the level of the bottom surface at least 300 mm above top
of Subgrade. Any damage to the Subgrade arising from such use of the surface shall be made
good by the Contractor at his own expense with material having the same characteristics as the
material which has been damaged.
2.3.3.3 Channel Excavation
Where indicated on the drawings and where the Engineer may so instruct as and when the work
proceeds, ditches and streams shall be widened, trained or permanently diverted.
Interception ditches at the top of slopes in cuts, as well as outlet ditches from railway ditches and
culvert outlets, shall be excavated as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
2.3.3.4 Borrow Excavation
(1) No borrow pits are permitted within the SRT Right-of-Way.
(2) If the Contractor elects to obtain material by widening cuts he shall first request permission in
writing from the Engineer and if written permission is granted, widening of cuts shall be
permitted within the limits indicated, but not beyond the limits of the Right-of-Way. Such
material shall be classified as borrow and shall not be paid for. If widening of cuts is carried out
on a written order of the Engineer the cut shall be measured and paid for as Excavation.
2.3.3.5 Control of Water
(1) The Contractor shall arrange for the rapid dispersal of water, shed on to earthworks or
completed formation during construction, or which enters the earthworks from any source, and
when practicable the water shall be discharged into permanent outfall for the pipe drainage
system. Adequate means of trapping silt shall be provided on temporary systems discharging
into permanent drainage systems. The arrangements shall be made in respect of all earthwork
including excavation whether for pipe trenches, foundations or cuttings.
(2) The Contractor shall provide where necessary temporary water courses, ditches, drains,
pumping or other means of maintaining the earthworks free from water. Such provision shall
include carrying out the work of forming the cuttings and embankments in such a manner that
their surfaces have at all times a sufficient minimum crossfall and, where practicable, a sufficient
longitudinal gradient to enable them to shed water and prevent ponding.
(3) Pumping shall not be regarded as meeting the provisions of this Clause where a blockage
temporarily obstructs the free drainage of a cutting. In such circumstances the Contractor shall
construct temporary drains with a suitable outfall or install the permanent drainage through
the blockage.
(4) The Works related to the control of water shall be considered as incidental to earthworks and
shall not be measured or paid for.
2.3.3.6 Disposal and Reuse of Excavated Material
(1) General
All suitable excavated materials shall be used insofar as practicable in the construction. Waste
shall be removed and disposed of at approved areas in accordance with Section 2.1:
EARTHWORKS DEFINITIONS AND CLASSIFICATIONS, Sub-Clause (6) of 2.1.1.1 Definitions and
Classification.
(2) Suitable Material

Materials which the Engineer deems suitable for embankment fill or for topsoil on slope shall
be ordered by the Engineer to be:
(a) used for embankment fill or for topsoil, or
(b) used for filling parts of the former stream bed lying outside the embankment areas.
(3) Unsuitable Material
Materials which the Engineer has declared in writing to be unsuitable for embankment fill or
for topsoil on slopes shall be placed as ordered by the Engineer and be:
(a) used for bed lying outside the embankment areas, or spread evenly within the Site in a
layer, the thickness of which shall not exceed 500 mm for volumes involving 300 cu.m or
less, whereas a somewhat greater thickness, as agreed by the Engineer, may be allowed
for larger volumes.
(b) Disposed in accordance with Section 2.1: EARTHWORKS DEFINITIONS AND
CLASSIFICATIONS, Sub-Clause (6) of 2.1.1.1 Definitions and Classification.
2.3.3.7 Surface Finishes
(1) Slopes
Shall be finished in a neat and workmanlike manner and to an accuracy appropriate to the
material, and care shall be taken that no material is lost below the required slopes. Breakages
and slides shall be removed and disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
(2) Subgrade
Shall be neat and workmanlike and shall have the required form, super-elevation, levels,
grades, cross-section and compaction. The surface shall be constructed to sufficient accuracy
to permit the construction of subsequent layers to the thickness, cross-section, surface
tolerance, and compaction specified.
(3) Elevation Check
Excavation limited to the roadway embankment shall conform to the shapes and smoothness
according to the Drawings. The deviation of elevation checked by a 3.0 m long straight edge
shall be less than 10 mm in both directions of perpendicular and parallel to the center line.
The elevation shall be different from that shown on the drawings by not greater than 15 mm.
The elevation check shall be performed at 25 m interval or less as consented by the Engineer.
2.3.3.8 Other Right-of-Way
At locations where the construction is close to irrigation canals and power transmission lines which
have their own Right-of-Way, the Contractor shall not, without instruction by the Engineer, remove
any materials from the Right-of-Way of other authorities or, by the operation of equipment or
otherwise, disturb their installations.
2.4 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

2.4.1 DESCRIPTION
2.4.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the excavation for the structures and subsequent backfilling. Works include:
(1) Excavation of foundations for structures and under drains.
(2) Constructing and removing cofferdams and sheeting.
(3) Pumping, dewatering and bailing.
(4) Backfilling around completed structures.
(5) Disposal of excavated material.
2.4.2 PRODUCTS
2.4.2.1 Materials
(1) Foundation Fill
Shall consist of suitably graded sand, gravel, or stone as shown on the drawings or required by
the Engineer, or concrete as described below.
(2) Concrete for Foundation Fill
Shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.1: CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES; grade 15.
(3) Backfill
(a) General
Backfill shall be approved compactable material. It shall be obtained from the structure
excavation if such material is approved by the Engineer as suitable. Any additional material
needed shall be obtained from excavation or borrow unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
(b) Culverts
Shall be sub-base material complying with the requirements of Section 2.6: SUBBASE AND
SUBBALLAST.
(c) Bridges
Backfill shall be approved compactable material. It shall be obtained from the structure
excavation if such material is approved by the Engineer as suitable. Any additional material
needed shall be obtained from excavation or borrow unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
(d) Porous Backfill
Shall be hard durable material composed of gravel, crushed rock or sand free from organic
material, clay balls and other deleterious material. Laterite or concretionary materials shall
not be used.
2.4.2.2 Properties
(1) Porous Material
(a) Sand
Shall conform to the following particle-size gradation:
*Sieve Designation (AASHTO T27)
% by Weight Passing Type A
Square Mesh
3/8" 100
No. 4 95-100
No. 16 45-80
No. 50 10-30
No. 100 2-10
(b) Gravel and Crushed Rock

Shall conform to one of the following particle-size gradations
Sieve Designation % by Weight Passing
(AASHTO T27) Type B Type C Type D Type E
2" 100 - - -
1 1/2" 70 -100 100 - -
1" 55 - 85 75 - 100 100 -
3/4" 50 - 80 60 - 90 70 - 100 100
3/8" 40 - 70 45 - 75 58 - 75 -
No. 4 30 - 60 30 - 60 35 - 65 45 - 80
No. 10 20 - 50 20 - 50 25 - 50 30 - 60
No. 40 10 - 30 10 - 30 15 - 30 20 - 35
No.200 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2
(c) Gravel Filters

Sieve No. % by Weight Passing
2" 100
11/2" 70-85
1" 45-65
1/2" 20-40
#4 10-20
# 10 0-10
Where one or more of the gradings shown above are indicated on the drawings or other
contract documents, material conforming to the gradings indicated on the Drawings shall
be used, otherwise the Contractor may select any one of the above gradings.
2.4.3 EXECUTION
2.4.3.1 Clearing
(1) Prior to starting excavation operations in any area, all necessary clearing and grubbing shall
have been performed.
(2) The Contractor shall notify the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the beginning of any
excavation so that cross-section elevations and measurement shall be taken of the undisturbed
ground. The natural ground adjacent to the structure shall not be disturbed without permission
of the Engineer.
2.4.3.2 Excavation
(1) Trenches and foundation pits for structures and structure footings and under drains shall be
excavated to the lines, grades and elevations shown on the Drawings. The elevations of the
bottoms of footings shown on the drawings are approximate only and the Engineer may order
in writing such changes in the dimension or elevations of footings as may be deemed necessary
to secure a satisfactory foundation.
(2) Boulders, rocks under berms, logs and other objectionable material encountered in excavation
shall be removed.
(3) The sides of pits and trenches shall be adequately supported at all times. Alternatively, except
where the Contract expressly requires otherwise, they may be suitably battered to such slopes
approved by the Engineer.
(4) After each excavation is completed the Contractor shall notify the Engineer to that effect and
no footing, bedding material or structure shall be placed until the Engineer has approved the
depth of excavation and the character of the foundation material.
(5) Rock and other hard foundation material shall be cleared of all loose material and cut to a
firm surface, either level or stepped or serrated, as specified or shown on the Drawings or
directed by the Engineer. All seams and crevices shall be cleared out and grouted with Portland
cement grout at the time the footing is placed. All loose and disintegrated rock and thin strata
shall be removed.
(6) In the excavation for foundations, the Contractor shall take particular care during construction
to avoid deterioration of the ground due to weathering or the use of Contractor's equipment,
and the last 150 mm of excavation above foundation levels shall be carried out by hand
immediately before blinding layers or structural concrete are placed. Should any excavation
be made greater than the dimensions required then the Contractor shall replace this with
compacted sand at his own expense.
(7) The bottom of all excavations, where blinding layers shall be cast, shall be compacted to at
least 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T99 in a thickness of not
greater than 150 mm after compaction.
(8) The excavation for foundations shall be kept free of water, and sheet piling and/or pumping or
temporary dewatering by well points or pumping wells may be required. No extra payment
shall be made for this as the cost shall be deemed to be included in the relevant rates for
excavation.
(9) All excavation surfaces and surfaces of backfill material against which concrete is to be placed
shall be smooth and firm and true to line and level.
(10) The Contractor shall allow for sufficient time between excavation and execution of the
foundations for the Engineer to carry out supplementary soils investigations and subsequent
tests.
(11) The Contractor shall at his own expense make good with suitable material as defined in Section
2.1: EARTHWORKS DEFINITIONS AND CLASSIFICATIONS or concrete when directed by Engineer
as follows:
(a) any excavation greater than the net volume required for the Works as described in the
Contract;
(b) any additional excavation at or below the bottom of foundations to remove material
which the Contractor allows to become unsuitable.
(12) Suitable materials from the excavations for structures shall be deposited in such manner as
not to cause damage to the railway, roads, services or property either within or outside the
Right-of-Way and so as to cause no impediment to the drainage of the Site or surrounding area.
If the excavated suitable materials not required by the Employer shall be removed and
disposed in accordance with Section 2.1: EARTHWORKS DEFINITIONS AND CLASSIFICATIONS,
Clause 2.1.1.3 Removal of Suitable Material.
The location of storage piles shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer who may require
that the survey centreline and the transverse or hub line of any part of the structure be kept
free of obstruction.
(13) Unsuitable materials from the excavations for structures, if not required by the Employer shall
be removed and disposed in accordance with Section 2.1: EARTHWORKS DEFINITIONS AND
2.4.3.3 Cofferdam and Caisson
(1) The term "cofferdam" denotes any temporary or removable structure, constructed to hold the
surrounding earth, water, or both, out of the excavation, whether such structure is constructed
of earth, timber, steel, concrete or any combination of these. The term includes earth dikes;
and timber cribs, sheet piling, removable steel shells and all bracing; and it shall be understood
to include excavation enclosed by pumping wells and well points.
The cost of cofferdams is always to be included as part of the related item of the works.
(2) The term "caisson" denotes a permanent part of the substructure so constructed as to sink
gradually into place as material is excavated within the area protected by its side walls.
(3) When no provision for caisson is shown in the drawings it shall be the intent of the Contract
that suitable cofferdams shall be provided for all excavations where cofferdams may be
necessary in order to control water or to preclude sliding and caving of the walls of the
excavation.
(4) The Contractor shall submit upon request drawings showing his proposed method of cofferdam
and caisson construction. Review and approval of the drawings by the Engineer will not in any
way relieve the Contract of the responsibility for the adequacy of the design for strength and
stability or for the safety of the people working therein.
(5) The interior dimensions of cofferdams shall be such as to give sufficient clearance for the
construction and removal of any required forms and the inspection of the interior and to permit
pumping outside the forms.
(6) If practicable cofferdams shall be so designed that no cross bracing shall be left in place. If this
is not practicable bracing left in place shall be of structural steel. The end of such structural
members that would be exposed when the structure is completed shall be boxed back at least
150 mm behind the concrete face. The resulting holes shall be completely filled with concrete.
(7) In general, sheet piling cofferdams shall extend well below the bottom of the footing and shall
be well braced and as water-tight as practicable.
(8) When foundation piles are to be driven inside a cofferdam and it is judged impracticable to
dewater the cofferdam before placing a concrete seal, the excavation may be extended below
the designed level to a depth sufficient to allow for swell of the material during pile driving
operations. Any material that rises to a level above the design level shall be removed.
(9) Where it is possible to dewater the cofferdam the foundation material shall be removed to
exact grade after the foundation piles are driven.
(10) Backfilling in a foundation to compensate for excavation which has been extended below the
required design level shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Backfilling shall be with
concrete or foundation fill material as indicated on the Drawings, or in the special provisions or
as directed by the Engineer. If no material is indicated, backfilling shall be concrete in
accordance with Sub-Clause 1.2 of PART II of this Section “Concrete for Foundation Fill”.
Unless otherwise permitted no excavation shall be made outside of caissons or cribs or
cofferdams or sheet piling and the natural stream bed adjacent to the structure shall not be
disturbed without permission from the Engineer. If any excavation or dredging is made at the
Site of the structure before caissons, cribs, or cofferdams are in place the Contractor shall, after
the foundation is in place, backfill all such excavation to the original ground surface or stream
bed with material approved by the Engineer.
Material deposited within the stream area from foundations or other excavations or from the
filling or cofferdams shall be removed and the stream area freed from obstruction.
(11) Caissons and cofferdams which tilt or move laterally during construction shall be corrected as
necessary at the expense of the Contractor.
(12) Unless otherwise provided cofferdams shall be removed after the completion of the sub--
structure. The removal shall be effected in such a manner as not to disturb or mar the finished
work. The Engineer may order the Contractor to leave any part or the whole of the cofferdam
in place.
(13) When conditions are encountered which, in the opinion of the Engineer, render it impracticable
to dewater the foundation before placing the footing, the Engineer may require the construction
of a concrete foundation or seal of such dimensions as he may consider necessary, and of such
thickness as to resist any possible uplift.
The concrete for such seal shall be placed as shown on the Drawings or required by the
Engineer. The foundation shall then be dewatered and the footing placed.
When weighted cribs are used and the weight is used to overcome partially the hydrostatic
pressure acting against the bottom of the foundation seal, special anchorages such as dowels
or keys shall be provided to transfer the entire weight of the crib to the foundation seal. When
a foundation seal is placed under water the cofferdam shall be vented at low water as directed.
Cofferdams shall be constructed so as to protect newly cast concrete from sudden rising of
the water and to prevent damage to the foundation by erosion.
2.4.3.4 Pumping and Bailing

(1) Pumping or bailing to dewater a sealed cofferdam shall not be started until at least 36 hours
after final set of sealing concrete.
(2) Pumping and bailing from the interior of any foundation enclosure shall be done in such a
manner as to preclude the possibility of the movement of water through or alongside any
concrete being placed. No pumping or bailing shall be permitted during the placing of concrete
or for a period of at least 24 hours thereafter unless it is done from a suitable sump separated
from the concrete work by a water tight wall.
(3) Excavations shall be as dry as possible prior to and during placing concrete. Placing concrete
under water will only be permitted if indicated on the Drawings or permitted by the Engineer.
2.4.3.5 Backfilling
(1) All spaces excavated under this specification and not occupied by the permanent structure
shall be backfilled. Backfilled material shall be free from large lumps, wood and other
extraneous material.
(2) Backfill not within the embankment area shall be placed in layers not more than 300 mm in
depth (loose measurement) and shall be compacted to a density comparable with the adjacent
undisturbed material.
(3) Backfill for culverts shall be placed in layers not exceeding 300 mm and shall be compacted
to at least 95% of the maximum dry density according to AASHTO T180.
(4) - NOT USE -
(5) All spaces which have been excavated and the volumes of which are not occupied by the
concrete structure shall be backfilled with materials in accordance with Section 2.4: STRUCTURE
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL, Sub-Clause (3) of 2.4.2.1 Materials and Sub-Clause (1) of 2.4.2.2
Properties herein approved by the Engineer.
(6) In placing backfill and embankment the material shall be placed insofar as possible to
approximately the same height on both sides of the structure. If conditions require backfilling
appreciably higher on one side, the additional material on the higher side shall not be placed
until permission is given by the Engineer nor until the Engineer is satisfied that the structure
has enough strength to withstand any pressure created.
(7) Backfill for embankment shall not be placed behind the walls of bridges or box culverts until
the top slab is placed for the required time and not less than three days.
(8) No backfilling shall be placed against any structure until permission shall have been given by
the Engineer. Jetting of fill or other hydraulic methods involving, or likely to involve, liquid or
semi-liquid pressure shall be prohibited.
(9) Special care shall be taken to prevent any unduly high pressures against the structures.
(10) The placing of embankment and the benching of slopes shall continue in such a manner that
at all times there shall be a horizontal berm of thoroughly compacted material for a distance
at least equal to the height of the abutment or wall to be backfilled.
(11) Adequate provision shall be made for drainage and to allow for porous backfill material to be
placed in accordance with Section 2.4: STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL, Sub-Clause
(3)(d) of 2.4.2.1 Materials and Sub-Clause (1) of 2.4.2.2 Properties herein.
2.4.3.6 Disposal of Material

All excavated material so far as suitable, shall be utilised as backfill or embankment. The waste
material, shall be disposed of as prescribed in Section 2.1: EARTHWORKS DEFINITIONS AND
2.5 EMBANKMENT
2.5.1 DESCRIPTION
2.5.1.1 General
The work involves the construction of a railway. The railway embankment is constructed mostly
along the existing railway embankment. Additional areas of railway embankment are required for
station loops and siding tracks.
2.5.2 PRODUCTS
2.5.2.1 Materials
(1) Sources of Materials
(a) Notwithstanding the indications given in the design or Contract Documents regarding the
existence of the sources of materials in the location of the alignment, the Contractor is
responsible for locating sources of materials, obtaining all permissions, permits, licenses
etc., required by the relevant Authorities, and ensuring the materials meet the
Specifications for embankment materials and have the approval of the Engineer. No
borrow pits shall be allowed in the SRT Right-of-Way.
(b) The Contractor shall also carry out an adequate number of borings (at least 1 boring
and/or 1 test pit every 20,000 cu.m) for each source area.
(c) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval the program of quarry
exploitation and possible subsequent processes of materials in order to comply with the
Technical Specifications.
(d) All vegetation, roots, organic materials, rubbish and contaminants shall be removed before
initial exploitation of source materials and/or use of excavated material from cut work for
the embankments.
(e) The same safety and health conditions shall be respected in any stock piling and/or
processing areas which the Contractor may make use of, always at his own expense.
(f) For the approval of material sources, the samples shall be collected and tested by the
laboratories of government university. The at least one test for every 20,000 cu.m
of material source shall be carried out to ascertain the characteristics and suitability
of the materials which in the following lists:
(i) Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates by AASHTO T27
(ii) Allterberg’s Limits Test by ASTM D4943, ASTM D4318
(iii) Standard Compaction Test by AASHTO T99
(iv) California Bearing Ratio (CBR) Test by AASHTO T193
(g) Sampling shall be carried out to provide evidence for the Engineer who will specify the
test laboratories to be used by the Contractor at his own expense.
(h) For embankment materials which partical size or compaction criteria does not meet the
requirement of certain part, should adopt crushing, sieving or order to improve grain size
gradation, particle size and other methods to make physical improvement or chemical
improvement, in order to improve grain size gradation and engineering properties.
(i) Improved soil design shall use mature and reliable technology. The improved soil’s
admixture can be made of inorganic materials such as cement, lime, fly ash, sand, gravel,
macadam, etc. Among them, fly ash shall not be used alone as an admixture for soil
improvement; if other types of admixtures are used, it shall be tested to confirm its
suitability.
When the admixture is cement, it should use ordinary Portland cement or slag Portland
cement, The strength of unconfined compression test of 7-day sample not less than 200
kPa, the raw soil material improved by cement should have a plasticity index of less than
12%, organic matter content not more than 2%, sulphate content not more than 0.25%.
The mixing ratios can be used of cement 3% to 5% by weight.
When the admixture is lime, it should use the first-grade building calcium quicklime
powder or qualified building calcium quicklime. The CaO+MgO content of the lime shall
not less than 80%; the content of CO2 shall not more than 9%. The strength of unconfined
compression test of 7-day sample not less than 200 kPa, the raw soil material improved
by cement should have a plasticity index of less than 12%, organic matter content not
more than 5%, sulphate content not more than 0.8%. The mixing ratios can be used of
lime 4% to 8% by weight.
When the admixture is fly ash, it should use the fly ash which has a content of SiO2 +
Al2O3 + Fe3O4 of not less than 70%. The strength of unconfined compression test of 7-day
sample not less than 200 kPa. The mixing ratios can be used of cement : fly ash 3% : 12%
to 6% : 24% by weight. The mixing ratios can be used of Lime : fly ash 4% : 12% to 8% :
24% by weight.
(j) If, the sampling of material test results not being conformed with specifications, the
material shall be rejected and removed from the construction site within 8 days, and the
material source shall be retested, as the Section 2.5 : EMBANKMENT, Sub-Clause (1)(f) of
2.5.2.1 Materials, prior to use for the construction.
(2) Source of Materials Approvals
Prior to commencing construction of the embankment, the Contractor shall submit the test
results of embankment materials to the Engineer for approval.
(a) The permission of the relevant Authorities to approve the sources of the materials.
(b) A map of the sources of the materials, scale 1:1,000 - 1:5,000 indicating the locations
where the tests were performed
(c) A complete report on the laboratory tests carried out on material.
(d) The program of materials exploitation and subsequent processes.
2.5.2.2 Properties
(1) Railway Embankment
(a) Fill materials for railway embankment shall have properties as follows:
- Soil group QS1 or better by UIC 719R soil classifications,
- CBR value not less than 3.0%, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 193 at
95% of the maximum dry density tested in accordance with AASHTO T 99,
- Liquid Limit not more than 40% and Plasticity Index not more than 10%
- At least one sampling on the construction site and testing, as directed by the
Engineer, shall be performed every 1,000 cubic meters.
(b) Prepare Subgrade for railway embankment shall have properties as follows:
- Soil group QS1(3) or better by UIC 719R soil classifications,
- CBR value not less than 10.0%, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 193 at
95% of the maximum dry density tested in accordance with AASHTO T 180,
- Liquid Limit not more than 40% and Plasticity Index not more than 10%
- The portion of passing No.200 sieve shall be not more than 40%,
Engineer, shall be performed every 1,000 cubic meters.
(c) Sand Drain shall have properties as follows:
- Mono granular and free from all impurities which could affect its permeability.
- The maximum grain size shall not larger than 19mm.
- The fraction passing the No.200 sieve shall be not greater than 5% of total sample
weight.
- Non-plasticity, test by ASTM D4943, ASTM D4318
- The grain size shall conform to the following formula:
4 * d15  D15  7*d 85
where: dn =
the particle size of the material, beneath Sand Drain layer,
defined on the grading curve of 15% and 85% of passing by
weight respectively;
D15 = the particle size of filter sand defined on the grading curve of
15% of passing weight.
Engineer, shall be performed every 300 cubic meters.
(d) Soil classification and identification of the soil groups shall be in accordance with UIC
719 R Figure 5 Soil Quality Classes as shown below:
Table 2.5-1 IC 719 R Table of Soil Quality Classes

Soil Type Soil Quality
(Geotechnical Classification) Class
0.1 Organic soils QS0
0.2 Soft soils containing more than 15 % fines #200 (see note 1), with a high moisture
content (high plasticity, LL > 50%): therefore unsuitable for compaction.
0.3 Thixotropic soils (e.g. quick-clay)
0.4 Soils containing soluble material (e.g. rock salt or gypsum)
0.5 Contaminated ground (e.g. industrial waste)
0.6 Mixed material/organic soils .
1.1 Soils containing more than 40 % of fines #200 (see note 1), (except for QS1
soils classified under 0.2)
1.2 Rocks which are very susceptible to weathering e.g.
- Chalk with dry density < 1. 7 t/m3 (AASHTO T99) and high friability
- Marl
- Weathered shale
1. 3 Soils containing 15 to 40 % of fines #200 ( see note 1) (except for soils classified QS1(3)
under 0.2)
1.4 Rocks which are moderately susceptible to weathering e.g
- Chalk with dry density < 1. 7 t/m3 (AASHTO T99) and low friability
- Unweathere shale
1.5 Soft rock e.g.
- Wearing Abrasion > 40% (AASHTO T96)
2.1 Soils containing from 5 to 15 % of fines #200 (see note 1) QS2(2)
2.2 Uniform soil containing less than 5 % of fines #200 (see note 1)(Cu ≤ 6)
2.3 Moderately hard rock, 30% < Wearing Abrasion≤ 40% (AASHTO T96)
3.1 Well graded soils containing less than 5 % of fines #200 (1) QS3
3.2 Hard rock, Wearing Abrasion< 30% (AASHTO T96)
Note: (1) These percentages are calculated from particle size distribution analysis undertaken on material
passing a 60 mm sieve. The percentages indicated here have been rounded down.
(2) Certain railways sometimes include these soils in quality class QS1.
(3) These soils can come under class QS2 if the hydro geological and hydrological conditions are good
by required drain system e.g. side ditch, crown drain, drainage system between adjacent track.
(4) These soils can come under quality class QS3 if the hydro geological and hydrological conditions
are good by required drain system e.g. side ditch, crown drain, drainage system between adjacent
track.
(5) Suitable materials shall be Groups QS1, QS2 and QS3 of UIC 719 R Table of Soil Quality Classes
shall be used.
(2) Roadway Embankment
(a) Earth or any materials shall free of topsoil and vegetation obtained from sources approved
by the Engineer. Lumps, by adhering or cementing, greater than 50 mm in size shall be
removed or broken and remixed to uniform distribution. In case that the property is not
specified otherwise, the material for earth embankment shall have the following
properties:
(b) Fill materials for roadway embankment shall have a CBR value not less than 3.0% and
Swelling shall be not greater than 4%, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 193 at
95% of the maximum dry density tested in accordance with AASHTO T 99. The roadway
embankment shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density tested in
accordance with AASHTO T 99.
At least one sampling on the construction site and testing, as directed by the Engineer,
shall be performed every 1,000 cubic meters.
(b) Selected Material for roadway embankment shall have a CBR value not less than 10% and
Swelling shall be not greater than 3% , when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 193 at
95% of the maximum dry density tested in accordance with AASHTO T 180 and shall have
a minimum thickness not less than 150 mm and shall be compacted to 95% of the
maximum dry density tested in accordance with AASHTO T 180.
At least one sampling on the construction site and testing, as directed by the Engineer,
shall be performed every 300 cubic meters.
2.5.3 EXECUTION
2.5.3.1 Preparation
(1) Ground Surface for Embankments
(a) The Contractor shall ensure that the foundation ground surface of the embankment is as
level as possible, with no deep depressions in order to avoid the possibility of rainwater
collecting there.
(b) Where existing embankments are to be included in a new embankment, the top and
slopes of the existing embankments shall be stripped of all vegetation and roots and all
materials shall be removed to a grade line and cross section 300 mm below the proposed
Subgrade elevations. Benching with horizontal and vertical faces shall be cut in the existing
slopes to a depth corresponding to the thickness of layers to be compacted.
(c) Embankments in swamps or water shall be constructed after draining the water, if directed
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, when ordered by the Engineer, excavate or displace
swamp ground and backfill with suitable material (AASHTO Soil Group A3 or similar as
directed by the Engineer). Embankment in water shall be in accordance with the same
provisions as for backfill unless otherwise directed.
(d) The Engineer will inspect and check the foundation before giving his approval and may
order further excavation at this time in order to remove any cohesive, soft or peaty
materials and to be replaced by suitable materials.
(e) When extra excavation not authorised by the Engineer is required because of
topographical errors, the need to remove materials which have been weakened through
negligence, the Contractor shall not be paid for the extra work involved or for the larger
quantity of embankment material required as a consequence.
2.5.3.2 Construction
(1) Placing of Embankment Material
(a) The material shall be placed systematically in layers of the same thickness using
methods and equipment which guarantee that there is no separation, abrupt variations
in the granulometry and water content.
(b) During the placing, quick drainage of water shall be guaranteed, shaping the embankment
with a transverse slope of not less than 2%. The slope will be perpendicular to the
retaining wall surfaces.
(c) Embankments shall be placed firstly at approaches to elevated bridges, structures and at
box and pipe culvert sites, and at low lying sections.
(d) Where the existing ground is generally too soft to support heavy construction equipment,
the Contractor may be permitted to place a 600 mm thick sand working platform rising to
800 mm at the centerline on the expenses of the Contractor. Only the use of track
mounted equipment will be permitted for spreading and compaction of the initial working
layer.
(e) Construction below water table: Where embankment is to be constructed from below the
water table level, rock or granular material fill shall be deposited in successive layers of a
thickness determined by the size of fill materials and depth of water, to be height of 0.3
m above the highest water level. Each layer shall be constructed starting at one end of
the embankment under construction and placing the fill material by means of a bulldozer
in such a manner that the larger rock shall be placed on geofabric which has been land
out and pegged in position, and the spaces between the layer stones filled with finer
material to form a dense interlocking and stable layer. The maximum size of rock shall be
250 mm. The fill materials shall be blinded with a layer of 40 mm graded aggregate
sufficient to fill all voids in the upper layer of the embankment. Fill materials shall be
compacted by heavy vibratory rollers until there is no visible movement of the
embankment under the equipment.
(f) Tests shall be carried out on each layer to certify that the layer fully complies with the
design criteria. Subsequent layers shall not be placed until tests have been completed.
The Engineer has the right to order removal if this conditions is not complied with.
(g) The thickness of each layer after compaction shall be not greater than 150 mm and
established on the basis of the characteristics of the material, the method of compaction
and the type of embankment, and be subject to the Engineer’s approval.
(h) The embankment construction schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval
(i) For embankments which have flexible retaining walls (such as sheet piling) placing shall
be done parallel to the exterior surface of the wall.
(j) The speed of construction shall ensure that buildup of pore pressures in the underlying
ground or in the new embankment is not allowed to cause instability of the works.
(2) Compaction
(a) Compaction can be carried out only after tests have shown that the soil water content is
approximately equal to the optimal value defined by the AASHTO T 99 (± 2%).
(b) If the water content is higher than this, the material shall be dried by aeration.
(c) If it is lower than this, the soil shall be damped down, using a method which guarantees
uniform distribution throughout the thickness of the layer.
(d) The type, characteristics and number of compaction equipment and the details of the
method of performing the work (number of roller passes, operating speed, frequency)
shall be approved by the Engineer. In the initial phases of the work, the Contractor shall
adapt his operating methods in accordance with the types of soil to be used and the
equipment available.
(e) Compaction shall be carried out in such a way as to provide a uniform product in terms
of density. Rollers shall be operated systematically in parallel directions guaranteeing that,
at each pass, 10% of the width of the roller is superimposed on the previous pass. To
guarantee uniform compaction along the edges of the embankment, the slopes will be
reshaped after the work, taking off any material outside the specified shape.
(f) Compaction inside flexible retaining walls and/or retaining structures shall guarantee the
same compaction quality, avoiding damage to existing structures.
(g) A distance of 1.5m from flexible walls shall be maintained when big tamping rollers are
operated. Light compacting equipment such as tamping plates and hand operated rollers
shall be used directly behind the walls, guaranteeing the density required.
(h) In the case of sections of the embankment not put to work because of the presence of
culverts, channels etc., continuity with the working sections shall be guaranteed, using
identical materials and levels of compaction.
(i) Behind structural walls, the Engineer can order cement to be mixed with fill material (up
to between 25 and 50kg of cement for each cubic metre of fill). This soil-cement mixture
shall be light compacted to the suitable density with the instruction in writing by the
Engineer.
(j) During the construction of the embankments, special maintenance squads and equipment
shall be permanently on hand to repair any damage caused by working site traffic and
damage caused by rain.
(k) The slopes of the embankment shall be immediately and systematically protected by
placing a layer of top soil so that grass can take root immediately and spread.
(l) If any type of erosion occurs, the Contractor shall restore the eroded areas at his own
expense in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer.
(m) Quality control during the constructions
- The embankment shall be constructed in each layers which the thickness of each
layer after compaction be not greater than 150mm
- If, during the construction, there are problems related to density of the layer not
being conformed with the specifications, the Engineer can reject the construction
of embankment material with the layer.
(3) Climatic Conditions
(a) The climate in the working area is characterised by a dry season and a rainy season.
Normally the operations of excavation, filling and construction of the embankment will
be carried out during the dry season.
(b) As a general rule, construction of the embankment under persistent rain shall not be
permitted unless the Engineer gives special permission and this permission shall be limited
to materials which are not affected by rain (for example, gravel).
(c) In the case of embankment constructed from soil with a high cohesive fraction content,
pneumatic tamping equipment shall be on hand so that the layer surface can be closed
during working in the case of rainfall.
(d) When work restarts, the surface shall be suitably scarified and the softened surface layer
shall be removed.
(4) Tests
(a) Each layer shall be tested and proved to have the required compaction quality before
proceeding with the placing of the next layer.
(b) The laboratory staff shall have proven experience and reliability. The number of laboratory
technicians and the equipment effectively available shall be such that tests on-site and
in the laboratory can be carried out at the times and with the continuity and frequency
requested.
(c) The laboratory staff shall have proven experience and reliability. The number of laboratory
technicians and the equipment effectively available shall be such that tests on-site and
in the laboratory can be carried out at the times and with the continuity and frequency
required by the Contract.
(d) Laboratory tests shall be carried out in a place of a suitable size, provided with the
appropriate equipment, located at the site offices of the Contractor or at a location, which
is easily accessible for the Engineer.
(e) Before commencing construction, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval,
a list of the staff, test equipment and equipment calibration sheets. During construction,
the test results shall be promptly recorded and submitted to the Engineer on appropriate
forms.
(f) The following control tests shall be carried out during construction.
(i) Before construction of embankment, the existing ground shall be test the plate
bearing test as be conformed to ASTM D1194 every 500 m interval on the middle
of alignment of existing ground.
(ii) Test on the embankment materials and on the level of compaction achieved,
obtained by means of the following procedures.
In-place density by AASHTO T191 (or equivalent): Field density shall be tested at
least every 1,000 square meter of each layer.
 95% of the maximum dry density tested by AASHTO T99 for the Fill Material
layer for railway or roadway.
 95% of the maximum dry density tested by AASHTO T180 for the Prepared
Subgrade layer for railway or the Selected Material layer for roadway.
(iii) Settlement control
In the case of soft ground, At regular intervals the embankment section and existing
track will be precision measured in order to check the movement behavior and any
soil swelling near the embankment.
(5) Sand Drain Layer
(a) The function performed by the Sand Drain layer is to permit the water to drain away from
the embankment area. The draining layer is obtained by using mono granular sand taken
from quarries indicated by the Engineer or accepted by him and spread in a layer, by the
thickness indicated on the Drawing, on the top of the finish Subgrade or the Prepared
Subgrade and compacted to 90% of the maximum dry density determine in accordance
with AASHTO T99. In-place density by AASHTO T191 (or equivalent): Field density shall be
tested at least every 1,000 square meter of each layer.
(6) Embankment at Box and Pipe Culvert

(a) Near box and pipe culverts, embankments will be shaped in the longitudinal direction
with a slope of 3/2 on either side of the location of the box culvert. After construction of
the box culvert this area shall be backfilled with coarse material (AASHTO Soil Group A1).
This procedure allows the area around the culvert to be consolidated properly.
(b) Single pipe culverts of 1.0m diameter or less, may be incorporated directly into the
embankment as it is constructed provided that bedding, haunching and side filling around
the culvert are carefully placed and compacted by hand. The culvert must be covered
by at least 300mm of compacted fill before mechanised placing and compaction can be
resumed. The Contractor must propose a methodology for the approval of the Engineer
prior to commencing this type of work.
(c) In areas where the embankment is supported on pile and slab, the culvers may be
constructed directly above the bearing slab, which may have to be lowered locally to
achieve the required invert levels. Bedding, haunching and side filling around the culvert
are carefully placed and compacted by hand. The culvert must be covered by at least
300mm of compacted fill before mechanised placing and compaction can be resumed.
The Contractor must propose a methodology for the approval of the Engineer prior to
commencing this type of work.
(d) In PVD sections it will be necessary to allow the embankment to settle to an agreed level
prior to construction of the permanent culverts. During this period, temporary pipe culverts
may be installed to permit water to flow. These temporary pipe culverts will remain the
property of the Contractor and should be removed from site on completion of this part
of the works.
(e) Following completion of settlement, the embankment at the locations of culverts will be
carefully excavated, and any temporary pipe culverts shall be removed. The ends of the
embankment at each side of the culvert location shall then be battered back to give
sufficient space to construct the culvert, wing walls, and any approach slabs.
(f) On completion of the culvert construction and following final inspection and acceptance
by the Engineer, the Contractor will be allowed to restore the embankment by backfilling
with coarse material belonging to AASHTO Soil Group A1.
(g) The above works, including supply, installation and subsequent removal of temporary
pipe culverts, will be assumed to be included in the price for embankment filling.
(7) Revetments and Slope Protections
(a) When indicated, the slopes of embankments and cuttings will be protected with random
rubble paving in accordance with the drawings.
(b) Where shown on the drawings and where directed by the Engineer the faces of slopes
beneath bridges will be protected with plain concrete lining or reinforced concrete lining
or random rubble paving. The paving will consist of selected hard stone as approved by
the Engineer.
(c) The stone will be not less than 100mm thick and will comply with the drawing. The stones
will be laid on a 100mm thick bed of concrete Class 0.
(d) All joints will be flushed up with 1:3 cement sand mortar.
(e) Canals and rivers running under rail bridges will be dredged and/or provided with proper
revetments as directed by the Engineer.
(8) Embankments in Areas with Good Soil Bearing Capacity

(a) The materials used for embankments shall comply with the acceptability standards given
in previous cases.
(b) Where rock materials are to be used as fill, the maximum grading to be used in the
horizontal layers shall be less than 300mm and the rock shall be chemically stable.
(c) Each layer shall consist of reasonably graded rock and all surface voids shall be filled with
broken fragments before the next layer is placed. The top surface and side slopes of
embankments formed in this way shall be thoroughly blended with approved fine-grained
material to seal the surface.
2.6 SUBBASE AND SUBBALLAST

2.6.1 DESCRIPTION
2.6.1.1 Scope
This Section specifies the furnishing, placing and compacting Subbase layer for railway or roadway,
hard standings and other paved areas, and of Subballast for railway, station loops and sidings of the
railway.
2.6.1.2 Tolerances
(1) Railway Formation Areas
The finished Subballast or Subbase surface shall at no point deviate more than 15 mm from
the designed surface level and the design shape and drainage falls shall be constructed
correctly.
(2) Roads, Hard Standings, etc.
The finished Subbase surface shall at no point deviate more than 15 mm from the designed
surface level and the design shape and drainage falls shall be constructed correctly.
2.6.2 PRODUCTS
2.6.2.1 Materials
(1) General
"Suitable Materials" for Subballast or Subbase of railway shall conform to the requirements of
this Section 2.6 : SUBBASE AND SUBBALLAST, Clause 2.6.2.2 Properties.
(2) Particle Size Distribution Curves
Shall show a well graded material with a distribution curve approximately parallel to the curves
for the grading limits. Materials not showing a graded particle size distribution curve shall not
be accepted.
(3) For Subbase or Subballast materials which partical size or compaction criteria does not meet
the requirement of certain part, should adopt crushing, sieving or order to improve grain size
gradation, particle size and other methods to make physical improvement or chemical
improvement, in order to improve grain size gradation and engineering properties.
(4) Improved soil design shall use mature and reliable technology. The improved soil’s admixture
can be made of inorganic materials such as cement, lime, fly ash, sand, gravel, macadam, etc.
Among them, fly ash shall not be used alone as an admixture for soil improvement; if other
types of admixtures are used, it shall be tested to confirm its suitability.
When the admixture is cement, it should use ordinary Portland cement or slag Portland cement,
The strength of unconfined compression test of 7-day sample not less than 300 kPa, the raw
soil material improved by cement should have a plasticity index of less than 12%, organic
matter content not more than 2%, sulphate content not more than 0.25%. The mixing ratios
can be used of cement 3% to 5% by weight.
When the admixture is lime, it should use the first-grade building calcium quicklime powder or
qualified building calcium quicklime. The CaO+MgO content of the lime shall not less than
80%; the content of CO2 shall not more than 9%. The strength of unconfined compression test
of 7-day sample not less than 300 kPa, the raw soil material improved by cement should have
a plasticity index of less than 12%, organic matter content not more than 5%, sulphate content
not more than 0.8%. The mixing ratios can be used of lime 4% to 8% by weight.
When the admixture is fly ash, it should use the fly ash which has a content of SiO2 + Al2O3 +
Fe3O4 of not less than 70%. The strength of unconfined compression test of 7-day sample not
less than 300 kPa. The mixing ratios can be used of cement : fly ash 3% : 12% to 6% : 24% by
weight. The mixing ratios can be used of Lime : fly ash 5% : 15% to 8% : 24% by weight.
2.6.2.2 Properties
(1) Type I Materials for Subballast shall have the properties as described below
(a) Materials for Subballast shall be crushed rock aggregate conform to the requirements in
accordance with Section 3.1: AGGREGATE BASE COURSE.
The general characteristics required of the Subballast are:
(i) the bearing strength CBR value not less than 80% test in accordance with AASHTO
T191 (or equivalent) with compaction 95% of AASHTO T180
(ii) the grading of the Subballast shall approximate to the following rules:
D15 (Subballast) ≤ 5 D85 (Subbase)
D50 (Subballast) ≤ 25 D50 (Subbase)
Additionally, where drainage of water from the sub-grade is anticipated:
D15 (Subballast) > 4 D15 (Subbase)
(where Dn is the particle size for which a percent by weight is finer)
(b) Grading
The grading shall conform to grading envelopes A or B in Table 2.6-1. The fraction passing
the No. 200 sieve shall be not greater than two thirds of the fraction passing the No.40
sieve.
(c) Plasticity
The portion passing the No.40 sieve shall, if it is plastic, have a liquid limit not greater than
25% and a plasticity index not greater than 6%
(d) Percentage of Wear
The coarse part of the material sampled and tested in accordance with AASHTO test
method T96 shall have a percentage of wear not greater than 40%.
(e) Sampling
At least one sampling on the construction site and testing as direct by the Engineer, shall
be performed every 500 cubic meters.
(2) Type II Materials for Subbase

(a) Materials for Subbase shall consist of soil aggregate, which comply with the requirements
given below. All materials shall be free of topsoil and all other organic matter. The
materials shall consist of sound durable particles, which do not breakdown under
compaction or repeated wetting/drying cycles.
The general characteristics required of the Subbase are:
(i) the bearing strength CBR value not less than 25% test in accordance with AASHTO
T191 (or equivalent) with compaction 95% of AASHTO T180
(b) Grading
The grading for Subbase of railway or roadway shall conform to grading envelopes A, B, C
or D in Table 2.6-1. The fraction passing the No. 200 sieve shall be not greater than two
thirds of the fraction passing the No.40 sieve.
(c) Plasticity
The portion passing the No.40 sieve shall, if it is plastic, have a liquid limit not greater than
35% and a plasticity index not greater than 11%.
(d) Percentage of Wear
The coarse part of the material sampled and tested in accordance with AASHTO T96 shall
have a percentage of wear not greater than 60%.
(f) Sampling
At least one sampling on the construction site and testing as direct by the Engineer, shall
be performed every 500 cubic meters.
Table 2.6-1 : Particle size distribution for Subballast or Subbase Materials
Sieve Percentage by weight passing square mesh sieve
Designation Grading A Grading B Grading C Grading D
2 inch 100 100 - -
1 inch - 75-95 100 100
3/8 inch 30-65 40-75 50-85 60-100
No.10 15-40 20-45 25-50 40-70
No.40 8-20 15-30 15-30 25-45
No.200 2-8 5-20 5-15 5-20
2.6.3 EXECUTION
2.6.3.1 General
(1) Work shall be performed in accordance with these Specifications, lines, levels, grade,
dimensions and cross-sections show on the Drawings and as required by the Engineer.
(2) The Subballast and Subbase shall extend to the side slopes and shall, after compaction and
completion, be of the thickness shown on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer with
due allowances being made for the construction of shoulders as shown on the Drawings and
as directed by the Engineer.
(3) The Subballast shall be placed onto the compacted and shaped Subbase immediately before
the placing of the ballast and track.
2.6.3.2 Preparation
(1) Before construction of Subballast or of Subbase is commenced, the earthwork, including
topsoil, grassing and side ditches and drains for the section or area concerned shall be
completed to correct line and level in order to protect already completed embankment works
against erosion.
(2) The Subgrade shall be shaped and compacted in conformity with the provisions of Section 2.5:
EMBANKMENT. Notwithstanding any earlier approval of Subgrade, any damage to or
deterioration of Subgrade shall be made good before Subballast or Subbase is laid.
2.6.3.3 Spreading
Subballast or Subbase shall be spread in layers, with uncompacted thickness not exceeding 150 mm
subject to the approval of the Engineer, and the layers shall be as nearly equal in thickness as possible.
Care shall be taken to prevent segregation of the material into fine and coarse parts.
2.6.3.4 Compacting
(1) Immediately after each layer has been spread and shaped satisfactorily, each layer shall be
thoroughly compacted with suitable and adequate compaction equipment approved by the
Engineer. Rolling operations shall begin from the outer edge of trackbed or roadway toward
the centre, gradually in a longitudinal direction; except on super elevated curves, while rolling
shall begin at the low side and progress toward the high side.
(2) During construction of Subballast or Subbase, the Contractor shall take all necessary
precautions to ensure that the layers are efficiently drained.
(3) The Subballast or Subbase shall be compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density as
determined by AASHTO T180. The in-place dry density shall be tested in accordance with
AASHTO T191 (or equivalent), Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
(4) Material which does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted, shall have water added
to produce the required moisture content so that proper compaction can be achieved.
(5) Material containing excess moisture shall be dried prior to or during compaction to the required
moisture content so that proper compaction can be achieved. Drying of wet material shall be
performed by methods approved by the Engineer, at the expense of the Contractor.
(6) The thickness of each layer after compaction shall be not greater than 150 mm and established
on the basis of the characteristics of the material.
(7) The following control tests shall be carried out during construction.
Test on the Subballast layer for railway and Subbase layer for railway or roadway materials
and on the level of compaction achieved, obtained by means of the following procedures.
In-place density by AASHTO T191 (or equivalent): Field density shall be tested at least every
1,000 square meter of each layer.
 95% of the maximum dry density tested by AASHTO T180 for the Subballast layer for
railway and Subbase layer for railway or roadway.
2.6.3.5 Repair of Defects
(1) Non complying material shall not be used in the Works and shall be removed from the site.
(2) The completed thickness of Subballast or Subbase which is out of the tolerance as mentioned
this Section 2.6: SUBBASE AND SUBBALLAST, Clause 2.6.1.2 Tolerance shall be re-worked to meet
the tolerance by the method approved by the Engineer at the Contractor’s expenses.
(3) Not Used
2.7 TOPSOIL AND GRASSING

2.7.1 DESCRIPTION
2.7.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the furnishing and spreading topsoil, and placing grass.
2.7.2 PRODUCTS
2.7.2.1 Materials
(1) Topsoil
(a) Shall consist of a natural fibre surface soil without admixture of any undesirable soil, refuse
of foreign materials.
(b) It shall be reasonably free from roots, hard clay, coarse gravel, stones larger than 50 mm
in any dimension, noxious weeds, tall grass brush, sticks, stubble or other litter, and shall
have indicated by a healthy growth of crops, grasses, trees or other vegetation that it is
free draining and non-toxic.
(2) Grass
(a) Grass shall be of species native to Thailand, harmless and inoffensive to people and
animals and not of a kind recognised as a nuisance to agriculture.
(b) It shall be free of disease and noxious weeds, deep rooted and sufficiently rapid growing
and spreading to give complete cover over the planted area within one year of planting.
(c) The term "grass" embraces turf, sprigs, seeds and, if the Engineer permits, may include
plants of other types capable of giving effective protection.
(d) Sprigs shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be live, fresh and uninjured at the time
of planting.
2.7.3 EXECUTION
2.7.3.1 Topsoil
(1) The topsoil shall be evenly spread on the designated areas to a depth which after settlement
and compaction, shall be that shown on the Drawings. Spreading shall not be done when the
ground or topsoil is excessively wet or otherwise in a condition detrimental to the work. The
railway or roadway surfaces shall be kept clean during hauling and spreading operations.
(2) After spreading has been completed, large clods, stones larger than 50 mm in any dimension,
roots, stumps and other litter shall be raked up and removed and the topsoil lightly rolled to
the required thickness.
2.7.3.2 Grass
(1) General
(a) Earthwork slopes shall be trimmed and cultivated as soon as possible after each cutting
or embankment has been completed.
(b) Grass shall be planted at such a time and the work shall be done in such a way that at
the time of the final construction inspection all areas to be grassed are substantially
covered with healthy, well established, firmly footed grass and the planted area is free
from erosion channels.
(c) Fertiliser shall be applied to ensure sufficient ground cover in time to withstand erosion.
(2) Grass Seeds
Seeds shall be planted by a method that ensures reasonably uniform coverage and that the
seeds will germinate and sprout roots without being washed out.
(3) Grass Sprigs
Sprigs shall be planted as soon as possible after being dug and shall be kept moistened and
shaded during the time between digging and planting. They shall be planted only when the
soil is moist and in proper condition to induce growth. They shall be set in rows not more than
100 mm apart and with sprigs set not more than 100 mm apart. Roots shall be well buried in
firm material.
(4) Turf
(a) The prepared areas shall be spotted with turf set at 500 mm centres. The turf in alternate
lines shall be staggered by 250 mm to give a diamond pattern. Alternatively where
indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer the prepared areas shall be close
turf laid to a well boned pattern with no gaps between and lightly beaten.
(b) All turf used for cultivation shall be not less than 250 mm square and shall be obtained
from an approved source outside the Site and shall be formed of dense, well established
grass free from weeds or other plant growth. The thickness of the turf root mat shall be
not less than 50 mm.
(c) On slopes exceeding 1 on 4 each turf shall be secured with a wooden peg 150 mm long
driven into the prepared topsoil bed flush with the top of the turf.
2.7.3.3 Maintenance
(1) The Contractor shall be responsible until the end of the Defects Liability Period for the
establishment of the turf growth in the cultivated areas and for the replacement of topsoil
eroded from the prepared areas. In periods of dry weather he shall water the cultivated areas
as necessary to sustain growth. The Contractor shall as and when instructed by the Engineer
during the construction of the works or during the Defects Liability Period re-cultivate at his
own expense any areas:-
(a) in which the turf has died;
(b) in which, in the opinion of the Engineer, the turf has not established sound growth within
four months of being laid;
(c) which have become eroded of turf or topsoil.
(2) During the period of the Works and the Defects Liability Period the Contractor shall keep all
cultivated areas mown or cut to the satisfaction of the Engine
2.8 CUT SLOPE PROTECTIONS

2.8.1 SHOTCRETE
2.8.1.1 General
The Engineer shall approve the materials, equipment, methods and procedures used by the
Contractor for installing shotcrete.
In general, the practices set out in ACI-506 and ACI-506.2 shall be followed. These practices may be
modified, as directed or approved by the Engineer, to suit actual conditions
The Contractor is free to use either dry mix or wet mix shotcrete
2.8.1.2 Materials
Cement shall be low alkali Portland cement meeting the requirement of ASTM C150, Type 1, Type 2,
Type 3 or other standards approved by the Engineer.
For aggregates, relevant parts of the specification relating to concrete shall apply.
Aggregates for shotcrete shall have gradation within the range indicated in Table 2.8-1 for the
combined coarse and fine mixture.
The gradation and maximum size of aggregates may be varied, subject to the approval of the Engineer,
in sections of greater or lesser thickness than those normally occurring.
When early setting is required, an accelerating admixture conforming to the requirements set out in
the specification relating to concrete shall be used to develop quick setting and high early strength.
The suitability and the required amounts of the admixture shall be established in pre-construction
tests. Admixtures shall not contain water-soluble chlorides or substances corrosive to steel.
Furthermore, admixtures shall not promote other detrimental effects, such as cracking and spilling of
applied shotcrete. The proportion of admixture shall normally be restricted so that the strength
requirements specified in Clause 2.8.1.6 Control of Applied Shotcrete are satisfied. However, a higher
proportion of admixtures may be accepted where rapid treatment of weak rock is needed
Water shall conform to the requirements set out in the specification relating to concrete.
Table 2.8-1 Allowable percent passing of each aggregates size.
Sieve size Percent passing
US Sieve Standard (by weight)
3/4 inch 100
1/2 inch 70 to 100
3/8 inch 65 to 90
No. 4 50 to 70
No. 8 35 to 55
No. 16 20 to 40
No. 30 10 to 30
No. 50 5 to 18
No. 100 2 to 10
No. 200 1 to 6
2.8.1.3 Reinforcement
1) Steel reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall be conformed to the SECTION 4.2 REINFORCEMENT which is equally
binding on all trades. This section of this specification shall be read in conjunction with all
other sections. Steel reinforcement shall consist of hot rolled, deformed bars meeting the
requirements of ASTM A615, Grade 40.
2) Welded wire fabric
Welded wire fabric shall comprise hard-drawn wire in accordance with AASHTO Standards. It
shall be firmly fixed in place using an agreed method. Overlap between adjacent sheets of
welded wire fabric shall be a minimum of 2 squares. Welded steel wire fabric shall meet the
requirements of ASTM-A 1064.
3) Fiber reinforcement
Fiber reinforcement shall be obtained from a supplier meeting the requirements of BS EN,
ISO 9001 or similar.
Steel fibers can be either deformed steel fiber in accordance with BS EN 14889-1 Fibers for
Concrete – Part 1: Steel Fibers – Definitions, Specifications and Conformity or mild steel or
cold-drawn steel. Fibers in accordance with ASTM A820 may be used with the approval of
the Engineer.
Structural, macro-synthetic fibers shall be in accordance with BS EN 14889-2 Fibres for
Concrete -Part 2: Polymer Fibres – Definition, Specifications and Conformity. Only Class II fibers
shall be used where fibers are incorporated for structural purposes. Alternative fibers may be
utilised following successful completion of proving trials which meet the Designer's
performance requirements.
Fibers shall be stored, handled and dosed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Generally this will require them to be stored in dry, sealed containers until
ready for use and shall be free from corrosion, oil, grease, chlorides, and deleterious materials
which may reduce the efficiency of mixing or spraying processes, or which may reduce bond
between the fibers and the sprayed concrete.
Steel fibers to be used for reinforcement of shotcrete shall be in accordance with ASTM-
C1116 Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and ACI-544 Measurement of
Properties of Fiber Reinforced Concrete and ASTM-C1550. Length-thickness ratio for the fibers
of 65±1 is preferable, but fibers with other ratios may be used if approved by the Engineer.
The steel fiber content in the shotcrete shall normally be 30 kg/m3. The fibers shall be added
to the mix at the concrete station and be well mixed into the shotcrete.
Before applying steel fiber as reinforcement of shotcrete, testing on shotcrete mixed with
steel fiber in appropriate contents shall be conducted by certified laboratory. Test method
shall conform to ASTM 820 or ASTM 1116 or equivalent standard by engineer approval.
Flexural toughness test according to ASTM C1550 shall exceed 320J after 7 days and 400J
after 28 days.
2.8.1.4 Batching and Mixing

1) Dry mix
The quantities of cement and aggregates shall be gauged by weight and be mixed dry in a
mixing drum for at least 2 minutes or by continuous mixing methods approved by the
Engineer.
Proportioning by volume may be allowed in the case of mobile mixers, provided that regular
checking of mix proportions is carried out and have been approved by the Engineer.
The dry mix shall be batched in special batching plants or mobile mixers, solely used for this
purpose, and placed within an appropriate distance from the various places where shotcrete
shall be applied. The aggregate and the cement shall be well protected against water and
sunshine. The transport of the dry mix from the respective batching plant to the place of
application shall be carried out with specially equipped vehicles and the dry mix shall be
protected against water and sunshine throughout its transport.
2) Wet mix
Wet mixed shotcrete shall be transported from the concrete plant, ready to use, to the place
of work by trans mixers. The shotcrete shall be well protected against water and sunshine
before spraying.
Proportioning by volume may be allowed in the case of mobile mixers, provided that regular
checking of mix proportions is carried out and have been approved by the Engineer.
The proportions of cement, aggregates and admixture shall be determined in pre-construction
tests. The proportions of cement to dry aggregates shall be between 1:3 and 1:5 by weight.
2.8.1.5 Equipment and Application
The Contractor shall provide an adequate number of mobile units with a remote-controlled swivel
nozzle mounted on an extendable boom of such length that the operator can work under the
shotcrete cover applied during the previous round. In addition to the mobile units, the Contractor
shall provide an adequate number of manually held and operated nozzles.
The water shall be added in the nozzle when installing dry mix shotcrete and be supplied through a
regulating valve, easily and accurately controllable by the certified experienced "nozzle man" .
Air shall be supplied at constant and sufficient pressure and volume. The air shall not be contaminated
by oil.
Before the commencement of spraying, loose rock fragments shall have been removed, The rock
surface or the surface of previously applied shotcrete shall be cleaned in order to ensure proper
bond. Cleaning with water/compressed air is required. Groundwater percolating from the rock shall
be drained by means of pipes, hoses or other appropriate methods approved by the Engineer.
In case welded steel wire fabric is to be used, it shall be fixed with long steel nails, driven into
previously drilled holes provided with plastic plugs, or with appropriate method approved by the
Engineer.
Shotcreting shall only be carried out by experienced nozzleman. When required by the Engineer, each
crew shall demonstrate its proficiency by producing test panels before beginning production work
Spraying shall be carried out with the nozzle at right angles to the rock surface and at a distance of
about one meter.
Should the mix be too dry or too wet or of uneven quality, the spraying shall be stopped.
The shotcrete shall be applied in layers about 30 mm thick when dry mix shotcrete is applied and
about 50 mm thick when wet mix shotcrete is applied. Before the application of the next layer, the
shotcrete of the previous layer shall have attained initial set. Rebound materials shall be removed
and dumped.
The Contractor shall, when so directed by the Engineer, execute a systematic drilling of drainage holes
after Concreting.
2.8.1.6 Control of Applied Shotcrete
The control of the applied shotcrete shall include:
1) Compressive strength and density tests of drilled core
(i) The tests shall each be made on three specimens drilled within max. 0.5 m of each
other. Core diameter shall be at least 60 mm. The specimens shall after trimming have
an H/D ratio not less than 1.0, and preferably in the range of 1.5-1.7. The specimens
shall be drilled when the concrete is of sufficient strength and not earlier than 3 days
after shotcreting. The specimens shall be stored in water until testing after 28 days.
(ii) Frequency: One test for each 250 m3 of shotcrete or 20 m/interval.
2) Bond
(i) The bond shall be checked by random knocking (e.g. with a crowbar). Minimum one
knock per 5 m2 and the results shall be included in a written report. Areas with no bond
shall be marked off as the checking progresses. The concrete shall be 7-28 days old when
the bond is checked, If there are areas with no bond, the reasons for this shall be
investigated, and the need for additional stabilization shall be evaluated.
(ii) Frequency: To be performed on all shotcreted areas.
3) Thickness
(i) The average applied thickness shall be at least the specified thickness. The thickness
shall be measured by drilling through the hardened shotcrete.
(ii) Frequency: 20 drillings for each 100 m of shotcrete.
4) Fiber contents
(i) The fiber contents shall be established by crushing drilled cores or flushing fresh
shotcrete.
2.8.1.7 Testing of Shotcrete

In advance of placing any shotcrete, the Contractor shall prepare and test not less than three test
panels for each mix design and all the nozzleman. Sets of test panels shall comprise one shot
downwards onto a horizontal surface, one shot onto a vertical surface and one shot upwards onto a
horizontal surface. The panels shall be obtained by attaching 500 x 500 x 100 mm deep timber boxes
securely to appropriately aligned surfaces and applying shotcrete to the areas contained in the boxes
using the same mixing, placing equipment, and same nozzleman as for the production work
When the final set has taken place, the test panels shall be transported to the laboratory where the
Contractor shall determine the crushing strength by testing cores cut from the panels. The following
minimum compressive strength requirements shall normally be met:
(i) 12 MPa (120 kg/cm2) at 3 days; and
(ii) 30 MPa (300 kg/cm2) at 28 days.
Strengths shall be determined from test cylinders with length and diameter both of 100 mm.
In order to facilitate a decision regarding the use of accelerators, the Contractor shall perform tests
using at least two different percentages of each type of acceleration admixtures he proposes to use;
the percentages being determined with due consideration of the recommendations given by the
manufacturer. The compressive strength of three specimens shall each be determined after 3 hours,
8 hours, 24 hours, 3 days and 28 days. As a control measure, an equal number of samples without
admixture shall be tested at indicated time intervals.
During the placing of shotcrete, routine test panels shall be prepared beside the application zones
for the purpose of quality control in accordance with ASTM C1140 Standard Practice for Preparing and
Testing Specimens from Shotcrete Test Panels. From each test panel, 9 cores shall be drilled. Three
cores shall be tested after 3 days, three cores after 28 days and three cores shall be kept as spare.
One panel shall be prepared from each 50 m3 of the first applied 500 m3 of shotcrete. The Engineer
may decrease the frequency of testing if satisfactory results are obtained consistently.
The quality of shotcrete will be considered satisfactory if at least 90% of the tested cores meet the
specified strength. No single core shall have a strength less than 80% of the specified strength.
2.8.2 SLOPE ANCHORAGE BY SOIL NAILS/ROCK BOLTS
2.8.2.1 General
The Engineer shall approve the materials, equipment, methods and procedures to be used by the
Contractor prior to the installation of Soil nails / Rock bolts.
Soil nails shall be used to stabilize any slopes where it is soil. Rock bolts shll be installed where it is
fractured rock which it is susceptible to have shallow movement.
2.8.2.2 Requirements
Holes shall be carried out by means of percussion drilling.
Drill holes shall have diameters recommended by the supplier or as proposed by the Contractor and
Soil nails/rock bolts shall be thoroughly cleaned and be free from loose rust, scale, dirt, grease or any
other coating before they are inserted into the drill holes. Where required, the anchors shall have
corrosion protection to extent its life spans.
The protruding end of the anchors shall be provided with rolled or cut end or cut threads for fixing
of anchor plates by nut and washer, but it shall not slip off before rebar damage during assembly test
of tensile loading. It shall be covered with shotcrete after installation.
Nails/bolts shall normally be grouted in over the entire hole lengths with a grout consisting of cement
and water with, if necessary, the addition of sand. The grouting shall be carried out in a manner
preventing formations of voids or air pockets.
2.8.2.3 Materials
Soil Nails/Rock Bolts should be either deformed bar or anchor rod with sacrificial drill bit.
Deformed bar shall be at least 25-mm-diameter of types approved by the Engineer and shall as a
minimum meet the requirements of ASTM A615, Grade 40.
Anchor rod could be used and should cold rolled to form rope thread profile in compliance with ISO
10208. Sacrificial drill bits should be chosen to suit with rock mass condition and well contacted with
the rods. All rods shall be chamfered with precised coupling to enable the rod ends to have the
correct seating of each bar within the coupler.
All bolts/nails shall be coated by galvanized. The method of galvanization shall be hot-dip. Other
methods shall not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer.
Centralizers shall be equipped every at least 1 m in order to maintain its position in the center of
drilled holes.
2.8.2.4 Finishing Materials
Each anchor shall be furnished with bearing plate, washer and nut. Nuts shall have hexagonal heads
of the heavy-duty type, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A325.
Bearing plates shall conform to ASTM A36 and shall be of 9-mm flat steel or equal, providing not less
than 22,500-mm2 contact area for each bolt.
Washers shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A325 and shall be quenched and tempered to
a Rockwell hardness of C38 to C45. The round center hole shall be 4 mm larger in diameter than the
anchors to be used. Washers shall be beveled to the required angle and shall be placed between the
plate and the nut.
Alternatively, the bearing plate shall be under packed with mortar so that it becomes normal to the
bolt.
2.8.2.5 Grouting
Cement grout for soil nails/rock bolts shall be required for every kind of soil nails/rock bolts.
Requirements of cement grouting is listed in Table 2.8-2. Suitable accelerators, for generating
immediate loading capacity, and other types of additives may be used following the Engineer's
approval after site trials conducted by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer. The composition
of the grout and the grouting procedures shall be subjected to the approval of the Engineer. Any
material used to fill instead of cement grout shall be approved by the Engineer. Test of cement grout
shall be determined in tests at frequencies directed by the Engineer.
Table 2.8-2 Requirement for cement grouting of soil nails/rock bolts
a. W/C = 0.35-0.45
b. Compressive strength for 3 days shall exceed 35
Cement grouting MPa, for 10 hours shall exceed 10 MPa.
c. Sagging is unallow.
d. Strip packing is available.
2.8.2.6 Furnishing of oil Nails/Rock Bolts
Where so directed by the Engineer, soil nails/rock bolts shall protrude a sufficient length outside the
soil/rock surface to allow load testing according to the next section. For such purpose, the protruding
ends of the anchors shall be threaded and provided with anchor plates. Where the soil/rock surface
will be covered with reinforced shotcrete, the anchor plates shall be located outside the
reinforcement. After testing, protruding ends shall be bent back and covered with shotcrete.
Where soil nails/rock bolts are installed at an angle to the surface, the plates may be aligned normal
to the bolt by setting on a pad of mortar. This pad must extend under the whole area of the plate,
to avoid subsequent voids or inclusions of shotcrete rebound. When plates are set, beveled washers
may be omitted.
The protruding ends of anchors shall have been bent at right angles and as a minimum extend one
anchorage length from the rock surface.
2.8.2.7 Testing of Soil Nails/Rock Bolts
The reliability and performance of the procedures for grouting and fixing soil nails/rock bolts shall be
ascertained in pre-construction tests carried out by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer. For
this purpose, the Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment.
Pull equipment shall consist of a suitable size hollow ram jack, an adjustable bearing truss or bridging
device for the alignment of the direction of pull with the centerline of the bolt, extension bar for
attaching the jack to the bolt, a hydraulic pump with a gauge with 50 kPa interval marks calibrated to
read directly in kilograms (or pounds) for the ram being used, a dial gauge which reads in increments
of 0.05 mm over a range of 50 mm, a magnetic or independent dial gauge mounting and all other
necessary accessories.
The hydraulic pump gauge shall be calibrated while connected to the jack by a uniaxial testing
machine prior to field use. The hydraulic pump gauge shall be recalibrated at times directed by the
Engineer during the period of construction.
The Contractor shall use equipment certified by an independent laboratory and shall furnish the
Engineer with the respective certificates and calibration charts to convert the hydraulic pressure of
the pump into tensile load applied by the ram.
Running tests shall be performed routinely on 5% of all soil nails/rock bolts. Such nails/bolts shall be
tested to 1.5*working load. Strength requirement can be adjusted to suit with site condition upon the
Engineer’s approval. In case nails/bolts fail before this load is achieved the Contractor shall test
additional bolts as directed by the Engineer. If the failure depends on poor materials and/or
workmanship, the Contractor at his own expense shall replace the nails/bolts. If satisfactory results
are consistently obtained, the number of tests may be decreased.
2.8.2.8 Records
The reliability and performance of the procedures for grouting and fixing soil nails/rock bolts shall be
ascertained in pre-construction tests carried out by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer. For
this purpose, the Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment.
For each installed, the following information shall be recorded:
(i) reference number;
(ii) type of installation;
(iii) name of person taking record;
(iv) date of drilling;
(v) length and orientation of drill hole;
(vi) consistency, colour, structure and type of rock or material;
(vii) rates of penetration and water flow (if any);
(viii) date of dowel installation;
(ix) length of installation; and
(x) grout take quantities (if more grout is injected than the theoretical quantities required to
fill the drill hole).
END OF SECTION 2
SECTION 3
ROADWORKS
Tender Documents Section 3: Roadworks
SECTION 3: ROADWORKS
3.1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
3.1.1 DESCRIPTION
3.1.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the furnishing, installing and compacting of aggregate base course for roads
and hardstanding.
3.1.1.2 Tolerances
Base Course shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings. Grade or elevation shall be
inspected at intervals not greater than 25 meters. Surface deviation in excess of 10 millimeter
when a straight edge of 3 meters long applied to the surface, either parallel or perpendicular to
the centerline of the road or deviation of elevation from the Drawings in excess of 10 millimeters,
shall be corrected by reshaping and compacting or reconstructing.
3.1.2 PRODUCTS
3.1.2.1 Materials
(1) General
Shall be a hard durable crushed rock particles or crushed stone fragments.
(2) Particle Size Distribution Curves
Shall show a well graded material with a curve approximately parallel to the curves for the
grading limits. Materials not showing such a graded particle size distribution curve shall not
be accepted.
(3) Quality
The materials shall be free from any vegetable matter, clay balls and topsoil and shall not
include any fraction that breaks up when alternately wetted and dried.
3.1.2.2 Properties of Base Course Materials
(1) Grading
The material shall conform to the gradation shown on Table 3.1-1 when tested by AASHTO
Test Method T27 "Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates".
Table 3.1-1 : Required Gradation for Crushed Rook Soil Aggregate

Sieve Designation Percentage by Weight Passing
Millimeter (INCH) A B C
50.0 (2) 100 100
25.0 (1) 75-95 100
9.5 (3/8) 30-65 40-75 50-85
4.75 (No.4) 25-55 30-60 35-65
2.00 (No.10) 15-40 20-45 25-50
0.425 (No.40) 8-20 15-30 15-30
0.075 (No. 200) 2-8 5-20 5-15
(a) Materials retained on sieve No.4 shall comply with the following:-
(i) The percentage of wear, as determined by AASHTO Test Method T96
"Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and
Impact in the Los Angeles Machine", shall not exceed 40%.
(ii) All particles shall have at least one mechanically fractured face.
(b) The dry weight of fractions passing sieve No.200 shall not be greater than two-thirds
of the dry weight of fractions passing sieve No.40.
(c) If fine aggregate materials, in addition to those naturally present in the base co u r s
e materials, are necessary in order to meet the grading requirements, such fine
aggregate materials shall be the same type and same property as the coarse aggregate.
(d) The Sodium Sulfate Soundness loss shall not exceed 9 percent after five cycles, when
it is tested in accordance with AASHTO T 104 "Soundness of Aggregate by Use of
Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate".
(e) Material at source shall be rechecked every 5,000 Cu.m.
(2) Plasticity
Base course materials shall have a liquid limit not greater than 25 percent and a plasticity
index not greater than 6 percent, when tested in accordance with AASHTO Test Method
T89 "Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils" and ASSHTO Test Method T 90 "Determining the
Plastic Limit and Plastic Index of Soils". The portion passing sieve No.40 shall be obtained
in accordance with AASHTO Test Method T 146 "Wet Preparation of Disturbed Soil Sample
for Test".
(3) California Bearing Ration
Base course materials shall have a California Bearing Ratio (CBR) value not less than 80
percent for Asphaltic Concrete Pavement and 90 percent for Surface Treatment Pavement
when tested in accordance with AASHTO Test Method T193 "The California Bearing Ratio"
at 95 percent of the Maximum Dry Density tested in accordance with AASHTO Test Method
T 180 "Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-lb Rammer and a 18-in Drop"
(4) Quality
As transportation, spreading, compaction and other handling cause the quality of the
materials to change, the Contractor shall investigate such changes and make due allowance
for same at the crushing plant in order to comply with the grading, liquid limit and plasticity
index specified for the completed crushed rock soil aggregate base course materials.
3.1.2.3 Delivery
The base course materials shall not be delivered to or stockpiled on the Site until it has been
properly processed to meet the provisions prescribed. No mixing and processing shall be allowed
on the Site.
3.1.3 EXECUTION
3.1.3.1 General
(1) Work shall be performed in accordance with these Specifications, lines, levels, grades,
dimensions and cross-section shown on the Drawings.
(2) Where materials for shoulders and base course conform to the same Specifications, the
bottom layers of shoulders and base course shall be spread and compacted in one
operation.
(3) When the base course is spread continuous to concrete kerbs or gutters, extreme care shall
be exercised not to damage the kerbs or gutters. Any damage of kerbs or gutters resulting
from carelessness or negligent construction methods by the Contractor, the said kerbs or
gutters shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's sole expense.
3.1.3.2 Preparation
(1) Material Preparation
The area for stockpile shall be cleaned and approved by the Engineer.
When the base course material from the crushing plant conforms to the Specifications, it
shall be delivered to the roadway, otherwise it shall be stockpiled in appropriate piles.
The base course material which is obtained from the different sources and has been
approved by the Engineer, shall be placed on the road separately about 500 meters long
on the subbase or as specified by the Engineer. The Contractor shall separate the stockpile
from each source in an appropriate quantity so that it is convenient to take samples for
the control test. The material which has not been approved by the Engineer shall not allow
to place on the roadway.
The material shall not be segregated at the stockpile, the Engineer may take the samples
for retest if he deemed necessary.
The Contractor shall spray the water on the stockpile and mix the material so that the
moisture content is nearly at Optimum Moisture Content. Shoveling and hauling the
material shall be carefully done to avoid the segregation of coarse and fine aggregate. In
case of segregation, the material shall be remixed at the Site.
(2) Construction Area Preparations
The subbase or other underlying layer to support the crushed rock soil aggregate base
course shall be shaped and compacted in accordance with the Drawings.
After the preparation in accordance with Clause 3.1.3.2 above, the Contractor shall spray the water
over the entire surface of the subbase or the specified layer. The base course material shall be
hauled by suitable vehicles, spreading and mixing on the subbase or the specified layer. The water
content shall be at approximately optimum moisture content ± 2 percent.
After spreading and mixing, the material shall be compacted immediately and evenly by rubber
tire rollers or other compactors over the entire surface of base course so that the compaction is
in accordance with the Specifications. Base course material shall be spread and shaped to conform
to the alignment, elevation, slope, dimension and the cross section shown on the Drawings, no
potholes or loose material appear on the surface.
If the steel rollers are employed to compact base course for final compaction, coarse aggregate
shall not be broken. The Contractor shall correct the area where segregation of coarse and fine
aggregate has occurred.
In rainy season, if different types of materials are used in shoulders and base course, the shoulders
shall not be done before constructing the base course.
If the Contractor has already placed the shoulders and it rains during construction or there is water
in the base course area, the Contractor shall remove both the base course and shoulders to
inspect the subbase. If there are any soft spot on the subbase, the Contractor has to reconstruct
the subbase to comply with the Specifications under the consideration of the Engineer.
3.1.3.4 Compacting
Base course materials shall be compacted to a density not less than 95% of the Maximum Dry
Density tested in accordance with AASHTO Test Method T180. Field density shall be tested in
accordance with AASHTO T 191 "Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand Cone Method"
Field Density Test shall be carried out not more than every 1,000 Sq.m. for each layer or otherwise
3.2 SHOULDERS FOR ROADS

3.2.1 DESCRIPTION
3.2.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the furnishing and construction of soil aggregate shoulders to the roads.
Work does not include bituminous surfacing or grassing.
3.1.1.2 Tolerances
After compaction, the shoulder shall be trimmed to the cross-section dimensions shown and shall
conform to the required line, levels, slopes and all dimensions. The average thickness of each
course shall not be less than the thickness shown on the drawings and no point shall thickness
be less than the required thickness exceed 10 mm. The accuracy of the surface shall be such that
water drains away from the road over the surface freely and evenly without forming channels.
3.2.2 PRODUCTS
3.2.2.1 Materials
(1) General
Shall be a mixture of hard, durable particles of mineral aggregate, free from vegetable
matter, soft particles and clay lumps. All material shall conform to any other requirements
indicated on the cross-sections on the drawings.
(2) Properties
Shall conform with the requirements of Section 3.1: AGGREGATE BASE COURSE.
(3) Delivery
(a) Shoulder materials shall not be brought to the site before they are finally processed
to meet the provisions prescribed above.
(b) No shoulder materials may be stockpiled or processed on asphaltic surfaces.
3.2.3 EXECUTION
3.2.3.1 General
The Work shall be performed to the lines, grades, levels, dimensions and cross section shown on
the drawings and as required by the Engineer.
The shoulders shall be constructed on a previously prepared sub-base finished as required in the
appropriate section of these specifications. The construction shall be done in such a way that
courses of different types are not mixed together.
The shoulders on roads shall be constructed in two layers as follows.
(a) After compaction, the bottom layer of the shoulders shall, at the joint, be of the same
thickness as the base course, and its surface shall be sloping as indicated on the drawings.
(b) Immediately after completing of the asphaltic surface layer the shoulders shall be finalised
and brought up to the level of their surface as shown on the drawings by adding a top
layer of material, compacting and shaping it.
(c) The shoulders shall be tight bladed using a motorgrader to remove any vegetation. The
underlying subgrade shall be scarified to a depth of 150 mm., to secure a satisfactory
bonding, and then compacted with at least two complete coverages over the area with an
approved roller.
(d) When shoulders are completed, the topsoil and grassing shall, as soon as possible, be
finished in accordance with the drawings.
(e) The shoulders construction shall match the existing width and fill slope or plan section
widths, whichever is widest.
(f) The Contractor shall place embankment material in successive horizontal layers not
exceeding 150 mm. in depth before rolling. Each layer will extend the full width of the
embankment and shall be leveled before compaction.
(g) When the final elevation of the traveled way is different from the elevation of intersecting
roads and driveways, the Contractor shall adjust the grade line of intersecting roads and
driveways to meet the elevation of the new shoulder surfaces. The existing grade line will
be adjusted 2 m horizontally for each 35 mm of vertical change in the surfacing elevation.
3.2.3.3 Compaction
The full thickness and width of the shoulders shall be compacted to at least 95 % of the maximum
dry density, as determined by AASHTO T180, Method D. The maximum dry density shall be
determined as described in Section 3.1: AGGREGATE BASE COURSE. The in-place dry density shall
be tested in accordance with AASHTO T181.
Field Density Test shall be carried out not more than every 1,000 sq.m. for each layer or otherwise
3.3 SCARIFICATION & RECONSTRUCTION OF EXISTING PAVEMENT

3.3.1 DESCRIPTION
3.3.1.1 Scope
This work shall consist of scarifying and reconstructing of the existing pavement, basecourse,
subbase, subgrade etc. to form a reconstructed layer in accordance with these Specifications to
the lines, levels, dimensions, density and shown on the Drawings.
3.3.2 PRODUCTS
3.3.2.1 Materials
(1) General
The existing road pavement shall be scarified and separated unusable or undesirable
material shall be taken off. After that the material shall be broken into small pieces of
maximum size 50 millimeters and blend together to obtain a homogeneous mass.
(2) Tools and Equipment

The Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all tools and equipment to
perform, testing, start-up and completion of the Works. The equipment shall be approved
by the Engineer and shall be capable of constructing the Works to meet the Specifications.
3.3.3 EXECUTION
3.3.3.1 General
The existing road pavement shall be scarified to a depth not less than 100 mm throughout the
whole width of that section or as specified in the Drawings. Care must be taken to avoid any
damage to the beneath materials and other utilities system. The scarified material from existing
pavement which is unsuitable or undesirable shall be removed. The remaining material shall be
blended and mixed with water to appropriate moisture content and compacted to the required
grade and density.
3.3.3.2 Compaction Test
Scarified pavement layer shall be compacted to not less than 95% of the maximum dry density
(Modified Compaction Test) and complied with the provisions of SECTION 3.1: AGGREGATE BASE
COURSE.
3.4 PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT

3.4.1 DESCRIPTION
3.4.1.1 Scope
(1) Prime Coat
This work shall consist of application of liquid asphalt on the prepared and shaped base
course, allowing the asphalt penetrate through voids in order to prevent moisture seeping
in and bond the base course to the surface course.
(2) Tack Coat
The work shall consist of application of liquid asphalt on existing road surface or previously
prepared prime coat which has been finished for a long period such that it cannot bond
with the new road surface to be constructed or on the road surface base course over which
a new road surface course to be constructed.
3.4.2 PRODUCTS
3.4.2.1 Materials
(1) Asphalt for Prime Coat
Asphalt for prime coat shall pass quality tests and be of types and grades as follows.
Cutback Asphalt, MC-30 or MC-70, comply with the Thai Institute of Standard, “Cutback
Asphalt”, Standard No. TIS 865, or
Emulsified asphalt, CSS-1 comply with the Thai Institute of Standard “Cationic Emulsified
Asphalt for Roads”, Standard No. TIS 371
Range of application temperature for prime coat shall be in comply with Table 3.4-1
Table 3.4-1 : Range of Application Temperature
Range of Temperature
Type of Asphalt o o
C F
MC-30 30-90 85-190
MC-70 50-110 120-225
CSS-1 20-70 70-160
(2) Asphalt for Tack Coat

Asphalt shall pass quality tests and be of type and grade as follows.
Cutback asphalt RC-70 or RC-250 comply with the Thai Institutes of Standard “Cutback
Asphalt”, Standard No. TIS 865 or
Emulsified asphalt, CRS-1 or CRS-2, comply with the Thai Institutes of Standard “Cationic
Emulsified Asphalt for Road”, Standard No. TIS 371
Type of asphalt shall be selected by considering condition of base course or existing road
for tack coat. Range of application temperature for aforementioned asphalts shall be in
accordance with Table 3.4-2
Type of Asphalt o o
C F
RC-70 50-110 120-225
RC-250 75-130 165-270
CRS-1 50-85 125-185
CRS-2 50-85 125-185
(3) Quality Control Test

Sample of asphalt shall be taken for each 10 tons or each delivery. In case that the quantity
less than specify at least 1 sample shall be taken for testing or specify by the Engineer.
3.4.2.2 Equipment
Prior to beginning of construction, the contractor shall prepare equipment necessary for operation
at the work site. They shall be of types, sizes, models and in condition to work efficiently.
Following equipments shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer
(1) Asphalt Distributor
The equipment shall be self-propelled with truck-mounted or trailer-mounted asphalt tank
equipped with devices necessary for work as follows
(a) Dipstick or devices for volume measurement of asphalt in the tank.
(b) Burner
(c) Thermometer
(d) Asphalt Pump
(e) Power Unit
(f) Asphalt Spray Bar with Nozzles
(g) Asphalt Hand Spray
(h) Bitumeter
(i) Asphalt Tank
The asphalt distributor shall have circulating system with a pump which functions well for
liquid asphalt to asphalt cement and capable of the followings.
- Drawing the prepared asphalt to the tank mounted on the truck
- Circulating asphalt between the spray bar and tank
- Spraying asphalt through the spray bar or hand spray
- Drawing asphalt from the spray bar or hand spray to the tank
- Drawing asphalt from the tank to the external asphalt container
- Power units shall have pressure gauges or any controls
Asphalt pump shall be equipped with devices to measure quantity of asphalt flowing
through pump by number of revolution or pressures or any means.
Spray bar may consist of several pipes connecting together with nozzles installed at uniform
distance apart. Angles of the nozzles and spray bar shall be adjustable. The nozzles shall
be equipped with on/off control. The spray bar shall be the model through which asphalt
can be circulated. While working, the pressure throughout the spray bar shall be uniformly
maintained and can be adjusted higher or lower. Width of spray is adjustable.
Hand spray shall be the type with free movement nozzle to use in the area inaccessible
by spray bar.
Bitumeter shall consist of a speed measuring wheel with a cable leading to a speedometer
in the cap of the vehicle. The meter shall indicate the speed in meters per minute or feet
per minute with distances of trip in digits.
The asphalt tank shall be insulated. Inside the tank shall consist of heater pipes from the
burner with metal pads for heat distribution and drain pipes. The tank shall be equipped
with volume measuring devices either a dipstick type or a dial gauge type or both. There
shall be a thermometer of a dial type or an armoured type or both with the accuracy to 1
degree Celsius.
(2) Rotary Broom
The equipment may be towed or self-propelled or farm tractor mounted. The broom shall
be revolved by mechanical means. Brushes may be made of fiber, steel, nylon or rattan or
any appropriate materials. Revolution speed and pressure on the road surface shall be
adjustable.
(3) Blower
The blower shall be farm-tractor mounted consisting of large blades capable of blowing
strong wind and sufficiently efficient to clean the road surface
3.4.2.3 Application of Prime Coat
(1) Application Rate for Crushed Aggregates Base Course
Application rate of prime coat shall be between 0.8 to 1.4 liters per square meter. The
actual rate depends on the density of the base course especially on the uppermost. It is
recommended to use the following equation as a guideline for determination of the
application rate.
Application Rate of Prime Coat = 100 P (1-D/G)/R liters per square meter
where
P = depth that asphalt penetrates base course in millimeters
R = asphalt residue in percent
D = average field dry density for the working section in grams per milliliter
G = bulk specific gravity (saturated surface-dry) of base course material
The value of P will depend on the porosity of the base course and the type and grade of
asphalt. For the initial test section, P equaling to 4.5 millimeters is used for calculation.
After inspection of the result of application, P can be adjusted or type of the asphalt is
changed as appropriate.
The asphalt residue (R) used in the equation shall be in accordance with Table 3.4-3
Table 3.4-3 : Percentage of Asphalt Residue in Liquid Asphalt
Type of Asphalt Residue (percent)

MC-30 62
MC-70 73
CSS-1 75
Value of D shall be the average field dry density for the working section tested in comply
with AASHTO T191 “Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method”.
Value of G, for which G1 for coarse grained base course material shall be determined in
comply with AASHTO T85“Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate” and G2 for
fine grained material in comply with AASHTO T84“Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine
Aggregate” can be calculated by the following formula.
G = (P1+P2) / (P1/G1+P2/G2) or = 100 / (P1/G1+P2/G2)
where
P1 = percent retained on the 4.75 millimeter (No 4) sieve
P2 = percent passed the 4.75 millimeter (No 4) sieve
G1 = bulk specific gravity (saturated surface-dry) of material retained on
4.75 millimeter (No 4) sieve
G2 = bulk specific gravity (saturated surface-dry) of material passed 4.75
millimeter (No.4) sieve
(2) Application Rate for Cement-modified Crushed Rock or Soil-cement Base Course
Since the cement-modified crushed rock or soil-cement base course is very dense,
application rate of prime coat is about 0.6 to 1.0 liter per square meter depending on the
condition and denseness of base course. If MC-70 cutback asphalt is used for prime coat
and does not penetrate base course well, MC-30 cutback asphalt should be considered.
However, if the contractor cannot buy MC-30, MC-70 cutback asphalt shall be mixed with
kerosene in appropriate quantity for application
3.4.2.4 Application of Tack Coat
(1) Case of Existing Course being Prime Coat or Asphalt Concrete or Portland Cement Concrete
Use RC-70 or RC-250 at rate 0.1-0.3 liters/sq.m.
Use CRS-1 or CRS-2 at rate 0.1-0.3 liters/sq.m.
Use CRS-1 or CRS-2 mixed with water at ratio 1:1,
at rate 0.2-0.6 liters/sq.m.
(2) Case of Existing Course being Surface Treatment or Penetration Macadam
Use RC-70 or RC-250 at rate 0.1-0.3 liters/sq.m
3.4.3 EXECUTION
3.4.3.1 Construction Method
(1) Prime Coat
(a) Preparation Prior to Prime Coat Application
(i) Inspection of Equipments and Calibration of Asphalt Distributor
Prior to bringing the asphalt distributor to work, the equipment shall be inspected
and calibrated to good working condition such that the asphalt application shall
be done at proper and uniform quantity in both transverse and longitudinal

directions. When tested in comply with DH-T 401 “Method for Determination of
Asphalt Quantity Applied on the Road in Transverse Direction by Asphalt
Distributor”, and in comply with DH-T 402 “Method for Determination of Asphalt
Quantity Applied on the Road in Longitudinal Direction by Asphalt Distributor”,
the asphalt quantity shall deviate by not greater than 17 and 15 percent,
respectively.
(ii) Preparation of Base Course
 Base course shall be cut to the elevation and grade according to the Drawings.
Waste from cut shall be completely removed from the base course.
 Use the broom to completely sweep dust and fine material which retained
on the base course to expose the rock facing by not less than 80 percent of
the working area. Rate of broom revolution and pressure on the base course
shall be adjusted to just sufficient not to sweep out rock which embedded in
the base course or sweep dust to deposit in front of the broom
Where the base course is covered with smooth and dense dust or fine
material or any materials with hardened patches and after brooming, rock
facing is exposed less than 80 percent of the working area, the hardened
patches shall be removed by any equipment approved by the Engineer or by
a blade of grader as appropriate. Use the broom to sweep the excess. The
operation shall be repeated until rock facing is exposed not less than specified
or the roadway is open to traffic for about 3 days or more by the judgement
of the Engineer in order to remove out the hardened patches.
 Use the blower to completely blow out the dust
 Lightly sprinkle water over the base course until it is moist. If it is too wet, it
shall be left until it is damp. If water is ponded, it shall be completely
removed
(b) Construction
After preparation of the equipments and construction area, construction can be done
as follows.
(i) Prior to beginning the prime coat application, the asphalt distributor shall be
parked some distance away from the beginning of the working section to allow
the equipment run at the specified speed.
(ii) At the beginning and the end of the working section, thick paper or any materials
of at least 500 millimeter wide shall be longitudinally laid across the width of
the prime coat for prevention the repetition of the asphalt application. The
operation shall begin and end on the paper or other materials such that junction
of prime coat is neat. No asphalt is messed in the finished section.
(iii) Height of the spray bar before and after the application in any section shall not
be different by greater than 12.5 millimeters.
(iv) Asphalt application should be done against wind direction to allow smoke from
the asphalt blowing to the back of spray bar.
(v) Temperature of the asphalt application by the asphalt distributor shall conform
to Table 3.4-1.
(vi) For each application, the finished one shall be longitudinally overlapped by not
less than 50 millimeters.
(vii) Asphalt application should not consume all the asphalt in the tank. The asphalt
should be left at least 5 percent of the tank capacity since the quantity of asphalt
drawed out of the tank may be less making the application rate deviate from the
specified rate.
(viii) After the asphalt application, the roadway shall be closed to traffic for at least
24 hours under good weather condition or 48 hours under bad weather condition.
After the closing period, the asphalt has not completely penetrated the base
course, sand shall be spreaded to blot the leftover asphalt preventing from
adhesion to wheel. The sand shall be clean. Where the asphalt application has
not yet been done on the other side of roadway, sand shall be spreaded with
the exception of at least 150 millimeter away from the junction. Sand shall not
be spreaded before 24 hours have elapsed after the asphalt application.
(ix) The surface shall be constructed within 1 month but not before 48 hours after
the prime coat application
(c) Precautions
(i) To use cutback asphalt, extreme care must be exercised to prevent flames while
boiling or application of cutback asphalt, since it is flamable.
(ii) Care should be taken in transporting emulsified asphalt in a drum container
especially while loading and unloading to prevent any heavy strike to the drum
since it can cause separation of the emulsion.
(iii) To use emulsified asphalt in a drum container, before the asphalt is poured into
the asphalt distributor, drums shall be rolled back and forth or the asphalt be
stirred so that the emulsified asphalt is in uniform condition. If it is not completely
consumed, the container should be tightly sealed to prevent evaporation of
water causing separation of the emulsion and impair the emulsion property.
(iv) After daily work, the asphalt should be completely drawed out. The distributor,
especially at the spray bar, should be thoroughly clean. Cleaning should be done
by kerosene or any solution, drawed through the pipes of spraybar to completely
clean the leftover asphalt. This is to prevent any asphalt adhesion to the pipes
and cause inconvenience of further work. It also prevents the tank in distributor
from attack by some acid of emulsified asphalt which may corrode and damage
the tank.
(2) Tack Coat
(a) Preparation Prior to Tack Coat Application
(i) Inspection of Equipments and Calibration of Asphalt Distributor Prior to bringing
the asphalt distributor to work, the equipment shall be inspected and calibrated
to good working condition such that asphalt application shall be done at proper
and uniform quantity in both transverse and longitudinal directions. When tested
incomply with DH-T 401 "Method for Determination of Asphalt Quantity Applied
on the Road in Transverse Direction by Asphalt Distributor", and in comply with
DH-T 402 "Method for Determination of Asphalt Quantity Applied on the Road in
Longitudinal Direction by Asphalt Distributor", the asphalt quantity shall deviate
by not greater than 17 and 15 percent, respectively. (2) Preparation of Existing

Road Surface which, Prime Coat has been left for a long Period, or Road Surface
Base Course
(ii) Preparation of Existing Road Surface which, Prime Coat has been left for a long
Period, or Road Surface Base Course
 In case that the existing surface is irregular or undulating, it shall be cut and
uniformly shaped. If there are potholes, they shall be excavated and repaired
with skin patching or deep patching whatever appropriate then densely
compacted to make the surface smooth and uniform before applying tack
coat.
 Existing surface shall be clean, free of dust and other materials. The
Contractor shall remove vegetation, dirts or soil from the existing road surface
edge.
 In case that the existing base course with prime coat over a long period such
that it cannot be bonded with the new surface course or so dirty that it cannot
be cleaned by any scratching, washing and other specified cleaning methods,
tack coat shall be applied by the judgement of the Engineer.
 Cleaning of the existing base course with prime coat over a long period or
existing surface shall be done by sweeping of dust and loose material with
broom. Revolution rate and pressure applied on the existing base course or
surface shall be adjusted just enough not to remove the prime coat or
damage the existing surface. Use a blower to completely blow out the dust
or loose materials.
 In case that there are dust smear or hard patches on the base course or
surface, it shall be removed by any appropriate equipments as approved by
the Engineer to scratch out and clean by washing, left until dry, use broom
to sweep and blower to completely blow out dust and loose materials.
(b) Construction
(i) Use the asphalt distributor to applying tack coat at the temperature specified in
Table 3-4-(2) The application rate depends on type and condition of the base
course or surface as specified by the Engineer.
(ii) Where the area for tack coat is inaccessible by spray bar, hand spray is allowed.
(iii) Application of tack coat in the repaired area or unsuitable area for spray bar or
hand spray, for example, uncontinuous repaired areas, may be done by brushing
as approved by the Engineer. Application rate shall be appropriate to the
condition of the base course or existing surface and complying to 3.4.2.4
Application of Tack Coat.
(iv) Application of tack coat shall be done in advance of surface construction within
suitable period by specifying the area of tack coat just sufficient for surface
construction in one day. It is not allowed to stay for overnight since the base
course or existing surface may be again dirty.
(v) After the application of the tack coat, it shall be closed to traffic to allow
evaporation of cutback asphalt or separation of the emulsion and evaporation of
water, then construct the surface.
(vi) In case that there is a tack coat area left due to any obstruction not able to
complete the construction for the entire tack coat area, the unsurfaced tack coat
section shall be closed to traffic and its surface be constructed as soon as it is
able to.
(c) Precautions
(i) Storage and Use of Emulsified Asphalt in Bulk Container
 Bulk container should be insulated and be the model with circulation system.
The system may be the model using a pump to circulate emulsified asphalt
from top to bottom of the container or using stirring fan which slowly
revolves. If the container is the model without a circulation system or stirring
fan, small amount of kerosene should be added in the container such that
the kerosene will buoy to sufficiently and lightly cover the surface of
emulsified asphalt. This is to reduce film produced at the surface of
emulsified asphalt in the container.
 The container should be filled up with emulsified asphalt allowing the least
surface area of emulsified asphalt be in contact with air reducing the
coalescence of asphalt molecules to form film over the surface.
 Emulsified asphalt should be stored at temperature in the range between 10-
85 degree Celsius (50-185 degree Fahrenheit).
 Do not heat emulsified asphalt until the temperature at its surface, which
contacts with the area connected to the heating inducing device, reaches 96
degree Celsius (205 degree Fahrenheit), or the emulsion may be separate.
 While heating emulsified asphalt in the container, the asphalt should be
stirred to reduce the coalescence of asphalt molecules to form film at the
surface.
 Do not pressurize air in the container while stirring the emulsified asphalt.
 Circulation of emulsified asphalt in the container should not be done too fast
and too strong because air can infiltrate the emulsified asphalt causing it
easier to separate.
 Mixing of water with CRS-1 or CRS-2 emulsified asphalt shall be done by
slowly adding clean water to the emulsified asphalt to prevent the emulsion
from separation. Do not add emulsified asphalt to water.
(ii) Use of Emulsified Asphalt in Drum Container
 Transportation of emulsified asphalt shall be done with care especially while
loading and unloading to prevent any heavy strike to the drum since it can
cause separation of the mixture.
 Prior to using of emulsified asphalt in storage for long period, the drums
should be routinely rolled back and forth 5 times each every week especially
before put into the asphalt distributor so that the emulsified asphalt
homogeneously mixed for the whole container. If it is opened for use, the
emulsified asphalt should be completely consumed. If it is not, the container

should be lightly sealed to prevent evaporation of water causing separation
of the mixture and impairing the emulsion property.
 Every time the asphalt distributor being filled with emulsified asphalt, it
should be completely consumed. The distributor is then clean especially at
the spray bar or the emulsion is separate and asphalt adhesion to the spray
bar make it inconvenient for work in the following day. It also prevents the
tank in distributor from attack by some acid of emulsified asphalt which may
corrode and the tank
3.5 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

3.5.1 DESCRIPTION
3.5.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the materials, plant, and equipment, used to place and compact asphalt
concrete pavement
Before Starting work, the Contractor shall submit job Mix Formula to the Engineer for approval.
3.5.2 PRODUCTS
3.5.2.1 Materials
(1) Aggregates
Aggregates shall consist of coarse aggregate and fine aggregate. In case that the fine aggregate
contains insufficient fine or requires improvement of quality and strength of asphalt concrete,
mineral filler may be added
Aggregates shall be tested comply with AASHTO T27 “Sieve analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate”
and gradation comply to Table 3.5-1
(a) Coarse Aggregate shall be the portion of crushed rock or any materials approved by the
Engineer which is contained on the 4.75 millimeter (No.4) sieve. It shall be hard,
durable, clean and free from any objectionable materials.
Unless the properties are specified otherwise, the coarse aggregate shall have the
following properties.
(i) Abrasion loss when tested in comply with AASHTO T96, “Resistance to Abrasion
of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by Use of the Los Angeles Machine”, shall be not
greater than 40 percent.
(ii) Soundness loss when tested in comply with AASHTO T104, “Soundness of
Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate” for 5 cycles, shall be
not greater than 9 percent.
Table 3.5-1 : Gradation of Aggregate and Asphalt Content

Nominal Size Millimeter 9.5 12.5 19.0 25.0
(inch) (3/8) (1/2) (3/4) (1)
For Roadbed Wearing Wearing Binder Base
Course Course Course Course
Thickness Millimeter 25-35 40-70 40-80 70-100
Sieve Size Millimeter (inch) Total Percent Passing by mass
37.5 (1 1/2) - - - 100
25.0 (1) - - 100 90-100
19.0 (3/4) - 100 90-100 -
12.5 (1/2) 100 80-100 - 56-80
9.5 (3/8) 90-100 - 56-80 -
4.75 (No.4) 55-85 44-74 35-65 29-59
2.36 (No.8) 32-67 28-58 23-49 19-45
1.18 (No.16) - - - -
0.600 (No.30) - - - -
0.300 (No.50) 7-23 5-21 5-19 5-17
0.150 (No.100) - - - -
0.075 (No.200) 2-10 2-10 2-8 1-7
Asphalt Cement Content 4.0-8.0 3.0-7.0 3.0-6.5 3.0-6.0
Percent by mass of Aggregate
Note : The Engineer may change gradation of aggregate and asphalt content from Table 3.5-1 However,
asphalt concrete shall have property and strength in comply with Table 3.5-3
Coarse aggregate, from the existing sources, which has passed the soundness test,
may be waived from the retesting subject to the judgement of the Engineer to
accept the available test result.
(iii) Asphalt coating on the aggregate surface, when tested in comply with AASHTO
T182 “Coating and Stripping of Bitumen-Aggregate Mixtures” shall be not less
than 95 percent.
(b) Fine aggregate shall be the portion of stone dust or clean sand which passes 4.75
millimeter (No.4) sieve, free from any objectionable materials.
Unless that properties are specified otherwise, the fine aggregate shall have the
following properties.
(i) Sand equivalent, when tested in comply with AASHTO T176, “Plastic Fines in
Graded Aggregates and Soils by Use of the Sand Equivalent Test” shall be not
less than 50 percent.
(ii) Soundness loss when tested in comply with AASHTO T104, “Soundness of
Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate” for 5 cycles, shall be
not greater than 9 percent.
Fine aggregate, from existing sources, which has passed the soundness test, may
be waived from the retesting subject to the judgement of the Engineer to accept
the available test result.
(c) Mineral Filler is used when combined aggregate of course aggregate and fine aggregate
consists of insufficient fine or to improve quality of asphalt concrete. Mineral filler
may be stone dust, Portland cement, Silica cement, hydrated lime or any other
materials approved by the Engineer.
Mineral filler shall be dry, not be lumped, when tested in comply with AASHTO T37,
“Sieve Analysis of Mineral Filler” shall be according to Table 3.5-2
Table 3.5-2 : Gradation of Mineral Filler
Sieve Size
Total Percent Passing
Millimeter
0.600 (No.30) 100
0.300 (No.50) 75-100
0.075 (No. 200) 55-100
In case that the Engineer considers that material having gradation different from Table 3.5-2
but when used as mineral filler will improve quality of asphalt concrete, it may be approved
for use as mineral filler.
(2) Asphalt
In case that type of asphalt is not specified otherwise, AC 60-70 asphalt cement shall be
used. It shall pass quality tests and conform to the Thai Industrial Standard, “Asphalt
Cement for Road Works”, Standard No. TIS 851.
Other asphalts or asphalt modified with any additives, to be used, shall have equal or
better quality. It shall pass quality test, be considered for suitability and subject to approval
by the Engineer on the basis of case by case.
Approximate asphalt content to be used shall be according to Table 3.5-1
(3) Quality Control Test
Sample of aggregates material for testing shall be taken for each 500 Cu.m. and sample of
asphalt shall be taken for each 10 tons or each delivery.
In case that the quantity less than specify at least 1 sample shall be taken for testing or
specify by the Engineer
3.5.2.2 Usage
Asphalt concrete mixture can be used for road work as follows.
(1) Road Patching, to do skin patching and deep patching.
(2) Levelling to relevel the road surface to the required elevation.
(3) Overlay to strengthen existing road surface or to increase skid resistance to existing road
surface
(4) Base course to lay the asphalt concrete layer on the subbase course or any other prepared
roadbed.
(5) Binder course to lay the asphalt concrete layer on the prepared base course or on the
existing surface to be rehabilitated.
(6) Wearing course, to lay the asphalt concrete lay over the binder course, the base course or
any other prepared roadbed.
(7) Shoulder where it is asphalt concrete, to lay the asphalt concrete lay over the shoulder or
any other prepared roadbed.
3.5.2.3 Equipments
All equipments for construction shall be in good working condition, pass inspection and/or be
calibrated and approved by the Engineer. During the construction, the Contractor shall maintain
all equipments in good condition.
(1) Asphalt Concrete Mixing Plant
(a) General Specification
The asphalt concrete mixing plant shall be located within the road construction limit.
If necessary, it may be located off the road construction limit but it shall be within
the transportation time limit not over 2 hours beginning from completion of mixing to
laying on the road subject to the proper temperature. The plant shall have a rated
capacity not less than 60 tons per hour. It can be either a Batch type or Continuous
type, but it shall be capable to produce asphalt concrete mixture to pavers for
continuous laying. The mixture shall have uniform quality according to the job mix
formula and proper temperature conforming to the specification.
The mixing plant shall be in good working condition and shall be composed as a
minimum of the following equipments.
(i) Equipment for preparation of asphalt-The mixing plant shall have a storage tank
which heating devices are steam coils or oil coil, electricity or other means such
that no flame shall come into direct contact with the storage tank. Every device
shall be capable to efficiently work. Suitable means shall be provided to control
asphalt temperature to the specification. Circulation system shall be suitable to
allow asphalt to continuously circulate while working. Devices which provide or
maintain heating at the circulating pipes may be steam jacket or hot oil jacket or
insulation to keep the temperature of asphalt in the transfer lines, the asphalt
meter, the distribution pipes, the asphalt tank and others to the specified
temperature. End of the circulating pipe shall be below the asphalt level in the
tank while the pump is working.
(ii) Cold bin and aggregate feeder-The mixing plant shall have bins with at least 4
compartments for separating aggregates or other material of each fraction. The
cold feed gates shall be adjustable. The cold bins shall be provided with suitable
aggregate feeder capable to uniformly feed aggregates to dryer correct to the
required proportions. The feeder for fine aggregate bin e.g. stone dust or sand in
particular, shall be a continuous conveyer or other conveyer which produce the
same result.
(iii) Dryer-The mixing plant shall have a dryer in good, efficiently working condition
to dry and heat aggregates to the specified temperature. Thermometric
instruments, such as electric pyrometer, accuracy to 2.5 degree Celsius shall be
provided at the mouth where the aggregates are discharged. There shall be a
recording device installed to automatically record the aggregate temperature.
(iv) Screening unit-The mixing plant shall have a screening unit to separate aggregates
from the dryer to the fractions of specified sizes. The unit shall include a scalping
screen to get rid of oversized aggregate. All screens shall be in good condition,
not torn or damaged such that passing aggregate are wrong size to the
requirement.
(v) Hot bin-The mixing plant shall have at least 4 hot bins, not including a mineral
filler storage bin, to store hot aggregate which have passed screening. The hot
bins shall have strong walls, with no leaks, which are sufficiently high to prevent
aggregate to carry over into the other bins and have a capacity to sufficiently and
uniformly supply hot aggregate to the pugmill mixer. When the plant is in full
production, each bin shall have an overflow pipe to allow aggregate overflow
from the bin to prevent aggregates from packing up into the other bins, when
the aggregate in that bin is filling.
(vi) Mineral filler storage bin-The mixing plant shall have a mineral filler storage bin
in addition to the hot bins with a scale or a feeder, which can be calibrated and
capable to properly regulate the mineral quantity to the pugmill.
(vii) Dust collector-The mixing plant shall have a dust collector which is sufficient and
suitable for collection of dust for uniformly reuse or completely or partially
disposal. The dust collector shall be capable to control dust from distribution
into the air in quantity that may cause pollution. The plant shall have both
primary and secondary collectors. The primary collector shall be a dry type and
the secondary collector shall be a wet type or others which have equivalent
efficiency.
(viii) Thermometric equipment-The mixing plant shall have an armoured thermometer
or other types with reading between 90-200 degree Celsius. The thermometer
shall be fixed at the appropriate location on the transfer line near the exit of
asphalt at the pugmill mixer. The plant shall be further equipped with a
thermometric instrument such as a dial scale mercury activated thermometer,
an electric pyrometer or other appropriate thermometers approved by the
Engineer. The device shall be placed at the exit end of aggregate bins to measure
the correct temperature when the rate of temperature change is faster than 5
degree Celsius per minute.
(ix) Asphalt control unit-The mixing plant shall have an asphalt control unit either by
weighing or volume metering. It shall be capable to regulate asphalt quantity to
be within the range of job mix formula. In case that weighing is used, the scale
shall be accurate to not less than 2 percent of the specified asphalt weight for
the mixing. In case that volume metering is used, the metering device to measure
flow of asphalt to the pugmill mixer shall be accurate. The required quantity of
asphalt may deviate by weight not greater than 2 percent.
(b) Special Requirements for Batching Plants.

(i) Weigh box or hopper-The batching plant shall have devices to accurately weigh
the aggregate in each bin. The weigh box or hopper shall be suspended from a
scale beam, sufficiently large to contain a full batch without running over. The
weigh box or hopper shall be tightly supported on fulcrum and knife edge that
they will not be thrown out of alignment or adjustments. The discharge gates of
hot bins and weigh box or hopper shall be strong with no leaks.
(ii) Pugmill mixer-The mixer shall be a twin pugmill type with heating device and
capable of producing a uniform mixture. The discharge gate shall be tightly shut
with no leak of materials when it is shut. It shall be equipped with a timelock to
automatically control the mixing time and will not release the gate until the total
specified time has elapsed. The mixer shall be equipped with a sufficient number
of paddle tips with appropriate arrangement to produce a properly and uniformly
mixed batch. The clearance between the paddle and wall shall be less than one-
half of the maximum size of aggregate.
(iii) Plant scale-The scale shall be accurate to not less than 0.5 percent of the
maximum weight of the aggregates. The dial gauge shall be large enough to be
read at the distance of 7 meters away and be in the position that can be clearly
seen by the operator. There shall be a pointer on the gauge for each bin.
Standard weight, each of 25 kilograms, not less than 10 numbers or sufficient
numbers shall be provided for calibration of the scale.
(iv) Quantity of aggregate and asphalt for each batch shall be automatically
controlled.
(c) Special Requirements for Continuous Mixing Plants
(i) Gradation control unit-The plant shall be equipped with a gradation control unit
to properly regulate the quantity of the aggregate from each hot bin consisting
of feeders below the hot bins. Feeding of the mineral filler shall be separately
equipped with a quantity control unit installed in the location capable of
controlling the feeding of the mineral filler into the pugmill to mix with the
aggregate in the dry mixing cycle prior to mix with the asphalt feeded later in the
wet mixing cycle.
(ii) Synchronization of aggregate and asphalt feed-The plant shall be equipped with
a device to control feeding the aggregate of each bin size and the asphalt into
the pugmill in synchronization to obtain the uniform proportioning.
(iii) Pugmill mixer unit-The mixer shall be a continuous mixer with a twin pugmill
type and a heating device capable of producing a uniform mixture. The paddles
shall be of a type adjustable for angular position on the shafts to speed the flow
of the mixture or reversible to retard the flow of the mixture. The mixer shall be
equipped with a device to control the level of the mixture. The clearance
between the paddles and wall shall be less than one-half of the maximum size
of aggregate. The mixer shall carry a manufacturer’s plate giving the net
volumetric contents of the mixer at the several heights inscribed on a permanent
plate. Moreover, There shall be a table showing the rate of feed of aggregate per
minute, at plant operating speed. Determination of the mixing time shall be by a

weight method using the following formula.
Mixing time (seconds)= A/B
Where A = Pugmill dead capacity in kilograms
B = Pugmill output in kilograms per second
(iv) Discharge hopper-The plant shall consist of a hopper for storage of the mixture
from the mixer. The hopper shall be equipped with a discharge gate at the
bottom and shall be opened to release the mixture after the hopper is full.
(v) Signal indicating aggregate quantity in hot bins-The plant shall be equipped with
a signal indicating whether aggregate quantity in the hot bins is sufficient for
operation. If the quantity in any of the hot bins is insufficient, the signal shall
alert the operator immediately. The Contractor shall stop the operation. The
correction shall be made to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to getting
permission to resume the operation.
(2) Haul Truck
The number of trucks available shall be in conformance with the production of the plant,
truck’s capacity, time to load asphalt concrete mixture on a truck, distance and time of
transportation, time for waiting and unload the asphalt concrete mixture on a paver, paving
ability of the paver and etc. The truck’s container shall have no leak. Its bed is smooth
metal, clean, free of objectionable materials. Before using for transportation of the asphalt
concrete mixture, the container shall be sprayed or coated with soap water, lime solution
or any chemicals with cutter mixing not greater than 5 percent by the approval of the
Engineer. Benzene, kerosene of diesel oil or similar is not permitted. Spraying or coating
shall be thinly done only. Prior to loading the asphalt concrete mixture into the truck’s
container, it shall be lifted to unload unnecessary material or coating.
(3) Paver of Finisher
The paver shall be self-propelled. It can consist of either steel-tract wheels or rubber-tired
wheels with equivalent quality, sufficiently powered and capable of regulating the uniform
moving speed either by self-propelled or truck-towed. The paver shall be capable to adjust
several rates of paving and to spread the asphalt concrete mixture to the correct grades
and elevations in neat and uniformly smooth appearance. The paver shall consist of main
components as follows.
(a) Tractor unit shall consist of a power generating engine with a governor to maintain
steady engine revolution while working. The hoppers, capable of shutting, shall be
attached at its sides. Slat conveyers and auger or screw conveyers are equipped on
both left and right sides, freely working from each other. Flow gates are adjustable by
their height.
(b) Screed unit shall consist of a thickness control, a crown control, a screed heater, a
screed plate and other necessary devices. A grade control and an elevation control of
asphalt concrete should be an automatic type of either (1) Erected Grade Line (2)
Mobile String Line, (3) Ski (4) Floating Beam or (5) Joint-Matching Shoe. For types (2),
(3) and (4), they should be a minimum of 9 meter long. The screed plate shall be a
minimum of 2.4 meter long and capable of extending to a minimum of 3.5 meter. It
shall be in line and elevation without bent, pits and too much wear. There shall be
an initial compaction system of either vibratory screed or tamper bar or combined

which is capable of adjusting the vibratory frequencies or tamping as required. For the
tamper bar type, the distance between the screed plate and tamper bar shall be 0.25-
0.50 millimeter. The bottom surface of the tamper bar shall be in good condition and
not worn to less than one-half of the thickness of a new one
(4) Motor Grader
A motor grader, if necessary, shall be self propelled with smooth threaded rubber tires. Its
blade shall be not less than 3.6 meter long. Its wheel base shall be not less than 4.8 meter.
Its use shall be by the judgement of the Engineer.
(5) Rollers
Each type of roller shall be self-propelled. Its weight and other properties shall be as shown
in the detailed specification for each type. Rolling weight shall be suitable to the type and
characteristics of the mixture, thickness of paving layer, sequence of compaction and
others. There shall be sufficient numbers of rollers for steady construction to get the
asphalt concrete course which its density, smoothness and other properties to the
specification. Details of vehicle weight, rolling weight, and increase the number of rollers
to the required minimum are subject to the judgement of the Engineer. Rollers shall be
the types which have been inspected and approved by the Engineer. There shall be a
minimum of one steel-wheeled tandem rollers and one vibratory roller or two steel-
wheeled tandem rollers in case that there is no vibratory roller and a minimum of three
pneumatic-tired rollers. Details of each type of rollers are as follows.
(a) Steel-wheeled tandem roller shall have a minimum weight of not less than 8 tons
and capable of increasing to not less than 10 tons. The weight per width of the wheel
shall be not less than 3.8 kilograms per millimeter. The roller shall be in good
condition, capable of forward and reverse moving. The forward, stop and reverse
propellant shall be smooth. Both wheels shall be aligned. Its surface shall be smooth
without groove, holes or pits. The king pins and wheel bearings shall be not excessively
worn such that the wheels are loosened. There shall be a water tank, a sprinkler
system, a scraper and wetting pats to absorb and distribute water to the rolling drum,
which are in good working condition and proper condition as required to prevent
adhesion of the asphalt concrete mixture to the wheels while rolling.
(b) Pneumatic-tired roller shall have a minimum weight of not less than 10 tons and can
be surcharged. There shall be not less than 9 wheels with smooth thread. The rim
diameter shall be not less than 500 millimeters. The width of a tire surface shall be
not less than 225 millimeters. The tire size and numbers of reinforcing ply shall be
equalled for all tire. At least one row of axle and tires is able to move freely up and
down. Contact pressure, while rolling, shall not be greater than 620 kilopascals (90
poundforce per square inch). There shall be a water tank, a sprinkler system, a scraper
and wetting pats to absorb and distribute water to the rolling surface, which are in
good working condition and proper condition as required to prevent adhesion of the
asphalt concrete mixture to the tires while rolling. Tire pressure for all tires shall be
equalled with a tolerance not greater than 35 kilopascals (5 poundforce per square
inch).
(c) Vibratory roller shall have a minimum weight not less than 4 tons for the asphalt
concrete layer not over 35 millimeters in thickness and not less than 6 tons for the
layer over 40 millimeters in thickness. It can be either single or tandem vibration. Its
frequency shall be not less than 33 hertz (2,000 revolutions per minute) and its
amplitude between 0.20-0.80 millimeter. The weight per width of the rolling wheel
shall be not less than 2.2 kilograms per millimeter. The roller shall be in good
condition capable of forward and reverse moving. Forward, stop and reverse
propellant shall be smooth. Both wheels shall be aligned. The rolling surface shall be
smooth with no holes or pits. The king pins and wheel bearings shall be not
excessively worn such that the wheels are loosened. There shall be a water tank, a
sprinkler system, a scraper and wetting pats to absorb and distribute water to the
rolling surface, to prevent adhesion of the asphalt concrete mixture to the wheels
while rolling. The vibration system shall be in good condition.
(6) Equipments and Tools for Cleaning Area of Construction
(a) Water truck shall be in good condition equipped with water spraying pipes and
accessories in working condition.
(b) Rotary broom, may be towed or self-propelled or farm-tractor mounted or other
vehicle mounted. The broom shall be revolved by mechanical means. Brushes may
be made of fiber, steel, nylon, or rattan or any appropriate material by approval of
the Engineer subject to be sufficiently efficient to clean the area of construction.
(c) Blower shall be farm-tractor mounted or other vehicle mounted consisting of large
blades capable of blowing strong wind and sufficiently efficient to clean the area of
construction.
(7) Supplementary Equipments
(a) Small vibratory compactor shall have a suitable weight to compact the asphalt
concrete in the area inaccessible by rollers or to be used for small repair. Its use shall
be by the judgement of the Engineer.
(b) Hand tamper shall be of a model and a weight suitable to tamp the asphalt concrete
in the area inaccessible by a small vibratory compactor or to be used for small repair.
Its use shall be by the judgement of the Engineer.
(c) Joint cutter shall be a type attached to a steel-wheel roller or a small cart type or
both or any types which is capable of cutting neat joint subject to the judgement of
the Engineer.
(d) Sample driller may be mechanical or electrical capable of taking a cored sample of
100 millimeters in diameter.
(e) Straightedge shall be a suitable size and 3.00 meter long.
Equipment and tools or other devices in addition to the specified ones which are to be
used and their uses shall be by the judgement of the Engineer.
3.5.2.4 Specification for Asphalt Concrete Mix Design
(1) Not less than 30 days prior to commencing asphalt concrete work, the Contractor shall
submit document of asphalt concrete mix design to the Engineer. The Engineer shall then,
send samples of material for the mixture and the document to the Department of Highways
for checking. Alternatively, the Contractor may request the Independent agency to perform
asphalt concrete mix design. All expenses shall be paid by the Contractor.
(2) General quality of materials to make asphalt concrete shall be comply with to Part II
Gradation of aggregate and asphalt cement content shall be comply with to Table 3.5-1
(3) Specification for asphalt concrete mix design shall be according to Table 3.5-3
Table 3.5-3 : Specification for Asphalt Concrete Design

Wearing Wearing Binder Base Shoulder
Course Course Course Course Course
Items
Nominal Size Nominal Size
9.5 mm. 12.5 mm.
Blows 75 75 75 75
Stability N 8006 8006 8006 7117
(lb) (1800) (1800) (1800) (1600)
Flow 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) 8-16 8-16 8-16 8-16
Percent Air Voids 3-5 3-5 3-6 3-6
Percent Voids in Mineral
Aggregate (VMA) Min 15 14 13 12
Stability /Flow Min
N/0.25 mm. 712 712 712 645
(lb/0.01 in.) -160 -160 -160 -145
Percent Strength Index Min 75 75 75 75
Note : (a) Testing for the asphalt concrete mixture design shall be in comply with AASHTO T245 “Resistance to
Plastic Flows of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus”
(b) In the design of the asphalt concrete shoulder comply with to the specification in Table 3. 5- 3, the
aggregate with the nominal size of 12. 5 millimeters shall be used except the case that a binder course
is also used for shoulder, then the specification for the binder course is applied to the shoulder, as well.
(c) Test to determine percent strength index shall be comply with AASHTOT165 ”Effect of Water on Cohesion
of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures”. The test in this requirement shall be considered its suitability by
the Engineer.
(4) The Engineer shall be the authority to check or carry out the asphalt concrete mix design
including specifying the job mix formula which shall be within the limits shown in Table
3.5-4 for construction control.
In case that the Engineer considers to specify the allowable tolerance of the job mix
formula different from Table 3.5-4, it can be done as appropriate.
(5) If the aggregate of any size or the asphalt cement content or any properties, for mixing of
the asphalt concrete in the field, deviate from the allowable tolerance specified in the job
mix formula, it shall be considered that the quality of the asphalt concrete mixture does
not conform to the specification. The Contractor shall do the improvement. All expenses
shall be paid by the Contractor.
(6) The Contractor may request to change the job mix formula if the material for mixing of the
asphalt concrete mixture change by any reasons. Any change of the job mix formula shall
be priorly approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall check, correct, change, modify or
specify a new job mix formula as appropriate throughout the work.
Table 3.5-4 : Allowable Tolerance for Job Mix Formula

Passing Sieve Size Percent
2.36 mm. (No.8) and over 
1.18 mm. (No.16), 0.600 mm. (No.30) 
and 0.300 mm. (No.50)
0.150 mm. (No.100) 
0.075 mm. (No.200) 
Asphalt Content 
(7) For testing and checking of every asphalt concrete mix design or every contract, the
Contractor shall pay all fee.
3.5.3 EXECUTION
(1) Preparation Prior to Construction
(a) Preparation of Aggregate and Mineral Filler Area for stock piling shall be free from
objectionable materials and approved by the Engineer.
Stock piling for material of each size shall be clearly separate by some distance away
or a bin is made for each material type and size to prevent from blending with each
other or blending with other material. Material piling shall be properly done by piling
in layers to prevent any segregation. Each layer shall not be higher than a single pile
when unloaded from a truck. If the next layer is to be piled, the top of the pile shall
be levelled. Material should not be piled in cone shaped.
There shall be measures to prevent wetting of the material by stock piling in the
roofed area, or covered with canvasses or sheets of any suitable materials or by any
methods approved by the Engineer.
The material of each type when feeded to the mixing plant shall have a moisture
content not over the limit recommended by the manufacturer of the plant. This will
allow the plant being in efficiently working condition. The aggregate of each type, prior
to use, shall be confined in the separate cold bin. Mixing of each aggregate type shall
be only made through the cold bins. The mixing of aggregate outside the cold bins is
not permitted for any case. The mineral filler, if to be used, shall be separately
confined in the mineral filler bin. Feeding of the mineral filler shall be separated from
the other materials directly to the pugmill mixer.
(b) Preparation of Asphalt
Asphalt cement in the asphalt tank shall have a temperature not greater than 100
degree Celsius (212 degree Farenheit). When mixing with aggregate, it shall be heated
to 159  8 degree Celsius (318  15 degree Farenheit) or to the temperature where
viscosity of the asphalt is 170  20 Centistokes or to the temperature specified in the
job mix formula. Feeding of the asphalt cement to the pugmill mixer shall be
continuous and steady at the specified temperature.
(c) Preparation of Equipments for Construction

Equipments shall be in good working condition, pass 1 the quality check and/or
calibrated according to the specified list and procedures and be permitted to use by
the Engineer. There shall be sufficient numbers of equipments, tools and devices to
continuously perform the asphalt concrete construction without delay or obstruction.
During the construction, they shall be mintained in good working condition.
(d) Preparation of Construction Area
(i) Subbase, base or shoulder shall be uniformly smooth, elevationed and graded
according to the Drawings prior to the construction of asphalt concrete layer. In
case that the subbase or base or shoulder is damaged, undulated, pitted, soft or
not correct to the Drawings, the roadbed shall have been corrected by the
approval of the Engineer.
(ii) If the existing asphalt surface to be overlaid with asphalt concrete consists of a
irregular surface or be undulated and without levelling layer, it shall be uniformly
shaped. If there are pot holes, cracks, softs or other damages of any pavement
layers, they shall be cut or excavated and skin patched or deep patched,
whatever the case, obtaining a densely compacted and smooth surface to the
elevation and grade according to the Drawings. The material to be used shall be
of good quality, size and quantity suitable to the damage characteristics and area
to be repaired.
(iii) Base or shoulder, which the prime coat has been stripped of or damaged, shall
be corrected by the procedure specified by the Engineer and left in place over
the curing period before overlaying the asphalt concrete.
(iv) Base or shoulder, which the prime coat has been stripped of over a continuous
area much more than to be repaired complying with 3.4.3.1 (1) (a) The base or
shoulder should be scarified and re-compacted to the specified density and re-
prime coated, left in place until reaching the cured time for such asphalt before
overlaying the asphalt concrete.
(v) Base or shoulder, which has been prime coated for a long period, but is not
overlaid with asphalt concrete under normal operation. If the prime coat is still
in good condition, before construction of the asphalt concrete layer, it may be
considered to apply tack coat over the surface, subject to the judgement of the
Engineer.
(vi) To overlay the asphalt concrete on the existing surface consisting of a sag and
depression or local depression area but not soft shall be done as follows.
 In case that the sag and depression area is not over 30 millimeter deep, the
asphalt concrete levelling may be done separately or done together with
the overlaying subject to the judgement of the Engineer. However, the total
thickness of the layer shall be not greater than 80 millimeters. If it is over
80 millimeters, levelling of the sag and depression area shall be separately
done.
 In case that the sag and depression area is over 50 millimeters deep,
levelling of the sag and depression area shall be separately done in layers
which each layer is not over 50 millimeter thick.
The asphalt concrete levelling layer shall be compacted with pneumatic-

tired rollers to the specified density before laying the next asphalt concrete
layer.
(vii) Subbase, base, shoulder or existing asphalt surface to be overlaid with the
asphalt concrete shall be clean, free of dirt, dirty materials or objectionable
materials.
(viii) Cleaning of the subbase, base, shoulder or existing asphalt surface to be overlaid
with asphalt concrete, shall be done by sweeping loose material and sand, which
has been spreaded over the prime coat, with a broom. The rate of revolution
and pressure applied on the subbase, base, shoulder or existing asphalt surface
shall be adjusted to be suitable not to damage the layer. A blower is then used
to blow out all dirt and loose material.
(ix) In case that there is dirt smear or hardened material adhered to the base,
shoulder or existing asphalt surface to be overlaid by asphalt concrete, the
hardened smear shall be removed by any suitable tools specified or approved
by the Engineer. Striping, and wasting shall be done until clean and the surface
is left until dry. A broomer is used to sweep and a blower is used to blow the
dirt and loose material.
(x) If the existing asphalt surface is bleeding, prior to the construction of asphalt
concrete overlay, it shall be corrected by wiping off or other suitable methods
specified or approved by the Engineer.
(xi) Existing asphalt concrete or any asphalt concrete layer to be overlaid with asphalt
concrete shall have been tack coated.
(xii) Edge of any concrete structure or any cut surface of any existing asphalt concrete
layer connecting to the new asphalt concrete shall have been tack coated.
(xiii) A concrete bridge deck to be overlaid with asphalt concrete, crack sealer and
excessed joint filler adhered to the concrete deck, shall be completely removed,
washed until clean the surface is left until dry. A broomer is used to sweep and
a blower is used to blow all dirt. Tack coat is the applied to the bridge deck.
(1) Production Control of Asphalt Concrete Mixture at the Mixing Plant
(a) Quality control of asphalt concrete mixture.The aggregate and asphalt cement shall
have properties comply with 3.5.2 Product. Quality of the asphalt concrete mixture
shall be uniformly correct to the job mix formula specified for the asphalt concrete.
(b) Control of asphalt concrete mixing time. The mixing plant shall be equipped with an
automatic timer capable of setting and adjusting time for dry mixing and wet mixing
as required. For a batching plant, time for dry mixing and wet mixing should be
approximately 15 and 30 seconds, respectively. For a continuous plant, time for mixing
is to be calculated according to 3.5.2 Product.
Mixing of the asphalt concrete by either process shall produce uniform asphalt concrete mixture.
In case that, after mixing for the specified period, the mixture is still not uniform, the mixing time
may be increased, but the total mixing time shall be not over 60 seconds subject to the judgement
of the Engineer.
To specify the mixing time for any mixing plants, it shall be done by performing the test to
determine asphalt content coating aggregate surface in comply with AASHTO T195 “Degree of
Particle Coating of Bituminous-Aggregate Mixtures”
Table 3.5-5 : Asphalt Content of Aggregate Surface Coating
Asphalt Content of Aggregate Surface
Asphalt Concrete Layer
Coating Percent of surface area
Base not less than 90
Wearing, Binder, shoulder, levelling not less than 95
(c) Control of the temperature of aggregate prior to mixing and the temperature of asphalt
concrete mixture
(i) The aggregate, prior to mixing, shall be heated to the temperature of 163  8
degree Celsius (325  15 degree Farenheit) Its moisture content shall be not over
1 percent by mass of aggregate. While mixing with the asphalt cement in the
mixing plant, the temperature shall be as specified in the job mix formula.
(ii) The asphalt cement, while storing in the storage tank, shall have the temperature
not over 100 degree Celsius (212 degree Farenheit). When it is to be mixed with
the aggregate in the mixing plant, it shall be heated to the temperature of 159
 8 degree Celsius (318  15 degree Farenheit) or at the temperature which its
viscosity be 170  20 centistokes or at the temperature as specified in the job
mix formula.
(iii) The asphalt concrete mixture, after mixing is completed but before hauling out
of the mixing plant, shall have the temperature between 121-168 degree Celsius
(250-335 degree Farenheit) or as specified in the job mix formula. If the
temperature is different from this, the asphalt concrete mixture is not permitted
to use.
(iv) There shall be records of temperatures of the aggregate passing the dryer, the
asphalt cement prior to mixing with the aggregate and the asphalt concrete
mixture throughout the operation by using automatic temperature recorders
which are available for inspection any time. The Contractor shall submit the
records of temperatures to the Engineer every operating day.
(v) Temperature measurement of the asphalt concrete mixture in a hauling truck
shall be done by an instant thermometer. The temperature measurement shall
be done through the holes drilled on both sides of the truck at about mid-length
and about 150 millimeters high above the bed. The temperature measurement
and recording shall be done for every truck.
(2) Hauling of Asphalt Concrete Mixture
Hauling of the asphalt concrete mixture from the mixing plant to the construction site shall
be done with the prepared haul trucks. There shall be a canvas or any suitable material
sheet covering the asphalt concrete mixture during the hauling for maintaining temperature
and preventing rain or any dirty material.
(3) Spreading of Asphalt Concrete Mixture
Spreading of the asphalt concrete mixture shall be continuously done with a uniform rate
of spreading calculated in conformance with the plant capacity and other related factors.
Quantity of the asphalt concrete from the screed unit shall be uniform thoroughly the
width of spreading area. While spreading, the paver should be uniformly supplied from the
haul trucks through the screw conveyers of both sides to the screed unit at the constant
level of the asphalt concrete mixture. The operation shall be utmostly continuous. In the
screed unit, the rate of tamping by the tamper bar and the vibratory frequency and
amplitude of the vibratory screed unit shall be constant and suitable to the type and
thickness of the asphalt concrete layer. The spreading surface of the uncompacted asphalt
concrete mixture shall be uniformly dense and smooth both transversely and longitudinally
without tearing, shoring, segregation of the asphalt concrete mixture or any other damages.
While spreading, if there are any damages, correction shall be made immediately. The
asphalt concrete mixture which is adhered to be hard lump shall not be used.
Surface condition prior to spreading of asphalt concrete mixture shall be dry. While it is
raining or the surface is wet, the spreading of asphalt concrete mixture is prohibited.
Temperature of the asphalt concrete mixture while spreading shall not deviate from the
temperature at the mixing plant specified by the Engineer by not greater than 14 degree
Celsius (57 degree Farenheit) and not less than 120 degree Celsius (248 degree Farenheit).
Temperature of the spreaded asphalt concrete mixture shall be periodically measured
during the spreading. If the temperature the of the asphalt concrete mixture does not
conform to the specified temperature, causes shall be investigated and corrections are
made immediately.
Prior to construction of any asphalt concrete layer, the edge line shall be made by string
lining fixed to the area to be spreaded with the asphalt concrete mixture or any suitable
aligning means approved by the Engineer, especially when spreading of the first traffic lane
for each layer is made. This will make the asphalt concrete layer to the proper line
according to the Drawings. The operation does not include the spreading of asphalt
concrete mixture next to curbs and gutters or any structures which consist of correct lines
to the Drawings.
(a) Transverse joint construction-The transverse joint is meant by the line of construction
of the asphalt concrete layer transversely at the end of daily construction
Transverse joint can be constructed by many ways as follows.
(i) Use of a formwork, which its thickness equals to the thickness of the asphalt
concrete layer, placing at the end of construction for each section in
perpendicular to the line of construction. When spreading of asphalt concrete
over the formwork, the layer is allowed to taper enough to not interrupt the
traffic passing through. It may be allowed to use sand cushion underlying the
tapered portion, for convenience of stripping the tapered asphalt concrete, by
the judgement of the Engineer.
(ii) Use of a ready-made card board or any material specifically for making a
transverse joint, which is workable according to the objectives and approved by
the Engineer, placing at the end of working section in perpendicular to the line
of construction. It shall be overlaid with asphalt concrete mixture tapering for a
sufficient length not to interrupt the traffic passing through.
When it is to continue spreading of the asphalt concrete layer from the transverse
joint, the formwork, card board or ready-made sheet including the tapered
asphalt concrete portion shall be removed. The transverse joint shall be checked
with a straightedge. If the elevation or thickness of the layer at the joint does not
conform to the Drawings, such portion of the asphalt concrete layer shall be cut
off to the area which the elevation and thickness is correct by cutting the joint
with a pavement power saw in straight and perpendicular line. The joint shall be
applied with thin tack coat to bond with the new asphalt layer.
In case that the spreading of asphalt concrete mixture is interrupted by any
reasons during the construction such that the temperature of the asphalt
concrete mixture in front of the screed unit decrease to lower than the specified
temperature, a transverse joint shall be made at this location by cutting the area
which its thickness and compaction are according to the Drawings. The cutting
shall be in straight and perpendicular line. The joint shall be applied with thin
tack coat to bond with the new asphalt concrete layer.
The spreading of asphalt concrete mixture for each traffic lane shall be done
such that, the construction joints be staggered a minimum of 5 meters and shall
not be weak areas which may cause any damages later.
The spreading of asphalt concrete mixture for a multiple layers shall be done
such that the construction joint on the top layer be distanced away by a
minimum of 5 meters and be staggered from the joint on the adjacent lane by a
minimum of 5 meters, as well.
Spreading of the asphalt concrete layer to any transverse joint shall be checked
of its elevation by using a straightedge at the first dump. If the elevation is not
as specified, correction shall be made while the asphalt concrete mixture is still
hot.
(b) Longitudinal joint-Prior to spreading the asphalt concrete adjacent to the finished
traffic lane, a longitudinal joint shall be made using a power saw by cutting in
perpendicular to the surface to be overlaid. The joint shall be a straight line, neat and
sharp, not torn. The join shall then be applied with thin tack coat to bond with the
layer to be attached. The spreading of asphalt concrete adjacent to the finished traffic
lane shall be done by either one of the two methods.
(i) The asphalt concrete mixture shall be spreaded into the finished adjacent traffic
lane by 25-50 millimeters. The overlapped mixture shall be pushed to attach the
joint line sufficiently higher than the outside elevation such than when it is
compacted, the joint shall be dense and smooth at the same elevation to the
constructed lane.
(ii) The asphalt concrete mixture shall be spreaded overlapping into the finished
adjacent traffic lane by 25-50 millimeters. Large sized aggregate at the
overlapping area shall be removed. When it is compacted, there shall be a dense
longitudinal joint, not rough but smooth to the same elevation of the constructed
lane.
In spreading of multiple asphalt concrete layers, each layer shall have a longitudinal
joint staggered by not less than 150 millimeters. For a two traffic lane, the longitudinal
joint of the top layer shall be at the center line. For multiple lanes, the longitudinal
joints of the top layer shall be at the lane edge according to the Drawings.
Spreading of asphalt concrete mixture for multiple lanes by using multiple pavers, the
mixture spreaded by the following paver shall be overlapping to the lane which
spreaded by the prior paver by 25-50 millimeters. It is not necessary to cut a
longitudinal joint and applying tack coat in this case.
(c) Spreading of asphalt concrete mixture in a curve, shall begin from the inside traffic
lane outward to the outside traffic lane. In the rainy season, the construction to the
full curve shall be done at the soonest to prevent any water ponding on the pavement
layer.
(d) Thickness of the uncompacted asphalt concrete layer shall be checked throughout
the width of the layer in intervals, each is not over 8 meters. If the thickness deviates
from the specified value, the layer shall be raked and added with a proper mixture
and shaped to the uniform elevation. The thickness shall be rechecked.
(e) In the area unaccessible by a paver, or not suitable to operate by a paver, a grader
may be used for spreading of the asphalt concrete mixture subject to the judgement
of the Engineer. The layer shall be checked for smoothness and correct elevation by
a straightedge.
(f) In the confined area or area to be levelled, the area with obstruction or any areas
where a paver or a grader cannot be used for operation or not suitable or not
convenient for operation, spreading of the asphalt concrete mixture may be done
manually subject to the judgement of the Engineer. The manual operation shall be
done by using a shovel to pile the asphalt concrete mixture into several single piles.
High pile, are prohibited. The mixture is shaped to smooth and uniform elevation and
checked by a straightedge.
(g) Smoothness of the asphalt concrete mixture spreading shall be checked after the first
compaction by using a straightedge placing over the surface. If it is necessary to relevel,
it shall be done while the temperature of the mixture is still hot.
(4) Compaction of Asphalt Concrete Mixture
Compaction of the asphalt concrete layer shall be done with proper equipments as
specified with sufficient numbers such that the construction of asphalt concrete layer be
commenced in normal operation, without any obstruction or interruption. Equipments shall
be inspected, calibrated prior to work to suit the specified lists and procedures and be
permitted by the Engineer.
Compaction shall be immediately done after spreading of the asphalt concrete mixture
beginning while the mixture is still hot at the temperature between 120–150 degree Celsius
(248–302 degree Farenheit). After compaction, the asphalt concrete layer shall be dense,
uniformly smooth to the elevation and grade according to the Drawings. There shall be no
cracks, shovings, ripples, roller marks or any damages of the asphalt concrete layer.
In case that the compaction method is not specified otherwise, the compaction shall be
done as follows.
(a) General principle of compaction shall begin with rolling at the joints. After that, the
initial or breakdown rolling shall be done by a roller following as close as possible
after the paver. The compacting layer shall have no cracks. There shall be no adhesion
of the mixture to the roller wheels. The intermediate rolling shall then follow as close
as possible after the initial rolling. The operation shall be done, while the temperature
is suitable, to compact the mixture to the specified density. The finish rolling shall be
done, while the temperature of the asphalt concrete mixture is still suitable, to neatly
erase the roller marks from the previous rollings.
Rolling shall begin from the lower edge of the asphalt concrete layer or the outside
edge and proceed toward the center line by overlapping the prior rolling except the
rolling at the super elevation which rolling shall begin at the lower edge to the higher
edge with overlapping. Rolling shall be operated parallel to the center line.
Overlapping shall be made about 150 millimeters. If, after rolling, there is transverse
ripples or shovings, the overlapping shall be made to a half of the wheel width.
Termination of each rolling pass shall not be the same as the previous terminating
mark but some distance away.
While rolling, if there is adhesion of the asphalt concrete mixture to the wheels, water
or any suitable material for wheel coating approved by the Engineer shall be lightly
sprayed to moist the wheel surface for prevention of the adhesion. The spraying may
be stopped if it is not needed. Roller shall be run at a low and uniform speed. The
drive wheel is as close as possible to the paver. If there is a change in rolling speed
while rolling, it shall be gradually changed. In any rolling path, forward and backward
movings shall be done in the same path. Prior to forward or backward movings, it shall
be completely stopped. If it is a vibratory roller, the vibration shall also be completely
stopped. Changing a rolling path shall be done gradually on the compacted and cool
asphalt concrete layer but not on the compacting or finished layer. A roller shall be
parked on the cool asphalt concrete layer but not on the still hot layer. If there are
some moves of the asphalt concrete layer, correction shall be made immediately by
raking to loosen the asphalt concrete mixture, adding the new mixture, shaping to the
correct elevation and compacting the mixture.
(b) Speed of rolling for general compaction shall be low and uniform. The maximum
speed depends on the type of rollers, temperature, type and thickness of asphalt
concrete mixture, sequences of rolling and other related factors. The maximum speed
for a non-vibratory roller, a vibratory steel-wheeled roller which vibration is not
applied and a pneumatic-tired roller should be according to Table 3.5-6.
The maximum speed of rolling for a vibratory roller which its frequency depends on
the impact spacing. Normally, the impact spacing is less than the thickness of
compacted asphalt concrete layer. Impacting frequency should be not less than 10
times for a distance of 300 millimeters (33 times for a distance of 1 meter) of roller
moving. Appropriate speed of a vibratory roller at any frequency and specified impact
spacing should be according to Table 3.5-7.
Table 3.5-6 : Speed of Roller in Compaction

Speed of Roller
Type of Roller Initial Rolling ntermediate Rolling Finish Rolling
Km/hr Mile/hr Km/hr Mile/hr Km/hr Mile/hr
Steel wheeled Tandem Roller 3 2 5 3 5* 3*
Pneumatic-tired Roller 5 3 5 3 8 5
Vibrating Roller** 4-5 2.5-3 4-5 2.5-3 - -
* Include vibratory roller without –applying vibration
** See also Table 3.5-7
Table 3.5-7 : Relation between Speed, Frequency and Number of Impact

Frequency Vibration Number of Impact for 1 meter Distance*
Hertz (Revolutions per Minute) (Number of Impact for 1 foot Distance)
30 (1,800) 45.0 33.8 27.0 22.5 19.3
(13.6) (10.2) (8.2) (6.8) (5.8)
33 (2,000) 50.0 37.5 30.0 25.0 21.4
(15.2) (11.4) (9.1) (7.6) (6.5)
37 (2,200) 55.0 41.3 33.0 27.5 23.6
(16.7) (12.5) (10.0) (8.3) (7.1)
40 (2,400) 60.0 45.0 36.0 30.0 25.7
(18.2) (13.6) (10.9) (9.1) (7.8)
43 (2,600) 65.0 48.8 39.0 32.5 27.9
(19.7) (14.8) (11.8) (9.8) (8.4)
47 (2,800) 70.0 52.5 42.0 35.0 30.0
(21.2) (15.9) (12.7) (10.6) (9.1)
50 (3,000) 75.0 56.3 45.0 37.5 32.1
Speed of Roller (22.7) (17.0) (13.6) (11.4) (9.7)
Km/hr 2.4 3.2 4.0 4.8 5.6
Mile/hr 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
M/min 40.0 53.3 66.7 80.0 93.3
Ft/min 132 176 220 264 308
* The range, which should be used, is typed in bold
(c) A test section for determining the pattern of rolling, prior to begin the construction of
asphalt concrete layer, should be implemented for a proper use of available rollers
and obtain the maximum benefit.
The test section should be about 100 – 150 meter long, to set the pattern of rolling
suitable to the type, number, condition of the equipments. When the compaction is
completed, the asphalt concrete layer shall be neat, uniformly dense, at the elevation
and grade according to the Drawings and shall have properties according to the
specification. The test section shall be constructed by adjusting of the usage or
increasing of the number of equipments, whatever the case, until it is capable of
compaction as specified and approved by the Engineer. It is then used as the criteria
for construction of asphalt concrete layer for the project. During the construction, if
there is any change of asphalt concrete mixture or equipments and others, it may be
considered to adjust or construct a new test section to retry its suitability subject to
the judgement of the Engineer.
To specify the pattern of rolling for any fleet of equipments for the project, the
Contractor shall carry out the rolling test to determine size of area for rolling in relation
to the plant capacity, spreading rate of asphalt concrete mixture to know the number
of trips coverage the full width, number of trips to recompact at each rolling pass,
speed of each type of roller and others.
(d) Sequence of rolling of the asphalt concrete layer for the first traffic lane or for the full
width shall be carried out in following orders (1) transverse joint rolling (2) outside
edge rolling (3) initial rolling (4) intermediate rolling (5) finish rolling
For spreading of the asphalt concrete layer of multiple traffic lanes or spreading of a
new asphalt concrete layer attached to the finished existing traffic lane or attached
to line of existing structure, rollings shall be carried out in following orders (1)
transverse joint rolling (2) longitudinal joint rolling (3) outside edge rolling (4) initial
rolling (5) intermediate rolling (6) finish rolling.
(i) Transverse joint rolling shall be done by a steel-wheeled tandem roller or a
vibratory roller without applying vibration. For the construction of the asphalt
concrete layer of the first traffic lane, prior to rolling of the transverse joint, a
wooden board of suitable thickness should be placed at both sides of the joint
to support the roller wheel when rolling beyond the edges of asphalt concrete
layer. This is to prevent the edges of the asphalt concrete layer at both ends of
the transverse joint from damage. When it is finished, the transverse joint rolling
is done in the first trip by allowing the roller run on the finished asphalt concrete
layer and the roller wheel overlaps into the new spreading layer of asphalt
concrete for about 50 millimeters. The smoothness of the joint is checked by a
straightedge. If it is not proper, correction shall be made immediately. In the
following trips, the rolling line shall be gradually moved by about 150-200
millimeters until the wheel of roller is on the new layer in full.
For the construction of the asphalt concrete layer of the traffic lane adjacent to
the finished traffic lane, the first rolling shall be done at the end of construction
joint connecting to the longitudinal joint in parallel to the longitudinal joint for a
distance about 0.5-1.0 meter. The smoothness of the joint is checked by a
straightedge. If it is not proper, correction shall be made immediately. It is
followed by transverse joint rolling. Prior to rolling, a wooden board of a suitable
thickness should be placed at the outside edges of the joint. The rolling shall be
done as aforementioned procedure.
(ii) Longitudinal joint rolling – There are 2 types of joint
Cold joint or old joint means the longitudinal joint between the finished,
compacted asphalt concrete traffic lane and the new adjacent asphalt concrete
layer.
In the longitudinal joint rolling, when a non vibratory steel – wheeled roller is
used, the first trip of rolling shall be done by allowing the majority of the wheel
over the finished asphalt concrete layer, but about 100 – 150 millimeters of the
wheel be on the new spreaded asphalt concrete layer. In the successive trips,
the wheel shall be moved gradually toward the new spreaded layer until the full
width of wheel is over the new spreded layer. In case that a vibratory roller is
used, the first trip of rolling shall be done by allowing the majority of the wheel
over the new spreaded layer but only about 100-150 millimeters in the finished
layer. Repetition of the rolling on the same pass shall be implemented until the
longitudinal joint is neat and compacted to specified density.
Hot joint or new joint means the longitudinal joint of asphalt concrete layer
between the traffic lanes which being constructed at the same time with two
sets of paver.
In the longitudinal joint rolling of this type, a steel – wheeled tandem roller shall
be used to compact both sides of the joint about 400 millimeters wide which is
exempted from initial rolling. The rolling shall be done by setting the longitudinal
joint at the center of the width of wheel until the joint is neatly made and
compacted to the specified density.
(iii) Initial of breakdown rolling–After joint rolling has been completed, initial rolling
shall be commenced. When the temperature of the asphalt concrete mixture is
not less than 120 degree Celsius (248 degree Farenheit), the rolling may be done
with either non-vibratory or vibratory rollers. Vehicle weight, rolling weight, weight
per width of wheel, frequency of vibration, impact spacing, speed of roller and
other related factors shall be considered to be suitable to the type,
characteristics, stability, temperature, thickness of the layer and roadway
condition to be overlaid with the asphalt concrete layer. Rolling shall begin from
the low side to the high side or the outside edge to the inside edge of the layer.
Rolling by a vibratory roller shall be done using a suitable vibration frequency
and an impact spacing. The frequency should be between 33 – 50 hertz (2,000 –
3,000 revolutions per minutes) and the impact spacing should be between 0.2-
0.8 millimeter. For rolling of a wearing course or shoulder surface, high frequency
and low impact spacing should be used. For other asphalt concrete layer which
is not a wearing course and its thickness is over 50 millimeters, a low frequency
and a high impact spacing may be used. However, the frequency and impact
spacing of a roller should be considered from the test section reference to 3.4.3
EXECUTION
Rolling of asphalt concrete with thickness less than 25 millimeters shall be
specially considered. If a steel – wheeled tandem roller is used, vibration should
not be employed. If vibration is to be applied, the impact spacing shall be low
such that it will not cause any damages to the asphalt concrete layer, i.e.
depression, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Rolling of asphalt concrete with thickness between 25-50 millimeters, if a
vibratory roller is used, a high frequency and a low impact spacing should be
used.
Rolling of asphalt concrete with thickness over 50 millimeters with a vibratory
roller, if the layer is not a wearing course, a high impact spacing may be used,
but for a wearing course, a high frequency of vibration and a low impact spacing
should be used.
Rolling of asphalt concrete with thickness over 50 millimeter and without
structure line such as curb or finished asphalt concrete layer as a lateral
resistance, if, by rolling in normal procedure there is any lateral movement, the
procedure shall be changed by specifying the first trip of rolling be distanced
away from the edge by about 300 millimeters. Then, the rollings shall normally
continue. After rolling of the full width of the layer has been finished, the final
trip of rolling shall be done at the edge over the left, un compacted portion.
Construction of two traffic lane asphalt concrete simultaneously, the initial
rolling, be done simultaneously on both lanes, but about 200 millimeters from
the hot joint or new joint shall be excluded. The area shall be compacted with
hot joint or new joint rolling continuously.
(iv) Intermediate rolling shall be done while the temperature of the asphalt concrete
layer be not less than 95 degree Celsius (203 degree Farenheit). The Intermediate
rolling shall be done in the same pattern as the initial rolling by following the
initial rolling to the nearest and continuously done until uniformly specified
density is obtained.
Intermediate rolling shall be normally done by pneumatic-tired rollers, especially
on an asphalt concrete wearing course and a shoulder surface. Vehicle weight
and tire pressure shall be adjusted to obtain the suitable contact tire pressure
for the compaction layer.
For other asphalt concrete layers or the layer with thickness over 50 millimeters
which is not a wearing course or a shoulder surface, a steel – wheeled roller or
a vibratory roller may be used in complimentary with pneumatic-tired rollers as
appropriate. The vehicle weight, rolling weight, weight per width of wheel,
frequency of vibration, impact spacing and other related factors suitable to the
compacting layer shall be subject to the judgement of the Engineer.
(v) Finish rolling is purposed to remove roller marks on the surface and to smoothen
the surface only. It shall commence when the temperature of the asphalt
concrete layer is not less than 66 degree Celsius (150 degree Farenheit) A non-
vibratory roller or a vibratory roller without applying vibration shall be used. The
vehicle weight, rolling weight, weight per width of wheel and other related factors
shall be suitable to the compacting asphalt concrete layer.
(vi) Rolling on Special Areas
Rolling on steep grade – For an asphalt concrete layer constructed on a steep
grade or in high super elevation curve, rolling shall be done by a non-vibratory
roller using tiller wheel in the front following the paver to the nearest wherever
the paver goes up or down the slope. Rolling by a vibratory roller shall be done
without vibration in the first trip, but after the stability of the asphalt concrete
mixture increase enough, the rolling with vibration may be used, it can be
continued with vibration using low impact spacing.
Rolling on the asphalt concrete mixture in the inaccessible area by rollers. For a
construction area which is inaccessible by roller, e.g., area adjacent to a curb and
gutter, a bridge, a manhole, or other obstructions, small compactors may be used

subject to the judgement of the Engineer.
Rolling on the bell mouth area may be done in either of the 2 ways.
 Diagonal rolling shall be done firstly by rolling at the corner then rolling
parallel to the curve.
 Parallel rolling shall be done firstly by rolling perpendicular to the center
line, then rolling parallel to the curve.
(5) Traffic Control during the Construction
During the construction of the asphalt concrete layer, traffic shall be managed and
controlled not to pass on the newly constructed layer until it is cooled enough for the
traffic passing without causing any marks on the layer. Traffic sign and other necessary traffic
control devices shall be installed as specified. Workmen shall be provided to direct the
traffic to conveniently and safely pass the construction area and not cause any damages
to the newly constructed asphalt concrete layer. Time to open and close to the traffic
shall be subjected to the judgement of the Engineer.
3.5.3.3 Inspection
(1) Inspection of Surface Texture
The finished asphalt concrete layer shall be true to elevation and grade according to the
Drawings with uniform surface texture and compaction. There shall be no indication of
surface pull, torn, loose, segregation, ripple or any damages. If the inspection shows any
damages, correction shall be made to satisfactory of the Engineer.
(2) Checking of Surface Tolerance
When a straightedge is placed on the surface of the asphalt concrete layer in the directions
of perpendicular and parallel to the centerline, the elevation shall deviate by not greater
than 6 millimeters and 3 millimeters, respectively.
(3) Field Density Check
Density of asphalt concrete layer shall be inspected by comparing the densities of the
samples of the asphalt concrete layer with the densities of the samples compacted in the
laboratory in comply with AASHTO T245 “Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures
Using Marshall Apparatus”, calculating in percentage of the densities of the samples
compacted in the laboratory.
(a) Preparation of Asphalt Concrete Specimen in the Laboratory
Asphalt concrete mixture shall be randomly sampled at intervals from the haul trucks,
at the mixing plant before transporting to the construction site from daily production.
The samples shall be taken to the laboratory enough for preparing a minimum of 8
specimens in each working day for testing of density. The densities of all specimens
shall be averaged to be the daily testing density for comparation calculation of
percentage of density of the asphalt concrete layer in the field.
Sampling and preparation of samples of the asphalt concrete mixture shall be done
in complywith AASHTO T245 “Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using
Marshall Apparatus”,Temperature of the asphalt concrete mixture while compacting
in the laboratory shall be according to the job mix formula. The samples of the asphalt
concrete mixture during the operation are allowed to keep in the oven for maintaining
the temperature for compaction as specified but not greater than 30 minutes. During
the operation, if the temperature of the mixture sample decrease to lower than the
specified temperature for compaction, the sample shall be discarded. It cannot be
ovened to increase the temperature for compaction to make the test specimens.
(b) Preparation of Asphalt Concrete Samples in the Field
Samples of the asphalt concrete layer in the field, after the construction is completed,
shall be cored by a coring machine. The samples shall be taken at 250 meter interval
or one sample for one hundred tons of asphalt concrete mixture. The samples shall
be tested for density in apply with AASHTO T245 “Resistance to Plastic Flow of
Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus”.
For a wearing course, binder course and levelling course with thickness not less than
25 millimeters, field density of the asphalt concrete layer shall be not less than 98
percent of the daily averaged density of the test specimens.
For a base course and shoulder, field density of the asphalt concrete layer shall be
not less than 97 and 96 percent of the daily averaged density of the test specimens,
respectively
3.6 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENT

3.6.1 DESCRIPTION
3.6.1.1 Scope
This work shall consist of construction of surface or shoulder by application of asphalt and
spreading over with Crushed Aggregates by a single layer or multiple layers, on the base course
which has been prime coated or any other prepared roadbed.
3.6.2 PRODUCTS
3.6.2.1 Materials
(1) Asphalt
Asphalt shall pass quality tests and be of types and grades as follows.
Asphalt cement, AC 60-70, conforming to the Thai Institute of Standard, "Asphalt
Cement for Road Work", Standard No TIS 851 or
Cutback asphalt, RC-800, RC-3000, conforming to the Thai Institute of Standard, "Cutback
Asphalt", Standard No TIS 865 or
Emulsified asphalt, CRS-2, conforming to the Thai Institute of Standard, "Cationic
Emulsified Asphalt" for Road, Standard No TIS 371.
Range of application temperature for aforementioned asphalts shall be in accordance with
Table 3.6-1

Type of Asphalt
C F
AC 60-70 145-175 295-345
RC-800 100-120 210-250
RC-3000 120-160 250-310
CRS-2 50-85 125-185
(a) Use of other asphalts or asphalt which property is modified with any additives. In
addition, the materials shown above shall have quality as equal to or better. The
materials shall pass quality tests and be considered for suitability and be approved by
the Engineer, case by case.
(b) In case that the road is very steep grade, or asphalt flows before spreading Crushed
Aggregates, the Engineer may prohibit the particular emulsified asphalt or cutback
asphalt.
(c) In case that the traffic is heavy or the road cannot be closed to traffic for a Long
period, the Engineer or Owner may specify use of asphalt cement only.
(d) In case that the temperature of the surface is Lower than 15 degree Celsius, asphalt
cement is not allowed, but if it is necessary, cutter shall be added by the approval
of the Engineer. Quantity of cutter shall be specified by the Engineer but not greater
than the values shown in Table 3.6-2
Table 3.6-2 : Quantity of Cutter
Crushed Aggregates Quantity of Cutter
Nominal Size, millimeters Percent by Volume of
(Inches) Asphalt Cement at 15°C
19.0 (3/4) Not greater than 2 not greater than 4
12.5 (1/2) Not greater than 4
9.5 (3/8)
Addition of cutter to asphalt cement, in field operation, shall be done by heating the
asphalt cement to the temperature between 160-185 degree Celsius. Then, the cutter is
pumped from the cutter tank to the asphalt tank of the distributor according to the
calculated quantity. Mixture of asphalt cement and cutter shall be circulated in the asphalt
tank for about 20 minutes before the application.
While adding cutter to the asphalt tank in the distributor, for mixing with asphalt cement,
care shall be taken to prevent any sparks, for examples, Lighting, smoking or use of torch
within 15 meter radius from the distributor. Vapor of the cutter and asphalt cement, while
mixing, is flamable. In addition, care shall be taken not to allow the start of engine with
internal combustion within the mentioned area which may cause sparks which can ignite
the vapor into flame.
(2) Crushed Aggregates
Crushed Aggregates shall be clean, hard, durable, not too long or too flat, free of dirt,
soil or any objectionable materials and shall have the following properties.
(a) Abrasion Loss, when tested in comply with AASHTO T96, "Resistance to Abrasion of
Small Size Coarse Aggregate by Use of the Los Angeles Machine" shall be not greater
than 35 percent.
(b) Percentage of stripping, when tested in comply with DH- T 605 " Method for
Determination of Stripping by Plate Test Procedure" , shall be not greater than 20
percent.
(c) Flakiness index, when tested in comply with BS 812 Section 105. 1" Flakiness Index" ,
shall be not greater than 35 percent.
(d) In case that crushed gravel is used, each of sizes retained on 4. 75 millimeter sieve,
when tested in comply with DH- T 212 " Method for Determination of Percent of
Fractured Face of Crushed Gravel" , shall have at Least one fractured face not Less
than 75 percent by mass.
(e) Soundness Loss, when tested in comply with AASHTO T104, "Soundness of Aggregate
by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate" , for 5 cycles, shall be not greater
than 5 percent.
Crushed Aggregates from the sources, which there are records of acceptable test
results, may be waived from the additional tests, by the judgment of Engineer to
accept the previous test results.
(f) Sizes for each nominal size, when tested in comply with AASHTO T27 " Sieve analysis
of Fine and Coarse Aggregate", shall be comply with Table 3.6-3
Table 3.6-3 : Sizes of Crushed Aggregates
Nominal Size Quantity Passing Sieve, Percent by Mass
Millimeters
(Inches) 25.0 19.0 12.5 9.5 4.75 2.36 1.18
mm. mm. mm. mm. mm. Mm. mm.
19.0 (3/4) 100 90-100 0-30 0-8 - 0-2 0-0.5

12.5 (1/2) 100 90-100 0-30 0-4 0-2 0-0.5
9.5 (3/8) 100 90-100 0-30 0-8 0-2
(3) Pre-coating Material

Material to pre-coat Crushed Aggregates may be either kerosene or diesel oil of general
grades or any materials as approved by the Engineer.
(4) Additive
Additive shall be the type which the Engineer has checked and approved.
3.6.2.2 Selection of Sizes of Crushed Aggregates
(1) Single Surface Treatment Surface
- Use 12.5 millimeters (1/2 inch) nominal size
(2) Double Surface Treatment Surface
- Use of 19.0 millimeters (3/4 inch) nominal size for the first layer
- Use of 9.5 millimeters (3/8 inch) nominal size for the second layer
(3) Single Surface Treatment Shoulder
- Use of either 19.0 millimeters (3/4 inch) or 12.5 millimeters (1/2 inch) Nominal sizes
(4) Double Surface Treatment Shoulder
- Use of 19.0 millimeters (3/4 inch) nominal size for the first layer
- Use of 9.5 millimeters (3/8 inch) nominal size for the second layer.
3.6.2.3 Quality Control Test
Sample of aggregate material for testing shall be taken for each 500 Cu.m and sample of
asphalt shall be taken for each 10 tons or each delivery.
In case that the quantity less than specify at least 1 sample be taken for testing or specify by
the Engineer.
3.6.2.4 Equipment
Prior to beginning of construction, the contractor shall prepare equipment necessary for operation
at the work site. They shall be of types, sizes, models and in condition to work efficiently.
Following equipment shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer
(1) Asphalt Distributor
The equipment shall be self-propelled with truck-mounted or trailer-mounted asphalt tank
equipped with devices necessary for work as follows
(a) Dipstick or devices for volume measurement of asphalt in the tank.
(b) Burner
(c) Thermometer
(d) Asphalt Pump
(e) Power Unit
(f) Asphalt Spray Bar with Nozzles
(g) Asphalt Hand Spray
(h) Bitumeter
(i) Asphalt Tank
The asphalt distributor shall have circulating system with a pump which functions well for
liquid asphalt to asphalt cement and capable of the followings.
 Drawing the prepared asphalt to the tank mounted on the truck
 Circulating asphalt between the spray bar and tank
 Spraying asphalt through the spray bar or hand spray
 Drawing asphalt from the spray bar or hand spray to the tank
 Drawing asphalt from the tank to the external asphalt container
 Power units shall have pressure gauges or any controls
Asphalt pump shall be equipped with devices to measure quantity of asphalt flowing
through pump by number of revolution or pressures or any means.
Spray bar may consist of several pipes connecting together with nozzles installed at uniform
distance apart. Angles of the nozzles and spray bar shall be adjustable. The nozzles shall
be equipped with on/off control. The spray bar shall be the model through which asphalt
can be circulated. While working, the pressure throughout the spray bar shall be uniformly
maintained and can be adjusted higher or lower. Width of spray is adjustable.
Hand spray shall be the type with free movement nozzle to use in the area inaccessible
by spray bar.
Bitumeter shall consist of a speed measuring wheel with a cable leading to a speedometer
in the cap of the vehicle. The meter shall indicate the speed in meters per minute or feet
per minute with distances of trip in digits.
The asphalt tank shall be insulated. Inside the tank shall consist of heater pipes from the
burner with metal pads for heat distribution and drain pipes. The tank shall be equipped
with volume measuring devices either a dipstick type or a dial gauge type or both. There
shall be a thermometer of a dial type or an armoured type or both with the accuracy to 1
degree Celsius.
(2) Aggregate Spreader

The equipment shall be self-propelled and shall consists of following main parts.
(a) Propelling Engine
(b) Aggregate Box
(c) Feed conveyer with adjustable opening to control flow of aggregate
(d) Propelling Unit for feed roll which can adjust the roll speed
(e) Spread Hopper which the opening at the bottom can be its width to control proper
quantity and uniformity of aggregate spreading
Aggregate spreader shall be capable to spread aggregates in each pass not less than the
width of the applied asphalt. The spreader shall be approved by the Engineer prior to work.
Dump of aggregates from a truck directly on the applied asphalt is prohibited.
(3) Pre-coating Equipment
The equipment shall include the following accessories, the accessory for applying
aggregates, sieves which is capable to separate the too large and the too small aggregates
and dispose of dirt, nozzle to jet spray the pre-coated material, stirring tank or any
accessories which is capable to throughly and uniformly pre-coat Crushed Aggregates,
conveyer and other necessary accessories.
(4) Washing Equipment
The equipment shall consist of the following accessories, the accessory for applying
aggregates, sieves which is capable to separate the too large and the too small aggregates
and dispose of dirt, nozzle to jet spray water to clean aggregates, and other necessary
accessories. The pre-coating equipment in 3.6.3 EXECUTION may be used instead, but its
nozzle shall be replaced with appropriate water nozzle and/or externally water jet, capable
to clean the aggregates, may be used by the approval of the Engineer
(5) Rotary Broom
The equipment may be towed or self-propelled, or farm-tractor mounted. The broom shall
be revolved by mechanical means. Brushes may be made of fiber steel, nylon or rattan or
any other appropriate materials. Revolution speed and pressure on the road surface shall
be adjustable.
(6) Drag Broom
The equipment shall be capable to drag the aggregates spreaded by aggregate spreader to
be uniform and distributed without removal the aggregates which embed in the asphalt.
(7) Blower
The blower shall be farm-tractor mounted consisting of large blades capable of blowing
strong wind and sufficiently efficient to clean the construction area.
(8) Pneumatic Tired Roller
The equipment shall be self-propelled having not less than 9 wheels. The vehicle weight
is not less than 6 tons but not greater than 12 tons after ballasting. The wheels shall be
smooth threaded tires having equal size and number of reinforcing plies. Increase of its
gross weight and tire pressure shall be appropriate for the type of work as specified by the
Engineer. The tire pressure should be between 345-830 kilo pascals (50-120 pound force
per square inch) depending on size, type and vehicle weight.
(9) Loader
A loader shall be provided to load crushed aggregates on a truck or any conveyer for
transportation to use at work site all the time.
3.6.2.5 Design Criteria for Specifying Quantity of Material
Crushed Aggregates shall be clean, hard, durable, not too long or too flat, free of dirt, soil or
any objectionable materials and shall have the following properties.
(1) Quantity of Crushed Aggregates and quantity of asphalt is approximately as Table 3.6-4.
Table 3.6-4 : Approximate Quantity of Material
Nominal Size in millimetre (inch) 19.0 (3/4) 12.5 (1/2) 9.5 (3/8)
Crushed Aggregates Kilograms per square meter 16-22 12-18 7-11
Asphalt at Temperature 15°C
Asphalt Cement, Liters per square meter 0.8-2.1 0.6-1.5 0.4-1.0
Cutback Asphalt, Liters per square meter 1.0-2.6 0.7-1.9 0.4-1.2
(2) Quantity of materials shown in Table 3.6-4 is only suggestion. Every construction of surface
treatment, the Contractor shall submit samples of crushed aggregates and asphalt, to be
used, to the Engineer for test and design of quantity of materials per square meter. In case
that cutback asphalt or asphalt cement is used, pre- coat material and additives shall also
be submitted.
(3) For a double surface treatment, it may be necessary to adjust the design quantity of asphalt
by decrease the rate of asphalt application on the first layer and increase by the same
amount the rate of asphalt application on the second layer.
(4) If there is a change of material sources, or crushed aggregates, such that the average least
dimension deviate from the design value by over 0.3 millimeter or the Contractor requests
a change of asphalt type and grade, the Contractor shall submit samples of the crushed
aggregates and the asphalt to the Engineer for test and redesign of quantity of materials
per square meter. Every change shall be approved by the Engineer.
(5) Tests and design of quantity of materials for each surface treatment or each contract, the
contractor shall be responsible for all expenses.
(6) In the design of surface treatment, rate of asphalt application is specified at standard
temperature of 15 degree Celsius. To apply the asphalt at the temperature shown in Table
3. 6- 1 the quantity of asphalt shall be adjusted to the actual temperature by divided with
the factors presented in Table 3.6-5 for asphalt cement and cutback asphalt with specific
gravity ranging from 0.966 to 1.076 at 15 degree Celsius and in Table 3.6-6 for emulsified
asphalt.
Quantity or rate of asphalt application at working temperature
= Quantity or rate of asphalt application at 15 degree Celsius divided by the adjusting
factor
Table 3.6-5 : Temperature Adjusting Factor for Asphalt Cement and Cutback Asphalt
Temperature Adjusting Temperature Adjusting Temperature Adjusting
C Factor C Factor C Factor
15 1.000 81 0.959 147 0.920

18 0.998 84 0.957 150 0.918
21 0.996 87 0.956 153 0.916
24 0.994 90 0.954 156 0.914
27 0.993 93 0.952 159 0.913
30 0.991 96 0.950 162 0.911
33 0.989 99 0.948 165 0.909
36 0.987 102 0.946 168 0.907
39 0.985 105 0.945 171 0.905
42 0.983 108 0.943 174 0.904
45 0.981 111 0.941 177 0.902
48 0.979 114 0.939 180 0.900
51 0.978 117 0.937 183 0.899
54 0.976 120 0.936 186 0.897
57 0.974 123 0.934 189 0.895
60 0.972 126 0.932 192 0.893
63 0.970 129 0.930 195 0.892
66 0.968 132 0.928 198 0.890
69 0.967 135 0.927 201 0.888
72 0.965 138 0.925 204 0.886
75 0.963 141 0.923 - -
78 0.961 144 0.921 - -
Table 3.6-6 : Temperature Adjusting Factor for Emulsified asphalt

Temperature Adjusting Temperature Adjusting Temperature Adjusting
C Factor C Factor C Factor
15 1.000 51 0.984 87 0.969
18 0.999 54 0.983 90 0.967
21 0.997 57 0.981 93 0.966
24 0.996 60 0.980 96 0.965
27 0.995 63 0.979 99 0.964
30 0.993 66 0.978 102 0.962
33 0.992 69 0.976 105 0.961
36 0.991 72 0.975 108 0.960
39 0.989 75 0.974 111 0.959
42 0.988 78 0.972 114 0.957
45 0.987 81 0.971 117 0.956
48 0.985 84 0.970 120 0.955
3.6.3 EXECUTION
(a) Preparation of Materials
Crushed aggregates for each size shall be separately stockpiled. Inclusion of any
objectionable materials shall be prohibited.
Area for stockpile shall be free of objectionable substances and approved by the
Engineer.
(b) Inspection and Calibration of equipment
(i) Asphalt distributor, prior to work, shall be inspected and calibrated to good
working condition such that the asphalt application shall be done at proper and
uniform quantity in both transverse and longitudinal directions.When tested in
accordance with DH-T4 Method for Determination of Asphalt Quantity Applied
on the Road in Transverse Direction by Asphalt Distributor, and in accordance
with DH-T402 Method for Determination of Asphalt Quantity Applied on Road in
Longitudinal Direction by Asphalt Distributor, the asphalt shall deviate by not
greater than 17 and 15 percent, respectively.
(ii) Aggregate spreader, prior to work, shall be inspected and calibrated to be able
to spread the specified quantity of crushed aggregates uniformly over the
spreading area.
(iii) Pneumatic tired roller, prior to work, shall be inspected to proper condition. Its
gross weight and tire pressure shall be specified by the Engineer.
(iv) Haul trucks, prior to work, shall be inspected to proper condition. The number
of trucks shall be sufficient to transport the crushed aggregates to continuously
construction without delay of aggregate spreading after the asphalt application.
(v) Other equipment, in addition to the specified ones, if it is necessary to bring for
use shall be subject to the judgement of the Engineer and shall be inspected
and calibrated to proper condition prior to work.
(c) Preparation of Base Course or Existing
(i) In case that base course or existing surface to be covered with surface treatment
is not uniform or is undulating, it shall be shaped uniformly. If there are potholes,
they shall be cut or excavated and repaired with skin patching or deep patching
whatever appropriate, then densely compacted and surface smoothened.
Aggregate size and quantity shall be suitable to damage condition and area to
be repaired.
(ii) In case that prime coat on the base course has been stripped off or damaged, it
shall be repaired by the procedure specified by the Engineer. The repairment
shall be left until the asphalt is cured before the construction of surface.
(iii) In case that prime coated base course has been left for a Long period such that
stripping and damages occur continuously over the area or too much work than
being repaired as in 3.6.3 EXECUTION. The base course shall be scarified and
recompacted according to the specification and re-prime coated. It shall be left
for a period required for asphalt curing before the construction of surface.
(iv) In case of asphalt bleeding, it shall be corrected before the construction of
surface by spading or any other means specified or approved by the Engineer.
(v) Base course edge, base course and existing surface shall be clean, free of dust
and inclusion of other dirty material.
(vi) Base course or existing surface shall be cleaned by sweeping all dust, loose
materials and asphalt blotted sand with a broomer. Rate of revolution and
pressure on the base or existing surface shall be adjusted just enough not to
damage them. Then, a blower shall be used to blow all the dust and loose
particles.
(vii) In case that there is dust smear or hard patch on the base course or existing
surface, it shall be removed by any appropriate equipment as approved by the
Engineer to scratch out, and clean by washing, left until dry, use a broom to
sweep and a blower to completely blow out dust and loose materials.
(d) Pre-coating or Washing of Crushed Aggregates
(i) In case that asphalt cement or cutback asphalt is used, pre-coating shall be done
as follows.
 Crushed Aggregates shall not be too moist such that pre-coating can not be
done thoroughly. If it is too moist, the Engineer may add additive which has
been tested and allowed for use with the pre- coated material by the
amount not less than 0.5 percent by volume of the pre-coated material
making pre-coating be done thoroughly.
 Pre-coating of Crushed Aggregates shall be done by pre-coating equipment
using pre-coat material at the rate about 4-10 liters per cubic meter subject
to the type and absorption of Crushed Aggregates and type of pre-coat
material.
 Crushed Aggregates shall be screened by pre-coating equipment to separate

dust and unwanted sizes. The Crushed Aggregates is then pre-coated
thoroughly with the use of nozzle to spray pre-coating material over. The
pre-coat shall be thin, but not bleed.
 When pre-coating is finished, the crushed aggregates shall be immediately
used. If it is left long enough to dry, it shall be re-coated subject to the
judgement of the Engineer.
(ii) In case that emulsified asphalt is used, pre-coating is not required, but crushed
aggregates shall be cleaned by washing equipment. It is then be used as soon as
possible. If it is left until dry or dirty, it shall be rewashed.
(e) Use of Additives
Additives may be used with pre-coating material or directly mixed with asphalt
depending on types and suitability suggested by manufacturers.
If additive is directly mixed with asphalt, it should be done just before the work. Allow
the asphalt in the tank be circulated and uniformly mixed by approximately 20
minutes and be immediately used. Heating of the asphalt mixed with additive to the
application temperature is prohibited for a long period as the additive may loss its
quality within certain hours.
If it is necessary to reuse the asphalt mixed with additive having been heated for over
3 hours, it shall be done according to suggestions of the manufacturer and by approval
of the Engineer.
(2) Construction
(a) Single Surface Treatment Construction
The construction which consists of one application of asphalt and one spreading of
crushed aggregates and compaction to required denseness, shall be operated as
follows.
(i) Asphalt application is done by the distributor at the specified temperature in
Table 3-6 (1) at the specified rate.
(ii) When the asphalt application is finished, crushed aggregates shall be immediately
spreaded over the asphalt by the specified quantity. If there are areas partially
uncovered with the crushed aggregates or the aggregates are not uniformly
distributed, the spreading shall be done manually until the crushed aggregates
are closely and uniformly distributed.
(iii) In case that there are many passes of asphalt application, spreading of crushed
aggregates over the first pass of asphalt application shall be 100 to 150
millimeters from the inside edge of the applied asphalt. The next pass of asphalt
application shall overlap the exempted area such that asphalt shall be applied
at proper quantity and uniformly over the area.
In case that special nozzles, which capable to apply asphalt at the quantity on
the outside edge uniformly equal to the quantity inside the area, are installed at
the outermost of the spray bar, the spreading of crushed aggregates can be done
for the full surface of the pass. The special nozzles shall pass the tests of
uniformity of transversely asphalt application in comply with DH-T 401 Method
for Determination of Asphalt Quantity Applied on the Road in Transverse

Direction and shall be permitted by the Engineer.
(iv) While spreading crushed aggregates over the asphalt, pneumatic tired rollers shall
rolled over the full surface for a few passes.
(v) At least two pneumatic tired rollers are to be used and if in one hour, the work
can be done over 500 meters for one traffic lane, one additional pneumatic tired
roller is required. The number of additional pneumatic tired roller is by the
judgement of The Engineer.
(vi) After rolling for a few passes, the aggregate sweeper shall be used to sweep the
crushed aggregates which is overlayered to uniformly distributed over the asphalt
but to remove the crushed aggregates which have already been embedded in
the asphalt. The spreading shall be done twice for the full surface.
(vii) Pneumatic tired rollers shall continue rolling over the surface until the crushed
aggregates are properly embeded in the asphalt having uniform, surface and the
asphalt has already been hardened or set.
(viii) In some cases, it may be necessary to use a self-propelled steel-tired roller having
a gross weight of 4-6 tons for final compaction. It shall be done for the full surface
but not over 2 passes and not break the crushed aggregates subject to the
(ix) The road shall be closed to traffic as long as possible if the traffic can be by-
passed. However, if the road cannot be closed to traffic, the vehicle speed shall
be limited to not greater than 30 kilometers per hour for a minimum 24 hours.
(x) After the asphalt adheres to the crushed aggregates and completely dry, a
broomer or any appropriate equipments shall be used to remove all excess
crushed aggregates but not that adhered to the asphalt.
(b) Double Surface Treatment Construction
The construction consists of alternating asphalt application and spreading of crushed
aggregates to form double layers, as follows.
(i) The first asphalt application and spreading of crushed aggregates shallbe done
the same as single surface treatment construction as 3.6.3 EXECUTION
(ii) After the first asphalt application and spreading and compacting of crushed
aggregates, it can be left until the asphalt has completely adhered to the crushed
aggregates before the construction of next layer. The waiting period should be as
follows.
For asphalt cement, the waiting period is about 2 hours
For emulsified asphalt, the waiting period is about 10 hours
For cutback asphalt, the waiting period is about 18 hours
This is subject to normal weather condition to allow evaporation of cutter or
water depending on the types of asphalt, to almost complete. However, if it rains
or high moisture weather condition exists, it may be left for a longer period than
the above specified period as judged by the Engineer.
(iii) Before the second asphalt application, the first surface shall be cleaned by
appropriate equipments, for example, a broomer to sweep loose crushed
aggregates retained on the surface. Then, a blower is used to blow out dust or
Loose material. In case that there is dirty material adhered to the surface, it shall
be washed before application of asphalt at the temperature according to Table
3.6-1 by the specified rate..
(iv) In some cases, by the judgement of the Engineer, the first surface treatment is
constructed and open to traffic for a suitable period to allow it adjusted
depending on weather condition, traffic condition, characteristics and volume.
The second surface treatment is then constructed. Prior to the construction of
the second surface treatment, the first Layer shall be cleaned and commenced
as 3.6.3 EXECUTION.
(v) Immediately after the second asphalt application, crushed aggregates shall be
spreaded at the corrected quantity over the asphalt. Steps of construction shall
be operated the same as single surface treatment construction as 3.6.3
EXECUTION.
(c) Additional Specifications for Construction
(i) The suitability of weather condition shall be considered for construction of the
surface treatment. Application of the asphalt is prohibited while it is windy, going
to rain, or during raining. If the surface area for application of asphalt is wet, them
application of asphalt cement or cutback asphalt is prohibited.
(ii) Length for asphalt application section should be specified to suit for the asphalt
type, traffic volume, weather condition, equipment and prepared crushed
aggregates.
(iii) Prior to the beginning the asphalt application, the asphalt distributor shall be
parked some distance away from the beginning of the working section to allow
the equipment run at the specified speed.
(iv) At the beginning and the end of the working section, the thick paper or any
materials of at least 500 millimeter wide shall be longitudinally laid across the
width of asphalt application for prevention the repeating of the asphalt
application. The operation shall begin and end on the paper or other materials
such that junction of asphalt application is neat. No asphalt is messed on the
finished section.
(v) Asphalt application should not completely consume all the asphalt in the tank.
The asphalt should be left at least 5 percent of the tank capacity since the
quantity of asphalt drawed out of the tank will be less making the application
rate deviate from the specified rate.
(vi) Height of the spray bar before and after the application in any section shall not
be different by greater than 12.5 millimeters.
(vii) Asphalt application should be done against wind direction to allow smoke from
the asphalt blowing to the back of spray bar.
(viii) To construct double surface treatment, the first asphalt application and second
asphalt application should be done in the opposite direction to average the
asphalt quantity to be uniformly distributed.
(ix) After the construction of surface treatment is completed, the roadway shall be
closed to traffic until the asphalt properly adhere the crushed aggregates.
However, if it is necessary to open to traffic, the vehicle speed should be limited

to not over 30 kilometers per hour.
(x) After the construction of surface treatment is completed, the roadway should be
opened to traffic while it has low temperature as in the evening or early night. It
shall not be opened to traffic while it is raining.
(3) Precaution
(a) To use cutback asphalt, extreme care must be exercised to prevent flames while
boiling or application of cutback asphalt, since it is flamable.
(b) Care should be taken in transporting the emulsified asphalt in a drum container
especially while loading and unloading to prevent any heavy strike to the drum since
it can cause separation of the emulsified.
(c) To use the emulsified asphalt in a drum container, before the asphalt is poured into
the asphalt distributor, the drum shall be rolled back and forth or asphalt be stirred
so that emulsified asphalt is in uniform condition. If it is not completely consumed,
the container should be tightly sealed to prevent evaporation of water causing
separation of the emulsion and impair emulsion property.
(d) After daily work, the asphalt should be completely drawed out. The distributor,
especially at the spray bar, should be thoroughly clean. Cleaning should be done by
kerosene or any solution, drawed through the pipes of spraybar to completely clean
the leftover asphalt. This is to prevent any asphalt adhesion to the pipes and cause
inconvenience of further work. It also prevents the tank in distributor from attack by
some acid of emulsified asphalt which may corrode and damage the tank.
(e) Mixing of cutter with asphalt shall be strictly done as 3.6.2 PRODUCT.
3.7 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

3.7.1 DESCRIPTION
3.7.1.1 Scope
The work shall consist of construction of Portland cement concrete pavement with or without
steel reinforcement, on any prepared roadbed with Portland cement concrete mixture having
quality to the specification to the line and shape according to the Drawings.
3.7.2 PRODUCTS
3.7.2.1 Materials
(1) Portland Cement
Portland cement shall conform to the Thai Industrial Standard, "Portland Cement", Standard
No TIS 15 Portland cement to be used shall be any of the followings:
Type 1 Portland cement for making concrete on any products which do not require
special quality.
Type 3 Portland cement which produces high early strength concrete.
Type 5 Portland cement which produces high sulfate resistance concrete.
or any Portland cement with equivalent quality or specified in the Drawing. In general,
Portland cement Type 1 shall be used for construction of concrete pavement. Portland
cement type 5 shall be used for concrete members which require resistance to aggression
of salt water, salt soil or in high sulfate environment as specified in The Drawings. Portland
cement type 3 shall replace Portland cement type 1 in special case and only by the
approval in written from the Engineer.
The Portland cement shall be of the same type and trade mark, produced from the same
plant and same raw material except it is otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Pounded or sack cement in each usage, shall not be grain or lump. Cement of previous
opened sack is prohibited.
(2) Water
Water used in the mixing or curing shall be clean, free of oil, acid, base, salt, sugar, vegetable
or any material which is harmful to concrete or reinforcing steel. Water used shall be from
the same source and when tested in accordance with AASHTO T26: Quality of Water to be
Used in Concrete shall have the concentration of solution not greater than specified in
Table 3.7-1
Water from different source shall be priory permitted from the Engineer to be used.
Table 3.7-1 : Maximum Concentration of Solution in Water

Concentration of Solution in Water (ppm)
Type of Concrete
Other Solution Free Chloride Free Sulfate
Plain Concrete 2000 2000 1500
Reinforced Concrete 2000 1000 1000
Muddy water, if to be used, shall be allowed to sedimented. The concentration shall be

not greater than 2000 ppm.
In case that it is unable to located water which its quality is in accordance with the
specification or it is questionable whether the quality of water is suitable to mix or cure
concrete. Quality of water shall be tested according to MSHTO T106: Compressive Strength
of Hydraulic Cement Mortar by molding concrete cube samples. If the compressive strength
of the samples mixed by the tested water at the ages of 7 days and 28 days, is not less
than 90 percent of the compressive strength of the concrete cube samples mixed by
distilled water, the tested water is acceptable to mix or cure concrete.
In case of using, water from natural sources for mixing or curing concrete, the water quality
test shall be carried out twice yearly.
(3) Admixtures
Admixtures used in concrete work, if not specified in the Drawings shall be priority approved
by the Engineer.
The admixtures should have the properties in reducing the water proportion in concrete
mixture or increasing workability or reducing bleeding or reducing expansion of concrete.
The admixtures shall conform to the Thai Industrial Standard, "Chemical Admixtures for
Mixing with Concrete", Standard No TIS 733 Contents of the admixtures shall not be
chemical substance in quantity such as being harmful to the reinforcing steel and the
cement.
For the reinforced concrete, the admixtures shall not contain any calcium chloride in the
constituents and shall not have other free chlorides in quantity over 0.5 percent by weight
of the admixtures.
In case that, air entraining in concrete mixture is not specified in the Drawings, proportion
of the admixtures being used shall not induce air entraining in the concrete mixture over 3
percent by volume.
All admixtures shall be used on recommendation by manufacturers. If the result of using
the admixtures is not as required, the Engineer may stop the use of admixtures.
The Contractor shall submit samples of specific data, and chemical components of the
admixtures to be used including test results of properties of concrete being mixed with the
admixture to the Engineer for consideration not less than 30 days prior to construction.
Specific data for each admixture, at least, shall show details as follows:
(a) Type of the admixture, name and chemical components, trade mark and manufacture.
(b) Proportion and method of use and results of change of proportion and method of use
(c) Contents of free chloride in the admixture
(d) Air-Entraining in the concrete when the admixture is used
(4) Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand or rock particles which are circular or angular in
shape, not flat and flaky, rough surface and hard, durable, free from dust. Fine aggregate
from different sources shall not be mixed together or stocked in the same pile or be used
together in the construction which is in continuous without the prior permission of the
Engineer.
If properties of fine aggregate are not specified otherwise, they shall be as follows:
(a) There shall not be soil, ash, organic, bases, inorganic chlorides or any deleterious
substance which may cause undesirable effects to concrete or reinforcing steel in
greater amount than specified in Table 3.7-2.
Table 3.7-2 : Maximum Contents of Deleterious Substances in Fine Aggregate

Deleterious Substances Percent by Mass
Clay and Dust 1.0
Coal and Lignite 1.0
Material passing 0.075 mm. (No.200) Sieve 3.0
Chlorides 0.1
(b) Soundness loss when tested in accordance with AASHTO T104, "Standard Method of
Test for Soundess of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate" by
use of Sodium Sulfate for 5 cycles, shall not be greater than 9 percent.
Fine aggregate, from the existing source, which has passed the test, may be waived
from the retesting subject to the judgement of Department of Highways to accept the
available test result.
(c) Clean, free of organic contents which may be harmful to concrete, when tested in
accordance with AASHTO T21, "Standard Method of Test for Organic Impurities in Fine
Aggregates for Concrete", the test color shall be not darker than the standard color.
(d) Gradation, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T27-70 "Standard Method of Test
for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates", shall be according to Table 3.7-3.
Table 3.7-3 : Gradation of Fine Aggregate for Concrete Pavement

Sieve Size Millimeter (Inch) Percent Passing Sieve by Mass
9.5 (3/8) 100
4.75 (No 4) 95-100
1.18 (No 16) 45-85
0.300 (No 50) 5-30
0.150 (No100) 0-10
(5) Coarse Aggregate

Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed rock, gravel or crushed gravel being angular or
circular shape, hard, durable, not weathered, not too Long or too flat, clean, free from dust
and other material coating. Aggregate of different types shall not be mixed or stocked in
the same pile or used together in continuing construction without permission by the
Engineer.
If it is not specified otherwise, coarse aggregate shall have following properties.
(a) Abrasion Loss, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131 and C 535, "Resistance to
Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles
Machine" shall be not grater than 40 percent.
(b) Shall not be high porosity rock or gravel, when tested by soaking in the water for a
period of 24 hours, the weight shall not increase by over 10 percent.
(c) Soundness Loss, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 104, "Standard Method of
Test for Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate" by
use of Sodium Sulfate for 5 cycles, shall be not greater than 9 percent.
Coarse aggregate, from existing sources, which has passed the test, may be waived
from the retesting subject to the judgement of Department of Highways to accept the
available test result.
(d) There shall not be deleterious substance in the quantity over there specified in Table
3.7-4
Table 3.7-4 : Maximum Contents of Deleterious Substances in Coarse Aggregate

Deleterious Substance Percent by Mass
Clay Lumps and Friable Material 2.0

Coal and Lignite 0.5
Material Passing 0.075 mm. (No 200) Sieve
- Clay Particle 1.0
- Stone Dust 1.5
Chlorides 0.05
Tests for determining maximum contents of deleterious substances shall be carried

out at test once for each change of material source or as required.
(e) Gradation, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T27 -70 "Standard Method of Test
for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates", shall be according to Table 3.7-5.
If, material size is not specified in the Drawings or by the Engineer, it should be selected
as appropriate.
Table 3.7-5 : Gradation of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete Pavement

Nominal Percent Passing Sieve by Mass
Size 50 37.5 25.0 19.0 12.5 9.5 4.75 2.36 1.18
mm. mm. mm. mm. mm. mm. mm. mm. mm. mm.
37.5-4.75 100 95-100 - 35-70 - 10-30 0-5 - -

25.0-4.75 - 100 95-100 - 25-60 - 0-10 0-5 -
19.0-4.75 - - 100 90-100 - 20-55 0-10 0-5 -
12.5-4.75 - - - 100 90-100 40-70 0-15 0-5 -
9.5-2.36 - - - - 100 85-100 10-30 0-10 0-5
(f) Coarse aggregate shall not be piled obstructing the traffic. Stock piling shall be
prevented from other material. If there is some mixing, the aggregate shall be washed
before use. Coarse aggregate of different types and sizes shall be separately piled. If
there is segregation, it shall be reblended.
(6) Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcing steel in concrete pavement shall be steel-wire fabric or bar-mat reinforcement.
Dowel bars, tie bars and other necessary components shall be provided as specified in the
Drawings. Wire-fabric and bar-mat reinforcement shall extent to within 50 millimeters of
each edge of slab.
(a) Steel-wire fabric
it is not specified otherwise, steel-wire fabric shall conform to the Thai Industrial
Standard, "Welded Steel-wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement", TIS No 737
The steel-wire shall conform to the Thai Industrial Standard, "Cold drawn Steel-wire
for Concrete Reinforcement", TIS No 747. The minimum diameter of the steel-wire
shall be not less than the nominal diameter of 3.15 millimeters and the nominal area
of 7.74 square millimeters.
In case that the steel-wire fabric are lap-spliced, the length of lapped splices shall be
not less than 40 times of the wire diameter and not less than the spacing between
the cross- wire + 50 millimeters.
Quantity of steel-wire shall be calculated from the nominal area and spacings
between the wires in each direction as specified in the Drawings.
Welding of the wires shall be strong and shall be not separated during the
transportation or handling. The welding separation while working from any reasons
shall not be the reason to reject the material, if welding separation is allowed to be
less than 1 percent for each sheet of steel-wired fabric or for each 14 square meters
of the rolled steel-wired fabric. Moreover, for the whole length of a steel-wire, welding
shall be not separated by over 50 percent.
While laying the steel-wire fabric for construction of concrete pavement, the fabric
shall be in flat portion not rolled or distorted in all direction.
Thickness of concrete covering the steel-wired fabric shall be, as shown in the
Drawings, the same as using of bar-mat reinforcement.
(b) Bar-mats Reinforcement
Bar forming bar-mat shall conform to the Thai Industrial Standards, "Round Steel Bar",
TIS No 20 or "Deformed Steel Bar", TIS No 24. Sizes and spacings shall be as shown in
the Drawings.
(c) Dowel Bar
Dowel bars shall be round steel bars conforming to The Thai Industrial Standard,
"Round Steel Bar", TIS No 20. The bar shall be smooth surface, free from burring or
other deformation restricting slippage in the concrete. Before using for construction,
one-half of the length of each dowel bar shall be coated with the asphalt material or
painted with oil paint and coated with grease.
(d) Tie bars shall be deformed bars conforming to the Thai Industrial Standard, "Deformed
Steel Bar", TIS 24.
(7) Sleeves
The sleeves for dowel bars shall be of metal or approved synthetic material. This shall be
designed to cover not less than 50 millimeters of the dowel, with a closed end, and with
a suitable stop to hold the end of the sleeve a distance equal to the thickness of joint filler
or at least 25 millimeters from the end of the dowel bar.
Sleeves shall be of such design that they do not deflect or collapse during construction.
The arrangement shall be as specified. Its thickness shall be not less than 2.5 millimeters.
(8) Jointing Materials
(a) Joint Filler
The joint filler shall conform to AASHTO M 213 -81 "Preformed Expansion Joint Filler
for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction, Non extruding and Resilient
Bituminous Type". They shall be punched to admit the dowels. The filler for each joint
shall be furnished in a single piece for the full depth and length as specified in the
Drawings unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. When the use of more than
one piece is allowed for a joint, the abutting ends shall be closely fastened together
securely and accurately by any methods satisfactory to the Engineer.
(b) Joint Primer
Joint primer shall be material which is capable to highly flow into pores of concrete,
when a trial application on concrete surface is made it shall be dried within 4 hours
under the temperature of 25 degree Celsius. When bringing a mortared block coated
with joint primer to contact with a test sample of hot-poured concrete joint sealer
which passes quality test, for testing of absolute adhesion in accordance with the Thai
Industrial Standard, "Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic Type" TIS 479, there
shall be no cracking or separation or opening over 6.4 millimeter deep at any point
between the test sample and mortar block during the testing. Asphalt emulsion is not
permitted for use as joint primer. Any material for use as joint primer shall priority
approved by Design Engineer.
(c) Concrete Joint
Concrete joint sealer shall be hot-poured elastic type conforming to the Thai Industrial
Standard, "Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic Type" TIS No 479 and shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to use.
(9) Covering Material for Concrete Curing
Unless it is specified otherwise, covering material for concrete curing shall be as follows.
(a) Burlap Cloth
Burlap cloth shall be made from jute or kenaf and whiles in use, shall be in good
condition, not dirty by mud or any material which decline its absorbability, not
composed of material harmful to concrete, when soak in water or being water-poured
on shall have absorbent property according to AASHTO M 182 : Burlap Cloth made
from Jute or Kenaf or equivalent.
(b) Liquid membrane-forming Compounds
Liquid membrane-forming Compound shall conform with the Thai Industrial Standard
"Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete", TIS No 841.
3.7.3 EXECUTION
3.7.3.1 Equipment
(1) General
All equipment for use shall be in good working condition, be inspected and calibrated and
be approved by the Engineer. During the construction, the Contractor shall maintain the
equipment in good condition all the time.
(2) Batching Plant and Equipment
All material in the mix shall be proportioned wholly by weight. The batching plant shall
include bins, weighing hoppers, or separate storage area for each material and scales for the
sand, rock aggregate or gravel for each separated size. If cement is used in bulk, a bin capable
of prevention of moisture and scales for the cement shall be included.
Weighing of material for the concrete mix shall be done. Approved by The Engineer, at the
batching plant or at the mixer as appropriate. The batching plant shall be either of stationary
or mobile type. It shall be always properly levelled within the accuracy required for the
proper operation of the weighing mechanisms.
(a) Bin and Hoppers
Inside the bin, there shall be adequate compartments for every size of aggregate gravel
and sand. Each compartment shall discharge efficiently and freely into the weighing
hopper. Means and control shall be provided so that as the quantity desired in the
weighing hopper is being approached, and the material being be added slowly to
obtain the required quantity and the weighing hopper be tightly shut.
A port or other opening for discharging an overload of the several materials from the
hopper shall be provided. Weighing hoppers shall be constructed by capable of fully
discharging the material.
(b) Scales
The scales for weighing aggregates and cement shall be the beam type with the
accuracy within 0.5% of the weight. Spring-type scales are prohibited. Provision shall
be made for indicating that the required load in the weighing hopper is being
approached. The device shall indicate at least the last 100 kilograms and up to 25
kilograms overload. All weighing and indicating devices shall be in full view of the
operator while charging the hopper and all controls the conveniently accessed.
The Contractor shall provide at least ten 25 kilogram standard weights at the work site
for checking the accuracy.
Cement may be measured directly by weight, or counting the number of cement sacks
being used. In general, cement in standard sack weigh 50 kilograms. When measured
by weighing, a separate, scale and hopper for cement shall be provided together with
a boot or other device to transfer the cement from the weighing hopper to the mixer.
Satisfactory methods shall be employed by the approval of the Engineer.
Batching shall be so conducted as to the result in the weights of material required,
within tolerances of 1 percent for cement and 2 percent for aggregates.
(3) Mixer
All concrete shall be mixed in a mixer. It may mixed at the construction site, at a central
plant or, in a transit. Each mixer shall have attached to it a prominent place a manufacturer's
plate showing the capacity of the drum in terms of volume of mixed concrete and speed of
rotation of the mixing drum.
(a) Mixer at Construction Site
The mixer shall be capable of combining the aggregate, cement and water into a
thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified mixing period and discharge
the mixture without segregation. The mixer shall be equipped with a suitable weighing
hopper, water storage tank and a water measuring device, accurate within 1 percent
being near. Prior to mixing the concrete, all materials shall be thoroughly blended
before adding the water. There shall be a discharge Lever which automatically Lock
until the batch has been mixed the required time after all materials are in the mixer.
Suitable equipment for discharging the concrete on the prepared roadbed shall be
provided.
The mixer shall be cleaned at suitable intervals. The interior condition shall be daily
examined. The pickup and throw-over blades in the drum shall be replaced when
they have Lost 10 percent of their depth.
(b) Truck or Transit Mixers
Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically actuated counters by which the
number of revolution of the drum or blades may be readily verified and the counters
shall be actuated at the commencement of mixing operations at designated mixing
speeds. The mixer when loaded shall not be filled to more than 60 percent of the
drum gross volume. The mixer shall be capable of combining the ingredients of the
concrete into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and of discharging the concrete
with a satisfactory degree of uniformity, without segregation.
Except when intended for use exclusively as agitators, truck mixers shall be provided
with a water measuring device to measure accurately the quantity of water for each
batch. The delivered amount of water shall be within plus or minus 1% of the
indicated amount.
(4) Finishing Equipments

(a) Fixed-Form Paving Equipment
The fixed-form paving equipment shall consist of the followings.
(i) Concrete paver shall be self-propelled moving on the fixed-form or rail attached
to the fixed-form. It shall be equipped with a concrete spreader of either auger-
type or paddle type to distribute the concrete to the full width of the form. The
auger-type concrete spreader shall be capable of uniformly dispersing concrete
into the Left and right without segregation. The paddle-type concrete spreader
shall be capable of moving Laterally up and down and self-revolving controlled
by mechanical system, electrical system or hydraulic system.
(ii) Vibrators shall be vibrated to the full width of concrete slab consisting of internal
vibrating rods and vibrating plates. The vibrators may be attached to the concrete
paver or concrete finisher or any movable tool. While working, they are taken
care not to disturb the fixed-form edges, joint, dowel bars and tie bars and other
prepared components.
Internal vibrating rods shall be aligned to the full width of concrete slab having
a diameter not less than 50 millimeters (2 inches). Their frequencies shall not be
less than 5,000 cycles per minute. Spacing shall conform with the manufacturer's
recommendation and approved by the Engineer. Insertion of the vibrating rod
into the freshly mixed concrete shall be done by a mechanical system or
electrical system or hydraulic system. Workmen shall not walk in the freshly
mixed concrete to insert the vibrating rods. The Contractor shall prepare at least
2 reserved rods for consolidation of concrete mix against and along the faces of
the forms.
Vibrating plates shall be installed with the concrete finisher or any movable tool.
The frequency shall be not less than 3,000 cycles per minutes and capable of
moving up and down without contacting with the concrete surface while waiting.
(iii) Transverse concrete finisher shall be self-moved in transverse direction for
screeding and finishing concrete surface and capable of removal of ripple marks
resulted from vibrators. The concrete finisher shall be placed in slightly sloping
to the back not greater than 1.5 millimeters.
(iv) Movable lifting-type vibrating pan shall be made of metal or any strong material
which retains its shape while vibrating subject to the approval of the Engineer
prior to use.
(v) Portable screed may be steel pipe or straight edge at least 600 millimeters longer
than the width of the concrete slab to be smoothened. It shall be, prior to use,
checked and adjusted to the proper smoothness along the transverse of roadway
and approved by the Engineer. Care shall be taken in the adjustment of the
smoothness and related levels. It shall be used when concrete surface finishing
has started.
(vi) Other finishers shall be readily prepared before the concrete placements begins.
(b) Slip-Form Paving Equipment

The slip-form paving equipment shall be self-propelled and capable of spreading,
consolidating and screeding concrete to be in required shape. It also finishes the
concrete to the smoothness and appearance as specified.
Controls of working of the slip-form paving equipment shall at least composed of the
followings.
(i) Velocity control
(ii) asd Anger type spreader, oscillating screed and control system
(iii) Vibrating-rod type vibrator and control system for insertion and vibration
(iv) Screed unit and control system
(v) Alignment and level control either by hydraulic sensor system or any appropriate
system
(vi) Tie-bar shooter and dowel-bar placement tool
(vii) Auto-float Attachment or Extrusion plate.
The slip-form paving equipment shall be checked and adjusted conforming to the
manufacturer's recommendation and approved by the Engineer prior to
commencement of concrete work.
(5) Joint Cutting Saw
The saw for cutting joints shall be adequately powered to cut rapidly with a water cooled
diamond edge saw blade or an abrasive wheel to the depth required. When sawing of joints
is carried out the Contractor shall keep a stand by power saw on the project.
(6) Forms
Straight side forms shall be metal having a thickness of at least 5 millimeters and have a
depth equal to the prescribed edge thickness of the pavement slab. Curved forms may be
made of any material by the approval of the Engineer.
Each segment of metal form shall be not less than 3.0 meters long. A form shall not be
placed on top of the other to build up to the required depth. In case that there is sand
cushion below the concrete slab, Depth of the forms shall be at least 25 millimeters greater
than the concrete thickness such that part of the forms will embed in the sand layer. In case
that aggregate base course is underneath the concrete slab, depth of the forms shall be less
than the concrete thickness by not greater than 10 millimeters. Forms shall be securely set.
Levelling of the forms shall be done by shimming with a strong plate. Wedge shall not be
employed. Grove resulting from shimming shall be sealed to prevent flow of concrete by
mortar or sand mixed with concrete. Mineral fillers shall not be used.
The forms shall contain provision for locking together tightly the ends of abutting form
sections and for secure setting. In case that the forms kink, bend or warp, the Contractor
shall remove the forms from the site immediately. Repairment can be done if it is permitted
by the Engineer.
Setting of the forms shall be secure, strong and be certain that there shall be no flow of
concrete out of the forms. In any cases, top of the forms shall be levelled. The difference
shall be not greater than 3 millimeters in 3 meters. At any points, the forms shall not deviate
from the alignment by greater than 6.0 millimeters. The forms shall be securely set to be
certain that no movement occurs while placing concrete. After placing of concrete has
finished, the forms shall be retained to the appropriate period specified by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall be responsible for damages of concrete due to defects of the forms, despite
the Engineer check and approve line, level and secureness of the forms prior to every
placement of concrete.
3.7.3.2 Criteria for Concrete Mix Design
(1) Specifications of Concrete Mix
If it is not specified otherwise, concrete mix shall be according to the following specifications.
(a) Compressive strength of 150x300 millimeter concrete cylinder samples, at 28 days
old, shall be not less than 27 Megapascals. The modulus of Rupture of 150x150x600
millimeter concrete beam samples, at 28 days old, shall be not less than 4.2
Megapascals.
(b) The grading of the aggregate used in concrete work shall be within the specified limits.
When appropriate grading of the aggregate has been determined in accordance with
the specified criteria and approved by the Engineer. Such grading shall be used for
concrete work. It shall not be changed. If Fineness Modulus of sand deviates from the
specified value by greater than 0.20, concrete mix shall be redesigned.
(c) All material in the mix shall be proportioned by weight of cement. The aggregate shall
have the properties as specified. The nominal sizes of coarse aggregate shall be as
specified. The ratio of aggregate and cement for concrete mix shall not exceed 7 : 1
by weight. The cement for concrete mix shall weigh not less than 350 kilograms per
cubic meter of concrete. (d) The grading of the aggregate used in concrete work
shall be within the specified limits. When appropriate grading of the aggregate has
been
(d) The ratio of free water to cement shall not exceed 0.55 by weight for all concrete.
The aggregate is considered to be saturated surface dry.
(e) The concrete shall be of suitable workability for full compaction to be obtained with
the equipment used. The slump, when tested in accordance with TIS No 213,
"Standard For Ready-Mixed Concrete" shall not be less than 30 millimeters and not
greater than 70 millimeters.
(a) Preparation of Sublayer Underneath the Concrete Pavement
Before forms are set, the roadbed within the proposed concrete placement shall have
been graded and compacted to proper line, grade, elevation and density according to
the Drawings and being approved by the Engineer. All structures shall be adjusted to
correct elevation line and alignment. The roadbed shall have been trimmed
approximately to correct elevation for a width extending at least 600 millimeters
beyond each edge of the concrete pavement. Generally sufficient roadbed for setting
the forms shall have been prepared for a distance at least 50 meters ahead of the
point where concrete is being placed unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
In case that sand cushion is to be placed underneath the concrete pavement as
specified in the Drawings. The sand shall be clean, free of clay lumps or chemicals
which may harm the concrete, or any objectionable material such as roots, regetation.
Before placing the concrete, sand shall be shaped to level, water sprinkled to
saturation and compacted. After compaction, any points on the top of sand layer shall
not be 10 millimeter below or over the elevation specified on the Drawings.

In case that crushed rock base course is specified on the Drawings to be placed
underneath the concrete pavement, the base course shall be trimmed to the shape,
elevation density as specified for a distance at least 50 meters ahead of the point
where concrete is being placed.
In case that the slip- form paving equipment is used, the prepared area shall be at
least 100 meters ahead of the point where concrete is being placed.
(b) Setting Forms
(i) Base support-In case that sand cushion is used beneath the concrete pavement,
the base support beneath the sand layer shall be strong. When staking forms
into place or placing the supporting plate, it shall be secured, free from
movement. When sand cushion has been placed, the bottom edge of the forms
shall be embedded in the sand at least 20 millimeters to prevent flow of
concrete out of the forms. If subbase or sand cushion in the line of setting forms
is over depressed, the material shall be added until the elevation shall not lower
than specified on the Drawings by exceeding 10 millimeters.
In case that the crushed rock base course is used beneath the concrete
pavement, base support shall be compacted to the specified density and
shaped to the elevation such that after setting the forms, the specified elevation
by the Drawings is obtained.
Advanced setting- Forms shall have been set for at least half the length of
pavement to be concreted in a particular day before concreting shall commence
on that day. Unless prior approval has been obtained from the Engineer for
concreting short sections, the length of formwork set shall not be less than 100
meters at the time of commencement of concreting on any one day.
In case that there are more than one traffic lane in each direction, Concreting
shall commence in sequence from the traffic lane with higher elevation to lower
elevation unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
(ii) Staking forms-Forms shall be securely staked into place with at least three pins
for each 3 meter section, one pin being placed near each end of the section.
Form sections shall be tightly locked, free from play or movement in any
direction. The forms shall not deviate from true line by more than 6 millimeters
at any point. Forms shall be cleaned and oiled prior to the placing of concrete
(iii) Grade and alignment-The alignment and grade elevations of the forms shall be
checked by trial run of the paving equipment. If it shows that the forms or base
support are unstable, necessary corrections shall be made and rechecked. After
the paving equipment travels on the forms, the top edge of the forms, when
checked by a 3. 0 meter straight edge across the joint, the elevation shall not
deviate by over 3 millimeters and the alignment shall not deviate by 6
millimeter from the specified grade and alignment.
(iv) Condition of roadbed- After form settings but prior to concreting, the roadbed
shall be in a smooth, dense condition and suitably moist when the concrete is
placed suitably. Concrete shall not be placed on unsmooth and uncompacted
roadbed. If the roadbed is dry at the time of concrete to be placed, it shall be
sprinkled. The method of sprinkling shall be such that it does not form pools of
water. If it is required by the weather conditions, the roadbed shall have been
moistened for some time previous to the placing of the concrete as directed by
the Engineer.
(2) Construction
(a) Criteria for Concrete Mixing and Placing
No concrete shall be mixed, placed and finished when the natural light is insufficient,
unless an adequate and approved artificial lighting system is operated. Concrete shall
be mixed only in amounts required for each placement. The Contractor shall be
responsible for producing a concrete of the required consistency. Should it prove
impracticable to finish centrally mixed concrete properly before it has become too
stiff, the Engineer may require that the concrete be mixed at the construction site.
Placement of concrete in rainy season, the Contractor shall prepare accessories for
prevention of rain such as canvases, tents and others at the construction site. Such
accessories shall be available for use in case that sudden rainfall occurs while placing
or finishing the concrete but it has not set yet. Construction joint shall be made to
discontinue the construction. The accessories shall be priority approved by the
Engineer.
(b) Mixing Concrete
(i) Mixing at the construction site- For concrete mixed at the construction site, the
mixer shall be operated outside the lane of pavement being laid, except where
the Engineer directed otherwise. The amount of admixture to be added, if any
shall be approved by the Engineer.
Job-site mixer, shall be operated at a drum speed between 14-20 revolutions per
minute. The batched materials shall be so charged into the drum that a portion
of the water shall enter in advance of the cement and aggregates and the water
shall continue to flow into the drum for a minimum time of 5 seconds after all
the cement and aggregates are in the drum. Mixing time shall be counted from
the time after all materials except water are in the drum. The mixing time shall
not be less than 50 seconds nor more than 70 seconds for the mixer having a
capacity of cubic meter or less and higher, respectively, subject to the judgement
of the Engineer. In the case of a dual drum mixer, the mixing time shall not
include transfer time. The contents of an individual mixer drum shall be removed
before a succeeding batch is emptied herein. Any concrete mixed less than the
specified minimum time shall be discarded.
The volume of concrete mixed per batch shall not exceed the mixer's nominal
capacity as shown on the manufacturer's guaranteed capacity standard rating
plate on the mixer. An overload up to 10 percent above the mixer's nominal
capacity may be permitted provided concrete test data for strength, segregation,
and uniform consistency are satisfactory and provided no spillage of concrete
takes place.
Retempering concrete by adding water or by other means will not permitted.
Concrete which is not of the required consistency at the time of placement shall
not be used.
(ii) Central plant mixing-In addition to the requirements of subclause (2)(2.1), if

central plant mixers have a capacity between 2-5 cubic meters, mixing time shall
not be less than 90 seconds. For mixers having capacity over 5 cubic meters,
mixing time shall be not less than 120 seconds.
(iii) Truck mixing- Truck mixers may be used for complete mixing at the batch plant
and as truck agitators for delivery of concrete to the job site or they may be
used for complete mixing of the concrete at the job site. Mixer drum shall either
be a revolving blade or paddle type.
Mixing time shall be designated by number of revolutions of the mixer drums.
When a truck mixer is used for complete mixing, each batch of concrete shall be
mixed for not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum as
designated by the manufacturer, as such designation shall appear on a metal
plate attached to the mixer. If the batch concrete is 0.4 cubic meter less than
guaranteed capacity, the number of revolutions at mixing speed may be reduced
to not less than 50. Mixing in excess of 100 revolutions shall be at the agitating
speed. All materials, including the mixing water, shall be in the mixer drum before
actuating the revolution counting which will indicate the number of revolutions
of the drum or blades.
When wash water is used as a portion of the mixing water for the succeeding
batch, it shall be accurately measured and taken into account in determining the
amount of additional mixing water required. The Engineer will specify the amount
of wash water. If it is unable to measure or control the wash water, there shall
be no water left in the drum before the succeeding batch.
When a truck mixer is used for complete mixing at the batch plant, mixing
operation shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement has been added to the
aggregates. After mixing, the truck mixer shall be used as an agitator for
transporting concrete at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the
equipment as agitating speed. Concrete discharge shall be completed within 45
minutes after the addition of the cement to the aggregates. Each batch of
concrete delivered at the job site shall be accompanied by a time slip issued at
the batching plant, bearing the time of departure therefrom.
When the truck mixer is used for the complete mixing of concrete at the job site,
the mixing operation shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement has been
added to the aggregates.
The rate of concrete discharge from the mixer drum shall be controlled by the
speed of drum rotation while discharging with the discharge gate fully open.
(c) Transportation of Concrete
Concrete mixture shall be transported from the central mixing plant to the job site in
agitator truck or, upon written permission of the Engineer, in nonagitator trucks. Delivery of
concrete shall be so regulated that placing is at a continuous rate unless delayed by the
placing operations. The intervals between delivery of batches shall not be so great as to
allow the concrete in place to harden partially, and in no case shall such an interval
exceed 30 minutes.
Uniformity of transported concrete in each batch shall be checked by carrying out the test
determination of slump of concrete in accordance with TIS No 213, "Standard For Ready-
Mixed Concrete". The uniformity is satisfactory if samples from the one-quarter and three-
quarter point of the load do not differ by more than 20 millimeters in slump and are in
the specified limits.
Unless the Contractor will be able to deliver concrete within the specified period or be
the cause of concrete setting before completing the concrete finishing, the Engineer may
require that retarder be added to the concrete at the expense of the Contractor.
(i) Agitator trucks-Unless otherwise is permitted by the Engineer, the agitator truck
shall have a watertight revolving drum suitably mounted and shall be capable
of transporting and discharging the concrete without segregation. The agitating
speed of the drum shall not be less than 2 revolutions per minute or more than
6 revolutions per minute. The volume of mixture concrete permitted in the
drum shall not exceed the manufacturer's rating nor exceeding 80 percent of
the gross volume of the drum.
Upon approval by the Engineer, revolving blade trucks mixers may be used in
lieu of agitating trucks for transportation of concrete from the plant.
The interval between introduction of water into the mixer drum and final
discharge of the concrete from the agitator shall not exceed 45 minutes. During
this interval the mixture shall be agitated continuously.
(ii) Nonagitator- trucks- Bodies of nonagitating equipment shall be smooth,
watertight, metal containers equipped with gates that will permit control of the
discharge of the concrete. Covers shall be provided when needed for protection
against the weather.
The nonagitating equipment shall permit delivery of the concrete to the site of
the work in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass with a satisfactory degree of
discharge. Discharge of the concrete from the transported container shall be
completed within 30 minutes after introduction of water into the mixer to mix
with the aggregates and cement.
(d) Placing Concrete
While placing concrete, there shall be an inspector closely supervise the operation of
the Contractor by every step until the placing in each section is completed.
Concrete shall be placed only on the prepared roadbed. It shall not be placed around
any public utilities such as manholes unless elevation of such structure has been
corrected as specified and joint filler around the structure has been placed.
Unless truck mixers, truck agitators, and other approved hauling equipment are
equipped with means for discharge of concrete without segregation of the materials,
the concrete shall be discharge into a bucket, which shall be lift or moved over the
roadbed and the concrete deposited therefrom in such a way as to prevent
segregation or precompaction of the concrete.
If necessary, concrete to be reinforced shall be placed in two layers. The bottom layer
shall be struck off at the level for the reinforcement or as designated on the Drawings.
The concrete surface shall be sufficiently rough to bond with the concrete to be
placed over. Reinforcement shall be placed on the bottom concrete layer and
immediately placing concrete on the top before the bottom concrete has been set.
The period of operation shall not exceed 30 minutes. During the placement of the
top concrete, the reinforcement shall be prevented from any movement. The
Contractor shall present the method statements and construct a test section to be
checked and approved by the Engineer. Should it prove that the top and bottom
concrete is not homogeneously bonded or position of the reinforcement is not as
designated, the Engineer may exempt the placement of two-layered concrete.
In case that one-layered concrete is to be placed, if the reinforcement is arranged to
the position and elevation, it shall be thoroughly supported by concrete blocks or
steel trestles to prevent sagging and shall be approved by the Engineer. The concrete
blocks shall have strength as specified.
When the concrete has been placed, vibrators shall not be used to break the mass.
Spreading concrete shall be done by tools of approved types and models unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer. The concrete shall be spreaded to uniform
distribution so as to require as little rehanding as possible and so that when the layer
is consolidated and finished, the thickness required will be provided, with the surface
at no point below the required elevation. Hand spreading at joints may be done with
shovels, not with rakes. Workmen shall not walk in the freshly mixed concrete.
Placing concrete between two transverse joints shall be done in continuous except it
is an emergency. During the placing, if it is to wait for concrete over 30 minutes, the
Engineer may stop the work and order to have construction joint made at the expense
of the Contractor.
The concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated against and along the faces of all forms
by means of vibrators inserted in the concrete. Vibrators shall not be permitted to
come in contact with a joint assembly, the roadbed, or a side form. In no case shall
the vibrator be operated longer than 30 seconds in any one location.
Where concrete is to place adjoining a previously constructed concrete slab, the
Contractor shall carry out any work the Engineer deems necessary to provide a good
joint including drilling and grouting load transfer bars into the existing slab.
Should any concrete materials fall on or be worked into the surface of a completed
slab or existing one, the Contractor shall immediately removed them by the methods
Concrete shall be deposited as near to the expansion and contraction joints as
possible without disturbing them, but shall not be dumped from the discharge bucket
on to a joint assembly.
Except at construction joints, concrete shall be shovelled against both sides of the
joint of all expansion and contraction joints simultaneously, maintaining equal
pressure on both sides. It shall be deposited to a height of approximately 50
millimeters more than the depth of the joint, and shall be vibrated so that all
honeycomb and void are prevented. The vibrator shall be inserted in the concrete
and worked along the full length and both sides of the joint.
(e) Initial Strike-off and Placement of Reinforcement
(i) Striking-off two-layered concrete-The bottom layer of concrete shall be struck-off
for the full width true to crown at the required distance below the finished surface
elevation, for placement of reinforcement or for placement of a top layer of the
required thickness. The striking-off shall be accomplished by use of the finishing

machine or by hand methods in specific areas such as where the width change or
in emergency.
Wire-fabric or bar-mat reinforcement shall be laid on the surface of the bottom
layer of concrete. Equal clearance shall be provided on each side of the slab,
successive sheets shall be lapped as called for on the Drawings, and the
reinforcement shall extend to within 50 millimeters of expansion and contraction
joints, but shall not extend across the joints. At laps, the sheet shall be wired or
slipped together firmly at intervals of not more than 1 meter. The reinforcement,
when placed, shall be free from dirt or other foreign matter, and shall not be so
rusted as to impair bond of the steel the concrete. Cross bars or bar mats shall be
overlapped at least 100 millimeters.
(ii) Striking-off one-layered concrete-In case that one-layered concrete is to be placed,
the reinforcement shall be thoroughly supported on prepared concrete blocks or
steel trestles to prevent from sagging. The concrete blocks shall have strength as
specified. Placing concrete shall be in accordance with Clause ( 4) Striking- off
concrete shall be in accordance with sub Clause (5)(5.1)
(f) Joint Construction
Joint shall be of the designs shown on the Drawings and shall be constructed where
called for on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. Before joint materials are set
in place, the roadbed at those location shall have been approved by the Engineer. A
strip of the preformed expansion joint filler shall be placed around each structure
which extend into or through the pavement before concrete is placed
(i) Transverse expansion joints-The material for a transverse expansion joint shall be
assembled off the roadbed, and placed into position as a unit. Each assembly
shall consist of an installing bar or approved substitute, preformed joint filler of
the required dimensions, a protective cap of at Least 2.5 millimeter thick made
from metal or any synthetic material having been approved by the Engineer. The
void between end of a dowel bar and bottom of the cap shall be not Less than
25 millimeters. Dowel bars of the required size and Length assembled at the
required Locations, dowel bar sleeves, and an approved auxiliary spacing and
supporting element for the dowel bars, Located at or near the ends of each bar.
The installing bar shall be of substantial metal plate cut to the required depth
and crown of the slab and having a Length 10 millimeters Less than the required
Length of the joint. It shall be slotted from the bottom as necessary to permit
removal. Suitable shall be provided on the bar for facilitating its removal.
The dowel bar sleeves may be either a separate component or a part of the
installing bar. The installing bars and dowel bar sleeves shall be cleaned and
oiled before use. One-half of the Length of each bar shall be coated with asphalt
or with an oil paint then covered with grease or other material approved by the
Engineer to prevent the concrete from bonding to that portion of the dowel. A
dowel bar sleeve shall be placed on the coated end of each dowel, filled with
appropriate material to prevent concrete flowing in the sleeve and center the
dowel in the sleeve.
The supporting and holding component shall be of such design and construction
as to hold dowels in correct alignment, both vertically and horizontally, subject
to a tolerance of not more than 1 millimeter in 100 millimeters.
When assembled, the top of the installing bar shall be about 5 millimeters above
the top of the preformed filler. The filler shall be vertical when the dowel bars
are Level. The face of the filler shall be in a plane at right angle to the center
Line of the road, subject to a tolerance of not more than 5 millimeters in the
width of one traffic Lane, and the dowels shall be parallel and at right angles to
the face of the filler.
The joint assembly shall be placed so that the installing bar is on the side of the
filler remote from pouring operation. The top of the filler shall be 10 millimeters
below the required concrete surface, and the bottom shall rest on or extend
slightly into the roadbed. The filler shall be in a vertical position. The assembly
shall be staked into position in such a way as to hold the assembly securely in
position throughout construction.
The stakes shall be of a cross section and length satisfactory to the Engineer. The
U-shape metal shall be a metal of not less than 1.5 millimeter thick. They shall
be 400 millimeters in length, or longer if necessary to provide stability of the
assembly.
The assembly and its installation shall have been approved by the Engineer
before any concrete is placed against it.
(ii) Transverse contraction joints-Transverse contraction joints shall consist of planes
of weakness created by cutting grooves in the surface of the pavement and,
when shown on the Drawings, shall include load transfer dowel-bar assemblies.
 Planes of weakness-Grooves for planes of weakness shall be sawn in the
concrete after the concrete has been placed for 6 hours. In case of special
concrete, required grooves to be sawn earlier than the specified period may
be done upon the approval of the Engineer. The grooves shall be at right
angles to the centerline of the pavement and shall be true to line, subject to
a tolerance of 5 millimeters in the width of the slab.
Normally sawn contraction joints shall begin between 6-24 hours after placing
concrete. The joints about 30 meters apart shall be sawn before uncontrolled
shrinkage cracking takes place. The intermediate joints shall be sawn before
the end of curing period or shortly after. The spacing of joints that must be
sawn early will depend on several factors. Such spacing shall be appropriate.
All contraction joints in lanes adjacent to previously constructed lanes, cracks
at the proposed joint position, construction joints to the existing slabs shall
be sawn soon.
In case that width and depth of the joint are not specified otherwise on the
Drawings, the depth by sawing shall be not less than one quarter of the slab
thickness and the width shall be not less than 10 millimeters.
Any procedures for sawing joints that results in premature cracking shall be
revised immediately by adjusting the sequence of cutting the joints or the
time interval involved between the placing of the concrete or the removal of
the curing materials and cutting of the joints.
Sawn joints which breaks or aggregate loosened, shall be repaired by filling
with epoxy and neatly finishing to line by the judgement of the Engineer.
 Load transfer assemblies-Each assembly for a transverse contraction joint
shall consist of dowel bars without sleeves and an approved auxiliary spacing
and support element. One- half of the length of each bar shall be coated
with asphalt or with an oil paint then covered with oil tar or other material
approved by the Engineer to prevent the concrete from bonding to that
portion of the dowel. The supporting element shall be of such design and
construction as to hold dowels in correct alignment, both vertically and
horizontally, subject to a tolerance of not more than 1 millimeter in 100
millimeters.
The assembly shall be placed into position so that the dowels are parallel to
the centerline and shall be staked into position in such a way as to hold the
assembly securely in the position throughout the construction. The assembly
and its installation shall have been approved by the Engineer before any
concrete is placed against it.
 Longitudinal joints-Longitudinal joints shall be constructed with the details
shown on the Drawings. Planes of weakness shall be created by sawing
grooves in the surface of the pavement.
Tie bars across Longitudinal joints shall be placed perpendicular to the joint
and positioned as specified on the Drawings. The bars shall not be painted or
coated with asphalt or other material. When adjacent lanes of pavements are
constructed separately, steel side forms shall be used which will form a
groove along the construction joint. Tie bars may be bent at right angles
against the form of the first lane constructed and straightened into final
position before the concrete of the adjacent lane is poured.
Transverse construction joints shall be constructed when there is an
interruption of more than 30 minutes in the concreting operations. No
transverse construction joint shall be constructed within 3 meters of an
expansion joint, contraction joint or plane of weakness subject to the
(g) Final Strike-off, Consolidation and Finishing
(i) Machine finishing-As soon as the concrete of the top layer has been placed, it
shall be strucked-off and screeded by an approved, self-mobiled, vibratory
finishing machine. When properly consolidated and finished the concrete surface
shall be free of porous texture. The machine shall go over each area of pavement
within suitable period to consolidate the concrete and leave a surface of uniform
texture. The machine shall not be operated on any specific areas for too long.
The travel of the machine on the forms shall be maintained true to line without
variation resulting of a non uniform finished surface.
Where the width of slab changes, and in case of emergency, the striking-off may
be done with a moveable, vibratory plate provided being approved by the
Engineer.
(ii) Smoothing and correction of Surface-After the concrete has be struck off and
consolidated, it shall be further smoothed by a finishing tool such as a triangle
wood until the surface is smooth and to the elevation specified on the Drawings.
The finishing tool shall be the type which has been approved by the Engineer.
Care must be taken to begin finishing the surface at the suitable period. Water
shall not be sprinkled as it can lessen the durability of the concrete surface or
cause cracks on the surface afterward.
Finishing concrete surface at transverse construction joints shall be done by
removing of excess concrete which run over the old concrete and adjusting the
level to the same as the old concrete before the concrete is set.
Finishing concrete surface at the longitudinal joint shall be done with special care
to obtain smooth surface on both sides of the joint. Should it doubt that the
finishing at the joint has not been proper, the Engineer may direct the
measurement by a straightedge.
During the concrete finishing, any depressions found shall be filled immediately
with freshly mixed concrete. Mortar shall not be permitted. High areas shall be
cut down. Striking-off and finishing shall be redone Finishing and correcting the
concrete surface shall be continuously done until all the surface is smooth, true
to the grade and shape shown on the Drawings.
(iii) Brooming-The concrete surface shall be given a broomed finish upon appropriate
period. Brooms shall be of a quality size and construction to the Drawings or
satisfactory to the Engineer.
The broom shall be drawn from one edge to the other, with strokes slightly
overlapping, in such a way as to corrugate the surface uniformly to a depth of
about 2-3 millimeters. Brooming shall be completed before the concrete is in
such condition that the surface is torn or unduly roughened by the brooming.
The broomed surface shall not be rough, porous or irregularities, and of an
appearance satisfactory to the Engineer.
(iv) Edging at joints-After brooming, but before the concrete has taken its initial set,
the edges of all joints except when sawed, shall be worked with an approved
tool and rounded to a radius of 5 millimeters or designated on the Drawings. A
well defined and continuous radius shall be produced and a smooth, dense
mortar finish obtained. The surface of the slab shall not be unduly disturbed by
tilting of the tool during use. Along the edges, tool marks with its width not over
3 millimeters and its depth not over 10 millimeters shall be left in place.
All joints shall be tested with a straight-edge before the concrete has set and
correction shall be made if one side of the joint is higher than the other or if they
are higher or lower than the adjacent slabs.
(h) Curing
As soon after brooming and edging is completed, the concrete shall be cured by any
method approved by the Engineer.
Curing concrete shall be done with covering the slab to the full width with covering
material. Should any portion of the slab become exposed at any time during the
curing period, it shall be recovered immediately. The concrete shall not be left
uncovered between stage of curing.
The concreting operation shall be suspended whenever the supply of water or curing
material is not sufficient at the job- site.
When the surface of concrete are covered with 2 layers of burlap, they shall be left
in place for at least 72 hours. Throughout the 72 hour period, the burlap shall be
continuously kept damp by spraying. Salt or brackish water shall not be used. Water
pool on the slab may be used throughout the 72 hour period.
When membrane curing compound is used and if it has coated tie bars before pour
the concrete on the adjacent slab, the tie bars shall be thoroughly cleaned or else
the bonding property is poor.
(i) Removing Form
Forms shall not be removed until the freshly placed concrete has set for at least 12
hours. The forms shall be removed carefully so as to avoid damage to the pavement.
As soon as the forms are removed, any areas showing a minor degree of honeycomb
shall be finished up with mortar composed of one part cement and two parts of sand
by weight. Where the Engineer considers that a major degree of honeycomb is present,
the work shall be considered defective and shall be removed and replaced to the full
depth and width of the slab with construction joints designated on the Drawings at
the expense of the Contractor.
(j) Protection of Pavement
The Contractor shall erect and maintain suitable barricades and shall employ
watchmen to exclude traffic from the newly constructed slab until the slab has duly
aged and required strength to carry the traffic. These barricades shall be arranged as
designated on the Department of Highway's Standard Drawings of Erection of Traffic
Signs During the Construction. Where, it is necessary to provide for traffic across the
pavement, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, construct suitable and substantial
crossings to bridge the concrete
Where the Lane which is opened to traffic, is next to the constructed slab, the
Contractor shall provide, temporary guard fence along the constructed slab, and shall
be maintained until the constructed slab is opened to traffic. The construction plan
of contractor shall be such as not to obstruct the opening traffic Lane.
Any slab is damaged by traffic or other causes shall be repaired or replaced at the
expense of the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The repairing method shall
be given the Engineer.
(k) Sealing Joints
(i) Joint preparation-Before the seal is applied, the joint shall be dry, free of dirts,
gravel and sand. Excess cement shall be abraded and blowed out such that joint
sealer be absolutely attached to the joint faces, free of any voids.
(ii) Brushing the join faces with primer-Before sealing the joint, the joints faces shall
be coated with primer as suitable to the joint sealing material. Priming can be
done by either brushing or spraying. The primer shall be dried before pouring the
joint sealing material.
(iii) Heating the joint sealing material-Containers for heating the joint sealing material
shall be double walls type with oil on any Liquid filled in the between such that
the temperature of the joint sealing material is uniformly controlled. The heating
container shall be equipped with a thermometer to check the temperature while
heating and pouring.
The joint sealing material shall be gradually melted. In the beginning, the
hardened joint sealing material shall be cut into small pieces with a heated knife
or sharped knife which is rubbed with paraffin. The pieces of the joint sealing
material shall be put into the heating container. While heating, the joint sealing
material shall be stirred continuously. Concurrently, the joint sealing material
shall be gradually put in to the heating container. When the joint sealing material
has melted and reached the temperature for pouring, the pouring of the joint
sealing material shall be immediately done. Care shall be taken not allow the
temperature of the joint sealing material is too high such that its quality is poor.
(iv) Heating the joint sealing material-Containers for heating the joint sealing material
shall be double walls type with oil on any liquid filled in the between such that
the temperature of the joint sealing material is uniformly controlled. The heating
container shall be equipped with a thermometer to check the temperature while
heating and pouring.
(v) Remelting-The joint sealing material which has been melted and left until it is
cooled and hardened shall not be remelted for use. The unused melted joint
sealing material shall be discarded.
(vi) Level of pouring-The joint sealing material shall be poured to slightly lower than
the joint edges such that it will not be spilled on the slab surface after it has
been opened to traffic.
(l) Opening to Traffic
The concrete slab shall not be opened to traffic until the concrete age is 14 days old
but where necessary such as intersection or connection road may be allowed to be
opened to traffic if the test results of compressive strength of the concrete specimens
are not lower than designated figure on the Drawings. The slab can be opened to traffic
after joints have been sealed and shall be permitted by the Engineer.
Where the Drawings called for surfaced shoulder, the surfaced shoulder shall have been
finished before it is opened to traffic. Where necessary edges of concrete slabs shall be
protected from damages from the traffic. Stockpiling or blending of shoulder material on
the concrete shall not be permitted as it can cause damages to the slab.
3.7.3.4 Inspection
(1) Inspection of Tolerance of Concrete Surface
After the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the concrete surface shall be given a further
smoothness test, using a 3. 00 m. long straight edge laid on the surface, in successive
positions overlapping 1. 5 meters, over the whole surface and particularly at joints. Any
portion of the surface, when tested in the longitudinal direction which shows variation or
departure from the testing edge of more than 3. 5 millimeters but not exceeding 7. 0
millimeters shall be marked and immediately ground down with an approved grinding
tool until the variation does not exceed 3.5 millimeters.
Whenever the variation or departure from the straight edge is more than 7.0 millimeters,
the pavement shall be removed and replaced including construction joints designated
on the Drawings by the Contractor at his own expense.
(2) Testing of Concrete Strength
During the pouring concrete, the Engineer shall take the concrete samples by directing
the Contractor to make test specimens for testing concrete strength at 28 days. Sampling
the concrete shall be carried out in accordance with AASHTO T 141 -84 "Standard Method
of Test for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete". Curing of concrete Specimens shall be
carried out in the same condition as curing of the concrete pavement.
(a) Compressive Strength Test
Sampling for compressive strength test shall be carried out once for every 100 cubic
meters of concreting or every time of placing concrete. (In case of less than 100 cubic
meters). The concrete sample is taken to make three 150x300 millimeter cylinder (one
set) to be kept for compressive strength test conforming to the Thai Industrial Standard
"Standards Test Method For Compressive Strength Of Concrete Specimens" TIS No 409.
Results of the test, when concrete specimens are 28 days old, shall be that the
average compressive strength for each set be not less than 27 Megapascals or
designated on the Drawings. Nevertheless, the compressive strength of one specimen
is allowed to be lower than 27Megapascals or designated on the Drawings but not
less than 85% of the specified value.
When the test results of the concrete specimen give the value the compressive
strength less than the specified value, the Contractor may request to recheck the
compressive strength of concrete in the section by coring the concrete to take samples
for retest. The coring shall commence soon not later than 60 days after concreting in
the section. Location and number of corings shall be specified by the Engineer.
Diameter of coring shall not be less than 100 millimeter and the ratio between height
and diameter about 2 : 1. The compressive strength of cored samples converted to
compressive strength of standard test specimens conforming to the Thai Industrial
Standard "Method of test for Compressive Strength of Concrete Specimens" TIS No
409, shall not be less than 85% of the specified value. Then the concrete shall be
acceptable. In case that the test results from the cored samples are less than the
specified value, the Contractor shall remove and replace concrete slab in the section.
New test samples are taken for testing.
When the test results give the compressive strength lower than the specified value
and the Contractor does not request for coring for retest of strength, the Engineer is
empowered to remove and replace the concrete slab.
All the expenses shall be paid by the Contractor.
(b) Flexural Strength Test
Sampling for flexural strength test shall be carried out once for every 100 cubic meters
of concreting or every time of placing concrete (In case of less than 100 cubic meters).
The concrete sample is taken to make three 150x150x600 millimeter beams (one set)
to be kept for flexural strength test conforming to AASHTO T 97: Flexural Strength of
Concrete (Using Simple Beam With Third-Point Loading)
Results of the test, when concrete specimens are 28 days old, shall be that the
average modulus of rupture for each set be not less than 4.2 Megapascals or
designated on the Drawings, Nevertheless, the modulus of rupture of one specimen
is allowed to be lower than 4.2 Megapascals or designated on the Drawings but not
less than 85 percent of the specified value.
When the test results of the concrete speciment give the value of the modulus of
rupture Less than the specified value, the Contractor may request the recheck of the
modulus of rupture of the concrete in the section by cutting the concrete to take
samples for retest. The cutting shall commence soon not later than 60 days after
concreting in the section. Location and number of cuttings shall be specified by the
Engineer. Size of the samples shall be 150x150 millimeters and not less than 500
millimeter Long. The modulus of rupture of cut samples shall be not less than 85%
of the specified value. Then, the concrete shall be acceptable. In case that the test
results of cut samples are less than the specified value, the Contractor shall remove
and replace concrete slab in the section, new samples are taken for testing.
When the test results give the modulus of rupture lower than the specified value and
the Contractor does not request for cutting samples in the field for retesting of flexural
strength. The Engineer is empowered to remove and replace the concrete slab. All
the expenses shall be paid by the Contractor.
3.8 CONCRETE KERB AND GUTTER

3.8.1 DESCRIPTION
3.8.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the furnishing and installation of concrete kerbs, gutters or combination of
kerb and gutter. This section shall also include bed course where required on the drawings.
3.8.2 PRODUCTS
3.8.2.1 Materials
(1) Bed Course
Shall be material conforming to the requirements of Section 3.1: AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
but of maximum size 10 mm.
(2) Concrete
Shall be of the grade indicated on the drawings, and shall conform to the requirements of
Section 4.1: CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
(3) Expansion Joint
Shall be performed filler conforming to the requirements of Section 3.7: PORTLAND
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT.
3.8.3 EXECUTION
3.8.3.1 Excavation
Excavation shall be made to the required depth, and the base upon which the kerb, gutter, or
combination kerb and gutter is to be set shall be compacted to a firm, even surface. All soft and
unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with suitable material. If shown on the
drawings bed course material shall be placed and compacted to form a bed of the required
thickness.
3.8.3.2 Expansion Joints
When a kerb is placed next to a concrete pavement, expansion joints in the kerb shall be located.
Expansion joints shall be formed at the intervals shown on the drawings using preformed filler 10
mm in thickness in accordance with the requirements of Section 3.7: PORTLAND CEMENT
CONCRETE PAVEMENT.
3.8.3.3 Placing Concrete
(1) Concreting shall be generally in accordance with the requirements of Section 4.2:
CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES. Forms shall be removed within 24 hours after concrete has
been placed. Minor defects shall be repaired with mortar containing one part of Portland
cement and two parts of fine aggregate. Repair will not be permitted on the faces and
rejected portions shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. The exposed
surfaces shall be finished while the concrete is still green, by wetting a soft brick or a wood
block and rubbing the surfaces until they are smooth. The surfaces shall be wet thoroughly
either by dipping the brick or block in water, or by throwing water on the surfaces with a
brush. After the concrete has been rubbed smooth, using water, it shall then be rubbed
with a thin grout containing one part of Portland cement and one part of fine aggregate.
(2) Rubbing with grout shall continue until a uniform colour is produced.
(3) When completed, the concrete shall be covered with suitable material and kept moist for
a period of 3 days. The concrete shall be suitably protected from the weather until
thoroughly hardened.
3.8.3.4 Backfilling
After the concrete has set sufficiently, the spaces in front and back of the kerb and gutter shall
be refilled to the required elevation with the proper material, which shall be tamped in layers of
not more than 150 mm, until properly compacted.
3.8.3.5 Finish
(1) The finished work shall be true to line grade and level to within 3 mm and shall present a
smooth appearance free from kinks and distortion visible to the eye.
(2) Kerbs shall be painted on the visible front side with alternating stripes of black paint and
white reflectorised paint where indicated on the drawings or ordered by the Engineer.
3.9 SLOPE PROTECTION

3.9.1 DESCRIPTION
3.9.1.1 Scope
This work shall consist of the provision and installation of slope protection for stream banks,
embankment slopes, cut slopes, bridge abutment slopes and other surfaces composed of
erodible materials where protection is desired. Generally, the protection will form an impervious
layer constructed in or on designated surfaces and shall have at its bottom and ends anti-scour
devices such as cutoff walls, toe walls or sheeting. Slope protection may be constructed of
concrete, stone riprap, sacked concrete or others as shown on the Drawings.
Slope protection shall also include impervious linings of concrete, soil cement or stone riprap for
ditches or gutters for the Conveyance of surface runoff. The linings shall be placed in ditches,
gutters, chutes, outlets or other locations as shown on the Drawings, directed by the Engineer or
as specified in these Specifications. Anti-scour devices may also be included with these items.
If directed by the Engineer, the various types of slope protection shall be constructed in the
locations so directed, whether or not shown at those locations in the Drawings, in accordance
with the Standard Drawings.
3.9.2 PRODUCTS
3.9.2.1 Materials
(1) Riprap Stone
Stone for riprap shall consist of field stone or rough, un-hewn quarry stone as nearly
rectangular as practicable. The stone shall be dense, resistant to the action of air and water,
and suitable in all other respects for the purpose intended. The stone shall have
percentage of wear of not more than 50% as determined by AASHTO test method T96,
after testing riprap stone which has been broken up in small pieces in conformance with
T96, the stones shall, in general, be of the wide flat type with their larger faces roughly
rectangular and parallel. The minimum thickness of stone shall be 15 centimeters
(measured perpendicular to face of riprap). No face dimension shall be less than the
thickness of the stone. Riprap stones for ditch lining, chute or outlet lining shall have a
minimum thickness of 10 ems. and minimum length and width dimensions of at least 25
ems. These stones shall not weigh less than 10 kilograms each and may range in weight
between 10-25 kilograms. In other respects, the stones shall conform to the requirements
described above.
(2) Concrete Slope Protection
Concrete slope protection for embankments or cut slopes shall be a Class C concrete slab
constructed to the dimensions and details shown in the Drawings. The concrete slab may
or may not contain steel reinforcements, as required by the Drawings. Steel reinforcement
shall conform to the requirement of Section 4.11.3 Concrete for lining ditches, gutters,
outlets and chutes shall also be Class C concrete, with or without steel reinforcement, as
detailed in the Drawings. Class C concrete shall conform to the provision of Section 4.1:
FORMWORK AND FALSEWORK
(3) Mortar
This shall be composed of one part of cement and two parts of sand by dry loose volume
and sufficient water to make a mortar that can be easily handled and troweled.
Retempering of mortar that has not been used for periods of 45 minutes or longer will not
be permitted. Cement for mortar shall conform to the requirement of Section 4.1.
(4) Sacked Concrete Slope Protection
Sacked concrete slope protection shall consist of a mixture of aggregates and cement
placed in a jute or cotton sack having a minimum capacity of 30 liters or larger and an
average thickness of 20 centimeters. Sacks shall be a type which will allow water to
penetrate them easily. Sacked concrete slope protection shall conform to the requirements
as detailed in the Drawings.
(5) Incidentals
All incidentals required in slope protection shall conform to the requirements as specified
in the Drawings, and these Specifications. These incidentals include, but are not limited to,
such items as joint sealer, weep-holes drain pipes and filter material.
Filter material required for bridge abutments and embankment slope protection shall be
an accepted coarse aggregate material as specified in Section 3.1: AGGREGATE BASE
COURSE, or as approved by the Engineer.
3.9.3 EXECUTION
(1) General
Unless otherwise specified slope protection shall always be constructed as an impervious
layer upon designated surfaces. Unless otherwise specified slope protection shall have
mortared joints.
Reinforced concrete drain chutes, unless otherwise specified, shall be constructed where
curb and gutter is used with embankment heights greater than 6 meters to safely convey
surface runoff down the embankment slope.
The drain chutes shall connect the drop openings integrated into the curb with the toe of
the slope. The curb and gutter installation shall be placed along each shoulder edge when
the roadway is in a normal cross section and only long the lower edge in a superelevated
section. Spacing of drain chutes shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. Mortared riprap protection shall also be placed at the toe of the drain chute as
detailed in the Drawings.
Reinforced concrete drain outlets, unless otherwise specified, shall be constructed along
the side slopes between the outlet of pipe culverts and the toe of embankment to guard
against erosion wherever the vertical distance between the pipe outlet and toe of slope is
declared critical by the Engineer. The drain outlet shall be a trapezoidal reinforced concrete
gutter of a type as detailed in the Drawings. Mortared riprap protection shall be integrated
into the discharging end of each drain outlet as detailed in the Drawings.
Concrete interceptor ditches, unless otherwise specified, shall be constructed at the toe of
benches where depths of excavation exceed 5 meters and the subgrade material is subject
to erosion. Interceptor ditch linings may be reinforced concrete or plain concrete and shall
be as detailed in the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Concrete, stone riprap or sacked concrete embankment slope protection shall be
constructed at locations shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. This type
of slope protection shall generally be used where embankments intrude into streams or
watercourses.
(2) Preparation
Excavation or construction of embankments shall be processed to planned shapes and
dimensions, as if there were no slope protection, to allow some excavation immediately
prior to the placing of the slope protection. The Contractor is responsible for conferring
with the Engineer in charge of construction, prior to the making of excavations or building
of embankments in areas to be covered so that the proper procedure can be decided.
The areas to be covered shall, at the proper time, be laid out to intended positions, and
all necessary cut and fill stakes batter boards and construction lines set up. Every effort
shall be made to have the surfaces in such condition as to require some excavation
immediately prior to the laying of the riprap. Where, however, low areas are encountered
they shall be backfilled and thoroughly tamped at the earliest practical time in advance of
the laying of masonry, to avoid settlement after placing riprap. It is not necessary that the
entire area to be protected be excavated and fine graded in advance of the laying, work
should be always laid upon a freshly excavated and stable surface.
Aggregates and cement for sacked concrete slope protection shall be mixed dry, by hand,
or mechanically in the proportion of 1:10 (cement : aggregate) measured by volume until
the mixture is uniform in colour. Aggregates shall meet the gradation and quality
requirements as specified in the Drawings. The mixture shall be placed into the sacks and
filled approximately 3 I 4 full, and shall be securely and substantially sewed, the ends
forming a straight edge.
The sacks when filled shall have an average thickness or depth of 20 centimeters.
(3) Cut off Trench or Sheeting
As a slope protection will usually be accompanied by a bottom cutoff trench, the
excavation for same shall be provided for in advance of fine grading. Where the cutoff
trench is composed of masonry, a trench shall be excavated to the dimensions
contemplated for the masonry, dewatered, and the masonry placed directly in the trench,
visually without any form. Where the cutoff trench is composed of sheeting, care shall be
taken not to disturb, by excavation of otherwise,any natural ground,stream beds of other
formations intended to be in front of the sheeting.
After laying has been completed, backfills shall be made around the edges and
mechanically tamped. Special care shall be given to backfilling and compacting any spaces
or volumes resulting from the removal of forms.
Aggregates and cement for sacked concrete slope protection shall be mixed dry, by hand,
or mechanically in the proportion of 1:10 (cement:aggregate) measured by volumn until
the mixture is uniform in colour. Aggregates shall meet the gradation and quality
requirements as specified in the Drawings. The mixture shall be placed into the sacks and
filled approximately 3 / 4 full, and shall be securely and substantially sewed, the ends
forming a straight edge.
The sacks when filled shall have an average thickness or depth of 20 centimeters.
(4) Cut off Trench or Sheeting
As a slope protection will usually be accompanied by a bottom cutoff trench, the
excavation for same shall be provided for in advance of fine grading. Where the cutoff
trench is composed of masonry, a trench shall be excavated to the dimensions
contemplated for the masonry, dewatered, and the masonry placed directly in the trench,
visually without any form. Where the cutoff trench is composed of sheeting, care shall be
taken not to disturb, by excavation of otherwise,any natural ground,stream beds of other
formations intended to be in front of the sheeting.
After laying has been completed, backfills shall be made around the edges and
mechanically tamped. Special care shall be given to backfilling and compacting any spaces
or volumes resulting from the removal of forms.
If the bottom of the slope protection does not occur in rock or other natural strata
accepted as non-erodible, the riprap shall always be founded or sealed on the bottom
with appropriate cutoff trenches or sheeting. For cutoff trenches composed of masonry,
the prepared trench shall be dewatered and completely filled with stones and mortar. The
trench shall first be filled approximately 60 per cent with mortar and immediately
thereafter stones shall be dropped and pushed into the unset mortar or concrete so as to
make a solid, dense masonry wall. Additional mortar or concrete may be added to the top
so as to obtain a screeded, level top surface. Only such length of trench is to be worked
upon at a time as to insure that all stones can be inserted in fresh concrete. Where the
foundation under the slope protection is unstable and the masonry cutoff may settle or
fail, the cutoff masonry will be omitted and sheeting as required shall be driven. The cutoff
masonry and/or sheeting shall be constructed before laying the slope protection.
Where the cut-off trench is composed of sacked concrete and after laying and backfilling
has been completed, the sacked concrete shall be thoroughly soaked by sprinkling with
water to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The cut-off protection shall be constructed before
laying the slope protection.
(5) Laying Slope Protection
After cutoff masonry or sheeting has been placed and accepted the laying of slope
protection shall be commenced in tight contact with the cutoff masonry or sheeting and
laid from the bottom towards the top. Stone and precast concrete blocks shall be laid in
close contact.
In the case of stone riprap, the interstices may be partly filled with spalls or small stones,
and finally all remaining joints or openings filled solidly with mortar. Where the pieces are
composed of precast concrete, they shall be laid with broken joints. As each course is laid,
the top of the joint shall be filled with mortar so that the succeeding course can be shoved
into position in a full bed of mortar. At the conclusion of a course or section, all joints
between the precast sections shall be filled solidly with mortar and joints pointed flush
with the surface of the slope protection.
Precast concrete slope protection shall be constructed on the site or other location at the
Contractor's option. Forms shall be composed of wood or steel and the pieces cast in
horizontal positions. Lifting holes may be provided or rings, hooks, or other devices inserted
to facilitate handing. Holes are to be filled with mortar if exposed in completed work.
Where slope protection is cast-in-place, the wet curing time, however, may be reduced to
three days. Curing shall be with burlap or cotton mats. Otherwise construction of precast
concrete slope protection shall be in accordance with Section 4.1: FORMWORK AND
FALSEWORK.
Slopes which are to receive the precast slope protection shall be graded and trimmed, and
filled, tamped and screeded if necessary to final grade immediately prior to laying. A row
of blocks shall be laid on ends (40 centimeter dimension normal to the slope) under all
edges of slope protection, except where same is contiguous to pier or abutment walls.
These end or edge blocks shall be set in trenches excavated as nearly neat to the block
as possible. Any spaces between the block and sides of the trench shall be backfilled and
tamped. Slope protection concrete blocks shall then be laid wit broken joints, and all joints
shall be mortared joints. As the edges is completed from bottom to top, backfill shall be
placed against the completed edge and tamped. All blocks shall be full size, except where
half blocks are required to complete courses. The competed exposed surface shall be
accurate to a tolerance not exceeding one centimeter in 1.5 meters.
All blocks, slabs and stones shall conform to the dimensions and requirements stated on
the Drawings.
In laying the sacked concrete slope protection, the prepared sacks shall be bedded on the
prepared surface upon which they are placed with the sewn ends all in the same direction.
Sacks shall be placed by hand, beginning at the bottom of the slope and laid with broken
joints. The sacks shall be rammed and packed against each other and tamped on the
surface so as to from a close and molded contact and secure a uniform surface.
Sacks ripped or broken during placing shall be removed and replaced. Immediately after
placing and tamping the sacks, they shall be soaked thoroughly by sprinkling with water.
Water shall not be applied under high pressure.
All slope protection shall conform to the dimensions and requirements shown in the
Drawings, these Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
3.10 MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES

3.10.1 DESCRIPTION
3.10.1.1 Scope
This work shall consist of furnishing, constructing and/or installing miscellaneous types of
structures built according to the Specification for concrete structures and in conformance with
the Contract Drawings. Included are such items as inlet boxes, manholes, urban drains, irrigation
slide gates, flap gates, retaining walls, spring boxes, pipe encasement, platforms, barriers and other
incidental items not specified elsewhere.
3.10.2 PRODUCTS
3.10.2.1 Materials
Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 4.1: FORMWORK AND FALSEWORK, where
required, shall conform to the requirements of Section 4. 2: REINFORCEMENT. Iron castings for
frames, covers and gratings for manholes and inlets shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
Standard Specification M 105 Class 30. Manhole and inlet steps shall meet the requirements of
the latest edition of the ASTM Designation A-207.
3.10.3 EXECUTION
3.10.3.1 Construction Methods
Underground drainage structures, including earthwork and backfilling incidental thereto, shall be
completed before the adjacent roadway surfacing is placed, but pipe endwalls shall not be
constructed until grading has been completed, as developments during construction may justify
alterations in design or location of such endwalls. Also manholes, catch basins and inlets shall
not be completed to final grade until after the grading has been finished and all necessary
arrangements have been made to insure suitable connections at proper grade and alignment with
pavements, gutter, curbs, etc.
Grates, and frames for grates, and covers for inlets and manholes shall be set in full beds of
mortar or be otherwise properly secured as indicated in the Drawings, so as to be held rigidly in
place to proper grade and alignment.
Inlet and outlet pipe at inlets and manholes shall be set or cut flush with the inside faces of the
walls of such structures and shall extend a sufficient distance beyond the outside faces of the
walls to provide ample room for making proper connections. The joint around the pipe in the
structure wall shall be completely and neatly closed with mortar, or other material as may be
specified, so as to make it watertight.
Pipe encasement shall be constructed of 200-ksc concrete, unless otherwise specified. ALL work
shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings.
3.11 CONCRETE SIDEWALK

3.11.1 DESCRIPTION
3.11.1.1 Scope
This work shall consist of concrete sidewalks constructed of insitu concrete, concrete slabs or
concrete blocks on prepared beds in accordance with this Specification and in accordance with
the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and types shown on the Drawings. If shown on the Drawings
the work shall include the construction of bed courses.
This work shall also include concrete for median and island paving in accordance with the
locations and details shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3.11.2 PRODUCTS
3.11.2.1 Materials
Bed course material, if any is shown on the Drawings shall consist of sand, gravel, crushed stone
or other approved porous materials of 1 centimeter maximum size. Concrete shall be of the class
shown on the Drawings and shall conform to the requirements of Section 4.1: FORMWORK AND
FALSEWORK.
3.11.3 EXECUTION
Excavation shall be made to required depth, and the foundation shall be shaped to conform to
the section shown on the Drawings and compacted to a firm, even surface. All soft and unsuitable
material shall be removed and replaced with suitable material.
If indicated on the Drawings bed course material shall be placed and compacted to form a bed
course of the required thickness.
Forms shall be made of metal or of straight and sound lumber at least five centimeters in
thickness. They shall be free of wrap and of sufficient strength to resist springing out of shape
under pressure of the concrete. Forms shall be staked securely in position at the correct line and
elevation.
Concreting shall be generally in accordance with the requirements of Section 4-1 Preformed
expansion joint filler of the dimensions shown on the Drawings shall be set in the positions shown
of the Drawings before the placing of concrete is started.
The concrete sidewalk between expansion joints shall be divided into blocks by transverse cuts,
extending to at least one-third the depth of the slab, where called for on the Drawings or directed
by the Engineer.
The edges of the sidewalk and the transverse cuts shall be shaped with a suitable tool, so formed
as to round the edges to a 1 centimeter radius.
All work shall be correct to line, grade and level to within 3 millimeters.
If shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall construct the required sidewalk or island paving of
individual precast concrete slabs or blocks of a size specified on said Drawings. If precast slabs are
not specified, the Contractors electing to construct the required sidewalk, median or island paving
in this manner must have the prior written approval of the Engineer.
3.12 GRASSING
3.12.1 DESCRIPTION
3.12.1.1 Scope
This work shall consist of furnishing seed, sprigs or sods as required or permitted and planting
them to give a healthy stable covering of grass which will maintain its growth in any weather and
prevent erosion of the material in which it is planted.
This work includes the providing of block sodding, strip sodding, sodding with geocell or other
method on the topsoil covered slopes of embankment, subbase and shoulder and on other areas
subject to erosion as shown on the Drawings and where required by the Engineer.
3.12.2 PRODUCTS
3.12.2.1 Materials
Grass shall be of species native to Thailand, harmless and inoffensive to people and animals and
not of a kind recognized as a nuisance to agriculture. It shall be free of disease and noxious weeds,
deep rooted and sufficiently rapid growing and spreading to give complete cover over the planted
area within two years of planting.
The term "grass" embraces sods, sprigs and seeds and, if the Engineer permits, may include plants
of other types capable of giving effective protection.
Fertilizer shall be approved Lime or mixtures of plant nutrients or both.
Sods and sprigs shall be planted with their root system substantially undamaged and packed
around with moist earth in which they have grown.
3.12.3 EXECUTION
Seed shall be planted by a method that ensures reasonably uniform coverage and that the seeds
will germinate and strike root without being washed out.
Sprigs shall be planted in a regular pattern such that surface water flowing over the area will have
no clear channels to flow through but will be diverted into winding course by the presence of
the sprigs. Sprigs shall be planted at a spacing of 30 centimeters or as required in the Contract
Documents.
Sodding shall be done by planting sods to give continuous cover over the whole area.
Strip sodding shall be done by planting strips of sods not less than 8 centimeters wide, not more
than 45 centimeters apart (centre to centre) or as required in the Contract Documents.
Strip sodding shall be planted with the strips lying along contours.
All sprigs and sods shall be planted with roots well buried in firm material.
Grass shall be planted at such a time and the work shall be done in such a way that at the time
of the final construction inspection all areas to be grassed are substantially covered with healthy,
well established, firmly rooted grass and the planted area is free form erosion channels. In the
case of strip sodding bare strips between the strips of sods will be permitted at the time of the
construction inspection, In the case of sprigging bare patches between sprigs will be permitted
provided clear paths for erosion channels for not exist.
Occasional small bare patches will not be cause for rejection. Any bare areas which, in the
Engineer's opinion, may permit erosion shall be made good and replanted with Sodding.
Surfaces to be planted shall be trimmed in such a way that the ground surface after planting shall
be as shown on the Drawings.
Fertilizer shall be added at the time of planting if required in the Contract Documents or if it is
necessary to ensure good ground cover within the required time.
Whenever a slope is completed, dressed and ready for grassing, the Contractor shall proceed with
block sodding or strip sodding as designated on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall maintain the grass at his expense until the end of the Maintenance Period.
Maintenance shall consist of preserving, protecting and replacing grass, and such other work as
may be necessary to keep it in a satisfactory condition to prevent erosion and to present a dense
and uniform appearance. The Contractor shall be responsible for satisfactory growth and shall
water, fertilize and mow the grass at such intervals as will ensure good ground cover of live grass
all through the Maintenance Period.
3.13 TOPSOIL
3.13.1 DESCRIPTION
3.13.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the transportation, furnishing and installation of topsoil.
3.13.2 PRODUCTS
3.13.2.1 Materials
(1) Shall consist of a natural surface soil without admixture of any undesirable soil, refuse
of foreign materials.
(2) It shall be reasonably free from roots, hard clay, coarse gravel, stones larger than 50
mm. in any dimension, noxious weeds, tall grass brush, sticks, stubble or other litter,
and shall have indicated by a healthy growth of crops, grasses, trees or other vegetation
that it is free draining and non-toxic.
3.13.3 EXECUTION
3.13.3.1 Topsoil
(1) The contractor shall remove noxious weeds and tall grass, brush, stones larger than 50
mm in any dimension and roots
(2) The topsoil shall be evenly spread on the designated areas to a depth which after
settlement and compaction, shall be that shown on the drawings. Spreading shall not
be done when the ground or topsoil is excessively wet or otherwise in a condition
detrimental to the work. The roadway surfaces shall be kept clean during hauling and
spreading operations.
(3) After spreading has been completed, large clods, stones larger than 50 mm in any
dimension, roots, stumps and other litter shall be raked up and removed lightly rolled
to the required thickness measured perpendicularly the slopes.
3.14 GUARD RAILS
3.14.1 DESCRIPTION
3.14.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the furnishing and installation of guard rails along roads. This work includes
posts, rails, cables, fixtures and fastenings, beams, expansion joints, anchorages and attachments,
alignment and finishes.
3.14.2 PRODUCTS
3.14.2.1 Materials
(1) Steel posts shall be galvanized standard carbon steel pipe with round shape, outside
diameter not less than 100 mm., thickness not less than 4 mm., and conform to the
requirement of TIS 248.
(2) Concrete shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.3 : PRECAST CONCRETE
(3) Rail Elements shall be of rolled steel sections of not less than gauge 10 and conform to
the requirement of TIS 248.
(4) Type of Rail Elements shall be galvanized with various minimum weight of zinc coating
as specified in the Table 3.14-1.
Table 3.14-1 : Minimum Weight of Zinc Coating of Rail Elements
Rail Type MIN. Weight of Zinc Coating

(Grams of Squaremeter)
TYPE 1 550
TYPE 2 1,100
3.14.3 EXECUTION
3.14.3.1 Posts
Posts shall be set vertically in position and to the lines and levels shown on the drawings. Post
holes shall be backfilled with reviewed material well tamped in layers of not more than 100 mm
thickness. If driving of posts is permitted the tops of posts shall have substantially the same
dimensions as the body of the posts. Damage to posts in driving will be cause for rejection.
3.14.3.2 Rails
Shall be erected in a manner that will result in a smooth continuous taut rail closely conforming
to the line grade of the road or as shown on the drawings, and supplied to the site fully fabricated
requiring only bolting on site. Bolts shall be drawn tight except where otherwise required at
expansion joints.
3.14.3.3 Painting
All metal work not galvanized shall be given one shop coat of red lead or zinc chromate paint or
a rust inhibiting primer of a type approved by the Engineer and two field coats of white or
aluminum paint. All metal parts which are galvanized shall be given one field coat of white paint.
3.14.3.4 Road Traffic Signs
Road Traffic signs shall be located and installed as shown on the drawings.
3.15 FENCING
3.15.1 DESCRIPTION
3.15.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the furnishing and installation fencing and gate at locations indicated on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3.15.2 PRODUCTS
3.15.2.1 Materials
(1) Concrete shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.3: CONCRETE FOR
STRUCTURES.
(2) Reinforcing steel shall comply with requirements of Section4.2: REINFORCEMENT
(3) Timber shall be carpentry grade conforming to Section 5.4 CARPENTER AND JOINER.
Timber shall be free from shakes, splits, waned edge and heartwood, and shall be well
seasoned.
(4) Cable, Chain Link, Wire shall be of the gauge, weight, size and type as indicated on the
drawings.
(5) Hinges and Fittings shall be to size and type indicated on the drawings.
3.15.3 EXECUTION
3.15.3.1 Erection
(1) Post shall be set vertically to the depth shown on the drawings and maintained in
accurate alignment while fencing is erected and backfilling is done.
(2) Backfilling shall be done with suitable material, not necessarily the material excavated,
and shall be well tamped into compacted layers not exceeding 100 mm thickness.
(3) On completion of erection the fence shall be firm with no loose or movable parts and
true to lines, grades and levels. Gates shall be hung horizontally.
(4) Anchor posts shall be securely buried and backfilled as for posts and shall show no signs
of movement when wires are strained tight.
3.15.3.2 Painting
Painting shall be in conformity with the requirements stated on the drawings and Section
5.2.12: Painting.
3.16 MARKERS AND GUIDE POSTS

3.16.1 DESCRIPTION
3.16.1.1 Scope
This work shall consist of guide posts, kilometer stones and right - of – way monuments furnished
and installed in accordance with details shown on the Drawings and these Specifications.
This work shall also include the removal, rehabilitation and relocation of existing guide posts or
kilometer stones on road rehabilitation or reconstruction projects as directed by the Engineer and
in accordance with these Specifications.
3.16.2 PRODUCTS
3.16.2.1 Materials
(1) Concrete shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.3:CONCRETE FOR
STRUCTURES.
(2) Reinforcing steel shall comply with requirements of SECTION 4.2: REINFORCEMENT
3.16.3 EXECUTION
3.16.3.1 Erection
Details of construction materials, placing, painting, lettering, etc. are shown and fully described
on the Drawings. Any guide post or kilometer stone shown on the Drawings or designated by
the Engineer to be removed and relocated shall be carefully excavated, removed, cleaned,
repainted and refurbished to a like- new condition and installed in the proper location as
3.17 ROAD SIGNS

3.17.1 DESCRIPTION
3.17.1.1 Scope
This work shall consist of furnishing, assembling and erecting posts and signs in accordance with
at the locations as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
This work shall also include the removal, cleaning, restoration and reinstalling of existing road
signs and posts which are in good condition but not presently in the proper location for the
finished road construction.
3.17.2 PRODUCTS
3.17.2.1 Materials
(1) Concrete
Concrete shall be of the Grade 20 as shown on the Drawings or as otherwise ordered by the
Engineer.
(2) Sign Post
Sign posts shall be made of steel in the form of round tubes or pipes of not less than 75
mm outside diameter and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 53, Grade B. Open ended
posts shall be effectively capped with a non removable insert of approved design to prevent
ingress of water.
(3) Sign Plates
(a) Sign plates shall be of 2 mm thick sheet steel and conform to the requirements of
ASTM A 245. The edges of sign plates shall be shaped or strengthen as approved by
the Engineer to increase the rigidity of the sign face without impairing the appearance
of the sign. Signs plate shall be durable, even and flat, with no warp.
(b) The legend, size and colour shall comply with the Drawings.The inscription on traffic
signs be in Lao and English with the Lao inscription above the English.
(c) The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with shop drawings, manufacturers'
certificates and samples of all sign plates.
(d) No sign plates shall be erected before being approved by the Engineer. Any
significant damage to or bending of the sign plates shall be considered as sufficient
cause to require replacement of the plates at the Contractor's expense.
(4) Reflective Sheeting
(a) The legend and background (as appropriate) shall be of reflective sheeting, which
shall be "Scotchlite" Engineering Grade or equal approved colour-fast reflective material
applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's specifications/instructions.
(b) The inscription, size and colour shall comply with the Drawings and Lao standards
(c) The Contractor shall submit samples of each colour of the reflective sheeting to the
Engineer for approval, prior to ordering materials.
(5) Galvanisation
(a) Steel posts and steel sheets shall be galvanised in accordance with AASHTO M 111
after allnecessary fixing holes, etc. have been drilled or formed.
(d) All bolts nuts and washers shall be galvanised in accordance with AASHTO M 232.
3.17.3 EXECUTION
3.17.3.1 Construction Requirements
(1) General
(a) Sign delivered to Site shall be stored off the ground and under cover in a manner
approved by the Engineer. Any sign damaged, discoloured or defaced during
transportation, storage or erection shall be rejected and replaced by the Contractor at
his own cost.
(b) The Engineer will establish and mark the longitudinal location of each sign.
(c) The sign shall be laterally positioned from the shoulder or sidewalk edge as shown on
the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
(d) Sign posts shall be erected vertically, and where two posts support one sign, their tops
shall be at the same level and below the top of the sign.
(2) Foundations
(a) Footing shall be excavated to the dimensions shown on Drawings. Concrete shall be
placed against the undisturbed excavated faces. The top 150 mm of each footing shall
be formed. Forming of the entire footing will not be permitted unless approved by the
Engineer.
(b) Concrete shall be thoroughly rodded and spaded to eliminate all voids. Tops of footings
shall be finished with a wood float and all exposed edges shall be rounded with an
edger.
(c) Backfill shall be thoroughly compacted by mechanical tampers to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, and care taken to prevent damage to the finished concrete. Backfill shall be
brought up level with the finished ground line. Posts shall be firmly supported plumb
and vertical and at the proper elevation prior to placing the concrete and such supports
shall be maintained until the foundation is at least 4 days old.
(d) Alternative, prefabricated concrete footings may be approved based on drawings and
specifications submitted by the Contractor of the proposed footings.
(3) Sign Supports
(a) Sign plate supports shall be as shown on the Drawings.
(b) Post Lengths shown on the Drawings are an indication only. The Engineer will authorise
the Location of each sign, with the station and offset distance from the edge to the
pavement. The Contractor shall determine the correct Length of posts to obtain the
vertical clearance shown on the Drawings. Field cutting of posts shall be performed by
sawing. Cut edges shall be filed smooth and all damage to the galvanisation made good
with two coats of an approved zinc-rich inorganic paint especially formulated for the
repair of galvanised finishes. The posts shall be painted in black and white bands.
(4) Attaching Signs to Posts
(a) Signs shall be attached to posts by shaped galvanised steel members in accordance with
the requirements of the Drawings, the recommendations of the sign manufacturer and
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(b) The exposed portion of fastening hardware on the face of the signs shall be painted with
enamel paint to match the background colour.
(c) All newly erected traffic signs shall be covered until otherwise ordered by the Engineer.
The maternal (when dry or wet) shall obscure the Legend but shall not impart and
damage or discoloration to the sign face. The covering material shall be adequately
secured against displacement by the wind and shall be promptly resecured or replaced
by the Contractor if displaced, Lost or removed.
3.18 ROAD LIGHTING

3.18.1 DESCRIPTION
3.18.1.1 Scope
This section shall consist of the supply of all Lanterns complete, brackets, columns and other
supporting devices, bases, cables, switchgear and all necessary ancillary equipment together with
the transportation, storage, assembly, erection, connection and testing of the same in order to
supply a complete street Lighting system in accordance with Section 7.6: ROAD AND YARD
LIGHTING, 7.6.1 DESCRIPTION.
3.18.2 PRODUCTS
Materials and Equipment used for erection of Street lighting System shall be in accordance with
Section 7.6: ROAD AND YARD LIGHTING, 7.6.2 PRODUCTS.
3.18.3 EXECUTION
Conduction of all work for Road Lighting System shall be conforming to Section 7.6: ROAD AND
YARD LIGHTING, 7.6.3 EXECUTION.
3.19 ROAD MARKING

3.19.1 DESCRIPTION
3.19.1.1 Scope
This Section covers the application of continuous or intermittent Lines, Letters or figures to the
dimensions and at the Locations shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer, including
the supply of all Labour, tools and equipment, materials, warning and traffic guidance signs as
necessary for the safe and efficient completion of the work.
3.19.2 PRODUCTS
3.19.2.1 Materials
Materials for permanent road markings shall be thermoplastic material as described in Clause 1.1
or road marking paint as described in Clause 1.2. Kerb markings shall be painted with road marking
paint as described in Clause 1.2. Road markings shall be white or yellow as shown on the drawings.
Reflecting road studs are described in Clause 1.3.
(1) Hot Applied Thermoplastic
(a) The thermoplastic material shall be factory mixed, from an approved manufacturer
and shall be of a tropical grade suitable for application, by the means proposed, to
the specified road surfaces, and must demonstrate skid resistance appropriate to
Local traffic conditions. The material shall comply with TIS 542
(b) The material shall be supplied in containers which do not contaminate the
contents and which protect the contents from contamination and shall be stored
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
(c) Ballotini (glass beads) may be incorporated in the mixture during the manufacture
of the thermoplastic material. The quantity of ballotini included shall be between
13% and 22% by weight of the total mix and shall be counted as part of the
aggregate. The Ballotini shall comply with TIS 543.
(d) Alternative the Ballotini (glass beads) may be applied to the surface of the
thermoplastic immediately application is complete. Application of the beads shall
be at least 300 grams/m 2 or as otherwise instructed by the Engineer. The Ballotini
shall comply with TIS 543.
(2) Road Marking Paint
(a) All paints shall be road marking paint conforming to BSEN1436:2007+A1:2008
"Road Marking Materials. Road Marking Performance for Road Users" and made by
an approved manufacturer and suitable for application, by the means proposed,
to the specified road surfaces.
(b) The paint shall be suitable for applying by brush or mechanical means
The following particulars of the paint shall be supplied:
(i) composition (analysis by weight)
(ii) application (brush or spray)
(iii) type and maximum amount of reducer (thinner)
(iv) drying time (wheel dry)
(v) setting time (to recoat)
(vi) recommended coverage (litres per linear kilometre of 100
mm stripe)
(vii) heat resistance i.e. maximum road temperature
(viii) details of any primer, undercoat or tack coat required
(c) Retro-Reflecting Road Studs
Reflecting road studs shall conform to TIS 2573. Road studs shall have retro reflecting
colour of either be red, white or yellow and be uni-directional, bi-directional or omni-
directional, as shown on the Drawings or as otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
They shall incorporate one or more corner cube retro reflective lenses, and the area
of lens facing each direction of traffic shall be at least 300 square millimetres. The
studs shall be capable of withstanding impacts and no contact shall be possible
between the lenses and the vehicle types. The studs shall not project more than 20
mm. above the level of the surrounding road surface and the lowest part of the
lenses shall be more than 5 mm. above the surrounding road surface. The studs
may be either bonded to, or anchored within, the road surface. The design shall be
such as to ensure ample key to the road pavement with adequate load distribution
and such that it shall not be possible for heavy equipment such as road rollers and
tracked vehicles travelling in the direction of the road axis to meet with any sharp
edges whereby the removal of the stud might be facilitated.
3.19.3 EXECUTION
(1) Thermoplastic
(a) Preparation of Road Surface
The material shall be applied only on a surface which is clean and dry. It shall not
be Laid over Loose detritus, mud or similar extraneous matter, or over an old paint
marking, or over an old thermoplastic marking which is faulty. New surfaces must be
allowed to weather and compact for at Least 72 hours before applying the marking.
In the case of smooth polished surfaces, e.g. smooth concrete, old asphalt surfacing
with smooth polished surface stones, and/or where the method of application
requires or the Engineer's instructs, a tack coat shall be applied to the surface prior
to the application. The tack coat shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of
the thermoplastic material and to the approval of the Engineer.
(b) Preparation of Thermoplastic Material
The material shall be melted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions in
a heater fitted with a stirrer to give a smooth consistency to the thermoplastic and
such that local overheating shall be avoided. The temperature of the mass shall be
within the range specified by the manufacturer and shall on no account be allowed
to exceed the maximum temperature stated by the manufacturer. The molten
material shall be used as expeditiously as possible and for thermoplastics which
have natural resin binders or are otherwise sensitive to prolonged heating, the
material shall not be maintained in a molten condition for more than 4 hours.
(c) Laying of Thermoplastic Material
(i) Markings may be applied by hand-screeding, hand propelled machine or by self
propelled machine as approved or instructed by the Engineer. After transfer to
the laying apparatus the material shall be maintained within the temperature
range specified by the manufacturer and stirred to maintain the right consistency
for laying.
(ii) In the case of screeded application, material shall be laid to a thickness of not
less than 3 mm nor more than 6 mm, unless specifically authorised by the
Engineer. In the case of sprayed application, the material shall be laid to a
thickness of not less than 1.5 mm unless specifically authorised by the Engineer.
In all cases, the surface produced shall be uniform, appreciably free from bubbles
and streaks.
(iii) The Contractor shall not proceed with the marking work until the equipment,
method of application, and rate of application, as established by a test section,
have been approved by the Engineer.
(iv) The work shall be carried out very carefully to a regular alignment in accordance
with the Drawings. Straight edges and templates shall be used if instructed by the
Engineer.
(v) Where applicable the Ballotini (glass beads) shall be applied to the surface of the
thermoplastic immediately application is complete and shall be applied in a
controlled manner by use of a spreading device which will permit an even spread
from a fixed height of between 300 mm and 400 mm or otherwise as the
Manufacturer may recommend. ( A wheel mounted, variable width, funnel
applicator may be suitable). The loss of glass beads after 3 weeks traffic shall not
exceed 10 percent of the total applied.
(d) Re-use of Thermoplastic Material
At the end of the day's work, as much as possible of the material remaining in the heater
and/or laying apparatus shall be removed. This may be broken and used again, provided
that the maximum heating temperature has not been exceeded and that the total time
during which it is in a molten condition does not exceed the requirements.
(2) Road Marking Paint

(a) Preparation of Road Surface
The paint shall be applied only on a surface which is clean and dry. It shall not be laid
over loose detritus, mud or similar extraneous matter or over a thermoplastic marking
or over an old paint marking which is faulty or incompatible with the paint being applied.
New surfaces must be allowed to weather and compact for at least 72 hours before
applying the marking. If a primer or undercoat is necessary to ensure proper adhesion of
the marking paint to the road surface without bleeding or discolouration, the primer or
undercoat shall be fully compatible with the marking paint and the road surface, and
shall be applied only if, and at the rate of application approved by the Engineer.
(b) Preparation of Paint
All cold-applied paint shall be thoroughly field mixed before applying in order to keep
the pigments in uniform suspension. Hot-applied paints shall be heated in a properly
designed heater, to the correct laying temperature at which it shall be maintained as
required for the method of application. The paint shall on no account be allowed to
exceed the maximum temperature specified by the paint manufacturer. The use of
thinner or other additives shall not be permitted unless otherwise agreed to by the
Employer/Engineer.
(c) Laying of Paint
(i) Markings shall be applied by brush, spray, hand-propelled or self-propelled
machine according to the marking configuration and the type of paint
approved for use or as instructed by the Engineer. The rate of application of
paint for each coat shall be that recommended by the manufacturer and
shall produce a minimum total cover rate of thinner paint of 0. 5 litre per
square metre, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
(ii) Where a spray machine is to be used the Contractor shall not proceed with
the marking work until the equipment, method of application, and rate of
application, as established by a test section, have been approved by the
Engineer.
(iii) When more than one coat is used, the succeeding coat shall not be applied
until the previous coat has fully set.
(iv) The work shall be carried out very carefully to a regular alignment in
accordance with the Drawings. Straight edges and templates shall be used if
required by the Engineer.
(v) Where applicable the Ballotini (glass beads) shall be applied to the surface
of the paint immediately application is complete and shall be applied in a
controlled manner by use of a spreading device which shall permit an even
spread from a fixed height of between 300 mm. and 400 mm. or otherwise
as the Manufacturer may recommend. ( A wheel mounted, variable width,
funnel applicator may be suitable) . The loss of glass beads after 3 weeks
traffic shall not exceed 10 percent of the total applied.
(d) Protection of Paint Markings
All markings shall be protected from traffic until they have dried sufficiently.
(3) Retro-reflecting Road Studs

Road studs shall not be installed over road markings or joints in the road surface. The road surface
shall be cleaned, and dust, oil, grease and other contaminants removed. New surfaces shall be
allowed to compact and weather for at least 72 hours prior to the installation of the studs.
Acceptable methods of fixing include: bonding with an adhesive; anchoring with a road nail; and
setting the stud into a drilled cavity in the pavement. However, the method of fixing, including
any adhesive or grout used, must be suitable for the specified road surface and the tropical
climate. The studs shall be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Studs which
become loose or free during the defects liability period shall be considered a defect.
(4) Attaching Signs to Posts
All forms of line marking and road studs shall be subject to the following tolerances where
applicable:
(a) Longitudinal lines such as centre lines, edge lines and other lines of a continuous nature
shall not vary from the design longitudinal dimensions by more than 10%. Transverse
dimensions (Line width) shall have a tolerance of-0% + 10%.
(b) Longitudinal lines such as centre lines, edge lines, other lines of a continuous nature and
road studs shall not vary from the designed alignment by more than 300 mm. on a curve
or 150 mm on a straight section.
(c) Transverse and other incidental road markings shall not vary from the specified
dimensions by more than ± 5% of the overall dimension. Alignments shall not vary by
more than 20 mm. from the designed alignment except in the case of centre line
chainage location which shall not vary by more than 0.5 m.
(5) Defective Materials of workmanship
Materials which are defective or have been applied in an unsatisfactory manner or to
incorrect dimensions or in a wrong location shall be removed, the road pavement made
good and the materials replaced, reconstructed and/or properly located, all at the
Contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(6) Protection of Traffic
The Contractor shall protect pedestrian, vehicular and other traffic adjacent to the working area
against damage or disfigurement by construction equipment, tools and materials or by splatters,
splashes and smirches of paint or other construction materials and shall during the course of the
work provide and maintain adequate signs and signals for the warning and guidance of traffic.
END OF SECTION 3
SECTION 4
STRUCTURAL WORKS
Tender Documents Section 4 : Structural Works
SECTION 4: STRUCTURAL WORKS
4.1 FORMWORK AND FALSEWORK

4.1.1 DESCRIPTION
4.1.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the furnishing and installation of formwork, moulds and falsework for
concrete construction.
4.1.1.2 Tolerances
(1) Formwork
Shall be set to such lines and levels as to ensure that the following tolerances are not
exceeded in the finished concrete members whilst still supported by the formwork:
(a) For all buried concrete not waterproofed: +25 mm and -12 mm
(b) For all buried concrete which is waterproofed: +25 mm and -12 mm but with no
abrupt change of more than 3 mm
(c) For edge beams and sides of kerbs: ±3 mm but not more than 3 mm in 3.5 metres
(d) For all other concrete: ±6 mm but not more than 3 mm in 3.5 metres
(2) Moulds
The tolerance in longitudinal dimensions for all concrete work shall remain within the
following limits:
(a) For component up to 10 m long: ±5 mm
(b) For component up to 20 m long: ±10 mm
(c) For component up to 40 m long: ±15 mm
4.1.2 PRODUCTS
4.1.2.1 Materials
(1) Formwork
Shall be constructed of sound well-seasoned timber and/or plywood. The use of steel
forms or forms made of other materials shall be permitted. Such forms shall be of regular
uniform size with make-up sections arranged in a manner approved by the Engineer. They
shall conform in all relevant respects with the requirements specified for timber formwork.
(2) Moulds
Shall be of steel or plywood panels or panels of other materials approved by the Engineer
and shall be rigidly assembled so that no displacement or deformation can take place
during casting. Formwork shall be designed so that it can be removed without shock or
damage to the concrete, and it must be braced and held in position in such a way as to
avoid any holes or fastenings through the member.
(3) Falsework
Shall be constructed from well-seasoned timber, hot rolled steel sections or other
approved materials suitable to support the loads to be carried.
4.1.2.2 Design
(1) Formwork
Track Doubling Project : Den Chai – Chiang Rai – Chiang Khong Section Volume III : Book 1/3
Contract : 2 Ngao-Chiang Rai Section 4-1
(a) Strength and deflection calculations and drawings of the formwork shall be submitted
for theEngineers approval.
(b) Formwork shall be constructed so that the side forms of members can be removed
without disturbing the soffit forms and, if props or falsework are to be left in place
when the soffit forms are removed, these props or falsework shall not be disturbed
during the striking.
(c) For prestressed units, the soffit forms shall accommodate deformation of the member
when the prestress is applied.
(d) All formwork shall be removed without damage to the concrete in appearance,
strength or durability.
(2) Falsework
(a) Strength and deflection calculations and drawings of the falsework shall be submitted
for the Engineer's approval.
(b) All falsework shall be designed and constructed to provide the necessary rigidity and
to support the loads without significant settlement or deformation.
(c) Falsework that cannot be founded on solid footings must be supported by ample
falsework piling, which shall be spaced, driven, and removed in a manner approved
by the Engineer.
(d) Arch centring shall be so constructed as to permit its lowered gradually and uniformly.
(e) Beams and slabs shall have a camber of 1/1000 of their span after removal of the
forms, unless otherwise stated on the drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
(3) Construction
(a) All timber shall be sound, free from warps and twists, sap, shakes, large or loose knots,
waney edges or other defects affecting the strength or appearance of the finished
structure.
(b) The shape, strength, rigidity, water tightness and surface smoothness of reused
formwork shall be maintained at all times. Any warped or bulged timber must be
resized before being reused.
Formwork that is unsatisfactory in any respect shall not be reused.
(c) Internal ties shall be so arranged as to permit their removal to a depth of at least 25
mm from the concrete face without injury to the concrete.
No permanently embedded metal shall have less than 25 mm cover to the finished
concrete surface.
(d) Formwork shall be so constructed that easy cleaning out of any extraneous material
inside the formwork can be achieved without disturbing formwork already checked
(4) Finishes
(a) Concealed Surfaces
Rough timber may be used for surfaces that will not be exposed in the finished
structure. The surface shall be dense and sound and free from excessive irregularities
or blemishes. The finish shall be left as struck but major irregularities shall be rectified
as required by the Engineer.
(b) Exposed Surfaces
Kerbs, parapets, edge beams, and soffit of deck slab, and prestressed girders/beams,
columns, cross heads, wing walls and abutments of all bridges, and internal faces of
vehicular, pedestrian, and drainage box culverts. The formwork shall be lined with a
material approved by the Engineer providing a smooth finish of uniform texture and
appearance. The lining material shall leave no stain on the concrete and shall be so
joined and fixed to its backing that it imparts no blemishes.
(c) It shall be of the same type and obtained from the same source throughout one
structure. The arrangement of panels shall be agreed with the Engineer. Any
imperfections shall be made good as required by the Engineer.
(d) Unless otherwise shown in the Contract, all formwork joints in exposed surfaces of
concrete finish shall form a regular pattern with horizontal and vertical lines
continuous throughout each structure and all construction joints shall coincide with
these horizontal and vertical lines.
4.1.3 EXECUTION
4.1.3.1 Preparations
(1) Releasing Agent
Formwork shall be treated with approved non-staining oil or saturated with water at the
discretion of the Engineer before placing concrete. Form oil will only be used after the
approval of the Engineer has been given. The Engineer may require trials to be carried out
before approval is given for the use of a particular form oil, to ascertain that the form oil
proposed be the Contractor will not discolour or injure the finished concrete face in any
way.
(2) Cleaning
Immediately before concreting all shavings, loose binding wires and other extraneous
matter shall be removed from within the formwork. No concrete shall be placed until the
Engineer has inspected and approved the formwork and supports thereto.
4.1.3.2 Removal of Formwork and Falsework
(1) Time of Removal
Forms and falsework shall not be removed without the approval of the Engineer. The
Engineer's approval shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the safety of the
work. Blocks and locking shall be removed at the same time as the forms and in no case
shall any portion of the wood forms be left in the concrete.
(a) Centring under girders, beams or frames 14 days
(b) Floor slabs and bottom of crossheads 14 days
(c) Columns 2 days
(d) Walls, piers, sides of beams and other vertical surfaces 1 day
(2) The minimum times in the above table are based on normal curing in average
weatherconditions and the use of the Ordinary Portland Cement. They may be changed
subject to the prior written agreement of the Engineer.
(3) Formwork and falsework for the whole of suspended span bridges and other
specialstructures shall remain in place until such time as the Engineer will decide, after all
concrete has been poured.
4.1.3.3 Reuse of Formwork

Where it is intended to reuse formwork, it shall be cleaned and repaired as necessary to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.1.3.4 Voids in Bridge Decks
(1) Voids in bridge deck slabs, where shown on the drawings, shall be formed with non-
recoverable void formers, of expanded polystyrene, or by other methods approved by the
Engineer. They shall not deviate by more than 12 mm from the positions shown on the
Drawings, nor shall the cross section deviate from the specified shape by more than 12
mm. The deck slabs containing these voids shall be cast to the full depth in one operation
and the void farmers shall be capable of withstanding all forces developed during the
concreting operation.
(2) Formers shall be secured and adequately anchored to prevent movement or flotation
outsidethe limits specified above, during the concreting operation.
Anchor ties secured to the soffit formwork will be permitted providing they comply with
the requirements of Clause 4.1.2.2(3)(c) herein.
(3) Void formers of expanded polystyrene need not be vented. Hollow void formers shall
bevented by the provision of 50 mm diameter holes between each void and the soffit at
positions approved by the Engineer.
(4) As soon as possible and at least 3 months prior to the casting of the first deck slab with
voids,the Contractor shall construct a "mock-up" of a size and form to be agreed with the
Engineer using the proposed formers, methods of fixing, and simulating reinforcement and
prestressing cable ducts.
The "mock-up" must demonstrate that the proposed methods of fixing the formers and for
the placing of concrete around them and the reinforcement will produce voids within the
tolerances and surrounded with properly compacted concrete of the required strength to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(5) The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the flammable nature of expanded polystyrene
andhe shall take all necessary precautions to minimise the risk of fire.
(6) Concreting of voided slabs in the structures shall not be commenced until the "mock-up"
hasbeen completed and approved by the Engineer.
4.2 REINFORCEMENT
4.2.1 DESCRIPTION
4.2.1.1 Scope
(1) The materials and workmanship to be employed for the reinforcing steel works of
concreteshall comply with the Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ACI
318, and the Specifications. In the event of conflict between ACI Standard and the
Specifications, the latter shall prevail.
(2) This section specifies the furnishing and placing of reinforcement bars of the grade, type,
andsize shown in accordance with these specifications, and in conformity with the
requirements shown on the drawings.
(3) Bending schedules shown on the drawings are for guidance only and shall be checked by
theContractor.
4.2.1.2 Tolerances
Reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in the position shown in the Contract Drawings to
the following tolerances:
Concrete cover: + 6 mm /- 3 mm
Longitudinal location of bends and ends of bars: ± 25 mm except that the specified cover at
ends of members should not be reduced by
more than 3 mm
4.2.1.3 Storage and Handling
(1) Reinforcement for structures shall be handled and stored in a manner that will prevent
bendingout of the desired shape and the unnecessary accumulation of dirt, oil, and paint.
(2) When placed in the work reinforcement shall be free from dirt, oil, grease, paint, mill-scale
andloose or thick rust.
4.2.1.4 Shop Drawings
Shop drawings are specified in Section 1.4.2.2(1) Shop and Working Drawings.
4.2.2 PRODUCTS
4.2.2.1 Materials
(1) Bar Reinforcement
(a) Bar reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of TIS No.20-2559 Grade SR 24
for plain round bars and TIS No.24-2559 grade SD 40 or SD 40T for high yield strength
deformed bars.
(b) Where these standards are not applicable the reinforcement shall conform to the
specifications for deformed and plain billet-steel bars, AASHTO M31, Grade 40 or TIS
No.24-2559 as approved by the Engineer.
(c) Twisted or redrawn bars shall not be used.
(2) Wire and Wire Mesh
(a) Wire shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO Standard Specification M32 - Cold
Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
(b) Wire mesh shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO Standard Specification M 55
-Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
(3) Bar Mat Reinforcement
Bar mat reinforcement for concrete shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO Standard
Specification M 54 Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
(4) Binding Wire

Reinforcement binding wire shall be best black annealed mild steel wire, approximately
1.6 mm in diameter.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, all intersecting bars shall be tied together and
the ends of the tying wire turned into the main body of the concrete.
(5) Cover Blocks
Cover blocks shall be as small as possible consistent with their purpose, designed not to
overturn when the concrete is placed, and of a shape acceptable to the Engineer. If made
of concrete they shall have 10 mm aggregate size and the same mix proportions so as to
produce the same strength as the adjacent concrete. Cover blocks of other materials may
be used with the Engineers prior written approval.
(6) Manufacturer's Certificate
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with copies of the manufacturer's certificates of
tests for the steel reinforcement to be used in the Works. These certificates shall include
full details of the cast analyses. The carbon equivalent values and the results of all tensile
and bend tests on samples taken in accordance with the defined standards.
(7) Conformity Tests
All reinforcement shall be bundled by size with separation of casts and bundle shall be
identified by durable tags bearing the manufacturer's name or mark, the reinforcement size
or designation and the cast mark as appropriate. Upon delivery to the Site, the Engineer
may require the Contractor to carry out conformity tests on further samples at a laboratory
nominated by the Engineer. Any steel which as a result of the conformity tests, does not
comply with the foregoing specification, will be rejected and shall be removed from the
Site without delay.
4.2.3 EXECUTION
4.2.3.1 Cutting and Bending
(1) Bars shall be cut and bent cold, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, to
dimensionsand shapes as shown on the drawing. Bars partially embedded in concrete shall
not be site bent except as shown on the drawing or with the approval of the Engineer.
(a) Stirrups and tie bars in Grade SR 24 shall be bent around a pin having a diameter not
lessthan four times the minimum thickness of the bar.
(b) Bends for other bars shall be made around a pin having a diameter not less than 12
times the minimum thickness except for bars larger than 30 mm in which case the
bends shall be made around a pin of eight bar diameters.
(c) Hooks shall conform to American Concrete Institute Standard Building Code
Requirements for reinforced concrete (ACI 318), section 906, or as shown on the
drawings.
(2) High tensile steel reinforcement bar must not be re-bent or straightened on site.
4.2.3.2 Placing, Supporting and Fastening
(1) All bar reinforcement shall be placed, supported, and secured before the beginning
ofconcreting operations. The reinforcement shall be checked and approved by the Engineer
before placement of concrete begins. The relation between the minimum spacing of bars
and the maximum size of aggregate shall be as follows unless otherwise stated by the
Engineer. The minimum clear distance between two bars in a beam or column shall not
be less than the diameter of the bar or 25 mm or the largest size of aggregate plus 10 mm
whichever is the greatest. Laying or driving bars into the concrete after placement will not
be permitted.
(2) All horizontal reinforcement shall be supported on metal supports or mortar blocks of
approvedshape with the wires embedded in them. Supports which are in contact with the
external face of the concrete will all be mortar blocks. The use of small stones or wood
blocks will not be permitted.
(3) The reinforcement shall be held securely in place at the exact position and at the
exactspacing as indicated on the drawings by the use of wire ties at bar intersections,
supports and spacer blocks. Wire ties shall be securely tied and folded so that they do not
project beyond the planes formed by the reinforcing bars. The adequacy of the supports
and ties to secure the reinforcement properly shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
(4) The number, size, form and position of all steel reinforcing bars, ties, links, stirrups and
otherparts of the reinforcement shall be in exact accordance with the drawings and they
shall be kept in the correct position and with the required cover without displacement
during the process of compacting the concrete in place in a manner approved by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall provide all necessary distance pieces and spacer bars to
maintain the reinforcement in the correct position. The type of distance pieces shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Any ties, links or stirrups connecting the bars shall be taut so that the bars are properly
braced and the inside of hooks and bends shall be in actual contact with the bars around
which they are intended to fit.
4.2.3.3 Splicing
(1) No splicing shall be made in reinforcement except where shown on the drawings and/or
shopdrawings approved by the Engineer. Splicing of steel bar reinforcement shall be made
in accordance with ACI 315.
(2) Reinforcement shall be furnished in the lengths indicated on the drawings. Lap splicing
exceptwhere shown on the drawings will not be permitted without written approval from
the Engineer, and if additional lap splices are used the additional weight occasioned by
such lap splices will not be included in the measurement of reinforcement for payment.
(3) All splices shall have a lap length of not less than that shown on the drawings, or 40
diametersof the bars for tensile reinforcement and 32 diameters for compressive
reinforcement wherever no dimension is shown on the drawings. Lap splices shall generally
be located at points of minimum tensile strength. Except where otherwise shown on the
drawings lap splices shall be made with the bars placed in contact and wired securely
together.
(4) Welding of reinforcing steel may be done only if approved in writing by the Engineer.
Beforethe Engineer will approve of welding, the Contractor shall submit such samples as
the Engineer may require for testing and make allowance for the time elapsing before test
results are available.
(5) The use of mechanical couplers (e.g. crimped type) may only be used with the prior
writtenapproval of the Engineer.
4.2.3.4 Substitution
(1) Substitution of different size bars will be permitted only with specific authorisation by
theEngineer. If steel is substituted, it shall have a cross-sectional area equivalent to the
design area, or larger. The additional weight occasioned by such substitution will not be
included in the measurement of reinforcement for payment.
(2) The Contractor shall provide, in the case of substitutions, at his own expense and to
theapproval of the Engineer working drawings of all reinforcement accompanied by bending
schedules and copies of orders placed for bars.
4.2.3.5 Cleaning and Inspection
Immediately before concreting, the reinforcement shall be examined for accuracy of placing and
cleanliness and corrected if necessary.
No concreting shall take place before inspection and approval of the reinforcement by the
Engineer.
4.2.3.6 Cover to Reinforcement
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or approved by the Engineer, the concrete cover to
the reinforcement nearest the surface shall not be less than :
 top bars in slabs = 50 mm
 bottom bars in slabs = 38 mm
 main bars in all other structures = 50 mm
 stirrups, links and ties in all other structures = 38 mm
4.3 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
4.3.1 DESCRIPTION
4.3.1.1 Scope
(1) This section specifies the construction of all or portions of concrete structures, of the
requiredclass or classes, with or without reinforcement, and with or without admixture,
constructed in accordance with these Specifications and the lines, levels, grades, and
dimensions shown on the drawings, and as required by the Engineer.
(2) Concrete shall consist of a mixture of Portland cement, water, and coarse and fine
aggregatewith or without admixture.
(3) The materials and workmanship used in the manufacture of concrete shall comply with
ACIStandard, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ACI 318, and the
requirement of the Specifications. In the event of conflict between ACI 318 and the
Specifications, the later shall prevail.
4.3.1.2 Tolerances
Each strength test result shall be the average of at least two cylinders from the same sample
tested at 28 days or the specified earlier age. Forthe strength level of the concrete to be
considered satisfactory, all strength test results shall equal or exceed the minimum compressive
strength and the strength of no individual cylinder shall be less than 85% of the minimum
compressive strength specified.
4.3.1.3 Quality of Concrete
(1) Classes of Concrete - The class of concrete to be used in each part of a structure or other
concrete article shall be as indicated on the drawings and as generally described in the
table below:
Table 4.3-1 Classes of concrete

Concrete
Strength at 28 Balanced Overpass Box Overpass I-
Class Railway Bridge Building Minor Bridge
days, Cylinder Cantilever Girder Girder
(kg/sq.cm.)
Superstructure
AA 500 - - - - -
(Box Girder)
Box Girder, Precast I and
A 450 - - - -
PC.Crossbeam C Girder
Prestressed Girder
B 400 - - - - -
(see notes in dwg.)
Column,
RC.Crossbeam,
PC.Square Pile,
Prestressed Girder PC.Square
C 350 - RC.Pile Column Precast Plank,
(see notes in dwg.) Pile, Precast
Precast Box
Panel, Precast
Plank Girder
RC.Crossbeam,
Pilecap, Deck Pilecap,
Pilecap, Barrier,
Column, Slab, Barrier, Topping Slab,
D 300 - - Abutment &
Foundation Abutment & Barrier,
Transition
Transition Abutment &
Transition
Column, Foundation,
RC.Building
E 250 Approach Slab, Bored Pile Bored Pile - -
Structure
Abutment, General
F 200 Lean Concrete - - Lean Concrete Lean Concrete Lean Concrete
G 150 - - Lean Concrete - - -
(a) Concrete class AA, A, B and C shall be used for prestressed concrete.
(b) Concrete class G shall be used between stones in rip-rap, in ditch and stream bed
protection, for footwalls and for other non-reinforced structures, blinding layers, sub-
foundations, etc.
(c) Concrete class D shall be used for Concrete Road Pavement.
(d) Concrete class D shall be used for RC. Box Curlvert and RC. Box Underpass.
(2) For reinforced concrete of any class the minimum quantity of cement shall be 300 kg per
cu. m. concrete. The compressive strength of concrete shall be determined by tests on 15
x 30 cm cylinders.
4.3.1.4 Mix Design
(1) The Contractor shall design the concrete mixes and submit his proposal for approval of
theEngineer. The class of concrete is denoted by the minimum 28 days cylinder strength
and the maximum size of aggregate. Unless specified to the contrary or otherwise permitted
by the Engineer all cement shall be ordinary Portland Cement complying with Part II herein.
(2) The cement content in any mix shall not exceed 540 kg nor be less than 300 kg per
cubicmetre of concrete. The quantity of water used shall not exceed that required to
produce a dense concrete with sufficient workability to be placed and compacted where
required, and in no case shall the water/cement ratio be greater than 0.5 for all exposed
concrete unless otherwise specifically approved by the Engineer.
(3) Concrete shall conform to the requirement for the particular class set out in Table 4.3-1
appended to this section.
4.3.1.5 Trial Mixes
(1) When the Contractor designs the mix, he shall, at least 35 days before the commencement
ofconcreting, have trial mixes in the presence of the Engineer at the site. The concrete for
each mix shall be tested in accordance with applicable ASTM Standards and must satisfy
the strength requirements of Clause 3.2 above.
(2) The Contractor shall prepare trial mixes having workability, strength and surface finish
ascriteria to satisfy the Engineer regarding these qualities. The trial mixes shall be made and
compacted in the presence of the Engineer, using the same type of plant and equipment
as shall be used for the Works.
(3) From each trial mix, test cylinders shall be made and tested in accordance with AASHTO
T23and T22.
(4) From the same mix as that from which the test cylinders are made, the workability of the
concrete shall be determined by the slump test in accordance with AASHTO test method
T119 or other method approved by the Engineer. The remainder of the mix shall be cast
in a wooden mould and compacted. After 24 hours the sides of the mould shall be struck
and the surface examined in order to satisfy the Engineer that an acceptable surface can
be obtained with this mix.
(5) A trial mix for a particular class shall be acceptable when the strengths of each cylinder
fromthree sets of three cylinders made from different batches cured and tested after 28
days in a laboratory approved by the Engineer are not below the particular strength
specified. In addition the consistency shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(6) On the basis of the results of the trial mixes, the Engineer shall approve the weights
inkilograms of fine and coarse aggregates (in a saturated surface-dry condition) per 50 kg
bag of cement, and the volume of water in litres per bag of cement, which will be required
for a specified class of concrete in order to attain the specified strength and the necessary
workability, and these proportions shall not be changed during the progress of the works,
except if allowed by the Engineer.
(7) In addition, the Engineer shall before each casting approve the batch weight of
aggregatesafter moisture determinations have been made and the saturated surface dry
weights have been corrected for free moisture.
(8) Volume batching may be used only for concrete class C, and the volume of fine and
coarseaggregates shall then be designated per 50 kg bag of cement. Devices for measuring
shall be approved by the Engineer.
(9) When a proposed mix has been approved by the Engineer, no variations shall be made in
themix proportions, or in the type, size, grading zone or source of any of the constituents
without the consent of the Engineer, who may require further trial mixes to be made before
any such variation is approved by the Engineer.
4.3.1.6 Sampling and Testing
(1) The Contractor shall take samples of concrete for testing.
(2) The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish steel moulds for cylinders and ensure
thatnot less than 3 sets of moulds (each set consisting of 3 moulds) for test cylinders, are
always available on any site where concrete is cast
(3) The time of sampling will be decided by the Engineer. Sampling, making and testing
ofcylinders shall be done in accordance with AASHTO T23 and T22.
(4) Unless otherwise requested by the Engineer, cylinder tests shall generally be made at the
rateof:
1 set of cylinders per 40 cu.m for the first 500 cu.m
1 set of cylinders per 80 cu.m for the remainder of the work.
4.3.1.7 Delivery and Storage
(1) Cement shall be stored in a dry weather-proof shed with a raised wooden floor or in a silo
andshall be delivered in quantities sufficient to ensure that there is no suspension or
interruption of the work of concreting at any time. If stored in sheds, each consignment
shall be kept separate and distinct.
(2) Coarse aggregate, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, shall be delivered to the site
inseparate sizes (2 Sizes when the maximum size is 20 mm and 3 sizes when the maximum
size is 40 mm or more).
(3) All aggregates brought upon the site shall be kept free from contact with deleterious
matterand in the case of aggregates passing a 5 mm sieve they shall be deposited on the
site of mixing for not less than 8 hours before use. Aggregates of different sizes shall be
stored in different hoppers, or different stockpiles which shall be separated from each other
on a concrete floor sloping to the back of the stockpile with adequate drainage.
4.3.2 PRODUCTS
4.3.2.1 Materials
(1) Cement
(a) The cement shall conform to the requirements of TIS 15 Portland Cement, type I, Ill
or V.
(b) Type I cement shall be used for ordinary concrete.
(c) The use of type III cement shall be subject to the Engineer's approval in each particular
case. No additional payment will be allowed for the use of one or other type of
cement.
(d) Type V cement shall be used where sulphate concentrations in the soil or water, in
the opinion of the Engineer, may be found detrimental to the concrete.
(2) Water
(a) The water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be tested according to AASHTO T26.
The water shall be clean and free from silt, oil or acid, vegetable or other substance
injurious to the finished product.
(b) Sources of water shall be maintained at such a depth, and the water shall be
withdrawn in such a manner as to exclude silt, mud, grass or other foreign materials.
(3) Coarse Aggregates
(a) The coarse aggregate shall conform to the requirements of Table I (No. 467) in AASHTO
M80, substitution 1 1/4" (31.5 mm) for 1 1/2" (38.0 mm), and it shall be uniformly
graded between the limits specified.
(b) The Engineer may, in certain cases prescribed, allow the designated maximum size of
coarse aggregate to be reduced from 31.5 mm to 25 or 20 mm according to the spacing
of the reinforcement bars.
(c) The three dimensions of particles shall be nearly equal. For at least 90% of the
particles the proportion between the largest and smallest dimension shall be 5.0 or
less.
(d) The percentage of particles having certain proportions between their largest and
smallest dimensions (i.e. between the largest distance the particles can fill out
between two parallel planes and the smallest distance between two parallel planes
that will permit the particle to pass) shall be determined in the following way:
(i) From a sample of coarse aggregates all particles passing No. 4 sieve are
eliminated. The sample shall be so big that at least 100 particles remain.
(ii) By means of a sliding caliper the largest and smallest dimensions, as defined
above, are determined for each particle and its proportion calculated (with one
decimal).
(iii) The total weights of particles having the proportions 5.0 or less, are determined
and their percentages in relation to the total sample are calculated.
(e) Coarse aggregates shall be obtained by crushing rock.
(f) The aggregate shall not contain more than 750 parts per million of chlorides nor more
than 1500 parts per million of sulphates.
(4) Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall conform to AASHTO M6. Such aggregate may be obtained by screening
and blending sand. The contents of chlorides and sulphates shall conform to the values
stated for coarse aggregate.
(5) Admixtures
(a) Unless agreed by the Engineer neither admixtures nor cements containing additives
shall be used. The Contractor shall submit samples of any additive or admixture he
proposes to use to the Engineer at least 35 days prior to the date of commencement
of construction of the particular structure or portion of structure on which he intends
to use such admixture or additive. Trial mixes or any other tests incorporating the
proposed admixture additive shall be made by the Contractor at his own expense and
the results shall be approved by the Engineer before use in the Works. Any approval
if otherwise given under this Clause shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his
obligation to produce concrete with the specified strength, workability and durability
as required under this Contract.
(b) Approved admixtures shall be introduced into the mix at the time of adding water by
a method ensuring an even and accurate dispersion throughout the mix.
(c) Reinforcement
All reinforcements shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.2: Reinforcement.
4.3.2.2 Plant and Equipment
(1) General
Equipment and tools necessary for handling materials and performing the work, and
satisfactory to the Engineer as to design, capacity, and mechanical condition, shall be at
the site of work before work is started.
(2) Batching Plant and Equipment
(a) Free Water Contained in Aggregate
The water content of the aggregates shall be determined before mixing is commenced
on every day that concrete is to be produced. Samples for determining the water
content shall be taken from those stocks of aggregate which will be used during the
day. When no rain occurs, the water content of the aggregates shall be checked once
more during the day, after such time as the Engineer shall agree. During rain, the water
content shall be checked every two hours unless otherwise directed. The weighed
quantity of aggregates shall be such that the correct weight of dry aggregates is taken
into the batch mix and the amount of water added to each batch shall take into
account the water content of the aggregates. For all testing for water content, the
frequency of testing and calculations of batch proportions shall be to the approval of
the Engineer.
(b) Accuracy of Measuring
The weighing mechanism shall be maintained in good order and its accuracy checked
against known weights and volumes as required by the Engineer. The weighing shall
be to an accuracy of within 1% for water, within 2% for cement and admixture and
within 3% for aggregates by weight. The weight of cement, water and the total weight
of the fine and coarse aggregates in each batch shall be accurately measured. The
weighing mechanism shall be checked under the supervision of the Engineer at least
for every 1,000 tons of material weighed or not less than once per week.
(c) General
All material in the mix shall be proportioned wholly by weight. The batching plant
shall include bins, weighing hoppers, and scales for the fine aggregate and for each
separate size of coarse aggregate. If cement is used in bulk, a bin, hopper and scales
for the cement shall be included. The container shall be watertight.
Provision, satisfactory to the Engineer, shall be made for batching other components
of the mix, at the batching plant or at the mixer as may be necessary. The batching
plant may be either of stationary or of mobile type. It shall be always properly levelled
within the accuracy required for the proper operation of the weighing mechanisms.
(d) Bins and Hoppers
Bins with adequate separate compartments for fine aggregate and for each required
size of coarse aggregate shall be provided in the batching plant. Each compartment
shall discharge efficiently and freely into the weighing hopper. Means of control shall
be provided so that as the quantity desired in the weighing hopper is being
approached, the material may be added slowly and shut off with precision. A port or
other opening for removing an overload of the several materials from the hopper shall
be provided.
(e) Weighing hoppers shall be constructed so as to discharge fully.
(f) Scales
The scales for weighing aggregates and cement shall be of either the beam type or
the springless-dial type. They shall be accurate within 0.5 percent under operating
conditions throughout the range of use. Ten 25 kg weights shall be available for
checking accuracy. All exposed fulcrums, devises, and similar working parts of scales
shall be kept clean. When beam-type scales are used, provision shall be made for
indicating to the operator that the required load in the weighing hopper is being
approached. The device shall indicate at least the last 100 kg of load up 25 kg
overload. All weighing and indicating devices shall be in full view of the operator
charging the hopper and he shall have convenient access to all controls.
(g) Cement may be measured by weight, or in standard sacks considered to weigh 50 kg
net. When measured by weight a separate, satisfactory scale and hopper shall be
provided together with a boot or other approved device to transfer the cement from
the weighing hopper. Satisfactory methods of handling shall be employed.
(h) Batching shall be so conducted as to result in the weights of material required, within
tolerances of 2 percent for cement and 3 percent for aggregates.
4.3.2.3 Mixing Concrete
(1) Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, concrete shall be mixed in a power-driven
batchmixer which has been approved by the Engineer. The quantity of materials in each
batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer and the speed of rotation shall be
within ± 1 rpm. of that recommended by the manufacturer. Mixing shall continue for not
less than 1.0 minute or such time as the Engineer may require or permit as the result of
plant trials at the mixing site. Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes
shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the first batch of concrete through the mixer
shall then contain only two-thirds the normal quantity of coarse aggregate. Mixing plant
shall be thoroughly cleaned before changing from one type of cement to another. The
Contractor shall supply suitable maximum/minimum thermometers and record the shade
temperatures adjacent to the concrete mixer and to all parts of the Works where concrete
is being placed. A record of the daily maximum and minimum temperatures during
concreting shall be kept on Site and a copy shall be given to the Engineer each week during
which concrete is placed.
(2) Mixing at Site of Construction
Job-site mixers, shall be operated at a drum speed of not less than 15 nor more than 20
revolutions per minute. The batched materials shall be so charged into the drum that a
portion of the water shall enter in advance of the cement and aggregates and the water
shall continue to flow into the drum for a minimum time of 5 seconds after all the cement
and aggregates are in the drum. Mixing time shall be measured from the time all materials
except water are in the drum and shall in the case of mixers having a capacity of 1 m or
less not be less than 50 seconds nor more than 70 seconds. In the case of dual drum
mixers, the mixing time shall not include transfer time. The contents of an individual mixer
drum shall be removed before a succeeding batch is emptied therein. Any concrete mixed
less than the specified minimum time shall be discarded and disposed of by the Contractor
at his own expense.
(3) Retempering concrete by adding water or by other means will not be permitted. Concrete
which is not of the required consistency at the time of placement shall not be used.
(4) Central Plant Mixing
In addition to the requirement underSection 4.3.2.3(1) above, central plant mixers which
have a capacity of not less than 2 cu.m. but not more than 5 cu.m. and mixers having a
capacity greater than 5 cu. m. may be permitted a minimum mixing time of 90 seconds
and 120 seconds respectively; provided a mixing analysis and tests of the job materials
indicates such produced concrete is equivalent in strength and uniformity to that attained
as stated in the preceding Section 4.3.2.3(2).
(5) Mixed concrete shall be transported from the central mixing plant to the site of work in
agitator trucks only. Delivery of concrete shall be so regulated that placing is at a
continuous rate unless delayed by the placing operations. The intervals between deliveries
of batches shall not be so great as to allow the concrete in place to partially harden, and
in no case shall such an interval exceed 30 minutes.
(a) Agitator Trucks
Unless otherwise permitted in writing by the Engineer, agitator trucks shall have
watertight revolving drums suitably mounted and shall be capable of transporting and
discharging the concrete without segregation.
The agitating speed of the drum shall not be less than two or more than six revolutions
per minute.
The volume of mixed concrete permitted in the drum shall not exceed the
manufacturer's rating nor exceed 80 percent of the gross volume of the drum.
Upon approval by the Engineer, open-top, revolving-blade truck mixers may be used
in lieu of agitating trucks for transportation of central plant mixed concrete.
Gross volume of agitator bodies expressed in cu.m. shall be supplied by the mixer
manufacturer.
The interval between introduction of water into the mixer drum and discharge of the
concrete from the agitator shall not exceed 45 minutes. During this interval the mixture
shall be agitated continuously.
(b) Non-agitator Trucks
Bodies of non-agitating equipment shall be smooth watertight metal containers
equipped with gates that will permit control of the discharge of the concrete.
Covers shall be provided when needed for protection against the weather.
The non-agitating equipment shall permit delivery of the concrete to site of the work
in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass with a satisfactory degree of discharge.
Uniformity shall be satisfactory if samples from the one quarter and three quarter of
the load do not differ by more than 30 mm in slump.
Discharge of concrete shall be completed within 30 minutes after introduction of the

mixing water to the cement and aggregates.
(c) Truck Mixing
(i) Truck mixers may be used for complete mixing at the batch plant and as truck
agitators for delivery of concrete to the job or they may be used for complete
mixing of the concrete at the job.
They shall either be a closed watertight revolving drum or open revolving blade
or paddle type.
(ii) The amount of mixing shall be designated in number of revolutions of the mixer
drum. When a truck mixer is used for complete mixing, each batch of concrete
shall be mixed for not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum
or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of the
equipment as the "mixing speed".
Such designation shall appear on a metal plate attached to the mixer.
If the batch is at least 0.5 cu.m. less than guaranteed capacity, the number of
revolutions at mixing speed may be reduced to not less than 50.
Mixing in excess of 100 revolutions shall be at the agitating speed.
All materials, including the mixing water, shall be in the mixer drum before
actuating the revolution counter which will indicate the number of revolutions
of the drum or blades.
(iii) When wash water (flush water) is used as a portion of the mixing water for the
succeeding batch, it shall be accurately measured and taken into account in
determining the amount of additional mixing water required.
When wash water is carried on the truck mixer, it shall be carried in a
compartment separate from the one used for carrying or measuring the mixing
water.
The Engineer will specify the amount of wash or flush water, when permitted,
and may specify a "dry" drum if wash water is used without measurement or
without supervision.
(iv) When a truck mixer is used for complete mixing at the batch plant, the mixing
operation shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement has been added to
the aggregate.
After mixing, the truck mixer shall be used as an agitator for transporting
concrete at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as
agitating speed.
Concrete discharge shall be completed within 45 minutes after the addition of
the cement to the aggregates.
Each batch of concrete delivered at the job site shall be accompanied by a
time slip issued at the batching plant, bearing the time of departure therefrom.
When the truck mixer is used for the complete mixing of the concrete at the
job site, the mixing operation shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement
has been added to the aggregates.
(v) The rate of discharge of the plastic concrete from the mixer drum shall be
controlled by the speed of rotation of the drum in the discharge direction with
the discharge gate fully open.
4.3.3 EXECUTION
(1) Formwork, Falsework and Centring
Before concrete is placed the Engineer shall inspect all formwork, falsework and centring
and no concrete shall be placed until the Engineer has inspected and approved such
formwork, falsework, and centring. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any of
his responsibilities under the Contract for the successful completion of the structure.
(2) Reinforcement
The Engineer shall inspect and approve all reinforcement in place, before concrete is
placed. An experienced steel fixer shall be present while all concrete is placed to ensure
that no reinforcement becomes displaced during placing and if it does to reposition such
reinforcement before placing continues.
4.3.3.2 Transport of Concrete
Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the formwork as soon as practicable by a method
which will prevent segregation or loss of any ingredients and maintain the necessary workability.
The intervals between delivery of batches shall not exceed 30 minutes. The time shall be counted
from the moment when concrete is discharged from the mixer to its deposition.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval details of the proposed method for
transporting the concrete. Such method shall be compatible with the proposed mix designs.
4.3.3.3 Placing Concrete
(1) General
(a) Placing of Concrete
No structural concrete shall be placed in the Works until the relevant mix design has
been approved by the Engineer.
(b) Time Interval of Placing
Concrete which does not reach its final position in the form within the time stipulated
under Section 4.3.2.5 shall not be used.
(c) Premature Stiffening
Approved means shall also be provided to avoid premature stiffening of concrete
placed in contact with hot, dry surfaces. Surfaces including reinforcement against
which concrete is to be placed shall be shielded against the direct rays of the sun and
shall be sprayed with water to prevent excessive absorption by the surfaces of water
from the fresh concrete.
(d) All concrete shall be placed within the times specified in Section 4.3.2.3 herein.
Concrete shall be placed in such a manner as to avoid segregation and the
displacement of reinforcing bars and shall be spread in horizontal layers where
practicable. Concrete shall be placed where necessary inside forms by hand shovels
and in no instance shall vibrators be so manipulated to transport concrete inside
formwork. Care shall be taken to prevent mortar from spattering on forms and
reinforcing steel and from drying ahead of the final covering with concrete. Where
spattering has occurred, the forms and steel shall be cleaned with wire brushes or
scrapers before concrete is placed around steel, or in forms which have been
spattered.
(e) Troughs, pipes, or short chutes used as aids in placing concrete shall be positioned in
such a manner that segregation of the concrete will not occur. All chutes, troughs,
and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coating of hardened concrete or mortar.
(f) Concrete shall not be dropped freely over a vertical distance of more than 1.5 m.
(g) Concrete shall be placed continuously throughout each section of the structure, or
between indicated joints if shown on the drawings, or as directed by the Engineer. If,
in emergency, it is necessary to stop placing concrete before a section is completed,
bulkheads shall be placed as the Engineer may direct and the resulting joint shall be
deemed a construction joint.
(h) All concrete shall during placing and final finishing of surfaces be protected against
direct sunshine.
(i) Concrete when deposited shall have a temperature of not more than 32oC. It shall be
compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of discharge from the mixer unless
carried in purpose made agitators, operating continuously, when the time shall be
within 1 1/2 hours of the introduction of cement to the mix and within 30 minutes of
discharge from the agitator.
(j) Records
The Contractor shall maintain records in a form to be agreed by the Engineer, of all
tests on aggregates, cement, water, fresh concrete and hardened concrete.
The records shall be kept at Site and shall identify the tests with the section of work
to which they relate and shall be promptly submitted to the Engineer at his request.
The Contractor shall keep records giving the class code, the cement content used,
the number of batches and the position of concrete deposition in respect of each
class of concrete used in the Work or the Temporary Works and shall submit such
records to the Engineer on the day following that during which concrete is placed.
Details of all test cylinders with their reference numbers which are taken from the
batch of each class of concrete shall also be included in the records.
(2) Concrete Columns
Concrete in columns or bents shall be placed in one continuous operation unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer.
(3) Concrete Slab and Girder Spans
(a) Concrete in T-Beam or deck girder spans having spans of 12m or less shall be placed
in one continuous operation unless otherwise stated on the drawings. Concrete
preferably shall be deposited by beginning at the centre of the span and working from
the centre toward the ends.
(b) Concrete in slab spans shall be placed in one continuous operation and in one layer
for each span.
(c) Concrete in girders spanning more than 12 m may be placed in two operations, the
first operation being the placing of concrete in the girder stems to the bottom of the
slab haunches or the bottom of the slab whichever is applicable.
(d) Shear keys shall be provided for by inserting oiled timber blocks to a depth of about
4 cm in the fresh concrete at the top of each girder stem. A sufficient number of
blocks shall be used to cover uniformly about one-half the top surface of the girder
stem and the blocks shall be removed as soon as the concrete has set sufficiently to
retain its shape.
(e) A period of at least 24 hours shall elapse between the completion of placing concrete
in the girder and the commencement of placing concrete in the slab.
Before placing concrete in the slab, the top surface of the previously placed concrete
shall be hammered with a sharp hand tool until the aggregate is exposed, cleaned
and immediately before placing concrete a small quantity of neat cement slurry
added.
(f) The Contractor shall check all falsework for shrinkage and settlement and shall tighten
all wedges to ensure minimum deflection of all formwork.
(4) Walls, Piers etc.
(a) Where walls, piers, columns, struts, posts and other such structural members allow
horizontal construction joints, concrete shall not be placed on top of other concrete
which has not been allowed to set for 12 hours or more.
(b) Work shall not be discontinued within 45 cm of the top of any face, unless provision
has been made for a coping less than 45 cm thick, in which case, if permitted by the
Engineer, the construction joint may be made at the underside of the coping.
(5) Culverts
(a) The slabs of box culverts shall be placed for their full depth in one mass or layer and
allowed to set not less than 12 hours before any additional work is done on them.
(b) For culverts of exceptional length under high embankment details of construction
joints are shown on the drawings. The entire length of slabs between indicated
construction joints shall be placed for their full depth or layer and allowed to set for
not less than 12 hours before any additional work is done on these lengths.
(c) Before concrete is placed in sidewalls, bottom slabs shall be cleaned of all shavings,
sticks, sawdust and other extraneous material.
(d) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval his proposal for pouring
culvert walls before commencing culvert construction. Concrete shall not be placed
in layers more than one metre high relative to the concrete already placed. Deposition
shall proceed in a systematic manner.
(6) Depositing Concrete Under Water
(a) Concrete shall not bedeposited in water except with the approval of the Engineer and
under his immediate supervision and in this case the method of placing shall be as
defined herein.
(b) Concrete deposited in water shall be class B with 10 percent by weight extra cement
added to the amount approved by the Engineer for normal class B concrete. In any
case not less than 300 kg per cu.m. concrete.
(c) To prevent segregation, it shall be carefully placed in a compact mass, in its final
position, by means of a tremie tube or pipe, or a bottom-dump bucket and shall not
be disturbed after being deposited. Special care must be exercised to maintain still
water at the point of deposit. Concrete shall not be placed in running water. The
method of depositing concrete shall be so regulated as to produce approximately

horizontal surfaces.
(d) Concrete seals shall be placed in one continuous operation.
When a tremie tube or pipe is used, it shall consist of a tube or pipe not less than 25
cm. in diameter.
All joints in the tube shall be watertight.
The means of supporting the tremie tube shall be such as to permit free movement
of the discharge end over the entire top of the concrete and to permit its being
lowered rapidly when necessary to choke off or retard the flow.
The tremie tube shall be filled by a method that will prevent washing of the concrete.
The discharge end shall be completely submerged in concrete at all times and the
tremie tube shall be kept full.
(e) When concrete is placed with a bottom-dump bucket, the bucket shall have a
capacity of not less than 0.5 cu.m. and the top of the bucket shall be open.
The bottom door shall open freely downward and outward when tripped. The bucket
shall be completely filled and slowly lowered to avoid backwash.
It shall not be dumped until it rests on the surface upon which the concrete is to be
deposited and when empty be withdrawn slowly until well above the concrete.
The slump of the concrete used shall be maintained between 10 and 20 cm.
(f) Dewatering shall proceed only when the concrete seal is considered strong enough
to withstand any pressures to be exerted upon it.
This time will be decided by the Engineer.
(g) All laitance or other unsatisfactory material shall be removed from the exposed
surface by scraping, jetting, chipping or other means which will not injure the seal
unduly.
(7) Construction Joints
(a) Approval of Engineer
Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints, the position
and arrangements of which shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as previously
Joints shall be formed in walls or slabs to prevent, as far as possible, cracking due to
shrinkage.
The joints shall be located to take into account stresses in the concrete and shall be
shuttered square to the work.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit by layout drawings and concreting
programmes for the Engineers approval in adequate time prior to preparation for
concreting to enable any changes the Engineer may consider necessary to be made.
(b) Horizontal Joints
Unless otherwise agreed or directed by the Engineer, exposed faces of the concrete
at the joint shall be thoroughly brushed with wire brushes, or by other approved
means so as to remove laitance and expose the coarse aggregates.
Care shall be taken to ensure that no disturbance or loosening of the aggregate, or
cracks or other defects in the concrete are caused.
(c) Vertical Joints

Vertical and inclined construction joints shall be formed by the insertion of rigid
stopping-off forms so constructed that no loss of materials occurs through the joints.
Temporary stopping-off forms shall be stripped as soon as practicable and in all cases
within 24 hours of completion of placing.
Sacrificial stopping-off forms may be permitted, subject to the approval of the
Engineer, but the Engineer may still order that they be removed on occasions where
he has reason to suspect that, for example, honey combing has occurred because of
grout loss.
(d) Cleaning
Immediately before placing fresh concrete against faces of previously placed and
hardened concrete, the surface of construction joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and
wetted.
(e) Expansion Joints
Expansion, contraction and other movement joints shall be provided in the locations
and according to the details and dimensions shown on the drawings or as directed by
the Engineer to his satisfaction.
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified in the Specifications, contraction
joints, where required in the opinion of the Engineer, shall be formed as deliberate
planes of discontinuity in the concrete structure.
The face of the concrete which is first placed shall be painted with two coats approved
rubber bitumen before placing the adjoining concrete.
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified in the Specifications, expansion
joints shall be formed in the same way as contraction joints but, in addition, an
approved compressible sheet or filler shall be supplied and placed in the joint to
provide freedom for two adjacent concrete slabs or beams to expand.
The exposed edges of the joints shall be sealed within an approved synthetic rubber
or similar resilient sealing compound.
(f) Watertight Joint
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, joints in water retaining
structures shall be formed with a continuous waterproof material and the detailed
proposal shall be approved by the Engineer.
(g) Bridge Abutments
Bridge abutments adjacent to earth embankments shall be directly supported on
bored piles.
The Contractor shall propose a method of construction, for the approval' of the Engineer,
which avoids embankment settlement imparting negative friction into the bored
piles,otherwise the piles shall be bored through the embankment only after the
embankment has reached its accepted settlement.
The proposed method of construction shall also be such that the installation of the
adjacent bearing slab driven piling does not cause displacement of the abutment and
its bored piles.
4.3.3.4 Compaction of Concrete

(1) General
Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration or other approved methods. The
Contractor shall submit details of his proposed methods and rate of placing and
compacting the concrete to the Engineer for approval. Such details shall include the
proposed number and size of vibrators to be used and the number of standby vibrators
that will be kept available, and shall be submitted in sufficient time prior to concreting to
enable the Engineer to consider and agree the compacting methods without delay to the
commencement of concreting.
(2) Use of Vibrators
(a) Vibration shall not be applied by way of the reinforcement. Where vibrators of the
immerse type are used, contact with reinforcement and all inserts shall be avoided,
so far as is practicable.
(b) Internal vibrators shall be capable of producing not less than 10,000 cycles per minute,
and external vibrator not less than 3,000 cycles per minute.
(3) Concrete shall not be subjected to vibration between 4 and 24 hours after compaction.
(4) Damage to Freshly Set Concrete
If during concreting a previously placed layer or edge concrete has set before a subsequent
layer has been placed, concreting shall be stopped and the placed concrete cut back to a
sound face at the Contractor's cost.
4.3.3.5 Finishing Concrete
All concrete surfaces exposed in the completed work shall comply with the requirements of
Section4.3.3.5(3) below except where the drawings indicate otherwise.
(1) Concrete Decks
(a) Immediately after placing concrete, concrete decks shall be struck off with templates
to provide proper crowns and shall be finished smooth to the correct levels. Finish
shall be slightly but uniformly roughened by brooming.
(b) The finished surface shall not vary more than 3 mm from a 3 m straightedge placed
parallel to the centre line and 3 mm from a transverse template cut to the true cross-
section.
(2) Kerb and Sidewalk Surface
Exposed faces of kerbs and sidewalks shall be finished true to lines and grades. The kerb
surface shall be wood floated to a smooth but not slippery finish. Sidewalk surfaces shall
be slightly but uniformly roughened by brooming.
(3) Ordinary Finish
(a) The finish left on a surface after the removal of the forms when all holes left by form
ties have been filled, and any minor surface defects have been repaired. The surface
shall be true and even, free from depressions or projections.
(b) The Concrete in bridge seats, caps, and tops of walls shall be struck off with a
straightedge and floated to true grade. Under no circumstances will the use of mortar
topping for concrete surfaces be permitted.
(4) Rubbed Finish

(a) After the removal of forms the rubbing of concrete shall be started as soon as its
condition will permit. Immediately before starting this work the concrete shall be kept
thoroughly saturated with water for a minimum period of three hours. Sufficient time
shall have elapsed before the wetting down to allow the mortar used in patching to
have thoroughly set.
(b) A medium coarse carborundum stone shall be used for rubbing a small amount of
mortar on the face. The mortar used shall be composed of cement and fine aggregate
mixed in the same proportions as those used in the concrete being finished. Rubbing
shall be continued until all form marks, projections, and irregularities have been
removed, all voids filled, and a uniform surface has been obtained. The paste
produced by this rubbing shall be left in place at this time.
(c) The final finish shall be obtained by rubbing with a fine carborundum stone and water
until the entire surface is of a smooth texture and uniform colour.
(d) After the final rubbing has been completed and the surface dried, burlap shall be
used to remove loose powder. The final surface shall be free from unsound patches,
paste, powder and objectionable marks.
4.3.3.6 Curing and Protection
(1) Approval
The Contractor shall submit details of his proposals for curing and protecting each section
of the work for the Engineer's prior approval before placing any concrete or any precast
units are cast. For areas likely to be affected by sea water or salt water spray, proposals
describing how the concrete is to be effectively protected therefrom up to the time when
it has sufficiently hardened shall also be submitted for approval.
(2) Curing Period
All concrete shall be properly cured to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The concrete shall
be protected from harmful effects of sunshine, drying winds, rainfall, running water and
shock. It shall be prevented from drying out for at least 4 days for the concrete made of
"Type I cement and 7 days for the concrete made of Type V cement or as directed by the
Engineer.
(3) Curing Compound
If Engineer approves the use of a curing compound it shall be applied in the manner and
at the rate recommended by the manufacturer.
Where spraying equipment is used, it shall be maintained in a thoroughly clean condition
and shall not be used for any material other than the approved curing compound.
The curing compound shall be applied to the surface of the concrete as soon as it has
been finished. Any free water shall be allowed to dry out before the compound is applied.
Care shall be taken not to damage the surface during the application.
If the period for drying out exceeds one hour or if for any other reason the curing compound
can not be applied, the alternative methods of curing described below shall be used.
The Contractor shall have an alternative approved method of curing concrete available for
use at any time.
The Contractor's proposals for the use of liquid membrane curing compound shall be
(4) Wetted Absorbent Covering

Where a wetted absorbent covering is used, the Contractor shall ensure that the covering
is kept continually damp and that in no circumstances shall alternate wetting and drying
occur. The Engineer may prohibit the use of wetted absorbent coverings where the surface
being protected is likely to be cooled excessively by drying winds and in such cases the
Contractor shall submit alternative proposals to the Engineer for approval.
(5) Curing after Removal of Formwork
Where formwork is removed from concrete before sufficient time has elapsed for proper
curing, curing protection shall be immediately applied to the surface.
(6) The Contractor shall take steps to prevent any damage to newly cast surfaces. Suitable
barriers and warning notices shall be erected to prevent access over concrete which has
been recently placed, and no plant, equipment and the like shall be placed thereon until
the surface is hard enough to bear such loads without damage. Edges, corners and other
areas shall be adequately protected against accidental damage.
(7) All concrete surfaces shall be kept wet for at least 7 days after placing. Salt or brackish
water must not be used for the curing.
Bridge deck and sidewalk slabs shall be covered with wet burlap immediately after final
finishing of the surface.
This material shall remain in place for the full curing period or may be removed and
replaced with sand when the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent marring.
In both cases the materials shall be kept thoroughly wet for the entire curing period.
All other surfaces if not protected by forms, shall be kept thoroughly wet, either by
sprinkling or by the use of wet burlap until the end of the curing period.
If wood forms are allowed to remain in place during the curing period, they shall be kept
moist at all times to prevent openings at joints.
(8) Removal of Formwork
(a) Notice
The Contractor shall give adequate notice to the Engineer of his intention to strike any
formwork.
(b) Age and Strength
The concrete must be of sufficient age and strength at the time of striking for it to
withstand the effects of striking including the effect of thermal shock or the loss of
surface durability upon premature exposure and be able to carry the stresses acting
without adverse effects.
(c) Minimum Times
The time at which the formwork is struck shall be the Contractor's responsibility but
minimum periods between concreting and the removal offorms shall be as follows:
 Sides of beams, walls, columns. pile caps and piles 2 days
 Soffits of slabs (props left in) 4 days
 Soffits of beams (props left in) 8 days
 Removal of props-beams, and slabs 14 days
 Removal of props-concrete frames and cantilever structures 21 days
(d) Times Modified

The times in the above table are based on average weather conditions and the use
of Type 1 and Type 5 cement and normal curing methods. They may be changed if
other types of cement or curing methods are used, subject to the agreement of the
Engineer.
(e) Partial Removal
Formwork shall be constructed so that the side forms of members can be removed
without disturbing the soffit forms and if props are to be left in place when the soffit
forms are removed, these props shall not be disturbed during the striking.
(f) Prestressed Units
For prestressed unit, the soffit forms shall accommodate deformation of the member
when the prestress is applied or as approved by the Engineer.
(g) Removal Without Damage
All formwork shall be removed without damage to the concrete in appearance,
strength or durability.
(h) No loading or pressure by earth fill or water shall be carried to any part of a structure
until permission is given by the Engineer.
(i) Cleaning
Where it is intended to re-use formwork it shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
4.3.3.7 Repair of Surface Defects
(1) Patching
As soon as the forms are removed, all wire or metal devices used for securing the formwork
which project from or appear on the surface of the finished concrete shall be removed or
cut back at least 25 mm from the finished surface of the concrete.
All holes and pockets so formed shall be filled with cement mortar mixed in the same
proportions as the fine aggregate to cement of the concrete mix used for that particular
section of the structure, after the surface to be patched has been thoroughly cleaned and
wetted to receive the patch.
(2) Cause for Rejection
Excessive honeycombing shall be sufficient to cause rejection of portions of the structure
containing this honeycombing. The Contractor, on receipt of written orders from the
Engineer, shall remove and rebuild such portions of the structure at his own expense.
4.3.3.8 Loading
No superstructure load shall be placed upon finished bents, piers, or abutments until the Engineer
so directs but in no case shall any load of any kind be placed until the concrete has completed
curing.
The Contractor shall not place any temporary loads on deck slabs except for temporary loads
defined in satisfactory design calculations produced by the Contractor for the Engineers review,
which demonstrate the ability of the structure to carry such loads. Contractor’s traffic loads, if
significant, must be subject to such calculations before the Engineer will permit such traffic.
Bridge decks shall be opened to traffic only when so directed by the Engineer and generally not
sooner than 28 days after the placing of the concrete has been completed.
4.3.3.9 Control of Heat in Massive Structures

In massive structures of major dimension e.g. pier columns, the heat deriving from hardening of
the concrete shall be controlled by the Contractor.
Temperature gradient shall not exceed 20oC and the maximum temperature shall not exceed
80oC.
4.4 PRECAST CONCRETE

4.4.1 DESCRIPTION
4.4.2 Scope
This section specifies the requirements for ordinary precast concrete, not cast in its final location.
The Contractor will be permitted to obtain precast concrete units from outside suppliers provided
that they comply with the Specifications and that the Contractor obtains the Engineers approval
to each supplier.
4.4.1.1 Tolerances
Unless otherwise specified in the Specifications or permitted by the Engineer, in situ and precast
concrete units shall be cast to the following tolerances:
(1) Lengths
Up to 3 meters ± 5 mm
3 to 6 meters ± 7 mm
6 meters upwards ± 10 mm
(2) Cross Section (each direction) + 10 mm / - 5 mm
(3) Straightness or bow (Deviation from intended line)
Up to 3 meters ± 6 mm
3 to 6 meters ± 9mm
6 meters upwards ± 12 mm
(4) Squareness
When measuring the squareness of a corner the longer of the two adjacent sides shall be
taken as the base line. The shorter side shall not vary in its distance between the greatest
and shortest dimensions exceeding:
Length of short side
Up to 1.2 meters 6 mm
1.2 to 3 meters 9 mm
3 meters upward 12 mm
(5) Twist
Any corner shall not be more than the tolerance stated from the plane containing the
other three corners:
Up to 700 mm wide and up to 6 meters in length 6 mm
Over 700 mm wide and for any length 9mm
(6) For beams laid side by side in a deck:
(a) the difference in deflections in soffit levels between adjacent units before the insitu
concrete is placed, shall nowhere exceed 6.0 mm for units up to 4 m or 10 mm for
larger span units;
(b) the width of the deck soffit shall be within ± 25 mm of that described in the Contract;
(c) in adjacent spans, the continuity line of the outside beams shall be maintained;
(d) the width of gap between individual inverted tee beams shall not exceed twice the
nominal gap described in the Contract;
(e) the alignment of transverse holes shall permit reinforcement to be placed without
distortion.
4.4.1.2 Transportation, Storage, and Erection
(1) General
The Contractor shall give the Engineer full details of his proposed methods of curing, form
removal, storage, transportation, and erection. The precast concrete members shall not be
over stressed, warped, or otherwise damaged or have camber adversely affected, including
its own weight which shall not induce a stress in it exceeding 0.33 of its compressive
strength at the time of loading or specified twenty-eight day strength.
(2) Bearing Surface
Where precast girders are to be placed in the Works without compressible bearing strip on
the unyielding surface of the bearings, the bearing shall be carefully screed to the specified
level on a layer of 10 mm nominal thickness of epoxy mortar bedding and left for seven
days prior to placing the units.
(3) Dressed Surface
The surfaces of precast members which will be bonded to cast-in-situ concrete are
designated as "Dressed Surfaces". Such surfaces shall be 'treated as construction joints as
stipulated in Section 4.3.3.7
4.4.2 PRODUCTS
4.4.2.1 Materials
(1) Cement
Shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.3: Concrete for Structures.
(2) Aggregates
Shall comply with the requirements ofSection 4.3: Concrete for Structures.
(3) Water
Shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.3: Concrete for Structures.
(4) Reinforcement
Shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.2: Reinforcement
(5) Moulds
Shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.1: Formwork and Falsework.
4.4.2.2 Surface Finishes
Surface finishes shall be compatible with the use of steel formwork except as shown otherwise.
In particular for precast beams, some surfaces of which will later be bonded to insitu concrete,
these surfaces shall have all laitance removed and the coarse aggregates shall be exposed.
4.4.2.3 Identification and Marking
All prestressed girders shall be marked to indicate location in the bridge span, top surface and
date of fabrication.
Identification marks shall correspond to the placing plan.

(1) All members shall be indelibly marked to show the Member Mark, the production line
onwhich they were manufactured, the date on which the concrete was cast. If they are
symmetrical sections, the face which will be uppermost when the member is in its correct
position in the Works shall be marked TOP. All markings shall be located so that they are
not visible when the member is in its final position in the Works.
4.4.3 EXECUTION
4.4.3.1 Preparation
(1) The Engineer's approval to the method of manufacture and the manufacturer, if this is not
themain Contractor, shall be obtained before work is started. When the method and
manufacturer have been approved, no changes shall be made without the Engineer's
written approval.
(2) The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in advance of the date of commencement
andlocation of manufacture of each type of member, and no work of concreting shall be
permitted without the Engineer's prior approval.
(3) All concreting operations shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer unless
otherwiseagreed in writing by the Engineer.
4.4.3.2 Tests
(1) A copy of all 28 days cylinder test results and any tests to establish transport strength shall
besubmitted to the Engineer immediately after testing.
(2) Where the Engineer requires tests to be performed on members or their
materialconstituents, no members to which such tests relate shall be despatched to the
site until suchtests have been satisfactorily completed and the members accepted by the
Engineer.
4.4.3.3 Rejection of Members
Any member considered by the Engineer to be substandard shall be rejected and replaced at the
Contractor's expense by an acceptable unit.
4.4.3.4 Erection
Precast girders and cross beams shall be adequately braced and supported during erection to
ensure proper alignment and structural integrity until permanent connections are completed.
(1) Bridge beams shall be so arranged that as far as practicable, those having the largest
camberare placed at or near the longitudinal centre line of the bridge.
(2) Bridge beams shall not be placed in their final positions in the bridge until the Engineer
hasapproved the beams and has checked and approved the location and alignment of the
bearings or bearing pads on the substructure.
(3) When beams are being placed in position, they shall be braced independently
againstoverturning or any other movement, before being released by the crane or other
lifting device.
(4) When placing insitu concrete over precast members in bridge decks, it shall be placed
insuch a sequence that the advancing edge of the freshly placed concrete over the full
deck width or between longitudinal construction joints is approximately parallel to the

deck supports.
(5) As far as possible, any longitudinal construction joints shall be parallel to the
precastmembers and located between the adjacent top flanges of two adjacent members.
4.5 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

4.5.1 DESCRIPTION
4.5.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the detail design, the preparation of shop drawings, and the furnishing,
transportation, storage and placing of prestressed concrete, stressed by pretensioning or post
tensioning methods. It shall be in accordance with the details shown on the drawings and as
specified herein.
The construction of prestressed concrete members shall conform to the requirements of Section
4.3: Concrete for Structures and Section 4.4 Precast Concrete, except where these requirements
are modified or supplemented by the provisions of this section.
4.5.1.2 Definitions
Post tensioning is defined as any method by which the tension reinforcement is tensioned after
the concrete is placed.
Pretensioning is defined as any method by which the tension reinforcement is tensioned before
the concrete is placed.
Prestressed reinforcement is defined as any reinforcement to which stress is applied by post
tensioning or pretensioning.
Non-prestressed reinforcement is defined as any reinforcement to which no stressing tension is
applied externally.
4.5.1.3 Tolerances
(1) Reinforcement
The prestressing reinforcement shall be positioned with the following tolerance:
Vertical Horizontal
Position Position
Individual tendon ± 10 mm ± 20 mm
Group of tendons ± 3 mm ± 10 mm
(2) Dimensions
Shall not exceed those required in Section 4.1: Formwork and Falsework.
4.5.1.4 Handling, Storage and Transporting
(1) Storage
(a) All prestressing steel shall be stored in such a manner as will cause no harmful effect
to the material.
The steel should be stored under suitable weatherproof cover and protected from
ground dampness.
If in the opinion of the Engineer any prestressing steel does not appear to be in a
suitable condition for use in the Works he may require tests to be made to
demonstrate the physical properties of the steel involved and if the steel does not
demonstrate the required properties it shall not be incorporated in the Works.
Any batch of steel so condemned shall be removed from the site immediately.
(b) Prestressing components shall be stored in clean and dry conditions. All prestressing
steel shall be free from rust, loose mill scale, oil, grease or other harmful matter. A
slight film of rust will be accepted, but the steel shall not be pitted.
(c) Prefabricated and prestressed structural components shall be stored on specially
prepared temporary supports, which must be made and placed such that the design
dead weight bending moment in a component is not exceeded at any point. Beams
and slabs shall only be stored in a single layer, and not on top of each other.
(2) Handling
(a) The method of lifting and handling prestressed beams or slabs shall be such as to
ensure that the design dead weight bending moment is not exceeded at any point of
the unit throughout the whole operation.
(b) Lifting from casting beds shall not take place until grouting is completed and at least
24 hours old.
(c) Mounting of the unit into its final position shall not take place until the concrete has
attained a strength as specified on the respective drawings or given in the
specifications.
(d) The lifting of the units shall be done using temporary lifting devices provided by the
Contractor to the Engineer's approval.
(e) Initial lifting from casting beds and final lowering on to supports shall be done so as
to avoid sudden shock in the unit.
(3) Transporting
(a) The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with full details of the proposed method of
transport and erection for approval before commencing this work.
(b) Should any cracking or other damage to components during transport or erection
render the components unfit for use the Contractor shall replace such components
at his own expense.
(c) Transporting of beams or slabs from storage to point of erection shall be carried out
by the Contractor using a purpose-made conveyance enabling him to ensure that the
design dead weight bending moment is not exceeded at any point over the length of
the unit
(d) The conveyance shall be designed so as to avoid winching or dragging the units in a
horizontal direction over uneven ground.
(e) The transporting of other structural components shall be as approved by the Engineer.
4.5.2 PRODUCTS
4.5.2.1 Materials
(1) Cement
Shall conform to Section 4.3: Concrete for Structures.
(2) Water
Shall conform to Section 4.3: Concrete for Structures.
(3) Admixtures
(a) Admixtures or any other additions shall not be used except with the written approval
of the Engineer.
(b) The Contractor shall submit specifications and samples of any admixtures or additive
that he proposes to use, to the Engineer at least 28 days before the commencement
of construction or manufacture of the particular structure on which he intends to use
such admixtures.
(c) Any tests the Engineer may require on concrete mixes on account of the Contractor's
proposal to use additives shall be carried out at the expense of the Contractor.
(4) Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall conform to Section 4.3: Concrete for Structures.
(5) Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall conform to AASHTO Standard Specification M6.
(6) Non-Prestressing Reinforcement
Non-prestressing reinforcement shall conform either to Section 4.2: Reinforcement or where
prestressing quality is called for in the drawings it shall conform to the requirement for
prestressing reinforcement.
(7) Prestressing Reinforcement
(a) Prestressing reinforcement shall be high-tensile strength steel wire, high-tensile
strength multi-wire strand or high-tensile alloy steel bars according to the drawings.
(b) Wire shall be uncoated, stress relieved, cold drawn, high tensile steel conforming to
ASTM A421, or approved equivalent. Wire shall not be oil tempered.
(c) High Tensile Alloy steel bars shall be made by the open hearth process (acid or basic),
or by the electric process, or by any of the oxygen processes, with the addition of the
necessary alloying elements, with sulphur and phosphorus contents each less than
0.04 per cent. When tested in accordance with ASTM A 722 the steel shall have a
tensile strength of at least 1000 N/sq. mm, and a 0.2 percent proof stress of not less
than 80 percent nor more than 90 percent of the actual tensile strength.
High tensile steel bars shall be individually inspected by the Engineer for superficial
tears, nicks, roller marks or any other form of surface imperfections. A bar with surface
imperfections of up to 0.10 mm deep is acceptable. A bar with surface imperfections
that range up to 0.35 mm deep may be accepted at the discretion of the Engineer,
provided the imperfections whose depths range from 0.10 mm to 0.35 mm are filed
smooth with a fine cut file. A bar with surface imperfections that exceed 0.38 mm in
depth is not acceptable. The prestressing reinforcement shall comply with the
relevant standards as called for on the drawings.
(d) Copies of manufacturer's test certificates including stress/strain diagrams shall be
obtained by the Contractor and given to the Engineer for each consignment of
prestressing steel reinforcement. These certificates must be obtained and approved
by the Engineer before the prestressing steel reinforcement is used in the works.
(e) Tests on prestressing steel in addition to those of the manufacturer, may be required
by the Engineer and the Contractor is to make all arrangements to supply samples for
testing to a nominated testing laboratory.
(f) Prestressing steel wires, strands, or bars shall be delivered to the site in coils or in
bundles asspecified by the manufacturers. If in coils these shall be of such diameter
as to be self-straightening when unrolled. The coils shall be securely tied and fully
wrapped in strong waterproof protective covering with the diameter and length of wire
or strand indicated on the outside.
(g) Each coil or bundle shall be clearly marked and numbered to identify the portion for
which tests have been carried out.
(h) Coils and bundles of prestressing steel shall be stored flat on a floor raised off the
ground and under full cover from the weather. They shall be protected from damage,
oil, corrosion or any deleterious matter, and shall not be opened until required. Before
being manufactured into prestressing cables the wire shall be cleaned free from loose
rust and any deleterious matter, and inspected by the Engineer for approval.
Prestressing steel reinforcement which shows signs of pitting or has any surface defects
such as splits, roughness or necking is not to be used, and any lengths of wire or strand
affected are to be cut out of the coil and rejected.
(8) Ducts
(a) Ducting for internal tendons shall be interlocked, mortar and grout tight and fabricated
from corrugated galvanised sheet steel or semi-rigid conduit of a type approved by
the Engineer. Duct diameter shall be at least 6 mm larger than the nominal diameter
of strand, wire or bar and the cross sectional area shall be at least 2.5 times that of
the net tendon area. Duct thickness shall be as follows:
26 gauge for duct dia. less than or equal to 67 mm
24 gauge for duct dia. greater than 67 mm
31 gauge for bar tendons
Ducts shall have grouting connections at each end and shall have vent/drains at all
intermediate high and low points, to the approval of the Engineer.
(b) Corrugated sheathing is to be delivered to the site coiled on to large diameter wooden
drums, securely fastened and protected from damage, or other approved methods.
(c) The corrugated sheathing is to be stored on site under cover from the weather and
shall be protected from damage, rusting, staining by oil or any other deleterious
matter, and shall be clean and free from all such matter before being used in the
works.
(9) Anchorages for Prestressing Reinforcement
The anchorages shall be of a proprietary type and make, which through tests and practice
has verified its safe mode of operation and its strength and breaking characteristics.
(10) Moulds
Shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.1: Formwork and Falsework.
4.5.2.2 Finish
Prestressed concrete work shall, unless otherwise specified, have a smooth finish on all surfaces
exposed in the completed work. Surfaces which will be in contact with concrete cast in place to
form a composite construction shall be purposely left rough, in order to provide adequate keying.
The valleys and ridges of any roughening system shall not be parallel with the direction of
stressing. Before concreting against such surfaces they shall be cleared of any cement slurry and
inferior quality material on the surface.
4.5.3 EXECUTION
4.5.3.1 Design and Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design of prestressed concrete structural
elements including the determination of the prestressing arrangements and the prestressing forces
in accordance with this Specification and TIS, ACI or other internationally recognised standard
approved by the Engineer. The drawings included as part of the Contract documents are based
on standard bridge designs and are not intended to be detailed design drawings. The Contractor
shall prepare and shall to the Engineer detailed design and fabrication drawings and erection
procedures for submittal and approval before any prestressed concrete units are produced, in
accordance with SECTION 1.4 SUBMISSIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS. The shop drawings shall be
prepared on a tracing cloth, Al size, including margins. The margin at the left end shall be 40 mm
and the others 15 mm wide. An approved title block shall be provided at the lower right-hand
corner. These drawings or transparent reproductions on linen or mylar shall ultimately become
the property of, and shall be delivered to, the Engineer upon completion of the Contract.
4.5.3.2 Precautions
(1) Prestressing and the subsequent grouting operations required shall both be carried out
underthe direction of a competent supervisor and by personnel who have had approved
previous experience in the use of the type of equipment proposed, all of which shall be
(2) The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the safe execution of tensioning operations.
Special precautions against accident shall be taken when working with or near tendons
which have been tensioned or are in the process of being tensioned.
4.5.3.3 Plan of Operations
(1) The Contractor shall prepare, check and submit to the Engineer complete detailed
workingdrawings and calculations or schedules prepared by a professionally qualified civil
or structural engineer whose name shall appear on all sheets and showing:
(a) Contractor's details of proposed construction.
(b) Proposed sequence of operations.
(c) Dimensions and complete descriptions of all devices joints, bearings and anchorages
not specified or detailed in the Contract.
(d) Calculated eventual deflections and rotation of the concrete due to the effects of
prestress, creep and shrinkage in the concrete, relaxation in the reinforcement, gravity
and other effects.
4.5.3.4 Construction of Units
(1) Fabrication
(a) Prestressing cables shall be manufactured on site from coils of wires or strands.
(b) The cable consisting of a number of high-tensile strength steel wires or strands shall
be formed in the manner as directed by the Engineer.
(c) In estimating the length of all cables, extra allowance must be made for attaching
either one or two tensioning jacks as required or as instructed by the Engineer.
(d) Sheathing shall be carefully examined prior to use and any damaged lengths shall be
cut away and rejected.
(e) Joints in corrugated sheathing shall be formed by the use of couplers and by wrapping
the joints with suitable tape. They shall be so designed as to prevent the ingress of
water, cement, concrete or other material during casting.
(f) All joints in sheathing shall be approved by the Engineer.
(g) The sheathing shall be provided with suitable outlets with plugs to prevent air locks.
(h) Tendons shall be carefully handled so as to avoid sudden bends or kinks, and
threaded into the flexible sheathing before this is placed in the formwork.
(i) The sheathing with the prestressing tendon shall be rigidly supported in its exact
position as shown on the drawings so that no movement can take place during casting
of the structural component.
(j) The anchorages shall be placed accurately in accordance with the drawings and firmly
fixed to resist displacement during vibration of the concrete. Each anchorage shall be
fixed so as to have its axis coinciding with the axis of the tendon in question and to
remain so throughout the casting of the component.
(k) Tendons after being placed in ducts or sheaths shall be so arranged as to allow an
unrestricted flow of grout through the ducts, and it shall be ensured that tensioned
tendons are completely embedded and the ducts effectively filled, unless specific
instructions are given on the drawings as to the tendons being left unbonded. The
treatment of unbonded tendons shall be as approved by the Engineer.
(2) Concreting
Concrete shall not be deposited in the forms until the Engineer has inspected the placing
of the reinforcement, corrugated sheathing, anchorages, and prestressing steel and has
given approval thereof.
The concrete shall be vibrated internally or externally, or both, as directed by the Engineer.
The vibrating shall be done with care in such a manner as to avoid damage to, or
displacement of, reinforcement, sheathing, anchorages, or wires.
4.5.3.5 Prestressing
(1) The Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary for the prestressing. Prestressing
shallbe done with approved jacking equipment.
(a) IIf hydraulic jacks are used, they shall be equipped with accurate readable pressure
gauges.
(b) The combination of jack and gauge shall be calibrated and a graph or table showing
the calibration shall be furnished to the Engineer.
(2) No tensioning of prestressing tendons shall take place until directed or approved by the
Engineer.
(a) The Contractor shall carry out test tensioning of cables if and as instructed by the
Engineer. The cost of this shall be considered incidental to the works and included in
the relevant unit rates or sums.
(b) The final tensioning shall take place as directed by the Engineer at the time decided
by the Engineer as ascertained from compression tests on specimens cured under the
same conditions as the concrete of the structural component.
(c) Before final stressing of single wires or strands, the wires or strands in each cable shall
be of equal length and tension.
(d) Before the initial tensioning the anchorages shall be carefully cleaned on all surfaces.
(3) The amount of tension given to each tendon shall conform to a tensioning schedule to be
supplied by the Engineer, and will be based on the test data for the prestressing steel.
(a) The order and sequence of tensioning shall be as specified on the drawing or as
instructed by the Engineer.
(b) After tensioning, the wires or strands shall be secured in position and cut off as
directed.
(c) Measuring of the stressing force shall be done using an accurate gauge indicating the
force on the hydraulic jack, and also by ascertaining the elongation of the tendon,
after allowing for any initial slip in the wedges or jaws of the pulling grips.
(4) Approval shall be obtained from the Engineer before each tendon is anchored. The
tensioning procedure shall be recorded by the Contractor on tensioning schedules, a copy
of which will be supplied to the Engineer.
(a) The prestressing force shall be applied from one or both ends as specified on the
drawings or by the Engineer.
(b) If the tensioning does not proceed as scheduled, the Contractor shall be liable to re-
tension or to replace the reinforcement.
(c) Each wire, pair of wires, cable or strand, shall be placed, shaped and pulled in such a
manner as to ensure that the elongation is uniform in its length. Should any tensioned
steel or anchorage break or be damaged it shall be replaced if so ordered.
(d) Throughout all tensioning operations one or more spare jacks capable of maintaining
the designated load shall be available.
(5) The men employed shall be experienced in this class of work. A cable under stress can
cause serious injuries to persons or damage to equipment in case of failure of the cable,
the anchor or the jack. All reasonably practicable precautions shall be taken to avoid such
injury and damage.
4.5.3.6 Grouting
(1) After tensioning and anchorage are approved by the Engineer, all cable ducts shall be
groutedas specified below.
(a) No grouting shall take place until directed or approved by the Engineer.
(b) Immediately before grouting each duct shall be carefully cleaned by pumping clean
water through it, and the ducts shall subsequently be blown through with clean
compressed air until water is expelled. The compressed air shall be tested to ensure
that no oil is carried over from the compressor unit.
(2) The method of mixing and injecting the grout shall be approved by the Engineer.
(a) The pressure at which the grout is to pumped into the duct shall be approved by the
Engineer and shall not normally exceed 1 N/sq. mm.
(b) Grout shall be either a lean cement grout with a water cement ratio not exceeding
0.4, or cement mortar (1:1 by weight).
(c) An expanding plasticising admixture should be used in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
(d) The admixture shall be of manufacture approved by the Engineer. Admixtures or sand
containing chlorides, nitrates or sulphates shall not be used.
(e) Grout should be fluid (the consistency of thick paint) but should be proportioned so
that free water will not separate out of the mix.
(f) Care shall be taken to avoid lumps in the cement, and sieving shall be carried out
before mixing the grout.
(g) It is essential to prepare a quantity of grout sufficient for a particular duct immediately
prior to its injection and to use only this batch on the duct.
(3) Grouting is to be carried out continuously, the discharge from consecutive air holes before
their plugging being observed throughout.
(a) The mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned before grouting is commenced.
(b) A complete spare grouting plant shall be available for immediate use in case of an
emergency breakdown of the equipment in operation.
(c) During the grouting operation, grout shall be continuously added to the bucket from
which the grout is being pumped, and the bucket shall not be changed.
(d) The duct shall be plugged when grout is issuing freely from the outlet end, and once
plugged the pressure shall be gradually reduced to prevent blowbacks or air pockets.
(e) The pump shall then be removed and the inlet end of the duct likewise plugged.
(f) After grouting, the ends of the anchorages and any projecting ends of cut - off tendons
shall be covered by epoxy resin and a 1:1 mix mortar shall be packed hard into the
recess around these ends.
4.6 DAMPPROOFING AND MEMBRANE WATER PROOFING

4.6.1 DESCRIPTION
4.6.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the dampproofing or waterproofing of concrete surfaces. The type of
covering shall be as indicated on the drawings. The methods are briefly described as follows.
(1) Dampproofing
This covering consists of two or more coats of asphalt (prime coat) and one coat of asphalt
seal (seal coat).
(2) Membrane Waterproofing
This covering comprises a prime coat and three mop coats and two layers of fabric and
mortar for protection, all as described herein.
4.6.1.2 Storage
Fabric shall be stored in a dry, protective place. The rolls shall not be stored on their ends.
Containers of asphaltic materials shall be kept closed when not in use.
4.6.2 PRODUCTS
4.6.2.1 Materials
(1) Mortar
Mortar for the protective course shall be composed of one part of portland cement and
three parts of sand, unless otherwise provided. The sand shall conform to AASHTO
Standard Specification M45 for Mortar Sand.
(2) Asphalt
(a) Waterproofing asphalt shall conform to AASHTO Standard Specification M115 (ASTM
D449). Asphalt for Dampproofing and Waterproofing Type B shall be used normally.
(b) Primer for use with asphalt in waterproofing shall conform to AASHTO Standard
Specification M116 (ASTM D41), Primer for use with Asphalt in Dampproofing and
Waterproofing.
(3) Fabric
The fabric shall conform to AASHTO Standard Specification M117 (ASTM D173), Woven
Cotton Fabrics Saturated with Bituminous Substances for use in Waterproofing.
(4) Joint Fillers
Filler for use in horizontal joints in waterproofing work shall be straight refined oil asphalt
conforming to the following requirements:-
Flash point: Not less than 232 °C (450 °F)
Softening point: 48 °C (120 °F) to 54 °C (130 °F)
Penetration: At 0 °C (32 °F), 200 g, 1 minute, not less than 15
At 25 °C (77 °F), 100 g, 5 seconds, 50 to 60
At 46 °C (115 °F), 50 g, 5 seconds not more than 300
Loss on heating: At 163 °C (325 °F), 50 g, 5 hours, not more than 0.5%
Ductility: At 25 °C (77 °F), 50 mm per minute, not less than 85
Total bitumen (soluble in carbon disulphide): Not less than 99.5%.
(5) Mortar
Shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.3: Concrete For Structures.
(6) Wire Mesh
Shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.2: Reinforcement.
4.6.3 EXECUTION
(1) Dampproofing or membrane waterproofing shall not be applied until all provisions for
curing ofconcrete and repairing of defective concrete surfaces have been complied with.
All concrete surfaces shall be reasonably smooth and free from projections and holes.
(2) The concrete surfaces shall be dry.
(a) Immediately before the application of dampproofing or waterproofing, the surface
shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust and loose materials.
(b) When necessary, the Engineer will require the surfaces to be scrubbed with water and
a stiff brush after which all surfaces shall be allowed to become thoroughly dry before
application of materials.
4.6.3.2 Dampproofing
(1) Care shall be taken to confine all asphalt to the areas to be covered, and special care shall
be taken to prevent disfigurement of any other parts of the structure by dropping or
spreading of the materials.
(2) The cured, cleaned and dry surfaces shall be painted as follows.
(a) Prime Coats
Paint with at least two coats of asphalt. When indicated on the drawings, more than
two coats may be required. The materials may be either brushed or sprayed on. The
amount of each coat shall be not less than 0.51/sq. m. Successive coats shall not be
applied until the preceding coat has thoroughly dried.
(b) Seal Coat
After the last prime coat has thoroughly dried, one coat of seal shall be applied by
brush only. This coating shall consist of at least 0.51/sq. m. When necessary, this
material may be heated, but not in excess of 65 °C (150 °F).
4.6.3.3 Membrane Waterproofing
(1) Priming
(a) The surfaces shall first be painted with a primer, either by spraying or brushing. The
amountof the primer coat shall be not less than 0.51/sq. m.
(b) The primer shall be applied so as to give a uniform coating. The priming coat shall be
applied 24 hours in advance of applying any mop coats, and shall be allowed to
become thoroughly dry before the first mopping application. The primer shall not be
heated.
(2) Mopping
(a) After the prime coat has dried as specified above, the mop coats shall be applied.
(b) In all cases, the mopping on concrete shall cover the surfaces so that no grey spots
appear, and on cloth it shall be sufficiently heavy to completely conceal the weave.
On horizontal surfaces not less than 50 litres of asphalt or tar shall be used for each
10 sq.m. of finished work, and on vertical surfaces not less than 60 litres shall be used.
(c) The work shall be so regulated that, at the close of a day's work, all cloth that is laid
shall have received the final mopping of asphalt or tar. Special care shall be taken at
all laps to see that they are thoroughly sealed down.
(d) Asphalt shall be heated to a temperature between 150 °C and 175 °C. Arrangements
shall be made to apply the heat indirectly. The heating kettles shall be equipped with
thermometers.
(e) In all cases, the waterproofing shall begin at the low point of the surface to be
waterproofed, so that water will run over and not against or along the laps.
(3) Fabric Laying
(a) The first strip of fabric shall be of half width; the second shall be full width, lapped
the full width of the first sheet; and the third and each succeeding strip shall be full
width and lapped so that there will be at least two layers of fabric at all points and
three layers with laps not less than 50 mm. wide at edges of strips. All laps at ends of
strips shall be at least 300 mm.
(b) Beginning at the low point of the surface to be waterproofed, a section about 200 mm
wide and the full length of the surface shall be mopped with the hot asphalt or tar,
and there shall be rolled into it, immediately following mopping, the first strip of
fabric, of half width, which shall be carefully pressed into place so as to eliminate all
air bubbles and obtain close conformity with the surface.
(c) This strip and an adjacent section of the surface of a width equal to slightly more than
half the width of the fabric being used shall then be mopped with hot asphalt or tar,
and a full strip and a full width of the fabric being used shall then be mopped with
hot asphalt or tar, and a full strip and a full width of the fabric shall be rolled into
this, completely cover the first strip, and pressed into place as before.
(d) The forward or upgrade half of this second strip and an adjacent section of the
concrete surface shall then be mopped with hot asphalt or tar and the third strip of
fabric "shingled" on so as to lap the first strip not less than 50 mm.
(e) This procedure shall continue until the entire surface is covered, each strip of fabric
lapping at least 50 mm. over the second strip below.
(f) The entire surface shall then be given a final mopping of hot asphalt.
(g) The completed waterproofing shall be a firmly bonded membrane composed of two
layers of fabric and three moppings of asphalt or tar.
(h) Under no circumstances shall one layer of fabric touch another layer at any point or
touch the surface, as there must be at least three complete moppings of asphalt.
(4) Flashings
(a) At the edges of the membrane and any points where it is punctured by such
appurtenances as drains or pipes, it shall be flashed in a manner suitable to the
Engineer, to prevent water from getting between the waterproofing and the
waterproofed surface.
(b) All flashing at kerbs and against girders, spandrel walls, etc, shall be done with separate
sheets lapping the main membrane not less than 300 mm. Flashing shall be closely
sealed either with a metal counter-flashing or by embedding the upper edges of the
flashing in a groove poured full of joint filler.
(5) Joints
(a) Joints which are essentially open joints, but which are not designed to provide for
expansion, shall first be caulked with oakum and lead wool and then filled with hot
joint filler.
(b) Expansion joints, both horizontal and vertical, shall be provided with sheet copper or
lead in "U" or "V" form in accordance with the details, and after the membrane has
been placed, the joint shall be filled with hot joint filler.
(c) The membrane shall be placed at expansion joints as detailed on the drawings.
(d) At the ends of the structure, the membrane shall be carried well down on the
abutments and suitable provision made for all movement.
4.6.3.4 Protection
(1) Care shall be taken to prevent injury to the finished membrane by the passage over it of
menor equipment, or by throwing any material on it. Any damage which may occur shall
be repaired by patching.
(a) Patches shall extend at least 300 mm beyond the outer most damaged portion, and
the second ply shall extend at least 70 mm beyond the first.
(b) The top surface shall be trowelled to a smooth, hard finish, true and accurate to
required grade.
(c) The construction of the protection course shall follow the construction of the
membrane waterproofing so closely that the latter will not be exposed without
protection for more than 24 hours.
(2) The mortar protection course will be subject to the same requirements for curing,
anddefective work as stipulated for concrete work.
(3) Loads and fill will not be allowed on the mortar until the entire surface has been cured.
4.7 JOINTS, BEARINGS AND SUNDRIES

4.7.1 DESCRIPTION
4.7.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the furnishing and installing of elastic joint fillers, elastomeric bridge
bearings, spherical bearings and deck drainage, as shown on the drawings and described in these
specifications.
4.7.1.2 Tolerances
Plain and laminated bearings: The permissible variation from the dimensions and configuration
required by the plans and these specifications shall be as follows:
(1) Overall Vertical Dimensions mm
Average Total Thickness 32 mm or less -0,+3.2
Average Total Thickness over 32 mm -0,+6.4
(2) Overall Horizontal Dimension -0,+6.4
1 m and less -0,+12
over 1 m 7,+3.2
(3) Thickness of Individual Layers of Elastomer 3.2
(Laminated Bearing Only)
(4) Variation from a Plane Parallel to the Theoretical Surface (as
determined by measurements at the edge of the bearings) 6.4
Top 3.2
Sides
Individual Non-Elastic Laminates
(5) Position of Exposed Connection Members +3.2

(6) Edge Cover of Embedded Laminates or Connection Members -0,+3.2
(7) Size of Holes, Slots or Inserts +3.2
(8) Position of Holes, Slots or Inserts +3.2
4.7.1.3 Storage
Expansion joint materials and bearing materials delivered to the bridge sites shall be stored, under
cover, on platforms above the surface of the ground. It shall be protected at all times from injury,
and when placed it shall be free from dirt, oil grease or other foreign substance.
4.7.2 PRODUCTS
4.7.2.1 Materials
(1) Joint Filler
Board joint filler shall be Expandite Flexcell or similar approved.
Mastic joint-filler shall be of approved quality. Where foam plastic is shown, it shall be
(a) Shall be weather-proof and hard enough to resist compression during pouring of
concrete and shall conform to AASHTO M153, type II, articles 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and 3.7.
(b) It shall also resist immersion in boiling water without melting or dissolving.
(2) Joint Sealing Materials
(a) Joint Primer: Joint priming compound shall be Expandite No. 3 other approved equal
primer.
(b) Joint Sealing Compound: Horizontal joint sealing material shall be Expandite Pliastic
hot poured rubber bitumen sealing compound Grade 99 or other approved
compound. Vertical or inclined joint sealing material shall be Expandite Elastijoint
bituminous putty or other approved compound.
(3) Tarpaper or Bitumen Paper Filler: These will be used only when specified, in which event
athreeply roofing paper will be required, and shall be of a type approved by the Engineer.
(4) Elastomer
(a) The elastomer portion of the elastomeric compound shall be 100 percent virgin
natural polyisoprene (natural rubber) meeting the requirements of Table 4.7-A or 100
percent virgin chloroprene (neoprene) meeting the requirements ofTable 4.7-B, as
shown on the Drawings.
Table 4.7-A :Natural Rubber

ASTM Standard Physical Properties 50 Duro 60 Duro 70 Duro
D2240 D412 Hardness 50+5 60+5 70+5
Tensile strength, min. Mpa 17.2 17.2 17.2
Ultimate elongation, Min. % 450 400 300
Heat Resistance
D573 Change in durometer hardness, max. points +10 +10 +10
70 hr. Change in tensile strength,
Compression Set
D395 Method B 22 hours at 70. C, Max. % 25 25 25
Ozone
D1149 25 pphm ozone in air by volume, No No No
20 % strain 38oC+1oC Cracks Cracks Cracks
48 hours
Adhesion
D429, B Bond made during vulcanization Kn/m 7.14 7.14 7.14
Table 4.7-B :Neoprene
ASTM Standard Physical Properties 50 Duro 60 Duro 70 Duro

D2240 Hardness 50+5 60+5 70+5
D412 Tensile strength, min. Mpa 17.2 17.2 17.2
Ultimate elongation, Min. % 400 350 300
Heat Resistance
D573 Change in durometer hardness, max. +15 +15 +15
70 hr. points
at 70 °C Change in tensile strength, max. % -15 -15 -15
Change in ultimate elongateion, max. % -40 -40 -40
Compression Set
D395 Method B 22 hours at 70. C, Max. % 35 35 35
Ozone
D1149 25 pphm ozone in air by volume, 20% No No No
strain 38oC+1oC Cracks Cracks Cracks
48 hours
Adhesion
D429, B Bond made during vulcanizationKn/m 7.14 7.14 7.14
(b) Compound of nominal hardness between the values shown may be used and the test
requirements interpolated.
(c) When test specimens are cut from the finished product a 10 percent variation in
"Physical Properties" will be allowed.
(5) Laminates
Shall be rolled mild steel sheets conforming to AASHTO M183 (ASTM A36), Grade C or D
unless otherwise specified by the Engineer.
(6) Epoxy Resin
(a) Two component epoxy resin systems for application to Portland Cement Concrete,
asphaltic concrete and metals shall generally be in accordance with AASHTO Standard
Specification M200.
(b) Packaging, Labelling and Storing
Each component shall be packaged in steel containers not larger than 20 litres in
volume. When the components are to be mixed at a ratio of 2 parts A to one part B,
by volume, the container containing component B shall be one half of the volume of
the container containing component A. The containers shall have lug type crimp lids
with ring seals. Each container shall be clearly labelled with the designation
(Component A or B), type (Standard or Rapid), manufacturer's name, date of
manufacture, batch number (a batch shall consist of a single charge of all components
in a mixing chamber), lot number, all directions for use specified elsewhere and the
following warning:
“CAUTION"
"This material will cause severe dermatitis if it is allowed to come in contact with the
skin or eyes. Use gloves and protective creams on the hands. Should this material
contact the skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. Do not attempt to remove
this material from the skin with solvents. If any gets in the eyes, flush for 10 minutes
with water and secure immediate medical attention."
(c) Epoxy Grout Strength Requirements
The compressive strength of 38mm cubes of epoxy grout tested in accordance with
ASTM C39 after 10 hours of curing at 20oC shall be not less than 45 N/mm2.
(d) Attention is directed to the characteristic of some epoxy components to crystallise or
thicken excessively prior to use when stored at temperatures below 2oC. Any material
which shows evidence of crystallisation or a permanent increase in viscosity or settling
of pigments which cannot be readily redispersed with a paddle shall not be used.
(7) Dowel Bars
Shall be of SS41 grade steel, be straight with clean cut ends and be of the diameters and
lengths shown on the Drawings.
(8) Cover Plate
Cover plates shall be hot dip galvanised mild steel plate to the dimensions shown on the
drawings.
(9) Water Stop
Water stop material shall be approved in writing by the Engineer before being used in the
Works.
(10) Gratings
Steel gratings and frames, shall be fabricated in accordance with AASHTO Standard
Specification for Highway Bridges Division II Section 10. Allcastings shall be free from airholes,
sandholes, cold shuts and chill. They shall be neatly dressed, carefully fettled, and free
from voids whether due to shrinkage, gas inclusions or other causes. They shall be supplied
coated with an approved tar or bitumen based compound.
(11) Weep pipes
Shall be unplasticized PVC conforming to TIS 17 Class 8.5, and be to the dimensions shown
on the drawing.
(12) Spherical Bearings
Spherical Bearings shall be Mechanical Bearing as shown in the drawings. Materials,
Manufacture and installation, unless otherwise specified, shall be in accordance with the
requirement of BS, EURO, AASHTO or DIN Standard. Product shall guarantee for 15 years
after opening to the service.
4.7.3 EXECUTION
4.7.3.1 Joint Preparation
(1) Premoulded material shall be used in as large pieces as possible. Small areas of 0.25
squaremetre or less shall be made of one piece.
(2) The material shall be cut to a clean square edge with a sharp tool. Rough or ragged
edgeswill not be permitted.
(3) The material shall be placed so that it will be securely held in the form and well-fastened
toone face of the concrete. Care must be taken to ensure straight lines at the joint.
(4) The thickness of the joints to be used shall be as shown on the drawings.
4.7.3.2 Expansion Joints
(1) General
Expansion joints except in the case of premoulded filler shall be formed by placing a
temporary joint form, shaped to the section, of a type of material approved by the Engineer.
(a) Care shall be taken in removing these forms so that the concrete is not chipped or
broken.
(b) The size of the gap shall be compatible with the mean bridge temperature at the time
of installation. This temperature shall be determined in accordance with arrangements
agreed with the Engineer.
(c) The position of all bolts cast into concrete and all holes shall be accurately
determined from templates.
(d) The mixing, application and curing of all proprietary material shall comply with the
manufacturers requirements.
(e) All joints shall be constructed according to physical details shown on the drawings.
(2) Prevention of Damage
During the placing and hardening of concrete or mortar under expansion joint components,
relative movement shall be prevented between them and the supports to which they are
being fixed.
(a) When one half of the joint is being set, the other half shall be completely free from
longitudinal restraint.
(b) In particular where strongbacks or templates are used to locate the two sides of a
joint they shall not be fixed simultaneously to both sides.
(c) Screw threads shall be kept clean and free from rust.
(d) Ramps shall be provided and maintained to protect all expansion joints from vehicular
loading.
(e) Vehicles shall cross the joints only by means of the ramps until the Engineer permits
their removal.
4.7.3.3 Water Stops
Shall be used to form continuous watertight joints.
4.7.3.4 Epoxy Mortar Bearing Plinths
(1) Epoxy mortar plinths shall be formed under the direction of a competent
supervisorexperienced in the use of the material. The work shall be carried out preferably
in dry weather. The air temperature around the joint shall be not less than 10oC.
(2) Concrete surfaces upon which the plinth is to formed shall be dry, sound and free
fromlaitance. Before application of the priming coat, loose material and dust shall be
removed by an air jet, tested to ensure that no oil is carried over from the compressor.
(3) A priming coat of unfilled epoxy resin composition shall be well worked in by brush to
allsurfaces with which the plinth will be permanently in contact at a uniform rate of not
less than 250 g/m2. The mortar shall then be applied as quickly as possible while the
priming coat is still tacky.
(4) The composition and mix proportions of the epoxy mortar shall be submitted for the
Engineer'sprior approval. Aggregate shall be either silica sand, calcined bauxite or other
approved synthetic or natural aggregate of suitable grading not exceeding one-fourth of the
thickness of the joint to be grouted. The particle size distribution shall be that which
produces a mortar with, adequate workability and minimum void volume. Aggregates shall
be clean and completely dry.
(5) Whichever type of aggregate is used, the epoxy mortar components shall be thoroughly
mixedin a suitable mechanical mixer. The sequence, duration and temperature of mixing
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
(6) The mortar shall be placed in position within the time recommended by the manufacturer.
Itshall be well worked against the primed surfaces and trowelled flush to form a dense
mortar to the profiles described in the drawings or special provisions.
4.7.3.5 Dowel Bars
Dowel bars shall be firmly supported in the positions shown on the Drawings so that they remain
accurately parallel and are not displaced during the casting of the concrete. After the concrete
has hardened and after the formwork has been removed the projecting end shall be cleaned and
painted with two coats of bituminous paint.
The Contractor shall take care to protect the projecting ends of dowel bars from bending or other
damage.
4.7.3.6 Drainage
Allpipes and gratings shall be fixed true to the lines and levels shown on the Drawings. Jointing
shall be to the approval of the Engineer. Pipes and gratings shall be securely supported to prevent
displacement while any surrounding concrete is placed.
4.8 PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE DRIVEN PILES

4.8.1 DESCRIPTION
4.8.1.1 General
This work shall consist of precast reinforced concrete and prestressed reinforced concrete piling
furnished and driven in accordance with the requirements of TIS 395, 396, and 398, and these
Specifications and in conformity with the requirements shown on the Drawings.
4.8.1.2 Submissions
Prior to the commencement of piling operations the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for
his approval, a method statement giving details of proposed piling methods including
(1) Details of construction plant
(2) Method and sequence of pile installation, including methods of avoiding damage to
adjacent piles, utilities and structures.
(3) Calculations of driving stresses.
(4) Methods of jointing and lengthening piles.
(5) Anticipated ground vibration, ground movement.
(6) Details of advance "pilot" piles including calculations of the required final set and drop
height for the proposed piling hammer.
(7) Arrangements for pile testing.
4.8.2 PRODUCTS
4.8.2.1 Materials
(1) Precast concrete piles shall be constructed in accordance with the provisions of Section 4,
thedetails shown on the Drawings, and as described in this Specification.
(2) Concrete
(a) Reinforced Concrete Piles
Concrete shall be as a minimum Class A, in accordance with Section 4.3: Concrete for
Structures, with a minimum cement content in any mix not less than 330 kg/m3.
(b) Pre-stressed Reinforced Concrete Piles
Concrete shall be as a minimum Class 0.
(3) Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section 4.2: Reinforcement of this Specification.
The main longitudinal reinforcement not exceeding 12 m in length shall be in one
continuous length unless specified otherwise.
In piles exceeding 12 m in length joints will be permitted in the main longitudinal bars.
Joints in adjacent bars shall be staggered at least lm apart along the length of the pile.
The method of jointing the reinforcement shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
(4) Pile Shoes
Shoe bases where used shall be made from "chilled hardened" high duty cast iron to ASTM
A48 and shall be free from sand, honeycombing or porous places, air holes or other defects.
Straps shall be of mild steel or wrought iron cast as an integral part of the shoe.
(5) Dimensions
The cross sectional dimensions of the pile shall be not less than those specified and shall
not exceed them by more than 10 mm.
Any face of a pile shall not deviate by more than 6 mm from a straight edge 3 m long laid
on the face, and the centroid of any cross section of the pile shall not deviate by more
than 1/1000 of the length of the pile from the straight line connecting the centroids of the
end faces of the pile.
The head of each pile shall be square to the longitudinal axis. The corners of the head and
the corners of the pile shaft for a distance of 30 cm from the head shall be chamfered 25
mm x 25 mm
(6) Casting
Cylindrical piles shall be centrifugally cast in steel forms. The ends of the piles shall be
square to the longitudinal axis of the pile. Other pile shapes shall be cast in a horizontal
position. Special care shall be taken to place the concrete so as to produce a pile free
from any air pockets, honeycombing or other defects. Concrete shall be placed
continuously and shall be compacted by vibrating or by other means satisfactory to the
Engineer. The forms shall be slightly overfilled, the surplus concrete screed off, and the
top surfaces finished to a uniform, even texture similar to that produced by the forms.
(7) Tensioning Procedure

(a) As used here the word "tendon" shall be defined as any single prestressing element
used to apply prestressed forces to the concrete. For pretensioning this shall be each
strand or straight wire. All tendons to be stressed in a group shall be brought to a
uniform tension of approximately 500 kilograms per tendon prior to being given their
full tension. After this initial stressing the group shall be stressed to a total tension as
required on the Drawings by means of hydraulic jacks or other approved appliances
equipped with gauges graduated to read directly to 1% of the total load applied, and
calibrated to measure accurately the stress induced in the steel. The induced stress
shall be measured by elongation of the tendons and checked by gauge pressure. The
results obtained shall be within 5% of each other.
Means shall be provided for measuring the elongation to an accuracy of one
millimetre in twenty meters of length between jacking heads. In the event of apparent
discrepancies of more than five percent between stresses indicated by gauge pressure
and elongation, the entire operation shall be checked carefully and the source of
error determined and corrected before proceeding further. The Contractor shall
submit theoretical extension calculations based on actual tendon areas and modulus.
Measured extensions shall be within 5% of the agreed, calculated values.
Independent references shall be established adjacent to each anchorage to indicate
any yielding or slippage that may occur between the time of initial stressing and final
release of the tendons. The tendon stress shall be maintained between anchorages
until the concrete has reached a compressive strength equal to the "Transfer Strength"
specified on the Drawings.
Tensioning operations may be inspected by the Engineer at the factory.
(b) Release
The tendon stress shall be maintained between anchorages until the concrete has
reached a compressive strength equal to the "Transfer Strength" specified on the
Drawings. After strength requirements are attained, the tension in the tendons shall
be gradually and simultaneously released and the tendons cut off as required in such
a way as to prevent shock. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to transfer the
prestress safely and to the Engineer's satisfaction in all respects.
(c) Finish
At the ends of piles a recess shall be cut around each tendon to allow cutting off the
tendon and filling the recess with grout so that the cover to the end of the tendon is
not less than 20 mm.
Piles shall present a true, smooth, even surface free from any surface blemishes and
true to the dimensions shown on the Drawings within the tolerance limits.
(8) Handling and Storage
The method and sequence of lifting, handling, transporting and storing piles shall be such
that the piles are not damaged. Only the designated lifting and support points shall be
used. During transportation and storage the piles shall be stored on adequate supports
located under the lifting points of the piles.
Concrete shall at no time be subjected to loading, including its own weight, which will
induce a compressive stress in it exceeding 33% of its strength at the time of loading or of
the specified strength, whichever is the lesser. For this purpose the assessment of the
strength of the concrete and of the stresses produced by the loads shall be subject to the
agreement of the Engineer.
All piles within a stack shall be in groups of the same length. Packings of uniform thickness
shall be provided between piles at the lifting points.
(9) Marking of Piles
After a pile has been cast, the date of casting, reference number, length, and correct as
printed where appropriate, the prestressing force shall be clearly inscribed on the top
surface of the pile and also clearly and indelibly marked on the head of the pile. In addition,
each pile shall be marked at intervals of 250 mm along the top 3 m. of its length before
being driven.
4.8.3 EXECUTION
4.8.3.1 Driving Piles
(1) Strength of Piles
Piles shall not be driven until the concrete has achieved the specified 28 day strength.
(2) Leaders and Trestles
At all stages during driving and until incorporation in the superstructure the pile shall be
adequately supported and restrained by means of leaders, or other guide arrangements to
maintain position and alignment and to prevent buckling. These arrangements shall be
such that damage to the pile does not occur. Leaders shall be of sufficient length to make
the use of followers unnecessary.
(3) Driving Equipment
Before any piling work is commenced the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full
details of the pile driving equipment and the method he intends to use in carrying out the
work.
Piles shall be driven with diesel hammers or gravity hammers. When diesel hammers are
used, they shall be calibrated by load tests if necessary.
The driving equipment shall be of a modern type which assures that the energy needed to
penetrate the pile to the required depth is transmitted to the pile head without damaging
the pile. Efficiency factor of the hammer, i.e. the relation between the theoretical energy
developed by the hammer and the energy submitted to the pile, shall be a minimum of
0.7.
When gravity hammers are used for driving concrete piles, the drop of the hammer shall
not exceed 1.0 m and the hammer shall have a weight of not less that 80% of the weight
of the pile and the driving head. The fall shall be regulated so as to prevent injury to the
pile.
The minimum energy developed by other types of hammers shall be the same as specified
for gravity hammers.
(4) Driving Procedure and Redrive Checks
Each pile shall be driven continuously until the specified or approved set and/or depth has
been reached, except that the Engineer may permit the suspension of driving if he is
satisfied that the rate of penetration prior to the cessation of driving will be substantially
reestablished on its resumption or if he is satisfied that the suspension of driving is beyond

the control of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer without delay if an unexpected change in driving
characteristics is noted. A detailed record of the driving resistance over the full length of
the nearest available pile shall be taken if required.
The Contractor shall give adequate notice and provide all facilities to enable the Engineer
to check driving resistances. A set shall be taken only in the presence of the Engineer unless
otherwise approved.
Redrive checks, if required, shall be carried out to an approved procedure.
(5) Final Set
The final set of each pile shall be recorded either as the penetration in millimetres per 10
blows or as the number of blows required to produce a penetration of 25 mm. When a
final set is being measured, the following requirements shall be met.
(a) The exposed part of the pile shall be in good condition without damage or distortion.
(b) The dolly and packing, if any, shall be in sound condition.
(c) The hammer blow shall be in line with the pile axis and the impact surfaces shall be
flat and at right angles to the pile and hammer axis.
(d) The hammer shall be in good condition and operating correctly.
(e) The temporary compression of the pile shall be recorded if required.
(6) Driving Sequence and Risen Piles
Piles shall be driven in an approved sequence to minimise the detrimental effects of heave
and lateral displacement of the ground.
When required, levels and measurements shall be taken to determine the movement of
the ground or any pile resulting from the driving process.
When a pile has risen as a result of adjacent piles being driven, the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer his proposals for correcting this and the avoidance of it in subsequent work.
4.8.3.2 Length of Piles
(1) The lengths of the piles shown on the Drawings are based on information which has
beenobtained from a site investigation prior to the driving of any piles.
(2) Before pile lengths are finally settled, the Contractor shall construct to the lengths shown
on theDrawings such pilot piles as may be found necessary and these piles shall be driven
in the positions specified by the Engineer who shall be notified in advance of the driving.
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer daily with a detailed record of the driving of pilot
piles throughout the full depth of driving. After attaining the approved set driving shall be
continued until the Engineer directs that it shall cease. Driving of pilot piles beyond the
point at which the approved set is obtained shall be called for to demonstrate that driving
resistance continues to increase. The Contractor shall then furnish the remainder of the
piles in the structure. In determining the lengths of piles the Contractor shall base his order
list on the lengths assumed to remain in the completed structure. The Contractor at his
own expense can increase the lengths to provide for fresh heading and for such lengths as
may be necessary to suit his method of operation.
4.8.3.3 Cut Off and Extension

Pre cast concrete piles shall be cut off at such elevation that they shall extend into the cap or
footing as indicated on the Drawings.
4.8.3.4 Damage to Adjacent Structures
If during the execution of the work damage is, or is likely to be caused to mains services, or
adjacent structures, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals for repair or
avoidance of such damage.
4.8.3.5 Records
The Contractor shall keep records as indicated below of the installation of each pile and shall
submit two signed copies of these records to the Engineer not later than noon of the next working
day after the pile is installed. The signed records shall form a record of the work.
(1) The following data is required
(2) Pile location
(3) Pile reference number
(4) Pile type
(5) Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameter
(6) Length of pile
(7) Date and time of driving or redriving
(8) Pile toe level
(9) Ground level (msl)
(10) Type, weight, drop and mechanical condition and serial number of hammer andequivalent
information for other equipment
(11) Number and type of packing used and type and condition before and after the driving of
dolly used during driving the pile
(12) Condition, of the pile head before and after driving
(13) Set of pile in mm per 10 blows or number of blows per 250 mm of penetration
(14) All information regarding obstructions delays and other interruptions to the sequence
ofwork and observations of occurrences such as ground heave.
4.8.3.6 Tolerances
(1) Setting Out
Setting out shall be carried out from the main grid lines of the proposed structure.
Immediately before installation of the pile, the pile position shall be marked with suitable
identifiable pins or markers.
(2) Position
For a pile cut off at or above ground level the maximum permitted deviation of the pile
centrefrom the centre point shown on the setting out drawing shall be 75 mm in any
direction.
(3) Verticality
The maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the vertical shall be 1 in 50.
(4) Rake
Where raking piles are specified, the pilingrig shall be set and maintained to attain the
required rake. The maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the specified
rake shall be 1 in 25.
4.8.3.7 Defective Piles
The procedure of the driving of piles shall not subject them to excessive and undue abuse
producing crushing and spalling of the concrete, injurious splitting, splintering and brooming of the
wood or deformation of the steel. Manipulation of piles to force them into proper position,
considered by the Engineer to be excessive, shall not be permitted. Any pile damaged by reason
of internal defects, or by improper driving or driven out of its proper location shall be corrected
at the Contractor's expense by one of following methods approved by the Engineer for the pile
in question:
(1) The pile shall be withdrawn and replaced by a new pile.
(2) A second pile shall be driven adjacent to the defective pile.
(3) The pile shall be spliced or built up as otherwise provided herein or a sufficient portion of
the footing extended to properly embed the pile.
4.8.3.8 Repair of Damaged Pile Heads
When repairing the head of a pile, the head shall be cut off square at sound concrete, and all
loose particles shall be removed by wire brushing, followed by washing with water. If the pile is
to be subjected to further driving, the head shall be replaced with concrete of an approved grade.
If the driving of a pile has been accepted but sound concrete of the pile is below the cut-off
level, the pile shall be made good to the cut-off level with concrete of a grade not inferior to
that of the concrete of the pile.
Repaired piles shall not be driven until the added concrete has reached the specified characteristic
strength of the concrete of the pile.
4.8.3.9 Pilot Piles
Any pilot pile completed and accepted, shall be made at the same rates as for working piles of
the same size and type. The additional costs associated with pilot piles shall be deemed to have
been distributed over the total length of working piles for each size and each location.
No payment shall be made for unauthorised, defective, unsound or unsatisfactorily driven piles
or for any costs incurred by the Contractor for such piles.
4.8.3.10 Testing of Piles
If not specified in the construction drawing, the pile testing shall be performed as follows:
(1) Static Pile Load Test
The preliminary pile out side the foundation plan for preliminary test, whichof the same
size and type shall be subjected to a test load of 250% of the specified working load for
24 hours. The settlement of the pile shall be monitored at intervals as directed by the
Engineer by reference to a datum point well clear of the zone of influence of the pile being
tested and of any other work in progress. The rate of settlement shall be plotted and shall
not exceed those specified on the Drawings.
The minimum rate of testing shall be one (1) test for every five hundred (500) piles and all
the costs of testing shall be included in the costs of providing, furnishing and installing the
piles.
Pile load tests shall be carried out on piles which have been installed for a minimum of 28
(twenty eight) days.
The cost of pile load test shall be assumed to be incidental to the piling works for buildings
and structures and shall be included in the relevant rates. The Engineer may instruct such
pile tests as he considers necessary.
(2) Dynamic Pile Load Test
Thetestpile of any group of the same size and type shall be subjected to a proof load by
dynamic pile load test conforming to ASTM D4945.
The rate of proof load testing shall be 3 percent of working piles and all the costs of testing
shall be included in the costs of providing, furnishing and installing the piles. The Engineer
may instruct such pile testing as may be required.
(3) Integrity Test
All working piles shall be tested the integrity test as ple head impact test e.g. sonic integrity
test or seismic test or echo test or shock test or equivalents.
The costs of testing shall be included in the costs of providing, furnishing and installing the
piles. The Engineer may instruct such pile testing as may be required.
4.9 BORED CONCRETE PILES

4.9.1 DESCRIPTION
4.9.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the furnishing and boring of large diameter reinforced concrete piles in
accordance with the drawings and these specifications.
Such piles will be executed by the Bentonite slurry method or Polymer Slurry.
Prior to the commencement of pile boring proposed founding levels shall be established by site
investigation prebores located at or near pile positions.
The Engineer shall require prebore results a minimum of 30 days in advance of the piling works
to confirm the pile design.
The Contractor shall allow for soil sampling and tests in order to produce a boring log during
excavation of the pile and to confirm the depths and types of the various soil layers.
Disturbed samples shall be submitted to the Engineer. However, before pile lengths are finally
settled, the Contractor shall construct trial piles to be subjected to load tests.
During the pile excavation if the ground conditions are different from those observed in the
prebore the Contractor shall notify the Engineer at once, and the Contractor shall not be
reimbursed for any possible delays.
4.9.1.2 Tolerances
(1) Piles shall be straight and deviation from vertical will be maintained within 1 degree.
(2) After pile construction, the position of the head of a pile shall be within the following
distancesfrom the position shown on the drawings: 50 mm in the longitudinal direction of
the construction and 75 mm in the direction perpendicular to the construction, but the
centre of gravity of piles shall not deviate more than 50 mm from its theoretical position.
4.9.2 PRODUCTS
4.9.2.1 Materials
(1) Concrete
Shall be class A in accordance with Section 4.3 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES with cement
content not less than 400 kg/m3.
(2) Reinforcement
Shall comply with requirements of Section 4.2: REINFORCEMENT.
(3) Bentonite Slurry Mud
Bentonite mud, used to support the cavity drilled by bucket or auger from surrounding
unstable ground, are formed by a mix of top quality bentonite suspended in water,
normally in the ratio of 8 - 17 kg of dry bentonite to 100 litres of water, the Engineer having
the right to order different ratios.
The bentonite suspension, when submitted to laboratory test, must satisfy the following
specifications:
Screening oversize, 1000 mesh/cm2 screen 1%

moisture content 15 %
liquidity limit 440 %
Marsh cone viscosity 1500/1000 of 6% suspension in distilled water 40 °A
Setting of 6% suspension in 24 hours 2%
Water separated by pressurised filtration or 450 cc of the 6%
18 cm3
suspension in 30 minutes at a pressure of 7 kg/m2
pH of filtered water 7 pH 9
Cake thickness of filter-press filter 2.5 mm
4.9.2.2 Preparation of Bentonite
The specifications of the bentonite on site must as be follows:
Property to be measured Range of values at 20oC Test method
Density 1.10 g/ml Mud density balance
Viscosity 30-90 sec. Marsh's cone
pH value 9.5-12 pH indicator paper strips
Shear strength 1.4-10 N/m2 Shearometer
The mixture will be prepared in automatic high-powered mixers and with a component weight
metering device.
4.9.2.3 Testing Bentonite

The drilling fluid shall be tested during piling operations. Once boring is completed and before
concreting, the fluid properties should be measured, taking samples from different depths.
(1) The Contractor must have proper test facilities on site for tests of the specific gravity of
themixture, while an approved laboratory must be used for testing the density, viscosity,
pH, and shear strength, of the mixture.
(2) The frequency of testing drilling fluid and the method and procedure of sampling shall
beproposed by the Contractor for approval of the Engineer prior to the commencement of
the work.
The frequency may subsequently be varied as required, depending on the consistency of
the results obtained.
(3) Control tests shall be carried out on the bentonite suspension, using suitable apparatus.
The density of freshly mixed bentonite suspension shall be measured daily as a check on
the quality of the suspension being formed.
The measuring device shall be calibrated to read to within 0.01 g/ml.
Tests to determine density, viscosity, pH value, and shear strength shall be applied to
bentonite supplied to the pile bore.
For average soil conditions the results shall generally be within the ranges stated in Table
given above.
The contents of extra-fine sand must amount to less than 3% of the dry bentonite.
The tests shall be carried out until a consistent working pattern has been established,
account being taken of the mixing process, any blending of freshly mixed bentonite
suspension and previously used bentonite suspension and any process which may be used
to remove impurities from previously used bentonite suspension.
When the results show consistent behaviour, the tests for shear strength and pH value may
be discontinued, and tests to determine density and viscosity shall be carried out as agreed
with the Engineer.
(4) The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval the method proposed
forsampling and checking of contaminated bentonite and for the cleaning of the base of
the bore.
In the event of a change in the established working pattern tests for shear strength and pH
value shall be reintroduced for a period if required.
4.9.2.4 Temporary Casings
Temporary casings shall be used to maintain the stability of the pile excavation which might
otherwise collapse.
Temporary casings shall be free from significant distortion.
They shall be of uniform cross-section throughout each continuous length.
During concreting they shall be free from internal projections and encrusted concrete which might
prevent the proper formation of piles.
4.9.3 EXECUTION
4.9.3.1 General
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval particulars of proposed materials and
methods of constructing bored cast-in-place piles using bentonite slurry or other agents including:
(1) A certificate from the manufacturer of the bentonite powder showing the type, the
manufacturer's name, the date and place of manufacture and including details of the
apparent viscosity range in centipoises and gel strength range in N/sq mm for solids in
water.
(2) Characteristics of the bentonite slurry in a freshly mixed condition and in the excavation
immediately before concreting.
(3) Methods of quality control, sampling, testing, mixing, storing, recirculation, removing silt
and sand, preventing spillages and disposal from the site.
(4) Head of bentonite slurry, including calculations.
(5) Methods of placing concrete by tremie.
(6) Methods of cleaning the pile toe.
The Contractor will be responsible for extending the pile to at least 1.25 metres above the
bottom level of the pile cap or abutment.
The pile head shall be cut down until sound concrete is reached and judged to be
acceptable by the Engineer.
In general, pile head cutting is to be provided for down to 75 mm above the bottom level
of the pile cap or abutment.
The pile reinforcement shall extend above the bottom level of pile cap or abutment for a
minimum of 40 times its diameter.
4.9.3.2 Pile Installation
(1) Sequence
Piles shall not be bored close to other piles which have recently (within 24 hours) been
cast and which contain workable or unset concrete in order to avoid causing a flow of
concrete or damage to any of the adjacent piles.
The sequence of piling shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
(a) During and after concreting care shall be taken to avoid damage to the concrete from
pumpingand de-watering operations.
(2) Stability of Pile Excavation Using Drilling Fluid
(b) Where the use of drilling fluid is approved for maintaining the stability of a bore, the
level of thefluid in the excavation shall be maintained so that the fluid pressure always
exceeds the pressures exerted by the soils and external groundwater.
The fluid level shall be maintained at a level not less than 1 m above the level of
the external groundwater.
(c) In the event of a rapid loss of bentonite suspension from the pile excavation, the
excavation shall be backfilled without delay and the instructions of the Engineer or
Engineer's Representative shall be obtained before excavation at that location is
resumed.
(3) Spillage and Disposal

All reasonable steps shall be taken to prevent the spillage of bentonite suspension on the
Site in areas outside the immediate vicinity of bore. Discarded bentonite shall be removed
from the Site without delay. Any disposal of bentonite shall comply with the regulations
of the local controlling authority.
(4) Pumping from Bored Holes
Pumping from a bored hole shall not be permitted unless a casing has been placed into a
stable stratum which prevents the flow of water from other strata in significant quantities
into the bore, or unless it can be shown that pumping will not have a detrimental effect
on the surrounding soil or adjacent property.
(5) Cleanliness of Pile Bases
On completion of boring, loose, disturbed or remoulded soil shall be removed from the
base of the pile, using appropriate and approved methods, which may include airlifting,
and which shall be designed to clean while at the same time minimising ground disturbance
below the pile base.
(6) Inspection
The Contractor shall provide an approved means by which inspection of the verticality of
bored holes and reinforcement cages can be performed.
(7) Concreting
Immediately after the boring has been completed the Engineer's approval to the
commencement of concreting shall be sought and, when this has been obtained, concreting
shall start forthwith and continue without interruption.
Before placing concrete, measures shall be taken to ensure that there is no accumulation
of silt or other material at the base of the bore.
(a) In a boring which contains water or drilling fluid the concrete shall be placed by tremie
in such a manner that segregation does not occur.
The lower end of the supply pipe will constantly be immersed in the fresh concrete
mass for a length of at least two metres.
(b) The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and watertight throughout.
The pipe shall extend to the base of the pile and a sliding plug or barrier shall be
placed in the pipe to prevent direct contact between the first charge of concrete in
the pipe of the tremie and the water.
The pipe shall at all times penetrate the concrete which has previously been placed
and shall not be withdrawn from the concrete until completion of concreting.
At all times a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within the pipe to
ensure that the pressure from it exceeds that from the water or fluid.
(c) The internal diameter of the tremie pipe shall be not less than 150 mm for concrete
made with 20 mm aggregate and not less than 200 mm for concrete made with 40
mm aggregate.
It shall be so designed that external projections are minimised, allowing the tremie to
pass through reinforcing cages without causing damage.
The internal face of the pipe of the tremie shall be free from projections.
(d) Measurement of the level of the concrete surface shall be taken immediately before
and after any vertical movement of the tremie pipe.
(e) The Contractor shall ensure that heavily contaminated bentonite suspension, which
could impair the free flow of concrete from the pipe of the tremie, has not
accumulated in the bottom of the hole.
(f) A sample of the bentonite suspension shall be taken from the base of the bore using
an approved sampling device.
If the specific gravity of the suspension exceeds 1.25 the placing of concrete shall not
proceed. In this event, the Contractor shall modify or replace the bentonite as
approved to meet the Specification.
(8) Temporary Casings
(a) Temporary casings shall be used to maintain the stability of pile excavation passing
throughthe upper soft clay layers.
(b) Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them remains
sufficiently workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted.
Should a semi-dry mix have been approved the means of ensuring that the semi-dry
concrete does not lift during extraction of the casing shall be subject to approval)
(c) When the casing is being extracted a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be
maintained within it to ensure that pressure from external water or soil is exceeded
and that the pile is neither reduced in section nor contaminated.
(d) No concrete is to be placed in the boring once the bottom of the casing has been
lifted above the top of the concrete; concrete shall be placed continuously as the
casing is extracted until the desired head of concrete is obtained.
(e) Adequate precautions shall be taken in all cases where excess hydraulic heads could
be caused as the casing is withdrawn because of the displacement of water by the
concrete as it flows into its final position against the walls of the shaft.
(f) The use of vibrating casing extractors shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
(9) Water Level
In the event of the groundwater level being higher than the required pile head casting level
shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit his proposals for approval prior to
placing concrete.
The pile head shall not be left below the groundwater level unless approved precautions
are taken.
(10) Piling Records
The Contractor shall keep records, as indicated in the table appended to this section, of
the installation of each pile and shall submit two signed copies of these records to the
Engineer not later than noon of the next working day after the pile was installed.
The signed records shall form a record of the work.
4.9.3.3 Trial Piles and Tests
(1) Trial Piles
The Engineer will decide on the number of load tests for trial piles to be carried out by the
Contractor in accordance with the geological layers involved. However, there will be in all
cases be one test for each trial pile type.
(2) Load Tests

(a) The test load shall be equal to twice the working load (P max).
The pile must not be loaded for any reason before the test is performed and this can
be carried out not less than 28 days after concrete pouring.
A reinforced concrete cap will be constructed on the pile, with a smooth upper surface
and the same centring as the pile.
An iron plate of an appropriate thickness will be placed on the cap and one or more
hydraulic jacks of an adequate pull will be interposed between this plate and the
counteracting load, which will be constituted by a ballast caisson, or steel girders,
rails, cubes of concrete or other material whose weight can be easily determined.
The counteracting load must be 20% higher than the test load so that the test load
can be achieved even if the frame is not perfectly centred with respect to the pile.
The supports of the frame constructed for the test must be extensive and far enough
away from the pile to avoid interference between the underground stress produced
by the counteracting load and the stress produced by the pile being tested.
The hydraulic jacks which are used must permit the oil pressure to be maintained at
a constant level for the time required for the test to be performed.
The pressure gauge must have a scale excursion which is sufficiently large for the loads
required. The manometer and micrometer gauges will be tested and calibrated before
use by an approved laboratory with calibration graphs.
The micrometers will be installed at 120 degree at a suitable distance from the piles.
They will have a large scale excursion in relation to the eventual settlement.
Settlement of the trial pile will be assumed to be equal to the average of the
micrometer readings. When the test has been completed, the Engineer reserves the
right to recheck the calibration of the manometer and micrometer gauges.
The final load will be achieved by successive and equal increments. The balance of
the counteracting ballast caisson must be kept stable even when approaching the
maximum applied load.
A report must be prepared for each test, duly signed by the parties and including the
following information:
 date and time of each variation to the load;
 corresponding micrometer readings and load-settlement diagram.
(b) Ultimate Load Test Procedure
The load tests shall be carried out on 2 consecutive days.
Day 1
(i) Loading Cycle
Apply a load of ten tonnes, remove load and set recording instruments to zero.
Increase the load to P max in five equal increments.
The next increment shall not be applied until the rate of settlement has
decreased to 0.5 mm per hour and the load has been maintained for 90
minutes.
The load increments must be effected as rapidly as possible. At each
increment, micrometer readings are taken at the following times:
0-0.5-1-2-3-4-5-10-15-20-25-30-45-60-75-90 min. and so on until settlement

decreases to 0.5 mm per hour, if necessary.
The P max load shall be maintained for at least 12 hours.
(ii) Unloading Cycle
The load increments equal to P max/5 are removed until 0 load is reached,
maintaining the decrement for 15 min. For each decrement, readings are taken
at:
1-2-5-10 and 15 min.
When the unloading cycle has been completed, readings are taken during the
next hour at the following intervals:
1-2 and every 5 minutes after this.
Day 2
(i) Loading Cycle
All the instruments readings shall be noted down. Increase the load to 2P max
in ten equal increments until a maximum load of 2P max is obtained. Loads
are maintained and readings are taken at the same time intervals as the
previous day.
(ii) Unloading Cycle
The load increments of P max/10 are removed until 0 load is obtained,
maintaining the decrement for 5 min. For each decrement, readings are taken
at: 1-2 and 5 minutes.
When the unloading cycle has been completed, readings are taken for the next
30 min (at 1 minute and then at 5 minute intervals).
A final reading of the permanent settlement is taken the next day before the
kentledge is removed. The results are then analysed and characteristic diagrams
are constructed from the test data.
(iii) Diagram of the load/displacement on the pile head:
 the abscissa provides the load in tonnes;
 the ordinate provides the displacements of the two load cycles;
 the 2 cycles are plotted on the same graph.
The ultimate load shall be taken as the asymptotic value from the load
settlement curve, or the load at which the maximum settlement is one tenth
of the pile diameter, whichever is the lesser.
(iv) Displacement-time diagram
 the abscissa provides the decimal logarithms of the times in minutes;
 the ordinate provides the accumulated vertical displacement of the pile
head in millimetres computed from time 0 of the first cycle.
A curve which tends to a straight line is obtained for each load increment,
called the straight line of stabilisation. The corresponding constant load is
indicated on each curve.
(v) Plot of load-slope of straight lines of stabilisation:
 the abscissa provides the load in tonnes;
 the ordinate provides the slope of the straight lines of stabilisation for the
corresponding loads.
The slope of the straight line which joins the various points changes sharply in
correspondence to a certain load (the sliding load QF)
(vi) Sliding load QF
The load which corresponds to the intersection of the two straight parts of the
load slope graph of the stabilisation lines. This point represents the load at
which the first ground plasticity occurs.
The safety factor of the working load is obtained from the equation:
QF
μ=
Pmax
(3) Geotechnical Verifications

Once the piles to be subjected to load tests have been identified by the Contractor and in
agreement with the Engineer, systematic undisturbed sampling of the geological layers
involved will be performed and the samples will be sent to an approved laboratory so that
the ground parameters can be identified in order to verify that the value assumptions made
during the design correspond to that which is effectively encountered during construction.
Reports will be prepared on the sampling performed and test certificates will be supplied
with the measurement documentation.
4.9.3.4 Testing of Piles
If not specified in the construction drawing, the pile testing shall be performed as follows:
Checks during Construction
(1) Core Proving
The Contractor may be required to carry out continuous coring on the concrete of the
foundation piles with a minimum of 1 for every bridge of greater than 20 metres span.
The Engineer will indicate the piles to be cored.
Cores shall be a minimum of 100 mm diameter and shall be taken with a core barrel to a
depth of 500 mm above the base of the pile.
The cores obtained shall be placed in the correct order in core boxes and the drill holes
identification shall be clearly marked on the core and boxes.
The cores to be tested will be selected by the Engineer and tested in accordance with
Section 4.3: Concrete for Structures.
Upon the satisfactory completion of the tests all voids formed by the core drill shall be
pressure grouted with sand and cement mortar (1:3) to the approval of the Engineer.
(2) Drilling Monitoring
In the case of wet process, the sonic caliper (or equivalents) shall be applied to all working
piles of which diameter not smaller than 800mm for verticality and dimension investigation
of each bored holes prior to concreter puring.
(3) Integrety Test
All working piles shall be tested the integrity test as pile head impact test e.g. sonic intergrity
test or seismic test or echo test or shock test or equivalents.
(a) The tests shall be carried out on all bored piles.

The seismic tests shall be carried out at pile cut off level. The tests shall not be carried
out until 7 days have elapsed since casting the pile and, or the concrete has gained
its 28 day characteristic strength.
(b) The testing shall be carried out by a specialist firm approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit a full method statement in accordance with Section 1.4:
Submittals and Substitutions, prior to commencing testing work.
(c) The interpretation of the results shall be carried out by competent persons and initial
results of the test shall be passed to the Engineer immediately the test is completed.
A full written report shall be submitted to the Engineer within 10 days of the test
being carried out.
(d) If the seismic test indicates weakness in the concrete or non-homogeneous
construction the Contractor shall perform a core test, at his own expense, to
enable the Engineer to determine whether the quality of the concrete and
construction of the pile is adequate.
(4) Sonic Logging Test
The sonic logging (4 tubes) shall be applied to the working pile diameter not smaller than
800 mm, at least 20 percent of each pile size, and tested at each pier location (minimum
one test per each pier).
(5) Static Pile Load Test
The preliminary pile out side the foundation plan for preliminary test, which of the same
size and type shall be subjected to a test load of 250% of the specified working load for
24 hours. The settlement of the pile shall be monitored at intervals as directed by the
Engineer by reference to a datum point well clear of the zone of influence of the pile being
tested and of any other work in progress. The rate of settlement shall be plotted and shall
not exceed those specified on the Drawings.
The minimum rate of testing shall be one (1) test for every five hundred (500) piles and all
the costs of testing shall be included in the costs of providing, furnishing and installing the
piles.
The cost of pile load test shall be assumed to be incidental to the piling works for buildings
and structures and shall be included in the relevant rates. The Engineer may instruct such
pile tests as he considers necessary.
(6) Dynamic Pile Load Test
The test pile of any group of the same size and type shall be subjected to a proof load by
dynamic pile load test conforming to ASTM D4945.
The rate of proof load testing shall be 3 percent of working piles and all the costs of testing
shall be included in the costs of providing, furnishing and installing the piles. The Engineer
may instruct such pile testing as may be required.
(7) Lateral Load Test
Lateral loading tests shall be carried out at least 3 (three) times for each pile type and size,
if required by the Engineer.
(a) Equipment for applying force
The equipment used for applying the horizontal forces shall consist of one or more
hydraulic rams or jacks.
The total capacity of the jacks shall be equal to at least twice the required maximum
load. The complete system shall be capable of transferring the maximum load
required for the test.
(b) Loading arrangement
Piles to be tested for horizontal forces shall consist of a pair of complete piles of
equal length and penetrating similar subsoil strata.
The jack shall be placed between the piles and the force transmitted through direct
contact on a flat, surface of each pile or through reinforced concrete pile caps rigidly
connected to the piles.
(c) Measurement of load
The load shall be measured by a load measuring device and by a calibrated pressure
gauge included in the hydraulic system.
Readings of both the load measuring device and the pressure gauge shall be recorded.
In interpreting the test data the values given by the load measuring device shall
normally be used; the pressure gauge readings are required as a check for gross error.
The load measuring device shall consist of a pressure cell or other appropriate system.
The load measuring device shall have been recently calibrated.
The pressure gauge and hydraulic jack shall be calibrated together.
Certificates of calibration shall be submitted to the Engineer.
Recalibration may be requested by the Engineer when results consistently differ by
more than 10 percent.
(d) Measurement of lateral displacement
Movements of the tops of the piles shall be measured relative to each other and to
a suitable referenced datum to the nearest 0.5 mm by the use of dial gauges.
The Engineer may request the installation of additional instrumentation such as
inclinometers, strain gauges or load cells along the length of the pile.
When another method of measuring displacement is proposed this shall be agreed in
writing.
(e) The maximum test load to be applied to each pile shall be equal to twice the
maximum design lateral load or that load which causes the maximum allowable
lateral displacement.
(f) During the progress of a test, the testing equipment and all records of the test shall
be available for inspection by the Engineer.
(g) Results to be submitted
Summary in writing to the Engineer, unless otherwise directed within 24 hours of the
completion of the test, which shall give:
(i) maintained load for each stage of loading, the period for which the load was
held, the load and the maximum displacement recorded
(ii) The completed schedule of recorded data in Section 4.9.3.4(2).
Table 4.9 :Pile Record

1. Contract
2. Pile reference number (location)
3. Pile Type
4. Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameter
5. Nominal diameter of under ream
6. Standing groundwater level
7. Date and time of boring
8. Date of concreting
9. Ground level at commencement of installation of pile
10. Working level
11. Depth from working level to pile toe
12. Toe level
13. Depth from working level to pile head level
14. Length of temporary casing
15. Length of permanent casing
16. Verticality of borehole
17. Soil samples taken and in-place tests carried out
18. Length and details of reinforcement
19. Concrete mix
20. Volume of concrete supplied to pile where this can be measured in practice andcorresponding
levels of concrete and casing
21. All information regarding obstructions delays and other interruptions to the sequence of work
22. Strength of corresponding concrete cubes
4.10 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK

4.10.1 DESCRIPTION
4.10.1.1 Scope
This Section specifies the construction of steel structures, and the steel structure portions of
composite structures for bridge construction and temporary structures in accordance with these
Specifications and the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and designs shown on the Drawings, and
as required by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall prepare all detail design, fabrication drawings, furnish all equipment, tools,
labour, and materials in connection with the fabricating, hauling, erecting, welding, galvanising,
and painting of structural metals for incorporation in railway bridges. Structural metals will include
structural steel, bolts, welding, special and alloy steels, steel forgings and castings, and iron
castings. This work will also include any incidental metal construction not otherwise provided for
all in accordance with these Specifications and the Drawings.
The materials and workmanship used in the fabrication and erection of steel structures shall
conform to the requirements of BS 5400 or Chapter 15 Steel Structures of the American Railway
Engineers Association (AREA) Manual for Railway Engineering, except as modified in these
Specifications.
The fabrication of structural steel shall be performed in accordance with the AISC Quality
Certification Programme, category III Major Steel Bridges, or similar programme, which shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the commencement of these works.
The fabrication of steel members designated herein as fracture critical members and the material
making up those members shall be in accordance with the requirements set forth in the AREA
Fracture Control Plan for Fracture Critical Members.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer shop drawings and erection procedures for his
approval before any work is fabricated or erected.
4.10.2 PRODUCTS
4.10.2.1 Materials
(1) Steel shall be furnished according to the following Specifications, and unless
otherwisespecified shall be structural carbon steel.
(2) Structural Steel
(a) Carbon Steel
Unless otherwise specified, structural carbon steel for riveted, bolted or welded
construction shall conform to Structural Steel, AASHTO M 183.
(b) Eyebars
Steel for eyebars shall be of a weldable grade. This grade includes structural steel
conforming to Structural Steel AASHTO M 183; Highway Strength Low Alloy Structural
Steel with 344.5 MPa (50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm (4 in.) thick, AASHTO
M 222 (ASTM A 588 with Supplementary Requirement S1 of AASHTO M 222
mandatory).
(c) High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel
It shall conform to High-Strength Low-Alloy Chromium-Vanadium Steels of Structural
Quality, AASHTO M 223, High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa
(50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222.
(d) High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel for Welding. It shall conform to:
(i) High Strength Low Chromium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality, Grade 50,
AASHTO M 223 (ASTM A 572 with supplementary requirement S2 of AASHTO M
223 mandatory).
(ii) High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa (50,000 psi) Minimum
Yield Point to 100 mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222. (ASTM A 588 in
Supplementary Requirement S1 of AASHTO M 222 Mandatory).
(e) High Strength Structural Steel for Bolted Construction It shall conform to:
(i) High Strength Low Alloy Chromium-Vanadium Steel of Structural Quality,
AASHTO M 223.
(ii) High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa (50,000 psi) Minimum
Yield Point to 100 mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222.
(f) High Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate It shall conform to:
(i) High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel plate, suitable for
welding, ASTM A 514.
(ii) High-Strength Alloy Steel Plates, Quenched and Tempered for pressure vessels,
ASTM A 517.
(iii) Quenched and tempered alloy steel structural shapes and seamless
mechanical tubing meeting all the mechanical and chemical requirements of A
514/A 517 steel, except that the specified maximum tensile strength may be
964.6 MPa (140,000 psi) for structural shapes and 999.05 MPa (145,000 psi) for
seamless mechanical tubing shall be considered as A 514/A 517 steel.
(3) High Strength Bolts
(a) Bolts, nuts circular washers shall conform to High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel
Joints, including Suitable Nuts and plain Hardened Washer, AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325).
(b) High strength bolts for structural steel joints including suitable nuts and plain hardened
washers shall conform to either AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) or AASHTO M 253. When
M 164 type 3 bolts are specified, they, along with suitable nuts and washers shall have
an atmospheric corrosion resistance approximately two times that of carbon steel with
copper.
(c) Bolts and nuts manufactured to AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) are identified by proper
marking as specified on the top of the bolt heads and on one face of the nuts for
three different types.
(d) Bolts manufactured to AASHTO M 253 shall be identified by marking on the top of the
head with the symbol A 490 and the nuts shall be marked on one face with the legend
"2H" or "DH".
(e) Bolt and nut dimensions shall conform to the dimensions shown in Table 4.10-1and
to the requirements for Heavy Hexagon Structural Bolts and for Heavy Semi-Finished
Hexagon Nuts given in ANSI Standard B 18.2.1 respectively.
(f) Circular washers shall be flat and smooth and their nominal dimensions shall conform
to the dimensions given in Table 4.10-2 except that for lock pin and collar fasteners,
flat washers should not be used unless slotted or oversized holes are specified.
(g) Bevelled washers for American Standard Beams and Channels or other sloping faces
shall be required and shall be square or rectangular, shall taper in thickness, and shall
conform to the dimensions given in Table 4.10-2
(h) Where necessary, washers may be clipped on one side to a point not closer than
0.875 (7/8) of the bolt diameter from the centre of the washer.
(i) Other fasteners or fasteners assemblies which meet the Materials, Manufacturing, and
Chemical Composition requirements of AASHTO M 253 and which meet the
Mechanical Property requirements of the same specification in full size tests and which
have body diameter and bearing areas under the head and nut, or their equivalent,
not less than those provided by a bolt and nut of the same nominal dimensions
prescribed in the previous paragraph, may be used subject to approval by the
Engineer.
(j) Huck Bolts or equivalent Multi-grooved Locking Pins shall be supplied in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall meet ASTM A 325 strength
requirements satisfying high proof load and tensile strength specifications.
(k) Subject to the approval of the Engineer, high strength steel lock-pin and collar
fasteners may be used as an alternative for high strength bolts as shown on the
Drawings. The shank and head of the high strength steel lock-pin and collar fasteners
shall meet the requirements of the preceding paragraph. Each fastener shall have a
solid shank body of sufficient diameter to provide tensile and shear strength equal to
or greater than the bolt specified and shall have the cold forged head on one end,
and dimensions as approved by the Engineer, a shank length suitable for material
thickness fastened, locking grooves, break neck groove and pull grooves (all annular
grooves) on the opposite end. Each fastener shall provide a steel locking collar of
proper size for shank diameter used which may, by means of suitable installation
tools, be cold swaged into the locking grooves so forming a head for the grooved end
of the fastener after the pull groove section has been removed. The steel locking
collar shall be a standard product of an established manufacturer of lock-pin and
collar fasteners, as approved by the Engineer.
Table 4.10-1 : Nominal Bolt and Nut Dimensions
Nominal Heavy Semi- Finished

Heavy Hexagon Structural Bolts
BoltSize mm Hexagon Nuts
Dimension in mm (inches)
(inch) Dimension in mm (inches)
Width of Width
Height Thread
(Diameter) Head Across Across Height
OfHead Length
Flats Flats
12 (1/2) 21 (7/8) 7 (5116) 25 (1) 21 (7/8) 12 (31/64)
15 (5/8) 26 (1 1/16) 9(25/64) 31(1 1/4) 26 (1 1/16) 15 (39/64)
18 (3/4) 31(1 1/4) 11(15/32) 34 (1 3/8) 31(1 1/4) 18 (47164)
21 (7/8) 35 (17116) 13 (35/64) 37 (1 1/12) 35 (17/16) 21 (55/64)
25 (1) 40 (1 5/8) 15 (39/64) 43 (1 3/4) 40 (1 5/8) 24 (63/64)
28 (1 1/8) 45 (1 13/16) 17 (11/16) 50 (2) 45 (1 13/16) 27 (17/64)
31 (1 1/4) 50 (2) 19 (25/32) 50 (2) 50 (2) 30 (17/32)
34 (1 3/8) 54 (23/16) 21 (27/32) 56 (2 1/4) 54 (23/16) 33 (1 11/32)
37 (1 1/2) 59 (2 3/8) 23 (15/16) 56 (2 1/4) 59 (2 3/8) 36 (1 15/32)
Table 4.10-2 :Nominal Washer Dimensions
Square or Rectangular Bevelled washers for

Circular Washer
American Standard Beams and channels
Nominal Nominal
Minimum Slope or
Bolt Size Outside Diameter Thickness Thickness Mean
Side Taper in
Diameter Diameter of Hole Min Max Thickness
Dimension Thickens
mm (inch) mm mm mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch)
mm (inch) mm (inch)
(inch) (inch)
12 (1/2) 26 (1 1/16) 13 (17/32) 2 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 3 (1 3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)

15 (5/8) 32 (1 5/16) 18 (21/32) 3 (0.122) 4 (0.177) 3 (1 3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
19 (3/4) 36 (1 5/32) 20 (13/16) 3 (0.122) 4 (0.177) 3 (1 3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
22 (7/8) 43 (1 314) 23 (15/16) 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 3 (1 3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
25 (1) 50 (2) 26 (1 1/16) 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 3 (1 3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
28 (1 1/8) 56 (2 1/4) 31(1 1/4) 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 3 (2 3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
31(1 1/4) 62 (2 1/2) 34 (1 3/8) 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 3 (2 3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
34 (1 3/8) 68 (2 3/4) 37 (1 1/2) 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 3 (2 3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
37 (1 1/2) 75 (3) 40 (1 5/8) 3 (01.36) b4 (0.177) 3 (2 3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
43 (1 3/4) 84 (3 3/8) 46 (1 7/8) 4 (0.178) 7 (0.28) - - -
50 (2) 93 (3 3/4) 53 (2 1/8) 4 (0.178) 7 (0.28) - - -
Over 50 to 100 2D-12(1/2) D+3 (1/8) c6 (0.24) 8 (0.34) - - -
(2 to 4) incl.
a May be exceeded by 6 mm (1/4 inch)

b 4 mm (3/16 in) nominal
c 6 mm (1/4 in) nominal)
(4) Copper Bearing Steels
When copper bearing steel is specified, the steel shall contain not less than 0.2 percent of
copper.
(5) Forgings
Steel forgings shall conform to the specifications for Steel forgings Carbon and Alloy for
General Industrial Use, AASHTO M 102, (ASTM A668, Classes C, D, F and G).
(6) Pins and Rollers
(a) Pins and rollers more than 228.6 mm (9 inches) in diameter shall be annealed carbon-
steelforgings conforming to AASHTO M 102 Class C1).
(b) Pins and rollers 228.6 mm (9 inches) or less in diameter shall be (ASTM A 668), Class
C1, or cold finished carbon-steel shafting conforming to AASHTO M 169, Grade 1016
to 1030 (ASTM A 108) inclusive, with a minimum Rockwell Scale B Hardness of 85.
Material not meeting the specifications for hardness may be accepted provided it
develops a tensile strength of 482.3 MPa (70,000 psi) and a yield point of 248.04 MPa
(36,000 psi).
(c) Threads for pins shall conform to the ANSI B1.1 Coarse Thread Series, Class 2A. Pin
ends having a diameter of 35 mm (1 3/8 inches) or more shall be threaded six threads
to the inch.
(7) Castings
Castings shall conform to the specifications given below and be true to pattern in form and
dimensions, free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes, and other defects in
position affecting their strength and value for the service intended. Castings shall be boldly
filed at angles and arises shall be sharp and perfect. All castings must present a smooth,
clean, and uniform surface.
(a) Steel castings for Highway Bridges - AASHTO M 192 Class 70.
(b) Chromium alloy steel castings - AASHTO M 163 (ASTM A 296) Grade CA-15.
(c) Grey iron castings - AASHTO M 105 Class No. 30
(d) Malleable castings - ASTM A 47 Grade No. 35018.
(e) Cast steel for shoes - ASTM A 27 or A 148
4.10.2.2 Galvanised Metal
(1) When galvanised structural steel shapes, plates, bars and their products are specified,
theyshall be galvanised in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M 111, or BS 729
Table 1 with the ingot zinc in accordance with BS 3436.
Coating thickness shall not be less than 85 microns.
Records of galvanising are to be kept and made available for the Engineer's approval.
(2) All bolts and screwed rods, including the threaded portions shall be galvanised. Threads
shallbe cleaned by spinning or brushing. Dies shall not be used for cleaning threads. Nuts
shall be tapped 0.4 mm oversize prior to galvanising. Bolts are to be delivered with nuts
run up to the full extent of the thread.
4.10.2.3 Paints
(1) General
Before ordering paint the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval a full
specification of the paints he proposes to use, together with the name of the manufacturer,
and one litre samples for test panels. All paints forming part of any one painting system
shall be obtained from the same manufacturer and the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer data sheets for all paint material he proposes to use, together with any identifying
codes. No paint shall be used without prior approval of the Engineer.
The Engineer may require sample test plates to be produced of any paint system proposed.
The panels will be tested to check that the specified protection is being achieved.
Paint shall be supplied in sealed containers, of not more than 25 litres capacity, plainly
marked with mass, colour, composition, and name and address of the manufacturer, and
date of manufacture. Paint which has not been used within its "shelf life" shall be discarded
and replaced.
Galvanised surfaces that are to be painted shall receive suitable primer before being coated
with normal undercoats.
All paints shall be stored in cool dry conditions, and used in the same order in which they
are delivered.
(2) The paint shall conform to the requirements of the specifications indicated below.
Red lead ready mixed paint AASHTO M 72 Type I, II, Ill, & IV
Aluminium paint AASHTO M69 Type I & II
White & tinted ready mixed paint AASHTO M 70
Foliage green bridge paint AASHTO M 67
Black paint for bridges AASHTO M 68
Basic lead silicon chromate AASHTO M 229
4.10.2.4 Identification and Name Plates
The Contractor shall provide an identification plate indicating the bridge is designed for a 20 tonne
axle load. In addition the Contractor shall provide a separate name plate bearing the name of the
manufacturer, place, and year of manufacture. Both plates shall be neat castings bolted
horizontally close to each other in a conspicuous position on every span where they can be easily
read.
4.10.2.5 Test Certificates
(1) Plates over 40 mm thick and rolled sections over 25 mm thick shall be impact tested.
(2) The Contractor shall provide test certificates which give the mechanical, chemical, and
impact (if required) properties of all materials. In the absence of test certificates the
Contractor is to arrange for the independent testing and analysis of the materials to be
incorporated into the Works.
4.10.3 EXECUTION
4.10.3.1 Detail Design and Shop Drawings
(1) The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design of steel structures. The drawings
included as part of the Contract documents are based on standard SRT bridge designs and
are not intended to be detailed design drawings. The Contractor shall prepare and submit
to the Engineer detailed design and fabrication drawings and erection procedures for review
and approval before any steel fabrication areto begin. The shop drawings require the
Engineer's approval before any steel fabrication is begun, in accordance with Section 1.4:
Submittals and Substitutions. The shop drawings shall be prepared on a tracing cloth, Al
size, including margins. The margin at the left end shall be 40 mm and the others 15 mm
wide. An approved title block shall be provided at the lower right-hand corner. These
drawings or transparent reproductions on linen or mylar shall ultimately become the
property of, and shall be delivered to, the Engineer upon completion of the Contract.
(2) The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer as many prints of drawings as may be
necessaryto carry out the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness
and completeness of his drawings, regardless of any review by the Engineer. Any work
performed or material ordered prior to approval by the Engineer shall be at the sole risk
of the Contractor.
During the preparation of the shop drawings, the Contractor shall check all general
dimensions of the steel work and shall report any discrepancies to the Engineer for revision
and correction before the fabrication is begun. No allowance shall be made to the
Contractor for material fabricated to incorrect dimensions.
(3) The shop drawings shall indicate the type and grade of steel used in each of the
fabricatedmembers. Members subject to the Fracture Control Plan and Charpy V-Notch
toughness tests shall be designated as such on the shop drawings.
The shop drawings shall indicate number, length, grip and location of all shop and field
fasteners.
(4) All welding shall be fully detailed. One copy of the proposed welding procedures
givingcomplete details for each type and thickness of joint to be used, whether pre-
qualified or subject to qualification tests, shall be submitted to the Engineer for review
prior to submitting shop drawings. The shop drawings submitted for final approval shall
indicate the welding procedure to be used for each joint. Welding symbols shall be those
shown in the latest edition of American Welding Society (AWS) Publication A2.4, "Symbols
for Welding and Non-destructive Testing". Special conditions including location of joints
subject to non-destructive testing and type of non-destructive testing shall be fully
explained by added notes or details.
4.10.3.2 Master Tape
The whole work shall be of the highest class of workmanship and finish. The greatest accuracy
shall be observed in the design, manufacture, and erection of every part of the Work to ensure
that all parts will fit accurately together on erection. The Contractor shall maintain a master steel
tape of approved make, which has been duly calibrated and shall supply a certificate of accuracy
to the Engineer. The master tape shall not be used for any purpose other than checking or
calibrating other tapes, and in case of damage, shall be promptly replaced with another.
4.10.3.3 Inspection
(1) The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least fifteen (15) days notice prior to the beginning
ofwork at the mill or shop, so that the required inspection may be made. The term "mill"
means any rolling mill, shop or foundry where material for the work is to be manufactured
or fabricated. No material shall be rolled or fabricated until said inspection has been
provided. The Contractor shall furnish all facilities for inspection and the Engineer shall be
allowed free access to the mill or shop and premises at all times. The Contractor shall
furnish, without charge, all labour, machinery, material and tools necessary to prepare test
specimens. The cost of this shall be regarded as incidental to the costs of fabrication and
included in the appropriate rates.
Inspection at the mill or shop is intended as a means of facilitating the work and avoiding
errors and it is expressly understood that it will not relieve the Contractor from any
responsibility for imperfect material or workmanship and the necessity for replacing same.
The acceptance of any material or finished member at the mill or shop by the Engineer
shall not preclude their subsequent rejection if found defective before final acceptance of
the work. Inspection of welding will be in accordance with the provision of Section 5 of the
"Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" of the American Welding
Society.
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with copies of certified mill reports of the
structural steel, preferably before but not later than the delivery of the steel to the job
site.
(2) Stock Material Control

When so specified in the Contract, stock material shall be segregated into classes
designated as "identified" or "unidentified". Identified material is material which can be
positively identified as having been rolled from a given heat for which certified mill tests
can be produced. Unidentified material shall include all other general stock materials.
When it is proposed to use unidentified material, the Engineer shall be notified of such
intention at least 15 days in advance of commencing fabrication to permit sampling and
testing. When so indicated or directed, the Contractor shall select such material as he
wishes to use from stock, and place it in such position that it will be accessible for
inspection and sampling. The Contractor shall select identified material from as few heat
numbers as possible, and furnish the certified mill test reports on each of such heat
numbers. Two samples shall be taken from each heat number as directed, one for a tension
test and one for a bend test.
In the case of unidentified stock, the Engineer may, at his discretion, select any number of
random test specimens.
Each manufacturers batch from which bolts are taken a number shall be subject to random
test. Five bolts may be selected by the Engineer from each batch for test purposes.
4.10.3.4 Fabrication
These Specifications apply to bolted and welded construction.
Workmanship and finish shall be in accordance with the best general practice in modern bridge
shops. Portions of the work exposed to view shall be finished neatly. Shearing, flame cutting, and
chipping shall be done carefully and accurately.
Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored above the ground upon platforms,
skids or other supports. It shall be kept free from dirt, grease or other foreign matter, and shall be
protected as far as practicable from corrosion.
Rolled material before being laid off or worked must be straight. If straightening is necessary, it
shall be done by methods that will not injure the metal. Sharp kinks and bends will be cause for
rejection of the material.
Preparation of material shall be in accordance with AWS (American Welding Society) D 1.1,
paragraph 3.2 as modified by AASHTO Standard Specification for Welding of Structural Steel
Highway Bridges.
4.10.3.5 Finishing and Shaping
Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends and open joints.
(1) Edge Planing
Sheared edges of plates more than 15.9 mm in thickness and carrying calculated
stressesshall be planed to a depth of 6.3 mm. Re-entrant cuts shall be filleted before
cutting.
(2) Facing of Bearing Surfaces
The surface finish of bearing and base plates and other bearing surfaces that are to come
in contact with each other or with concrete shall meet the American National Standards
Institute surface roughness requirements as defined in ANSI B-46.1 47, Surface Roughness
Waviness and Lay, Part 1
Steel slabs ANSI 2,000

Heavy plates in contact in shoes to be welded ANSI 1,000
Milled ends of compression members, stiffeners and fillers ANSI 500
Bridge rollers and rockers ANSI 250
Pins and pin holes ANSI 125
Sliding bearings , ANSI 125
(3) Abutting Joints
Abutting joints in compression members and girder flanges and in tension members where
so specified on the drawings, shall be faced and brought to an even bearing. Where joints
are not faced, the opening shall not exceed 6.3 mm.
(4) End Connection Angles
Floor beams, stringers and girders having end connection angles shall be built to plan
length back to back of connection angles with a permissible tolerance of 0 mm to minus
1.6 mm. If end connections are faced, the finished thickness of the angles shall not be less
than that shown on the detail drawings, but in no case less than 9.5 mm.
(5) Lacing Bars
The ends of lacing bars shall be neatly rounded unless another form is required.
(6) Fabrication of Members
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, steel plates for main members and splice plates
for flanges and main tension members, not secondary members, shall be cut and fabricated
so that the primary direction of rolling is parallel to the direction of the main tensile and/or
compressive stresses.
Fabricated members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends and open joints.
(7) Web Plates (Riveted or Bolted)
In girders having no cover plates and not to be encased in concrete, the top edges of the
web shall not extend above the backs of the flange angles and shall not be more than 3.2
mm below at any point. Any portion of the plate projection beyond the angles shall be
chipped flush with the backs of the angles. Web plates of girders having cover plates may
not be more than 12.7 mm less in width than the distance back to back of flange angles.
Splices in webs of girders without cover plates shall be sealed on top with red lead paste
prior to painting.
At web splices, the clearance between the ends of the web plates shall not exceed 9.5
mm. The clearance at the top and bottom ends of the web slice plates shall not exceed
6.3 mm.
(8) Bent Plates
Cold-bent load carrying rolled-steel plates shall conform to the following:
(a) They shall be so taken from the stock plates that the bendline will be at right angles
to thedirection of rolling, except that cold-bent ribs for orthotropic deck bridges may
be bent in the direction of rolling if permitted by the Engineer.
(b) The radius of bends shall be such that no cracking of the plate occurs. Minimum bend
radii, measured to the concave face of the metal are shown in the following table:
Minimum Bend
ASTM
Radii for thicknesst
Designation
/ mm
t. Up to 6.3 t. Over t. Over t. Over t. Over
6.3 up 12.7 up 25.4 up 38.1 up
to 12.7 to 25.4 to 38.1 to 50.08

A36 1.5t 1.5t 2t 3t 4t
A242 2t 3t 5t a a
A440 2.5t 3.5t 6t a a
A441 2t 3t 5t a a
A529 2t 2t - - -
Gr.42 2t 2t 3t 4t 5t
Gr.45 2t 2t 3t 4t -
A572 Gr.50 2.5t 2.5t 4t a -
Gr.55 3t 3t 5t a -
Gr.60 3.5t 3.5t 6t - -
Gr.65 4t 4t - - -
A588 2t 3t 5t a a
A514 b 2t 2t 2t 3t 3t
a. It is recommended that steel in this thickness range be bent hot. Hot

bendinghowever, may result in a slight decrease in the as-rolled mechanical
properties.
b. The mechanical properties of ASTM A 514 steel results from a quench-and-temper-
operation.Hot bending may adversely affect these mechanical properties. If hot
bending is necessary the fabricator should discuss the procedure with the steel
supplier.
Note: Before bending, the corners of the plate are to be rounded to a radius of 1.6 mm
throughout that portion of the plate where the bending is to occur.
(9) Fit of Stiffeners
End stiffeners of girders and stiffeners intended as supports for concentrated loads shall
have full bearing (either milled, ground or on weldable steel in compression areas of
flanges, welded as shown on the Drawings or specified) on the flanges to which they
transmit load or from which they receive load. Stiffeners not intended to support
concentrated loads shall, unless shown or specified otherwise, fit sufficiently tight to
exclude water after being painted, except that for welded flexural members, the ends of
stiffeners adjacent to the tension flange shall be cut back as shown on the Drawings. Fillers
under stiffeners shall fit within 6.3 mm at each end.
Welding will be permitted in lieu of milling or grinding if noted on the Drawings. Brackets,
clips, gussets, stiffeners, and other detail material shall not be welded to members or parts
subjected to tensile stress unless approved by the Engineer.
(10) Eyebars
Pin holes may be flame cut at least 50 mm smaller in diameter than the finished pin
diameter. All eyebars that are to be placed side by side in the structure shall be securely
fastened together in the order that they will be placed on the pin and bored at both ends
while so clamped. Eyebars shall be packed and matchmarked for shipment and erection.
All identifying marks shall be stamped with steel stencils on the edge of one head of each
member after fabrication is completed so as to be visible when the bars are nested in
place on the structure. The eyebars shall be straight and free from twists and the pin holes
shall be accurately located on the centreline of the bar. The inclination of any bar to the
plane of the truss shall not exceed 1.6 mm to 305 mm.
The edges of eyebars that lie between the transverse centrelines of their pin holes shall
be cut simultaneously with two mechanically operated torches abreast of each other,
guided by a substantial template, in such a manner as to prevent distortion of the plates.
(11) Pins and Rollers
Pins and rollers shall be accurately turned to the dimensions shown on the Drawings and
shall be straight, smooth, and free from flaws. Pins and rollers more than 228.6 mm or less
in diameter may either be forged or annealed. Pins and rollers 228.6 mm or less in diameter
may either be forged and annealed or cold finished carbon-steel shafting.
In pins larger than 228.6 mm in diameter, a hole not less than 50 mm in diameter shall be
bored full length along the axis after the forging has been allowed to cool to a temperature
below the critical range under suitable conditions to prevent injury by too rapid cooling
and before being annealed.
Pin holes shall be bored true to the specified diameter, smooth and straight, at right angles
with the axis of the member and parallel with each other unless otherwise specified. The
final surface shall be produced by a finishing cut.
The distance outside to outside of holes in tension members and inside to inside of holes
in compression members shall not vary from that specified more than 0.8 mm. Boring of
holes in built-up members shall be done after the bolting is completed.
The diameter of the pin hole shall not exceed that of the pin by more than 0.5 mm for
pins 127 mm or less in diameter, or 0.8 mm for larger pins.
Pilot nuts and two driving nuts for each size of pin shall be furnished, unless otherwise
specified.
(12) Fastener Holes for Bolts
All holes for bolts shall either be punched or drilled. Material forming parts of a member
composed of not more than five thickness of metal may be punched 0.8 mm larger than
the nominal diameter of the bolts whenever the thickness of the material is not greater
than 20 mm for structural steel, 16 mm for high-strength steel or 12.5 mm for quenched
and tempered alloy steel, unless sub-punching and reaming is required for field
connections.
When there are more than five thickness or when any of the main material is thicker than
20 mm for structural steel, 16 mm for high-strength steel, or 12.5 mm for quenched and
tempered alloy steel, all holes shall either be sub drilled or drilled full size.
When required for field connections, all holes shall either be sub punched or sub drilled
(sub drilled if thickness limitation governs) 5 mm smaller and, during assembly, reamed 0.8
mm larger or drilled full size 0.8 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the bolts.
When permitted by design criteria, enlarged or slotted holes are allowed with high-strength
bolts. For punched holes, the diameter of the die shall not exceed the diameter of the
punch by more than 0.8 mm. If any holes must be enlarged to admit the fasteners, they
shall be reamed. Holes shall be clean cut, without torn or ragged edges. Poor matching of
holes will be cause for rejection.
Reamed holes shall be cylindrical, perpendicular to the member, and not more than 0.8
mm larger than the nominal diameter of the fasteners. Where practicable, reamers shall
be directed by mechanical means. Drilled holes shall be 0.8 mm larger than the nominal
diameter of the fasteners. Burrs on the outside surface shall be removed. Poor matching
of holes will be cause for rejection. If required by the Engineer, assembled parts shall be
taken apart for removal of burrs caused by drilling. Connecting parts requiring reamed or
drilled holes shall be assembled and securely held while being reamed or drilled and shall
be match-marked before the disassembling.
Unless otherwise specified, holes for all field connection and field splices of main truss or
arch members, continuous beams, towers (each face), bents, plate girders and rigid frames
shall be sub punched (or sub drilled if sub drilling is required) and subsequently reamed
while assembled in the shop in accordance with Section 4.10.3.6.
All holes for floor-beam and stringer field connections shall be sub-punched and reamed
to a steel template while being assembled.
Reaming or drilling full size of field connection through templates shall be done after the
templates have been located with the utmost care as to position and angle and firmly
bolted in place. Templates used for the reaming of matchmarking members, or of the
opposite faces of one member, shall be exact duplicates. Templates for connections which
duplicate shall be so accurately located that like members are duplicates and require no
matchmarking.
If additional sub punching and reaming is required, it shall be specified on the Drawings or
Alternately, in lieu of sub-sized holes and reaming while assembly or drilling full sized holes
during assembly, for any field connections or splice designated above the Contractor may
drill bolt holes full size in unassembled pieces or connections or both by means of
numerically controlled (NC) drilling equipment. This option is subject to the specific
provisions contained in this sub-section. This option may be exercised also on the
manufacturing of templates for use with the matching of sub-sized and reamed holes.
If N/C drilling equipment is used and unless otherwise stated or shown on the Drawings,
the Engineer may require the Contractor, by means of check assemblies, to demonstrate
that this drilling procedure produces holes and connections which meet consistently the
requirements of this section. If evidence of satisfactory relevant Quality Assurance
documentation is provided to the Engineer then he may relax or dispense with the need
for check assemblies.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a detailed outline of the
procedures that he proposes to follow in accomplishing the work from initial drilling
through check assembly, if required, to include the specified members of the structure that
may be N/C drilled, the sizes of the holes, the location of common index and other
reference points, composition of check assemblies and all other pertinent information.
Holes drilled by N/C drilling equipment shall be drilled to appropriate size either through
individual pieces, or any combination of pieces held tightly together.
All holes punched full size, sub punched or sub drilled shall be so accurately punched
that after assembling (before any reaming is done), a cylindrical pin 3 mm smaller in
diameter than the nominal size of the punched hole may be entered perpendicular to the
face of the member, without drifting in at least 75 percent of the contiguous holes in the
same plane. If the requirement is not fulfilled, the badly punched pieces will be rejected.
If any hole will not pass a pin 5 mm smaller in diameter than the nominal size of the
punched holes, this will be cause for rejection.
When holes are reamed or drilled 85 percent of the holes in any continuous group shall,
after reaming or drilling show no offset greater than 1.0 mm between adjacent thicknesses
of metal.
All steel templates shall have hardened steel bushings in holes accurately dimensioned
from the centre lines of the connection as inscribed on the template. The centre lines shall
be used in locating accurately the template from the milled or scribed ends of the
members.
(13) Annealing and Stress Relieving
Structural members which are indicated in the Contract as being annealed or normalised
shall have finished machining, boring and straightening done subsequent to heat treatment.
Normalising and annealing (full annealing) shall be in accordance with ASTM E 44. The
temperatures shall be maintained uniformly throughout the furnace during heating and
cooling so that the temperature at no two points on the member will differ by more than
37.8oC at any one time.
Members of A514/A517 steels shall not be annealed or normalised and shall be stress
relieved only with the approval of the Engineer.
A record of each furnace charge shall identify the pieces in the charge and show the
temperatures and schedule actually used. Proper instruments including recording
pyrometers shall be provided for determining at any time the temperatures of members in
the furnace. The records of the treatment operation shall be available to and meet the
Members, such as bridge shoes, pedestals, or others which are built up by welding sections
of plate together shall be stress relieved in accordance with the provisions of Section
4.10.3.7 when required by the Drawing or Specifications governing the Contract.
(14) Tests
When full size tests of fabricated structural members or eyebars are required by the
Contract, the Drawings or Specifications will state the number and nature of the tests, the
results to be attained and the measurements of strength, deformation or other
performances that are to be made. The Contractor will provide suitable facilities, material,
supervision and labour necessary for main and recording the tests. The cost of testing,
including equipment handling, supervision labour and incidentals for making the tests shall
be included in the contract price for the fabrication or fabrication and erection of structural
steel, whichever is the applicable item in the Contract, unless otherwise specified.
4.10.3.6 Shop Assembly
(1) Fitting for Bolting
Surfaces of metal in contact shall be cleaned before assembling. The parts of a member
shall be assembled, well pinned and firmly drawn together with bolts before reaming is
commenced. Assembled pieces shall be taken apart, if necessary, for the removal of burrs
and shavings produced by the reaming operation. The member shall be free from twists,
bends and other deformation.
End connection angles and similar parts shall be carefully adjusted to correct positions and
bolted, clamped, or otherwise firmly in place until final connection is made.
Parts not completely bolted in the shop shall be properly secured insofar as practicable,
to prevent damage in shipment and handling.
(2) Shop Assembling
The field connections of main members of trusses, arches, continuous beam spans, bents,
towers (each face), plate girders and rigid frames shall be assembled in the shop with milled
ends of compression members in full bearing, and then shall have their sub-size holes
reamed to specified size while the connections are assembled. Assembly shall be "Full
Truss or Girder Assembly" unless "Progressive Truss or Girder Assembly", "Full Chord
Assembly", "Progressive Chord Assembly or "Special Complete Structure Assembly" is
specified on the Drawings.
Check Assemblies with Numerically Controlled Drilled Field Connections shall be in
accordance with the provisions of Section 4.10.3.6(3)(e).
Each assembly, including camber, alignment, accuracy of holes and fit of milled joints, shall
be approved by the Engineer before reaming is commenced or before an N/C drilled check
assembly is dismantled.
A camber diagram shall be furnished to the Engineer by the Contractor showing the camber
at each panel point in the cases of trusses or arch ribs and at the location of field splices
and fractions of span length (1/4 points minimum, 1/10 points maximum) in case of
continuous beam and girders or rigid frames. When the shop assembly is Full Truss or Girder
Assembly or Special Complete Structure Assembly, the camber diagram shall show the
camber measured in assembly. When any of the other methods of shop assembly is used,
the camber diagram shall show calculated camber.
(3) Method of assembly shall be as described below.
(a) Full or Truss or Girders Assembly shall consist of assembling all members of each
truss, arch rib, bent, tower face, continuous beam line, plate girder or rigid frame at
one time.
(b) Progressive Truss or Girder Assembly shall consist of assembling initially for each truss,
arch rib, bent, tower face, continuous beam line, plate girder, or rigid frame all
members in at least three continuous shop sections or panels but not less than the
number of panels associated with three contiguous chord lengths (i.e., length between
field splices) and not less than 45.72 m. in the case of structures longer than 45.72 m.
At least one shop section or panel or as many panels as are associated with a chord
length shall be added at the advancing end of the assembly before any member is
removed from the rear-ward end so that the assembled portion of the structure is
never less than that specified above.
(c) Full Chord Assembly shall consist of assembling with geometric angles at the joints,
the full length of each chord or each truss or open spandrel arch, or each leg of each
bent or tower, then reaming their field connection holes while the members are
assembled; and reaming the web member connections to steel templates set at
geometric (not cambered) angular relation to the chord lines. Field connection holes
in web members shall be reamed to steel templates. At least one end of each web
member shall be milled or shall be scribed normal to the longitudinal axis of the
member and the templates of both ends of the member shall be accurately located
from one of the milled ends or scribed lines.
(d) Progressive Chord Assembly shall consist of assembling contiguous chord members in
the manner specified for Full Chord Assembly, and in the number and length specified
for Progressive Truss or Girder Assembly.
(e) Check Assemblies with Numerically-Controlled Drilled Field Connections. A check
assembly shall be required for each major structural type unless otherwise designated
on the Drawings, and shall consist of at least three contiguous shop sections or, in a
truss, all members in at least three contiguous panels but not less than the number
of panels associated with three contiguous chord lengths (i.e., length between field
splices). Check assemblies should be based on the proposed order of erection, joints
in bearings, special complex points, and similar considerations. Such special points
could be the portals of skewed trusses, etc.
Use of either geometric angles (giving theoretically zero secondary stresses under
deadload conditions after erection) or cambered angles (giving theoretically zero
secondary stresses under no-load conditions) should be designated on the Drawings.
The check assemblies shall preferably be the first such sections of each major
structural type to be fabricated.
No matchmaking and no shop assemblies other than the check assemblies shall be
required.
If the check assembly fails in some specific manner to demonstrate that the required
accuracy is being obtained further check assemblies may be required by the Engineer.
The cost of all check assemblies shall be considered incidental to the cost of
manufacture and shall be included in the appropriate rates.
(4) Bolted Connections (High Tensile-Strength Bolts)
(a) Bolts
Bolt lengths shall be determined by adding griplength values given in Table 4.10-3 to
the total thickness of connected material. The values of Table 4.10-3 compensate
for manufacturer's tolerance, the use of heavy semi-finished hexagon nut and a
positive "stick-through" at the end of the bolt. For each hardened flat washer that is
used add 4 mm to the tabular value and for each bevelled washer add 8 mm. The
length determined shall be adjusted to the next longer 6.3 mm.
Table4.10-3 :Grip-Length Values

To determine required bolt
Bolt Size (mm)
length, add grip (mm)
9.5 17.5
12.7 22.2
19.0 25.4
22.2 28.6
25.4 31.7
28.6 38.1
31.7 41.3
34.9 44.4
38.1 47.6
Note: Does not include allowance for washer thickness.
(b) Bolted Parts
The slope of surfaces of bolted parts in contact with the bolt head and nut shall not
exceed 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. Bolted parts shall fit
solidly together when assembled and shall not be separated by gaskets or any other
interposed compressible material.
When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolt head, nuts or
washers, shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale, and shall also be free of burrs,
dirt and other foreign material that would prevent solid seating of the parts. Paint is
permitted unconditionally in bearing-type connections.
In friction-type connections, the Class, as defined below, indicating the condition of
the contact surfaces shall be specified on the Drawings. Where no Class is specified,
all joint surfaces shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale and shall not have a
vinyl wash.
(i) Classes A, B and C (uncoated). Contact surfaces shall be free of oil, paint,
lacquer or other coatings.
(ii) Class D (hot-dip galvanised and roughened). Contact surfaces shall be tightly
scored by wire brushing or blasting after galvanising and prior to assembly. The
wire brushing treatment shall be a light application of manual or power brushing
that marks or scores the surface but removes relatively little of the zinc coating.
The blasting treatment shall be a light "brush-off' treatment which will produce
a dull Gary appearance. However, neither treatment should be severe enough
to produce any break or discontinuity in the zinc surface.
(iii) Classes E and F (blast cleaned, zinc rich paint). Contact surfaces shall be coated
with organic or inorganic zinc rich paint as defined in the Steel Structures
Painting Council Specifications SSPC 12.00.
(iv) Classes G and H (blast-cleaned, metallised zinc or aluminium). Contact surfaces
shall be coated in accordance with AWS C2.2, Recommended Practice for
Metallising with Aluminium and Zinc for Protection of Iron and Steel, except
that subsequent sealing treatments, described in Section IV therein shall not

be used.
(v) Class I (vinyl wash). Contact surfaces shall be coated in accordance with the
provisions of the Steel Structures Painting Council Pre-treatment Specifications
SSPC PT3.
(vi) AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) Type 2 and AASHTO M 253 bolts shall not be
galvanised nor shall they be used.
(c) Installation
(i) Bolt Tension
Each fastener shall be tightened to provide, when all fasteners in the joint are
tight, at least the minimum bolt tension shown in Table 4.10-4, for the size of
fastener used.
Threaded bolts shall be tightened with properly calibrated wrenches or by the
turn-of-nut method. If required, because of bolt entering and wrench operation
clearances, tightening by either procedure may be done by turning the bolt
while the nut is prevented from rotating. Impact wrenches, if used, shall be of
adequate capacity and sufficiently supplied with air to perform the required
tightening of each bolt in approximately ten seconds.
AASHTO M253 P and galvanised AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) bolts shall not be
reused. Other AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) bolts may be reused, but not more
than once, if approved by the Engineer. Retightening previously tightened bolts
which may have been loosened by the tightening of adjacent bolts shall not
be considered as a reuse.
(ii) Washers
All fasteners shall have a hardened washer under the element (nut or bolt
head) turned in tightening in except that AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) bolts
installed by the turn of the nut method in holes which are not oversized or
slotted may have the washer omitted. Hardened washers shall be used under
both the head and nut regardless of the element turned in the case of AASHTO
M 253 bolts if the material against which it bears has specified yield strength
less than 275.76 MPa.
Table4.10-4 : Bolt Tension
Minimum Bolt Tension Kg *

AASHTO M 164 AASHTO M 253
Bolt Size
(ASTM A 325) Bolts (ASTM A 420) Bolts
12.7 5466 6758
15.9 8709 10569
19.0 12882 15821
22.2 13268 21999
25.4 23360 24312
28.6 25605 36768
31.7 32522 45858
34.9 38760 55111
38.1 47174 66905
*Note: equal to 70 percent of specified minimum tensile bolt strength.
(iii) Calibrated Wrench Tightening.
When calibrated wrenches are used to provide the bolt tension as specified
above, their setting shall be such as to induce a bolt tension 5 to 10 percent
in excess of this value. These wrenches shall be calibrated at least once each
working day by tightening, in a device capable of indicating actual bolt tension,
not less than three typical bolts of each diameter from the bolts to be installed.
Power wrenches shall be adjusted to install or cut-out at the selected tension.
If manual torque wrenches are used, the torque indication corresponding to
the calibrating tension shall be noted and used in the installation of all of the
tested lot. Nuts shall be turned in the tightening direction when torque is
measured. When using calibrated wrenches to install several bolts- in a single
joint, the wrench shall be returned to "touch-up" bolts previously tightened
which may have been loosened by the tightening of adjacent bolts, until all
are tightened to the prescribed amount.
(iv) Turn-of-Nut Tightening.
When the turn-of-nut method is used to provide the bolt tension specified in
(a) above, there shall first be enough bolts brought to a "snug tight" condition
to ensure that the parts of the joint are brought into full contact with each
other. Snug tight is defined as the tightness attained by a few impacts of an
impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench.
Following this initial operation, bolts shall be placed in any remaining holes in
the connection and brought to snug tightness.
All bolts in the joints shall then be tightened additionally by the applicable
amount of nut rotation specified in Table 4.10-5 with tightening progressing
systematically from the most rigid part of the joint to its free edges. During this
operation, there shall be no rotation of the part not turned by the wrench.
(v) Lock Pin and Collar Fasteners.

The installation of lockpin and collar fasteners shall be by methods approved
by the Engineer-.
Table4.10-5 : Nut Rotation From Snug Tight Condition1
Disposition of Outer Faces of Bolted Parts
Bolt Length measured Both faces normal One face normal to Both faces sloped
from underside of head to to bolt axis bolt axis and other not more than 1:20
extreme end of point face sloped not more from normal to bolt
than 1:20 (bevel axis (bevel washer
washer not used) not used)
Up to and including 4 0.33 turn 0.5 turn 0.66 turn
diameters
Over 4 diameters but not 0.5 turn 0.66 turn 0.625 turn
exceeding 8
Over 8 diameters but not 0.66 turn 0.83 turn 1 turn
exceeding 12 diameters2
1
Note: nut rotation is relative to bolt, regardless of the element (nut or
bolt) being turned. For bolts installed by 1/2 turn and less the
tolerance should be plus or minus 30 degrees, for bolts installed by
2/3 turn and more, the tolerance should be plus or minus 45
degrees.
2
Note: No research work has been performed by the Research Council on
Bolted Structural joints to establish the turn of nut procedure when
bolt lengths exceed 12 diameters. Therefore, the required rotation
must be determined by actual tests in a suitable tension device
simulating the actual conditions.
(d) Inspection
When the calibrated wrench method of tightening is used, the Engineer shall have full
opportunity to witness the calibration tests.
The Engineer will observe the installation and tightening of the bolts to determine
that the selected tightening procedure is properly used and will determine that all
bolts are tightened.
The following inspection shall be used unless a more extensive or different procedure
is specified.
(i) The Contractor shall use an inspecting wrench which may either be a torque
wrenchor a power wrench that can be accurately adjusted in accordance with
the requirements of Section 4.10.3.6(4)(c)(iii) above, in the presence of the
Engineer.
(ii) Three bolts of the same grade, size and condition as those under inspection
shall be placed individually in a calibration device capable of indicating bolt
tension. Length may be any length representative of bolts used in the structure.
There shall be a washer under the part turned in tightening each bolt.
(iii) When the inspecting wrench is a torque wrench, each of the three bolts
specified above shall be tightened in the calibration device by any convenient
means to the minimum tension specified for its size in Table 4.10-5. The
inspecting wrench shall then be applied to the tightened bolt and the torque
necessary to run the nut or head 5 degrees (approximately 26 mm at 300 mm
radius) in the tightening direction shall be determined. The average torque
measured in the test of three bolts shall be taken as the job inspection torque
to be used in the manner specified below.
(iv) When the inspecting wrench is a power wrench, it shall be adjusted so that it
will tighten each of the three bolts specified to a tension at least 5 but not
more than 10 percent greater than the minimum tension specified for its size
in Table 4.10-5. This setting of wrench shall be taken as the job inspecting
torque to be used in the manner specified below.
(v) Bolts, of which the three sample bolts prescribed above are representative,
which have been tightened in the structure shall be inspected by applying, in
the tightening direction, the inspecting wrench and its job inspecting torque to
10 percent of the bolts, but not less than two bolts selected at random in each
connection. If no nut or bolt head is turned by this application of the job
inspecting torque, the connection shall be accepted as properly tightened. If
any nut or bolt head is turned by the application of the job inspecting torque,
this torque shall be applied to all bolts in the connection, and all bolts whose
nut or head is turned by the job inspecting torque shall be tightened and re-
inspected, or alternatively, the fabricator or erector, at his option may retighten
all the bolts in the connection and then resubmit the connection for the
specified inspection.
4.10.3.7 Welding
Welding shall be done in accordance with the best modern practice and the applicable
requirements of American Welding Society (AWS) DI.5 except as modified by AASHTO "Standard
Specifications for Welding of Structural Steel Highway Bridges".
All welding shall be done by approved competent and experienced fully qualified welders. The
welding operator shall place his identification mark with crayon, or paint, near the welds made by
him.
In assembling and joining parts of a structure or a built up member and in welding reinforcing
parts to existing members, the procedure and sequence of welding shall be such as will avoid
distortion and minimize shrinkage stresses.
Peening to reduce residual stress of multi layer welds may be used only if authorized and ordered
by the Engineer. Care shall be exercised to prevent over peening which may cause overlapping,
scaling, flecking or excessive cold working of weld and base metal.
Welds that are to be galvanized shall be treated to remove every particle of slag.
Painting shall not be done until the welding work has been accepted as being in accordance with
the Specification. The surface to be painted shall be cleaned of spatter, rust, loose scale, oil and
dirt. Slag shall be cleaned from all welds.
On completion of the welding work, inspection shall be carried out by an Inspector appointed by
the Engineer. The size and contour of welds shall be measured with suitable gauge. The inspector
shall identify with a distinguishing mark all welds that he has inspected and accepted.
The Contractor shall remove and replace or correct as instructed, all welds found defective or
deficient. He shall also replace all methods found to produce inferior results, with methods which
will produce satisfactory work.
In the event that faulty welding or the removal for re-welding of faulty welding shall damage the
base metal, the Contractor shall remove and replace the damaged component.
4.10.3.8 Erection
(1) General
The Contractor shall provide the falsework and all tools, machinery and appliances,
including driftpins and fitting-up bolts, necessary for the expeditious handling of the work
and shall erect the steelwork, remove the temporary construction, and do all work
necessary to complete the structure as required by the Contract and in accordance with
the Drawings and these Specifications.
(2) Handling and Storing Materials
Materials to be stored shall be placed on skids above the ground. They shall be kept clean
and properly drained. Girders and beams shall be placed upright and shored. Long
members, such as columns and chords, shall be supported on skids placed near enough
together to prevent injury from deflection. The Contractor shall be responsible for the loss
of any material while in his care, or for any damage caused to it after being received by him.
(3) Falsework
The falsework shall be properly designed and substantially constructed and maintained for
the loads which will come upon it. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer
for his approval, working drawings for falsework and working drawings for changes in any
existing structure, and for maintaining traffic if necessary.
(4) Method and Equipment
Before starting the work of erection the Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully as to the
method of erection he proposes to follow, and the amount and character of equipment
he proposes to use, which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The approval
of the Engineer shall not be considered as relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for
the safety of his method or equipment or from carrying out the work in full accordance
with the Drawings and Specifications. No work shall be done until, such approval by the
Engineer has been obtained.
(5) Straightening Bent Materials
The straightening of plates, angles, other shapes and built-up members, when permitted
by the Engineer, shall be done by methods that will not produce fracture or other injury.
Distorted members shall be straightened by mechanical means or, if approved by the
Engineer, by the carefully planned and supervised application of a limited amount of
localized heat, except that. heat straightening of AASHTO M 244, ASTM A 514/A 514-M-85A
High Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate Suitable for Welding, ASTM
A 517/A 517 M-86, Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, High Strength, Quenched and
Tempered, or ASTM A 517 steel members shall be done only under rigidly controlled
procedures, each application subject to the approval of the Engineer. In no case shall the
maximum temperature of the AASHTO M 244 (ASTM A 514) or ASTM A 517 steels exceed
607.2oC, nor shall the temperature exceed 510oC within 150 mm of weld metal. In all other
steels, the temperature of the heated area shall not exceed 648.9oC (a dull red) as
controlled by temperature indicating crayons, liquids or bimetal thermometers.
Parts to be heat-straightened shall be substantially free of stress and from external forces,
except stresses resulting from mechanical means used in conjunction with the application
of heat.
Following the straightening of a bend or buckle, the surface of the metal shall be carefully
inspected for evidence of fracture.
(6) Assembling Steel
The parts shall be accurately assembled as shown on the working drawings and any
matchmarks shall be followed. The material shall he carefully handled so that no parts
will be bent, broken or otherwise damaged. Hammering which will injure or distort the
members shall not be done. Bearing surfaces and surfaces to be in permanent contact
shall be cleaned before the members are assembled. Unless erected by the cantilever
methods, truss spans shall be erected on blocking so placed as to give the trusses proper
camber. The blocking shall be left in place until the tension chord splices are fully
connected with permanent fasteners and all other truss connections pinned and erection
bolted. Splices of butt joints of compression members, that are milled to bear, and of
railing, shall not be permanently fastened until the spans have been swung, except that
such permanent fastening may be accomplished for the truss members at any time that
joint holes are fair. Splices and field connections shall have one-half of the holes filled with
erection bolts and cylindrical erection pins (half bolts and half pins) before placing
permanent fasteners. Splices and connections carrying traffic during erection shall have
three-fourths of the holes so filled, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
Fitting-up bolts shall be of the same nominal diameter as the permanent fasteners and
cylindrical erection pins will be 0.75 mm larger.
(7) Camber shall be such as to offset the deflection due to a U 20 train load so as to cause
maximum stress on the structure plus dead loads distributed along the entire length of the
main girder designed trusses.
(8) Pin Connections
Pilot and driving nuts shall be used in driving pins. They shall be furnished by the Contractor
without charge. Pins shall be so driven that the members will take full bearing on them.
Pin nuts shall be screwed up tight and the threads burred at the face of the nut with a
pointed tool.
(9) Setting Shoes and Bearings
Shoes and bearings shall not be placed on bridge seat bearing areas that are improperly
finished, deformed, or irregular. They shall be set level in exact position and shall have full
and even bearing.
The shoes and bearing plates shall be properly supported and fixed with non shrink grout.
No load shall be placed on them until the grout has set for at least 96 hours, adequate
provision being made to keep the grout well moistened during this period. The grout shall
be non shrink mortar approved by the Engineer.
The location of the anchor bolts in relation to the slotted holes in expansion shoes shall
correspond with the temperature at the time of erection. The nuts on anchor bolts at the
expansion ends shall be adjusted to permit the free movement of the span.
4.10.3.9 Surface Treatment
(1) Preparing Metal Surfaces for Painting
All surfaces of new structural steel which are to be painted shall be blast cleaned unless
otherwise specified.
The steel surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as outlined in the "Steel Structures
Painting Council" Specifications (SSPC) meeting one of the following classes of surface
preparation.
(a) SSPC - SP - 5 White Metal Blast Cleaning
(b) SSPC - SP - 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning
(c) SSPC - SP - 8 Pickling
(d) SSPC - SP - 10 Near White Blast Cleaning
Blast cleaning shall leave all surfaces with a surface equal to the Swedish Standard SIS 05
5,900 Preparation Grade or specified international equivalent.
Threaded fittings shall be protected by the use of temporary bolts or threaded rods in such
a way as to allow blast cleaning up to the edge of the hole.
Blast cleaned surfaces shall be primed or treated within three hours of blast cleaning. The
blast cleaned steelwork shall be cleaned free from dust and adherent particles and any
other contaminants to the approval of the Engineer. If cleaned surfaces rust or are
contaminated with foreign material before painting is accomplished, they shall be re-
cleaned by the Contractor at his expense.
Welded areas which have not been blast cleaned shall be neutralised with a proper
chemical after which they shall be thoroughly rinsed with water.
When paint systems No. 1 or 3 are specified, the steel surfaces shall be blast cleaned in
accordance with SSPC-SP-10. When paint systems No. 2, 4 or 5 are specified, the steel
surfaces shall be blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP-6.
(2) System of Paint
The paint system to be applied shall consist of one of the systems set forth in Table 4.10-
6 and described in Table 4.10-7 and as modified with the approval of the Engineer.
All structural steel shall be painted by one of the following systems.
The required system or choice of systems will be shown in the Contract.
System 4 is intended for use in mild climates or to repaint existing structures where the
other systems are not compatible.
Table4.10-6 :Paint System

Paint System
Location
1 2 3 4 5
High Pollution or Coastal Area X X X
Mild Climate X X
Note:
1. Paint systems shown for severe areas are satisfactory in less severe areas.
2. High pollution and coastal means areas within 300 m of the ocean or tidal water, or in
an environment with high pollution such as industrial areas.
3. Mild means areas other than coastal areas not in air pollution environment.
(3) Painting Metal Surfaces
(a) Time of Application
The prime coat of paint or pretreatment when specified, shall be applied as soon as
possible after the surface has been cleaned and before deterioration of the surface
occurs. Any oil, grease, soil, dust or foreign matter deposited on the surface after the
surface preparation is completed shall be removed prior to painting. In the event the
rusting occurs after completion of the surface preparation, the surfaces shall be
cleaned again.
Particular care shall be taken to prevent the contamination of cleaned surfaces with
salts, acids, alkali, or other corrosive chemicals before the prime coat is applied and
between applications of the remaining coats of paint. Such contaminants shall be
removed from the surface. Under these circumstances, the pretreatments or, in the
absence of a pretreatment, the prime coat of paint shall be applied immediately after
the surface has been cleaned.
(b) Storage of Paint and Thinner
All paint and thinner should be stored in a locked separate building or room that is
well ventilated and free from excessive heat, sparks, flame or the direct rays of the
sun.
All containers which have been opened shall be used first.
Paint which has livered, gelled, or otherwise deteriorated during storage shall not be
used. Thixotropic materials which may be stirred to attain normal consistency are
satisfactory.
Table4.10-7 : Paint Systems

oating Specification Min. Dry Film Thickness*
System 1 - Vinyl Paint System
Washer Primer 708.03 (b) 12.7
Intermediate coat 708.03 (b) 38.1 - 50.8
3rd Coat 708.03 (b) 38.1 - 50.8
4th Coat 708.03 (b) 38.1 - 50.8
Finish Coat 708.03 (b) 38.1 - 50.8
Total thickness 165.1 - 215.9
System 2 - Epoxy-polymide System *
Prime Coat 708.03(c) 50.8 - 76.2
Intermediate Coat 708.03(c) 50.8 - 76.2
3rd Coat 708.03(c) 50.8 - 76.2
Finish Coat 708.03 (C 38.1 - 50.8
System 3 - Inorganic Zinc Rich Coating System
Prime Coat 708.03 (d) 88.9 - 127
Wash Primer Tie Coat 708.03 (d) 40.8 - 76.2
Finish Coat 708.03 (d) 38.1 - 50.8
Total thickness 167.8 - 254
Alternate System
Prime Coat 708.03 (d) 88.9 - 127
Wash Primer Tie Coat 708.03 (d) 12.7
Finish Coat 708.03 (d) 38.1 - 50.8
Total thickness 139.7 -190.5
System 4 - Alkyd Oil - Basic Lead Chromate System
Prime Coat 708.03 (e) 38.1 - 50.8
Intermediate Coat 708.03 (e) 38.1 - 50.8
Finish Coat 708.03 (e) 38.1 - 50.8
System 5 - Organic Zinc Rich Paint System
Prime Coat 708.03 (f) 38.1 - 50.8
Intermediate Coat 708.03 (f) 50.8 - 63.5
Wash Primer Tie Coat 708.03 (f) 12.7
Finish Coat 708.03 (f) 38.1 - 50.8
* Dimensions in microns
** The third coat may be eliminated in mild climates and this system may be specified
as four coats for new structural steel in a mild climate, with minimum thickness of
152.4 micron.
(c) Mixing and Thinning
All ingredients in any container of paint shall be thoroughly mixed before use and
shall be agitated often enough during application to keep the pigment in suspension.
Paint mixed in the original container shall not be transferred until all settled pigment
is incorporated into the vehicle. This does not imply that part of the vehicle cannot
be poured off temporarily to simplify the mixing.
Mixing shall be by mechanical methods, except that hand mixing will be permitted
for containers up to 19 litres in size.
Mixing in open containers shall be done in a well ventilated area away from sparks or
flames.
Paint shall not be mixed or kept in suspension by means of an air stream bubbling
under the paint surface.
When a skin has formed in the container, the skin shall be cut loose from the sides of
the container, removed, and discarded. If such skins are thick enough to have a
practical effect on the composition and quality of the paint, the paint shall not be
used.
The paint shall be mixed in a manner which will insure breaking up of all lumps,
complete dispersion of settled pigment, and a uniform composition. If mixing is done
by hand, most of the vehicle shall be poured off into a clean container. The pigment
in the paint shall be lifted from the bottom of the container with a broad, flat paddle,
lumps shall be broken up, and the pigment thoroughly mixed with the vehicle. The
poured off vehicle shall be returned to the paint with simultaneous stirring, or pouring
repeatedly from one container to another until composition is uniform. The bottom
of the container shall be inspected for unmixed pigment. Tinting pastes or colours
shall be wetted with a small amount of thinner, vehicle, or paint and thoroughly
mixed. The thinned mixture shall be added to the large container of paint and mixed
until the colour is uniform.
Paint which does not have a limited pot life, or does not deteriorate on standing, may
be mixed at any time before using, but if settling has occurred, it must be remixed
immediately before using. Paint shall not remain in spray pots, painter's buckets, etc.,
overnight, but shall be gathered into a container and remixed before use.
No thinner shall be added to the paint unless necessary for proper application. In no
case shall more than 0.5 litres of thinner be added per 3.8 litres unless the paint is
intentionally formulated for greater thinning.
The type of thinner shall comply with the paint specification and the manufacturer's
recommendation.
When the use of thinner is permissible, thinner shall be added to paint during the
mixing process. Painters shall not add thinner to paint after it has been thinned to the
correct consistency.
All thinning shall be done under supervision of one acquainted with the correct
amount and type of thinner to be added to the paint.
(4) Application of Paint

(a) General
The oldest of each kind of paint shall be used first. Paint shall be applied by brushing
or spraying or a combination of these methods. Daubers or sheepskin may be used
when no other method is practicable for proper application in places of difficult
access. Dipping, roller coating, or flow coating shall be used only when specifically
authorized. All paints shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Open seam at contact surfaces of built up members which would retain moisture shall
be caulked with red lead paste, or other approved material, before the second
undercoat of paint is applied. Paint shall not be applied to steel at a temperature
over 51.7oC unless the paint is specifically formulated for application at the proposed
temperature, nor shall paint be applied to steel which is at a temperature that will
cause blistering or porosity or otherwise will be detrimental to the life of the paint.
Paint shall not be applied when it is raining or when the relative humidity exceeds 85
percent. Paint shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces.
When paint must be applied in damp or cold weather, the steel shall be painted
under cover, or protected, or sheltered or the surrounding air and steel heated to a
satisfactory temperature. In all such cases, the above temperature and humidity
conditions shall be met. Such steel shall remain under cover or be protected until
dry or until weather conditions permit its exposure.
Any applied paint exposed to excess humidity, rain, or condensation shall first be
permitted to dry. The damaged areas of paint shall be removed, the surface again
prepared and then repainted with the same number of coats of paint of the same
kind as the undamaged areas.
If stripe painting is required or if the Contractor chooses to do so at his option, all
edges, corners, crevices, rivets, bolts, weld and sharp edges shall be painted with the
priming paint by brush before the steel receives first full prime coat of paint. Such
striping shall extend for at least 25 mm from the edge. When practicable, this stripe
coat shall be permitted to dry before the prime coat is applied, otherwise the stripe
coat shall set to touch before the full prime coat is applied. However, the stripe coat
shall not be permitted to dry for a period long enough to allow rusting of the
unprimed steel. When desired, the stripe coat may be applied after a complete prime
coat.
To the maximum extent practicable, each coat of paint shall be applied as continuous
film of uniform thickness free of pores. Any thin spots or areas missed in the
application shall be repainted and permitted to dry before the next coat of paint is
applied. Film thickness is included in the description of paint system. Each coat of
paint shall be in a proper state of cure or dryness before application of the succeeding
coat.
At bolted connections clearance at holes must be maintained and runs through holes
avoided. Temporary bolts shall be fitted in any threaded fittings and removed before
the coating has set. After final tightening the externally exposed surfaces of bolts, nuts
and washers shall be cleaned, degreased and carefully painted by brush with the
approved primer, and matching paint system as applied to the surrounding area.
In the case of surfaces joined by HSFG bolts the paintwork shall be stopped off at a
distance of 80 mm from the joint. All interfaces shall be cleaned by hand wire brushing
before assembly. After jointing, all exposed faces shall be made good to the same
specification as for the surrounding area.
(b) Brush Application
Paint shall be worked into all crevices and corners where possible and surfaces not
accessible to brushes shall be painted by spray, daubers, or sheepskins. All runs or
rags shall be brushed out. There shall be a minimum of brush marks left in the applied
paint.
(c) Spray Application of Paint
The equipment used for spray application of paint shall be suitable for the intended
purpose, shall be capable of properly atomising the paint to be applied and shall be
equipped with suitable pressure regulators and gauges. The air caps, nozzles, and
needles shall be those recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment and for
the material being sprayed. The equipment shall be kept in satisfactory condition to
permit proper paint application.
In closed or re-circulating paint spray system, where gas under pressure is used over
the liquid, the gas shall be an inert one such as nitrogen. Traps or separators shall be
provided to remove oil and water from the compressed air. These traps or separators
shall be of adequate size and shall be drained periodically during operations. The air
from the spray gun impinging against the surface shall show no water or oil.
Paint ingredients shall be kept properly mixed in the spray pots or containers during
paint applications either by continuous mechanical agitation or by intermittent
agitation as frequently as necessary.
The pressure on the material in the pot and of the air at the guns shall be adjusted
for optimum spraying effectiveness. The pressure on the material in the pot shall be
adjusted when necessary for changes in elevation of the gun above the pot. The
atomising air pressure at the gun shall be high enough to atomise the paint properly
but not so high as to cause excessive fogging of paint, excessive evaporation of solvent
or loss by overspray.
Spray equipment shall be kept sufficiently clear so that dirt, dried paint and other
foreign material are not deposited in the paint film. Any solvents left in the equipment
shall be completely removed before applying paint to the surface being painted.
Paint shall be applied in uniform layer, with overlapping at the edge of the spray
pattern. The spray shall be adjusted so that the paint is deposited uniformly. During
application, the gun shall be held perpendicular to the surface and at a distance which
will ensure that a wet layer of paint is deposited on the surface. The trigger of the gun
should be released at the end of each stroke.
All runs and sags shall be brushed out immediately or the paint shall be removed and
the surface repainted. Spray application of prime coats shall in all cases be
immediately followed by brushing.
Areas inaccessible to the spray gun shall be painted by brush, if not accessible by
brush, daubers or sheepskins shall be used. Brushes shall be used to work paint into
cracks, crevices and blind spots where not adequately painted by spray.
(d) Shop Painting
Shop painting shall be done after fabrication and before any damage to the surface
occurs from weather or other exposure. Shop contact surfaces shall not be painted
unless specified.
Surfaces not to be in contact but which will be inaccessible after assemblyshall
receive the full paint system specified or three shop coats of the specified paint before
assembly.
The areas of steel surfaces to be in contact with concrete shall not be painted, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings The areas of steel surfaces to be in contact with
wood shall receive either the full paint coats specified or three shop coats of the
specified primer.
If paint would be harmful to a welding operator or would be detrimental to the
welding operation or the finished welds, the steel shall not be painted within a
suitable distance from the edges to be welded. Welding through inorganic zinc paint
systems will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer and only after a
thorough documented hazard analysis has identified precautions and been submitted
to the Engineer.
Any weld spatter coatings shall be removed before painting. Weld slag and flux shall
be removed by methods at least as effective as those specified for the cleaning.
Machine-finished or similar surfaces that are not to be painted, but do not require
protections, shall be protected with a coating of rust inhibitive petroleum, or other
coating which may be more suitable, for special conditions.
Erection marks and weight marks shall be copied on areas that have been previously
painted with the shop coat.
(e) Field Painting
Steel structures shall be painted as soon as practicable after erection. Metal which
has been shop coated shall be touched-up with the same type of paints as the shop
coat. This touch-up shall include cleaning and painting of field connections, welds,
rivets and all damaged or defective paint and rusted areas. The Contractor may, at his
option, apply an overall coat of primer in place of touch-up spot painting.
Surfaces (other than contact surfaces) which are accessible before erection but which
will not be accessible after erection shall receive all field coats of paint before
erection.
If possible the final coat of paint shall not be applied until all concrete work is finished.
If concreting or other operations damage any paint, the surfaces shall be cleaned and
repainted. All cement or concrete spatter and dripping shall be removed before any
paint is applied.
Wet paint shall be protected against damage from dust or other detrimental foreign
matter to the extent practicable.
(f) Drying of Painted Metal

The maximum practicable time shall be allowed to dry before recoating or exposure.
No drier shall be added to paint on the job unless specifically called for in the
Specifications for the paint. No painted metal shall be subjected to immersion before
the paint is dried through. Paint shall be protected from rain, and condensation until
dry, to the fullest extent practicable.
(g) Handling of Painted Steel
Painted steel shall not be handled until the paint has dried, except for necessary
handling in turning for painting or stacking for drying.
Paint which is damaged in handling shall be scraped off and touched up with the
same number of coats and kinds of paint as were previously applied to the steel.
Painted steel shall not be loaded for shipment or shipped until it is dry.
Precautions shall be taken to minimise damage to paint films resulting from stacking
members.
(5) Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Paints
(a) Instrumentation
Dry paint film thickness shall be measured using Pull-Off (Type 1) or Fixed Probe Type
2) Magnetic Gauges.Type 1 gauges include Tinsley, Elcometer, Minitector, General
Electric, Verimeter and Accuderm models.
(b) Calibration
(i) Type 1 (Pull-Off) Magnetic Gauges
Measure the coating thickness on a series of reliable standards covering the
expected range of paint thickness. Record the calibration correction either plus
(+) or minus (-) required at each standard thickness. To guard against gauge drift
during use, re-check occasionally with one or more of the standards.
When the gauge adjustment has drifted so far that large corrections are needed,
it is advisable to re-adjust closer to the standard values and recalibrate.
For Type 2 gauges, the preferred basic standards are small, chrome plated steel
panels.
Plastic shims of certified thickness in the appropriate ranges may also be used
to calibrate the gauges. The gauge is held firmly enough to press the shim tightly
against the steel surface. Record the calibration correction as above.
(ii) Type 2 (Fixed Probe) Magnetic Gauges
Shims of plastic or non-magnetic metals laid on the appropriate steel base (at
least 76.2 x 76.2 x 3.2 mm) are suitable working standards. These gauges are
held firmly enough to press the shim tightly against the steel surface. One
should avoid excessive pressure that might indent the plastic or, on a blast
cleaned surface, might impress the steel peaks into the undersurface of the
plastic.
(c) Measurement Procedures
To determine the effect of the substrate condition on the gauge readings, access is
required to some unpainted areas.
Repeated gauge readings, even at points close together, may differ considerably due
to small surface irregularities. Three gauge readings should therefore be made for each
spot measurement of either the substrate or the paint. Move the probe a short
distance for each new gauge reading. Discard any unusually high or low gauge reading
that cannot be repeated consistently. Take the average of the three gauge readings as
the spot measurement.
(i) Measurement with Type 1 (Pull-Out) Gauge
Measure (A), the bare substrate, at a number of spots to obtain a representative
average value. Measure (B), the dry paint film, at the specified number of spots.
Correct the (A) and (B) gauge readings or averages as determined by calibration
of the gauge. Subtract the corrected readings (A) from (B) to obtain the thickness
of the paint above the peaks of the surface.
(ii) Measurement with Type 2 (Fixed Probe) Gauge
Place a standard shim of the expected paint thickness on the base substrate
that is to be painted. Adjust the gauge in place on the shim so that it indicates
the known thickness of the shim. Confirm the gauge setting by measuring the
shim at several other areas of the bare substrate. Re-adjust the gauge as needed
to obtain an average setting representative of the substrate.
With the gauge adjustment as above, measure the dry paint film at three points.
The gauge readings indicate the paint film thickness at the three points. and
indicate the point thickness above the peaks of the surface profile.
Re-check the gauge setting at frequent intervals during series of measurements.
Make five separate spot measurements spaced evenly over each section of the
structure 9.29 square metres in area, or of other area as may be specified. The
average of five spot measurements for each such section shall not be less than
the specified thickness. No single spot measurement (average of three readings)
in any section shall be less than 80% of the specified thickness.
Since paint thickness is usually specified (or implied) as a minimum, greater
thickness that does not causes defects of appearance or functions such as mud
cracking, wrinkling, etc., is permitted unless otherwise specified.
(6) Special Notes
All of the above devices, if properly adjusted and in good condition, are inherently accurate
to within +15% of the true thickness of the coating.
Much larger, external errors may be caused by variations in method of use of the gauges
or by uneveness of the surface of the substrate or of the coating. Also, any other film
present on the steel (rust or mill scale or even a blast cleaned profile zone) will add to
the apparent thickness of the applied paint film.
The surface of the paint and the probe of the gauge must be free from dust, grease and
other foreign matter in order to obtain close contact of the probe with the paint and also
to avoid adhesion of the magnet. The accuracy of the measurement will be affected if the
coating is tacky or excessively soft.
The magnetic gauges are sensitive to geometrical discontinuities of the steel, as at hole
corners or edges. The sensitivity to edge effects and discontinuities varies from gauge to
gauge. Measurements closer than 25.4 mm from the discontinuity may not be valid unless
the gauge is calibrated specifically for that location.
Magnetic gauge readings also may be affected by proximity to another mass of steel close
to the body of the gauge, by surface curvature and presence of other magnetic fields.
All of the magnets or probes must be held perpendicular to the painted surface to produce
valid measurements.
4.10.3.10 Clean-Up
Upon completion and before final acceptance, the Contractor shall remove all falsework, and
falsework piling down to at least 1.0 m below the finished ground line, excavated or unused
materials, rubbish and temporary buildings. He shall replace or renew any fences damaged and
restore in an acceptable manner to all property, both public and private which may have been
damaged during the prosecution of the work and shall leave the work site and adjacent railway
in a neat and presentable condition, satisfactory to the Engineer. All excavated material or
falsework placed in stream channels during construction shall be removed by the Contractor
before final acceptance.
4.11 BRIDGE RAILINGS

4.11.1 DESCRIPTION
4.11.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the furnishing fabrication and erection of pipe, aluminium and concrete
railings for bridges and incidental structures, all as indicated on the drawings and required by these
specifications.
4.11.1.2 Working Drawings
The Contractor shall furnish for the approval of the Engineer working drawings for the particular
type of railing to be installed.
4.11.1.3 Storage and Handling
Pipe, railing, fittings and incidental parts shall be carefully handled and stored on blocking, rack
or platforms so not to be in contact with the ground and shall be protected from corrosion.
Materials shall be kept free from dirt, oil, grease and other foreign matter.
Surfaces to be painted shall be carefully protected both in the shop and in the field.
Threads shall be carefully protected from injury.
4.11.2 PRODUCTS
4.11.2.1 Materials
(1) Pipe Railing
(a) Wrought Iron Pipe: Shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A72 Standard weight.
(b) Malleable Castings: Shall conform to ASTM Designation A47, Grade No. 35018.
(c) Mortar and grout shall conform with SECTION 4.3: CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
(d) Galvanising: All pipe railing and fitting shall unless otherwise specified be galvanised
inaccordance with Specification AASHTO M111 or ASTM Al23.
(e) Painting: Where painting is required, the number of coats and the type of paint will be
as specified on the drawings.
(2) Aluminium Railing

(a) Aluminium alloy pipe (6061-T6) shall conform to ASTM Specification B241, Alloy GS-
11A, Condition T6.
(b) Aluminium alloy castings shall conform to ASTM Specification B108, Alloy SG 70A,
Condition T6, except for rail caps. As an alternative rail caps may conform to ASTM
Specification B26, Alloy SG70A, Condition 16. All posts have an 80 grit finish on all
exterior surfaces. All castings exhibiting shrinkage cracks will be unacceptable.
(c) Aluminium alloy shims (1100 - 0) shall be made from sheet or plate conforming to
ASTM Specification B209, alloy 990A, Condition 0.
(d) Anchor bolts, nuts and washers for attaching railing post castings to concrete shall be
aluminium alloy or structural steel as shown on the drawings. If steel is used, it shall
be given as heavy a coating of galvanising as practical or may be non-corrosive metal
as required on the drawings, special provisions or as approved by the Engineer.
(3) Concrete Railing
(a) Concrete shall conform to the provisions of Section 4.3: CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
(b) Reinforcement Steel shall conform to the requirement of Section 4.2: REINFORCEMENT.
4.11.2.2 Connections
(1) The components parts of pipe railings shall be connected with screw threads unless
otherwise specified on thedrawings.
(a) Rails and posts shall be connected with bends, tees and crosses.
(b) Fillings for railings on slopes shall be levelled to fit the required grades.
(c) Screw thread fittings shall be coated with red lead and oil, and the threads engaged
for a minimum 20 mm.
Expansion shall be provided by omitting treads on one side of fittings at designated
posts.
Where rails are continuous through two or more posts threads may be omitted
between the rails and the fittings, but the rails must be pinned at each post.
(d) Individual rail sections shall be connected with screw thread couplings between posts,
and couplings shall be staggered where two or more strings are required.
(e) Where welding is allowed, the details must be in accordance with the drawings or as
(2) The connections between the posts or rails and the structure shall be as the followings.
(a) Where railings are to be connected to steel or metal structures, the castings and the
fittingsshall be bolted rigidly to the structure in accordance with the detailed drawings.
(b) For connecting railings to concrete the posts shall be set in approved sockets or
sleeves, unless otherwise specified.
The posts shall be fixed in these holes with grout as shown on the drawings.
Posts by means of flanges, plates or castings which in turn shall be fastened to the
concrete by bolts cast in or anchored in drilled holes.
4.11.3 EXECUTION
4.11.3.1 Erection
(1) The Contractor shall provide for the erection of pipe railing by suitable fabrication in the
shop.
Where railing is fitted between concrete posts, provision shall be made to allow the
installation of same.
(2) Where aluminium alloy comes into contact with concrete or other metals, except non-
corrosive anchor bolts, washers and nuts, the contacting surface shall be thoroughly coated
with an approved caulking compound or shall be separated by an approved insulating shim
as indicated on the drawings.
Omission of this detail from the drawings will not be considered as permission to omit the
approved coating, or approved shims from the work.
Cast aluminium alloy caps with setscrews shall be furnished and installed on all exposed
open ends of rails.
(3) Railings shall be fabricated and erected as indicated on the drawings, and rails shall
beparallel to the grade of the railway or road.
Posts shall be perpendicular to the parapet and rails.
(4) All exposed surfaces shall be constructed to the line and grade shown on the drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, all railing posts shall be plumb.
Railings shall not be placed on a structure until centring or falsework has been removed
and the Engineer approves the railing to be installed.
(5) All concrete shall be cast in smooth forms.
Repair of damaged or irregular surfaces resulting in discolouring will not be allowed.
(6) The railing must not show any visible deviations, horizontally or vertically, from the
correctposition.
4.12 REVETMENTS
4.12.1 DESCRIPTION
4.12.1.1 Scope
(1) The furnishing and placement of riprap or concrete blocks for bank and surface protection.
(2) Work Includes: protection of earth slopes around bridge abutments, drainage
outfallprotection, culvert inlets and outlets, stream bed protection, drain gutters ditch
protection and checks and concrete cut-off walls.
(1) Determination of acceptability of riprap gradation shall be made by visual inspection prior
tocommencement of placing.
(2) The Contractor shall dump individual loads on a designated flat surface and sort and
measurethe individual rocks in the load.
4.12.2 PRODUCTS
4.12.2.1 Materials
(1) Loose Riprap
(a) Stone shall be hard, durable, angular in shape, resistant to weathering and to water
action.
(b) Gradation requirements shall comply with Table 4.12-1
(c) Neither breadth nor thickness of a single stone should be less than one-third its length.
Rounded stone or boulders shall not be acceptable.
(d) Minimum weight of stone shall be 1200 kg/cu. metre.
4.12.2.2 Mortared Riprap
(1) Stone shall be hard, durable, angular in shape, resistant to weathering and to water action.
(2) Stone shall be free of fines that prevent penetration of mortar.
(3) Shall generally be Class 2 of Table 4.12-1
4.12.2.3 Concrete blocks
(1) Base Blocks for underwater laying: Shall be 250 mm cube Class C concrete unreinforced.
(2) Paving Blocks for exposed work: Shall be interlocking design 150 mm thick, concrete Class
B.
4.12.2.4 Mortar
(1) Bedding mortar: 1:6 Cement: Sand by weight
(2) Grouting mortar: 1:2 Cement sand mix by weight with air entraining agent. Shall be of a thick
creamy consistency but with minimum amount of water to reduce shrinkage.
(3) Materials shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.3: CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
4.12.2.5 Concrete
(1) Concrete for cut-off walls shall be as described in the Drawings, and shall comply with the
requirements of Section 4.3: CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
4.12.2.6 Weep pipes
(1) Shall be unplasticised PVC to conform to TIS 17 Class 8.5, and be a nominal 50 mm diameter.
4.12.3 EXECUTION
4.12.3.1 Preparation
(1) Concrete cut-off walls shall be formed and cast before any work of placing riprap
commences.
(2) Slopes shall be free of brush, debris and other objectionable material and shall be dressed
to a smooth surface.
(3) All soft or spongy material shall be removed to the depth as directed by the Engineer and
replaced with Suitable Material.
(4) Filled areas shall be compacted with approved compaction equipment.
4.12.3.2 Loose Riprap
(1) Stone for loose riprap shall be placed by methods that will produce a compact uniform
blanket of riprap protection having a reasonably smooth surface along the riprap water face.
(2) Riprap shall be placed to its full course thickness in one operation and in a manner to
prevent displacing the underlying material.
(3) Placing of riprap by end dumping on the slope or by other methods likely to cause
segregation or damage to the slope will not be permitted.
(4) Hand placing or re-arrangement of individual stones by mechanical equipment may be
required to the extent necessary to secure the results specified.
4.12.3.3 Mortared Riprap

(1) Stones shall be placed on the prepared slopes substantially to the dimensions shown in
the Drawings.
(2) A layer of bedding mortar 60 mm thick shall be spread over the slope, and the stones
bedded in the mortar.
(3) Stones shall be thoroughly moistened and any excess of fines shall be sluiced off before
mortaring.
(4) The mortar may be placed by any means that will ensure uniformity and prevent
segregation of the mortar.
When the placement is by gravity flow the mortar shall be rodded or spaded into the
interstices to completely fill the voids.
Pressure mortaring shall not unseat the stones and after placing by this method, the mortar
shall be rodded or spaded into any remaining voids.
(5) Weep holes shall be provided through the riprap as shown in the Drawings or as directed
by the Engineer.
(6) Expansion joints 20 mm wide and sealed with hot bitumen shall be formed at 5.0 m
centres.
4.12.3.4 Concrete Blocks
(1) Base Blocks
(a) Base blocks for riprap shall be used below water level, and set approximately to the
requiredprofile with no more than 10 mm spacing between blocks, the blocks will be
placed in a regular pattern.
(b) Riprap shall not be placed over the blocks until the whole area has been inspected
and accepted by the Engineer.
(2) Paving blocks
(a) The surface of the slope shall be covered by a 75 mm layer of bedding mortar
commencing at the toe of the slope.
(b) Chipped, cracked or damaged blocks will not be used.
(c) The blocks shall be laid at least 5 mm apart and shall be grouted up with mortar.
(d) The slope shall be regular and no block may deviate more than 5 mm from a straight
edge with contact points 1,000 mm apart.
Table 4.12-1 :Stone forRiprap

Weight Equivalent Percentage total
CLASS 1
7.0 170 100
5.0 150 80
2.5 120 50
0.2 50 10*
CLASS 2
22.0 250 100
13.0 230 80
5.0 160 50
0.4 75 10*
CLASS 3
66.0 380 100
44.0 330 80
20.0 250 50
2.2 125 10*
* Not to exceed 10%. Material shall consist of spans and rock fragments.
END OF SECTION 4
การรถไฟแห่งประเทศไทย
โครงการก่อสร้างทางรถไฟ สายเด่นชัย-เชียงราย-เชียงของ
สัญญาที่ 2 ช่วงงาว-เชียงราย
เอกสารประกวดราคาจ้าง
ด้วยวิธีประกวดราคาอิเล็กทรอนิกส์ (e-bidding)
เล่ม III (ข้อกําหนดรายการจําเพาะด้านเทคนิค)
บริษัท เอ็ม เอ เอ คอนซัลแตนท์ จํากัด

Tender Documents Section 5: Building Works
Table of Contents
Page
SECTION 5: BUILDING WORKS 5-3
5.1 BUILDING WORKS 5-3
5.2 ARCHITECTURAL WORK 5-22
5.3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 5-245
5.4 PLUMBING SYSTEM 5-354
5.5 MECHANICAL VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 5-410
5.6 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 5-469
5.7 ELEVATOR & ESCALATORS 5-518
SECTION 6: PIPE AND DRAINAGES 6-1

6.1 REINFORCED CONCRETE CULVERTS 6-1
6.2 DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE 6-6
6.3 PIPE DRAINS 6-9
6.4 MISCELLANEOUS DRAIN STRUCTURES 6-11
6.5 EARTH DITCH EXCAVATION 6-12
SECTION 7: UTILITIES 7-1

7.1 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 7-1
7.2 HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE 7-6
7.3 CONCRETE POLE 7-8
7.4 HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT 7-10
7.5 TRANSFORMER 7-13
7.6 ROAD AND YARD LIGHTING 7-24
7.7 COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPING WORK 7-35
7.8 DEEP WELL AND ELEVATED TANK 7-39
Contract: 1 Den Chai - Ngao Section 1

SECTION 5
BUILDING WORKS
Contract: 2 Ngao-Chiang Rai Section 5-2
5.1 : BUILDING WORKS

5.1.1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5.1.1.1: SUMMARY OF WORK
PART I: DESCRIPTION (This part is not applicaple.)
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Definition
Wording (noun and pronoun) in the contract, drawings, specifications, and other attached
documents, have a meaning as indicated in this section except indicated otherwise in
further details in the contract.
Owner The project Owner who signs the contract, or the representative
who gets appointed from the project Owner.
Supervisor The representative who gets appointed from the project Owner to
control the construction work.
Architect/Engineer Architect/Engineer who designs the project.
Contractor Person or juristic person who signs the contract with Owner
including the appointed representative, Subcontractor, employees,
workers, and labors in responsibility of Contractor in execution of
a contract.
Construction All works indicated in the contract, drawings, specifications, and
other attached documents to the contract.
Drawing All drawings that attached to the contract, and the drawings that
have changed, revised, or added further details later in accordance
with the contract.
Specification This document, indicated the detail and information of drawing,
material quality control, techniques and strategies involved with
construction that indicated or not indicated on the drawings.
Approval Written approval from the authorized person as indicated in the
specifications.
Appointment Written appointment to operate activities indicated in this
document.
Contract All documents that are parts of construction contract such as
- Construction contract
- Tender document (if any)
- Specifications
- Drawings or additional drawings
- Bill of quantity (BOQ)
- Other documents (if any)
1.1.2 Scope
Owner by State Railway of Thailand aims to build the buildings of “ Track Doubling
Project: Den Chai – Chiang Rai – Chiang Khong Section” , the main structure is
reinforced concrete as recommended in the design and in the specifications. The main
objectives are all construction work meets the construction standard, has construction
quality, has strength, stability and durability, and is ready to use when construction works
Contract : 3 Chiang Rai-Chiang Khong Section 5-3
complete. The building is constructed with neatly, finely, and beautifully construction
skill. In addition, the building construction is lawful according to the related laws and
regulations, and also correctness to the engineering and architectural principles.
1.1.3 General Regulation
All Contractor, Subcontractor, and Owner's personnel who work in this construction
project shall follow the Section 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, in the involved area as
indicated in this specifications. If some statements conflict with the contract or the other
attached documents, the parts which are resulting in better work quality shall be used.
The approval from Owner and Architect/Engineer is the final decision.
1.1.4 Scope of Work and Construction Cost
Construction work according to the drawings and the specifications has a scope of work
and the construction cost in these details except the contract indicates otherwise.
1.1.4.1 Construction site preparation and setting out to be ready to start the
construction work.
1.1.4.2 [ Demolition and removal of the existing building, relocation of the existing
construction to Owner's specified place, cutting down or relocation of trees,
removal of utility systems, and removal or fill the soil.]
1.1.4.3 Cost for worker's accommodation, water closet- toilet, temporary entrance,
temporary fence, cleaning, and removal construction waste from the site
during the whole construction period.
1.1.4.4 Construction cost for office with durable furniture and communication device
of Owner and Supervisors.
1.1.4.5 Free for temporary electricity meter and temporary water meter, [ ground
water drill] [ electric generator] , water bill, electricity bill, and bill of any
communication systems during the whole construction period including the
cost to join the existing utility systems and the new utility systems for the
building as soon as the construction process is completed
1.1.4.6 Material and equipment cost, labor cost tool and machine cost, transportation
cost, and over time cost.
1.1.4.7 Coordinating cost with other parties or the government sectors.
1.1.4.8 Cost for operating the construction work, security and protection cost to
prevent the damage to persons and property both inside and outside of the
construction area, including the cost for all temporary facilities.
1.1.4.9 Cost for documents such as shop drawing, as- built drawing, approval
document, and report.
1.1.4.10 Material testing cost and mock up cost as indicated on the drawings and in
the specifications.
1.1.4.11 Insurance for the damage to person and property.
1.1.4.12 Profit.
1.1.4.13 Tax according to the regulation.
1.1.4.14 Landscape architecture
1.1.4.15 Signage
1.1.4.16 Furniture
1.1.5 The Items not Included in the Construction Cost
1.1.5.1 The work indicated in other details or in the contract according to the purpose
of Owner.
1.1.6 Tender Document Inspection and Construction Site
1.1.6.1 Contractor shall study tender document carefully. The tender document
consist of the letter of bidding invitation, condition to bid, drawings,
specifications, contract draft, etc. Bidder shall visit and survey the
construction site existing context, entrance and access, utility systems, etc.
Bidder shall study the design and all details for clearly understanding. If
there is any obstacle or problem in the construction site and in the tender
document, Contractor shall not claim for additional expense from Owner.
1.1.6.2 For tender document explanation, Owner will specify date, time, place, and
responsible person as indicated in the details in tender document.
1.1.6.3 For explanation and suggestion about the drawings and the specifications
including conditions and agreements that Owner or Owner's representative
informs in tender, bargain, and before making a contract, a memorandum
shall be made and used as parts of the contract.
1.1.7 Drawings and Specifications Explanation and Suggestion
1.1.7.1 Before starting any parts of the construction work, Contractor shall check
the drawings, specifications including all attached documents, and
understand them thoroughly. If there is any doubt or problem, Contractor
shall send written query to Owner’s representative or Supervisor.
1.1.7.2 During the construction process, Contractor must not work without drawings
and specifications. Contractor shall take responsibilities to all of the
construction work executed by Contractor's representative or Subcontractor,
or Contractor's workers without Supervisor approval.
1.1.8 Priority in Drawing
1.1.8.1 Drawings.
1.1.8.2 The number of distance and length.
1.1.8.3 Alphabets or letters appear in the drawings.
1.1.8.4 Detail drawings, shop drawings, or further detail drawings. When in doubt,
Contractor shall inform Supervisor for approval before construction.
1.1.9 Priority of Contract
The priority is regarded as the followings unless the contract indicated otherwise.
1.1.9.1 Contract that Owner and Contractor signed with witnesses.
1.1.9.2 Specifications.
1.1.9.3 Drawings.
1.1.9.4 Details about construction cost, accepted by Owner and Contractor.
1.1.9.5 Further agreement between Owner and Contractor (if any).
1.1.9.6 The correction orders from Owner's representative according to the contract
that Contractor shall follow.
1.1.10 Change, Addition, or Reduction of Construction Work
1.1.10.1 Owner has a right to change, add, or reduce the work in the drawings or the
specifications according to the contract by the written agreement about cost,
and construction period that is extended or reduced from the contract. The
principle of cost estimation are the followings.
1.1.10.1.1 Cost estimation by unit according to the BOQ in the contract.
1.1.10.1.2 If the changed item unit cost is not available in the BOQ, fair cost
estimation according to the market price in the time shall be
used.
1.1.10.1.3 [ If the reduced work reduce the total cost from the contract,
material cost and labor cost shall be reduced, handling charge
and profit cost shall be the same.]
1.1.10.2 If Contractor see that the drawings or any order from Owner or Owner's
representative apart from the drawings and the specifications in accordance
to the contract would need additional cost, Contractor shall send written
report to Owner. Owner will make an agreement about added and reduced
working cost, and construction period before adding or reducing the work
except that work is in the responsible by Contractor according to the
contract or that work is on the process of critical work schedule. Contractor
shall finish construction work following to the schedule, and the added-
reduced work that Owner approved. Contractor can claim for the added-
reduced cost, but cannot request to extend the time for completion except
that added-reduced work are approved to be delayed from the critical work
schedule as the judgment from Supervisor and Architect.
1.1.11 Authority of Supervisor
1.1.11.1 Inspect and control the construction work as indicated on the drawings and
in the specifications, and all attached documents for supporting the
construction work.
1.1.11.2 Suspend the construction, if the drawings, the specifications, and the details
in contract are conflict, or expect that the construction work according to
the contract would not result in stable and strong construction, or would
not follow to the standards or the principles of engineering and architecture.
Supervisor shall send written inquiry to Architect and Owner to review the
issues immediately.
1.1.11.3 Make a daily log of Contractor's work activities, events in the construction
site, problems and obstacles in construction work and weather to evaluate
Contractor's outcome work.
1.1.11.4 Supervisor has no authority to exempt any responsibility of Contractor
according to the contract. Supervisor has no authority to add or reduce
construction cost or change the design or details without approval from
Architect/Engineer and Owner.
END
5.1.1.2 : SECURITY PROCEDURES
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Protection the Nearby Land from Trespassing
Contractor shall limit the construction boundary and strictly prevent labors to trespass nearby
lands. Contractor shall pay for expense and compensations including repairing to good
condition if there is any damage from any execution of labors in case that labors trespass the
nearby lands.
1.1.2 Prevention from the Outsiders and Protection for the Nearby Buildings
Contractor shall prevent an outsider or people who are not permitted from Supervisor access
construction area both daytime and nighttime during the construction period. Contractor shall
strictly follow this section. At the end of working hour each day, Contractor's representative
shall patrol to make sure that no one is in the building except security guard or over time
worker who is permitted to work. Contractor shall install an equipment to prevent falling
materials that can pose a danger to life, or can damage property and nearby building. The
equipment shall not block public pathway. Contractor shall pay for the equipment installation,
required permission, and maintenance fee during the whole construction period including
demolition cost after completion.
1.1.3 Protection for Existing Building
1.1.3.1 The Nearby Building
Contractor shall protect the nearby building from any damage during
construction process. If damage occurs, Contractor shall be responsible to fix or
repair the damage to the former condition as soon as possible. In case Supervisor
considers that the protection or the repairing by Contractor do not meet the
standard or do not safe, Supervisor may ask Contractor to fix it as appropriate.
1.1.3.2 Underground Structure
Contractor shall explore underground structure, for example potable pipe, drain
water pipe, telephone cable, etc. in the construction area or the neighbor area
thoroughly. Contractor shall treat underground structure carefully and keep them
in good condition during the whole construction period. If there is any damage,
Contractor shall responsible to fix and repair the structure to the former condition
immediately. In case the underground structure obstructs the construction work
and need to be removed or relocated, Contractor shall seek permission from
involved parties. Contractor shall responsible for all execution, management and
other involved expense.
1.1.4 Construction Work Protection and Fire Protection
1.1.4.1 Construction Work Protection
Contractor shall responsible for protecting construction work including materials
and equipment installed or kept in the construction area from the beginning of
construction work until Owner accepts the final work. If applicable, Contractor
shall provide protections such as shelter, scratch protection, installing a pump to
protect flooding, and other protections approved by Supervisor including
preventing materials and equipment from missing. Contractor may restrict people
who access to or leave from the construction area and the building during the
construction period.
1.1.4.2 Fire Protection
Contractor shall provide efficient and enough fire extinguishers at every floor of
the building including in the temporary office, material storage, and other places
as necessary. Strictly protect fuel and inflammable material storage using clear
warning sign, and prohibit fire or materials that can set fire close to the
inflammable material storage. Prohibit smoking or fire ignition in the under
construction building.
1.1.4.3 Responsibility
Contractor shall take responsibility for all expenses to maintain, protect, and
preserve the construction works including take responsibility for any damage and
loss that may occur to materials, equipment, or construction work until Owner
accept the last term of closeout procedures.
1.1.5 Trouble and Annoyance Prevention
For any construction work and execution from labors that might pose trouble and annoyance
to neighbor, Supervisor may request Contractor to execute construction work with appropriate
methods and time period or request Contractor to find the way to prevent possible trouble
and annoyance. Contractor shall respond immediately.
1.1.6 Safety Equipment for Work
Contractor shall maintain clean, tidy, no harmful object that affects to labor's health and life
and good environment construction area. Contractor shall provide clear warning signs in the
area that tend to be dangerous or has high risk for accident and shall provide various safety
equipment such as helmets, safety belts, fences or guard rails to prevent labors from falling.
Supervisor may request Contractor to improve or fix sign and equipment as appropriate.
Contractor shall manage safety issue strictly and follow the related laws and regulations during
the whole construction period.
1.1.7 First Aid and Life Saving Equipment
Contractor shall provide sufficient medicine and medical supplies for first aid, and the required
life-saving equipment as appropriate during the whole construction period.
1.1.8 Insurance
Contractor shall provide insurance to every person involved or indirectly involved with the
construction according to the regulations. Contractor shall provide appropriate insurance
coverage according to the construction cost for property damage in the construction area and
nearby area including the damage from natural disaster and other accidents as indicated in the
contract or the regulation during whole construction period, with approval from Supervisor
and Owner.
1.1.9 Accident Report
If accident occurs in the construction area no matter it affects the construction work or not,
Contractor's representative shall report that accident to the Supervisor immediately, and write
a report indicated the details of the accident, the solution, and the prevention.
END
5.1.1.3 : REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Standard Institute
The standards that specified on the drawings and in the specifications for references or quality
comparison, or material and construction equipment testing, processes, materials and
equipment installation instructions for construction works, If not indicated otherwise, shall be
from the following institutes.
1.1.1.1 TIS Thai Industrial Standards Institute, Ministry of Industry,
Thailand (Thai Industrial Standards: TIS)
1.1.1.2 EIT Engineering Institute of Thailand Under H.M. the King's Patronage (EIT Standards)
1.1.1.3 AASHTO American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials
1.1.1.4 ACI American Concrete Institute
1.1.1.5 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
1.1.1.6 ANSI American National Standards Institute
1.1.1.7 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
1.1.1.8 AWS American Welding Society
1.1.1.9 BSI British Standards Institution (BS Standards)
1.1.1.10 DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung
1.1.1.11 IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
1.1.1.12 JSA Japanese Standards Association (JIS Standards)
1.1.1.13 NFPA National Fire Protection Association
1.1.1.14 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
1.1.1.15 UL Underwriter Laboratories Inc.
1.1.1.16 VDE Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik and Informationstechnik
1.1.2 Testing Institute
In case material required testing, it shall be tested in following institutes.
1.1.2.1 Faculty of Engineering, Chulalongkorn University (CU)
1.1.2.2 Faculty of Engineering, Kasetsart University (KU)
1.1.2.3 Asian Institute of Technology (AIT)
1.1.2.4 Department of Science Service, Ministry of Science and Technology, Thailand
1.1.2.5 King Mongkut's University of Technology Thonburi (KMUTT)
1.1.2.6 King Mongkut's Institute of Technology Ladkrabang (KMITL)
1.1.2.7 Other approved institutes by Owner and Architect/Enigineer
END
5.1.1.4 : QUALITY CONTROL

1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Contract
Contractor shall make a copy of contracts, construction drawings, specifications, and all related
documents from the master copy attached to the contract, and keep a copy at the
construction site. The copy shall be kept in good condition and made available at all time.
Contractor shall make another copy of all documents for Supervisor.
1.1.2 Error or Incomplete
1.1.2.1 Contractor shall report any error or incomplete in any parts of the drawings and the
specifications to Supervisor for correction immediately. The decision from
Architect/Engineer is final.
1.1.2.2 Any part indicated on the drawings but not in the specifications, or indicated in the
specifications but not on drawings, is regarded as it is indicated in both places. If it
is not indicated in both places, Contractor shall follow to the decision from
Architect/ Engineer considering durability, strength, or conforming to the standards
and principles of engineering and architecture. Contractor shall not claim for any
additional cost, or extend the time for completion.

1.1.3 Planning, Alignment, Length, and Level
1.1.3.1 Contractor shall use dimension for construction indicated on the drawings. Measuring
the dimension directly from the drawings may cause an error. If there is any question
about dimension that might not conform to related regulations such as building
code, city planning law, or environmental law, Contractor shall ask Supervisor for
approval before execution the construction part. If necessary, Supervisor shall ask
Architect/Engineer for confirmation.
1.1.3.2 Contractor is responsible to check if land boundary marks are conformed to the title
deed before setting the building layout, columns alignment, leveling, sizing and
dimensioning as indicated on the drawings. Contractor shall provide modern tools
and equipment, and skilled labors specialized in planning and leveling including
maintaining referencing marks in good conditions and at the correct positions during
the whole construction period.
1.1.4 Action Plan, Responsibility, and Report
1.1.4.1 Action Plan
Contractor shall prepare action plan in bar chart format, and work schedule format
presenting time period and the order of work execution. The action plan shall
present cooperation schedule with Subcontractors and other Owner's Contractors.
The action plan must contain the followings;
1.1.4.1.1 The beginning date and the completion date of each construction work,
this information shall present in detail by weekly, monthly, and in the
master schedule.
1.1.4.1.2 Plan for the submission date of shop drawing, and the delivery schedule
of materials and equipment for approval.
1.1.4.1.3 Plan for the procurement date and the delivery date to the construction
site for all materials and equipment used in construction by Contractor,
Subcontractors, and other workers.
1.1.4.1.4 Plan for the total number of staffs, technicians in each work, Contractor's
labors, Subcontractors, and other Contractors.
1.1.4.1.5 Data Collection for Planning the Action Plan
For planning the action plan, Contractor is the person who collects all requirement
data from Subcontractors and other workers for planning and coordinate concisely
as much as possible. Supervisor may request Contractor to modify some parts of the
action plan to increase suitability and efficiency.
1.1.4.2 Request for Master Schedule Approval
Master schedule and details shall be sent for approval to Supervisor within [15] days
after the date of signed contract. Contractor or the appointed representative shall
sign the name indicated the approval of the master schedule. With representative
signature, Contractor shall not be exempt from responsibility to keep up with the
schedule.
1.1.4.3 Actual Work Logging, and Comparison with the Action Plan
Contractor shall present the action plan clearly for all parties in the construction
department, and Contractor shall log actual work activities and compare them with
the action plan. This log aims to assist the verification and evaluation of execution
process. Logging shall be done every week from the beginning of work until
completion.
1.1.4.4 Responsibility
If some parts of work need Subcontractors and other Contractors, Contractor shall
prepare work related to others and follow up Subcontractors and other Contractors’
progress regularly. In case Contractor find that the construction does not follow the
action plan, Contractor shall inform Supervisor by written letter immediately. If
Contractor ignores to follow up the construction result, Contractor shall be the
responsible person to fix any damage that may happens except the damaged work
is responsible by other Owner's Contractors.
1.1.4.5 Action Plan Adjustment
If Supervisor decide to adjust the action plan to increase appropriateness and
effectiveness in construction work execution, Contractor shall provide the new
action plan and work schedule to Supervisor for approval immediately.
1.1.4.6 Report
To verify the construction work and follow up with the construction progress,
Contractor shall send the following documents to Supervisor as an evidence of
Contractor's work.
1.1.4.6.1 List of labors, tools, and equipment for construction work in each day,
separated according to type of works. .
1.1.4.6.2 Copy of all invoices sent to the construction site in each day. The
invoice should identify quantity, kind, type, manufacturer, dealer,
sender, receiver, etc.
1.1.4.6.3 Monthly action plan and actual work progress compared to weekly action plan.
1.1.4.6.4 Weekly progress report, with problems and obstacles from construction
work.
1.1.4.6.5 Photos of construction work present the result of construction progress
in every part of the building, every [15] days.
1.1.4.6.6 Others as requested from Owner, Architect/Engineer, and Supervisor.
1.1.5 Coordination between Contractor, Subcontractors, and Other Owner's Contractors
1.1.5.1 Providing Facilities
Contractor shall prepare in advance to provide various support facilities for
Subcontractors and other Contractors. Contractor shall give permission to
Subcontractors and other Contractors to use available facilities such as scaffold,
stairs, dispatch pulley, service elevator, crane, etc. Contractor shall plan and
coordinate the utilization of these equipment to prevent usage schedule conflict.
Charge with fair and appropriate rate.
1.1.5.2 Contact and Coordination for Construction Work
Contractor shall verify that Subcontractors and other Contractors’ construction work
would not delay the action plan. Contractor shall responsible and provide
coordination and meeting between Contractor, Subcontractors, and other
Contractors by setting up detailed schedule to present work plan and instruction to
maintain clearly and harmoniously in every part for completion of construction work
as indicated in the contract.
1.1.5.3 Site Meeting
1.1.5.3.1 Site meeting shall be arranged regularly during the construction period.
Contractor shall invite Owner's representative or Project Manager of the
Owner, and involved parties to join every meeting. Project Manager from
Supervisor party will be the chair of the meeting, and Supervisor is the person
who keeps meeting minutes. Contractor shall follow the agreement from the
meeting as indicated in the meeting minutes. The meeting minutes shall be
presented to the Owner for approval before the next meeting. Contractor
may send request to Supervisor to correct the meeting minutes and also make
a memorandum about the discussion in the meeting minutes.
1.1.5.3.2 The meeting shall be arranged during the construction period at least
once a week. Supervisor may call for additional meeting or postpone a
meeting depending on circumstances and necessity.
1.1.6 Shop Drawing

1.1.6.1 Contractor shall carefully verify the construction work with drawings and
specifications in every process. In case the drawings are not clear, Contractor shall
prepare detail drawings or shop drawings of that part and present to Supervisor for
approval before execution.
1.1.6.2 Contractor shall prepare list and plan to submit shop drawings for approval in
advance with enough time period for consideration, and send shop drawings by
order of the construction process. Delay in shop drawings preparation by Contractor
resulted in insufficient verification time could not be used as a reason to extend
construction time.
1.1.6.3 The approval of shop drawings by Supervisor does not exempt Contractor from
responsibility in any construction part. Contractor shall responsible to rectify
construction work conflicted with the contract without additional charge or time.
1.1.7 Sample of Finishing, and Surface Preparation for Finishing
1.1.7.1 Contractor shall provide finishing samples such as mock up panel or mock up room
according to the order from representative or Architect. Samples such as tiled floor,
stone, wood, painting wall, tiled wall, wall paper, gypsum board, lath, switch, plug,
lamp, etc. shall be able to represent actual color or actual installation pattern.
Acceptable installation skill leading to architectural beauty shall be shown and set
as standards for inspection when construction work complete.
1.1.7.2 Area with future finishing shall be dropped and prepared according to future finishing
materials requirement. The surface preparation shall be done neatly by skilled labor.
In case Architect decide that the surface preparation is incorrect and order Contractor
to rectify it, Contractor shall rework until it is correct. Contractor shall not claim for
additional cost and construction time. For the finishing materials not specified clearly
in the construction drawing, Contractor shall inform Supervisor by written document
requesting for the details about installation process, size, type, and color of finishing
materials from Architect. It is Contractor's duty to plan and coordinate for surface
preparation that fit to the future material installation.
1.1.8 Contractor's Representative, Skilled Craftsman, and Responsibility
1.1.8.1 Contractor shall appoint fully authorized representative or project manager who is
competent, experienced, and fit with the project, stationed at the site at all time.
Any order that Supervisor send to Contractor's representative, according to the

contract, is counted as the direct order to Contractor. Owner can reserve the right
to change Contractor's representative if the representative is not fit to the project.
1.1.8.2 Contractor shall provide experienced Architect/Engineer, and skilled labor to work
with the construction project. Supervisor may request Contractor to change the labor
who is offended, or incompetent, or not fit to the project. Contractor shall replace
the new suitable labor to work immediately.
1.1.8.3 Contractor is considered competent, skillful, and professional in this construction
project. Architect and Engineer shall closely monitor construction process. Any
approval of materials, equipment, or construction work from representative and
Architect/Engineer, does not exempt Contractor from responsibility. Any defects or
mistake of the construction work shall be rectified by Contractor according to the
contract. Contractor cannot claim for additional cost and working time for
completion.
1.1.8.4 Contractor shall appoint Architect and/or Engineer to sign the construction
document as construction Supervisor according to the building regulation, in the
building construction permit for this construction project.
1.1.9 Facility for Construction Work Inspection
Contractor or Contractor's representative, Architect/Engineer, and Supervisor have authority to
inspect the construction work at all time during the whole construction period. Contractor
shall prepare temporary facilities such as stairs, walkway, lighting, etc. which are stable and
safe, or according to the order from Supervisor.
1.1.10 Suspension of Work
For any construction parts which conflict with construction drawings or under quality standard,
or do not meet engineering and architectural principles, Supervisor has authority to suspension
some parts of the work or all of the work until Contractor fix that part completely according
to the approval from Architect/Engineer. Contractor could not claim for additional cost and
time for completion.
END
5.1.1.5 : TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Facilities
1.1.1.1 Material and Equipment Storage: Contractor shall build storage to keep and protect
materials and equipment for construction work from damage. Storage size shall be
appropriate and sufficient for the requirement. Contractor is not allowed to keep
the material and equipment which are not used for construction work in this storage.
1.1.1.2 Temporary Office: Contractor shall build the temporary office for a working place for
Contractor, Owner's representative, and/or Supervisor. This temporary office
comprises office area, meeting room, sample material storage room, water closet,
toilet, and necessary office furniture such as working desks, chairs, drawing table, file
cabinet, telephone, fax, etc.
1.1.1.3 Labor Accommodation: Contractor shall build labors’ accommodation, water closet,
toilet, and needed utilities. This accommodation shall be secure, maintained in good
sanitary and have waste disposed regularly. Contractor or labors are not permitted
to build shop or restaurant in the Owner's land except it is approved from Owner. If
the labor’s accommodation is not sufficient or not permitted to build, Contractor
shall find the place for labor accommodation.] Contractor shall find labor’s
accommodation outside the construction area, and is not allowed to build labor’s
accommodation in Owner's land except it is approved from Owner.]
1.1.1.4 Meeting Room: Contractor shall build a meeting room in the temporary office. The
meeting room size shall be sufficient for arranging a meeting in construction sector.
Tables, chairs, whiteboard with stationery and writing materials, and other necessary
equipment shall be available in this room.
1.1.1.5 Construction Sign: Contractor shall provide the sign which shows the name of the
construction project, size not less than [1.20x2.40] m, in front of the construction
site with appropriate lighting. The details in the sign shall be correct and complete
according to the regulation. This sign shall be strong and durable during the whole
1.1.1.6 Detail Drawing and Layout of Temporary Building: Contractor shall provide detail
drawing which presents the layout of temporary building to Supervisor for approval,
and start constructing the temporary building as soon as the approval is granted. If
the temporary road is required, it should be specified in the same layout and position
of the actual road according to construction drawing. The priority and position of
temporary building shall be organized and related to the construction work including
efficient traffic systems inside and outside of the construction area which do not
block the construction work and public traffic outside the construction area.
1.1.1.7 Machine, Tool, and Equipment for Construction: Contractor shall provide and install
a strong, durable, and lawful scaffold according to the regulations of scaffold for
construction work [install service elevator, material hoist, or tower crane] follow to
safety standard of the Engineering Institute of Thailand and related laws. Installation,
removal, and demolition shall get approval from Supervisor before execution.
1.1.1.8 Maintenance: Contractor shall provide permanent labor to clean the temporary
building, and permanent mechanic to maintain and repair machine and tools in safe
and good condition during the whole construction period.
1.1.1.9 Cost All cost for facilities, permission requesting process, cleaning, facility
maintenance, including demolition and cleaning after the completion of
construction are Contractor's responsibility.
1.1.2 Temporary Fence and Security Guard
Contractor shall provide temporary fence around the construction site according to the
boundary line indicated on the drawing, and shall verify the mark indicated in the title deed
correctly. The temporary fence shall be built from timber frame or steel frame, covered by
[galvanized steel sheet or color coated steel sheet [green]], height not less than [2.4] m from
ground level, strong and durable, has a gate, has a guardhouse. Provide security guards to
control the access at all time. Provide falling materials protection for the side that adjacent to
the public place and nearby building. Contractor shall strictly maintain falling object protection
in good condition at all time. Contractor shall responsible for cost of installation, requesting
for permission, fee, maintenance cost, demolish cost, and security cost.
1.1.3 Road, Parking Area, and Temporary Walk Way
1.1.3.1 Road and Temporary Parking Area During the construction period, Contractor shall
provide entrance to the construction site and temporary [asphalt or concrete]
parking area which can support vehicle load without damaging to drainage water
system, or blocking public transportation and public waterway. Contractor shall
maintain this entrance in good condition during the whole construction period. When
the construction is completed, Contractor shall repair it back to good condition.
1.1.3.2 Temporary Walk Way Contractor shall provide temporary walk way and temporary
stair as requested and according to the construction process for accessing necessary
areas of the construction site. The walk way and stair shall be secure and safe and
demolished at the end of use. Contractor shall repair the defect part of construction
completely. All expense are Contractor responsibility.
1.1.4 Footpath Cut and Drain Water Pipe Connection
Curtain construction activities, for example, public footpath cut for construction site entrance
or connecting site drainage to the public drainage system, may need permissions from related
authorities. Contractor shall request all required permissions at Contractor's expense.
1.1.5 Electricity for Construction Work
1.1.5.1 Temporary Electricity Systems Contractor shall provide temporary electricity system
for construction work from the beginning of construction until completion.
Contractor shall responsible for all expense including permission requesting to install
temporary electricity systems from the Electricity Authority, cost of equipment,
electricity bill, maintenance cost, demolition cost, and the working part of
Subcontractor and other Owner's Contractor. Subcontractor and other Contractors
shall pay electricity bill and equipment for the part that they use only.
1.1.5.2 Temporary Electricity System Safety Contractor shall provide materials, equipment,
and install temporary electricity system for construction work in safety manner. Short
circuit protection system and electric supply cut off system when the accident
happens shall be provided according to regulations of the Electricity Authority and
related laws.
1.1.5.3 Power of Temporary Electricity Contractor shall responsible to provide sufficient
temporary electricity power for use in construction work from the beginning until
completion including all electricity testing before the final term of closeout
procedures. Supervisor may order Contractor to fix and increase suitable electric
power at Contractor's expense.
1.1.6 Potable Water for Construction Work
Contractor shall provide potable water for construction work from the beginning until
completion including water system testing and all sanitary systems before the final term of
closeout procedures. Contractor shall pay the permission fee to install temporary potable
water system from the Waterworks Authority including cost of equipment, water bill,
maintenance cost, demolition cost, and the working part of Subcontractor and other Owner's
Contractor. Subcontractor and other Contractors shall pay water bill and equipment for the
part that they use only.
1.1.7 Cleaning and Environment
Contractor shall follow ["BMA Notice: Regulation and requirement criteria in building
construction and utility" signed on 23th September 1996, and related laws] Contractor shall
not make any annoyance to the neighbor. [Construction outside Bangkok is required to follow
this BMA Notice.]
1.1.7.1 Contractor shall provide water treatment and waste water drainage systems which
are hygienic and follow related laws including drain water systems from construction
and rain. Prevent trapped water or smell in the construction site and nearby area.
1.1.7.2 Contractor shall regularly remove waste, construction waste, and the leftover object
that are dirty or obstruct the construction activities from the construction area every
day. Contractor shall strictly keep construction area safe, clean, and tidiness during
the whole construction period. Before the final term of closeout procedures,
construction area and building shall be cleaned thoroughly.
1.1.8 Management for Safety, Occupational Health, and Working Environment
Contractor shall execute administration and management for safety, occupational health, and
working environment as indicated in [“Ministerial Regulations of the Standard in Administration
and Management in Safety, Occupational Health, and Environment in Construction Work B.E.
2551 and the related laws].
END
5.1.1.6 : PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Scope of Work
Contractor shall provide good quality products, skilled labors, quality control systems, modern
effective tools and machines for various construction works as indicated on the drawings and
in the specifications.
1.1.2 Preparation
1.1.2.1 Contractor shall provide products indicated on the drawings and in the specifications,
or not indicated but required as element of construction process to increase
construction efficiency and quality according to the principles of engineering and
architecture.
1.1.2.2 Products in the construction work shall be approved from Supervisor before
procurement, and dispatch in time for construction according to the work schedule.
1.1.2.3 Products from foreign countries or products with long production time shall be
ordered in advance and be made available in time to use according to the work
schedule.
1.1.2.4 Any disapproval products is not permitted in the construction area.
1.1.3 Quality
All products in the construction work shall be new, of good quality, without defect or damage,
and conform to the construction drawings and specification, or as approval.
1.1.4 Inspection and Quality Testing
1.1.4.1 Contractor shall manage to get inspection and required certification for all products
that will be used in construction work before the product is dispatched from the
manufacture. Contractor shall present certificated documents and testing results to
Supervisor for approval.
1.1.4.2 If the regulations require product testing, Contractor shall have certification body as
indicated tested the products. In the testing, Contractor shall inform Supervisor in
advance in order that Supervisor can attend the testing. If Owner sends a letter to
permit the representative of inspection company or manufacturer to access the
construction area for inspection or testing at the construction area, Contractor shall
facilitate the representatives.
1.1.5 Sample Product Presentation
1.1.5.1 Contractor shall present all samples of products as indicated on the drawings and
in the specifications for approval. Contractor shall prepare work plan that presents
the period of time to dispatch sample of products in advance with enough period
of time for consideration before procurement and install product according to the
order in the work plan.
1.1.5.2 All products shall be approved from Supervisor before installation. After approval,
Contractor shall procure products without delay. If Contractor install product
without approval, Contractor shall replace the installed product with the approved
product immediately as requested from Supervisor. Contractor cannot extend the
time for completion or charge for any additional cost. The approval products are in
Contractor's responsibility for correction in case product quality and/or installation
quality does not meet the manufacturer's standard, or principles of engineering and
architecture.
1.1.5.3 After product approval, Contractor shall procure products without delay. Owner
shall be able to verify the procurement order at any time.
1.1.6 Substitutions
1.1.6.1 Architect/Engineer shall consider a request for substitutions only within [90] days
after the construction contract signed date.
1.1.6.2 Architect/Engineer can confirm to use the product as indicated on the drawings or
in the specification if Contractor do not have enough reason to request for
substitutions.
1.1.6.3 If "or equivalent" is specified, the specified product shall be used unless the products
are not available, the substitute with equivalent quality and specifications could be
permitted. Delayed work schedule or late product ordering are not acceptable
reasons for substitutions.
1.1.6.4 Contractor shall send the details of products, certificate and testing result, price,
warranty that can confirm product quality, standard, and other requirements from
Architect for approval. Apart from function, Architect could consider product beauty,
strength, and safety. The decision from Architect is regarded as the final conclusion.
Architect reserves the right to approve substitutions that have better quality or higher
price from the specified value.
1.1.6.5 Contractor shall take responsibility to the consequences of the substitutions.
1.1.6.6 Contractor shall not claim for additional cost or additional time because of
substitutions.
1.1.6.7 Contractor shall provide substitutions considering time that might lead to redesigning
or additional required permissions from involved government sectors. Contractor
could not extend construction completion time because of the substitutions.
PART II: PRODUCT

1. Materials
1.1 Provide other materials not specifically described on the drawing but required for a complete and
proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect and/ or
Engineer.
1.2 All proprietary materials shall be of submit for approved make and the types as stipulated. Local
materials shall be major consideration. However foreign material may be consideration as they
support the design intent for the submission and a list of submittal materials for approval shall be
provided. It will be deemed that the Contractor has priced the respective items on the basis of those
approvals. However, it shall be the prerogative of the Engineer and/ or Architect to choose any
particular make among the list as the most appropriate one and the Contractor shall be bound to
provide the same without any variation in the Contract rate. The guarantees for various architectural
finishes shall be stipulated under Construction Specification of this Contract.
END
5.1.1.7 : CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Closeout Procedures
1.1.1.1 Closeout procedures of each construction phase shall follow to the term of work
and payment indicated in the contract. Owner has the right to withhold the payment
for the following reasons.
1.1.1.1.1 Quantity of work or construction cost does not conform to details
indicated in term of work, or condition in the contract.
1.1.1.1.2 Quality of work and skill of work does not meet the standards or the
principles of engineering and architecture.
1.1.1.2 The evidences that Contractor shall provide with each term of closeout procedure.
1.1.1.2.1 Certificate of inspection, term of work approval and terms of payment
from Supervisor.
1.1.1.2.2 Details of withdraw money in each term of work, and terms of payment
according to the contract with the table summarizing the details of
previous withdraw money, total money to withdraw for the current
term, balance, and addition/reduction of work (if any).
1.1.1.2.3 Additional documents such as layout, floor plan, elevation, section, and
photos to present construction result in the current term.
1.1.1.2.4 Any testing result of the current term, work plan, etc. according to the
request from Supervisor and Owner.
1.1.2 Final Term of Closeout Procedures
1.1.2.1 Process
1.1.2.1.1 Contractor shall inform Supervisor by written document for substantial
completion at least 30 days before the completion date according to
the contract.
1.1.2.1.2 Supervisor shall prepare the punch list, verifying, and testing according
to the list until completion. The certificate of substantial completion

and list of defect work shall be made. Supervisor shall inform Contractor
to fix the defect. Contractor shall fix the defect to the completion within
time period indicated in the contract.
1.1.2.1.3 When Supervisor verify the final completion work, Supervisor shall
inform Owner and Architect/ Engineer to inspect the final term of
closeout procedure together.
1.1.2.1.4 Owner reserves the right to reject the work in case Supervisor states that
some parts of construction work required defects fixing in the period of
time indicated in the contract. If that period of time is overdue from the
contract, Contractor shall pay fines.
1.1.3 Transfer for Materials, Equipment, and Documents
1.1.3.1 Every key of the building shall be provided in 3 sets with the master key [ and the
grand master key] . Owner shall specify the system of master key by written
document before procurement. When transferring, keys shall be kept in the
standardized steel cabinet, and systematically separated to sets.
1.1.3.2 User manuals and maintenance manuals for the main equipment of each system
from the manufacturer, and installation manual as indicated by Architect/ Engineer
shall be provided in standardized hard cover book format for 3 sets per system. Each
system shall be organized to sections in this example.
Section 1: System operation
Section 2 : Main equipment
Section 3 : Water pipe, valve, etc.
Section 4 : Other equipment
Section 5 : Electrical system and involved machines.
1.1.3.3 Contractor shall provide specialists or experts from the manufacturer producing main
equipment of each system to train and advice Contractor's staff about system
operation, maintenance, etc. as indicated in the manuals until staffs understand the
systems operation.
1.1.3.4 Contractor shall transfer all equipment and spare parts which come with the
equipment, or as indicated in the contract, to Owner.
1.1.3.5 As- built drawings shall be organized into book format, and separated for each
system. As- built drawings consist of master copy in natural tracing paper for 1 set,
copy ( blue print) for 5 sets, and the details of drawings in digital files with DWG
format and PDF format, and saved in CD for 1 set.
1.1.3.6 As- built drawings shall be provided in the same scale and the same size as the
drawings in the contract. As-built drawings present the length of material installation
on the wall, floor, or under the ground correctly according to the actual construction,
and clearly shows the construction parts that changed, or added reduce from the contract.
1.1.3.7 Written warranty certificate indicate warranty period from the manufacturer or
installer for all products according to the contract with the list of name, address,
and telephone number to contact.
1.1.3.8 List of all products used in the construction work with the company name, address,
telephone number, and contact person for convenience in case of maintenance or
additional procurement.
1.1.3.9 Contractor shall prepare finishing products including equipment for maintenance the
building systems with the quantity as indicated in the contract or as necessity,
Contractor shall transfer the product and equipment with the final term of closeout
procedure.
1.1.4 System Testing
Contractor shall be responsible to pay all the system testing cost such as water bill for testing
and cleaning the pipe systems, electricity bill for operation testing of any equipment and
machines, lighting and lamp testing, and payment for other testing. To show that the systems
operate correctly and completely as indicated in the contract and ready to use as soon as the
closeout procedure finish, Contractor shall provide temporary water and temporary electricity.
Contractor shall test the electricity systems and all machine systems at the same time for at
least 24 hours to test capacity of all systems before closeout procedure.
1.1.5 Contractor shall repair any area around the construction site which are damaged
from construction work until completion before the final term of closeout procedure.
1.1.6 Contractor shall clean the building. Contractor shall fill the ground surface completely. Any
scrap and construction materials including temporary buildings shall be removed from the site
within 7 days after the date that Owner accept the final closeout procedure.
1.1.7 Warranty
1.1.7.1 In [ 365] days or as indicated in the contract after the date that Supervisor issue a
document approving the final term of closeout procedure, if there is any defect in
the building because of mistake, indiscretion, or neglect from Contractor during the
construction process, Contractor shall fix the defect to a complete condition or a
good condition as soon as Contractor receive the report from the Owner, and
Contractor cannot claim for any additional cost.
1.1.7.2 Owner reserves the right to hire other parties to repair or fix the defect of work if
Contractor does not repair or fix the defect of work in the appropriate period of time.
Contractor shall be responsible for all expenses, or Owner can deduct money from
Contractor's guarantee fund.
1.1.7.3 [At the date that the Owner pay for the last term of payment, Contractor shall bring
the guarantee fund from the commercial bank, the value is 5% of construction cost
according to the contract, the guarantee period is 365 days, or as indicated in the
contract, and transfer the guarantee fund to the Owner or according to the contract.]
END
5.1.2 : EXISITING CONDITIONS

5.1.2.1 : SURVERYS
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Surveys
1.1.1 Contractor shall survey the construction site for all existing conditions such as entrance, area
context, existing fence around the site, and nearby building, etc. and use the data from survey
as the guideline to plan site works.
1.1.2 Contractor shall measure the construction site, plan layout of the building, make datum, check
for any line and length as indicated on drawings, check if marks of the land are correct to the
title deeds and write a report. This report shall contain information about any correctness or
error from the drawings. Contractor shall send the report to Supervisor and Architect for verify
and approve before working in the next process.
1.1.3 Contractor shall provide modern equipment and tools, skilled labors, with approval from
Supervisor to operate quick and efficient survey, measure, planning, leveling, and verifying for
vertical line, angle and any length of construction work. All reference marks shall be
maintained in good condition and correct position during the whole construction period.
1.1.4 Contractor shall survey the nearby building around construction site by taking existing condition
photos for both indoor and outdoor of every building, and provide a report as evidence with
witnesses before construction.
1.1.5
END
5.1.2.2 : RENOVATION AND DEMOLITION

1. GENERAL
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Existing Building and Structure Demolition
Contractor shall demolish, remove or relocate existing buildings, trees, and other structures in
accordance to the drawings and in the contract immediately after permission to from Owner
to enter construction site is granted. Contractor shall prevent the nearby buildings, existing
trees, and existing utility systems such as potable water pipe, underground electricity wires
and cables, etc. from affected or damages because of the demolition activities. If it is necessary
to demolish the nearby buildings, or cut the trees, or remove the existing utility systems,
Contractor shall request permission from Supervisor and Owner before execution.
1.1.2 Process to Demolish Existing Building and Structure
Contractor are not permitted to demolish existing buildings and structures using the process
that might pose danger, or create panic and frighten to neighbor. Contractor shall request
permission to demolish the building in advance according to related regulations. Demolition is
Contractor's responsibility and Contractor's expense except indicated otherwise on the
drawings or in the contract.
1.1.3 Ownership of Materials and Objects
All materials and objects from demolition are the properties of Contractor except the materials
and objects indicated otherwise in the contract. Contractor shall demolish existing building
and structure neatly. Contractor shall prevent damage to materials and objects that are
specified to be belong to Owner, and transfer to the place specified by Owner.
1.1.4 Excavation and Fill
Contractor shall remove all demolished materials and objects away from the construction site
including underground structure such as foundations, pile foundations, pools, ponds, concrete
plates, tree roots, and any object situated on the ground or underground which obstruct the
construction. After materials and objects are cleared away from underground, the area shall
be filled to the former level for the next construction work process. Contractor shall
responsible for all demolition expense. [For any cost of the parts which cannot be seen and
Owner does not offer the turnkey rate in the contract, it will be counted as the actual work,
or according to the approval from Architect. Contractor shall have photos or other reliable
evidences, and witnesses from Contractor, or Supervisor for verifying at all time.]
1.1.5 Big Trees in Construction Site
If it is not indicated otherwise, on the drawings or in the specifications for the big trees with
trunk diameter not less than [200] mm or higher than [5] m, Contractor shall keep the trees or
transplant the trees to another place as indicated by Owner. Contractor is not permitted to
cut big trees before approval from Owner. All cost of transplanting or keeping the tree including
the damage that might occur are Contractor responsibility.
END
5.2 ARCHITECTURAL WORK

5.2.1: FLOOR/WALL FINISHED
5.2.1.1: CONCRETE FINISHED
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 The polished concrete, high-tolerance concrete or liquid floor hardener finishing
Contractor is to provide an integrated all polished concrete, high-tolerance concrete or
liquid floor hardener finishing systems for the Project, including all design & engineering,
labor, materials, appliances and services required to manufacture, deliver, furnish and
install all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of all polished
concrete, high-tolerance concrete or liquid floor hardener finishing and related works as
shown on the Drawings, as specified herein and/or as required by work conditions. The
polished concrete, high-tolerance concrete or liquid floor hardener finishing Contractor
shall have the proven experience, ability, manpower to offer all polished concrete, high-
tolerance concrete or liquid floor hardener finishing as a single contract. All items not
shown or specified, but which are necessary for the proper execution and completion
of the work shall be provided by the Contractor in his scope of work.
2. References
2.1 Comply with applicable standards and local building codes are referenced as Engineer or/ and
Architect support the design intent. Alternate standards may be proposed for consideration by The
Employer’s representative shall be the sole judge as to whether the proposed standards adequately
support the design intent.
2.2 Cement: TIS 15 Part 1-2555 (2012) Portland cement Part 1
2.3 White cement: TIS 133-2556 (2013) White Portland Cement.
2.4 ASTM C418; Abrasion resistance test of concrete by sandblasting (high-tolerance concrete test)
2.5 ASTM C944 (high-tolerance concrete test)
2.6 ASTM C779 Test Method for Abrasion of Horizontal Concrete Surface (liquid floor hardener test)
2.7 CPAA 03 3543 Concrete Polishing Assoc. of America Specification Diamond Polishing
(liquid floor hardener test)
2.8 ASTM D523 Reflectivity (liquid floor hardener test)
3. Warranty
3.1 The contractor shall warranty covering the materials, installation and workmanship for a period of (2)
years from acceptance of the completed of contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS

1. General
1.1 Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation,
as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect and/or Engineer.
2. Polished concrete materials
2.1 Cement TIS 15 Part 1-2555 (2012) Portland cement Part 1
2.2 Sand or aggregates : Clean and Free of any debris.
2.3 Clean Water: : no oil slick, no grease, no acid, no base, no organic compound, and
no suspended solids.
3. High-tolerance concrete materials
3.1 Cement TIS 15 Part 1-2555 (2012) Portland cement Part 1
3.2 Sand or aggregates: Clean and Free of any debris.
3.3 Clean Water: : no oil slick, no grease, no acid, no base, no organic compound, and
no suspended solids.
3.4 Color: good quality inorganic color pigment for mixing with white cement Inorganic color pigment and
white cement shall be weighted or measured when mixing
3.5 Wax
3.6 Floor hardener: non-metallic, grey color or as specified on drawings, rate 5 kg/sq.m.
4. Liquid floor hardener materials
4.1 The liquid hardener/densifier shall be water-based material and have no hazardous ingredient.
4.2 The chemical shall be Lithium Silicate based, able to penetrate into concrete, react and bond within
concrete matrix. No coating material allow use.
4.3 The chemical shall not create hazardous waste which produce from chemical reaction during or after
the application.
4.4 The liquid hardener/ densifier shall have a test result of ASTM C779 to unsure that the performance
is reaching requirement.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. General
1.1 Manufacture’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect and/or
Engineer will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the
work.
END
5.2.1.2: CONCRETE AND BRICK PAVING BLOCK

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide concrete and brick paving block where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in
and as needed for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of these
Specification for requirements which affect the works of this Section, whether or not such
requirements are particularly mentioned herein. Coordinate the work of this section with the
related work of other trades, to assure the steady progress of all works of the Contract.
1.1.2 The term concrete and brick paving block shall include concrete and brick paving block,
compacted sand and R.C. curb. The concrete and brick paving block contractor shall have the
proven experience, ability, manpower to offer all concrete and brick paving block as a single
contract. All items not shown or specified, but which are necessary for the proper execution
and completion of the work shall be provided by the Contractor in his scope of work.
2. Submittals
2.1 Submit Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified requirements;
Manufacturer’ s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect and/ or
Engineer will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work.
2.2 Submit complete shop drawings and design calculations under provisions of the general
specifications. Drawings shall show scale plan, elevations, sections and details.
2.3 Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
2.4 Contractor shall provide materials sample to supervisor for approval. The sample separated by
specified type of material size is 300x300 mm. or close that will be used with not less than 2 samples.
3. Warranty
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Paving block and obstructing block
1.1 Concrete paving block
The concrete paving bocks shall conform to TIS 827-2531; Pigmentation shall conform to ASTM C979.
1.1.1 Thickness of concrete paving block is 6 cm. and thickness of units not differ by more than
+/- 2 mm. In addition, color and pattern of units is specified in the drawing.
1.1.2 Concrete paving block which has surface thickness at least 5 mm. has compressive strength
not less than 35 Mpa. (Approximately 350 ksc) TIS.827-2531
1.2 Obstructing block (Detectable warning concrete block)
The concrete paving blocks shall conform to TIS 827-2531; Pigmentation shall conform to ASTM C979.
The Tactile paving shall be homogeneous concrete block with raised studs or strips purposely made
to render different tactile walking surfaces for foot and cane detection.
1.3 Edge restraints
1.3.1 Precast concrete
The edge restraint shall be precast Portland cement concrete elements with the dimension
show on the plans. Minimum compressive strength of precast concrete shall be 21 MPa (cube
test) unless analysis requires some other value.
1.3.2 Cast-in-place concrete
The edge restraint shall be Portland cement concrete placed with the dimensions shown in
the plans. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of ACI 301, except the Minimum
compressive strength of cast- in- place concrete shall be 21 MPa ( cube test) unless analysis
requires some other value.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Paving block and obstructing block
1.1 Preparation
1.1.1 Edge restraint location
The edge restraint shall be placed as show in the drawings and shall be installed prior to
placement of the blocks.
1.1.2 Sand bedding layer

The bedding sand shall be spread evenly over the area to be paved and shall be screeded to
an uncompacted average thickness of 30 mm. with a tolerance for grade and surface
smoothness of plus or minus 6 mm. this bedding sand shall not be used to fill low areas that
exceed the specified tolerance for the base. The sand shall be left uncompacted and shall
not be disturbed by any pedestrian or vehicle construction traffic.
1.2 Block placement
The paving block shall place by hand or machine in the indicated pattern. Placement of paving block
shall start from a corner or straight edge and proceed forward over the undisturbed sand bedding
layer. The joints, excluding any chamfer between paving blocks, shall be not less than 2 mm. or more
than 6 mm. above the edge restraint.
1.3 Unfilled gaps
Any gaps between paving blocks and any edge restraint, drainage structures, or other members that
cannot be filled with a whole block shall be filled with a paving block cut to fit the gap, Cutting shall
be done with a hydraulic splitter, a masonry saw, or other device that accurately leaves a clean,
vertical face without spilling, Any remaining gap between the block and adjoining edge restraint or
structure greater than 6 mm. will not be accepted; adjacent blocks shall be cut or rearranged to
prevent this.
1.4 Seating blocks
The blocks shall be seated in the bedding sand by compacting them with a minimum of three passes
of a vibratory plate compactor.
1.5 Jointing sand
The jointing sand shall be swept into joints and vibrated with a vibratory plate or vibratory roller
compactor. This process shall be continued until sweeping and vibrating have filled all joints with
sand and further vibration cannot force additional sand into the joints. The coarser particles of the
sand will not enter the joints and will remain on the surface. These particles and any excess sand
shall be swept off the pavement.
1.6 Timing of operations
Seating of blocks and placement of jointing sand can be done concurrently with block placement.
However, seating of blocks and placement of jointing sand shall not be done within 1.5 m of any
unfinished edge of the block pavement that is not supported by the edge restraint.
1.7 Construction traffic
Construction traffic shall not be allowed on the paving block surface until the jointing sand has been
placed and vibrated into the joints and all debris and excess sand has been swept off.
END
5.2.1.3: STONE FLOORING /FACING (FLOOR AND WALL)

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide stone flooring/facing where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in and as
needed for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of these Specifications
for requirements which affect the works of this Section, whether or not such requirements
are particularly mentioned herein. Coordinate the work of this section with the related work
of other trades, to assure the steady progress of all works of the Contract.
2. Submittals
2.1 Submit Manufacturer’ s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified
requirements;
2.2 Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect and/or
work.
3. Warranty
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Materials: new, manufacturer's standard, special selection, no crack, no defects, no twist, same size
in every piece.
1.2 Granite: [ Saraburi black stone or as specified on drawings] , size [ … … x300x25] mm for stair flooring,
made in Thailand [water jet applied, no slip] [rough surface].
1.3 Granite: [ Saraburi black stone or as specified on drawings] , size [ 300x600x20] , [ 300x300x20] ,
[600x600x20] mm. made in Thailand [water jet applied, no slip] [rough surface] or as specified on
drawings.
1.4 Natural sand stone: size [300x300x30], [600x600x30], mm for flooring: [smooth surface, from Saraburi
or Tak or equivalent, color to be selected by supervisor and/or architect approval]
1.5 Artificial stone: size as specified on drawings.
1.6 Floor leveling mortar.
1.7 Materials for stone installation: [ flexible adhesive cement type] [ TIS2703- 2559, ANSI A118. 1, ANSI
A118.4 or EN 12004 (C1)]
1.8 Clear sealer for damp proofing and waterproofing.
1.9 Joint sealant: [black mold prevention] [ANSI A118.6 or EN13888 (CG1)]
1.10 Joint sealant for stone expansion: [silicone (non-staining)] [[ASTM C920], can support joint movement
not less than [± 25%] of the joint size in accordance with [ASTM C719]]
1.11 Stone finishing wax.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. General Requirement
1.1 Measure and verify the installation site for the correctness of actually size and dimension.
1.2 Calculate and design hooks, stone thickness, position, and the quantity of hooks for fixing, incise,
drilling and others including verify the wall strength that shall be enough for stone fixing firmly and
safety.
1.3 Provide damp proofing and waterproofing as specified in the Section Damp proofing and
Waterproofing before pouring floor leveling mortar or plastering the first concrete layer on the wall,
and install the stone such as damp proofing for the ground floor that attached to the ground.
1.4 Interior stone wall facing, interior and exterior stone flooring shall have groove with space at least 3
mm, sealed by silicone for stone expansion, every distance 4000x4000 mm,.
1.5 Exterior stone wall facing shall have groove with space at least 3 mm, sealed by silicone for stone
expansion, every distance 1000x1000 mm.
1.6 For exterior and interior stone wall facing more than 2500 mm high, the stone shall be strong enough
for load bearing and installed by stainless hook or equivalent.
1.7 Unless specified on drawings for baseboard, trim of counter or stair, or stair nose that is granite or
marble stone: finishing by making round edge, and polish at the thickness corner or at the ridge of
the stone that can be seen. After installation, the surface shall be polished same as the stone surface.
1.8 Unless specified on the drawings, flooring the stair using stone shall be [one piece without joint and]
polished round edge, grooved incise, or as specified on the approved shop drawings.
2. Preparation
2.1 Clean the surface, no dust, no grease stain, no concrete debris or dirtiness, and wash by water.
2.2 Before installation: coated the stone by clear sealer for damp proofing at [5 sides of the stone except
the front side for polished surface stone, and all 6 sides for rough or sand blast or torch applied or
rough chipping or other surface apart from polished surface] [ 6 sides of stone: front side, backside
and other sides] by coating 2 layers each side and leave until dry before installation.
3. Installation
3.2 Lay the stone, specify the quantity and the cut stone in accordance with the approved shop drawings.
Stones gap shall be close as much as possible.
3.3 The cut stone shall be equal at both sides. Joints are straight or as specified on the drawings. For
joint at the corner, unless specified: grind the edge at 45 degree, assemble the corner showing the
thickness of both piece of the stones approximately 5 mm each side.
3.4 Stone cutting in straight line and curve line shall be done by extra sharp standard tools. Drilling for
install accessories, the drilled points shall have the size as required. Granite after cutting shall not
twist, crack, chipped, and shall be edge finished completely before installation.
3.5 Clean the surface, spray water to all surface, use plastering trowel to plaster adhesive cement to the
area completely, scrape lines on the plaster, follow adhesive cement manufacturer's
recommendation by approval Supervisor.
3.6 Install and push the stone at the specified line tightly with no hollow within the indicated time period
of adhesive cement. If the stone has hollow, no tight, no strong, demolish and re-install.
3.7 After finished flooring, protect from any impact for at least 48 hours. Sealed by joint sealant with
similar or lighter color than the stone color.
3.8 Stone facing using hook shall be approved methods and process by supervisor and/ or engineer.
4. Clean
4.1 The finished installation of stone flooring shall be row, level, plumb, and smooth color to all of the
area, beautiful, no stain, or no defect.
4.2 After sealing the joint for approximately 24 hours, the stone shall be cleaned again by water and
wipe until dry using clean cloth, and coated the surface by wax for at least 1 layer.
4.3 Protect stone flooring/facing work from dirtiness and damage during the whole construction period.
END
5.2.1.7 : EPOXY SELF-LEVELING FLOORING

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide self-leveling epoxy flooring where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in and as
for requirements which affect the works of this Section, whether or not such requirements are
particularly mentioned herein. Coordinate the work of this section with the related work of
other trades, to assure the steady progress of all works of the Contract.
2. Performance
2.1 Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum
5 years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
3. Quality Assurance
3.1 Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods
for proper performance of the work of this Section.
4. Submittals
requirements;
4.2 Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect and/or Engineer will
become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work
5. Warranty
5.1 The contractor shall warranty covering the installation and workmanship for a period of (2) years from
acceptance of the completed of contract.
5.2 The contractor shall warranty materials for a period of (5) years from acceptance of the completed of contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.3 Self-leveling epoxy applied at not less than 2 mm. thickness.
1.4 The material must have the following qualifications:
1.4.1 Compressive Strength: ≥ 60N/mm2(ASTM D 695)
1.4.2 Tensile strength: >15N/mm2(BS6319 Part 7)
1.4.3 Flexural strength: >30N/mm2(DIN 1048)
1.4.4 Surface Hardness: 75-85 Shore D
1.4.5 Adhesive/ Bonding strength: >1.5 N/mm2

1.4.6 Water Absorption: (impermeable) Nil-Karsten Test
1.4.7 Abrasion Resistance: <105mg (ASTM D4060,BS 812)
PART III: EXECUTION
1. General
Engineer will become the basis for rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work.
END
5.2.1.8: RESILIENT AND PVC/VINYL TILES FLOORING

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide resilient and PVC/vinyl tiles flooring where shown on the Drawings, as specified here
in and as needed for a complete proper installation. The term resilient and vinyl tiles flooring
shall include resilient and vinyl tiles, adhesive, damp proofing and waterproofing, skirting, floor
leveling mortar, wax and accessories. The resilient and vinyl tiles flooring Contractor shall have
the proven experience, ability, manpower to offer all resilient and vinyl tiles flooring as a single
contract. All items not shown or specified, but which are necessary for the proper execution
and completion of the work shall be provided by the Contractor in his scope of work.
2. References
2.1 ASTM E 648 Fire resistance: Class I.
2.1 ASTM E 662 (Smoke Generations)
3. Submittals
requirements;
3.2 Submit complete shop drawings and design calculations under provisions of the general specifications.
Drawings shall show scale plan, elevations, sections and details.
4. Warranty
4.2 The contractor shall warranty materials for a period of (10) years from acceptance of the completed
of contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Wood Surface Vinyl Plank
1.1.1 The materials made with heterogeneous vinyl tiles. If vinyl tile is not indicate used size 6”x36”
or 4” x36” or 3” x36” wood surface. The color and pattern selected from range currently
available manufacturer’s catalog. The material to be qualified accordingly.
- Overall thickness 2.5 mm.
- The clear vinyl wear layer surface thickness- not less than 0.5 mm.
- Wear Resistance (EN 649) Group T

- Flexibility (EN 435) 20 mm. mandrel, no crack
- Fire Resistance/ Flammability Critical radiant fluk:≥0.45 watts/cm2
Specific optical smoke density:≤0.45
- Color fastness (ISO 105-B02) - 6
1.2 Vinyl Tile Flooring
1.2.1 The materials made with vinyl composition tiles(Non-Asbestos). If vinyl tile is not indicate used
size 300x300, 450x450 mm. or as specified on drawings. The color and pattern selected from
range currently available manufacturer’s catalog. The material to be qualified accordingly.
- Overall thickness Size 300x300: Not less than 2.0 mm,
Size300x300: Not less than 2.5 mm
- Wear Resistance (EN 660-2) ≤ 10 mm3
- Fire Resistance Critical radiant fluk: > 11 kW/m2
- Smoke Development rate <750%minutes
- Slip resistance (AS/NZS 4586) Y, R9
1.3 Wall Base/Skirting
1.3.1 For vinyl floor tile: Provide flexible vinyl skirting with a coved base(toe) and tapered top edge
for used as wall finish high 10 cm. and thickness 1. 6 mm. using adhesive and accessories
recommended and approved by the flooring manufacturer.
1.3.2 For carpet tile: Provide flat flexible vinyl skirting with tapered edges for used as wall finish with
carpet installation high 10 cm. using adhesive and accessories recommended and approved
by the flooring manufacturer.
1.3.3 Color and type to be selected by supervisor and/or architect.
1.4 Adhesive
Provide Adhesive for field areas as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
1.5 Accessories
1.5.1 For patching, smoothing, and leveling monolithic subfloors, provide leveling compound and
primer as manufacturer’s recommendations.
1.5.2 Other accessories by manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Inspection
1.1 Examine subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are smooth and free from cracks,
holes, ridges, and other defects that might prevent adhesive bond impair durability or appearance of
the flooring material.
1.2 Inspect subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are free from curing, sealing, parting
and hardening compounds; residual adhesives; adhesive removers; and other foreign materials that
might prevent adhesive bond. Visually inspect for evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation,
dusting, mold, or mildew.
1.3 Report conditions contrary to contract requirements that would prevent a proper installation. Do not
proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.4 Failure to call attention to defects or imperfections will be construed as acceptance and approval of
the subfloor. Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions existing at the
time of installation.
2. Preparation
2.1 Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, ridges, and bumps, and filling low spots,
control or construction joints, and other defects with leveling compound A- 1 and primer as
manufacturer’s recommendations
2.2 Remove paint, varnish, oils, release agents, sealers, and waxes. Remove residual adhesives as
recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove curing and hardening compounds not
compatible with the adhesives used, as indicated by a bond test or by the compound manufacturer’s
recommendations for flooring. Avoid organic solvents.
2.3 Perform subfloor Calcium Chloride Tests ( and Bond Tests) to determine if surfaces are dry; free of
curing and hardening compounds, old adhesive, and other coatings; and ready to receive flooring.
2.4 Vacuum or broom-clean surfaces to be covered immediately before the application of flooring. Make
subfloor free dust, dirt, grease, and all foreign materials.
3. Installation
3.2 Install flooring in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation standard.
3.3 Install flooring wall to wall before the installation of floor-set cabinets, casework, furniture, equipment,
movable partitions, ect. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door recesses, closets, and similar openings
as shown on the drawings.
3.4 Install flooring with adhesives, tools, and procedures in strict accordance with the manufacturer’ s
written instructions. Observe the recommended adhesive trowel notching, open times, and working
times.
3.5 Prepare sealed seams with special seam sealing adhesive supplied for this purpose. Use methods and
sequence of work in conformance with written instructions of the flooring manufacturer. Finish all
seams flush and free from voids, recesses, and raised areas.
3.6 Provide integral flash cove wall base where shown on the drawings, including cove fillet support strip
and top edge cap trim. Construct flash cove base in accordance with flooring manufacturer’ s
instruction. Heat-weld seams as specified for those on the floor.
4. Cleaning and Protection
4.1 Perform initial maintenance according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.2 Protect installed flooring as recommendations by the flooring manufacturer against damage from
rolling lords, other trades, or the placement of fixtures and furnishings.
END
5.2.1.9: ACCESS RAISE FLOORING
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide access flooring where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in and as needed for
a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of these Specifications for
requirements which affect the works of this Section, whether or not such requirements are
1.1.2 The access flooring Contractor is to provide an integrated all access flooring systems for the
Project, including all design & engineering, labor, materials, appliances and services required
to manufacture, deliver, furnish and install all items necessary for the proper execution and
completion of all access flooring and related works. The term access flooring shall include
panels, support, subfloor, skirting and accessories.

2. References
2.2 Fire Resistance- BS476 Part 6-7 or ASTM E84
2.3 Materials and Accessories- TIS 1129-2535
3. Submittals
requirements;
5.4 Submit mock up drawings if required by the Engineer and/or Architect.
4. Warranty
7.2 The contractor shall warranty materials for a period of ( 5) years from acceptance of the completed
of contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
2. Floor Panel
2.1 Product standard panel size : 600x600x35mm. or as shown on drawings.
2.1.1 Type Load capacity 1000 Kg/sq.m.
a. Concentrated Load (Kg) ≥ 454
b. Ultimate Load (Kg) ≥ 1,335
c. Uniform Load (Kg) ≥ 2,300
d. Impact Load (Kg) ≥ 55
e. Rolling Load (Kg) ≥ 333 (10 times)
≥ 245 (10,000 times)
2.1.2 Type Load capacity 1250 Kg/sq.m.
a. Concentrated Load (Kg) ≥ 568
b. Ultimate Load (Kg) ≥ 1,668
c. Uniform Load (Kg) ≥ 3,300
d. Impact Load (Kg) ≥ 68
e. Rolling Load (Kg) ≥ 362 (10 times)
≥ 272 (10,000 times)
2.2 Filled Formed – Steel Panels: Either panels construction described below :
2.2.1 Cementitious – filled panels fabricated with flat top sheet and die- formed and stiffened
bottom pan formed from cold-rolled steel sheet joined together by resistance welding to form
an enclosed assembly and protected against corrosion by manufacturer’ s standard factory-
applied finish.
2.2.2 Lightweight – concrete-filled panels fabricated with flat cold-rolled steel top sheet and bottom
pan formed from electrolytic-zinc-coated cold-rolled steel sheet joined together permanently
and structurally by hemming and adhesively to concrete core to form an enclosed assemble.
3. Floor Panel Covering
3.1 General: Provide factory- applied floor coverings of type indicated that are High Pressure laminated
(HPL)by the access flooring manufacturer to top floor panels.
3.2 Colors and Patterns: Provide Architect’s selection made from manufacturer’s full range of colors and
patterns.
3.3 Standard Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, High – Wear Type, fabricated in one cover each panel face
within perimeter plastic edging or with integral trim serving as edging.
3.3.1 Antistatic Floor Covering Properties: Electrical Resistance: Test per ESD STM 7.1
3.3.2 Average greater than 25,000 ohms and less than 1,000 megohm when test specimens and
installed floor coverings are tested surface to surface (point to point)
3.4 Edging: Manufacturer’s standard form of edge trim. For applied edge trim, use method standard with
manufacturer to attach edge trim to perimeter of each panel. Provide size and profile of applied edge
trim that fits floor covering selected.
4. Understructure
4.1 Pedestals: Assembly consisting of base, column with provisions for height adjustment, and head (cap):
made of steel or aluminum or a combination of both.
4.1.1 Base: Square or circular base with not less than 16 sq. in. (103 sq. cm.) of bearing area.
4.1.2 Provide vibration-proof leveling mechanism for making and holding fine adjustments in height
over a range of not less than 2 inches (50 mm.) Include means of locking leveling mechanism
at selected height that requires deliberate action to change height setting and prevents
displacement.
4.1.3 Head: Designed to support understructure system indicated.
4.1.3.1 Provide sound- deadening pads or gaskets at contact points between heads and
panels.
4.1.4 Stringer Systems: Modular steel stringer systems made to interlock with pedestal heads and
form a grid pattern placing stringers under each edge of each floor panel and a pedestal under
each corner of each floor panel. Protect steel components with manufacturer’ s standard
galvanized or corrosion-resistant paint finish.
4.1.4.1 Provide continuous gasket at contact surfaces between panel and stringers to deaden
sound, to seal off underfloor cavity from above, and to maintain panel alignment and
position.
4.1.4.2 Provide stringers that support each edge of each panel where required to meet design-
load criteria.
5. Accessories
5.1 Cutouts: Provide cutouts in floor panels for cable penetrations and service outlets. Comply with
requirements indicated for size, Shape, number, and location. Provide reinforcement or additional
support, if needed, to make panels with cutouts comply with standard performance requirements
5.1.1 Fit cutouts with manufacturer’s standard grommets in size indicated or, where size of cutouts
exceed maximum grommet size available, trim edge of cutouts with manufacturer’ s standard
plastic molding having tapered top flange.
5.2 Service Outlets: UL-listed and – listed and – labeled assemblies, for recessed mounting flush with
top of floor panels, for power, communication, and signal services, and complying with the following
requirements:
5.2.1 Structural Performance: Cover capable of supporting a 1000-lbf (4448-N) concentrated load.
5.2.2 Cover and Box Type: Grommet with twist-close cover and including steel junction box electrical
receptacle with provision with provision for telephone amphenol connectors and signal cables.
5.2.3 Location: Locate outlets in center of and quadrant.
5.2.4 Receptacles and Wiring: Equip each service outlet with power receptacles to comply with
requirements indicated below.
5.2.4.1 Type of Receptacle: Heavy – duty duplex,2- pole,3- wire grounding,20 A, 220- 250 V,
NEMA configuration 5-20R, unless otherwise indicated.
5.3 Perimeter Support: Provide manufacturer’s standard method for supporting panel edge and form
transition between access flooring and adjoining floor covering at same level as access flooring.
5.4 Vertical Closures (Fascia): Where underfloor cavity is not enclosed walls or other constriction, provide
manufacturer’s standard metal – closure plates with factory-applied finish.
5.5 Ramps: Manufacturer’s standard ramp construction of width and slope indicated, and of same
materials, performance, and construction requirements as the access flooring.
5.6 Panel Lifting Device: Manufacturer’s standard lifting device of type and number required for lifting
panels with floor covering provided.
5.7 Vinyl Base: Vinyl wall base shall be matching end stops and preformed or molded corner units, with
top set cove, and of height and thickness indicated.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
END
5.2.1.10: WOOD FLOORING
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide wood flooring where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in and as needed for a
complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of these Specifications for
2. References
2.2 Wood for construction in accordance with the standard of the Royal Forest Department.
3. Performance
3.1 Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 10 years
documented experience approved by manufacturer.
4. Submittals
requirements;
specified type of material size is appropriate or close that will be used with not less than 2 samples.
5. Warranty
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.3 The selected wood: as specified in the Section Architectural Woodwork, no cracks, no twist, no
defects.
1.4 Teak Wood floor: with tongued and grooved, [Golden Teak, special selection, size [25x150x1800 mm]
[1"x6"], smooth dressed 2 sides, polyurethane coated for interior with [hardwood] cleat, size [25x50
mm] [1"x2"] at every [450] mm] embedded in the polished floor leveling mortar.
1.5 Hardwood floor with gap: [ [Daeng Wood], special selection, size [1 1/2"x4"], [1 1/2"x6"] smooth
dressed 4 sides, chamfer slightly for 2 sides on the top, flooring with [3] mm gaps, coated wood stain
and preservative for exterior, installed on the [Daeng Wood] joists: size [50x100 mm] [2"x4"] at every
[500] mm.]]
1.6 Parquet floor: parquet with groove tongue, [ [Makha Wood], special selection, size
[2"x12"][4"x14"][4"x18"], polyurethane coated for interior
1.7 Engineering wood floor or laminate floor: size not less than [8x190x1200] mm, written warranty not
less than [10] years.
1.8 Hardwood floor coverings close: [Daeng Wood], special selection, size [1 1/2"x6"], [2"x8"], [2"x10"]
smooth dressed 4 sides, coated polyurethane for interior, installed on the [Daeng Wood] joists: size
[50x100 mm] [2"x4"] at every [500] mm. or as specified on drawings.
1.9 Wall border: unless specified on drawings: same type as the floor, size [3/4"x4"]
1.11 Timber flooring adhesive: latex for wood flooring.
1.12 Paint: product as specified in the Section Painting.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
2.2 Wood flooring alignment: unless specified on the drawings, flooring by [ alternating the joint row at
half of the wood length (brick pattern), the cut wood shall be equal at both sides of the floor] or as
specified on the approved shop drawings.
2.3 Teak floor with tongued and grooved, put wood cleats at every [ 450] mm, adjust to the required
level, pour floor leveling mortar and polish the surface to the same level as the wood cleat, leave
until dry completely, flooring the tongued [ Teak] with grooved, fixed to the wood cleat by screw,
hide the screw head at the rabbet, the grooves between each wood shall be completely tight using
clamp, joints of the wood shall be alternated and have wood cleat to support at every joint, space
the groove approximately [8] mm at the area that the wood attach to the wall.
2.4 Wood flooring with gap, put the joist at every [ 500] mm, fix to the reinforced concrete beam or
building structure as specified on drawings, or fix above the reinforced concrete floor that was poured
with floor leveling mortar, polished surface, and sloped to water drainage point. The joist level is
over the polished concrete floor approximately [ 30] mm, fixed by angle steel and stainless nuts or
as specified on the approved shop drawings. Start wood flooring by fixing wood panels to the wood
joists with stainless screws that are embedded and hidden the screw head by wood wedge.
2.5 Parquet floor: pour floor leveling mortar, polished the surface, leave until completely dry, flooring
the parquet floor by adhesive glue [ polyurethane] , row or pattern of the parquet floor shall be
flooring as specified on the approved shop drawings. Flooring by adjoin tightly and plumb. Wood
joint shall be plain and smooth completely.
2.6 Engineering wood floor or laminate floor: pour floor leveling mortar, polished finishing, flooring by
rubber plywood thickness [10] mm for exterior, each plywood shall has gap between panels 5 mm,
fixed the plywood with the polished cement finishing floor by wood screws embedded cleat at every
[400x400] mm, leveling to the smooth surface and flooring engineering wood floor or laminate floor
by adhesive [ polyurethane] [ or flooring by lock tongued system] as recommended by the
manufacturer with approval from Supervisor.]
2.7 Wood flooring coverings close, put the joist at every [ 500] mm, fix to the reinforced concrete beam
or building structure as specified on drawings, or fix above the reinforced concrete floor that was
poured with floor leveling mortar, polished surface, and sloped to water drainage point. The joist
level is over the polished concrete floor approximately [ 30] mm, fixed by angle steel and stainless
nuts or as specified on the approved shop drawings. Start wood flooring by fixing wood panels to the
wood joists with stainless screws that are embedded and hidden the screw head by wood wedge.
2.8 Wood wall-border installation: embed 2 pieces of wood cleat or as appropriate at every distance 500
mm or less, use rubber glue and wood screw embedded and hidden screw head. Joint of wood wall-
skirting and corner joint shall assemble with corner joint at 45 degrees, no cut and attach. The joint
shall be smooth, tightly, and the color is harmonious along the wall skirting without joint appearance.
2.9 After the completion of Teak wood flooring, parquet floor: leave until the glue is dry, no entry at
least 15 days, polished by floor sander until smooth at all of the area, fill and finish the groove that
are not neat and polished by floor polisher to make smooth and beautiful wood surface. Painting as
specified in the Section Painting.
2.10 After the completion of wood flooring with gaps, polish the wood floor surface until smooth, chamfer
the groove without sharp grain by sandpaper, and filled and finished the head screw by wood wedge
until complete and beautiful. Painting as specified in the Section Painting.]
2. Cleaning
3.1 The completion of wood flooring shall be row, level, and smooth color to all of the area, beautiful,
no stains, or no defects.
3.2 Clean the wood floor after finishing the installation by sweep, vacuum, and wipe by cloth dipped
with almost dry water, and protect wood flooring from dirtiness and damage during the whole
3. Protection
4.1 Store without too much load bearing on the wood, have supported sleeper, good ventilation and no
dampness at the storage
4.2 After the completion of wood flooring: no entry, no loading. If the traffic is necessary, the wood floor
shall be protected from defects and damages using clear plastic sheet that good withstand tear force.
In case of stain and scratch appearance, or the wood is not plain or smooth, fix by polishing or
replacing and painting with plain color to all of the area at Contractor's expense.
END
5.2.1.11: TERRAZZO FLOORING

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide terrazzo flooring where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in and as needed for
2. References
2.2 TIS 133-2518 (1975) White Portland Cement
2.3 TIS 379- 2556 Dual Layered Terrazzo Tiles
2.4 ASTM C150-07 Standard Specification for Portland Cement TYPE I
3. Performance
4. Submittals
requirements;
work.
5. Warranty
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. General
1.2 Contractor shall provide mock up size [ 600x600] mm presents color, stone size, pattern, terrazzo
dividing strips to Supervisor and/or Architect for approval before installation.
2. Terrazzo Floor (cast-in place) Materials
2.1 Stone: selected marble, wash until clean, no substance, similar size, sifted out through the grid.
Unless specified, use size [ 3- 4] mm, type, size, and color of the stone shall be approved from
Architect.
2.2 Cement: white cement for terrazzo [TIS 133-2518, White Portland Cement] [or ASTM C150- 07 or
BS 12:1971 ORDINARY Standard Specification for Portland Cement TYPE I] ] , Very fine
particles, high bond strength and high compressive strength.
2.3 Color: good quality color pigment for mixing with white cement.
2.4 Terrazzo dividing strips: unless specified: [ PVC, size [ 4.8x12] [ 6x12] [ 10x13] mm] [ aluminum size
[4.8x10] [6x15] [10x13] mm], divide each area size not larger than [2000x2000] mm.
2.6 Wax for terrazzo surface coating.
3. Terrazzo Floor Tile Materials
3.1 Dual- Layered Terrazzo Tiles: Shall comply with TIS 379-2556 Dual-Layered Terrazzo Tile and shall
be to the size specified on the drawings. The wearing and bottom layer manufactured from a mixture
of cement, natural aggregates and coloring material where required, by pressure process not less
than 140 kg/cm2 . The admixture and additions can be used
Quality: The tile shall be supplied with initial grinding and grouting of the wearing layer. The wearing
layer of the tile shall be free from projections, depressions and cracks
Specific Physical Requirement:
- Dry Transverse Strength shall not be less than 3 Mpa.
- Water Absorption shall not be exceed 6% (tested according to the procedure in TIS 379-2556)
Color: good quality color pigment for mixing with white cement.
3.2 Terrazzo dividing strips: unless specified: [ PVC, size [ 4.8x12] [ 6x12] [ 10x13] mm] [ aluminum size
[4.8x10] [6x15] [10x13] mm], divide each area size not larger than [2000x2000] mm.
3.3 Materials for installation: [flexible adhesive cement type] [ANSI A118.1 or EN 12004 (C1)]
3.4 Wax for terrazzo tiles surface coating.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Terrazzo Flooring (cast-in place)
1.1 Preparation
1.1.1 Protect wall or other building parts from dirtiness, and protect water pipe and
drainage channel from being blocked and damaged.
1.1.2 Verify and fix the surface area that are defects or damages before terrazzo flooring.
1.1.3 Clean the surface that will be flooring, no dust, no grease stain, no concrete debris or dirtiness,
and wash by water.
1.1.4 For terrazzo flooring area, pour floor leveling mortar to the required level and slope using
rough plastering mortar for making smooth and strong surface. Required thickness for terrazzo
flooring work is approximately 15 mm.
1.1.5 After leveling or plastering for 24 hours, the mortar shall be cured not less than 28 days, and
leave until dry before starting terrazzo flooring.
1.2 Installation of terrazzo flooring (cast-in place)
1.2.1 Manufacture’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect
and/or Engineer will become the basis for rejecting actual installation procedures used on the
work.
1.2.2 Organize the terrazzo dividing strips [ PVC] as approved, divide the space according to the
approved shop drawings, fix the strips tightly, straight, and level.
1.2.3 Before plastering the surface or pouring cement for the surface, water all of the area until wet
and spray or pour thick mortar as the binder.
1.2.4 Mix stone, white cement, [ color pigment] with clean water until thick enough, plastering or
pouring to the floor. Slap tightly and cure the surface that will be made terrazzo flooring.
Leave at least 7 days. Make sure the surface is strong enough that the stone will not come off
during polishing.
1.2.5 To mix powder pigment with white cement, always weigh or measure.
1.2.6 The surface is polished by skilled labor. For the corner, polish by hand. Pieces of stone shall
be tight, smooth, and level.
2. Terrazzo Tiles Flooring
2.1 Preparation
2.1.1 Protect wall or other building parts from dirtiness, and protect water pipe and drainage channel
from being blocked and damaged.
2.1.2 Verify and fix the surface area that are defects or damages before terrazzo tiles installation
2.1.3 Clean the surface that will be installed, no dust, no grease stain, no concrete debris or dirtiness,
and wash by water.
2.1.4 For terrazzo flooring area, pour floor leveling mortar to the required level and slope using
rough plastering mortar for making smooth and strong surface.
2.2 Installation of terrazzo tiles flooring
2.2.1 Manufacture’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect
and/or Engineer will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures
used on the work.
2.2.2 Organize the terrazzo dividing strips [ PVC] as approved, divide the space according to the
approved shop drawings, fix the strips tightly, straight, and level.
2.2.3 Lay each terrazzo tiles into place and meet required level. Ensuring each tiles are level with
each other.
2.2.4 Grouting the tiles to protect surface of tiles from being stained.
2.2.5 After the grout is dry, the surface is polished by skilled labor and the surface shall be smooth
and level.
2.3 Maintenance and Cleaning
2.3.1 After the completion of terrazzo flooring, all of the terrazzo surface shall be straight, level,
plumb and smooth, harmony color. If there are stain, cracks or pieces of stone are not spread
harmoniously or there are any defect, fix by smashing and flooring all of the area again at
Contractor's expense.
2.3.2 Protect terrazzo flooring after completion from any impact for at least 2 days. Clean by water
and wipe until dry by clean cloth before coating all surface by wax for at least 1 layer.
2.3.3 Do not used acid cleaner for cleaning.
END
5.2.1.12: CARPET TILE FLOORING

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide carpet tile flooring where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in and as needed
for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of these Specifications for
2. References
2.1 Comply with applicable standards and local building codes are referenced as Engineer or/and
2.2 American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC)
2.2.1 AATTC 16 Test Method 16, Test Option 16E: Water cooled Xenon Arc Lamp, Continuous Light.
2.2.2 AATTC 20 Fiber Analysis – Qualitative
2.2.3 AATTC 165 Colorfastness to Crocking - AATCC Crock meter Method
2.3 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2.3.1 ISO 2551 Machine-made Textile Floor Coverings -- Determination of Dimensional Changes Due
to the Effects of Varied Water and Heat Conditions ISO 2551 (Aachen Test).
2.3.2 ISO 3656 Textile and laminate floor covering – Assessment of static electrical propensity –
walking test.
2.3.3 ISO 10361 Textile floor covering – Production of changes in appearance by means of
Vettermann drum and hexapod tumbler testers.
2.3.4 ISO 6925 textile floor covering – Burning behavior- Tablet test at ambient temperature.
2.3.5 ISO 9239-1 Reaction to fire tests for floorings.
2.4 American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
2.4.1 ASTM D2859 Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering
Materials.
2.4.2 ASTM D3676 Standard Specification for Rubber Cellular Cushion Used for Carpet or Rug
Underlay.
2.4.3 ASTM D5252 Standard Practice for the Operation of the Hexapod Drum Tester.
3. Performance
4. Submittals
requirements;
4.2 Manufacturer’ s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect and/ or
4.3 Contractor shall provide materials sample to supervisor for approval. The sample separated by specified
type of material size is 300x300 mm. or close that will be used with not less than 2 samples.
5. Warranty
5.1 The Contractor shall warranty covering the installation and workmanship for a period of ( 2) years from

5.2 The Contractor shall warranty materials for a period of (15) years from acceptance of the completed of contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.3 Compatibility: Provide carpet, adhesives, and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with substrates under conditions of service and application.
1.4 Physical Performance Requirements:
1.4.1 Appearance Retention Rating: Severe-Heavy (short-term not less than 4.0, long-term not less
than 3.5) based on ISO 10361. Carpets shall be tested without underlay.
1.4.2 Tuft bind: minimum average value, 8.0 pounds (Loop Pile)
1.4.3 Dimensional Stability: maximum dimensional change ± 0.2 percent.
1.4.4 Delamination Resistance of the Secondary Backing: not less than 2.5 pounds per inch.
1.4.5 Colorfastness (entire color line):
1.4.6 To Crocking: Color transfer Class 4 minimum, wet and dry, when tested as specified
1.4.7 To light: Color contrast between the exposed and unexposed carpet areas equivalent to a
minimum of Grade 4 on the Gray Scale for Color Change after an exposure to 60 AFU (AATCC
fading units) for all colors
1.5 Fluorochemical finish: minimum average of 350 parts- per- million fluorine on the pile fiber when
tested in accordance with CRI TM-102.
1.6 Antimicrobial Activity: Inherently antimicrobial, topical finishes not allowed.
1.7 Electrostatic Propensity: maximum 3.5 kV
1.8 Flammability:
1.8.1 Methenamine Pill Test: Self Extinguishing – compliance with Federal Flammability Standards
CPSC FF-1-70 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2859.
1.8.2 Radiant Panel: minimum critical radiant flux of 0.45 watts per square centimeter.
1.8.3 Smoke Density: ASTME662 or maximum 450 Dmc.
1.8.4 Reaction to fire : ASTM E648 Class I or EN 13501 B-s1
1.9 Indoor Air Quality:
1.9.1 Carpet: shall be only those certified for Glasbac and Glasbac RE for Nylon and PP products
with certificate no.2237 and 5095 or under CRI Green Label Plus certificate.
1.9.2 Adhesive: shall be only those certified with the CRI IAQ Adhesive Testing Program Green Label
or tested for compliance to meet the CRI IAQ Adhesive Testing Program requirements and
criteria.
1.9.3 All products ( carpet, cushion and adhesives) from current production must be retested on a
quarterly basis to ensure continuing compliance with CRI IAQ Test Program requirements.
1.10 Material Requirements:

1.10.1 Pile Fiber Type:100 percent continuous filament nylon, Type 6 BCF Nylon
1.10.2 Backing Materials:
1.10.2.1 Primary Backing: 100 percent non-woven polyester.
1.10.2.2 Secondary Backing: Fiberglass acrylic resin or 85% Recycled material cushion backing
1.10.3 Recycled Content: Renewed nylon carpet, which is cleaned, retextured, recolored, or
otherwise reused to produce new nylon carpet is acceptable; otherwise comply with the
following recycled content requirements:
1.10.3.1 Nylon Carpet Face Fiber: 20 percent minimum total recovered materials content.
1.10.3.2 Nylon Carpet Backing: For vinyl primary backing, use the highest percentage of total
recovered materials content available; however, 0% is not acceptable.
1.10.3.3 Polymeric Cushion: Preference will be given to recycled content cushion backings.
1.10.4 Construction Requirements
1.10.4.1 Surface texture: level or textured loop, multi-level loop, or pattern
1.10.4.2 Yarn: Multi-ply
1.10.4.3 Tufting Machine Gauge: minimum 1/10 gauge
1.10.4.4 Finished pile thickness: 3.5-4.0mm. +/- 0.5mm.
1.10.4.5 Average Finished Pile Yarn Weight: minimum 20 ounces per square yard
1.10.4.6 Dye method: Solution dyed
1.10.4.7 Color: To be selected by the Architect or SDR from Vendor color line of product
meeting this specification.
2. Accessories
2.1 Carpet Edge Guard, Nonmetallic: Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or rubber carpet edge guard
of size and profile required with minimum 2- inch wide anchorage flange; colors compatible with
carpet furnished.
2.2 Cutback Underlayment and Patching Compound: " Henry 345" Flooring Underlayment Powder, as
manufactured by W. W. Henry Company or approved equal.
2.3 Vinyl Base: 4 inches high, coved, 0.080-inch gauge.
2.4 Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet and other carpeting products
for intended application.
2.5 Releasable Adhesive for Carpet: Provide water-resistant, low VOC (not to exceed 10.0 milligram per
square meter per hour), non-staining type as recommended by carpet manufacturer which complies
with flame spread rating required for carpet installation.
2.6 Concrete Sealer: Provide concrete sealer compatible with carpet backing material and adhesive.
3. Source Quality Control
3.1 Flammability Tests
3.1.1 Radiant Panel: ASTM E648, Class I
3.1.2 Smoke Density: ASTM E662
3.1.3 Methenamine Pill Test: Self Extinguishing ( CPSC FF- 1- 70 or ASTM D 2859 or ISO 6925 or BS
6307).
3.1.4 Reaction to fire : ASTM E648 Class I or EN 13501 B-s1
3.2 Lightfastness: AATCC 16E , EN-ISO 105-B02
3.3 Crocking: AATCC 165
3.4 Static Electricity: AATCC 134 or ISO 6356
3.5 Dimensional Stability: ISO 2551
3.6 Electrostatic Propensity: AATCC 134 or ISO 6356

3.7 Indoor Air Quality: ASTM D5116 or compliance with CRI-Green Label Plus program.
3.8 Test in accordance with NFPA 253 (ASTM E-648) when applying the floor finish requirements of the Life
Safety Code (NFPA 101) to DOE Facilities.
3.9 Carpets and rugs should have a critical radiant flux not less than the following:
3.9.1 0. 45 watts per square centimeter in areas unprotected by an automatic fire suppression
system; and
3.9.2 0.22 watts per square centimeter in areas protected by an automatic fire suppression system.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. General
1.1 Examine substrates for moisture content alkaline presence and other conditions under which carpet
tile is to be installed. Provide Calcium Chloride test results to verify amount of moisture in new or
existing slabs. Calcium Chloride shall be less than or equal to three (3) pounds per one thousand
( 1000) square feet in 24 hours. Alkalinity testing shall result in a pH range of 5– 9. Notify CPM in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.2 Field verify all dimensions and other work conditions affecting the installation of carpet tile.
1.3 The carpet covered by this specification is intended for end use applications that have a Severe Use
Classification. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide only products compatible with adjacent
materials in the assembly.
2. Installation
3.4 General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, “Carpet Modules (Tiles),” and carpet tile manufacturer’s
written instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except
where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance
of the work.
4.1 Remove and dispose of debris and recycle all unusable scraps.
4.2 Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer. Replace carpet tile where blemishes cannot be removed. Trim protruding face yarn
from carpet tile surface. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial quality vacuum cleaner with face-
beater element.
4.3 Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, “Protection of Indoor Installations.”
4.4 Protect installation with a heavy, non-staining building paper. Do not use a moisture barrier such as
plastic film. Maintain protection intact until construction complete.
4.5 Advise SDR of protection methods and materials necessary to prevent deterioration or damage until
construction complete.
4. Carpet Removal
5.1 All carpet tile and scraps removed from projects shall be recycled or reapplied. Disposal of product
in landfill is not permitted.
5.2 Vacuum in-place carpet with industrial vacuum prior to demolition or debris-producing renovation.
5.3 Remove carpet.
5.4 Stack on pallets for handling.
5.5 Store carpet off ground and under cover to prevent contamination of materials by water, foreign
matter or other causes.

5.6 Coordinate with inspector to deliver removed carpet to recycling program or contact manufacturer
for pick-up for recycle.
END
5.2.1.13: STAMP CONCRETE FINISHING

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide stamp concrete finishing where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in and as
2. References
2.2 ACI 305R and ACI 306R. Standard
2.3 ASTM C 979
2.4 ASTM C 309
3. Submittals
requirements;
4. Warranty
4.1 The contractor shall warranty covering the material, installation and workmanship for a period of (2)
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Dry-Shake Colored Hardener: Cementitious material containing special hard aggregates, formulated as a
high opacity color hardening material for the top surface of freshly place concrete substrates. Highly UV-
resistant. Factory proportioned, mixed and packaged, ready-to-use. Comply with ASTM C 979.
1.2 Antiquing Release Agent: Colored, finely powdered material formulated to break the bond between
imprinting tools and surface of color-hardened concrete while imparting an antiqued appearance
1.3 Low VOC Liquid Release Agent: Colorless, odorless liquid formulated to break the bond between
imprinting tools and surface of color-hardened concrete. Evaporates completely, leaving no residue.
VOC content less than 450 g/L (3.75lb/gal).
1.4 Liquid Release Agent: Colorless, scented liquid formulated to break the bond between imprinting
tools and surface of color-hardened concrete. Evaporates completely, leaving no residue.
1.5 Waterborne Curing Compound and Sealer: Low VOC waterborne modified acrylic formulation.
Complies with ASTM C 309.
1.6 Solvent-Borne Curing Compound and Sealer: 100 percent methacrylate polymers and UV inhibitors
blend. Low VOC waterborne modified acrylic formulation. Complies with ASTM C 309.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Subgrade Preparation
1.1 Subgrade to receive stamped concrete paving work must be well drained and have adequate, uniform
loadbearing characteristics.
1.1.1 Verify grading will ensure a uniform concrete thickness during concrete
placement.
1.2 At the time of concrete placement, subgrade must be moist, completely consolidated, and free from
frost. If necessary, subgrade may be dampened with water prior to placement; however, freestanding
water or soft, muddy, or frozen ground in not permissible.
2. Concrete Placement
2.1 General: Place and spread concrete to completely fill all space inside forms. Move concrete into
place with square-tipped shovels or concrete rakes.
2.2 Consolidate concrete by tamping or vibrating to provide a suitable surface for finishing
2.3 Prior to appearance of excess moisture or bleed water, screed concrete with wood or magnesium
straight edge or mechanical vibrating screed
2.4 Continue concrete surface leveling and consolidation with highway magnesium straight edge and (or)
magnesium bull float.
2.5 Mechanically float concrete surfaces to required flatness and levelness as soon as concrete surface
has taken its initial set and will support weight of a power float machine equipped with float shoes
or combination blades and operator
2.5.1 Comply with ACI 302.1R for acceptable tolerances.
2.6 Completed concrete placement to result in an open surface suitable to receive colored hardener
3. Stamp Concrete Paving Installation
3.2 Apply 2/ 3 of dry- shake colored hardener at specified application rate to freshly floated concrete
surface. Bleed water must not be present during or following application of first and second dry-
shake applications.
3.3 Do not throw dry-shake colored hardener material; distribute evenly by hand or mechanical spreader
designed to apply floor hardeners. Mechanical spreader manufacturer as acceptable to stamped
concrete paving manufacturer.
3.4 As soon as dry- shake material has absorbed moisture, indicated by uniform darkening of surface,
mechanically float concrete surface a second time, just enough to bring moisture from base slab
through dry-shake color hardener.
3.5 Immediately following second floating, apply remaining 1/3 of dry-shake colored hardener at specified
application rate. If applied by hand, broadcast in opposite direction of first application for a more
uniform coverage. If a mechanical spreader is used, apply in same manner as previously described.
3.6 As soon as dry- shake material has absorbed moisture, mechanically float concrete surface a third
time.
3.7 Do not add water to the surface.
3.8 Begin imprinting operations immediately after applying dry- shake colored hardener, according to
manufacturer’s written instructions, including application of powder antiquing release agent.
4. Sealing
4.1 Prior to sealing, the following conditions must be present:
4.1.1 Release agent has been removed.

4.1.2 Moisture content of concrete is low enough that alkali and other salts do not become trapped
beneath sealer. This will require a minimum of 28 days subsequent to concrete placement, or
longer if required.
4.1.3 No evidence of free water on concrete surfaces to receive curing and sealing compound.
4.2 Seal imprinted concrete with liquid membrane curing and sealing compounds as recommended by
manufacturer.
4.3 Apply two coats of specified curing and sealing compound according to manufacturer’ s written
instructions.
5. Protection
5.1 Prohibit foot or vehicular traffic on the newly imprinted concrete surface.
5.2 Protect floor surface from damage throughout remainder of construction period until Final
Acceptance of the work. If a covering material is necessary, surfaces must remain uncovered for a
minimum of four days after which they may be covered with a new, smooth, non-staining reinforced
kraft curing paper. Plastic sheeting is unacceptable as a covering material.
END
5.2.1.14: FLOOR TAPE

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide floor tape where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in and as needed for a
complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of these Specifications for
2. References
2.2 ANSI/ OSHA- Occupation Safety and Health Administration- Standard 29 CFR- 01910. 265- Statutory
Requirements Associated with Health and Safety.
2.3 ASTM 04505- 01a- Standard Specification for Preformed Retro Reflective Pavement Marking Tape for
Extended Service Life.
3. Submittals
requirements;
work.
4. Warranty
of contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
2.1 Retro reflection in accordance with ASTM 04061-94(2000)- Standard Test Method for Retro reflectance
of Horizontal Coatings.
2.2 Adhesion in accordance with ASTM D1000-99 – Standard Test Method for Pressure Sensitive Adhesive-
Coated Tapes Used for Electrical and Electronic Applications.
2.3 Skid resistance in accordance with ASTM E303-95(98) – Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface
Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester.
2.4 Course grit anti-skid tape: Course grit tape surface, waterproof.
2.4.1 Color: yellow
2.4.2 Finish: Fluorescence.
2.4.3 Size: As indicated on the approved shop drawings.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Preparation
1.1 Verify that surfaces to receive tape have been finished, and that substrate finishes are dry and
correctly cured.
1.2 Seal untreated or pressure-treated wood surfaces prior to application of anti-skid tape.
2. Installation
work.
END
5-2.2: SKIRTING/WALL BASE
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide Enamel/epoxy paintskirting, Stone skirting, Ceramic tile skirting, fiber cement skirting,
PVC/Vinyl skirting, Metal skirting, Wood skirting, where shown on the Drawings, as specified here
in and as needed for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of these
Specifications for requirements which affect the works of this Section, whether or not such
requirements are particularly mentioned herein.
1.1.2 The term all skirting shall include skirting and accessories. The skirting Contractor shall have
the proven experience, ability, manpower to offer all skirting as a single contract.
2. Submittals
requirements;
specified type of material chart. or close that will be used with not less than 2 samples.
3. Warranty
4.1 The Contractor shall warranty covering the materials, installation and workmanship for a period of (2)
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. ENAMEL/EPOXY PAINT SKIRTING
1.1 Materials
1.1 Product qualification is according as section Painting Work
1.2 Enamel paint skirting high 100 mm. or as specified on drawings.
2. STONE SKIRTING
2.1 Materials
1.1 Materials: new, manufacturer's standard, special selection, no crack, no defects, no twist, same
size in every piece.
1.2 Granite: [ Saraburi black stone or as specified on drawings] , size [ 100x600x20] , [ 100x300x20]
mm. made in Thailand [water jet applied, no slip] [rough surface] or as specified on drawings.
1.3 Natural sand stone: size [100x300x20], [100x600x20], mm.: [smooth surface, from Saraburi or
Tak or equivalent, color to be selected by supervisor and/or architect approval]
1.4 Artificial stone: size as specified on drawings.
1.6 Materials for stone installation: [flexible adhesive cement type] [ANSI A118.1 or EN 12004 (C1)]
1.7 Clear sealer for damp proofing and waterproofing.
1.8 Joint sealant: [black mold prevention] [ANSI A118.6 or EN13888 (CG1)]
1.9 Joint sealant for stone expansion: [ silicone ( non- staining) ] [ [ ASTM C920] , can support joint
movement not less than [± 25%] of the joint size in accordance with [ASTM C719]]
1.10 Stone finishing wax.
3. CERAMIC SKIRTING
3.1 Materials
1.1 Material: new, manufacturer's standard, no crack, not defects, no twist, same size in every
piece, 1st class quality or grade A or premium grade, completely packed in the box, has invoice
and quality certificate from the manufacturer that can be checked, store in the place with no
dampness.
1.2 Ceramic tiles: [TIS 2508-2555 (2012) Ceramic Tiles], unless specified: use non-slip surface type
size [100x150], [100x200], [100x300], [100x600] mm. or as specified on the drawings.
1.3 Rough surface homogeneous ceramic tiles: [ TIS 2508- 2555 ( 2012) Ceramic Tiles] , unless
specified: use unglazed and homogeneous extruded tiles which have been fired at no less
than 1,250 degree Celsius. Ceramic tiles have passed chemical resistance, thermal shock
resistance, and have water absorption less than 6% . Extruded tile has thickness no less than
16 mm and can be used for interior and exterior size [100x100], [150x150], mm. or as specified
on the drawings.
1.4 Ceramic clay tiles: [ TIS 2508- 2555 ( 2012) ] , unless specified: use glazed and homogeneous
ceramic tiles for swimming pool which have been fired at no less than 1,000 degree Celsius
with the water absorption less than 3%, size [4”x4”], [6”x6”],[8”x8”], [12”x12”] with the
thickness of no less than 9 mm. or as specified on the drawings.
1.5 Granito ceramic tiles (Gresporecelain) : unless specified: use non-slip homogeneous surface
type size [100x600] mm. or as specified on the drawings.
1.6 Mosaic tile: as specified on drawings [TIS 38-2531 (1988) Mosaic Tile], size [20x20], [25x25] mm.
or as specified on drawings.
1.7 Tile adhesive: cement [Type: Flexible] [ANSI A118.1 or EN 12004 (C1)]
1.8 Joint sealant: [black mold resistance] [ANSI A118.6 or EN13888 (CG1)]
1.9 Wax for coating tile surface.
1.10 Cleaner for after installation of skirting.
1.11 Others as specified on the drawings by approval from Supervisor.
4. FIBER CEMENT SKIRTING
4.1 Materials
4.1.1 Fiber cement skirting size 1.4x10x305 cm. or as specified on drawings. Seal all cutting edges
with approved water repellent or non-staining silicone type
5. VINYL SKIRTING
5.1 Materials
1.1 Wall Base/Skirting
(1) For vinyl floor tile: Provide flexible vinyl skirting with a coved base(toe) and tapered top
edge for used as wall finish high 10 cm. and thickness 1. 6 mm. using adhesive and
accessories recommended and approved by the flooring manufacturer.
(2) For carpet tile: Provide flat flexible vinyl skirting with tapered edges for used as wall
finish with carpet installation high 10 cm. using adhesive and accessories recommended
and approved by the flooring manufacturer.
(3) Color and type to be selected by supervisor and/or architect.
1.2 Adhesive
(1) Provide Adhesive for field areas as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
6. METAL SKIRTING
6.1 Materials
1.1 Product qualification is according as section 5-2.11 Miscellaneous architectural work.
1.2 Aluminum skirting: size 0.5x10 cm. or as specified on drawings.
1.3 Hair line stainless skirting: size 0.5x10 cm. or as specified on drawings.
7. : WOOD SKIRTING
7.1 Materials
1.1 Wall skirting: unless specified on drawings: same type as the floor, size [3/4"x4"]
1.2 Timber skirting adhesive: latex for wood flooring.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
2. Protection
3.1 Protect all skirting works from dirtiness and damage during the whole construction period.
END
5.2.3 WATERPROOFING
5.2.3.1: POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide polyurethane waterproofing and accessories where shown on the Drawings, as
specified here in and as needed for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections
of these Specifications for requirements which affect the works of this Section, whether or not
such requirements are particularly mentioned herein. Coordinate the work of this section with
the related work of other trades, to assure the steady progress of all works of the Contract.
1.1.2 If is not specified where else polyurethane waterproofing shall be applied to foundation and
basement, balcony, terrace, reinforced concrete roof, reinforced concrete floor slab, where
required surface drainage.
3. References
Architect support the design intent. Alternate standards may be proposed for consideration. The
4. Submittals
4.1 Product Data: Provide details of product description, test performed, limitations of coating, cautionary
procedures required during application in accordance with the General Specifications and
manufacturer recommendation.
4.2 Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special
attention.
5. Warranty
of contract
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials.
1.1 Liquid applied: Polyurethane base waterproof coating, minimum dry Thickness 1.5-2.0 mm.
1.2 Polyurethane Waterproof: Single component polyurethane liquid applied in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
1.3.1 Elongation at Break (ASTM D412) > 500%
1.3.2 Tensile strength (ASTM D412) > 1.5 MPa
1.3.3 Water Vapor Permeability (ASTM E96) 0.15 g/m2/day
1.3.4 Adhesion in Peel (ASTM C794) >1.0 N/mm2
1.3.5 Hardness (Shore A Scale) 50-50
1.3.6 Service Temperature -5°c to 100°c

1.3.7 Crack bridging ability 1.0-1.5 mm.
1.3.8 Chemical Resisiance (ASTM D543) Passed
1.3.9 UV Resistance Excellent
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Surface conditions
1.1 Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct
conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1.2 Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean and free of laitance, efflorescence, oil or other matter
detrimental to application of coating.
1.3 Delay work until concrete substrate is cured a minimum of 6 days.
1.4 Remove loose particles and foreign matter.
1.5 Remove oil or foreign substance with a chemical solvent which will not affect coating.
1.6 Patch all holes and voids. Area to be patched must be dampened with water prior to patching.
1.7 Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and dry.
1.8 Vacuum sweep or blow out area to be patched.
2. Installation
2.2 Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2.3 Apply in two continuous, uniform coats, to receive a smooth finish with natural concrete color.
2.4 Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating.
2.5 If applied to unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately by a method instructed by coating
manufacturer.
END
5.2.3.2: SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING (FLOOR AND WALL)

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide sheet membrane waterproofing and accessories where shown on the Drawings, as
specified here in and as needed for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections
of these Specifications for requirements which affect the works of this Section, whether or not
such requirements are particularly mentioned herein. Coordinate the work of this section with
1.1.2 If is not specified where else sheet membrane waterproofing shall be applied to below
grade/underground reinforced concrete floor and wall, over lagging on blindside walls, below
grade walls, pile caps, grade beams, under slab, and lift pits.
3. References
3.1 Comply with applicable standards and local building codes are referenced as Engineer
or/and Architect support the design intent. Alternate standards may be proposed for
consideration. The Employer’s representative shall be the sole judge as to whether the
proposed standards adequately support the design intent.
4. Submittals
4.1 Product Data: Provide details of product description, test performed, limitations of sheet membrane
waterproofing installation procedures required during application in accordance with the General
Specifications and manufacturer recommendation.
attention.
4.3 Shop Drawing: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other
materials such as for surface conditioner flexible flashings, joint cover sheet and joint and crack
sealants.
5. Warranty
5.1 Warranty: Provide 5 years’ warranty include coverage for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of
water, expect where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking of
concrete due to temperature change of shrinkage is not consider a structural failure.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Sheet membrane waterproofing shall be adhesive applied or self- adhesive or torch applied
electrometric, sheet membrane waterproofing including:
1.3.1 Can’t strips.
1.3.2 Protective cover.
1.2 Waterproofing System: Capable of resisting water head of 5.0 m. and preventing moisture migration
to interior.
1.3 Membrane Materials shall be watertight membrane has mlti-layers-an Ethylene-Propylene Diene
Rubber (EPDM) barrier, an active core with the ability to seal when penetrated, self-healing, self-
sealing and self-repairing sheet waterproofing membrane.
1.6.1 Elongation (ASTM D412) >700%
1.6.2 Tensile Strength, film (ASTM D412) 927 psi
1.6.3 Peel Adhesion to Concrete (ASTM D903) 7 lbs/in.
1.6.4 Nail Sealability (ASTM D1970, sect. 7.9) Passed
1.6.5 Tear Strength at Break (ASTM D624) 161.51 psi
1.6.6 Permeability ASTM E96 B ASTM E96 BW 0.0048 US Perm-Inch
0.0011 US Perm-Inch
1.6.7 Crack Cycling @ -9.4 °F, 100 Cycles (ASTM C836) Unaffected, pass
1.6.8 Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance (ASTM D4068X Pass at 40 hrs.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.2 Verify surfaces to be installation are dry, clean and free of laitance, efflorescence, oil or other matter
1.5 Remove oil or foreign substance with a chemical solvent which will not affect sheet membrane.
1.7 Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry.
2. Installation
2.2 Apply sheet membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2.3 Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive sheet membrane waterproofing.
manufacturer instruction.
2.5 Manufacturer’s Installation: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
END
5.2.3.3: CEMENTITIONS WATERPROOFING (FLOOR AND WALL)

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide cementitious waterproofing and accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified
here in and as needed for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of these
1.1.2 If is not specified where else cementitious waterproof coating shall be applied to reinforced
concrete water tanks, reinforced concrete floor slab of all toilet rooms and wet rooms,
retaining wall, swimmimg pool and fountain.
3. References
4. Submittals
4.1 Product Data : Provide details of product description, test performed, limitations of coating, cautionary
procedures required during application in accordance with the General Specifications and
manufacturer recommendation.
attention.
4.3 Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements..
5. Warranty
of contract
PART II: PRODUCTS.
1.1 Coating: Cementitious waterproof coating.
1.2 Mixing: Mix cement- based waterproof coating with mixing liquid in accordance with manufacturer’ s
instructions.
1.3.1 Tensile strength ≥ 1.2 N/mm2
1.3.2 Adhesion to concrete ≥ 0.7 N/mm2
1.3.3 Non Toxic Passed
1.3.4 Elongation at break 100 %
1.3.5 Resisitance to water penetration No penetration at consumtion 1 Kg/m2 for 6 hrs.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.2 Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean and free of laitance, efflorescence, oil or other matter
1.5 Remove oil or foreign substance with a chemical solvent which will not affect coating.
1.7 Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and dry.
2. Installation
2.2 Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2.3 Apply in two continuous, uniform coats, to receive a smooth finish with natural concrete color.
2.4 Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating.
manufacturer.
END
5.2.3.4: COAL TAR EPOXY RESIN FLOORING (FLOOR AND WALL)

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.2 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide coal tar epoxy resin or epoxy flooring and accessories where shown on the Drawings, as
specified here in and as needed for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of
these Specifications for requirements which affect the works of this Section, whether or not such
1.1.2 If is not specified where else coal tar epoxy resin or epoxy flooring shall be applied to internal
reinforced concrete waste water treatment tanks floor.
2. References
3. Performance
5. Submittals
requirements;
work.
6. Warranty
of contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Coal tar epoxy resin or epoxy flooring applied not less than 500 micron thickness.
1.2.1 Tensile strength ≥ 21.04 MPa
1.2.2 Bond Strength ≥ 3.34 MPa/500 micron (Concrete)
1.2.3 Non Toxic Passed
1.2.4 Low V.O.C. ≤ 18.25 g/L
1.2.5 Chemical Resistance
(1) Nitric Acid 30%
(2) Sodium Hydroxide 50%
(3) Methanol, Hydrochloric Acid 37%

(4) Sulfuric Acid 80%
PART III: EXECUTION
1. General
END
5.2.4.1: BRICK AND VERTICAL GLASS UNIT MASONRY

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide brick and vertical glass unit masonry where shown on the Drawings , as specified here
in and as needed for a complete proper installation.
1.1.2 The term brick and vertical glass unit masonry shall include brick and vertical glass unit
masonry, cement mortar, lintel and nets. The brick and vertical glass unit masonry Contractor
shall have the proven experience, ability, manpower to offer all brick and vertical glass unit
masonry as a single contract. All items not shown or specified, but which are necessary for the
proper execution and completion of the work shall be provided by the Contractor in his scope
of work.
2. References
2.1 TIS 77-2545 (2002) Bricks for General Construction
2.1 TIS 58-2533 (1990) Concrete Block
2.1 TIS 1395-2554 (2011) Hollow Glass Block
3. Submittals
requirements;
work.
4. Warranty
4.1 The contractor shall warranty covering thematerials, installation and workmanship for a period of ( 2)
year from acceptance of the completed of contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Brick, size 65x140x40 mm. or as specified on drawings. [ TIS 77- 2545 ( 2002) Bricks for General
Construction]
1.2 Concrete block for general wall, or as indicated on the drawings: concrete block, size [ 190x390x70
mm], [190x390x140 mm] , [190x390x190 mm] ,[grooved surface] [TIS 58-2533 Concrete Block, Type:
Non Load-Bearing]. The material has the following properties:
1.2.1 Weight per pack ≤5.5 kg (~110 kg/ m²)
1.2.2 Coefficient of thermal conductivity ≤ 0.2 W / m. K
1.2.3 The fire resistance standards (BS 476 Part 22: 1987) ≥ 4 hours
1.2.4 The sound protection STC 40
1.2.5 Density 1100 kg / m³
1.2.6 The water absorption (before coating) by weight 25-30%
1.2.7 Environmental Friendly The Green Label certification Passed
1.2.8 TIS 58-2533 Standard Test Passed
1.3 Concrete block for fence [ concrete block, unplastered] , or as indicated on the drawings: concrete
block, size [190x390x70 mm], [190x390x90 mm] , [190x390x140 mm] [smooth surface] [TIS 58-2533
(1990) Concrete Block, Type: Load-Bearing]
1.4 Facing &Texture solid brick, size 105x235x65 mm. or as specified on drawings.
1.5 Ventilation block as indicated on the drawings: ventilation block, size [160x160x65 mm] or as specified
on drawings.
1.6 Ventilation block as indicated on the drawings: ventilation block [ rainproof type] , size [ 190x390x70
mm], [190x390x90 mm]
1.7 Glass block as indicated on the drawings: glass block, size [190x190x80 mm] [clear color] [pattern as
specified on drawings.] [TIS 1395-2554 (2011) Hollow Glass Block]
1.8 Cellular lightweight concrete (CLC): size [200 x 300 mm], [200 x 600 mm], [70], [75], [125], [150], [175],
[200] mm.
1.9 Grouting materials: grouting materials [polyurethane [white color]] for glass block
1.10 Bricklaying mortar
1.10.1 Bricklaying mortar
1.10.2 Water: clean, no oil, neutral, no salt or plants. If the quality of water in the construction
does not meet the standard, Contractor shall provide clean water from other places.
1.10.3 Concrete admixture: Contractor shall follow the manufacturer's specification with the
Supervisor approval.
1.11 Tie columns and lintel beams are reinforced concrete. Stone flakes can be used as aggregate in
concrete admixture.
PART III: EXECUTION
Manufacture’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect and/or
work.
1. Brick
1.1 Clean the area of bricklaying, draw the lines for the correct laying alignment as indicated on the
drawings, clean the bricks [or concrete blocks].
1.2 Pour bricklayer mortar to row of brick masonry [or concrete block]. Lay the brick [or concrete block] of the first row on
the mortar, plumb and true to line. Lay the bricks [or concrete blocks] of the next row.
1.3 Tie columns and lintel beams are required at the corner of brick wall, or the brick wall which do not
attach to the reinforced concrete column, or the bottom of beam or floor, or the brick wall which
attach to door frame and window frame. Size, not less than 150 mm, width is equal to the brick.
Provide reinforcing steel bars ( diameter 6 mm, 2 bars) and lateral reinforcement ( diameter 6 mm,
every 200 mm). Reinforcing steel bars of tie columns and lintel beams shall be embedded into both
side of the reinforced concrete floor or beam or column, or welded with the steel bar.
1.4 Tie columns shall be provided every 2. 50 m of the length of the brick wall, lintel beams shall be
provided every 2.00 m of the height of the brick wall.
1.5 Install sleeve in the brick wall for piping of various building systems as indicated on the drawings such
as sanitation system, electric, air conditioned. Install sleeve carefully without the gaps around the
sleeve, and fill the gap completely using brick laying mortar.
1.5.1 Use either factory built ( Firestop Devices) or field erected ( through- Penetration Firestop
Systems) to form a specific building system maintaining required integrity of the fire barrier
and stop the passage of gases or smoke.
1.5.2 Through- penetration firestop systems and firestop devices tested in accordance with ASTM
E814, UL 1479 or UL2079 using the "F" rating at least 2 hours by test report from UL laboratory
to maintain the same rating and integrity as the fire barrier being sealed
1.6 Put steel bar (diameter 6 mm) while pouring concrete for brick masonry structure, such as at the side
of column that that will attach to the brick wall, every 400 mm of vertical line. The part of steel bar
in reinforced concrete column shall be bent as a hook. The minimum length of the steel bar that
stick out from the column is 300 mm, or install by expansion bolts later with Supervisor approval.
1.7 Lay the bricks plumb and true to line, stretch the tendon line, and use plummet at least every 500
mm of the wall height. Lay the brick to the maximum height of 1.00 m, leave the bricks for at least
3 hours before continue laying the next 1.00 m. Put a lintel beam every 2.00 m high.
1.8 The thickness of bricklaying mortar is not less than 10 mm. Lay with completely filled mortar joint
and good alignment.
1.9 To lay the brick wall attached to the bottom of the reinforced concrete beam, space the gap, not
less than 150 mm along the row, leave the gap for at least 24 hours. Fill the gap completely with
diagonally laying bricks and mortar at the bottom of the beam.
1.10 To lay the bricks attached to the building structure that tend to deflect such as post- tension floor,
prefabricated floor, or steel structure, space the gap above the wall approximately [25] [50] mm, put
the flexible materials such as foam, thickness and width are equal to the brick, in the gap along the
wall. Groove at the joint, [and grout by grouting materials: polyurethane
1.10.1 Construction joint where need movement 12.5% such as Floor to Floor, Wall to Wall, Top
of Wall or Floor to Wall should be specified Flexible Firestop Sealant ( 12. 5% movement)
by UL test report, if not specified Test report by Engineering Judgment (EJ).
1.10.2 Construction joint where need movement 25% such as Top of Wall should be specified
Elastic Firestop Sealant (25% movement) by UL test report, if not specified Test report by
Engineering Judgment (EJ).
1.10.3 Construction joint where need movement 50% such as Curtain Wall should be specified
CFS-SP-WB (50% movement) by UL test report, if not specified Test report by Engineering
Judgment (EJ).
Typical firestop Joint detail
1.11 To embedded electrical pipe or water pipe in the brick wall, size of the pipe shall not exceed 1 of 3
the width of the brick. Use electrical cutting tool to make two deep grooves. Gouge and remove the
brick from the part of the wall that the pipe will be embedded. Fully fill bricklaying mortar, and cover
by wire mesh, 200 mm wide, along the hole before plastering.
1.12 To install electrical pipe, water pipe, air conditioning system pipe with insulation along the brick wall,
size of the pipe shall not exceed 2 of 3 of the width of brick. Install pipes in advance. Lay the brick
with the gap from the pipe approximately 50 mm. Pour concrete or construct tie columns along the
pipe line at the same thickness, and the pipe shall be in the middle of tie columns. Cover wire mesh,
not less than 300 mm wide per pipe, along the 2 sides of the pipe before plastering.
2. Concrete Block
1.1 Comply with section A), B), F), and G). The pattern of concrete block for both vertical line and
horizontal line shall be aligned. For every 5 pieces of concrete block, put 2 steel bars, diameter 9
mm, along the wall height not higher than 2.00 m and wall length not longer than 3.00 m, or lay the
concrete block in accordance with manufacturer's specifications with approval of Supervisor. Space
for steel-bar shall be filled completely by concrete. Concrete block cutting shall be done neatly
using appropriate equipment. Finish the grooves using fine plastering mortar.]
3. Glass Block
3.1 Strictly comply with manufacturer's instruction with Supervisor approval. Lay the glass block
horizontally and vertically for straight line and curve line as indicated on the drawings. Grooves
around the edges are not less than 10 mm, using spacer and reinforcing steel bars ( diameter 6 mm,
2 bars) at every horizontal groove and every other vertical groove. Aligning and cleaning the glass
block wall before bricklaying mortar dry. Grout two sides of the glass block wall by grouting materials.
[ Use polyurethane as a grouting materials for expansion joint, or shrinkage joints, or movement joint
around the materials
4. Facing & Texture Solid Brick
4.1 Strictly comply with manufacturer's instruction with Supervisor approval. Lay Facing & Texture solid
brick horizontally and vertically for straight line and curve line as indicated on the drawings. All brick
tumbled surrounding cubes. Wipe the cement stain by sponge dipped with haft dry water. Prevent
facing & texture solid brick after completion at least 7 days. Coat the surface by rock coating for moss
proofing as specified in the Section Painting

5. Cleaning
5.1 Remove concrete debris, bricks debris, [or concrete block], [glass block] away, and clean the
construction area before bricklaying mortar dry and hard to clean. Decorate or grout for brick wall
carefully. Keep the brick wall, [or concrete block], [glass block] clean from scratch on the wall or
dirtiness during the whole construction period.
END
5.2.4.2: AUTOCLAVED AERATED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide autoclaved aerated concrete unit masonry where shown on the Drawings , as specified
2. References
2.2 TIS 1505¬2541(1998Autoclaved Aerated Lightweight Concrete Elements
2.3 Fire rating : Standard BS 476
2.4 ASTM C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars
2.5 ASTM C952 Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Mortar to Masonry Units
3. Submittals
requirements;
work.
4. Warranty
4.1 The Contractor shall warranty covering the installation and workmanship for a period of (2) year from
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
materials shall be major consideration. The guarantees for various architectural finishes shall be
stipulated under Construction Specification of this Contract.

1.3 Autoclaved aerated concrete block: full of bubbles, no hole, harden by autoclave, TIS 15052541(1998)
Autoclaved Aerated Lightweight Concrete Elements, standard size [ 200 mm high, 600 mm long, and
70, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200 and 250 mm thick] , as indicated on the drawings and in the
specifications.
1.3.1 The product with classification 4, types 0.7
1.3.1.1Dry density: 610-700 kg/cu m
1.3.1.2Compressive strength, f’c : minimum 40 kg/sq cm
1.3.1.3Modulus of elasticity, E : minimum 17500 kg/sq cm
1.3.1.4 Fire rating : Standard BS 476, not less than 4 hours, at 75 mm thick.
1.3.1.5Water absorption : maximum 50 % kg/cu m
1.3.1.6Thermal conductivity : maximum 0.098 W/m-K
1.4 Thin bed adhesive mortar: [ compressive strength at 28 days, not less than 100 kg/ sq cm, and bond
strength not less than 1.50 kg/sq cm , ASTM C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 50 mm cube specimens) and ASTM C952 Standard Test Method for
Bond Strength of Mortar to Masonry Units] , high- strength bonding, fine, quick to load bearing, no
friable, no crack, no need to water the block before laying. The chemical shall not create hazardous
waste which produce from chemical reaction during or after the application.
1.5 Rendering mortar: for autoclaved aerated concrete unit masonry. Ready to use when mixing with
water. [Compressive strength: maximum 50 kg/sq cm, and bond strength: minimum 1.10 kg/sq cm,
ASTM C109 and C952]
1.6 Lintels: use the light weight concrete product with 2 layers reinforced steel. Put the lintel above the
door, or the window
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
work.
1.2 Unless specified the height on the drawings, lay to the bottom of beam or floor or roof to prevent
sound transmission. To lay the block attached to the roof, space the gap for reinforced concrete
lintel beam.
1.3 Mortar Mixing:
1.3.1 Mix lightweight block bricklaying mortar with clean water, ratio mortar 1
bag: clean water 12-14 liters. Mix by mortar agitator that joined with electrical drill for 2-3
minutes until mixed.
1.3.2 Mix lightweight block plastering mortar with clean water, ratio mortar 1 bag: clean water
10-12 liters. mix by mortar agitator for 2 hours until mixed.
1.3.3 Discard mixed mortar left more than 2 hours.
1.4 Lightweight Block Bricklaying Process
1.4.1 Clean the area. Specify the length, draw the line of lightweight block bricklaying, and stretch
the monofilament line for easier in laying.
1.4.2 Put the cement mortar to the row for leveling the floor to the same level with 10-50 mm
high. Put the lightweight block bricklaying mortar by buttering trowel with 2-3 mm thick
along the bottom of the first block row.
1.4.3 Put the first block on the mortar. Use a rubber hammer and precision level to manage the
correct alignment and level.

1.4.4 Start the second block laying; put bricklaying mortar to the side of the first block. Put the
second block attach to the first block. Use a rubber hammer to knock for more adjoining.
Check precision level every time. Do the same process with the 3rd block, and 4th block,
until finishing the row.
1.4.5 If cutting the block is necessary, measure for the fit length, use a block saw to cut in vertical.
For the block in the second row, lay with alternate pattern between the bottom row and
the pattern should be overlap for half of the block, or at least 100 mm. Put thin bed
adhesive mortar to the side of the block at that row, and above the block at the bottom
row by buttering trowel, and mortar shall not spill. Put mortar along the row with no gap.
Steel plate is not required to fix the block gap.
1.4.6 The end blocks which attached to the column structure or tie columns need to be fixed
with6 mm diameter steel bar, not less than 250 mm long, or fixed with metal strap 22 mm
long, for every 2 layers of the block laying row. The steel bar shall be embedded into the
column not less than 50 mm.
1.4.7 If the wall area is larger than the product standard area, reinforced concrete tie columns
or lintel beams with the minimum size 100 mm are required. Use 2 - 6 mm diameter
reinforcing steel bars , and 6 mm diameter lateral reinforcement steel bars for every 200
mm. The end of steel bars shall be deeply embedded into the main structure of the
building such as floor, column, or beam.
1.4.8 a Corner of the wall can be interlocking but both sides of the wall must have total area
not more than the product standard area. If the total area is larger than the product
standard area, reinforced concrete tie columns and/or lintel beams are required at the
corner. Tie column shall be provided for every corners and every maximum 10 sq.m. of
bricklaying area, or as indicated according to the size and the thickness of the block.
1.4.9 For the wall with 70, 75 mm thick or more, prefabricated lintel may be used above the
doors, windows, or other openings instead of casting reinforced concrete lintel beam.
Prefabricated lintels must extend 150 mm in each direction into the wall.
1.4.10 To fix the frame to the wall, use metal strap fixed by screw to the wood frame in every
joint layers between blocks. Cover metal strap by bricklaying mortar before laying the block.
Fill the joint beside the frame tightly by mortar. If the block wall is 70, 75 mm thick, made
reinforced concrete tie columns / reinforced concrete lintel beam above the voids in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.
1.4.11 Install sleeve in the masonry wall for piping of various building systems as indicated on the
drawings such as sanitation system, electric, air conditioned. Install sleeve carefully without
the gaps around the sleeve, and fill the gap completely using brick laying mortar.
1.4.12 Use either factory built (Firestop Devices) or field erected (through-Penetration Firestop
Systems) to form a specific building system maintaining required integrity of the fire barrier
and stop the passage of gases or smoke.
1.4.12.1 Through- penetration firestop systems and firestop devices tested in accordance
with ASTM E814, UL 1479 or UL2079 using the " F" rating at least 2 hours by test
report from UL laboratory to maintain the same rating and integrity as the fire
barrier being sealed
1.4.13 To lay the bricks attached to the building structure that tend to deflect such as post-tension
floor, prefabricated floor, or steel structure, space the gap above the wall approximately
[25] [50] mm, put the flexible materials such as foam, thickness and width are equal to the
brick, in the gap along the wall. Groove at the joint, [and grout by grouting materials:
polyurethane].
1.4.13.1 Construction joint where need movement 12.5% such as Floor to Floor, Wall to
Wall, Top of Wall or Floor to Wall should be specified Flexible Firestop Sealant
( 12. 5% movement) by UL test report, if not specified Test report by Engineering
Judgment (EJ).
1.4.13.2 Construction joint where need movement 25% such as Top of Wall should be
specified Elastic Firestop Sealant (25% movement) by UL test report, if not specified
Test report by Engineering Judgment (EJ).
1.4.13.3 Construction joint where need movement 50% such as Curtain Wall should be
specified CFS-SP-WB (50% movement) by UL test report, if not specified Test report
by Engineering Judgment (EJ).
Typical firestop Joint detail
END
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide galvanized steel frame and steel frame where shown on the Drawings , as specified
2. References
2.2 TIS 863-2532 (1989) Steel Frame for Fixing Wall Panel [1st class quality classified]
2.3 TIS 107-2533 Tube Steel Frame
2.4 TIS 1228-2549 Angle Steel Frame (Cold Forming)
3. Performance
4. Submittals
requirements;
specified type of material size is 300 mm. or close that will be used with not less than 2 samples.
5. Warranty
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Galvanized wall frame: size not less than [30x70] mm, steel plate thickness not less than [0.50] mm,
distance of vertical frame for every [300] [400] [600] mm. [TIS 863-2532 (1989) Steel Frame for Fixing
Wall Panel [1st class quality classified]
1.2 Steel wall frame: unless specified: use size [50x50x3.2], [75x45x2.3] mm.@ 600x600 mm. or as
specified on the drawings.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
work.
1.2 Verify the drawings and coordinate with the installers of electrical system, air conditioning system
and other systems that related with galvanized steel frame such as preparation for steel structure
that fixed with the door frame.
2. Gulvanized Steel frame
2.1 Installation of Wall Frame.
1.3.1 Specify the alignment of the wall that will be installed, draw the line on the floor and the
bottom of the next floor. If the wall is not attached to the bottom of the next floor, the wall
may be reinforced with steel at the top and at the sides, according to Engineer approval.
Install u-section frame according to the line, fix to the floor and the bottom of the next floor
by steel cleat, diameter not less than 6 mm, every 600 mm ( if the floor is not concrete or
the floor is steel structure, use appropriate fixing material.)
1.3.2 Cut the C-section stud, the length is according to the wall height, put the stud in the u-section
rail that plumb to the floor at every 300, 400, or 600 mm in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation or the agreement from Engineer. Fix C-section stud and u-section stud by
screw or punch wrench for 1 point at each side. If the material wall has vertically joints higher
than 2400 mm, reinforce the wall with u- section steel to support the next board panel that
will be installed.
1. Steel frame
bottom of the next floor. If the wall is not attached to the bottom of the next floor, the
wall may be reinforced with steel at the top and at the sides, according to Engineer
approval. Install steel frame according to the line.
1.3.2 Install steel frame, the length is according to the wall height, put the steel frame that
plumb to the floor at every 300, 400, or 600 mm in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation, the agreement from Engineer or as specified on drawings. If the material
wall has vertically joints higher than 2400 mm, reinforce the wall with steel frame to
support the next board panel that will be installed.
END
5.2.3.4: WOOD FRAME
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide wood frame where shown on the Drawings , as specified here in and as needed
2. References
2.2 Wood for construction in accordance with the standard of the Royal Forest
Department.
3. Submittals
requirements;
specified type of material size is 300 mm. or close that will be used with not less than 2 samples.
4. Warranty
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Size of wood after dressing may be smaller than the size indicated on the drawings, but not smaller
than the following lists. Size after dressed not less than ½” [8 mm] 1” [18 mm] 1 ½” [30 mm] 2” [43
mm] From 3” [(-10 mm)]
1.2 Wood: [wood for construction in accordance with the standard of the Royal Forest Department], new,
no defect that could affect bearing capacity, completely dry, no sapwood, no crack, straight and not
bend..
1.3 Hardwood: [Teng or equivalent] for parts that cannot be seen, and apply wood preservative. For the
parts that can be seen, used [Daeng or equivalent], and apply wood preservative. The chemical shall
not create hazardous waste which produce from chemical reaction during or after the application.
1.4 Softwood: use for stud wall. Use [Yang] treated by chemical from the factory with the same quality
as the Chemical Treatment Plant of the Forest Industry Organization. The Forest Industry Organization
wood chemical treatment process require drying wood until moisture in the wood is approximately
30%. Treat the wood with chemical by mixing 1/2 pound of dry chemical per 1 cult of wood. Wood
for stud wall shall be dressed from the factory only.
1.5 Others in accordance with the drawing with the approval by engineer.
1.6 Paints for architectural woodwork are products indicated in the Section Painting.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
work.
and other systems that related with wood frame such as preparation for wood structure that fixed
with the door frame.
Specify the alignment of the wall that will be installed, draw the line on the floor and the
wall may be reinforced with wood at the top and at the sides, according to Engineer
approval. Install wood frame according to the line.
1.3.1 Install wood frame, the length is according to the wall height, put the wood frame that
plumb to the floor at every 300, 400, or 600 mm in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation, the agreement from engineer or as specified on drawings. If the material
wall has vertically joints higher than 2400 mm, reinforce the wall with wood frame to
support the next board panel that will be installed.
END
5.2.5.5: CEMENT PLASTERING

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide cement plastering where shown on the Drawings , as specified here in and as
2. References
2.2 TIS 1776-2542 : Dry mortar for plastering

2.3 TIS 15, TIS 80-2517, TIS 133-2518, TIS 241-2541, TIS 566-2528, TIS 849-2532
2.4 ASTM C 35-95 Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum Plaster
2.5 ASTM C 88-90 Standard Test Method for soundness of Aggregates by use of Sodium
Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
2.6 ASTM C 91-97c Masonry Cement
2.7 ASTM C 807- 89 Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement Mortar by Modified
Vicat Needle
2.8 ASTM C 897-95a Aggregate for Job Mixed Portland Cement-Based Plasters
2.9 BS 1199: 1976 ( Amendment No. 2 1985 and No. 3 1986) Sand for External renderings and internal
plastering with lime and Portland cement
2.10 DIN 18550-1985 Part 1 Plaster; Terminology and requirements
2.11 DIN 18550-1985 Part 2 Plaster; Plasters made of mortars containing mineral binders:
application
3. Performance
4. Submittals
requirements;
work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Plastering Mortar
1.3.1 Plastering mortar: fine plastering mortar.
1.3.2 Concrete plastering mortar.
1.3.3 Skim coat: 1-3 mm thick.
1.3.4 Lightweight block plastering mortar: in accordance with the Section
Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Unit Masonry
1.2 Water: clean, no oil, neutral, no salt and no plants. If the quality of water in the construction area is
not good, provide clean water to use from other places, and strictly comply with the manufacturer's
instruction by approval from Supervisor.
1.3 Waterproofing admixture (if specified on the drawings).
1.4 Bonding agent: acrylic.
1.5 Joint sealants: paintable, in accordance with the Section Joint Sealants.
1.6 Beads or PVC grooves.
1.7 Wire mesh: square grid, [galvanized], grid size 3/4".
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Surface Preparation
1.1 The surface that will be plastered shall finish not less than 3 days before plastering, clean, no dust,
no oil, no concrete debris, or others that might result in loss of bond strength. Too smooth surface
because of smooth shuttering shall be made rough by surface cracking or other methods approved
from Supervisor. Before plastering, verify vertical and plumb of the surface before beading and stick
the level button to the wall, distance of each level button not over 2. 00 m, and leave until dry. If
the wall row is error more than 25 mm, install wire mesh by concrete screw, and finish vertical and
plumb by plastering mortar. If the wall row is error more than 40 mm, fix that wall before plastering
according to Supervisor approval.
2. Pastering
2.2 Plaster for two layers, the first layer is approximately 8 mm thick and the second layer is
approximately 7 mm thick. For each plastering, do not add more water to the admixture, and use all
of the admixture for plastering within 45 minutes after mixing the plastering mortar.
3. Maintenance
3.1 After plastering of each layer, cure plastering surface by spraying water to all of the wall to provide
dampness at all time and protect the wall from direct sunlight or wind. Mortar curing is an important
work Gloss Value Testing: The owner may inspect the gloss value of concrete surface after completion
of polishing step.
3.2 After finish mortar plastering, clean all involved place, no stain, no dirtiness, no damage until finish
or painting for the next step.
4. Repair
1.1 Plastering surface shall adhere tightly to all of the wall. If some parts have a strange sound or loud
sound when knocking, or are cracking, fix by chipping the problem areas, cleaning and wetting the
area. Repair plastering using cement plastering with acrylic bonding agent. The finished surface shall
be homogeneous with the previous concrete surface.
1.2 If the plastering surface is cracking but not peeled off, cut the deep groove by fiber and filled by
paintable joint sealants.
1.3 To repair the concrete structure work that have hole or cracking, materials and process approval
from Supervisor or Engineer is needed. Repair at Contractor's expense before plastering or finishing
the surface of that structure.
END
5.2.5.6: FIBER CEMENT BOARD AND PLANK

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide fiber cement board and plank where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in and
as needed for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of these Specifications
2. References

3. Performance
3.1 Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3
years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
4. Submittals
4.1 Submit Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with
specified requirements;
4.2 Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Architect and/or Engineer will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual
installation procedures used on the work.
5. Warranty
5.1 The Contractor shall warranty covering the installation and workmanship for a period of
(2) year from acceptance of the completed of contract.
5.2 The Contractor shall warranty covering the materials for a period of (5) year from acceptance of the
completed of contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials.
1.1 Fiber cement board, thickness as indicated on the Drawings. Seal all cutting edges with approved
water repellent or non-staining silicone type.
Technical Data of Materials

Properties of Product Standard Unit Test Result
Length ASTM C1185 mm. +/-2.5
Width ASTM C1185 mm. +/-5
Thickness ASTM C1185 mm. +/-1
Density ASTM C1185 g./cm3 1.2
Moisture Content ASTM C1185 % 5
Water Absorption ASTM C1185 % 30
Dimensional Stability ASTM C1185 % 0.27
Ignitability BS 476 Part 5 - Pass
Fire Propagation Index BS 476 Part 6 - I=O
Surface Speed of frame BS 476 Part 7 - Class 1
Fire Resistance BS 476 Part 22 - 30-60 Minute
PH-Value - PH 9
MOE ASTM C1185 Mpa 5,000-8,000
Flexural Strength ASTM C1185 Mpa 11-15
Thermal Conductivity ASTM C177-97 W/m.K 0.184
Thermal Resistance ASTM C177-97 m2.K/W 0.082
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Installation
work.
END
5.2.5.7: GYPSUM BOARD WALLING
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide gypsum board where shown on the Drawings , as specified here in and as needed for
2. References
2.2 TIS 219-2552 (2009) Gypsum Board
2.3 TIS 863-2532 (1989) Steel Frame for Fixing Wall Panel [1st class quality classified]
3. Performance
4. Submittals
requirements;
work.
5. Warranty
5.1 The Contractor shall warranty covering the installation and workmanship for a period of (1) year from
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Gypsum board: [ 9] [ 12] [ 15] mm thick, type: standard, moisture resistant, heat insulation, or fire
resistant in accordance with the drawings. size: 1200x2400 mm, tapered edge for wall [TIS 219-2552
(2009) Gypsum Board]
1.2 Galvanized wall frame: size not less than [30x70] mm, steel plate thickness not less than [0.50] mm,
distance of vertical frame for every [300] [400] [600] mm. [TIS 863-2532 (1989) Steel Frame for Fixing
Wall Panel [1st class quality classified]
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Installation
work.
and other systems that related with gypsum wall such as preparation for steel structure that fixed
with the door frame.
1.3 If the wall hatch is needed for service and building systems, install the hatch securely and neatly as
1.4 Installation of Plastered Wall Frame and Gypsum Board
wall may be reinforced with steel at the top and at the sides, according to Supervisor
approval. Install u- section frame according to the line, fix to the floor and the bottom of
the next floor by steel cleat, diameter not less than 6 mm, every 600 mm (if the floor is not
concrete or the floor is steel structure, use appropriate fixing material.)
1.4.2 Cut the C- section stud, the length is according to the wall height, put the stud in the u-
section rail that plumb to the floor at every 300, 400, or 600 mm in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation or the agreement from Supervisor. Fix C- section stud and
u- section stud by screw or punch wrench for 1 point at each side. If the gypsum wall has
vertically joints higher than 2400 mm, reinforce the wall with u-section steel to support the
next gypsum board panel that will be installed.
1.4.3 For tapered edge gypsum board, [12] [15] mm thick, install with vertical frame and raise the
edge from the floor for at least 10 mm to prevent water or dampness from the floor. Fix
with steel frame by drywall screws size 25 mm [ or 38 mm for gypsum board. Distance for
each screw: 300 mm at the middle row of the panel and 200 mm at the edge row of the
panel, and 10-15 mm from the gypsum board edge. Screw head shall be embedded to the
gypsum panel approximately 1- 1. 5 mm ( do not pierce through the gypsum panel) , install
using screw drivers.
1.4.4 Install trim to every edge and corner for neatness and beauty.
1.4.5 Plaster mortar to cover joints, gypsum panel trims, and screw heads by plastering mortar
and gypsum tape for 3 layers, leave until plastering mortar is completely dry in each layer,
polish by sandpaper before painting or finishing.
1.4.6 If the wall is designed for soundproofing or to be a fire barrier, consult with manufacturer or
follow the agreement from Supervisor.
END
5.2.5.8: ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL-WALL AND CEILING

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide aluminum composite panels where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in and
as needed for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of these
1.1.2 The term of aluminum composite panels shall include aluminum composite panels, metal
stud, stell support, sealant and accessories.
2. References
Employer’s representative shall be the sole judge as to whether the proposed standards
adequately support the design intent.
2.2 ECCA (European Coil Coating Association)
2.3 AAMA (American Aluminum Manufacturer Association)
2.4 ASTM D 2244-89 “Color Retention” or EN 13523-3
2.5 ASTM D 523-86 “Gloss Retention” or EN 13523-2
2.6 ASTM D 4214-89 “Chalk Resistance” or EN 13523-14
2.7 ASTM D 3359-method B “Adhesion Test” or EN 13523-6
2.8 ASTM D 3363-92a “Pencil Hardness” or EN 13523-4
2.9 ASTM D 968-81 “Abrasive Resistance” or EN 13523-12
2.10 ASTM D 2247-94“Humidity Resistance” or EN 13523-25
2.11 AAMA2605 approved exterior exposure weather ability 10 yrs.@45º,South Florida Test Site Passed
2.12 Non-Combustible Core Standard as follow :
- UBC 26-9 & NFPA285(Intermediate scale multi-story apparatus test) Passed
- ASTM E-108 (For roofing covering) Passed
- ASTM E-119 (Fire rating test) 2 Hours
- ASTM E-84 (Steiner tunnel test) Class A
- DIN4102 Part1 (Reaction to fire test) Class B1
- UL-94 (Horizontal burning test) V-0
- ISO-TR9122-3 (Toxic fumed evaluation test) Lower than IDHL value limits
- BS476 Part 7 (Surface spread of flame) Class 1
- BS476 Part 6 (Test for fire propagation) Class 0
- BS476 Part 5 (Test for determine ignitability) Passed
3. Submittals
3.1 Submit Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified
requirements;
3.2 Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect
and/or Engineer will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used
on the work.
specified type of material size is 300x300 mm. or close that will be used with not less than 2
samples.
5. Warranty
5.1 The Contractor shall warranty covering the installation and workmanship for a period of (2) year
from acceptance of the completed of contract.
5.2 The Contractor shall warranty materials for a period of 20 years from acceptance of the completed
of contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 The aluminum composite material shall be composing of Non-Combustible mineral filled core
sandwiched between two skins of 0.5 mm-thick aluminum sheets and total sheet thickness shall be
4.0 mm.
1.2 Two kinds of coating system for fluorocarbon coating Kynar500® or Hylar5000® Polyvinylidene
Fluoride (PVDF) (up to 70% resin)
1.3 The surface is finished with KYNAR 500 or HYLAR5000 PVDF Based or FEVE-Based fluorocarbon
coating or other equivalent approval on the top side and service coating on the reverse
side.(Polyester Coating)
1.4 Two kinds of coating system for KYNAR 500 or Hylar5000® Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF base) (up
to 70% resin) or FEVE-Based fluorocarbon coating shall be selected by the Architect for achieving of
the architectural design intent.
1.4.1 “Solid Color” is two-bake system. The total dry film thickness shall be 25μ minimum
consisting of a conversion coating, an inhibitive primer and KYNAR 500 or HYLAR 5000 PVDF
Based or FEVE -Based fluorocarbon coating.
1.4.2 “Metallic Color” and “Sparkling Color” are three-coat three-brake system or four-coat four-
brake system. The total dry film thickness shall be 35μ minimum consisting of a conversion
coating, an inhibitive primer, KYNAR 500 or HYLAR 5000 PVDF Based or FEVE -Based metallic
coating and clear coating.
1.4.3 “Stone series” and “Timber Series” are coated with a unique image transfer process. The
total dry film thickness shall be 45μ minimum consisting of a conversion coating, an
inhibitive primer, and KYNAR 500 or HYLAR 5000 PVDF Based or FEVE -Based fluorocarbon
coating including the image transfer layer.
1.4.4 The Coating System in Pre-Painted; Coil Coater category Quality Control and Certificates by
ECCA or AAMA
1.4.5 Or AAMA2605 approved exterior exposure weather ability 10 yrs.@45º,s Florida Test Site
Passed .
1.5 The finished surface shall be protected with a self-adhesive peel off film with two polyethylene
layers of white and black
1.6 Composition
1.6.1 Skin material (Front & Back) – 0.5 mm. thick aluminum sheet. (3xxx-Hxx or 5xxx-Hxx)
1.6.2 Tensile Strength ASTM E-8 : 5.0 kg/cm2
1.6.3 Yield strength ASTM E:8 : ≥4.4 kg/cm2
1.6.4 Elongation ASTM E:8 : 11%
1.6.5 Flexural Elasticity ASTM C393 :3660-7000 kg/mm2
1.6.6 Sound Transmission Loss ASTM E413 not less than 25.3 - 29 STC
1.6.7 Punching shear resistance ASTM D732
- Maximum load (50 mm) : 2,040-2117 kg.
- Shear resistance : ≥ 3.3 kg/mm2
1.7 Core Material-Non-Combustible mineral filled core consisting of Al (OH)3 or Mg (OH)2 (which
achieves following fire tests:
1.7.1 ISMA (Intermediate Scale Multi-story Apparatus) Test (UBC 26-9 & NFPA285)
1.7.2 ASTM E-119 (2-hr Fire Rating)

1.7.3 DIN 4102 Part 1 : Class B1
1.7.4 Combustion Toxicity Test-New York uniform Fire Prevention & Building Code
1.7.5 Silicone Sealant
Silicone Sealant for aluminum cladding panel should be neutral curing, (non-stain ASTM
C1248 pass) architectural grade silicone sealant for metal panel.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 Manufacture’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect
and/or Engineer will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used
on the work.
END
5.2.5.9: METAL SHEET SIDING

PART I: DECRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide metal sheet siding where shown on the Drawings , as specified here in and as needed
2. References
2.2 Australian Standard AS 1397-2011 Continuous Hot-Dip Metallic Coated Steel Sheet
and Strip or equivalent
2.3 Color coating: AS 2728-2013 Prefinished/ Pre-Painted Sheet Metal Products for
Interior/ Exterior Building Application or equivalent
3. Submittals
requirements;
work.
4. Warranty
4.1 The contractor shall warranty covering the installation and workmanship for period of (2) years from
4.2 The contractor shall warranty materials for period of (30) years from acceptance of the completed of
contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS

1. Materials
1.1 Sheet metal siding and flashing with bolt system.
1.2 Sheet metal siding shall have shape, size as specified on the drawings, and have properties as follows.
aMetal sheet: coated by corrosion protection coating [alloy comprises aluminum 55%, zinc 43.4% ,
and silicon 1.6%] or [alloy comprises aluminum 55%, zinc 45%] [[AZ150], Australian Standard AS 1397-
2011 Continuous Hot-Dip Metallic Coated Steel Sheet and Strip - coatings of zinc and zinc alloyed
with aluminium and magnesium or equivalent.]
1.2.1 Minimum yield strength not less than] 550 Mpa )G550 .[(
1.2.2 Color coating :AS 2728-2013 Prefinished /Pre-Painted Sheet Metal Products for Interior /Exterior
Building Applications –performance requirements or equivalent .color defined later
1.2.2.1 Topside coating layer comprises ]primer :5 microns thick, undercoating polyester :20
microns thick .[
1.2.2.2 Underside coating layer comprises ]grey polyester :5 microns thick, undercoating by
primer :5 microns thick .[
1.2.3 Sheet metal thickness, not including coating layer, BMT not less than 0.48 mm .
1.2.4 Sheet metal siding must be one sheet along the length of wall, fixed by bolt system .
1.3 Self-drilling screw:
1.3.1 Comply to AS3566-2002 Section 5.3(b) Outdoor Exposure testing (Class 3) for Self-Drilling
screws used externally in industrial buildings
1.3.2 Comply to AS3566-2002 Section 5.4(a) Outdoor Exposure testing (Class 4) for Self-Drilling
screws used externally in marine or severe industrial zones
1.4 Products shall have manufacturer's trademark
1.5 Transportation can support the maximum sheet length at 24 m. Sheet length over 24 meters shall
use onsite forming machine. Consult with manufacturer before selecting the sheet length
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
work.
1.2 Install sheet metal siding as indicated on the approved shop drawings. Installation for the other parts
related to sheet metal siding such as translucent wall panels, metal ceiling, and ventilation louvers
shall follow manufacturer's suggestion with approval from Supervisor.
1.2.1 Installed by bolt systems, and self- drilling screw ( wafer head) follow manufacturer's
suggestion with approval from Supervisor.
1.2.2 Recommended length of the center pintal is 1. 70 m, the maximum length of the center
pintal for roof is 2. 00m, Australian Standard: AS 1562. 1- 1992 Design and Installation of
Sheet Roof and Wall Cladding - Metal and AS 4040.1-1992 Methods of Testing Sheet Roof
and Wall Cladding - Resistance to Concentrated Loads.
1.3 Testing and Cleaning
1.3.1 After installation, test for wall leak by spraying water according to suggestion from
Supervisor. If there is leakage, repair or replace without additional charge.
1.3.2 Before the last term of closeout procedures, completely clean the siding and wall.
END
5.2.6.1: GYPSUM BOARD CEILING

PART I: DECRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Contractor shall provide quality equipment, skilled labor and have quality control system in
gypsum board installation as indicated on the drawings and in the specifications.
1.1.2 Contractor shall provide samples with the details and installation processes such as gypsum
boards and ceiling frames including accessories to Supervisor of approval before installation.
1.1.3 Contractor shall provide the following shop drawings to Supervisor for approval
(1) Layout, elevation, section of ceiling present frame alignment, dimension and position
of lamps, supply air grills, sprinklers, and others which complete the systems.
(2) Detail drawings of installation at the edge, corner, joint of ceiling and building structure.
(3) Detail drawings of fixing, suspending with building structure or roof structure.
2. References
2.2 TIS 219-2552 (2009) Gypsum Board
2.3 TIS 863-2532 (1989) Steel Frame for Fixing Ceiling Panel [1st class quality classified]
3. Performance and Testing Requirements
3.1 General Requirements:
3.1.1 Within the parameters set forth in the above mentioned documentation, the Contractor is
responsible for the technical and engineering of the system including whatever modifications
or additions may be required to meet the specified requirements while maintaining the visual
design concept.
3.2 Qualifications of Gypsum Board Contractors:
3.2.1 Able to prove successful performance and regular engagement in the engineering,
manufacture, finishing, installation, gypsum board on projects of similar complexity and scope
over a period of at least five (5) years. Works shall have included the design & engineering, the
construction of major gypsum board installations, including any required secondary supporting
structure associated with the gypsum board scope. Submit reference list for at least 3
completed projects for which contractor provided scope of services similar to that defined in
these contract documents. Submit reference list for at least 1 completed project which
contractor provided the similar gypsum board design; provide name of project, location and
start date.
3.2.2 Demonstration of fabrication capability to achieve the required tolerances supporting the
gypsum board. Contractor or Contractor’ s fabricator must be able to show successful
fabrication of structures of similar in scope and complexity over a period of at least five ( 5)
years. Submit a list of at least 3 completed projects for which the Contractor or the
Contractor’s fabricator provided steel fabrication services.
3.2.3 Demonstration of ability to engineer and deliver quality integrated gypsum board factory.
Contractor must be able to show successful design, engineering, fabrication and supply of
integrated gypsum board and structure systems for projects for at least five (5) years. Submit
a list of at least 5 completed projects for which the Contractor provided ceiling systems similar
in scope and complexity as described by these contract documents.

3.2.4 The Engineer or/ and Architect reserves the right to visit the fabricating facilities of the
Contractor and/or sub-contractors at any time when the work is in progress. All shop and field
materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer at all times.
3.2.5 Conformance with the requirements shall be demonstrated, where applicable, by submitting
appropriate manufacturer's standard test reports, calculations and/or conformance letters.
3.2.6 The work as erected shall meet or exceed the following structural and weather resistance
requirements as demonstrated by engineering calculations and mockup testing. Methods of
fabrication and assembly shall be at the discretion of the Contractor provided that the exterior
and interior visible architectural effect is not changed, the work of other Contractors not
affected and weather tightness and strength qualities as demonstrated by engineering
calculations and measured by the results of the tests for performance requirements are not
reduced. Remedial measures which may be necessary on the mock- ups or the building shall
maintain standards of quality and durability and are subject to approval by the Engineer.
3.2.7 Provision for movement of the structure: Gypsum board system shall be designed to
accommodate dead and live load deflection and/or sway of the building frame as may be
anticipated. To this end the Contractor shall obtain all necessary projected data from the
structural Engineer of record for the base building and make such provision in the gypsum
board system as may be necessary.
3.2.8 Design Criteria: Design and size members to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by
hail, wind (pressure and suction), seismic requirements, temperature range, point and other
loading requirements, as calculated in accordance with applicable codes and the local code.
4. Submittals
requirements;
5. Warranty
5.1 The Contractor shall warrant for two (2) years from the date of substantial completion. The work
related to the integrated gypsum board that the work is not defective in workmanship or materials
and conforms to the final approved shop drawings.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. General
1.1 The drawings and details show a gypsum board and others design concept utilizing an integrated
approach between the ceiling and supporting structure.
2. Materials
1. Gypsum board: 9 ,12 ,13, 15-16, 59 mm. (9mm.thk. gypsum board+ 50 mm. EPS Hi-Dense Foam) thick,
type: standard, moisture resistant, heat insulation, or fire resistant in accordance with the drawings.
size: 1200x2400 mm., tapered edge for wall or tapers edge 4 sides for plastered ceiling.
2. T-bar ceiling panel: size 600x600 mm. ,9 mm. thick, square edge or 600x1200 mm., 12 mm. thick in
accordance with the drawing.
3. Finishes
3.1 Provide high durability corrosion protection finish consisting of the following paint system. Equivalent
performing paint systems shall be allowed subject to the Engineer or/and Architect approval.
3.2 The Engineer and/or Architect shall select color from complete line of manufacturer's finishes. One
color may be selected for interior and a second color for exterior pressure caps.
3.3 Galvanized steel: machined finish on all fittings, standard stainless steel finish on rods and cables.
4. Gypsum Board
4.1 General:
4.1.1 For all gypsum boards, provide the type and thickness shown on the Drawings or specified
herein.
4.1.2 Where thickness and ceiling accessories or both, are not shown on the Drawings or specified
herein the contractor must provide as necessary complete and proper installation or as
directed by the Architect or/and Engineer.
4.2 Gypsum board: Comply with code applicable standards regulation and design intent
4.3 Heat Resistance gypsum board ceiling- Heat Resistance gypsum board ceiling as consist gypsum and
EPS Hi-Dense Foam
4.3.1 Size – 600 x 600 x 29 mm. (gypsum board 9 mm. thick, EPS Hi-Dense Foam 20 mm. = 29 mm.
thick.)
4.3.2 Size – 595 x 595 x 59 mm. (gypsum board 9 mm. thick, EPS Hi-Dense Foam 50 mm. thick = 59
mm. thick)
4.3.3 Size – 1.20 x 2.40 x 9 mm. (gypsum board 2 mm. thick, EPS Hi-Dense Foam 20 mm. thick = 29
mm. thick)
4.3.4 Size – 1.20 x 2.40 x 9 mm. (gypsum board 9 mm. thick, EPS Hi-Dense Foam 50 mm. thick = 59
mm. thick)
5. Metal stud ceiling frame
5.1 Plastered ceiling frame:
5.1.1 The plastered ceiling frame made of galvanized, size not less than [14x37] mm, steel plate not
less than [0.50] mm thick, distance of the main stud (vertical) for every [1000] mm and cross
pieces (horizontal) for every [400] mm, wire hanger diameter not less than 4 mm for every
1200x1200 mm with butterfly stainless adjustable clip [TIS 863-2532 (1989) Steel Frame for
Fixing Ceiling Panel and Wall Panel [1st Class Quality Classified] [2nd Class Quality Classified]]
5.2 General T-Bar ceiling frame:
5.2.1 T-bar ceiling frame made of galvanized, steel plate thickness not less than [0.30] mm, bending
and forming 2 layers, main stud not less than 38 mm high, distance for every 1200 mm, cross
piece height not less than 25 mm distance for every 600 mm or 1200 mm. wire hanger diameter
not less than 4 mm for every 1200x1200 mm with spring adjustable clip.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.2 Verify the drawings and coordinate with the installers of electrical system, air conditioning system and
other systems that relates with gypsum ceiling such as preparation for steel structure that fixed the
wire hanger of the ceiling frame, lamp fixing, supply air grill fixing of air conditioning system for a
secure, neat, and beautiful gypsum board work.
1.3 If the ceiling hatch is needed for service and building systems or roof maintenance, install the hatch
securely and neatly as specified on the drawings.
1.4 Ceiling height as specified on the drawings, might be slightly changed according to Supervisor
instruction.
2. Installation
2.1 Inspect each piece of gypsum board immediately prior to start of installation.
Installation of Plastered Celling Frame and Gypsum Board
2.2.1 Fix angle of the plastered ceiling edge around wall firmly and strongly by steel cleats or
concrete nails to the required level as specified o the drawings, Fix 2 holes angle steel to the
bottom of the nest floor at distance 1000x1200 mm (distance of the main studs is 1000 mm,
distance between hangers is 1200 mm) by steel cleats, diameter not less than 6 mm. distance
of the first main studs alignment from the wall is 300 mm.
2.2.2 Measure height from the edge of angle steel to the bottom of the next floor for the 4 mm
wire cutting, assembly frame hanger set using adjustable clip, bend the end of one side of
the 4 mm wire as a hook (or use angle steel if a space between ceiling and the bottom of the
next floor is less than 200 mm)
2.2.3 Hang all of the hanger sets that have already assembled to the 2 holes angle steel that have
already installed. The hanger set alignment shall be vertically.
2.2.4 Install the main studs at the hook of the hanger set to the installation area. The distance of
main studs shall be every 1000mm.
2.2.5 Install noggin studs the main studs using locking keys. Install noggin studs for every 400 mm.
2.2.6 Adjust the level of all frames thoroughly at adjustable clip, verify the level as specified on the
drawings before installing gypsum boards.
2.2.7 Install tapered edge gypsum boards 9 mm thick to mugging studs. The long side (2400 mm)
shall be perpendicular to noggin stud row. Fixed by gypsum screws size 25 mm, distance for
each screw is 300 mm at the middle row of the panel and 200 mm at the edge row of the
panel, and 10-15 mm from the gypsum edge. Screw head shall be embedded to the gypsum
panel approximately 1-1.5 mm (shall not pierce through the gypsum panels) , install using
screw drivers.
2.2.8 Install trims to every edge and corner for neatness and beautiful.
2.2.9 Plaster cover to the joints, trim of gypsum panels, and screw heads by plastering mortar and
gypsum tape for 3 layers, leave until the plastering mortar is completely dry in each layer,
polish by sandpaper before painting or finishing.
Installation of T-Bar Ceiling Frame and Gypsum Board
1. Fix angle of the T-bar edge to around wall by steel cleats or concrete nails with the required
level as specified on the drawings. Fix 2 holes angle steel to the bottom of the next floor at
distance 1210 x 1210 mm by steel cleats, diameter not less than 6 mm.
2. Measure height from the edge of angle steel T-bar to the bottom of the next floor for cutting
the top hanger wire diameter not less than 4 mm. and assembly hanger set by using spring
adjustable clip and the bottom hanger wire diameter not less than 4 mm together.
3. Hang all of the hanger set to the 2 holes angle steel that have already prepares, The hanger
set alignment shall be vertical.
4. Hang the main studs to the hanger set, hook the wire to the hole of the ridge on the stud,
bind the strand tightly , install the main studs to the installation area, distance of each main
stud is 1210 mm. The studs should be parallel or perpendicular to the wall.
5. Install noggin studs, 1210 mm long to the hole of the main studs for every 605 mm, install
perpendicular to the main studs, distance of the frame ridge is 605 x 1210 mm for placing T-
bar panel size 600 x 600 mm, add short noggin studs size 605 mm. and install at the hole in
the middle of noggin studs length 1210 mm by placing perpendicular to the long noggin studs.
6. Adjust the level of all frames using the adjustable clip, verify the level as specified on the
drawings before installing gypsum boards size (600x600 mm, 9 mm thick) (600x1200 mm, 12
mm thick) that have already painted or finished.
7. Ridge dimension of the frame and size of T-bar panel in the section or size and dimension in
gypsum board system. use dimension and size as follows:
Ridge dimension Size of T-Bar panel

System
Of the fame (mm) (mm)
600 x 600 595 x 595
Metric
600 x 1200 595 x 1195
610 x 610 605 x 605
Inch- Pound
610 x 1220 605 x 1215
2.2 Maintenance
The plastered gypsum board shall be align, level, plumb, meat, and beautiful. For T-bar ceiling, The
T-bar row shall be align, straight, no twist, level, plumb, neat, and beautiful. Protect gypsum board
work form dirtiness and damage during the whole construction period.
END
5.2.6.2: ACOUSTICAL CEILING

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Contractor shall provide quality equipment, skilled labor and have quality control system
in acoustical ceilings installation as indicated on the drawings and in the Specifications.
1.1.2 Contractor shall provide samples with the details and acoustical ceiling installation process
such as acoustic board, ceiling frame and accessories to Supervisor for approval before
installation.
1.1.3 Contractor shall provide the following shop drawings to Architect for approval before
installation.
1.1.3.1 Celling plan presents frame alignment, dimension and position of lamps, supply
air grills, sprinklers and others.
1.1.3.2 Detail drawings of installation at the edge, corner, joint of walls and building
structure.
1.1.3.3 Detail drawings of fixing, suspending with building structure or roof structure or
wall.
1.1.3.4 Other relates or required detail drawings such as electricity conduit installation,
condensate drain pipe, ceiling hatch.
1.1.4 Contractor shall provide written warranty for unbend ceiling for ( 10) years under relative
humidity (RH) not over 99%, and temperature not over (49) C
2. References
2.2 TIS 219-2552 (2009) Gypsum Board
2.3 TIS 863-2532 (1989) Steel Frame for Fixing Ceiling Panel [1st class quality
classified]
3.1.1 Within the parameters set forth in the above mentioned documentation, the Contractor is
responsible for the technical and engineering of the system including whatever modifications
or additions may be required to meet the specified requirements while maintaining the visual
design concept.
3.2 Qualifications of Gypsum Board Contractors:
3.2.1 Able to prove successful performance and regular engagement in the engineering,
manufacture, finishing, installation, gypsum board on projects of similar complexity and scope
over a period of at least five (5) years. Works shall have included the design & engineering, the
construction of major gypsum board installations, including any required secondary supporting
structure associated with the gypsum board scope. Submit reference list for at least 3
completed projects for which contractor provided scope of services similar to that defined in
these contract documents. Submit reference list for at least 1 completed project which
contractor provided the similar gypsum board design; provide name of project, location and
start date.
3.2.2 Demonstration of fabrication capability to achieve the required tolerances supporting the
gypsum board. Contractor or Contractor’ s fabricator must be able to show successful
fabrication of structures of similar in scope and complexity over a period of at least five ( 5)
years. Submit a list of at least 3 completed projects for which the Contractor or the
Contractor’s fabricator provided steel fabrication services.
3.2.3 Demonstration of ability to engineer and deliver quality integrated gypsum board factory.
Contractor must be able to show successful design, engineering, fabrication and supply of
integrated gypsum board and structure systems for projects for at least five (5) years. Submit
a list of at least 5 completed projects for which the Contractor provided ceiling systems similar
in scope and complexity as described by these contract documents.
3.2.4 The Engineer or/ and Architect reserves the right to visit the fabricating facilities of the
Contractor and/or sub-contractors at any time when the work is in progress. All shop and field
materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer at all times.
3.2.5 Conformance with the requirements shall be demonstrated, where applicable, by submitting
appropriate manufacturer's standard test reports, calculations and/or conformance letters.
requirements as demonstrated by engineering calculations and mockup testing. Methods of
fabrication and assembly shall be at the discretion of the Contractor provided that the exterior
and interior visible architectural effect is not changed, the work of other Contractors not
affected and weather tightness and strength qualities as demonstrated by engineering
calculations and measured by the results of the tests for performance requirements are not
reduced. Remedial measures which may be necessary on the mock- ups or the building shall
maintain standards of quality and durability and are subject to approval by the Engineer.
3.2.7 Provision for movement of the structure: Gypsum board system shall be designed to
structural Engineer of record for the base building and make such provision in the gypsum
board system as may be necessary.
loading requirements, as calculated in accordance with applicable codes and the local code.
4. Submittals
requirements;
work.
5. Warranty
5.1 The Contractor shall warrant for two (2) years from the date of substantial completion. The work
related to the integrated gypsum board that the work is not defective in workmanship or materials
and conforms to the final approved shop drawings.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Mineral Fiber acoustical ceiling board: size [593x593] [593x1194] mm. or as shown on drawings, not
less than [15] mm thick [square edge] [tongue and groove edge], made from mineral fiber that as
good quality in sound absorption and thermal insulation, no asbestos fiber, no toxic fumes in fire,
[ASTM E1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products – Class A]:
2. Mineral fiber acoustical ceiling board property
1.1.1 Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) : 0.55-0.75 [ASTM C423]
1.1.2 Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) : 30-40 dB [ASTM E1414]
1.1.3 Light Reflectance (LR) : Not less than 0.85 [ASTM E1477]
1.1.4 Flame Spread : Pass Class A [ASTM E84]
1.1.5 Thermal Resistance “R” : Not less than 1.7 [ASTM C177]
1.1.6 Moisture Resistance : Not less than 95%
1.1.7 Fire Resistance : Pass ASTM E1264 Class A or BS476 Part 6&7 Class A
3. Gypsum acoustic ceiling board: hole perforated acoustic gypsum board, sound absorption type, back
side of the panel attached completely to glass mat, NRC 0.55-0.75, perforated pattern [round] [square]
[line], size 1200x2400 mm, tapered edge, 12-12.5 mm thick, certified sound absorption standard
[international]
4. T-bar ceiling frame: galvanized, steel plate thickness not less than [0.30] mm, bending and forming 2
layers, main stud not less than 38 mm high, distance for every 1200 mm, cross piece height not less
than 25 mm distance for every 600 mm or 1200 mm. wire hanger diameter not less than 4 mm for
every 1200x1200 mm with spring adjustable clip.
5. Plastered ceiling frame: galvanized, size not less than [14x37] mm, steel plate not less than [0.50] mm
thick, distance of the main stud (vertical) for every [1000] mm and cross pieces (horizontal) for every
[400] mm, wire hanger diameter not less than 4 mm for every 1200x1200 mm with butterfly stainless
adjustable clip [TIS 863-2532 (1989) Steel Frame for Fixing Ceiling Panel and Wall Panel [1st Class
Quality Classified] [2nd Class Quality Classified]
6. Ceiling hatch for maintenance : ceiling hatch for acoustic gypsum board ceiling, hidden frame for
plastered ceiling [moisture resistance], size [300x300] [450x450] [600x600] mm. Contractor shall provide
the following shop drawings to Architect of approval before installation
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Verify drawings and coordinate with the installer of electricity system, air conditioning system and
other systems that related with acoustical ceilings such as preparation for steel structure for fixing
wire hangers of ceiling frames, lamp fixing, supply air fixing of air conditioning system to make a strong,
neat, and beautiful acoustical ceilings work.
2. If ceiling hatch is needed for service building systems or roof maintenance, install firmly and neatly as
3. Ceiling height as specified on the drawings, might be slightly changed according to Supervisor
instruction.
4. Acoustical Concealed Ceiling Hidden Frame Installation
4.1 Fix plumb of the plastered ceiling edge around wall firmly and strongly using steel cleats or concrete
nails to the required level as specified on the drawings. Fix 2 holes angle steel to the bottom of the
next floor at distance 1000x1200 mm (distance of main frame is 1000 mm, distance between hangers
is 1200 mm), fix by expansion bolt, diameter not less than 6 mm, distance of the first main frame row
from the wall is 300 mm.
4.2 Measure height from the edge of angle steel to the bottom of the next floor to cut the 4 mm wire,
and assemble frame hanger set using adjustable clip, bend the 4 mm wire at the end of the one side
as a hook (or use angle steel if a space between ceiling and the bottom of the next floor is less than
300 mm).
4.3 Hang the hanger set to the installed 2 holes angle steel. The hanger set shell be plumb and vertical.
4.4 Install the main stud at the hook of hanger set. The distance of the main stud shall be every 1000
mm.
4.5 Install cross stud to the main stud by frame locking. Install for noggin stud every 400 mm.
4.6 Adjust the level of all frames using adjustable clip, verify the level as specified on the drawings before
installing gypsum board.
4.7 Install tapered edge acoustic gypsum board [ 12-12.5] mm thick to cross studs. The long side (2400
mm) shall be perpendicular to noggin stud line. Fixed by gypsum screws size 25 mm, distance for
each screw is 300 mm at the center row of the panel and 200 mm at the edge row of the panel, and
10-15 mm from the gypsum edge. Screw head shall be embedded to the gypsum panel approximately
1-1.5 mm (shall not pierce through the gypsum panel). Install using screw driver.
4.8 Install trim to every edges and corners for neatness and beauty.
4.9 Plaster cover to the joint, trim of gypsum panel, and screw head by plastering mortar and gypsum
tape, plaster for 3 layers, leave until plastering mortar is completely dry in each layer, polish by
sandpaper before painting or finishing.
5. T-Bar Ceiling Frame and Acoustical Ceiling Board Installation
5.1 Fix plump of the ceiling edge around the wall by expansion bolt or concrete nails to the required
level as specified on the drawings. Fix 2 holes angle steel with the bottom of the next floor at distance
1210x1210 mm by expansion bolt diameter not less than 6 mm.
5.2 Measure height from the edge of angle steel T-bar to the bottom of the next floor to cut the hanger
wire diameter not less than 4 mm, and assemble hanger set using spring adjustable clip and hanger
wire.
5.3 Hang the hanger set to the 2 holes angle steel. The hanger set shall be plump and vertical.
5.4 Hang the main studs to the hanger set, hooked wire to the hole of the ridge on studs, bind the strand
tightly, install the main studs, distance of each main stud 1200 mm. The stud should be parallel or
perpendicular to the wall.
5.5 Install cross studs, length 1200 mm to the hole of main studs for every 600 mm, install perpendicular
to the main studs, distance of frame ridge is 600x1200 mm for placing T-bar panel size 600x1200 mm.
If the 605x605 mm distance of frame is required for placing T- bar panel size 600x600 mm, add short
noggin studs size 605 mm and install at the hole in the middle of noggin studs length 1210 mm
perpendicular to the long noggin studs.
6. Maintenance
After the completion of acoustical ceiling board installation, the acoustic ceiling shell be level and
plump. T-bar ceiling shall be straight, no twist, level and plump. Protect acoustical ceiling board from
the dirtiness and damage during the whole construction period.
END
5.2.6.3: ALUMINIUM CEILING

PART I : DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
The Works of this section shall be governed by the condition of contracts. Provide materials, labors,
equipment’s necessary to furnish, deliver and install all works of this section as shown on the Drawings
as specified herein and / or as required by working conditions.
2. References
2.1 Foreign standards are referenced as they support the design intent. Alternate standards may be
proposed for consideration by the Employer's Representative.
The Employer's Representative shall be the sole judge as to whether the proposed standards
adequately support the design intent.
2.2 The Works are subject to applicable portions of the following standards:
2.2.1 AA “Finished Designation System”, Aluminum Association
2.2.2 EN 13964:2004 Suspended ceilings, Requirements and test methods
2.2.3 BS 8290 Part 3 “Suspended Ceilings Code of practice for installation and maintenance”
2.2.4 BS476: Part 4: 1970 requirements for non-combustibility test
2.2.5 BS476: Part 6: 1989 requirements for propagation test
2.2.6 BS476: Part7: 1997 requirements for surface spread of flame test
2.2.7 GB8624: 1977 class A requirements for non-combustibility test
2.2.8 NF X70-100 : 1986 Toxic gas test on aluminum panel
2.2.9 BS8290: Part 2: 1991 Appendix B.4.1 requirements for dimensional accuracy test
2.2.10 BS8290: Part 2: 1991 Appendix B.4.2 requirements for squareness test
2.2.11 BS8290: Part 2: 1991 Appendix B.4.3 requirements for flatness test
2.2.12 GB8624: 1997 class A requirements for non-combustibility test
2.2.13 ISO9001:2008, ISO14001
Or the other foreign credit standard or TIS (by ministry of industry) contractor shall be submit for
approve by Architect by shape-size as similar.
3. Performance Requirements
3.1 Structural performance : Engineering, fabricate, and install metal ceiling systems to withstand the
effects of loads and stresses, without showing permanent deformation of ceiling system components
including panels and support system; noise or metal fatigue caused by vibration, deflection, and
displacement of ceiling units; and permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
4. Submittals
4.1 Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for all products in
accordance with the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. Product data shall include certifications and test
reports necessary to show compliance with the Contract Documents.
4.2 Submit the following samples:
4.2.1 Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples
of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of the Works.
Where finishes involve color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of
variations expected.
(1) Samples of finishes for selection by the Employer's Representative.
(2) 1.2m x 1.2m section of ceiling, each type, including each component with the
specified finish.
(3) Metal grid with specified finish, 300 mm. length.
(4) Suspension system members, 300 mm. length.
4.3 Submit the following shop drawings:
4.3.1 Complete reflected ceiling plans showing layout of system components, details of connections
between elements of the system, locations of access panels, light fixtures, and edge trim,
sectional details, and relations to adjoining work and clearance.
4.3.2 Calculations verifying that main runner can support weight of ceiling, lighting fixtures, and air
distribution units with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the clear span.
4.3.3 Coordination : The Drawings for reflected ceiling plans shall be drawn accurately to scale and
shall coordinate penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
(1) Joint pattern.
(2) Ceiling suspension members.
(3) Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
(4) Ceiling- mounted items, including light fixtures, air outlets and inlets, speakers, sprinkler
heads, and access panels.
(5) Special conditions at walls, column penetrations, and other junctions with adjoining
construction.
(6) Submit field record documents in accordance with the Contract.
5.1 Single- source responsibility: Obtain each type of metal ceiling panels and suspension system from
one sources, a single manufacturer.
5.2 Every single step of the production process shall be done in house by the manufacturer, no
outsourcing, to be able to control the highest quality and precise delivery time.
5.3 Coordination of the Works: Coordinate layout and installation of liner metal ceiling units and
suspension system components with other work supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire suppression system components ( if any) , and partition
system (if any).
6. Project Conditions
6.1 Environmental conditions : Do not install aluminum ceiling systems until work in plenum is complete
and until space is enclosed and weatherproof and wet work in space is completed and dry.
7. Warranty
7.1 Submit a written warranty for the Works under this section for 5 years. The warranty shall be in
addition to and not a limitation of other rights which the Employer may have against the Contractor
under the Contract Document.
7.1.1 Warranty shall state that the anodic finish will not crack, pit, corrode or develop excessive
change of color.
7.1.2 "Crack, pit, or corrode" shall mean those defects which are discernible from a distance of 3m
and result from the natural elements in a normal atmosphere.
7.1.3 "Excessive change of color" shall mean a change in color not over 10 percent or a value of 4,
whichever is a greater, above or below the original limits of acceptable color range, as
measured on the photo volt reflec to meter.
7.2 Repairs and replacements made under the warranty shall bear an additional warranty of 1 year or
longer period standard with the manufacturer.
8. Extra Materials
8.1 Furnish extra materials equal to 5 percent of the finished amount of the following:
8.1.1 Metal panels.
8.1.2 Aluminum bar grid.
8.1.3 Suspension system components.
8.1.4 Edge trim.
PART II : PRODUCTS
1. General
1.1 The drawings and details show metal ceilings and others design concept utilizing an integrated
approach between the ceiling and supporting structure.
2. Materials
2.1 Aluminum perforated linear ceiling with sound absorb material
2.1.1 Metal strip ceiling 300 x 2000, 300x2300 mm.
2.1.2 Panel shall be formed by roll-forming process with 3000 mm. maximum length
2.1.3 The powder coating is two coat system 25 microns
2.1.4 Aluminum suspension carrier is at least 0.6 mm. thickness.
2.1.5 NRC: 0.8
2.1.6 Fire resistance : ASTM E1264 Class A or BS 476 Part6,7 as Class 1
2.1.7 Punching Hole: 2.5 mm.
2.2 Aluminum perforated clip-in ceiling with sound absorb material
2.2.1 Aluminum clip-in ceiling width with concealed suspension system.
2.2.2 Perforated metal ceilings size 600x600, 600x1200 mm. coated steel panel suspended ceilings
with concealed suspension system.
2.2.3 The powder coating is two coat system 25 microns
2.2.4 Aluminum suspension carrier is at least 0.7 mm. thickness.
2.2.5 NRC: 0.8
2.2.7 Punching Hole: 2.5 mm.
2.3 Aluminum cell ceiling type :
2.3.1 Aluminum cell ceiling to width with concealed suspension system.

2.3.2 Cell ceilings size 10 x 50 x 0.45 mm. U-Shape distance 50x50 mm. or as shown on drawings.
2.3.3 Aluminum Class 3xxxHxx
2.4 Aluminum alloy linear ceiling
2.4.1 Aluminum linear ceiling to width with concealed suspension system
2.4.2 Aluminum ceiling size 150 x 17.6 mm. x 0.60 mm. thick
2.4.3 Each panel held by the specific D-shape runner tightly to hide the suspension in the ceiling.
2.5 Baffle aluminum alloy ceiling(U-Shape)
2.5.1 Baffle aluminum linear ceiling to width with concealed suspension system
2.5.2 Aluminum alloy linear ceiling size 25x130x0.60, 25x150x0.60mm. @ 250 mm.
2.5.3 The ceiling is suspension main runner 1.5 mm. thick. With runner clamps.
2.5.4 The distance between each runner is about 1200 mm.
2.5.5 The runner connector directly joint the skews and the runner.
2.6 Suspension system
2.6.1 Standard for metal suspension systems finishes that comply with applicable BS 8290 or ASTM
C 635.
2.6.2 Hangers and ties : hanger is to be “U” or “rod” profile channel to with stand the uplift load
hot dip galvanized steel 5 mm. and ceiling level is to be adjusted by spring or nuts.
2.6.3 The ceiling suspension system is th3e interlocking and knock-down system by screw and rivet.
2.7 Finishing
2.7.1 Powder coating : The powder coating ceiling ASTM 01730-67 and coated with polyester powder
paint AAMA-2603 the paint 60 microns 20% gloss
2.7.2 Color : Architect can be selected
PART III : EXECUTION

1. Installation, General
1.1 Comply with reflected ceiling plans.
1.2 Standard for installation of ceiling suspension system comply with the manufacturer's instructions
and ASTM C636 or BS 8290 as applicable to metal ceilings.
1.3 Ceiling shall be laid out accurately in accordance with the Drawings and shop drawings. Joints shall
be straight and continuous in both directions. Carefully fit units at penetrations, changes in plane,
fixtures, and perimeter of the ceiling area.
Where units are cut at pipes, columns and other penetrations, install wall trim at cut edges and install
spring clips to hold cut unit closely against intersecting surfaces.
1.4 Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members as follows:
1.4.1 Install hangers plum and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers
only where required to avoid obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
counter-splaying, or other equally effective mean.
1.4.2 Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing
that interfere with the location of hangers at spacing required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes
or equivalent devices.
Size supplemental suspension member and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards.
1.4.3 Secure hangers to structure, including attaching to inserts, eye- screws, or other devices that
are secure and appropriate for structure to which hanger are attached as well as for type of
hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail because of
age, corrosion, and elevated temperatures.
1.4.4 Space hangers not more than 1,200 mm on center along and not more than 0.15 m. from
ends of each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown
1.5 Install edge moldings at edge of each metal ceiling area and at locations where edge of units would
otherwise be exposed after completion of the Works. Level moldings with ceiling suspension system
to level tolerance of 3mm in 3.6m.
2. Field Finishing
2.1 Damaged and abraded spots on painted surfaces shall be touched up and painted after installation
with 1 coat of the same paint as used for shop finishing.
2.1 Areas around field welds shall be cleaned after welding is completed and painted with 1 coat of the
same paint as used for shop finishing.
3. Field Quality Control
3.1 Field mock-ups:
3.1.1 Prior to installation of metal ceilings, erect a sample ceiling mockup using materials and
systems required for the final work. Install mockup at site in location as directed by the
Employer's Representative, including at least one of each element required for project. Unless
otherwise indicated, the mockup may be incorporated into final ceiling after acceptance by
the Employer's Representative.
3.1.2 After acceptance, the mock-up shall serve as the standard of workmanship for the rest of the
metal ceiling work.
4.1 Clean exposed surfaces of metal ceilings and comply with fabricator's instructions or touch- up of
minor finish damage.
4.2 Provide necessary protection of metal ceilings from damage by other trades.
4.3 After 30 days, inspect the Works and adjust any unit not properly aligned with others. Replace mission
units.
END
5.2.6.4: FIBER CEMENT BOARD CEILING
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide fiber cement board ceiling where shown on the Drawings , as specified here in and as
2. References
3. Submittals
4 Warranty
4.1 The Contractor shall warranty covering the installation and workmanship for a period of
(2) year from acceptance of the completed of contract.
4.2 The Contractor shall warranty covering the materials for a period of (5) year from acceptance of the
completed of contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Fiber cement board ceiling, thickness as indicated on the Drawings. Seal all cutting edges with
approved water repellent or non-staining silicone type.
Technical Data of Materials
Properties of Product Standard Unit Test Result
Length ASTM C1185 mm. +/-2.5
Width ASTM C1185 mm. +/-5
Thickness ASTM C1185 mm. +/-1
Density ASTM C1185 g./cm3 1.2
Moisture Content ASTM C1185 % 5
Water Absorption ASTM C1185 % 30
Dimensional Stability ASTM C1185 % 0.27
Ignitability BS 476 Part 5 - Pass
Fire Propagation Index BS 476 Part 6 - I=O
Surface Speed of frame BS 476 Part 7 - Class 1
Fire Resistance BS 476 Part 22 - 30-60 Minute
PH-Value - PH 9
MOE ASTM C1185 Mpa 5,000-8,000
Flexural Strength ASTM C1185 Mpa 11-15
Thermal Conductivity ASTM C177-97 W/m.K 0.184
Thermal Resistance ASTM C177-97 m2.K/W 0.082
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Installation
work.
END
5.2.6.5: METAL SHEET CEILING

PART I: DECRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide metal sheet ceiling where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in and as needed
2. References
2.2 Australian Standard AS 1397- 2011 Continuous Hot- Dip Metallic Coated Steel Sheet and Strip or
equivalent
2.3 Color coating: AS 2728- 2013 Prefinished/ Pre- Painted Sheet Metal Products for Interior/ Exterior
Building Application or equivalent
3. Performance
4. Submittals
requirements;
work.
5. Warranty
5.2 The contractor shall warranty materials for period of ( 3 0) years from acceptance of the completed
of contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS

1. Materials
1.1 Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect and/or Engineer.
2.1 Sheet metal ceiling and flashing with bolt system.
2.2 Sheet metal ceiling shall have shape, size as specified on the drawings, and have properties as follows.
2.2.1 Metal sheet: coated by corrosion protection coating [alloy comprises aluminum 55%, zinc
43.4%, and silicon 1.6%] or [alloy comprises aluminum 55%, zinc 45%] [[AZ150], Australian
Standard AS 1397-2011 Continuous Hot-Dip Metallic Coated Steel Sheet and Strip - coatings
of zinc and zinc alloyed with aluminum and magnesium or equivalent.]
2.2.2 Minimum yield strength not less than [550 Mpa (G550)].
2.2.3 Color coating: AS 2728-2013 Prefinished/ Pre-Painted Sheet Metal Products for Interior/
Exterior Building Applications – performance requirements or equivalent. color defined later
(1) Topside coating layer comprises [primer: 5 microns thick, undercoating polyester: 20
microns thick].
(2) Underside coating layer comprises [grey polyester: 5 microns thick, undercoating by
primer: 5 microns thick].
2.2.4 Sheet metal thickness, not including coating layer, BMT not less than 0.48 mm.
2.2.5 Sheet metal ceiling must be one sheet along the length of wall, fixed by bolt system.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.2 Install sheet metal ceiling as indicated on the approved shop drawings. Installation for the other parts
related to sheet metal ceiling such as translucent wall panels, metal siding, and ventilation louvers
shall follow manufacturer's suggestion with approval from Supervisor.
1.2.1 Installed by bolt systems, and self-drilling screw (wafer head) follow
manufacturer's suggestion with approval from Supervisor.
1.2.2 Recommended length of the center pintal is 1. 70 m, the maximum length of the center
pintal for roof is 2.00m, Australian Standard: AS 1562.1-1992 Design and Installation of Sheet
Roof and Wall Cladding - Metal and AS 4040. 1- 1992 Methods of Testing Sheet Roof and
Wall Cladding - Resistance to Concentrated Loads.

1.3.2 Before the last term of closeout procedures, completely clean the siding and wall.
END
5.2.6.6: SMOOTH CONCRETE CEILING
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide smooth concrete ceiling where shown on the Drawings , as specified here in and as
2. References
4. Warranty
PART III: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Plastering Mortar
1.3.1 Skim coat: 1-3 mm thick.
1.2 Water: clean, no oil, neutral, no salt and no plants. If the quality of water in the construction area is
not good, provide clean water to use from other places, and strictly comply with the manufacturer's
instruction by approval from Supervisor.
1.3 Joint sealants: paintable, in accordance with the Section Joint Sealants.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Surface Preparation
1.1 The surface that will be plastered shall finish not less than 3 days before plastering, clean, no dust,
no oil, no concrete debris, or others that might result in loss of bond strength. Too smooth surface
because of smooth shuttering shall be made rough by surface cracking or other methods approved
from Supervisor.
2. Plastering
3. Maintenance
3.1 After finish skim coated, clean all involved place, no stain, no dirtiness, no damage until finish or
painting for the next step.
END
5.2.6.7: CEMENT BONDED BOARD CEILING

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Provide cement bonded board ceiling where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in and as
needed for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of these Specifications for
requirements which affect the works of this Section, whether or not such requirements are particularly
mentioned herein. Coordinate the work of this section with the related work of other trades, to assure
the steady progress of all works of the Contract.
2. References
2.1 Comply with applicable standards and local building codes are referenced as Engineer or/and Architect support
the design intent. Alternate standards may be proposed for consideration by The Employer’s representative
shall be the sole judge as to whether the proposed standards adequately support the design intent.
2.2 TIS 878-2537 Standard Test
2.3 BS 476 Part 6 and 7 (Fire Resistance Test)
3. Submittals
4. Warranty
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Cement bonded particle board, thickness as indicated on the Drawings (Min 8 mm. thk.). Seal all
cutting edges with approved water repellent or non-staining silicone type
1.2 Composition:
1.2.1 Density (kg/m3) 1,100-1,300
1.2.2 Moisture Content (%) 9-15
2
1.2.3 Bending Strength (N/mm ) ≥9
2
1.2.4 Modulus of Elasticity (N/mm ) ≥3,000
2
1.2.5 Tensile Strength Perpendicular to Plane (N/mm ) ≥ 0.5
1.2.6 Thermal Conductivity (K Value) W/m ̊c ≤ 0.25
1.2.7 Thickness Swelling (after 24 hours immersed in water)(%) ≤2
1.2.8 Fire Resistance Properties (BS 476 Part 6 and 7) Passed
1.2.9 Acoustic Performance (STC Rating) 28-32
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
work.
END
5.2.6.8: WOOD CEILING (NATURAL WOOD)

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide wood ceiling where shown on the Drawings , as specified here in and as needed for
2. References
2.2 Wood for construction in accordance with the standard of the Royal Forest
Department.
3. Performance
4. Submittals
requirements;
specified type of material size is appropriate or close that will be used with not less than 2 samples.
5. Warranty
PART II: PRODUCTS

1. Materials
materials shall be major consideration The guarantees for various architectural finishes shall be
1.3 The selected wood: as specified in the Section Architectural Woodwork, Contractor must be selected
original wood ailing from to remove building station-wood character-straight-no crack misshapen-to
twist-to pull out a mail-to peel off original color or etc. surface by to plane-san paper to scour.
1.4 Original Wood (Natural Wood)
Architect can be adjust the new size wood conform to design because after to peel off original color-
to plane-and san paper wood piece slightly.
1.5 New Wood (Natural Wood)
- Contractor shall be selected quality new wood all size-wood character-straight-non crack-
misshapen-twist and dry (moisture not than 15% submittal certificate) approval by architect.
1.6 Natural Wood for USE
- Natural wood for use-list of name wood as indicated on the Drawings and specification contractor
shall be submittals wood sample approval by architect.
1.8 Termite Protection
- Contractor shall be provide chemical termite protection submittal approval by engineer
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.2 Exterior Ceiling
- Contractor shall be alignment-perpendicular before installation wood frame-nylon net-fiber
net (for mosquito-in sect protection) around ceiling area.
1.3 Interior Ceiling
- Contractor shall be alignment-perpendicular before installation wood frame.
1.4 Fixing
- Wood frame 1½” x 3” fixing around interior wall building some part fixing with structure building-
wood ceiling fixing with wood frame.
END
5.2.7. : DOOR AND FRAMES

5.2.7.1 : METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
Provide metal doors, and frames, which are not specifically described in other Sections of these
Specifications. Where shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and
proper installation.
need for proper performance of the work of this Section.
2.2 Unless specifically otherwise approved by the Architect, provide all products of this Section from a
Single manufacturer.
3. References
3.2 ISO 7892 Door sets – Hard Body Impact
3.3 ISO 8270 Door sets – Soft Body Impact Tests
3.4 ISO 6612 - 1980(E) Windows and Door Height Windows - Wind Resistance Tests
4. Submittals
4.1 Submit Product data as following:
4.1.1 Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
4.1.2 Manufacturer’ s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
4.1.3 Shop Drawings showing details of each frame type, elevations of door designs, details of
openings, and details of construction, installation, and anchorage.
4.1.4 Manufacturer’ s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures
used on the work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Material
proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect and/or
Engineer.
1.2 All proprietary materials shall be submit for approved make and the types as stipulated. The
guarantees for various architectural finishes shall be stipulated under Construction Specification of this
Contract.
1.3 Type and design:
1.3.1 Provide full- flush design, in dimensions and types shown on the Drawings, labeled or
non-labeled as indicated on the Door Schedule in the Drawings. Properly reinforced for
the finish hardware description in other Section and in these Specifications.
1.4 Finish:
1.4.1 Pre- clean and shop prime each door for finish painting which will be performed at the
job site under other Section and in these Specifications.
1.4.2 Shop painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel doors and frames,
including galvanized surfaces, but excluding stainless steel surfaces.
1.4.3 Chemical degreasing agents shall be spay applied to steel surfaces and shall be water
rinsed prior to treatment by spray application of zinc phosphate.
1.4.4 Spray applied zinc phosphate shall convert metallic surfaces to no- metallic zinc
phosphate coating to inhibit corrosion and increase the adhesion and durability of paint
finishes.
1.4.5 Excess zinc phosphate shall be removed by water rinse and the product shall be baked
dry prior to application of finish coatings.
1.4.6 All Steel doors shall be epoxy finish coatings with spray applied and oven dries in
accordance with the epoxy manufacturer’s instructions.
1.5 Door Materials:
1.5.1 Fire rated door sets shall consist of steel door panel, steel door frame, smoke seals and
hardware and shall be installed in fire rated walls with fire resistance ratings not less than
the fire resistance rating of the door set.
1.5.2 Fire rated door sets will incorporate smoke seals at top, sides and bottom. These seals
shall be designed to prevent the passage of smoke.
1.5.3 sound-rated doors, which are fire rated door set and non-fire rated door set construction-
Fire rated steel door panels shall contain noncombustible high density material that is
identical to the materials used in the successfully fire tested prototypes. Non fire rated
steel doors shall contain acoustical and damping in core materials.
1.5.4 Non fire rated door sets shall consist of steel door panel, steel door frame, silicon seals
and hardware and shall be installed in non fire rated walls in accordance with the
1.5.5 Acoustical door sets shall be to the manufacturer’ s standard t meet acoustic and fire
requirements where this door sets type are to be tested in accredited laboratory. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide acoustical assemblies with sound ratings of STC 34 or better
except for plant rooms or technical rooms where door sets of STC 48 or better shall be
used. hardware and shall be installed in walls in accordance with the manufacturer’ s
instructions.
1.5.6 General steel door and steel panels-shall be at least 39 mm. thick sheeted on faces and
edges with 0.7 mm. thick. Internal the door leaf put in lining Polyurethane Foam.
1.5.7 Fire door and steel panels- shall be at least 40 mm. thick sheeted on faces and edges
with 1.6 mm. thick. Interlock panel joints shall ensure that the door panel is structurally
sound and that all seams are concealed when the door is closed. Internal the door leaf
put in lining insulation ROCKWOOL.
1.5.7.1 Internal reinforcements shall be manufactured from steel vertical “ hat” shape
sections. The stiffeners shall run vertically for full height of the door and be spot-
welded to both surfaces of the door at every 75 mm. The stiffeners shall be
welded together at the top and bottom of the door, and each set of stiffeners
shall be spaced at not more than 150 mm. apart.
1.5.7.2 Top and bottom channels shall be from minimum 16 Ga. steel. The top channel
shall be fitted with an additional 16g flush closing channel secured by an
interlock method.
1.5.7.3 Hinge reinforcement shall be 4.25 mm. thick. and welded to the door skins.
1.5.7.4 Lock reinforcement shall be fabricated from at least 1.2 mm. steel welded into
the box shape.
1.5.7.5 Other hardware reinforcement shall be minimum 1. 2 mm. steel, welded to the
inside of the door skins.
1.5.8 Door seals shall be fire retardant silicone rubber seals able to withstand temperature to
150°C with no change in properties, and used at temperature to 200°C for more than
10,000 hours. At temperatures of 350°C the silicone rubber seal shall be able to be used
for short periods without damage. These seals shall be tested in accordance with
applicable standard requirement.
1.5.9 Door frames – shall be at least 1.6 mm. thick steel frames in section shapes and profiles
to suit Project requirements. The frame shall be fabricated from minimum fully welded
steel, filled and ground smooth corner to provide a high quality finish.
1.5.9.1 Hinge reinforcement – screw fixed hinges shall be reinforced with at least 3 mm.
thick, wide steel plate welded to the door jamb.
1.5.9.2 Hinge – Stainless steel Flag Style 3 mm. of thickness width and length size 5”x4”
1.5.9.3 Closer reinforcement – The frame shall be reinforced by using minimum 3.0 mm.
steel, welded inside the frame at the fixing point for the closer arm.
1.6 Louvers at Door
1.6.1 Door louvers: Louvers shall be pressed into the door skins before assembly of the door
panel or shall be flush mounted into using of the interlock method of fixing. No screws
shall be visible from either side of the door sets.
1.6.2 Provide internal support as recommended by louver manufacturer. Prime paint after
fabrication, except stainless Steel.
1.6.3 Interior louvers: Sight proof, stationary type, constructed of inverted Z- shaped blades-
formed of 10 mm. cold-rolled steel, except 10 mm. stainless steel for stainless steel doors.
PART II: EXECUTION
1. Surface Condition
conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions are correct.
2. Installation
2.1 General: Install doors and frames according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
2.2 Frames: Install steel frames for doors, transoms, side lights, borrowed lights, and other
openings, of size and profile as indicated.
2.2.1 Install frames and accessories in accordance with shop drawings, manufacture’ s
recommendation and specified as herein.
2.2.2 Setting masonry anchorage devices: Provide masonry anchorage devices where required
for securing frames to in-place concrete or masonry construction.
2.2.3 Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location, in accordance with details on final
shop drawings and anchorage device manufacturer’ s instructions. Leave drilled holes
rough, not reamed, and free from dust and debris.
2.2.4 Floor anchors may be set with powder actuated fasteners instead of masonry anchorage
devised and machine screw, If so indicated on final shop drawing.
2.2.5 Placing frames: Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely
until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary
braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
2.2.5.1 At in- place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure in place
with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices.
2.2.5.2 Place frames at fire- rate opening in accordance with applicable standard codes
and local code.
2.2.5.3 Make field splices in frames as detailed on final shop drawings, welded and
finished to match factory work.
2.2.5.4 Remove spreader bars only after frames or bucks have been properly set and
secured.
2.3 Door: Fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in their respective frames, with the following
clearances:
2.3.1 Jambs and head: 2 mm.
2.3.2 Meeting edges, pairs of doors: 3 mm.
2.3.3 Bottom: 10 mm, where no threshold or carpet.
2.4 Install fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in applicable standard codes and
local code.
2.5 Install smoke control doors in accordance with applicable standard codes and local code.
2.5.1 Hardware preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed
hardware in accordance with final door hardware schedule and templates provided by
hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements specifications for door and frame
preparation for hardware. Doors shall be reinforced for closers, but not mortised of tapped
unless such closers are scheduled.
2.5.2 Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface- applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
surface-applied hardware may be done at the Site.

2.5.3 Secure reinforcement with a minimum of 6 mm. long fillet welds not over 50 mm. apart
on contact edges or a minimum of spot welding at points not over than 50 mm. apart in
both directions on contact surfaces. Increase minimum welding requirements to develop
full strength of reinforcement as necessary, depending on door size, weight, exposure, and
amount of usage.
2.5.4 Hardware shall be shop fitted, either to templates or to the hardware item. Where locations
of hardware are not indicated, requirements specified with the hardware shall apply.
Provide sheet metal chases within door construction for extension bolt rods. Locate
hardware as indicated on final shop drawings.
2.5.5 Provide sheet metal cover boxes on inside of frame for hardware cutouts.
2.5.6 Exposed fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated.
3. Adjust and Clean
3.1 Final adjustments:
3.1.1 Check and read just operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final
inspection.
3.1.2 Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
3.1.3 Remove defective work and replace with work complying with the specified requirements.
3.2 Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted and damaged areas of prime coat, and apply
touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
END
5.2.7.1.2: ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide aluminum doors and frames where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in
and as needed for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of these
requirements are particularly mentioned herein. Coordinate the work of this section with
2. References
3.1 Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
4. Performance
4.1 All corners and joints shall be neatly filter and reinforce as required.
4.2 Framing shall be designed to provide for expansion and/or contraction of the component parts as will
be caused by an outside surface temperature variation of 0 degree C to 50 degree C and an inside surface
temperature variation of 2 degree C to 50 degree C. Expansion and contraction shall be provide for on
a member to member basis and shall not be accumulated for several members between expansion
joints.
4.3 Water Penetration
4.4.1 No water penetration shall occur when the doors are tested in accordance with applicable
standard. The differential static pressure used in the test shall be 33% of the inward acting
design wind load pressure.
4.4.2 No water penetration shall occur when the doors are tested in accordance with applicable
standard using dynamic pressure.
4.4 Provide aluminum door in the dimensions and arrangements shown on the drawings.
4.5 All exposed aluminum shall finished in powder coated color.
4.6 Aluminum sills: Unless otherwise indicated, the aluminum sill for each door shall be a single full-length
piece. Anchors shall be provided 100 mm. from each end and spaced not more than 900 mm apart. Sills
shall be set in a full bed of mortar. Aluminum sills shall be finished as specified for door.
4.7 Shims: shall be Aluminum or quality plastic. Use zinc chromate; 125 micros, Dry Film Thickness, for
separation of dissimilar surfaces.
5. Submittals
5.1 Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
5.2 Manufacture’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified
requirements;
5.3 Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work
of this Section with the work of adjacent traders;
5.4 Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will
become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5.5 Samples: Accompanying the Shop Drawings, Submit:
5.5.1 Sample of each exposed member.
5.5.2 Samples of finished, showing complete range of color from darkest to lightest proposed for use on this Work
5.5.3 Sample of two pieces of 300mm long extrusion with glazing gasket included. Submit 2
samples, minimum 100mm square of window
6. Warranty
6.1 Upon completion of this portion of the work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Architect
two copies of a written Warranty agreeing to replace work of this Section which fails due to defective
materials or workmanship within two years after Date of Substantial Completion
6.2 Failure due to defective materials or workmanship is deemed to include, but not to be limited to:
6.2.1 Failure in operation of operating component or components;
6.2.2 Leakage or air infiltration in access of the specified standard;
6.2.3 Deterioration of finish to an extent visible to the unaided eye;
6.2.4 Defects which contribute to unsightly appearance, potential safety
hazard, or potential untimely failure of the work of this Section or the work as a whole.
PART II: PRODUCTS

1. Materials
1.3 Provide all reinforcing, bolts, nuts and shims required to properly erect, align and secure all work
under this section. Fasteners shall be compatible with aluminum. Use same color and material
for fastenings as items fastened, unless otherwise indicated. Fasteners may be stainless steel or
tempered hardened aluminum. Provide types, gages and lengths to suit unit installation
conditions. Use tempered aluminum Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners,
unless otherwise indicated.
1.4 Use non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for corrosion resistance. Use steel
or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish non-corrosive inserts, as
required, to be set into concrete or stone work.
1.5 Framing members, transition members, mullions and mountings for interior and exterior aluminum
fixed glass framing shall be extruded aluminum forms with aluminum stiffeners in accordance
with applicable standard requirement alloy. Design shall include a method of to the exterior for
any condensation or leakage. Framing members shall be inside glazed.
1.6 Sealant, Caulking and Joint Filler: As specified under Section Joint Sealers.
1.7 Fasteners: Match color of aluminum when exposed.
1.8 Provide sub-sill flashing for all exterior fixed aluminum framing.
1.9 Aluminum trim and similar items used in conjunction with framing indicated. All fastening devices
to be concealed type. Minimum thickness of extrusions shall be 3 mm.
1.10 Provide any additional aluminum sub-frames, struts clips, etc. as required to conform to structural
design requirements.
1.11 Finish Hardware:
1.11.1 Prepare for, receive, and install the finish hardware furnished under these Specifications.
1.11.2 Perform all fitting of finish hardware to doors and frames at the factory; except do not drill
or tap for surface mounted items until time of installation at the site.
1.11.3 Comply with finish hardware manufacturer’s instructions and template requirements.
1.11.4 Use concealed fasteners to the maximum extent practicable.
2. Fabrication
2.1 Fabricate in strict accordance with the manufacturers’ specifications and Shop Drawings as approved
by the Architect, prefabricating in the shop to the maximum extent practicable.
2.2 Provide hairline fit at joints, with smooth continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles.
Securely fasten.
2.3 Extruded aluminum sections for aluminum doors shall be of the following minimum thickness.
2.3.1 Stiles and Rails: Minimum 1.55mm.
2.3.2 Sill Member : Minimum 1.95mm
2.3.3 Glass Stops: Remover, with no exposed fastening.
2.4 Aluminum trim and similar items used in conjunction with framing shall be fabricated from extruded
aluminum to indicated shapes and sizes.
2.5 All fastening devices shall be concealed type. Aluminum trim manufacturer of other window
components.
PART III: EXECUTION

1.2 Surface which will contact doors shall be plumb, level, and have no debris and sharp projections.
1.3 Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those
trades for interface with the work of this Section.
1.4 Make measurements as required in the field to assure proper fit.
2. Installation
2.1 Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop
Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer’s
recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect or/and Engineer anchoring all
components firmly into position for long life.
2.2 Erect aluminum door frames plumb and true and in correct relationship to adjacent work.
2.3 Aluminum surfaces in contact with incompatible metals shall be isolated from such materials by a
coating of zinc chromate.
2.4 Aluminum surfaces coming in contact with masonry shall be provided with a heavy coat of alkali
resistant coal-tar epoxy paint.
2.5 Caulk perimeter of aluminum door construction between all aluminum work and adjoining
construction.
2.6 Field touch-up marred finish with primer and enamel paint to match fluoropolymer finish to the
satisfaction of the Engineer or/and Architect.
2.7
END
5.2.7.1.3 : WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
Provide wood doors and frames, which are not specifically described in other Sections of these
2.1 Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods need for proper performance of the work of this Section.
2.2 Unless specifically otherwise approved by the Architect, provide all products of this
Section from a Single manufacturer.
3. References
4. Submittals
4.1.1 Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section
4.1.3 Shop Drawings showing details of each frame of door type, elevations of doors designs,
details of openings, and details of construction, installation and anchorage.
4.1.4 Manufacturer’ s recommended installation procedures to be approved by the Engineer
or/ and Architect. It will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation
procedures used on the work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Material
1.1 Provide other materials not specifically described on the drawing but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect and/or Engineer.
1.2 All proprietary materials shall be submit for approved make and the types as stipulated. Local
1.3 Wood for doors shall be stock thoroughly seasoned dried and neatly and accurately framed. Wood
shall conform to type of wood indicated on the Drawings. In general frames shall be a hardwood
unless otherwise shown.
1.4 All door frame joints shall be mortise and tenon joined. All wood work shall be sanded, filled,
resented and painted as specified.
1.5 Wood doors shall have a 12 cm. wide horizontal stiffening rod vertically center on the lock or handle
and latch assembly.
1.6 Door shall be made at a shop specializing in this type of work not at the site. Doors shall be rigidly
framed, smoothly finished and 3.5 cm. thick unless otherwise specified.
1.7 Plywood doors shall be either a solid or hollow core, however, all exterior wood doors shall be solid
core, In hollow core the outer plywood shall be adequately supported and shall afford strength and
stability sufficient for the use intended. Stiles shall not be less than 2 cm. and rails shall not be less
than 7 cm. A lock block shall be provided 1.0 m. from the bottom, midway on the stile, and shall be
securely connected to the stile. Veneer for cross binding and faces shall be plywood of two or more
piles with a combined minimum thickness of 7 mm. before sanding. Face veneer shall be of plain
sliced teak, laid with the grain at the right angles to cross-binding, glued under pressure and heat and
sanded smooth.
1.8 HDF Laminated Door made of 4 mm thickness of High-Density Fiberboard (HDF) density 800-1,000
kg/m3. (HDF is wood fiber mixed with Phenolic resin and pressed in high pressure machine. Phenolic
resin is the component which provides moisture resistance characteristic.) HDF board sticks with
door’s structure by PVA adhesive. The HDF Laminated Door finishes by 0.8 mm Dark Oak High Pressure
Laminated (HPL). The HPL has vertical and horizontal line with wood grain texture. Door frame made
from SYP lumber which naturally resist to termite without any chemical. Door’s structure is hollow
core Particle board weight 17-24 kg. It passed drying process made the door more stability. Standard
thickness of HDF Laminated Door is 40 mm come with 5 year warranty.
1.9 White Prime Moulded HDF Doors made of 3 mm thickness of High Density Fiberboard density 800-
1,000 kg/m3. HDF skin sticks with door’s structure by PVA adhesive. HDF skin comes with white prime
Acrylic water based allow easily painting. Door frame made from SYP lumber which naturally resist
to termite without any chemical. Frame of this model painted by white high solid lacquer. Door’s
structure is hollow core Particle board weight 17-24 kg. It passed drying process made the door more
stability. 2000-2100 mm. height door is 35 mm. thickness while 2101-2250 mm height door is 40 mm.
thickness and 2251-2400 mm. is 44 mm. thickness. This model is 10 year warranty.
1.10 Flush doors shall be 3.75 cm. thick with teak wood frame unless otherwise noted. Sash doors shall
be solid with standard rails and mullions.

1.11 Type and Finish:
1.11.1 Provide full design in dimensions and types shown on the Drawings, labeled or non-labeled
as indicated on the Door Schedule in the Drawings. Properly reinforced for the finish
hardware description in other Section and in these Specifications.
1.11.2 Pre-clean and shop prime each doors for finish painting which will be performed at the job
site under other Section and in these Specifications.
1.11.3 Non fire rated door sets shall consist of wood door panel, wood door frame, and hardware
and shall be installed accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
1.11.4 Acoustical door sets shall be to the manufacturer’ s standard to meet acoustic
requirements. Unless otherwise indicated, provide acoustical assemblies with sound ratings
of STC 34 or better except for plant rooms or technical rooms where door sets of STC 48
or better shall be used. Hardware and shall be installed in walls in accordance with the
1.11.5 Door frames – shall be used 2”x4” wood frames for general area and 2”x5” wood frame
for toilet room or as shown on drawings in section shapes and profiles to suit Project
requirements. The frame shall be fabricated filled and ground smooth corner to provide a
high-quality finish.
1.12 Louvers at Door
1.12.2 Provide internal support as recommended by louver and/or door-window manufacturer.
PART III: EXECUTION
2. Installation
2.1 General: Install doors and frames according to manufacturer’s instructions.
2.2 Frames: Install wood frames for doors, transoms, side lights, borrowed
lights, and other openings, of size and profile as indicated.
2.2.2 Setting masonry anchorage devices: Provide masonry anchorage devices where required
for securing frames to in-place concrete or masonry construction.
2.2.3 Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location in accordance with details on final
shop drawings and manufacturer’s instructions.
devised and machine screw.
2.2.5.1 At in- place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure in place
with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices.
2.2.5.2 Make field splices in frames as detailed on final shop drawings, welded and
finished to match factory work.
secured.
2.2.5.4 Door: Fit doors accurately in their respective frames with the following
clearances:
2.2.5.4.1 Jambs and head: 2 mm.
2.2.5.4.2 Meeting edges, pairs of doors: 3 mm.
2.2.5.4.3 Bottom: 10 mm, where no threshold or carpet.
2.3 Install smoke control doors in accordance with applicable standard codes and local code.
2.4 Hardware preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed
hardware in accordance with final door hardware schedule and templates provided by
hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements specifications for door and
frame preparation for hardware. Doors shall be reinforced for closers, but not mortised
of tapped unless such closers are scheduled.
2.4.2 Located hardware as indicated on final shop drawings.
3. Adjust and Clean
3.1.4 Check and just operating finish hardware items in door and window work just prior to final
inspection.
3.1.6 Remove defective work and replace with work complying with the specified requirements.
3.2 Immediately after erection sand smooth all damaged areas apply prime coat and touchup.
END
5.2.7.1.4 : ROLLER DOORS AND FRAMES

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
Provide roller doors and frames, which are not specifically described in other Sections of these
3. References
consideration. The Employer’s representative shall be the sole judge as to whether the proposed
standards adequately support the design intent.
3.2 TIS 593-2530
3.3 ISO 9001:2000
4. Submittals
4.1.1 Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
4.1.3 Shop Drawings showing details of each frame type, elevations of door designs, details of
openings, and details of construction, installation, and anchorage.
4.1.4 Manufacturer’ s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures
used on the work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Material
Engineer.
1.3 Type and design:
1.3.1 Provide doors design, in dimensions and types shown on the Drawings, labeled or
non-labeled as indicated on the Door Schedule in the Drawings. Properly reinforced for
1.4 Finish:
1.4.1 Pre-clean and shop prime each door for finish painting which will be performed at the
job site under other Section and in these Specifications.
1.4.2 Shop painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel doors and frames, including
galvanized surfaces, but excluding stainless steel surfaces.
1.4.3 All Steel doors shall be powder coating finish with spray applied and oven dries in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
1.5 Door Materials:
1.5.1 Roller shutter door made of galvanized steel sheets and galvanized steel frames with
painted finish, rubber seals and hardware and shall be installed in accordance with t he
1.5.2 The galvanized steel blade shall be at least 0.60 mm. thickness or as shown on drawings.
1.5.3 U-Shape post rail shall be seals rubber which able to reduce sound when open and closed
the door.
1.5.4 Post rail – shall be at least 1. 5 mm. thick galvanized steel frames with painted finish in
section shapes and profiles to suit project requirements. The frame shall be fabricated from
minimum fully welded steel, filled and ground smooth corner to provide a high quality
finish or as shown on drawings.
1.5.5 Steel box: shall be at least 0.6 mm. thick galvanized steel sheet on 1.2x25x25 mm. steel
frame w/painted finish

PART III: EXECUTION
2. Installation
2.1 General: Install doors and frames according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
2.2 Frames: Install steel frames for doors, transoms, side lights, borrowed lights, and other
openings, of size and profile as indicated.
2.2.2 Setting masonry anchorage devices: Provide masonry anchorage devices where required for
securing frames to in-place concrete or masonry construction.
2.2.3 Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location, in accordance with details on final
shop drawings and anchorage device manufacturer’s instructions. Leave drilled holes rough,
not reamed, and free from dust and debris.
devised and machine screw, if so indicated on final shop drawing.
2.3 Hardware preparation: according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
3. Adjust and Clean
1 Check and read just operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final
inspection.
2 Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
3 Remove defective work and replace with work complying with the specified requirements.
3.2 Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted and damaged areas of prime coat, and apply
touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
END
5.2.7.1.5 SPECIALTY DOORS AND FRAMES
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
Provide specialty doors ( plastic doors, fiberglass door and glass door) and frames which are not
specifically described in other Sections of these Specifications. Where shown on the drawings, as
specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
3. References
4. Submittals
4.1.1 Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section
4.1.2 Manufacturer’ s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified
requirements;
4.1.3 Shop Drawings showing details of each frame of door and type, elevations of doors and designs,
details of openings, and details of construction, installation and anchorage.
4.1.4 Manufacturer’ s recommended installation procedures to be approved by the Engineer or/ and
Architect. It will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on
the work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Material
Engineer.
1.3 Door and frame shall be stock thoroughly dried and neatly and accurately framed. In general frames
shall be a hardwood unless otherwise shown.
1.4 All door and frame joints shall be painted as specified.
1.5 Door shall have a 12 cm. wide horizontal stiffening rod vertically center on the lock or handle and
latch assembly.
1.6 Door and frame shall be made at a shop specializing in this type of work not at the site. Door and
frame shall be smoothly finished and 3.5 cm. thick unless otherwise specified.
1.7 Door and frame shall be adequately supported and shall afford strength and stability sufficient for
the use intended.
1.8 Type and Finish:
1.8.1 Provide full design in dimensions and types shown on the Drawings. Properly reinforced for
1.8.2 Pre- clean and shop prime each doors for finish painting which will be performed under
other Section and in these Specifications.
1.8.3 Door frames – shall be used 2”x4” wood frames for general area and 2”x5” wood frame
for toilet room or as shown on drawings in section shapes and profiles to suit Project
requirements. The frame shall be fabricated filled and ground smooth corner to provide a
high quality finish.
1.9 Louvers at Door
1.9.2 Provide internal support as recommended by louver and/or door manufacturer.

1.9.3 Interior louvers: Sight proof, stationary type, constructed of inverted Z- shaped wood
blades- formed of 10 mm.
PART III: EXECUTION
1 Surface Condition
2 Installation
2.1 General: Install doors and frames according to manufacturer’s instructions.
2.2 Frames: Install frames for doors transoms, side lights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of size and
profile as indicated.
2.2.1 Install frames and accessories in accordance with shop drawings, manufacture’s
2.2.2 Setting masonry anchorage devices: Provide masonry anchorage devices where required for
securing frames to in-place concrete or masonry construction.
2.2.3 Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location in accordance with details on final
shop drawings and manufacturer’s instructions.
devised and machine screw.
2.2.5.1 At in- place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure in place with
machine screws and masonry anchorage devices.
2.2.5.2 Place frames at fire-rate opening in accordance with applicable standard codes and
local code.
2.2.5.3 Make field splices in frames as detailed on final shop drawings, welded and finished
to match factory work.
secured.
2.3 Door: Fit doors accurately in their respective frames with the following clearances:
2.3.1 Jambs and head: 2 mm.
2.3.2 Meeting edges, pairs of doors: 3 mm.
2.3.3 Bottom: 10 mm, where no threshold or carpet.
2.4 Hardware preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware in
accordance with final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply
with applicable requirements specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Doors shall
be reinforced for closers, but not mortised of tapped unless such closers are scheduled.
2.4.2 Located hardware as indicated on final shop drawings.
3 Adjust and Clean
3.1.1 Check and just operating finish hardware items in door work just prior to final inspection.

3.1.3 Remove defective work and replace with work complying with the specified
requirements.
END
5.2.7.2 DOOR HARSWARE AND LOCK SET

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work include:
1.1.1 Furnish finish hardware required to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings and as
specified herein;
1.1.2 Furnish trim attachments and fastenings, specified or otherwise required, for proper and
complete installation;
1.2 Related work:
1.2.1 Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to
another Section of these specification and including not limited to the following;
1.2.1.1 Metal Doors and Frames
1.2.1.2 Aluminum Door and Frames
1.2.1.3 Wood Doors and Frames
2 Quality Assurance
2.2 Provide the services Hardware Consultants to:
2.2.1 Be available for consultation with Architect or/and Engineer at no additional cost to the
Owner during progress of construction.
2.2.2 Be present at completion of construction.
2.2.2.1 Inspect installation of all finish hardware items.
2.2.2.2 Make all minor adjustments required.
2.2.2.3 Report to the Architect or/and Engineer on completeness of the installation.
2.3 Work under this section shall be done by a recognized architectural door hardware supplier, that has
record of successful in service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and
quality to that indicated for this Project.
2.4 Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, other types) from a single
manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.
2.5 A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has been locally
furnishing hardware in the project’s vicinity, and who is, or who employs an experienced architectural
hardware consultant who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work for
consultation about project’s hardware requirements.
2.5.1 Supplier shall maintain locally, stock and parts inventory of items supplied for
future service to provide inventory and hardware on a system wide basis.
3. References
3.1 Comply with the applicable standards are referenced as they support the design intent. Alternate
standards may be proposed for consideration by the Employer’s representative. The Employer’s
representative shall be the sole judge as to whether the proposed standards adequately support the
design intent.
4. Submittals
4.1 In accordance with the requirements as specified herein.
4.1.1 Manufacturer’s technical product data for each item of hardware. Include information
necessary to show compliance with requirements; include instructions for installation and
maintenance of operating parts and finish.
4.1.2 Final hardware schedule prepared by Hardware manufacture in manner indicated below, and
based on same set numbers as used on the drawings and in hardware schedule at the end
of this Section. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper
size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware.
4.1.2.1 Schedules shall be completely detailed in vertical form. List hardware for each
opening separately.
4.1.2.2 Based on finish hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into “hardware
groups” indicating complete designations of every item required for each door
or opening. Include the following information:
4.1.2.2.1 Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item.
4.1.2.2.2 Name and manufacturer of each item.
4.1.2.2.3 Fastenings and other pertinent information.
4.1.2.2.4 Location of hardware set cross- referenced to indications on drawings
both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
4.1.2.2.5 Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, similar information,
contained in schedule.
1) Mounting locations for hardware.
2) Door and frame sizes and materials.
3) Construction keying schedule.
4.1.3 Submit initial draft of schedule along with essential product data in order to facilitate the
fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow metal frame) which is critical in the project construction
schedule. Submit final draft of schedule after samples, product data, coordination with shop
drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and similar information has been completed and
accepted.
4.1.4 Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to final ordering of finish hardware,
submit one sample of each type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required, and tagged
with full description for coordination with schedule.
4.1.4.1 Sample will be returned to the supplier. Units which are acceptable and remain
undamaged through submittal, review and field comparison procedures may,
after final check of operation, be used in the work, within limitations of keying
coordination requirements.
4.1.4.1 Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work
to be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware. Check shop drawing of
such other location and installation of hardware.
4.1.5 Manufacturer’s Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer’s products which have manufacturer’s
name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in
conjunction with required acceptable to the Engineer or/and Architect Permit manufacturer’s
identification on rim of lock cylinders only.
4.1.6 Keying Schedule:
Following receipt of approved finish hardware schedule, prepare a construction keying

schedule.
4.1.6.1 Submit copies of proposed keying schedule to Engineer, with correction
inserted.
4.1.6.2 As soon as possible after key conference, submit typed copies of keying
schedule to Engineer.
5. Substitutions
5.1 If a specified hardware item is not available, the Employer’s representative reserves the right to select
other hardware, equal in the Employer’s representative’s opinion to the specified item, and require
resubmission of the hardware schedule listing the selected item.
6. Packing and Delivery
6.1 Packing of hardware separated with labeled identification the manufacturer’s name, type, number,
and name of the item, and tagged with the same item number indicated in the hardware schedule.
Include necessary screws, special wrenches, instructions, and installation templates for spotting
mortising tools in each container or package. Delivery of hardware to the job sit shall be the
responsibility of the hardware supplier. Hardware shall be sorted into groups (by door number) by the
hardware supplier.
6.2 Packing of hardware at supplier’ s warehouse. Prepare shipments to the job site or as otherwise
required. Direct shipments form manufacturers will not be permitted.
6.3 Do not use manufacturer’s products that have manufacturer’s name or trade name displayed in a
visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels
and as otherwise acceptable to the Employer’s representative.
6.3.1 Manufacturer’s identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
7. Warranty
7.1 The manufacturer shall be required to provide a 5 year warranty for each of the hardware items.
8. Maintenance
8.1 Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for the
Employer’s representative continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of
door hardware.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. General
Engineer.
materials shall be major consideration. However foreign material may be consideration as they support
the design intent for the submission and a list of submittal materials for approval shall be provided.
It will be deemed that the Contractor has priced the respective items on the basis of those approvals.
However, it shall be the prerogative of the Engineer and/or Architect to choose any particular make
among the list as the most appropriate one and the Contractor shall be bound to provide the same
without any variation in the Contract rate. The guarantees for various architectural finishes shall be
1.3 The nominated sub-contractor supplying the ironmongery shall ensure that the proposed ironmongery
comply with the applicable codes and local code and applicable standards, where applicable.
1.4 Hardware shall be detailed completely on the finish hardware schedule, including door sizes,
thicknesses, hands, active doors, extra long lip strikes, etc. No claims for extras will be allowed for any
service or materials which, in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative, could have been foreseen
by the Contractor.
1.5 Where the exact types of specified hardware are not adaptable to the finished shape or size of
members requiring hardware, finish suitable types having the same operation and quality as the
specified types, subject to review by the Employer’s Representative.
1.6 Hardware shall be commercial grade hardware suitable for use in public areas where it may be
subjected to severe conditions.
1.7 Before commencement of the works the supplier shall provide a hardware schedule indicating the
function of each lock.
1.8 Cylinders shall offer protection against key duplication and resist picking. Restricted keyway and
interchangeable core shall be available.
1.9 All keys and master keys shall be restricted security broach available only from the manufacturer. The
hardware supplier shall not duplicate keys excepts with the except with the express written approval
of the Employer.
1.10 Lever handles, panic bars, push plates and pull handles shall be treated with permanent inorganic
silver based anti-microbial compound that permanently suppresses the growth of algae, fungus
mould, and mildew is effective against a broad spectrum of bacteria.
1.11 Smoke seals shall be supplied and installed by the fire door manufacturer in accordance with
regulatory standard requirement.
1.12 The fire rated hardware shall comply with regulatory standard requirement and the supplier shall
provide evidence that hardware selected is suitable for use on the fire door sets selected for the
project and installed by the fire door set manufacturer to ensure that it is correctly installed in
accordance with the fire door set test prototypes.
1.13 Non fire rated hardware shall comply with the general conditions of the specification and be
appropriate for the function and operations of the doorway.
2. Material
2.1 Hinge
2.1.1 All hinges supplied shall be available in heavy duty and high frequency. Unless otherwise
specified, all hinges shall be of stainless steel hairline finish, non- removable pins, non-
magnetic steel pin, ball bearing type or heavy load bearing and to weights as required.
2.1.2 All hinges shall be certified to conform with Fire Proof ,by Fire &Smoke proof applicable
standard requirements and shall be conformed Fire Test up to 3 hours. A minimum of
4 hinges shall be provided for each door leaf or with manufacturer’s recommendation.
2.1.3 All hinges shall be certified tested at least 2,500,000 cycles Grade 7 or 200,000 cycles
Grade 7 opening and closing cycles of the door-leaf at an opening angle of 90 degree.
2.1.4 Hinges materials and finishes shall be selected to match other hardware but subject to
the provision hereof.
2.1.5 All hinges shall be supplied with wood screw for timber doors and machine screw for
metal doors by manufacturer’s standards.
2.1.6 The proposed concealed bearing hinge shall be available with 8 electric wires, if required.
2.2 Butt Hinge
2.2.1 For light door weight, hinges are solid stainless steel hairline finish 89x89x3. 0 mm.
including 2 ball bearing pin fixed for door weight as required.
2.2.2 For medium door weight, hinges are solid stainless steel finish 114x114x3.4 mm. including
2 ball bearing pin fixed for door weight as required.
2.2.3 For heavy door weight, hinges are solid stainless steel finish 152x114x4.0 mm. including
heavy load bearing or 2 or 4ball bearing for door weight as required.
2.3 Pivot Hinge
2.3.1 All pivot hinges shall be certified to conform to regulatory standard requirement.
2.3.2 Heavy Duty pivot hinge shall be fixed to the steel frame of granite covered door leaf or
metal cladding covered door and operated by radius closed to 180 degree for opening
and carry weight as required.
2.4 Door Closer
2.4.1 Door closer shall be of rack and pinion hydraulic action and certified to conform to
2.4.2 All door closer shall be constructed with High strength cast iron body or extruded
anodized or cast aluminum body, forged steel arms passively against rust protected &
high strength.
2.4.3 Door closer shall be certified and conformed to a proven effciency rating of 1,500,000
cycles with back check function or 500,000 cycles.
2.4.4 High quality hydraulic for optimum performance and long life with temperature
compensation any climatic operation & constant lubrication.
2.4.5 The surface mounted closer shall be fitted internally on the side of the door where they
are least visible to the public.
2.4.6 Each door closer shall be sized to properly close door automatically, smoothly and lightly
against doorframe, under operating conditions.
2.4.7 All door closers shall be provide with adjustable for closing speed, latching speed and
back check speed.
2.4.8 All door closer shall be non- hold open function and shall use adjustable back check
function and delay action for handicapped toilet.
2.4.9 Door closer shall be totally reversible without adjustment and have a power adjustment
for door widths between 750mm to 1400mm.friction free movement.
2.4.10 Door closer shall have up to size in accordance with regulatory standard requirement
This is particularly useful for use in pressured rooms, e.g. Pressurized staircase.
2.4.11 Door closer shall be suitable for use on up to 3 hours fire rated doors.
2.5 Overhead Door Closer
2.5.1 Non- hold open Door closer size in accordance with regulatory standard requirement
Tandem/ Docking Unit ( Double door closer) , back Door width 1400 mm carry weight as
required.
back check with standard arm maximum door width < 1400 mm.
2.5.3 Door closer shall be of full hydraulic cam action for slide channel or track arm door
closer.
back check & delay action with track arm for disable person.
back check & track arm for public area.
2.6 Floor Door Closer
2.6.1 All for spring shall be certified to conform regulatory standard requirent.
2.6.2 Depth of floor spring shall not be more than 60 mm. The Contractor shall ensure that
the top level of floor spring completed is of the same level as the adjacent finished floor
level with finished.
2.6.3 All for spring shall be provide with adjustable for closing speed, latching speed and back
check speed.
2.6.4 Floor spring shall be available sized power to 15 NM. 53NM or Fix sized.
2.6.5 Floor spring shall be available with interchangeable spindle from 5 mm to 50 mm.
suitable for timber, metal and glass doors.
2.7 Door bar coordination or Door selector
2.7.1 The door bar coordinator supplied shall be general standard finish with Door frame and
includes filler bar accordingly. This device shall be certified to conform with regulatory
standard requirement Reversible and control- closing cycles of active and inactive door
leaf. Engineered to prevent damage in case of abnormal force against active door that is
held open.
2.7.2 Door bar coordinator including Filer, to be used for double swinging fire door to ensure
they closing of the doors take place in fixed order.
2.8 Locksets/Lock case
2.8.1 All locksets shall be mortise type locks and shall be manufactured to conform to
2.8.2 All locksets shall be equipped with a heavy- duty lever coil to ensure positive return of
lever handles. These locksets shall be certified to 1,000,000 cycles test to prevent sagging
of levers in use. The square follower shall be especially constructed by steel or stainless
steel part to expel all play between follower and lever handle spindle. The follower or
clamps follower after inserted the spindle shall be positive ensures long-term stability.
2.8.3 Unless otherwise specified, locksets shall be of full mortise type to receive a separate
lever handle. Cylindrical or bored-in locksets are not acceptable.
2.8.4 Lock case shall be available in number of functions to suit the different applications.
2.8.5 The lock case is to be mounted with high security cylinders as required by the operator.
Temporary cylinders are to be provided by the supplier during the construction phase.
2.8.6 Lock case shall be constructed of durable machined or stamped steel for essential
moving components.
2.8.7 All lock case shall be supplied with standard beveled striking plates in same finish and
material of the forced in stainless hair-line finish.
2.8.8 Heavy duty deadlock function, 8 mm. follower or clamp follower in steel or other
materials, forced in stainless steel & including striking plate.
2.8.9 For pressurization room, 3 points or multiple points locking if it is required.
2.8.10 Locks and latches shall be mortise type with stainless steel lever handles.
2.9 Cylinders and Master key System
2.9.1 All Cylinders shall be certified to conform with regulatory standard requirement at
Locking Security and Attack Resistance
2.9.2 All cylinders proposed shall be restricted keyway for this project.
2.9.3 All cylinders shall be available in at least 20 or more authorization check/ requests per
key insertion that is unique to have absolute accurate combination in key system, against
breach in key system. For expand systems with the use of multiplex key profile
configuration of at least 900 profiles so that it does not have repetition of combination,
breaching security. Or Cylinders shall be 7 pin small format interchange core system with
restricted profile. Provide minimum number of pin segments to increase security and
reduce picking/bumping case.
2.9.4 The cylinder shall suit regular door thickness of 40-45mm but incremental increases shall
be available for doors of thickness more than 60 mm.
2.9.5 The cylinder’ s bodies and plugs are machined from extruded brass of the profile to suit
lock case.
2.9.6 It is finished in nickel silver plating as standard to match most door furniture; however,
other finishes are available upon request.
2.9.7 The standard length of a double cylinder with both sides keyed is 60 mm which suits
most doors up to 50 mm thick. Extended length is available upon request for extra thick
doors.
2.9.8 Where external security is vital, cylinder can be surface hardened to prevent drilling. The
pins in such cylinders also hardened.
2.9.9 The range of cylinders must be very wide. A cylinder can be found to suit most
applications from door locks, furniture locks, keys switches, roller shutter locks, and any
other area requiring special application. All keys witches should come complete with
tamper proof stainless steel box.
2.9.10 All cylinders are factory sealed making it impossible to tamper with the permutation
inside the cylinder.
2.9.11 Since a cylinder could be found to suit most application, it is possible to master key
systems comprising a variety of cylinder locks, e. g. mortise locks, roller shutter locks,
padlocks, furniture locks, keys witches and any other types of locks, being integrated into
a master key system.
2.9.12 All cylinders supplied shall be under grand master key complete with optional
construction key system. The Contractor shall liaise with his subcontractor responsible
for producing a key chart in master key system for Superintending Officer’s approval prior
to installation.
2.9.13 Cylinders shall be available in construction key system, which is incorporated into the
permanent cylinder, if requested. The construction key system can be invalidated by
using a special U- key or change code key and only the mastered keys will be able to
activated the cylinder Alternatively, temporary cylinders should be supplied.
2.9.14 For usage with door panel mortise lockset, the following cylinders must be available:
2.9.14.1 Single cylinder – Key entry from one side only
2.9.14.2 Double cylinder - Key entry from both sides of cylinder
2.9.14.3 Cylinder with thumb turn – Key entry from one side only and a thumb turn
on the other side of the cylinder
2.9.14.4 And all cylinders shall be furnished according to the requirements and
under the same system. The supplier will:
2.9.14.5 Key quality: furnish 3 change keys for each cylinder; 3 master keys for each
sub master; and grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system.
2.10 Lever Handles/Pull Handles
2.10.1 All lever handles shall be certified to conform with regulatory standard
requirement.
2.10.2 These lever handles shall be certified to 1,000,000 cycles test.

2.10.3 All lever/pull handles and accessories shall be of the same supplier.
2.10.4 All roses and escutcheon shall have a snapped cover and not more than 10mm. in
height.
2.10.5 All levers/pull handles. Roses and escutcheon shall be provided with a bolt
through fixing system to ensure the lever handle will not become loose after a period of
usage and no retightening of the fixing screw to the lever handle is required.
2.10.6 Approved lever handles bolted to rose or back plate shall open smoothly, softly and
silently and yet be strong enough to prevent any form of sagging.
2.10.7 All back plates, roses and escutcheons shall be concealed fixings and squarely aligned
with door leaf. The fixing screws shall be installed form behind of the door or form inside
the room.
2.10.8 All lever handles shall be available with the option of incorporating with radial needle
bearings and not ball bearings, which is in the roses itself, for heavy duty door and
excellent handle operation, The needle-bearings, integrated in the lever handles, is fixed
rotating on a ground plate in stainless steel and provided with a bolt through fixing
system.
2.10.9 Wherever required, lever handle and knobs can be intermixed for inside/outside trim.
2.10.10 Specified lever handles is able to withstand very heavy weight and pressure exerting on
the handles.
2.10.11 Ironmongery including push bars and lever handles shall comply with ADA standards for
egress and access for persons with disabilities.
2.11 Plate
2.11.1 Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacture’ s standard exposed fasteners for installation;
Stainless steel hair-line finish material, fixing centers in order to the size.
2.11.2 All plates shall be pre-drilled fixing holes. Cover plates shall have cylinder holes, handle
holes, etc. where required.
2.11.3 Back plate shall be stainless steel hairline finish suitable for all kind of doors including
fire doors.
2.11.4 Push Plate shall be certified to conform to regulatory standard requirment for
architectural door trim.
2.11.5 Push plate in stainless steel hair-line fi nish with countersunk screw holes suitable for all
kind of doors including fire doors.
2.12 Pull Handle
2.12.1 Pull handles shall be certified to conform with regulatory standard requirement door
trim, constructed from stainless material 19 mm. with a material thickness of 1. 5 mm.
(wall thickness) in stainless steel hair-line finished formed in a “D” shape 130 mm. centre
to centre and projection of 65 mm. through bolt fixed with M8 screw or manufacturer’
standard.
2.12.2 Pull handle in stainless steel hair-line finish (19x300) horizontally or vertically installed.
2.13 Automatic Flush Bolt
2.13.1 Provide Automatic flush bolts for double metal doors. Flush bolts shall have a spring
loaded action, which will retract the bolt when the active door is opened and protect
the bolt into the head frame when the closed. The Automatic flush bolts shall be
certified to conform with regulatory standard requirement doors Bolts shall have 19mm.
throw into frame and vertically adjustment.
2.13.2 Lever automatic flush bolt action box with dust proof socket in stainless or cast brass
hairline finish.
2.14 Door Stop
2.14.1 Floor Mounted Door Stop shall be type for fixing on to concrete with rubber
buffer door stop and construct from stainless steel or cast brass material and hair line
finish base plate and rubber buffer floor mounted Door Stop.
2.14.2 Wall Mounted Door Stop shall be stainless steel or cast brass hair-line finish base
plate and rubber buffer wall mounted Door Stop.
2.15 Fire Exit Panic Devices
2.15.1 Fire exit devices shall be certified to conform to regulatory standard requirement
classifications and suitable for fir doors up to 3 hour.
2.15.2 All Fire exit devices shall be certified to 1,000,000 cycles test for regulatory standard
requirement or 1,000,000 cycles test.
2.15.3 For single door and double door, Horizontal push-bar exit device shall be stated by heavy
duty finished in stainless steel hair-line.
2.16 Kick Plate
2.16.1 Kick Plate shall be certified to conform with regulatory standard requirement for
architectural door trim.
2.16.2 Kick Plate shall be 1.2 mm thick, stainless hair-line finish 150-300mm height for standard
doors and 850mm height for cash trolley door. The total length shall be less 5mm as
compared to the actual door width. The correct required length has to be advised from
the door manufacture.
2.17 Key Administration Software Package
The Contractor shall also provide a key administration tongue and software package for the efficient
administration and planning of all mechanical and electronic locking systems.
The software package provided should consist of the following module.
2.17.1 Master key locking systems
2.17.1.1 Registration of all mechanical and electronically lock- systems in a building
stating manufacturers.
2.17.1.2 The planning and production of a key plan and the ordering of a lock-
system.
2.17.1.3 To indicate the structure of the building, department etc. To indicate all
the key and card holders.
2.17.2 Structures
2.17.2.1 Registration of detailed particulars of a structure etc.
2.17.3 Doors/Cylinders
2.17.3.1 Registration of doors, cylinders and card-readers of door. Etc.
2.17.3.2 Production of mechanical codes, i.e. to add and remove keys within the key
plan. To add and remove access period, also to arrange the organization of
door/cylinders etc.
2.17.4 Key-journal
2.17.4.1 All actions regarding keys are registered chronologically and can be
displayed.
2.17.5 Keys
2.17.5.1 Registration of status of key/ cards i.e. issued, being repaired or in deposit.
2.17.5.2 Production of mechanical codes, i. e. to add and remove door/ cylinders
within the key plan to add and remove access periods, to issue and reclaim
keys and cards from users.
2.17.6 Persons
2.17.6.1 Registration of all required people/firms in a building; i.e. key or card holders,
managements, manufacturers of key plans.
2.17.6.2 The issue and return of key/cards.
2.17.7 Electric Strikes
2.17.7.1. Electric strikes shall be solenoid operated by either 12V DC or
24V DC operations. It shall also be fully fail i. e. it requires power to be
energized. In the event of power failure, the locks shall remain in its de-
energized stage after its battery backup period has elapsed. All electric
strikes shall be interlocked with the fire alarm panel. In the event of fire
alarm, the locks shall be de-energized leaving the door free for access.
2.17.7.2. Electrical strike shall be self contained, completely factory wired, tamper
resistant with only external wire connections. It shall also be heavy duty
and of fully stainless steel construction with built- in strike, latch and
hardened locking pins. (3 nose).
2.17.7.3. Electrical strike proposed shall be suitable for the type of door for which it
is to be installed with body depth of not more than 27 mm. It shall be able
to withstand the pulling or pushing force of an average human being once
the electrical lock is energized. As a guide, a minimum pulling or pushing
force to be designed for shall be approximately 1500lbs.
2.17.8 Electromagnetic Lock/Holder
2.7.8.1 The electromagnetic lock shall be highly reliable, low power consumption
long life and high holding force of minimum 1500lbs.
2.7.8.2 The electromagnetic lock shall have positive locking and unlocking without
residual magnetism or moving parts that might stick, jam, bind, wear out and
need replacement.
2.7.8.3 The electromagnetic lock shall require no maintenance or adjustment after
installation.
2.17.9 Keys and Keying
2.17.9.1 Prepare keying nomenclature for the keying schedule, using the symbols,
nomenclature, and Provide keying in accordance with instructions of the
Employer’s Representative.
2.17.9.2 Provide key and core control system complete with necessary permanent
and temporary tags, brass receipt holders, signature receipt form, 3- way
cross index forms, and permanent key loan record books.
1. The key and core control system manufacturer or his representative
shall obtain all keys and cores and place them on permanent and
temporary tags, and set up and type a complete 3 way cross index
system. Keys shall be placed in envelopes furnished with the key and
core control system and marked with change number, door number,
and hardware schedule item number. Nomenclature and door

numbers shown on the hardware schedule shall be that will actually
be used by the Employer’s Representative.
1) Furnish a wall mounted steel key control cabinet for 200
percent of the required number of cores.
2.17.10 Fasteners
2.17.10.1 Furnish necessary screws, bolts, or other fasteners for proper application of
hardware Fasteners shall be of suitable size and finish to match the
hardware. Furnish expansion shields, toggle bolts, or other types of suitable
anchors for the material to which the hardware is applied. No raw plugs or
similar type of anchors will be permitted.
2.17.10.2 Unless otherwise indicated, furnish Phillips oval head screw for exposed
closer, closer arms, and similar items and Phillips flat head countersunk
screw for other items.
2.17.10.3 Furnish sex bolts for surface applied door closer and vertical rod exit devices
on mineral core wood fire doors.
2.17.10.4 Hardware for Physically Disabled
2.17.10.5 Hardware shall comply with applicable codes and local code for building
used by the physically disable.
2.17.10.6 Hardware shall comply with applicable local codes. Hardware for doors
leading to areas of unsafe entry by the physically disabled shall have tactile
indication standards.
2.17.10.7 Miscellaneous Requirements
1. Closer shall be fully fielded adjustable for sizes 2 through6.
2. Top flush bolts shall have rods extending to 1.8 m. above floors. Furnish
dustproof strike for each bottom flush bolt and vertical rod exit device.
3. Furnish wrought boxes strikes with curved lips for locks and latches.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Surface condition
1.1 Examine the area and condition under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct
conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work, Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
2. Hardware Location Dimensions
2.1 Unless otherwise indicated, mounting dimensions for hardware items shall be as follows:
2.2 Locksets and latch sets: 950 mm. from floor to center of the actuating portion of the device.
2.3 Cylinder deadlock: 1200 mm. from floor to center of deadlock.
2.4 Exit device: 900 mm. to 1100 mm. as recommended by the manufacturer, from floor to centerline
of cross bar.
2.4.1 Pull:
2.4.1.1 Vertically: 1050 mm. form floor to center of pull.
2.4.1.2 Horizontally: centered on door stile or 125 mm. from edge of door.
2.4.2 Push bar: 1180 mm. from floor to centerline of push bar. Back to back with top of pull,
unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
2.4.3 Push plate:
2.4.3.1 Vertically: 1100 mm. from floor to centerline of push plate.
2.4.3.2 Horizontally: centered on door stile.

2.4.4 Closers: mount inside rooms. On least prominent side of door, using parallel arm
mounting where necessary.
2.4.5 Door stops: located to prevent contact between door hardware and adjacent
construction. Stops shall be wall type firstly where possible and floor type elsewhere.
Where floor type is impracticable or would create a hazard or obstruction to traffic,
stops shall be overhead type.
3. Installation
3.1 Mount hardware units at heights as indicated Locations except as specifically indicated or required
to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by Engineer.
3.2 Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of
surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division 9 sections. Do not install surface-
mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Do not weld finish hardware
items to hollow metal doors and frames.
3.3 Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment Substrate
as necessary for proper installation and operation.
3.4 Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners
and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
3.5 Use hex nut bolts for securing door closer to door leaf.
3.6 Anchor thresholds with flat-head screws fitted into lead expansion shields which have been installed
in floor. Screw: match threshold finish, and countersink. Underside of threshold shall be fully
grounded with non-shrink grout.
3.7 Anchor floor stops with flat-head machine screws fitted into lead expansion shield. Length of screw
not less than 62mm.
3.8 Omit kick plates and mop plates on stainless steel doors.
3.9 Hinges for out-swinging exterior doors shall have security studs.
3.10 Paint coordinators to match finish or color of door jamb.
3.11 Apply full bed of butyl sealant under metal thresholds.
4. Adjusting
4.1 Adjust closers for proper operation after the building is completed and with all mechanical systems
in operation, taking into account accessibility requirements for opening force, delayed action, and
closing speed.
4.2 Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the installer, accompanied by
representatives of the manufacturers of latch sets and locksets and of door control devices, and of
other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work:
4.2.1 Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors
and hardware to comply with specified requirements.
4.2.2 Consult with and instruct personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance
procedures.
4.2.3 Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or
installation of hardware units.
4.2.4 Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the
performance of the hardware.
5. Hardware Sets
5.1 Door shall receive the hardware in corresponding to the set number listed for the door in
the door schedule. Schedule of the hardware sets shall be specified on the Contract
Drawings.
5.2 All finish hardware as specified and scheduled in the drawings, shall designate the type
and quality of the hardware desired. The furnished hardware brand shall be equivalent to the brand
as specified.
END
5.2.7.3 : WINDOWS AND FRAMES

5.2.7.3.1 : ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND FRAMES
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide aluminum windows, frame and accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified
2. References
4. Performance
4.1 All exterior window framing, including the method of attachment to the building structure shall be
designed to withstand a positive and negative wind pressure load of 2900 Pa. Framing at corners and
their method of attachment shall be designed to withstand a positive and negative wind pressure of
4300Pa. Deflection of members shall be limited to 1/175 of the span.
4.2 All corners and joints shall be neatly filter and reinforce as required.
4.3 Framing shall be designed to provide for expansion and/or contraction of the component parts as
will be caused by an outside surface temperature variation of 0 degree C to 50 degree C and an
inside surface temperature variation of 2 degree C to 50 degree C. Expansion and contraction shall
be provide for on a member to member basis and shall not be accumulated for several members
between expansion joints.
4.4 Water Penetration
4.4.3 No water penetration shall occur when the windows are tested in accordance with
applicable standard. The differential static pressure used in the test shall be 33% of the
inward acting design wind load pressure.
4.4.4 No water penetration shall occur when the windows are tested in accordance with
applicable standard using dynamic pressure.
4.5 No uncontrolled flow of water from condensation shall occur on the interior face when air Leakage:
Air leakage through the window shall not exceed the following values of projected window area when
tested in accordance with applicable standard.
4.5.1 Fixed window: 0.0003 m3/sec/m2
4.5.2 Projected Window: 0.0006 m3/sec/m2
4.5.3 Sliding Window: 0.002 m3/sec/m2
4.6 Provide aluminum window in the dimensions and arrangements shown on the drawings.
4.7 All exposed aluminum shall finished in powder coated color.
4.8 Aluminum sills: Unless otherwise indicated, the aluminum sill for each window shall be a single full
length piece. Anchors shall be provided 100 m from each end and spaced not more than 900 mm
apart. Sills shall be set in a full bed of mortar. Aluminum sills shall be finished as specified for
windows.
4.9 Shims: shall be Aluminum or quality plastic. Use zinc chromate; 125 micros, Dry Film Thickness, for
separation of dissimilar surfaces.
5. Submittals
5.1 Materials list of item proposed to be provided under this Section;
5.2 Manufacture’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified
requirements;
5.3 Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the
work of this Section with the work of adjacent traders;
5.4 Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will
become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5.5 Samples: Accompanying the Shop Drawings, Submit:
5.5.1 Sample of each exposed member.
5.5.2 Samples of finished, showing complete range of color from darkest to lightest proposed for use
on this Work
5.5.3 Sample of two pieces of 300mm long extrusion with glazing gasket included. Submit 2 samples,
minimum 100mm square of window
6. Warranty
6.1 Upon completion of this portion of the work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the
Architect two copies of a written Warranty agreeing to replace work of this Section which fails due to
defective materials or workmanship within two years after Date of Substantial Completion
6.2 Failure due to defective materials or workmanship is deemed to include, but not to be limited to:
6.2.1 Failure in operation of operating component or components;
6.2.2 Leakage or air infiltration in access of the specified standard;
6.2.3 Deterioration of finish to an extent visible to the unaided eye;
6.2.4 Defects which contribute to unsightly appearance, potential safety
hazard, or potential untimely failure of the work of this Section or the work as a whole.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Provide all reinforcing, bolts, nuts and shims required to properly erect, align and secure all work
under this section. Fasteners shall be compatible with aluminum. Use same color and material for
fastenings as items fastened, unless otherwise indicated. Fasteners may be stainless steel or tempered
hardened aluminum. Provide types, gages and lengths to suit unit installation conditions. Use
tempered aluminum Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.2 Use non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for corrosion resistance. Use steel
or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish non-corrosive inserts, as required,
to be set into concrete or stone work.
1.3 Framing members, transition members, mullions and mountings for interior and exterior aluminum
fixed glass framing shall be extruded aluminum forms with aluminum stiffeners in accordance with
applicable standard requirement alloy. Design shall include a method of weepage to the exterior for
any condensation or leakage. Framing members shall be inside glazed.
1.4 Sealant, Caulking and Joint Filler: As specified under Section Joint Sealers.
1.5 Fasteners: Match color of aluminum when exposed.
1.6 Provide sub-sill flashing for all exterior fixed aluminum framing.
1.7 Aluminum trim and similar items used in conjunction with framing indicated. All fastening devices to
be concealed type. Minimum thickness of extrusions shall be 3 mm.
1.8 Provide any additional aluminum sub-frames, struts clips, etc. as required to conform to structural
design requirements.
1.9 Finish Hardware:
1.11.1 Prepare for, receive, and install the finish hardware furnished under these Specifications.
1.11.2 Perform all fitting of finish hardware to windows and frames at the factory; except do not
drill or tap for surface mounted items until time of installation at the site.
1.11.3 Comply with finish hardware manufacturer’s instructions and template requirements.
1.11.4 Use concealed fasteners to the maximum extent practicable.
2. Fabrication
2.1 Fabricate in strict accordance with the manufacturers’ specifications and Shop Drawings as approved
by the Architect, prefabricating in the shop to the maximum extent practicable.
2.2 Provide hairline fit at joints, with smooth continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles.
Securely fasten.
2.3 Extruded aluminum sections for aluminum windows shall be of the following minimum thickness.
2.3.1 Stiles and Rails: Minimum 1.55mm.
2.3.2 Sill Member : Minimum 1.95mm
2.3.3 Glass Stops: Remover, with no exposed fastening.
2.4 Aluminum trim and similar items used in conjunction with framing shall be fabricated from extruded
aluminum to indicated shapes and sizes.
2.5 All fastening devices shall be concealed type. Aluminum trim manufacturer of other window
components.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.2 Openings in walls for installation of windows shall be free from debris.
1.3 Surface which will contact windows shall be plumb, level, and have no debris and sharp projections.
1.4 Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of
those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
1.5 Make measurements as required in the field to assure proper fit.
2. Installation
2.1 Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop
Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the
manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect or/and Engineer
anchoring all components firmly into position for long life.
2.2 Erect aluminum window frames plumb and true and in correct relationship to adjacent work.
2.3 Aluminum surfaces in contact with incompatible metals shall be isolated from such materials by a
coating of zinc chromate.
2.4 Aluminum surfaces coming in contact with masonry shall be provided with a heavy coat of alkali
resistant coal-tar epoxy paint.
2.5 Caulk perimeter of aluminum window construction between all aluminum work and adjoining
construction.
2.6 Field touch-up marred finish with primer and enamel paint to match fluoropolymer finish to the
satisfaction of the Engineer or/and Architect.
END
5.2.7.4 : WINDOW HARDWARE SET

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work include:
1.1.1 Furnish finish hardware required to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings and
as specified herein;
1.1.2 Furnish trim attachments and fastenings, specified or otherwise required, for proper and
complete installation;
2.2 Provide the services Hardware Consultants to:
2.2.3 Be available for consultation with Architect or/and Engineer at no additional cost to the
Owner during progress of construction.
2.2.4 Be present at completion of construction.
2.3 Work under this section shall be done by a recognized architectural window hardware supplier, that
has record of successful in service performance for supplying widow hardware similar in quantity, type,
and quality to that indicated for this Project.
2.4 Obtain each type of hardware ( latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, other types) from a single
manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.
2.5 A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has been locally
furnishing hardware in the project’s vicinity, and who is, or who employs an experienced architectural
hardware consultant who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work for
consultation about project’s hardware requirements.
2.5.1 Supplier shall maintain locally, stock and parts inventory of items supplied for
future service to provide inventory and hardware on a system wide basis.
3. References
standards may be proposed for consideration by the Employer’s representative. The Employer’s
design intent.
4. Submittals
4.1 In accordance with the requirements as specified herein.
4.1.1 Manufacturer’s technical product data for each item of hardware. Include information
necessary to show compliance with requirements; include instructions for installation and
maintenance of operating parts and finish.
4.1.2 Final hardware schedule prepared by Hardware manufacture in manner indicated below, and
based on same set numbers as used on the drawings and in hardware schedule at the end
of this Section. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper
size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware.
4.1.2.1 Schedules shall be completely detailed in vertical form. List hardware for each
opening separately.
4.1.2.2 Based on finish hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into “hardware
groups” indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or
opening. Include the following information:
4.1.2.2.1 Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item.
4.1.2.2.2 Name and manufacturer of each item.
4.1.2.2.3 Fastenings and other pertinent information.
4.1.2.2.4 Location of hardware set cross- referenced to indications on drawings
both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
4.1.2.2.5 Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, similar information,
contained in schedule.
1) Mounting locations for hardware.
2) Door and frame sizes and materials.
3) Construction keying schedule.
4.1.3 Submit initial draft of schedule along with essential product data in order to facilitate the
fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow metal frame) which is critical in the project construction
schedule. Submit final draft of schedule after samples, product data, coordination with shop
drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and similar information has been completed and
accepted.
4.1.4 Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to final ordering of finish hardware,
submit one sample of each type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required, and tagged
with full description for coordination with schedule.
4.1.4.1 Sample will be returned to the supplier. Units which are acceptable and remain
undamaged through submittal, review and field comparison procedures may,
after final check of operation, be used in the work, within limitations of keying
coordination requirements.
4.1.4.2 Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work
to be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware. Check shop drawing of
such other location and installation of hardware.
4.1.5 Manufacturer’s Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer’s products which have manufacturer’s
name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in
conjunction with required acceptable to the Engineer or/and Architect Permit manufacturer’s
identification on rim of lock cylinders only.

4.1.6 Keying Schedule:
Following receipt of approved finish hardware schedule, prepare a construction keying
schedule.
4.1.6.1 Submit copies of proposed keying schedule to Engineer, with correction
inserted.
4.1.6.2 As soon as possible after key conference, submit typed copies of keying
schedule to Engineer.
5. Substitutions
5.1 If a specified hardware item is not available, the Employer’s representative reserves the right to select
other hardware, equal in the Employer’s representative’s opinion to the specified item, and require
resubmission of the hardware schedule listing the selected item.
6. Packing and Delivery
6.1 Packing of hardware separated with labeled identification the manufacturer’s name, type, number,
and name of the item, and tagged with the same item number indicated in the hardware schedule.
Include necessary screws, special wrenches, instructions, and installation templates for spotting
mortising tools in each container or package. Delivery of hardware to the job sit shall be the
responsibility of the hardware supplier. Hardware shall be sorted into groups (by door number) by
the hardware supplier.
6.2 Packing of hardware at supplier’ s warehouse. Prepare shipments to the job site or as otherwise
required. Direct shipments form manufacturers will not be permitted.
6.3 Do not use manufacturer’s products that have manufacturer’s name or trade name displayed in a
visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels
and as otherwise acceptable to the Employer’s representative.
6.3.1 Manufacturer’s identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
7. Warranty
7.1 The manufacturer shall be required to provide a 5 year warranty for each of the hardware items.
8. Maintenance
8.1 Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for the
Employer’s representative continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of
door hardware.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. General
Engineer.
2. Material
2.1 Hinge
2.1.1 All hinges supplied shall be available in heavy duty and high frequency. Unless otherwise
specified, all hinges shall be of stainless- steel hairline finish, non- removable pins, non-
magnetic steel pin, ball bearing type or heavy load bearing and to weights as required.
2.1.2 All hinges shall be certified to conform with Fire Proof, by Fire &Smoke proof applicable
standard requirements and shall be conformed Fire Test up to 3 hours. A minimum of 3
hinges shall be provided for each windows leaf or with manufacturer’s recommendation.
2.1.3 All hinges shall be certified tested at least 2,500,000 cycles Grade 7 or 200,000 cycles
Grade 7 opening and closing cycles of the window-leaf at an opening angle of 90 degree.
2.1.4 Hinges materials and finishes shall be selected to match other hardware but subject to
the provision hereof.
2.1.5 All hinges shall be supplied with wood screw for timber window and machine screw for
metal window by manufacturer’s standards.
2.2 Butt Hinge
2.2.4 For wood window, hinges are solid stainless steel hair-line finish 76x102x3.0 mm. including
2 ball bearing pin fixed for window weight as required.
2.3 Widows friction hinge
2.3.1 Hinges made of high grade austenitic stainless steel (304)
2.4 Widow grip handle
2.4.1 The handle made of 6” stainless steel matt for wood windows.
2.5 Window handle
2.5.1 The handle made of aluminum 90̊ ball catch mechanism for tilt and turn windows for
aluminum windows.
2.6 Window bolt
2.6.1 The window bolt made of 3.5” stainless steel matt for wood windows.
2.7 Windows hook

2.7.1 The window hook made of 6” stainless steel matt for wood windows.
2.8 Flush handle
2.8.1 The flush handle and lock set made of stainless steel for sliding aluminum windows or as
shown on drawings.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Surface condition
Examine the area and condition under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct
conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work, Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
2. Installation
Manufacture’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect and/or
3. Hardware Sets
3.1 Door shall receive the hardware in corresponding to the set number listed for the windows in the
window schedule. Schedule of the hardware sets shall be specified on the Contract Drawings.
3.2 All finish hardware as specified and scheduled in the drawings, shall designate the type
and quality of the hardware desired. The furnished hardware brand shall be equivalent to the brand
as specified.
END
5.2.7.5: GLAZING
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide glazing and glazing accessories where shown on the Drawings , as specified here in
and as needed for a complete proper installation.
1.1.2 The term glass wall shall include frame-and accessories, aluminum frame façade and glass
with aluminum doors and windows. The glass wall Contractor shall have the proven
experience, ability, manpower to offer all glass walls as a single contract. All items not
shown or specified, but which are necessary for the proper execution and completion of
the work shall be provided by the Contractor in his scope of work.
2. References
3.1.1 Within the parameters set forth in the above-mentioned documentation, the Contractor is
responsible for the technical and engineering of the system including whatever
modifications or additions may be required to meet the specified requirements while
maintaining the visual design concept.
3.1.2 Qualifications of glass wall Contractors:
3.1.2.1 Able to prove successful performance and regular engagement in the engineering,
manufacture, finishing, installation, glazing and sealing on glass wall projects of
similar complexity and scope over a period of at least five ( 5) years. Works shall
have included the design & engineering, the construction of major glass wall
installations, including any required secondary supporting structure associated with
the glass wall scope. Submit reference list for at least 3 completed projects for
which contractor provided scope of services similar to that defined in these contract
documents. Submit reference list for at least 1 completed project which contractor
provided the similar glass wall design; provide name of project, location and start
date.
3.1.2.2 Demonstration of fabrication capability to achieve the required tolerances for the
steel structure supporting the glass wall. Contractor or Contractor’s fabricator must
be able to show successful fabrication of structures of similar in scope and
complexity over a period of at least five ( 5) years. Submit a list of at least 3
completed projects for which the Contractor or the Contractor’s fabricator provided
steel fabrication services.
3.1.2.3 Demonstration of ability to engineer and deliver quality integrated steel structure
and glass systems including factory structural glazing of unitized panels as required.
Contractor must be able to show successful design, engineering, fabrication and
supply of integrated glass and steel structure systems for projects for at least five (5)
years. Submit a list of at least 5 completed projects for which the Contractor
provided glazing systems similar in scope and complexity as described by these
contract documents.
3.1.3 The Engineer or/and Architect reserves the right to visit the fabricating facilities of the
Contractor and/or sub-contractors at any time when the work is in progress. All shop and
field materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer at all times.
3.1.4 Conformance with the requirements shall be demonstrated, where applicable, by
submitting appropriate manufacturer's standard test reports, calculations and/or
conformance letters.
requirements as demonstrated by engineering calculations and mock-up testing. Methods
of fabrication and assembly shall be at the discretion of the Contractor provided that the
exterior and interior visible architectural effect is not changed, the work of other Contractors
not affected and weather tightness and strength qualities as demonstrated by engineering
calculations and measured by the results of the tests for performance requirements are
not reduced. Remedial measures which may be necessary on the mock-ups or the building
shall maintain standards of quality and durability and are subject to approval by the
Engineer.
3.1.6 Provision for movement of the structure: Glass wall system shall be designed to
structural Engineer of record for the base building and make such provision in the glass
wall system as may be necessary.
loading requirements, as calculated in accordance with applicable codes and the local
code.
3.1.8 Field check for water leakage: Typical areas of each type of glass wall constructed shall be
checked for water penetration This testing will be performed as early in the installation
phase as possible. The Engineer will designate the areas of completed wall not less than 2
column bays in width, and the full building height to be checked.
4.2 Welding shall be done by skilled and qualified skilled workmen where required in accordance with
local building regulations
4.3 Testing Laboratories shall be specifically qualified to conduct laboratory and field performance tests
required by these Specifications.
4.4 Contractor shall comply with requirements set forth without exception for the glass wall work.
4.5 Mock-ups shall be complete with glass, corners, splice joints, sealants and glazing and with all details
identical to those proposed for use in the building. In case of the tension truss structure, provide support
for the glass wall during the test to simulate support characteristics of the tension truss structure.
4.5.1 The Engineer and/or Architect will review mock-up for compliance with architectural visual
requirements prior to performance testing.
4.5.2 Set up and make complete installation of mock-ups at testing laboratory. Upon completion
of satisfactory tests, dismantle mock-ups and deliver boxed to the Site or dispose of as
directed.
4.6 All testing shall be performed on the mock-ups or portions thereof. The testing laboratory shall be
responsible for conducting and reporting the tests and state in the report whether or not the test
specimen conforms to all requirements of the Contract Documents, Necessary corrections shall be
performed by the Contractor at no additional cost.
5. Submittals
5.1 Submit Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified
requirements;
specifications. Drawings shall show scale elevations and sections and include: hardware
schedule, a key to sheet metal and glass thickness, metal finishes and all pertinent
information. Details of field connections, glass fitting details and anchorage and their
relationship to the work of others shall be clearly indicated when necessary to coordinate
the work with other building trades. Show details of fastening and sealing methods and
product joinery. No work shall be fabricated until shop drawings for that work have been
approved for fabrication.
5.4 Submit computer structural analysis for structures included under this section. Calculations shall be
sealed by a qualified, professional engineer licensed in Kingdom of Thailand, and presented in an
explanatory report.
5.5 Submit samples under provisions of the general specifications.
5.6 Submit one (1) sample each of spider pinch plate and/or point-fixed glass fittings material indicating
profile and finish.
5.7 Submit two (2) 12" long samples each of structural tube members and stainless steel rods indicating
profile and finish.
6. Delivery, Storage, and Handling
6.1 Packaging and shipping: Pack components in a manner to avoid damage from handling, shipping and
storage after leaving factory. Mark all components clearly to indicate their location on the building.
6.2 Store material in a location on site and in a manner to avoid damage.
7. Warranty
7.1 The Contractor shall warrant for two ( 2) years from the date of substantial completion. The work
related to the integrated glass wall that the work is not defective in workmanship or materials and
conforms to the final approved shop drawings.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. General
1.1 The drawings and details show a glass façade and others design concept utilizing an integrated
approach between the glass, glazings and supporting structure.
2. Materials

1.3 Steel structural support assemblies, glass wall anchor brackets and assorted interface system
components shall be fabricated of low carbon steel.
3. Fasteners
3.1 Specific bolt assembly components determined by structural analysis.
3.2 Steel structure: All structure hardware to have mechanically deposited zinc with supplementary
chromate treatment. Small quantity miscellaneous steel hardware shall receive electro-deposited
zinc finish.
3.3 Aluminum to Carbon Steel Connections: Fasteners used to join aluminum to carbon steel shall be
stainless steel. Provide isolator between raw steel and mill aluminum surfaces.
3.4 Cable or rod connections: all end-fittings shall be connected to the carbon steel trusses by stainless
steel pin hardware per Contract Documents.
4. Finishes
4.1 Provide high durability corrosion protection finish consisting of the following paint system. Equivalent
performing paint systems shall be allowed subject to the Engineer or/and Architect approval.
4.3 Stainless steel: machined finish on all fittings, standard stainless steel finish on rods and cables.
5. Glass
5.1 General :
5.1.1 For all glass, provide the type and thickness shown on the Drawings or specified herein.
- For general aluminum doors/windows with frame, area of panel not larger than 2.2 sq.m.
shall be used Green-Floated glass, thickness not less than 6 mm.
- For aluminum doors/windows with frame, area of panel larger than 2.2 sq.m. shall be
used Laminated glass, thickness not less than 8 mm.(4+4 green floated glass)
- For frame-less or 2-side frame glass-door/window shall be used Clear Tempered glass
thickness not less than 10 mm.
- For inclined glass panel, glass rail or glass skylight shall be used Tempered Laminated
glass thickness not less than 10 mm. (5+5 Tempered glass)
5.1.2 Where thickness and glazing accessories or both, are not shown on the Drawings or specified
herein the contractor must provide as necessary complete and proper installation or as directed
by the Architect or/and Engineer.
5.2 Plate or float glass: Comply with code applicable standards regulation and design
intent. Where plate glass is called for, plate glass or float glass may be used.
5.3 Sheet glass: Comply with code applicable standards regulation and design intent
5.4 Clear wire glass: Comply with code applicable standards regulation and design intent
wire mesh where shown or required.
5.5 Tempered glass:
5.5.1 Provide tempered or heat-strengthened glass where in-dicated on the Drawings, and
elsewhere as required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
5.5.2 Sizes and cutting: prior to tempering or heat treating, cut glass to required sizes as
determined by accurate measurements of the openings to be glazed, making allowances
for required edge clearances.
5.5.3 All tempered glass shall have belt arised edges or better.
5.5.4 Do not cut, work, or permanently mark after toughening. Use installation methods which
prevent the glass making direct contact metals or other non-resilient materials.
5.5.5 100% heat soak testing for all tempered glass. Tempered glass shall be subject to quality
control measure to minimize the occurrence of nickel sulfide stones and a manufacturer's
certification of heat soaking is required. This specification defines nickel sulfide stones as
a glass material defect. Installed tempered glass, which breaks due to nickel sulfide stones
shall be replaced.
5.6 Heat Strengthen glass: Comply with code applicable standards regulation and design
intent
5.7 Laminated glass: Comply with code applicable standards regulation and design
intent. Two lites of glass laminated with poly vinyl butyral (PVB). Units shall conform to TIS 1222-
2539, ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201 for safety glazing. Provide PVB interlayer of a minimum 0.060-
inch thickness as structurally required. LOW-E coated on the external surface of building enclosures
where installs air-conditioning system
6. Sealant
6.1 Silicone sealants and adhesives shall be of the highest quality and tested for strength, adhesion, non-
staining and durability for this specific application. Submit test data to the Engineers for approval.
Provide custom color silicone as required by the Engineer and/or Architect.
6.2 Materials shall be a non-staining type such as:
6.2.1 Butyl compounds
6.2.2 Polyurethane compounds:
6.2.3 Silicone compounds
6.2.4 Preformed tape, non-curing type
6.2.5 Exterior perimeter sealing compound
6.2.6 Expanded cellular glazing tape
7. Fabrication
7.1 General
All parts of the glazing shall be of the materials design sizes and thickness subject of commercial
tolerances shown or called for on the Engineer approved drawings and/or herein specified. Methods
of fabrication and assembly.
7.2 Steel fabrication tolerances
7.2.1 Relative welded plate locations: dimension +/- 1/16 inch over a 3' - 6" length
7.2.2 General straightness parameters: over a 7' - 0" length, +/- 1/16 inch over a 50' - 0" length,
+/- 1/4 inch
7.3 Joints in metal work: All exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce continuity of line and
design, with all joints, unless otherwise shown or specified, being accurately fitted and rigidly secured.
7.4 All fitting and assembly work shall be done in the.
7.5 Protection against galvanic action shall be provided wherever dissimilar metals are in contact, except
in the case of aluminum in contact with galvanized steel, zinc or relatively small areas of stainless
steel or nickel silver (white bronze). This protection shall be provided either by painting the contact
surfaces with zinc chromate primer or of an appropriate sealer or tape.
PART III: EXECUTION

1.2 Clean glazing channels, stops, and rabbets to receive the glazing materials, making free from
obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the work.
1.2.1 Remove protective coatings which might fail in adhesion or interfere with bond of sealants.
1.2.2 Comply with manufacturers’ instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately prior to
application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes.
1.2.3 Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds in accordance with manufacturers’
recommendations.
2. Installation
2.1 Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation.
2.1.1 Do not install items which are improperly sized, have damaged edges, or are scratched,
abraded, or damaged in any other manner.
2.1.2 Do not remove labels from glass until so directed by the Engineer and/or Architect.
2.1.3 Install glass so distortion waves, if present, run in the horizontal direction.
2.1.4 Cut and process edges in accordance with the glass manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.2 Locate setting blocks at sills one quarter of the width of the glass in form each end of the glass, unless
otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer.
2.2.1 Use blocked of proper size to support the glass in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2.2.2 Provide spacers for all glass sizes larger than 1.5 meter united inches, to separate glass from
stops; expect where continuous glazing gaskets or felts are provided.
2.2.2.1 Locate spacer no more than 60 centimeter apart, and no closer than 30
centimeter to a corner.
2.2.2.2 Place spacers opposite one another.
2.2.2.3 Make bite of spacer on glass or more.
2.3 Set glass in a manner which produces the greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance.
2.4 Do not use two different glazing materials in the same joint system unless the joint use is approved
in advance by the Architect or/and Engineer.
2.5 Mask, or otherwise protect, surfaces adjacent to installation of sealants.
2.6 Miter-cut and seal the joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations, to provide watertight and airtight seal at corners and other locations where joints
are required.
2.7 Protect glass from breakage after installation by promptly installing streamers or ribbons, suitably
attached to the framing and held free from glass. Do not apply warning markings, streamers, ribbons,
or other items directly to the glass except as specifically directed by the Architect or/and Engineer.
END
5.2.7.6: LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide louvers and vents where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in and as needed
1.1.2 The louvers and vents Contractor is to provide an integrated all louvers and vents systems
for the Project, including all design & engineering, labor, materials, appliances and services
required to manufacture, deliver, furnish and install all items necessary for the proper
execution and completion of all louvers and vents related works as shown on the Drawings,
as specified herein and/or as required by work conditions. The term louvers and vents shall
include louvers, vents, frame and accessories. The louvers and vents Contractor shall have
the proven experience, ability, manpower to offer all louvers and vents as a single contract.
All items not shown or specified, but which are necessary for the proper execution and
completion of the work shall be provided by the Contractor in his scope of work.
1.2 Related work :
1.2.1 Document affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to
General Condition, Supplementary Conditions, and others. Section of these
Specifications.
3. Submittals
3.1 Submit manufacturer’s product data with application and installation instructions for all products in
accordance with the submittal requirements. Product data shall include certifications and test reports
necessary to show compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 Submit copies of the relevant Rain and Air performance test certification, applicable to applicable
standard requirement and BSRIA test procedures, must be submitted for the Employer’s
representative approval.
3.3 Submit shop drawing for fabrication and erection of louver units and accessories. Include plane,
elevations and details of sections and connections to adjoining work. Indicate materials, finishes,
fasteners, joinery and other information to determine compliance with specified requirements.
3.4 Submit 150mm square sample of required finish. Prepare sample on metal of same gage and alloy
to be used in work. Where normal color and texture variations are to be expected, include 2 or more
units in each sample showing limits of such variations.
3.5 Submit product certificates signed by louver manufacturer certifying that products comply with
specified requirements and are licensed to bear BSRIA seal based on tests made according to
applicable standard requirement “Method of Test for Water Rejection Performance of Louvers subject
to Simulated Rainfall and complying with Certified Rating Program.
4. Performance
4.1 The supplier of the material shall perform work in accordance with recognized International Quality
Assurance Standards.
4.2 The supplier of the material shall coordinate with the Contractor to ensure the manufacturer, supply
and installation of product is fully integrated with the architectural finishes where finishes is required.
4.3 The supplier of the louver system shall have a substantial track record of not less than 5 years for
the manufacturer and supply of high performance louver systems in applications with similar weather
conditions and tested to the standards listed in this

specification.
4.4 The louver system shall be aerodynamically designed to provide minimum restriction to
airflow low velocity and shall have the following Maximum Airflow Coefficient values and
high volume airflow at low-pressure drop with suitable rain defense
Aerodynamic
Type of Louver Coefficient Air Flow class Rain Defense Class
Single Bank More than 0.4 1 D

Double Bank 0.30-0.399 2 A up to airflow 1.0m/s
Triple Bank 0.20-0.299 3 A up to airflow 3.5m/s
4.5 The louver system shall be designed to create a pressure drop of not more than the
following pressure at face velocity 2.5 m/s
Type of Louver Maximum pressure drop Pa)

Single Bank 20
Double Bank 40
Triple Bank 60
4.6 The louver system shall be designed to restrict the rain as far as practicable and shall have been
tested according to the HEVAC 5th edition “Laboratory testing and rating of weather louvers when
subject to simulated rain.”
4.7 Rain drainage shall take place via extruded mullion and sill sections and the inner blades will consist
of upturn drainage gutters to transport rainwater effective to the vertical drainage mullions and to
the external face of the louver system.
4.8 All components and fixings of the louver system shall be capable, in conjunction with the frame
support steelworks, of withstanding the wind loads, which have been used in designing the
building/curtain walling system.
4.9 The entire louver system should be able to withstand the wind load according ASCE 07 standard
5. Delivery, Storage and Handling
5.1 Deliver material in good condition to the site in the manufacture’s original unopened containers that
bear the name and brand of the manufacturer, project identification, and shipping and handling
instruction.
5.2 Store materials in a clean, dry, enclosed space off the ground, and protected from the weather and
from extremes of heat and cold. Protect adhesives from freezing. Store flooring, adhesives and
accessories in the spaces where they will e installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
Engineer.
stipulated under Construction Specification of this Contract
1.3 The louver systems shall consist of horizontal louver blades, vertical mullions, drainage frames
constructed throughout from the highest quality extruded aluminum alloy having proven resistance
to industrial and marine atmosphere and high strength to weight ratio.
1.4 All Louvers, mullions, frames, blades shall be manufactured from aluminum grade 6063-T5.
Otherwise, components that cannot fabrication by extrusion process can be used alloy grade 3003
or 3105 instead.
1.5 Louver Panel height exceeds 1.5 m. a structural steel support according to the professional
engineering calculations is required, which will be provided by the contractor.
1.6 Louver blades shall be able to span up to 1.25 meters long between supports taking into
consideration the above mentioned wind load conditions.
1.7 The louvers shall incorporate a drain system such that water collected within the blades will be
transported to the rear mullions and downwards out the louver face.
1.8 Louvered doors shall comprise single or double leaf arrangements to incorporate the specialist louver
panels as previously described, including door frame hinges and hardware all to be mounted in
prepared jambs.
1.9 Bolts and fixings shall be stainless steel of appropriate grade and mechanical properties to suit
designed functions and with appropriate isolation device to prevent any possible bimetallic action.
1.10 Where required to follow the shape of the building, the louver shall be facetted with concealed
joints.
1.11 Louver blades shall be attached to vertical mullions without surface drilling or riveting and shall
remain horizontal with equal spacing at all time irrespective of environment temperature. All louver
fixing shall be through stainless steel screws.
1.12 The louver system shall be coated in PVDF ≥ 70/30 finishes, other coatings will not be acceptable.
1.13 Front louver blades are to be fixed to support mullions with purpose made extruded aluminum
blade clip and will allow expansion and contraction to suit environment conditions.
1.14 Louver Bird Screens
1.14.1 Provide removable bird screen for exterior louvers where indicated.
1.14.2 Fabricated screen frames of same metal and finish as louver units to which
secured.
1.14.2.1 Provide frames consisting of U-shaped or Extrusion Aluminum
metal for permanently securing screen mesh.
1.14.3 Fabricate bird screen from the following:
1.14.3.1 12 mm 8g. mesh, 1.5mm aluminum wire.
1.14.3.2 15 mm spacing with 2mm diameter stainless wire
1.14.4 Locate screen on inside face of louvers. Secure screens to louver frames
with tempered aluminum machine screws, spaced at each corner and at
300mm o.c. between corners.
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Preparation
1.1 Examine the contract drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work
required under this section.
1.2 Verify all measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and
scheduling of the work of this section with the work of related trades, with particular attention given
to the installation of items embedded in concrete and masonry so as not to delay job progress.
1.3 Field Measurement: Check actual louver openings by accurate field measurements before fabrication,
and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying work.
1.4 Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying work, guarantee opening dimensions
and proceed with fabricating louvers without field measurements. Coordinate constructions to ensure
actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
1.5 Provide all templates as required to related trade for location of all support and anchorage items.
2. Installation
2.1 Locate and place louver units plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work.
2.2 Use concealed anchorages. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect
metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
2.3 Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide revals and openings
for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
2.4 Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding operations required for fitting and
jointing. Restore finisheds so there is no evidence of corrective work. Return item which cannot be
refinished in field to shop, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit, or provide new units,
at Contractor’s option.
2.5 Coat concealed surfaces in contact with other metals with zinc-chromate paint.
2.6 The louver system shall be suitable for easy site assembly where for large panels the rear panels will
be supplied pre-fixed from factory with maximum width of 1.5 meters and front blades supplied in
knock-down cut to length forms.
2.7 Small panels may be as an option supplied as factory built modules, but should be in line with the
surrounding louver lines.
2.8 The construction of the louver system shall take account of the requirement for installation on site
by a local applicator. The louver manufacturer must provide with own staff, on site advice and first
panel installation supervision to ensure quality of work.
3.1 Do not remove protective material until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective
material is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer’s instruction.
3.2 Protect lovers and vents from damage of any kind during construction period including use of
temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove
protective covering at time of substantial completion.
3.3 Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction period, so that no evidence
remains of correction work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as judged by the Architect,
remove damaged units and replace with new units.
3.4 Test operation of adjustable louvers, if any, and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units
that comply with requirements.
3.5 Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary
covering to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until
final cleaning.
3.6 Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and mild soap or detergent not harmful
to finishes. Rinse surface thoroughly and dry.
END
5.2.8: STAIR AND RAMP WORK

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 This Specification includes concrete and steel structure for staircase and ramp
related pipe railings, complete.
(1) Granite tiling for staircase finish
(2) Terrazzo tiling for staircase finish
(3) Washed gravel for staircase finish
(4) Washed sand for staircase finish
(5) Granito ceramic tiling for staircase finish
(6) Terracotta tiling for staircase finish
(7) Steel trowel concrete for staircase finish
(8) Wood trowel concrete for staircase finish
(9) Vinyl Tilling for staircase finish
(10) Wood Plank for staircase finish
(11) Checker plate steel for staircase finish
(12) Supporting material to complete works
(13) Steel pan stairs
(14) Steel stairs with treads fabricated of steel grating
(15) Granite tiling finish for steel structural stair
(16) Shop priming and field touch-up
2. References
standards may be proposed for consideration by the Employer’ s representative. The Employer’ s
design intent.
3. Submittals
3.1 Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication and construction, and engineering analysis stamped by a
structural engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project.
3.2 Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
3.2.1 Submit manufacturer's data for all finishing materials, accessories, and
items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds,
joint systems, curing compounds, and others as requested by Architect.
3.2.2 Engineering performance data and recommendations.
3.2.3 Batch mixing and delivery requirements and recommendations.
3.2.4 Placement and finishing methods.
4.1 Manufacturer Qualifications:
4.1.1 With concrete requirements similar to that required for the project.
4.1.2 With self-consolidating concrete requirements similar to that required for the
project.
4.2 Installer Qualifications:
4.2.1 With concrete requirements similar to that required for the project.
4.2.2 With self-consolidating concrete requirements similar to that required for the project.
4.3 Testing Agency Qualifications:
4.3.1 Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician,
Grade 1, per ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
4.4 Conform to ACI301 and ACI 318.
4.5 Conform to ACI 305R concrete during hot weather.
4.6 Conform to ACI 306R concrete during cold weather.
4.7 Obtain cement and aggregate from same source for all Work.
4.8 Quality Control: Do not commence placement of concrete until mix designs have been reviewed and
approved by the Engineer, and until copies are at Project site, batch plant, and building inspection
department.
5.1 Maintain environmental conditions ( temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental
conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
5.2 Admixtures intended to accelerate hardening of concrete or produce higher than normal strength at
early periods will not be permitted, unless approved in writing by Architect. Calcium chloride is
specifically prohibited.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Concrete staircase or concrete with steel structure staircase materials
1.1 Granite Tiling for staircase finish:
1.1.1 2 0 mm, 25 mm thickness Granite tiles polished or waterjet finish for stair treads or
risers as specified on the drawings.
1.1.2 The landing paved with 300x300x20 mm. polished or waterjet granite tiles.
1.1.3 100 mm. high granite skirting or as specified on the drawings.
1.1.4 The floor area has changed levels must paved with 150x150 mm. or 200x200 mm. or
300x300 mm. stop warning ceramic floor tiles as specified on the drawing
1.1.5 Cramp & Pin fixing with galvanized steel expansion bolts with washers as specified on the
approved shop drawings.
1.1.6 Tiling and grout adhesive
1.1.7 Penetrating Sealer or Water Repellant Treatment.
1.1.8 Stair nosing grooved line on granite tiles as specified on the drawings.
1.1.9 The stainless steel railing, steel railing and wall type railing see specified ornamental
section.
1.2 Terrazzo Tiling for staircase finish:
1.2.1 The treads or risers staircase made of terrazzo cast-in place as specified on the drawings.
1.2.2 The landing paved with 600x600x32 mm. terrazzo tiles.
1.2.3 100 mm. high terrazzo skirting or as specified on the drawings.
1.2.8 Stair nosing made of aluminum or brass as specified on the drawings.
section.
1.3 Washed gravel for staircase finish:
1.3.1 Washed gravel finish of staircase treads or risers as specified on the drawings.
1.3.2 The landing paved with washed gravel finish.
1.3.3 100 mm. high washed gravel skirting or as specified on the drawings.
1.3.4 The floor area has changed levels must paved with 150x150 mm. or 200x200
mm. or 300x300 mm. stop warning ceramic floor tiles as specified on the
drawing
1.3.7 Stair nosing grooved line on washed gravel as specified on the drawings.
section.
1.4 Washed sand for staircase finish:
1.4.1 Washed sand finish of staircase treads or risers as specified on the drawings.
1.4.2 The landing paved with washed sand finish.
1.4.3 100 mm. high washed sand skirting or as specified on the drawings.
mm. or 300x300 mm. stop warning ceramic floor tiles as specified on the drawing
1.4.7 Stair nosing grooved line on washed sand as specified on the drawings.
section.
1.5 Granito ceramic floor tiling for staircase finish:
1.5.1 300x300 mm. non- slip or polished granito ceramic floor tiles for staircase treads or risers
as specified on the drawings.
1.5.2 The landing paved with 600x600 mm. non-slip or polished granito ceramic floor tiles.
1.5.3 100 mm. high granito ceramic skirting or as specified on the drawings.
1.5.8 Stair nosing made of P.V.C. or aluminum as specified on the drawings.

section.
1.6 Terracotta tiling for staircase finish:
1.6.1 12”x12” terracotta tiles for staircase treads or risers as specified on the drawings.
1.6.2 The landing paved with 12”x12”non-slip or polished granito ceramic floor tiles.
1.6.3 100 mm. high terracotta skirting or as specified on the drawings.
section.
1.7 Steel trowel concrete for staircase finish:
1.7.1 Steel trowel concrete for staircase treads or risers as specified on the drawings.
1.7.2 The landing made of steel trowel concrete floor.
1.7.3 100 mm. high enamel skirting or as specified on the drawings.
section.
1.8 Wooden trowel concrete for staircase finish:
1.8.1 Wooden trowel concrete for staircase treads or risers as specified on the drawings.
1.8.2 The landing made of wooden trowel concrete floor.
1.8.3 100 mm. high enamel skirting or as specified on the drawings.
section.
1.9 Vinyl tiling for staircase finish:
1.9.1 300x300x2 mm. vinyl tiles for staircase treads or risers as specified on the drawings.
1.9.2 The landing paved with 300x300x2 mm. vinyl tiles.
1.9.3 100 mm. high vinyl skirting or as specified on the drawings.
1.9.6 Wax
1.9.7 Stair nosing made of P.V.C. as specified on the drawings.

section.
1.10 Wood plank for staircase finish:
1.10.1 20- 25 mm. thickness solid wood plank for staircase treads or risers as specified on the
drawings.
1.10.2 The landing paved with wood floor as specified on the drawings.
1.10.3 100 mm. high ¾”x4” wood skirting with painted finish or as specified on the drawings.
1.10.6 Polyurethane or wood stain painted top surface.
1.10.7 Stair nosing made of wood plank as specified on the drawings.
1.10.8 The stainless steel railing, steel railing, wood railing see specified ornamental section.
1.11 Checker plate staircase finish: (ST11) Steel structure staircase materials
Steel shapes: ASTM A36 or JIS G3101 Class SS400

Steel tubing: ASTM A36, A500, or A501
Steel pipe: ASTM A 120 standard weight for general use; ASTM A53 Grade B where
used for structural purposes.
Steel sheet: ASTM A570, Grade A, or ASTM A611, Grade A.
Checker steel plate: ATSM A36 or JIS G3101 Class SS400
Bolts and nuts: ASTMA307
Electrodes: AWS 01.1, E70XX Series as required for intended use.
Shop primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal
modified alkyd primer selected for good
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion,
and compatibility with finish paint, and for
capability to provide a sound foundation for
field- applied topcoats despite prolonged
exposure complying with performance
requirements of FS TT-P645.
Galvanizing repair paint: High zinc dust content paint with dry film containing not less than 94%
zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-
P-21035 or SSPC Paint 20.
Bituminous paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC Paint 12, except
containing no asbestos fibers.
Non-shrink grout:
Bolt inserts:
Steel grating: Manufacture and pattern indicated, designed to support loads required
by code for stair construction, minimum
percentage opening as shown.
1.12 Exposed concrete for ramp finish: (Ramp 1)

1.12.1 Wooden trowel concrete for ramp as specified on the drawings.
1.12.2The landing made of wooden trowel concrete floor.

1.12.3Cramp & Pin fixing with galvanized steel expansion bolts with washers as specified on the
1.12.4 Grooved line made of P.V.C. or as specified on the drawings.
1.12.5 The steel railing and wall type railing see specified ornamental section.
1.13 Washed sand for ramp finish: (Ramp 2)
1.13.1 Washed sand finish of ramp with U-10x10 mm. P.V.C. grooved line@ 100 mm. or as specified
on the drawings.
1.13.2 The landing paved with washed sand finish.
1.13.3 100 mm. high washed sand skirting or as specified on the drawings.
mm. or 300x300 mm. stop warning ceramic floor tiles as specified on the drawing
section.
1.14 Granite Tiling for ramp finish: (Ramp 3)
1.14.1 20 mm. thickness Granite tiles waterjet finish for ramp with grooved line 10x10mm. @ 100
mm. or as specified on the drawings.
1.14.2 The landing paved with 300x300x20 mm. waterjet granite tiles.
1.14.3 100 mm. high granite skirting or as specified on the drawings.
1.14.8 The stainless steel railing, steel railing and wall type railing see specified ornamental section.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 Installer recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect and/ or
work.
END
ROOFING WORK
5.2.9.1: TILES ROOFING
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide tiles roofing where shown on the Drawings , as specified here in and as needed
for a complete proper installation.
1.1.2 The term of tiles roofing shall include roof tiles, and accessories. The tiles roofing
contractor shall have the proven experience, ability, manpower to offer all tiles roofing
as a single contract. All items not shown or specified, but which are necessary for the
proper execution and completion of the work shall be provided by the Contractor in his
scope of work.
2. References
3. Performance
5. Submittals
requirements;
6.3 To Deliver objects, material and property to contractor must deliver objects and material before and
after demolition throughout property by transportation and shall classify keeping indicate date time
place by owner complete with expanse contractor.
7. Warranty
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. General
1.1 The drawings and details show roof and others design concept utilizing an integrated approach
between the roof, roofing and supporting structure.
2. Materials
approvals. However, it shall be the prerogative of the Engineer and/or Architect to choose any
Items
No. Cat. Acceptability Criterion
Quality Characteristics Unit
The tile surface is smooth or
rough. But not broken, not convex,
1 General characteristics -
concave or any other defect. That
hinders its use.
2 Dimension % ≤ 2% (Deviation from the design)
Body
3 Transverse Breaking Load kgf. ≥ 100 kgf.

4 Water absorbtion % ≤ 10%
5 Distortion mm. ≤ 5 mm.
Submerged surface tiles 2 hrs. Not
6 Permeability - appear a drop of water under the
tiles.
7 Appearance - Normal
Coating
8 Shades from eye - Compare from standard tile

2.3 Roof Tiles
2.3.1 Cement roof Tile (C-PAC Monier Cement Tiles Roofing)
Cement roof tile is the interlock follow standard TIS 535- 2540. The roof is painted as the
cement is wet, the roof features a long- lasting color and peeling off easy. The roof must
meet standard and qualification from manufacturer’ s for cross section – profile , color ,
purlins , screw – blot and all accessory for roof tile materials fixing purlins use appropriate
sign according to standard manufacture’s as indicated on the drawings.
2.3.2 Kite Cement Roof Tile
Kite cement roof tile is the interlock sign approximate 9” x9” and 13” x13” must meet
standard and qualification from manufacturer’s for cross section-profile ,color , purlins ,screw-
bolt and all accessory for roof the materials fixing purlins use appropriate sign according to
standard manufacturer’s as indicates on the drawings.
Roof tile must be tested by the department of Science Service. To determine the standard
of Roof tile as this table
2.3.3 Corrugated Roof Tile (Corrugated Tile Roofing)
Corrugated tile manufactured from fiber cement asbestos free ( TIS 1407- 2540) sign
approximate 0. 50x1. 50 thick 0. 6 mm. ( or as shown on drawing) , color ,screw- bolt and all
accessory for roof the materials fixing purlins use appropriate sign according to standard
manufacturer’s as indicated on the drawings.
2.3.4 Small Corrugated Roof Tile (Corrugated Tile Roofing)
Small Corrugated tile manufactured from fiber cement asbestos free ( TIS 18- 2529) sign
approximate 0. 50x1. 50 thick 0. 4 mm. ( or as shown on drawing) ,color ,screw- bolt and all
2.3.5 Fiber cement roof tile
Fiber cement roof tile manufactured from fiber cement asbestos free sign approximate
800x510x6 mm. ( or as shown on drawing) ,color ,screw- bolt and all accessory for roof the
materials fixing purlins use appropriate sign according to standard manufacturer’s as indicated
on the drawings.
2.3.6 Clay roof tile
Clay roof tile manufactured from clay sign as shown on drawing, color ,screw-bolt and all
3. Finishes
4. Roofing
4.1 General :
4.1.1 For all roofs, provide the type and thickness shown on the Drawings or specified herein.
4.1.2 Where thickness and roofing accessories or both, are not shown on the Drawings or specified
herein the contractor must provide as necessary complete and proper installation or as
directed by the Architect or/and Engineer.
4.2 Steel roof structure in accordance with the Section Metal Fabrications, or the structural engineering
for purlin section. Unless specified on structural drawings: galvanized steel purlin, not less than (0.55)
(0.70)mm or equivalent.
4.3 Roofing materials: indicated on the drawings, installed using dry tech system.
4.4 Ridge, eaves filler unit, flashing, and others to prevent roof leaks (dry tech system: use products of
roofing manufacturer company, or as indicates on the drawings.
4.5 Screw or bolt for roof materials fixing to purlins, with washer and rubber sheet use appropriate size
according to standard or manufacturer’s suggestion with good leakage protection, by approval from
the Supervisor
4.6 Ventilation louvers: us (wood louver as specified on the drawing)
4.7 Rain gutter: (color- coated aluminum oven dried) or equivalent, color , with rain drainage pipe
(rectangular), (rain gutter cover or leaf guard grate) and full accessories.
4.8 Others as specified on the drawings.
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Installation
1.1 For installation of other roof types and ventilation louvers, comply with the manufacture’s suggestion.
Present installation process and shop drawings to get Supervisor approval before installation.
1.1.1 before roofing , check if the level and slope are right, If there is any mistake because of
roof structure installation purlin and roofing.
1.1.2 inspect wind and rain direction. avoid install roofing with roof overlap joints facing the wind
direction, by approval from Supervisor.
1.1.3 For cutting and drilling roof material, and for roof installation, use appropriate equipment
by approval from Supervisor.
1.1.4 Strictly comply with the roof material manufacturer’s suggestion for roofing, installing
catches and others equipment, overlapping, sealing, and waterproofing, with approval from
Supervisor, Provide protection processes to prevent damage to roof materials while
installing. inspecting. or fixing after installation.

1.2.1 After finished roofing, inspect carefully for and damage of the roof. Test the roof to confirm
no leakage problems, and well water drainage by spraying water to the whole roof with
appropriate pressure and period of time, or by other methods according to the agreement
of Supervisor.
1.2.2 After finish roofing. clean the roof and gutter, and check for roofing performance. if there is
any damage, repair or replace according to the order from Supervisor. Protect the roof from
damage and dirtiness during the whole construction period.
END
5.2.9.2 : SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART I: DECRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide sheet metal roofing where shown on the Drawings , as specified here in and as
needed for a complete proper installation.
1.1.2 The term of sheet metal roofing shall include sheet metal roofing, steel frame, flashing,
nut, screw and accessories. The sheet metal roofing contractor shall have the proven
experience, ability, manpower to offer all metal sheet siding as a single contract. All items
not shown or specified, but which are necessary for the proper execution and completion
2. References
2.2 Australian Standard AS 1397-2011 Continuous Hot-Dip Metallic Coated Steel Sheet
and Strip or equivalent
Building Application or equivalent
3. Performance
4. Submittals
requirements;
work.
5. Warranty
5.1 The contractor shall warranty covering the installation and workmanship for period of ) 2 ( years from

5.2 The contractor shall warranty materials for period of )30 (years from acceptance of the completed of
contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.3 Sheet metal roofing and flashing with boltless system.
1.4 Metal sheet: coated by corrosion protection coating [ alloy comprises aluminum 55% , zinc 43. 4% ,
and silicon 1.6%] or [alloy comprises aluminum 55%, zinc 45%] [[AZ150], Australian Standard AS 1397-
2011 Continuous Hot- Dip Metallic Coated Steel Sheet and Strip - coatings of zinc and zinc alloyed
with aluminium and magnesium or equivalent.]
Building Applications – performance requirements or equivalent. color defined later
1.5.1 Topside coating layer comprises [primer: 5 microns thick, undercoating polyester: 20
microns thick].
1.5.2 Underside coating layer comprises [grey polyester: 5 microns thick, undercoating by primer:
5 microns thick].
1.6 Sheet metal roofing shall have shape, size as specified on the drawings, and have properties as
follows.
1.6.1 General metal sheet roofing must have property as follow (AS1397-G550-AZ150):
1.6.1.1 Minimum yield strength not less than 550 Mpa (G550)
1.6.1.2 Sheet metal thickness, not including coating layer, BMT not less than
0.48 mm.
1.6.2 Metal sheet roofing for 3D-Shape must have property as follow (AS1397-G300-AZ150):
1.6.2.1 Minimum yield strength not less than 300 Mpa (G300)
1.6.2.2 Sheet metal thickness, not including coating layer, BMT not less than 0.55 mm.
1.7 Sheet metal roofing must be one sheet along the length of roof, fixed by boltless system or standing
seem system.
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Installation
work.
1.2 Install sheet metal roofing as indicated on the approved shop drawings. Installation for the other
parts related to sheet metal roofing such as translucent wall panels, metal ceiling, metal siding and
ventilation louvers shall follow manufacturer's suggestion with approval from Supervisor.
1.2.3 Installed by boltless systems or standing seem system and self- drilling screw for support( follow
1.3.3 After installation, test for wall leak by spraying water according to suggestion from Supervisor. If there
is leakage, repair or replace without additional charge.
1.3.4 Before the last term of closeout procedures, completely clean the roofing and wall.
END
5.2.9.3 : FIBERGLASS/ACRYLIC TRANSLUCENT ROOF

PART I: DECRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide translucent roof where shown on the Drawings , as specified here in and as needed
for a complete proper installation.
1.1.2 The term translucent roof shall include fiberglass translucent roof, acrylic translucent roof,
flashing, nut, screw and accessories. The translucent roof contractor shall have the proven
experience, ability, manpower to offer all translucent roof as a single contract. All items not
shown or specified, but which are necessary for the proper execution and completion of the
work shall be provided by the Contractor in his scope of work.
2. References
2.2 AS/NZS 4256.3 : 2006 standard and TIS 612-2549
2.3 Nut and screw test passed AS 3566.2 (not less than class 3)
3. Performance
4. Submittals
requirements;
work.
5. Warranty
contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. General
2. Materials
2.1 Acrylic Translucent Materials
2.2 Fiberglass Translucent Materials
2.2.1 Glass reinforced polyester is composite material with fiberglass, resin, polyester film, Gel resin include
pigment reflectance solar energy. Glass reinforced polyester is translucent material resistance against
corrosive.
2.2.2 Translucent roof coating the top with Gel coat exo- set205 include pigment reflectance
solar energy thickness not less than 100 micron meters.
2.2.3 Translucent roof have Solar Optical Properties in table
Product Visible %Solar %Solar %Solar SHG U-Value
Light SC SHGC
(2400 GSM) Transmittance Reflection Absorption (watt/m2) (watt/m2.K)
(%)
Roof
44.00% 20.40% 47.00% 32.60% 0.31 211.14 4.49 0.27
Translucent
2.2.4 Self-drilling screw:
(1) Comply to AS3566-2002 Section 5.3(b) Outdoor Exposure testing (Class 3) for Self-Drilling
(2) Comply to AS3566-2002 Section 5.4(a) Outdoor Exposure testing (Class 4) for Self-Drilling
2.2.5 Products shall have manufacturer's trademark
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Installation
work.
1.2 Install translucent roof as indicated on the approved shop drawings. Installation for the other parts
related to fiberglass translucent roof such as roof sheet, siding, and ventilation louvers shall follow
1.2.1 Installed by bolt systems, and self-drilling screw (wafer head) follow

1.3.2 Before the last term of closeout procedures, completely clean the roof.
END
5.2.9.4 : POLYCARBONATE ROOFING
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
1.1 This Specification includes
1.1.1 Solid Polycarbonate Sheet Roofing and Multi wall rbonate Sheet Roofing, Standing Seam
system.
1.1.2 Supporting material to complete works
2. References
2.1 ASTM D635 “Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extend and Time of Burning of
Plastics in a Horizontal Position ” , American Society for Testing and Material
2.2 ASTM D1003 “ Standard Test Method for Haze and Light Transmittance of Transparent Plastics ”
,American Society for Testing and Materials
2.3 ASTM E424“ Standard Test Method for Solar Energy Transmittance and Reflectance (terrestrial) of
sheet Material ” ,American Society for Testing and Materials
2.4 UL 580 “ Test for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies”, Underwriters Laboratories.Inc
3. Submittal
3.1 Product Data : Submit manufacture’s product data and installation instruction.
3.2 Shop Drawing : Provide drawing indicating details of fabrication and installation
3.3 Sample : Submit selection and verification samples , including available product finishes, color and
thicknesses
3.4 Quality Assurance/Control Submittals : Submit the following
3.4.1 Test reports: Material test results for compliance of plastic glazing with specified
requirements
3.4.2 Certificates : Submit manufacturer’s certificate that product meet or exceed specified
requirement
4.1 Installer Qualification : Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on project of similar size
and complexity
4.2 Pre-Installation Meetings shall be required
5.1 Delivery : Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels in fact
5.2 Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid constriction
delays products.
5.3 Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental
conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
5.3.1 Store horizontally on a flat pallet in a dry , clean and shaded location
5.3.2 Avoid storage with unsupported overhanging panel ends or edges
5.3.3 Handle panels with care to avoid scratched , edge damage and puncturing
5.3.4 Leave panels in original packaging until time of installation
PART II: PRODUCTS

1. Materials
1.1 Polycarbonate roofing sheet made from high quality polycarbonate (Virgin Polycarbonate) providing
clear color or translucent with UV protection.
1.2 Corrugated and multi-wall Structured Polycarbonate sheets in accordance with the approved shop
drawings or as specified here in. The internal structure has many layer and reinforcement with lean
axis. When press by hand the surface will not damage or reform. Thickness of sheet shall be 8 mm.
or 10 mm. or as specified on the drawing, width not less than 1100 mm.
1.3 Solid Polycarbonate sheet, Thickness is not less than 3 mm. or as specified on the drawing, width not
less than 500 mm.
1.4 The internal structure has many layer and reinforcement with lean axis. When press by hand the
surface will not damage or reform. Thickness not less than 18mm. and width not less than 1 meter.
1.5 M shape polycarbonate joiner (PC Joiner) made of extruded polycarbonate, strengthen by 3 ways fix
design.
1.6 Contractor have to provide 20 years product quality warranty that issue by the manufacture and 1
year installation warranty for water leakage
1.7 Contractor shall provide the following shop drawing to Architect for approval before installation.
2. Accessories: Provide glazing and installation accessories as follow:
2.1 Compression Gaskets:
2.1.1 Material: Extruded or molded gaskets of ( EPDM) ( Silliconized EPDM) ( Neoprene)
( Santoprene) complying with the reference applicable ASTM standards. Do not use PVC
gaskets in any fashion.
2.1.2 Profile: Profile and hardness required to maintain a watertight seal Standard profile.
2.1.3 Manufacturer: Acceptable to glazing and sealant manufacturers.
2.2 Glazing and Building Sealants: (not release ammonia)
2.2.1 Material: Silicone sealant.
2.2.2 Material Standard : in accordance with the approve shop drawings.
2.3 Pre-Formed Tape Sealant :
2.3.1 Material: Preformed, butyl- rubber- based tape for glazing purposes, with or without
continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturer.
2.3.2 Manufacturer Standard : in accordance with the approved shop drawings.
2.3.3 Manufacturer: Acceptable to glazing and sealant manufacturers.
2.4 Attachment Profiles:
2.4.1 Material and Profile: ( Base inverted – H polycarbonate connecting profile) or ( two- part
polycarbonate connecting profile) or ( Combination metal and plastic two- part in
accordance with the approved shop drawing.
2.5 Fasteners:
2.5.1 Material: Corrosion protected steel.
2.5.2 Screw Type: ( Self-tapping) or (Self-drilling) or (Metal screw) with manufacturer approved
washer.
2.5.3 Size: Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for specific application.
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Manufacturer’s Instructions
1.1 Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the multi-wall structured polycarbonate sheets
manufacturer. Including:
a. Manufacturer’s product data
b. Product technical bulletins
c. Product catalog
d. Installation instructions
e. Product carton instructions
2. Cleaning
After installation and before the Employer’s Representative acceptance, comply with the following
cleaning procedure :
5.1 Rinse panel surfaces with clean, lukewarm water to remove all loose dust particles.
5.2 Do not use a synthetic cloth, abrasive cleaners, scrapers, squeegees, highly alkaline detergents, sharp
instruments or dry cleaning with rage or brushes.
5.3 Using a mild detergent (no abrasives or solvents), wash the panel with a soft sponge or brush soaked
in detergent solution.
5.4 Rinse panel surfaces with clean, lukewarm water and dry with a clean cotton cloth to avoid spotting.
3. Protection
Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site.
END
5.2.9.5: SHINGLE ROOF

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide asphalt shingle roof, metal shingle roof where shown on the drawings as specified here
in and as needed for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of these
specifications for requirements which affect the works of this section, whether or not such
related work of other trades, to assure the steady progress of all works of the contract.
1.1.2 The shingle roof contractor is to provide an integrated all shingle roof systems for the
project, including all design & engineering, labor, materials, appliances and services required
to manufacture, deliver, furnish and install all items necessary for the proper execution
and completion of all shingle roof and related works as shown on the drawings, as specified
herein and/or as required by work conditions. The term of shingle roof shall include asphalt
tile or metal tile, sub roof, waterproof material, hip and ridge tile and accessories.
2. References
2.2 ASTM D4586: Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free
2.3 ASTM D3462: Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made from Glass Felt and Surfaced with
Mineral Granules
2.4 ASTM D316: Wind Resistance of Prepared Roof Covering Materials.
2.5 ASTM E108 and NFPA 256: Test for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials
2.6 CAN/ CSA- A123. 5: Asphalt Shingles Made From Organic Felt and Surfaced with Mineral Granules /
Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced With Mineral Granules
2.7 EN 544: Bitumen shingles with mineral and/ or synthetic reinforcements. Product specification and
test methods
2.8 ISO 9001, ISO 14001
2.9 JIS 5420: General Rules Of One-Part Connectors For Printed Wiring Board
2.10 ASTM C1105: Standard Test Method for Length Change of Concrete Due to Alkali- Carbonate Rock
Reaction
2.11 ASTM C177- 79: Standard Test Method for Steady- State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus
2.12 BS 476 Part 5: Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method of test for ignitability
2.13 BS 476 Part 7: Fire Test to Building Material – Surface flame
2.14 BS 476 Part 22: Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method for determination of the fire
resistance of non-loadbearing elements of construction
2.15 ANSI/UL 790: Test for Fire Resistance of Roofing Covering Materials
2.16 UL 997: Wind Resistance of Prepared Roof Covering Materials
3. Performance
4.1 Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary
crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods for proper
performance of the work of this section.
5. Submittals
requirements;
5.2 Manufacturer’ s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect and/ or
6.2 Storage and Protection: Store materials from exposure to harmful conditions. Store in dry, above ground
location.
6.2.1 Stack in pallets as delivered to prevent twisting, bending, abrasion, and denting. Do NOT
overload pallets.
6.2.2 Avoid direct sunlight exposure, temperatures over 95 degrees.

6.2.3 Eye contact: Immediately flush eyes with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Get
medical attention if irritation persists.
6.2.4 Skin contact: Clean exposed skin with warm soapy water. Do not use solvents to remove
material from skin. Get medical attention if irritation persist or develops
6.2.5 Ingestion: This product must not be ingested or eaten. Never give anything to unconscious
person. If vomiting occurs keep head lower than hips to prevent aspiration.
6.3 To deliver objects, material and property to contractor must deliver objects and material before and
after demolition throughout property by transportation and shall classify keeping indicated date time
6.4 Store products in a covered, ventilated area at temperature not more than 43 °C do not store near
steam pipes, radiators or in sunlight.
6.5 Store bundles on flat surface to maximum height recommended by manufacturer store rolls on end.
7. Warranty
7.2 The contractor shall warranty materials for period of ( 10) years from acceptance of the completed
of contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Asphalt Shingle Roof Materials
1.1 The material made of asphalt shingle tile, unless specified: use the material as follow:
1.1.1 Material Width: 39 3/8” (100 cm)
1.1.2 Material Height: Overall 13 3/8” (34 cm)
1.1.3 Material Height: Coverage 5 23/32” (14.5 cm)
1.1.4 Overall Material Thickness: 3/16” (.50 cm)
1.2 Material Composition:
1.2.1 Waterproofing material made with naphthenic, aromatic and aliphatic hydrocarbons with
high molecular weight distillate from crude, about 50% by weight: Petroleum Blown Asphalt
CAS 64742-93-4 (Asphalt oxide; Blown asphalt; Bitumen, oxidized)
1.2.2 Bituminous Materials
1.2.3 Natural Venezuela Oxidized
1.2.4 Exceptionally high UV ray resistance
1.2.5 Low expansion – contraction
1.2.6 High waterproofing capacity
1.2.7 Air induced to reduce material weight
1.2.8 Other raw materials: mineral fillers, polypropylene film and fiberglass (40% by weight)
1.3 Fiberglass Sheet
1.3.1 Two layers of fiberglass between three layers of Bituminous materials – stability against
expansion and contraction of Tiles
1.3.2 Polypropylene film
1.3.3 Storage protection sheet
1.3.4 Natural Copper or Pre-patina
1.3.5 99.7% pure Copper
1.4 Material Weight: 340 lbs/sq.ft.
1.5 Puncture Resistance: 900 lbs/sq.in.
1.6 Peeling Resistance: 4,400 lbs./sq.ft.

1.7 Texture: Granule
1.8 Wind Uplift Ratings Test: UL 90
1.9 Flashing:
1.9.1 Standards according to install guide manufactured to fit according to Contractor diagram
1.10 Fasteners: Large Head Ring Shanked Stainless Steel Nails. Length to be determined appropriately to
the thickness and type of decking. Nail must penetrate decking or a minimum of ¾” into solid
lumber. Nails may be applied through a pneumatic gun.
 Asphalt Shingle Roof Standard
Description Standard Unit Test Result

Length ASTM C 1185 mm. +/-2.5
Width ASTM C 1185 mm. +/-5.0
Thickness ASTM C 1185 mm. +/1-1.0
Density ASTM C 1185 9/cm3 1.2
Moisture Content ASTM C 1185 % 5
Water Absorption ASTM C 1185 % 30
Dimensional Stability ASTM C 1185 % 0.27
Ignitability BS 476 part 5 - Passed
Fire propagation BS 476 part 6 - 1.0
Surface spread of BS 476 part 7 - Class 1
Fire Resistance BS 476 part 22 - 30-60 minute
pH-Value - pH 9
Moe ASTM C 1185 Mpa. 5,000-8,000
Flexural Strength ASTM C 1185 Mpa. 11-15
Thermal ASTM C 177-97 w/m.k 0.18
Thermal Resistance ASTM C 177-97 m2.k/w 0.082
2. Prestige Compact Copper or Pre-Patina Shingle Roof Materials

2.1 The material made of Compact Copper or Pre-Patina Shingle Roof Tile, unless specified: use the material
as follow:
2.1.3 Material Height: Coverage 5 23/32” (14.5 cm)
2.2.1 Waterproofing material made with naphthenic, aromatic and aliphatic hydrocarbons with high
molecular weight distillate from crude, about 50% by weight: Petroleum Blown Asphalt CAS
64742-93-4 (Asphalt oxide; Blown asphalt; Bitumen, oxidized )
2.2.1.1 Bituminous Materials
2.2.1.2 Natural Venezuela Oxidized
2.2.1.3 Exceptionally high UV ray resistance
2.2.1.4 Low expansion – contraction
2.2.1.5 High waterproofing capacity
2.2.1.6 Air induced to reduce material weight

2.2.2 Other raw materials: mineral fillers, polypropylene film and fiberglass (40% by weight)
2.2.2.1 Fiberglass Sheet
2.2.2.2 Two layers of fiberglass between three layers of Bituminous materials – stability
against expansion and contraction of Tiles
2.2.2.3 Polypropylene film
2.2.2.4 Storage protection sheet
2.2.3 Natural Copper or Pre-patina
2.2.3.1 99.7% pure Copper
2.6 Texture: Smooth
2.7 Sliding Copper or Pre-patina to Bituminous Base Per sq.ft: 0/194 degrees F
2.8 Edge Coverage: Copper and Pre-patina bent over the front edge and then under the tile for full face
coverage
2.10 Flashing:
the thickness and type of decking. Nail must penetrate decking or a minimum of ¾” into solid
lumber. Nails may be applied through a pneumatic gun.
3. Prestige Compact Copper Shingle Roof Materials

3.1 The material made of Prestige Compact Copper Shingle Roof Tile, unless specified: use the material
as follow:
3.1.3 Material Height: Coverage 11 13/32” (29 cm)
3.2.1 Waterproofing material made with naphthenic, aromatic and aliphatic hydrocarbons with
high molecular weight distillate from crude, about 50% by weight: Petroleum Blown Asphalt
CAS 64742-93-4 (Asphalt oxide; Blown asphalt; Bitumen, oxidized)
3.2.1.1 Bituminous Materials
3.2.1.2 Natural Venezuela Oxidized
3.2.1.3 Exceptionally high UV ray resistance
3.2.1.4 Low expansion – contraction
3.2.1.5 High waterproofing capacity
3.2.1.6 Air induced to reduce material weight
3.2.2 Other raw materials: Copper or Zinc Titanium (10% by weight), mineral fillers,
polypropylene film and fiberglass (40% by weight)
3.2.2.1 Fiberglass Sheet
3.2.2.2 Two layers of fiberglass between three layers of Bituminous materials – stability
against expansion and contraction of Tiles
3.2.2.3 Polypropylene film

3.2.2.4 Storage protection sheet
3.2.2.5 Natural Copper or Zinc Titanium thickness: .03 mils (70 microns)
3.2.2.6 99.7% pure Copper
3.2.2.7 99.7% pure Zinc Titanium
3.6 Texture: Smooth
3.7 Sliding Copper or Zinc Titanium Face to Bituminous Base Per sq.ft: 0/194 degrees F
3.8 Edge Coverage: Copper and Zinc Titanium are bent over the front edge and then under the tile for
full face coverage
3.10 Flashing:
the thickness and type of decking. Nail must penetrate decking or a minimum of ¾” into solid lumber.
Nails may be applied through a pneumatic gun.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 Manufacture’ s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect and/ or
1.2 Deck Requirements
1.2.1 Contractor is responsible to ascertain acceptability of the roof deck for installation of the
shingle roof tile. In general decks should be 25/ 32´minimum thickness wood sheeting or
minimum 3/8” thick 4’ X 8’ Plywood. Plywood chosen should be as recommended by the
APA ( American Plywood Association) , Underwriters Laboratory, Factory Mutual and/ or
applicable local codes. The deck must be rigid and smooth, free from any conditions of rot or
wrapping (decks must be completely cured). The deck may be from wood, tongue and groove
planks, and plywood or cement board.
1.2.2 Required Slope
1.2.2.1 The Shingle Roof: 20 degree = 35% slope = 5/12 pitch
1.2.2.2 Considerations maybe made with ice and water shield products to slope – request
variance.
1.2.3 Low Slope
1.2.3.1 Applications – require torch down of product
1.2.4 Underlayment
1.2.4.1 Appropriate underlayment must be installed in accordance with the underlayment
of the manufacture’s specifications.
1.2.4.2 New Construction – 30# felt with ice and water shield in all appropriate areas.
1.2.4.3 Re-roof – does not require underlayment.
1.2.5 Polypropylene backer must be removed prior to installation of Tiles.
1.3 Trim Flashings – all trim flashings must be manufactured from copper, brass, stainless steel or non-
metallic materials
1.3.1 Drip Edge Metal
1.3.1.1 Drip Edge must be installed before installation of underlayment at the eaves, and
over underlayment of at rakes. Drip edges should not extend in excess of 3” past
the rake of the roof edge. The hems should be bent downwards and appropriately
fastened with stainless steel nails 8 – 10” apart along the inner edge.
1.3.2 W Valley Flashing
1.3.2.1 W Valley Flashing must be installed in accordance with valley material per
manufacture’ s instructions and the Architect’ s specifications. The valley is to be
installed over ice and water shield. The W Valley Flashing material should be a
minimum of 20” in width with a back v hem.
1.3.3 Eave Flashings
1.3.3.1 In cold weather where ice may form along the eaves ice and water shield is required
under the flashing that must be used.
1.3.4 Hips and Ridges Tiles
1.3.4.1 Shingle manufactures the Hip and Ridge from the same material as the Prestige
product line. They will match the field of the job. They are pre- bent to 35
degrees. They will bend to fit almost any job. Included with each box of Hip
and Ridge is Top Roll to cover the Hip and Ridge for waterproofing prior to installation.
1.3.5 Adhesive
1.3.5.1 Prestige compact have self- adhesive strips. The protection strips must be
removed prior to installation. Geocel may be applied to the leading edges of
the tile in high wind zones for extra protection.
1.3.6 Fasteners
1.3.6.1 Follow the guidelines Part 2, C, 14
1.3.6.2 A minimum of 4 fasteners must be used for Prestige Elite
1.3.6.3 A minimum of 6 fasteners must be used with Prestige Compact
1.3.6.4 Steep Slope
1.3.6.4.1 Extra fasteners are required for roofs that exceed 12/ 12 pitches or in
high wind zones. Increase the number of fasteners per Tile by two.
1.4 Material Handling
1.4.1 Handle bundles or individual Tiles with care.
1.4.2 Do not carry bundles over ones shoulder onto the roof.
1.4.3 Do not leave bundles at the edge of the building where they bend.
1.4.4 Do not leave bundles at an area that allows for sharp bends
1.4.5 Bundles and/ or individual Tiles must not be installed at a temperature of less than 50
degrees F. This refers to the temperature of the Tiles not the ambient temperature.
1.4.6 Cutting Tiles should be accomplished with a straight bladed from the front (copper or ZincT
bent face) of the Tiles. Cutting from the reverse side or the use of a hook bladed knife
may damage the Tiles beyond use.
1.4.7 Immediately prior to installation of the Tiles a gentle curve should be put on the Tiles of
approximately 1/ 8” . This is done by gently smacking the front of the panel where the
bent Copper or ZincT is bent around the front.
1.4.8 Prestige Tiles should be installed horizontally across the whole roof to avoid having to lift
corners to butt Tiles together. Follow the instructions inside each bundle.
1.4.9 Torching - Prestige Tiles should be torched only by persons completely familiar with the
special installation technique. WARNING: unskilled installations of single- ply membrane
and Tiles can cause leaks and subsequent delaminating due to overheating of torches.
Care must be taken that the flame does not “lap around” the edges of the Tiles and cause
discoloration to the surface of the Copper or Zinc Titanium. This could also cause damage
to the adhesive layer that is not apparent until a later date.
1.5 Contractor shall be alignment- perpendicular on the top deck before installation asphalt roofing
around through the deck.
1.6 After installation completely contractor shall be verify level and alignment around all the area and
leak test spray water observe leaking-case leach contractor shall be repair.
END
5.2.9.6: INSULATION
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide insulation ( glass wool insulation, polyurethane foam insulation, reflective
insulation(Ceramic Coating) and polyethylene insulation) and support accessories where shown
on the Drawings , as specified here in and as needed for a complete proper installation.
Examine all other sections of these Specifications for requirements which affect the works of
this Section, whether or not such requirements are particularly mentioned herein. Coordinate
the work of this section with the related work of other trades, to assure the steady progress of
all works of the Contract.
2.2 Obtain insulation materials from a single manufacturer for each different product
required. Do not inter-mix different products or different systems.
3. References
4. Submittals
4.1 Submit Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance
with specified requirements;
4.2 Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by
the Architect and/or Engineer will become the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the work.
4.3 Submit insulation data thickness, density compressive strength, water absorption,
flame spread and smoke develop as required for each type of insulation.
5. Delivery, Storage Handling
5.1 Insulation materials shall be completely protected while in storage and during application to keep it dry
at all times. When stored outdoors, stack boards on pallets or dunnage at least 100 mm. above ground
level and covered with suitable water-resistant covering.
PART II: PRODUCTS

1. Materials
1.1 Submit insulation data thickness, density compressive strength, water absorption, flame spread and
smoke develop as required for each type of insulation.
1.2 Polyurethane Insulation Foam- Polyethylene insulation foam has performance low thermal conductivity
of only 0.029 W / m.K put anti-fire (Flame Retardant) to prevent the spread of fire. To effectively reflect
heat radiation sheets pure aluminum Foil to help reflect heat radiation. There is no heat in the body.
1.3 Polyethylene with foil insulation: Thermal Reflective Insulation Material (Polyethylene with foil insulation)
shall be one layer of polyethylene bubble film with Fire retardant, both side with pure high resistance
aluminum foil (99.%); moisture resistant, fungi-resistant, with the following characteristics:
1.5.1 Thickness: Nominal +/- 4 mm (allow up to 0.3 mm deviation)
1.5.2 Surface Summing Characteristics: Flame spread index of 22, maximum; smoke developed
index of 62, maximum; when tested in accord with ASTM E 84 (NFPA Class A/UBC Class
1).
1.5.3 Surface Burning Characteristics: Index of overall performance, Fire propagation index of
8.5, maximum, when tested in accord with British Standard 476, Part 6, 1989
1.5.4 Linear Shrinkage: None observed when tested in accord with ASTM D-1204.
1.5.5 Tensile strength @ pead (g/cm-width) MD 2500, Minimum, TD 2400 Minimum, when tested
in accord with ASTM D-882
1.5.6 Tear Strength @ peak (gf) MD 10.5, Minimum, TD 16.5 Minimum, when tested in accord
with ASTM D-1938.
1.5.7 R-Value: 2.98 (m2OC/W square meters Kelvin per watt) down, when facing 90 mm air gap
both directions when tested in accordance with ASTM C 236, or less, where minimum R-
Value will never be less than 1.50 ((m2OC/W square meters Kelvin per watt) when tested
in accordance with ASTM C 236: 1.28 (m2OC/W square meters Kelvin per watt) horizontal,
when in accordance with ASTM C 236; 0.951 (m2OC/W square meters Kelvin per watt)
up; when tested in accordance with ASTM C 236.
1.5.8 U-Value: 0.335 watts per square meter Kelvin down, or more, when never exceed 0.666
watts per square meter Kelvin; 0.675 watts per square meter Kelvin, horizontal; 0.789
watts per square meter Kelvin, up.
1.5.9 Emittance: 0.03 to 0.05 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1371.
1.5.10 Reflectivity: 0.95 – 0.97, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 408.
1.5.11 Degradation: 0.
1.5.12 Perm Rating: 0.018 perm (0.99 ng/Pa s per square meter), when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 96-95.
1.5.13 Aluminum Surface: Shall be corrosion free, shall have High Resistance treatment to ensure
better resistance to humidity and wet conditions
1.5.14 Warranty period: Minimum warranty period is 7 years, or, more accordance with local
construction code requirements
1.5.15 The following manufacturers are acceptable or as shown on drawing, subject to
compliance with the Contract Documents:
1) L’aquatech Co., Ltd.
2) Poly protech Co., Ltd.
3) RFI Trading Co., Ltd
4) Polyon Barkai Industries (1993) Ltd.
1.4 Glass Wool Insulation- Thermal Insulation for Roof which is green glass wool. It is added with
HydroProtecTM. It has 2 faces attached by black non-woven and aluminum 3-way-reinforcement foil.
Density is 24 kg/m3. Thickness is 50 mm, thermal conductivity (k-value) is not more than 0.035 W/m.K. It
is non-flammable accordance to ASTM E84 and BS 476. and manufactured in accordance with Thai
Industrial Standard 468/2527, certified as a Green Label product by Thailand Environment Institute.
1.5 Ceramic Coating- The materials used must have a thermal protection materials like acrylic polymer,
100% of Solar Reflective Insulation with the heat reflecting more than 90% and withstand use in hot
weather, humidity, and light up. Ultra-violet (UV) as well.
The Material must have properties as follow:
- Solar Reflectance >90%
- Solar Absorbtance <10%
- Thermal Emittance >90%
- U.V.Weather Resistance >4000 hours
- Fungal Resistance No fungal growth
- Dry Film Toxicity Non-toxic
- No Mercury, Lead, Cadmium, Chromium Cyanide Arsenic found
PART III: EXECUTION

1.1 Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions
detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected.
1.2 Prior to starting work, protect all work in an approved manner. Provide special protection on the face of
wall in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.
1.3 The surface shall be tight, dry, clean, free from defects and in accordance with the manufacturer’s
application requirements be prepared to receive insulation.
2. Installation
2.1 Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design and the manufacturer’ s
recommendation as approved by Architect or/and Engineer.
3. Protection and Clean up
3.1 Protect adjacent surfaces and other finish work from being splashed with adhesive or otherwise damaged
during the course of work.
3.2 At the conclusion of the work, remove marks or stains on finished work. Remove excess materials and
dispose of barrels, cans, or cartons in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer or/and Architect.
END
5.2.9.7 : ROOF GUTTER

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide stainless steel roof gutter, Galvanized steel roof gutter and supporting material
where shown on the drawings, as specified here in and as needed for a complete proper
installation including labor, materials, appliances and services required to manufacture,
deliver, furnish and install all items necessary for the proper execution and completion
of all roof gutter and related works. Examine all other sections of these Specifications for
requirements which affect the works of this Section, whether or not such requirements
are particularly mentioned herein. Coordinate the work of this section with the related
work of other trades, to assure the steady progress of all works of the Contract.
2. References
3. Submittals
3.1 Properly identified product data and descriptive literature before starting work.
3.2 Shop Drawing on flashing and sheet metal work.
3.3 Samples :
3.3.1 150 mm. square samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces.
3.3.2 150 mm. long samples of factory fabricated products exposed as finished work. Provide
complete with specified factory finish.
4.1 Regulatory Requirements: Flashing and sheet metal shall comply with requirements of The Sheet
Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) 1793 Architectural Sheet Metal
Guideline.
4.2 Coordinate application of flashing with application of roofing, protruding material, and roof accessories
to provide a complete weather tight installation according to the specified warranty requirements.
4.3 Pre-roofing Conference: Attendance to the pre-roofing conference is required. Refer to the roofing
sections.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Material
1.1 Stainless Steel Sheet
1.1.1 Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, 20 and 22 gage, complying with ASTM A167.
1.1.2 Flashing for Pipes, Conduits, and Round Equipment Supports: Type 304 stainless steel, 26
gage, complying with ASTM A240/A.
1.1.3 Fastening Devices: Fasteners shall be compatible with metal and roofing
Use of powder activated fasteners is prohibited.
1) For Attaching Sheet Metal to Wood to Wood with concealed Fastenings: Hot dip
galvanized ring shank roofing nails not less than 1-1/4"1ong.
2) For Attaching Sheet Metal to wood with Exposed Fastenings: No.10 x 1-1/4" pan head
stainless steel sheet metal screws. Provide neoprene sealant washers and stainless
steel washers under screw heads.
3) For Attaching Sheet Metal to Metal Walkway Covers: No10 x 1/2" pan head stainless
steel sheet metal screws. Provide neoprene sealant washers and stainless steel
washers under screw heads.
4) For Attaching Sheet Metal to Masonry or Concrete: No.10 x 1-1/4" pan head Tap-Con
zinc plated concrete tapping screws. Provide neoprene sealant washers and stainless
steel washers under screw heads.
1.1.4 Roofing Cement: Plastic roofing cement complying with the requirements of ASTM D2822 or
as appropriate and as recommended by roofing manufacturer.
1.1.5 SBS Flashing Cement : Roofing cement according to ASTM D4586

1.1.6 Splash Blocks : Approximately 2 foot x 1 foot- 6 inches x 1-1/2" thick reinforced concrete
slabs with recess formed in top to deflect water away.
1.1.7 Roof Drain Flashing: 16 ounce 30 inches by 30 inches copper flashing.
1.1.8 Solder: According to ASTM 832.
1.2 Fabrication
1.2.1 Fabricate flashing and sheet metal work according to accepted Shop Drawings.
1.3 Edge Drips :
1.3.1 Fabricate using sheet 22 gage stainless steel to detail indicated in not over 10 foot sections.
1.3.2 Provide a continuous 20 gage stainless steel cleat with punched holes at 6 inches on center.
If cleat extends 6 or more below top fastener, provide second row of punched holes at 12
inches on center.
1.3.3 Provide 4 inch roof flange, and extend bottom drip not less than 1 inch below bottom of
wood or plywood roof sheathing, with kick to dispel water 3/4" from finish wall.
1.3.4 Comply with RAS 111 -Table 2.
1.4 Base Flashing at Metal Walkway Covers Abutting Concrete and Masonry:
1.5 Surface Mounted Flashing (1-piece):
1.5.1 Fabricate in approximately 10 foot sections using sheet stainless steel to detail as indicated.
1.5.2 Provide flashing with 1-1/2 wall flange with 1/4" kick at top to receive sealant, a 1/2" 135
degree sloping top flange and a 4 inch bottom flange formed inward 3/4" towards wall a
hemmed 1/2" kick at bottom.
1.5.3 Shop punch wall flange at 12 inches on center for fastening.
1.5.4 Provide shop fabricated corner splices extending 4 inches.
1.6 Copings :
1.6.1 Fabricate in approximately 10 foot sections using sheet 22 gage stainless steel to detail as
indicated.
1.6.2 Provide a continuous 20 gage stainless steel outer hold-down cleat with punched holes at 6
inches on center and face fasten at inward facing parapet components with removable
fasteners as required for sheet metal.
1.6.3 Provide 8 inch wide joint covers.
1.6.4 Comply with Roofing Application Standard (RAS) 111- Table 2.
1.7 Window Head Flashings :
1.7.1 Fabricate using sheet stainless steel to detail and dimension indicated.
1.7.2 Extend flashing 3 inches past window at each side.
1.7.3 Hem bottom drop edge.
1.7.4 Shop punch wall flange for fastenings.
1.8 Door Hoods:
1.8.1 Fabricate using sheet stainless steel with closed ends to detail dimensions indicated.
1.8.2 Lock seam top and side joints.
1.8.3 Form 1-1/2" minimum continuous wall flanges at sides and top.
1.8.4 Shop punch wall flanges at not over 6 inches on center for fastenings.
1.8.5 Form 1-1/2" minimum horizontal inward stiffener flanges with hemmed edges at top
bottom of hood.
1.8.6 Lap bottom hood lips at corners, solder and secure with 2 stainless steel rivets each.
1.9 Pitch Pans :
1.9.1 Fabricate using stainless sheet steel, bottomless, not less than 3 inches high, with 4 inches
wide roof flanges.
1.9.2 Roof flanges shall have closed corners soldered in.
1.9.3 Solder vertical corner joints.
1.9.4 Top edges shall be hemmed down 1/4" outside.
1.9.5 Pan shall provide 2 inches ,minimum clearance from item surrounded.
1.9.6 Coordinate pan sizes with various other trades.
1.10 Flashings for Pipes, conduits, and round Equipment supports Penetrating Roofing or Resting on
Roofing:
1.10.1 Form tubular stainless steel base flashing sleeves not less than 8 inches high to fit pipe,
conduit, and round equipment support and with 4 inch wide roof flanges soldered
watertight.
1.10.2 Form split fit over base flashing, with 2 inch minimum loose edge lap, of 5- 1/2" minimum
height and minimum loose lap, of 5-1/2" minimum height and with 4 inch lap over base
flashings.
1.10.3 Provide a conical sealant cover, sloped outward and downward at 30 to 45 degrees from
the horizontal plane with an inside diameter equal to the vent stack and an outside
diameter 1 to 2 inches larger.
1.11 Scuppers :
1.11.1 Fabricate using stainless steel with soldered seams to profiles and details show.
1.11.2 Lock seam corners, solder watertight and hem outer exposed edges.
1.11.3 Provide 4 inch wide minimum flanges formed to fit cants, decks and vertical wall
surface.
1.11.4 Shop punch flanges for fastenings at 6 inches on center.
1.12 Gutters, conductor Heads and Downspouts:
1.12.1 Gutters shall be fabricated from stainless steel, minimum 20 gauge, except gutters with a
girth exceeding 30" shall be fabricated from minimum 18 gauge stainless steel. The front
edge of the gutter shall be a minimum of 1"below the back edge. Provide continuous cleats
at the back edge of the gutter.
1.12.2 Provide manufacturer's standard expansion joints. Locate downspouts and attach gutter
anchors and supports of accommodate and hot constrain expansion. Lap joints in gutters
a minimum of 2 inches in direction of flow, and solder.
1.12.3 Gutter brackets shall be fabricated of stainless steel, and spaced a maximum of 30" o.c
Brackets shall be a minimum of 1/8" thick by 1"wide for gutters with a girth of up to 20",and
2" wide for girths exceeding 20". Attach to the face of the gutter, in addition to the building
structure at the back of the gutter.
1.12.4 Provide spacer straps in gutters with a width of 5" or more, spaced at a maximum of 30"
o.c., at locations staggered from the gutter brackets. Straps shall be stainless steel, a
minimum of 1/16" thick (16 gauge) by 1 wide, and fastened only the front and back of the
gutter.
1.12.5 Provide conductor heads to collect water from the scuppers to discharge into the
downspouts.Conductor heads shall be fabricated from stainless steel.The top of the
conductor head shall be a minimum of 1" below and a minimum of 2" wider than the
scupper. Proportion as recommended in SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.12.6 Use ductile iron or Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe • downspouts within 9 feet of finish grade.
The size of a downspout shall be constant throughout its length. At joints, the top portion
shall fit into the lower. Provide stainless steel or other corrosion resistant metal hangers.
1.13 Curb to Duct Flashing and Counter Flashing:
1.13.1 Fabricate from stainless steel to fit duct curbs and ducts projecting from curbs.
1.13.2 Provide 4 inch vertical flange to cover top edge of bituminous base flashing. Form flange
bottom towards curbs, with 1/4" bottom edge bent 1/4" out and hemmed.
1.13.3 At top of curbs bend metal 90 degrees and extend horizontally over to duct, then bend
upward and extend vertically not less than 3 inches from top edge vertically not less than 3
inches from top edge of flashing out 3/8" to receive sealant.
1.14 Other Metal Sheet
Aluminum
Sheet and strip aluminum shall be conform to ASTM B 209/B 209M, embossed finish, clad one side
and specified temper.
Minimum tensile strength shall be 160 Mega Pascal. Galvanized Steel
Galvanized steel sheet shall conform to ASTM A 924/A 924M and ASTM A 653/A 653M, regular coating,
designation Z90
Corrosion-Resistant Steel
Corrosion-resistant steel shall be chromium-nick le steel conforming to (ASTM A 167) (ASTM A 240/A
240M) and ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 2D finish, annealed temper as required for the end use.
Copper
Copper shall be standard (electrolytic tough-pitch copper, Type ETP) (fire-refined tough- pitch copper,
Type FRTP) as classified in ASTM 8 224 and conforming to ASTM 8 370, cold-rolled temper.
Minimum Dimensions and Thicknesses
Materials shall be in accordance with ASMCNA 1793 and shall be not less than the following minimum
thicknesses and weights.

Copper, Corrosion
ounces Aluminum, resistant Galvanized Lead
per thickness steel steel LB per
Item sg ft inch Gage Gage sg ft

Building expansion 16 0.032 28 26

joints, cap

Bellows or flanges, 16 28 26
U-type
Flashings

Base 20 0.032 28 22 3

Cap, roof penetration 16 0.032 28 26 2-1/2

cap flashing, equipment
and structural supports,
pitch pans

Through-wall, 16 28 26 2-1/2
above roof line,
including coping
and parapet

Cleats, 2 inches by 16 0.032 26 24

inches

Edge strips, 1-1/4 24 0.050 24 20

inches wide

Reglets 10 30 30

Cap flashing 16 28 26
receivers
Gravel stop fascias:

Corrugated sheets 16 0.032 28 26

Smooth sheets to 16 0.032 28 26

3-1/2 inches

Smooth sheets 20 0.050 26 22

Over 3-1/2 inches
Gutters and downspouts:

Gutter sections, 16 0.032 28 26

End caps

Continuous cleats, 16 0.032 28 26

Cover plates

Downspouts, con- 16 0.024 30 26

Doctor heads

Copper, Corrosion
ounces Aluminum, resistant Galvanized Lead
per thickness steel Steel LB per
Item sq ft inch Gage Gage sq ft

Scupper linings 20 0.032 28 26
Downspout Hangers, 2 inch 1/8 0.125 18 10
Gutter hangers, 1 inch wide 1/8 0.125 18 10
Splash pans 16 0.040 28 22 3
Copper, KG Aluminum, Corrosion Galvani Lead

per thickness resistant zed LB per
square millimeter steel steel sq ft
meter millimeter Gage
Item
Building expansion 4.9 0.81 0.48 0.55
joints, cap
Bellows or flanges, 4.9 0.48 0.55
U-type
Flashings
Base 6.1 0.81 0.48 0.85 14.6
Cap, roof penetration 4.9 0.81 0.48 0.55 12.2
cap flashing, equipment
and structural supports,
pitch pans
Through-wall, 4.9 0.48 0.55 12.2
Above roof line, including
coping and parapet
Cleats, 50 by 75 4.9 0.81 0.55 0.70
millimeter
Edge strips, 32 7.3 1.27 0.70 1.0
millimeter wide
Reglets 3.1 0.40 0.40
Cap flashing 4.9 0.48 0.55
receivers
Gravel stop fascias:
Copper, KG Aluminum, Corrosion Galvanized Lead

per thickness resistant steel LB per
square millimeter steel Gage sg ft
meter millimeter
Item
Corrugated sheets 4.9 0.81 0.48 0.55
Smooth sheets to 4.9 0.81 0.48 0.55
90 millimeters
Smooth sheets over 6.1 1.27 0.55 0.85
90 millimeters
Gutters and downspouts:
Gutter sections, 4.9 0.81 0.48 0.55
end caps
Continuous cleats, 4.9 0.81 0.48 0.55
cover plates
Downspouts, con- 4.9 0.61 0.40 0.55
doctor heads
Scupper linings 6.1 0.81 0.48 0.55
Strainer wire 3.66 2.77 3.0
diameter dia. dia. dia.
Downspout 3.2mm 3.18 1.3 3.5
hangers, 50 mm
Gutter hangers, 3.2mm 3.18 1.3 3.5
25mmwide
Splash pans 4.9 1.02 0.48 0.85 14.6
Cements and Sealing Compounds Bituminous Plastic Cement
Bituminous plastic cement shall be an asphaltic-base material conforming to ASTM D 4586,
compatible with the roofing asphalts and asphalt primer.
Sealing Compound
Sealant shall be on elastomeric, ( ( Type s) single} ( (Type M) multiple} component, nonsag or
gunnable (Grade NS) Class 50 sealant, conforming to ASTM C 920. Base material shall be polysulfide.
Aluminum-seam sealant shall be as recommended by the aluminum manufacturer.
Solder Materials
Solder and flux shall meet the requirements of ASTM B 32. Solder shall be SN50 Fasteners
Fasteners shall be the same metal or a metal compatible with the material joined. Miscellaneous
Components
Conductor heads shall conform to SMACNA 1793 and shall be fabricated of the same material and
thickness as the downspout. Seams shall be locked and soldered.
Metal scupper linings• conforming to SMACNA 1793 shall be provided through wall and roof openings.
Metal splash pans conforming to SMACNA 1793 shall be provided. Material shall be the same for
downspouts.
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Stainless Steel Roof Gutter
1.1 Inspection
1.1.1 Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
1.2 Installation
1.2.1 Install according to accepted Shop Drawings.
(1) Lap, river, lock, or seal joints as field conditions require.
(2) Provide necessary reinforcement, miscellaneous fittings and accessories.
1.2.2 Apply flashing and sheet metal work including miscellaneous fittings and accessories to even,
smooth, sound, thoroughly clean and dry surfaces that are free from defects that might affect
application. Prime metal flanges that receive bitumen according to SFBC and manufacturer's
requirements.
1.2.3 Perform soldering work slowly, with properly heated coppers to thoroughly heat seam
material and sweat solder through full width of seam that show not less than 1 inch of
evenly flowed solder.
(1) Start soldering immediately after application of flux.
(2) Solder flat locked seam.
1.2.4 Isolate dissimilar metals with accepted isolation paint or other accepted materials.
(1) Do not place in contact with or in positions where drainage across such paint or
other materials will occur.
1.2.5 Make flashing and sheet metal work water weather tight, with Jines, arises and angles sharp
and true and plans surfaces free from waves and buckles.
1.2.6 Provide sufficient fasteners and related hardware to insure a complete and weather
tight system.
1.2.7 Flashing fasteners not covered by roofing membrane shall be removable.
1.2.8 Edge drips
(1) Install a continuous 20 gage stainless steel cleat.
(2) Set 22 gage stainless steel edge drip roof flanges in full bed of roofing cement over
completed roofing.
(3) Lap splices 4 inches minimum and seal top horizontal surface laps with cold
bitumen.
(4) Stagger nails at 4 inch flange to roof deck at 4 inches on center.
(5) Cover roof flanges with 2 ply felt stripping set in full bed of roofing cement.
(6) Locate drip bottom not less than 3/4" away from finished vertical surfaces.
1.2.9 Base Flashing at Aluminum Walkway Covers Abutting Concrete and Masonry
(1) Set flashing tight against wall and with roof flange set on aluminum deck in bed of
sealant.
(2) Secure roof flanges to metal deck with No.10 x 1/2" stainless steel sheet metal screws
at 6 inches on center maximum. Provide sealant washers and stainless steel washers
under screw heads.
(3) Set receiver on masonry and concrete walls where indicated.
(4) Lap spiced 4 inches minimum and seal laps with sealant.
(5) Secure to wall with No.10 x 1-1/4" minimum Tap-Con screws 12 inches on center
maximum.
(6) Check for membrane/bitumen seal on top of felt flashing before counter flashing
installation.
(7) Insert counter flashing into receiver, and secure
1.2.10 Surface Mounted Flashing (1-piece)
1.2.10.1 Set on masonry and concrete walls over base flashing where indicated.
1.2.10.2 Lap splices 4 inches minimum and seal laps with sealant.
1.2.10.3 Secure to wall with No.10 x 1-1/4" Tap-Con pan head screws at 12 inches on center
maximum. Provide neoprene sealant washers and stainless steel washers.
1.2.10.4 Where corrugated metal wall immediately above top neoprene filler strip on wall
immediately above top of metal base flashing.
1.2.10.5 Set filler strip in sealant and seal abutting edges of filler strip with sealant. Place
counter flashing over filler strip set in sealant and secure flashing to metal wall through
filler strip with No.10 x appropriate length stainless steel sheet metal screws at 6 inches
on center maximum and centered on wall flutes.
1.2.10.6 Provide sealant washers and stainless steel washer under screw heads.
1.2.10.7 Check for membrane/bitumen seal on top of felt flashing before flashing
installation.
1.2.11 Copings
1.2.11.1 Secure outer hold-down cleat to wood block at 6 inches on center with ring shank
roofing nails.
1.2.11.2 Install coping over cleat. Allow 1/8 space between each coping section.
1.2.11.3 Secure inside face of coping with removable grommet type fasteners.
1.2.11.4 Provide 1"/1' slope at coping to inner parapet wall.
1.2.11.5 Install joint covers in full bed of sealant.
1.2.12 Window head Flashing
1.2.12.1 Set wall flange in full bed of sealant over windows.
1.2.12.2 Secure to prefinished wall panels with No.10 x 3/4" pan head stainless steel sheet
metal screws at 10 inches on center.
1.2.12.3 Provide sealant washers and stainless steel washers under screw heads.
1.2.13 Door Hoods
1.2.13.1 Set hoods level over doors where required with wall flahges bedded in full bed of
sealant.
1.2.13.2 Secure hood wall flanges to prefinished wall panels with No.10 x 3/4"
stainless steel metal screws at 6 inches on center.
1.2.13.3 Provide sealant washers and stainless steel washers under screw heads.
1.2.14 Provide pitch pans as approved
1.2.14.1 Set pitch roof flange in a full bed of plastic roofing cement.
1.2.14.2 Cover pan flanges with 2 layers of roofing felt stripping set in solid coats of hot
bitumen or roofing cement.
1.2.14.3 Fill pitch pan 1 inch deep with mixture of plastic roofing cement and Portland
cement and top out with hot asphalt bitumen or roofing cement.
Allow hot asphalt bitumen or roofing cement to fill to top edge of hem.
Do not nip top edge of hem to allow for drainage of water
Use cold bitumen to cone from penetration to edge of pan to avoid standing water.
1.2.15 Provide sheet metal base and counter flashing at pipes, conduits and round equipment
supports
1.2.15.1 Mate shop fabricated half sections around pipe or conduit and solder vertical and
horizontal seams watertight.
1.2.15.2 Set flashing roof in full bed of roofing cement.
1.2.15.3 Cover flashing flanges with 2 players of roofing felt stripping set in solid coats of hot
bitumen or roofing cement.
1.2.15.4 Wrap pipe, conduit and round equipment support with 1 or more layers of 3/8" 1 inch
wide neoprene foam tape, with tight fitting butt joints.
1.2.15.5 Install counter flashing over base flashing and solder vertical seam.
1.2.15.6 Seal watertight at top edge with a one part urethane sealant and tool for positive
runoff.
1.2.15.7 After preliminary inspection, install conical sealant cover with sealant.
1.2.16 Installation of curb to Duct Flashing and counter flashing
1.2.16.1 Install flashing after ducts through curbs are in place and after bitumen base flashings
are completed.
1.2.16.2 Place flashings in place on curbs and solder corne watertight.
1.2.16.3 Secure counter flashings to vertical edge of curbs nailers with No.10 stainless steel
sheet metal screws through sealant washers at not over 12 inches on center.
1.2.16.4 Secure vertical upturned duct flashing to duct with No.10 stainless steel sheet metal
screws through sealants washers at not over 6 inches on center,
1.2.16.5 Seal joint between flashings and ducts sealant as specified in Section 07920
1.2.17 Installation of Scuppers
1.2.17.1 Set scuppers in full bed of roofing cement over complete base flashing and roof
membrane.
1.2.17.2 Secure to masonry walls and concrete decks with stainless sheet metal fasteners and
anchors at 6 inches on center.
1.2.17.3 Secure to wood nailers with stainless steel sheet
1.2.17.4 Seal exterior wall at scupper perimeter.
1.2.18 Installation of Downspouts
1.2.18.1 Provide where indicated according to Shop Drawings.
1.2.18.2 Provide downspout straps near top and bottom of each sections, located
approximately 10 feet on center.
1.2.18.3 Secure each end of straps to masonry walls with stainless steel sheet metal screws an
anchors or with drive pins.
1.2.18.4 Secure each section of downspout to top strap with at least 2 stainless steel sheet
metal screws.
1.2.18.5 Do not secure bottom end of each downspout to strap to allow for thermal
movement.
1.2.19 Installation of Splash Blocks
1.2.19.1 Where downspouts or scuppers empty on grade or lower roof that are of surfaces
other than concrete, provide precast concrete splash blocks. Slope grade to
maintain positive drainage.
1.2.20 Installation of Roof Drains
1.2.20.1 Prime roof drain flanges before applying roof felts.
1.2.20.2 Set copper in full bed of cold bitumen over intermediate

1.2.20.3 Strip copper cover with 2 players of roofing felts in solid coats of not
blame.
2. Other Metal Roof Gutter
2.1 Gutters and Downspouts
2.1.1 Gutters
Gutter design shall be in accordance with SMACNA 1793.
Gutters shall be set level to a tolerance not to exceed not to exceed 13 millimeter in
2.1.2 meter.
Gutters shall be pitched to drain at not more than 1/ 16 inch per foot 1. 6 millimeter in
305 millimeter.
Gutters supports shall be in accordance with SMACNA 1793. Support spacing shall not
exceed 760 millimeter on center.
Back edges of gutters shall be folded to form a continuous hook not less than 13
millimeter deep. Gutters shall be supported by continuous cleat of not less than a 64
millimeter width.
Outlet tubes with flanges shall be riveted and soldered to gutters; tubes shall be
extended 3 inches 75 millimeter into downspouts.
A downspout strainer shall be inserted into each outlet tube.
Gutter expansion joints shall be provided at a spacing of not more than 9. 75 meter on
center in accordance with SMACNA 1793.
2.1.3 Downspouts
Downspouts shall be provided on outside walls from gutters, conductor heads, and
scuppers.
Downspouts shall be joined to the gutters at outlet tubes and joined to each other by
telescoping end joints 1-1/2 inches 38 millimeter into the lower section.
Downspout hangers shall be fabricated of the same material as downspouts. One hanger
shall be provided at the top and bottom of each downspout section.
Elbows shall be installed where downspouts terminate on splash blocks or roof pans.
Downspouts shall be fitted neatly into cast-iron boots so drain pipes where downspouts
terminate in drainage lines; joints shall be filled to the full height of the bell with portland-
cement mortar caps.
2.2 Miscellaneous Drainage Items
2.2.1 Conductor Heads
Installation shall be in accordance with SMACNA 1793.
Top openings shall be closed with removable millimeter mesh screens.
2.2.2 Scupper Lining
Linings shall be projected beyond walls or fascias and terminated in conductor heads,
spouts, or overflow openings. Surfaces to receive linings shall be coated with bituminous
cement.
3. Cleaning
Exposed sheet metal work shall be cleaned of all surface contaminants and imperfections
at completion of installation.
END
5.2.9.8 : ACCESSORY ROOFING

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide accessory roofing where shown on the Drawings , as specified here in and as needed
1.1.2 The term of accessory roofing shall include wood eaves, fiber cement eaves, nut, screw,
safety rail and accessories. The accessory roofing contractor shall have the proven
experience, ability, manpower to offer all metal sheet ceiling as a single contract. All items
not shown or specified, but which are necessary for the proper execution and completion
2. References
3. Performance
5. Submittals
requirements;
work.
6.3 To Deliver objects, material and property to contractor must deliver objects and material before and
after demolition throughout property by transportation and shall classify keeping indicate date time
7. Warranty
contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.2 Eave wood (original wood) size 1” x 6”, 1” x 8”, 1” x 10”
After to plane (original wood) approximate remainder
1” x 6” remainder = 18 x 14 mm.
1” x 10” remainder = 18 x 0.235 mm.
1.3 Eave wood (new natural wood) size 1” x 6”, 1” x 8”, 1” x 10”
After to plane (new natural wood) approximate
1” x 6” remainder = 21 x 193 mm. (for double up with 1”x 8” or 1” x 10”)
1” x 10” remainder = 21 x 248 mm.
1.4 Fiber cement eaves size 17x150, 17x200 mm. or as shown on drawings. The property has indicated in
section fiber cement board.
1.5 Fiber cement eave board synthetic size 8” x 16 mm. x 4.00 and size 6” x 16 mm. x 4.00 (for double
up with size 8” x 16 mm. x 4.00) Standard : JIS A-5420 and ASTM, BS 476 (the following under Neath)
Property Standard Unit Test Result

Length ASTM C 1185 mm. +/-2.5
Width ASTM C 1185 mm. +/-5.0
Thickness ASTM C 1185 mm. +/1-1.0
Density ASTM C 1185 9/cm3 1.2
Moisture Content ASTM C 1185 % 5
Water Absorption ASTM C 1185 % 30
Dimensional Stability ASTM C 1185 % 0.27
Ignitability BS 476 part 5 - Passed
Fire propagation index BS 476 part 6 - 1.0
Surface spread of frame BS 476 part 7 - Class 1
Fire Resistance BS 476 part 22 - 30-60 minute
pH-Value - pH 9
Moe ASTM C 1185 Mpa. 5,000-8,000
Flexural Strength ASTM C 1185 Mpa. 11-15
Thermal Conductivity ASTM C-177-97 w/m.k 0.18
Thermal Resistance ASTM C-177-97 m2.k/w 0.082
1.6 Safety rail: As shown on drawings.

PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 Manufacture’ s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect and/ or
END
5.2.10.1 : TOILET FIXTURES

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide toilet fixtures where shown on the Drawings, as specified here in and as needed
for a complete proper installation including labor, materials, appliances and services
execution and completion of all toilet fixtures and related works. Examine all other
sections of these Specifications for requirements which affect the works of this Section,
whether or not such requirements are particularly mentioned herein. Coordinate the
work of this section with the related work of other trades, to assure the steady progress
of all works of the Contract.
1.2 Related work :
1.2.1 Document affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to General
Condition, Supplementary Conditions, and others. Section of these Specifications.
2. References
2.2 International standards are referenced as they support the design intent. Alternative standards may
be proposed for consideration by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to whether
the proposed standards adequately support the design intent.
3. Submittal
3.1.1 Product data for each accessory item shall include construction details, material descriptions
and thickness, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting method, specified options, and
finishes.
3.2 Submit the following samples in accordance with the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS:
3.2.1 Samples of each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.
Acceptable full-size samples will be returned and may be used in the Works.
3.3 Submit the following shop drawings in accordance with the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS:
3.3.1 Schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each
accessory item to be provided for the Works.
3.3.2 Setting the Drawings indicating where cutouts are required in other work, including
templates, substrate preparation, and instructions for preparing cutouts and installing
anchorage devices.
3.4 Submit maintenance schedules and parts lists in accordance with the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
4.1 Before starting the works, arrange a pre-construction meeting in accordance with the Project meetings.
Items for discussion shall include construction procedures, Specifications, surface readiness, application,
material storage and protection. Conduct the meeting to ensure operator will have the best quality work.
4.2 Single-source responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each toilet fixtures unit and
for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer or as shown on
drawing.
5. Project Condition
5.1 Coordinate toilet fixtures locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference
with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of accessory items.
5.2 Furnish toilet fixtures manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in
concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
6. Warranty
6.1 Submit a written warranty for the works under this section for 5 years. The warranty shall be in addition
to and not a limitation of other rights which SRT may have against the Contractor under the Contract
Documents.
6.2 Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, agreeing to replace any mirrors that
develop visible silver spoilage defects within the warranty period.
7. Extra Material
7.1 At the completion of work the Contractor shall provide adequate supply of each type of reserve
toilet fixtures specified as necessary and directed by the Engineer.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Material
1.1 Stainless steel sheet: No. 304 or 316 in accordance with the performance requirement, with brushed
finish, 0.85mm minimum thickness. All stainless steel shall be the same type.
1.2 Galvanized steel mounting devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
1.3 Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material and finish as accessory unit, or of
galvanized steel where concealed. Finishes shall match accepted samples.
2. Fabrication
2.1 General: Only a maximum 38mm. diameter, un-obstructive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved
by the Engineer, is permitted on exposed face of accessory units. On interior surface not exposed to
view or on back surface, provide additional identification by a printed, waterproof label or a stamped
nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
2.2 Surface-mounted accessories, general: Except where otherwise indicated fabricate unit with tight
seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel
piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
2.3 Recessed accessories, general: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all- welded
construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full- length, stainless steel
piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.
2.4 Keys: Provide universal keys for access to accessory units requiring internal access for servicing, re-
supply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to the Engineer.
3. Toilet Fixtures
Toilet Fixtures: model and color as specified on the drawings [unless specified color on drawings,
select white color. Toilet Fixtures shall be the products listed on the Drawings or acceptable products
specified herein.
3.1 Water closet with accessories:-
3.1.1 Executive water closet with accessories and flush tank :
3.1 Conform to TIS.792-2554
3.2 Sing flush with 3.8-6 liter of water
3.3 Anti-bacterial water closet
3.1.2 Water closet with accessories and flush valve :
(1) Conform to TIS.792-2554
(2) Sing flush with 6 liter of water
(3) Anti-bacterial water closet
(4) Flush valve: Top inlet, Made from brass, chrome finish and secured lock.
3.1.3 2 piece water closet with accessories and flush tank :
(2) Sing flush with 3.8-6 liter of water
3.1.4 Water closet for disable and elderly person
(2) 2 piece water closet, flush tank with special length of lever handle.
(3) Sing flush with 3.8-6 liter of water.
(5) Seat shall design for disable and elderly person
(6) Seat shall be made from EVA foam, non-skid protect, durable and easy to cleaning.
(7) A pedestal big size to support sit balance.
(8) Install with grab bar/hand rail as show in the Drawing.
3.1.5 Squat flush tank:
(1) Back Inlet flush tank squat with pedestal
3.2 Urinal with accessories:-
3.2.1 Executive urinal with accessories and flush valve:
(1) Wall hung type with built-in trap.
(2) Anti-bacteria, hygiene, less stain and easy to clean.
(3) Urinal flush valve: Top inlet, made from brass-chrome finish and secured lock.
(4) Size: Approximate width 30-35 cm. height 57-65cm. length 30-35 cm.
3.2.2 Urinal with accessories and flush valve:
(1) Wall hung type with built-in trap.
(2) Anti-bacteria, hygiene, less stain and easy to clean.
(3) Urinal flush valve: Top inlet, made from brass- chrome finish and secured lock.
(4) Size: Approximate width 44-48 cm. height 67-75 cm., length 31-38 cm
3.3 Lavatory (Wash basin) including accessories:-
All type of lavatory shall conform to TIS.791-2544 and as specified in the Drawing.
3.3.1 Counter top lavatory

(1) Made from ceramic, hygiene and less stain.
(2) Approximate size: 59-65 cm width, 19-22 cm height, 49-52 cm length.
(3) Shape of lavatory as shown in the Drawing.
3.3.2 Under-counter lavatory
3.3.3 Semi recessed (Half counter) lavatory
3.3.4 Wall hung lavatory with Pedestal
3.3.5 Lavatory for disable and elderly person
(1) Wall hung lavatory.
(2) Design of lavatory shall be used comfortably from a chair, or a wheel-chair can be
brought underneath it.
(3) Install with grab bar/hand rail as show in the Drawing.
3.4 Faucet including accessories:-
3.4.1 Self-closing Lavatory (Wash basin) faucet
(1) Conform to TIS.11377-2555,
(2) Cold water faucet with slow-self closing.
(3) Metal contaminant-controlled (Lead, cadmium, copper, zinc)
(4) Made from brass and chrome finish.
3.4.2 Lavatory (Wash basin) faucet
(1) Conform to TIS.1278-2555, TIS 2067-2552
(2) Cold water faucet.
(3) Metal contaminant-controlled (Lead, cadmium, copper, zinc)
(4) Ceramic valve, lever handle
3.4.3 Wall mount faucet (Wall tap)
(2) Cold water faucet
(3) Ball or Ceramic valve, lever handle
3.4.4 Kitchen faucet
(2) Cold water faucet
(3) Ceramic valve, Swivel or spindle handle.
3.4.5 Shower faucet and accessories.
(1) Shower head conform to TIS.1187-2555
(2) Hand shower: shower head shall have minimum 3 function (Normal spray, message,
and soft) and flexible shower (inlet) hose.
(3) Fix shower: shower head shall have minimum 3 function (Normal spray, message,
soft) or as shown on drawings
(4) Shower faucet : Made from brass and chrome finish, Ceramic valve and lever handle,
3.4.6 Kitchen Sink
(5) Kitchen sink made from stainless SUS304 or high quality include drain and necessary
fixtures.
3.4.7 Stop valve
(1) Ball or Ceramic valve, Swivel or spindle handle.
3.4.8 Hose
(1) Made from stainless steel size 14”, 16”,20” or as shown on drawings.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 Install toilet fixtures according to manufacturers' instructions, using theft resistant fasteners appropriate
to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored at
indicated heights. Location of accessories shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall not interfere
with door swing or other movable parts of the building.
1.2 Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or
screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's
instructions for type of substrate involved.
2. Adjusting
2.1 Adjust toilet fixtures for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace
damaged or defective items.
3. Cleaning
3.1 After removing temporary labels and protective coatings, clean and polish exposed surfaces in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2
END
5.2.10.2 : TOILET COMPARTMENT

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Toilet compartments:
High pressure laminates on solid compacted melamine sheet or Melamine face foam
panel with accessories.
1.1.2 Provide toilet compartments where shown on the drawings, as specified
here in and as needed for a complete proper installation including labor, materials,
appliances and services required to manufacture, deliver, furnish and install all items
necessary for the proper execution and completion of all toilet compartments and
related works. Examine all other sections of these specifications for requirements which
affect the works of this section, whether or not such requirements are particularly
mentioned herein. Coordinate the work of this section with the related work of other
trades, to assure the steady progress of all works of the Contract.
1.2 Related work :

Specifications.
1.2.2 Toilet accessories other than specified herein (SECTION 5-2.10.3 Toilet Accessories).
2. References
2.1 Comply with applicable standards and local building codes are referenced as Engineeror/and Architect
support the design intent. Alternate standards may be proposed for
consideration by The Employer’s representative shall be the sole judge as to whether
2.2 International standards are referenced as they support the design intent. Alternate standards may be
proposed for consideration by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to whether the
3. Submittals
reports necessary to show compliance with the Contract.
3.3 Samples of full range of finish on same substrate to be used in work, 300 x 300 mm.
3.4 Shop Drawings for fabrication and installation of toilet compartment assemblies not fully described
by product drawing, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorage devices built into other
work.
3.6 Submit field record documents in accordance with the Contract.
4.1 Before starting the work, arrange a pre-construction meeting with the Engineer, the Contractor, installer,
and manufacturer to discuss construction procedures, specifications, surface readiness, application, and
material storage and protection. Conduct meeting to ensure OPERATOR will have the best quality
work.
4.2 Field measurements: take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication,
where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. Allow for adjustments where taking of field
measurements before fabrication might delay work.
4.3 Coordination: furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into work for installation of toilet
compartments and related items. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
4.4 Contracture shall procure toilet compartments from only one manufacturer to control product
quality, installation includes warranty terms and conditions.
5. Warranty
5.1 Submit a written warranty for work under this for 2 years. The warranty shall be in addition to and not
a limitation of other rights which SRT may have against the contractor under the Contract.
6. Maintenance Instruction
6.1 Provide instruction in the maintenance of toilet compartment in accordance with the Contract.
PART II: PRODUCTS

1. Acceptable Manufacturers
1.1 The Following manufacturers are acceptable as shown on drawings, subject to compliance with the
Contract Documents:
2. Materials
2.1 General: provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed
surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core
material, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
2.2 High pressure laminate on solid compacted melamine sheet:
2.2.1 Pilasters: 13 mm.thick
2.2.2 Doors, panels, and screenscompact laminate: 13 mm.thick
2.2.3 High pressure laminate: the highest quality, coated by phenol resin, arranged in layers,
extruded by heat and high pressure until it melts and homogeneous. The materials shall
have property to withstand heat, scratch, cigarette burn, acid-base, damp, and water, and
not swallow even though the material is located at the high moisture area.
2.3 Melamine face foam (MFF) panel made from HPL-high pressure laminate 0.8 mm. thick. Inject
polyurethane foam between HPL with density 285 kg./square meter. Foam is hard as artificial wood.
MFF panel is no swelling in water, furnished with a high quality resistance, no conduct of fire and
electricity. With the sandwich system, the edge of panel cover with PVC (A grade) 2 mm. thick. by hot
melt system at 220 degree centigrade. Hinge, put an axle on top and bottom of a door.
2.3.1 Pilaster, door and intermediate panel made from MFF (melamine face foam board). MFF
made from high pressure laminate 0.8 mm. thick. Inject PU foam between HPL with density
285 kg./square meter. Foam without chlorofluorocarbons and no any glue for the
production. The thickness is 25 mm. Hinge, put an axle on top and bottom of a door.
2.3.2 Pilaster, Door and Intermediate Panel are resistance to fire, no rot from moisture and resistance
to termites. No any joint on Intermediate Panel, same color of door, pilaster and side panel.
2.3.3 Top channel on the top of pilaster is long rounded shape. Diameter is not less than 50
mm. Thick is not less than 1.5 mm. with anodized 18 micron. The edge cover with black
nylon plastic CAP (ABS type).
2.3.4 Woolen fabric sticks on 2 sides of the door and a door stopper.
2.3.5 Quality Guarantee
 No swelling in water guarantee for 2 year by manufacturer.
 Rotten guarantee for usually use for 2 year by manufacturer
2.4 Pilaster shoes and caps: Stainless steel, type 304 stainless steel, finished to match fittings.
2.5 Stirrup brackets: manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels to walls and pilasters, stainless
steel type 304.
2.6 Hardware and accessories: manufacturer's design heavy duty operating hardware and accessories of
stainless steel type 304.
2.7 Anchorages and fasteners: manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel type 304 with
theft-resistant-type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized, cadmium-plated,
or other rust-resistant protective-coated steel.
3. Fabrication
3.1 General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system.
Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partition-mounted
hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
3.2 Door dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 600 mm. wide in-swinging doors for ordinary
toilet stalls and 900 mm. wide {clear opening) out-swinging doors for stalls equipped for use by
handicapped.
3.3 Ceiling-hung on floor compartments: furnish galvanized steel anchorage devices complete with
threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural
support above finished ceiling to floor finishing. Furnish devices which are designed to support pilasters
from structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling floor. Provide 75 mm. high stainless steel
trim piece, finished to match hardware, at each pilaster.
3.4 Wall-hung screens: furnish panel units in indicated sizes, of same construction and finish as partition
system panels.
3.5 Hardware: furnish hardware for each compartment to comply with local regulations and codes for
handicapped accessibility and for ordinary use as follows:
3.5.1 Hinges for typical compartments: cutout insert type, double acting, adjustable to hold
door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Provide gravity type, spring-action cam type,
or concealed torsion rod type to suit manufacturer's standards.
3.5.2 Latch and keeper: manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit, designed for
handicapped accessibility, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper.
3.5.3 Coat hook: manufacturer's standard unit, combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper,
sized to prevent door hitting mounted accessories.
3.5.4 Purse hook: manufacturer's standard unit.
3.5.5 Door pull: manufacturer's standard unit.
4. Shop Finishing
4.1 Stainless steel fittings: brushed finish.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 General: comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Install
compartment units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1 3 mm.
between pilasters and panels, and not more than 25 mm. between panels and walls. Secure panels
to walls with not less than two stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall
brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints. Secure panels to pilasters
with not less than two stirrup brackets located to align with stirrup brackets at wall. Secure panels in
position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
1.2 Ceiling- hung on floor compartments: secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb, and
tighten installation with furnished devices. Attach dividing panels to the pilasters and walls with stirrup
brackets. Hang doors and adjust so that bottoms of door are level with bottom of pilasters when
doors are in closed position.
1.3 Screens: attach with anchoring devices as recommended by manufacturer to suit supporting structure.
Set units to provide support and to resist lateral impact.
2.1 Installation tolerances:
Clearance at vertical edges of compartment doors shall be uniform from top to bottom and shall not
exceed 5 mm.
3. Adjusting
3.1 Hardware adjustment: adjust and lubricated hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging
doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on
out-swinging doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed position.
4. Cleaning
4.1 Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by the
manufacturer.
5. Protection
5.1 Provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period.
END
5.2.10.3 : TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide toilet accessories where shown on the drawings, as specified here in and as needed
for a complete proper installation including labor, materials, appliances and services
execution and completion of all toilet accessories and related works. Examine all other
sections of these specifications for requirements which affect the works of this section,
whether or not such requirements are particularly mentioned herein. Coordinate the work
of this section with the related work of other trades, to assure the steady progress of all
works of the Contract.
1.2 Related work :
2. References
2.2 International standards are referenced as they support the design intent. Alternative standards may
be proposed for consideration by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to whether
3. Submittal
3.1.2 Product data for each accessory item shall include construction details, material
descriptions and thickness, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting method, specified
options, and finishes.
3.2.1 Samples of each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.
Acceptable full-size samples will be returned and may be used in the Works.
3.3.1 Schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each
accessory item to be provided for the Works.
3.3.2 Setting the Drawings indicating where cutouts are required in other work, including
templates, substrate preparation, and instructions for preparing cutouts and installing
anchorage devices.
4.1 Before starting the works, arrange a pre-construction meeting in accordance with the Project meetings.
Items for discussion shall include construction procedures, Specifications, surface readiness, application,
material storage and protection. Conduct the meeting to ensure operator will have the best quality work.
4.2 Single-source responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each accessory unit and for
units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer or as shown on
drawing.
5. Project Condition
5.1 Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference
with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of accessory items.
5.2 Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete
or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
6. Warranty
6.1 Submit a written warranty for the works under this section for 2years. The warranty shall be in addition
to and not a limitation of other rights which SRT may have against the Contractor under the Contract
Documents.
6.2 Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, agreeing to replace any mirrors that
develop visible silver spoilage defects within the warranty period.
7. Extra Material
7.1 At the completion of work the Contractor shall provide adequate supply of each type of reserve
toilet accessories specified as necessary and directed by the Engineer.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Material
1.1 Stainless steel sheet: No. 304 or 316 in accordance with the performance requirement, with brushed
finish, 0.85mm minimum thickness. All stainless steel shall be the same type.
1.2 Galvanized steel mounting devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
1.3 Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material and finish as accessory unit, or of
galvanized steel where concealed. Finishes shall match accepted samples.
2. Fabrication
2.1 General: Only a maximum 38mm. diameter, un-obstructive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved
by the Engineer, is permitted on exposed face of accessory units. On interior surface not exposed to
view or on back surface, provide additional identification by a printed, waterproof label or a stamped
nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
2.2 Surface-mounted accessories, general: Except where otherwise indicated fabricate unite with tight
seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel
piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
2.3 Recessed accessories, general: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all- welded
construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full- length, stainless steel
piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.
2.4 Keys: Provide universal keys for access to accessory units requiring internal access for servicing, re-
supply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to the Engineer.
3. Rinsing Spray
3.1 Conform to TIS.1497-2548
3.2 Passed water pressure test >17.5 bar
3.3 Shower head made from stainless SUS304 or high quality ABS plastic.
3.4 Flexible shower (inlet) hose.
4. Tissue Paper Holder
4.1 Tissue Paper Holder: Wall mount type, made from brass-chrome finished or stainless SUS304 or as
Shown on drawing.
5. Soap Dispensers
5.1 Liquid soap dispenser, deck-mounted: Deck-mounted piston and spout-type unit with a minimum
600 ml capacity, polyethylene reservoir concealed below deck. Piston and 0.10 m. long spout of
stainless steel with brightly polished finish with chrome-plated deck escutcheon.
5.1.1 Provide unit designed for mounting on lavatory deck.
5.1.2 Equip unit with valve for dispensing soap in liquid form.
6. Emergency Shower
Conform to ANSI Z358.1-1998, Floor mounted type with eye wash. Unit shall be made of stainless
steel material with foot and hand operator. Eye wash shall be equipped with cap.
7. Grab Bars//Hand Rail for Toilet
7.1 Stainless SUS304 type: provide grab bars/hand rails with wall thickness not less than 1.3 mm. and as
follows:
7.1.1 Mounting: Exposed, manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorages.
7.1.2 Clearance: 38 mm. clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar
7.1.3 Gripping surfaces: Smooth, satin finish.
7.1.4 Heavy- duty size: outside diameter of 38 mm.
7.1.5 Type of grab bar/hand rail as specified in the Drawing or as follows.
7.1.5.1 Hand rail for water closet:
 L-Shaped stainless handrail hairline finish, install left or right side on wall as
shown in the Drawing
 T-Shaped stainless handrail hairline finish, install opposite L-shaped handrail as
shown in the Drawing
 In the limited space, install swing able handrail replace T- Shaped stainless
handrail hairline finish.
7.1.5.2 Hand rail for lavatory
 T-Shaped stainless handrail hairline finish, install on wall/floor as shown in the
Drawing.
7.1.5.3 Hand rail for urinal
 Stainless handrail hairline finish, install on wall as shown in the Drawing.
8. Other Accessories
8.1 Baby Changing
8.1.1 Baby changing station body shall have 18 gauge, type 304 satin stainless steel exterior finish
with high-density polyethylene interior.
8.1.2 Design of unit shall be recess-mounted. Unit shall be equipped with a pneumatic cylinder for
controlled opening and closing of bed. Bed shall be secured to back plate with a concealed,
full-length steel-on-steel hinge.
8.1.3 Unit shall have antimicrobial embedded into plastic material.
8.1.4 No hinge structure shall be exposed on interior or exterior surfaces. Unit shall have steel
mounting plates with mounting hardware included.
8.1.5 Unit shall conform to ASTM F 2285-04 Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification
for Diaper Changing Tables for Commercial Use.
8.1.6 Unit shall be backed by manufacturer’s 2-year limited warranty on materials and
workmanship.
8.2 Mirror: Frameless, Beveled edge. Size as specified in the Drawing.
8.3 Coat Hook: Made from brass-chrome finished or stainless SUS304
8.4 Paper Towel Dispenser: Surface Mounted type for hard roll towel, made from durable ABS plastic.
8.5 Towel bar: Made from brass-chrome finished or stainless SUS304, 60-90 cm. length.
8.6 Soap holder: Made from ceramic, wall mounted with stainless bracket or as shown on drawings.
8.7 Floor drain: Dia. 2”-3” Stainless steel type odor trap or as shown on drawings.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 Install accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using theft resistant fasteners
appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly
anchored at indicated heights. Location of accessories shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall
not interfere with door swing or other movable parts of the building.
1.2 Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or
screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's
instructions for type of substrate involved.
2. Adjusting
2.1 Adjust accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace
damaged or defective items.
3. Cleaning
3.1 After removing temporary labels and protective coatings, clean and polish exposed surfaces in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
END
5.2.11 : MISCELLANEOUS ARCHITECT WORK

5.2.11.1: ORNAMENTAL RAILING
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Stainless Steel pipe handrail, kick rail, fittings and Stainless Steel post.
1.1.2 Steel pipe handrails and fittings.
1.1.3 Wire mesh balustrade
1.1.4 Perforated and expanded metal balustrade
1.1.5 Stainless steel cable balustrade
1.1.6 Hard wood balustrade
1.1.7 Glass balustrade

1.1.8 All fittings materials to complete work
2.1 Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, Horizontal balustrading to the heads of stairs, escalators
or open wells through floors, shall be constructed to a minimum height above floor level, in
accordance with BS 6180; Barriers in and about buildings-code of practice, and installed in such a way
as to withstand the crush loading in accordance with Table 4 of BS 6399 part 1: 1996; Minimum
horizontal imposed loads for parapets, barriers and balustrades.
2.2 Walkways and Balustrades are those in Plant Rooms, Plenums, and any Platform edges requiring
balustrades, Plant bridges and the like, and shall be installed to resist the lateral loads in accordance
with BS 5395 part 3: Stairs ladders and walkways – industrial stairs and ladders.
3. Submittals
3.1 Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and
accessories.
3.2 Samples: Submit two 300 mm long samples of handrail. Submit two samples, of elbows and end stops.
Submit one sample of post.
3.3 Document: Submit material specification. Submit ITP (Inspection and Test Plan) and Quality Control
Checklist.
3.4 Mockup: Install the full-scale mockup for 1 typical module in accordance with the approved mockup
shop drawings. The mockup shall be approved by the Engineer prior to start the submittals of
permanent work.
4. Field Measurements
4.1 Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Stainless Steel Railing System
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, following is the acceptable products;
1.1 Rails: 48.6 mm. diameter, 2.0 mm. thickness stainless steel (304 grade) pipe, grooved joints.
1.2 Side mounted auxiliary handrail for disable and elderly person: 38 mm. diameter, 2.0 mm. thickness
stainless steel (304 grade) pipe, grooved joints. Support rail shall be Installed 800mm. height from finished
floor, offset distance from Main rail 50mm.
1.3 Posts: 60 mm. x 51 mm. solid steel friction fit into stainless steel (304 grade) hollow section with
galvanic protection.
1.4 Fittings: Elbows, end stops.
1.5 Mounting: with steel plate 300 x 275 x195 x 20 mm. and steel plate angle 80 x 80 x 195 x 20 mm. expansion
bolt to concrete floor.
1.6 Splice Connectors: Stainless Steel (304 grade) tube diameter 42.16 mm. frictions fit.in to stainless steel tube
diameter 48.6 mm.
1.7 Finish: Hair line no.4
2. Steel Railing System
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawing, following is the acceptable products.
2.1 Rails: 38mm (1-1/2”) diameter steel pipe, welded joints.
2.2 Posts: 38mm (1-1/2”) diameter steel pipe, welded joints.
2.3 Fitting: Elbows, and stops.
2.4 Mounting: with 50.8mm (2”) dia. X 152.4mm (6”) deep hole in concrete, for casting posts in concrete at
top landings: with steel brackets expansion bolt to concrete wall.
2.5 Splice Connectors: Steel welding collars.

2.6 Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, rust-inhibitive primer. Railings exposed to the weather
shall be hot-dip galvanized, with weight of coating conforming to ASTM A53, before applying primer.
3. Wire mesh
3.1 Wire mesh: Wire cloths fabricated from coated steel with corrosive protection system for at least 5 year
warranty prior to having the first overhaul or component replacement.
3.2 Type: Woven wire cloth fabricated from min. 1.2 mm [diameter] wire woven into a square mesh with max.
75 mm opening between wires.
3.3 Rails: 38mm (1-1/2 ")diameter steel pipe, welded joints.
3.4 Posts: 38mm (1-1/2 ")diameter steel pipe, welded joints.
3.5 Fittings: Elbows, and stops.
3.6 Mounting: with 50.8mm (2") dia. x 152.4mm (6") deep hole in concrete, for casting posts in concrete at top
landings: with steel brackets expansion bolt to concrete wall.
3.7 Splice Connectors: Steel welding collars.
3.8 Framing finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, rust-inhibitive primer. Railings exposed to the
weather shall be hot-dip galvanized, with weight of coating conforming to ASTM A53, before applying
primer.
4. Perforated and Expanded metal
4.1 Perforated panel: Fabricated from 2 mm.thickness -stainless steel plate with hair-line finished, 2 mm.
thickness -galvanized steel plate with epoxy color coating, 2 mm.thickness -solid aluminum plate with
powder coating color or as specified in the Drawing, punched to form 9 mm [diameter] holes in diagonal
pattern, 15 mm horizontal & vertical spacing.
4.2 Expanded panel: Fabricated from 1.5 mm. thickness-stainless steel plate with hair-line finishedPanel shall
be expanded to form 22mm. short way of diamond, 50.8mm.-long way of diamond, 2.00 mm.width,
Fabricated from 2.5 mm. thickness steel plate with galvanized finish. Panel shall be expanded to form 25
mm. short way of diamond, 61 mm.long way of diamond, ridge 3.00 mm.
4.3 Framing: 40 mm x 20 mm, 1.5 mm. thickness stainless steel (304 grade) rectangular tube with 12 mm x 12
mm, 1.5 mm. thickness stainless steel (304 grade) squared tube batten, 25x25x2.3 mm. steel frame with
painted finish.
4.4 Rails: 48.6 mm. diameter, 2.0 mm. thickness stainless steel (304 grade) pipe grooved joints.
4.5 Posts: 60 mm. x 51 mm. solid steel friction fit into stainless steel (304 grade) hollow section with galvanic
protection.
4.8 Splice Connectors: Stainless Steel (304 grade) tube diameter 42.16 mm. frictions fit in to stainless steel tube
diameter 48.6 mm.
5. Stainless steel cable
5.1 Cabling: Stainless steel cables and the fitting system in accordance with the approved shop drawings, the
diameter and strand numbers shall be complied with the performance requirements. The cable spacing
shall not exceed 100 mm.
5.2 Rails: 48.6 mm. diameter, 2.0 mm. thickness stainless steel (304 grade) pipe, grooved joints.
5.3 Posts: 60 mm. x 51 mm. solid steel friction fit into stainless steel (304 grade) hollow section with
galvanic protection.
diameter 48.6 mm.
6. Solid hardwood railing
6.1 Railing height: 900-1000 mm.
6.2 Top rails: Circular handrail shall have38mm (1-1/2”) outside-diameter, non-circular handrail shall have a
perimeter dimension of 100mm. and a cross-section dimension of 57mm. maximum.
6.3 Surfaces: Handrail gripping surfaces and any surfaces adjacent to them shall be free of sharp or abrasive
elements and shall have rounded edges
6.4 Bottom rails: 38x75 mm. rectangular-hardwood, floor-to-bottom rail shall be 100 mm spacing
6.5 Baluster:38x38 mm.rectangular-hardwood. Intermediate rail shall be 100 mm. maximum spacing.
6.6 Posts: 100 mm. x 100 mm. rectangular-hardwood
6.7 Fitting: Handrails shall not rotate within their fittings.
6.8 Mounting: The mounting of handrails shall be such that the completed structure is capable of withstanding
a load of at least 200 pounds applied in any direction at any point on the rail.
6.9 Finish: Wood painted finish according section Painting.
7. Glazing
7.1 Glass panel: Fabricated from tempered glass with heat soaked test or laminated .heat strengthen glass in
which the framed panel resists the loads in accordance with the performance requirements. The sealing
and glazing material shall be non-staining types.
7.2 Framing: 40 mm x20 mm, 1.5 mm. thickness stainless steel (304 grade) rectangular tube with
7.3 Rails: 48.6 mm. diameter, 20 mm. thickness stainless steel (304 grade) pipe, grooved joints.
7.4 Posts: 60 mm. x 51 mm. solid steel friction fit into stainless steel (304 grade) hollow section with galvanic
protection.
diameter 48.6 mm.
8. Point-fixed Glass Fittings Materials
8.1 Material size, dimension as indicated on the Drawings.
8.2 Stainless Steel Type 316
8.3 Finish: Hair Line no.4
9. Generic Fabrication
9.1 Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to site.
9.2 Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured.
9.3 Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with
design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
9.4 Supply components required for anchorage or fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of
same material and finish as fabricated, except where specifically noted otherwise.
9.5 Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds as the manufacturer's recommendation.
9.6 To form metal hollow section, V-cut stainless steel sheet before bending. Weld, grind exposed joints to
make invisible joints then grinding in one direction to perform hairline finish.
9.7 Accurately form components to each other and to building structure.
9.8 Provide the Earthing system connection in accordance with the electrical engineering requirement.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Examination
1.1 Verify that filed conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
1.2 Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
2. Preparation
2.1 Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
2.2 Supply items required to be cast into concrete with setting templates, to appropriate Sections.
3. Installation
3.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings.
3.2 Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion and defects.
3.3 Provide anchors, required for connecting railings to structure. Anchor railing to structure.
3.4 Field weld anchors as indicated on shop drawings. Touch-up welds with primer. Grind welds smooth.
3.5 Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings.
4. Erection Tolerances
4.1 Maximum variation from plumb: 6 mm. per 3 m. high, non-cumulative.
4.2 Maximum offset from true alignment: 6 mm.
END
5.2.11.2: METAL GRATINGS
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Furnish and install fabricated metal work, including but not limited to:
1.1.1 Metal gratings: steel grating with paint finished, galvanized steel grating, aluminum grating
and stainless steel grating.
1.1.2 Metal channel framing for gratings
1.1.3 Anchor accessories for items furnished under this section
2. References
2.2 The work is subject to applicable portions of the following standards:
3.1 Fabrications shall comply with the following minimum design loads without deformation
3.1.1 Gratings: minimum 735 kgs/sq.m uniform live load and a 136 kg concentrated live load
in center of unit, except when greater live load requirements are indicated.
4. Submittals
reports necessary to show compliance with the Contract.
4.2 Submit the name and address of the manufacturer of high-strength bolts and applicable certified mill
reports to ensure traceability of the bolts. Failure to submit this information will be cause to reject
the bolts.
4.3.1 Metal gratings finish, 4 range samples 300 x 300 mm.
4.3.2 Coating system on steel, 300 x 300 mm
4.3.3 Each type of movement joint cover assembly 300 mm long.
4.4 Submit the following shop drawings in accordance with the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. Shop drawings shall
include the following information:
4.4.1 Methods of joining and fastening, thicknesses of metal, profiles, materials, methods of
anchorage, and finishes for fabricated items.
4.4.2 Relative location of adjacent materials.
4.4.3 Details of structural stair members, treads, and risers, and size and location of floor
openings including the earthing connection in accordance with the electrical engineering
requirements.
4.4.4 Fabrication and installation of expansion joint cover assembly including plans, elevations,
sections, details of components, joints, splices, and attachments to other units of Work.
4.4.5 Installation diagrams.
4.5 Welding shall be indicated using AWS symbols. Show length and size for all welds and spacing for
intermittent welds. Notes such as 6 mm weld”, “weld” and “tack weld” will not be acceptable.
4.6 Submit operating instructions, maintenance schedules, and parts lists in accordance with the GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS
4.7 Submit field record documents in accordance with the condition of contracts.
5.1 Fabricator qualifications: firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated
for this Project with a record of successful in - service performance, and with sufficient production
capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
5.2 Welding shall be executed by operators who have been qualified as prescribed in the American
Welding Society's standard qualification procedure for the required type of work. Certification that
each operator has passed the tests shall be furnished if requested by the Engineer.
5.3 Single-source responsibility: obtain expansion joint cover assembles specified in this Section from one
source from a single manufacturer. Coordinate compatibility with expansion joint cover assemblies
specified in other sections.
6. Delivery, Storage, and Handling Conditions
6.1 Storage of Materials: Store off ground, and under cover, protected from damage. Store packaged
materials in unopened containers. Provide for drainage.
6.2 Fabricated items shall not be twisted, bent, distorted, or otherwise damaged. Materials shall be
protected against corrosion and deterioration
6.3 Handling Materials: Handle materials in way to protect surfaces. Prevent distortion of and other
damage to fabricated Metal.
PART II: PRODUCTS

1. Materials
1.1 Hot Rolled, Pickled & Oiled Steel: Commercial steel per ASTM A 1011, minimum yield of 33 ksi.
1.2 Mill Galvanized Steel: Commercial steel per ASTM A 653 and ASTM A 924 with G-90 coating
designation, minimum yield of 33 ksi.
1.3 Hot-Dip Galvanized after fabrication: Commercial steel per ASTM A 1011, minimum yield of 33 ksi,
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication per ASTM A 123.
1.4 Aluminum: Alloy 5052, Temper H32 aluminum per ASTM B 209
1.5 Stainless Steel: Type 304 (Type 316) stainless steel, No.4 brushed finish, per ASTM A 240
1.6 Rolled steel shapes and plates: ASTM A283 or ASTM A36
1.7 Steel sheet and strip: ASTM A366
1.8 Perforated steel plate: 14 ASTM A283, Grade C, with perforations of indicated size, shape, and pattern.
Margins shall be blank. Surface flatness deviation over a 300 mm span shall not exceed 4 mm
1.9 Fasteners for stainless steel: stainless steel, commercial type as shown and best suited for the
intended purpose. Where exposed, material and finish shall match the fastened metal. Exposed screw
heads shall be countersunk allen head type unless otherwise indicated
1.10 High strength bolts, nuts, and washers: ASTM A325 or ASTM A490
1.11 Thread locking compound.
1.12 Brackets, flanges, and anchors: cast or formed metal of the same material and finish as supported
members, unless otherwise indicated
1.13 Metal primer for surfaces which will receive a finish coat: as recommended by finish coat
manufacturer
1.14 Metal primer for surfaces which will not receive a finish coat: rust inhibitive metal primer standard
with the fabricator.
1.15 Grout: ASTM C1107, non-shrinking, non-staining grout, as approved by the Engineer
1.16 Beads for bead blasting: non-steel shot
2. Fabrication
2.1 Materials shall be new, clean, and free from excessive mill scale, flake, rust, and pitting.
2.2 Furnish necessary shims, washers,lugs, brackets, rivets, bolts, nuts, screws, and anchors for assembly
and installation. Shop assembled members may be riveted, bolted, or welded. Field connections
shall be bolted or welded. Bolts shall be concealed unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 Fasteners shall be commercial type best suited for the application and concealed where practicable.
Exposed fasteners shall match fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. Exposed screws shall be
countersunk Phillips oval head type unless otherwise indicated. Screw up tight and nick threads to
prevent loosening. No member shall have end connections using less than 2 fasteners.
2.4 Welds shall be made by the electric are process in accordance with approval by the Engineer and
spacing shall be as recommended by the fabricator unless otherwise indicated; Exposed welds for
fabricated items shall be continuous. Welds on back of finished surfaces shall be done to minimize
distortion and discoloration on the finished side. Welding of metal shall be done on unexposed
surfaces
2.5 Remove weld spatter and oxides from finished surfaces by de-scaling or grinding. Grind and polish
weld beads on exposed metal surfaces to match finish on adjacent metal. Remove burrs from exposed
edges and surfaces.
2.6 Punch, drill, and tap finished members as required for connection of adjoining work. Drill field holes
in this work as required by other trades.
2.7 Standard commercial items differing only in minor details from the Drawings will be considered by
the Engineer.
3. Source Finishing
3.1 Prepare surfaces scheduled to be painted in accordance with SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council)
SP-3 (Power Tool Cleaning) or SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) SP-6 (Commercial Blast) as
required to remove loose mill scale, rust, slag and flux deposits, oil, dirt, and other foreign matter.
3.2 Steel material shall be prepared for priming in accordance with the metal primer manufacturer's
instructions
3.3 Shop coat steel with 1 coat of metal primer in accordance with the metal primer manufacturer's
instructions, unless otherwise specified. Dry film thickness shall be a minimum of 0.4 mm. Painting
shall be in accordance with the requirements of SSPC PA- 1 (Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of
Steel) Surfaces that will be inaccessible for painting after assembly or installation shall be given 2
shop coats of primer.
3.4 Shop coat will not be required on hot-dip galvanized or zinc coated metal unless otherwise specified
but abraded places and welds shall be touched up with zinc rich compound. Do not prime surfaces
encased in concrete or contact surfaces to be welded or high-strength bolted.
3.5 Electro-galvanizing shall conform to ASTM 8633 and the requirements for the appropriate service
conditions listed therein.
3.6 Cast stainless steel clips: bead blasted, to match the Engineer approved sample
3.7 Finish for other exposed stainless steel surfaces shall be No.4 brushed finish
4. Marking
4.1 Mark each member with an identifying mark. Marks shall correspond to marks shown on the
installation Drawing and shall be visible during field installation
5. Anchor Accessories
5.1 Furnish anchor bolts, clips, bent anchors, and other accessories required to install items specified
herein in connection with concrete and masonry work. Anchor accessories shall be properly marked
according to marks on installation drawings.
6. Metal gratings
6.1 Gratings shall be formed of metal bars welded together with cross bracing. Gratings shall be designed
to support a uniformly distributed live load of 735 kgs per sq. m., except where greater live load
requirements are indicated. Maximum bar spacing shall be 30 mmo.c. for bearing bars and 100 mm.
o.c. for cross bars. Sides of grating sections shall be banded with bars of the same dimensions as linear
bars. Include device for anchoring gratings into openings while still allowing for removal.
6.2 Gratings shall be fabricated in accordance with the requirements of Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating
Manual Essential current technical data concerning heavy duty bar gratings of structural carbon steel
and stainless steel. Includes information on types of gratings, fabrication, dimensional standards, load
tables, installation and guide specifications (ANSIINAAMM MBG 532-00).
6.3 Gratings shall be custom finished to match the approved samples by the Engineer.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Preparation
1.1 Verify locations of anchor accessories and other pertinent field conditions prior to installation
of items.
1.2 Manufacturer's instructions: in addition to requirements of these specifications with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations for phases of work including preparing substrate, applying
materials, and protecting installed units.
1.3 Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of
expansion joint cover assemblies to be embedded in or anchored to concrete or to have recesses
formed into edges of concrete slab for later placement and grouting in of frames.
1.4 Fastening to in-place construction: provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary to secure
expansion joint cover assemblies to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners with drilled-in
expansion shields for masonry and concrete where anchoring members are not embedded in
concrete. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and provide
for secure attachment of expansion joint cover assemblies.
2. Installation - General
2.1 Assemble and install work in place as rapidly as the progress of other construction permits and in
accordance with the construction schedule. Work shall be installed plumb, square, level, in proper
alignment, and securely fastened to the building construction.
2.2 Cutting of structural shapes in the field will not be allowed without prior review by the Engineer.
2.3 Field assembly, welding, brazing, and joining shall conform to requirements specified for shop
fabrication and assembly.
2.4 After plumbing, leveling, and aligning, draws connections up tight except where noted otherwise to
permit expansion. Make intersections tight and inconspicuous.
2.5 Calk indicated joints, or where required for water tightness, using sealant applied by mechanics skilled
in their use. Apply sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply sealant
when the temperature is below 4.4° C.
2.6 Work to be embedded in concrete shall be installed as specified in another section.
2.7 Work to be built into concrete unit masonry shall be installed as specified in another Section.
3. Field Finishing
3.1 Immediately after installation, damaged and abraded spots on painted surfaces and areas around field
welds shall be cleaned, touched up, and painted using the same procedures and materials specified
for shop finishing, unless otherwise recommended by the coating manufacturer
END
5.2.11.3 : SEALANTS
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide each form and type of joint sealant and accessories where shown on the Drawings ,
as specified here in and as needed for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections
of these Specifications for requirements which affect the works of this Section, whether or not such
requirements are particularly mentioned herein. Coordinate the work of this section with the related
work of other trades, to assure the steady progress of all works of the Contract.
1.1.2. If is not specified where else cementitious waterproof coating shall be applied to reinforced
concrete water tanks and reinforced concrete floor slab of all toilet rooms and wet rooms, where
required surface drainage.
1.2 Related work :
Specifications.
2.1 Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods for proper performance of the work of this Section.
2.2 Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product
required. Do not inter-mix different products or different systems.
2.3 Preconstruction Tests:
2.3.1 Field Tests:
2.3.1.1 Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test their adhesion to joint substrates.
2.3.1.2 Install joint sealants in 1500mm joint lengths using same materials and methods
required for completed work. Allow sealants to cure before testing. Test adhesion
to joint substrates by manually trying to pull joint sealant out of joint in
accordance with the manufacturers published adhesion criteria.
2.3.1.3 Locate test joints as directed by Engineer or/and Architect.
2.3.1.4 Perform tests in Engineer’s presence with technical representative of joint sealant
manufacturer present.
2.3.2 Perform field tests for the following applications:
2.3.2.1 Joints between stone panels or paver units.
2.3.2.2 Joints between other panels, pavers or systems.
3. Submittals
3.1 Manufacturer’ s technical data for each joint sealant required, including instructions for joint
preparation pretreatment and joint sealant application, and full size joint details identifying all
components and substrates to which they will be applied.
3.2 Submit :
3.2.1 Verification samples in small tubes ( cartridges) of each type and color of joint sealant
required. Install joint sealant samples in 12mm side joints formed between two 150mm
long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint
sealants in the work.
3.3 Submit test reports:
3.3.1 Certified test reports for elastomeric sealants evidencing compliance with requirements
specified based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations within a 24-
month period preceding date of submission of test reports. Include test results for aged
performances including hardness, stain resistance, adhesion and cohesion under cyclic
movement, low- temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100 percent strain,
effects of head aging, and effects of accelerated weathering. Adhesion and cohesion
under cyclic movement shall be tested in accordance with applicable standards.
3.3.2 Preconstruction field test results reported by Installer indicating which products and joint
preparation methods demonstrated acceptable adhesion to joint substrates.
3.4 Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with
specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
4. References
4.2 The following applicable standards references:

4.2.1 Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic
Movement.
4.2.2 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
4.2.3 Guide for Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
4.2.4 Standard Test Method for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension.
4.2.5 Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber, Cork and Recycle PVC Expansion Joint
Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
4.2.6 Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete
Pavement.
5. System Description
5.1 Provide joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight
and airtight continuous seals.
6.1 Delivery materials to project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing
about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use. pot life, curing
time and mixing instruction for multicomponent materials.
6.2 Store and handle materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to
moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials and Color
provided. The guarantees for various architectural finishes shall be stipulated under Construction
Specification of this Contract.
1.2 Provide joint sealants, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another
and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by testing
and field experience.
1.3 Provide manufacturer’s standard colors and type for exposed joint sealants in accordance with the
Contract Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
1.3.1 Elastomeric Joint Sealants: Provide manufacture’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric
sealant of base polymer.
1.3.2 Silicone Sealant:
1.3.2.1 One-part non-acid-curing silicone, and complying with the requirements for uses,
modules and additional joint movement capability and mildew resistant.
1.3.2.2 As applicable to glass, porcelain, and metal joint substrates indicated, color to
match substrate color, as approved by the Engineer.
1.3.3 Urethane Sealant:
1.3.3.1 Two-part pourable urethane, As applicable to horizontal joint surfaces and
substrates indicated, color to match substrate on which installed.
1.3.3.2 One-part nonsag urethane, As applicable to vertical joint substrates indicated, color
to match substrate on which installed.
1.4 Multi-Component Epoxidized Polyurethane:
1.4.1 Used for masonry, stone and concrete substrates, as recommended by manufacturer,
provided colors to match substrate surfaces to which sealant is applied.

1.5 Polysulphide Sealant:
1.5.1 Used for precast concrete lining or other concrete structure where back-up material is sealing
strip as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Joint Sealant Backing
2.1 Provide sealant backings of material and type which are non- staining: are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by
sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
2.1.1 Preformed compressible, resilient, non- waxing, non- extruding form backer rod, of size,
shape and density to suit various conditions and control sealant depth. Provide flexible,
open cell polyurethane form or non- gassing, closed- cell polyethylene foam, unless
otherwise indicated, subject to approval of sealant manufacturer.
2.1.2 Polyethylene Bond- breaker tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing bond between sealant and joint filler or other materials at
back surface of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
3. Miscellaneous Materials
3.1 Provide primer of type recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated.
3.2 Provide cleaners for nonporous surfaces; non- staining, chemical cleaner of type acceptable to
manufacturer of sealant and sealant backing materials which are not harmful to substrates and
adjacent nonporous materials.
3.3 Provide nonstaining masking tape; nonabsorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces
adjacent to joints.
4. Compression Seals
4.1 Manufacturer’s standard preformed hollow neoprene gasket, polychloroprene elastomeric joint seal
of the open-cell compression type complying with requirements indicated for size, profile and cross-
sectional design.
4.2 Lubricant adhesive: One –part moisture curing polyurethane as recommended by compression seal
manufacturer
5. Hydrophilic Rubber Seal (Sealing Strip)
5.1 Made of a non water- soluble but water expansive resin and synthetic rubber, moulded and
vulcanized, with the following
5.2 Adhesives: As recommended by Sealing Strip manufacturer.
6. Joint Fillers
6.1 Provide joint fillers beneath joint sealant backing materials. Filler shall comply with applicable
standard regranulated cork particles impregnated and bound with resins; and with resiliency recovery
rate of 95 percent. Provide in lengths of not less than 2m and in depth to fill substrate beneath joint
sealant backing.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.2 Installer shall inspect joints indicated to receive joint sealants for compliance with requirements for
joint configuration, installation tolerance and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance.
Installer shall submit written report to Contractor, with a copy to Engineer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance of joint sealant work.
1.2.1 Remove foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesive and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; oil; grease; water
proofing; water repellents; water; surface dirt and frost.
1.2.2 Clean concrete, masonry, and similar porous joint substrate surface, by brushing, grinding,
blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, acid washing or a combination of these methods to
produce a clean sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers.
Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out
joints with oil-free compressed air.
1.2.3 Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
1. 2. 4 Clean metal, glass, and other nonporous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means
which are not harmful to substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion
of joint sealant.
1.3 Prime joint substrate where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction
joint sealer-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant
manufacturer’s recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow
spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
1.4 Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which
otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint
seal.
2. Installation
2.1 Comply with joint sealant manufacturers’ printed installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
2.2 Installation Standards:
2.2.1 For elastomeric sealant, comply with recommendation of ASTM C962 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated.
2.3 Installation of Sealant Backings:
2.3.1 Install backer rods of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application
and at position required to produce the cross- sectional shapes and depths of installed
sealant relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
2.3.1.1 Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-fillers and back rods.
2.3.1.2 Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint-fillers and backer rods.
2.3.1.3 Remove absorbent joint- fillers or back rods which have become wet prior to
sealant application and replace with dry material.
2.3.2 Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint- fillers, or on back of joints where
required, to prevent third-side adhesion of sealant to back of joint.
2.4 Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint
substrates completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration and providing uniform,
cross- sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement
capability.
2.5 Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to
form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact
and adhesion of sealant with side of joint. Remove access sealants from surface adjacent to joint. Do
not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant
manufacturer.
2.6 Install each length of sealing strip immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not
to pull or stretch material, and complying with sealing strip manufacturer’s directions for installation
methods, materials and tools which produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints.
For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealing strip requires acceleration
to produce seal, apply heat to sealing strip in conformance with sealing strip manufacturer’ s
recommendations.
2.7 Adhesive: Use sealing strip adhesive continuously as recommended by manufacturer of sealing strip.
2.8 Installation of Compression Seals:
2.8.1 If adjacent surfaces are to receive waterproofing, install compression seals prior to
application of waterproofing.
2.8.2 Prime interfaces, edges and corners of joint as necessary.
2.8.3 Prime and lubricate joints by coating both sides of joint with lubricant/ adhesive to wet
film thickness of 0.5m
2.8.4 While lubricant/adhesive is still wet, install compression seals to depth shown.
2.8.5 Recess exposed edges slightly behind adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise shown, so that
compressed units will not protrude from joints.
2.8.6 Bond ends together with adhesive or adhere by other means as recommended by
manufacturer to ensure continuous watertight and airtight performance. Miter- cut and
bond ends at corners unless molded corner units are provided.
2.9 For joints to receive sealant but where tape of material is not noted, apply sealant as followings:
2.9.1 Horizontal wearing surfaces, two- component polyurethane, self- leveling. Prime joint
surfaces prior to application.
2.9.2 General purpose sealants for building joints.
2.9.1.1 One part polyurethane – stone and concrete.
2.9.1.2 Silicone – metals, glazing and roofing.
3. Surface
3.1 Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following environmental conditions at
the project site:
3.1.1 Ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturers.
3.1.2 Joint substrates are wet due to rain, condensation or other causes.
3.2 Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants when joint widths are less than allowed by joint
sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
4. Warranty
4.1 Provide joint guarantee signed by both the installer and the manufacturer that installed materials will
perform without loss of adhesion, rupture, failure, or staining of substrates for a period of five
consecutive years. Any joints failing to meet this criteria will be removed and replaced at no cost.
Failures resulting from structural movement are not subject to this guarantee.
5. Protection and Cleaning
5.1 Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or
from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without
deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. If damage or deterioration occurs, cut out
and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new areas
indistinguishable from original work.
END
5.2.11.4 : EXPANSION JOINT COVER
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 Provide expansion joint cover and accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified
here in and as needed for a complete proper installation. Examine all other sections of
these Specifications for requirements which affect the works of this Section, whether or not
such requirements are particularly mentioned herein. Coordinate the work of this section
with the related work of other trades, to assure the steady progress of all works of the
Contract.
1.2 The work of this section shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1.2.1 Floor expansion joint cover.
1.2.2 Wall/ceiling expansion joint cover.
1.2.3 Exterior expansion joint seals.
1.2.4 Roof expansion.
1.2.5 Fire barrier systems.
1.3 Related work :
3. References
4.1 The material and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference all applicable codes and
requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction
4.2 Fire Performance Characteristics.
4.2.1 Fire Resistance - Where indicated, provide expansion joint cover assemblies identical to
those of assemblies whose fire resistance and cycling capability has been determined in
accordance with applicable UL 2079 codes (USA). Fire rating shall not less than the rating
of adjacent construction.
4.3 Loading Characteristics.
4.3.1 Standard Floor Covers - Shall be designed to withstand a minimum point load of
2,400 kg without damage or permanent deformation. For point load testing has been
determined in accordance with applicable standard testing lab.
4.4 Single-Source Responsibility:

4.4.1 Obtain expansion joint cover assemblies from one source from a single manufacturer.
5. Submittals
5.1 Submit manufacturer’s product data with application and installation instructions for all products in
accordance with the submittal requirements. Product data shall include certifications and test reports
necessary to show compliance with the Contract Documents.
5.2 Product Data: Providing data describing design characteristics, materials and finishes must be supplied
in accordance with the specification.
5.3 Shop Drawing: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other
materials such as for surface conditioner flexible flashings, joint cover sheet and joint and crack
sealants.
6. Delivery, Storage and Handling Conditions
6.1 Deliver material in good condition to the site in the manufacture’s original unopened containers that
bear the name and brand of the manufacturer, project identification, and shipping and handling
instruction.
6.2 Store materials in a clean, dry, enclosed space off the ground, and protected from the weather and
from extremes of heat. Protect flooring, adhesives and accessories in the spaces where they will be
installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation.
7. Warranty
7.1 The Manufacturer warrants upon and subject to the terms and conditions of its full written limited
warranty, that is the products are free from manufacturing defects for a period of two year from the
date of installation of the product, maintained, and used in a manner consistent with product
specifications.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Provide other materials not specifically described on the drawing but required for a
complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of
the Architect and/or Engineer.
1.3 Materials to be used in the Works, shall meet the following requirements of those herein
after specified under the particular item:
1.3.1 Structural Steel Shapes
1.3.2 Steel Plates
1.3.3 Rolled Steel Floor Plates
1.3.4 Aluminum alloy for extrusions; sheet and plate
1.3.5 Bronze for extrusions.
1.3.6 Stainless Steel with 2B finish, unless indicated otherwise, for plates, sheets
and strips
1.3.7 Extruded Preformed Seals : Single or multi-layered rubber extrusions in according with
application standard designed with or without continuous, longitudinal, internal baffles
and formed to fit compatible frames in color indicated, or/not indicated as selected by
the Employer’s representative from manufacturer’s standard colors.
1.3.8 Exterior Seals : Typically two single layered flexible extrusions, one interior PVC and one
exterior Santoprene non- hydroscopic, thermoplastic rubber retained in a set of
compatible frames in color indicated or/ not indicated as selected by the Employer’ s
representative.
1.3.9 Fire Barriers : Designed for indicated or required dynamic structural movement without
material degradation or fatigue in accordance with applicable standard. Tested in
maximum joint width condition as a component of an expansion joint cover in
accordance with applicable codes including hose stream testing of wall assemblies at
full-rated period.
1.3.10 Accessories : Manufacturer’ s standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spacers, flexible
vapor seals and filler materials, drain tubes, adhesive and other accessories compatible
with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations.
1.4 Interior and Exterior Expansion Joint Covers:
1.4.1 Extruded Rubber Gasket Exposed Cover Assemblies for Floor to Floor or Floor to Wall
Applications:
Provide continuous extruded aluminum frame assemblies of a suitable profile to receive
free floating cover plate of design indicated. Furnish colorable thermoplastic frame seal
with rigid edges for positive attachment to frame and center plate free from grooves or
ridges. Seals must have flexible core of shore hardness 73 to allow movement of joint
width without gaps occurring between seal and cover assembly. Seals can be replaceable
without removal of center plate. All aluminum in contact with concrete must have
anodized finish or primer, exposed aluminum to be capable of +/- 25% expansion and
contraction. Floor covers must withstand minimum 227 kg., point load without damage
or permanent deformation or approval by the Employee’s Representative.
1.4.2 Extruded Aluminum Exposed Cover Assemblies for Floor to Floor or Floor to Wall
Applications:
Provide continuous extruded aluminum, the unique interlocking cover design allows for
horizontal movement in the floor slab, as well as vertical deflection, and is designed to
withstand heavy and frequent rolling loads. Furnish depth and configuration to suit type
of construction. All aluminum in contact with concrete to have anodized finish or primer,
exposed aluminum to be mill finish free of gaskets and fillers assemblies to be capable
of +/- 2.0 cm. in holizontal and vertical expansion and contraction without loss of cover.
Floor covers must withstand minimum 2400 kg., point load without damage or permanent
deformation unless otherwise indicated or approval by the Employee’s Representative.
1.4.3 Extruded Aluminum Flushed or Exposed Cover Assemblies for Wall to Wall or Ceiling to
Ceiling Applications:
Provide continuous extruded cover plates snap-locked to mounting clips 600 mm on
center with free floating center plate. The movement shall be capable of +/- 50%
expansion and contraction. Assembly shall be finished flush or expose with adjacent wall
surface. Standard finishes shall be Clear Anodize or equivalent approval by the
Employee’s representative.
1.5 Specialty Expansion Joint Covers
Compression Seals for Floor to Floor Applications - Provide continuous thermoplastic rubber compression
seal. Elastomeric membrane shall be a monolithic seal with integral nosings made from EPDM rubber. The
elastomeric membrane shall be bonded in place with two-part epoxy with its edges sealed with urethane
caulking. The movement shall be capable of bearing vehicular traffic while maintaining a watertight seal.
The expansion joint shall be capable +/- 50% cyclic movement, including lateral shear, without overstress
in the gland or nosing material or approval by the Architect or/and Engineer.
1.6 Fire Barrier Systems
Prefabricated fire barrier assemblies tested in accordance with applicable codes for 2-hour
certification, unless otherwise detailed and in compliance with applicable standard. Material shall
carry label and be subject to Underwriters Laboratories follow-up service for quality assurance.
Systems shall be installed strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. The fire
barrier shall be supplied in maximum lengths to minimize field splicing. Fire barrier shall provide a
flame and insulation barrier and to accommodate the specified dynamic movement with applicable
codes for floor application, and for masonry wall application or approval by the Architect or/and
Engineer.
PART III: EXECUTION
2. Preparatio
2.1 Examine the contract drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of the
work required under this section.
2.2 Verify all measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and
scheduling of the work of this section with the work of related trades, with particular attention
given to the installation of items embedded in concrete and masonry so as not to delay job
progress.
2.3 Provide all templates as required to related trade for location of all support and anchorage
items.
3. Installation
3.1 Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which must fit, by accurate field
measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings and
coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress.
3.2 The supplier of the material shall co-ordinate with the Contractor to ensure the manufacturer,
supply, and installation of product is fully integrated with the architectural finishes where the
coordination with architectural finishes is required.
3.3 Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing expansion joint cover
assemblies to in-place construction.
3.4 Perform all cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of expansion joint covers. Install
joint cover assemblies in true alignment and proper relationship to expansion joints and
adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels.
3.5 Comply with manufacturer’s instructions recommendations for all phases of work, including
preparation of substrate, applying materials, and protection of installed units.
4.1 Do not remove protective material until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When
protective material is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer’s
instruction.
END
5.2.11.5 : METAL FABRICATION

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included :
1.1.1 This section describes items made from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes,
pipes, and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems
specified elsewhere. Examine all other sections of these Specifications for requirements
which affect the works of this Section, whether or not such requirements are particularly
mentioned herein. Coordinate the work of this section with the related work of other
trades, to assure the steady progress of all works of the Contract.
2. References
3. Submittals
3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications, anchor details, and installation instructions for
products to be used in the fabrication of metalwork, including paint products and grout.
3.2 Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and erection of metal fabrications. Include drawings, elevations,
and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates
for anchor and bolt installation under other sections
3.3 Where design of members and connections is specified as part of the work of this section, submit
structural analysis showing loadings and stresses, stamped and signed by a structural engineer.
3.4 For site welding work, submit a detailed plan of safety procedures that includes fume control and
shielding.
4.1 Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do
not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before
fabrication might delay work.
4.2 Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry for
installation of metalwork. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
4.3 Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
4.4 Welding shall be executed by operators who have been qualified as prescribed in the American
Welding Society's standard qualification procedure for the required type of work. Certification that
each operator has passed the tests shall be furnished if requested by the Engineer.
4.5 Single-source responsibility: obtain expansion joint cover assembles specified in this Section from
one source from a single manufacturer. Coordinate compatibility with expansion joint cover
assemblies specified in other sections.
PART II : PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 For fabrication of metalwork which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and
free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and
roughness.
1.2 Fabricate metal fabrications from ASTM A36, or as recommended by fabricator for the specific
application; except where material is specifically identified.
1.3 Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners of
the type, grade, and class required.
1.4 Steel sheet and strip: ASTM A366
1.5 Checkered steel plate: ASTM A786
1.6 Rolled stainless steel shapes: ASTM A484
1.7 Stainless steel plates: ASTM A 167, Type 304, mechanically leveled.
1.8 High strength bolts, nuts, and washers: ASTM A325 or ASTM A490
1.9 Brackets, flanges, and anchors: cast or formed metal of the same material and finish as supported
members, unless otherwise indicated
1.10 Metal primer for surfaces which will receive a finish coat: as recommended by finish coat
manufacturer. Verify compatibility with the required finish coats of paint. Coordinate selection of
metal primer with finish paint requirements specified elsewhere.
1.11 Metal primer for surfaces which will not receive a finish coat: rust inhibitive metal primer standard
with the fabricator.
1.12 Grout: ASTM C1107, non-shrinking, non-staining grout, as approved by the Engineer
2. Fabrication- General
2.1 Workmanship:
2.1.1 Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of required size and thickness
to produce strength and durability in finished product. Work to dimensions shown or
accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of
materials shown or specified for various components of work.
2.1.2 Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise
shown. Form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain
separation or otherwise impairing work
2.2 Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with American Welding Society (AWS)
recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining
surfaces.
2.3 Form exposed connection with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever
possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown or, if not shown, socket type flathead (countersunk)
screws or bolts. Provide sufficient backing at screw locations to cover at least three threads.
2.4 Provide for anchorage of type suitable for use with supporting structure. Fabricate and space
anchoring devices as shown and as required to provide adequate support for intended use.
2.5 Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as required to receive finish hardware and similar
items.
2.6 Galvanizing: Provide a zinc coating for those items shown or specified to be galvanized, as follows:
2.6.1 ASTM A123 for galvanizing iron and steel products.
2.6.2 ASTM A153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
2.6.3 ASTM F2329 for galvanizing fasteners.

2.7 Shop Painting:
2.7.1 Shop paint metal fabrications (after galvanizing where a zinc coating is specified), except
members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless
2.7.2 Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat
2.7.3 Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions and at a rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 1.0
mils for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints,
corners, edges and exposed surfaces.
2.7.4 Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply two coats of paint to
surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to
distinguish it from the first
3. Metal Fabrications
3.1 Rough Hardware:
3.1.1 Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and
other steel and iron shapes as required.
3.1.2 Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes, and dimensions required.
3.2 Edge and Sill Angles: Provide edge angles fabricated of structural steel shapes as shown, of all
welded construction with mitered corners and continuously welded joints. Provide welded anchors
for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 150mm. from each end,
150mm. from corners and 600mm o.c., unless otherwise shown. Galvanize exterior edge angles.
3.3 Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Provide shapes and sizes as required for profiles shown. Except as
otherwise noted, fabricate units from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, with
continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever
possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and
installation with other work. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
3.4 Structural Steel Door Frames:
3.4.1 Fabricate steel door frames of structural shapes as shown, fully welded, uniform, square
and true. Continuously weld exposed joints; grind exposed welds smooth.
3.4.2 Provide steel strap anchors for securing door frames into adjoining concrete or masonry,
using stud anchors or 1/8-inch x 2-inch straps of the length required for a minimum
150mm.embedment, unless otherwise shown. Weld anchors to frame jambs not more
than 300mm. from both bottom and head of frame and space anchors not more than
750mm. apart.
3.4.3 Galvanize exterior structural steel door frames and anchors.
3.5 Ladders:
3.5.1 Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacing, details, and
anchorages as required. Comply with the requirements of ANSI A14.3, except as
otherwise noted.
 Unless otherwise shown, provide 1/2-inch x 2 1/2-inch continuous structural steel
flat bar side rails with eased edges, spaced 50mm. apart.
 Provide 3/4-inch-diameter solid structural steel bar rungs, uniformly spaced not
over 300mm. o.c.
3.5.2 Fit rungs into punched holes in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on
outer rail faces.
3.5.3 Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more
than 1500mm o.c. Use welded or bolted steel brackets, designed for adequate support
and anchorage, and to hold the ladder clear of the wall surface with a minimum of
17mm clearance from wall to centerline of rungs. Extend rails 1000mm above top rung,
and return rails to wall or structure unless other secure handholds are provided.
3.6 Loose Bearing Plates: Provide loose bearing plates for steel items bearing on concrete construction,
made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to
receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication.
3.7 Pipe Bollards:
3.7.1 Fabricate bollards from Schedule steel pipe or as specified in the Drawing. At bollards
provide concrete fill with rounded cap as indicated.
3.7.2 Galvanize exterior bollards.
3.8 Miscellaneous Framing and Supports:
3.8.1 Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural
steel framework, as required to complete work. Galvanize items at exterior and in
exterior walls.
3.8.2 Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes, and profiles shown or, if not shown, of
required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except
as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of
welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units
to receive hardware and similar items.
3.8.3 Equip units with integrally welded anchor straps for casting into concrete wherever
required. Furnish inserts where units must be installed after concrete is placed. Except
as otherwise shown, space anchors 600mm. o.c. and provide minimum anchor units of
1 1/4-inch x 1/4-inch, 200mm. steel straps.
3.8.4 Provide 150mm.-square (minimum) 6mm.-thick steel plates:
 At each point of support of toilet compartments and screens.
 At brackets for handrails where bolted.
 Where required.
3.8.5 Provide angles for support of masonry work. Galvanize after fabrication.
 Provide structural steel shelf angles of sizes shown. Drill holes to receive 3/4 inch
bolts, spaced not more than 150mm.from ends and not more than 600mm.o.c.
unless otherwise shown. Where concealed, add 50mm.diameter holes 150mm.o.c.
for drainage.
 Provide lintels as indicated.
3.9 Steel Support Frames: Provide for penetrations of exterior walls.
3.10 Interior Sign Supports: Provide for roof, wall, and ceiling-hung signs.
3.11 Steel Counter Supports: Provide angles to support lavatory counters as shown. Drill holes to receive
screws for attachment to metal studs.
3.12 Concrete Masonry Header Support: Provide bent plate deflection head at top of CMU veneer as
indicated. Include angle struts, clips, and brackets to structure above. Coordinate strut installation
with mechanical items above ceiling.
3.13 Sump Pit Frames: Provide angles, to support steel grating, of all welded construction with mitered
corners and continuously welded joints. Provide headed stud anchors for embedding in concrete,
spaced not more than 150mm. from each corner and 600mm. o.c. Galvanize sump pit frames.
3.14 Provide other miscellaneous steel items. Work of this section is not limited to the items listed above.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Inspection
1.1 Examine areas and conditions under which metal fabrications are to be installed. Correct conditions
which are detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.
2. Preparation
2.1 Provide setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages,
such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to
be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
3. Installation
3.1 Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing metal fabrications to in-place construction including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts,
toggle bolts, through-bolts, and other connectors as required.
3.2 Cutting, Fitting and Placement:
3.2.1 Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of metal fabrications. Set
work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack,
measured from established lines and levels with lines visually parallel. Provide
temporary bracing or anchors in framework for items which are to be built into concrete
or masonry of similar construction.
3.2.2 Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld
connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop-welded
because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat.
Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
3.3 Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work.
3.3.1 Fume Control: Provide welding fume control to protect personnel and the public from
exposure to heavy metals.
3.3.2 Shielding: Provide shielding for arc welding operations to protect personnel and the
public that may have visual or other access during the work.
3.4 Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply
by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mils.
END
5.2.12: PAINTING
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 Work included:
1.1.1 Surface preparation, priming, and finishing of exposed exterior and interior surfaces.
1.1.2 Provide painting where shown on the drawings, as specified here in and as needed for a
complete proper installation including labor, materials, appliances and services required to
manufacture, deliver, furnish and install all items necessary for the proper execution and
completion of all painting and related works. Examine all other sections of these
specifications for requirements which affect the works of this section, whether or not such
requirements are particularly mentioned herein. Coordinate the work of this section with
1.2 Paint exposed surfaces; except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface of material is not to
be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a
surface, paints the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not
schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Engineers will select
from available standard colors and finishes.
1.3 Consult the Specifications for work and materials of other trades with the Engineer to determine
requirements for finishing. Surfaces left unfinished by the requirements of other sections shall be
finished as part of the work.
1.4 Painting is not required on prefinished items, concealed surfaces, certain exposed surfaces, operating
parts, and labels.
1.4.1 Prefinished items not to be painted, unless otherwise specified, include the following shop
finished components:
1.4.1.1 Metal Deck
1.4.1.2 Aluminum Composite Panels.
1.4.1.3 Access Floor System
1.4.1.4 Automatic Sliding Door
1.4.1.5 Door Hardware &ironmongery
1.4.1.6 Glazing System
1.4.1.7 Toilet Compartments
1.4.1.8 Louvers system
1.4.1.9 Signage
1.4.2 Concealed surfaces not to be painted, unless otherwise specified, include wall or ceiling
surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas:
1.4.2.1 Foundation spaces.
1.4.2.2 Furred areas.
1.4.2.3 Pipe spaces.
1.4.2.4 Interior of duct and pipe shafts and furred spaces, except adjacent to registers
and grilles.
1.4.2.5 Elevator shafts except where exposed to view at combination glass and solid hoist
ways.
1.4.3 Operating parts not so be painted include the following:
1.4.3.1 Valve and damper operators.
1.4.3.2 Linkages.
1.4.3.3 Sensing devices.
1.4.3.4 Motor and fan shafts.
1.4.4 Labels: do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory mutual or other code required labels
or equipment: name, identification performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
1.4.5 Shop prime painting requirements specified elsewhere:
1.4.5.1 Structural steel

1.4.5.2 Miscellaneous Metal
1.4.5.3 Metal decking
1.4.5.4 Metal Stairs
1.4.5.5 Steel Handrails and Railings
1.4.5.6 Architectural Metal
1.4.5.7 Steel Door and Frames
1.4.5.8 Steel Rolling Shutter Door
1.4.6 Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1.4.6.1 Secondary Steel Finishes.
1.4.6.2 Identification of piping, ductwork, and mechanical equipment.
1.4.6.3 Identification of conduit and electrical equipment.
2. References
3. Definitions
3.1 The term ''finish system" as used herein includes primers, bond coats, emulsions, enamels, sealers and
fillers, and other applied materials, whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats, for a specific
application.
3.2 General: standard coating terms defined in ASTM D16 apply to this section.
3.3 Gloss ranges:
3.3.1 Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a measured at an 85 degree meter.
3.3.2 Eggshell refers to low sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60
degree meter.
3.3.3 Semi-gloss refers to medium finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60
degree meter.
4.1 Finish systems shall comply with local healthy regulation.
4.2 Interior finish systems shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84 and
NFPA 255.
5. Submittals
accordance with the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. Product data shall include certifications and test reports
necessary to show compliance with the Contract Documents
5.1.1 Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for
handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use.
5.1.2 List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify
each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
5.2.1 Samples for verification purposes: provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with
texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. A detailed
description of the finish system (materials, manufacturers, number of coats, etc,) shall be displayed
on the back of each sample.
5.2.1.1 Provide stepped samples of each finish system, defining each separate coat, including
block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review.
5.2.1.2 Provide a list of materials and application for each coat of each sample.
5.2.1.3 Label each sample as to location and application.
5.2.1.4 Submit samples on the following substrates for the color and texture only:
‐ Masonry: provide two samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for
each finish and color, 100 x 200mm.
‐ Ferrous metal: provide two 300 x 300mm samples of flat metal and two 300mm
long samples of solid metal for each color and finish.
‐ Painted plaster: provide two samples of each color and material on plaster,
similar to that specified for project, 300 x 300mm.
5.2.1.5 Submit complete painting schedule in accordance with the GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.
Schedule shall detail finish system for each substrate in the same order as the
schedules used in this section. Include the following.
(1) The specific products to be used for each coat.
(2) Documentation that the manufacturer has reviewed and approvedeach painting
system.
(3) Data pages for all products listed.
(4) On one set of data pages, highlight the following:
‐ Type of resin.
‐ Dry film thickness.
‐ Volume solids.
‐ Gloss range.
5.3 Submit the manufacturer's written certification that each finish system is appropriate for the intended
application and that materials used within each finish system are compatible with each other.
5.4 Submit the manufacturer's written certification that products used on the project meet or exceed fire
resistance requirements. Submit current test data if requested.
6.1 Before starting the work, arrange a pre-construction meeting with the Engineer, the Contractor, applicator,
and manufacturers to discuss construction procedures, specifications, surface readiness, application, and
material storage and protection.
6.2 Applicator qualifications: engage an experienced applicator who has system applications similar in
material and extent to those indicated
6.3 Source limitations: obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from
the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
6.4 Coordination of work: review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of
the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish
materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
6.5 Notify the Engineer about anticipated problems using the specified materials over substrates primed by
others.
6.6 Mockups: provide a full-coat mockup finish sample of each type of coating and substrate required on
the Project. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples.
6.6.1 The Engineer will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of
coating and substrate to be painted.
6.6.2 Ceiling surfaces: provide samples on at least 9 sq.m of ceiling surface.
6.6.3 Small areas and items: the Engineer will designate an item or area as required.
6.6.4 After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply coatings in this
room or to each surface according to the schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color,
and texture on each surface.
(1) After finishes are accepted, the Engineer will use the room or surface to evaluate coating
systems of a similar nature.
6.6.5 Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples.
7.1 Materials shall be delivered to the project site in the manufacturer's original packaging with the following
information clearly identified:
7.1.1 Product name or title of material.
7.1.2 Product description (generic classification or binder type).
7.1.3 Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
7.1.4 Contents, by volume, of pigment and vehicle constituents.
7.1.5 Thinning instructions.
7.1.6 Application instructions
7.1.7 Color name and number
7.2 Comply with manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling. Store materials not in use in tightly
covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature. Maintain containers used
in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Protect from freezing.
7.3 Materials shall not be in an area with finish providing adequate protection.
7.4 Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to
ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling,
mixing, and application.
8.1 Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are not different 12° C between high and low points.
8.2 Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are not different 18° C between high and low points.
8.3 Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at
temperatures less than 3° C above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.
8.3.1 Painting may continue during inclement weather if spaces in which surfaces to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and
drying periods.
9. Warranty
9.1 Submit a written warranty for work under this section for 2 years. The warranty shall be in addition to
and not a limitation of other rights which SRT may have against the Contractor under the Contract
Documents. The contractor shall warranty materials for a period from acceptance of the completed of
contract as:
Quality Guaranty
- 15 years for acrylic 100% exterior paint

- 10 years for acrylic 100% interior paint
- 5 years for enamel Paint
- 5 years for epoxy paint
9.2 Repairs and replacements made under the warranty shall bear an additional warranty of 1 year or longer
period standard with the manufacturer.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Acceptable Manufacturers
1.1 The following manufacturers are acceptable as shown on drawing, subject to compliance with the
Contract Documents:
2. Materials
2.1 Material compatibility: provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are
compatible with one another and the indicated substrates under conditions of service and application,
as demonstrated by the manufacturer bases on testing and field experience.
2.2 Material quality: provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the various specified
coating types. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be
acceptable.
2.2.1 Proprietary names: use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate color or
materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion
of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and
certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
2.2.2 Colors: provide custom colors to match the Engineer's samples.
2.2.3 Primers: products recommended by manufacturers of the intermediate and finish coats for each
finish system. Materials used within each finish system shall be compatible.
2.2.4 Thinning and tinting materials: products recommended by manufacturers of the materials to be
thinned or tinted.
3. Generic Exterior and Interior Finish Systems
3.1 Paint for the exterior plastered wall, wood fiber wall, reinforced concrete wall: Emulsion paint,semi-
glossfinish.
Emulsion paint system: -
- Primer: Primer for concrete surface as strictly comply with the paint manufacturer's instruction.
- Top coat: 2 coat of Emulsion paint, conform to TIS 2321-2549, 100% pure acrylic, self-cleaning
technology and UV shield.
- Surface preparation: The substrate must be clean, cure and dry free from oil, grease, mildew, from
release agents and foreign matters.
- 15 years of performance, durability and protection.
3.2 Paint for the interior plastered wall: Emulsion paint, semi-gloss finish.
(1) Primer: Primer for concrete surface as strictly comply with the paint manufacturer's instruction.
(2) Top coat: 2 coat of Emulsion paint, conform to TIS 2321-2549, 100% pure acrylic, low odour and wash
ability technology.
(3) Surface preparation: The substrate must be clean, cure and dry free from oil, grease, mildew, from
3.3 Paint for gypsum board wall and ceiling, wood fiber cement ceiling, reinforced concrete ceiling: Emulsion
paint, matt finish.

(2) Top coat: 2 coat of Emulsion paint, conform to TIS 2321-2549, 100% pure acrylic, scrub resistance,
mold and dirt protection technology.
(3) Surface preparation: The substrate must be clean, cure and dry free from oil, grease, mildew, from
3.4 Granite Spray Paint or texture for Exterior Wall.
Granite Spray paint system:-
(2) Spray granite paint or granite pattern paint for 2 layers.
(3) Spray top coat for 2 layers, leave 24 hours between layers.
(4) Application: To manufacturer's recommendation.
3.5 Anti-moss paint for exposed surface material such as brick masonry, washed sand, washed gravel: anti-
moss clear paint, water repellant.
Anti-moss paint system: -
(1) Surface shall be dry, clean, no paint or any coating, cleaned by water and leave until dry completely.
(2) Paint anti moss liquid-water repellant for 2 layers, leave 1-2 hours between layers.
4. Particular Finish Painter
The following painters shall be applied for particular areas where indicated on the Drawings:-
4.1 Epoxy paint on floor:-
Epoxy paint on floor shall be 2 coat dust proofing epoxy resin sealer.
Epoxy paint system on floor:-
(1) Primer coat 1 x 50 microns (dry film thickness) 2 packs transparent. Polyamide cured epoxy varnish.
(2) Top coat 2 x 120 microns (dry film thickness) high build,2 pack, polyamide cured epoxy coating
based on epoxy resin with high molecular weight.
(4) Surface preparation: The substrate must be clean, dry and undamaged.
(5) Conditions during application: Each coat should not be exposed to water, application chemicals
or mechanical stress until fully cured.
(6) Inter-coating: Best inter-coat adhesion occurs when the Subsequent, proceeding coat is fully
cured.
(7) Storage and Packing: To manufacturer's recommendation.
(8) Health and Safety: The precautionary notices as displayed on the container: Fire Performance Fire
test comply to BS 476 part 6,7.
4.2 Epoxy paint on wall :-
Epoxy paint shall also be applied on R.C. wall or rendered block work.
Epoxy paint system on Wall:-
- Primer coat1 x 50 microns (dry film thickness), 2 pack transparent polyamide. Cured epoxy varnish.
- Top coat 1 x 125 microns (dry film thickness) high build, 2 pack polyamide. Cured epoxy coating
based on epoxy resin with high molecular weight.
- Application: To manufacturer's recommendation
- Surface preparation: The substrate must be clean, dry and undamaged. Conditions during each
coat should not be exposed to water, application chemicals or mechanical stress until fully cured.
- Inter-coating: Best inter-coat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before the
proceeding coat is fully cured. After this time roughen the surface
- Storage and Packing: To manufacturer's recommendation.
- Health and Safety: The precautionary notices are displayed on the container.
- Fire Performance: Fire test comply to BS 476 part 6,7.
4.3 Epoxy paint for steel doors, access panels and inspection panels :-
- Primer coat1x100 microns(dft), 2 packs zinc phosphate pigmented epoxy.
- Under coat1x150 microns(dft), 2 packs surface tolerant, high solids epoxy based coating.
- Top coat epoxy.1x100 microns(dft), high build, a pack polyamide
- Application: Airless spray, air spray roller and brush for small or touch-up area.
- Surface preparation: Oil and grease removal. The substrate must be clean,dry and free from
contaminant.
- Condition during application:Each coat should not be exposed to water, chemicals or mechanical
stress until fully cured
- Inter- coating: Best intercoat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before the
proceeding coat is fully cured.
- Touch-up painting1x150 microns(dft), 2 packs surface tolerant, high solids epoxy based coating.
- 1x100 microns (dft), high build, 2 packs polyamide epoxy.
- Fire Performance: Fire test comply to BS 476 part 6,7.
4.4 Emulsion paint:-
Emulsion paint shall be applied on soffit in staff operation rooms and plant rooms or as
shown in finishes schedules.
Emulsion paint system:-
- Primer coat or sealer.1 x 35 microns (dry film thickness) acrylic emulsion primer
- Top coat2 x 35 microns ( dry film thickness) plastic emulsion paint based on a 100% pure
acrylic binder.
- Application: To manufacturer's recommendation.
- Surface preparation: The substrate must be clean, dry and undamaged.
- Health and Safety: The precautionary notices are displayed on the container. Fire Performance
Fire test comply to BS 476 part 6, 7.
4.5 Polyurethane paint system:-
- Primer coat 1 x 100 microns (dry film thickness),2 packs zinc phosphate pigmented epoxy resin.
- 2nd coat1 x 250 microns ( dry film thickness) , 2 packs surface tolerant high solids epoxy based
coating.
- Top coat1 x 50 microns ( dry film thickness) , 2 packs polyurethane. Excellent gloss and color
retention for aggressive atmospheric exposure.
- Each coat should not be exposed to water application, chemicals or cured.
- Inter- coating: Best inter- coat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before the
proceeding is fully cured. After this time roughen the surface.
- Fire Performance: Fire test comply to BS 476 part 6,7. Acceptable for the other equivalent systems
shall be approved by the Engineers, subject to compliance with the Contract Documents.
5. Structural Steel Finish Systems
All paint shall be ready mixed from the factory and shall be packed in unbroken, sealed and labeled
containers of the paint manufacturer. Labels shall clearly state trade mark, type and designated name
formula. Where necessary, the Contractor shall mix the paint by himself with the approval of the
Engineer.
Except otherwise specified on the Drawings, all materials shall conform to the following properties.
5.1 Paint System for Structural Steel:
- Primer coat 1 x 150 microns (dry film thickness), Epoxy Mastic Primer.
- Finished coat 1 x 50 microns (dry film thickness), Aliphatic Polyurethane Topcoat.
Total dry film thickness should not be less than 200 microns.
5.2 Paint System for Galvanized Steel Surface:
- Primer coat1x 100 microns (dry film thickness), Zinc Phosphate Epoxy Primer.
- Finished coat1 x 50 microns (dry film thickness), Aliphatic Polyurethane Topcoat.
6. Wood Finish Systems
6.1 Wood stain and wood preservative for wood work specified to paint wood stain or paint natural color
such as frames, door/window panels, wood eaves, use wood stain and wood preservative.
Wood stain system:-
(1) Type: Clear high gloss finishing wood stain for exterior wood.
(2) Primer: Aluminum wood primer and anti-fungal wood primer comply with the paint manufacturer's
instruction.
(3) Top coat: 3 coat of Wood stain.
6.2 Emulsion paint for wood work specified to paint exterior and interior wood or paint solid color such as
frames, door/window panels, wood eaves, wood panel use emulsion paint for wood 100% acrylic and
semi-gloss finish.
Emulsion paint for wood system:-
(1) Type: 100% acrylic waterborne
(2) Primer: Aluminum wood primer and anti-fungal wood primer comply with the paint manufacturer's
instruction.
(3) Top coat: 2 coat of Emulsion paint for wood, 100% acrylic, low odor, scrub resistance and mold
protection technology.
(4) 10 years of performance, durability and protection.
6.3 Polyurethane paint for wood work specified to paint exterior and interior wood floor.
Polyurethane paint for wood floor system:-
(1) Primer: Primer for wood surface as strictly comply with the paint manufacturer's instruction.
(2) Top coat: 3 coat of Polyurethane paint for wood floor, scrub resistance, mold and UV protection
technology.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Examination
1.1 Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint
application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint shall be thoroughly dry before paint is applied.
2. Preparation
2.1 General: remove hardware and hardware accessories. Plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and
similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface applied protection prior to
surface preparation and painting, following completion of painting operations in each space or area,
items shall be reinstalled by workers skilled in the involved trades.
2.2 Cleaning: before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substances of substances that
could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning
and painting so dust and other contaminants form the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly
painted surfaces.
2.3 Surface preparation: clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
2.3.1 Incompatible primers: provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime.
Notify the Engineer in writing about anticipated problem using the specified finish coat material
with substrates primed by others.
2.3.2 Cementitious materials: prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral-
fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,
grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. Glaze. If hardeners or
sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
2.3.2.1 Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods it recommended by the paint manufacturer.
2.3.2.2 Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. It surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and
burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where
moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.
2.3.3 Ferrous metals: clean un-galvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop-coated.
Remove oil, grease, substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods recommendations
of the Steel Structures Painting Council
2.3.3.1 Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.
Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer,
and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.
2.4 Materials preparation: carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions.
2.4.1 Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials
and reside.
2.4.2 Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material
before using.
2.4.3 Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
2.5 Tinting: tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats
of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide
sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3. Application
3.1 General: apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited
for substrate and type of material being applied.
3.1.1 Paint colors. Surface treatments and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
3.1.2 Provide finish coats that are compatible with applied primers.
3.1.3 The number of coats and the required film thickness are the same regardless of the application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by
the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth
even surface according to the manufacturer's directions.
3.1.4 Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint
until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that
formed surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners; receive a dry
film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
3.1.5 Paint surfaces which are visible movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3.1.6 Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture exposed surfaces. Before the final
installation of equipment, permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3.1.7 Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular
black paint.
3.1.8 Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
3.1.9 Paint closets and other unidentified areas same as adjoining areas.
3.1.10 Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
3.1.11 Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted.
3.1.12 Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to
formation of a durable paint film.
3.2 Mechanical and electrical work: painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items, both bare
and insulated, which are exposed in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
3.3 Scheduling painting: apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
3.3.1 Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint
feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application
of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
3.4 Application procedures: apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according
to the manufacturer's directions.
3.4.1 Brushes: use brushes best suited for the applied material.
3.4.2 Rollers: use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the
manufacturer for the required material and texture.
3.4.3 Spray equipment: use airless spray equipment with orifice size as reconfirmed by the manufacturer
for the required material and texture.
3.5 Minimum coating thickness: apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading
rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.6 Block fillers: apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with
prefilled.
3.7 Prime coats: before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the
manufacturer, to material that is required to be pained or finished and that has not through or other
defects due to insufficient sealing.
3.8 Completed work: match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or
repaint work not complying with specified requirements.
4.1 Field samples: duplicate finishes of prepared samples on wall surfaces and other exterior and interior
components. Provide full-coat finish samples until required sheen, color, and texture and obtained.
Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in place work.
4.1.1 The Engineer will select one room to represent interior surfaces and conditions for each type of
coating and substrate to be painted. Apply coatings in this room on at least 9 sq m of surface
according to the schedule or as specified. After finishes are accepted, this room will be used to
evaluate coating systems of a similar nature elsewhere in the Project.
4.1.2 Final acceptance of colors will be from field applied samples.
4.2 Field testing: The Engineer reserves the right to require the following test procedure at any time and
as often as the Engineer deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
4.2.1 Engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used.
Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the
presence of the Contractor.
4.2.2 The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by
the Engineer:
(1) Quantitative materials analysis.
(2) Abrasion resistance.
(3) Apparent reflectivity.
(4) Flexibility.
(5) Wash ability.
(6) Absorption.
(7) Accelerated weathering.
(8) Dry opacity.
(9) Accelerated yellowness.
(10) Recoating.
(11) Skinning.
(12) Color retention.
(13) Alkalis and mildew resistance.
4.2.3 If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the
Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for -
testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with noncomplying paint. If, upon repainting with
specified paint, the two paints are incompatible, remove noncomplying paint from previously
coated surfaces before repainting.
5. Cleaning
5.1 After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by
washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
5.2 At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials
from the site.
6. Protection
6.1 Furnish drop cloths, masking, or other means of protection for finished surfaces during the work. If
finished surfaces are damaged, correct the damaged surfaces or replace the damaged materials,
making good nay damage to other work in connection therewith.
6.2 Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to The Engineer.
6.3 Provide 'Wet Paint ' signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
6.4 At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.
END
5.2.13: SIGNAGE
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. GENERAL
1.1 Work included :
1.1.2 Provide Interior passenger signs and related signage specified on the Drawings. as specified
2. DESIGN INTENTS
2.1 The Drawings indicate the size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of required signs and are based
on the indicated type and model. Signs by other manufacturers may be considered provided
deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by
the Engineer. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposed alternative manufacturer.
2.2 The Engineer shall be notified of deviations from the Drawings and graphics schedule, revised field
dimensions or conditions, and changes required in construction details.
2.3 Signs shall comply with applicable Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), accessibility guidelines for
buildings and facilities or the relevant BMA guidance.
3. SUBMITTALS
3.1.1 Include manufacturer's construction details relative to materials, dimensions of individual
components, profiles, and finishes for each required type of sign.
3.2.1 For initial selection of color, pattern, texture, and lighting:
(1) Inkjet print on PP sticker: Manufacturer's color charts showing full range of
available colors. Include representative samples of available type styles and
graphic symbols.
(2) Inkjet print on backlit translucent: Manufacturer’s color charts showing full range
of available colors. Include representative samples of available type styles and
graphic symbols.
(3) Silk-screen print on frosted acrylic plate: Manufacturer's color charts showing full
range of available colors. Include representative samples of available type styles
and graphic symbols.
(4) Lighting: Manufacturer's samples showing full range of available light fixture for
illuminated and lighted signage.
.3.2.2 For verification of selected color, pattern, and texture, and compliance with indicated
requirements:
3.2.2.1 10mm. acrylic sheet: one 300 x 300 mm. panel for each required texture.
3.2.2.2 10mm. stainless steel mirror frame: 100 x 100 mm.
3.2.2.3 "% 01stainless steel mirror pipe: 1,000 mm. in length
3.2.2.4 10mm. laminated wood: one 300 x 300 mm. panel for each required color.
3.2.2.5 10mm. Compact Laminate : one 300 x 300 mm. panel for each required color.
3.2.2.6 050 x 2.3 mm. aluminum pipe: 1,000 mm. in length
3.2.2.7 020 mm. stainless steel mirror screw cover
3.2.2.8 Metal base with stainless steel cover plate
3.2.2.9 Metal base with aluminum cover plate
3.2.2.10 In each panel include a representative sample of the graphic image process
required, showing graphic style and colors and finishes of letters, numbers, and
other graphic devices.
3.2.2.11 Color samples on specified material, 300 x 300mm.
3.2.2.12 2 sets of light fixtures to accommodate: frosted acrylic plate for lighted
signage, and back-lit translucent sticker mounted on frosted acrylic plate for
illuminated signage
3.2.2.13 Sign types, ) 1one) each, after review, sample signs shall be fully installed in
proper location for inspection by the Engineer.
3.3.1 Complete shop drawings, including plans, elevations, and not less than 20:1scale sections of
typical members and other components. Show anchors, reinforcement, accessories, layout,
relative location of adjacent materials, and installation details. Layout drawings shall show all
elements of graphics, letter spacing, line spacing, message-to-field relation, symbols, colors,
and placement.
3.3.2 Provide message list for each required sign, including not less than half-size details of wording and
lettering layout. Include full-size detailed of special graphics.
3.3.3 For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors.
3.3.4 For Light Box signage, provide electrical drawings in general and directions for installation of
wiring and equipment.
3.4 Submit maintenance schedules and parts lists in accordance with the Contract.
3.5 Submit field record documents in accordance with the Contract.
3.6 Submit a certificate from the manufacturer stating that the PP sticker, Acrylic sheet, Stainless steel sheet,
Vinyl film, High pressure laminated wood conforms to requirements of the specification.
4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
4.1 Before starting the Works, arrange a pre-construction meeting to ensure OPERATOR will have the best
quality work. Items for discussion shall include construction procedures and scheduling, surface readiness,
installation requirements, material storage, and protection.
4.2 Sign fabricator qualifications: firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for the Project,
with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units
required without causing delay in the works.
4.3 Installer qualifications: engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the sign
manufacturer and has completed installation of signs similar in material, design, and extent to those
indicated for the works and that has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
1.3.4 The installer shall be capable of providing replacement message bars within 10 working
days of receipt of an order.
1.3.4 The installer shall be capable of electrical system installation.
4.4 Single-source responsibility: Obtain each type of sign from one source from a single manufacturer.
5. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
5.1 Before delivery to the site, each sign shall be tagged or labeled with its identifying number and installation
location as shown on these Specifications. Labeling shall be on both. sign and protective covering.
5.2 Provide protective covering or crating as recommended by the manufacturer to protect sign components
and surfaces against damage during transportation and delivery.
5.3 Handle signs carefully to prevent breakage, surface abrasion, denting, soiling, and other defects. Comply
with the manufacturer's handling instructions for unloading components subject to damage.
.5.3.1 Inspect sign components for damage upon delivery. Do not install damaged sign
components. Repair minor damage to signs, provided the finished repair is equal in all
respects to the original work and is acceptable to the Engineer; otherwise remove and
replace damaged sign components.
6. PROJECT CONDITIONS
6.1 Field measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to
ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
7. WARRANTY
7.1 Submit a written warranty for the Works under this section for 2 years. The warranty shall be in addition to
and not a limitation of other rights which SRT may have against the Contractor under the Contract
Documents.
7.2 Repairs and replacements made under the warranty shall bear an additional warranty of 1 year or longer
period standard with the manufacturer.
8. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION
8.1 Provide maintenance instruction in accordance with the Contract.
9. EXTRA MATERIALS
9.1 At the completion of work the Contractor shall provide adequate supply of each type of reserve print
panel component material specified as necessary and directed by the Engineer.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. MATERIALS
1.1 Acrylic Sheet: 10mm. thickness or as indicated in the drawings, non-distortion clear and frosted acrylic
plates as required in the drawings.
1.2 Silk screen: 200 mesh fabric photographic screen. Hand cut screens will not be accepted.
1.3 High Pressure Laminated Wood
High pressure laminated wood shall be exterior grade in conformance with CAN/CSA 0122 standard.
1.4 Adhesives: As recommended by the manufacturer of the material specified to be laminated or adhered.
No adhesives that will fade, discolor, or delaminate as a result of proximity to ultraviolet light source or
heat therefore shall be used. Adhesives shall be of a non-staining, non-yellowing quality and shall not
change the color of or cetcricrate the materials to which they are applied. Visible joints shall be free
from air bubbles and other defects.
1.5 Compact Laminate: 13 mm. thickness or as indicated in the drawings, Machine finished with black core
made from thermo-setting resins. The product shall be suited for high humidity environments due to
its inherent water resistance and excellent impact resistance.
1.6 Grout: local brand grouting material.
1.7 Aluminum and aluminum alloys
1.7.1 Any aluminum used for electrical purposes shall be of the highest purity commercially
available and shall be substantiated by submitting certificates of analysis stating the
percentages and nature of any impurities. Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys for
electrical purposes shall comply with BS (1985) 1970] 2898Specification for wrought aluminum
and aluminum alloys for electrical purposes. Bars, extruded round tube and sections].
1.7.2 Fabricate all aluminum metal framing members form aluminum to the requirements of BS
EN ] 485Aluminum and aluminum alloy. Round tube and sections].
1.7.3 Use appropriated grades, strengths, and thicknesses of aluminum to ensure that all structural
and finishing requirements are met. The wall thickness of aluminum extrusions shall be
sufficient to ensure their rigidity in the lengths required in the final installation.
1.7.4 Manufacture all aluminum fixing brackets and cleats from the most appropriated grade of
alloy to the requirements of BS 1987] 1474 Specification for wrought aluminum and aluminum
alloys for general Consultanting purposes: bars, extruded round tubes and sections]. They
shall be finished to match the metal panels and framing members if visible.
1.7.5 All extruded aluminum alloy framing members shall be fabricated from the appropriate grade
of aluminum alloy complying with BS 1987] 1474 Specification for wrought aluminum and
aluminum alloys for general Consutanting purposes: bars. Extruded round tubes and sections].
Unless otherwise specified.
1.7.6 Unless specified otherwise, Solid aluminum sheeting shall be a minimum of 3mm thick and
satisfy the requirements of BS EN :485Parts ] 4-1Part 1 ii :1994Technical conditions for inspection
and delivery, Parts 2 ii :1995Mechanical properties; Part 3 ii :1994Tolerances on shape and
dimensions for hot-rolled products; Part 4 ii :1994Tolerances on shape and dimensions for
cold-rolled products], BS EN :1993] 515Aluminum and aluminum alloys. Wrought products; Part
2 ii :1955Chemical symbol based designation system; Part 3 ii :1995Chemical composition; Part
4 ii :1995Forms of products].
1.7.7 All exposed aluminum shall be protected with low tack adhesive film during construction
and prior to handover.
1.7.8 Aluminum panels shall be manufactured such that the grain on each runs in the same
direction.
1.7.9 Prior to mass production, dye Drawings shall be submitted to the Consultant for review.
These shall be considered as Shop Drawings. The dye Drawing shell indicate polished surfaces
and shape.
1.7.10 Aluminum extrusions containing score lines resulting from poorly polished surfaces shall not
be accepted.
1.8 Stainless Steel
1.8.1 Foreign standards are referenced as they support the design intent. Alternate standards may
be proposed for consideration by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as the
whether the proposed standards adequately support the design intent.
1.8.2 Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for all
products in accordance with the General Specifications. Product data shall include
certifications and test reports necessary to show compliance with the contract.
1.8.3 Submit operating instructions, maintenance schedules, and parts lists in accordance with the
General Specifications.
1.8.4 Fabricator qualifications; firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those
indicated for this project with a record of successful in-service performance, and with
sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the work.
1.8.5 Fire-test-response characteristics; where indicated, provide expansion joint cover assemblies
identical to those assemblies whose fire resistance has been determined per ANSIIUL263 c
<Fire Resistance Rating), NFPA 251<Specifies methods for determining the fire-resistive abilities
of building members and assemblies), U.B.C.1-43<Uniform Building Code 4301 Fire-Resistive
Standards), or ASTM E 119<Standard Test Methods for Fire Test of Building Construction and
Materials), including hose stream test of vertical wall assemblies, by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.8.6 Fire-resistance ratings: not less than the rating of adjacent construction. Fabricated item shall
not be twisted, bent, distorted, or otherwise damaged. Materials shall be protected against
corrosion and deterioration.
1.8.7 Fasteners for stainless steel; stainless steel, commercial type as shown and best suited for
the intended purpose. Where exposed, material and finish shall match the fastened metal.
Exposed screw heads shall be countersunk Allen head type unless otherwise indicated.
1.8.8 Metal primer for surfaces which will receive a finish coat: as recommended by finish coat
manufacturer.
1.9 Electrical wiring, parts and equipment please see the section: Electrical engineer system for general
standard to be equal as specification.
2. PANEL SIGNS
2.1 Panel signs: Comply with indicated requirements for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes,
sizes, and details of construction.
2.1.1 Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under
installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 6.1mm measured diagonally.
2.2 Unframed panel signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform to the
following requirements:
2.2.1 Edge condition: Square cut.
2.3 Graphic content and style: Provide sign copy that complies with the indicated requirements for size, style,
spacing, content, and position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices.
2.4 Apply copy to the exposed face of the sign panel. Panel material shall be frosted acrylic or high pressure
laminated wood or as indicated in the drawings. Characters and graphic symbols shall be printed using one
of the following methods:
2.4.1 Inkjet printing on PP sticker with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing.
2.4.2 Inkjet printing on backlit translucent sticker with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing.
2.4.3 Silk-screen printing directly on sign panel
3. FABRICATION
3.1 General: Comply with indicated requirements for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes,
sizes, and details of construction.
3.2 Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to the weather to exclude water penetration.
3.3 Conceal fasteners where possible. Otherwise locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.
3.4 Insofar as practicable, fitting and assembly of the works shall be done in the shop. Work that cannot be
permanently shop assembled shall be completely assembled, marked, and disassembled before shipment
to ensure proper assembly in the field. Unless otherwise noted, field joints in the face of signs will not be
allowed. Coordinate sizes of finished assemblies with access limitations to final locations at the building.
3.5 Panels: Form panels to required size and shape. Comply with indicated requirements for design,
dimensions, finish, color, and details of construction.
3.5.1 Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods to produce message panels with closely
fitting joints. Align edges and surfaces with one another in the indicated relationship.
3.5.2 Increase panel thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffener or backing materials as
required to produce surfaces without distortion, buckles, warp, or other surface
deformations.
4. LEGENDS FOR SIGNS
4.1 Legends shall include logo, font style, letters, numbers, arrows, symbols, borders, and other applications
shown for sign panels. Enlargement or reduction of art work shall be done photographically or by
computer. Hand cut masks or templates will not be accepted.
4.2 Logo and Font style: shall comply with indicated requirements for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors,
designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction and as shown in the drawing.
4.3 Custom symbol art work will be provided by the Engineer.
5. COLORS FOR SIGNS
5.1 Colors for signage shall be Pantone color matching system or as specified in the drawing.
5.2 Pantone colors listed below are for specification purposes only.Other colors that are not listed are
specified in the drawing. Submit color samples for comparison with control colors and review by the
Engineer.
5.2.1 White
5.2.2 Black %100 Black
5.2.3 Light Grey Pantone 429C
5.2.4 Dark Grey 424C
5.2.5 Red Pantone 1795C
5.2.6 Yellow 1 Pantone 116C
5.2.7 Blue 1 Pantone 284C
5.2.8 Green 1 Pantone 3415C
5.2.9 Blue2 Pantone 2935C
5.2.10 Red2 Pantone Warm Red C
5.2.11 Yellow2 Pantone 109C
5.2.12 Orange Pantone 193C
6. SOURCE FINISHING
6.1 Colors and textures: for exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or
applied colors, textures, or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches as
selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standards.
6.2 Metal finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and application
recommendations.
6.3 All polyester powder coating shall be conform to BS 6496 and BS 6497, to be painted on a fully
automatic continuous paint line by a single applicator to a minimum s of 80 microns and maximum
thickness to match hard coating process. Colour shall be reviewed by the Consultant and samples
shall be submitted to the consultant for review. One applicator and one powder supplier shall be
used for the Works.
6.4 The polyester powder coating thickness between adjacent metal panels shall not vary by more than
10 microns. In addition all powder coated panels shall receive a clear protective top coat sealant, 70
microns thick.
6.5 Any primer and surface treatment applied to panels prior to application of decorative coatings shall
have a minimum dry film thickness of 25 microns and shall be of a type compatible with the
decorative coatings. Workmanship for surface preparation and paint application shall conform to BS
1977] 5493 Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel structures against corrosion.
6.6 The over coating of elements shall not be allowed. All finished surfaces shall be smooth, free from
blemishes pinholes, tears, orange peel effect and other coating defects when evenly illuminated by
diffuse light and viewed using normal corrected vision from a distance of 100mm. Limits for acceptable
production variations in color uniformity shall be established by reference samples.
6.7 All coating shall satisfy the following criteria:
6.7.1 Adhesion: Test in accordance with BS :3900Part E] 6Cross-out test] with no detachment of film
from substrate.
6.7.2 Flexibility: No cracking, flaking or film deformation above 6 millimeters when tested in
accordance with BS :3900Part E] 11Pains and varnishes. Bend test (conical mandrel}].
6.7.3 Cupping test: No cracking of substrate of coating when using an indentation of 6 millimeters
tested in accordance with BS :3900Part E :1976] 4Cupping test].
6.7.4 Scratch resistance: No penetration to substrate using a 1 millimeters diameter tungsten ball
of 4000 gram weight in accordance with BS 3900; Part E1998) 1992] 2}: Scratch test].
6.7.5 Impact resistance: No cracking or detachment with an impact of 23.0M/kg as tested to BS 6496
clause :(1991) 1984] 16Specification for powder organic coatings for application and stoving
to aluminum alloy extrusions, sheet and performed sections for external architectural
purposes, and for the finish on aluminum alloy extrusions, sheet and performed sections
coated with powder organic coatings].
6.7.6 Salt spray resistance: No blistering, softening, or detachment of coating when tested for 1000 hours
for aluminum and 500 hours for galvanized steel as clause 15 of BS 6 :(1991) 1984]496
Specification for powder organic coatings for application and sloving to aluminum alloy
extrusions, sheet and d performed sections for external architectural purposes, and for the
finish on aluminum alloy extrusions, sheet and performed sectionscoated with powder organic
coatings] and BS :(1991) 1984] 6497Specification for powder organic coatings for application
and stoving to hot-dip galvanized architectural purposes, and for the finish on galvanized
steel sections and performed sheet coated with powder organic coatings].
6.7.7 Degree of gloss: Gloss reduction shall be even over surface without affecting uniform
appearance of coating when tested to BS :3900Part D] 5Measurement of specular gloss of
non-metallic paint films at 20oo, 60oo and 85oo].
6.7.8 Humidity resistance: No effect to coating after 3000 hours tested to BS :3900Part F 1973] 2
:(1989)Determination of resistance to humidity (cyclic condensation)].
6.7.9 Colour consistency: colour consistency shall be assured from batch to batch for project as
judged under conditions described in :950Part :(1980) 1967]1llluminant for colour matching
and colour appraisal].
PART III: EXECUTION

1. PREPARATION
1.1 The locations of signs indicated on the Drawings are for general information only. The manufacturer
shall arrange a meeting with the Engineer at the site to determine final location of sign elements. Sign
locations shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to installation of sign foundations and structural
supports.
1.2 The manufacturer shall coordinate with electrical engineer incase of all Light box signage (hanging and
stand alone) to confirm the location of sign elements .All electrical equipments and parts shall be
reviewed by the Engineer and the electrical engineer prior to safety quality and system standard.
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the described
type and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2.2.1 Install signs level, plumb wiring, and at the indicated height, with sign surface free from
distortion or other defects in appearance.
3. FIELD FINISHING
3.1 Clean and touch up existing signs to receive new finish coat in field. Apply intermediate primer coat
if recommended by the finish coat manufacturer. Material, application, and thicknesses shall be in
accordance with the paint manufacturer’s specifications.
4. CLEANING
4.1 At completion of the installation, protective coverings shall be removed from exposed finished
surfaces. Clean soiled surfaces of sign units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
5. PROTECTION
5.1 Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Engineer.
6. COMMISSIONING
6.1 All Light box signage (hanging and stand alone) must be commissioning test with electrical system
both normal condition and emergency condition. The commissioning shall be reviewed by the
Engineer and the electrical engineer prior to approve of installation.
END
5.2.14 : PLANTING AND IRRIGATION
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General
1.1 The work in this section consists of furnishing and installing plant, soils, edging turf, grasses and
landscape materials required as specified in locations shown.
2. Related Work
2.1 Topsoil Testing
2.2 Temporary Environmental Controls
2.3 Stripping Topsoil, Stock Piling and Topsoil Materials
2.4 Planting Irrigation
3. Definitions
3.1 Backfill: The earth used to replace earth in an excavation.
3.2 Balled and Bur lapped. Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown and
depth recommended for type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported,
and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball.
3.3 Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and
placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and depth for type and size of
plant required .
3.4 Bare-Root Stock: Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or root
pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than minimum root spread according
for type and size of plant required.
3.5 Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-
established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from
container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping
and be sized according for type and size of plant required.
3.6 Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants established and grown in-ground in a
porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not
less than diameter, depth, and volume required for type and size of plant.
3.6 Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
3.7 Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with
stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
3.8 Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest.
This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also
includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.
3.9 Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil;
imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps
fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
3.10 Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers,
turf and grasses, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.
3.11 Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem
or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or
trunk.
3.12 Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface
of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
3.13 Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter
and soil organisms.
4. Delivery, Storage and Handing
4.1 Notify the Contracting Officer’s Representative of the delivery schedule in advance so the plant
material may be inspected upon arrival at the job site. Remove unacceptable plant and landscape
materials from the job site immediately.
4.2 Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name
and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as
applicable. Keep seed and other packaged materials in dry storage away from contaminants.
4.3 Bulk Materials
4.3.1 Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or
on existing turf areas or plants. Keep bulk materials in dry storage away from contaminants.
4.3.2 Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials,
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water
conveyance systems, or walkways.
4.3.3 Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime and soil amendments with appropriate
certificates.
4.4 Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root
system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.
4.5 Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun
scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or
bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering
of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.
4.6 Handle planting stock by root ball.
4.7 The use of equipment such as "tree spades" is permitted provided the plant balls are sized in
accordance and tops are protected from damage.
4.8 Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F (16 to 18 deg C) until planting.
4.9 Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting
is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun,
filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
4.9.1 Heel-in bare-root stock: Soak roots that are in dry condition in water for two hours. Reject
dried-out plants.
4.9.2 Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other
acceptable material.
4.9.3 Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
4.9.4 Water root systems of plants stored on- site deeply and thoroughly with a fine- mist spray.
Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly- wet,
condition.
4.10 Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to
Turfgrass Sodding". Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from
breakage, seed contamination and drying.
4.11 Deliver sprigs in air tight bags to keep from drying out. Sprigs delivered unwrapped, shall be kept moist
in burlap or other accepted material until planting.
4.12 Deliver plugs within 24 hours of harvesting, keep moist until planting.
4.13 All pesticides and herbicides shall be properly labeled and registered with the Department of
Agriculture. Deliver materials in original, unopened containers showing, certified analysis, name and
address of manufacturer, product label, manufacturer’s application instructions specific to the project
and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.
5.1 Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and
dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before
proceeding with planting work.
5.2 Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be
performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable
weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
5.3 Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas
unless otherwise indicated. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas,
protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.
5.4 Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades and irrigation system components are
established. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants, protect irrigation system components and
promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.
6.1 Products Criteria:

6.1.1 When two or more units of the same type or class of materials or equipment are required,
these units shall be products of one manufacturer.
6.1.2 A nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or trademark, including model number, shall be
securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment. In addition, the model number shall
be either cast integrally with equipment, stamped, or otherwise permanently marked on
each item of equipment.
6.2 Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful
establishment of plants.
6.2.1 Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work
is in progress.
6.2.2 Pesticide Applicator: Licensed in state of project, commercial.
6.3 A qualified Arborist shall be licensed and required to submit one copy of license to the Contracting
Officer’s Representative.
6.4 Include an independent or university laboratory, recognized by the Department of Agriculture, with
the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests
to be performed.
6.5 For each unimpeded soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil- testing
laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation
exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient
content of the soil.
6.6 Provide quality, size, genus, species, variety and sources of plants indicated, complying with applicable
requirements
6.7 Do not prune to obtain required sizes.
6.7.1 Measure trees and shrubs with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take
height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and
container grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not
measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches (150 mm) above
the root flare for trees up to 4 inch (100 mm) caliper size, and 12 inches (300 mm) above
the root flare for larger sizes.
6.7.2 Measure other plants with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.
6.8 Contracting Officer’ s Representative may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site
before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality.
Contracting Officer’ s Representative retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and
condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and to reject
unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or
shrubs immediately from Project site.
6.9 Include product label and manufacturer's literature and data for pesticides and herbicides.
6.10 Conduct a pre-installation conference
7. Submittals
7.1 Submit product data for each type of product indicated, including soils:
7.1.1 Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials.
7.1.2 Include approved product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to the
Project.
7.1.3 Include color photographs in digital 3 by 5 inch (76 by 127 mm) print format of each
required species and size of plant material as it will be furnished to the Project. Take
photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be
furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species
where plants are required, include a minimum of photographs showing the average plant,
the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph
with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery.
7.2 Submit samples and manufacturer’s literature for each of the following for approval before work is
started.
7.2.1 Trees and Shrubs: Maintain approved samples on-site as a standard for comparison.
7.2.2 Organic and Compost Mulch: 1-pint (0.5-liter) or 1 quart (1-liter) volume of each organic
and compost mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials
by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of
material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic
makeup.
7.2.3 Mineral Mulch: 2 lb (1.0 kg) or 5 lb (2.5 kg) of each mineral mulch required, in sealed plastic
bags labeled with source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be
delivered and installed on the site; provide an accurate indication of color, texture, and
makeup of the material.
7.2.4 Submit edging materials and accessories in manufacturer's standard size, to verify color
selected.
7.2.5 Erosion Control Materials: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
7.2.6 Root Barrier: Width of panel by 12 inches (300 mm).
7.2.7 Landscape Membranes: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
7.2.8 Tree Wrap: Width of panel by 12 inches (300 mm).
7.3 Qualification data for qualified landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by
Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and
year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons.
7.4 Prior to delivery, provide notarized certificates attesting that each type of manufactured product, from
the manufacturer, meet the requirements specified and shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer’s
Representative for approval:
7.4.1 Plant Materials (Department of Agriculture certification by State Nursery Inspector declaring
material to be free from insects and disease).
7.4.2 Seed and Turf Materials notarized certificate of product analysis.
7.4.3 Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products.
7.4.4 Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods
established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.
7.5 Material Test Reports: For existing native surface topsoil, existing in-place surface soil and imported
or manufactured topsoil.
7.6 Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of
plants during a calendar year. Submit before start of required maintenance periods.
8. Plant and Turf Establishment Period
8.1 The establishment period for plants and turf shall begin immediately after installation, with the
approval of the Contracting Officer’s Representative, and continue until the date that the Government
accepts the project or phase for beneficial use and occupancy. During the Establishment Period the
Contractor shall maintain the plants and turf.
9. Plant and Turf maintenance service

9.1 Provide initial maintenance service for trees, shrubs, ground cover and other plants by skilled
employees of landscape Installer. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and
continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than
maintenance period below.
Maintenance Period: months from date of planting completion or Substantial Completion.
9.2 Obtain continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or
other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State
services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
10. Warranty
10.1 The Contractor shall remedy any defect due to faulty material or workmanship and pay for any
damage to other work resulting therefrom within a period of years from final acceptance, unless
noted otherwise below. Further, the Contractor will provide all manufacturer's and supplier's written
guarantees and warranties covering materials and equipment furnished under this Contract.
10.1.1 Plant and Turf Warranty Periods will begin from the date of planting completion and
Substantial Completion Government acceptance of the project or phase for beneficial use
and occupancy.
10.1.2 Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses
10.1.3 Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, Turf, and Other Plants
10.1.4 Annuals
10.1.5 The Contractor shall have completed, located, and installed all plants and turf according
to the plans and specifications. All plants and turf are expected to be living and in a healthy
condition at the time of final inspection.
10.1.6 The Contractor will replace any dead plant material and any areas void of turf immediately,
unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. Provide extended warranty for
period equal to original warranty period for replacement plant materials. Replacement
plant and turf warranty will begin on the day the work is completed.
10.1.7 Replacement of relocated plants, that the Contractor did not supply, is not required unless
plant failure is due to improper handling and care during transplanting. Loss through
Contractor negligence requires replacement in plant type and size.
10.1.8 The Government will rein spec all plants and turf at the end of the Warranty Period. The
Contractor will replace any dead, missing, or defective plant material and turf immediately.
The Warranty Period will end on the date of this inspection provided the Contractor has
complied with the warranty work required by this specification. The Contractor shall also
comply with the following requirements:
(1) Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead, missing or defective plant
material prior to final inspection.
(2) A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or
replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.
(3) Mulch and weed plant beds and saucers. Just prior to final inspection, treat these
areas to a second application of approved pre-emergent herbicide.
(4) Complete remedial measures directed by the Contracting Officer’s Representative to
ensure plant and turf survival.
(5) Repair damage caused while making plant or turf replacements.
10.2 Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or
growth within specified warranty period.

10.2.1 Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
10.2.1.1 Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of
adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond
Contractor's control.
10.2.1.2 Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.
10.2.1.3 Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Plant Material
1.1 Plant and turf materials will conform to the varieties specified and be true to botanical name as listed
in Plants for Landscape Architecture in Thailand (ISBN 974-7114-36-4); nursery-grown plants and turf
material true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated on
Drawings; healthy, normal and unbroken root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning;
well- shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf; free of disease,
pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, windburn, injuries, abrasions, and
disfigurement.
1.1.1 Trees- deciduous and evergreen: Single trunked with a single leader, unless otherwise
indicated; symmetrically developed deciduous trees and shrubs of uniform habit of
growth; straight boles or stems; free from objectionable disfigurements; evergreen trees
and shrubs with well developed symmetrical tops, with typical spread of branches for
each particular species or variety. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight
vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and
trunk; crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter; or with stem
girdling roots will be rejected.
1.1.2 Ground cover and vine plants: Provide the number and length of runners for the size
specified on the Drawings, together with the proper age for the grade of plants specified.
Provide vines and ground cover plants well established in removable containers, integral
containers, or formed homogeneous soil sections. Plants shall have been grown under
climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project. Spray all plants budding
into leaf or having soft growth with an anti-desiccant at the nursery before digging.
1.1.3 The minimum acceptable sizes of all plants, measured before pruning with branches in
normal position, shall conform to the measurements designated. Plants larger in size
than specified may be used with the approval of the Contracting Officer’s Representative,
with no change in the contract price. When larger plants are used, increase the ball of
earth or spread of roots in accordance.
1.1.4 Provide nursery grown plant material conforming to the requirements and
recommendations. Dig and prepare plants for shipment in a manner that will not cause
damage to branches, shape, and future development after planting.
1.1.5 Balled and burlapped ( B&B) plant ball sizes and ratios will conform consisting of firm,
natural balls of soil wrapped firmly with burlap or strong cloth and tied.
1.1.6 Bare root ( BR) plants shall have the root system substantially intact, but with the earth
carefully removed. Cover roots with a thick coating of mud by "puddling" after the plants
are dug.
1.1.7 Container grown plants shall have sufficient root growth to hold the earth intact when
removed from containers, but shall not be root bound.

1.1.8 Make substitutions only when a plant ( or alternates as specified) is not obtainable and
the Contracting Officer’ s Representative authorizes a change order providing for use of
the nearest equivalent obtainable size or variety of plant with the same essential
characteristics and an equitable adjustment of the contract price.
1.1.9 Existing plants to be relocated, ball sizes shall conform to requirements for collected
plants and plants shall be dug, handled, and replanted in accordance with applicable
sections of these specifications.
1.1.10 Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established
landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.
1.2 Label plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof and weather-
resistant label bearing legible the correct designation of common name and full scientific name,
including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the
plant as indicated in the Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on the Drawings. Labels shall be
securely attached and not be removed.
2. Inorganic Soil Amendments
2.1 Lime: agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent.
2.2 Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum of
99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35 mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No.
40 (0.425 mm) sieve.
2.3 Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent
sulfur.
2.4 Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.
2.5 Perlite: horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.
2.6 Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing
through No. 50 (0.30 mm) sieve.
2.7 Coarse Sand shall be concrete sand, Fine Aggregate, clean, sharp free of limestone, shale and slate
particles, and toxic materials.
2.8 Vermiculite: horticultural grade and free of any toxic materials.
2.9 Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption
capacity by weight.
2.10 Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.
3. Organic Soil Amendments
3.1 Organic matter: Commercially prepared compost. Well- composted, stable, and weed- free organic
matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through
1 inch ( 25 mm) , 3/ 4 inch ( 19 mm) or 1/ 2 inch ( 13 mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10
decisiemens/ m; not exceeding 0. 5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to
plantings.
3.2 Peat: A natural product of sphagnum moss peat, peat moss, hypnum moss, peat reed sedge peat
and peat humus derived from a fresh-water site, except as otherwise specified. Peat shall be shredded
and granulated to pass through a 1/ 2 inch ( 13 mm mesh screen with a pH range of 3. 4 to 4. 8 and
conditioned in storage piles for at least 6 months after excavation.
3.3 Wood derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen- treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform
texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
3.4 Manure: Well- rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by
volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil,
weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth.
4. Plant and Turf Fertilizers
4.1 Soil Test: Evaluate existing soil conditions and requirements prior to fertilizer selection and application
to minimize the use of all fertilizers and chemical products. Obtain approval of Contracting Officer’s
Representative for allowable products, product alternatives, scheduling and application procedures.
Evaluate existing weather and site conditions prior to application. Apply products during favorable
weather and site conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty
requirements. Fertilizers to be registered and approved acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and of type recommended by manufacturer applicable to specific areas as required for Project
conditions and application. Provide commercial grade plant and turf fertilizers, free flowing, uniform
in composition and conforms to applicable state and federal regulations.
4.2 Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial- grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of slow-
release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous,
and potassium in the following composition: Composition shall be nitrogen, phosphorous, and
potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
4.3 Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pellet fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen,
phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: Composition shall be nitrogen,
phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil- testing
laboratory.
4.4 Plant Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long- lasting, slow- release, commercial- grade planting
fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form
that can be absorbed by plant roots.
5. Planting Soils
5.1 Planting Soil: Topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum percent organic material content; free of stones
1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix
topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers as recommended by the soils analysis.
5.2 Existing Planting Soil: Existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions retained during
excavation process and stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of native surface topsoil to produce viable
planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials
harmful to plant growth
5.3 Imported Planting Soil: Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources can be used if
sufficient topsoil is not available on site to meet the depth as specified herein. The Contractor shall
furnish imported topsoil. At least 10 days prior to topsoil delivery, notify the Contracting Officer’ s
Representative of the source( s) from which topsoil is to be furnished. Obtain imported topsoil
displaced from naturally well- drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4
inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs, or marshes.
6. Landscape Membranes
6.1 Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. (101 g/sq. m) minimum,
composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position. Fabric shall be
inert to biological degradation and resist naturally-encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids.
6.2 Composite Fabric shall be woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven
polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd. (162 g/sq. m).
7. Mulch
7.1 Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs
7.2 Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture
content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1 inch (25 mm) sieve.
7.3 Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, of
following type, size range, and color.
8. Tree Wrap
8.1 Crinkle paper tree wrap: Two thicknesses of crinkled paper cemented together with a layer of
bituminous material. Wrapping material shall be a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) in width and have
a stretch factor of 33 1/3 percent. Twine for tying shall be lightly tarred medium or coarse sisal yarn.
8.2 Extruded, translucent, twin walled polypropylene protection board sheets: 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, 6 ft
(1800 mm) long tree shelters may be utilized for short trunk trees 3 inch (75 mm) caliper or less.
8.3 Breathable synthetic fabric tree wrap: White in color, delivered in 3 inch (75 mm) wide rolls. Material
shall be specifically manufactured for tree wrapping.
8.4 Tree wrap shall be secured to the trunk using bio-degradable tape suitable for nursery use and which
is expected to degrade in sunlight in less than 2 years after installation.
9. Edging
9.1 Steel edging: Standard commercial steel edging, rolled edge, fabricated in sections of standard lengths,
with loops stamped from or welded to face of sections to receive stakes.
9.2 Aluminum edging: standard profile extruded aluminum edging, fabricated in standard lengths with
interlocking sections with loops stamped from face of sections to receive stakes.
9.3 Natural cut edging shall edge plant beds with an excavated ‘ V’ cut to provide a clear division line
between the plant bed and adjacent turf. Do not use any artificial or manufactured products to form
plant bed edges.
10. Water
Water shall not contain elements toxic to plant life
11. Antdesiccant
Antidesiccant: An emulsion specifically manufactured for agricultural use that will provide a protective
film over plant surfaces permeable enough to permit transpiration.
12. Seed
Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will not be acceptable.
13. Sod
Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous
growth and development when planted.
14. Sprigs
Sod Sprigs: Healthy lateral living stems, rhizomes, or stolons
15. Plugs
15.1 Plugs: Turf grass sod including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects.
15.2 Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, cut into square or round plugs, strongly
rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted
16. Pesticides
16.1 Consider IPM ( Integrated Pest Management) practices to minimize the use of all pesticides and
chemical products. Obtain approval of Chief Engineer for allowable products, product alternatives,
scheduling and application procedures. Evaluate existing weather and site conditions prior to
application. Apply products during favorable weather and site conditions according to manufacturer's
written instructions and warranty requirements. Pesticides to be registered and approved by
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each
specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted
pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
16.2 Pre- Emergent Herbicide ( Selective and Non- Selective) : Effective for controlling the germination or
growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.
16.3 Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has
already germinated
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Examination
1.1 Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation
and performance.
1.1.1 Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,
concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,
paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within
a planting area.
1.1.2 Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions.
1.1.3 Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil
moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required
results.
1.1.4 Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.
1.1.5 Special conditions may exist that warrant a variance in the specified planting dates or
conditions. Submit a written request to the Contracting Officer’ s Representative stating
the special conditions and proposal variance.
1.2 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.3 If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area,
remove the soil and contamination as directed by Contracting Officer’ s Representative and replace
with new planting soil.
2. Preparation
2.1 Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants
from damage caused by planting operations.
2.2 Install erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil
bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
2.3 Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline
areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain approval by the Contracting Officer’ s
Representative of layout before excavating or planting. The Contracting Officer’s Representative may
approve adjustments to plant material locations to meet field conditions.
2.4 Apply ant desiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks
( before wrapping) , branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and
transportation.
2.5 Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect
from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation.
3. Planting Area Establishment
3.1 Loosen subgrade of planting areas in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous
matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
3.2 Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine
texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
3.3 Before planting, obtain Contracting Officer’ s Representative acceptance of finish grading; restore
planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
4. Excavation for trees and shrubs
4.1 Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45 degree
angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center
area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not
further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify
sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.
4.1.1 Excavate approximately 3 times as wide as ball diameter for balled and bur lapped,
balled and potted, container-grown and fabric bag-grown stock.
4.1.2 Excavate at least 12 inches ( 300 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to
accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.
4.1.3 Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the
bottom of the root ball.
4.1.4 If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level
and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling.
4.1.5 Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials as shown on the Drawings. Do
not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or
existing improvements.
4.1.6 Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours.
4.1.7 Keep excavations covered or otherwise after working hours when unattended by
Installer's personnel.
4.1.8 Use topsoil to form earth saucers or water basins for watering around plants. Basins to
be 2 inches (50 mm) high for shrubs and 4 inches (100 mm) high for trees.
4.2 Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations be used as planting soil.
4.3 Notify Contracting Officer’s Representative if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or
shrubs are encountered in excavations.
4.4 Notify Contracting Officer’ s Representative if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage
or retention in tree or shrub planting pits.
4.5 Fill excavations with water and allow water to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.
5. Tree, Shrub and Vine Planting
5.1 Prior to planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball. If root flare is not visible, remove
soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top- most root emerges from the trunk. After
soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements.
5.2 Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.
5.3 Set balled and bur lapped stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare.
5.4 Set balled and potted, container- grown ,fabric bag- grown ,stock plumb and in center of planting pit
or trench with root flare.
5.5 Set and support bare-root stock in center of planting pit or trench with root flare.
5.6 When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding
soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil.
Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.
6. Mechanized tree spade planting
6.1 Trees shall be planted with an approved mechanized tree spade at the designated locations. Do not
use tree spade to move trees larger than the maximum size allowed for a similar field-grown, balled-
and-burlapped root-ball diameter larger than the manufacturer's maximum size recommendation for
the tree spade being used, whichever is smaller.
6.2 When extracting the tree, center the trunk within the tree spade and move tree with a solid ball of earth.
6.3 Cut exposed roots cleanly during transplanting operations.
6.4 Use the same tree spade to excavate the planting hole as was used to extract and transport the tree.
6.5 Where possible, orient the tree in the same direction as in its original location.
7. Tree, Shrub and Vine pruning
7.1 Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.
7.2 Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and
arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Contracting Officer’s Representative, do not cut
tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain
natural character.
7.3 Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.
8. Tree Wrap
Wrap the trunks of deciduous trees immediately after planting. Wrap the trunks of deciduous trees,
1- 1/ 2 inches ( 40 mm) or greater in caliber with the specified material beginning at the base and
extending to the first branches. Remove wrapping after one year. When using crinkled paper wrap,
securely tie wrapping at the top and bottom and at 18 inch (450 mm) maximum intervals with twine.
9. Root-Barrier installation
9.1 Install root barrier where trees are planted of paving or other hardscape elements, such as walls,
curbs, and walkways unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
9.2 Align root barrier with bottom edge angled at 20 degrees away from the paving or other hardscape
element and run it linearly along and adjacent to the paving or other hardscape elements to be
protected from invasive roots.
9.3 Install root barrier continuously from the tree trunk. If trees are spaced closer, use a single continuous
piece of root barrier.
10. Ground cover and plant installation
10.1 Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines in even rows with
triangular spacing.
10.2 Use planting soil for backfill.
10.3 Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.
10.4 For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that will minimally disturb the root
system but to a depth not less than two nodes.
10.5 Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to
hold water.
10.6 Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
10.7 Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from
transplanting shock.
10.8 Plant ground cover in areas to receive erosion control materials through the material after erosion
control materials are in place.
11. Mulch Installation
11.1 Install weed- control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Completely cover area to be mulched.
11.2 Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. Keep mulch out of plant crowns
and off buildings, pavements, utility standards/pedestals, and other structures.

12. Edging installation
12.1 Install steel edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with steel
stakes spaced approximately 30 inches (760 mm) apart, driven below top elevation of edging.
12.2 Install aluminum edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with
aluminum stakes spaced approximately 36 inches (900 mm) or 48 inches (1200 mm) apart, driven
below top elevation of edging.
12.3 For Natural Cut Edging provide a uniform lazy ‘V’ cut with one vertical side adjacent to turf areas 5
inches (125 mm) deep and a second side angled 10 inches (250 mm) toward center of plant bed for
a clear cut division line between the plant bed and adjacent turf.
13. Plant Maintenance
13.1 Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring plant
saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required
to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of
insects and disease.
13.2 Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace
mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
13.3 Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and
pathogens or disease. Use IPM (Integrated Pest Management) practices whenever possible to minimize
the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off
foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.
14. Turf area preparation and grading
14.1 For newly graded subgrades loosen subgrade to a minimum depth. Remove stones in any dimension
and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's
property.
14.2 Finish grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture.
Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and
fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate
future.
15. Seeding
15.1 Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity
exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right
angles to each other.
15.1.1 Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.
15.1.2 Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.
15.2 Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.
15.3 Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1: 4 with erosion- control blankets and 1: 6 with erosion-
control fiber mesh // installed and fastened with biodegradable materials according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
15.4 Protect seeded areas with erosion control mats where shown on Drawings; install and anchor with
biodegradable materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
15.5 Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a
minimum rate of // 2 tons/acre (42 kg/92.9 sq. m) // Insert rate // to form a continuous blanket // 1-
1/ 2 inches ( 38 mm) / / Insert thickness / / in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand,
blower, or other suitable equipment.
15.6 Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds within 24 hours after completing seeding
operations.
16. Hydroseeding
For hydroseeding, mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically
designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry
suitable for hydraulic application.
17. Sodding
17.1 Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.
17.2 Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or
overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or
sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets,
and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod;
remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.
17.2.1 Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3.
17.2.2 Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with biodegradable staples spaced as recommended
by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.
17.3 Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water
daily or more frequently until sod is established.
18. Sprigging
Plant freshly shredded sod sprigs after finish grade is properly prepared and thoroughly soaked a day
in advance. Plant sprigs at a rate of // 10 cu. ft./1000 sq. ft. (0.28 cu. m/92.9 sq. m) // Insert rate // in
furrows // 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm) // 1-1/2 to 2 inches (38 to 50 mm) // 2-1/2 to 3 inches (64
to 75 mm) / / deep. Place individual sprigs with roots and portions of stem in moistened soil, / / 6
inches (150 mm) // 12 inches (300 mm) // Insert spacing // apart in rows // 10 inches (250 mm) // 18
inches (450 mm) // Insert spacing // apart, and fill furrows without covering growing tips. Lightly roll
and firm soil around sprigs after planting. Water thoroughly and keep soil moist. Weed by hand or
hoe. Do not treat sprig area with herbicide.
19. Plugging
Plant fresh sod plugs after finish grade is properly prepared. Plant plugs in holes or furrows, spaced //
12 inches (300 mm) // 18 inches (450 mm) // Insert spacing // apart in both directions. On slopes,
contour furrows to near level. Water thoroughly and keep soil moist. Weed by hand or hoe. Do not
treat plug area with herbicide.
20. Turf Renovation
20.1 Renovate existing turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment
and movement of vehicles.
20.1.1 Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is
required.
20.1.2 Install new planting soil as required.
20.2 Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not bury in soil.
20.3 Remove topsoil containing foreign materials such as oil drippings, fuel spills, stones, gravel, and other
construction materials resulting from Contractor's operations, and replace with new planting soil.
20.4 Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf.
20.5 Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required.
Do not use pre-emergence herbicides.
20.6 Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally
dispose of them off Owner's property.

20.7 Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches (150 mm).
20.8 Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new turf and mix thoroughly into
top 4 inches (100 mm) of existing soil. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades.
20.9 Apply seed and protect with straw mulch ,sod as required for new turf.
20.10 Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established.
21. Turf Maintenance
21.1 Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and
performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant
bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and
installation the same as those used in the original installation.
21.1.1 Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.
Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
21.1.2 In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new
mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement.
21.1.3 Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease.
Use IPM (Integrated Pest Management) practices whenever possible to minimize the use
of pesticides and reduce hazards.
21.2 Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey water from
sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm).
21.2.1 Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or
mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted
areas.
21.2.2 Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per week unless rainfall
precipitation is adequate.
21.3 Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height
without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial
or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do
not mow when grass is wet.
22. Satisfactory Turf
22.1 Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Contracting Officer’s
Representative:
22.1.1 Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand
of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage
exceeding // 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. (0.92 sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 5
by 5 inches (125 by 125 mm).
22.1.2 Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well- rooted, even-
colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and
surface irregularities.
22.1.3 Satisfactory Plugged Turf: At end of maintenance period, the required number of plugs
has been established as well- rooted, viable patches of grass, and areas between plugs
are free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation.
22.1.4 Satisfactory Sprigged Turf: At end of maintenance period, the required number of sprigs
has been established as well- rooted, viable plants, and areas between sprigs are free of
weeds and other undesirable vegetation.
22.1.5 Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and
continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.
23. Pesticide Application
23.1 Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with
authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications
with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Contracting Officer’s
Representative before each application is performed.
23.2 Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Applied to tree, shrub, and ground-cover areas
in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas.
23.3 Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Applied only as necessary to treat already-
germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
24. Cleanup and Protection
24.1 During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.
24.2 Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and
trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace
damaged plantings.
24.3 Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles
before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
24.4 Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs, as required to protect newly planted areas
from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after
plantings are established.
24.5 After installation and before Project Completion remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels,
wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.
24.6 Remove non degradable erosion control measures after grass establishment period.
24.7 Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and
legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END
5.3 : ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
5.3.0 : GENERAL SPECIFICATION
1.1 Introduction
This general specifications and requirements describe the materials and installation of the electrical
system and related work for the project. The Works shall be executed to completion and in
conformity with the drawings and these Specifications.
1.2 Environment
The material and equipment shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and shall be suitable for
use in tropical climatic area mentioned below.
(1) Altitude : Approximately mean sea level.
(2) Ambient temperature
(a) Maximum : 40° C
(b) Average : 30° C
(3) Relative humidity
(a) Maximum : 85 %
(b) Average : 60 % (all year)
1.3 Standards, Codes and Regulations

(1) The entire system and its basic components shall conform in all respects to the standards and
regulations of The Engineering Institute of Thailand (EIT). The following standards are
mentioned in these Specifications for systems and/or components and, where described, the
systems and/or components shall conform to any of the following standards.
(a) ANSI - American National Standard Institute
(b) ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials
(c) BS - British Standard
(d) DIN - Deutsher Industrie Normen (German Industrial Standard)
(e) EIT - The Engineering Institute of Thailand
(f) FM - Factory Mutual
(g) IEC - International Electro Technical Commission
(h) MEA - Metropolitan Electricity Authority
(i) NEC - National Electrical Code
(j) NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(k) NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
(l) PEA - Provincial Electricity Authority
(m) TISI - Thai Industrial Standard Institute
(n) UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
(o) VDE - Verband Deutsher Electro techniker (German
Electrical Regulation and Codes)
Any regulations issued by local authorities.
(2) In the case of conflict or uncertainty in the application of the above standards and codes, the
most stringent regulation shall govern.
(3) All regulations and standards shall be of the latest issue unless governing authorities require
an earlier issue.
1.4 Scope of Work
(1) The Electrical System work includes the furnishing of materials, labor, equipment, tools,
transportation and services required to construct, install and test the complete electrical
system as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.
(2) It shall be the Contractors responsibility to provide a completely safe and workable system in
accordance with the requirements of these Specifications, and the accompanying drawings and
schedules all to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
(3) The Contractor shall coordinate with the building contractor or other trades to ensure that the
system and its components furnished form a complete electrical and communication system
with the established construction schedule.
(4) The Contractor shall coordinate with Electricity Authority to have the high voltage cable test
as shown on the Drawings. The expense use for the test shall be the contractor responsibility.
(5) It shall be the Contractor responsibility to coordinate with Electricity Authority to inspect the
electrical installation and install the high voltage meter for the building as indicated in the Drawings.
(6) The entire system and its basic components shall conform to the standards and regulation of
The Engineering Institute of Thailand (EIT Standard 2001-56). All Standards, codes and
regulations shall be the latest issue unless governing authorities require an earlier issue and/or
as indicated on the Drawings.
PART II: PRODUCTS

1.1 Materials and Equipment
(1) All electrical equipment, materials and parts used shall be new and unused, of current
manufacture, of the highest quality and free from defects or imperfections affecting the
performance or life of the item and approved by the Engineer.
(2) Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or in the specification, all materials
and equipment shall be installed, with the approval of the Engineer, in accordance with
recommendations of the manufacturer. However, the approval of the Engineer shall not
release the Contractor from his responsibility or his liability regarding the properties of
installations.
(3) The Contractor shall protect all electrical equipment, materials and parts during storage and
during construction against the ingress of moisture, contamination or corrosion that might
damage the finish or lower the electrical integrity of the item.
(4) Certain major electrical equipment defined in the Specifications will be furnished to the Contractor,
on site. The Contractor shall assemble, align, level and fix this equipment as instructed by the
manufacturer and to the Engineer's satisfaction. In this specified case herein (if any).
(5) After the material and equipment have been installed completely in accordance with the
instructions, the responsibility for protecting of material and equipment from damages shall
rest with the Contractor's own expense.
1.2 Tools and Appliances
(1) Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide any pay for all tools and other
facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the works.
(2) If at any time prior to commencement or during the progress of works, tools, equipment and
materials, in the opinion of the Engineer, appear to be insufficient, of inappropriate to secure the
required quality of works or proper rate of progress, the Engineer may order the Contractor to
increase their efficiency, improve their character, augment their number or replace with new tools,
equipment and materials as required.
1.3 Nameplates and Identifications
All parts of the installation, which are of interest for its operation and maintenance, shall be provided
with nameplates, tags or arrows, especially in enclosed areas, such as ceiling, shafts, and other places
accessible for maintenance service.
1.4 Color Coding
Color coding for power cables, bus bars and junction boxes shall be as follow:
(1) For wires and bus bars:
(a) Phase A : Brown
(b) Phase B : Black
(c) Phase C : Gray
(d) Neutral : Light Blue
(e) Ground : Green or Yellow Strip Green
Large wires and cables shall be color coded with tapes as specific color.
(2) For junction boxes of:
SYSTEM Color Code Letter

Lighting System White L
Emergency Lighting System Red LE
Uninterruptible Lighting System Gray LU
Receptacle System White R
Emergency Receptacle System Red RE
Uninterruptible Receptacle System Gray RU
Energy Power Billing System Orange BS
Building Management System Brown BMS
SCADA Yellow SD
Structure Cabling System Blue SC
IP Telephone System Green TEL
Trunk Radio System Violet TR
Public Information Display System: Block PIDS
(PIDS)
Public Address System, (PAS) Blue Sky PAS
Central Clock System Gold CC
Internet Protocol Television System, Lavender IPTV
(IPTV)
Controlled Access Security System, Erin CASS
(CASS)
Closed Circuit Television System, White/Black CCTV
(CCTV)
Fire Detection and Alarm System, Red/Yellow FDAS
(FDAS)
1.5 Examination of Drawings and Specifications
1.5.1 The Contractor shall examine all Drawings and Specifications to make sure that all requirements are
thoroughly understood. In cases where, in his opinion, there are omissions and/or errors in any of
these documents, he shall inform the Engineer immediately.
1.5.2 The Contractor shall examine all relevant architectural and structural drawings together with all other
utilities systems involved in the Project, prior to installation of machines, materials and equipment.
1.5.3 Figure dimension as indicated on the Drawings are to be followed and in no case dimensions shall
be scale from the Drawings. Wherever possible, dimensions are to be measured from the building.
Before the Contractor commences any works, he shall ensure that dimensions are checked on the
site and/or building and agree with those on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the accuracy of such dimensions regardless of the comparable dimensions on the Drawings.
1.6 Equipment Deviations
1.6.1 Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed
on the Drawings, requiring any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any
other part of the mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, all such redesign, including drawings
and detailing required shall be prepared by the Contractor at his own expense and then approved
by the Engineer.
1.6.2 Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of cable, conduit, and
equipment from the specified or indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall furnish and install any
such cable, conduit, structural supports, insulation, and any other additional equipment required by the
system with additional cost, which approved by the Engineer.
1.6.3 In reference to inspection, all works rejected by the Engineer shall be repaired, corrected or replaced
at the Contractor's expense to attain good workmanship, and conform to the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. Therefore, ample time shall be provided for inspection and, if there is any defective
work re-inspection of the Engineer shall be performed. In the event that the Contractor should fail
to carry out necessary changes, then the Engineer shall have the right to make its own arrangement
at the Contractor's expense.
1.7 Shop Drawings
1.7.1 The Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings to the Engineer for approval at least 30 days
before starting the installation.
1.7.2 Size and scale of shop drawings shall be similar to the contract drawing, except for enlarge scale
details done for clarify, which shall be in conformity with international standard or as directed by the
Engineers.
1.7.3 All details of the installation of the electrical system, including the required clearance for accessibility,
shall be clearly indicated to avoid conflicts with other trades.
1.7.4 Shop Drawing shall have installation details such as:
(1) Installation detail for Low Voltage Switchgear.
(2) Routing and installation detail for Main Feeder Cable, Bus Way.
(3) Installation detail for Low Voltage Cable, Conduit and raceway.
(4) Installation detail for Lighting Fixtures, switches and outlets.
(5) Installation detail for Grounding and Lightning System.
(6) Installation detail for scope of works and CSC Requirement.
1.8 As-Built Drawings
1.8.1 The as-built drawings shall record all changes arising during the installation and shall detail all relevant
data concerning makes, types, numbers, capacities, sizes and quantities, etc.
1.8.2 Size and scale shall be similar to shop drawing. The complete set of as-built drawings shall be all of
the same size.
1.8.3 The Contractor shall submit reproducible drawings and CAD files (on DVD or better) to SRT.
1.9 Temporary Power Supply and Others
The Contractor shall connect electrical wires, telephone wires and water pipe for his own use at
suitable connection points and shall bear the expense of usage, which shall be removed upon
completion of sections of the Works.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Field Testing
1.1.1 Test all electrical equipment upon completion of installation to ensure that the equipment operates
satisfactorily and to conform to Contract Documents.
1.1.2 Field testing shall be required for all cables and electrical equipment furnished, installed or
connected by the Contractor to assure proper installation, setting, connection, and functioning in
accordance with the plans and specifications and manufacturer's recommendations.
1.1.3 Testing shall be conducted in the presence of the owner representative and, when necessary, under
the supervision of equipment manufacturer's field engineer.
1.1.4 All tests recommended by the equipment manufacturer whether specified in these Specifications or
not, shall be included, unless specifically waived by the Engineer.
1.1.5 Testing shall include any additional tests issued by the Engineer conditions to determine that
equipment, material and system meet requirements of these Specifications.
1.1.6 The Contractor shall maintain in quadruplicate a written record of all tests showing date, personnel
making test, equipment or material tested, tests performed and results. Two copies of test records
shall be given to the Engineer.
1.1.7 The Contractor shall notify the owner representative two weeks prior to commencement of any
testing, except for meggering.
1.1.8 Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to equipment or material due to improper test
procedures or test apparatus handling, and shall replace or restore to original condition any damaged
equipment or material.
1.1.9 Safety devices such as rubber gloves and blankets, protective screens and barriers, danger signs, etc.
shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be used to adequately protect and warn all personnel
in the vicinity of the tests.
1.1.10 The Contractor shall furnish all testing equipment, and furnish temporary power source of proper
type for testing purposes when normal supply is not available at the time of testing.
1.1.11 The conduit and wiring system shall be checked to ensure that the system has been installed in such
a way as to provide a safe and reliable system.
1.1.12 The lighting system shall be checked at night to ensure that illumination levels as specified have
been met.
1.1.13 All interlocks, control and alarm circuits shall be given an operation test (If any).
1.1.14 The insulation test of each conductor shall not be lower than the accepted level as required by
Authority concerned.
1.1.15 The grounding system test shall not be more than 5 ohms or EIT Standard 2001-56.
1.1.16 Test all miscellaneous equipment furnished by equipment manufacturer as recommended by the
manufacturer i. e. , circuit breaker, low voltage switchboard, motor ( if any) etc unless specifically
waived by the Engineer.
1.1.17 Include all additional tests issued by Engineer that he deems necessary because of field conditions,
to determine that equipment and material and systems meet requirements of these Specifications.
1.1.18 Be responsible for all damage to equipment or material due to improper test procedures or test
apparatus handling.
1.1.19 Cost incurred during testing, electricity, city water, labor, etc., shall be borne by the Contractor, unless
stated specifically otherwise in these Specifications or the Contract Documents.
1.2 Works to Completion
1.2.1 The Contractor shall commission, clean down, and leave in full working order the works as specified.
1.2.2 The Contractor shall operate the systems in such a manner to be able to and ready to operate at
full load anytime within a period of 24 consecutive hours. The cost incurred during this operation
shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.2.3 As the installation proceeds the Contractor shall prepare record drawings of the electrical installation,
as built drawing. It will be sufficient to modify these contract Drawings showing any amendments to
the services, which have taken place and submit the marked-up prints to the Engineer for approval.
The Contractor shall deliver to the owner representative on completion of the Works, manufacturer's
literature, specifications, technical information and record drawings for all equipment installed.
END
5.3.1 : DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1.1 General Requirements
This Specification describes the requirements for providing, installing a complete, testing, and
commissioning The Diesel Engine Generator
(1) The Contractor shall install the standby power systems including generator sets, associated
auxiliary, and control equipment. The generator shall provide back-up power for the emergency
power distribution system during utility or normal power outage.
(2) Power outage sensing, generator starting, transfer of load, re-transfer to normal power, and
engine cool down running time shall be a completely automated system and shall not require
attended operation.
(3) The capacity of generator set shall conform to ISO 8528 standard. The generator set shall be
capable of carrying rated full load in a single step in accordance with NFPA 110 for Level 1
systems.
(4) Both alternator and engine shall be mounted on a common base and shall be assembled by
the engine manufacturer.
1.2 Standards and References
The Diesel Engine Generator shall comply with the following codes and standards:
(1) EIT 112002-16 : Design and Installation Standard of Generator Set
(2) NFPA 110 : Standard For Emergency and Standby Power Systems
(3) BS 5000 : Rotating electrical machines of particular types or for
particular applications
(4) DIN 6271/VDE0530 : Reciprocating internal combustion engines;
performance; power tolerances; supplementary stipulations to DIN
ISO 3046 Part 1
(5) IEC 60034 : Rotating Electrical machines
(6) NEMA MG1-32 : Synchronous Generators
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the detailed technical data and catalogues of The Diesel Engine
Generator for approval before purchasing.
(2) The Contractor shall submit the installation details and routing plans of The Diesel Engine
Generator for approval before installation.
(a) Installation detail drawings of The Diesel Engine Generator (Dimension plan, sectional
view, required clearances and location of all associate equipment).
(b) Installation detail drawings of Cables & Raceways and its accessories connected with
The Diesel Engine Generator
(c) Installation and operation manuals
(3) Quality Assurance
3.1 The equipment manufacturer shall be the latest ISO 9001 certified.
3.2 The Contractor shall submit test certificates of equipment and materials issued by the
internationally recognized institutes, such as ASTA, LPCB, KEMA, TUV, etc accepted by
the Engineer.
3.3 The test certificates or reports submitted shall indicate the validating time which is still
effective during the date of approval.
3.4 The Contraction shall guarantee the quality and functioning of all installations included
in the Contract for a period of two (2) years after the acceptance date of complete
work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Materials
1.2.1 Technical Requirements
(a) Generator set powered : As indicated on Drawing and prime power in
accordance with ISO 8528 at 0.80 PF.
(b) Electrical system : 3-Phase, 4-Wire, 50Hz, 4-Pole, 1500rpm. TN-C or TN-S
or TN-C-S grounding system
(c) Governor regulation class : Compliance with ISO 8528 class G2
(d) Frequency regulation : Isochronous
(e) Random frequency variation : ± 0.5% (less than 66 kVA = ± 0.75%)
(f) Voltage Regulation; No Load to Full Load : ± 1% (less than 66 kVA = ± 2.5%)
(g) Random Voltage Variation : ± 1% (less than 66 kVA = ± 2.5%)
(h) Radio Frequency Emissions Compliance : BS EN 61000-6-4 and BS EN 61000-6-2
1.2.2 Diesel Engine
(1) The diesel engine shall be of direct injection, AC-Generator drive type (G-drive), cold starting, multi-
cylinder 1,500 rpm engine speed, prime rated power according to ISO 8528 with 10% overload
capability is available in accordance with ISO 3046, DIN 6271 and BS 5514.
(2) The diesel engine and AC generator shall be arranged to drive the alternator by SAE standard
housing and flexible disc direct coupling to AC generator with single bearing.
(3) The engine shall be furnished with the following components:
- Fuel service tank including level gauge, sufficient for at least 8-hour service under full
load or manufacturer standard.
- Speed changing device, manual-operated.
- Pumps for fuel oil and lubricating oil.
- Fuel and lubricating oil filters.
- Lubricating oil cooler.
- Pressure gauge for lubricating oil.
- Temperature gauge or thermometer, for outlet water in water cooling system.
- Cooling water circulating pumps, for water cooling system.
- Tachometer and service hour meter.
- Oil-bath air filter, or heavy-duty dry filter.
- Exhaust silencer for exhausting to the outside of the plant.
- Automatic shut down and audible alarm in case of over normal operation temperature,
and low oil pressure.
- Battery charger with ammeter.
- Other accessories according to the manufacturer's design.
(4) Starting device
- An electrical starting and automatic starting system shall be provided.
(5) Cooling system
- The engine shall be water-cooled with 50°C ambient radiator and fan or manufacturer
standard.
(6) Bearing
- The main and big end bearing shall be of shell type, easy for maintenance and
replacement.
(7) Governor
- The governor shall be isochronous to 5% droop speed regulation under varying loads
from no load to 100% full load with electronic governor type. with ± 5% speed trimmer
potentiometer.
- The governor shall be random speed variation not exceed ±0.25% of its mean value for
constant loads – no load to full load.
1.2.3 Alternator
The alternator shall be brushless single bearing, revolving field, IP23 screen protected type. The
synchronous alternator shall have two-end shield ball or roller bearing, special damper windings to
prevent flicker, and separated exciter. The alternator shall be specially designed for direct diesel
engine drive and protected against insects attacking the load wires.
Short-circuit : The alternator shall sustain a short-circuit current.
Stator : The stator frame shall be made of cast-iron or welded steel. The stator core
shall be made of specially selected sheet steel stamping of high permeability
and low hysteresis loss. Each stamping shall be insulated with varnish so that
the iron loss is reduced to a minimum.
Stator : The stator windings shall be 2/3 pitch and reconnect able
Field : The field windings shall be round or square conductors pre-insulated with
class H insulation.
Exciter system : Separately excited with Permanent Magnet Generator (PMG) (below 550
kVA standard in self-excited).
Insulation : The stator and rotor windings shall be insulated with insulation materials
of the highest quality fully capable of service under high humidity in
tropical condition Class H for the rotor and stator.
AVR : The Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) shall be 3-phase sensing, maintains
voltage output to within ±0.5% at any power factor between 0.8 and 1.0, any
variations from no load to full load, any variations from cold to hot and speed
droop variations up to 4.5%.
Voltage level : Terminal voltage adjustable within + 5% of rated voltage by voltage
trimmer potentiometer.
1.2.4 Control Board
(1) Each generator control board shall consist of:
- One triple pole molded case circuit breaker, undervoltage release, three-phase
overcurrent release, and auxiliary contacts for signal lamps.
- One AC voltmeter with a selector switch for measuring line and phase voltage.
- Three AC ammeters for measuring the current of each of the three phases,
- One three-phase, 4-wire indicating wattmeter for unbalanced load.
- One read-type frequency indicator, 47-53 Hz.
- All wirings of meters shall not be smaller than 2.5 SQ.MM. copper conductors or
manufacturer standard.
- One set of instrument fuses.
- Necessary instrument transformers and fuses of at least one set as spare to be included.
- Other accessories package in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.

(2) The engine control board shall provide protection and control of diesel engine with shutdown,
visual alarm indication and audible alarm activation as follows:
- Over crank.
- Low oil pressure.
- High engine temperature.
- Over speed.
- Under speed.
- Over voltage.
- Under voltage.
The above protection shall be provided individual volt-free contact and/or common alarm volt-free
contact according to BMS or/and SCADA required.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Installation
1.1.1 The engine and alternator shall be mounted on the same steel base frame and installed on
the concrete pad to be done by the Electrical Contractor by vibration isolators of spring type.
1.1.2 The exposed non- current carrying parts of the alternator and control board, which can be
accessible to persons and can become under tension to be grounded.
1.1.3 The incidental sundry components necessary for the complete execution of works and for
proper usage of the installation, whether or not these sundry components are mentioned in
details in the Specification shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor.
1.2 Testing and Commissioning
1.2.1 The Contractor shall carry out performance tests in the presence of the Engineer’s
Representative before handing over the installed system.
1.2.2 All modes of operations and each of equipment shall be tested and ascertained to be
functioning.
1.2.3 Test reports shall be submitted for approval prior to conducting an acceptance test. All
controls shall be checked. The performance of all equipment shall be tested to ascertain
they meet the specifications or applicable standards.
END
5.3.2 : UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

(1) The UPS system will be supplied and installed as indicated on the Drawings and will comply
with the Technical Specifications specified herein.
(2) The UPS system will be rated as indicated on the Drawings and fully operate according to the
requirements specified herein.
The UPS shall comply with the following International Standard.
(1) EIT Standard (2001-56): Standard for Electrical Installation
(2) IEC 60950-1 : Safety of information technology equipment
(3) EN/IEC 62040 : Uninterruptible power systems
 Part 1 General and safety requirement for UPS used in restricted assess location
 Part 2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements

 Part 3 Method of specifying the performance and test requirements
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the detailed technical data and catalogues of the UPS for approval
before purchasing.
(2) The Contractor shall submit the installation details and routing plans of the UPS for approval
before installation.
(a) Installation detail drawings of the UPS and Stationary Batteries (Dimension plan,
sectional view, required clearances and location of all associate equipment).
the UPS and Stationary Batteries.
(3) The Contractor shall submit calculation sheets for batteries capacity which is based on 25C
operating temperature
(4) The Contractor shall submit the battery de-rating curve and the life expectancy decreasing
data due to room temperature variation.
the Engineer.
5.4 All Printed Circuit Board (PCB) shall conform coating to protect dust from environment.
work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Materials
1.2.1 Description
(1) Normal Operation (input power present)
The rectifier/charger will obtain AC power from the input source and supply DC power to its
inverter with the float simultaneously charging the battery. The UPS inverter will directly
supply high quality power to all areas indicated on the Drawings and appropriate distribution
board schedules.
(2) Operation on Battery Power (input power outage)
Upon failure or excessive deterioration of the input AC source, the UPS inverters will
continuously supply AC for at least 15 minutes at full load or as shown on the Drawings in this
mode.
(3) Battery Recharge (input power restored)
When the input source is restored, the rectifier/charger will again power its inverter, without
interruption or disturbance to the speed drive system, while at the same time automatically
recharging the battery. The minimum recharging time after input power restore from final
battery end voltage should less than 12 hours to 90 % of fully state of charge.
(4) Automatic Bypass (static switch)
In the event of overload exceeding system capabilities (short-circuit, heavy inrush currents, etc) or
inverter shutdown (manual or automatic) the bypass transfer switch will instantaneously transfer
the Load to the bypass AC input source without interruption. The Load will be re-transferred back
to the UPS output either manually or automatically, without interruption, when suitable plant and
load conditions are restored.
(5) Manual Bypass (maintenance)
The UPS will include a built-in manually operated mechanical bypass system which incorporates a
system microprocessor for uninterrupted maintenance purposes.
The system will isolate the UPS module while continuing to supply power to the Load via the
bypass AC input source.
Transfer to the maintenance bypass will operate manually without interruption to the Load.
(6) Downgrade (operation without battery)
Circuit breakers will be provided for disconnection of the battery from the rectifier/charger and
inverters to facilitate maintenance.
1.2.2 Component
(1) Rectifier/Charger
The rectifier/Charger will be designed as rectifier IGBT modules to match input electrical
characteristics as follows: -
- Input Voltage : 400V ± 15%
- Input Frequency : 50Hz. ± 10%
- Input Power Factor : >0.95
- Input Current Distortion : ≤ 3%
(2) Inrush Current
A walk-in circuit will eliminate over currents during startup by imposing a gradual increase of
the rectifier/charger DC output voltage. Maximum inrush current less than nominal input
current
(3) Inverters
The UPS inverter free frequency chopping will be PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) or SVM (Space
Vector Modulation) IGBT component capable of accepting the output of the rectifier/charger
or emergency battery and providing an alternating current output
(a) Output Power
The inverters will supply power not less than rated as indicated at max. p.f. 1
(b) Output Voltage, transient and recovering
Transient 0-100% step load : 380V /220V± 2%
Steady state : 380V /220V± 1%
(return to ± 1% <100 ms)
(c) Output 100% Unbalanced Load : 380V ± 1.5% and 2 degree
(d) Output Frequency
Steady state : 50Hz. ± 2%
Free running : 50Hz. ± 0.1%
Slew rate (df/dt) : 1 Hz /sec. to 2 Hz/sec.
Adjustable according to programing.
With mains synchronization adjustable to: 0.5 Hz to 3 Hz.
(e) Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage (THDU)
When feeding the load, the output filter of the inverters unit will limit the total harmonic
distortion generated as follows: -
100% linear load (Phase to Phase) : max. 2%
100% non-linear load (Phase to Phase) : max. 5%
Overload Capacity : 125% for 10 min
150% for ≥30 sec
Crest factor : ≥ 3:1
Phase displacement : 2 degrees
Short circuit current limit : 2.7 In peak for 100msec
(4) Static Bypass Switch

The UPS will be provided with a single step static switch enabling instantaneous load transfer from
inverter to the bypass AC input source and vice-versa without interruption or disturbance provided
that the bypass source voltage and frequency are within the limits.
(5) UPS Capabilities
(a) Overload and Short circuit Capabilities
The UPS module shall be capable of supplying 125% for 10 min. and 150% for
≥30 sec during normal operation (input power present)
The inverters will be able to supply a current limitation in order to clear short
circuit faults.
(b) Overall Efficiency
The UPS module will operate at an overall system efficiency not less than 94%
non-linear load from full load.
(6) Controls and Monitors
(a) The UPS module will be microprocessor based control and indicating graphic display
panel with separated mimic diagram. All instrumentation, alarms and indicators showing
the operating of UPS module will be incorporated on the display panel. LED or LCD
alarm indications and graphic display will be installed at the standard front panel and
shall remain live even after the relevant module has been shut down and shall link all
UPS together to send UPS information to central PC for monitoring.
(b) All alarms and other indicators will maintain memory even reading to the last
500 events after the failure of the relevant module and be able to remote
diagnostic by a central supervisory computer console.
(c) The display unit on the UPS module will indicate at least the following
information:
- Automatic Battery Test
- Battery test procedure (to evaluate remaining life of battery)
- Real time battery protection time
- Low battery shutdown imminent
- Position of switching devices.
(d) Metering
The display will indicate the following measurements:
- Inverters output line-to-line voltages, line to neutral voltage
- Inverters output currents
- Inverters output frequency
- Voltage across battery terminals

- Battery charge or discharge current
- Battery discharge time
- Normal AC input source line-to-line voltages, line-to-neutral voltage.
- Rectifier/Charger input currents
- Output power
- Crest factor
An audible alarm will warn of the existence of faults, malfunctions or operation
on battery power.
The system will be equipped with an alarm reset button.
(7) Environmental Conditions.
The UPS system will be capable of operating under the following environmental
conditions without degradation of its characteristics.
- Ambient temperature : 0 to 40 degree (C)
- Maximum relative humidity : 90% without condensation at ambient
temperature
- Maximum elevation : 1000 meters without de-rating
1.3 Control and Annunciation System
1.3.1 The UPS shall incorporate the necessary control, instruments and annunciation to perform the
completed function and to allow the operator to monitor the system status and performance as well
as to take any appropriate action.
1.3.2 The control and annunciation system shall be micro-processor based control which complete with
LCD display or graphic touch screen for monitoring of events and measured values.
1.3.3 The visible and audible alarm for the UPS shall be provided.
1.3.4 The minimum requirement of the measuring values for monitoring shall be as listed:
(1) Input : Voltage, Current, Frequency, Power
(2) Output : Voltage, Current, Frequency, Power
(3) Battery Output : Voltage, Current
(4) BYPASS : Voltage, Frequency
1.3.5 The minimum requirement of the status and alarm for monitoring shall be as listed:
(1) Rectifier : Off, Over Temperature, Failure
(2) Inverter : Off, Over Temperature, Failure
(3) Battery : On Load, Over Temperature
(4) Load on Bypass
(5) Overload
1.4 STATIONARY VALVE REGULATED LEAD ACID BATTERY (VRLA BATTERY)
1.4.1 General Requirements
(1) The VRLA BATTERY system will be supplied and installed as indicated on the Drawings
and will comply with the Technical Specifications specified herein.
(2) The VRLA BATTERY system will be rated as indicated on the Drawings and fully operated
according to the requirements specified herein.
1.4.2 Warranty
(1) All parts of the equipment and its accessories including installation shall be guaranteed
by the Contractor for at least two (2) years after handover.
(2) The life time of each battery shall be at least 10 years at 25C with five (5) years product
warranty.
1.4.3 Description
(a) The battery set will be maintenance-free sealed lead acid (VRLA) type with 10 years plus
for float (application at 25 degree Celsius) operation or manufacturer standard.
(b) Back up time of the battery will be not less than 15 minutes at full load condition at
load PF 1.
(c) Case : Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM)
(d) Case and cover Material : Flame-retardant, Polypropylene or ABS.
(e) Battery standard following IEC 60896 part 21/22 and UL94 V-O
1.4.4 Installation
After the completion of the manufacturing of the VRLA BATTERY before shipment, the equipment will be
tested at the supplier’s plant in accordance with the Manufacturing and Inspection Plan, as provided by
the Company quality assurance system and manual that relates to the ISO 9001 standard. A certified test
report showing that the equipment has passed the factory test and has demonstrated the full output
rating required by the Specification will be submitted promptly after completion of the test and before
shipment to site.
1.4.5 Testing and Commissioning
(1) Recording the standard types of test necessary to demonstrate that VRLA BATTERY has
been installed and tested in accordance with the tender specification and complete
systems in accordance with user requirements, included dummy load test at field to
conform performance and operation.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Installation
1.1.1 The Contractor shall install the equipment and accessories in accordance with approved shop
drawings and manufacturer’s instructions.
1.1.2 All final connections, testing, adjustments and calibrations shall be made under the direct
supervision of a factory-trained technician of the system supplier or as directed by the Engineer.
functioning.
controls shall be checked. The performance of all equipment shall be tested to ascertain
they meet the specifications or applicable standards.
END
5.3.3 : AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
The Contractor shall furnish and install the automatic transfer switch described or indicated on the
Drawings and requirements specified herein.
1.2 Technical Requirements
The automatic transfer switches shall comply with the following codes and standards.
1.2.1 For ATS  500A.

(1) IEC 60947-6-1 : Low Voltage Switch and Controlgear: Multifunction
equipment, Automatic Transfer Switching equipment
(2) UL 1008 : Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment
(3) NFPA110 : Emergency and Standby Power System
(4) NFPA70 : National Electrical Code
1.2.2 For ATS  500A.
(1) IEC 60947-3 : Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 3 “ Switch, disconnectors,
switch- disconnectors and fuse-combination units
(2) IEC 60947-6-1 : Low-voltage Switchgear and Controller - Multifunction equipment -
Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment Class PC
The ATS and microcontroller shall be from the same manufacturer, completely factory assembled
and tested by manufacturer for Europe or America and distributor shall be prepared to submit a
certified letter testifying to this condition. Manufacturer for ATS shall perform a complete routine test
as per the above standards and prior to shipping from the factory or a certified test IEC 60947-6-1
report shall be submitted for approval
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data and catalogues of the automatic transfer
switch and associated accessories for approval prior to purchase.
(2) The Contractor shall prepare and submit the installation details and layout plan of the
automatic transfer switch for approval prior to installation.
internationally recognized institutes, such as ASTA, LPCB, KEMA, TUV, UL, DEMKO etc.
either or standard accepted by the Engineer.
3.4 The Contraction shall guarantee the quality and functioning of all installations included in
the Contract for a period of two (2) years after the acceptance date of complete work.
3.5 The distributor shall be certified by manufacturer and provide official distributor
certificate to guaranty for after sales service and spare part and distributor shall be
prepared to submit a certified letter.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Description
The Automatic Transfer Switches shall have the characteristics as follows;
Number of pole : 3 or 4 pole as indicated on drawing
Rated Voltage : 230V/400V
System Voltage : 220V/380V
Rated Frequency : 50 Hz.
Rated Continuous Current : As indicated on Drawings
1.2 For ATS  500A.
The automatic transfer switches shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with UL 1008
and IEC60947-6-1.
The Automatic Transfer Switches shall be of double throw construction and electrically operated by
solenoid mechanism, momentarily energized in the event of normal supply failure, and can also be
operated manually in the event of control circuit failure. The manual operated shall be 2-positions
(Normal and Emergency).
1.2.1 Component
(1) Automatic transfer switch shall be 4 poles solenoid operated double throw switch type
with 100% rated for both normal utility power source and emergency engine generator
power source and shall be electrically and manually operated, off their respective
power sources, as a common transfer mechanism to provide double throw switching
action. Microprocessor control panel shall be the same manufacturer as automatic
transfer switch.
(2) During transferring from one active source to the other active one, the neutral of the
load shall not be break or caused the connection of line to line voltage to the load.
The purpose is to avoid high transient voltage which can cause damage to the system.
(3) Transfer mechanism shall electrically operated and mechanically held by own structure,
to prevent load circuits from being connected simultaneously to the normal utility and
emergency (engine generator set) power sources.
(4) Each transfer switch shall be provided with normal utility 3 phase voltage monitoring
circuits of the closed differential type, field adjustable up to not less than110% for
overvoltage and 75-98% for under voltage of normal utility voltage, in any phase and
to pick up when normal utility voltage returns to 90 percent in all 3 phases, dropout
shall be set to 5 - 20 percent.
(5) The voltage monitoring circuits shall also include adjustable time delays for dropout
and pickup, dropout shall be adjustable in range of 0 to 6 seconds and after time period
a signal shall be provided to the master station start circuit controls, pickup shall be
adjustable in range of 0 to 10 minutes and after time period the switch shall
automatically retransfer to the normal utility power source.
(6) To avoid inrush current of re-transfer to utility and cause a nuisance tripping, an in-phase
monitor feature shall be provided in the control panel. The control panel and ATS shall
be from the same manufacturer.
(7) Each transfer switch shall be provided with position indicating lamps plus a test switch
to simulate failure of the normal utility power source. Transfer switches shall not
automatically transfer to the emergency power source unless emergency power source
voltage is established as sensed by three phase voltage monitors. Each transfer switch
shall include an indicating lamp that shall illuminate when normal utility voltage is
available
1.3 For ATS  500A.
The transfer switches unit shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The electrical
operator shall be a motorized unit or a single solenoid mechanism, momentarily energized. Main
operators which include over current disconnect devices will not be accepted. The transfer switches
shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two possible positions, normal or emergency.
The transfer switches shall ensure stability of the contact, and position must be unaffected by
momentary outages or vibration so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and
temperature rise at the contacts is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life. There should
be no power consumption while in a stable position.
1.3.1 All main contacts shall be silver plated.

(1) Maintenance of the controller or motorization unit shall be possible without
disconnection of the power conductors. It shall be done in less than 10 minutes.
(2) A manual operating handle made of one piece only shall be provided for emergency
transfer purposes. The handle shall be easy to find and easy to operate for maximum
efficiency during power outages. Manual transfer shall be possible on load.
(3) For ATS < 500A. A visible Automatic-to-Manual selector key shall be accessible on the
front part of the device, to inhibit automation during manual operation (handle in place)
or in padlocked position. Access to manual operation must be prohibited in automatic
or padlocked position.
(4) For ATS < 500A. A padlocking mechanism shall be accessible on the switch, enabling
up to three lockers to be installed on the switch to ensure that only authorized
personnel can use the transfer switches unit. The padlocking shall be possible in the
three positions: Mains, Emergency and 0 position.
(5) Opening and closing of the contacts must be fast and independent from the automatic
driving mechanism.
1.3.2 ATS CONTROLLER
(1) The control unit shall direct operation of the changeover switch. The controller’s
sensing and logic shall be a built-in microprocessor for maximum reliability, minimum
maintenance and inherent serial communication capabilities.
(2) A security password is required for programming access.
(3) An adjustable timer of 0 to 6 seconds shall be provided to detect priority network
failure, to override any transient outages of the normal supply.
(4) Once the generator set supply is available, a timer of 0 to 60 seconds shall be provided
to validate the stability of emergency network before transfer.
(5) An adjustable timer of 0 to 30 minutes shall be provided to detect priority network
return to normal, to override any false availability of the normal supply.
(6) For ATS < 500A. While transferring to back to primary source, a possibility to stay in
position 0 shall be provided from 0 to 20 seconds.
(7) An adjustable timer of 0 to ≥10 minutes shall be provided to allow the generator
cooling down after load retransfer from standby source to mains source.
(8) The controller shall provide a relay contact for starting of the generator set.
(9) The controller shall provide relay contacts to indicate the power source that the ATS is
connected.
(10) The controller shall provide the possibility to run a test on load by simulating a normal
source failure to check if the transfer sequence will occur correctly.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Installation
functioning.
controls shall be checked. The performance of all equipment shall be tested to ascertain they
meet the specifications or applicable standards.
1.2.4 The complete ATS shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation of the individual
components and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure that the operating
transfer time, voltage, frequency and time delay settings are in compliance with the
specification requirements.
END
5.3.4 : MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD (MDB)

(1) This specification describes the requirements for the design, manufacture, testing, supply
erection, installation, commissioning and handing over in satisfactory operating condition of
Main Distribution Board (MDB) or LV switchboard (LVSB)
Unless indicated otherwise, the Main Distribution Board or LV switchboard shall be type tested
switchboard Design Verification by Test (TTA) and for the Distribution Board (Wall mount Type
and Panel) (DB) or LV distribution board shall be the local switchboard.
All drawings covering the design and construction shall be prepared to the satisfaction of the
Employer’s Representative.
This specification defines requirements that shall apply to prefabricated low voltage switchgear
assemblies. It defines the basic features of the equipment and the requirement that
manufacturers shall fulfil in order to provide equipment manufactured and tested in
accordance with International Electro technical Standards (IEC)
The manufacturer who designed the equipment and who confirmed the performances through
certified design & type tests has also the authority to licence or delegate the assembly of this
equipment to assembly manufacturers (panel builders). In such case, the assembly
manufacturer (panel builder) presenting the equipment for tender shall demonstrate its
connection to the original manufacturer, by means of an Technical guide, Assembly Guide,
Quality guide, Annual audit report and Licence Audit certificate in all 5 year ago to present.
for the category of duty specified will be considered providing all certification is valid for the
type tested assembly.
Manufacturer is TTA Main LV Distribution Board assemblies by manufactured in Thailand only
(Local Manufacturer) under licensed from original Manufacturer more along than 10 year and
present all document in approve process.
((2 The Contractor shall furnish and install the Main Distribution Boards or Low Voltage Switch
Board (LVSB or MDB), Air Condition Motor Control Center Board (MCCB) and Sanitary Motor
Control Center Board (SMCC) completed with associated equipment as described or indicated
on the Drawings and requirements specified herein.
(3) The switchboard assemblies manufactured in Thailand shall be latest ISO 9001 certified and
also be the standard factory which continues produce and/or assembly the low voltage
switchboard compliance to IEC 61439-1 & 2.
The Main Distribution Boards shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(2) NFPA 70 : National Electrical Code
(3) IEC : International Electro Technical Commission
1.2.1 The main switchboard current rated  1000 A
(1) The switchboard shall comply with IEC 61439-1 & 2 and complete with panel builder
License or original manufacturer issued by an international independent third party testing
authority. Each certificate shall be complete with successfully verified 12 design
requirements separated into two main parts; ‘construction’ and ‘performance’. The
characteristics of certificate shall conform to performance as indicated on the Drawing,
application, cabling installation and specification requirements. The certificate shall
include testing with enclosure, structure frame, busbar, circuit breaker and accessories.
(2) The switchboard shall be standard product and/or assembled under License or Verified
Assemblies product and shall have certificates for all ranges of current rating and
temperature rise, degree of protection (IP), 3-condition short-circuit withstand strength
(Icw, Ipk and Icc), effectiveness of the protective circuit, clearances and creepage
distances, dielectric properties, mechanical operation its as indicated on above item.
(3) All circuit breakers in a switchboards shall be of the same manufacturer and in
accordance with type tested certificate.
(4) The Contractor shall provide for Documentation of verifications to Owner
Representative at least but not limit to the following:
- Design Verification to be performed Design verification shall be achieved by the
application of one or more of the following equivalent and alternative methods
as appropriate: testing, calculation, physical measurement or the validation of
design rules.The verification process consists of two elements:
- Design Verification – performed once on a representative sample or samples of
a PSC Assembly to confirm the design complies fully with the requirements of
the standard.
- Routine Verification – undertaken on every PSC Assembly produced; is intended
to detect faults in materials and workmanship and to ascertain proper functioning
of the manufactured PSC Assembly.
- Certified Test Reports shall be submitted before manufactured.The low-voltage
electrical switchboard must be a Type Tested Assembly, compliant with IEC
61439-1/2. The switchboard type-test certificates shall be originated by a
worldwide known third-party certification organization follow up item Testing
laboratory.The supplier should be able to provide several certificates (not only
one) upon request during the project, with a specific focus to prove that a
switchboard has been tested with characteristics close to the object of this
project. Certificates for high current testing will not be accepted as proof of the
whole system compliance with IEC61439-1/2. These certificates should either
reflect the switchboard characteristics or allow understanding on how these
characteristics are reached. In this second case, the manufacturer shall be able
to show design tables (such as de-rating or co-ordination tables) formally
originated from the switchboard original manufacturer. The selected switchgear
and control gear brands shall be equal to the ones mentioned in the type tests
reports of the equipment. The test reports shall be written to the name of the
original manufacturer who designed the switchboard system
The certificate shall be completed with below:-
IEC61439- Verification options available

1&2 Verificatio Verificatio
Verificatio
No. Characteristics to be verified clauses or n by n by
n by
sub calculatio design
testing
clauses n rules
Verification of construction
1 Strength of material and parts including: 10.2
- Resistance to corrosion 10.2.2 YES NO NO
- Thermal stability 10.2.3.1 YES NO NO
- Resistance of insulating materials to 10.2.3.2 YES NO NO
normal heat
- Resistance to abnormal heat and fire due 10.2.3.3 YES NO NO
to internal electric effects
- Resistance to ultra-violet (UV) radiation 10.2.4 YES NO NO
- Lifting 10.2.5 YES NO NO
- Mechanical impact 10.2.6 YES NO NO
- Marking 10.2.7 YES NO NO
2 Degree of protection of enclosures 10.3 YES NO YES
3 Clearances and creep age distances 10.4 YES YES YES
4 Protection against electric shock and 10.5
integrity of protective circuits including:
- Effective continuity between the exposed 10.5.2 YES NO NO
conductive parts of the ASSEMBLY and the
protective circuit
- Effectiveness of the assembly for external 10.5.3 YES YES YES
faults
5 Incorporation of switching devices and 10.6 NO NO YES
components
6 Internal electrical circuits and connections 10.7 NO NO YES
7 Terminals for external conductors 10.8 NO NO YES
Verification of performance
8 Dielectric properties including: 10.9
- Power-frequency withstand voltage 10.9.2 YES NO NO
- Impulse withstand voltage 10.9.3 YES NO YES
9 Temperature-rise limits 10.10 YES YES YES
10 Short-circuit withstand strength 10.11 YES YES YES
11 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 10.12 YES NO YES
12 Mechanical operation 10.13 YES NO NO
Technical Requirements
The low voltage switchboard shall have the electrical characteristics as follows:
Functions and characteristics Requirement a)

Electrical system
 Earthing system TN-S or TN-C or TN-C-S as indicated on
drawing.
 Rated voltage Un (Volts) 3Ph., 4W, 400/230 Vac
 Overvoltage category IV (if at the origin of the installation)
 Rated frequency ƒn (Hz) 50Hz
Short circuit withstand capability
 Prospective short-circuit current at supply Conditioned by circuit breakers as
terminals Icp (kA) indicated on drawing.
 Prospective short-circuit current in the neutral 60% of phase values
 Prospective short-circuit current in the protective 60% of phase values
Circuit
 Short-circuit protective device (SCPD) in the incoming As indicated on drawing
functional unit
 Co-ordination of short-circuit protective devices As indicated on drawing
including external short-circuit protective device
details.
 Data associated with loads likely to contribute to As indicated on drawing
the short-circuit current
Protection of persons against electric
shock in accordance with IEC 60364-4-
41
 Type of protection against electric shock – Basic IP2X barriers or enclosures according to
protection (protection against direct contact) IEC61439-1 § 8.4.2
 Type of protection against electric shock – Fault Insulation fault protection with ELCB as
protection (protection against indirect contact) indicated on drawing.
Installation environments
 Location type Indoor
 Protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies and IP 31 indoor
ingress of liquid
 External mechanical impact (IK) Not required, not positioned in a
 NOTE 3 IEC 61439-1 does not nominate specific IK vulnerable location
Codes
 Resistance to UV radiation (applies for outdoor According to ISO 4892-2, ISO178 and ISO
assemblies only unless specified otherwise) 179 for outdoor application.
 Resistance to corrosion According to IEC 60068 and IEC61439-1 §
10.2.2 Severity test A standard.
 Ambient air temperature – Lower limit Indoor: –5 °C
 Ambient air temperature – Upper limit 40 °C
 Ambient air temperature – Daily average maximum 35 °C

 Maximum relative humidity Indoor: 50 % @ 40 °C
 Pollution degree Industrial: 3
 Altitude ≤ 2 000 m
 EMC environment Environment B
Installation methods
 Type Indoor Cubicle
 Portability Floor fixed
 Maximum overall dimensions and weight As manufacturer’s standard
 External conductor type(s) PVC insulation cables as indicated on
drawing
 Direction(s) of external conductors In bottom, out top and front access
 External conductor material Cu
 External phase conductor, cross sections, and As indicated on drawing
terminations
 External PE, N, PEN conductors cross sections, and As indicated on drawing
terminations
 Special terminal identification requirements L1, L2, L3, N, PE
Storage and handling
 Maximum dimensions and weight of transport units Manufacturer’s transport
 Methods of transport (e.g. forklift, crane) Manufacturer’s transport
 Environmental conditions different from the Same above condition
service Conditions
 Packing details Manufacturer’s standard
Operating arrangements
 Access to manually operated devices Front manually operated with IP31,
through door installation for ACBs and
toggle handle through door installation for
MCCBs.
 Isolation of load installation equipment items Key locking on ‘OPENED’ position for ACBs
and toggle handle with removable
padlock for MCCBs as required on drawing.
Maintenance and upgrade capabilities
 Requirements related to accessibility in service by Manufacturer’s standard
ordinary persons; requirement to operate devices
or change components while the ASSEMBLY is
energised
 Requirements related to accessibility for inspection Only when isolated
and similar operations
 Requirements related to accessibility for Only when isolated
maintenance in service by authorized persons

 Requirements related to accessibility for extension Connection of cables only
in service by authorized persons
 Method of functional units connection Only when isolated
 Protection against direct contact with hazardous Only when isolated
live internal parts during maintenance or upgrade
(e.g. functional units, main busbars, distribution
busbars)
Current carrying capability
 Rated current of the assembly InA (amps) As indicated on drawing
 Rated current of circuits Inc (amps) Form 3b
 Rated diversity factor As indicated on drawing and
manufacturer’s standard general
arrangement CB installation
 Ratio of cross sectional area of the neutral As product standard 100%
conductor to phase conductors: phase conductors
up to and including 16 sq.mm.
 Ratio of cross sectional area of the neutral Manufacturer’s standard
conductor to phase conductors: phase conductors
above 16 sq.mm.
1.2.2 The main switchboard current rated less than 1000 A

1.2.2.1 Main Distribution Board (MDB): Each board shall be at least 3 compartments as
follow:
(1) Circuit Breaker Compartment
(2) Metering & Control Compartment: For installing equipment, instrument, Protection
device, Terminal block for control system, and alarms. Generally, these
compartments are provided on the upper parts of switch boards and the height is
not less than 300 mm
(3) Busbar Compartment: The compartment for installing Busbars both Horizontal
and Vertical Busbars. Normally, these are behind the Main Switch Board
(4) The structure of Distribution Board shall be Self-Standing Metal Structure. The
structure which is reinforced shall be Al-Zn. Electro Galvanized Steel Sheet, and
all covers including all partitions shall be Al-Zn Electro Galvanized Steel Sheet.
The thickness shall be not less than 1.2 mm. Each of covers and partitions of
Distribution Board shall be as the followings:
(4.1) Top cover shall be a steel sheet with edges folded up. There are at least
2 sheets by one sheet is used for specially covering at CABLE
COMPARTMENT and hold on with Distribution Board structure by screws
or bolts as suitable size and quantity for strong strength
(4.2) Bottom cover shall be a flat steel sheet. Cover feature and holding with the
structure of Distribution Board shall be same as the top cover.
(4.3) Side cover, 2 sheets, shall be flat steel sheets or edge folded up steel
sheets which folded in each sheet holding with Distribution Board
Structure together with screws and bolts as suitable size and quantity
for strong strength. In each case which used various parts of Switch
Boards (Vertical Section) tiled together shall apply partitions which are
flat steel sheets between parts with connected through holes. It shall
use covers between the flat steel sheets partitions instead with the
suitable amount of connected through holes.
(4.4) Back cover shall be edge folded up steel sheets. One side hold one Switch
Board structure with Removable Pin Hinges for convenience of open and
remove. Another side is Screw Lock or Key Lock except, in case of no
inspection and maintenance of the Switch Board in the back cover. The
back cover is same as the front cover.
(4.5) Back cover shall be edge folded up steel sheets by holding with Removable
Pin Hinges. Another size shall be Key Lock cover for Metering & Control
Compartment to be individual cover.
(5) Distribution Board Assembly shall regard to natural heat ventilation method inside
the equipment. The same may drill ventilation fragment on one side or many
sides sufficiently together with insect screen.
(6) All inside steel sheets shall be Al-Zn coated steel sheet or Electro Galvanized
steel sheet. Rust protection and power coating of the Al-Zn coated steel for
all outside cover is for corrosion protection, and color code should coat with
light grey color. (Specified color as owner approved)
(7) The panel shall be IP Class Protection of IP 31 or as specified on the Drawings,
and increased temperature inside the panel shall not excess the limit of the
equipment inside the panel.
(8) For Main Circuit Breaker, shall provide inside the cabinet as 1 cabinet per 1 section
to protect heat’s accumulating in the cabinet.
(9) The installed Feeder Circuit Breaker shall regard to the cables which out from CB
and each section to limit the number of the cables.
(10) The cabinet shall be sufficiency strength, and It does not bend during normal
using and short circuit. There is short circuit calculation lists which follow IEC 865-
1 or VDE-0102 or DIN 57102 Standard for low voltage switch board with Shop
Drawing for approval
(11) Mimic Diagram shall be installed at the cabinet and show Single Line Diagram of
system
(12) All cabinet’s covers shall install a ground cables which made from plated Copper
strand and connect to the cabinet’s ground
1.2.2.2 All equipment inside low voltage switch board shall be the following:
(1) Busbar shall be Copper which its purity is not less than 98%, and its size shall
have a current capacity as IEC 61439-2 Standard, and according to MEA or PEA
standard. However, the main busbar at Phase-, Neutral-, and Ground-Bus size
shall not be smaller than the specified in the drawing
(2) The main busbar size shall be as specified in the drawing and shall not reduce
the cabinet’s size utterly
(3) Busbar as specified in the drawing shall be Tinned Cu Busbars, and have
features as the followings.
(3.1) The Purity of Coating Material : Tin anode, 99.5% up

(3.2) Coating Thickness : ≥ 5 microns
(3.3) Having Tin Thickness Test Certificate from manufacture
(4) Busbar arrangement both Phase-To-Phase and Phase-To-Ground shall be
provided as the Live Part, and the distance between them shall be not less
than the specified in the standard.
(5) Busbar’s Holders shall be Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester or Epoxy Resin consist
of 2 pieces attached with the bus bar by bolt and nut together with electrical
insulated spacer. Materials which are Bakelite or Phennoics are not allow to be
or instead electrical insulation utterly.
(6) Busbar and Busbar Holders shall have technical information and results from
the calculation to express that they can withstand any forces from maximum
short circuit current with any damages including bolts and nuts shall also be
endured those forces as well.
(7) Wires for control system and instrument which connect between electrical
equipment and electrical equipment, and between electrical equipment and
terminal block shall be Flexible Annealed Copper 1000/750 Volts , 105°C,(IEC
60228 Class 5&6), PVC Insulated. At terminal point of the equipment shall be
used suitable lugs. Sizes of cable shall conduct the current as required, but it
shall not be smaller the followings:
- Current Circuit : 4 SQ.MM.
- Voltage Circuit : 2.5 SQ.MM.
- Control Circuit : 2.5 SQ.MM.
- Ground for door : 10 SQ.MM.
(8) All electrical wire shall be placed in Trunk (Trunking) or Flexible Conduit to
protect insulation of each wires which are connected between the said point.
Cut and connect wire are prohibit.
(9) The two side ends of all electrical wire shall be marked by WireMark with its
casing or sleeves to be difficult of loosing
(10) Mimic Bus in front of the cabinet shall be made of color plastic plates which
are clearly visible, composes to be Schematically Form 15 mm. width and 3
mm. thickness.
(11) All Nameplate shall be as specified in the drawing. The nameplate shall be
made from 2 layers plastic sheets. The outer shall be black, and the inner
shall be white. All graven alphabets shall be on the black plastic in order to
show, when the plastic have been composed, the all white alphabets will
appear as in the drawings
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the certificates, technical data, and catalogues of the low voltage
switchboard and associated accessories for approval prior to proceeding purchasing order.
(2) The Contractor shall prepare and submit the installation details and location plans of the
switchboard for approval prior to proceeding installation.
(3) The Contractor shall submit short circuit and coordination pattern along the protective lines
in low voltage main switchboards as shown in the Drawings for approval prior to energizing
power.
(4) he License or Verified Assemblies certification shall be indicated the recent valid date in the
year of approval, standard assemblies condition of product to proceed purchasing.
internationally recognized institutes, such as ASTA, LPCB, KEMA, TUV, etc. accepted by
the Engineer.
work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Main Switchboard
(1) The main switchboard shall be of modular design, floor- standing, electro- galvanized
steel. The cubicles shall have a door on the front in which operating mechanism are
mounted.
(2) The main switchboard shall have a 50-60 microns coating thickness with polyester epoxy
powder at high temperature both inside and outside surface of the cubicle. The
resistance to corrosion shall be in compliance with IEC 60068. The first coat shall be
rust inhibiting primer and the final one, light grey (RAL 7035) or cream (RAL 7032).
2.1.2 Busbars
(1) All current carrying conductors shall be copper with surface protection as indicated on
the Drawing, The conductivity of conductors shall not be less than 98% of IACS. Busbars
shall be permanently labeled by phase for identification of each phase, neutral and
protective earthing conductor as follows;
- Phase A : L1
- Phase B : L2
- Phase C : L3
- Neutral : N
- Earthing : PE / Green with Yellow strip.
(2) The main or horizontal busbars.
- The main busbars shall be arranged horizontally throughout N - L1 – L2 – L3
front to rear, positioned at the top for bottom cable entry or positioned at the
bottom for top cable entry and through left to right fully rated current to permit
future additions.
- The main busbars shall have a continuous current rating not less than that of the
main breaker, and the individual unit buses shall have a current rating not less
than those of the feeders. All buses shall be braced and supported for the
maximum allowable fault current of the incoming breakers.
- The busbars shall be mechanically braced to withstand the maximum
symmetrical short- circuit current rating of the main breaker in each assembly.
The busbars shall have sufficient cross- sectional area to continuously conduct
rated full load current as specified on the Drawing and limit temperature rise not
more than that specified in IEC61439-1 clauses 9.2., Table 6 at 40°C max. ambient
temperature and 35°C for average ambient temperature in 24hours.
(3) The distribution or vertical busbars.
- The distribution bus shall be connected to the mains bus. The distribution bus
shall be arranged through vertical top to bottom throughout N – L1 – L2 – L3
front to rear and installed within distribution bus compartment, positioned at the
left or right of functional unit compartment.
- The distribution bus shall have a continuous current rating not less than that of
the total of feeder circuit breakers.
(4) The neutral bus shall be full size of phase bus, arranged as main bus and distribution
bus. The neutral bus shall have each circuit breaker. Bolted type terminal lugs shall be
furnished for connecting the neutral bus to the incoming and outgoing cables.
(5) An earth or ground bus shall be sizing according to type tested certificate and not less
than 50% of 3-phase fault short circuit withstand at 0.5sec. The ground bus shall be
furnished to the entire length of the switchboard. All switchboard equipment requiring
grounding shall be connected to this bus
(6) All joints shall be securely tightened to manufacturer’s standards for each size of hardware.
Bolts, nuts, and washers for buses connection shall be high tension class and the contact
point between buses and terminal pad shall be electrical compound painted
(7) Busbar holders shall be of fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) type or Epoxy-resin or
manufacturer’s recommendation. The horizontal main and distribution bus bar
supports, connections, and joints shall be bolted to be free of required periodic
maintenance. The busbar supports shall be formed of high-dielectric strength and low
moisture absorption molded compound with the high impact strength. The type of
busbar support, support to support distance and phase distance shall be same type
tested low voltage switchboard recommended
2.1.3 All front plates for mounting meters, selector switches or other front mounted devices shall
be hinged with all wiring installed and laced with flexibility at the hinged side. The back closure
plate shall also be hinged type and other closure plates shall be screw removable and small
enough for easy handling by one man.
2.1.4 The form separation shall be form 3b, control and metering shall be separated from the
switchboard compartment. Each compartment as mentioned above shall have IP2X with sheet
metal safety partition with minimum thickness not less than 1.6 mm. All incomer shall be
separated from outgoing.
2.1.5 Ventilating louvers where required shall be provided on the sides and backs of panels and
shall be have approved design. All louvers shall be screened.
2.1.6 Metering and controls compartment shall be separated for power compartment, for installation of
measurement, protective devices and also include terminal block for control and alarm cable
termination. Generally, this compartment is located at the top level of the panels
2.1.7 Mimic diagram shall be plastic strip adhered on the front of the panel showing single line
diagram of the system. Mimic bus shall be approximate 3 mm. thick and 10 mm. wide.
2.1.8 The switchboard shall contain all necessary relays, meters, control switches, and other equipment
necessary for protection and normal control of the main breakers and feeder breakers.
2.1.9 The Switchboard shall be completely self-supporting structure of the required number of
vertical sections bolted together to form a single metal switchboard It can be easily separated
from one another and each vertical section shall be in the range of 600-1,200mm wide, 400-
1,200m deep and 2,000-2,200mm high
2.1.10 The top, sides and rear cover plates shall be removable and attached to the frame with
rustproof screws. The front doors shall be attached the frame with the hidden hinged and
approved keys providing easy opening to the doors
2.1.11 All steel parts of the panel shall be completely dry and chemically clean before coating with
the non-rusting primer and not less than two stove enamel-coating finished on top both inside
and outside.
2.1.12 A flexible ground strap shall be not less than 10 sq.mm. and connect all removable doors to
the frame.
2.2 Circuit Breaker
(1) All circuit Breakers shall conform to IEC60947-1, and IEC60947-2 standards
(2) Air circuit breaker and/or molded case circuit breakers shall be provided as shown on the
Drawings.
(3) Air circuit breaker (if applied) shall have the following characteristics:
- Number of poles : As indicated in the Drawings.
- Continuous rated current : As indicated in the Drawings.
- Icu :  50 kA. (or as shown on the Drawing)
- Ics : 100% of Icu
- Short circuit withstand : Icw at 1 Sec.
- Fixed type or draw-out type : As specified on the Drawing.
- Spring charging can be operated by either manual or motorized: As shown on the
Drawings.
- 2 steps of operating mechanism :
Step 1 Charge closing spring. (can be operated by either manual or motorized): As
Step 2 After the spring is fully charged, press button at the front of circuit breaker to
close the circuit breaker contacts.
- “ON” indicator, “TEST” indicator, and “OFF” indicator shall be installed at the front of circuit
breaker (only draw-out type) to indicate position status of the circuit breaker.
- Interlocks shall be provided which will prevent connecting the breaker to, or removing
it from, the bus stabs unless the breaker is OPEN (tripped).
- All spare contacts on breaker position switches and auxiliary relays shall be wired to
accessible terminal blocks.
- The circuit breakers as shown on the Drawing to provide status send to Building
Management System shall be provided with 4 N.O and 4 N.C auxiliary contacts.
- Geared motor for automatic charging of closing spring shall be provided. The motor
charges the closing springs again immediately after the circuit breaker has closed.
- The closing springs can, however, be charged manually (using the relative operating
mechanism lever) in the event of a power supply failure or during maintenance work.
- The circuit breaker can install with accessories or devices (if shown in the Drawing) as
listed below:
o Auxiliary Switch
o Time Delay Under-Voltage Trip
o Shunt Trip
o Motor Operate
o Ground Fault Relay
o Alarm Switch
- IDMTL (Inverse Definite Minimum Time lag) setting for main circuit breaker connected to
source or transformer and other with below:-
o Long time protection (LT), approx. adjustable from 0.4–1 time of ampere rated
(In) with 0.5 - 24sec. time delay.
o Short time protection (ST), approx. adjustable from 1.5–10 time of ampere rated
(In) with 0 - 0.4sec. time delay.
o Instantaneous trip (INST), approx. adjustable from 1.5–15 time of ampere rated
(In) for main circuit breaker connected to source or transformer and 1.5–10 time
of ampere rated (In) for feeder circuit breaker.
o Ground fault protection (if shown in drawing), shall be adjustable with time delay
and time delay not exceed 0.4 sec.
o LCD display for current & energy value, trip history, type of fault, pre-trip alarm
and main contact wear to maintenance shall be built-in the circuit breaker.
o Healthy Trip unit status for self-inspection shall be easy to monitor by LCD
display or LED status.
(4) Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) shall have the following characteristics:
- All molded case circuit breakers shall be 3 or 4 pole, rated 415 Vac, 50Hz and shall be
manually operated
- MCCB’s for UPS shall be complete with motor drives, trip free from the handle and
provided with adjustable thermal overload and instantaneous magnetic short-circuit
protective elements.
- MCCB’s with ampere frame rating of ≤ 250AF shall be of thermal magnetic trip type and
the higher rating shall be electronic trip type.
- MCCB’s rated ≤ 250AF shall be adjustable thermal-magnetic trip unit type.
- Quick–make, quick–break and trip-free for over-current and short circuit current. The all
MCCBs shall be current limited and Ics = 100%Icu.
- Drives shall be toggle operating mechanism, operated by trip-free system and shall have
trip indication.
- All MCCB’s shall be able to install the additional devices, such as shunt trip, under
voltage relay, auxiliary switch, alarm switch, rotary handle, pad locking device, etc. to
increase their performances.
- The trip unit of MCCB’s up to 250AF shall be thermal-magnetic trip unit with adjustable
0.8-1 time of In for thermal current and 1.5-10 times of thermal current for magnetic
protection.
- The trip unit of MCCBs >250AF shall be electronic trip unit type and 0.4-1In long time
adjustable, 1.5-10In short time adjustable with lamp ready to protected, pre-alarm lamp
when I > 90 % of long time setting and alarm when I >105% of long time setting or
circuit breaker tripped.
- All circuit breakers rating ≥ 1000 AT shall be complete with ground fault sensor as
indicated on drawing. The sensor shall have the following characteristic:
- Ground-fault clearing time of main circuit breaker shall be more than the clearing time
of feeder circuit breaker.
- Ground fault pick up current > 200A. (adjustable)

- Time delay can be set at 0.1, 0.2, 0.3 and 0.4 Sec.
(5) Terminals of all circuit breakers rating ≤ 225 AF shall be cable lugs and the others shall be
busbar terminals.
(6) Moulded case circuit breakers of frame, trip rating, and interrupting capacity including blank
spaces for future addition as shown in the schedule shall be provided.
(7) All circuit breakers shall be selected to perform in coordination pattern along the protective
lines.
(8) The rating and quantity of main and feeder breakers shall be shown on the schematic diagram.
(9) The Main Switchboard shall contain all necessary relays, meters, control switches, and other
equipment necessary for protection and normal control of the main breakers and feeder
breakers.
(10) An under voltage sensing relay shall be installed on the secondary of each transformer to sense
loss of voltage and it has an adjustable time delay feature so that if the supply voltage drops to
zero, it shall be remain at that value for a period of 3 second before tripping the main incoming air
circuit breaker and non-essential air circuit breaker.
2.3 Control wiring and terminal blocks
(1) All control wiring shall be with flexible, stranded copper conductors, switchboard wire and
shall not be less than 1.5 SQ.MM. Eexcept for current transformer circuits which shall not be
less than 2.5 SQ.MM . All hinged wiring shall be extra flexible. The wiring shall be neatly and
carefully installed in suitable wiring ducts with removable covers and shall be terminated at
suitable terminal blocks. Splices shall not be permitted in control wiring or instrument leads.
(2) The switchboard shall be provided with terminal blocks for termination of all wiring devices
and each terminal block shall be clearly identified to show wiring which will be installed by
the Contractor. Extra terminals, in a quantity of not less than 25% of the active terminals, shall
be provided on each terminal block for circuit modifications and for future use. The terminal
blocks shall be located so that the accessibility to them will not be lessened by interference
from structural members or panel instruments. Ample space shall be provided at terminal
blocks for termination of external circuits.
(3) Terminal block shall be single terminal type, rail- mounted type and shall be of screw type
terminal 600V a. c molded block with molded insulating barrier between terminals. All screw
type wire terminations shall make use of compression type ring tongue lug with firmly grip the
conductor and employ insulated compression sleeves to grip the wire insulation.
(4) Terminal blocks for final connections for indication, instrumentation and metering circuitry
shall have test probe facilities for connections of test leads and an integral disconnecting
device to facilitate testing. Terminal blocks utilized in the secondary circuits of current
transformers and electrical measuring transducers shall be of short-circuiting elements type.
(5) Wiring shall be identified at each end with a legible printed black marking sleeve. Sleeves shall
be white tubing, sized to fit the insulation. Sleeves shall be able to rotate on the wire so not
to inadvertently hide the wire number.
(6) Nameplates shall be furnished and mounted by the Contractor. Each assembly, each piece of
equipment mounted on an assembly, and each power and control circuit shall be provided
with a nameplate. All nameplates shall be made of laminated plastic. Characters shall be
black on a white background.
(7) All indicating and pilot lamp assemblies shall be LED type with integrally mounted resistors.
The lamp bulbs shall be replaceable from the front of the panels
2.4 Low Voltage Bushing
All low voltage bushing and connection shall be braced to withstand 40 kA. (minimum) at 415 V.
and/or as indicated on the Drawings.
2.5 Multifunctional digital power meter (DPM)
DPM shall be a compact panel mount compliant with IEC 61557-12 standard, complete with graphic display
unit. The display unit shall have the minimum 3 rows with many characters per row for value monitoring.
The power meter shall be able to measure true RMS values as follow (minimum) :
Current : per phase
Voltage : VL-L and VL-N
Power : kW, kVar, kVA per phase and total at 3 phases
Power Factor : per phase and average at 3 phases
Memory/Data logger : >= 15Mb, Recording of Average and timestamping of Min/Max
electrical values and Quality as Voltage Dips, Outages, Over
Voltage as EN 50160
Frequency : incoming electrical source (Hz.)
Energy : Total and partial of kWh, kVarh, kVAh
Harmonic : THDi and Individual Harmonic Distortion order from 3rd Up to
20th for current and voltage
IP of protection : IP 52 front, IP20 rear
Operating temperature : -10… +70 °C
Operating humidity : +70 °C/ 97%
The power meter shall be complete with RS-485, Mod bus communication port to interface with
Building Management System (BMS) or SCADA System. The interface unit shall be furnished with the
power meter (if applied).
The power meter shall be operated at voltage rating not lees then 400 VL-L or equivalent and accuracy
of power meter shall be Class 0.2 According to IEC 61557-12
The power meter shall have 3 digital inputs suited for multi-fluid metering, pulse meter, state report, tariff
synchronization and 2 digital outputs suited for alarming, energy pulse, load shedding or command
The power meter can also be configured via a USB connection or via the communication network
using a remote display or a dedicated and free configuration software.
The equipment manufacturer shall pass certification of manufacturing for the following ISO 9001, ISO
14001 , ISO 50001
The distributor shall be certified by manufacturer and provide official distributor certificate to guaranty
for after sales service and spare part and distributor shall be prepared to submit a certified letter.
2.6 Analog Ammeter and Voltmeter
(1) Each indicating instruments shall be semi- flush mounted, back connected, dustproof, fully
tropicalized, switchboard type with a dull black case for mounting on a steel panel. Each shall
be suitable for operation with the instrument transformers shown on the Drawings.
(2) Except as otherwise specified, all indicating instruments shall be approximately 96mm square
with a 240C scale arc. All ammeters and voltmeters shall be of the moving iron type. The
maximum error of each indicating instrument shall not be more than 1% of full scale range.
(3) The scale ranges of ammeters, voltmeters, wattmeters and varmeters shall be chosen so that,
under normal operating conditions, each instrument will read between 60-75% of the effective
scale range. Scale plates shall have a permanent white finish with black graduations and numberals.
(4) The ammeters for which the upper limited of the effective range does not exceed 20 amps
may be direct ( series) connected. For higher range, current transformer operated ammeter
shall be used, and shall be designed for a secondary current of 5 amps.
(5) Accuracy Class of the meters shall be 1.5 or better.
(6) Voltmeters shall be the direct connection type with the accuracy class 1.5 and scale range 0-500V.
2.7 Instrument Transformers
(1) The current transformers shall be encapsulated in resin suitable for use with meters and
tropical proof type with a 5 A secondary and a primary rating equal to the breaker continuous
current rating as specified on the Drawings. All current transformers shall have thermal and
mechanical limits coordinated with the short-time rating of the circuit breakers with which they
are used.
(2) All current transformer secondary leads shall be brought out to shorting type terminal blocks
located in the instrument compartments and shall be arranged to provide any combination of
connections or polarity.
(3) The current transformer shall not be used in dual-purpose role serving both instrument and
protective device.
(4) Accuracy Class of the current transformers shall be in accordance with the following function:
Tariff metering : 0.5
Non-tariff metering : 1.0
Switchboard indicating instrument : 1.0
Protection : 5P
(5) The voltage transformer (if applied) shall be of the air-insulated type, with the windings
encapsulated in epoxy resin or other suitable synthetic material. All voltage transformer
secondary leads shall be brought out and connected, through secondary fuses, to terminal
blocks for external connections or connection to other devices integral to the switchboard.
These fuses and terminal blocks shall be mounted in the instrument compartments.
(6) On 3-phase, 4-wire systems, ammeter switches shall have four operating positions, marked 'L1',
'L2', 'L3' and 'OFF' position, and shall enable the single ammeter to read, in sequence, the
currents in each of the three phases. Ammeter switches shall have 'make-before-break'
contacts and shall be connected so that the associated current transformers are short-circuit
when they are not connected to the ammeter.
(7) On 3-phase, 4-wire systems, voltmeter switches shall have seven operating positions, marked
'L1-L2', 'L2-L3', 'L1-L3', 'L1-N', 'L2-N', 'L3-N', and 'OFF' position, and shall enable the single
voltmeter to read, in sequence, each of the three line voltages and each of the three phase-
to-neutral voltages. Voltmeter switches shall have 'break-before-make' contacts.
(8) Undervoltage relay shall be provided to turn off the main circuit breaker when the voltage
falls below premeditated level. Undervoltage relay shall be 3-phase, 4-wire, 380/220V, 50Hz
unit. The undervoltage setting shall be adjustable to 10% with time delay setting 0-10s. The
undervoltage relay shall include phase sequence and phase failure to trip the breaker when
one phase falls symmetrically.
2.8 Surge Protective Device
(1) The surge protection equipment shall conform to IEC61643-11 standard.
(2) Lightning Current Arrester shall be as Shunt Surge Protection to capture and discharge
lightning current, and shall have the following characteristic.
- Nominal Voltage 230/400 VAC 50/60 Hz
- Impulse Discharge Current 50 kA per phase (10/350 μs)
- Maximum Discharge Current 100 kA per phase ( 8/20 μs)
- Protection level ≤ 2 kV
- Response time ≤ 1 μs or 100 ns
- Temperature Range -40°C to 70°C
- Protection type IP 20
- Follow current interrupt rating Iie 50 kA
(3) Surge Voltage Arrester shall be modular plug-in type made from Metal Oxide Arrester to
capture the rest of voltage surge from low voltage feeder. The arrester shall be completed
with status indicator (“Normal”, “Fault”, “Defect”, etc.) and self-disconnection, and shall have
the following characteristic.
- Nominal Voltage (Un) 230/400 VAC
- Maximum Continuous Voltage (Uc) 275VAC.
- Nominal Discharge Surge Current 20 kA per phase Isn (8/20 μs)
- Max Discharge Surge Current 40 kA per phase Imax (8/20 μs)
- Response time ≤ 25 ns
- Voltage protection level (Up) ≤ 1.3 kV
- Temperature Range -40°C to 70°C
- Protection type IP 20
(4) The installation of the surge protection equipment shall be fully 4 poles connection (LA –
Neutral, LB – Neutral, LC – Neutral and Neutral – Ground).
2.9 Switchboard instruments
Switchboard instruments such as ammeter, voltmeters shall be of the panel mounted type, accuracy
class 1.5 or better.
2.10 The current transformer (CT)
The current transformer (CT) shall be of tropical proof type, secondary rated 5A, accuracy class
Factory routine verification and testing
The factory routine testing of PSC at factory shall according to IEC 61439-1 & 2 and covers below lists.
The verification shall comprise the following categories:
(1) Verification of construction:
a) degree of protection of enclosures;
b) clearances and creepage distances;
c) protection against electric shock and integrity of protective circuits;
d) incorporation of built-in components;
e) internal electrical circuits and connections;
f) terminals for external conductors;
g) mechanical operation.
(2) Verification of performance:
a) dielectric properties;
b) wiring, operational performance and function.
2.11 Installation
(1) All PSC shall be installed at the location as indicated on the Drawings.
(2) The PSC shall be installed on the concrete plinth of 100 mm. height.
(3) All switchboard shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturers.
PART III: EXECUTION
3.1 Testing
Field or site testing and commissioning
(1) Field inspection and testing for PSC shall be performed after installation is complete, feeders
are terminated, and the room is secure. Testing shall be conducted not more than 4 weeks
before switchboard is energized.
(2) Testing scope shall be according to factory routine testing.
(3) Certified test report:
- Verify that the installation is in accordance with Standards and regulations.
- Verify that the switchboard equipment has been fully tested and is operational.
END
5.3.5 : DISTRIBUTION BOARD (DB) AND LOAD PANEL (LP)

PART I: DESCRIPTION
Panelboard, load break switch/ switch disconnector/ safety switch, Motor control Board and enclosed
circuit breaker shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Drawings.
All Distribution Board and Load Panel shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(2) EIT Standard (2002-49): Standard for Fire Alarm System
(3) UL List : Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc.
(4) NFPA 72 : National Fire Alarm Code
(6) ANSI : American National Standard Institute
(7) NEMA : National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(8) IEC : International Electrotechnical Commission
(9) As specified on the Drawings.
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data, catalogues and certificates (except enclosed circuit
breaker) of the Panelboard, load break switch/ switch disconnector/ safety switch , Motor control
Board and enclosed circuit breaker for approval prior to purchase.
(2) The Contractor shall prepare and submit the installation details and location plans of the
equipment for approval prior to installation.
the Engineer.
work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Materials
1.1.1 The panelboard, load break switch/ switch disconnector/ safety switch, Motor control Board
and enclosed circuit breaker shall be of the 3-Phase, 4-Wire 230/400V.or 1-Phase, 2-Wire 230V,
50 Hz system
(1) Panelboards shall be dead-front safety type compliant with IEC61439-1&2 or IEC61439-
3 equipped with main molded case circuit breakers or main lug.
(2) All panel board shall be mounted 1800 mm. from finished floor to top of panel and in
accordance with local utility regulations.
1.1.2 The circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip-indicating, and
have a common trip on all multi pole breakers with internal tie mechanism.
(1) Molded-case circuit breakers of frame, trip rating and interrupting capacity (including blank
spaces for future addition) as shown in the panel schedule shall conform to IEC 60947-2.
(2) Miniature circuit breakers shall conform to IEC 60898 or as scheduled on the Drawings.
1.1.3 Busbar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be in the “phase-sequence” type.
1.1.4 All load break switch/ switch disconnector/ safety switch shall have switch blades which are
fully visible in the OFF position with the door open. The switches shall be mounted 1800 mm.
from finished floor to top of panel unless otherwise specified on the Drawings.
1.1.5 All load break switch/ switch disconnector/ safety switch shall be quick-make, quick-break,
compliant with IEC 60947-3 publication standard, 1 phase 2 pole 240VAC for general purpose
type and 3 phase 3 or 4 poles, 600VAC for heavy duty type.
1.1.6 All fuses for fused safety switches shall be of the HRC type of voltage rating up to 600 V and
current rating shall be as specified on the Drawings.
1.1.7 The load break switches/ switch disconnector
1.1.7.1 For The load break switches/ switch disconnector/ safety switches >125 A
The load break switches/ switch disconnector/ safety switches shall be IEC 60947-3
(IEC 60529 or IP1X or betten) for indoor use and general purpose enclosures with
knockouts unless otherwise noted or required. For outdoors use or in wet areas shall
have IEC 60529 or IPX4 enclosures. The contacts are visible through a triplex window,
located on the enclosure door. This enables the operator to confirm the position of
the contacts either during a preventative check or before an operation.
1.1.7.2 For The load break switches/ switch disconnector/ safety switches < 125 A
The load break switches/ switch disconnector/ safety switches shall be IEC 60947-3
(IEC 60529 or IP1X or better) for indoor use and general purpose enclosures with
knockouts unless otherwise noted or required. For outdoors use or in wet areas shall
have IEC 60529 or IPX5
1.1.8 Enclosed circuit breakers shall be installed in the steel boxes complete with extension rotary
handles and shall be of the types and rating indicated.
1.1.9 Enclosed circuit breakers shall be IEC 60529 or IP1X general purpose enclosures with knockouts
unless otherwise noted or required. Enclosed circuit breakers located outdoors or in wet areas
shall have IPX4 enclosures.
PART III: EXECUTION

1.1 Installation
1.1.1 The main panelboards and sub-panelboards shall surface mounted type, fitted with hinged
front door and shall enclose all equipment, isolators, contactors, E.L.C.B's, etc. all suitably
shrouded for safe working conditions.
1.1.2 On the inside of the door of each cabinet, a typewritten directory shall be provided which will
indicate the location of the equipment or outlets supplied by each circuit. The directory shall
be mounted in a metal frame with a non breakable transparent cover. The panel board
designation shall be typed on the directory card and the panel designation stenciled in 40
mm. high letters on the inside of the door.
1.1.3 The Contractor shall supply, adapt, and install steel gutters at the top and/or the bottom the
panelboards to permit where necessary the incoming or outgoing of the cables, conduits, and
wires.
1.1.4 The frame shall be closed with flat steel plate screwed on the frame.
1.2.1 Certified Test Reports
(1) Verify that the installation is in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(2) Verify that the equipment has been routine tested.
(3) The distributor shall be certified by manufacturer and provide official distributor
certificate to guaranty for after sales service and spare part and distributor shall be
prepared to submit a certified letter.
1.2.2 Field Test
The Contractor shall conduct functional test and commissioning of system which is complied
with the manufacturing standards and requirements.
END
5.3.6 : CAPACITOR BANK

PART I: DESCRIPTION
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install the capacitor bank with cubicle and associated
capacitor bank equipment as described or indicated on the Drawings and requirements
specified herein.
(b) Technical Requirements
The Capacitor bank shall have the electrical characteristics as follows:
- System wiring 3-Phase, 4-Wire with TN-C or TN-S grounding system
- Rated operational voltage 230/400V
- Rated Frequency 50 Hz.
- Rated Insulation level 1,000V
- Ambient temperature 40°C maximum, and average of 24 hours not exceed 35°C.
- Rated Continuous Current indicated on Drawings
- Rated Short Circuit Current indicated on Drawings
- IP20 Degree of protection or indicated on drawing
The capacitor bank assemblies manufactured in Thailand shall be latest ISO 9001 certified and also
be the standard factory product which continues to produce and/or assembly the capacitor bank
similar to the low voltage switchboard complying with type test IEC61439-1& 2.
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the certificates, technical data and catalogues of the capacitor
bank and associated accessories with material samples for approval prior to proceeding
purchase.
(2) The Contractors shall prepare and submit the installation details and routing plans of the
capacitor bank equipment for approval prior to installation.
the Engineer.
work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Materials
1.1.1 Power Factor Correction equipment
(a) The Capacitor bank shall be connected to main busbar of the Main LV Switchboards as
means of power-factor-correction equipment which provides the reactive power directly
at the loads, it is possible to stabilize the system voltage and reduce the transmission
losses. The loading of the equipment installed for the generation and transmission of
power is reduced, and it is thus able to supply more active power.
(b) Power factor correction equipment shall comprise capacitor units, control relay,
switching equipment, protective fuses and means of isolation, all assembled and
connected to control automatically the connection and disconnection of the
capacitance in response to change in the load power factor..By must have the following
features: IEC 62053-23, IEC 61326-1, UL 508 PFC must be of 3 PHASE 4 wires, 380/220 V,
50 Hz. The display is digital in the LCD display. Measurements of power are: current (A),
voltage (V), cosø , power factor, Hz, harmonic current and harmonic voltage in sequence
of not less than 17 sequences ( Individual Harmonics) Communications RS-485,Modbus,
Temperature Measurement 0-80°Cand shell be Leakage Current Measurement rang 10
MA , and have Standards output Alarm Relay/Output Relay/Digital input
(c) The Capacitor units shall be built into the dedicated enclosure, and having a degree of
protection of at least IP20. The spacing for ventilation of each capacitor bank shall
comply with IEC 60831. The design, manufacture, installation and testing of materials
shall comply with the requirements of IEC60831: Part 1 and Part 2.
(d) Power factor correction equipment shall carry out the power factor improvement to PF
= 0.95 lagging or better. Provision shall be made to ensure that a connection point is
available for series connected, detuning reactor in case of problems with high
harmonics. The Contractor shall submit the calculation report to approval.
(e) The application of capacitor units shall be automatically operated via contactors. This
process shall be controlled by multi-stage, kVAR sensitive, solid state relay which cycles
the capacitor stages so that each is called into service in sequence and advances so
that each capacitor is used equally.
(f) Switching contactors shall have a minimum duty category AC-6b to IEC 60070 and 60831
and according to IEC 60947-4-1 coordination type as capacitor bank manufacture
recommended. The capacitor units shall be low loss type. Total losses shall be less
than 0.5 W/kVAR and the capacitor elements shall have a voltage rating of 440V without
detuned reactor and 525V with detuned reactor, 3-phase, 50 Hz.
(g) Permanently connected discharge resistors shall be provided across the termination
sized to ensure safe discharge of the capacitors to less than 50V within 1minute after
disconnection. The capacitors shall be capable of operating for prolonged periods,
without damage, at an applied voltage 10% greater than the rated voltage.
1.1.2 The capacitor shall comply with the following technical data:
(a) Type : Indoor, dry technology, self-healing,
metallization polypropylene film.
(b) Capacitor rated voltage : 3-Phase, 400Vac without detuned reactor and
440 or 525Vac with detuned reactor.
(c) Rated operational voltage : 230/400V, 3ph, 4w
(d) Rated frequency : 50 Hz.
(e) Rated power : as specified on the Drawings
(f) Safety & Self protected capacitor : Internal fuse each element
or self-healing with pressure-sensitive
disconnector.
(g) Target Power factor setting : 0.85 ind. – 0.9 cap.
(h) Losses : <0.5W/kVAR (discharge resistors included).
(i) Tolerance : -5 / +10%
(j) Protection : IP 20
(k) Standards : IEC 60831-1 & 2
(l) Overcurrent : 1.3 x In
(m) Overvoltage : IEC 60831- 1&2
(n) Maximum peak current (Inrush Current) : 200 x In
(o) Voltage test between terminals : 2.15x Un for 2sec.
(p) Voltage test between terminal and earth : 3kV for 10sec
(q) Ambient temperature : Class D, -40 / +55°C
(r) Mean Life expectancy : > 150,000 hrs.
1.1.3 The reactive power regulator shall be of the solid state type and have the following technical data:
(a) Rated voltage : 3-Phase, 4-wire, 230/400V
(b) Rated frequency : 50 Hz
(c) Step control : as specified in the Drawings
(d) Operation mode : Automatic & Manual
(e) Control voltage : 230V
1.1.4 HRC Fuse link
(a) Rated Voltage : 500Vac, IEC 60269-2
(b) Rated Current : Shall be not less than x1.6 times of capacitor current or
according to IEC60947-4-1 coordination as manufacture
recommended or as specified on the Drawings, with
insulating striker pin and remote indicator fuse base.
(c) Rated Breaking capacity : 120kA at 500Vac
(d) Humidity : Up to 95% with +45C
(e) Base fuse : Triple-poles with phase barriers for
1.1.5 Contactor
(a) Electrical durability at nominal load : ≥100,000 operating cycles at
400V.
(b) Standard : IEC60070 and 60831
(c) Control voltage : 220-240 Vac
(d) Rated insulation voltage : 1,000 V
(e) Prospective peak current at switch-on : 200In
(f) Rated thermal current : > 1.43 times of Capacitor current or
according to IEC60947-4-1 coordination type
as manufacture recommended.
1.1.6 The capacitor banks shall be designed so that alteration or addition of the capacitor in the
future will not affect the system
1.1.7 The capacitor bank shall be installed in separate cubicle from low voltage switchboard which
is the same design as the main switchboard and as the manufacturer recommendation.
1.1.8 The cubicle for capacitor bank shall be IP31 protection class and naturally or air-forced
ventilated.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Installation
(1) The capacitor bank shall be installed at the location as indicated on the Drawings.
(2) The cubicle of capacitor bank shall be installed on the concrete plinth of 100 mm. height.
(3) All equipment shall be installed as recommended and certified by the manufacturer.
1.2 Testing
(1) Factory routine verification and testing
The routine testing of capacitor bank at factory shall be similar to PSC.
(2) Field or on site testing and commissioning
(2.1) Field inspection and testing for capacitor bank shall occur after installation is complete,
feeders are terminated, and the room is secure. Testing shall be conducted not more
than 4 weeks before equipment is energized.
(2.2) Testing scope shall be in accordance with factory routine testing.
(2.3) Certified test report:
- Verify that the installation is in accordance with Standards and Regulations.
- Verify that the equipment has been fully tested and is operational.
5.3.7 : BUSWAYS
PART I: DESCRIPTION
Where shown on plans, the Contractor shall furnish and install a totally enclosed, low impedance
feeder busways system and/or plug-in unit of the indicated ratings with all necessary fittings, power
tap-off, hanging devices and accessories. Arrangements, details, and locations shall be as shown on
the Drawings and specified herein.
(1) Material and installation shall comply with all applicable codes, recommended practices, and
standards of IEC 61439-6.
(2) All components of the busways shall be factory made and type tested assembly all rated
compliance to IEC 61439-6 standard.
(3) The type tested certificate shall be certified by international third party.
(4) Straight feeder including Plug-In Feeder and Plug-In Unit or Tap-Off Box Passed the Type Tested
test according to IEC61439-1 & 6 and IEC 60331 at 750 ° C for 3 hours.Certification of Type
Tested test results from the third party institution of international trust DIN 4102-12
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data, catalogues, and other necessaries accessories
of the busways for approval before purchasing.
(2) The Contractor shall submit routine test reports and type test reports as necessary for each
type of cable in accordance with the standards as mentioned above.
3.1 The equipment manufacturer shall be the latest ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 certified.
internationally recognized institutes, such as ASTA, LPCB, KEMA, TUV, DEKRA, UL etc.
accepted by the Engineer.
in the Contract for a period of two (2) years after the acceptance date of complete work.
(4) Final field measurements shall be made by the contractor prior to release for manufacture to
assure coordination with other trades and shall be approved by the Engineer.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Materials
1.1.1 The housing shall be extruded aluminum or galvanized steel sheet to provide maximum
protection against corrosion from water and other contaminants normally encountered
during construction. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion. The housing shall be
IP68 for outdoor and IP55 for indoor application.
1.1.2 Unless otherwise specified on the drawing, busways which run from electrical room to shaft
or to other machine room shall be feeder type.
1.1.3 The conductor of busways shall be aluminium 99.5% Pure grade or copper 99.9% Pure ETP
grade (as specified on drawing) high conductivity, low resistance contact area with Tin, Sliver
or better. ,NO of Conductor : 5-Conductor (L1, L2, L3 , 100%N and Ground bus)
1.1.4 The ground conductor shall be internal ground for indoor and outdoor shall be aluminium
or copper continuous ground bus and not less than 50% of phase conductor.
1.1.5 Tie bolts shall brace housing and bars to withstand, without damage or permanent distortion,
short-circuit withstand strength (Icw) at 1 second or 6 cycle RMS duration time as shown on
the drawings when tested in accordance to IEC 61439-6 standard.
1.1.6 Joints shall be tin- plated ( or better) contact area, bolt removable/ isolatable type with
through- bolts that can be checked for tightness without de- energizing the system. It shall
be possible to make up a joint from one side in the event the busways is installed against
a wall or ceiling. The joint shall be so designed as to allow removal of any length without
disturbing adjacent lengths. Springs shall be provided to give positive pressure over complete
contact area. Plug-in and feeder shall use identical parts, and all multi-stacks shall be phase collected.
1.1.7 Busbars shall be suitably with tin-plated (or better) at all joints and contact surfaces.
1.1.8 All insulation material shall be epoxy class B, 130 degree Celsius or higher.,Bus bar Insulator
Class-F and Protection degree mechanical – IK10 according to IEC62262 DIN52453
1.1.9 Fire rated busway shall be provided for life saving circuit or indicated in drawings. Busway
shall be tested BS6387 (C,W,Z), 950 degree Celsius for 3 hours for fire testing.
1.1.10 Horizontal runs of busways hanging centers in any position shall conform to manufacturer’ s
instructions. Vertical riser runs of busways shall be supported with spring hangers conforming
to manufacturer’s instructions.
1.1.11 Housing of Plug-In busways shall completely enclose the switching device. A ground plate
to engage grounding tab on busways shall be provided. Provide means for padlocking cover
and operating handle in "OFF" position.
1.1.12 Plug-In Unit (PIU), if applied, The plug-in unit shall be circuit breaker type. The circuit breaker
shall be same type of LV switchboard’ s circuit breakers. The plug- in unit shall be specified
as follows:
- The plug- in jaw shall be spring design composed of different metal to ensure the firm,
tight contact with the busbar and tin-plated (or better) jaw contact area.
- The earthing contact of the plug- in unit shall always be made before that of the live
conductors and the last to break during removal. And it must connect to the earth bar
of busways to ensure the safety.
- Circuit breaker applied in Plug- In Units shall have an interrupting rating as specified on
the Drawings. They shall have a releasable cover interlock that prevents opening of
cover except with breaker in "OFF" position. An interlock to prevent insertion or removal
from busways when in " ON" position shall be provided, as well as an interlock
(releasable) to prevent closing circuit breaker with cover open.
- Presence of Transparent shield shall be inside to avoid direct contact of human.
- The plug-in units shall be equipped with internal barriers to prevent accidental contact
of fish tape and conductors with live parts on the line side of the protective device
during time of wire pulling.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Installation
1.2.1 The system shall be tested to demonstrate that all wiring and equipment has been properly
installed, and the system will function in the required manner.
1.2.2 The Contractor shall conduct functional testing and commissioning of the system which is
complied with the manufacturing standards and requirements.
1.2.3 The Contractor shall test the system to full function.
1.3 Training
1.3.1 The Contractor shall prepare the approved instruction manuals for users.
1.3.2 The Contractor shall provide training for the operators and maintenance staffs of the Employer
to operate and maintenance the system by themselves.
END
5.3.8 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE AND CONTROL CABLE

PART I: DESCRIPTION
(1) The Contractor shall furnish, install and test the low voltage cables and accessories as
described or indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
(2) This Specification of low voltage cables shall be provided for wiring in elevated structures,
terminal station section and the other sections.
The power cable shall comply with the following codes and standards:
(1) EIT Standard (2001-56) : Standard for Electrical Installation
(2) TIS 11-2553 : Standard for PVC insulated copper cables
(3) IEC 60228 : Conductors of insulated cables
(4) IEC 60502-1 : Power cables with extruded insulation and their
accessories for rated voltages from 1 kV up to 30kV –
Part 1: Cables for rated voltages of 1 kV and 3 kV.
(5) IEC 60332 : Tests on electrical cables under fire conditions
(6) IEC 61034-2 : Measurement of smoke density of cables burning
under defined conditions Part 2: Test procedures and
requirements
(7) IEC 60754 : Tests on gases evolved during combustion of electric
cables
(8) BS 6387 : Specification for performance requirements for cables
required to maintain circuit integrity under fire
conditions.
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data, catalogues, cable installation drawings, cable
routes, cable connection and other necessaries accessories of the low voltage cables for
approval before purchase.
3.2 The Contractor shall submit test certificates of low smoke halogen free cables and fire
resistant cables issued by the internationally recognized institutes, such as ASTA, LPCB,
KEMA, TUV etc. accepted by the Engineer.
3.3 The test certificates or reports LSOH cable and fire resistance cable submitted shall
indicate the validating time which is still effective during the date of approval.
work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Materials
1.2.1 Description
(1) Power cables shall be single or multicores conductors depending as indicated on the Drawings,
rated for 750V and 1000V, and shall be used for a 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz, solidly grounded
system.
(2) The cables shall be suitable for running in conduit, and laid in wireway or cable tray as specified
in the Drawings.
(3) The conductors shall be continuous for the full length of the reels.
1.2.2 Component
(1) PVC insulated single core cable (IEC 01)
(a) The cables shall be 450/750V copper conductor polyvinyl chloride (PVC) insulated single
core which have temperature rating of not less than 70°C. The cables shall be
manufactured in accordance with TIS 11 Part 3-2553.
(b) The conductor shall be solid and non-compacted concentric stranded uncoated
annealed copper conductor in accordance with TIS 2427-2552, Class 1 and Class 2. The
direction of lay shall be reversed in successive layers and left-hand (S) lay in the
outermost layer.
(c) The insulation shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) compound complying with the
requirements of TIS 11 Part 3-2553.
(d) The technical information of cable shall be labeled with suitable means throughout the
length of cable.
- Rated voltage : 450/750 V.
- Insulation material : PVC
- Max. operating temperature : 70°C
- Designated Type : 60227 IEC 01
- Number of cores : Single Core(1)
- Size of conductor : According to TIS 11 Part 3-2553 with TIS logo
and standard number
(e) The test and properties of cables shall be carried out in accordance with TIS 11 Part 3-
2553 and TIS 2427-2552.
(f) All cables sizing 6 SQ.MM. or larger shall be stranded.
(g) Cables wiring inside the luminaires shall not be smaller than 1.5 SQ.MM. or as specified
on the Drawings.
(h) The size of control cables shall not be smaller than 1.5 SQ.MM..
(i) Cable wiring to the socket outlets shall not be smaller than 4 SQ.MM. or as specified
on the Drawings.
(2) PVC insulated and PVC double sheathed power cable (NYY)
(a) The cable shall be copper conductor, 450/750V, 70°C PVC insulated, PVC double
sheathed power cable. The cable shall be in accordance with TIS 11 Part 101-2553
(b) The conductor shall be solid and non-compacted concentric stranded uncoated
annealed copper conductor in accordance with TIS 2427-2552, Class 1 and Class 2. The
direction of lay shall be left-hand (S) lay in the outer most layer.
(c) The insulation shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) compound complying with the
requirements of TIS 11 Part 101-2553.
(d) The individual insulated conductor for multi-core cables shall be bundled together with
PVC rod or polypropylene yarn with a suitable length of lay to give the completed cable
of a circular cross-section. The direction of lay shall be left-hand (S) lays.
(e) The cable cores shall be identified by color codes of insulation as follows:
- Single core : Black
- 2 cores : Light Blue, Brown
- 3 cores : Brown, Black, Gray
- 4 cores : Light Blue, Brown, Black, Gray
(f) The inner sheath shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) compound applied over the cable
core.
(g) The outer sheath shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) compound complying with the
requirements of TIS 11 Part 101-2553. The average thickness shall be not less than the
value given in TIS 11 Part 101-2553.The color of the outer sheath shall be black.
(h) The technical information of cable shall be labeled with suitable means throughout the
length of cable.
- Rated voltage : 450/750 V.
- Insulation material : PVC
- Max. operating temperature : 70°C
- Designated type : NYY
- Number of cores : Single Core (1) or Multi-Core (2-4)
- Size of conductor : According to TIS 11 Part 101-2553
with TIS logo and standard number
(i) The test and properties of cable shall be carried out in accordance with TIS 11 Part 101-
2553 and TIS 2427-2552.
(3) XLPE insulated and PVC sheathed cable
(a) Conductors shall be of soft or anneal uncoated stranded copper wire Class 2 in
accordance with IEC 60228 and shall have a concentric lay.
(b) The insulation shall be of cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated and black Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) sheathed, which shall have rating of 0.6/1 kV and temperature rating of
90°C complying with IEC 60502 standard.
(c) The shielding shall be annealed copper tape of suitable width and shall be helically
applied over the inner jacket with a minimum 10% lap.
The annealed copper tape shall be at least 0.1 mm thickness and substantially free
from burrs.
(d) Fillers shall be used in the interstice of the multi-core conductor cable where necessary to
give the complete cable a substantially circular cross section. Fillers shall be of
polypropylene, non-hygroscopic materials. The laid-up core shall be helically wrapped with
non-hygroscopic Mylar or Polyester tape.
(e) Maximum conductor operating temperature shall be 90°C for continuous duty and 250°C
under short circuit condition.
(4) Low Smoke Halogen Free (LSOH)

(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install all LSOH cables as required and/or as shown in
the Drawings.
(b) The LSOH cable shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC or BS
standards or approved equal.
(c) The conductor shall be annealed copper and the conductor with cross sectional area
of 4 SQ.MM.. or larger, shall be stranded.
(d) Electrical insulation shall be made of cross-linked material or equivalent.
(e) The cables, which are installed on cable trays, shall have outer sheath for protection
against mechanical damages. Otherwise, the cable shall be installed in conduits.
(f) The cable shall prevent flame propagation under fire conditions.
(g) Cables carrying digital or addressable data, shall have special characteristics as follows:
- Aluminum screen
- Circuit protection conductor made of full size tinned annealed copper in
contact with the aluminum screen
(h) The cable shall pass either of the following tests, in each category,
- Smoke emission
: IEC 61034-2
: BS 7622-2 or BS EN 50268
- Halogen Free and Acid gas emission
: IEC 60754-1, and IEC 60754-2
: BS 6425, BS EN 50267-2-1 and BS EN 50267-2-2
- Flame retardant
: IEC 60332-1
: BS 4066-1 or BS EN 50265-2-1
- Flame propagation
: IEC60332-3
: BS4066-3, BS EN 50266
(5) Fire Resistant Cable (FRC)
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and install all fire resistant cable as shown on the Drawings.
(b) The fire resistant cable shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC or BS
standards or as directed by the Engineer.
(c) All conductors 6 SQ.MM.., or larger shall be stranded.
(d) Insulation shall consist of fire resistant tape (mica tape, etc.) covering the copper
conductor, and the outer shall be cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulation which
have thickness according to IEC 60502. For multi core cable, spacing between
conductors shall be filled with filler.
(e) Outer sheath shall be Polyolefin or other materials that produce low smoke when it is
burning off and have zero halogen characteristics according to IEC 60502.
(f) Rated voltage of power cables and control cables shall be 0.6/1 KV.
(g) Maximum conductor operating temperature shall be 90°C for continuous duty and 250°C
under short circuit condition.
(h) Cable shall not generate corrosive gases when it is burnt.
(i) The cable shall comply with the following standards:
- Smoke emission, Halogen Free and Acid gas emission, Flame retardant, Flame
propagation shall be comply Low Smoke Halogen Free (LSOH)
- Fire resistant cable : BS 6387 Category C, W, Z.
(j) The Contractor shall submit the test report of the cable for approval.
(k) Fire resistant cable shall be wired in conduit and technical data for current ampere
rating shall be submitted for approval.
(6) Control Cable (CVV and CVVs)
(a) All control cables shall be suitable for installation in wet and dry locations. The
conductor shall be of soft or annealed stranded uncoated copper wire.
(b) The insulation shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) or Polyethylene (PE) suitable for use on
a copper conductor with a maximum operating temperature of not less than 70 C.
(c) Fillers shall be used in the interstice of the multi-conductor cable where necessary to
give the complete cable a substantially circular cross section. Fillers shall be Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) rod or Polyethylene (PE) materials.
(d) The cable shall be helically wrapped over the filler, inner sheath, and copper shielding
with non-hygroscopic Mylar or Polyester tape.
(e) The shielding, for CVVs cables, shall be annealed copper tape or suitable width and shall
be helically applied with a minimum 10% lap. The annealed copper tape shall be at least
0.1mm. thickness and substantially free from burrs.
(f) The outer sheath shall be of black Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) jacket over the wrapping
and shall comply in all respects with IEC 60502-1.
(7) Fibre Optic Cable
Cables shall be from the same manufacturer, of the same cable type, and of the same size.
Each fibre shall be continuous with no factory splices. Low smoke halogen free cable shall
meet IEC-332-2, and riser cable shall meet UL1666. Fibre optic cable shall be certified to meet
the requirements of the EIA and ANSI as referenced herein.
Mechanical stress present in cable shall not be transmitted to the optical fibres. Protective
coverings in any single length of cable shall be continuous and be of the same material.
(a) Multimode Fibre Optic Cable
Fibre shall be class 1A multimode grade-index FDDI compliant optical fibre wave guide with
50/125-micron core/cladding diameter.
- Core diameter of 50 plus/minus 3.0 micron.
- Cladding diameter to be 125 plus/minus 3.0 micron.
- Core-to-cladding offset shall be less than or equal to 3.0 micron.
- Attenuation at 1300 NM. not to exceed attenuation by more than
1.5 dB/km.
- Bandwidth at 850 NM. more than 400 MHz/km.
- Bandwidth at 1300 NM. more than 800 MHz/km.
- The fibre shall comply with ISO/IEC 11801:2002. Each fibre shall meet the graded
performance specifications of EIA/TIA/-568 10/2/4/2. The mechanical and
environmental specifications shall be in accordance with ANSI/CEA S-83-596.
- Cable shall have low smoke and zero halogen characteristics and the cable shall
have halogen-free according to corrosively: IEC 754-2 (HD 602, BS6425.2) Low
smoke: ASTM E662, Toxicity: NES 713 (HD 605, BS 6425.1)
- Cable jacket shall have zero halogen and low smoke characteristics.
Physical : Tensile (min) 1500 psi

: Elongation (min) 100 percent
: Tear resistance 74 lbs/inch
Halogen Content : IEC 754-1 0 percent
: BS 6425 0 percent
: MIL-C-24643 <0.2 percent
Toxicity Index : NEX 713 1
- Tension, short-term (Installation) 600 N.
- Tension, long-term (Installation) 600 N.
- Bend Radius, installation 14.0 cm.
- Bend Radius, post installation 5.0 cm.
- Water block test to IEC 811-1-3
- Temperature range
Operation/Installation : -40 to +80 °C
Storage : -40 to +80 °C
- Jacket shall comply to NEC section 770-51 (a) and 770-53 (a),
IEC 332-3C
(b) Single mode Fibre Optic Cable
Low smoke, zero halogen outdoor/indoor cable with flame retardant covering. Cable
shall utilize loose tube design within gel-filled buffer tubes for crush and impact
protection and shall have water blocking capabilities with the use of absorbent polymer
water blocking elements.
- Core diameter of 8.3 plus/minus 0.50 micron.
- Cladding diameter to be 125 plus/minus 1.0 micron.
- The fibre shall comply with ISO/IEC 11801:2002. Each fibre shall meet the graded
performance specifications of EIA/TIA/-568 10/2/4/2.
- The mechanical and environmental specifications shall be in accordance with
ANSI/CEA S-83-596 and the cable shall have halogen-free according to
corrosively: IEC 754-2 (HD 602, BS 6425.2), Low smoke: ASTM E662, Toxicity: NES
713 (HD 605, BS 6425.1)
- Transmission Performance : 1310 mm. and 1550 nm.
- Maximum Attenuation : 0.25 and 1550 nm.
- Tensile Load : 600 N for indoor
: 2700 N for outdoor
- Outer Diameter Bend Radius : 14 cm. for indoor
: 20.4 cm. for outdoor
- Bend Radius, installation 5 cm. for indoor and 10.2 cm. for outdoor
- Water block test range to IEC 811-1-3.
- Temperature range
Operation/Installation : -40 to +80 °C
Storage : -40 to +80 °C
(c) Connectors
- Connector will be SC or FC type, ceramic zirconia, epoxy crimp type.
- Connector insertion loss not exceed 0.4 dB. and return Loss more than 27 dB.
- Attenuation not exceed 0.4 dB per mated pair.
- Connector to sustain a minimum of 500 mating cycles per

ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-21.
- Optical axial pull strength 2.2 N at 0° angle, axial off pull strength of 2.2 N at 90°
with a maximum 0.5 dB increase in attenuation when tested in accordance with
ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-6b.
(d) Couplers (interconnection sleeve)
- Adapters or FS jack will have a ceramic alignment sleeve.
- Connectors will be spaced 6.3 mm. center to center.
- Connectors to sustain a minimum of 500 mating cycles per
ANSI / EIA / TIA-455-21.
(e) Patch Cords
- Fibre to comply with above specifications. Jacket to comply to NEC section 770-
51 (c), & 53 (c), UL type OFN. Duplex “zip cord” to be used.
- Connectors to comply with above specifications with the following exceptions:
Connectors will have boots (Strain relief) of 2 different colours to identify each
separate stand at each end.
- Optical axial pull strength 33 N and 0° angle, axial off pull strength of 22 N at 0°
angle with a maximum 0.5 dB increase in attenuation when tested in accordance
with ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-6b.
- Tested and attenuation results supplied with each cord.
(f) Outlet/Connector
Minimum of two optical fibres into 2 SC type connectors. Will have the ability to store
1 mm. of fibre cable. Cable management means to insure minimum bend radius of 30
mm.
(8) Unshielded Twisted Pair
Shall be Category 6 UTP, 4 Pair with bonded insulator for the electrical consistency and locked
each pairs into place by crescent shape design jacket to ensures that pair-to-pair movement is
greatly minimized during the installation process.
(a) Data cables shall be extended between the station location and its associated Data
Room or Main Equipment Room and consist of 4 pair, 0.022 mm² conductor O.D. the
multimedia UTP and shall be terminated on the 8 pin modular jacks provided at each
outlet. Cable jackets shall comply with Article 800 NEC for use as a cable and shall be
UL listed type CMP (plenum and low smoke zero halogen cable) type or non-halogen,
low smoke jacket complying to industrial standard.
(b) All 4 pair Category 6 cables shall conform to
- ANSI/TIA-568-C2 Category 6.
- ISO/IEC 11801 Class E
- EN 50173-1 Category 6
- ICEA S-102-700 Category 6
- EN 50288-6, NEMA WC 66
- IEC 61156-5, ASTM D4566-98, IEC 60332-1
- UL/CSA Listed CMX, CM, CMR, CMP and LSZH
- ETL and 3P Verified to TIA-568-C2 CAT 6
- UL E197771, INTERTEK, RoHS Compliant
PART III: EXECUTION

1.1 Installation
1.1.1 In general, the power cables shall be run in conduits, in cable tray and shall be run concealed
in ceiling, floor, and wall or as indicated on the Drawings.
1.1.2 No cable shall be pulled into the conduit system until it is completely finished.
1.1.3 Lubricant shall be used to facilitate cable pulling. Lubricants shall be approved for using with
the insulation specified.
1.1.4 Splicing of wires and cables shall be allowed only in the luminaires, socket outlets and
junction boxes with an approved method of insulation. No splice shall be made in conductors
for instrument circuits or control circuits.
1.1.5 Splicing of large wires and cables shall be by compression type, solderless wire connectors
indented by special hydraulic tool. The splice shall be insulated with plastic insulation tape,
such as Scotch Brand No.35. Thickness of the tape shall not be less than three layers or at
least the same thickness as the wire insulation.
1.1.6 Compression type, solderless lugs indented by proper tool shall be used at the end of all
wires and cables and shall be connected to the screw type terminals of the equipment and
to the bus bars.
1.1.7 The cut end of cables shall be treated to prevent seepage of water into the cable. When
unreeling cable from the cable drums, special care shall be taken to prevent damage to the
cables. When removing the cover of the drum, care shall be taken to prevent damage to the
cable sheath.
1.1.8 The Contractor shall provide all necessary materials for installation of the cables, such as
grounding lead wires, compression type terminals, metal fitting, bolts and nuts including
cable identification and felt packing to be inserted between cable and cleats.
1.1.9 The unoccupied space in cable knockouts and conduits after cable insertion shall be filled,
with duct seal to prevent insects and small animals from entering the equipment housing.
1.1.10 Where cables are buried in the ground the minimum depth of burial shall be at least 600
mm. Cables shall be laid on 150 mm. compact sand and covered by a 750 mm. layer of
clean sand. Cables shall be covered with tiles and or marking tape and the trenches
backfilled to grade level.
1.1.11 Cables under roads shall be enclosed in reinforced concrete duct banks supplied and
installed by the electrical work.
1.1.12 All cables shall be identified by means of cable tags fitted to each termination point and at
30 meter intervals along cable route.
1.1.13 Cable route markers shall be installed above ground along underground cable routes. These
shall be located at 30 meter intervals, at changes of direction and at entries to buildings.
1.1.14 The Contractor shall be responsible for the supervision of the cable trench excavation,
sanding and backfilling, supply and installation to warning tape, cable tiles and cable marker
posts as detailed on the Drawings and in these Specifications.
1.1.15 Cables shall be laid in one continuous length.
1.1.16 Conductors with compression type terminals and insulation cover shall be arranged in a neat
manner on terminal box or equivalent terminals. The Contractor shall install plastic cable
tie-wraps as required to neatly group cables and to keep the weight of the cable from
damaging terminations.
1.1.17 The conductors in vertical raceways shall be supported if the vertical rise exceeds the values
in table below:
Spacing for Conductor Supports in Vertical Raceway
Size of Maximum Remark
Cable Spacing (m)
(SQ.MM.)
50 or 30 If the vertical run
smaller are less than 25%
70 thru 120 24 of max. spacing in
150 thru 18 table, cable
185 supports will not
240 15 be required.
300 12
over 300 10
1.1.18 Color coding for the low voltage cables shall comply with IEC and EIT Standards.
1.2.1 Megger testing shall be conducted for all power cables, 600 volts rated with phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground prior to connecting to equipment and conduct phase-to-ground testing
after the equipment was connected including all connections were tapped.
1.2.2 Insulation resistance tests shall be performed by using a 500 Vdc megger on the 400 volts
system. Insulation resistance shall be complied with IEC 60502-1.
END
5.3.9 RACEWAY
PART I: DESCRIPTION
The Contractor shall furnish and install the Raceway (Conduits, Cable Trays and Wireways) and their
accessories as described or indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.2. Standards and References
The conduits, cable trays and wireways shall comply with the following codes and standards:
(2) TIS 770-2533 : Standard for Zinc coated steel conduits for
electrical wiring
(3) ANSI C80.1 : Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC)
(4) ANSI C80.3 : Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
(5) ANSI C80.6 : Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)
(6) NEMA/ANSI FB1 : Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit
Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and
Cable
(7) NEMA/ANSI OS1 : Sheet-Steel Outlet, Boxes, Device Boxes,
Covers, and Box Supports
(8) ASTM A123/A123M-13 : Standard for Hot-dipped galvanized for Steel
Cable Tray Standard Specification for Zinc
(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products
(9) NEMA TC14-1984 (R1986) : Filament Would Reinforced Thermosetting

Resin Conduit and Fittings
(10) NEC Electrical code (Article 347) : Rigid nonmetallic conduit
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data and catalogues of the Raceway (Conduits, Cable
Trays and Wireways) with sample material for approval before purchasing.
(2) The Contractor shall submit the installation details and routing plans of the Raceway for
approval before installation.
3.1 The equipment manufacturer shall be the latest ISO 9001 certified and shall submitted
the annual type test report at least 3 years, Reference list at least 5 years.
the Engineer.
work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Conduits
1.1.1 General Requirement
(1) Minimum Size: ø15 mm. (ø1/2 inch).
(2) For underground installations:
(a) Where embedded in compact soil or sand:
Use HDPE or RTRC type or as specified on the drawing.
(b) Where embedded in concrete encasement:
Use RSC, HDPE or RTRC type or as specified on the drawing.
(3) Where embedded in reinforced concrete wall or slab:
Use IMC or RSC type or as specified on the drawing.
(4) Where embedded in masonry wall or light wall:
Use EMT or IMC type or as specified on the drawing.
(5) For installations on any surface:
(a) Outdoor locations:
Use IMC, RSC, HDPE or RTRC type or as specified on the drawing.
(b) Indoor locations:
- Use EMT or IMC type or as specified on the drawing.
- Conduits and accessories installed inside all Stations shall be capable of
being subject to temperatures up to 500°C for 1 hour and shall not support
combustion under the same temperature, in accordance with NFPA 130.
(6) The conduits shall have to be specified in SI units as on the Drawings. And the table
below shall be the conversion of diameters of conduits from inch to millimeter.
Conduit Diameter (inch.) ½ ¾ 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ 3 4 5 6
Conduit Diameter (mm.) 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 127 152
1..12 Materials
(1) Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC), if applied, shall be hot-dip galvanized rigid steel in compliance
with aforementioned standards and complete with
(2) Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) shall be hot-dip galvanized rigid steel in compliance
with aforementioned standards and complete with
(3) Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be hot-dip galvanized steel in compliance with
aforementioned standards and complete with
(4) The RSC and IMC conduit shall be in standard length of approximately 3.00 meters
including coupling, one coupling to be furnished with each length. Each length shall be
reamed and threaded on each end.
(5) Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC) shall be made from galvanized steel in compliance with
TIS 2133-2545. The FMC installed in wet locations shall be of the liquid-tight type in
compliance with BS 731 or IEC 60754-1 or IEC 61034-2 or BS EN50086-1. Flexible conduit
and fittings for life safety equipment shall be made of galvanized steel water-tight
pattern, frame retardant; LSOH over-sheathed and separated earth wire enclosed within
the conduit.
(6) Conduit fittings and conduit bodies shall be hot-dip galvanized steel in compliance with
aforementioned standards and weatherproof type, and bushing shall be grounded type.
(7) The finished conduit and fittings shall have smooth surface, free of lumps of excess
zinc, inside bead or other injurious defects or such defects detrimental to smooth wire
pulling.
(8) The outside surface and threads on conduit shall have protective coating against
corrosion. The threads on the fittings shall have paint, zinc or other protective coating
against corrosion.
(9) The standard manufactured elbows shall be used for all sizes of conduits larger than
25 mm. (1 inch), and the field bends to be handled with great care not to damage the
conduits, will be permitted to be used for conduit of 25 mm. (1 inch) and smaller.
(10) HDPE conduit, if applied, shall be in compliance with SECTION 7.
(11) The Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) Underground Conduit RTRC shall
conforming to NEMA TC 14 (Part B) and UL 1684-1996
1.2 Cable Trays
(1) Cable trays shall be of a perforated/corrugated pattern (as indicated on the Drawings) with lid,
2. 0 mm minimum thickness mild steel and hot- dip galvanized overall after fabrication in
compliance with ASTM A123/A123M:13 to protect against corrosion during storage, and to have
long service life. The cable trays shall be provided with the dimensions as indicated on the
Drawings.
(2) Cable trays, fittings and supports shall be capable of being subject to temperatures up to
500°C for 1 hour and shall not support combustion under the same temperature.
(3) Fittings ( such as tees, angle pieces, connectors, etc. ) shall be of the same type of the cable
trays.
(4) Support brackets and rods shall be of hot- dipped galvanized steel. Minimum mean coating
thickness of the hot dipped galvanization shall be 65 microns. All bolts and nuts shall be
electroplated with zinc with a minimum plating thickness of 25 microns.
(5) On site cutting of hot dipped galvanized components shall be properly repaired in the field
using cold galvanizer.
(6) Connecting joint between cable tray and equipment shall be a flexible joint.
(7) Each section of the cable tray shall be electrically bonded, with a minimum 6 SQ.MM.(Flexible
copper) cross section area earth- bonding strap or wire, to the next section to form an
electrically continuous system and bonded to the main grounding system with green/ yellow
PVC insulated copper, single core cable. All edges, fittings, or any parts of the cable trays shall
be finished free from burrs, sharp edges, or projections damaging to the insulation or jacket of
the cables.
(8) The number of cables installed in the cable trays shall be in compliance with the requirements
of the EIT standard 2001-56. 40% spare space capacity of the cable trays shall be provided for
future cables laying inside the cable tray.
2.3 Wireways
(1) Wireways shall be made of hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to protect against corrosion
storage, installation and to have long service life and shall be provided to form the continuous
steel sheet troughs with removable covers attached to the wireway by screws for housing the
cables. The minimum thickness of steel sheets (before the galvanized process) for wireways
fabrication shall be as the following table (in millimeter unit):
Size of wireways (width x height)

Thickness (mm)
(mm)
50 x 50 up to 100 x 50 1.2
100 x 100 up to 150 x 100 1.2
200 x 100 up to 300 x 100 1.6
150 x 150 up to 300 x 150 1.6
(2) Wireways, fittings and supports shall be capable of being subject to temperatures up to 500°C
for 1 hour and shall not support combustion under the same temperature.
(3) Fittings (such as tees, angle pieces, connectors, etc.) shall be of the same type of the wireways.
(4) Support brackets and rods shall be of hot- dipped galvanized steel. Minimum mean coating
thickness of the hot dipped galvanization shall be 65 microns. All bolts and nuts shall be
electroplated with zinc with a minimum plating thickness of 25 microns.
(5) On site cutting of hot dipped galvanized components shall be properly repaired in the field
using cold galvanizer.
(6) Each section of the wireways shall be electrically bonded, with a minimum 6 SQ.MM.(Flexible
copper) cross section area earth- bonding strap or wire, to the next section to form an
electrically continuous system and bonded to the main grounding system with green/ yellow
PVC insulated copper, single core cable. All edges, fittings, or any parts of the wireways shall
be finished free from burrs, sharp edges, or projections damaging to the insulation or jacket of
the cables.
(7) The number of cables installed in the wireways shall be in compliance with the requirements
of the EIT standard 2001-56. 40% spare space capacity of the cable trays shall be provided for
future cables laying inside the cable tray.
1.4 Boxes and Accessories
(1) Outlet Boxes (for socket outlets, lighting switches, etc.)
(a) The outlet boxes shall comply with the aforementioned standards.
(b) For wall/column recess, the boxes shall be of steel sheet with not less than 1.6 mm
thickness with hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and completed with adjustable lug,
ample knocked-holes and brass earth terminals fitted within the box and with one
primer anti-rust coated and two coating finishes.
(c) For exposed works; the boxes shall be of die-cast aluminium, and completed with
threaded hubs, neoprene gasket and earth terminal fitted within the box. The boxes
shall be allowed for outdoor works in accordance with IP65 protection class.
(d) For floor recess; the boxes shall be of die-cast aluminium or galvanized cast iron, and
completed with threaded hubs, neoprene gasket and earth terminal fitted within the
box.
(e) The internal depth of a box shall be not less than 32 mm.
(f) The corners of a box shall be mechanically and electrically continuous.
(2) Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes
(a) Pull boxes and junction boxes for branch circuits, indoor used, shall be as the same
type of the outlet boxes (clause 2.4 (1)(b)) and to be equipped with galvanized steel
cover plate matching with the boxes which to be fastened with stainless steel screws.
(b) Pull boxes and junction boxes for branch circuits, outdoor used, shall be of die-cast
aluminium circular box completed with threaded hubs, earth terminal fitted within the
box and fastening cover with neoprene gasket for IP65 protection class.
(c) Pull boxes and junction boxes for branch circuits, in-ground used, shall be of die-cast
aluminium rectangular box completed with threaded hubs, earth terminal fitted within
the box and smooth cover with neoprene gasket fastened with stainless steel cover
screws for IP67 protection class.
(d) Pull boxes, which are used in feeder system (main feeders or feeders or sub-feeders),
shall be made of steel sheet with not less than 1.6 mm thickness with hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication, completed with ground flange, neoprene gasket and lid
fastened with stainless steel screws. The boxes where used on outdoor location shall
be IP65 protection class.
(e) The corners of a box shall be mechanically and electrically continuous.
(f) Size of the pull boxes and junction boxes shall be selected in compliance with EIT 2001-
56 standards.
PART III:EXECUTION
1.1 Installation
1.1.1 Conduits & Accessories
(1) Where the conduits enter the cabinets and equipment, conduit bushings and double
locknuts shall be used.
(2) The end of all conduits shall be tightly plugged to exclude dust and moisture while the
buildings are under construction.
(3) The bending radius of the conduit shall not be less than six times the outer diameter
of the conduits. The total bending angles of conduits shall not exceed 360 degrees in
any one run.
(4) The conduits used shall not have any internal and external defects. Each end of the
conduit shall be made smooth with the conduit reamer to prevent damage to the wire.
(5) A short piece of flexible metal conduit shall be used for connecting all motors, vibrating
equipment, recess lighting fixtures and junction boxes and as otherwise specified.
(6) The wiring system shall consist of PVC insulated cables drawn into conduit. Wiring shall
be loop-in style without joints.
(7) The wiring capacity of conduits shall comply with the requirement in EIT Standard 2001-
56 and as specified on the Drawings.
(8) Conduit shall be run neatly on the surface or buried within the carcass of the buildings
as indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications. Conduit shall be run at least
0.15 m. clear of plumbing and mechanical services.
(9) Conduit shall be supported at regular intervals not exceeding 2.5 m. on horizontal runs
and 1.5 m. on vertical runs.
(10) The length of thread on the ends of the conduit shall be fixed to the structure or the
building independently of the conduit.
(11) The length of thread on the ends of the conduit shall suit the length of internal thread
in the end of the fitting or accessory. Excess length of thread will not be permitted.
(12) Sleeves in floor slabs or beams for conduits shall be made of galvanized sheet steel,
securely fastened in position. Floor sleeves shall be with their top and set at least 5
cm. above finished floor. Sleeves in beams shall be finished flush with the surface of
the beam. Sleeves in telephone and electric rooms shall be filled with approved
materials to provide a fire barrier. Both used and unused sleeves shall be filled.
(13) Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit
crosses seismic, control and expansion joints. These fittings shall have grounding
continuity.
1.1.2 Cable Trays
(1) The supports for horizontal cable tray shall be provided such that they shall be capable
to adjust vertically. Where tray and ladder systems are supported by drop rods
additional restraints shall be included to provide adequate lateral support. Restraints
shall be installed at all bends and intersections and at intervals not exceeding 1. 5
meters on straight runs. Support rods shall be at least 6 mm diameter. Trapeze or other
hangers shall be clamped on the drop rods between two nuts.
(2) Cable tray or ladder shall not be installed across building or structural expansion joints.
On horizontal runs the tray or ladder shall be installed with a 20 mm gap at the
expansion joint. Supports shall be installed within 150 mm on either side of the joint.
(3) Cable Trays for normal and essential feeders shall be separated independently as
indicated on the Drawings.
(4) Provide all openings on floors and walls necessary for cable trays unless indicated as
being provided by others.
1.1.3 Wireways
(1) Installed wireways so that all signals cables are in wireways separate from wireway
having power cables in it. Install metal barriers in pull-boxes to keep power and signal
cables separate and divided.
(2) Wireways for normal and essential circuits shall be separated independently as
(3) All length of the wireways shall be supported by the metal hangers at every interval
not more than 1.50 m for horizontal and vertical installation. The supports for horizontal
run shall be provided such that shall be able to adjust vertically.
(4) Provide all openings on floors and walls necessary for wireways unless indicated as
being provided by others.
END
5.3.10 LUMINAIRES AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

PART I: DESCRIPTION
(1) The Contractor shall furnish and install luminaires and associated equipment as indicated on
(2) The luminaire schedule is shown on the Drawings for types and mountings. Luminaires shall
be manufactured locally by approved factory or imported from abroad as specified on the
Drawings.
(3) The design of mounting details of the light fitting shall take into consideration the ease of
maintenance. Where light fittings are mounted at high levels, the Contractor shall provide
suitable means to enable the light fittings being maintained without the use of portable ladders
or other portable equipment with minimum interruption to operation.
The luminaires and associated equipment shall comply with the following codes and standards:
(2) IEC 60598-1 : Luminaires – Part 1: General requirements and tests
(3) IEC 60598-2-1 : Luminaires – Part 2-1: Particular
requirements – Fixed general purpose luminaires
(4) IEC 60598-2-2 : Luminaires – Part 2-2: Particular
requirements – Recessed luminaires
(5) IEC 62504 : General lighting - Light emitting diode (LED)
products and related equipment - Terms and definitions
(6) IEC 62031 : LED modules for general lighting - Safety
specifications
(7) IEC 62612 : Self-ballasted LED lamps for general lighting
services with supply voltages > 50 V –
Performance requirements
(8) IES LM-79 : Approved Method for the Electrical and
Photometric Testing of Solid-State Lighting
Devices
(9) IES LM-80 : IES Approved Method – Measuring Luminous
Flux and Color Maintenance of LED Packages,
Arrays and Modules
(10) IES TM-21 : Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance
of LED Light Sources
(11) IEC 61347-1 : Lamp controlgear – Part 1: General and safety
requirements
(12) IEC 61347-2-13 : Lamp controlgear - Part 2-13: Particular
requirements for d.c. or a.c. supplied
electronic controlgear for LED modules
(13) IEC 62384 : DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for

LED modules - Performance requirements
(14) IEC 61000-3-2 : Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part
3-2: Limits - Limits for harmonic current
emissions (equipment input current ≤ 16 A

per phase)
(15) IEC 61000-3-3 : Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part
3-3: Limits – Limitation of voltage changes,
voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low-
voltage supply systems, for equipment with
rated current ≤ 16 A per phase and not
subject to conditional connection
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit photometric data, a manufacturer's name, material catalogues
and type of lamp(s) to be installed, together with the Shop Drawings for approval before
purchase. Lighting calculation report for review in public and staff areas shall also be
submitted.
(2) If requested by the Engineer, a sample of proposed luminaires shall be submitted. Samples of
all locally made luminaires shall be submitted for approval before purchasing.
(3) The Contractor shall submit the installation details, including method of fixing and support for
each type of luminaires, for approval before installation.
the Engineer.
work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Description
The luminaires as specified herein comprise the luminaires, lamp holders, lamps, driver,
emergency/exit lights and street lighting luminaires.
1.2 Materials
1.2.1 Luminaires
The luminaires shall comply with the following requirements.
(1) The luminaire shall be made from high grade cold rolled steel sheet, 0.8 mm minimum
thickness, and be provided with a lamp compatible with the control gear used. Any
plastic used in the luminaires shall be UV and light stable and shall be suitable for their
application. All sheet steel components shall be suitably pre-treated and painted using
acrylic polyester or epoxy powders to prevent corrosion.
(2) All hanger, cables, supports, channels, frames and brackets of all kinds for safety
erecting this equipment in place, shall be furnished and erected in place under this
section.
(3) The luminaires shall be supported from the building structure and the hangers shall be
adjustable in length.
(4) The LED luminaires shall be rated at 24 volts for colour changeable and 230 volts for
static colour, 50 Hz. And operated at constant and carefully regulated current levels.
(5) For wet and damp use, LED-based luminaire itself shall be sealed, and test for
appropriate environmental conditions, not accomplished by using an additional housing
or enclosure. All hardwired connections to LED luminaires shall be reverse polarity
protected and provide high voltage protection in the event connections are reversed or
shorted during the installation process.
(6) All luminaires, when installed shall be set true and free of light leaks, warps, dents, and
other irregularities. The finish of exposed metal parts of luminaires and finish trims of
all recessed luminaires shall be as directed by the Engineer or as indicated on the
Drawings.
(7) Each luminaire shall have a manufacturer's label affixed to it in a concealed location
and shall comply with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.
(8) Lamp sockets shall conform to IEC or TIS standard or equivalent.
(9) After the luminaires are completely installed, the wiring system, wiring and luminaires
shall be tested against grounds and short circuit.
(10) It is intent to provide and install a complete luminaire and multiples thereof, on each
and every outlet shown on the Drawings. Therefore, in the event a type designation is
omitted from the plans, furnish and install units typical of those in similar locations
without additional cost to the Project.
(11) The finish of exposed metal parts and stem lengths shall be as later directed by the
Engineer, unless otherwise noted in the luminaire Schedule; trims for luminaires
exposed to the weather shall have suitable gaskets.
(12) In the luminaires will use 105 °C heat resistant cable for PVC cables with similar heat
resistant sleeve and the connection size shall not be smaller than 1 SQ.MM. and shall
be capable of conductivity not less than 125% of full load current.
(13) Aluminum reflectors and louvers, if applied, shall be made from high purity aluminum
(99.85% minimum) with low or very low iridescence and a total reflection shall be of
87%. The anodic film shall have a minimum thickness of 2.5 microns.
(14) Plastic diffuser, if applied, shall be made of high quality plastic with sufficient strength
to withstand UV radiation and heat within the luminaire, and from the environment.
The diffuser shall be designed for low brightness and glare free performance.
1.2.2 LED lamps
The LED lamps shall comply with the following requirements.
(1) LED selected shall have expected luminosity at 50,000 hours of not less than 70% of
initial value (L70) when tested in accordance with IES LM-80 and IES Technical
Memorandum 21 (TM-21).
(2) The lamp shall have an initial luminous efficacy of not less than 100 lumens per watt
after 100 burning hours (exclusive of circuit losses) at the rated voltage (220 V) and
frequency (50 Hertz).
(3) The color rendering index (CRI) shall not be less than 80 for indoor type luminaire and
70 for outdoor type luminaires or as specified on the Drawing.
(4) The color temperature for LED shall be as follows:
(a) Daylight: 5,500 - 6,500 Kelvin
(b) Cool White: 4,000 Kelvin (within 3 Step McAdam)
(c) Warm White: 3,000 Kelvin (within 3 Step McAdam) or as specified on the type of
luminaires.
1.2.3 Driver (Power/data supply) for LED
The Driver for LED shall comply with the following requirements.
(1) Input Voltage : 230 V. ±10% 50 Hz.
(2) The driver shall have minimum life expectancy of 50,000 hours at maximum rated case
temperature (Tcmax), separately packaged independently of LED module for better
ventilation.
(3) The driver shall be fully functional at case temperature (TC) of not less than 70˚C
(4) LED and driver shall be separately removable and serviced.
(5) The driver input current shall have total harmonic distortion (THDi) of not more than 15%.
(6) The driver shall have power factor at maximum load of not less than 0.95 (lagging).
(7) The driver shall have surge protection being capable of withstanding a voltage surge of
not less than 2 kV (Line-Neutral).
(8) The driver shall complete with suitable protective devices to protect short circuit and
over voltage.
(9) The driver shall pass appropriate electro-magnetic compatibility test.
PART III: EXECUTION

1.1 Installation
1.1.1 The Contractor shall install the luminaires in accordance with approved shop drawings and
1.1.2 The Contractor shall coordinate with the building contractor to ensure that the fixtures
furnished are compatible with the ceiling suspension system being installed.
1.1.3 All luminaires shall be adequately and rigidly supported in an approved manner. In all cases,
all luminaires shall be suspended independently. The mounting height of the luminaires shall
be as directed and agreed on site.
1.1.4 Final connections to luminaires in areas, where a suspended ceiling is provided, shall be in a
flexible conduit system.
1.1.5 Luminaires shall not be used as 'through boxes' for circuit wiring.
1.2.1 The lighting system shall be checked at night to ensure that illumination levels as specified
have been met.
1.2.2 Megger testing shall be conducted to all installed luminaires and control cables with phase-
to-phase and phase-to-ground.
1.2.3 The performance of the luminaires and associate equipment shall be tested by turning on all
luminaires for 24 hours, together with measuring of the illumination levels which shall not be
deviated.
END
5.3.11 : LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1.1.1 The Contractor shall furnish and install the lighting control system as indicated on the drawings
and specification herein.
1.1.2 The contractor shall base his tender on the system specified as the base offer. If alternative
systems are proposed, they shall be listed as alternative offers. Divergences from these
Specifications, which regarded as essential or as improvement shall be clearly pointed out and
explained.
1.1.3 The lighting control system configuration such as graphic, layout, setting and etc. shall be
adjusted to harmonize with other lighting control system vendors applied in other phase of
the project at no additional cost. The purpose is to establish a common configuration and
standards enabling the operator to manage and operate the system efficiently. Such
configuration shall be issued to the Engineer for approval. This is also applied to third party
vendors interfaces with the system.
IEC Standard.& AS Standard
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data and catalogues of the lighting control system
and associated accessories with samples for approval prior to proceed purchasing. The
proposed equipment and materials shall be the latest types/models.
(2) The Contractor shall prepare and submit the installation details and routing plans of the
equipment for approval prior to proceed installation.
(3) Operation and maintenance manuals of the system shall be prepared and submitted to the
Engineer for approval before handover.
internationally recognized institutes, such as ASTA, LPCB, KEMA, TUV, AS, IEC etc.
accepted by the Engineer
work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Description
1.1.1 The lighting control system (LCS) shall be an intelligence network system, fully addressable,
comprising microprocessor-based lighting control devices interconnected via a topology-free
network that employs UTP-Cat.5e cable (or other high performance cable as recommended
by the equipment manufacturer) to supply power under extra-low voltage (self-powered
operations) and to facilitate communications between network devices.
1.1.2 The system shall be capable of supporting 100 units of relay controller module (minimum)
per single network and shall allow unlimited switching configurations.
1.1.3 For future extension, the system components shall be able to be added or changed without
interrupting the control cable or any other devices. No reconfiguration of existing units or
network shall be required during any system reconfiguration. All existing units shall be
removable without a system disturbance.
1.1.4 In the event of power failure, non-volatile memory shall retain all programmed information
relating to each unit’s current operating status. The state of the lighting loads shall be able to
be programmed to re-start to “on”, “off” states or resume in previous state following mains
power being restored after a power failure.
1.1.5 Each individual switch (if applied) shall indicate the “On” and “Off” state of the controlled
relay with an “On/Off” LED. Each switch shall be able to be programmed as toggle switch,
scene or group function.
1.1.6 The system shall be set-up for “fail-safe” operation such that under failure of control power,
the emergency lighting shall start to “ON” state.
1.1.7 Where Building Management System (BMS) is applied, it shall be able to monitor and control
all functions on the lighting control system via an interface unit.
1.2 Materials
1.2.1 Main control equipment
(1) The main control equipment comprises an interface unit for network recognition /
distribution and PC Workstation equipped with licensed software for main control and
monitoring of the system.
(2) PC Workstation
The Workstation shall be a complete set of desktop Personal Computer based on the
latest technology about 3 months before the submission of technical documents in the
approval stage (Vendor: Dell, HP, IBM or equivalent).
The following components and specifications (as stipulated below) are the minimum
requirement for reference of pricing in the Bidding stage only.
(a) CPU : 64 bit Octa-Core (Intel® CoreTM i7-6th
Generation or equivalent) with clock rate
up to 4.2 GHz per core and 8 MB Cache
Memory.
(b) RAM : 8 Gbytes / DDR4 / 2400 MHz.
(c) Display Adapters : Equipped with both On-board GPU
and Separated Graphic Card on PCI
Express Slot with 2 Gbytes / DDR5
GPU
(d) Hard Disk Drive : 1,024 Gbytes / SATA 3 / 7200 RPM
(e) Optical Disk Drive : 8X - Multi-layer DVD-RW Drive
(f) Power Supply Unit : According to standard for
Workstation
(g) Display Monitor : LED Monitor size 23”, 16:9 (or
16:10) Anti-glare Panel, QHD/1440p
resolution, 75 Hz. Refresh rate
(h) I/O interface ports comprise:

- D-Sub VGA port, HDMI port and UHD (4K) display port
- 2 ports of USB 2.0, 4 ports of USB 3.0 and Thunderbolt port
- Gigabit Ethernet (10/100/1000 Mbps) RJ45 port
- 3.5 mm ports for Audio IN/OUT
- Others according to Motherboard manufacturer
(i) Peripheral devices comprise:
- Standard keyboard for English & Thai language (as the same brand of the
Workstation)
- Five (5) buttons Optical Mouse (as the same brand of the Workstation).
- Others come with the Workstation according to Vendor's standard.
(3) Software
(a) Operating System (OS) : Windows 10 Professional 64 bit or better
(b) Application Software : The licensed comprehensive software shall be provided
from the system manufacturer. It shall be able to be configured easily for any control
and monitoring functions as required and approved by the Engineer. Security login
(Username & Password) for authorized Users/Operators shall be able to be edited by
themselves.
1.2.2 Relay controller unit (Sub controller)
(1) The unit shall be an addressable modular unit type, mounted on DIN rail according to
IEC55014 : Electromagnetic compatibility.
(2) The unit shall allow control of independent loads, equipped with a voltage-free
magnetically latched relay per channel and shall support current rating up to 10 A per
channel. All relay contacts shall be capable of carrying inductive lighting loads without
derating factor.
(3) Non-volatile memory shall be equipped within the unit to retain all address setting and
most recent information. All units shall be capable of stand-alone operation during the
shutdown or failure of the main controller.
(4) Each unit shall have the feature for setting the manual-override functions onto Remote
(ON/OFF) push-button switches. It shall be possible to connect these overrides in
parallel to multiple units to allow manual-override of multiple units from one push-
button location.
(5) Local ON/OFF push-button switches shall allow individual channels to be manually
overridden on each unit.
(6) Logic states and relay interlocking features shall be selectable configured by the
application software.
1.2.3 Power supply unit
(1) The power supply unit shall be a modular type, mounted on DIN rail according to IEC55014 :
Electromagnetic compatibility.
(2) The unit, which transforms the input voltage at 230 V.ac to the required voltage for
devices, shall have adequate power capacity for the connected equipment as designed
and shown on the Drawings.
1.2.4 Enclosure
(1) The enclosure, for installation of various device groups according to the Drawings, shall
be cabinet with flush-key lock. The cabinets shall be fabricated from 2 mm (thickness)
electro-galvanized steel sheet and coated with epoxy powder paint.
(2) The protection class of the enclosures shall comply with IEC 60529 and shall be
categorized as follows:
(a) IP 31 for installation on dry and indoor locations
(b) IP 55 for installation on outdoor locations including wet areas.
(3) All enclosures shall be grounded.
1.2.5 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
The UPS shall be provided to be a backup power source for the Lighting Control System. The
following specifications (as stipulated below) are the minimum requirement for this UPS.
(1) Technology : True Online power conversion
(2) Input
(a) Rated Voltage : 230 V.ac ± 15% or better
(b) Frequency : 50 Hz. ± 5% or better
(c) Harmonic (THDi) : not exceed 10%
(d) Connector : IEC 60320 C14
(3) Output
(a) Rated Voltage : 230 V.ac
(b) Voltage Regulation : ± 2% or better
(c) Frequency : 50 Hz. ± 1% or better
(d) Rated Power : as indicated on the Drawings and not less
than 1.5 kVA (@ PF = 0.70 or better)
(e) Harmonic (THDu) : not exceed 10%
(f) Connectors : IEC 60320 C13
(4) Battery
(a) Type : Maintenance-free sealed lead-acid battery
(b) Backup Time : 15 minutes @ full load or better
(5) Indicators : LCD Display and LED indicating lamps
(6) Surge Protection : Built-in surge protective device complying with
UL 1449
(7) Ambient Temperature : 0 °C – 50 °C or better
(8) Communication Interface : USB port and/or RJ 45 port (10/100
Ethernet)
1.2.6 System Wiring
(1) Type of signal cable for wiring in the system shall be a twisted pairs Cat.5e (or other high
performance cable as recommended by the equipment manufacturer) -LSOH according to
IEC and/or BS standard, or as recommended from the system manufacturer but shall also
have the characteristic of LSOH material as aforementioned.
(2) The cables shall be installed in conduit.
(3) Wiring method between the controllers shall comply with the recommendation from
the equipment manufacturer.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Installation
1.2.1 The system shall be tested to demonstrate that all wiring and equipment has been properly
installed, and the system will function in the required manner.
1.2.2 The Contractor shall conduct functional testing and commissioning of the system which is
complied with the manufacturing standards and requirements.
1.2.3 The Contractor shall test the system to full function.
1.3 Training
1.3.1 The Contractor shall prepare the approved instruction manuals for users.
1.3.2 The Contractor shall provide training for the operators and maintenance staffs of the Employer
to operate and maintenance the system by themselves.
END
5.3.12 : SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE
PART I: DESCRIPTION
The Contractor shall furnish and install the switch and receptacle as described or indicated on the
Drawings and specified herein.
1.2.1 The switches and receptacle shall comply with the following codes and standards:
(2) IEC 60529 : Degree of protection provided by enclosures) IP Code)
(3) IEC 60309-1 : Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial
purposes - Part 1: General requirements
(4) IEC 60884-1 : Plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar
purposes - Part 1: General requirements
(5) IEC 60669-1 : Switches for household and similar fixed-electrical
installations - Part 1: General requirements
(6) TIS 824-2551 : Switches for household and similar fixed electrical
installations: General requirement
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit material selections and catalogues including manufacturer's
instructions and sample materials for approval before purchasing.
(2) The Contractor shall submit the installation details including method of fixing and support for
the Engineer.
3.4 The Contraction shall guarantee the quality and functioning of all installations
included in the Contract for a period of two (2) years after the acceptance date of
complete work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Description
1.1.1 The material and color of cover plates, for all switches and receptacles, shall be finally
selected by the Engineer to match with the decorative finishing of architectural work.
1.2 Materials
1.2.1 Switch
(1) Description : General-duty rocker switch, toggle mechanism and comply

with IEC 60669-1 and/or TIS 824-2551.
(2) Device Body : White colored thermoplastic.
(3) Rated Voltage : ≥ 230 V.ac
(4) Rated Current : 15 Amperes or as indicated on the drawings.
(5) Faceplate : Generally; Plastic (color will be selected in the approval process)
except otherwise specified on the Drawings, IP55 for outdoor
installation.
1.2.2 Receptacle (Socket-Outlet)
(1) Description : General-duty receptacle, duplex universal pins (for flat pins and round
pins plug) 2P+E and comply with IEC 60884-1.
(2) Device Body : White colored thermoplastic (Gray colored for UPS circuit and red
colored for Essential circuits).
(5) Faceplate : Generally; Plastic (color will be selected in the approval process)
except otherwise specified on the Drawings, IP55 for outdoor installation.
1.2.3 Floor Mounted Receptacle
(1) Description : Pop-up type floor recessed outlet with duplex universal pins (for flat
pins and round pins plug) 2P+E and comply with IEC 60884-1.
(2) Device Body : White colored thermoplastic (Gray colored for UPS circuit and red
colored for Essential circuits).
(5) Cover Plate : Stainless Steel or equivalent
1.2.4 Heavy-duty Power Receptacle (if applied)
(1) Description : Angel type heavy-duty receptacle, equipped with spring door cover
with locked position to lock plug-in cord by simple twisting motion,
and comply with IEC 60309-1.
(2) Protection : IP44 for indoor and IP67 for outdoor
(3) Installation : Wall/column exposed.
(4) Electrical Characteristics:
(a) 3P+N+E 415 V. /16 A., 32 A., 63 A. as indicated on the drawings.
(b) 2P+E 240 V. / 16 A., 32 A. as indicated on the drawings.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Installation
1.1.1 The Contractor shall install the equipment in accordance with approved shop drawings and
1.1.2 Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings;
(1) The switches shall be installed on wall or column at 1,350 mm above the finished floor level.
(2) The receptacles shall be installed on wall or column at 300 mm above the finished floor level.
1.2.1 The Contractor shall conduct functional testing and commissioning of the system witness by the
Engineer.
END
5.3.13 : EMERGENCY LIGHTS AND EMERGENCY EXIT SIGNS

PART I: DESCRIPTION
The Contractor shall furnish and install Emergency Lights and Emergency Exit Signs as indicated on
1.2.1 The Emergency Lights and Emergency Exit Signs shall comply with the following codes and
standards:
(2) EIT Standard 2004-58 : Emergency Lighting System and Emergency
Exit Sign Luminaire Standard
(3) TIS 1102-2538 : Self-contained Emergency Lighting
Luminaires
(4) TIS 2430-2552 : Internally Illuminated Emergency Exit Sign
Luminaires for Buildings
(5) TIS 1955-2551 : Lighting and Similar Equipment: Radio
Disturbance Limits
1.3 Submittals
the Engineer.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Description
1.1.1 The Emergency Lights and Emergency Exit Signs shall comply with the aforementioned
standards and the following requirements hereafter.
1.1.2 The LED and Drivers, which are incorporated with this equipment, shall comply with the same
standards as shown in Section of topic "Luminaires and Associated Equipment".
1.2 Materials
1.2.1 Emergency Lighting Luminaires (Emergency Lights)
(1) The emergency lights shall be of the self-contained battery type suitable for single
phase 50 Hz system with 2 head LED lamps (light intensity not less than 2 x 55 Watt
halogen lamps) and surface mounted.
(2) Each unit shall be equipped with the following equipment/devices (as a minimum):
(a) Maintenance free, sealed-lead acid battery for backup operating at least 2 hours
(b) Solid state charger

(c) Under and over voltage cut-off
(d) Overload and short circuit protection
(e) Status indicating lamp for “Power On”, “Fully Charged”, “Charger Failure” &
“Short Circuit”
(f) Lamp & battery test button
(g) Battery low level alarm (visible & audible)
(h) Wireless remote testing
(3) Unit Housing: Corrosive-proof housing, fabricated from a 1.6 mm (minimum) sheet steel,
finished with epoxy powder coating, and complete with battery basin. The housing shall
be grounded.
(4) Electrical Connection: Power cord with molded plug; 2P+E 10 A. 240 V.ac.
(5) The units, when installed in public areas, shall be concealed and the head lamps shall
be separately installed (remote head lamps) at the locations as indicated on the
Drawings.
1.2.2 Emergency Exit Signs
(1) The emergency exit sign luminaires shall be of the self-contained battery type suitable
for a single phase 50 Hz system with internally illuminated LED lamps, decorative design
and surface-mounted type.
(2) Each unit shall be equipped with the following equipment/devices (as a minimum):
(a) Maintenance free, sealed-lead acid battery for backup operating at least 2 hours
(b) Solid state charger
(c) LED lamp and driver
(d) Under and over voltage cut-off
(e) Overload and short circuit protection
(f) Status indicating lamp for “Power On”, “Charger Failure”, “Battery Discharge”
(g) Lamp & battery test button
(h) Wireless remote testing
(3) Each of the Emergency Exit Sign shall comprise the white legend read "EXIT" with white
icon of human escape and white directional arrow on green opal diffuser in accordance
with EIT standard 2004-15 (or latest edition).
(4) Unit Housing: Corrosive-proof housing, fabricated from a 1.6 mm (minimum) sheet steel,
finished with epoxy powder coating, and complete with battery basin. The housing shall
be grounded.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Installation
1.1.2 Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, the equipment shall be installed on wall or
column at 2,500 mm above the finished floor level.
1.2.1 The Contractor shall conduct functional test and commissioning of the system which is
complied with the manufacturing standards and the Engineer requirements.
END
5.3.14 LIGHTNING PROTECTION AND GROUNDING SYSTEM

PART I: DESCRIPTION
(1) The Contractor shall furnish, install, and test equipment and materials of the System complete,
in accordance with the Drawings, the Specification and within the Contract Schedule.
(2) The lightning protection system shall consist of a network of air terminals, down
conductors and ground rods as shown in the Contract Drawings.
(3) The grounding system shall consist of ground rods and grounding continuity conductor, etc.,
for providing safety grounding to the electrical system.
((4 All equipment and materials of the same type shall be supplied by a single manufacturer to
ensure uniformity of standards and composition.
(5) All equipment and accessories delivered to site shall be new and shall be clearly marked to
identify different type and materials
(6) All equipment shall be suitable for use in tropical climate.
The lightning protection and grounding system shall comply with the following codes and standards:
(2) EIT Standard (2007-53) : Protection against lightning Part 1 General Principles
(3) EIT Standard (2008-53) : Protection against lightning Part 2 Risk
Management
(4) EIT Standard (2009-53) : Protection against lightning Part 3 Physical
Damage to Structures and Life Hazard
(5) EIT Standard (2010-53) : Protection against lightning Part 4 Electrical
and Electronic System within Structures
(7) NFPA 780 : Standard for The Installation of Lightning
Protection System
(8) IEC 62305 : Protection against Lightning
(9) IEC 62561 : Lightning Protection System Component
(10) UL 467 : Grounding and Bonding Equipment
(11) UL96 : Standard for Installation Requirements for
Lightning Protection
1.3 Submittals
the Engineer.
3.3 The test certificates or reports submitted shall indicate the validating time which is
still effective during the date of approval.
PART II: PRODUCTS

1.1 Lightning Protection System
(1) All air terminals shall be solid copper rod, at least 16 mm. in diameter and 1000 mm. long or
as indicated on the Drawing.
(2) Roof conductors connecting to all air terminals shall be copper tape or aluminum tape with
the minimum cross-sectional area of 70 sq.mm. or as indicated on the Drawing.
(3) Down Conductors shall be bare stranded copper wires or copper tapes with the minimum
cross – sectional area of 50 sq.mm. or as indicated on the Drawing.
(4) Ground rods shall be copper bonded steel diameter 16 mm and 3000 mm long or as
indicated on the Drawing.
1.2 Grounding System
(1) Ground rods shall be copper clad steel diameter 16 mm. and 3000 mm long or as indicated
on the Drawing.
(2) Grounding conductors connected to ground rods shall comply with the following
requirements.
(2.1) Grounding conductors shall be bare stranded copper wires or insulated copper wires
as indicated on the Drawing, and be continuous in full length without splicing.
(2.2) Unless otherwise indicated, the equipment grounding system shall comply with the
following requirements.
a) All non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment including
conduits, cable trays, and wire ways shall be grounded.
b) Feeder circuits and branch circuits for power, receptacle outlets and lighting
shall be provided with grounding continuity conductors running together with
circuit conductors.
(3) Sizes of grounding conductors connected to ground rods for AC System shall not be smaller
than those specified in Table 1
Table 1 Grounding Conductor Connected to Ground Rod for AC System
Size of Largest Size of Grounding
Service-Entrance Copper
(Copper Conductor
Conductor,Sq.mm.) (Sq.mm.)
35 or smaller 10
Over 35 thru 50 16
Over 50 thru 95 25
Over 95 thru 185 35
Over 185 thru 300 50
Over 300 thru 500 70
Over 500 95
(4) Sizes of grounding conductors for feeder and branch circuits will depend on ratings of over
current protective devices of the circuits as shown in Table 2
Table 2 Grounding Conductor for Feeder and Branch Circuits for AC System
Rating or Setting of Automatic Grounding Copper
Overcurrent Device in Circuit Ahead of Conductor
Equipment, Not Exceeding (Amperes) (Sq.mm)
16 2.5*
40 4*
70 6
100 10
200 16
400 25
500 35
800 50
1,000 70
1,250 95
2,000 120
2,500 185
4,000 240
6,000 400
* Note : If the length of the distributed circuit exceed 30 m, the size of earth conductor of
the electrical equipment shall be considered by earth fault loop impedance of the circuit
which is shown in EIT standard.
(5) Isolated Grounding System
a) Grounding system for special equipment, such as electronic equipment, shall be
provided with ground rod and grounding conductor separated from grounding system
of the normal circuits. And resistance to earth of ground rod of the circuit shall not
exceed 1.0 ohm. or latest EIT Standard.
b) Grounding conductors shall be copper with UPVC or PVC insulation and the sizes of
conductor shall be in accordance with Table 2 or as indicated in the Drawing.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Installation for lightning protection system
1.1.1 Air terminals shall be installed at the highest point of the building or where indicated
on the Drawing.
1.1.2 Roof conductors shall be fastened to the roof structure with fixing clamps at not greater
than 500 mm. intervals or indicated on the Drawing.
1.1.3 Roof and down conductors shall be continuous with no splicing unless otherwise
indicated on the drawings.
1.1.4 All protruding metal parts of the roof, e.g. hand rails, TV antenna, steel water tank, etc.,
shall be bonded to the lightning protection network.
1.1.5 Sharp bends of down conductors shall be avoided; its bending radius shall be not less
than 200 mm.
1.1.6 Down conductors exposed along the outer perimeter of the building shall be enclosed
in 25 mm. UPVC ducts at the level of 2500 mm. above finished grade.
1.1.7 Ground test points shall be provided at least 2 sets for grounding resistance test in the
future or as indicated on the Drawing.
1.2 Installation for grounding system
1.2.1 The top of ground rods shall be driven into the earth at least 300 mm. below finished
grade and installed in concrete inspection pits with covers flush with the finished
grade level.
1.2.2 Method of electrical connection will depend on types of metal and work conditions
as follows.
a) Welding of copper conductors with ground rods or with metal frames shall be done
by exothermic welding.
b) Movable equipment or materials shall not be welded; bolts and nuts or
other means shall be used instead.
c) The contact faces of grounding terminals shall be cleaned before connections are
made to the grounding system to ensure electrical continuity.
1.2.3 To ensure a permanent, reliable and good electrical connection, the Contractor shall
record and submit to the Engineer, the values of ground resistance inspected at
various stages, the resistance shall not exceed 5 ohms. More rods are required to
lower down the resistance if the result is not complied.
1.3 Field Test
1.3.1 The Contractor shall perform the field test of all components of the system and
submit the test reports to the Engineer for approval.
1.3.2 The field test of the system shall consist of:-
a) Measurement of resistance to earth of ground rod.
b) Check grounding continuity of lightning protection and grounding system.
c) Check tightness of grounding connection.
1.3.3 The Contractor shall carry out the tests under the supervision of his qualified engineer
having the license for professional practice, at least professional engineer level in electrical
engineering (power). He will inspect, review and certify the test result before being submitted
to the Engineer.
END
5.3.15 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1.1.1 The Contractor shall furnish and install the Fire Detection and Alarm System shall be modern,
addressable, pre-signal, non-coded system as indicated on the drawings and specification herein.
1.1.2 The equipment shall be UL listed.
1.1.3 The contractor shall base his tender on the system specified as the base offer. If alternative
systems are proposed, they shall be listed as alternative offers. Divergences from these
Specifications, which regarded as essential or as improvement shall be clearly pointed out and
explained.
1.1.4 The Fire Detection and Alarm System configuration such as graphic, layout, setting and etc.
shall be adjusted to harmonize with other control system vendors applied in other phase of
the project at no additional cost. The purpose is to establish a common configuration and
standards enabling the operator to manage and operate the system efficiently. Such
configuration shall be issued to the Engineer for approval. This is also applied to third party
vendors interfaces with the system.
Fire alarm system shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(2) EIT Standard (2002-49) : Standard for Fire Alarm System
(3) UL List : Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc.
(4) NFPA 72 : National Fire Alarm Code
(6) IEC 60332 : Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
under defined conditions – Part 2: Test
Procedure and Requirements
(8) IEC 60754 : Tests on gases evolved during combustion of
electric cables
(9) BS 6387 : Specification for performance requirements for
cables required to maintain circuit integrity
under fire conditions.
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data and catalogues of the lighting control system
and associated accessories with samples for approval prior to proceed purchasing. The
proposed equipment and materials shall be the latest types/models.
(2) The Contractor shall prepare and submit the installation details and routing plans of the
equipment for approval prior to proceed installation.
(3) Operation and maintenance manuals of the system shall be prepared and submitted to the
Engineer for approval before handover.
internationally recognized institutes, such as UL, ASTA, LPCB, KEMA, TUV, etc. accepted
by the Engineer
work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Functional Requirements
The system shall comprise Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP), manual pull stations, heat detectors,
smoke detectors, fire alarm bells, sounder/strobes, batteries and battery charger, system wiring and
other equipment required for a complete and workable system.
At normal condition, all alarm initiating circuit wiring and audible/visual alarm signal circuit wiring are
electrically supervised. Open wire or short circuit will set off trouble alarm.
In the event of fire, operation of any alarm initiating device (manual pull station or heat detector or
smoke detector) shall send a fire alarm signal to the FACP. The FACP will register the fired zone and
show on the front panel. After a pre-set duration, an audible and visual alarm (alarm bell,
sounder/strobes) will be activated to notify the occupants of fire situation.
The audible/visual alarm can be cancelled by activating the acknowledge switch before the delay
time runs out.
The LED light of the activated heat or smoke detector shall be shown.
The delay duration shall have a setting range from 0 to 3 minutes. No alarm delay (0 second) shall
be set when there is no occupant in the building.
The battery provided shall be capable of supplying power for supervisory function of the system for
a minimum of 24 hours and, at the end of that period, shall be capable of operating all alarm
appliances (bells and strobe lights) for 5 minutes.
1.2 System Components
1.2.1 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)
Fire detection and alarm system equipment shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
or approved by Factory Mutual (FM) individually and as a system for their intended use. All
fire detection devices that receive their power from the initiating device circuit or signaling line
circuit of a fire alarm control unit shall be listed for use with the control unit.
The FACP shall be housed in a steel cabinet with partially glazed door. All electronics within
the panel shall be microprocessor controlled. The panel shall include an integral
220VAC/24VDC power supply unit and sealed lead acid batteries. Facilities for alarm/trouble
silence and reset system shall be provided.
The system shall be provided with four (4) Zones alarm initiating class B circuits and two (2)
24 VDC alarm circuits, monitored for both open and short circuit faults.
Twin LED’s shall be provided for zone identification. They will flash intermittently when an
alarm is received and change to steady when the alarm is acknowledge. A flashing amber LED
shall operate with internal buzzer to indicate the fault status of each circuit. A separate
isolation switch shall be provided for each circuit. Upon operating the isolation switch, the
amber LED shall flash steadily to indicate the fault.
1.2.2 Heat Detector
The heat detector shall be rate-of-rise and fixed temperature type. They shall be solid state
construction with a monitoring LED and interchangeable plug in bases. The supply voltage
shall be between 17-28 VDC. Wiring shall be polarity insensitive. The heat detector shall
comply with UL standards.
1.2.3 Smoke Detector
The smoke detector shall be addressable optical smoke detectors at the locations shown on
the drawings. They shall be solid state construction with a monitoring LED and interchangeable
plug in bases. The supply voltage shall be between 17-28 VDC. Wiring shall be polarity
insensitive. The smoke detector shall comply with UL standards.
1.2.4 Manual Pull Station
The manual pull station shall be break-glass type shall be of standard model that fit on a
flushed mounted outlet box. It shall be designed to enable testing without breaking the glass.
1.2.5 Alarm Bell
The alarm bell shall be a 6-inch diameter gong type and be suitable for mounting directly to
a conduit box. The alarm bells shall be the vibrating type, utilize a heavy-duty mechanism and
be polarized for supervised operation. The alarm bell shall be UL listed.
1.2.6 Combined Sounder Strobes
The combined sounder strobes shall be 2-wire horn/strobe, wall mounted, indoor The high
volume of sound output shall not be less than 85 dB(A) at 3 m. Candela settings for strobe
lights shall be field adjustable.
1.2.7 Wiring System
Wiring for fire alarm system shall be installed in intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
Conduit shall be Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC).
Fire alarm system conductors shall be separated from any conductors of mains power, and
shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or ducting containing these conductors.
Conduit shall be ¾” (20mm) minimum.
The number, size and type of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system
manufacturer, but not less than 1.5 mm2 for initiating device circuits and audio/visual device
circuits. In all cases voltage drop shall be considered and cabling sized to maintain acceptable
voltage levels at equipment terminals.
All conductors for audio/visual alarm device circuits shall be fire resistant.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Power supply
The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated mains power branch circuit.
This circuit shall be labeled at the main power panel board as FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL.
Fire alarm control panel primary power wiring shall be a minimum of 4.0 sq.mm. The control panel
cabinet shall be properly grounded.
1.2 Installation
Fire alarm system wiring shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and
EIT Standard 2001-56 Thai Electrical Code -2013.
1.3 Test and Commissioning
All final connections, tests, adjustments and calibrations shall be made under the direct supervision
of a factory-trained technician of the fire alarm system supplier.
END
5.3.16 : FIRE BARRIER SYSTEM
PART I: DESCRIPTION
After erection of materials and equipment through wall and opening had been completed, it is the
responsibility of the Contractor to fill up voids and openings with fire resistant materials to protect
fire or smoke from spreading out from one room to another room through these voids and openings.
The applied to wall considered to be a fire or acoustical protection wall, unless otherwise specified.
Cover or escutcheon plates shall be provided, wherever exposed, and shall be neatly placed to the
Also, after the erection of all conduits, wirings, and raceways in the shaft, block- out or any floor
openings, the voids must be sealed with fire rating material, or as approved by the Engineer unless
The fire barrier system shall comply with the following codes and standards:
(2) NEC article 300-21 (NFPA 70) : Spread of Fire or Products of Combustion
(3) UL1479 : Standard for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestops
(4) ASTM E814 : Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of
Penetration Firestop Systems
(5) NFPA 130 : Standard for Fixed Guideway Transit and
Passenger Rail System
1.3 Submittals
the Engineer.
work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Technical Requirement
1.1.1 The fire barrier materials shall be based on the standards.
1.1.2 The fire barrier materials shall be of minimum 3-hour fire resistant rating.
1.1.3 The fire barrier materials must not be toxic during installation or in case of fire.
1.1.4 Easy to be dismantled and replaced in case of rearrangement.
1.1.5 Withstand over vibration.
1.1.6 Easy installation.
1.1.7 Before and after fire spreads, the fire barrier materials must be strong enough.
1.1.8 The fire barrier materials must be submitted to the Engineer for approval before installation.
PART II: EXECUTION
1.1 Installation
1.1.1 At every voids and openings, fire barrier materials shall be installed where:
(1) Every voids, sleeves, and openings appear on wall, floor, beam and shaft, provided for
raceway installation, must be sealed after the erection work had been completed.
(2) Voids, sleeves, and openings which are provided for future installation.
(3) Voids between electrical conduits and sleeves.
(4) Voids between electrical cabling and raceway on fire wall and floor.
(5) Voids between raceway and sleeves on fire wall and floor.
1.1.2 The method of fire barrier material installations must be submitted to the Engineer for approval
END
5.3.17 : PHOTOLUMINESCENT PATH MARKING SIGNS

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1.1.1 The Contractor shall furnish and install the Photoluminescent Path Marking Signs which to be
located throughout the fire escape route (emergency egress) including fire escape stairs as
indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.2.1 The Photoluminescent Path Markings Signs shall comply with the following codes and
standards:
(1) DIN 67510-1 : Photoluminescent pigments and products
Part 1: Measurement and marking at the producer
(2) ISO 7010 : Graphical symbols – Safety colours and safety signs –
Registered safety signs
(3) NFPA 101 : Life Safety Code
(4) TIS 2430-2552 : Internally Illuminated Emergency Exit Sign Luminaires for
Buildings
(5) UL 1994 : Standard for Luminous Egress Path Marking Systems
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit material catalogues together with technical products data,
maintenance data and certificates from relevant standards for approval prior to proceed
purchasing.
(2) A sample of proposed equipment shall be submitted for approval prior to proceed purchasing.
approval prior to proceed installation.
4.2 The contractor shall submit test report to confirm luminance quality.
4.3 The Contractor shall guarantee the quality and functioning of all installations included
work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Description
1.1.1 The Photoluminescent Path Marking Signs shall comply with the aforementioned standards
and the following requirements hereafter.
1.1.2 The photoluminescent path marking signs shall be the products designed compatible for
installation on each type of surface (e.g. stair treads, door frames, wall skirting, wall, etc.) and
shall be highly durable for rubbing/treading/UV depending on such locations.
1.1.3 The photoluminescent pigments shall be daily excited by sufficient illumination from the
general lightings according to ISO 17398 or/and manufacturer's instruction. Where an automatic
lighting control is applied in area that the equipment (path marking signs) to be installed, the
Contractor shall schedule to on-off such lightings conforming to the pigments excitation
instruction.
1.1.4 Luminance quality of photoluminescent pigments are class C according to DIN 67510.Luminance
shall be at least 150 mcd/m² at 60 minute, delay time at least 1800 minute. This Luminance will
be based on fully charge. Actual luminance is based on atmostphear’s lighting.
1.2 Materials
1.2.1 All products about the photoluminescent path marking signs, to achieve a complete safety
guidance system, shall be certified test according to UL 1994 and/or DIN 67510 Part 3. The
products, as a minimum, shall comprise:
(1) Guidance markers (or stripes); mounted on floor throughout the emergency escape routes.
(2) Guidance markers (or stripes); mounted at wall skirting throughout the emergency
escape routes.
(3) Warning markers (or stripes); mounted at door frames of the Emergency-Exit Doors.
(4) Guidance markers (or stripes); mounted on stair treads of the Fire Escape Stairs.
(5) Warning stripes; mounted on nose of stair treads of the Fire Escape Stairs.
(6) Emergency Exit Signs; mounted at low location, above wall skirting intermittently
throughout the escape routes.
(7) Supplementary Signage for Fire Protection and Safety System; such as fire extinguisher,
FHC, fire alarm manual stations etc. throughout the escape routes.
1.2.2 The products shall be made of durable materials with long lifetime pigments which its
luminance quality should not decrease for at least ten (10) years.
1.2.3 The visible distance of the products shall not less than ten (10) meters and the duration of
visibility shall not less than two (2) hours after loss of illumination.
1.2.4 Luminance quality of the products shall be in compliance with DIN 67510 or ISO 17398 with
minimum brightness rating of 150 mcd/m² at 10 minutes and 22 mcd/m² at 60 minutes (Class C).
1.2.5 The photoluminescent path markings (guidance and warning) installed on floor including on
stair treads shall be non-slip material and not tripping where installed, and shall also be water-
resistant material not to absorb water and humidity.
1.2.6 Graphical symbols, used on emergency exit signs including its dimension, shall be in
compliance with TIS 2430 (latest edition) or/and ISO 7010. For the supplementary signage for
fire protection and safety system, graphical texts and icons shall comply with ISO 7010 and
shall also be compatible with the Architectural work.
1.2.7 Standard graphical symbol will be printed on plate by high quality photoluminescent pigments.
For non-standard graphical symbols are accepted to use whole photoluminescent plate with
graphic sticker.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Installation
3.2.1 The Contractor shall conduct functional test and commissioning of the system which is
complied with the manufacturing standards and the Engineer requirements.
END
5.3.18 : HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

PART I: DESCRIPTION
(1) The aim of this document is to describe air-insulated, metal-enclosed Medium Voltage
switchboards, designed to equip high power indoor HV/MV, MV/MV, or MV/LV substations.
(2) Switchgear shall be designed to minimize any risk of short circuits and to ensure personnel
and operational safety during all operating conditions, inspections and maintenance.
(3) All materials shall be suitable for continuous operation of the switchgear at its rated load for
at least 30 years.
(4) This specification describes the requirements for the design, manufacture, testing, supply
erection, installation, commissioning and handing over in satisfactory operating condition of
Medium Voltage Switchgear (MV) or Metal –Clade(Enclosed) Switchgear
(5) Unless indicated otherwise, the Medium Voltage Switchgear (MV) or Metal –Clade (Enclosed)
Switchgear shall be type tested Switchgear Mandatories Test.All drawings covering the design
and construction shall be prepared to the satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative.
(6) This specification defines requirements that shall apply to prefabricated Medium Voltage
Switchgear (MV) or Metal –Clade (Enclosed) Switchgear assemblies. It defines the basic features
of the equipment and the requirement that manufacturers shall fulfil in order to provide
equipment manufactured and tested in accordance with International Electrotechnical
Standards (IEC)
(7) The manufacturer who designed the equipment and who confirmed the performances through
certified design & type tests has also the authority to licence or delegate the assembly of this
equipment to assembly manufacturers (panel builders). In such case, the assembly
manufacturer (panel builder) presenting the equipment for tender shall demonstrate its
connection to the original manufacturer, by means of an Technical guide, Assembly Guide,
Quality guide, Annual audit report and Licence Audit certificate in all 5 year ago to present.for
the category of duty specified will be considered providing all certification is valid for the type
tested assembly.
(8) Manufacturer is TTA Medium Voltage Switchgear (MV) or Metal –Clade (Enclosed) Switchgear
assemblies by manufactured in Thailand only (Local Manufacturer) under licensed from original
Manufacturer more along than 10 year and present all document in approve process
(9) The High Voltage switchgear will be supplied and installed as indicated on the Drawings and
will comply with the Technical Specifications specified herein.
(10) The High Voltage switchgear will be rated as indicated on the Drawings and fully operate
(11) VOCABULARY USED IN THIS SPECIFICATION
- Original manufacturer: the company which initially designed the Switchgear system and
performed the design verification tests according to IEC62271-200 / IEC 62271-202
- Assembly manufacturer: the company which executes the detailed design, assembles
and perform routine verifications for the Switchgear object of this specification, in strict
compliance with original manufacturer requirements.
- Switchgear: electrical Medium voltage (Un 1kV -52kV) panel assembly complying with
the terms of this specification
- Indoor Medium Voltage Switchboards, Modular, air-insulated, metal-enclosed switchgear
* LSC2B  « Loss of service continuity »
* * PM  « Metallic partition and shutters but with discontinuity >12.5mm

- LSC : The LSC stands for level of Loss of Service Continuity when there is an opened
main-circuit compartment, i.e. the extent to which busbars/cables may be left
energized, but not necessarily with power flowing through them.
- LSC : 1The 1denotes that there is no service continuity at least for one functional unit
other than the one containing the opened main circuit compartment. 3
- LSC : 2The 2denotes that there is service continuity of all functional units other than
the one containing the opened main-circuit compartment
- LSC2A : The A denotes that there is no service continuity of the functional unit
containing the opened main-circuit compartment. This class can be achieved with
a) a partition between each functional unit; and
b) With a minimum of two compartments and one point of disconnection per
functional unit.
- LSC2B : The B denotes that the service continuity applies to other compartments of
the functional unit containing the opened main circuit compartment. This class can be
achieved with
a) A partition between each functional unit;
b) A minimum of three compartments and two points of disconnection
per functional unit
- LSC-1PM: The PM denotes that partitions and shutters are metallic.
- LSC2B-PI: The PI denotes that at least one partition or shutter is insulation.
The High Voltage switchgear shall comply with the following the latest editions of Standard.
(2) IEC 60694 : Common specifications for high-voltage switchgear and
controlgear standards.
(3) IEC 62217-200 : High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – part 200: AC
metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated
voltages above 1kV and up to and including 52kV.
(4) IEC 62271-100 : High-voltage alternating-current circuit breakers.
(5) IEC 62271-102 : High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – part 102:
Alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches.
(6) IEC 60265-1 : High voltage alternating current switches.
(7) IEC 60801 : Monitoring and control.
(8) IEC 60529 : Degree of protection provided by enclosures
(9) IEC 61869-2 (60044-1) : Current transformers
(10) IEC 61869-1(60044-2) : Voltage transformer.
(11) IEC 61869-6 (60044-8) : Electronic current transformers
(12) IEC 61958 : Voltage Presence Indication Systems
(13) IEC 61850 : Communication Networks and Systems In Substations
The equipment conforms to other international standards having similar characteristics and
providing equal performance and/or quality to that specified may be proposed. In this case, the
complete ENGLISH language copies of the standard shall be submitted to the Employer’s
Representative for comment and agreement prior to use
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the detailed technical data and catalogues of the UPS for
approval before purchasing.
(2) The Contractor shall submit the installation details and routing plans of the UPS for approval
(3) The Contractor shall submit calculation sheets for batteries capacity which is based on 25C
operating temperature
(4) The Contractor shall submit the battery de-rating curve and the life expectancy decreasing data
due to room temperature variation.
5.2 The Contractor shall submit test certificates of equipment and materials issued
by the internationally recognized institutes, such as Third party
IEC laboratory by CESI Italy,
STC Japan,
ESEF ASEFA France,
CPRI India,
KEMA The Netherlands,
KERI South Korea,
PEHLA Germany,
STLNA USA,
SATS Norway,
LOVAG Agreement Group
ACAE Italy ,
ALPHA Germany ,
test station which is member of STL. The test reports included all test data,
reading, records and test forms shall be submitted etc accepted by the
Engineer.
5.3 The test certificates or reports submitted shall indicate the validating
time which is still effective during the date of approval.
5.4 All Printed Circuit Board (PCB) shall conform coating to protect dust
from environment.
5.5 The Contraction shall guarantee the quality and functioning of all
installations included in the Contract for a period of two (2) years after the
acceptance date of complete work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Technical characteristics
The switchgear shall be designed and tested for the following electrical values:
Basic Switchgear
Rated Voltage 36 kV 24 kV 7.2 kV
Operating Voltage 33 kV 22 kV 6.6 kV
Basic Switchgear
Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
Insulated Level 70kV – 50 Hz, 1 50kV – 50 Hz, 1 min. 20kV –50 Hz, 1 min.
min., 170kV – 125kV – 1.2/50μs 60kV – 1.2/50μs
1.2/50μs
Busbar rated current 1250A 1250A 1250A
Short-circuit current 25kA – 3 sec 25kA – 3 sec 25kA – 3 sec
1.2 Switchboards
The switchboards shall meet the criteria for indoor, air-insulated, metal-enclosed switchgear, in
compliance with IEC 62271-200.
1.3 Functional units
Each functional unit shall contain all the elements needed to perform its function.
The functional units shall comprise:
- An air-insulated, metal-enclosed cubicle, for indoor use
- A withdrawal switchgear device with vacuum breaking
- A digital protection and control system
1.4 Cubicles
1.4.1 Performances
The values below are given for normal operating as defined in IEC 62271-200 and IEC 60694.
Basic cubicle Units

Rated voltage Ur KV rms 33 22 6.6
Rated frequency Fr Hz 50 50 50
Rated normal current In A rms 1250-2000 630- 630-
2500 3150
Rated insulation voltage Ud KV rms 70 50 20
Up KV peak 170 125 60
Rated short-time withstand current Ik KA rms-3s 25 25 25
Standard protection index Enclosure IP4X IP4X IP4X
Busbars
Rated normal current max In A rms 3150 3150 4000
Circuit breaker
Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc KA rms 25 25 25
1.4.2 Architecture and enclosure

The cubicles shall be for the “metal-enclosed switchgear” type, in accordance with the
definition given in IEC standard 62271-200.The outer enclosure shall therefore be metallic
and earthed.Each cubicle shall be built on a self-supporting chassis made of folded steel
plates.They shall naturally be protected against corrosion, without requiring additional
treatment.Since the front doors and end cover plates comprise the visible parts of the
switchboard, both sides shall be painted.They shall be made of zinc-plated steel.
1.4.3 Compartments
The cubicles shall comprise four electrically independent compartments, in accordance
with the definition of metal enclosed switchgear given in IEC standard 62271-200.
Composed of; Busbar compartment, Switchgear compartment, Cable compartment and

Low voltage cabinet.Compartment access shall however be restricted by the presence
of safety mechanisms and interlocks
1.4.4 Fixed main circuit
The power circuit (also called main circuit) is the group of components, within a cubicle,
which participate in conveying power
1.4.5 Earthing circuit
The earthing circuit of a functional unit is the group of components that contribute to
equipment earthing.
The component include:
- The main earth collector.
- Secondary collectors.
- The cable earthing switch.
1.5 Switchgear device
1.5.1 Withdrawable vacuum circuit breaker
The circuit breaker shall be designed in accordance with IEC 62271-100 and circuit
breaker devices shall be arranged for local and remote operation.
1.6 Protection and control system
1.6.1 Protection and control unit
The manufacturer of cubicle and circuit-breaker shall manufacture the protection and
control unit. The functional units shall be equipped with integrated multi-functional
digital micro-processor protection relay and control units, which include the protection,
control and monitoring functions
1.6.2 Protection
Each Protection and Control Unit shall contain all the necessary ANSI code protections
according to the considered applications.
Each protection device shall have wide setting ranges, mainly for current protections,
providing a large choice of tripping curves: DT, IDMT, IEC (SIT, LTI, VIT, and EIT).
1.6.3 Measurement
Each Protection and Control unit shall include the measurements needed for operation
and commissioning:
- Phase current, residual current measurement
- Demand current and peak demand currents
- Voltage and frequency
- Active, reactive and apparent power.
- Power factor
- Peak demand powers
- Energy
- Temperature
Measurement accuracy shall be 1% (according to IEC 60255-4).
1.6.4 Operation
The Protection and Control unit shall include an alphanumeric display unit that indicates:
- Measurement values.
- Operating messages (choice of language to be specified on order, with a choice of at

least the following: English or local).
- Maintenance messages.
1.6.5 Communication
The Protection and Control unit shall be fitted with different possible communication
interface protocols:
- Modbus type, RS 485 twisted pair or fiber optic type
- Modbus type over Ethernet TCP-IP 10/100/1000 Mbits/s
- Or equivalent
The unit shall provide time tagging of events within a ms, with an adapted input available
for an external clock synchronization contact.
1.7 Current transformers
- Comply with IEC 60044-1.
- Shall be conventional current transformer
- Shall be epoxy resin molded and labelled individually.
1.8 Voltage transformers
- Shall have the same rated voltage withstand as the switchgear.
They shall be epoxy resin molded and labeled individually.
1.9 Electrical operating mechanism interface
The withdrawable switchgear device (circuit breaker) shall be operated by a mechanism
that includes the following :
- Selection of the relay control mode (local, remote)
- Local opening and closing of the switchgear device controlled by the relay.
This mechanism should be included in the relay device or installed on the front of the
low voltage compartment
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Operating mechanism
All operating mechanisms and access points shall be on the front of the functional units. In
particular, cable and busbar connections must be possible via the front.
Racking out and racking in of the circuit breaker shall be carried out with the door closed.
The door shall include inspection ports for unequivocal viewing of the circuit breaker position
(racked in or racked out).
In no case must the breaking device contacts be visible.
The different operations shall be validated once they have been completed by a special-purpose
selector switch that may be locked out by key-type lock or padlock.
1.2 Mechanical safety devices
The functional units shall have a large number of fail-safe mechanical devices so as to make the
use of the switchgear safe:
- Impossible to ground cables unless the switchgear device is racked out,
- Impossible to rack in or rack out switchgear device when the earthing switch is closed.
- Impossible to rack out a closed switchgear device.
- Impossible to open the switchgear compartment door unless the device is racked out.
- Impossible to gain access to the compartment, which contains the cables when, the earthing
switch is open.
- Impossible to gain access to the voltage transformers and their protection fuses unless the VTs
have been withdrawn.
- Impossible to extract a switchgear device from a cubicle unless the extraction truck is solidly
locked to the cubicle.
- Locking of the switchgear device to the truck when it is disconnected from the cubicle.
None of these safety measures may be ensured by the use of a key-lock or padlock.
1.3 Testing
Type Test report according to IEC62271-200 standard of the representative of the Proposed
type/model switchgear. The test shall be in accordance with IEC 62271 part 1 (IEC 60694) standard.
All mandatory type tests and including internal arcing test shall be conducted at the well-known
international third party testing laboratory or tested at the manufacturer’s testing laboratory
witnessed and certified by the well known international third party’s laboratory representative.
Certified Test Reports shall be submitted before manufactured.The Medium Voltage Switchgear
(MV) or Metal –Clade (Enclosed) must be a Type Tested Assembly, compliant with IEC 62271-200.
The Medium Voltage Switchgear (MV) or Metal –Clade (Enclosed) type-test certificates shall be
originated by a worldwide known third-party certification organization follow up item Testing
laboratory.
The supplier should be able to provide several certificates (not only one) upon request during
the project, with a specific focus to prove that a switchboard has been tested with characteristics
close to the object of this project. Certificates for high current testing will not be accepted as
proof of the whole system compliance with IEC 62271-200. These certificates should either reflect
the Switchgear characteristics or allow understanding on how these characteristics are reached. In
this second case, the manufacturer shall be able to show design tables (such as de-rating or co-
ordination tables) formally originated from the Switchgear original manufacturer.
The selected switchgear and control gear brands shall be equal to the ones mentioned in the
type tests reports of the equipment.
The test reports shall be written to the name of the original manufacturer who designed the
switchboard system.
Each type test certificate related to IEC 62271-200 standard shall mention the complete testing
of the system as per following paragraphs:
The proposed medium voltage switchgear shall have successfully passed at least The following
tests:
3.3.1 Type testing
The switchgear supplier shall submit the following type of testing certificates:
- Impulse dielectric withstand test.
- Dielectric withstand at power frequency test.
- Temperature rise test.
- Admissible short time current withstand test.
- Mechanical operation test.
- Degree of protection check.
- Switchgear device breaking capacity check.
- Switchgear device making capacity check.
The test shall be carried out in accordance with the corresponding IEC standard and the
certificate from license owner shall be acceptable.
3.3.2 Routine testing
The switchgear supplier shall perform the following individual routine testing certificates
during the witness test as following topic:
- Relay and low voltage auxiliary functional test.
- Checking of conformity with drawings and diagrams.
END
5.3.19 : HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE

PART I: DESCRIPTION
(1) The Contractor shall furnish, install and test the high voltage cables and accessories as described
or indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
(2) This Specification of high voltage cables shall be provided for wiring in elevated structures,
IEC 60502-2 : Compact round stranded Copper 18/30 (36kV) and PEA standard.
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data, catalogues, cable installation drawings, cable
routes, cable connection and other necessaries accessories of the high voltage cables for
approval before purchase.
(2) The Contractor shall submit routine test reports and type test reports or certificate as necessary
for each type of cable in accordance with the standards as mentioned above.
1.4 Quality Assurance
(1) The equipment manufacturer shall be the latest ISO 9001 certified.
(2) The Contractor shall submit test certificates of equipment and materials issued by the local
or internationally recognized institutes, such as TISI, ASTA, LPCB, KEMA, TUV, etc. accepted by
the Engineer.
(3) The Contraction shall guarantee the quality and functioning of all installations included in the
Contract for a period of two (2) years after the acceptance date of complete work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Aluminium Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR)
The cables shall be manufactured in accordance with IEC 61089 or TIS 85-2548
1.2 Cross-linked Polyethylene (XLPE)
The cables shall be manufactured in accordance with IEC 60502-2 or TIS.2143-2546
1.3 Spaced Aerial Cable (SAC)
The cables shall be manufactured in accordance with ICEA S-66-524 or TIS 2341-2555
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Installation
1.1.1 The high voltage cable 22/33 kV distribution lines shall be installed as overhead lines in
accordance with PEA standards.
1.1.2 Splicing of wires and cables shall be allowed only in the handhole, Manhole and
high-voltage switchgear.
1.1.3 Splicing of high voltage cables shall be by compression type, solderless lugs indented by
proper tool shall be used at the end of all wires and cables and shall be connected to the
splicing kit terminals of the equipment and Install high voltage cable and accessories as
recommended by the manufacturer.
1.2.1 Megger testing shall be conducted for all high voltage cables, 18/30(36kV) volts rated with
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground prior to connecting to equipment and conduct phase-to-
ground testing after the equipment was connected including all connections were tapped.
1.2.2 Insulation resistance tests shall be performed by using a 500 Vdc megger on the
400 volts system. Insulation resistance shall be complied with IEC 60502-1.
1.2.3 For cable in accordance with IEC 60502-2, high voltage test after installation shall be performed
on each conductors using methodology as specified in IEC 60502-2
END
5.3.20 : CONCRETE POLE
PART I: DESCRIPTION
Concrete poles and materials shall be utilized as supporting structure of the overhead lines and The
concrete poles and material shall conform to PEA and specified herein.
(2) The Contractor shall submit test certificates of equipment and materials issued by the
internationally recognized institutes, such as ASTA, LPCB, KEMA, TUV, etc. accepted by the
Engineer.
(3) The test certificates or reports submitted shall indicate the validating time which is still
1.3 Submittals
of the Concrete poles or bus duct for approval before purchasing.
the Engineer.
work.
PART II: PRODUCT

1.1 Concrete Poles
Concrete poles shall be prestressed concrete. The pole surface shall be free pock marks and air
holes. Cement shall be “Portland Cement” and conformed to latest applicable ASTM C-150 or
equivalent. The concrete and the prestressed wire of the pole shall have properties to be conformed
with PEA regulations. The remaining dimensions of the concrete pole shall be as specified in PEA
regulations.
1.2 Crossarms
The concrete crossarms shall be fixed on top of the concrete poles installed along the overhead
lines. The concrete crossarms shall be manufactured, fabricated and furnished to conform to the PEA
regulations.
1.3 Overhead Grounded Wire and Bayonet
The overhead conductor wires installed on concrete poles shall be protected by overhead grounded
wire. The overhead grounded wire conductor size shall be as specified in the Drawings. The bayonet
shall be utilized as overhead grounded wire support. The bayonet shall be made of galvanized steel
and shall be of size and shape as specified in PEA regulations
1.4 Guys
Guys shall consist of guy wire, anchor rod, anchor block an installing accessories. The guy wire shall
be double galvanized stranded steel wire. The size in cross-section area of the guy wire, type and
dimensions of anchor rod and anchor block used for furnishing and installation of the overhead lines
shall be in accordance with requirements or regulations of PEA.
1.5 Miscellaneous Materials
The miscellaneous materials or installing accessories shall be galvanized steel flat brace for fixing
concrete crossarm, bolts, washers, nuts, aluminium tie wire, connectors, clamps, PVC tube, PVC
connecting insolated type, and concrete backfill. The miscellaneous materials shall be manufactured,
fabricated and furnished to conform to PEA regulations.
PART III: EXECUTION
Method of installation of the concrete pole under this Contract shall be in accordance with the
requirements or practice regulations of the Provincial Electricity Authority (PEA) and shall be divided
into the following parts.
1.1 Concrete Poles
The spacing and embedment depth of concrete poles shall be as specified in the Drawings or PEA
regulations, or as approved by the Engineer.
1.2 Grounding Installation
The ground wire and rod of overhead lines shall be furnished and installed as specified herein.
i) At Metering Transformers and Revenue Meter
The high-tension current and potential transformers cases and the revenue meter cabinet and
high-tension lightning arresters shall be electrically connected to separate ground wires and
ground rods. The groundwire of the metering transformers and lightning arresters shall be fixed
on the opposite sides of the concrete pole and shall be insulated above the ground by 2.50
m PVC pipes. The ground rods of each of the ground wires shall be buried in the ground at
the depth of 0.05 m, also in opposite pole sides.
ii) The grounding resistance of the previously specified ground wire and rod, together with the
tests shall be as specified in PEA regulations
END
5.3.21 : HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT

PART I: DESCRIPTION
The work under this section shall include the furnished and installation of the high tension 22/33 kV
distribution lines together with the specified electrical connection of components and accessories,
complete in accordance with as specified herein.
internationally recognized institutes, such as ASTA, LPCB, KEMA, TUV, etc. accepted by the
Engineer.
1.3 Submittals
of the Concrete poles or bus duct for approval before purchasing.
the Engineer.
work.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Standards
The high-tension 22/33 kV equipment and materials as specified hereinafter shall be manufactured,
fabricated and furnished to conform with the latest standard specifications applicable of PEA, IEC, UL,
TIS or approved equivalent.
1.2 Lightning Arresters
The high-tension lightning arresters shall be utilized to protect high-tension equipment and materials
against damage from lightning surge induced in the lines.
The lightning arresters shall have manufactured, fabricated and furnished to conform with the latest
applicable IEC 60099 or equivalent.
The lightning arresters shall have the following ratings and features:
Nominal Voltage 22 kV 33 kV
(a) Type Single-pole,outdoor type Single-pole,outdoor type
(b) Rated voltage 20-21 kV 30-31 kV
(c) Rated Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz
(d) Lightning impulse 150 kV 200 kV
(e)Interrupting current 10 kA 10 kA
1.3 Current limiting Power Fuses
The high-tension current limiting power fuses shall be utilized to isolate an electric short circuit from
the system in order to protect system equipment from damage.
The current limiting power fuses or cutout fuse dropout shall be manufactured, fabricated and
furnished to conform with the latest applicable IEC 60282, or ANSI C37.41, or approved equivalent.
The current limiting power fuses shall have the following ratings and features:
(a) Type Single-pole,outdoor, Single-pole,outdoor,
vertical mounted type vertical mounted type
(b) Rated voltage 27 kV 38 kV
(d) Rated impulse 125 kV 150 kV
withstand voltage (BIL)
(e) Rated nominal current 100 A (cont.) 100 A (cont.)
(f) Interrupting current 10 kA (Asym. rms.) 10 kA (Asym. rms.)
1.4 Metering Transformers and Revenue Meter
All equipment shall consist of potential transformers, current transformers and revenue meter shall
be specified and furnished by the Provincial Electricity Authority (PEA)
1.5 Overhead 22/33 kV Lines
The overhead 22/33 kV lines shall be made of Partial Insulated Cable (PIC). The cable shall be
manufactured, fabricated and furnished to conform with TIS 86-2517 standard, or approved
equivalent. The wires shall have cross-section area as shown in the drawing.
1.6 Concrete Poles and Materials
See section 5.1.23
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Method of Installation
Method of installation of the high-tension 22/33 kV electric lines under this Contract shall be in
accordance with the requirements or practice regulations of the Provincial Electricity Authority (PEA)
and shall be divided into the following parts.
1.1.1 Concrete Poles and Materials
See section 5.1.23
1.1.2 Lightning Arresters
The high-tension lightning arresters shall be installed at the 3-phase distribution transformer
station on spun prestressed concrete beam with the size of 100 by 100 by 3,200 mm and
otherwise on spun prestressed concrete crossarm with the size of 100 by 100 by 2,500 mm.
1.1.3 Current Limiting Power Fuses
The current limiting power fuses or the high-tension dropout fuse links and cutouts shall be
installed at the 3-phase distribution transformer station on spun prestressed concrete beam
with the size of 100 by 100 by 3,200 mm. At the high-tension metering transformer, 22/33 kV
the high-tension dropout fuse links and cutouts shall be installed on spun prestressed concrete
cross-arm with the size of 100 by 100 by 2,500 mm.
1.1.4 Metering Transformer and Revenue
The metering transformer and revenue meter in the anodized aluminium cabinet shall be
furnished by PEA.
1.1.5 Grounding Installation
The grounded wire and rod of high-tension 22/33 kV overhead lines shall be furnished and
installed as specified herein.
i) At Metering Transformers and Revenue Meter
The high-tension current and potential transformers cases and the revenue meter cabinet and
high-tension lightning arresters shall be electrically connected to separate grounded
wires and grounded rods. The grounded wire of the metering transformers and lightning
arresters shall be fixed on the opposite sides of the concrete pole and shall be insulated
above the ground by 2.50 m PVC pipes. The grounded rods of each of the grounded
wires shall be buried in the ground at the depth of 0.05 m, also in opposite pole sides.
ii) The grounding resistance of the previously specified grounded wire and rod.
END
5.3.22 : TRANSFORMER
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1.1 General
For three-phase transformers of cast resin dry type, The transformer (including magnetic core, HV&LV
winding, electrical protection and metal enclosure) shall be completed set and tested from the
manufacturer, indoor installation, destined for use in three-phase HV/LV distribution systems. These
transformers shall be manufactured in accordance with a quality system in conformity with ISO 9001
an environmental management system in conformity with ISO 14001, both certified by an official
independent organization.
For three-phase transformers of oil type, this specification covers three phase, oil immersed, natural
self-cooled, hermetically sealed type transformer suitable for outdoor installation.
1.2.1 Cast resin dry type transformers shall be in compliance with the following standards:
(1) IEC 60076-1 to 5 : Power Transformers
Part 1: General
Part 2: Temperature rise for liquid-immersed transformers
Part 3: Insulation levels, dielectric tests and external clearances in air
Part 4: Guide to the lightning impulse and switching impulse testing - Power
transformers and reactors
Part 5: Ability to withstand short circuit
(2) IEC 60076-11 : Dry-type transformers
(3) IEC 60076-12 : Loading guide for dry-type power transformers
(4) BS EN 50541-1 : Three phase dry-type distribution transformers 50 Hz, from 100 kVA to
3150 kVA, with highest voltage for equipment exceeding 36 kV.
(5) Specific Standards according to local country requests
The manufacturer shall produce a test report from an official laboratory on a transformer
of the same design as those produced and on the same transformer which have initially
passed the above Climatic and Environmental tests. This test shall be performed in
accordance with IEC 60076-11.
1.2.2 Oil type transformer shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable
standard specifications and codes in the following:
(1) VDE AND DIN Regulation and Din Standard (VDE 0532/11)
(2) IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
(IEC 60076)
(3) BSI British Standard Institute (BS 171-1 to 171-5)
(4) TIS 384-2543 Thai Industrial Standards Institute
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the detailed technical data and catalogues of The
Transformer for approval before purchasing.
(a) Copy of Type Test Certificate of lightning impulse on line terminals of transformer
from recognized government test laboratory.
(b) Dimensional drawings.
(c) Technical catalogues.
(d) Manufacturers’ test certificates provided by the supplies.
(e) Installation, operation & maintenance manuals.
(2) The Contractor shall submit the installation details and routing plans of The Diesel
Engine Generator for approval before installation.
(a) Installation detail drawings of The Diesel Engine Generator (Dimension plan,
(b) Installation detail drawings of Cables & Raceways and its accessories connected
with The Diesel Engine Generator
(a) The equipment manufacturer shall be the latest ISO 9001 certified.
(b) The Contractor shall submit test certificates of equipment and materials issued by
the internationally recognized institutes, such as ASTA, LPCB, KEMA, TUV, etc
(c) The test certificates or reports submitted shall indicate the validating time which
is still effective during the date of approval.
(d) The Contraction shall guarantee the quality and functioning of all installations
complete work
PART II: PRODUCTS

1.1 Cast resin dry type transformer
- Rated power : As indicated on Drawing with natural air cooling system
: up to 40% of AN for air forced cooling system
- HV Network : 33/22 kV, 3-phases, 3-wires as indicated on the Drawing
- LV Network : 3-phases, 4-wires, 230/400V, 50Hz, TN grounding system
(TN-C, TN-S, TN-C-S according to indicated on the

Drawing).
- Cooling system : Air natural and Air Forced
- HV tapping range : Off load tap changer ±2 X 2.5 %
- Impedance Voltage : As indicated on the Drawing
- Vector group : Dyn11
- Rated primary insulation level : 36/24kV
- Rated primary voltage : 33/22kV as indicated on the Drawing
- Rated secondary voltage at no load : 230/400V
- Power frequency withstand voltage : 70kV at 36kV or 50 kV at 24kV,
50Hz at 1 min.
- Basic Impulse Level (BIL) : 170kV at 36kV or 125kV at 24kV, 50Hz at
1.2/50μs.
- HV & LV winding conductor : Aluminium & Aluminium or Copper &
Copper as indicated on Drawing
- HV winding & Insulation class : Encapsulated in cast resin & class F with
temperature rise ≤ 100K
- LV winding & Insulation class : Pre-impregnated epoxy resin or Prepreg insulation
& class F with temperature rise ≤ 100K
- Fire behavior classification : F1, IEC 60076-11
- Climatic classification : C2, IEC 60076-11
- Environmental classification : E2, IEC 60076-16
- Partial discharges : ≤ 10 pc at 1.3 Un
- Losses : no load losses ≤ 0.35%
: load losses at 75 °C ≤ 1.00%
- Efficiency (%) : ≥ 98% at load 75%, cos φ = 0.8 and 120 °C
: ≥ 97% at load 100%, cos φ = 0.8 and
120 °C
- Sound pressure level LPA : ≤ 68 dB(A) at 1m.
- Metal enclosure protection : IP21
1.1.2 Materials
1.1.2.1 Magnetic core
The magnetic core shall be made from laminations of insulated silicon steel, and
protected against corrosion with a coat of varnish. The magnetic core shall be stacked
using overlapping-interlocking or step-lap technology and noise-damping devices.
1.1.2.2 LV windings
The LV winding shall be produced using aluminium or copper foils, according to
indicated on Drawing. This foil shall be insulated between each layer using a heat-
reactivated class F pre-impregnated epoxy resin film or prepreg insulation. The ends
of the winding shall be protected and insulated using a class F insulating material. The
whole winding assembly shall be polymerised throughout by being autoclaved for 2
hours at 130°C.
1.1.2.3 HV windings
The HV winding shall be separated from the LV windings to give an air gap between
the MV and LV circuits in order to avoid depositing of dust on the spacers placed in
the radical electrical field and to make maintenance easier. These shall be made of
aluminium or copper wire or foil (according to the manufacturer's preference) with
class F insulation. The HV windings shall be vacuum cast in a class F fireproof epoxy
resin casting. The flame-retardant filler shall be thoroughly mixed with the resin and
hardener. It shall be composed of trihydrated alumina powder (or aluminium
hydroxide) or other flame-retardant products to be specified, either mixed with silica
or not. The casting system shall be of class F. The interior and exterior of the windings
shall be reinforced with a combination of glass fibre to provide thermal shock
withstand.
1.1.2.4 MV winding support spacers
The MV winding support spacers shall provide sufficient support in transport, operation
and during bolted short circuit conditions as well as in the case of an earthquake. The
spacers shall be circular in shape for easy cleaning. They will give an extended tracking
line to give better dielectric withstand under humid or high dust conditions. The
spacers should be include an Elastomer cushion that will allow it to absorb expansion
according to load conditions. This Elastomer cushion shall be incorporated in the
spacer to prevent it being deteriorated by air or UV.
1.1.2.5 HV connections
The HV connections shall be made from above on the top of the connection bars.
Each bar shall be drilled with a 13 mm hole ready for connection of cable lugs on
terminal plates. The HV connection bars shall be in rigid copper bars protected by
heat shrinkable tubing. HV connections in cables are not allowed, in order to avoid all
risk of contact, due to cables flapping. The HV connections shall be in copper.
1.1.2.6 LV connections
The LV connections shall be made from above onto bars located at the top of the
coils on the opposite side to the HV connections. Connection of the LV neutral shall
be directly made to the LV terminals between the LV phase bars. The LV connection
bars shall be in copper or in tinned aluminium (according to preference of the
manufacturer). The output from each LV winding will comprise a tin-plated aluminium
or copper connection terminal and shall be using a contact interface with aluminium-
copper bi-metallic strip for connection between copper to aluminium. These shall be
assembled according to current practices, notably using spring washers under the
fixings and nuts. Devices in the 630 to 2500 kVA range shall be easy to connect using
factory-built electrical ducting through an optional interface. Stress withstand in the
instance of a bolted short circuit on the connector shall be guaranteed by the
manufacturer.
1.1.2.7 HV tapping
The tapping which act on the highest voltage adapting the transformer to the real
supply voltage value, shall be off-circuit bolted links. Tapping with connection cables
are not allowed. These bolted links shall be attached to the HV coils.
1.1.3 Accessories and standard equipment
1.1.3.1 PT100 for winding temperature sensor
1.1.3.2 4 flat bi-directional rollers
1.1.3.3 Lifting lugs
1.1.3.4 Haulage holes on the undercarriage

1.1.3.5 Earthling terminals
1.1.3.6 Rating plate
1.1.3.7 "Danger Electricity" warning label
1.1.3.8 Routine tests certificate
1.1.3.9 Instruction manual for installation
1.1.3.10 Commissioning and maintenance in English.
1.1.4 Thermal protection
These transformers shall be equipped with a thermal protection device which will comprise:
1.1.4.1 PT100 thermal detection systems (1 by phase and 1 for spare), installed in the active
part of the transformer. The sensors shall be placed in a tube to enable them to be
replaced if ever necessary.
1.1.4.2 An electronic converter with two independent monitoring circuits equipped with a
changeover switch, one for "Alarm 1" the other for "Alarm 2". The position of the
relays shall be indicated by different coloured indicator lights. A third indicator light
will indicate the presence of voltage. These three indicator lights shall be on the
front of the converter. The electronic converter shall be installed away from the
transformer.
1.1.4.3 A plug-in terminal block for connection of the sensors to the electronic converter.
1.1.4.4 The sensors shall be supplied assembled and wired to the terminal block fixed on
the upper part of the transformer. The converter shall be supplied loose with the
transformer, packaged complete with its wiring diagram.
1.1.5 Metal enclosure
The transformers shall be equipped with a metal enclosure for indoor installation comprising
an integral IP 31 enclosure, which can be dismantled. The metal enclosure shall have anti-
corrosion protection in the manufacturer's standard colour.
1.1.6 MV surge arresters
The transformer shall be protected by phase-earth surge arresters installed directly on the MV
connection terminals (top or bottom). Phase-earth surge arresters shall be according to IEC
60099-4 with 10kA at 8/20 μs wave.
1.1.7 Installation
The transformer shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations
and regulations of the local Electricity Authority: -
2.1.7.1 The transformer shall not be installed in a flood hazard area.
2.1.7.2 The altitude shall not be over 1000 meters above mean sea level.
2.1.7.3 The ambient temperature for the transformer to be within the above limits.
2.1.7.4 The local ventilation shall be allowed for the dissipation of heat from the transformer.
2.1.7.5 Provision shall be made for access to bushings and tapping links of the transformer.
1.1.8 Testing and Commissioning
1.1.8.1 The transformer shall be completely assembled at the factory. The transformer
shall be subject, unless otherwise noted, to the following tests by and at the
expense of the Contractor.
1.1.8.2 All tests described below shall be performed in the presence of the Employer’s
Representative.
(1) Applied potential test
(2) Induced potential test

(3) No-load loss by the average-voltage voltmeter method (To be made after the
impulse tests)
(4) Exciting current test
(5) Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection
(6) Resistance measurements on all windings on the rated voltage connections
of the transformer and at each tap
(7) Temperature rise (heat run)
(8) Ratio tests on the rated voltage connections and on all tap connections
(9) Polarity and phase-relation tests
(10) Audible noise level tests shall be made in accordance with the applied
standards
1.1.8.3 Electrical tests
(1) Routine tests
These tests shall be carried out on all the transformers after the manufactu-
ring, enabling an official test certificate to be produced for each one:
- Measurement of windings resistance
- Measurement of the transformation ratio and vector
group
- Measurement of impedance voltage and load loss
- Measurement of no load loss and no load current
- Applied voltage dielectric test
- Induced voltage dielectric test
- Measurement of partial discharges. For this measurement, the
acceptance criterion shall be less than or equal to 10 pC at 1.30 Un.
All these tests shall be defined in the IEC 60076-11 and IEC 60076-1 to
60076-3 standards. The transformer shall be tested in metal enclosure.
(2) Type tests or special tests
These tests can be requested as option, but are subject to prior agreement
of the supplier:
- Temperature rise test carried out in accordance with the simulated
loading method as defined by the IEC 60076-11 standard
- Lightning impulse test in accordance with IEC 60076-3
- Short circuit test in accordance with IEC 60076-5
- Noise level measurements in accordance with IEC 60076-10.
All these tests shall be defined by the IEC 60076-11 and IEC 60076-1 to
60076-5 standards.
1.1.8.4 The Contractor shall furnish four (4) certified copies of reports of the results of tests,
curves and standard application data. The costs of the tests and report shall be
borne by the Contractor.
1.2 Oil type transformer
- Rated power : As indicated on Drawing
- HV Network : 33/22 kV, 3-phases, 3-wires as indicated on the Drawing
- LV Network : 3-phases, 4-wires, 230/400V, 50Hz, TN grounding system (TN-C, TN-S, TN-C-S
according to indicated on the Drawing).

- HV tapping range : Off load tap changer ±2 X 2.5 %
- Impedance Voltage : As indicated on the Drawing
- Vector group : Dyn11
- Rated primary insulation level : 36/24kV
- Rated primary voltage : 33/22kV as indicated on the Drawing
- Rated secondary voltage at no load : 230/400V
- Power frequency withstand voltage : 70kV at 36kV or 50 kV at 24kV, 50Hz at 1 min.
- Basic Impulse Level (BIL) : 170kV at 36kV or 125kV at 24kV, 50Hz at 1.2/50μs.
- HV & LV winding conductor : Copper & Copper as indicated on Drawing
- Losses : no load losses ≤ 0.35%
- Efficiency (%) : ≥ 98% at load 75%, cos φ = 0.8 and 75°C
: ≥ 97% at load 100%, cos φ = 0.8 and 75°C
1.2.2 Materials
1.2.2.1 Tank
Each transformer shall be provided with steel housing of substantial construction
which shall be oil tight and gas tight. The tank shall be an effective cooling and
ventilation construction to release internal heat produced during service. Each of
the four sides shall be produced from a single sheet of metal which is fabricated of
a rigid bottom with an oil drainage outlet, corrugated side walls with a thickness not
less than 1.2 mm. The tank shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage or
permanent deformation, the oil pressure at a maximum over pressure of 0.21
Kg/cm2 and a vacuum of 755 mm.Hg and have sufficient strength to withstand
internal and external faults. The tank cover shall be provided with a sufficient slope
on all sides so as to avoid collection of rainwater or other moisture.
The hermetically sealed type transformer tank shall be completely hermetically
closed and filled with oil at ambient temperature to prevent any humidity to
penetrate which is the major agent for oxidation. The cooling fins of the tank shall
be designed to absorb dilatation of transformer oil according to the increase of
transformer load.
1.2.2.2 Core
The core shall be constructed entirely of high quality, cold rolled grain oriented,
non-aging; high permeability silicon steel and designed to accessible 110% rated
voltage without making any damage to the transformer core. The steel shall be in
thin laminations thus allowing a good lamination factor, annealed after cutting by
highly precise machines and rolled to insure smooth surface at the edges. Both
sides of each steel sheet shall be insulated with a durable, heat-resistance baked
enamel or vanish. The overlapping joint core shall be rigidly clamped with positive
locking devices to insure adequate mechanical strength to support the winding,
prevent shifting of laminations during shipment and to reduce vibration to minimize
noise level during operation.
1.2.2.3 Winding
The design, construction, and treatment of the winding shall be given properly,
consideration to all service factors, such as high dielectric and mechanical strength
of insulation, coil characteristics, uniform electrostatic flux distribution, prevention
of corona formation and minimum restriction to free oil circulation.
Winding conductor shall be free from scale, burrs, splinters and shall be uniformly
insulated. Permanent current-carrying joints for splices shall be welded or brazed,
properly formed and finished, and insulated to conform to the basic insulation. The
completed assembly of core and coils shall be dried in vacuum sufficient to insure
elimination of air and moisture within the insulating structure. After the drying
process the assembly shall be immediately impregnated with dry oil.
(1) H.V. Winding
The H.V. winding shall be either round or rectangular copper conductors
enameled or paper insulated which has a high dielectric strength and good
temperature stability. The winding shall be firmly braced in the axial and
radial directions so that short-circuit forces can cause no loosening. The
internal insulation shall be designed to withstand impulse voltage stresses at
all points in order to give protection against surges.
(2) L.V. Winding
The L.V. winding shall be copper winding to allow the current density to
distribute freely along the width of the conductor to reduce axial short-circuit
force. The winding insulation shall also be designed to provide the strength
necessary to resist radial short-circuit forces.
The insulation resistance between winding and earth tested by mega ohm
meter not less than 2,000 V. At the average temperature 35°C and relative
humidity 80%.
- Primary-Secondary not less than 1,000 Meg.Ohm.
- Primary -Earth not less than 1,000 Meg.Ohm.
- Secondary - Earth not less than 600 Meg.Ohm.
1.2.2.4 Bushing
The bushing shall conform to the requirement of the reference standard. All porcelain
used in bushing shall be wet process, homogeneous, and free from cavities or other
flaws. The glazing shall be uniform in color and free from blisters, burns or other
defects. The color of all porcelain insulators shall be chocolate brown and all
porcelain parts shall be 1 piece.
1.2.2.5 Transformer Oil
The transformer oil shall be well filtered. The dielectric strength shall not less than 35
kV, before filling in the transformer tank shall, as tested by ASTM D 877 or equal. The
dielectric strength of the sample of insulation oil taken from the new transformer shall
not be less than 27 kV, when measured in accordance with ANSI Standard method of
testing electrical insulation oil C 59.12-1966 or equivalent.
1.2.2.6 Tank Cleaning and Painting
All surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by sand blasting or shot blasting before
painting. Interior surface of the tank shall be finished with oil resisting paint. Exterior
surface shall be painted with a primer coat and the tank finish shall be a ash-gray color.
The paint used for the tank finish shall have special heat, oil and weather-resisting
properties.
1.2.2.7 Tapping and Tap Changing

Tapping shall be changed with an off-circuit tap changer, provided on the high-voltage
winding so that the ratio can be matched to local system voltage conditions. The tap
changer positions are identified and located by means of a locking screw.
1.2.2.8 Terminal Arrangement
H.V. and L.V. bushing shall be equipped with solderless clamp type connectors suitable
for the conductor used, aluminum or copper.
1.2.2.9 Accessories
Each transformer shall be equipped with the following accessories:
(1) H.V. and L.V. bushing with terminal connectors
(2) Tap changer
(3) Oil level indicator
(4) Lifting lug
(5) Thermometer pocket
(6) Corrugated tank
(7) Name plate with connection diagram
(8) Oil check valve
(9) Draining plug
(10) Earth terminal
(11) Transport rollers
(12) Dial-type thermometer with alarm and trip contacts
(13) Mechanical pressure/relief device
The contacts of all relays, gauges, and thermometers shall be insulated from ground
and shall be of a positive, snap-action or mercury type.
PART III: EXECUTION
1.1 Installation
1.1.1 The transformer shall always be handled in the normal upright position unless information
from the manufacturer indicates that it can be handled otherwise.
1.1.2 Where a transformer cannot be handled by a crane, it may be skidded or moved on rollers
into place, depending upon compatibility of transformer base design and the type of surface
over which it is to be moved. During the handling operation, care shall be taken to prevent
overturning.
1.1.3 The transformer shall never be tilted at an angle greater than 15° from vertical.
1.1.4 When a transformer is shipped it is usually ready to be set in place after the crating and
shipping braces are removed. Bushings and accessories, which are shipped separately, shall be
thoroughly protected against moisture until they are installed.
1.1.5 Proper precaution shall be taken during installation of these parts to protect the transformer
against the entrance of moisture.
1.1.6 Lifting lugs and eyes are designed for lifting with a maximum sling angle of 30° from vertical.
For lift angles of greater than 30° from vertical, spreader bars shall be used to provide a vertical
lift on the lugs.
1.2.1 The transformer shall be completely assembled at the factory. The transformer shall be
subject, unless otherwise noted, to the following test by and at the expense of the Contractor.
1.2.2 All tests described below shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer.
(1) Applied potential test

(2) Induced potential test
(3) No-load loss by the average-voltage voltmeter method (To be made after the
impulse tests)
(4) Exciting current test
(5) Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection
(6) Resistance measurements on all windings on the rated voltage connections of the
transformer and at each tap
(7) Temperature rise (heat run)
(8) Ratio tests on the rated voltage connections and on all tap connections
(9) Polarity and phase-relation tests
(10) Audible noise level tests shall be made in accordance with the applied standard
(11) Leakage test
1.2.3 The Contractor shall furnish four (4) certified copies of reports of the results of tests, curves
and standard application data. The costs of the tests and report shall be borne by the
Contractor.
1.2.4 After installation, before being energized, the transformer shall be tested as follows:
(1) Visual and dimensional check
(2) Measurement of insulation resistance
(3) Measurement of voltage ratio
(4) Check of vector-group symbol
(5) Check of insulation oil
(6) Function test for protective devices
1.2.5 Checks before commissioning
(1) Remove the protective cover and check all the connections (arrangements, distances,
and tightening torques).
(2) Check cable and bus bars entries after connection to ensure IP rating has been
maintained
(3) Verify the position identity of tapping links on the three phases are in accordance with
the diagram on the rating plate.
(4) Verify cleanliness of the transformer and carry out an insulation test
(5) Verify HV, and LV insulations using a 2500V insulation tester (Megger) or as the
manufacturers recommendation. The values of resistances shall be not less than these
specified on instruction manual.
END
5.3.23 : ROAD & YARD LIGHTING
PART I: DESCRIPTION
This Section covers the supply of all lanterns, complete with brackets, columns and other supporting
devices, bases, cables, switchgears and all necessary ancillary equipment together with the
transportation, storage, assembly, erection, connection and testing of the same in order to supply a
complete lighting system for road and yard in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings
and as specified herein.
The Contractor shall search for and take special precautions to protect any existing utility services
such as power lines, telephone lines, gas and oil pipelines, sewers and water works etc., affected by
his operations at his own cost, and shall minimize and be responsible for any damage cause thereby.
He shall at all times and at his own expense conduct his operations in accordance with the
requirements of the Utility Authorities having jurisdiction.
The Road & Yard Lighting shall comply with the following codes and standards:
(2) Standard of Department of Highways
1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the detailed technical data and catalogues for approval before
purchasing.
(2) The Contractor shall submit the installation details and routing plans for approval before
installation.
(a) Installation detail drawings (Dimension plan, sectional view, required clearances and
location of all associate equipment).
(b) Installation detail drawings of Cables & Raceways and its accessories
(b) The Contractor shall submit test certificates of equipment and materials issued by the
the Engineer.
(c) The test certificates or reports submitted shall indicate the validating time which is still
(d) The Contraction shall guarantee the quality and functioning of all installations included
work.
1.4 Responsibility for Design and Materials
(1) A design of the ROAD & YARD LIGHTING has been carried out and the structures have been
designed to accommodate wirings, lanterns and columns in the positions shown on the layout
drawings.
(2) The Contractor shall review the design and co-ordinate functioning of all electrical work and
constructions relating to ROAD & YARD LIGHTING.
(3) The equipment offered and the work done shall be suitable for continuous trouble-free
operation under adverse climatic conditions of heavy rain, high humidity and intense sun light.
The equipment shall be able to withstand over long periods ambient air temperatures varying
from a normal of 10°C to a maximum of 50°C.
1.5 Compliance with Manufacturer's Specifications
The Contractor shall ensure that the equipment used will be entirely suitable for the work to be
performed and that they will be manufactured to proper clearances and fit. The Contractor will
further ensure that the loading of equipment will, under all normal circumstances, not exceed the
maximum specified in writing by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
inspection of all equipment before installation to ensure that they comply with the conditions of the
Contract and that they are not defective in any way as regards materials or workmanship. Should any
such non-compliance or defects be found during the inspection, the Contractor shall correct such
non-compliance and defects to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.6 Spare Parts
(1) The Contractor shall supply spare parts; 5 percent of total lanterns and accessories complete
with control gears, lamps and starters.
(2) All spare parts shall be of the same materials and workmanship as the corresponding original
parts and shall be interchangeable therewith. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer list
of recommended spare parts; 5 percent of total lanterns and accessories as follows:
(a) Street Lighting Lanterns 250 w
 Street Lighting Fixture
 High-pressure sodium lamp 250 w
 Electromagnetic ballasts
 Electronic ignitors
 Capacitors for power factor correction.
(b) Soffit Lanterns 250 w
 Soffit Fixture
(c) Flood Lighting Lanterns 400 w
 Flood-lighting Fixture
(d) Light Emitting Diode (LED)
 LED lamp
 Driver
1.7 Electricity Supply
(1) The provision of an electricity supply at the positions shown on the Drawings has been arranged
with the PEA or MEA. The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging the date and time of
the final connection at each position and maintaining an effective liaison with PEA or MEA.
(2) The Contractor must ensure that the equipment supplied will function correctly at the supply
voltage and must allow for normal variations and surges.
1.8 Excavation and Backfill
Excavation and backfilling for conduit laying and for foundations shall be carried out in accordance
with appropriate standard. Reinstatement shall be such that the surface is restored to at least its
original condition.
(1) The approximate location of the trench is shown on the Drawings but the Contractor shall obtain
the approval of the Engineer for each final location before breaking the ground. The trenches shall
be cleanly excavated, reasonably straight and free from loose soil or stones or water before the
conduits are laid. Trenches where necessary shall be adequately shored. Where trenches change
depth to accommodate access to conduits, or for similar reasons, the change in level shall be
gradual and wherever possible the slope should be not more than 1:5.
(2) No conduits shall be laid in a flooded trench and the Contractor is responsible for dealing with
any surface water and any pumping or bailing of the trenches. Trenches which are flooded
after the conduits are laid and before backfilling has commenced shall be carefully bailed or
pumped dry. If instructed by the Engineer the conduits shall be removed prior to pumping or
bailing.
(3) Conduits shall not be laid in the trench until the Engineer has inspected and approved the
excavation. Backfilling shall not commence until the Engineer has inspected and approved the
conduits and accessories in the trench.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1.1 Street Lighting Lamps
The size and type of lamp at each location is shown on the Drawings.
1.1.1 High Pressure Sodium Lamps
(1) The lamps shall be new and have a colour temperature of approximately 2,000 K.
(2) The rated average life of the lamp shall be 24,000 hours assuming 10 hours per start.
(3) The lamp shall have an initial luminous efficiency of not less than 100 lumens/watt
(4) The run up time of the lamp shall not be longer than 5 minutes to reach 80% of its
final luminous flux, and it shall be capable of re-ignition within 2 minutes after being
switched off.
(5) The majority of the lamp output shall be concentrated and fall within the visible
spectrum.
(6) In the event that the supply voltage drops by 1% the lamp luminous flux output shall
not be reduced by more than 3%
1.1.2 LED Lamps
(1) LED and LED module shall comply with the following requirements
1. IEC 62031 Edition 1 Publication 2008 : LED Modules for General Lighting, Safety
Specification
2. IEC TS 62504 : LED Modules for General Lighting, Term and Definition
3. IES LM-80 : Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Depreciation of LED Light Sources
4. Nominal Color Rendering Index (CRI) : shall not be less than 70,
5. Correlated Color Temperature shall be 6,000 +/-500 K,
6. LED selected shall have expected luminosity at 50,000 hours of not less than 70%
of initial value (L70) when tested in accordance with IES LM-80 and IES Technical
Memorandum 21 (TM-21).
(2) Luminaires or Lanterns shall comply with the following requirements
1. The lantern shall be made of high-pressure die-cast aluminum suitable for installation
on standard Department of Highways’ lighting poles
2. The complete lantern with all accessories shall have a minimum operating life of not
less than 50,000 hours, when operating at not less than 35˚C ambient temperature.
When operating under normal conditions, the temperature inside the lantern shall
not exceed the rated operating temperature of each and every components.
3. The lantern shall have passive ventilation system. Active ventilation system such as
electric fan will not be accepted.
4. The lantern shall have IP rating of not less than IP 66
5. The lantern shall have power efficiency of not less than 90 Lumen/W.
6. The lantern shall operate normally under ambient temperature of between -20˚C to
45˚C
7. The lantern shall pass Static Load Test in accordance with IEC 60598-2-3 or
equivalent
8. The lantern shall pass Vibration Test in accordance with IEC 60598-1 or equivalent
9. The lantern shall pass Resistance to Corrosion Test in accordance with IEC 60598-1
or equivalent
10. The lantern shall conform with TIS 1955 or equivalent, for radio disturbances
11. The lantern shall comply with Safety Standard of IEC 60598-2-3 or equivalent
(3) Driver shall comply with the following requirements
1. IEC 61347-1 : General and Safety Requirements
2. IEC 61347-2-3 : Particular Requirements for DC or AC Supplied Electronic Control
Gear for LED Modules
3. IEC 62384 : DC or AC Supplied Electronic Gear for LED Modules. Performance
Requirements
4. Voltage : 230 V +/- 10% 50 Hz
5. The driver shall have minimum life expectancy of 50,000 hours at maximum rated
case temperature (Tcmax), separately packaged independently of LED module for
better ventilation.
6. The driver shall be fully functional at case temperature (TC) of not less than 70˚C
7. LED and driver shall be separately removable and serviced
8. The driver shall have total harmonic distortion of not more than 15%
9. The driver shall have power factor at maximum load of not less than 0.95
10. The driver shall have surge protection capable of resisting a voltage surge of not less
than 2kV (Line-Neutral)
11. The driver shall have suitable short circuit and over voltage protection
12. The driver shall pass appropriate electro-magnetic compatibility test
1.2 Road Lighting Lanterns
(1) All lanterns shall be new.
(2) Cut-off lanterns shall be used unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
(3) The maximum luminous intensity of a cut-off lantern shall conform to IEC or BS Standards.
(4) All lanterns shall be supplied complete with control gears and other accessories and be fully
wired and ready for erection.
(5) The lantern wiring shall be of a size, and insulated with materials that shall effectively
withstand the current, voltage and temperature expected within the lantern during both the
starting and operating modes in the ambient temperature of the site.
(6) All lanterns shall have a side entry socket fitted to the lighting column arm spigot.
(7) The bowl shall be made from glass, polymethlymetacylate, polycarbonate or methacylate
and shall have a detachable mirror reflector of anodised aluminium sheet.
(8) The lantern shall be made watertight with gaskets of high heat, ozone and ageing resistant material.
(9) Steel lantern housings shall not be used.
(10) Stainless steel screws shall be used for fixing.

(11) The power factor to the lantern set shall not be less than 90% lagging.
(12) The physical size for 250 W and 400 W shall be the same.
(13) All wiring within the lantern shall have an insulation resistance of not less than 0.5 Megohm.
(14) The lanterns shall provide the requisite light distribution with the size and type of lamp specified.
(15) Any adjustments required to accommodate any alternative lamp size shall be positive and
lockable in the final position.
1.3 Flood Lighting Lanterns
(1) For the toll area, flood lighting shall be installed on 10 m columns along the outside of the
area as shown in the Drawings. Each column shall have provision for the mounting of one or
more lanterns. These lanterns shall house all the control gear and other accessories for their
operation and produce a wide angle light distribution not less than 2 x 25 with good optical
control. Housing and rear cover shall be low-pressure die cast aluminium construction or
equivalent. The casting shall be of low-copper-content for good corrosion resistance. Lamp
replacement is effected by removing the rear cover for easy maintenance. Reflectors shall be
of high-grade aluminium. The front glass is to be provided with a gasket of high heat, ozone
and ageing resistant material to ensure it is dustproof and watertight. The power factor shall
not be less than 90% lagging. All wiring within the lantern shall have an insulation resistance
not less than 0.5 Megaohm.
(2) The lantern shall be carried on a mounting which will allow movement vertically and
horizontally.
1.4 Soffit Lanterns
Soffit Lanterns are required at those places where the crosses existing roads and lighting of the low
level roadway is required. The quantities, types and sizes of the lanterns required are shown on the
Drawings. The lanterns shall be mounted in the position shown and interconnected by means of an
exposed conduit system. No part of any soffit lantern shall protrude below the soffit of the bridge.
The lanterns shall be installed so that the photometric axis of the lanterns is normal to the road.
1.5 Street Lighting Column and Bracket
(1) The vertical column of the lighting pole and its detachable bracket(s) shall be made of round
single length (without joint) steel tapered tube from 4.5 mm thick hot rolled sheet steel with yield
point not less than 25 kg/mm2 and ultimate tensile strength of not less than 41 kg/mm2. The bracket
is to be provided with spigot to suit the manufacturer's lanterns. The outreach of the bracket shall
be 2.50 m or as otherwise specified in the Drawings. Each column shall be provided with a base-
plate for mounting the column onto a suitable foundation by means of anchor bolts. The column,
arm(s), lanterns together with other accessories shall be designed to withstand a distributed wind
load corresponding to the wind- speed given on the Drawings. Each column shall be provided with a
weather proof service door.
(2) The columns shall conform to the outlines on the Drawings and shall be manufactured to BS
1840 or equivalent such as ANSI, ASTM
(3) A non-hygroscopic mounting board composed of electrically insulating material shall be fixed in
an easily accessible position inside the column and shall be of suitable size to take all necessary
electrical equipment such as connectors, fuses etc. Adjacent to this mounting board, there shall be
provided on the inside of the column a grounding bus complete with two stainless steel bolts, lock
nuts and washers, for use as grounding points.
(4) All the columns shall be erected in a truly vertical position with the arms at right angle to the
traffic flow. In the case of median mounted columns, the column doors shall all face in the same
direction along the road. The doors of the column erected at the side of the road shall be positioned
away from the approaching traffic. In each run of columns of five or more, every fifth column shall
be checked for vertically by means of a theodolite. The columns between each checked column
must be in line along the road and parallel to the check columns. Shim washers may be used to
achieve vertically where necessary. Each group of columns shall be inspected by the Engineer prior
to installation of the lanterns and wiring. Each column must be grounded. After erection, each
column shall have an identification code stencilled 50 mm high on one side of the single arm columns
and on two sides of a double arm column.
1.6 Wire and Cable
(1) All wires and cables shall be copper, PVC insulated PVC sheathed and free of joints except at
terminal blocks and junction boxes. Wires conveying power supplies to lighting columns shall
terminate in suitable sockets or terminal blocks which shall be covered and protected so that no live
parts are exposed. The cables shall be pulled through conduits as shown in the Drawings.
(2) All wires and cables shall conform to the size and current rating of IEC 60227 and IEC 60502
(3) All non-current carrying metallic parts shall form an electrically continuous system which shall
be grounded or separately grounded as specified in the latest version of National Electrical Code. All
items below ground level shall be so designed and installed that they will continue to operate
without fault if immersed in ground water.
(4) Where tees and joints are used, they shall be made in compound filled joint boxes and
accessories specially manufactured for the cables. The compound shall be two-part resin-hardener
which will form a void-free quick-setting compound. Alternatively, an equivalent insulating sealing
compound, to be applied and then wrapped with electrical insulating tape, may be used.
(5) The conductor connections within the joint shall be made using compression crimps or other
means of positive mechanical clamping to ensure that the electrical continuity of the wire is
maintained without significant increase in resistance as compared with that of straight cable runs.
(6) The design of the joint box and the composition of the compound shall provide an effective seal
to prevent moisture ingress to the circuit connections and clamps.
(7) No joint shall be made in a cable without the specific approval of the Engineer in writing.
1.7 Conduits, Boxes and fitting
(1) Equipment and materials to be provided shall be the standard catalogue products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products.
(2) The type, size and locations of conduits, fittings and boxes shall be as indicated on the
Drawings or otherwise approved by the Engineer.
(3) Steel conduit shall comply with SECTION 5
(4) High Density Polyethylene Conduit (HDPE) shall comply with ASTM-D1248 and used in the
corrosive area both underground and above ground installation.
(5) Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) pipes and fittings shall comply with ASTM D2665-85
for different diameters and joints should be made to comply with ASTM D 2672-89, ASTM D
2855 (แขวน)
1.8 Supply Pillars
(1) The Contractor shall supply and erect the pillars in accordance with the Drawings. The pillar shall
be manufactured from steel. The final appearance and finish of the pillars shall be identical to that
shown on the Drawings irrespective of the material used. The pillars shall be of sufficient size to
house the equipment shown on the Drawings and leave 10% spare usable space.
(2) The supply pillars shall be fitted with a steel channel base. The door shall be lockable with
either wedge type locks protected by screw plugs or some other form of secret lock approved by
the Engineer. The pillars must be self ventilating and rainproof. The doors shall be hinged internally
to prevent unauthorized access. All the supply pillars shall have the same lock and key. Six keys
shall be provided.
(3) The Contractor shall provide, mount and wire the equipment as shown on the Drawings. The
Contractor shall install the incoming cable from the meter to the supply pillar and the weather head
if required. The equipment includes main safety switch, distribution fuse board, connectors, multi-
terminal blocks, time switches etc. and some space must be left free for the possible future
installation of additional equipment.
(4) In addition to the items shown on the Drawings, the following shall be provided and installed at
each supply pillar:-
 A multi ground terminal block shall be provided for the connection/bonding of all non-
current carrying metallic parts, common grounding conductor and grounding electrode
conductor. The size of the conductor shall be 16 mm2 insulated stranded copper.
 A circuit identification chart sealed within a clear plastic envelope and fixed to the inside
of the door.
 An approved sign fitted to the outside of the pillar to indicate that the pillar houses
electrical equipment.
 All necessary internal wiring which shall be of a size to take the current of the protective
fuse.
1.9 Magnetic Contactors
The photo switches and time switches shall operate the road lighting in groups via a lighting control
with mercury displacement relays. These relays shall be those best suited for installation where
maintenance free operation is required. All contacts shall be sealed and are to be impervious to
corrosive atmosphere and gases, humid conditions and dust. The various capacities are specified in
the Drawings.
1.10 Main Switches (Safety Switches)
(1) Main or Safety switches shall comply with NEMA 1 or IP31, and be the heavy-duty type with
enclosure conforming to NEMA Type 3R, or IP54. Voltage, current rating, number of poles, and
fusing shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Switch construction shall be such that, when the
switch handle in the “ON” position, the cover or door cannot be opened. Cover release
device shall be coin-proof and be so constructed that an external tool shall be used to open
the cover. Make provisions to lock the handle in the “OFF” position, but the switch shall not
be capable of being locked in the “ON” position.
(2) Provide switches of the quick-make, quick-break type. Approved terminal lugs for use with
copper conductors.
(3) Safety colour coding for identification of safety switches shall conform to ANSI Z535.1.
1.11 Fuses and Fuse Distribution Board
(1) Fuses shall be time delay fuses which have an interrupting capacity not less than 80,000
amperes symmetrical. The fuse unit shall be manufactured from non-tracking thermo setting
plastic, cast aluminium or porcelain. The dimensions of the unit shall be such that the unit
will easily fit to the base board within the columns and to the fuse distribution board. In every
street lighting column, there shall be a cartridge fuse for each lantern to protect against a short
circuit current.
(2) The fuse supplied for this Contract shall be totally enclosed and be designed properly to
accept the fuse units. The enclosure shall be manufactured from metal or sheet metal which
is suitably stiffened to prevent twisting and wrapping of large areas such as doors. The doors
shall be internally hinged and lockable.
(3) The bus bars and fuse holders shall be fully shrouded. All spare fuse holders shall contain a
fuse of the same rating as those used.
(4) In each board a fuse chart recording fuse size and incoming and outgoing circuit connections
shall be supplied. This chart shall be read in the same manner as the fuses are installed. The
chart shall be enclosed in a clear transparent envelope firmly secured to the inside of the
door.
(5) The outgoing terminals of the fuse shall be large enough to take any incoming or outgoing
cable as specified in the Drawings.
1.12 Timer Switches
(1) At each station, a time switch is required to switch off part of the lighting circuit during
the period of darkness.
(2) The time switch shall be an electrically wound motor driven from 220 volts, 50 hertz supply
and shall have a spring driven clock-work reserve of not less than 12 hours.
(3) The contacts shall be inductively rated to accept an inrush current of contactor coils and
auxiliary relays.
1.13 Photo Electric Control
(1) Photo sensitive lighting controls shall be weatherproof and enclosed, and suitable for
operation on 200-250 volts, 50 Hz. A.C.
(2) The controls shall function to energise artificial lighting when the natural lighting level falls to
a preset, adjustable value, and to de-energise artificial lighting when natural lighting level rises
to a preset adjustable value.
(3) The operation shall be fail-safe, in that, in the event of failure of any components of the
control, the artificial lighting shall be continuously energised.
(4) Time delay devices shall be included to prevent switching of artificial lighting due to transient
lighting changes.
(5) The controls shall be completely unaffected by humidity.
(6) The switch mechanism shall be snap acting of sufficient capacity to adequately handle loads
of inrush rating of contactor coils or auxiliary relays.
(7) Suitable mounting sockets and brackets shall be provided.
1.14 Installation
(1) The size of each conduit shall be such that the sum of the areas of the cross-section of all
conductors, including insulation and protective coverings, shall be not greater than 40 percent
of the inside area of conduit, except that no conduit encased in concrete or installed
underground shall be less than 50 mm. inside diameter.
(2) All conduit sizes and conduit layouts shall be approved by the Engineer before installation
and the Contractor shall submit data on the layout for the exact make up, overall diameter,
and cross-sectional areas of the actual conductors he intends to use and the sum of the areas
of the conductors in each conduit.
(3) Bends shall be of long sweep, free from kinks and of such easy curvature as to permit the
drawing in of the conductors without injury. The radius of curvature of inner edge of bends
shall not be less than that shown in Table 346-10 of National Electrical Code. Conduits shall
not be flattened or distorted. The total angle of all bends between any two boxes or fittings
shall not exceed 360 degrees.
(4) Exposed conduit runs shall be parallel to or at right angles to walls, slabs, girders and in
locations giving greatest accessibility for painting and least accumulation of dirt. All exposed
conduit runs shall be attached to steel, masonry, concrete or timber by galvanized malleable
iron or galvanized steel straps, clamps, or hangers of an approved type, held at not less than
two points by galvanized steel bolts or lag screws. The runs shall be supported at not greater
than 3m centres on horizontal runs, unless otherwise specified, and not less than 50 mm. clear
of the supporting members. Conduits mounted on structural steel member shall be securely
clamped to prevent rattling and wear.
(5) All ends of conduits installed during construction, or for future use, shall be closed against the
introduction of foreign material by the use of bush caps.
(6) All conduits installed underground shall be at least 600 mm. below ground level and have a
concrete envelope which shall afford a 70 mm. cover beyond the maximum dimension of the
conduit. Class 20 concrete shall be used.
(7) Excavation for the encasement shall be carefully done, sidewalls trimmed to line and bottom
of trench graded, so that the envelope will be uniform, and there will be no pockets or low
points in the conduit run. All back fill shall be carefully tamped unless otherwise specified,
and care shall be taken not to injure the concrete envelope or conduit.
(8) All conduits, boxes, etc., to be encased in concrete must be accurately placed and rigidly held
in position so that no variation from line or grade occurs when concrete is placed.
(9) Upon completion of the conduit installation, the system shall be cleaned in the presence of
the Engineer before any conductors are installed. Immediately prior to the installation of
conductors in any run, the conduits comprising that run shall again be checked. Any and all
obstructions shall be removed to the approval of the Engineer.
(10) The Contractor shall install and leave in place a No.10 galvanized iron pull wire in all conduit
runs installed for future use.
1.15 Draw Pits
(1) Draw pits shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in any case at not more than 100m
intervals on straight runs and at every change of direction of the conduit run. The Contractor
may install additional draw pits without extra charge if he so wishes.
(2) Draw pits shall be of reinforced concrete as detailed on the Drawings.
(3) Covers shall be of cast iron, recessed for concrete filling, and shall be seated in cast iron
frames. The seating faces of all components in metal to metal contact shall be machine
finished to ensure that the installed covers are watertight. Covers shall be designed to carry
a distributed load of 3,000 kg/m2 unless sited in a roadway when they shall be designed to
carry a 10 tonne wheel load (contact pressure 11 kg/cm2).
(4) Covers shall be inscribed "Street Lighting" and shall be provided with a recessed means of
lifting.
(5) Tops of draw pits shall be effective level with the surrounding areas, whether paved or
unpaved. The bottoms of draw pits shall be bedded in sand and cement or crushed rock in
accordance with the Drawings.
1.16 Grounding
(1) The rods shall have clean, smooth, continuous copper surfaces and the proportion of copper
shall be uniform throughout the length of the rod. Ground wires shall be secured to the upper
ends of ground rods by an exothermic process.
(2) Ground rods shall be at least 3.0 m long unless otherwise specified, and shall have diameters
sufficient to permit driving to the necessary depth without being damaged, but in no case shall
they be less than 16 mm diameter.
(3) The maximum resistance of the grounding systems shall not exceed 5 ohms.
(4) If this resistance cannot be obtained by one rod, a sufficient number of additional rods shall
be installed not closer than two meters centres and bonded to the main system.
(5) Grounding system for all lighting column structures shall be accomplished by common ground
wire run along with power conductor circuit and bonded to grounding terminals at supply
pillars, unless otherwise specified.
(6) The last columns of each circuit shall be connected to a ground rod.
1.17 Working Drawings
The Contractor shall furnish working drawings in duplicate for the Engineer to make preliminary
examination. After working drawings have been approved by the Engineer and revisions made, the
Contractor shall furnish additional copies as may be requested.
PART III: Testing of the Lighting System
1.1 Functional test shall be made on completion of the work in order to demonstrate that every part of
the equipment and installation functions as intended and specified. The test shall consist of not less
than five nights (5 x 24 Hours) continuous and satisfactory operation. If any defects or unsatisfactory
operation are revealed, this condition shall be corrected and the test repeated until the required five
successive nights of satisfactory operation has been achieved.
1.2 The Contractor shall make available to the Engineer a photo-meter, and other related accessories,
suitably calibrated by an authorized authority, for measuring the illumination on the road surface if
desired.
1.3 Prior to the functional test, the Contractor shall provide the testing equipment and accessories and
shall carry out the following tests to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer:
3.3.1 Each circuit shall be tested for continuity and polarity.
3.3.2 Each circuit shall be tested for ground continuity and ground resistance.
3.3.3 Voltage drop in each circuit shall be measured.
3.3.4 Power factor for each circuit shall be determined.
1.4 On the completion of testing, the Contractor shall supply to the Engineer of "As- built" drawings and circuit
diagrams, which shall clearly indicate any modifications which have been made to the original design.
END
5.4 : PLUMBING SYSTEM
5.4.1: GENERAL SPECIFICATION
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. Introduction
(1) This general specification and requirement describe the materials and installation of the
Plumbing works for building services works and related work for the project.
(2) The work shall be executed to completion and in conformity with the drawings and this
specification
2. Environment
(1) The material and equipment shall be installed as shown on the drawings and shall be suitable
for tropical climate as mentioned below.
(2) Weather conditions for material and general equipment selection:
• Altitude : Approximately mean sea level
• Maximum temperature 40oC (104oF)
• Average temperature (all year) 30 oC (78 oF)
• Maximum relative humidity 85%
• Average relative humidity (all year) 60%
3. Standards, Codes and Regulations
regulations of Metropolitan Water Work Authority or Provincial Waterworks Authority. The
following standards are mentioned in these Specifications for systems and/or components and,
where described, the systems and/or components shall conform to such standards.
• ANSI - American National Standard Institute
• API - American Petroleum Institute
• ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating
and Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc.
• ASPE - American Society of Plumbing Engineers.
• ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
• BS - British Standard
• DIN - Deutsher Industrie Normen (German dustrial
Standard)
• EIT - The Engineering Institute of Thailand
• FM - Factory Mutual
• IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
• MEA - Metropolitan Electricity Authority
• MWA - Metropolitan Water works Association
• NEC - National Electrical Code
• NFC - National Fire Code
• NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
• NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
• PEA - Provincial Electricity Authority
• PWA - Provincial Waterworks Authority
• TISI - Thai Industrial Standard Institute
• UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
• VDE - Verband Deutsher Electro techniker
(German ElectricalRegulation and Codes)
• Any regulations issued by local authorities.
an earlier issue.
4. Scope of Work
(1) The scope of work of the Contractor shall include provision, installation, testing and balancing,
commissioning of equipment and accessories as shown on the Drawings and Specifications to
achieve a complete sanitary system.
(2) The system shall include the following:-
1. Cold water supply system
2. Sanitary drainage, soil water, wastewater, drain and vent systems
3. Wastewater treatment plant system
4. Rain water drainage system
5. Electrical power and control
6. Oil Separator
7. Accessories as required to complete the system
schedules all to the entire satisfaction of the engineer.
5. Dimensions
(1) Figured dimensions as indicated on the drawings are to be followed and in no case shall
dimensions be scaled from the drawings. Wherever possible, dimensions are to be measured
from the building.
(2) Before the Contractor commence any works, he shall ensure that dimensions are checked on
the site and/or building and agree with those on the drawings.
(3) The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of such dimensions regardless of
the comparable dimensions of the drawings.
6. Operation
(1) Where the Contractor propose to use material and/or equipment which is not specified or
detailed on the drawings, the matter shall be brought immediately to the attention of the
engineer who will make a decision.
(2) The locations of air outlets, air duct route and piping route shown on the drawings are
diagrammatic, and shall be considered as approximate only. The approved locations may be
different from those shown on the drawings, if so directed by the engineer.
PART II: PRODUCTS

1. General
1.1 The quality of all material shall comply with the standards specified in the details on the drawings
and diagrams. They shall further be of an approved make and suitable for the works.
1.2 Minimum three manufacturer’s marks of the major materials shall be proposed by the contractor for
the approval of the engineer. Any alternatives due to standards normally applied by the
manufacturers or resulting from special schemes developed by the manufactures will be considered
on their merits. However, such alternatives must meet the requirements of the engineer.
1.3 The major materials vender or manufacturer shall have the following qualification:
(1) The materials vender shall be an authorized sole distributor in Thailand and shall have spare
parts and after sale service.
(2) If contractor wishes to offer the others major materials which do not meet the above
qualification, the contractor shall as certain himself that such major materials is of equal quality
to that mention in these specifications and shall furnish full details of the material or apparatus
in order to enable the engineer to judge the quality of the offered.
2. Material and Equipment
(1) All Plumbing equipment, materials and parts used shall be new and unused, of current
performance or life of the item and approved by the engineer.
(2) Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or in the specification, all materials
and equipment shall be installed, with the approval of the engineer, in accordance with
recommendations of the manufacturer. However, the approval of the engineer shall not
release the Contractor from his responsibility or his liability regarding the properties of
installations.
during construction against the ingress of moisture, contamination or corrosion that might
damage the finish or lower the electrical integrity of the item.
(4) Certain major electrical equipment defined in the Specifications will be furnished to the
Contractor, on site. The Contractor shall assemble, align, level and fix this equipment as
instructed by the manufacturer and to the engineer satisfaction. In this case herein specified
(if any).
instructions, the responsibility for protecting of material and equipment from damages shall
rest with the Contractor's own expense.
3. Equipment Deviations
(1) Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or
detailed on the Drawings, requiring any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations,
piping, wiring or any other part of the mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, all
such redesign, including drawings and detailing required shall be prepared by the Contractor
at his own expense and then approved by the engineer.
(2) Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of cable,
conduit, and equipment from the specified or indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall
furnish and install any such cable, conduit, structural supports, insulation, and any other
additional equipment required by the system with additional cost, which approved by the
engineer.
(3) In reference to inspection, all works rejected by the engineer shall be repaired, corrected or
replaced at the Contractor's expense to attain good workmanship, and conform to the Contract
Drawings and Specifications. Therefore, ample time shall be provided for inspection and, if
there is any defective work re-inspection of the engineer shall be performed. In the event that
the Contractor should fail to carry out necessary changes, then the engineer shall have the
right to make its own arrangement at the Contractor's expense.
4. Tools and Appliances
(1) Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide any pay for all tools and other
facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the works.
materials, in the opinion of the engineer, appear to be insufficient, of inappropriate to secure
the required quality of works or proper rate of progress, the engineer may order the Contractor
to increase their efficiency, improve their character, augment their number or replace with new
tools, equipment and materials as required.
5. Nameplates and Identifications
6. Submittal of Data for Approval
(1) The Contractor shall submit to the engineer complete information regarding details of
materials and equipment involved, prior to any purchase or manufacturing operation. Any
purchase or manufacturing operations carried out prior to obtaining such approval shall be at
the Contractor’s sole responsibility.
(2) Each equipment information shall be separately submitted by listing all the details and with
attached catalogue indicating at least the model, series, size and performance. Such data shall
be sufficient detail to enable the engineer to identify that particular product and to form an
opinion to its conformity to the Specification.
(3) The Contractor shall stamp the name of his company and sign all documents to be submitted
for approval.
7. Approval of Materials
(1) Only new materials and equipment shall be incorporated in the Works. All materials and
equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to inspections and approval of the
engineer. The materials and equipment used for the Works shall correspond to the approved
makes or other data. Any materials which, in the opinion of the engineer, have lower quality
than the approved makes shall promptly be removed from the job site.
(2) Whenever requested by the engineer, the Contractor shall send materials to be tested by
an independent institute selected by the engineer immediately; any extra expanse for
testing shall be of the contractor responsibility.
(3) If these should be an unavoidable necessity to use materials and equipment that deviate from
the specification or from approved samples, then the Contractor shall immediately inform the
engineer in writing and submit the substitute items of equal quality for approval.
8. Examination of Drawings and Specifications
(1) The Contractor shall examine all Drawings and Specifications to make sure that all
requirements are thoroughly understood. In cases where, in his opinion, there are omissions
and/or errors in any of these documents, he shall inform the engineer immediately.
(2) The Contractor shall examine all relevant architectural and structural drawings together with
all other utilities systems involved in the Project, prior to installation of machines, materials
and equipment.
(3) Figure dimension as indicated on the Drawings are to be followed and in no case dimensions
shall be scale from the Drawings. Wherever possible, dimensions are to be measured from the
building. Before the Contractor commences any works, he shall ensure that dimensions are
checked on the site and/or building and agree with those on the Drawings. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the accuracy of such dimensions regardless of the comparable
dimensions on the Drawings.
9. Shop Drawings
(1) As soon as the Contract is awarded, the Contractor shall prepare shop-drawings comprising
complete details of items to be fabricated and works to be installed. These shop-drawings
shall be submitted to the engineer for approval not later than 30 days before installation.
(2) The drawings shall be checked by the Contractor for accuracy with regard to dimensions taken
in the building(s) and shall closely follow manufacturer's recommendations. All submitted
drawings shall be signed by the Contractor, and shall indicate the date of submission and the
date(s) of revision(s).
(3) In case shop-drawings require modifications for whichever reason, the Contractor has to clearly
identify the portion that was modified, and has to indicate the running number of revision
every time that a revision-drawing is submitted.
(4) The installation detailed shall be checked with the building works, the structure and other
related trades to prevent conflicts that may cause delay of the project.
(5) Size and scale of the shop-drawings shall be followed scale from the Drawing, which shall be
in conformity with international standards or as directed by the engineer.
(6) Where required by the engineer, the Contractor shall prepare additional drawings, diagrams,
etc., which in the opinion of the engineer are considered necessary for a proper execution of
the Works.
(7) The Contractor shall not proceed his work for a certain part or section, prior to the approval
of the shop-drawings therefore. Expense incurred because of modification that have to be
made as a result of lack of approved shop-drawings shall be borne by the Contractor.
(8) Approval of the shop-drawings by the engineer shall not be construed as a complete check
but will indicate only the general method of installation and its details are satisfactory.
(9) The approval of the engineer never releases the Contractor from his responsibility or his liability
regarding the exact dimensions and any further properties of the installations.
(10) Shop-drawings submitted without sufficient detailed shall be rejected and new submission
shall be required.
(11) The Contractor shall submit 3 print copies of all shop-drawings for approval. If approved by
the engineer, one copy shall bear the engineer stamp indicating the date of approval, and
shall be returned to the Contractor. After approval, 3 copies of print are required and additional
copies may be requested by the engineer as necessary.
10. Transportation of Materials and Equipment
(1) The Contractor shall submit in advance a transportation schedule of materials to the engineer
and coordinate with the building contractor in preparing passage ways and storage facilities.
(2) The Contractor shall be responsible for all expense incurred during shipping and transporting
of material and equipment to the job site. The materials and equipment shall be handled in
a manner to prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting and any injury, theft
of damage or any kind what so ever.
(3) The shipping documents of particular materials and equipment shall be submitted to the
engineer as soon as the materials and equipment have arrived at the Site.
11. Materials and Equipment Storage
(1) The Contractor shall prepare storage areas of sufficient size for all necessary materials and
equipment brought to the job site. The storage areas shall be provided with access for
inspection and removal of the stored materials and equipment.
(2) Materials and equipment delivered to the Site without suitable storage shall not be accepted.
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Temporary Power Supply and Others
The Contractor shall connect electrical wires, telephone wires and water pipe for his own use at
suitable connection points and shall bear the expense of usage, which shall be removed upon
completion of sections of the Works.
2. Responsibility
(1) The Contractor shall establish, maintain, and supervise all precautions and programs for
safety and provide protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to :
 All workmen on the worksite and other persons who may be affected thereby.
 All works and all materials or equipment to be incorporated herein, whether in storage
on or off the site.
(2) As the work proceeds, the Contractor shall progressively remove rubbish and surplus materials
away from the construction site or to a space indicated by the building contractor and shall
maintain his working area in a clean and tidy condition as far as is practicable.
(3) Upon completion of the Works he shall, without delay, remove all his temporary works and
buildings, all tools, equipment and surplus materials, and shall clean the whole area affected
by his work and leave it ready for immediately occupation.
(4) All materials, equipment and finished works shall be kept in good condition. The completed
work shall be the Contractor's property until handed over to the engineer.
3. Field Testing
(1) Test all plumbing equipment upon completion of installation to ensure that the equipment
operates satisfactorily and to conform to Contract Documents.
(2) Field testing shall be required for all equipment furnished, installed or connected by the
Contractor to assure proper installation, setting, connection, and functioning in accordance
with the plans and specifications and manufacturer's recommendations.
(3) Testing shall be conducted in the presence of the engineer and, when necessary, under the
supervision of equipment manufacturer's field Engineer.
(4) All tests recommended by the equipment manufacturer whether specified in these
Specifications or not, shall be included, unless specifically waived by the engineer.
(5) Testing shall include any additional tests issued by the engineer to determine that
equipment, material and system meet requirements of the Specifications.
(6) The Contractor shall maintain in quadruplicate a written record of all tests showing date,
personnel making test, equipment or material tested, tests performed and results. Two copies
of test records shall be given to the engineer.
(7) Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to equipment or material due to improper
test procedures or test apparatus handling, and shall replace or restore to original condition
any damaged equipment or material.
(8) Safety devices such as rubber gloves and blankets, protective screens and barriers, danger
signs, etc. shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be used to adequately protect and
warn all personnel in the vicinity of the tests.
(9) The Contractor shall furnish all testing equipment, and furnish temporary power source of
proper type for testing purposes when normal supply is not available at the time of testing.
(10) The conduit and wiring system, shall be checked to ensure that the system has been installed
in such a way as to provide a safe and reliable system.
(11) Test all miscellaneous equipment furnished by equipment manufacturer as recommended by

the manufacturer i.e., circuit breaker, low voltage switchboard, motor (if any) etc unless
specifically waived by the engineer.
(12) Include all additional tests issued by engineer that he deems necessary because of field
conditions, to determine that equipment and material and systems meet requirements of
(13) Be responsible for all damage to equipment or material due to improper test procedures or
test apparatus handling.
(14) Cost incurred during testing i.e., electricity, city water, labour, etc, shall be borned by the
Contractor, unless stated specifically otherwise in these Specifications or the Contract
Documents.
4. As-Built Drawings
(1) The as-built drawings shall record all changes arising during the installation and detail all
relevant data concerning makes, types, numbers, capacities, sized and quantities, etc.
(2) The Contractor shall submit As-Built Drawings to the engineer according to tender document
5. Operation and Maintenance Instructions Manual
(1) The manual shall be prepared in hard cover building in sets to be submitted to the engineer
on acceptance of the completed work.
Section 1 Comprises submittal data of all equipment and materials that have been
approved.
Section 2 Comprises catalogues, categorized in groups, complete with installation
operations and the maintenance manuals from the manufacturers.
Section 3 Comprises filled out test reports in the field.
Section 4 Comprises spare parts list and recommended spare parts.
Section 5 Comprises maintenance and services schedule, and service and maintenance
procedures for individual equipment listed daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly and
yearly.
Section 6 Comprises system operation manual
(2) A draft copy of the manual shall be submitted to the engineer for approval first.
6. Training of Operators
After acceptance of the completed work, the Contractor shall train the operator (s) and maintenance
staff of operator for a period of not less than 15 consecutive days until they are competent to operate
the system by themselves.
7. Works to Completion
(1) The Contractor shall commission, clean down, and leave in full working order the works as
specified.
(2) As the installation proceeds the Contractor shall prepare record drawings of the plumbing
installation, as built drawing. It will be sufficient to modify these contract drawings showing
any amendments to the service which have taken place and submit the marked-up prints to
the engineer representative for approval.
(3) The Contractor shall deliver to the engineer representative on completion of the works,
manufacturer's literature, specifications, technical information and record drawings for all
equipment installed.
END
5.4.2 : COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPING WORK

PART I: DESCRIPTION
The contractor shall furnish and install all piping work including all necessary parts as shown on the
drawings.
2. Standards and References
(1) The piping work shall comply with the following codes and standards.
 ASTM D2239 : Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE)
Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside
Diameter
 TIS 982 : High-density polyethylene pipes for drinking water
services
 TIS 17 : Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride pipes for drinking
water services)
 TIS 277 : Galvanized steel pipes
 TIS 249 : Malleable cast iron threaded pipe fittings
 AWWA C203 : Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel
Water Pipelines, Enamel and Tape-Hot Applied.
 AWWA C901 : Standard for Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and
Tubing for Water Service
 BS 1387 : Medium Black & Galvanized Steel Pipe
 BS 143 & 1256 : Malleable cast iron and cast copper alloy
threaded pipe fittings
an earlier issue.
(4) The standards and codes as mention in 1.2 can be equivalent by another standards and codes,
if it equal or better than standards and codes mention in 1.2 when comply between two
codes.
3. Submittals
The contractor shall submit all material, catalog, material lists and technical data request for approval
The manufacturer must specialize in the specified equipment and have a quality management system
and shall be meets to ISO 9001 certified.
All part or the piping work shall be guaranteed by the contractor at least 2 years after handover.
5. Delivery, Handling, Storage and Cleaning
(1) Pipes shall be delivered and stored with plugged ends. Ends shall be kept closed with
temporary covers during erection. Before any pipe is installed, it shall be opened and ounded
to remove any foreign substances, or swabbed, if necessary, for thorough cleaning.
(2) Pipes shall be stored on racks in a suitable warehouse or cover to avoid rusting. If necessary,
carbon steel pipes shall be coated with anodic rust converter or red lead primer.
(3) During the course of installation, the Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent any
debris from being left in the pipes. He shall be responsible for any damage that may occur.
(4) Immediately after erection, exposed threads at all fittings shall be painted with zinc-chromate
paint, and after welding each joint shall be wire-brushed and then painted with zinc-chromate
paint.
(5) Before start-up, all piping systems shall be thoroughly flushed with water until it runs clear.
(6) Fixtures and equipment shall be lightly covered and protected against damage. At the
completion of the work, fixtures, materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and
delivered in a satisfactory condition.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Description
(1) The cold water piping shall be the types or models, which are suitable for the working fluid in
the system.
(2) The rated working pressure of the cold water piping system as specified for the working fluid
shall be at least 1.5 times of the actual working pressure, but not less than 1,034 kPa (150
PSIG.).
2. Component
(1) Cold water pipe
 Cold water pipe underground shall be High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe
Class PN 10 conforming to ASTM D2239, TIS 982.
 Cold Water inside building shall be Galvanized steel pipe conforming to Thai
Industrial Standard, TIS 277, Class M.
(2) Fitting for Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes
 Fittings for polyvinyl chloride pipes shall be rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
as designated in TIS 1031, TIS 1132
(3) Fittings for High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
 Fitting for HDPE pipes shall be high density polyethylene as requirement or

recommendation of manufacture.
(4) Fittings for Galvanized Steel Pipes
 Fittings for galvanized steel pipes shall be galvanized malleable cast-iron,
conforming to TISI 249
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
(1) General Piping Installation
 All piping shall be installed parallel to, or at right angles with, the building walls
and partitions. A pitch in the direction of flow and drain shall be not less than
1: 500. Branches from water mains shall be taken in a manner that facilities venting and
draining. Reductions in bore shall be formed eccentrically to facilitate venting, except
on vertical pipes where concentric reduction may be used.
 All water piping shall be installed in such a way that all circuits can be completely
drained off and all air pockets in the water circuits shall be suitably vented.
 Clearance between pipe works and equipment or machinery shall be adequately
provided to facilitate maintenance. Overhead clearance shall be at least 600 mm. over
access ways, and where possible the projection of valve stems into access ways shall
be avoided. Pipe works and pumps shall be so arranged that the removal for
maintenance of the equipment can be carried out with minimum dismantling. Provision
of all pipe fittings and accessories necessary for the efficient functioning of the various
systems shall be included.
 Pipes shall be installed in continuous lengths as long as possible. Except where required
to be connected to fitting outlets or headers, they shall be joined by welding, solvent
welding, screwing or soldering as approved or indicated in these Specifications.
 The equipment or piping shall be installed so that it will not provide a cross
connection or interconnection between a distributing supply for drinking or domestic
purposes and a polluted supply such as a drainage system or a soil or waste pipe that
will permit or make possible the backflow of sewage, polluted water or waste into the
water supply system. Where crossing a sewer or waste line is inevitable, the water line
shall be not less than 0.30 meters above the sewer line, which shall be cast-iron soil
pipe for not less than 30 meters on each side of the crossing.
 All pipes shall be installed in an appropriate manner to present a neat and
orderly appearance, using fittings for all changes of direction, and arranging pipe run
parallel to or at right angles with structural members of the building, to provide utmost
head-room and to clear lights and other obstructions. In general, suspended pipes shall
be installed as closely as possible to the overhead structure.
(2) Workmanship
 All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site, and
shall be worked into place without springing or forcing.
 Piping shall be installed so that it may expand and contract freely without injury to itself
or other work. Steel and wrought-iron pipe shall be cut with pipe cutters and threaded
with sharp, clean dies. All cut sections shall be reamed to remove all burrs and to
restore the pipe to full diameter. All changes in size shall be made with reducing fitting.
 Pipe bends and bushings are prohibited.
(3) Location of Device
All valves, cleanouts, equipment, accessories, and devices shall be so located that they are
accessible for repair and replacement.
(4) Connection to Equipments
 Connections to coils, pumps and other equipment shall be made in such
a manner that undue strains between pipes and equipment are eliminated.
 Unions and/or flanges shall be used to facilitate the removal of the equipment.
(5) Expansion and Contraction
 The piping systems shall be installed so that there will be no damage due to
expansion and contraction during operation.
 Packless type expansion connectors shall be used where the expansion and
contraction of the pipe is excessive or cannot be compensated by expansion loops or
offsets.
(6) Differential Settlement
The piping systems shall be installed so that there will be no damage due to differential
settlement of the pipe supports after installation. The problems shall be avoided by providing
flexible connections.
(7) Sleeves
 Vertical pipes passing through floors shall be provided with sleeves of black
steel pipes. Sleeves shall be of a proper length to pass through the entire floor
construction and shall terminate 50 mm. above the finished floor level.
 Horizontal pipes passing through walls and partitions shall be provided with full
thickness sleeves made of standard weight black steel pipes.
 Sleeves shall be large enough to leave not less than 12.5 mm. clearances around the
pipe and covering insulation, if there is any. Sleeves shall be set in place where the
walls and partitions are built.
 Sleeves in concrete work shall be flanged at the bottom or provided with temporary
centering caps and securely nailed or screwed to formwork before the concrete is poured.
 Provide chromium- plated escutcheon, where exposed pipes pass through walls or
floors.
 When sleeves are installed through a fire wall, the clearance between sleeves
and pipes shall be filled with fire- resistant material. The fire rating of the fire- resistant
material shall be at least equivalent to that of the fire wall.
 When pipes pass through waterproof walls, water retaining rings with approved type of
sealant shall be applied.
(8) Pipe Joints
 Joint for Threaded Pipe
 Joints for threaded pipes shall be made with an approved teflon tape or graphite
compound applied to the male threads only. Threads exposed after joints are made up
shall be mopped with compound.
 Threads shall be of the cleanout, tapered threads with the ends being reamed
 Joint for Flanged Pipe
 Flanged joints shall be installed at all valves larger than 50 mm. and at other
places where necessary.
 Jointing flanges shall be truly parallel to each other so that bolts are used only to
tighten joints, rather than correct alignment. Flanges shall be chosen to suit the
maximum working pressure of the system. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be cadmium-
plated steel.
 Welded Pipe Joint
 The edges of the pipe to be welded shall be machine-beveled wherever possible. Gas
cuts shall be true and free of all burnt metal. Before welding, the surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned and degreased. The welding technique shall be such as to ensure
penetration to the full thickness of the pipe wall and through fusion of the deposited
metal with the parent metal. During welding the ends of the pipes shall be held firmly
together by suitable lugs, welded-on-bridge pieces or adequate tack welding. Special
care shall be taken to prevent formation of welded obstructions and lodgment of
welding residue inside the pipes. Cracks, pinholes, excessive under-cutting, etc. shall be
removed and the joints rewelded. Welding materials and workmanship shall be in
accordance with AWS.
 Welders must be entirely competent and may be required to perform site tests.
Should the engineer not be satisfied, the welder must be replaced. The engineer
reserves the right to order the cutout for inspection of up to 1 percent of the total
number of welds. In the event of any inspected welds being, in the engineer opinion,
unsatisfactory he reserves the right to order the removal of further welds which in his
opinion indicate faulty workmanship. Welds removed for inspection shall be reinstalled
at no cost to the Project.
 Either the electric arc or the oxy-acetylene welding method may be used. Welding rods
or electrodes shall have such composition that the welds produced by them shall have
the same analysis as the parent metal and shall be of an approved type and brand.
(9) Hanger and Supports
 All pipes shall be securely supported. Horizontal piping shall be supported by
adjustable clevis type hangers with solid rods securely attached to the building
structure. Where several pipes run in a parallel fashion, trapeze hangers may be used
in lieu of separate hangers. All hangers shall have turnbuckles or other approved means
of adjustment. Where pipes, such as those from individual toilet rooms to main stacks,
are not low enough to permit the use of turnbuckles, other means of adjustment shall
be used. Chains, straps, perforated bars, or wire hangers will not be accepted. All
hangers and supports shall be hot- dip galvanized. The maximum distances between
hangers and supports for horizontally mounted and vertically mounted pipes shall be
as indicated below.
 For all pipes where the hanger clips bear directly on pipes and for hangers of dissimilar
metals, suitable apparition with a layer of felt shall be provided to prevent corrosion.
Hangers on structural steel is absolutely prohibited, unless with the express approval
from the engineer.
 Anchors for steel pipes shall be welded directly to the pipe wall and securely bolted
to the building structure. Anchors for copper and PVC pipes shall be of the split ring
type. Hangers in the plant room shall be supported on springs.
 Supporting brackets shall be fastened to concrete by means of inserts or expansion
bolts, to brickwork by means of expansion bolts, and to hollow masonry by means of
toggle bolts. Two fixings per bracket shall be provided as follows:-
Nominal Pipe Size, mm. (inch) Fixing Rod Size, mm. (inch)
Up to 65 (2 ½) 6.4 (1/4)
80 (3”) to 150 (6) 9.5 (3/8)
200 (8”) to 300 (12) 12.7 (1/2)
 All hangers and steel supports shall be hot dip galvanized

 Underground pipe support and hanger shall be all stainless steel.
 Schedule of Pipe Supports as shown in the following table.
SCHEDULE OF PIPE SUPPORTS

Nominal Hanger Maximum Interval (m.)
Pipe Size Rod Steel Pipe PVC Pipe Copper Pipe
(mm.) Min.
Size Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
(mm.)
15 (1/2”) 9 2.0 2.4 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8
20 (3/4”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.0 1.2 1.8 2.4
25 (1”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.0 1.2 1.8 2.4
32 (1 ¼”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.2 1.8 2.0 3.0
40 (1 ½”) 9 3.0 3.6 1.3 1.8 2.4 3.0
50 (2”) 9 3.0 3.6 1.5 1.8 2.4 3.6
65 (2 ½”) 12 3.0 4.5 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.6
80 (3”) 12 3.6 4.5 2.0 2.4 3.0 3.6
80 (3”) 15 4.0 4.5 2.4 2.4 3.6 3.6
100 (4”) 15 4.8 4.5 2.4 3.0
125 (5”) 22 4.8 4.5 2.4 3.0
150 (6”) 22 6.0 4.8 3.0 3.6
200 (8”) 22 6.0 4.8
250 (10”) 22 6.0 4.8
300 (12”) 22 6.0 4.8
(10) Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plate

 Furnish and install plates on all entry and exit openings for all exposed pipes passing
through finished walls, finished partitions, finished ceilings, and floors above grade.
 Plates shall be large enough to completely close the hole around the pipe. Wall and
ceiling plates shall have set screws; spring clips will not be acceptable.
 Where necessary to cover beads of fittings, special deep escutcheons shall be provided.
(11) Cutting and Repairing
 The work shall be careful laid out in advance. Cutting of structural works shall be done
only with specific approval from the engineer
 Damage from the cutting shall be carefully repaired by skilled workmen of the trade
involved.
(12) Invert Elevation
 The Contractor shall verify the proposed invert elevations prior to laying pipes.
(13) Termination of Water Piping
 Water pipes extended to points 1. 50 meters beyond the building structure shall be
capped or plugged for future connection, or connection under other sections of these
Specifications.
 If trenches are closed, or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to
the utility systems, the locations of the end of each pipe shall be marked with a stake
properly tagged or otherwise identified.
(14) Underground Pipes
 Underground pipe supports attached to the building structure shall be made of stainless steel.
 Back fill and under-fill shall be made with sand.
(15) Valve
 The location of the principal valves shall be as indicated on the drawings, but, whether
or not so indicated, shutoff gate valves shall be furnished and installed in each supply
main where it enters the building. All valves used for pipe or equipment drains shall be
of the too expensive, if possible, please change to gate valve type. All valves shall be
installed in accessible locations or otherwise access panels shall be provided. No valve
shall be installed with its stem below the horizontal. These valves shall be rated for
1034 kPa (150 psi) working pressure or more, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
 Furnish and install a trap on each fixture and each piece of equipment requiring
connection to the sewer system, except fixtures or equipment having an integral trap
or seal. Each trap shall be placed as close to the fixture as possible and no fixture shall
be double-trapped. All traps installed in accessible locations shall have cleanout plugs
or other approved means for cleaning. Slip joints in traps will be permitted only on the
inlet side or in the trap seal.
(16) Water Pipe
 All pipes shall be installed with a pitch to drain. Where branches are connected to
vertical risers, each branch shall drain back to its respective riser. Provide drain valves
at all low points of the system to permit complete draining.
 Branches from service lines may be taken of the top, bottom or side of the main, using
such cross over fittings as may be required by conditions.
 Unions shall not be concealed in walls or partitions nor covered with insulations.
2. Testing and commissioning
(1) Cold water piping shall be tested with water pressure of not less than specified or 1 st times
the maximum working pressure, whichever is greater, at the lowest point in the system. Care
shall be taken to avoid putting excessive pressure on safety devices, etc. These delicate control
mechanisms shall be removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. The system shall be
tested when water temperatures and average ambient temperatures are approximately equal
and constant. Test pressure shall be maintained for not less than 30 minutes without an
appreciable drop after the force pump has been disconnected.
(2) Piping may be tested a section at time in order to facilitate the construction.
(3) Leaks in screwed fittings shall be corrected by remaking the joints. Leaks in welded joints shall
be cut out and rewelded. Caulking of leaks will not be permitted.
(4) After pressure tests have been made, the entire water-distribution system to be sterilized shall be
thoroughly flushed with water until all entrained dirt and mud have been removed before
introducing chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine or
hypochlorite. The chlorinating material shall provide a dosage of not less than 50 PPM. and shall
be introduced into the system in an approved manner. The treated water shall be retained in the
pipe long enough to destroy all nonspore-forming bacteria. Except where a shorter period is
approved, the retention time shall be at least 24 hours and shall produce not less than 10 PPM of
chlorine at the extreme end of the system of the retention period. All valves in the system being
sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period.
(5) The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is reduced to
less than 0.2 PPM. During the flushing period all valves and faucets shall be turned on and off
several times.
END
5.4.3 : SANITARY PIPING WORK

PART I: DESCRIPTION
drawings.
(1) Piping and accessories shall comply with the following codes and standards.
 ASTM A74 : Standard specification for cast iron soil pipe and
fittings
 ASTM D2239 : Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE)
 Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR)
 TIS 533 : Cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and
ventilating pipes
 TIS 604 : Cast iron pipe fittings
 ASTM A120 : Welded Steel Pipes Zinc-Coated, Threaded and
Coupled (GTC)
an earlier issue.
codes.
3. Submittals
temporary covers during erection. Before any pipe is installed, it shall be opened and pounded
(2) Pipes shall be stored on racks in a suitable warehouse or cover to avoid rusting. If necessary,
paint.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Description
The sanitary piping shall be the types or models, which are suitable for the working fluid in the
system.
2. Component
(1) Soil, Waste and Drain Pipes
 Soil and waste pipe inside building shall be PVC pipe Class 8.5 conforming to Thai
Industrial Standard, TIS 979.
 Soil and waste pipe inside large building shall be cast-iron pipe (Hubless type) class
extra heavy conforming to TIS 533
 Soil and waste pipe outside building and underground shall be High Density
Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe PN6.3 conforming to TIS 982.
(2) Vent Pipe
 Vent Pipe inside building shall be PVC pipe Class 8.5 conforming to Thai Industrial
Standard, TIS 979.
 Vent Pipe inside large building shall be galvanized steel pipes conforming to Thai
Industrial Standard, TIS 277, Class B.
 Underground vent pipe shall be High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe PN 6.3
conforming to TIS 982.
(3) Waste Pipes from Drainage Pumps
 Pipe from drainage pump shall be galvanized steel pipes medium weight conforming
to Thai Industrial Standard, TIS 277, Class B.
as designated in TIS 1410.
(5) Fitting for High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
 Fittings for galvanized steel pipes shall be galvanized malleable cast-iron, conforming
to TISI 249.
(7) Fittings for Cast-Iron Pipes
 Fittings for cast-iron pipes shall be cast-iron waste and drain pipe fittings, conforming
to TIS 604.
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Installation
(1) General piping installation
 All piping shall be installed parallel to, or at right angles with, the building walls and
partitions. A pitch in the direction of flow and drain shall be not less than 1: 500.
Branches from water mains shall be taken in a manner that facilities venting and
draining. Reductions in bore shall be formed eccentrically to facilitate venting, except
on vertical pipes where concentric reduction may be used.
 The equipment or piping shall be installed so that it will not provide a cross connection
or interconnection between a distributing supply for drinking or domestic purposes and
a polluted supply such as a drainage system or a soil or waste pipe that will permit or
make possible the backflow of sewage, polluted water or waste into the water supply
system. Where crossing a sewer or waste line is inevitable, the water line shall be not
less than 0.30 meters above the sewer line, which shall be cast-iron soil pipe for not
less than 30 meters on each side of the crossing.
 All pipes shall be installed in an appropriate manner to present a neat and orderly
appearance, using fittings for all changes of direction, and arranging pipe run parallel to
or at right angles with structural members of the building, to provide utmost head-
room and to clear lights and other obstructions. In general, suspended pipes shall be
installed as closely as possible to the overhead structure.
(2) Workmanship
 All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site, and shall be
worked into place without springing or forcing.
 Piping shall be installed so that it may expand and contract freely without injury to
itself or other work. Steel and wrought-iron pipe shall be cut with pipe cutters and
threaded with sharp, clean dies. All cut sections shall be reamed to remove all burrs
and to restore the pipe to full diameter. All changes in size shall be made with reducing
fitting.
 Pipe bends and bushings are prohibited.
 All valves, cleanouts, equipment, accessories, and devices shall be so located that they
are accessible for repair and replacement.
 Connections to coils, pumps and other equipment shall be made in such a manner
that undue strains between pipes and equipment are eliminated.
 Unions and/or flanges shall be used to facilitate the removal of the equipment.
 The piping systems shall be installed so that there will be no damage due to expansion
and contraction during operation.
 Packless type expansion connectors shall be used where the expansion and contraction
of the pipe is excessive or cannot be compensated by expansion loops or offsets.
 The piping systems shall be installed so that there will be no damage due to differential
settlement of the pipe supports after installation. The problems could be avoided by
providing flexible connections.
(7) Sleeves
 Vertical pipes passing through floors shall be provided with sleeves of black steel pipes.
Sleeves shall be of a proper length to pass through the entire floor construction and
shall terminate 50 mm. above the finished floor level.
centering caps and securely nailed or screwed to formwork before the concrete is
poured.
 Provide chromium-plated escutcheon, where exposed pipes pass through walls or
floors.
 When sleeves are installed through a fire wall, the clearance between sleeves and
pipes shall be filled with fire-resistant material. The fire rating of the fire-resistant
material shall be at least equivalent to that of the fire wall.
(8) Pipe Joints
 Joint for Cast-Iron Pipe
o Joints for cast-iron pipes, hubs or bell-and spigots shall be made by tightly
packing and caulking oakum gaskets or braided or twisted jute into the annular
space between a spigot and hub or a bell to within 1 1/2 inches (3.75 cm) of the
face of the hub or the bell, and filling the remaining space with molten lead at
one pouring. The lead shall then be caulked to produce a watertight joint
without overstraining the hub or the bell. When finished, the lead shall be flush
with face of the hub or the bell.
o Joints for No-Hub cast-iron pipes shall be made by Neoprene rubber sleeve
conforming to ASTM D-15 and couplings with 304 stainless steel shaft and nut
screw. Pipes and joints shall be plain ends.
o When cast-iron pipe is used for pump suction or discharge pipe, the joint shall
be flanged joint.

o Joints for threaded pipes shall be made with an approved Teflon tape or
graphite compound applied to the male threads only. Threads exposed after
joints are made up shall be mopped with compound.
o Threads shall be of the cleanout, tapered threads with the ends being reamed
o Flanged joints shall be installed at all valves larger than 50 mm. and at other
o Jointing flanges shall be truly parallel to each other so that bolts are used only
to tighten joints, rather than correct alignment. Flanges shall be chosen to suit
the maximum working pressure of the system. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be
cadmium-plated steel.
 Joint for HDPE Pipes
o All HDPE pipe works shall be strictly installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. It shall be joined with thermal butt fuse welding method.
o Stub end and backing ring shall be provided where connect to steel pipe, valves
or other equipments with flanged joint.
 All pipes shall be securely supported. Horizontal piping shall be supported by adjustable
clevis type hangers with solid rods securely attached to the building structure. Where
several pipes run in a parallel fashion, trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of separate
hangers. All hangers shall have turnbuckles or other approved means of adjustment.
Where pipes, such as those from individual toilet rooms to main stacks, are not low
enough to permit the use of turnbuckles, other means of adjustment shall be used.
Chains, straps, perforated bars, or wire hangers will not be accepted. All hangers and
supports shall be hot-dip galvanized. The maximum distances between hangers and
supports for horizontally mounted and vertically mounted pipes shall be as indicated
below.
from the engineer.
 Supporting brackets shall be fastened to concrete by means of inserts or expansion
bolts, to brickwork by means of expansion bolts, and to hollow masonry by means of
toggle bolts. Two fixings per bracket shall be provided as follows:-
Up to 65 (2 ½) 6.4 (1/4)
80 (3”) to 150 (6) 9.5 (3/8)
200 (8”) to 300 (12) 12.7 (1/2)
 All hangers and steel supports shall be hot dip galvanized.


Nominal Maximum Interval (m.)
Hanger Rod
Pipe Steel Pipe PVC Pipe Copper Pipe
Min.Size(mm.)
Size(mm.) Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
15 (1/2”) 9 2.0 2.4 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8
20 (3/4”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.0 1.2 1.8 2.4
25 (1”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.0 1.2 1.8 2.4
32 (1 ¼”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.2 1.8 2.0 3.0
40 (1 ½”) 9 3.0 3.6 1.3 1.8 2.4 3.0
50 (2”) 9 3.0 3.6 1.5 1.8 2.4 3.6
65 (2 ½”) 12 3.0 4.5 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.6
80 (3”) 12 3.6 4.5 2.0 2.4 3.0 3.6
80 (3”) 15 4.0 4.5 2.4 2.4 3.6 3.6
100 (4”) 15 4.8 4.5 2.4 3.0
125 (5”) 22 4.8 4.5 2.4 3.0
150 (6”) 22 6.0 4.8 3.0 3.6
200 (8”) 22 6.0 4.8
250 (10”) 22 6.0 4.8
300 (12”) 22 6.0 4.8
 The maximum interval of horizontal run cast iron pipe 1.2 m, with at least one hanger
for each pipe section. Hangers should be located adjacent to joints, changes in direction
and branch connection.
 Furnish and install plates on all entry and exit openings for all exposed pipes passing
through finished walls, finished partitions, finished ceilings, and floors above grade.
Plates shall be large enough to completely close the hole around the pipe.
 Wall and ceiling plates shall have set screws; spring clips will not be acceptable. Where
necessary to cover beads of fittings, special deep escutcheons shall be provided.
 The work shall be careful laid out in advance. Cutting of structural works shall be done
only with specific approval from the engineer.
 Damage from the cutting shall be carefully repaired by skilled workmen of the trade
involved.
 The Contractor shall verify the proposed invert elevations prior to laying pipes.
(13) Termination of Water and Drainage Piping

 Water and drainage pipes extended to points 1.50 meters beyond the building structure
shall be capped or plugged for future connection, or connection under other sections
of these Specifications.
 If trenches are closed, or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to
the utility systems, the locations of the end of each pipe shall be marked with a stake
properly tagged or otherwise identified.
 Underground pipe supports attached to the building structure shall be made of stainless
steel.
(15) Flashing
 Vent pipes shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with 4-pound sheet lead.
Flashings shall extend not less than 200 mm from the vent pipes in all directions and
shall extend up the vent pipe not less than 150 mm at which point threaded standard
cast-iron or malleable-iron recess roof couplings shall be installed to form counter-
flashing or rain guards.
(16) Valve
 The location of the principal valves shall be as indicated on the drawings, but, whether or
not so indicated, shutoff gate valves shall be furnished and installed in each supply main
where it enters the building. All valves used for pipe or equipment drains shall be gate valve
type. All valves shall be installed in accessible locations or otherwise access panels shall be
provided. No valve shall be installed with its stem below the horizontal. These valves shall
be rated for 10 kg/cm2 working pressure or more, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
(17) Floor Cleanout
 Floor cleanouts shall have an iron body ferrule with raised head brass plug or with
spanner wrench sockets.
(18) Drain
 Outside Floor Drain
Floor drains shall be of the cast-iron type and be provided with trap, chromium-plated
brass inlet grating and round removable cast-brass strainer. They shall, furthermore, be
threaded or caulked connection.
 Floor and Area Drain
The size of the drains shall be determined by the branch size indicated or as
shown on the Drawings. Drains and backwater valves installed in connection with
waterproofed floors shall be equipped with bolted-type clamping devices. Floor drain
for mechanical room shall be tunnel floor drain as indicated in the Drawings.
(19) Grease Trap

 Grease trap tank shall be installed in the position shown on the Drawings and be of the
sizes and dimensions indicated typical details, as shown. They shall be constructed of
complete sets from manufacture.
(20) Soil, Waste and Drain Piping
 Slope
Horizontal lines shall be installed with a minimum slope in the direction of flow of 2
cm per meter (1:50) for pipes of 80 mm and smaller sizes and with 1 cm. per meter
(1:100) for larger pipe sizes.
 Fitting
All changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings or recessed reducers while
changes in direction shall be made with "Y" fittings, combination Y and 1/8 bends, long
sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, and 1/16 bends. Sanitary "Tee" branches may be used when
the direction of flow is from a horizontal line to a vertical line, and short sweep 1/4
bends may be used on the discharge from a water closet. Union connections shall be
made with tucker or hub drainage fittings.
(21) Vent Line
 Slope
Horizontal lines shall be pitched to drain back to the drainage system without forming
traps, using fittings as required.
 Arrangement
Except where otherwise indicated, main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended
full size to and above the roof line as vents. Where practicable, two or more vent pipes
shall be connected together and extended as one pipe through the roof. Vertical vent
pipes shall be connected together and extended as one pipe through the roof. Vertical
vent pipes may be connected into on main vent riser above vented fixtures. Unless
indicated otherwise, sanitary piping shall form circuit or loop vents with no dead ends
or inverted siphons. Circuit or loop vent lines shall be connected at a height of not less
than 300 mm. above the highest fixture served. Horizontal waste lines receiving the
discharge from two or more fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate
venting of fixtures is shown. Where a vent is taken from a horizontal drain line, the vent
connection shall be made above the centerline of the drain, either on the top or at an
angle of not more than 45 degrees from the vertical. The bottoms of vent stacks shall
be so connected that any dirt or scale from the inside of the stacks will be flushed out
through the soil or waste piping. All vent stacks shall be extended to a minimum of
300 mm above the roof and be equipped with a flashing fitting and special waterproof
hood.
(1) The contractor shall primarily perform his own pressure test. The actual test shall be
performed by the witness of the engineer.
(2) For partial pressure test of soil, waste and vent pipes, fill up the part being tested by water up
to 3 meters over the tested part. For the whole system test, fill up the system until overflow.
Sanitary wares shall be tightly sealed, and after one hour of filling up, look for any leakage.
(3) If sanitary wares are already installed before test; fill up water into all traps/charge the smoke
or odor into the system until the smoke or odor comes out at the vent through pipe. Then
seal the vent through pipe, and charge the smoke or odor to the pressure of one inch water
gauge. 15 minutes of this pressure means passing of the test.
END
5.4.4 : STORM DRAIN PIPING WORK

PART I: DESCRIPTION
drawings.
(1) The Piping work and accessories shall comply with the following codes and standards.
 ASTM A74 : Standard specification for cast iron soil pipe and
fittings
 ASTM D2239 : Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic
Pipe (SIDR-PR)
 TIS 17 : Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride pipes for drinking
water services
 TIS 982 : High-density polyethylene pipes for drinking water
services
 TIS 533 : Cast ir on spigot and socket soil, waste and
ventilating pipes
 TIS 604 : Cast iron pipe fittings
 ASTM A120 : Welded Steel Pipes Zinc-Coated, Threaded and

Coupled (GTC)
 ASTM D2241 : Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)
 ASTM D1785 : Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
an earlier issue.
codes.
3. Submittals

temporary covers during erection. Before any pipe is installed, it shall be opened and pounded
(2) Pipes shall be stored on racks in a suitable warehouse or cover to avoid rusting. If
necessary, carbon steel pipes shall be coated with anodic rust converter or red lead primer.
paint.
completion of the work, fixtures materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Description
The storm drain piping shall be the types or models, which are satiable for the working fluid in the
system.
2. Component
(1) Rain Leader Pipes
 Rain leader pipes inside building shall be PVC pipe Class 8.5 conforming to Thai
Industrial Standard, TIS 979.
 Rain leader pipes inside large building shall be galvanized steel pipes medium weight
conforming to Thai Industrial Standard, TIS 277.Class B.
 Underground rain leader pipe shall be High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe PN 6.3
conforming to TIS 982.
(2) Storm Drain Pipe
 Storm drain pipe shall be Reinforced Concrete pipe, Tongue & Groove Joint Type,
conforming to TISI 128 Class 3 or Local Standard which equal.
as designated in TIS 1410.
 Fitting for galvanized steel pipes shall be galvanized malleable cast-iron, conforming to
TIS 249
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
(1) General piping installation
 All piping shall be installed parallel to, or at right angles with, the building walls and
partitions. A pitch in the direction of flow and drain shall be not less than 1: 500.
Branches from water mains shall be taken in a manner that facilities venting and draining.
Reductions in bore shall be formed eccentrically to facilitate venting, except on vertical

pipes where concentric reduction may be used.
 The equipment or piping shall be installed so that it will not provide a cross connection
or interconnection between a distributing supply for drinking or domestic purposes and
a polluted supply such as a drainage system or a soil or waste pipe that will permit or
make possible the backflow of sewage, polluted water or waste into the water supply
system. Where crossing a sewer or waste line is inevitable, the water line shall be not
less than 0.30 meters above the sewer line, which shall be cast-iron soil pipe for not
less than 30 meters on each side of the crossing.
 All pipes shall be installed in an appropriate manner to present a neat and orderly
appearance, using fittings for all changes of direction, and arranging pipe run parallel to
or at right angles with structural members of the building, to provide utmost head-room
and to clear lights and other obstructions. In general, suspended pipes shall be installed
as closely as possible to the overhead structure.
(2) Workmanship
All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site, and shall be worked
into place without springing or forcing. Piping shall be installed so that it may expand and
contract freely without injury to itself or other work. Steel and wrought-iron pipe shall be cut
with pipe cutters and threaded with sharp, clean dies. All cut sections shall be reamed to
remove all burrs and to restore the pipe to full diameter. All changes in size shall be made
with reducing fitting. Pipe bends and bushings are prohibited.
All valves, cleanouts, equipment, accessories, and devices shall be so located that they are
accessible for repair and replacement.
Connections to coils, pumps and other equipment shall be made in such a manner that undue
strains between pipes and equipment are eliminated. Unions and/or flanges shall be used to
facilitate the removal of the equipment.
 The piping systems shall be installed so that there will be no damage due to expansion
and contraction during operation.
 Packless type expansion connectors shall be used where the expansion and contraction
of the pipe is excessive or cannot be compensated by expansion loops or offsets.
settlement of the pipe supports after installation. The problems shall be avoided by providing
flexible connections.
(7) Sleeves
 Vertical pipes passing through floors shall be provided with sleeves of black steel pipes.
Sleeves shall be of a proper length to pass through the entire floor construction and
centering caps and securely nailed or screwed to formwork before the concrete is
poured.
 Provide chromium-plated escutcheon, where exposed pipes pass through walls or floors.
 When sleeves are installed through a fire wall, the clearance between sleeves and pipes
shall be filled with fire-resistant material. The fire rating of the fire-resistant material
shall be at least equivalent to that of the fire wall.
(8) Pipe Joints
Joints for threaded pipes shall be made with an approved Teflon tape or graphite
compound applied to the male threads only. Threads exposed after joints are made up
shall be mopped with compound. Threads shall be of the cleanout, tapered threads
with the ends being reamed before installation.
o Flanged joints shall be installed at all valves larger than 50 mm. and at other
o Jointing flanges shall be truly parallel to each other so that bolts are used only
to tighten joints, rather than correct alignment. Flanges shall be chosen to suit
the maximum working pressure of the system. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be
cadmium-plated steel.
 Joint for HDPE Pipes
o All HDPE pipe works shall be strictly installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. It shall be joined with thermal butt welding method.
o Stud end and backing ring shall be provided where connect to steel pipe valves
or the other equipments with flanged joint.

 All pipes shall be securely supported. Horizontal piping shall be supported by
adjustable clevis type hangers with solid rods securely attached to the building
structure. Where several pipes run in a parallel fashion, trapeze hangers may be used
in lieu of separate hangers. All hangers shall have turnbuckles or other approved means
of adjustment. Where pipes, such as those from individual toilet rooms to main stacks,
are not low enough to permit the use of turnbuckles, other means of adjustment shall
be used. Chains, straps, perforated bars, or wire hangers will not be accepted. All
hangers and supports shall be hot-dip galvanized. The maximum distances between
hangers and supports for horizontally mounted and vertically mounted pipes shall be
as indicated below.
from the The contractor shall primarily perform his own pressure test. The actual test
shall be performed by the witness of the engineer.
 Supporting brackets shall be fastened to concrete by means of inserts orexpansion
bolts, to brickwork by means of expansion bolts, and to hollowmasonry by means of
toggle bolts. Two fixings per bracket shall be providedas follows:-
Up to 65 (2 ½) 6.4 (1/4)
80 (3”) to 150 (6) 9.5 (3/8)
200 (8”) to 300 (12) 12.7 (1/2)
 All hangers and steel supports shall hot dip galvanized.

Nominal Hanger Rod Maximum Interval (m.)
Pipe Size Min.Size Steel Pipe PVC Pipe Copper Pipe
(mm.) (mm.) Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
15 (1/2”) 9 2.0 2.4 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8
20 (3/4”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.0 1.2 1.8 2.4
25 (1”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.0 1.2 1.8 2.4
32 (1 ¼”) 9 2.4 3.0 1.2 1.8 2.0 3.0
40 (1 ½”) 9 3.0 3.6 1.3 1.8 2.4 3.0
50 (2”) 9 3.0 3.6 1.5 1.8 2.4 3.6
65 (2 ½”) 12 3.0 4.5 1.8 2.4 3.0 3.6
80 (3”) 12 3.6 4.5 2.0 2.4 3.0 3.6
80 (3”) 15 4.0 4.5 2.4 2.4 3.6 3.6
100 (4”) 15 4.8 4.5 2.4 3.0
125 (5”) 22 4.8 4.5 2.4 3.0
150 (6”) 22 6.0 4.8 3.0 3.6
200 (8”) 22 6.0 4.8
250 (10”) 22 6.0 4.8
300 (12”) 22 6.0 4.8

Furnish and install plates on all entry and exit openings for all exposed pipes passing through
finished walls, finished partitions, finished ceilings, and floors above grade. Plates shall be large
enough to completely close the hole around the pipe. Wall and ceiling plates shall have set
screws; spring clips will not be acceptable. Where necessary to cover beads of fittings, special
deep escutcheons shall be provided.
The work shall be careful laid out in advance. Cutting of structural works shall be done only
with specific approval from the engineer. Damage from the cutting shall be carefully repaired
by skilled workmen of the trade involved.
The Contractor shall verify the proposed invert elevations prior to laying pipes.
(13) Termination of Water and Drainage Piping
Water and drainage pipes extended to points 1.50 meters beyond the building structure shall
be capped or plugged for future connection, or connection under other sections of these
Specifications. If trenches are closed, or the pipes are otherwise covered before being
connected to the utility systems, the locations of the end of each pipe shall be marked with
a stake properly tagged or otherwise identified.
 Underground pipe supports attached to the building structure shall be made of stainless
steel.
(15) Valve
 The location of the principal valves shall be as indicated on the drawings, but, whether
or not so indicated, shutoff gate valves shall be furnished and installed in each supply
main where it enters the building. All valves used for pipe or equipment drains shall be
of the too expensive, if possible, please change to gate valve type. All valves shall be
installed in accessible locations or otherwise access panels shall be provided. No valve
shall be installed with its stem below the horizontal. These valves shall be rated for 10
kg/cm2 working pressure or more, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
(16) Drain
 Outside Floor Drain
Floor drains shall be of the cast-iron type and be provided with trap, chromium-plated
brass inlet grating and round removable cast-brass strainer. They shall, furthermore, be
threaded or caulked connection.
 Floor and Area Drain
The size of the drains shall be determined by the branch size indicated or as shown on
the Drawings. Drains and backwater valves installed in connection with waterproofed
floors shall be equipped with bolted-type clamping devices. Floor drain for mechanical
room shall be tunnel floor drain as indicated in the Drawings.
 Roof Drain
Roof drains shall be of the heavy pattern cast-iron type, as specified on the drawings,
with an integral flange and satisfactory device for clamping or otherwise securing the
roofing and flashing to make a watertight connection. Openings in the strainer shall have
a combined area equal to twice the area of the drain outlet. The outlet shall be
equipped with necessary parts for proper connection to threaded pipes of the same
size as downspout.
2. Testing and Commissioning
Operating test run shall be provided from manufacturer
END
5.4.5 : VALVE AND ACCESSORIES

PART I: DESCRIPTION
(1) Valve shall be provided as indicated in the drawing.
(2) Shut-off valves shall be furnished as necessary for a satisfactory operation of all apparatus.
(3) Valves of the same type shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.
(1) The valves and accessories shall comply with the following codes and standards.
 ASTM A53/A53M-04a : Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black

and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless
 ASTM B75-02 : Standard Specification for Seamless
Copper Tube.
 TIS 277 : Steel Pipes
 ASME/ANSI B16 : Standards of Pipes and Fittings
 ASME Section VIII : Pressure Vessels; Boiler and Pressure
Vesse Codes
 ANSI/NEMA 250 : Enclosure for Electrical Equipment
 ASTM A216 : Carbon steel castings, suitable for fusion
welding for high temperature service.
an earlier issue.
codes.
3. Submittals
The contractor shall submit all valves and accessories performance selection, catalog, material lists
and technical data for approval before installation.
All parts of valves and accessories shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer and/or by the contractor
for at least 2 years after handover.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Description
(1) The valves shall be the types or models which are suitable for the working fluid in the system.
The rated working pressure of the valve as specified for the working fluid shall be at least 1.5
times of the actual working pressure, but not less than 1,034 kPa (150 PSIG.).
(2) The diameter of hand wheels for valves shall be of a suitable size so as to allow tight closure
by hand with the application of reasonable force so that neither additional leverage nor
damage shall be imposed upon the stem, seat and disc. Where indicated or required, for
inaccessible overhead valves, chain-operated hand wheels including rustproof chain and chain
guide shall be provide.
2. Component
(1) Gate Valves
 Valves of size up to 65 mm. (2 ½ inches) shall be bronze where appropriate, with
threaded ends, solid wedges and non-rising stems.
 Valves of sizes 80 mm. (3 inches) and larger shall be cast-iron or ductile iron where
appropriate, with flanged ends, solid wedges and rising stems.
(2) Globe Valves
 Valves of sizes up to 65 mm. (2 ½ inches) shall be bronze where appropriate with
threaded ends and union bonnets.
 Valves of 80 mm. (3 inches) and larger shall be cast-iron or ductile iron, bronze-trimmed
where appropriate, with flanged ends.
(3) Swing-Check Valves
 Valves shall be of the swing type suitable for the horizontal or vertical operation with a
two-piece hinge and accessible disc cover.
 Valves of sizes up to 65 mm. (2 ½ inches) shall be bronze where appropriate, with
threaded ends and full area Y pattern bodies.
 Valves of sizes 80 mm. (3 inches) and larger shall be cast-iron, swing pattern and bronze-
trimmed where appropriate, with flanged ends.
(4) Lift-Check Valves
 Lift-check valves or silent-type check valves shall be installed as indicated on the
Drawings and at the location where noise and water hammer would cause a problem.
The valves shall be of a spring closed type.
 Seats, discs, and springs shall be bronze or stainless steel, whichever is appropriate.
 Valves of sizes up to 65 mm. (2 ½ inches) shall be bronze where appropriate, with
threaded ends.
 Valves of sizes 80 mm. (3 inches) and larger shall be cast-iron where appropriate, with
flanged ends.
(5) Butterfly Valves
 A butterfly valve can be used instead of a gate valve if its size is 100 mm. (4 inches) and
larges; it shall have flange bolt centering holes for easy installation and be drilled to
suit precisely the piping flange (Full lug type).
 The body shall be cast-iron or ductile iron with aluminum-bronze disc where
appropriate of sufficient rigidity and strength to resist distortion. The stem shall be
through-shaft or two piece shaft design to provide high strength and positive disc
control.
 Compound rubber seat rings shall have excellent elasticity as well as wear resistance
to ensure positive water shut-off under the designed working pressure. Moulded-in "O"
rings shall provide positive flange sealing to eliminate need for gaskets. All rubber parts
shall be of the type suitable for the specified working fluid.
 Lever-operated valves shall be used for sizes up to 150 mm. (6”). Gear-operated valves
shall be used for sizes larger than 150 mm. (6”). Position indicators shall be provided
to indicate valve disc position.
(6) Ball Valves
 Valves shall be ball pattern of the square head type with stainless steel ball conforming
to AISI 304.
 Valves of sizes up to 50 mm. (2 inches) shall be bronze with threaded ends conforming
to ASTM B62 and for valves of sizes larger than 50 mm. (2 inches) Valve body shall be
carbon steel conforming to ASTM A216.
(7) Float Valve
 The valve shall be hydraulically operated, diaphragm-actuated globe or angle pattern
valve. Operation of the main valve shall be controlled by a two-level remote float
control.
 The body shall be cast-iron with flanged ends and shall have a pressure rating of 1,206
kPa. (175 psi [class 125]). A stilling well must be provided around the float to protection
against water surface turbulence.
(8) Pressure Regulating Valve
 The valve shall automatically reduce a higher inlet pressure to a steady lower
downstream pressure regardless of changing flow rate and/or varying inlet pressure. This
valve is an accurate pilot-operated regulator, capable of holding downstream pressure
to a pre-determined delivery pressure.
 The body of main valve shall be cast-iron with screwed or flanged ends and have a
pressure rating of 1,206 kPa. (175 psi [class 125]).
(9) Pressure Reducing Valve
 The Pressure Reducing Valve is a hydraulically operated, single seated globe valve
controlled by a direct acting spring and diaphragm pilot valve. It available in globe or
angle body.
 The main valve is operated by the downstream pressure passing through the pilot
system. It will reduce a high pressure of upstream to a predetermined lower pressure
of downstream.
 The body of main valve shall be cast-iron with screwed or Hanged ends and have a
pressure rating of 1206 kPa (175 psi (class 175))
(10) Pressure Relief Valve
 Pressure relief valve shall be installed at the pump discharge line to provide protection
against high surge when pump is shut down as indicated on the Drawings. It shall be of
globe patters diaphragm valve with hydraulically-operated, pilot-controlled and
modulating type.
 The body of main valve shall be cast-iron with screw or flanged ends of pressure rating
class of 1206 kpa (175 psi (class 175))
(11) Water Hammer Arrestors (Air Rechargeable)
 This water hammer arrestor shall be installed at discharged pipe of water pump as
indicated on the drawings.
 It contains only one moving part; a spherical piston which floats inside the surge copper
chamber, built in valve and gauge assembly simplified charging and recharging
procedure.
(12) Flexible Connections
 Where it is considered necessary, and only with the engineer approval, flexible
connections at inlets and outlets of pumps shall be of rubber type, Double-sphere
shape.
 The flexible connectors shall be designed for excellent vibration and noise protection.
Isolated tension members shall be provided to prevent excessive elongation.
 Flexible connections shall be suitable for the specified working fluid and specified
working pressure and temperature.
(13) Expansion Joints (For Steam and Hot Water System)
 Packless construction externally pressurized guide expansion connectors shall be used
where the expansion and contraction of the pipe is excessive or cannot be
compensated by expansion loops or offsets.
 Anchors and pipe guides shall be provided and installed at the recommended
locations. All expansion connectors shall have flanged ends with working pressure
corresponding with the piping system
(14) Strainers
 Water strainers shall be of the Y type. Strainers of 50 mm. (2 inches) and smaller shall
have bronze or iron bodies with screwed connections while 65 mm. (2 ½ inches)
strainers and larger shall have iron bodies and flanged connections. They shall have the
same rating as the piping system.
 Screens shall be stainless steel with perforations as follows:-
Strainer Size, mm. (inch) Screens Perforation (mm.)

20 (3/4) to 50 (2) inclusive 0.76
65 (2 ½) to 150 (6) inclusive 1.52
200 (8) to 300 (12) inclusive 3.05
Over 300 (12) 6.10
 The free area of each screen shall be not less than three times the area of the strainer
inlet pipe. Strainers size of 65 mm. and larger shall be provided with 15 mm. valve
drains.
(15) Air Vents and Drains
 Manual air vents shall be furnished as required for purging air or other gases from the
water circuit during filling-up. The outlet shall be piped to the nearest drain.
 Automatic air vents, conforming to ASA standards, shall be furnished at the top of main
water risers, supply and return pipes.
 A shut-off valve shall be provided at the inlet of each automatic air vent. The outlet
shall be piped to the nearest drain.
 A plug-type drain cock shall be provided at all low points of pipe work systems. Drains
shall be installed to ensure easy access and convenience for maintenance and removal
of all piping, valves, fittings and equipment without undue spillage.
 Drainage facilities shall be provided and suitable sized to drain expeditiously the entire
system and equipment involved.
(16) Pressure Gauges
 Pressure gauges shall be of the bourbon type, stainless steel casing, round type of 100
mm. dial and scale range of approximately 150 per cent of the normal operation.
Pressure readings shall be in dual scale with psi and kg/cm2.
 A needle valve and snubber with working pressure corresponding with the piping
system shall be provided for each pressure gauge.
 Pressure gauges, subjected to corrosive liquid, shall be of the chemical type with
diaphragm liquid separator.
(17) Water Meters
 Water meters shall be turbine type. Dry dial magnetic drive conforming to the
Metropolitan Waterworks Authority or Provincial Waterworks Authority Standard with
working pressure corresponding with the piping system.
(18) Water Tank
 Tank material shall be made of Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) or equivalent

materials.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
Installation shall be followed instruction manual from manufacturer.
Operating test run shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
END
5.4.6 : COLD WATER SUPPLY PUMP
PART I: DESCRIPTION
(1) Pumps used for the same function shall be of the same manufacturer.
(2) The unit shall be especially selected to meet the project requirements, from reputable
manufacturers.
(1) Pumps and accessories shall comply with the following codes and standards.
 ASTM B584 : Standard Specification for Copper Alloy
Sand Castings for General Applications
 ASTM B36/B36M : Standard Specification for Brass Plate,

Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar
 ASTM A48/A48M : Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
an earlier issue.
(4) The standards and codes as mention in 1.2 can be equivalent by another standards and codes, if
it equal or better than standards and codes mention in 1.2 when comply between two codes.
3. Submittals
The Contractor shall submit Pump’s performance selection, material lists and technical data for
All part of the cold water supply pump shall be guaranteed by the contractor at least 2 years after
handover.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Description
(1) The cold water supply pump in this section shall include water transfer pump and package
water booster pump set.
(2) The Water Transfer Pump
 The water transfer pump shall be centrifugal, single stage or multi-stage volute type. They
shall be end suction or vertical inline as indicated on the drawings. They shall be driven by
electric motors with flexible couplings. The pumps and motors shall be mounted on steel
base plate.
 The transfer pump shall be completed with pump starter and control panel with all automatic
control function.
(3) Water Supply Pump-Constant Pressure Booster Pump Set
 The pumps shall be end suction centrifugal or multi stage turbine type.
 The water supply pumps shall be constant pressures with continuous running operation
sequence and of the low energy consumption. The booster pump set shall be pressure
switch controlled or variable speed drive controlled.
 The entire booster system shall be factory prefabricated on a common structural steel stand
with all interconnection piping anti-vibration mounting and wiring completed and
operationally tested prior to shipment. Complete package shall also include isolation valves
on the suction and discharge at each pump. Galvanized steel suction and discharge pipe
manifolds as well as copper tubing with shut-off cocks for gauges and pressure switch, will
be furnished assemble.
 The booster pump set shall be completed with pump starter and control panel with all
automatic control function.
(4) Pumps shall be selected for a total efficiency as show in drawing.
2. Component
(1) Centrifugal Pump
 End Suction Centrifugal Type
o Pumps shall be of single-stage horizontal end suction centrifugal type, frame or closed
couple operating at not over 3,000 rpm or as indicated on the Drawings.
o The pumps shall be designed so that removal of the pump impeller will not interfere
with the piping system (back pull out pump).
 In-line Centrifugal Type
o Pumps shall be of the single-stage vertical mounted. Split coupled or close coupled
design, in-line centrifugal type, single suction with volute type casing operating at a
speed of not over 3000 rpm.
o The pumps shall be designed so that removal of the pump impeller will not interfere
with the piping system (back pull-out pump).
(2) Centrifugal Pump Component
 Casings
o Casings of all pumps shall be designed for a working pressure of 10 kg/cm2 or 1.5 times
the actual discharge pressure, whichever is greater.
o Pressure classification of flange connections shall correspond to casing working
pressures.
o Casing material shall be cast-iron, precision manufactured for best performance
and long-term duty.
o Water discharge diffusers shall be included to reduce radial torque the impeller.
 Wearing Rings
o All pumps having discharge connections larger than 50 mm and operating at more than
2 kg/cm2 total dynamic head shall be provided with casing wearing rings.
o These rings shall be suitable for an individual application. Rings shall be

replaceable, and positively keyed to prevent rotation.
 Impellers
o Impellers shall be one-piece, zinc free bronze and dynamically balanced. Impellers of
pumps having 40 mm and larger discharge connection shall be fully enclosed and
hydraulically balanced.
o Impellers shall be accurately keyed to the shaft and fixed in an axial position by shaft
sleeves and separate snap rings. Impellers shall be fully protected against damage due
to reverse rotation.
 Shafts
o Shafts for pumps shall be of stainless steel, (chrome-iron or nickel-iron) with high safety
precautions to withstand easily the torsional loads with other stresses to which they
may be subjected. They shall be so designed that there will be no detrimental
vibrational stresses.
 Bearings
o Bearings shall be heavy-duty ball bearing.
o The bearings shall be self-sealed, and housed in malleable-iron housing aligned to a
bearing bracket by means of large precision registers.
o Bearing shall be removable without dismantling any rotating element inside the pump.
 Shaft Seal
o Unless otherwise specified, shaft seals shall be mechanical type.
 Couplings
o All pumps, other than close coupled pumps, shall be provided with urethane flexible
couplings or steel pins and bushing with a service factor of at least 1.5 for an individual
application.
o Spacer couplings shall be required for back pull out end suction pumps.
o Couplings shall impose no restriction on normal end play expansion.
Suitable coupling guards shall also be provided.
 Base Plates
o Each flexible coupled pump shall be provided with a cast-iron or fabricated mild steel
base plate to hold both the pump and the motor in correct alignment
o Pumps and motors shall be accurately aligned.
o Miscellaneous Fittings
o High points of pump casings shall be provided with air vent cocks. These cocks shall be
extended outside of any insulation. Low points of casings shall be provided with valve
drains and both inlet and outlet connections with properly located gauge tapings.
 Motors
o Each pump shall be driven at the speed indicated on the drawing, 400V / 3 P/ 50 Hz. totally enclosed fan-
cooled, insulation class F and protection class IP54 electric motor and IP 55 for outdoor motor.
o The rated kW shall be at least 1.15 times the maximum power required.
o The motors shall be of a high efficiency design and should be supplied as an integral part of the pump.
The contractor shall submit technical data for approval.
o Bearing of each motor shall be of anti-friction type ball bearing or roller bearings.
(3) Instrumentation and Control Panel for Transfer Pump
The transfer pump shall included the following instrument and control features:-
 Main selector switch “Auto-Off-Manual”
 Pressure gauge
 Flow sequencing
 Lead-lag pump selector switch
 Thru the door pump disconnect switch
 Pump run light
 Control power light and switch
 Audible alarm buzzle
 Water storage tank low level system shut down
 Control panel
 Gate vale, check valve
 Strainer
 Pump overload light
 Flexible Connectors.
 Storage tank and roof tank level switch
(4) Instrumentation and Control Panel for Constant Pressure Booster Pump Set The booster
pump set shall included the following instrument and control features:-
 Main selector switch “Auto-Off-Manual”
 Pressure gauge and pressure switch
 Flow sequencing
 Lead-lag pump selector switch
 Thru the door pump disconnect switch
 Pump run light
 Control power light and switch
 Audible alarm buzzle
 Water storage tank low level system shut down
 Water storage tank and roof tank high level system alarm
 Variable speed drive (for Variable Speed Booster Pump Set only)
 Pressure transmitter (for Variable Speed Booster Pump Set only)
 Control panel
 Pressure regulating valve
 Gate vale, check valve
 Strainer
 Anti-Vibration pads
 Flow switch
 Pump overload light
 Flexible Connectors.
 Diaphragm pre-charged diaphragm type closed pressure tank.
3. System Control
(1) Cold Water Transfer Pump
 The transfer pump shall be controlled by storage tank and roof tank level switch.
 The transfer pump controlled shall be parallel and alternated, when the lead pump can not
handle the volume flow rate of the system then the lag pump will be automatically start
to run parallel.
(2) Constant Pressure Booster Pump Set
 System pressure controlled shall be maintain within + 5% by pilot operated diaphragm type,
combination pressure regulating and non-slam check valve on each pump discharge line, or
stabilized and controlled by a pressure reducing valve.
 The booster pump set controller shall be parallel and alternated, when the lead pump can
not handle the volume flow rate of the system then lag pump will be automatically start
to run parallel.
(3) Variable Speed Booster Pump Set
 System pressure shall be maintain within + 5% by variable speed drive (Inverter) and pressure
transmitter (At the longest point of riser) and non-slam check valve on each pump discharge
line.
 The booster pump set shall be controlled by storage tank level switch.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
(1) Pumps shall be installed by following the manufacturer recommendations and as indicated
on the detail drawing.
(2) Each pump shall be mounted on approved vibration isolators which are, in turn, placed on a
concrete base. The isolators shall be selected and installed inaccordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations such that no disturbingvibration and noise is being
transmitted to the nearby structure.
(3) Ensure that no cavitation occurs at the eye of the impeller
(4) Any suction and discharge pipes, which are bigger than the pump connections shall be
equipped with eccentric reducers.
(5) Flexible connections shall be installed on both the suction and on the discharge pipe.
(6) Shut-off valve and strainers shall have the same size as the suction pipe. Check valve and
shut-off valve shall have the same size as the discharge pipe.
(7) Drainage from each pump shall be discharged to the nearest drain. Each drain pipe shall be of
galvanized steel pipe as detailed within this specification.
(1) Operating test run shall be provided from manufacturer.
(2) Before start-up, grease or lubricating oil shall be applied to the pump and motor.
(3) After installations are completed, all pumps shall undergo test run. Any adjustments that are
needed shall be made to assure that all pumps will operate either the required performance.
Report forms to contain following minimum data listings shall include design and actual
conditions for each Item mentioned below:
 Date and time of test.
 Ambient conditions at time of test.
 Pump maker, type, name and serial number.
 Pump rpm.
 Pump amperage (Individual Operation).
 Pump amperage (Multiple Operation).

 Rated motor amperage, starter relay number and amperage rating.
 Pump inlet pressure (Individual Operation).
 Pump inlet pressure (Multiple Operation).
 Pump outlet pressure (Individual Operation).
 Pump outlet pressure (Multiple Operation).
 Water flow rate m3/s.
END
5.4.7 : WASTE WATER TREATMENT PLANT

PART I: DESCRIPTION
(1) The works shall be executed to completion in conformity with the drawing and these
specification
(2) Grease trap tank shall be used for separated grease from waste water of the kitchen and
washing area.
2. Standard and References
(1) Purify waste water that flowing out to public water resources shall comply with the Pollution
Control Department (PCD.) Regulations
an earlier issue.
3. Submittals
The Contractor shall submit waste water treatment plant’s performance selection, material lists and
technical data for approval before purchasing.
All parts of the waster water treatment plant shall be guaranteed by the contractor at least
2 years after handover.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Description
(1) Wastewater treatment tank shall be completely package onsite treatment unit.
(2) Treatment system shall be of anaerobic filter and contact aeration process.
(3) Waste water treatment tank shall be suitable to treat domestic wastewater to purify
wastewater prior to flow out to public drain.
(4) Tank material shall be made of Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) or equivalent materials.
(5) Influent BOD shall be of 250 mg/l, treated water effluent BOD shall be lower than 20 mg/l.
(Source : Notification of the Ministry of Natural Resources and Environment : Building Effluents
Standards)
2. Components
The wastewater treatment unit shall consist of the following component:-
(1) Solid separation tank
(2) Anaerobic filter tank
(3) Contact Aeration tank
(4) Sedimentation tank

PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Test equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
END
5.4.8 : ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION FOR SANITARY SYSTEM

PART I: DESCRIPTION
(1) This part of the Specification describes all electrical equipment and installations including
connections thereof for the aforementioned system.
(2) An electrical contractor will be responsible for bringing in the supply cable or wiring to the
Contractor's panels at the locations indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall connect
the cable from the indicated location to the isolator or circuit breaker in the mechanical work
panels. The connections and installation thereof shall form a part of the contract.
(3) All items of a similar nature shall be products of one manufacturer.
(4) All equipments, wiring methods and the installation shall conform to the latest applicable
standards as specified in this specification.
2. Standard and Reference
(1) Electrical and control works shall comply with the following codes and standards.
 IEC 60034-1 : Rotating electrical machines - Part 1: Rating
and performance
 IEC 60034-12 : Rotating electrical machines - Part 12:
Starting performance of single-speed three-
phase cage induction motors
 IEC 60335-2-104 : Household and similar electrical appliances
– Safety - Part 2- 104: Particular requirements for
appliances to recover and/ or recycle refrigerant
from air conditioning and refrigeration equipment
 IEC 60364-1 Edition 4.0 : Electrical installations of buildings – Part
1 : Fundamental principles, assessment of
general characteristics, definitions
regulations of MEA or PEA and IEC.
an earlier issue.
codes.
3. Submittals
All part of the electrical and control works shall be guaranteed by the contractor at least 2 year after
handover.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Description
(1) All electrical equipment shall be suitable for operation at the indicated system voltages and
operating conditions.
(2) The works shall be executed to completion and in conformity with the Drawings and these
Specifications.
(3) An electrical contractor will be responsible for bringing in the supply cable or wiring to the
Contractor's panels at the locations indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall connect
the cable from the indicated location to the isolator or circuit breaker in the panels. The
connections and installation thereof shall form a part of the Contract.
2. Component
(1) Earthing or Grounding System
 The equipment grounding system shall be designed and installed such that all metallic, raised
floor structures, enclosures, raceway, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames,
portable equipment, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits
operate continuously at ground potential.
 The equipment grounding system shall provide a low impedance path for possible ground
fault currents. The system shall consist of a separate green insulated equipment grounding
conductor for each feeder and each branch circuit. The required grounding conductor shall be
installed in the common conduit with the related phase and/or neutral conductors. Each
electrical expansion fitting shall be provided with an external flexible copper ground strap
securely bonded on each end of the fitting.
 Unless otherwise specified, the grounding connectors shall be of a type specifically
manufactured for grounding purposes, made of copper alloy and assembled with high strength
silicon bronze hardware. Where grounding or bonding conductors connect to structural cables,
connections shall be made with mechanical devices; welded connections shall not be made
at these points. All mechanical connections shall be completely encapsulated in
nonhardening, conductive epoxy. The epoxy shall be applicable for wet locations or for
ambient temperatures of 10 °C - 55 °C.
 Jumper material shall be copper wire. Copper straps shall be softdrawn copper.
 Grounding of all chillers, pumps, and air handling units shall be done by means of separate
green insulated equipment grounding conductor for each feeder or each branch circuit.
(2) Motor Control Center
 General Requirement
This provision covers the design and construction of motor control center of floor or wall
mounting type. Applicable standards of NEMA, ANSI, IEC, TISI, JIS, VDE MEA and PEA shall be
complied.
 Ratings of Equipment in Motor Control Center

The ratings of the equipment shall be as follows:
o Rates voltage : 400V/230V
o System Wiring : 3-Phase, 4-Wire (Solid grounded neutral)
o Rated Frequency : 50 Hz
o Rated Current : As shown in drawing
o Rated Short Time Withstand Current : 50 KA rms.
o Rated Power Frequency Voltage : 2.5 KV rms. Withstand Test
(50 Hz x 1 min)
 The Construction of Motor Control Center
o Motor control center shall consist of one or more vertical sections bolted together to
form a totally enclosed rigid construction. The vertical section shall be made of sheet
steel (minimum thickness of 2 mm.). Each vertical section shall consist of three
compartments, viz. busbar, cable, terminal and control unit compartment, and each
compartment shall be separated by sheet steel barrier. The motor control center shall
be designed to permit easy addition and removal in the future.
o Each control unit compartment shall be the combination of starter, circuit breaker and
other accessories for each motor. The unit shall be completely enclosed and isolated
from all other units. Unit side plates shall be permanently attached. Each unit shall have
a single door mounted on removable pin hinges. Each door shall be provided with a
removable panel suitable for mounting push button, selector or switch and pilot lamp.
o Efficient ventilation opening shall be provided on the panel. The opening shall be
screened so as to be insect-proof.
o Each panel shall undergo a treatment of degreasing and derusting by electro-galvanized
or other equivalent method for antirust and shall be coated by an oven-baked enamel
paint finished.
o All doors shall be provided with dust-protection gaskets of neoprene or any other
approved material. All doors shall be equipped with locks operated by keys.
o Plastic nameplate with engraved letters of at least 3 mm. thick shall be placed at ever
circuit breaker and starter indicating their uses.
o Mimic bus diagram shall be applied for each motor control center.
o Ground bus shall be full length of the motor control center.
o Uniform height and depth shall be adopted for the cubicles.
o Circuit Breakers
o All circuit breakers shall comply with NEMA, or JIS or IEC or TISI standard and shall be
manually operated, trip-free
o Main circuit breaker shall be equipped with the following protection devices.
 Over current and short circuit protection.
 Phase sequence protection
 Over and under voltage protection.
 Time delay relay
o All circuit breakers shall be equipped with operating handle and pad-locked mechanism
o The rated current and rated breaking capacities shall be as shown on the drawings.
 Motor Starters
o Motor starters shall comply with NEMA, IEC or JIS standard.
o Each starter shall be of an air break type and provided with thermal trip unit (one on
each phase). In case of intervention of the above trip units, an auxiliary contact shall cut
the starter coil off and give an alarm signal.
o The thermal trip units shall be hand reset, and a suitable push/button shall be provided
on the door of each unit.
o At least 2 normally open and 2 normally closed free contacts for both starting and tripping
signals shall be provided. These free contacts shall be wired to the terminal blocks for
remote indicator.
o The starter contacts shall be able to interrupt a current equal to 10 times the rated
current of the motor.
o Automatic direct-on-line starters are allowable for various motor sizes up to 1.1 kW (1.5
HP) and closed circuit transition reduced voltage starter shall be used for those over 5.5
kW (7.5 HP).
 Measuring Instrument and Current Transformer
o All measuring instruments and current transformers shall comply with IEC or ANSI or JIS
standards.
o All metering shall be the flush-mounted type with a dimension approximately 96 x 96
mm. accuracy class 1.5. The overload capacity is 1.2 times of the normal continuous load,
except for motor circuit where the overload capacity of ammeter shall be 2 times the
normal continuous load. The voltmeters shall be provided with selector switch.
o Current transformers shall be the single phase insulated type and can withstand a
continuous overload of 20%. The accuracy class of the transformer shall be class 1 for
metering winding and class 3 for instrument winding. The insulation of the current
transformer shall be of class 600 volts.
 Busbar & Busbar Holder
o Busbar shall be of copper conductor (purity 98%) the size and ampacity of busbar shall
comply with DIN standard and also shall comply with PEA or MEA regulation.
o Busbar spacing shall comply with PEA or MEA regulation.
o Busbar holder shall be of fiberglass reinforced polyester or epoxy resin (flame-proof
material) and shall withstand the short-circuit stresses.
o Each busbar shall have a colour identification, conforming to the colour coding of the cable.
 Control Wiring
o Control wire in the motor control center shall be flexible annealed copper wire 750V PVC
insulated.
o The size of control wire shall be as follows:-
 4 mm2 for current circuit
 2.5 mm2 for voltage circuit
 1.5 mm2 for control circuit
 10 mm2 for ground wire for door
o All control wiring shall be run in cable trunk or flexible conduit and no splicing.
o Wire marker approved by the engineer shall be applied and both ends of the control
wiring.
o All wirings shall be terminated at the terminal blocks.
(3) Motors
 All motors shall conform to the latest ANSI or IEC standards or approved equivalent. They
shall have ample margin on their rating for the required duty with due allowance for ambient
temperature. All motor shall be induction type suitable for 50 Hz. Motors shall be of totally
enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage screen-protect drip-proof type. High starting torque motors
and low speed machines shall be started by reduced voltage starters.
 Motors 7.5 KW (10 HP) and larger shall be started by reduced voltagestarters unless otherwise
specified.
 Motors shall normally be supplied by the manufacturer of the equipmentdriven by the motors.
 Control devices shall be provided for all motors. Single or double pole snap switches, specifically
designed for alternating current operation only, may be used as manual controllers for single-phase
motors having a current rating not in excess of 80 percent of the switch rating. Automatic control
devices such as thermostats may control the starting and stopping of motors directly, provided the
devices used are designed for that purpose and have such a rating. Otherwise, magnetic starters
shall be used, with the automatic control device actuating the control circuit.
 Overload protection shall be provided with running-over current (Overload) protection in
accordance with the NEC. The overload protection device shall be provided either integrally
with the motor or controller, or shall be mounted in a separate enclosure. Unless otherwise
specified, the protective device shall be of the manually reset type.
 All motors shall be provided with a disconnection means. All 3-phase and single-phase motors
above 1 kW (1 ½ HP) shall be provided with a safety-type disconnecting switch. For single phase
motors below 1 kW (1 ½HP), a general use snap switch, rated for alternating-current only shall be
acceptable, provided the ampere rating or the switch is at least 125 percent of the full load current
rating of the associated motor. Switches shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors
(4) System Voltage and Colour Code, Low-Voltage Cables,Raceway,Outlet Boxes and Pull Boxes
as mention in section 5-3 : Electrical System.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
(1) Motor Control Centers
 All motor control centers and electrical system shall be installed in accordance with PEA or
MEA regulation, NEC standard and/or the manufacturer's recommendation.
 All metal parts and non-carrying current of motor control center shall be.
(1) Motor Control Centers
 All motor control centers shall be not only tested at the manufactory but also checked at the
site for the follow performances
o Insulation of all cables
o Operating and protecting of the equipment Grounding
END
5.4.9 : FIRE BARRIER FOR SANITARY SYSTEM

PART I: DESCRIPTION
After erection of materials and equipment through wall and opening had been completed, it is the
responsibility of The Contractor to fill up voids and openings with fire resistant materials which
conform to NEC article 300-21, BS476, AS1530 and ASTM to protect fire or smoke from spreading out
from one room to another room through these voids and openings.
The fire barrier and its components shall comply will the following codes and standards.
(1) NEC 300-21
(2) ASTM
(3) UL
(4) BS476
(5) AS1530
3. Submittals
The contractor shall submit material selector, catalog, material lists, technical data and method of
installation for approval before purchasing and installation.
All material and installation of the fire barrier work shall be guaranteed by the contractor at least two
(2) years after handover.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Description
(1) The applied to wall considered to be a fire or acoustical protection wall, unless otherwise
specified. Cover or escutcheon plates shall be provided, wherever exposed, and shall be neatly
placed to the satisfaction of the engineer.
(2) Also, after the erection of all conduits, wirings, and raceways in the shaft, block-out or any
floor openings, the voids must be sealed with 2-hour fire rating material, and approved by
the engineer unless otherwise specified.
2. Component
The fire barrier materials shall have properties as the following:
(1) The fire barrier materials shall be based on the standards of Underwriter’s Laboratory Inc.
(2) The fire barrier materials shall be of minimum 2-hour fire resistant rating.
(3) The fire barrier materials must not be toxic during installation or incase of fire.
(4) Easy to be dismantled and replaced in case of rearrangement.
(5) Withstand over vibration.
(6) Easy installation.
(7) Before and after fire spreads, the fire barrier materials must be strong enough.
(8) The fire barrier materials must be submitted to the engineer for approval before installation.
3. All fire barrier products shall be supplied by single brand.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Installation
At every voids and openings, fire barrier materials shall be installed where:
(1) Every voids, sleeves, and openings appear on wall, floor, beam and shaft, provided for raceway
or pipes or ducts installation, must be sealed after the erection work had been completed.
(3) Voids between electrical conduits or pipes or ducts and sleeves.

The testing method shall be provided from the manufacturer.
END
5.4.10 : PAINTING
PART I: DESCRIPTION
(1) Prior to equipment installation all metal surfaces shall be treated with anticorrosive
materials and/or painted according to this specification.
(2) The preparation and application of the painting materials shall adhere strictly to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
(3) The equipment or materials that have previously been treated with anticorrosive materials
and painted from the factory must be inspected for their workmanship. Any defects, such as
scratches, peels and rust shall be repaired and repainted to the approval of the engineer.
(4) During the progress of the paint work, the Contractor shall avoid spotting of the floors, walls
and other adjacent equipment. All spotting, if any, shall be cleaned immediately. Any damages,
which may result from painting shall be under the contractor's responsibility.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Painting
(1) Preparation and cleaning of surface to be painted
 Metal or ferrous metal surfaces
 Rust at welding joints and other defects shall be removed by scraping. Wire brushes or sand
papers shall be used to clean the surfaces and to remove rust. Sand-blasting may be used to
remove loose rust and other foreign substances. Mordant solution such thinner, gas, terpentine
shall be used to remove grease, oil or organic coating. Then the surface shall be cleaned with
water and thoroughly dried or blow-dried.
 The application of prime coats which follows shall adhere strictly to
the manufacturer's recommendations.
 Old paint coats shall be removed by scraping before application of new paint.
(2) Brush or spray painting
Each paint coat shall be left until completely dry before subsequent applications. Painting can
be classified into 2 coats:
 Prime coat for rust prevention and/or adhesion of the finishing coats.
 Finishing coat for final appearance or for symbolizing the system codes. Types of paint used
shall depend on the material as well as on the environment.
(3) Types of paint for various surface and environment
Normal Area or
Type of Surface Humid Area
Corrosive Area
Black steel pipe, black Epoxy red lead primer
steel hanger and support, 1st coat : Red lead primer st
1 coat : Epoxy red lead primer
black steel sheet, 2nd coat : Red lead primer 2nd coat :
switchboard, and panel. 3rd coat : Alkyd finishing paint. 3rd coat : Epoxy Finishing paint.
4th coat : Alkyd finishing paint. 4th coat :
Epoxy Finishing paint.
Galvanized steel pipe, 1st coat : Wash primer 1st coat : Wash primer
galvanized steel hanger 2nd coat : Zinc chromate primer 2nd coat : Zinc chromate primer
and support, and gal- 3rd coat 3rd coat : Epoxy finishing paint.
vanized steel sheet. 4th coat : Alkyd finishing paint. 4th coat : Epoxy finishing paint.
If colour coding is not : Alkyd finishing paint.

specified, bronze colour
shall be used for finishing
coat.
PVC pipe, plastic pipe. 1st coat : Wash primer 1st cost : Wash primer
2nd coat : Chlorinated rubber 2nd cost Chlorinated rubber
finishing-paint 3rd cost : finishing-paint
3rd coat : Chlorinated rubber Chlorinated rubber
finishing-paint : finishing-paint
Cast-iron pipe inclusive of 1st coat Coal tar epoxy 1st coat : Coal tar epoxy
underground pipe. ::
2nd coat Coal tar epoxy 2nd coat : Coal tar epoxy
Copper tube, stainless 1st coat : Wash primer 1st coat : Wash primer
steel pipe, stainless steel 2nd coat : Alkyd finishing paint. 2nd coat : Epoxy finishing paint.
sheet, aluminium steel 3rd coat : Alkyd finishing paint 3rd coat : Epoxy finishing paint.
pipe, aluminium steel
sheet, light allowy, lead,
and conduct clamp.
Note: In case where there is a paint repair resulting from welding, cutting, drilling, polishing, or threading,
zinc rich primer shall be used prior to the application of finishing paint.
(4) Colour Code

 All pipes shall be colour coded except insulated pipes where only priming coats shall be
applied to the pipe surface.
 In the electrical system, colour coding shall be only at the conduit clamps and the cover of
junction boxes.
 Strip sizes of colour codes (for insulated pipes) and the letter size are as follows :-
Pipe Size, mm. (inch) Width of Colour Strip, mm. (inch) Letter Size, mm. (inch)
20 (3/4) – 32 (1¼) 200 (8) 12 (1/2)
40 (1½) – 50 (2) 200 (8) 20 (3/4)
65 (2½) – 150 (6) 300 (12) 30 (1¼)
200 (8) – 250 (10) 300 (12) 65 (1½)
300 (12) and larger 500 (20) 100 (4)
 Location of symbols and arrows indicating directions are as follows :

o Every 6 metre (20 ft.) internal of straight line pipe.
o Near all valves.
o Every change of direction and/or separation. พ Where pipes passing through walls or floors.
o Near service pipe.
(5) Colour Codes of Various Systems
 The identifications previously mentioned shall have colour as follows :
Description Code Letters Colour Code Colour Symbol
Symbol
Cold Water Supply CWS Blue White
Cold Water Supply to Water Storage CWT Blue White
Soft Water SF Blue White
Drinking Water DW Green White
Rainwater RL Light Green White
Waste W Brown White
Soil S Black White
Vent V Yellow Black
Sink Waste SK Purple White
Conduit & Tray for Electrical for Sanitary
SAN Blue Blue
System
Drain pipe D White Black
Conduit & Tray for Electrical for Fire FP Orange Red
Pipe Support & Hanger - Dark Gray -
Distribution Board & Motor Control
- Ivory Black
Board Normal Electrical
Distribution Board & Motor Control
- Ivory Red
Board Emergency Electrical
 Final selection of colours will be made by the engineer. All uninsulated pipes painted all over
the pipe surface conforming to this colour codes.
END
5.4.11 : TEST AND STERILIZATIONS

PART I: DESCRIPTION
(1) All piping shall be tested by the Contractor and approved by the engineer before acceptance.
(2) All equipment, materials, labour, etc. required for testing the sanitary system or the part
thereof shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost
(3) All new, altered, extended or replaced plumbing shall be left uncovered and unconcealed
until it has been tested and approved.
(4) Where such work has been covered or concealed before it is tested and approved, it shall be
exposed for testing.
(5) Underground plumbing shall be tested and approved before back filling.
PART II: PRODUCTS

-
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Drainage and Venting System Piping
Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water or air before the fixture are installed.
After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, the entire drainage and
venting system shall be submitted for a final test.
(1) Water Test
Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirely or in
sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings except the highest one in the pipes shall
be tightly closed. Then the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the
system is tested in sections, each opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged,
and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least 3 m. head of water. In
testing successive sections, at least the upper 3.00 meters of the next preceding section shall
be tested so that each joint or pipe in the building except the uppermost 3.00 m. of the system
has been submitted to a test of at least a 3.00 m. head of water. The water shall be kept in
the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 15 minutes before the inspection starts.
The system shall then be tightened at all joints.
(2) Air Test
The air test shall be made by attaching an air compressor testing apparatus to any suitable
opening and, after closing all other inlets and outlets to the system, force air into the system
until there is a uniform gauge pressure of 0.35 kg/cm2 or sufficient to balance a column of
mercury 250 mm. in height. This pressure shall be held without introduction of additional air
for a period of at least fifteen (15) minutes.
2. Water System
(1) Piping
When the roughing-in is completed and before fixture are set, the entire cold-water piping
systems shall be tested at hydrostatic pressure of not less than 6.9 kg/cm2, and proved tight
at this pressure for not less than 30 minutes in order to permit inspection of all joints. Where
a portion of the water-piping system is to be concealed before completion, this portion shall
be tested separately as specified for the entire system.
3. Defective Work
If the inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired
as necessary. Then inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs of piping shall be made with new
materials. No caulking of screwed joints or holes will be acceptable.
4. Cleaning and Adjusting
Equipment, pipes, valves, fittings, and fixtures shall be clean without grease, metal cuttings, or sludge
that may have accumulated from operation of the system during the test. Any stoppage,
discolouration, or other damage to the finish, furnishings, or parts of the building, due to the
Contractor's failure of cleaning the piping system properly, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his
properly, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense. When the Works is completed,
Flush valves and automatic control devices shall be adjusted for proper operation.
5. Sterilization
(1) After pressure tests have been made, the entire domestic water-distribution system to be
sterilized shall be thoroughly flushed with water until all entrained dirt and mud have been
removed before introducing chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be either
liquid chlorine or hypochlorite. The chlorinating material shall provide a dosage of not less
than 50 ppm. and shall beintroduced into the system in an approved manner. The treated
water shall be retained in the pipe long enough to destroy all nonspore-forming bacteria.
Except where a shorter period is approved, the retention time shall be at least 24 hours and
shall produce not less than 10 ppm. of chlorine at the extreme and of the system of the
retention period. All valves in the system being sterilized shall be opened and closed several
times during the contact period.
(2) The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is reduced to
less than 0.2 ppm. During the flushing period all valves and faucets shall be turned on and off
several times.
6. Report
After installations are completed, all equipment shall be test run. Any adjustments that are needed
shall be made to assure that all equipment will operate with the required performance. Test run
reports with all necessary data such as pressure, temperature, flow rate, current, voltage, etc., shall
be recorded.
END
5.4.12 : APPROVED MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. General Requirements
1.1 The quality of all material shall comply with the standards specified in the details on the Drawings
and diagrams. They shall further be of an approved make and suitable for the Project.
1.2 Any alternatives due to standards normally applied by the manufacturer or resulting from special
schemes developed by the manufacturers will be considered on their merits. However, such
alternatives must meet the requirements of the Employer.
1.3 Quantities of each piece of materials shall be as specified on the Drawings except for the following
items:-
(1) The wiring, cabling and conduit of the mechanical installation are to be determined from the
Drawings and diagrams.
(2) All small items not specifically mentioned but necessary for a complete installation, are to be
estimated, based on good, acceptable practice and proper workmanship.
(3) Data regarding capacities are given in the tabulation table on the Drawings and/or
specified in these Specifications.
1.4 In the event the Contractor proposes to use materials/equipment other than of those listed
in the “approved manufacturers” stipulated in this Specification, the Contractor shall
ascertain that such propose material/equipment shall be of the same or equivalent
quality. The Contractor shall furnish and submit details of such propose material/equipment
for Employer’s Representative approval prior to its use.
1.5 All equipment, whether on this list or offered as an alternative, must be supported by
adequate, locally available supplies of spare parts.
(1) Black Steel Pipe and Galvanized Steel Pipe
 Thai Union Steel Pipe
 Saha Thai Steel Pipe
 Samchai Steel
 Pacific Pipe
 KLM Steel Pipe
 SPS Steel Pipe
 Or Equivalent
(2) Cast Iron Pipe
 Knack
 Wenco
 TCP
 Or Equivalent
(3) High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE)
 TAP
 CAPC
 Wiik & Houglund
 TGG
 PBP
 Or Equivalent
(4) Gate Valve, Globe Valve, Ball Valve

 Nibco
 Kitz
 Crane
 Watts
 Toyo
 Hattersley
 Or Equivalent
(5) Check Valve (Non Slam)
 Bermad
 Singer
 OCV
 Watts
 Clayton
 Or Equivalent
(6) Check Valve (Silent Type)
 Metraflex
 Duo-check
 Val-Matic
 Hattersley
 Or Equivalent
(7) Water Strainer
 Metraflex
 Toyo
 Kitz
 Crane
 Nibco
 Hattersley
 Watts
 Or Equivalent
(8) Butterfly Valve
 Keystone
 Nibco
 Kitz
 Crane
 Amri
 Hattersley
 Watts
 Or Equivalent
(9) Pressure Reducing Valve
 Bermad
 Singer
 OCV
 Watts
 Cla-Val
 Or Equivalent
(10) Float Valve
 Bermad
 Singer
 OCV
 Watts
 Cla-Val
 Or Equivalent
(11) Pressure Relief Valve
 Bermad
 Singer
 OCV
 Watts
 Cla-Val
 Or Equivalent
(12) Flexible Pipe Connection
 Metraflex
 Tozen
 Mason
 Or Equivalent
(13) Foot Valve
 Socla
 Val-Matic
 Kitz
 Watts
 Or Equivalent
(14) Pressure Gauge
 Trerice
 Weksler
 Weiss
 Wika
 Winters
 Or Equivalent
(15) Water Meter
 Asahi
 Kent
 Schlumberger
 Thai Aichi
 Or Equivalent
(16) Floor Drain, Roof Drain, Floor Clean Out, Clean Out
 Knack
 Wenco
 TCP
 Or Equivalent
(17) Water Hammer Arrestor
 Hydra-Restor
 Zurn
 PPP
 Watts
 Or Equivalent
(18) Automatic Air Vent
 Metraflex
 Maid O Mist
 Val-Matic
 ITT Hoffman
 Crispin
 Or Equivalent
(19) Water Supply Pump
 Grundfos
 Wilo
 ITT
 SPP
 Aurora
 Or Equivalent
(20) Package Booster Pump
 Grundfos
 Wilo
 ITT
 SPP
 Aurora
 Or Equivalent
(21) Vibration Isolator
 Mason
 Tozen
 Metraflex
 Kinetics
 Vibration Mount & Control
 Or Equivalent
(22) Submersible Sewage Pump
 Tsurumi
 Ebara
 Grundfos
 Wilo
 Kawamoto
 SPP
 Or Equivalent
(23) Strom Drain Pump
 Tsurumi
 Ebara
 Grundfos
 Wilo
 Kawamoto
 SPP
 Or Equivalent
(24) Switch Gear
 Square-D
 GE
 Westinghouse
 Siemens
 ABB
 Merlin Gerlin
 Or Equivalent
(25) Starter
 Square-D
 GE
 Westinghouse
 Siemens
 ABB
 Telemechanique
 Or Equivalent
(26) LV Switch Board
 ABB
 PMK
 Siam Industry
 SCI
 E.S. International
 Or Equivalent
(27) Electrical Wire
 Thai Yazaki
 Phelps Dodge
 BKK Cable
 MCI
 CTW
 Or Equivalent
(28) Electrical Conduit
 Matsushita
 TSP
 TAS
 ABSO
 Maruichi
 Or Equivalent
(29) Circuit Breaker
 Merlin gerin
 Square D wastinghouse
 Sace
 ABB
 GE
 Seimens
 Or Equivalent
(30) Flow Switch
 Mcdonell
 Penn
 Honey Well
 Johnson Control
 Invensys
 Potter
 Or Equivalent
(31) Fire Barrier System

 3M
 Wilhams
 Bitec
 Bio fireshield
 STI
 Or Equivalent
(32) Package Waste Water Treatment Plant, Grease Trap Tank
 PP
 Aqua
 Biotech
 Entech
 Or Equivalent
(33) Paint
 Jotun
 TOA
 TOA Chugoku
 ICI
 Pamastic
 Shewin William
 Or Equivalent
PART II: PRODUCT

(This Part is not used)
PART III: EXECUTION

END
5.5 MECHANICAL VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

5.5.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATION
PART I DESCRIPTION
1. Introduction
1.1 This general specification and requirement describe the materials and installation of the Mechanical
Ventilating and Air Conditioning System for building services works and related work for the project.
1.2 The work shall be executed to completion and in conformity with the drawings and this specification
2. Environment
2.1 The material and equipment shall be installed as shown on the drawings and shall be suitable for
tropical climate as mentioned below.
2.2 Weather conditions for material and general equipment selection:
(1) Altitude : Approximately mean sea level
(2) Maximum temperature 40C (104F)
(3) Average temperature (all year) 30C (86F)
(4) Maximum relative humidity 85%
(5) Average relative humidity (all year) 60%

3.1 The entire system and its basic components shall conform in all respects to the standard and
regulations of ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air conditioning Engineers). The
following standards are mentioned in this specification for systems and/or components and, where
described, the systems and/or components shall conform to such standards.
(1) AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association
(2) ANSI - American National Standard Institute
(3) AHRI - Air-conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute
(4) ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(5) ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials
(6) BS - British Standard
(7) FM - Factory Mutual
(8) IEC - International Electro-Technical Commission
(9) MEA - Metropolitan Electricity Authority
(10) NEC - National Electrical Code
(11) NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(12) NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
(13) PEA - Provincial Electricity Authority
(14) SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air-conditioning Contractors National
Association Inc.
(15) UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
(16) Any regulations issued by local authorities.
3.2 In the case of conflict or uncertainly in the application of the above standards and codes, the most
stringent regulation shall govern.
3.3 All regulations and standards shall be of the latest issue unless governing authorities require an earlier
one.
4. Scope of Work
4.1 The Mechanical Ventilating and Air Conditioning System (MVAC) work includes the furnishing of
materials, labor, equipment, tools, transportation and services required to construct, install and test
the complete the MVAC system as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein.
4.2 It shall be the Contractors responsibility to provide a completely safe and workable system in
accordance with the requirements of this specification, and the accompanying drawings and schedules
all to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.3 The Contractor shall coordinate with the building contractor or other trades to ensure that the system
and its components furnished form a complete air conditioning and ventilating system with the
established construction schedule.
4.4 The entire system and its basic components shall conform to the standards and regulation of ASHRAE.
All standards, codes and regulations shall be the latest issue unless governing authorities require an
earlier one.
5. Dimensions
5.1 Figured dimensions as indicated on the drawings are to be followed and in no case shall dimensions
be scaled from the drawings. Wherever possible, dimensions are to be measured from the building.
5.2 Before the Contractor commence any works, he shall ensure that dimensions are checked on the site
and/or building and agree with those on the drawings.
5.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of such dimensions regardless of the comparable
dimensions of the drawings.
6. Operation
6.1 Where the Contractor propose to use material and/or equipment which is not specified or detailed on
the drawings, the matter shall be brought immediately to the attention of the Engineer who will make
a decision.
6.2 The locations of air outlets, air duct route and piping route shown on the drawings are diagrammatic,
and shall be considered as approximate only. The approved locations may be different from those
shown on the drawings, if so directed by the Engineer.
PARTII PRODUCT
1.1 All equipment, materials and parts used shall be new and unused, of current manufacture, of the
highest quality and free from defects or imperfections affecting the performance or life of the item
1.2 Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the drawings or in the specification, all materials and
equipment shall be installed, with the approval of the Engineer, in accordance with recommendations
of the manufacturer. However, the approval of the owner shall not release the Contractor from his
responsibility or his liability regarding the properties and workmanship of installations.
1.3 The Contractor shall protect all equipment, material and parts during storage and during construction
against the ingress of moisture, contamination or corrosion that might damage the equipment and
material.
1.4 Certain major equipment defined in the Specifications will be furnished to the Contractor, on site. The
Contractor shall assemble, align, level and fix this equipment as instructed by the manufacturer and
to the Engineer's satisfaction. In this case herein specified (if any).
1.5 After the materials and equipment have been installed completely in accordance with the instructions,
the responsibility for protecting of materials and equipment from damages shall rest with the
Contractor's own expense.
2.1 Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the
Drawings, requiring any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other part of
the mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, all such redesign, including drawings and detailing required
shall be prepared by the Contractor at his own expense and then approved by the Engineer.
2.2 Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of pipe, duct, cable,
conduit, and equipment from the specified or indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall furnish
and install any such pipe, duct, cable, conduit, structural supports, insulation, and any other additional
equipment required by the system with additional cost, which approved by the Engineer.
2.3 In reference to inspection, all works rejected by the Engineer shall be repaired, corrected or replaced
at the Contractor's expense to attain good workmanship, and conform to the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. Therefore, ample time shall be provided for inspection and, if there is any defective
work re-inspection of the Engineer shall be performed. In the event that the Contractor should fail to
carry out necessary changes, then the Engineer shall have the right to make its own arrangement at
the Contractor's expense.
3.1 Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide any pay for all tools and other facilities
necessary for the execution and completion of the works.
3.2 If at any time prior to commencement or during the progress of works, tools, equipment and materials, in
the opinion of the Engineer, appear to be insufficient, of inappropriate to secure the required quality of
works or proper rate of progress, the Engineer may order the Contractor to increase their efficiency, improve
their character, augment their number or replace with new tools, equipment and materials as required.
4.1 All parts of the installation, which are of interest for its operation and maintenance, shall be provided
5.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer complete information regarding details of materials and
equipment involved, prior to any purchase or manufacturing operation. Any purchase or manufacturing
operations carried out prior to obtaining such approval shall be at the Contractor’s sole responsibility.
5.2 Information of equipment shall be separately submitted by listing all the details and with attached
catalogue indicating at least the model, series, size and performance. Such data shall be sufficient
detail to enable the Engineer to identify that particular product and to form an opinion to its
conformity to the Specification.
5.3 The Contractor shall stamp the name of his company and sign all documents to be submitted for
approval.
6.1 Only new materials and equipment shall be incorporated in the Works. All materials and equipment
furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to inspections and approval of the Engineer. The materials
and equipment used for the Works shall correspond to the approved makes or other data. Any
materials which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have lower quality than the approved makes shall
promptly be removed from the job site.
6.2 Whenever requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall send materials to be tested by an
independent institute or third party laboratory selected by the Engineer.
6.3 If these should be an unavoidable necessity to use materials and equipment that deviate from the
specification or from approved samples, then the Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer in
writing and submit the substitute items of equal quality for approval.
7.1 The Contractor shall examine all drawings and specifications to make sure that all requirements are
thoroughly understood. In cases where, in his opinion, there are omissions and/or errors in any of these
documents, he shall inform the Engineer immediately.
7.2 The Contractor shall examine all relevant architectural and structural drawings, together with all other
utilities systems involved in the Project, prior to installation of machines, materials and equipment.
8. Shop Drawings
8.1 As soon as the Contract is awarded, the Contractor shall prepare shop-drawings comprising complete
details of items to be fabricated and works to be installed. These shop-drawings shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval not later than 30 days before installation.
8.2 The Drawings shall be checked by the Contractor for accuracy with regard to dimensions taken in the
building(s) and shall closely follow manufacturer's recommendations. All submitted drawings shall be
signed by the Contractor, and shall indicate the date of submission and the date(s) of revision(s).
8.3 In case shop-drawings require modifications for whichever reason, the Contractor has to clearly identify
the portion that was modified, and has to indicate the running number of revision every time that a
revision-drawing is submitted.
8.4 The installation detailed shall be checked with the building works, the structure and other related
trades to prevent conflicts that may cause delay of the project.
8.5 Size and scale of the shop-drawings shall be at least 1:100 scale except for enlarged scale details done
for clarity, which shall be in conformity with international standards or as directed by the Engineer.
8.6 Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall prepare additional drawings, diagrams, etc., which
in the opinion of the Engineer are considered necessary for a proper execution of the Works.
8.7 The Contractor shall not proceed his work for a certain part or section, prior to the approval of the
shop-drawings therefore. Expense incurred because of modification that have to be made as a result
of lack of approved shop-drawings shall be borne by the Contractor.
8.8 Approval of the shop-drawings by the Engineer shall not be construed as a complete check but will
indicate only the general method of installation and its details are satisfactory.
8.9 The approval of the Engineer never releases the Contractor from his responsibility or his liability
8.10 Shop-drawings submitted without sufficient detailed shall be rejected and new submission shall be
required.
8.11 The Contractor shall submit print copies of all shop-drawings for approval. If approved by the Engineer,
one copy shall bear the Engineer's stamp indicating the date of approval, and shall be returned to the
Contractor. After approval, 4 copies of blueprint are required and additional copies may be requested
by the Engineer as necessary.
9.1 The Contractor shall submit in advance a transportation schedule of materials to the Engineer and
coordinate with the building contractor in preparing passage ways and storage facilities.
9.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for all expense incurred during shipping and transporting of
material and equipment to the job site. The materials and equipment shall be handled in a manner
to prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting and any injury, theft of damage or any
kind what so ever.
9.3 The shipping documents of particular materials and equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer as
soon as the materials and equipment have arrived at the Site.
10.1 The Contractor shall prepare storage areas of sufficient size for all necessary materials and equipment
brought to the job site. The storage areas shall be provided with access for inspection and removal of
the stored materials and equipment.
10.2 Materials and equipment delivered to the Site without suitable storage shall not be accepted.
PART III EXECUTION
1.1 The Contractor shall connect electrical wires, telephone wires and water pipe for his own use at suitable
connection points and shall bear the expense of usage, which shall be removed upon completion of
sections of the Works.
2. Responsibility
2.1 The Contractor shall establish, maintain, and supervise all precautions and programs for safety and
provide protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to :
(1) All workmen on the worksite and other persons who may be affected thereby.
(2) All works and all materials or equipment to be incorporated herein, whether in storage on or off
the site.
2.2 As the work proceeds, the Contractor shall progressively remove rubbish and surplus materials away
from the construction site or to a space indicated by the building contractor and shall maintain his
working area in a clean and tidy condition as far as is practicable.
2.3 Upon completion of the Works he shall, without delay, remove all his temporary works and buildings,
all tools, equipment and surplus materials, and shall clean the whole area affected by his work and
leave it ready for immediately occupation.
2.4 All materials, equipment and finished works shall be kept in good condition. The completed work shall
be the Contractor's property until handed over to the Engineer.
3. Field Testing
3.1 Test all equipment upon completion of installation to ensure that the equipment operates
satisfactorily and to conform to Contract Documents.
3.2 Field testing shall be required for all MVAC system equipment furnished, installed or connected by the
Contractor to assure proper installation, setting, connection, and functioning in accordance with the
plans, specifications and manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3 Testing shall be conducted in the presence of the owner representative and, when necessary, under
the supervision of equipment manufacturer's field engineer.
3.4 All tests recommended by the equipment manufacturer whether specified in this specification or not,
shall be included, unless specifically waived by the Engineer.
3.5 Testing shall include any additional tests issued by the owner representative conditions to determine
that equipment, material and system meet requirements of the specifications.
3.6 The Contractor shall maintain in triplicate, a written record of all tests showing date, personnel making
test, equipment or material tested, tests performed and results. Three copies of test records shall be
given to the owner representative within the following day.
3.7 The Contractor shall notify the owner representative two weeks prior to commencement of any testing,
except for metering.
3.8 Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to equipment or material due to improper test
equipment or material.
3.9 Safety devices such as rubber gloves and blankets, protective screens and barriers, danger signs, etc.
3.10 The Contractor shall furnish all testing equipment and furnish temporary power source of proper type
for testing purposes when normal supply is not available at the time of testing.
4.1 The as-built drawings shall record all changes arising during the installation and detail all relevant data
concerning makes, types, numbers, capacities, sized and quantities, etc.
4.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer 3 sets of prints and 1 set of reproducible drawings.
5.1 The manual shall be prepared in hard cover building in sets to be submitted to the Engineer on
acceptance of the completed work.
(1) Section 1 Comprises submittal data of all equipment and materials that have
been approved.
(2) Section 2 Comprises catalogues, categorized in groups, complete with
installation operations and the maintenance manuals from the
manufacturers.
(3) Section 3 Comprises filled out test reports in the field.

(4) Section 4 Comprises spare parts list and recommended spare parts.
(5) Section 5 Comprises maintenance and services schedule, and service and
maintenance procedures for individual equipment listed daily, weekly,
monthly, quarterly and yearly.
(6) Section 6 Comprises system operation manual
5.2 A draft copy of the manual shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval first.
6.1 The Contractor shall commission, clean down, and leave in full working order the works as specified.
6.2 As the installation proceeds the Contractor shall prepare record drawings of the MVAC installation, as
built drawing. It will be sufficient to modify these contract drawings showing any amendments to the
service which have taken place and submit the marked-up prints to the owner representative for
approval.
6.3 The Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer on completion of the works, manufacturer's literature,
specifications, technical information and record drawings for all equipment installed.
END
5.5.1 AIR COOLED SPLIT TYPE AIR CONDITIONER

PART I DESCRIPTION
1.1 The Contractor shall furnish and install split type air conditioner as shown on the Drawings and/or
specified herein.
1.2 The split type air conditioner shall be specially designed for 50 Hz. Electrical systems and the cooling
capacity shall not be less than that indicated on the Drawings.
2.1 The split type air conditioner shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(1) ANSI/ASHRAE 128 : Method of Rating Portable Air Conditioners
(ANSI Approved)
(2) ANSI/AHRI 210/240 : Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning &
Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment
(3) AMCA 301 : Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings for from
Laboratory Test Data
(4) TIS 2134 : Room Air Conditioners : Energy Efficiency
(5) TIS 2564 : Room Air Conditioner : Installation
(6) EIT 3008 : Standard for Air-Conditioning and Ventilating System
2.2 In the case of conflict or uncertainty in the application of the above standards and codes, the most
issue.
2.4 The standards and codes as mention in 1.2.1 can be equivalent by another standards and codes, if it
equal or better than standards and codes mention in 1.2.1 when comply between two codes.
3. Submittal
3.1 The Contractor shall submit split type air conditioner’s performance selection, matching curve,
material lists and technical data and all necessary information for approval before purchasing.
4.1 All part of the split type air conditioner shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer and/or by the
contractor for at least two year after handover.
4.2 All compressors shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer for at least 3 year.
4.3 The equipment manufacturer plant shall be ISO 9000 certified
PART II PRODUCT
1. Description
1.1 The unit shall be assembled and matching parts from factory as standard model. The unit consisting
of outdoor Condensing Unit and indoor Air handler are connected with refrigerant pipe and electrical
wires, part of each section will be described below:
1.2 Evaporator unit, condensing unit, refrigerant pipe, filter drier, sight glass, shall be installed in the position
indicated on the drawings or advised by the manufacturer.
1.3 The air conditioning equipment shall be air cooled, split system suitable for HFC-407c, HFC-410a or
any zero ODP refrigerant, factory tested, evacuated dehydrated and pressurized with refrigerant
holding charge for field installation. The unit shall be in accordance with the following Specifications
as stated below.
2. Component
2.1 Condensing Unit
(1) The condensing unit shall be air cooled, weatherproof type for outdoor installation.
(2) Casing shall be made of steel sheet, bonded and finished with baked enamel. The casing may
be made of aluminum or fiberglass with equivalent strength.
(3) Compressor shall be hermetic type. All compressors shall be mounted on vibration isolators.
They shall be equipped with internal overload (overheated) protectors,
(4) Electricity characteristic shall be 230V/ 1Ph/ 50Hz or 400V/ 3Ph/ 50Hz as indicated on the
Drawings.
(5) Condenser coil shall be seamless copper tubes with mechanically expanded into aluminum fins,
leak tested and pressure tested at 3,100 kPa (450 psig).
(6) Condenser fan shall be direct drive protected by heavy gauge rust resisting wire guard.
(7) Fan motor shall be permanent-split-capacitor, inherently protected and permanently lubricated
bearings.
(8) There shall be low and high sides access valves for pressure measuring.
(9) Control shall be factory wired and located in a separate enclosure. They shall consist of the
following safety devices.
(a) Control and fan motor fuses size not be over 6 amperes.
(b) High-low pressure switch, except compressor with a capacity less than 12 kW. (42,000 BTUH)
(c) Magnetic starter.
(d) Timer or time delay (3-6 minutes delay time) especially designed for air conditioner except
compressor with a capacity less than 12 kW. (42,000 BTUH)
(10) Standard accessories for condensing unit shall include the following :
(a) Thermal overload
(b) Compressor contact relay
(c) High and low pressure switch
(d) Refrigerant dryer
(e) Liquid indicator
(f) Suction and liquid lines shut-off valves
(g) Refrigerant charging port

(h) Safety switch
2.2 Evaporator Unit (Air Handling Unit / Fan Coil Unit)
(1) Casing shall be made of steel sheet, bonded and finished with baked enamel insulated with 1/2"
(12 mm) thick, 40 kg/cu.m. (2.5 lb/cu.ft.) density mat-faced fiber glass. The casing may be made
of aluminum or fiberglass with equivalent strength.
(2) Evaporator coil shall be seamless copper tube with mechanically expanded into aluminum fins.
Coils shall be leak tested and pressure tested at 2,069 kPa. (300 psig.)
(3) Blower or fan shall be centrifugal type.
(4) Motor shall be permanently lubricated bearings mounted on vibration isolators.
(5) Electricity characteristic shall be 230V/ 1Ph/ 50Hz or 400V/ 3Ph/ 50Hz as indicated on the
Drawings.
(6) Air filter shall be synthetic washable type.
2.3 Cooling Capacity
(1) The cooling capacity and system design condition shall be indicated on the equipment schedule
herein or shown on the Drawings.
(2) If the system design condition not shown, the cooling capacity shall be matching capacity of
condensing unit and air handling unit, based on the following conditions:
(a) Air on condenser - dry bulb temperature 35 C (95 F)
(b) Air on evaporator - dry bulb temperature 26.7 C (80 F)
- wet bulb temperature 19.4 C (67 F)
(c) Maximum face velocity of air through evaporator 2.54 m/s (500 ft/min)
(d) Maximum compressor discharge pressure corresponding to 51.7 C (125 F) condensing
temperature.
(e) Saturated suction temperature 3 C - 9 C (38 F - 47 F)
2.4 Refrigerant Pipe
(1) Refrigerant pipes shall be copper tube hard drawn type L, suction lines shall be insulated with
closed cell elastomeric foam of not less than 20 mm (3/4 inch) thick, and wrapped with aluminum
pipe jacket for exposed pipe only.
(2) Suction and liquid lines shall be separated and fixed with clamps at every 2.5 m.
(8 ft.) interval.
(3) Pipe insulation at the fixed points shall be covered with galvanized steel of not less than 100
mm. (4 inches) long.
PARTIII EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 The split type air conditioner shall be mounted on vibration isolators and installed in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendation such that no disturbing vibration or noise is being transmitted to
the nearby structure.
1.2 Refrigerant pipes that exposed to outdoor shall be cover with aluminium pipe jacket for protected
insulation from direct UV exposure.
2.1 After installations are completed, all air handlers shall undergo test run. Any adjustments that are
needed shall be made to assure that all air handlers will operate either the required performance.
Report forms to contain following minimum data listings shall include design and actual conditions for
each Item mentioned below:
(1) Date and time of test.

(2) Air handling unit and fan coil unit make, type, name and serial number.
(3) Fan rpm.
(4) Pressure drop across filter
(5) Fan discharge static pressure
(6) Fan motor amperage
(7) Rated motor amperage, starter number and ampere rating.
(8) Re-circulated air CFM
(9) Outside air CFM
(10) Outside conditions (DB and WB)
(11) Return air conditions (DB and WB)
(12) Entering coil conditions (mixing) (DB and WB)
(13) Leaving coil conditions (DB and WB)
2.2 During test run, the air filters of testing sets shall be used.
END
5.5.2 FAN AND BLOWER

PART I DESCRIPTION
1.1 The contractor shall furnish and install the fans including all necessary accessories as shown on the
Drawings and/or specified herein.
1.2 Each fan capacity shall not be less than that shown on the Drawings.
1.3 Requirements of fans in this section shall be applied to those which are not integral parts of air-
handling units and similar equipment designed as complete units by the manufacturer. Fans shall be
guaranteed to deliver the specified air quantities at the specified pressures. In addition, they shall be
quiet in operation and be free from objectionable vibration. Each fan shall be suitable in size for the
space available and be installed without damage to either the building or the fan.
1.4 The rotation of the fan shall be checked on start up and if there is no rotation arrow supplied by the
manufacturer, the Contractor shall provide correct rotation arrow.
1.5 V-belt drives shall be dimensioned for long belt life according to the manufacturer's recommendations
regarding belt tension, minimum pulley diameter and belt speed. For belt selection purpose, the actual
motor horse power rating shall be multiplied by 1.3. A minimum of 2 belts shall always be provided.
These belts shall be of the oil-resistant type. Belt drives shall have adequate means for adjustment of
belt tension. Belt drives outside casings shall be protected with easily detachable belt guards.
2.1 The fan and blower shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(1) ANSI/ASHRAE 51 : Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for
Aerodynamic Performance Rating (AMCA Standard
210-99) (ANSI approved)
(2) ANSI/ASHRAE 87.1 : Method of Testing Fan Vibration -- Blade Vibrations
and Critical Speeds (ANSI approved AMCA)
(3) ASHRAE 68 : Laboratory Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power
Measurement Procedure for Fans.
(4) ANSI/AFBMA 9 : Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
(5) AMCA 300 : Reverberant Method for Sound Testing of Fans.
(6) AMCA 301 : Method for Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving
Devices.
(7) AMCA STD 211 and 311 : Certified Ratings Program - Product Rating Manual
for Fan Sound Performance
(8) SMACNA : HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
(9) NFPA 90A : Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
(10) UL 793/705 : Power Ventilators for Smoke
(11) UL 762 : Power Roof Ventilators for Restaurant Exhaust
Applications, (UL 762);
(12) IEC 60034-1 : Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 1: Rating and
performance
(13) BS 7346-5 : Components for smoke and heat control systems.
Functional recommendations and calculation
methods for smoke and heat exhaust ventilation
systems, employing time-dependent design fires.
Code of practice
(14) AHRI-1060 : Performance Rating of Air to Air Exchangers for
Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment
issue.
3. Submittals
3.1 The contraction shall submit fan and blower’s performances selection, material list and technical data
request for approval.
3.2 Dimension plan and elevation view drawing or the unit, required cleanses, and location or all field
ducting and electrical connections.
4.1 All part of the Fan and Blower shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer and/or by the contractor for
at least two (2) year.
4.2 The equipment manufacturer plant shall be ISO 9000 certified
PART II PRODUCT
1. Description
1.1 Fan and all parts thereof shall be capable of satisfactorily withstanding the effect of all stress and
loads under starting, operating and where applicable reversing conditions.
1.2 Belt driven fan shall be selected, where as possible, fan shall be driven by motor with revolution less
than 1,500 rpm.
1.3 Unless specified, maximum noise level for all fans shall be less than 65 dB (A) measured at three times
of fan diameter from the fan outlet.
1.4 Fan and Blower’s performance curve shall have certified rating by AMCA or DIN standard
2. Component
2.1 Centrifugal Fan
(1) Large fan housings shall be made in sections small enough to permit installation or removal through
openings available in the building. Field joints shall be flanged and bolted. The fan scroll shall be
attached to the side plates by means of continuous lock seam or welded seam construction.
Intermittent spot welded type construction will not be acceptable. Thickness of steel plate for
housings shall not be less than those indicated in the following table.
Wheel Diameter (mm.) Housing Thickness (mm.)
Side Scrolls
Not over 500 1.9 1.9
Between 500 and 1,000 2.0 1.9
Between 1,000 and 2,000 2.0 2.0
(2) Wheels shall be accurately assembled from die-formed parts and shall operate at all speeds, up
to 1 1/4 times the maximum speed specified without noticeable static or dynamic unbalance,
eccentricity or wobble. They shall be rigidly braced to resist torsional stresses due to air pressure
and rapid acceleration.
(3) Shafts shall be steel, heavy enough so that the critical speed of wheels and shafts will be not
less than twice the maximum speed. Shafts and wheels shall be tightly fitted and securely keyed.
(4) Bearings shall be self-aligning of the ball on roller type. Inner races of ball and roller bearing shall
be secured to the shafts by press fittings, split taper sleeves, eccentric locking rings or set screws.
Taper sleeve mounts shall be carefully adjusted so that bearings can neither slip on shafts nor
be preloaded. Eccentric locking rings shall be securely tightened and retained by setscrews. The
bearings held only by setscrews shall have two in each race and the screws shall have points
designed to provide in locking action on the shaft.
(5) Where taper sleeves, eccentric locking ring or set screw-held bearings are furnished, the actual shaft
diameters at the bearing shall not be different from the nominal bearing bores by more than the
amounts indicated in the following table of tolerances :-
Shaft Diameter (mm.) Tolerances(mm.)

Plus Minus
Not over 25 0 0.013
25 to 65 0 0.025
75 to 100 0 0.038
125 and over 0 0.051
(6) Load ratings of ball and roller bearings shall be based on an average bearing life of not less than
200,000 hours, allowance being made for dead load of wheel, shaft and maximum pull of belts.
Bearings requiring grease lubrication shall be equipped with readily accessible filling connections.
(7) Fan handling air that is abnormally hot or corrosive shall have both bearings opposite the inlet
and overhung wheels and sheaves.
(8) Unless otherwise specified, double- and single-inlet fans having wheels larger than 900 mm. in
diameter shall have two bearings, one on each side of the wheel, with overhung sheaves. Single-
inlet fans with wheels not over 900 mm. diameter may have bearings arranged as specified for
larger fans, or bearings may both be located on the side opposite the inlet with both wheels and
sheaves overhung. Small wheels may be mounted on extended motor shafts wherever fan speeds
permit.
2.2 Axial Flow Fan

(1) The fan shall be belt-driven or direct driven, axial-flow fan with adjustable airfoil blade. The
impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced before coupling and shall be fixed on a
shaft. Fan shaft shall be of high carbon steel. The motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled
three-phase induction.
(2) The fan casing shall be made of structural steel and designed to reduce resistance loss at each
section. For high static pressure application, guide-vanes shall be welded inside the casing in order
to obtain better fan efficiency. The motor terminal shall be connected by a steel pipe to a
terminal box outside the casing, which keeps the lead wire completely isolated from draft.
(3) Consideration shall be given to noise-protection when using axial flow fans in public areas.
2.3 Wall Mounted Propeller Fan
(1) Unless otherwise specified, propeller fans may be either direct-connected, motor driven type or
belt-connected. They shall be quiet in operation and be statically and dynamically balanced.
Wheels shall be steel, aluminum or plastic with heavy hubs.
(2) The gravity shutters shall be provided, opened in operation and closed in stopping. The blades
of gravity shutter are weather-proof materials.
(3) The fan casing shall be made of steel, aluminum or plastic structure. The rubber sheet shall be
inserted between fan casing and wall, for vibration isolator.
(4) The contractor shall be block-out the wall during building construction period to comply with
fan's casing dimension.
2.4 Ceiling Type Fan
(1) The fan shall be specifically designed for mounting at ceiling only and shall be easily taken-off
for maintenance without dismantling of the connected exhaust duct.
(2) Each fan shall consist of centrifugal fan, discharge gravity damper, tightly-sealed motor and baked
enamel casing.
2.5 Pressurized Air Fan
(1) Pressurized air fan shall be centrifugal fan or axial air fan as specified on the Drawings or
specified herein. (2) The motor driven for pressurized air fan shall be direct driven.
(3) The power supply for motor shall be for essential load, and cable shall be fire resistant (FR) type.
(4) Motor insulation shall be class F, protection IP55
2.6 Smoke Extract Fan
(1) Smoke extract fan shall be centrifugal fan, up-blast roof fan or axial air fan as specified on the
Drawings or specified herein.
(2) The motor driven for smoke extract fan shall be direct driven. Belt driven shall not acceptable.
(3) The power supply for motor shall be for essential load, and cable shall be fire
resistant (FR) type.
(4) Motor insulation shall be class H, protection IP55, conforming BS 7346 Class D, which can be
operated at temperature 250 C for 1 hour.
(5) All parts of smoke extract fan including motor, fan driven, control and power supply shall be
heat resistant conforming to BS 7346 Class D, which can be operated at temperature 250 C for 1
hour.
2.7 Energy Recovery Module (ERM)
(1) General requirements
(a) Energy Recovery Module shall be provided as the basis of design. Energy transfer ratings shall
be AHRI Certified. Performance shall be as scheduled on plans.
(b) Energy Recovery Modules shall include a cabinet having four 25mm (1-inch) duct flanges for
connection of supply and exhaust ducts.
(c) The cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and be internally insulated
to prevent condensation of water vapor on external or internal surfaces.
(d) A wiring box shall be provided for permanent connection of a power source.
(2) Energy recovery wheel
(a) Wheel shall be of the enthalpy type for both sensible and latent heat recovery and be
designed to insure laminar flow. Energy transfer ratings must be AHRI Certified to Standard
1060 and bear the AHRI 1060 certification symbol for Air- to- Air Energy Recovery Ventilation
Equipment Certification Program based on AHRI 1060. Ratings " in accordance with 1060"
without certification are not acceptable.
(b) Desiccant shall be silica gel for maximum latent energy transfer.
(c) Wheel shall be constructed of lightweight polymer media to minimize shaft and bearing
loads. Polymer media shall be mounted in a stainless steel rotor for corrosion resistance.
(d) Wheel design shall consist of removable segments ( for wheels greater than 660mm ( 26" )
diameter) for ease of service and/ or cleaning. Silica gel desiccant shall be permanently
bonded to wheel media to retain latent heat recovery after cleaning. Wheels with sprayed
on desiccant coatings are not acceptable. Wheels with desiccant applied after wheel
formation is not acceptable.
(e) Energy recovery device shall transfer moisture entirely in the vapor phase. The units shall
not require a condensation pan.
(f) Energy recovery drive belt material shall be high strength urethane and shall be factory
installed in a pre-stretched state, eliminating the need for field belt tension adjustment. Link
style belts are not acceptable.
(g) Direct-drive fans shall allow independent balancing of exhaust and supply airflows. Fan and
motor assemblies are mounted to unit base with neoprene isolators as standard. Fans shall
be located in draw-through position in reference to the energy recovery wheel.
(3) Access door
(a) A removable panel or duct mounted access doors for the wheel greater than 1,350mm shall
be provided to access the energy recovery cassette for service and inspection.
(b) Energy recovery wheel shall be mounted in a slide out cassette. A wheel drive motor having
permanently sealed ball bearings shall be provided with plug-in connection to a receptacle
mounted within the cabinet, and with pigtail located in a service box mounted for the wheel
greater than 54 inch.
PART III EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 Fans shall be mounted on or suspended with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. These isolators shall
be selected and installed in accordance with the unit manufacturer's recommendation so that no
disturbance is caused in the surroundings.
2.1 Before start-up, grease or lubricating oil shall be applied to the blower and motor.
2.2 After installations are completed, all equipment shall undergo test run. Any adjustments that are
needed shall be made to assure that all equipment will operate either the required performance.
Report forms to contain following minimum data listings shall include design and actual conditions for
each Item mentioned below:
(1) Date and time of test

(2) Fan make, type, name and serial number.
(3) Fan rpm
(6) Rated motor amperage, starter number and ampere rating
(7) Exhaust air CFM
END
5.5.3 PIPING WORKS

PART I DESCRIPTION
1.1 The contractor shall furnish and install all piping work including all necessary parts as shown on the
drawings.
2.1 The piping work shall comply with the following copes and standards.
(1) ASTM A53/A53M-04a : Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
(2) ASTM B75-02 : Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube.
(3) ASTM B88 : Seamless Copper Tube for Water, Gas and
Sanitation
(4) BS 2871 Part 1 : Copper Tube for water, gas and Sanitation
(5) ASTM C177 : Steady State Heat Flux measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by mean of the Guarded
Hot Plate Apparatus
(6) ASTM C534 : Perform flexible elastomeric cellular thermal
insulation in sheet and tubular form
(7) BS 874 Part 2 : Determining thermal insulating property part 2. Test
for thermal conductivity and related properties
(8) DIN 52615 : Determination of water vapor (moisture) permeability
of construction and insulation materials
(9) ASTM D1056 Type 1 : Flexible cellular materials-Sponge or Expanded
Rubber
(10) ASTM E96 : Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
(11) ASTM E84 : Surface Burning Characteristic of Building Materials
(12) ASTM D635 : Rate of Burning and/or Extend and Time of Burning
of Plastics in the Horizontal Position
(13) UL 94 : Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices
and Appliances
issue.
3. Submittals
3.1 The contractor shall submit all materials, catalogue, material lists and technical data requested for
4.1 All part of the piping work shall be guaranteed by the contractor for at least two (2) years after
handover.
PART II PRODUCT
1. Description
1.1 The valves shall be the types or models, which are suitable for the working fluid in the system. The
rated working pressure of the valve as specified for the working fluid shall be at least 1.5 times of the
actual working pressure, but not less than 1,034 kPa (150 PSIG.).
1.2 The diameter of hand wheels for valves shall be of a suitable size so as to allow tight closure by hand
with the application of reasonable force so that neither additional leverage nor damage shall be
imposed upon the stem, seat and disc. Where indicated or required, for inaccessible overhead valves,
chain-operated hand wheels including rustproof chain and chain guide shall be provided.
2. Component
2.1 Chilled Water/Condenser Water Piping
(1) All pipes shall be seamed black steel pipes, conforming to ASTM A-53, Schedule 40, Grade-A. All
pipes shall be welded joints and flanged connection for equipment and part required
maintenance.
(2) Small pipe if necessary threaded joints may be used with union connection for equipment and
parts required maintenance.
(3) Pipes and fittings shall be rated at not less than 1,034 kPa. (150 PSIG) working pressure.
2.2 Make-Up Water/Drain/Condensate Drain Piping
(1) All pipes shall be galvanized steel, BS Standard class medium, or conforming to Thai Industrial
Standard TIS 277-2521 medium weight.
(2) Threaded joints may be used for pipes of 50 mm. in diameter or smaller and flanged connections
for pipes of 65 mm. and larger.
2.3 Refrigerant piping
(1) Refrigerant pipe shall be copper tube hard drawn type L, conforming to BS 2827, part 2, fully
annealed and internally degreased and creamed.
(2) Compression fitting will not be accepted on refrigerant pipe work.
(3) Screw joints will not be accepted in refrigerant pipe work except on the equipment accessories.
2.4 Pipe insulation
(1) The insulation shall be EPDM closed cell structure, elastomeric thermal insulation, moisture and
vapor barriers, self-extinguishing with fire and low smoke density while burning.
(2) Properties of Insulation shall be as the following:
(a) Thermal conductivity shall not be more than 0.038 W/m./K (0.26 BTU/Hr/ft2/ F/Inch.) at
24C (75F) by test method of either ASTM C177, BS 874
(b) Water absorption shall not be more than 5 percentage by weight method of ASTM C534 or
ASTM D1056 Type 1
(c) Water vapor permeability shall be <0.10 perm-in in compliance to ASTM E96
(d) Moisture Resistance shall be ≥5,000 μ in compliance to DIN 52615
(e) Flammability shall be 25 in compliance to ASTM E84 or Class V-0 in compliance to UL94 or
surface spread of flame of Class 1 in compliance to BS476 Part 7. Smoke density shall be 50
in compliance to ASTM E84
(f) Density shall be 48-96 kg/cu.m. (3-6 lbs/cu.ft.)
(g) Service temperature shall be -20°C to 105°C (-4°F to 220°F)
(3) The insulation shall be performed tube or rolled sheet. The thickness of pipe insulation shall be
as follows:-
Pipe Diameter (mm.) Insulation Thickness (mm.)

65 (2 ½”) and smaller 32 (1 ¼”)
80 (3”) to 150 (6") 38 (1 ½”)
200 (8”) and larger 50 (2”)
Chiller Unit 38 (1 ½”)
Chilled Water Pump 32 (1 ¼”)
Condensate Drain 80 (3”) or less 13 (1/2”)
Condensate Drain above 80 (3”) 20 (3/4”)
Refrigerant Pipe 25 (1”)
2.5 Pre-insulated Pipe

(1) General requirement
(a) Insulation shall be factory pre-insulated without air gap, or approved equivalent of the
physical properties indicated below. This material must be installed strictly in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
(b) The Pre-insulated Pipe manufacturer shall be experienced and technically competent and
be able to provide a list of local project references, thermal conductivity test certificate,
class 0 fire behavior certificates, 2-hr fire resistance certificate tested to ASTM e119-05
(2) Service Pipe
(a) Pipe shall be specified for desire service as per this specification and as shown on the
Drawing. In either case the pipe shall be suitable for the pressure service specified elsewhere.
(b) Outer Casing shall be High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) PN6.3
(c) Finishing shall be as specified in this specification.
(3) Insulation
(a) Insulation shall be specially formulated MDI rigid polyurethane foam machine injected into
the annulus between service pipe and casing by a one shot factory process and shall have
the following physical properties:
(b) Density shall be minimum 32 kg/m3 (ASTM D 1622)
(c) Thermal Conductivity shall be k value 0.022 W/mK at 30°C mean (tested to ASTM C518),
Testing Certificate by 3rd party testing body is to be submitted
(d) Compressive Strength shall be minimum 255 kPa
(e) Closed Cell Content shall be minimum 90% by volume.
(4) Complete System
(a) Water vapour permeability conform to ASTM E96 (DIN 52615) shall not exceed 1.8 x 10-5
metric perms (2.6 x 10-2 perm inch) Mu >7000
(b) Do not spread fire, self-extinguishing, low smoke density Class O tested to BS 476: Part 7,
1997 (Surface spread of flame test) and BS 476: Part 6, 1989 (Fire propagation test), Testing
Certificate by 3rd party testing body is to be submitted 2-hr Fire Resistance tested to ASTM
e119-05, Testing Certificate by 3rd party testing body is to be submitted.
(5) The insulation shall be such thickness as to prevent condensation forming on the outer casing
under the following conditions:
Ambient Temp: 35°C (95°F), Rh%: 75, Fluid Temp: 6°C (43°F)
Ambient Temp: 30°C (86°F), Rh%: 80, Fluid Temp: 6°C (43°F)
Pipe Diameter (mm.) Insulation Thickness (mm.)
65 (2 ½”) and smaller 32 (1 ¼”)
80 (3”) to 150 (6") 38 (1 ½”)
200 (8”) and larger 50 (2”)
PART III EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 Delivery, Handling, Storage and Cleaning
(1) Pipes shall be delivered and stored with plugged ends. Ends shall be kept closed with temporary
covers during erection.
(2) Before any pipe is installed, it shall be opened and pounded to remove any foreign substances,
or swabbed, if necessary, for thorough cleaning.
(3) Pipes shall be stored on racks in a suitable warehouse or under cover to avoid rusting. If necessary,
carbon steel pipes shall be coated with anodized rust converter or red lead primer.
(4) During the course of installation, the Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent any debris
from being left in the pipes. He shall be responsible for any damage that may occur.
paint.
(6) Before start-up all piping systems shall be thoroughly flushed with water until it runs clear.
1.2 General piping installation
(1) All piping shall be installed parallel to, or at right angle with, the building walls and partitions. A
pitch in the direction of flow and drain shall be not less than 1 : 500, in general. Branches from
water mains shall be taken in a manner that facilitates venting and draining. Reductions in bore
shall be formed eccentrically to facilitate venting, except on vertical pipes where concentric
reduction may be used.
(2) All water piping shall be installed in such a way that all circuits can be completely drained off
and all air pockets in the water circuits shall be suitably vented.
(3) Clearance between pipe works and equipment or machinery shall be adequately provided to
facilitate maintenance. Overhead clearance shall be at least 600 mm. over access ways, and
where possible the projection of valve stems into access ways shall be avoided. Pipe works and
pumps shall be so arranged that the removal for maintenance of the equipment can be carried
out with minimum dismantling. Provision of all pipe fittings and accessories necessary for the
efficient functioning of the various systems shall be included.
(4) Pipes shall be installed in continuous lengths as long as possible. Except where required to be
connected to fitting outlets or headers, they shall be jointed by welding, solvent welding, screwing
or soldering as approved or indicated in this Specification.
(5) All pipe crossing structural expansion joint between buildings shall be provide with flexible
connection.
(6) All pipes shall be installed in an appropriate manner to present a neat and orderly appearance,
using fittings for all changes of direction, and arranging pipe runs parallel to or at right angles with
structural members of the building, to provide uppermost head-room and to clear lights and
other obstructions. In general, suspended pipes shall be installed as closely as possible to the
overhead structure.
1.3 Workmanship
All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site, and shall be worked into
place without springing or forcing. Piping shall be installed so that it may expand and contract freely
without damaging to itself or other work. Steel and wrought-iron pipe shall be cut with pipe cutters
and threaded with sharp, clean dies. All cut sections shall be reamed to remove all burrs and to restore
the pipe to full diameter. All changes in size shall be made with reducing fittings. Pipe bending and
bushings are prohibited.
1.4 Location of device
All valves, equipment, accessories, and devices shall be so located that they are accessible for repair
and replacement.
1.5 Connections to equipment
Connections to coils, pumps and other equipment shall be made in such a manner that undue strains
between pipes and equipment are eliminated. Unions and/or flanges shall be used to facilitate the
removal of the equipment.
1.6 Expansion and Contraction
(1) The piping systems shall be installed so that there will be no damage due to expansion and
contraction during operation.
(2) Pack less type expansion connectors shall be used where the expansion and contraction of the
pipe is excessive or cannot be compensated by expansion loops or offsets.
1.7 Differential Settlement
The piping systems shall be installed so that there will be no damage due to differential settlement of the pipe
supports after installation. The problems shall be avoided by providing flexible connections, offsets, or loops.
1.8 Sleeves
(1) Vertical pipes passing through floors shall be provided with sleeves of anti-corrosion painted black
steel pipes. Sleeves shall be of a proper length to pass through the entire floor construction all
(2) Horizontal pipes passing through walls and partitions shall be provided with full thickness sleeves
made of standard weight anti-corrosion painted black steel pipes.
(3) Sleeves shall be large enough to leave not less than 10 mm. clearance around the pipe or covering
insulation, if there is any. Sleeves shall be set in place when the walls and partitions are built.
(4) Sleeves in concrete work shall be flanged at the bottom or provided with temporary centering
caps and securely nailed or screwed to form work before the concrete are poured.
(5) Chromium-plated escutcheons shall be provided where exposed pipes pass through walls or floors.
(6) When sleeves are installed through a fire wall, the clearance between sleeves and pipes shall be
filled with fire-resistant material. The fire rating of the fire-resistant material shall be at least
equivalent to that of the fire wall.
(7) When pipes pass through waterproof walls, water retaining rings with approved type of sealant
shall be applied.
1.9 Pipe Joints

(1) Flanged joints shall be installed at all valves larger than 50 mm. and at other places where
necessary. Jointing flanges shall be accurately parallel to each other so that bolts are used only
to tighter joints, rather than correct alignment.
(2) Flanges shall be chosen to suit the maximum working pressure of the system at the points of
installation in accordance with the ASME standards. They shall be manufactured from a similar
material to the pipe works and fittings to which they are to be attached.
(3) Jointing materials used between flanged faces shall be of 3.2 mm. thick gaskets of good quality
or shall be of suitable material for the specified working fluid. Machined steel bolts with hexagonal
heads and nuts, and fitting with cadmium-plated flat steel washers where necessary. For bronze
flanges, machined brass bolts with hexagonal heads and nuts shall be used.
(4) The maximum length of each bolt shall be such that when it is fixed on the joint with nut in
position, it shall not extend more than 1/4 of its diameter beyond the nut while the minimum
length shall be a full nut. All threaded connections shall be made tight with an approved pipe
thread compound or Teflon tape. They shall be so jointed that not more than two threads will
be exposed. Union joint faces shall be smeared with graphite and oil during connection.
(5) The edges of the pipe to be welded shall be machine-beveled wherever possible. Gas cuts shall be free
from burnt metal. Before welding, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased. The welding
technique shall be such as to ensure penetration to the full thickness of the pipe wall and through fusion
of the deposited metal with the parent metal. During welding the ends of the pipes shall be held firmly
together by suitable lugs, welded-on-bridge pieces or adequate tack welding. Special care shall be taken
to prevent formation of welded obstructions and lodgment of welding residue inside the pipes. Cracks,
pinholes, excessive under cutting, etc. shall be removed and the joints rewarded. Welding materials and
workmanship shall be in accordance with acceptable standard.
(6) Welders must be competent and shall have qualification certificates. They may be required to
perform site tests. Should the Resident Engineer not be satisfied, the welder must be replaced?
The Resident Engineer reserves the right to order the cutout for inspection of up to 1 per cent of
the total number of welds. In the event of any inspected welds being, in the Resident Engineer's
opinion, unsatisfactory he reserves the right to order the removal of further welds which in his
opinion indicate faulty workmanship. Welds removed for inspection shall be reinstalled at no cost
to the Project.
(7) Either the electric arc or the oxy-acetylene welding method may be used for metallic pipes. Welding
rods or electrodes shall have such composition that the welds produced by them shall have the same
analysis as the parent metal and shall be of an approved type and brand.
(8) Prior to silver-soldering or brazing (if any) suitable chemical shall be used in cleaning the metal
surface to be jointed in order to remove oil and grease. Scale and any gross oxidation shall be
removed by emery cloth, or grinding. Care shall be taken in preparation of the joints.
(9) All tees or take-off’s shall be made with standard welding fittings only.
1.10 Pipe Hangers and Supports
(1) Hangers or supports shall be provided at intervals as shown on the drawings and/or specified
herein, both in horizontal and vertical runs. In addition, it is required that a hanger be provided
at not more than 1.0 meter (3.5’) from each change of direction on the side of the longest run
and also at point adjacent to all valves, strainers, etc. All hangers and supports for horizontal
piping shall be adjustable in height over a minimum distance of 50 mm. (2”) the intervals indicated
for support are maximum distances between brackets.
(2) For chilled water and condensate piping, rigid insulation of minimum length of not less than the
outside diameter of the insulation shall be provided at each support and hanger.
(3) For all pipes where the hanger clips bear directly on pipes and for hanger of dissimilar metals
suitable separation with a layer of felt shall be provided to prevent corrosion. Hangers on
structural steel must be clamped in position with hook bolts. Drilling holes in or welding to
structural steel is absolutely prohibited, unless with the express approval from the Engineer.
(4) Anchors for steel pipes shall be welded directly to the pipe wall and securely bolted to the
building structure. Anchors for copper and PVC pipes shall be of the split ring type. Hangers in the
main technical room shall be supported on springs.
(5) Supporting brackets shall be fastened to concrete by means of inserts or expansion bolts, to
brickwork by means of expansion bolts, and to hollow masonry by means of toggle bolts.
Two fixings per bracket shall be provided at follows :-
Nominal Pipe Size (mm.) Fixing Size (mm.)
Up to 65 (2 ½”) 6.4 (1/4”)
80 (3”) to 150 (6”) 9.5 (3/8”)
200(8”) to 350 (14”) 12.7 (1/2”)
(6) All hanger and steel shall be hot-drip galvanized.
(7) For all pipes hangers in the plant room shall be provided with spring isolators to reduce noise
transmission to adjacent rooms. The spring shall be selected to maintain 25 mm. (1”) minimum
static deflections.
1.11 Pipe insulation
(1) The outer surface of the pipe shall be cleaned before installation without any cement or small
particles attached to the pipe surface that may cause uneven surface. The irregular uneven
surface on the joint area should be made smooth.
(2) Installation shall use the adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. Apply the adhesive
on the joints then press the joints together tightly. The joints shall be made level and smooth
without tilt. For insulation on equipment, adhesives shall be applied on both insulation and
equipment surface. The insulation shall fit into the equipment smoothly without air holes or
bubbles inside.
(3) Installation shall be in the standard length according to the manufacturer. Then install it by
slipping continuously onto the pipe and joints. In case that it cannot be slipped, the insulation
has to be slit along the tube length and then closed back firmly by adhesives.
(4) After installation, the insulation shall be in the right tension, not too loose or too tensed,
observable by its appearance. Shall not use perform tube that is bigger than the pipe size.
(5) For hanging, holding and other method to support the pipe shall use polymeric rigid foam pipe
supporter to prevent the weight pressure on the insulation. The rigid foam pipe supporter shall
have equal or similar thermal conductivity as the insulation and shall be in a full or half circular
shape in order to support the full pipe or only the bottom part of the pipe on the load supporting
point.
(6) Insulation materials that are improperly stored, damaged, torn, scratch, unclean shall not be used
for installation.
(7) After installation, it shall be covered with another layer of anti-rust metal sheet (aluminum sheet,
galvanized steel sheet, stainless sheet) with thickness at least 0.5mm for the following areas:
(a) Chilled water pipes that are located on the ground in the pant room.
(b) Vertical or horizontal chilled water pipes that may be easily damage.
1.12 Pre-insulated Pipe

(1) Generally the pre-insulated pipe will be delivered to site in 6m length, the pipe installer will have
to cut the pipe into the required length and proceed with the weld or thread joint to complete
the pipe installation.
(2) It is important that the pipe installer pay much attention to the storage, moving and handling of
the pre-insulated pipe system to avoid damaging the pipe casing.
(3) When cutting small diameter pipe, the pipe assemblies can be cut directly with the standard fibre
cutter. When cutting big diameter pipe, remove 300mm length of casing and foam, use cutting
torch to cut at the bare centre leaving 150mm exposed ends for welding. Proceed ahead to weld
the pipe with 150mm exposed ends.
(4) After pressure test to the pipe joints, paint the welded section with proper anti-rust paint while
the bare joints await for site foaming insulation.
(5) The site foaming insulation shall be performed in strictly according to the manufacturer’s
instructions and recommendations. The straight joints, valves and fittings shall be site insulated
and jacketed using the chemical supplied by the same manufacturer.
(6) Typical site foaming method shall be done by install the metal jacket on site over the bare joint
and carry out foam pouring. Skilled and experienced workmanship is very important, as well as
the suitable foam material with the right formulation; to ensure a homogeneous insulation for
this part of the work.
(7) Due to the nature of the plant room’s complicated pipe layout, it is not practical to use the
factory pre-insulated pipe system. The plant room area pipe work, valves and accessories will
usually have to be insulated with the site foaming method (which is the manufacturer’s
formulated MDI polyurethane pour-in-situ).
2.1 Water piping shall be tested with water pressure of not less than 1034 kPa. (150 Psig) or 1.5 times the
maximum working pressure, whichever is greater, at the lowest point in the system. Care shall be taken
to avoid putting excessive pressure on safety devices, etc. These delicate control mechanisms shall be
removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. The system shall be tested when water
temperatures and average ambient temperatures are approximately equal and constant. Test pressure
shall be maintained for not less than 30 minutes without an appreciable drop after the force pump
has been disconnected.
2.2 Piping may be tested a section at time in order to facilitate the construction.
2.3 Leaks in screwed fittings shall be corrected by remaking the joints. Leaks in welded joints shall be cut
out and re-welded. Caulking of leaks will not be permitted.
2.4 After pressure tests have been made, the entire water-distribution system to be sterilized shall be
thoroughly flushed with water until all entrained dirt and mud have been removed before introducing
chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine or hypochlorite. The
chlorinating material shall provide a dosage of not less than 50 PPM. and shall be introduced into the
system in an approved manner. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe long enough to destroy
all nonspore-forming bacteria. Except where a shorter period is approved, the retention time shall be
at least 24 hours and shall produce not less than 10 PPM of chlorine at the extreme end of the system
of the retention period. All valves in the system being sterilized shall be opened and closed several
END
5.5.4 DUCTING WORKS

PART I DESCRIPTION
1.1 Unless otherwise specified or noted, casings, plenum chambers and ducts shall be of zinc-coated sheet
steel of varying thickness and construction as specified.
1.2 The Drawings do not attempt to show all offsets in ductwork. The Contractor shall provide these offsets
as required at no additional cost.
1.3 The construction of ductwork shall be generally in accordance with the "Duct Manual and Sheet Metal
Construction for Ventilating and Air-conditioning System", published by the Sheet Metal and Air-
conditioning Contractors National Association Inc.
1.4 In ducts, the slip joint must form a smooth interior surface and a neat exterior appearance. All joints shall be
as near airtight as possible. All seams shall be continuous around four sides of the duct. Under no conditions
shall hangers or supports piece the ducts. All curves, vents, offsets, etc. are to be made for an easy flow of air
with minimum obstruction and the radius being not less than the width of the duct or flue.
1.5 All changed in dimensions and shapes of ducts shall be gradual with a slope of not less than 1 to 4.
1.6 Changes in duct size or shape that may interference with other works shall be made by using the size
of the equivalent friction loss.
1.7 Where space permits, elbows shall have an inner radius of at least the duct width measured in the
plane of the elbow. Where shown or where required to fit in restricted space, square elbows shall be
used. These elbows may be constructed with square inner and outer corners, and shall be fitted with
factory-made or shop-fabricated turning vanes. Factory-made turning vanes shall be zinc-coated or
factory-finished with black enamel or other suitable finish. Seams, joints and bracing of elbows shall
be as specified for straight ducts.
1.8 Splitter dampers shall be provided for air adjustment in throats at all duct branches. Rivets, screws
and other fastening details shall be made of or plated with the same metal as the ducts or other
metals having equal or superior corrosion-resistance.
1.9 The exposed air ducts in air conditioning area except that in technical room shall be painted with high
quality coloring paint conforming to specification of "Painting". Colors shall be selected by the Engineer.
1.10 Where ducting passes through walls and floors, the Contractor shall supply to the Main Building Contractor
treated hardwood frames as shown on the Drawings. The area between the frame and the ducting shall be
covered on both sides of the wall by boards of 20 mm. (3/4”) thick multiplex, neatly cut to form a sound
barrier. The space between the covering board shall be filled with rockwool to a maximum density. All
joints shall be sealed with mastic.
1.11 Small holes, 50 mm. (2”) in diameter with cover plates, are to be provided for the use of Pilot tubes
for measurement of air quantities. Such holes are to be provided at convenient positions to facilitate
regulation of all branches and as may be required by the Engineer.
1.12 In the technical rooms, the ducting shall be fabricated in flanged sections, bolted together with
cadmium-plated bolts and nuts and asbestos cord for easy dismantling.
1.13 Bracing angles shall be provided for all sides and riveted to the ducts at 150 mm. (6”) centre to centre.
Bracing angles, angle flanges and transverse joints shall be painted with 2 coats of antirust paint.
2.1 Duct works shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(1) SMACNA Standard : HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal & Flexible
(2) SMACNA Standard : Fire, Smoke & Radiation Damper Installation Guide
for HVAC Systems
(3) SMACNA Standard : HVAC Duct Systems Inspection Guide

(4) SMACNA Standard : Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct
Construction Handbook
(5) SMACNA Standard : Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards
(6) SMACNA Standard : HVAC Systems - Duct Design Manual
(7) SMACNA Standard : Fire, Smoke & Radiation Damper Installation Guide
for HVAC Systems
(8) Standard 68-1997 : Laboratory Method of Testing to Determine the
Sound Power in a Duct (AMCA Standard 330-97)
(ANSI approved)
(9) Standard 126-2000 : Method of Testing HVAC Air Ducts (ANSI approved)
(SMACNA standard)
(10) Standard 120-1999 : Method of Testing to Determine Flow Resistance of
HVAC Ducts10and Fittings (ANSI Approved)
(11) UL 555 Revision 2 : Fire Dampers
issue.
2.4 The standards and codes as mention in 1.2.1 can be equivalent by another standards and
codes, if it equal or better than standards and codes mention in 1.2.1 when comply between two
codes.
3. Submittals
3.1 The contractor shall submit all material selection, catalog, material lists and technical data for approval
4.1 All parts of duct works shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer and/or by the contractor for at least
two (2) year after handover.
PART II PRODUCT
1. Description
1.1 The construction of ductwork shall be generally in accordance with the "Duct Manual and Sheet Metal
Construction for Ventilating and Air-conditioning System", published by the Sheet Metal and Air-
conditioning Contractors National Association Inc.
2. Component
2.1 Low Pressure Duct
(1) Low pressure ducts shall be used where indicated on the drawings, or, if not, where static
pressure does not exceed 50 mm. water gauge.
(2) Low pressure ducting shall be constructed with galvanized steel sheet and steel bracing angles in
which the thickness and dimension of the respective equipment shall not be less than the
indicated figures for low pressure ducting in the latest edition of ASHRAE and/or SMACNA.
(3) Sheet metal for slips and drive caps shall be of the same material and thickness as the ducts.
2.2 Medium Pressure Duct
(1) Medium pressure ducts shall be used where indicated in the Drawings. If not, they shall be used
where static pressure is higher than 50 mm. water gauge, but not over 100 mm. water gauge.
(2) Medium pressure ducting shall be constructed with galvanized steel sheet and steel bracing
angles in which the thickness and dimension of the respective equipment shall not be less than
the indicated figures for medium pressure ducting in the latest edition of ASHRAE and/or SMACNA.
(3) Medium pressure ducts shall be constructed without sharp edges or irregularities that may
generate noise.
2.3 Spiral Duct
(1) Spiral duct shall be used where indicated in the Drawings. Spiral duct shall be constructed with
galvanized steel sheet. The construction and thickness of spiral duct shall conform to the latest
edition of ASHRAE and/or SMACNA.
(2) Spiral duct shall be constructed with smooth inside surface with low friction loss.
2.4 Round Flexible Duct
(1) The flexible ducts shall be made of a coated polyester fabric, the outside of which shall be
mechanically interlocked by a corrosion-resistant metal spiral helix. If specified, factory-applied
insulation shall be a nominal 25 mm. (1”) thick, 24 kg/m3 (1.5 lb/ft3) density fiberglass. The vapour
barrier shall be of fiberglass fabric coated with a black elastomer compound and laminated to
aluminized polyester film. Pressure rating is 300 mm. of water static.
2.5 Duct Support and Hangers
(1) Horizontal rectangular/round, low and medium pressure ducts shall be supported by hangers as
(2) A pair of hangers shall be located close to each transverse joint and elsewhere as required by
the spacing indicated in table of air duct hanger.
(3) Upper ends of hangers shall be vertical and secured individually to floor of above roof
construction. Hangers shall not be secured to suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling hangers or
insertions to which suspended ceiling hangers are attached.
(4) The hangers and supports shall be of the adjustable type and hot-dip galvanized.
2.6 Access Panels
(1) Access doors shall be installed in casings, plenum chambers and ducts where shown and
wherever else required for ready access to dampers and other operating parts of any kind.
(2) Access doors shall be 1 mm. thick, double-skin set in galvanized frames with 25 mm. (1”) thick,
48 kg/m3 (3 lb/ft3) density fiberglass insulation and approved latches and hinges. Edges and frames
shall be stiffened and made airtight with felt strip. The minimum size shall be 300 by 300 mm.
except ducts less than 300 mm. where minimum size shall be 150 by 150 mm (6”x6”)
2.7 Flexible Collars
(1) Flexible collars shall be provided at the connections between fans and ducts or casings, where
required to prevent expansion joints. They shall be approximately 200 mm. (8”) long and shall
be installed with just sufficient slack to prevent transmission of vibration.
(2) Circular collars shall be secured to fans and ducts with metal bands of 2 mm. (0.08”) thick and
25 mm. (1”) wide. Rectangular collars shall be secured to ducts and fans with 25 mm. by 3.2 mm.
(1” by 0.125”) flat bars fastened with screws or bolts at 200 mm. (8”) intervals or with flanges
similar to those specified for duct joints. Metal for fastening collars shall be the same as specified
for ducts and bracing.
(3) Flexible collars shall be constructed of fire-resistant flexible canvas, or neoprene-coated glass fabric.
(4) Collars for ducts operating at temperatures above 40oC (104oF) and acid-resistant ducts shall be
made of neoprene-coated polyester fabric.
(5) Collars exposed to weathering shall be made of neoprene-coated glass fabric.
2.8 Dampers
(1) Automatic Air Dampers
(a) Automatic dampers shall be of the air balancing type, with flat or elliptical steel blades,
mounted horizontally in welded steel frames. Blades shall have interlocking edges.
Rectangular dampers of 300 mm. or more in a direction perpendicular to the axis shall be
louvered. Blades on louvered dampers must not be over 200 mm. wide. Round dampers
shall be single-blade dampers. Damper blades shall have steel turnings mounted in bronze
sleeve bearings or ball bearings. Dampers between bearing shall be not more than 150 mm.
long. Opposed blade dampers shall be similar to louvered dampers except that the air
stream is not deflected to one side. Where volume control is required, opposed blade
dampers shall be used.
(b) Dampers shall guaranteed to close substantially tight. Those for use in high pressure and
high velocity systems shall be of special design to minimize noise. Dampers in outdoor air
intakes, discharge openings and mixing dampers on hot and cold air plenum systems shall
have fitted edges or neoprene rubber edges cemented and riveted in place during
fabrication. Rectangular dampers having an area larger than 0.4 m2 (4 ft2) shall have
additional corner bracing.
(c) Damper operating links shall be steel or brass rod, adjustable in length and of such
proportions that they will withstand without appreciable deflection a load equal to not less
than twice the maximum operation force of the damper motor. Joints in linkages shall be
made with steel or brass pins or with ball and socket joints of ample size. Steel parts of
damper shall be finished with two coats of enamel or aluminum paint or shall be zinc-
coated.
(2) Volume Dampers
(a) All dampers necessary for proper control and balance of air distribution for ductwork systems
shall be furnished and installed so that they can be adjusted at any time after the
completion of the Works.
(b) Front and back bars or vanes of direction grilles are not to be used for adjustment of all
quantities.
(c) Generally, butterfly dampers shall be of the air balancing type with flat or elliptical blades.
Blades shall be rigid, with close fitting hem edges. A damper in ducts over 350 mm. (10ft) in
minimum dimension shall be of the multiple opposed blade type. Multiple blades shall be
not over 300 mm. (12”) wide and may be either gang-operated or individually operated.
Blades of dampers in medium and high pressure ducts shall be non-metallic or provided
with non-metallic edges or coating.
(d) Damper rods shall be not less than 9.5 mm. (0.375”) squared at one end and shall either
pass entirely through the ducts or shall be of short stubs secured to the blades by not less
than 2 bolts or rivets at each end. The squared end of each rod shall be held in lever type
locking device with a central locking nut of large diameter or a quadrant and locking screws.
Ends of damper rods in medium and high pressure ducts shall be provided with means of
sealing them to prevent leakage of air.
(e) Dampers shall have frames of not less than 50 mm. (2”) wide and blades of 1.6 mm.
(0.0625”) galvanized steel. The damper plate shall be pivoted on a rod or installed with
hinges, controlled with one or more rods that are fastened to the leading edge of the blade.
Damper rods, on the other hand, shall be not less than 9.5 mm. in diameter and slip through
a hub fastened to the duct side. The setscrew in the hub holds the rod and damper to a
desired setting. Length of damper blades shall be at least equal to the width of branch. The
damper blades, pivots and rods must be rigid in installation so that they will neither vibrate
nor create noise.
(3) Fire Dampers
(a) The fire dampers shall be constructed according to NFPA 90A and UL-555, the fire rating
shall have the same fire rating as the wall through which is to be led.
(b) The casings and blades of fire dampers shall be constructed of zinc-coated steel. The casing
shall be flanged and supported by the fire wall or floor and be totally independent of the
ducting in which they are incorporated.
(c) Damper blades shall be pivoted off-balance and counter-weighted so that they can be
closed by gravity, but held open by approved, rigid, fusible links.
(d) Links shall be set at 71C (160F) heat resistance for horizontal ducts and 40C (120F) for
vertical ducts. Access doors shall be provided at each fire damper and shall be 600 by 600
mm. (24”x24”) except ducts less than 300 mm. (12”), in which case the sizes shall not be
smaller 150 by 150 mm. (6” by 6”)
(e) All parts of fire damper (Frame, damper and fusible links) shall be tested and certified by
UL-555
(4) Fire and Smoke Dampers
(a) The fire and smoke damper shall be constructed according to NFPA 90A and UL555S, the
fire rating shall have the same fire rating as the wall through which is to be led.
(b) The casings and blades of fire dampers shall be constructed of zinc-coated steel. The casing
shall be flanged and supported by the fire wall or floor and be totally independent of the
ducting in which they are incorporated.
(c) The dampers shall be automatically closed when either smoke concentration or
temperature above safety limit. Any remote sensors, wiring and accessories shall have the
same fire rating as the dampers.
(d) All parts of fire and smoke damper (Frame, damper, actuator and fusible links) shall be
tested and certified by UL-555S
2.9 Duct Silencer and Duct Liner
(1) The Contractor shall be responsible for installing the necessary duct silencer or duct liner to
reduce the transfer of sound (created by the fan) to the rooms. The sound level from the air
handling unit and fan coil unit measure in an occupied room shall not exceed NC 40 for public
spaces and NC 45 for back of the house, unless otherwise specified.
(2) Duct Silencer shall be constructed to suit the ducting or the air handling units in which they will
be incorporated. The duct silencer shall be built-up of a casing in which sound absorbing cells
are fitted.
(3) Casings shall be made of zinc-coated steel, not lighter than specified herein for ducts of the same
outside dimensions, but in no case lighter than 0.76 mm. for low pressure ducts and 1 mm. for
medium pressure ducts. Casings shall be suitable braced and sealed so as not to show any
distortion or leakage.
(4) Duct silencer lining materials shall neither impart odor to the air nor delaminate readily. There
shall be no loose material on any exposed surface that may be detached by the air stream, either
during installation or under regular operating conditions. The materials shall be non-combustible.
Sound absorbing materials in contact with the air stream shall be neoprene-coated. All lining
materials shall be in good condition at the time of final inspection. Material damaged in shipment
by rough handling, vibration or exposure will be rejected. It shall be replaced or coated to prevent
detachment of loose material as directed by the Engineer.
(5) Duct silencer lining materials shall be adequately secured and protected. Edges of materials that
are not protected by metal shall be heavily coated with an adhesive to prevent detachment of
loose materials, whether such edges are to be exposed in the finished assembly or butted against
other similar edges.
(6) Duct liner shall have the construction of 25 mm. fiberglass 48 kg/m3 density and coated with
neoprene.
2.10 Black Steel Sheet Duct
(1) All hot air exhaust duct from kitchen shall be constructed of minimum 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) thick
black steel sheet. All duct joints shall be welded and each duct section shall be fabricated in
flanged connection.
(2) The kitchen exhaust duct shall be insulated with 40 mm (1 1/2 inches) calcium silicate and
covered with aluminum foil vapour barrier same specification and for fiberglass insulation. Where
exposed, the duct shall be covered with galvanized steel sheet jacket instead of aluminum foil
vapour barrier.
(3) The kitchen exhaust duct shall be sloped in 1:500 and appropriate 25 mm (1 inch grease drain
cocks shall be provided.
2.11 Miscellaneous Exhaust/Duct Work
(1) Dedicate kitchen dishwasher and laundry iron shall use welded stainless steel exhaust duct which
is slope back to equipment for drainage of condensation and ducted directly to outside.
(2) Fabricate pool bromine/chlorine storage room exhaust duct from stainless steel.
2.12 Duct Smoke Detector
(1) All duct smoke detectors shall be provided for all air handling units. Detectors shall be
photoelectric type and listed by Underwriters Laboratory, UL
(2) The duct detector shall operate at air velocities from 1.52 mps. (300 fpm.) to 20.3 mps. (4000
fpm.). Housing shall be of metal construction and complete mechanical installation will be
performed without removal of detector cover.
(3) Visual indicator of alarm and power must be provided on detector front. A manual reset switch
shall be located on front of the device. Terminal shall be provided for remote alarm indication,
strobe/horn and remote reset switch. All wiring must comply with local codes and regulation.
2.13 Air Outlet
(1) All ceiling diffusers, registers and grilles shall be of the size and shapes indicated on the Drawings.
(2) Ceiling diffusers shall be of the circular, square, rectangular, perforated face or linear type as
(3) Diffusers shall be constructed of anodized, extruded aluminum. Sharp edges and corners shall be
ground-off and the surface shall be flush-finished.
(4) Opposed blades volume control dampers shall be provided with each diffuser. All accessories
shall be constructed of extruded aluminum, and assembled without any metal-to-metal contact
in moving parts. The opposed blades volume control damper shall be adjusted without removing
any part of air outlet.
(5) All internal parts of each diffuser shall be removable as a unit to permit cleaning of the diffuser
and provide access to the ducts. All diffusers shall be supported independently from the
suspended ceiling system and shall be of an adjustable type.
(6) Registers shall be nylon-fitted, noise proof, 4-way adjustable anodized, extruded aluminum grille
with opposed blade volume control damper. All registers shall have gaskets, installed and located
in place without glue, blades mounted in nylon self-lubricating bashing, and assembled without
any metal to-metal contact in moving parts.
(7) Return, transfer and exhaust air grilles shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminum. All
blades shall be mounted in rigid vinyl insert cushion elements to prevent rattling or vibration.
(8) Fresh air grilles shall be similar in construction to return and exhaust grilles. They shall always be
equipped with opposed blade volume dampers and insect screens.
2.14 Duct insulation
(1) The insulation shall be closed cell structure, elastomeric thermal insulation, moisture and vapor
barriers, self-extinguishing with fire and low smoke density while burning.
(2) Properties of Insulation shall be as the following:
(a) Thermal conductivity shall not be more than 0.038 W/m./K (0.26 BTU/Hr/ft2/ F/Inch.) at
24C (75F) by test method of either ASTM C177, BS 874
(b) Water absorption shall not be more than 5 percentage by weight method of ASTM C534 or
ASTM D1056 Type 1
(c) Water vapor permeability shall be <0.10 perm-in in compliance to ASTM E96
(d) Moisture Resistance shall be ≥5,000 μ in compliance to DIN 52615
(e) Flammability shall be 25 in compliance to ASTM E84 or Class V-0 in compliance to UL94 or
surface spread of flame of Class 1 in compliance to BS476 Part 7. Smoke density shall be 50
in compliance to ASTM E84
(f) Density shall be 48-96 kg/cu.m. (3-6 lbs/cu.ft.)
(g) Service temperature shall be -20°C to 105°C (-4°F to 220°F)
(2) Duct insulation thickness shall be as follows specified below unless otherwise specified in the
drawings
Duct location Thickness, mm (inch)
Supply air duct outside air conditioning space 50 (2”)
or return air stream
Supply air duct in air conditioning space and 25 (1”)
return air duct outside air conditioning space
PART III EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 All supply and return air ducts for cooled air distribution shall be insulated. Return air duct in air
conditioning space, fresh air and exhaust air ducts may not be insulated.
1.2 Flanges and other steel parts shall be painted prior to the application of insulation.
1.3 The insulation blankets shall be adhered to the ducts by applying fire resistant adhesive over the
outside area of the ducts.
1.4 The connection of insulation blankets or joints shall be overlapped and sealed with at least 65 mm.
(2.5”) wide of the aluminum adhesive tape. Before applying the tape, surfaces should be cleaned to
remove moisture, oil, grease, and dirt. A 10-mm.(3/8”) wide aluminum belt shall be provided (over
insulation blanket) around the ducts at a spacing of approximately 600 mm.(24”).
1.5 In order to protect the insulation from damage, insulated ducting shall be supported on strips of
celotex or gypsum board of 6 mm. (0.25”) thick and 150 mm.(6”) wide at all supports and hangers.
1.6 In case of size duct over 300 mm (12”), mechanical clip and washer shall be provided in every 300
mm. (12”) interval.

2.1 High pressure blower with control damper shall be used for test apparatus. Air for testing shall be
introduced into the system through a suitable filter and dryer to exclude all impurities.
2.2 A flow measuring device shall be of an orifice assembly consisting of straightening vanes and an orifice
plate mounted in a straight tube with properly located pressure taps. Each orifice assembly is
accurately calibrated with its own calibration curve, which shall also be submitted to the Engineer for
approval. Pressure and flow readings shall be taken with U-tube manometers.
2.3 Test procedures shall be of audible test with a pressure of 50 mm WG in excess of designed duct
operating pressure. All joints for audible leaks shall be surveyed and each leak shall be marked and
repaired after shutting down the blower. After all audible leaks have been sealed, the orifice section
with a pressure of 25% in excess of designed duct operating pressure.
2.4 Total allowable leakage shall conform to the first edition of "HVAC Air Duct, Leakage Test Manual" of
SMACNA standard. When partial sections of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage
for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage.
END
5.5.5 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
PART I DESCRIPTION
1.1 All air distribution devices shall be of the size and type as indicated on the drawings.
2.1 Air distribution devices and accessories shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(1) SMACNA : HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal & Flexible, 1995,
2nd Edition
(2) SMACNA : Fire, Smoke & Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC
Systems, 5th Edition
(3) SMACNA : HVAC Duct Systems Inspection Guide, 2nd Edition
(4) SMACNA : Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct Construction
Handbook
(5) SMACNA: Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards
(6) SMACNA : HVAC Systems - Duct Design Manual
(7) Standard 68 : Laboratory Method of Testing to Determine the Sound Power
in a Duct (AMCA Standard 330-97) (ANSI approved)
(8) Standard 126 : Method of Testing HVAC Air Ducts (ANSI approved)
(SMACNA standard)
(9) Standard 120 : Method of Testing to Determine Flow Resistance of HVAC
Ducts10and Fittings (ANSI Approved)
issue.
3. Submittals
3.1 The contraction shall submit air distribution device’s performance selection, catalog, material list and
technical data request for approval before installation
3.2 The contractor shall provide samples or material for air distribution device request for approval before
installation.
4.1 All air distribution devices shall be guaranteed by the contractor for at least two (2) year after handover.
PART II PRODUCT
1. Description
1.1 The air distribution devices is the device used for distributed the air to the space.
2. Component
2.1 Supply Ceiling Diffusers (SCD)
(1) Supply ceiling diffusers shall be 1 to 4 ways air direction as specified on the drawings and/or
specified herein. The diffusers shall be square shape or rectangular shape as specified on the
drawings and/or specified herein.
(2) The diffusers shall be constructed or extruded anodized aluminum, removable cones and
installed flush-finish with the ceiling. (flush mount) .
(3) The diffusers will be colors coating with white color or others color as specified on the drawing.
(4) All diffusers shall have opposed blade volume control dampers, which can be adjusted air volume
without removing the diffusers.
2.2 Supply Air Registers (SAR)
(1) Register shall be 4 ways or 2 ways adjustable air direction. Supply air registers shall be constructed
of extruded aluminium and shall have an individual adjustable blade place one up on the other
(vertical front blade and horizontal rear blade).
(2) Some or the registers will be color coating with white color or other color as specified on the
drawing.
(3) All registers shall have opposed blades volume control dampers white can be adjusted air volume
without removing the registers.
2.3 Supply Air Grills (SAG)
(1) Supply air grilles shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminium and blades fixed on the grilles
with 45 ํ angle deflection.
(2) Some of the grille will be color coating with white color or other color as specified on the drawings.
(3) All grilles shall have opposed blade volume control dampers which can be adjusted air volume
without removing the grilles.
2.4 Supply Linear Slot (SLS) / Return Linear Slot (RLS)
(1) Supply linear slot shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminium and shall be formed to
provide horizontal air flow (condo air flow pattern). The linear slot shall be one-way or two-way flow
direction and shall be complete with internal damper to adjusted air flow, flow direction and pattern.
Each air flow channel shall not less than 20 mm. (3/4 in.) wide.
(2) Return linear slot shall have the same character as the supply linear slot, but the return linear slot
does not have internal control damper.
(3) Some of the linear slot will be color coating with white color or other color as specified on the
drawings.
2.5 Return Air Grilles (RAG)

(1) Return air grilles shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminum and blade fixed on the grilles
with 45 ํ angle deflection.
(2) Return air grilles shall be of removals cores and installed flush-finish with the ceiling (flush mount).
2.6 Transfer Air Grilles (TAG)
(1) Transfer air grilles shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminium and horizontal blade fixed on
grilles with 45 ํ angle deflection.
(2) If on the wall, transfer air grilled shall have face and fixed grilles on both sides of the wall.
2.7 Fresh Air Grilles (FAG) / Outdoor Air Grilled (OAG)
(1) Fresh air grille and outdoor air graces shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminium and
horizontal blade fixed on the grilles with 45 ํ angle deflection.
(2) Fresh air grilles and outdoor air grilles shall be designed for outdoor type, which have ability to protect
water come to inside of graces (wheat her proof).
2.8 Exhaust Air Grilles (EAG)
(1) Exhaust air grilles shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminium and horizontal blades fixed
on the grilles with 45 ํ angle deflection.
(2) Exhaust air grilles shall be designed for outdoor type , which have ability to protect watch come to
inside of grilles (wheat her proof).
2.9 Exhaust Air Registers (EAR)
(1) Exhaust air registers shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminium and horizontal blades fixed
on the grilles with 45 ํ angle deflection.
(2) The exhaust air registers shall have opposed blade volume dampers on the back of the register, which
can adjust air flow rate without removing the registers.
2.10 Adjustable Radial Outlet (ARO)
(1) Adjustable radial outlet shall be rounded vertical cooling supply air for used in high level area as
indicated in the Drawings. Adjustable radial outlet for air distribution at large discharge heights and
generation of high quality indoor air flow with high-induction radial air jets, discharge direction
adjustable from horizontal to vertical (downwards).
(2) Low outlet element with circular casing, moulded face and radial vanes. Vane underside flush
with surrounding face, either with circular face for flush mounting or with square face with turn-
up for installation in square tile ceiling, vertically mobile guide ring for adjustment of discharge
direction from nearly horizontal to vertical, manually.
(3) Mounting flush with ceiling or freely suspended.
(4) Radial outlet element made of galvanized sheet metal, visible air outlet parts painted to manufacturer
color or as approved color by the Client. Connection box made of galvanized sheet metal.
PART III EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 The installation of diffusers, grilles and registers in the ceiling or on the walls shall be flush-finish.
1.2 All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be installed with galvanized steel plenum.
2.1 After installations are completed, all equipment shall be test run. Any adjustments that are needed
shall be made to assure that all equipment will operate either the required performance. Report forms
to contain following minimum data listings shall include design and actual conditions for each Item
mentioned below:
END
5.5.6 AIR PURIFIER

PART I DESCRIPTION
1.1 All air handler shall be installed with air purifier at downstream side of the unit, unless specify in the
Schedule or the Drawings.
1.2 The air purifiers are devices or equipment that used to cleaning air for indoor air quality in the air
conditioning system. The air purifiers are Pre-filter, Medium filter, Gas & odor filter and including
Electronic air cleaner.
1.3 Type of air purifier that will be installed to air handler shall be specified in the Drawings.
1.4 For commercial fan coil unit which have capacity not exceed 17.6 kW. (60,000 Btu/Hr) or exposed type,
used standard air filter from manufacturer.
2.1 The air purifier shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(1) NFPA 90A : Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems.
(2) UL 900 : Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
(3) ASHRAE 52 : Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices used in General
Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter.
(4) ASHRAE 62 : EPA Ambient-Air Quality Standards for Outdoor Air
issue.
3. Submittals
3.1 The contractor shall submit air purifier’s performance selection, material lists and technical data
request for approval.
4.1 All materials shall be guaranteed by the contractor and/or by the manufacturer for at least two (2)
years after handover.
4.2 In the period of warranty, the contractor shall conduct periodic maintenance with involves checking of
filter necessary cleaning every 1 month.
PART II PRODUCT
1. Description
1.1 The unit shall be supplied with filter and accessories.
1.2 The electronic air cleaner shall be supplied with all parts of the unit including electrical power unit
and pre-wiring.
2. Component
2.1 Pre Filter
(1) The pre filter shall be of cleanable corrugated aluminum filter or cotton and synthetic media
pleat filter. The frame is constructed of high wet strength moisture resistant board.
(2) The offered pre filter shall be selected in accordance with the following requirements listed
below:
(a) Filter media shall have an average arrestance of 80-90 % conforming to ASHRAE 52-76. Filter
shall be classified G3, G4 or M5 in accordance with EN779:2012
(b) Maximum face velocity 2.5 m/s. (500 ft/min)
(c) Approximate initial pressure drop 4.0 mm. (0.16 in.) WG.
(d) Approximate final pressure drop 6.0 mm. (0.24 in.) WG.
(e) Approximate depth 100 mm. (4 in.), 50 mm. (2 in.), 25 mm. (1 in.) and 20 mm. (3/4 in.)
(3) Pre filter for small fan coil unit shall be 20 mm. thick, and have average arrestance not less than
65% efficiency.
(4) Pre filter for large air conditioning unit shall be 50 mm. thick, and have average arrestance of not
less than 80% efficiency.
2.2 Medium Filter
(1) The medium filter shall be extended surface pleat filter. The filter media is made of fine glass
fibers.
(2) The offered medium filter shall be selected in accordance with the requirements given in the
following
(a) Filter media shall have and average dust spot efficiency of 80-95% conforming to ASHRAE
52-76. Filter shall be classified F7 or F9 in accordance with EN779:2012
(b) Maximum face velocity 2.5 m/s. (500 ft/min)
(c) Approximate initial pressure drop 11.0 mm. (0.45 in.) WG.
(d) Approximate final pressure drop 22.0 mm. (0.90 in.) WG.
(e) Approximate depth 300 mm.
(f) The filter shall be U.L. Class 2 when tested according to U.L. standard 900
2.3 Gas & Odors Filter
(1) The gas & odors filter shall be side access filter housing constructed of 16 gauge galvanized steel
with flush metered and welded corners. The housing shall contained slide track for the mating
modules and gasket to air seals.
(2) The housing is equipped with two access door that are sealed with gaskets on the perimeter. The
doors are equipped with easy grip positive sealing knobs.
(3) The standard 50 mm. (2 in.) pre filter track and the gas & odors tray track are made of extruded
aluminum or galvanized steel and are gaskets to air seals.
(4) The gas & odors filter tray shall contain of Activate Carbon and Aluminociligate compound. The
compound is impregnation with Potassium Permanganate not less than 4% by weight.
(5) The pressure drop through the filter shall not exceed 12 mm. (0.47 in.) WG.
(6) The weight of gas and odor filter shall be calculated for approval prior to installation.
2.4 Filter Frame
(1) An air filter combination, as a filter bank, shall be mounted on the standard frame of the air filter.
(2) The stiffener shall be provided in order to increase the strength of the filter frame. The stiffener
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
(3) Air filter frame selection shall take into consideration the type of air filter, locations and
accessibility after installation has been completed. No air leakage shall occur at any joint of the
filter frame.
PART III EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 The pre filter or air filter for air handling unit shall be 50 mm. (2 in.) depth.
1.2 The pre filter or air filter for fan coil unit shall not be less than 20 mm. (3/4 in.) depth.
1.3 Air handling unit installed with medium filter shall consist of 50 mm. (2 in.) pre filter and 300 mm. (12
in.) medium filter in the 600 mm. (24 in.) filter housing depth.
1.4 Air handling unit installed with gas & odors filter shall consist of 50 mm. (2 in.) pre filter and standard
gas & odors filter not more than 750 filter housing depth.
2.1 All air purifier shall be tested in conjunction with the air moving equipment such as Air handling unit
and ventilation fans.
2.2 During the warranty period of gas and odor filters, dust particle shall be collected every 4 months for
laboratory characteristic test in order to determine performance of filter and increase appropriate
quantity if required. Cost incurred during this work shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
END
5.5.7 AUTOMATIC CONTROL DEVICES

PART I DESCRIPTION
1.1 Automatic control systems shall include all dampers, valves, thermostats and other control devices
shown on the Drawings. Control devices shall be connected complete so as to perform the indicated
functions and operate in the required sequence.
1.2 All control equipment shall be supplied by a firm whose establishment is widely recognized and whose
engagement in the installation and maintenance of this control equipment is on a regular basis.
2.1 The automatic control equipment shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(1) ASHRAE 135 : BACnet® - A Data Communication Protocol for
Building Automation and Control Networks
(2) EN 50081-1 : Generic Emissions: Residential, Commercial, and
Light Industrial Environments
(3) EN 50081 : Electromagnetic Emissions - Generic Emissions
Standard (3) NEC
2.3 All regulations and standards shall be of the latest issue unless governing authorities require an earlier issue.
2.4 The standards and codes as mention in 1. 2. 1 can be equivalent by another standards and codes, if it
3. Submittals
3.1 The contractor shall submit automatic control equipment’ s performance selection, catalog, material
lists and technical data for approval before installation.
3.2 The contractor shall submit full detail of equipment, function of work, size and method of installation
before the work starts.
4.1 All part of automatic control equipment shall be guaranteed by the contractor and/ or by the
manufacturer for at least two (2) year after handover.
PART II PRODUCT
1. Description
1.1 The quality and type of the instruments and enclosure shall be suitable for the climatic conditions of
the area where they will be used according to the manufacturer's recommendation. Care should be
taken in selection of instruments for hazardous areas, fire control purposes and outdoor use.
1.2 All automatic control equipment shall be completed with automatic control function and can be
interface to the building management system (BMS).
2. Component
2.1 Electronic sensors and controllers
(1) Electronic equipment shall be of the unit type with all elements readily removable for testing
and replacement. Equipment shall be enclosed in a suitable housing.
(2) Electronic sensor/controller shall be used to detect analogue signal (temperature humidity, etc.)
(3) Thermostats shall be of the proportional type unless two- position instruments are required in
these Specifications or diagrams.
(4) In general, duct thermostat shall be of a remote sensor type. Sensing elements shall be located
where they will respond to a representative temperature within the duct. Operating and adjusting
mechanisms or controller shall be enclosed in metal or phenolic resin cases and shall be located
on the outside of the ducts with covering. If the distance between the remote sensor and
controller ( operating/ adjusting) panel exceeds the recommended maximum length, a remote
transmitter, mounted on the outside of the duct, shall be used.
(5) Remote sensor shall be protected against damage. Capillary tubes or wires between sensor and
operating mechanisms shall be protected by conduit, moulding or flexible armour. Excess
capillary or wire lengths shall be neatly coiled and securely fastened out of the way. Capillaries
or wiring shall pierce thermal insulation at the smallest practicable number of points. They shall
be properly sealed wherever they pierce an insulation vapour seal.
(6) Pipe thermostats, generally, shall be of a remote sensor type. Pipe shall be provided with suitable
socket or thermo- well for sensor. Where the distance between the sensor and controller
( adjusting/ operating) panel exceeds the recommended maximum capillary or wire length, a
remote transmitter shall be used. Protection of capillary tubing and wires shall be as specified for
duct thermostats.
(7) Room thermostats shall be securely attached to suitable bases mounted on the walls or other
building surface. Each thermostat shall be located where shown or, if not shown where it will
respond to the average temperature in the room. Thermostats, generally, shall be mounted with
centerline 1.50 m. above the floor and shall not be mounted on outside walls or light partitions
between offices if other locations are more suitable. Thermostats mounted on outside walls shall
be provided with insulated bases.
(8) Room thermostats in which the adjusting mechanism is integral with the sensing element shall
have locked or concealed adjustment devices by means of which the operating points can be
adjusted through a range of not less than 5C, above and below the operating points specified.
External thermometers and knob or lever adjusting devices (lockable type) shall be furnished on
room thermostats.
(9) Every electronic temperature control system shall be provided with one or more transformers to
supply power for equipment operating at less than the normal lighting circuit voltage.
(10) Transformer shall be fed from the nearest air-conditioning switchboard.
(11) Control transformer shall have ample capacity to operate simultaneously all apparatus connected
to it and shall be capable of carrying a 25 per cent overload. Transformers shall be of the open
type with screw type terminals.
(12) Relay shall be of electronic or electric type and shall be totally enclosed. Capacity shall be
suitable for the loads controlled and contacts shall be as specified for thermostats.
2.2 Electric actuators and motors
(1) Controlled voltage shall be either 230V or 24V as specified on the Drawings.
(2) Valve and damper motors shall be of the proportional or on off type in accordance with
thermostat or controller and shall be quiet in operation. All motorized valves for air handlers
shall be returned to close position when fan motors being turned off.
(3) Operating speeds of valve and damper motors shall be selected or adjusted so that the motors
will remain in step with the controller without hunting, regardless of load variations. Motors
operating in sequence with other motors shall have adjustable operating ranges and starting points
to permit adjustment of the control sequence as required by the operating characteristics of the
system.
(4) Damper motors may be mounted either inside or outside of the duct or casing. If install outside,
they must be mounted on supporting plates that are completely outside the covering. On casings
or ducts handling cold air, the supporting plates shall be installed in a manner that will prevent
condensation on cold surface.
(5) Valve and damper motors shall be of rugged construction and quiet in operation. When operated
at rated voltage, each motor shall be capable of delivering not less than twice the torque required
by the valve or damper and shall withstand, without damage, continuous stalling.
(6) Motors shall function properly with a 10 per cent plus or minus change in line voltage supplying
to the equipment.
(7) Motors shall be of either the hydraulic or geared type. Motor-driven pinions and high speed gears
may be made of a suitable non-metallic composition to insure quiet operation, while others may
be of steel or bronze. Shaft shall be hardened steel, running through bronze, hardened steel,
nylon or other suitable sleeves or ball bearings. Lever arms shall be attached to motor shafts
with setscrews or other secure and adjustable means.
(8) Motors and gear trains shall be totally enclosed in dustproof housing of pressed steel or cast
metal with conduit entries. Gear trains shall be oil-immersed.
(9) Two- position motors shall be of the single direction, spring return ( stall) or reversing type.
Proportioning motors shall be of the reversing, shaded pole or capacitor induction type, capable
of stopping at any point in the cycle and starting in either direction from any points. Reversing
and proportioning motors shall have limit switches to limit the lever travelling in either direction.
Every valve motor shall be equipped with a spring yield device so that, when in the closed
position, it will maintain on the valve disc a pressure equivalent to that of the valve.
(10) Motor actuator shall be selected with sufficient close-off rating according to the actual system.
2.3 Flow Switch
(1) Flow switch shall detect the flow of water in pipeline. The detector shall be insert through a hole
in pipe and connected by a mechanical linkage to the delay mechanism. The construction shall
be watertight, dust-tight and corrosion resistant in a compact size. It should be suitable for use in
areas of high humidity. All detectors shall be UL list.
(a) Wetted parts : Brass
(b) Switch enclosure : NEMA 4X
(c) Pressure rating : 1,034 kPa. (150 PSI)

(d) Minimum Temp. rating : 0o C (32o F)
(e) Maximum Temp. rating : 104o C (220o F)
(f) Electrical : 10A 250 VAC
2.4 Variable Frequency Drive (Inverter)
(1) Control Specification
(a) Control Method : Sinusoidal pulse width modulation
(PWM)
(b) voltage control :
(c) Frequency Range : 6-60 Hz
(d) Start Frequency : 3 Hz
(e) Frequency Accuracy :  0.5% At 25C  10C
(f) Over current Capacity : 150% for one minute
(g) Frequency Setting Signal : 4-20 mA. DC.
(h) Acceleration/Deceleration Time : 10-150 Sec.
(2) AC Input 400V/3 Phase/50 Hz.,  5% for frequency fluctuation,  10% for voltage fluctuation.
(3) Protective-Function
(a) Over-current stall prevention
(b) Regenerative over-voltage stall prevention
(c) Over-current protection
(d) Regenerative over-voltage protection
(e) Overload protection
(f) Ground fault protection
(g) Instantaneous power failure protection
(h) Overload alarm
(i) Harmonic arrester or protection against interfering to other electronic/sensors
(j) Ambient operating temperature of 50°C
PART III EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 Installation shall follow the instruction manual from the manufacturer.
2.1 The Contractor shall require the control supplier to supervise and commission the control system. The
testing for the automatic control system include the following service :-
(1) Prior to commencement of work on site:-
Advise on the operation of the control system, identification and correct positioning of control
equipment and wiring connections.
(2) During the progress of the site work:-
Advise on the correct location and installation of controls and correct wiring on controls. Particular
attention shall be paid to the mounting of actuators on valves, dampers, and the correct linkages
form actuators to valves and dampers. The work shall be carried out on the basis of regular visits
throughout the Contract period.
(3) When the installation is completed :-
Commission the complete control system supplied under this section of these Specifications to
provide detailed operation and performance figures.
2.2 Provide all normal servicing and maintenance during the defects liability period for all equipment
provided under this Contract. In addition the following tests shall be carried out :-
(1) Insulation resistance
(2) Earthing continuity
(3) Polarity
(4) Continuity
(5) Phase proving tests to ensure that phases are connected in the specified manner and correct
sequence throughout.
(6) Earth fault loop inspection test.
2.3 Final commissioning of control systems after the Engineer’ s approval of the test records the systems
shall be finally commissioned.
END
5.5.8 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEM

PART I DESCRIPTION
1.1 This general specification and requirements describes all electrical equipment and installations
including connections there for the aforementioned systems.
1.2 All items of a similar nature shall be products of one manufacturer.
1.3 Unless items are factory-finished, one prime coat shall be provided on all raceways, hanger assemblies,
equipment and accessories furnished under this section. Prime coating on steel and iron shall be
synthetic red lead, or other materials as directed by the Engineer.
1.4 Scratches in factory-finished surfaces shall be touched up to match the original. Finished coat colors
shall be defined by the Engineer.
2.1 The electrical and control works shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(1) IEC 60034-1 : Rotating electrical machines - Part 1: Rating and
performance
(2) IEC 60034-12 : Rotating electrical machines - Part 12: Starting
performance of single-speed three-phase cage
induction motors
(3) IEC 60335-2-104 : Household and similar electrical appliances - Safety -
Part 2-104: Particular requirements for appliances to
recover and/or recycle refrigerant from air
conditioning and refrigeration equipment
(4) IEC 60364-1 Edition 4.0 : Electrical installations of buildings - Part 1:
Fundamental principles, assessment of general
characteristics, definitions
(5) IEC 60947-2 : Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 2:
Circuit-breakers
Switches, Disconnectors, Switch-disconnectors and
fuse-combination units
(7) IEC 60947-4-1 : Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 4-1:

Contactors and motor-starter – Electromechanical
contactors and motor-starters
Ancillary equipments
(9) IEC 60228 : Conductors of Insulated cables
(10) IEC 60502-1 : Power cables with extruded insulation and their
accessories for rated voltage from 1 kV – Part 1:
Cables for rated voltage of 1 kV
(11) IEC 60332 : Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
under defined conditions – Part 2: Test Procedure
and Requirements
(13) IEC 60754 : Tests on gases evolved during combustion of electric
cables
(14) TIS 11 : Standard for PVC insulated copper cables
(15) BS 6387 : Specification for performance requirements for
cables required to maintain circuit integrity under fire
conditions.
(16) ANSI C80.6 : Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)
(17) ANSI C80.4 : Conduit fitting
(18) E.I.T. Standard : Electrical Installation Standard of Thailand
2.2 The entire system and its basic components shall conform in all respects to the standards and MEA
standard.
issue.
3. Submittals
3.1 The contraction shall submit electrical and control works performance selection, catalog, material lists
and technical data request for approval before installation.
3.2 The Contractor shall submit the installation method and details for approval before installation.
4.2 All parts of electrical and control works shall be guaranteed by the contractor and/or by the
manufacturer for at least two (2) years after handover.
PART II PRODUCT
1. Description
1.1 An electrical contractor will be responsible for bringing in the supply cable or wiring to the Contractor's
distribution/control panels (or junction boxes or enclosed circuit breakers or safety switches) at the
locations indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall connect the cable from the indicated location
to the isolator or circuit breaker in the panels or to the equipment. The connections and installation
thereof shall form a part of the Contract.
1.2 The equipment rating shall be based on the following electrical system:
(1) System Voltage : 400V/230V
(2) Rated Frequency : 50 Hz.

1.3 All electrical conductors such as busbars, cables, wires, terminals, etc. shall be followed standard
specification in “SECTION 5-3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM”.
2. Component
2.1 Motor Control Centers
(1) This provision covers the design and construction of motor control center of floor or wall
mounting type.
(2) The requirement of electrical characteristic for equipment in Motor Control Centers shall be as
followed:
(a) Voltage and Frequency : As specified in item 2.1.2
(b) Wiring Requirement : 3-phase, 4-wires with Earth or 1-phase,
2-wires with Earth in accordance with type of
the equipment
(c) Insulation Class : 600V (Minimum)
(d) Rated Continuous Current : As indicated on Drawings
(e) Rated Short Circuit Current : As indicated on Drawings (at 415 V.)
If ratings of the equipment in the motor control center are not indicated on the Drawings and in
these Specifications, they shall be calculated in compliance with IEC Standard and/or EIT standard.
(3) The Construction of Motor Control Center (MCC)
(a) Enclosure of the motor control center shall be made of electro-galvanized steel sheet
(minimum thickness of 2 mm.) and finished with epoxy-powder coating (minimum 60 micron)
colored to the Engineer’s acceptance. The enclosure shall consist of four compartments via
busbar, cable, terminal and control unit compartment, which shall be separated by steel
sheet barrier.
(b) Each control unit compartment shall be the combination of starter, circuit breaker and other
accessories for each motor. The unit shall be completely enclosed and isolated from all
other units. Unit side plates shall be permanently attached so much so that cannot be
accidentally discarded. Each unit shall have a single door mounted on removable pin hinges.
Each door shall be provided with a removable panel suitable for mounting push button,
select or switches and pilot lamp. The door of each control unit shall be interlocked so that
it cannot be opened while the circuit breaker is in "ON" position.
(c) Efficient vent opening shall be provided on the panel. The opening shall be screened so as
to be insect-proof.
(d) Each panel shall undergo a treatment of degreasing and de-rusting by electro-galvanized or
other equivalent method for anti-rust and shall be coated by an oven-baked enamel paint
finished.
(e) All doors shall be provided with dust-protection gaskets of neoprene or any other approved
materials, positively retained in a rebate. All doors shall be equipped with locks operated
by keys.
(f) Plastic nameplate with engraved letters of at least 3 mm thick shall be placed at ever circuit
breaker and starter indicating their uses.
(4) Circuit Breakers
(a) Moulded case circuit breakers shall be applied in the system which shall comply with IEC
60947-1, IEC 60947-2 standard with appropriate rated short-circuit breaking capacity at 415V.
The short circuit performance categories shall depended on the application of the breaker.
All MCCB shall be of triple-pole or double-pole as required, thermal magnetic type, with
magnetic adjustable for MCCB’s rated at 400A and above, independent manual operated to
provide quick-make, quick-break, trip free mechanism so that the unit cannot be held closed
against overload and short-circuit.
(b) All circuit breakers shall be equipped with operating handles.
(5) Motor Starters
(a) Motor starters shall comply with IEC 60947-4-1 standard equipped with AC3 duty magnetic
contactors.
(b) Thermal overload relays with auxiliary contacts for shut down and monitored shall be
provided. The relays shall be manually preset/reset.
(c) Phase failure relays with auxiliary contact for shut down and monitored shall be equipped
with the starter.
(d) At least 2 normally open and 2 normally closed free contacts for both starting and tripping
signals shall be provided. These free contacts shall be wired to the terminal blocks for
remote indicator.
(e) Direct-on-line starters are allowable for various motor sizes up to 7.5 kW (11 HP) and Y-D
starter shall be used for motor bigger than 7.5 kW (11 HP).
(f) Motor bigger than 22 kW (30 HP) shall be equipped with closed circuit transition Y-D starter.
(6) Measuring Instrument and Current Transformer
(a) All metering shall be the flush-mounted type with a dimension approximately
96 x 96 mm. accuracy classes 1.5 or better. The overload capacity is 1.20 times of the normal
continuous load, except for motor circuit where the overload capacity of ammeter shall be
2 times the normal continuous load. The voltmeters shall be provided with selector switch.
(b) Current transformers shall be the single phase insulated type and can withstand a continuous
overload of 20%. The accuracy class of the transformer shall be class 1 for metering winding
and class 3 for instrument winding. The insulation of the current transformer shall be of class
600 volts.
(7) Busbar & Busbar Holder
(a) Busbar shall be of bare copper conductor (purity 98%) the size and ampere city of bustard
shall comply with DIN standard and also shall comply with Authority regulation.
(b) Busbar spacing shall comply with Authority regulation.
(c) Busbar holders shall be of Fiberglass reinforced polyester or epoxy resin (flame-proof
material) and shall withstand the short-circuit stresses.
(d) Each busbar shall have color identification, conforming to the color coding of the cable.
(8) Control Wiring
(a) Control wire in the motor control center shall be flexible annealed copper wire 750V PVC
insulated.
(b) The size of control wire shall be as follow:-
(i) 2.5 mm2 for voltage/current circuit
(ii) 1.5 mm2 for control circuit
(c) All control wiring shall be run in cable trunk or flexible conduit and no connecting.
(d) Wire marker shall be applied at both ends of the control wiring.
2.2 Motors
(1) All motors shall comply with IEC 60034-1, IEC 60034-12 standards or approved equivalent. They
shall have ample margin on their rating for the required duty with due allowance for ambient
temperature. All motors shall be induction type suitable for 50 Hz. Motors shall be of totally
enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage screen-protect drip-proof type. High starting torque motors and
low speed machines shall be started by reduced voltage starters.
(2) The rated kW shall be at least 1.15 times the maximum power required.
(3) The efficiency rating of motor shall be high efficiency or IE-2 type.
(4) Control devices shall be provided for all motors. Single-or double-pole snap switches, specifically
designed for alternating current operation only, may be used as manual controllers for single-
phase motors having a current rating not in excess of 80 percent of the switch rating. Automatic
control devices such as thermostats may control the starting and stopping of motors directly,
provided the devices used are designed for that purpose and have such a rating. Otherwise,
magnetic starters shall be used, with the automatic control device actuating the control circuit.
(5) Overload protection shall be provided with running-over current (overload) protection in
accordance with the NEC. The overload protection device shall be provided either integrally with
the motor or controller, or shall be mounted in separate enclosure. Unless otherwise specified,
the protective device shall be of the manually reset type.
2.3 Safety Switch
(1) The safety switches shall be either Fused Safety Switches or Non-Fused Safety Switches as shown
on the Drawings or as required.
(2) The switches shall be heavy duty type equipped with switch blades, a quick-make and quick-
break operating handle and mechanism which shall be an integral part of the box. Service door
of each safety switch shall be interlocked so that it cannot be opened while the switch is in "ON"
position.
(3) Current rating of the switches shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
(4) All fuses for "fused safety switch" shall be of the high rupturing capacity (HRC) type of voltage
rating up to 600 volts. Current rating shall be as specified on the Drawings.
(5) The switches shall be IP31 general purpose enclosure with knockouts unless
otherwise noted or required. Switches located outdoor or in wet areas shall have IP55 enclosures.
2.4 Low Voltage Cable
(1) All cables shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor installations, wet and dry locations, exposed
to sunlight, in conduit, in cable tray as appropriate.
(2) The conductors shall be unbroken for the full length of the reels.
(3) Type of the low voltage cables shall be followed standard specification in “ SECTION 5- 3
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM”
(4) PVC insulated cable (THW)
(a) The cables shall be followed standard specification in “SECTION 5-3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM”
(5) Fire Resistant Cable (FR)
(a) Fire Resistant (FR) cables shall be followed standard specification in “SECTION 5-3
(6) Control Cable (CVV and CVVs)
(a) All control cable shall be suitable for installation in wet and dry locations. The conductor
shall be of soft or annealed strand uncoated copper wire.
(b) The control cable shall be followed standard specification in “SECTION 5-3 ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM”
2.5 Conduits and accessories

(1) The steel conduits and accessories shall be followed standard specification in “SECTION 5-3
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM”.
(2) The conduits shall have to be defined in SI units as on the drawings. And the below table shall
be the comparison of diameters of IMC conduit in inches and in mm.
Conduit Diameter in 1 1 2 3
½ ¾ 1 2 3 4
Inches ¼ ½ ½ ½
Conduit Diameter in mm 10
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 90
0
2.6 Boxes and Accessories

(1) Boxes shall be provided in the conduit work for cable connections, cable pulling and installations
of Fan switches and installation of Thermostats.
(2) All boxes provided in the conduit work shall be followed standard specification in “SECTION 5-3
(3) Conduit outlet boxes, for fan switches, for thermostat, etc. , shall be of hot- dip galvanized steel
complete with adjustable lug, ample knockouts, and brass earth terminals fitted in the base.
2.7 Equipment grounding
(1) Grounding of all equipment shall be done by means of separate green insulated equipment
grounding conductor for each feeder or each branch circuit.
(2) All metal parts and non-carrying current of motor control center shall be grounded.
(3) All grounding work shall be followed standard specification in “SECTION 5-3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM”
PART III EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 The works shall be executed to completion and in conformity with the Drawings and these
Specifications.
1.2 Motor control centers.
(1) All control centers shall be mounted 1.80 m. above the finished floor level and in accordance
with manufacturer recommendation.
(2) The Contractor shall supply, adapt and install a steel work at the top and/or the bottom the
equipment to permit where necessary the incoming or outgoing of the cables, conduits, and wires.
1.3 Low Voltage Cables
(1) In general, the feeder cables shall be run in conduits or in cable tray and shall be run concealed
in ceiling, floor, and wall or as indicated on the Drawings.
(2) No wire shall be pulled into the conduit system until it is complete in all details.
(3) Lubricant shall be used to facilitate wire pulling. Lubricants shall be approved for
using with the insulation specified.
(4) Splicing of wires and cables shall be allowed only in the proper junction box with an approved
method of insulation. No splice shall be made in conductors for instrument circuits or control
circuits.
(5) Splicing of large wires and cables shall be by compression type, solderless wire connectors
indented by special hydraulic tool. The splice shall be insulated with plastic insulation tape such
as Scotch Brand No.35. Thickness of the tape shall not be less than three layers or at least the
same thickness as the wire insulation.
(6) Compression type, solderless lugs indented by proper tool shall be used at the end of all wires
and cables and shall be connected to the screw type terminals of the equipment and to the bus
bars.
(7) The cut end of cables shall be treated to prevent seepage of water into the cable. When unreeling
cable are from the cable drums, special care shall be taken to prevent damage to the cables.
When removing the cover of the drum, care shall be taken to prevent damage to the cable
sheath.
(8) The contractor shall provide all necessary materials for installation of the cables, such as
grounding lead wires, compression type terminals, metal fitting, bolts and nuts including cable
identification and felt packing to be inserted between cable and cleats.
(9) The unoccupied space in cable knockouts and conduits after cable insertion shall be filled, with
duct seal to prevent insects and small animals from entering the equipment housing.
(10) All cables shall be identified by means of cable tags fitted to each termination point and at 30
meter intervals along cable route.
(11) Cables shall be laid in one continuous length.
(12) Conductors with compression type terminals and insulation cover shall be arranged in a neat
manner on terminal box or equivalent terminals. The contractor shall install plastic cable tie-
wraps as required to neatly group cables and to keep the weight of the cable from damaging
terminations.
(13) No bare wires are to be exposed or shall have "backed off" due to the application of pressure nor
shall it happen that the connector will loosen due to cycling or vibration.
1.4 Conduits
(1) All conduits shall be as specified herein with a minimum size of 15 mm. unless otherwise noted.
(2) Where the conduits enter the cabinets and equipment, conduit bushings and double locknuts
shall be used.
(3) The end of all conduits shall be tightly plugged to exclude dust and moisture while the buildings
are under construction.
(4) The bending radius of the conduit shall not be less than six times the outer diameter of the
conduits. The total bending angles of conduits shall not exceed 360 degrees in any one run.
(5) The conduits used shall not have any internal and external defects. Each end of the conduit
shall be made smooth with the conduit reamer to prevent damage to the wire.
(6) A short piece of flexible metal conduit shall be used for connecting all motors, vibrating
equipment, and junction boxes and as otherwise specified.
(7) The wiring capacity of conduits shall be as Table of the current edition of the local Regulations
and as specified on the Drawings.
(8) Conduit shall be run neatly on the surface or buried within the carcass of the buildings as indicated
on the Drawings and in these Specifications. Conduit shall be run at least 0.15 m. clear of plumbing
and mechanical services.
(9) Conduit shall be supported at regular intervals not exceeding 2.5 m. on horizontal runs and 1.5
m. on vertical runs.
(10) The length of thread on the ends of the conduit shall be fixed to the structure or the building
independently of the conduit.
(11) The length of thread on the ends of the conduit shall suit the length of internal thread in the
end of the fitting or accessory. Excess length of thread will not be permitted.
(12) Sleeves in floor slabs or beams for conduits shall be made of galvanized sheet steel, securely
fastened in position. Floor sleeves shall be with their top and set at least 5 cm. above finished
floor. Sleeves in beams shall be finished flush with the surface of the beam. Sleeves in electric
rooms shall be filled with approved materials to provide a fire barrier. Both used and unused
sleeves shall be filled.
(13) Provide all openings on floors and walls necessary for cable trays and wireway unless indicated
as being provided by others.
2.1 All motor control centers shall be not only tested at the manufactory but also checked at the site for
the follow performances:
(1) Insulation of all cables
(2) Operating and protecting of the equipment
(3) Grounding
2.2 All cables fed to the equipment shall be meggered phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground before the
equipment is connected and phase-to-ground after the equipment is connected and all connection
are tapped.
2.3 Cable insulation resistance tests shall be performed by using a 500 Vdc megger on the 400 volts system.
Insulation resistance shall be not less than one mega-ohm per 1000 volts rating.
END
5.5.9 FIRE BARRIER FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEM

PART I DESCRIPTION
1.1 After erection of materials and equipment through wall and opening had been completed, it is the
responsibility of the Contractor to fill up voids and openings with fire resistant materials which conform
to NEC article 300-21 and ASTM to protect fire or smoke from spreading out from one room to another
room through these voids and openings.
2.1 The fire barrier shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(1) NEC 300-21 : Spread of Fire or Products of Combustion
(2) ASTM E814 : Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration
Fire Stops
(3) UL 1479 : Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
issue.
3. Submittals
3.1 The contractor shall submit material selector, catalog, material lists, technical data and method of
installation request for approval.
4.1 All material and installation or barrier work shall be guaranteed by the contractor for at least two (2)
year after handover.
PART II PRODUCT
1. Description
1.1 The applied to wall considered to be a fire or acoustical protection wall, unless otherwise specified.
Cover or escutcheon plates shall be provided, wherever exposed, and shall be neatly placed to the
1.2 The fire resistant rating of the material shall be in accordance with the fire rating of construction walls
or slabs and shall be not less than 2 hours.
2. Component
2.1 The fire barrier materials shall have properties as the following
(1) The fire barrier materials shall be of a minimum 2-hour fire resistant rating or higher in accordance
with type of construction walls or slabs.
2.2 Materials of fire barrier work shall be followed standard specification in “SECTION 5-6 FIRE PROTECTION
SYSTEM”
PART III EXECUTION
1. Installation
1.1 At every voids and openings, fire barrier materials shall be installed where:
(1) Every voids, sleeves, and openings appear on wall, floor, beam and shaft, provided for piping and
raceway installation, must be sealed after the erection work had been completed.
(3) Voids between electrical conduits and sleeves.
1.2 Execution method of fire barrier work shall be followed standard specification in “SECTION 5-6 FIRE
PROTECTION SYSTEM”
2.1 The testing method shall be provided from the manufacturer.
END
5.5.10 PAINTING AND COLOR CODE

PART I DESCRIPTION
1.1 The following clauses specify the material or paint system, preparation and application requirements
for painting of all equipment, housing, vessels, containers, pipelines, pipe supports, and other structural
steelworks which are not protected by galvanizing or an approved protective coating.
1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for any expense incurred for cleaning, brushing and painting work.
1.3 When surface cleaning, blasting and painting is done in the Contractor's factory, such preparation and
painting shall be done with the prior consent of the Engineer. If necessary, the Contractor shall arrange
for presentation the Engineer for inspection at his factory.
1.4 All painting shall be completed before applying of pipe insulation and commissioning.
1.5 Prior to equipment installation all metal surfaces shall be treated with anti-corrosive materials and/or
painted according to these Specifications.
1.6 The preparation and application of the painting materials shall adhere strictly to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
1.7 The equipment or materials that have previously been treated with anticorrosive materials and painted
from the factory must be inspected for their workmanship. Any defects, such as scratches, peels and
rust shall be repaired and repainted to the approval of the Engineer.
1.8 During the progress of the painting work, the Contractor shall avoid spotting of the floors, walls, and
other adjacent equipment. All spotting, if any, shall be cleaned immediately. Any damages, which may
result from painting shall be under the Contractor's responsibility.
2.1 The fire barrier shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(1) ANSI A13.1 : Standard Pipe Marker Color Codes
(2) ASTM D4228-05 : Standard Practice for Qualification of Coating
Applicators for Application of Coatings to Steel
Surfaces
issue.
3. Submittals
3.1 The contractor shall submit material selector, catalog, material lists, technical data and method of
installation request for approval.
4.1 All material and installation of painting shall be guaranteed by the contractor for at least two (2) year
after handover.
PART II PRODUCT
1. Surface Preparation and Cleaning
1.1 Metal or ferrous Metal Surfaces
(1) Rust at welding joints and other defects shall be removed by scraping. Wire brushes or sandpaper
shall be used to clean the surfaces and to remove rust. Sand-blasting may be used to remove
loose rust and other foreign substances. Mordant solution such as thinner, gas, turpentine shall
be used to remove grease, oil or organic coating. Then the surfaces shall be cleaned whitewater
and thoroughly dried or blow-dried.
(2) The application of prime coats, which follows shall adhere strictly to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
(3) Old paint coats shall be removed by scraping before application of new paint.
1.2 Non-Ferrous Metal Surface
Non-ferrous metal surface shall be cleaned with sandpaper and turpentine before prime coating. Wire-
brushing or sand-blasting shall not to be used.
1.3 Zinc and Zinc-Annealed Surfaces
Before prime coating, grease and dirt shall be removed with proper solution.
1.4 Copper, Lead, Plastic and Brass Surfaces
Before the application of prime coats, the surface shall be cleaned with sand paper, then proper
solution shall be used to remove dust.
PART III EXECUTION

1. Brush or Spray Painting
1.1 Each paint coat shall be left until completely dry before subsequent applications.
1.2 Painting can be classified into 2 coats :-
(1) Prime coat for rust prevention and/or adhesion of the finishing coats.
(2) Finishing coat for final appearance or for symbolizing the system codes. Types of
paint used shall depend on the material as well as on the environment.
2. Paint System
2.1 For Equipment
(1) All of the manufacturer's applied coating or painting surfaces of all equipment such as pump,
valve, and other accessories or fittings, etc., which have been damaged, or have been applied
with inappropriate paint system for the services and environment of the equipment, shall be
corrected or removed and repainted at the Contractor's expenses.
(2) The above requirements shall also be applied to all damaged galvanized surfaces of the
equipment and materials.
(3) Paint system for equipment, valves, etc. shall be of the same grade of paint system specified for
pipe work that those equipment, valves, etc. are connected, except that the surface cleaning may
be mechanical wire brushing.
2.2 For Vessel
Products vessel which are constructed of stainless steel material shall have their surface polished
internally and externally as specified under other section. No painting is required on uninsulated
stainless steel and galvanized steel surface. However, for vessel externals of carbon steel components
shall have their surfaces treated and coated as specified below for the carbon steel vessels.
(1) Uninsulated Vessel of Black Steel
(a) Exterior
Surface Preparation - Abrasive blasted to a Near white grade
SSPC-SP-10 (Sa 2 1/2)
Prime Coat - Zinc Ethyl Silicate Coating 3 mils (75 micron)
DFT
Second Coat - High build epoxy 5 mils (125 micron) DFT
Finish Coat - Polyurethane 2 mils (50 micron) DFT
(b) Interior
Surface Preparation - Same as exterior
Prime Coat - High build epoxy 5 mils (125 micron) DFT
Second Coat - High build epoxy 5 mils (125 micron) DFT
(2) Insulated Vessel of Galvanized Steel
(a) Exterior
Surface Preparation - Solvent cleaning and degreasing
Primer Coat - PVB Zinc chromate self etching primer or
wash primer 0.4 mil (10 microns) DFT
Second Coat - Chlorinated rubber based primer 3.4 mils
(2x40 microns) DFT
(b) Interior - Not required
2.3 For Piping and Material Other Than Equipment Vessel

Type of Surface Normal Area Humid/Corrosive Area
st st
(a) Black steel pipe, 1 coat: Read lead primer. 1 coat: Epoxy read lead
Black steel sheet, primer.
nd
Switchboard, 2 coat: Read lead primer. 2nd coat: Epoxy read lead
Panel primer.
3 coat: Alkyd finishing paint. 3rd coat: Epoxy finishing paint.
rd
4th coat: Alkyd finishing paint. 4th coat: Epoxy finishing paint.
(b) Galvanized steel 1st coat: Wash primer. 1st coat: Wash primer.
pipe, Galvanized 2nd coat: Zinc chromate primer. 2nd coat: Epoxy read lead primer.
steel sheet duct 3rd coat: Alkyd finishing paint. 3rd coat: Epoxy finishing paint.
work exposed to 4th coat: Alkyd finishing paint. 4th coat: Epoxy finishing paint.
view. If color coding
is not specified,
bronze color shall
be used for finishing
coat
(c) PVC pipe, 1st coat: Wash primer. 1st coat: Wash primer.
Plastic pipe 2nd coat: chlorinate rubber 2nd coat: chlorinate rubber
finishing paint. finishing paint.
3 coat: chlorinate rubber 3rd coat: chlorinate rubber
rd
finishing paint. finishing paint.

st
(d) Cast-iron pipe 1 coat: Coal tar Epoxy. 1st coat: Coal tar Epoxy.
nd
inclusive of 2 coat: Coal tar Epoxy. 2nd coat: Coal tar Epoxy.
underground pipe
(e) Copper tube, 1st coat: Wash primer. 1st coat: Wash primer.
Stainless steel sheet, 2 coat: Alkyd finishing paint. 2nd coat: Alkyd finishing paint.
nd
Aluminium steel sheet, 3rd coat: Alkyd finishing paint. 3rd coat: Alkyd finishing paint.
Light alloy, Lead
(f) Closed cell foam - -
plastic. Use color
tape strips to
indicate color codes.
(g) Outdoor kitchen 1st coat: As recommend by
exhaust duct manufacturer.
2nd coat: As recommend by
manufacturer.
3rd coat: Heat resistant 100oC
alkyd finishing paint
Note: In case where there is a paint repair resulting from welding, cutting, drilling, polishing, or
threading, zinc rich primer shall be used prior to the application of finishing paint.
3. Color Codes
3.1 All pipes shall be color-coded.
3.2 In the electrical system, color coding shall be only at the conduit clamps and the cover of junction
boxes.
3.3 Strip sizes of color codes (for insulated pipes) and the letter size are as follows :-
Pipe Size Width of Color Strip Letter Size
(mm.) (inch.) (mm.) (mm.)
20 - 32 (3/4”-1.1/4”) 200 12
40 - 50 (1.1/2”-2”) 200 20
65 - 150 (2.1/2”-6”) 300 30
200 – 250 (8”-10”) 300 65
300 and larger (12” 500 100
3.4 Location of Color codes, symbols and arrows indicating directions are as follows:-
(1) Every 6-meter (20 ft.) internal of straight line pipe.
(2) Near all valves.
(3) Every change of direction and/or separation.
(4) Where pipes passing through walls or floors.
(5) Near service pipe.
4. Color Codes of Various Systems
4.1 The identifications previously mentioned shall have colours as follows :-
Description Letters Colour Colour
Code Symbol
(1) Chilled water supply CHS Green White
(2) Chilled water return CHR Green White
(3) Chilled water reverse return CHRR Green White
(4) Condenser water supply CDS Orange White
(5) Condenser water return CDR Orange White
(6) Conduit for electrical Blue -
4.2 The Engineer will make final selection of colors. All uninsulated pipes shall be painted all over the
pipe surface.
END
5.5.11 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING
PART I DESCRIPTION
1.1 All water pipes shall be cleaning & flushing with clear water before testing.
1.2 All air ducts shall be cleaning inside before testing.
1.3 Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer. The Contractor shall give timely notice and
furnish the Engineer the required certificates of testing for review. The cost of all tests including the
supply of instruments shall be paid by the Contractor.
1.4 Work which fails to meet the requirements of any test or does not meet the requirements of the
contract documents shall be considered defective and shall be promptly corrected or removed from
the site.
1.5 Test instruments shall be tested for accuracy by an approved laboratory or by the manufacturer.
Instruments and appliances required for tests shall be furnished by the Contractor. If gauges,
thermometers, etc. which are to be left permanently installed are used for the tests, they shall not be
installed until just prior to the tests to avoid possible changes in calibration.
1.6 The Contractor shall submit the star-up and test report form to the Engineer for approval before
starting-up and testing each system.
PART II PRODUCT
PART III EXECUTION
1. Testing for Equipment
shall be made to assure that all equipment will operate either the required performance. Report forms
to contain following minimum data listings shall include design and actual conditions for each Item
mentioned below:
1.1 Air Handling Units and Fan Coil Units
(1) Date and time of test.
(2) Air handling unit and fan coil unit make, type, name and serial number.
(3) Fan rpm.
(4) Pressure drop across filter
(7) Rated motor amperage, starter number and ampere rating.
(8) Recirculated air CFM
(9) Outside air CFM
(10) Outside conditions (DB and WB)
(11) Return air conditions (DB and WB)
(12) Entering coil conditions(mixing) (DB and WB)
(13) Leaving coil conditions (DB and WB)
During test run, the air filters of testing sets shall be used.
1.2 Exhaust Fans
(3) Fan rpm
(7) Exhaust air CFM
1.3 Exhaust Fans
(3) Fan rpm
(7) Re-circulated air CFM
2. Testing for Pipe Works
2.1 Water piping shall be tested with water pressure of not less than specified or 1 ½ times the maximum
working pressure, whichever is greater, at the lowest point in the system. Care shall be taken to avoid putting
excessive pressure on safety devices, etc. These delicate control mechanisms shall be removed during the
tests to prevent shock damage. The system shall be tested when water temperatures and average ambient
temperatures are approximately equal and constant. Test pressure shall be maintained for not less than 30
minutes without an appreciable drop after the force pump has been disconnected.
2.2 Piping may be tested a section at time in order to facilitate the construction.
2.3 Leaks in screwed fittings shall be corrected by remaking the joints. Leaks in welded joints shall be cut
out and re-welded. Caulking of leaks will not be permitted.
2.4 After pressure tests have been made, the entire water-distribution system to be sterilized shall be
thoroughly flushed with water until all entrained dirt and mud have been removed before introducing
chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine or hypochlorite. The
chlorinating material shall provide a dosage of not less than 50 PPM and shall be introduced into the
system in an approved manner. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe long enough to destroy
all nonspore-forming bacteria. Except where a shorter period is approved, the retention time shall be
at least 24 hours and shall produce not less than 10 PPM of chlorine at the extreme end of the system
of the retention period. All valves in the system being sterilized shall be opened and closed several
2.5 The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is reduced to less than 0.2
PPM. During the flushing period all valves and faucets shall be turned on and off several times.
3. Testing for Duct Work
3.1 High pressure blower with control damper shall be used for test apparatus. Air for testing shall be
introduced into the system through a suitable filter and dryer to exclude all impurities.
3.2 A flow measuring device shall be of an orifice assembly consisting of straightening vanes and an orifice
plate mounted in a straight tube with properly located pressure taps. Each orifice assembly is
accurately calibrated with its own calibration curve, which shall also be submitted to the Engineer for
approval. Pressure and flow readings shall be taken with U-tube manometers.
3.3 Test procedures shall be of audible test with a pressure of 50 mm WG in excess of designed duct
operating pressure. All joints for audible leaks shall be surveyed and each leak shall be marked and
repaired after shutting down the blower. After all audible leaks have been sealed, the orifice section
with a pressure of 25% in excess of designed duct operating pressure.
3.4 Total allowable leakage shall conform to the first edition of "HVAC Air Duct, Leakage Test Manual" of
SMACNA standard. When partial sections of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage
for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage.
4. Testing for Electrical Works
4.1 The electrical installation shall be functionally tested and checked to insure that all equipment,
devices and wiring have been properly installed and will operate as intended.
4.2 The conduit system shall be checked to ensure that it has been installed for safe and reliable
operation. Special attention shall be given to ensure NEC or approved equivalent requirements are
satisfied in weatherproof enclosures, sealed location and sealed pouring. Conduit drawings, supports,
fittings covers, etc. shall be checked.
4.3 Insulation resistance tests shall be performed using a 500-volt DC megger on the 400-volt system.
Insulation resistance shall not be less than one mega-ohm per 1,000-volt rating.
4.4 All electrical tests of equipment shall be recorded. A copy of the record shall be furnished to the
Engineer.
4.5 Power cables, 600-volt rated shall be meggered phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground before the
equipment is connected and phase-to-ground after the equipment is connected.
All connections are taped with color code tape.
4.6 All motor control centers equipment shall be visually inspected, and where possible, test-operated to
ensure that all components have been furnished and installed and will operate in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
4.7 The tests shall be for fuses, meters, current transformers, potential transformer, overload relays, wiring,
connections for power, control, grounding, etc.
4.8 The motor control center buses shall be meggered phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.
4.9 Each starter and contactor shall be test-operated.
4.10 The actual running current of the motor shall be checked against the nameplate current to insure that
the motor is not overloaded.
4.11 Each adjustable circuit breaker shall be set in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Each
motor shall be meggered phase-to-ground.
4.12 Each motor shall be checked for proper lubrication, shaft alignment, electrical connections, ground
connection, control circuit operation, space heater, drain operation, etc. Each motor shall be "bumped"
to verify proper rotation.
4.13 Ground resistance shall be checked, using Megger Ground Resistance Test Instrument. The maximum
resistance to grounding shall be 2 ohms.
5. Testing for Automatic Control System
5.1 The Contractor shall require the control supplier to supervise and commission the control system. The
testing for the automatic control system include the following service :-
(1) Prior to commencement of work on site:-
Advise on the operation of the control system, identification and correct positioning of control
equipment and wiring connections.
(2) During the progress of the site work:-
Advise on the correct location and installation of controls and correct wiring on controls. Particular
attention shall be paid to the mounting of actuators on valves, dampers, and the correct linkages
form actuators to valves and dampers. The work shall be carried out on the basis of regular visits
throughout the Contract period.
(3) When the installation is completed :-
Commission the complete control system supplied under this section of these Specifications to
provide detailed operation and performance figures.
5.2 Provide all normal servicing and maintenance during the defects liability period for all equipment
provided under this Contract. In addition the following tests shall be carried out:-
(1) Insulation resistance
(2) Earthing continuity
(3) Polarity
(4) Continuity
(5) Phase proving tests to ensure that phases are connected in the specified manner and correct
sequence throughout.
(6) Earth fault loop inspection test.
5.3 Final commissioning of control systems after the Engineer’s approval of the test records the systems
shall be finally commissioned.
END
5.5.12 APPROVED MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS

PART I DESCRIPTION
items:-
(2) All small items not specifically mentioned but necessary for a complete installation, are to
be estimated, based on good, acceptable practice and proper workmanship.
(1) Split Type Air Conditioner Unit
 Carrier
 Trane
 York
 Daikin
 Or Equivalent
(2) Precision Air conditioner
 Stulz
 Liebert
 Citec
 Denco
 Airedal
 APC
 Or Equivalent
(3) Ventilation Fan
 Panasonic
 Kruger
 Wolter
 Greenheck
 Or Equivalent
(4) Copper Tube and Fitting
 Kembla
 Mueller
 Cambridge Lee
 Or Equivalent
(5) Grille, Diffuser
 Komfort Flow
 Flow Thru
 Stream Air
 Aero Grille
 Escoflow
 Price
 Or Equivalent
(6) Jet Nozzle Diffuser
 Krantz
 Trox
 Titus
 Price
 Or Equivalent
(7) Galvanize steel sheet
 Singha
 Thai Galvanized Steel
 Truzinc
 Or Equivalent
(8) Pre-Fabrication Duct
 K-Duct
 ESCO Duct
 Arrow Duct
 Or Equivalent
(9) Close Cell Elastomeric Insulation
 Aeroflex
 Armaflex
 Maxflex
 Kflex
 Or Equivalent
(10) Fibre Glass Duct Insulation
 Mircofiber
 Siam Fibre Glass
 Thai insulation
 Or Equivalent
(11) Air Filter
 American Air Filter
 Cambridge
 Air Guard
 Camfil farr
 AFPRO
 Luftfilter
 Or Equivalent
(12) Thermometer & Pressure Gauge
 Trerice
 Weksler
 Weiss
 Wika
 Winters
 Or Equivalent
(13) Automatic Control Equipment
 Honey Well
 Johnson Control
 Seimens
 Belimo
 Azbil
 Schneider
 Or Equivalent
(14) Fire Damper and Smoke Damper
 Green Heck
 Ruskin
 Pottorff
 Metal-Fab
 Or Equivalent
 Mason
 Tozen
 Metraflex
 Kinetics
 Or Equivalent
(16) Electric Motor
 Siemens
 AEG
 ABB
 Crompton
 Brooks
 Or Equivalent
(17) Electrical Wire
 Thai Yazaki
 Phelps Dodge
 BKK Cable
 MCI
 CTW
 Or Equivalent
(18) Electrical Conduit
 Matsushita
TSP

TAS

ABSO

Maruichi

Or Equivalent

(19) Circuit Breaker and Safety Switch
 Merlin gerin
 Square D wastinghouse
 Sace
 ABB
 GE
 Seimens
 Or Equivalent
(20) LV Switch Board
 ABB
 PMK
 Siam Industry
 SCI
 E.S. International
 Or Equivalent
(21) Starter
 Square-D
 GE
 Westinghouse
 Siemens
 ABB
 Telemechanique
 Or Equivalent
(22) Variable Speed Controller
 ABB
 Danfoss
 Seimens
 Delta
 Schneider
 Or Equivalent
(23) Paint
 Jotun
 TOA
 TOA Chugoku
 ICI
 Pamastic
 Shewin William
 Or Equivalent
(24) Fire Barrier
 3M
 Wilhams
 Bitec
 Bio Fireshield
 STI
 Or Equivalent
(25) Duct Smoke Detector
 Simplex
 System Sensor
 Notifier
 InnovairFlex
 Or Equivalent
PART II PRODUCT
PART III EXECUTION

END
5.6 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

5.6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION
PART I DESCRIPTION
1. Introduction
(1) This general specification and requirement describe the materials and installation of the Fire
Protection works for building services works and related work for the project.
(2) The work shall be executed to completion and in conformity with the drawings and this
specification
2. Environment
(1) The material and equipment shall be installed as shown on the drawings and shall be suitable
for tropical climate as mentioned below.
(2) Weather conditions for material and general equipment selection :
•Altitude : Approximately mean saea level
•Maximum temperature 40°C (104°F)
•Average temperature (all year) 30°C (78°F)
•Maximum relative humidity 85%
•Average relative humidity (all year) 60%
regulations of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). The following standards are mentioned
in these Specifications for systems and/or components and, where described, the systems and/or
components shall conform to such standards.
• ANSI - American National Standard Institute
• API - American Petroleum Institute
• ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating
and Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc.
• ASPE - American Society of Plumbing Engineers.
• ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
• BS - British Standard
• DIN - Deutsher Industrie Normen (German Industrial
Standard)
• EIT - The Engineering Institute of Thailand
• FM - Factory Mutual
• IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
• MEA - Metropolitan Electricity Authority
• MWA - Metropolitan Waterworks Association
• NEC - National Electrical Code
• NFC - National Fire Code
• NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
• PEA - Provincial Electricity Authority
• PWA - Provincial Waterwork Authority
• TIS - Thai Industrial Standard
• UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
• VDE - Verband Deutsher Electro techniker (German
Electrical Regulation and Codes)
• Any regulations issued by local authorities.

(3) All regulations and standards shall be of the latest issue unless governing authorities require an
earlier issue.
4. Scope of Work
(1) The scope of work of the Contractor shall include provision, installation, testing and balancing,
commissioning of equipment and accessories as shown on the Drawings and Specifications to
achieve a complete Fire protetion system.
(2) The system shall include the following:-
• Fire protection system
• Clean agent fire suppression system
• Electrical power and control
• Accessories as required to complete the system
schedules all to the entire satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative.
5. Dimensions
(1) Figured dimensions as indicated on the drawings are to be followed and in no case shall
dimensions be scaled from the drawings. Wherever possible, dimensions are to be measured
from the building.
(2) Before the Contractor commence any works, he shall ensure that dimensions are checked on
the site and/or building and agree with those on the drawings.
(3) The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of such dimensions regardless of the
comparable dimensions of the drawings.
6. Operation
(1) Where the Contractor propose to use material and/or equipment which is not specified or
detailed on the drawings, the matter shall be brought immediately to the attention of the
Employer’s Representative who will make a decision.
(2) The locations of sprinkler head, gas nozzle, smoke detector, air outlets, air duct route and piping
route shown on the drawings are diagrammatic, and shall be considered as approximate only.
The approved locations may be different from those shown on the drawings, if so directed by
the owner.
PART II PRODUCTS
1. General
1.1 The quality of all material shall comply with the standards specified in the details on the drawings
and diagrams. They shall further be of an approved make and suitable for the works.
1.2 Minimum three manufacturer’s marks of the major materials shall be proposed by the contractor for
the approval of the engineer. Any alternatives due to standards normally applied by the manufacturers or resulting
from special schemes developed by the manufactures will be considered on their merits. However, such
alternatives must meet the requirements of the engineer.
1.3 The major materials vender or manufacturer shall have the following qualification:
(1) The materials vender shall be an authorized sole distributor in Thailand and shall have spare
parts and after sale service.
(2) If contractor wishes to offer the others major materials which do not meet the above
qualification, the contractor shall as certain himself that such major materials is of equal quality
to that mention in these specifications and shall furnish full details of the material or apparatus
in order to enable the Employer and the engineer to judge the quality of the offered.
(1) All Fire Protection equipment, materials and parts used shall be new and unused, of current
performance or life of the item and approved by the Employer’s Representative.
(2) Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or in the specification, all materials and
equipment shall be installed, with the approval of the Employer’s Representative, in accordance
with recommendations of the manufacturer. However, the approval of the Employer’s
Representative shall not release the Contractor from his responsibility or his liability regarding the
properties of installations.
during construction against the ingress of moisture, contamination or corrosion that might damage
the finish or lower the electrical integrity of the item.
(4) Certain major electrical equipment defined in the Specifications will be furnished to the
Contractor, on site. The Contractor shall assemble, align, level and fix this equipment as
instructed by the manufacturer and to the Employer’s
Representative satisfaction. In this case herein specified (if any).
instructions, the responsibility for protecting of material and equipment from damages shall rest
with the Contractor's own expense.
(1) Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed
on the Drawings, requiring any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or
any other part of the mechanical, electrical or architectural layout, all such redesign, including
drawings and detailing required shall be prepared by the Contractor at his own expense and then
approved by the Employer’s Representative.
(2) Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of cable, conduit,
and equipment from the specified or indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall furnish and
install any such cable, conduit, structural supports, insulation, and any other additional
equipment required by the system with additional cost, which approved by the Employer’s
Representative.
(3) In reference to inspection, all works rejected by the engineer shall be repaired, corrected or
replaced at the Contractor's expense to attain good workmanship, and conform to the Contract
Drawings and Specifications. Therefore, ample time shall be provided for inspection and, if there
is any defective work re-inspection of the engineer shall be performed. In the event that the
Contractor should fail to carry out necessary changes, then the engineer shall have the right to
make its own arrangement at the Contractor's expense.
(1) Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide any pay for all tools and other facilities
necessary for the execution and completion of the works.
materials, in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative, appear to be insufficient, of
inappropriate to secure the required quality of works or proper rate of progress, the engineer
may order the Contractor to increase their efficiency, improve their character, augment their
number or replace with new tools, equipment and materials as required.
(1) The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative complete information regarding
details of materials and equipment involved, prior to any purchase or manufacturing operation.
Any purchase or manufacturing operations carried out prior to obtaining such approval shall be
at the Contractor’s sole responsibility.
(2) Each equipment information shall be separately submitted by listing all the details and with
attached catalogue indicating at least the model, series, size and performance. Such data shall
be sufficient detail to enable the engineer to identify that particular product and to form an
opinion to its conformity to the Specification.
(3) The Contractor shall stamp the name of his company and sign all documents to be submitted
for approval.
(1) The Contractor shall examine all Drawings and Specifications to make sure that all requirements
are thoroughly understood. In cases where, in his opinion, there are omissions and/or errors in
any of these documents, he shall inform the engineer immediately.
(2) The Contractor shall examine all relevant architectural and structural drawings together with all
other utilities systems involved in the Project, prior to installation of machines, materials and
equipment.
(3) Figure dimension as indicated on the Drawings are to be followed and in no case dimensions
shall be scale from the Drawings. Wherever possible, dimensions are to be measured from the
building. Before the Contractor commences any works, he shall ensure that dimensions are
checked on the site and/or building and agree with those on the Drawings. The Contractor shall
be responsible for the accuracy of such dimensions regardless of the comparable dimensions on
the Drawings.
(1) Only new materials and equipment shall be incorporated in the Works. All materials and
equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to inspections and approval of the
engineer. The materials and equipment used for the Works shall correspond to the approved
makes or other data. Any materials which, in the opinion of the engineer, have lower quality than
the approved makes shall promptly be removed from the job site.
(2) Whenever requested by the engineer, the Contractor shall send materials to be tested by an
independent institute selected by the engineer. immediately, any extra expanse for testing shall
be of the contractor responsibity.
(3) If these should be an unavoidable necessity to use materials and equipment that deviate from
the specification or from approved samples, then the Contractor shall immediately inform the
engineer in writing and submit the substitute items of equal quality for approval.
9. Shop Drawings
(1) As soon as the Contract is awarded, the Contractor shall prepare shop-drawings comprising
complete details of items to be fabricated and works to be installed. These shop-drawings shall
be submitted to the engineer for approval not later than 30 days before installation.
(2) The drawings shall be checked by the Contractor for accuracy with regard to dimensions taken
in the building(s) and shall closely follow manufacturer's recommendations. All submitted
drawings shall be signed by the Contractor, and shall indicate the date of submission and the
date(s) of revision(s).
(3) In case shop-drawings require modifications for whichever reason, the Contractor has to clearly
identify the portion that was modified, and has to indicate the running number of revision every
time that a revision-drawing is submitted.
(4) The installation detailed shall be checked with the building works, the structure and other related
trades to prevent conflicts that may cause delay of the project.
(5) Size and scale of the shop-drawings shall be followed scale from the Drawing, which shall be in
conformity with international standards or as directed by the engineer.
(6) Where required by the engineer, the Contractor shall prepare additional drawings, diagrams, etc.,
which in the opinion of the engineer are considered necessary for a proper execution of the
Works.
(7) The Contractor shall not proceed his work for a certain part or section, prior to the approval of
the shop-drawings therefore. Expense incurred because of modification that have to be made as
a result of lack of approved shop-drawings shall be borne by the Contractor.
(8) Approval of the shop-drawings by the engineer shall not be construed as a complete check but
will indicate only the general method of installation and its details are satisfactory.
(9) The approval of the engineer never releases the Contractor from his responsibility or his liability
(10) Shop-drawings submitted without sufficient detailed shall be rejected and new submission shall
be required.
(11) The Contractor shall submit 3 print copies of all shop-drawings for approval. If approved by the
engineer, one copy shall bear the engineer stamp indicating the date of approval, and shall be
returned to the Contractor. After approval, 4 copies of print are required and additional copies
may be requested by the engineer as necessary.
(1) The Contractor shall submit in advance a transportation schedule of materials to the
engineer and coordinate with the building contractor in preparing passage ways and storage
facilities.
(2) The Contractor shall be responsible for all expense incurred during shipping and
transporting of material and equipment to the job site. The materials and equipment shall be
handled in a manner to prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting and any
injury, theft of damage or any kind what so ever.
(3) The shipping documents of particular materials and equipment shall be submitted to
the engineer as soon as the materials and equipment have arrived at the Site.
(1) The Contractor shall prepare storage areas of sufficient size for all necessary materials and
equipment brought to the job site. The storage areas shall be provided with access for
inspection and removal of the stored materials and equipment.
(2) Materials and equipment delivered to the Site without suitable storage shall not be accepted.
PART III EXECUTION

The Contractor shall connect electrical wires, telephone wires and water pipe for his own use at suitable
connection points and shall bear the expense of usage, which shall be removed upon completion of sections of
the Works.
2. Responsibility
(1) The Contractor shall establish, maintain, and supervise all precautions and programs for
safety and provide protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to :
• All workmen on the worksite and other persons who may be affected thereby.
• All works and all materials or equipment to be incorporated herein, whether in storage
on or off the site.
(2) As the work proceeds, the Contractor shall progressively remove rubbish and surplus
materials away from the construction site or to a space indicated by the building contractor and
shall maintain his working area in a clean and tidy condition as far as is practicable.
(3) Upon completion of the Works he shall, without delay, remove all his temporary works and
buildings, all tools, equipment and surplus materials, and shall clean the whole area affected by
his work and leave it ready for immediately occupation.
(4) All materials, equipment and finished works shall be kept in good condition. The completed
work shall be the Contractor's property until handed over to the engineer.
3. Field Testing
(1) Test all fire protection equipment upon completion of installation to ensure that the
equipment operates satisfactorily and to conform to Contract Documents.
(2) Field testing shall be required for all equipment furnished, installed or connected by the
Contractor to assure proper installation, setting, connection, and functioning in accordance with
the plans and specifications and manufacturer's recommendations.
(3) Testing shall be conducted in the presence of the engineer and, when necessary, under the
supervision of equipment manufacturer's field Engineer.
(4) All tests recommended by the equipment manufacturer whether specified in these
Specifications or not, shall be included, unless specifically waived by the engineer.
(5) Testing shall include any additional tests issued by the Employer’s Representative to
determine that equipment, material and system meet requirements of the Specifications.
(6) The Contractor shall maintain in quadruplicate a written record of all tests showing date,
personnel making test, equipment or material tested, tests performed and results. Two copies
of test records shall be given to the engineer.
(7) Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to equipment or material due to improper
test procedures or test apparatus handling, and shall replace or restore to original condition any
damaged equipment or material.
(8) Safety devices such as rubber gloves and blankets, protective screens and barriers, danger
signs, etc. shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be used to adequately protect and warn
all personnel in the vicinity of the tests.
(9) The Contractor shall furnish all testing equipment, and furnish temporary power source of
proper type for testing purposes when normal supply is not available at the time of testing.
(10) The conduit and wiring system, shall be checked to ensure that the system has been
installed in such a way as to provide a safe and reliable system.
(11) Test all miscellaneous equipment furnished by equipment manufacturer as recommended
by the manufacturer i.e., circuit breaker, low voltage switchboard, motor (if any) etc unless
specifically waived by the engineer.
(12) Include all additional tests issued by engineer that he deems necessary because of field
conditions, to determine that equipment and material and systems meet requirements of these
Specifications.
(13) Be responsible for all damage to equipment or material due to improper test procedures
or test apparatus handling.
(14) Cost incurred during testing i.e., electricity, city water, labour, etc, shall be borned by the
Contractor, unless stated specifically otherwise in these Specifications or the Contract
Documents.
(1) The as-built drawings shall record all changes arising during the installation and detail all
relevant data concerning makes, types, numbers, capacities, sized and quantities, etc.
(2) The Contractor shall submit to the owner 3 sets of prints and 1 set of reproducible drawings.
(1) The manual shall be prepared in hard cover building in sets to be submitted to the engineer
on acceptance of the completed work.
• Section 1 Comprises submittal data of all equipment and materials that have been
approved.
• Section 2 Comprises catalogues, categorized in groups, complete with installation
operations and the maintenance manuals from the manufacturers.
• Section 3 Comprises filled out test reports in the field.
• Section 4 Comprises spare parts list and recommended spare parts.
• Section 5 Comprises maintenance and services schedule, and service and maintenance
procedures for individual equipment listed daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly
and yearly.
• Section 6 Comprises system operation manual
(2) A draft copy of the manual shall be submitted to the engineer for approval first.
staff of operator for a period of not less than 7 consecutive days until they are competent to operate
the system by themselves
(1) The Contractor shall commission, clean down, and leave in full working order the works as
specified.
(2) As the installation proceeds the Contractor shall prepare record drawings of the Fire protection
work installation, as built drawing. It will be sufficient to modify these contract drawings showing
any amendments to the service which have taken place and submit the marked-up prints to the
engineer for approval.
(3) The Contractor shall deliver to the engineer on completion of the works, manufacturer's
literature, specifications, technical information and record drawings for all equipment installed.
END
5.6.2 FIRE WATER PIPING WORK

PART I DESCRIPTION
The contractor shall furnish and install fire water pipes as shown on the drawing and/or specified
herein.
Pipes and Fittings shall comply with the following codes and standards.
(1) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 13/2002 : Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 14/2002 : Standard for the Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant,
and Hose Systems
NFPA 20/2007 : Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps
NFPA 24/2002 : Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service
Mains and Their Appurtenances
NFPA 2001/2002 : Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
(2) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
UL 213 : Rubber Gasketed Fittings for Fire-Protection Service
American Society of Mechanical Employer’s Representatives (ASTM)
ASTM A53 : Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM A183 : Specifications for Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A234 : Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon
Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service
ASTM A536 : Specifications for Ductile Iron Castings
(3) British Standard (BS)
BS 143 & BS 1256 : Threaded pipe fittings in malleable cast iron and cast
copper alloy
BS 1387 : Specification for screwed and socketed steel tubes
and tubulars and for plain end steel tubes suitable for
welding or for screwing to BS 21 pipe threads
(4) American Water Works Association (AWWA)

AWWA C203 : Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water
Pipelines Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied
AWWA C214 : Tape Coating System for the Exterior of Steel Water
Pipelines.
(5) American Welding Society (AWS)
AWS D10.9 : Specification for Qualification of Welding Procedures and
Welders for Piping and Tubing
3. Submittals
All part or the piping work shall be guaranteed by the contractor at least 2 year after handover.
5. Delivery, handling, storage and creaming.

(1) Pipes shall be delivered and stored with plugged ends. Ends shall be kept closed with temporary
covers during erection. Before any pipe is installed, it shall be opened and pounded to remove
any foreign substances, or swabbed, if necessary, for thorough cleaning.
(2) Pipes shall be stored on racks in a suitable warehouse or under cover to avoid rusting. If
necessary, carbon steel pipes shall be coated with anodized rust converter or red lead primer.
(3) During the course of installation, the Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent any debris
from being left in the pipes. He shall be responsible for any damage that may occur.
paint.
(5) Before start-up all piping systems shall be thoroughly flushed with water until it runs clear.
PART II PRODUCTS
1. Description
(1) The fire pipe shall be the types or models, which are suitable for the working fluid in the system.
(2) The rated working pressure of the fire protection system as specified for the working fluid shall
be at least 1.5 times of the actual working pressure, but not less than 1378 kPa (200 PSIG)
2. Component
(1) Wet Pipe
• Fire water pipe for wet pipe system shall be black steel pipe, ERW Schedule 40 conforming
to ASTM A53. Grade A used for standpipe and automatic sprinkler system.
• Welding methods shall be used for joining pipes of sizes up to 50 mm. (2 inches)
• Grooved couplings shall be used for joining pipes of 65 mm. (2 ½ inches) and larger.
(2) Dry Pipe
• Fire water pipe for dry pipe system shall be galvanized steel pipe conforming to BS 1387
class H. and use for pre-action system.
• Threading methods shall be used for joining pipes of sizes up to 50 mm. (2 inches)
• Grooved couplings shall be used for joining pipes of 65 mm. (2 ½ inches) and larger.
(3) Drain Pipe
• Drain pipes shall be galvanized steel pipe conforming to BS 1387 class M.
• Threading methods shall be used for joining pipes.
(4) Gas Suppression Pipe
• Gas suppression pipe shall be black steel pipe, Seamless Schedule 40 conforming to ASTM
A53, Grade B.
• Welding methods shall be used for joining pipes of sizes up to 50 mm.
• Grooved couplings shall be used for joining pipes of 65 mm. diameter and above.
(5) Fittings
• Fittings for welded, black steel pipes shall be of wrought carbon and alloy steel for
modulate and elevated temperature, conforming to ASTM A234.
• Fittings for grooved, black steel pipes shall be of ductile-iron, UL listed and FM approved.
• Fittings for galvanized steel pipes shall be galvanized malleable iron, conforming to BS 143
and BS 1256.
(6) Grooved Couplings
Grooved couplings shall be UL 213 listed and FM approved, complete set from the factory.
The following items shall be included :

• Housing shall be made of ductile-iron.
• Gasket shall be made of EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer).
• Oval track head bolts and nuts shall conform to ASTM A183.
PART III EXECUTION

1. Installation
(1) General
• All piping shall be installed parallel to, or at right angles with, the building walls and
partitions. A pitch in the direction of flow and drain shall be not less than 1 : 500. Branches
from water mains shall be taken in a manner that facilities venting and draining. Reductions
in bore shall be formed eccentrically to facilitate venting, except on vertical pipes where
concentric reduction may be used.
• All water piping shall be installed in such a way that all circuits can be completely drained
off and all air pockets in the water circuits shall be suitably vented.
• Clearance between pipe works and equipment or machinery shall be adequately provided
to facilitate maintenance. Overhead clearance shall be at least 600 mm. over access ways,
and where possible the projection of valve stems into access ways shall be avoided. Pipe
works and pumps shall be so arranged that the removal for maintenance of the equipment
can be carried out with minimum dismantling. Provision of all pipe fittings and accessories
necessary for the efficient functioning of the various systems shall be included.
• Pipes shall be installed in continuous lengths as long as possible. Except where required to
be connected to fitting outlets or headers, they shall be joined by welding, solvent welding,
screwing or soldering as approved or indicated in the Specification.
(2) Appearance
All pipes shall be installed in an appropriate manner to present a neat and orderly appearance, using fittings for
all changes of direction, and arranging pipe runs parallel to or at right angles with structural members of the
building, to provide utmost head-room and to clear lights and other obstructions. In general, suspended pipes
shall be installed as closely as possible to the overhead structure.
(3) Workmanship
All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site, and shall be worked into place without
springing or forcing. Piping shall be installed so that it may expand and contract freely without injury to itself or
other work. Steel and wrought-iron pipe shall be cut with pipe cutters and threaded with sharp, clean dies. All cut
sections shall be reamed to remove all burrs and to restore the pipe to full diameter. All changes in size shall be
made with reducing fitting. Pipe bends and bushings are prohibited.
All valves, cleanouts, equipment, accessories, and devices shall be so located that they are accessible for repair
and replacement.
(5) Storage and Cleaning
• Pipes shall be delivered and stored with plugged ends. Ends shall be kept closed with
temporary covers during erection. Before any pipe is installed, it shall be opened and
pounded to remove any foreign substances, or swabbed, if necessary, for thorough cleaning.
• Pipes shall be stored on racks in a suitable warehouse or cover to avoid rusting. If necessary,
• During the course of installation, the Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent any
• Immediately after erection, exposed threads at all fittings shall be painted with zinc-
chromate paint, and after welding each joint shall be wire-brushed and then painted with
zinc-chromate paint.
• Before start-up, all piping systems shall be thoroughly flushed with water until it runs clear.
• Fixtures and equipment shall be lightly covered and protected against damage. At the
Connections to coils, pumps and other equipment shall be made in such a manner that undue strains
between pipes and equipment are eliminated. Unions and/or flanges shall be used to facilitate the removal of
the equipment.
• The piping systems shall be installed so that there will be no damage due to expansion and
contraction during operation.
• Packless type expansion connectors shall be used where the expansion and contraction of
the pipe is excessive or cannot be compensated by expansion loops or offsets.
The piping systems shall be installed so that there will be no damage due to differential settlement
of the pipe supports after installation. The problems could be avoided by providing flexible connections.
(9) Sleeves
• Vertical pipes passing through floors shall be provided with sleeves of black steel pipes.
Sleeves shall be of a proper length to pass through the entire floor construction and shall
terminate 50 mm. above the finished floor level.
• Horizontal pipes passing through walls and partitions shall be provided with full thickness
sleeves made of standard weight black steel pipes.
• Sleeves shall be large enough to leave not less than 12.5 mm. clearance around the pipe
and covering insulation, if there is any. Sleeves shall be set in place where the walls and
partitions are built.
• Sleeves in concrete work shall be flanged at the bottom or provided with temporary
centering caps and securely nailed or screwed to formwork before the concrete is poured.
• Provide chromium-plated escutcheon, where exposed pipes pass through walls or floors.
• When sleeves are installed through a fire wall, the clearance between sleeves and pipes
shall be filled with fire-resistant material. The fire rating of the fire-resistant material shall
be at least equivalent to that of the fire wall.
• When pipes pass through waterproof walls, water retaining rings with approved type of
(10) Joints for Threaded Pipes
Joints for threaded pipes shall be made with an approved Teflon tape or graphite compound applied
to the male threads only. Excess jointing material shall be removed after the joint is made. Threads shall be clean-
cut, tapered threads with the ends being reamed before installation.
(11) Flanged Pipe Joint
Flanged joints shall be installed at valves of size 65 mm. diameter and above, and at other places
where necessary. Jointing flanges shall be truly parallel to each other so that bolts are used only to tighten joints,
rather than correct alignment. Flanges shall be chosen to suit the maximum working pressure of the system. Bolts,
nuts and washers shall be cadmium-plated steel.
(12) Welded Pipe Joint
• Welding methods that comply with all of the requirements of AWS D10.9, Specification for
Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, Level AR-3, are
acceptable means of joining fire protection piping.
• Sprinkler piping shall be shop welded.
• No welding shall be performed if there is impingement of rain or high wind on the weld area
of the pipe product.
• When welding is performed :
o Holes in piping for outlets shall be cut to the full inside diameter of fittings prior to
welding in place of the fittings.
o Disc shall be retrieved.
o Openings cut into piping shall be smooth bore, and all internal slag and welding residue
shall be removed.
o Fittings shall not penetrate the internal diameter of the piping.
o Steel plates shall not be welded to the ends of piping or fittings.
o Fittings shall not be modified.
o Nuts, clips, eye rods, angle brackets, or other fasteners shall not be welded to pipe or
fittings.
• Torch cutting and welding shall not be permitted as a means of modifying or repairing
sprinkler systems.
• A welding procedure shall be prepared and qualified by the contractor or fabricator before
any welding is done. Qualification of the welding procedure to be used and the performance
of all welders and welding operators is required and shall meet or exceed the requirements
of American Welding Society Standard AWS D10.9, Level AR-3.
• Contractors or fabricators shall be responsible for all welding they produce. Each contractor
or fabricator shall have available to the authority having jurisdiction an established written
quality assurance procedure ensuring compliance with the requirements shown in this item.
• The engineer reserves the rights to order the cutout for inspection of up to 1 percent of
total number of welds. In the event of any inspected welds being, in the engineer opinion,
Unsatisfactory he reserves the rights to order the removal of further welds which in his
opinion indicate faulty workmanship. Welds removed for inspection shall be reinstalled at
no cost to the project.
(13) Grooved Coupling
• Rigid couplings shall be used for riser, mechanical room and other applications where rigidity
is required. The built-in teeth and T&G (tongue and groove) mechanisms provide a rigid,
locked-in connection.
• Flexible couplings shall be used for moderate pressure pipeline applications where
expansion, contraction or deflection caused by temperature change, seismic tremors or
other sources of vibration are factors.
• Grooved couplings are permitted for using the roll-groove method by roll grooving machine.
Mechanically cut grooves are not permitted
• Lubricant shall be used to the sealing lips and exterior of the gasket as well as the interior
of the coupling housings.

• All pipes shall be securely supported in accordance with NFPA13 “Installation of Sprinkler
System”. Horizontal piping shall be supported by adjustable clevis type hangers with solid
rods securely attached to the building structure. Where several pipes run in a parallel
fashion, trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of separate hangers. All hangers shall have
turnbuckles or other approved means of adjustment. Where pipes, such as those from
individual toilet rooms to main stacks, are not low enough to permit the use of turnbuckles,
other means of adjustment shall be used. Chains, straps, perforated bars, or wire hangers
will not be accepted. All hangers and supports shall be hot-dip galvanized. The maximum
distances between hangers and supports for horizontally mounted and vertically mounted
pipes shall be as indicated in drawing.
• For all pipes where the hanger clips bear directly on pipes and for hangers of dissimilar
metals, suitable aeparation with a layer of felt shall be provided to prevent corrosion.
Hangers on structural steel is absolutely prohibited, unless with the express approval from
the engineer.
• Anchors for steel pipes shall be welded directly to the pipe wall and securely bolted to the
building structure. Hangers in the plant room shall be supported on springs.
• Supporting brackets shall be fastened to concrete by means of inserts or expansion bolts,
to brickwork by means of expansion bolts, and to hollow masonry by means of toggle bolts.
• Two fixings per bracket shall be provided as follows :
Nominal Pipe Size, mm Fixing Size, mm

(inch) (inch)
Up to 65 (1/2) 6.4 (1/4)
80x3 to 150 (6) 9.5 (3/8)
200x8 to 300 (12) 12.7 (1/2)
• All hangers and steel supports shall be hot dip galvanized.
• Underground pipe support and hanger shall be all stainless steel.
Furnish and install plates on all entry and exit openings for all exposed pipes passing through finished walls,
finished partitions, finished ceilings, and floors above grade. Plates shall be large enough to completely close the
hole around the pipe. Wall and ceiling plates shall have set screws; spring clips will not be acceptable. Where
necessary to cover beads of fittings, special deep escutcheons shall be provided.
The work shall be careful laid out in advance. Cutting of structural works shall be done only with specific approval
from the engineer. Damage from the cutting shall be carefully repaired by skilled workmen of the trade involved.
• All steel pipes to be buried underground shall be externally coated in the mill of the
fabricator. Material shall conform to AWWA C214.
• Underground pipe supports attached to the building structure shall be made of stainless
steel.
• Back fill and under-fill shall be made with sand.

(1) Flushing of Piping.
• Piping between the fire department connection and the check valve in the inlet pipe shall
be flushed with a sufficient volume of water in order to remove any construction debris
and trash accumulated in the piping prior to the completion of the system and prior to the
installation of the fire department connection.
(2) Underground Piping
 Underground piping, from the water supply to the system riser, and lead-in connections to
the system riser shall be completely flushed before the connection is made to downstream
fire protection system piping.
 The flushing operation shall be continued for a sufficient time to ensure thorough cleaning.
 The minimum rate of flow shall be not less than one of the following:
 Hydraulically calculated water demand flow rate of the system, including any hose
requirements.
 Flow necessary to provide a velocity of 3.1 m/sec (10 ft/sec) in accordance with table.
Pipe Size Flow Rate
In. mm gpm L/mm
4 100 390 1,476
6 150 880 3,331
8 200 1,560 5,905
10 250 2,440 9,235
12 300 3,520 13,323
 Maximum flow rate available to the system under fire conditions.
END
5.6.03 VALVE AND ACCESSORIES

PART I DESCRIPTION
(1) Valves and accessories shall be provided as indicated on the drawings.
(2) Shut-off valves shall be furnished as necessary for a satisfactory operation of all apparatus.
(3) Valves of the same type shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.
Valve and accessories shall comply with the following codes and standards.
NFPA 10/2002 : Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
NFPA 14/2002 : Standard for the Installation of Standpipe, Private
Hydrant, and Hose Systems
NFPA 20/2002 : Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire
Pumps
NFPA 24/2002 : Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service
Mains and Their Appurtenances

UL 8 : Foam Fire Extinguishers
UL 154 : Carbon-Dioxide Fire Extinguishers
UL 193 : Alarm Valves for Fire-Protection Service
UL 199 : Automatic Sprinklers for Fire-Protection Service
UL 213 : Rubber Gasketed Fittings for Fire-Protection Service
UL 246 : Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service
UL 260 : Dry Pipe and Deluge Valves for Fire-Protection Service
UL 262 : Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service
UL 312 : Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service
UL 346 : Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 405 : Fire Department Connections
UL 626 : Water Fire Extinguishers
UL 668 : Hose Valves for Fire-Protection Service
UL 711 : Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers
UL 753 : Alarm Accessories for Automatic Water-Supply Control
Valves for Fire Protection Service
UL 864 : Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems
UL 1091 : Butterfly Valves for Fire-Protection Service
UL 1468 : Direct Acting Pressure Reducing and Pressure Restricting
Valves
UL 2129 : Halocarbon Clean Agent Fire Extinguishers
(3) Factory Mutual (FM)
(4) British Standard / European Standard (BS EN)
BS EN 671-1 : Fixed fire fighting systems. Hose systems. Hose reels with
semi-rigid hose
BS EN 694 : Fire-fighting hoses. Semi-rigid hoses for fixed systems
(5) Listed of Approved Fire and Security Products and Services, (LPCB)
Part 5, Section 7 : Multiple jet controls
(6) Thai Industrial Standard (TIS)
TIS 332 : Dry Chemical Portable Fire Extinguishers
3. Submittals
The contractor shall submit all material, catalog, material lists and technical data request for approval before
installation.
(1) All portable fire extinguishers shall be guaranteed by the contractor at least 5 year after handover.
(2) All part or the valve and accessories shall be guaranteed by the contractor at least 2 year after
handover.
PART II PRODUCTS
1. Description
(1) The valves and accessories shall be the types or models which are suitable for the working fluid
in the system.
(2) The rated working pressure of the valve as specified for the working fluid shall be at least 1.5
times of the actual working pressure which could be specified as 12 kg/cm2 (175 PSI) for general
area and shall be 20 kg/cm2 in fire pump room.
(3) The diameter of hand-wheels for valves shall be of a suitable size so as to allow tight closure by
hand with the application of reasonable force so that neither additional leverage nor damage
shall be imposed upon their stem, seat and disc. Where indicated or required, for inaccessible
overhead valves, chain-operated hand-wheels including rust-roof chain and chain guide shall be
provided.
2. Component
(1) Gate Valves (OS&Y)
• Valves of sizes up to 50 mm. shall be bronze with threaded ends, solid wedges and rising
stems.
• Valves of sizes 65 mm. and larger shall be cast-iron with flanged ends, solid wedges and
rising stems.
• Valves shall be UL listed and FM approved.
(2) Butterfly Valves
• Butterfly valve may be used instead of gate valve if its size is over or equal to 80 mm. in
diameter or as indicated on the drawings.
• Butterfly valves shall be cast iron or ductile iron, grooved end.
• Built-in supervisory switch shall be provided.
• Butterfly valves shall be UL listed and FM approved.
(3) Swing-Check Valves
• Valves shall be of the swing type suitable for the horizontal or vertical operation with two-
piece hinge and accessible disc cover.
• Valves of sizes up to 50 mm. shall be bronze with thread ends and full area Y pattern
bodies.
• Valves of sizes 65 mm. and larger shall be wafer style cast-iron, swing pattern and bronze-
trimmed with flanged ends.
(4) Lift-Check Valves
• Lift-check valves or silent-type check valves shall be installed as indicated on drawings and
at the location where noise and water hammer would cause a problem.
• The valve shall be of a spring closed type. Seats, discs, and springs shall be bronze or
stainless steel.
• Valves of sizes up to 50 mm. shall be bronze with threaded ends.
• Valves of sizes 65 mm. and larger shall be wafer style cast-iron with flanged ends.
(5) Ball Valves
Ball valves shall be made of cast brass with threaded ends, 35 kg/cm2 (500 psi.) working pressure. They shall be
installed as indicated on drawings. UL listed or FM approved.
(6) Wet Pipe Alarm Valves
• Alarm valves shall be of the vertical or horizontal pattern as indicated in the drawings, and
shall be provided with an isolating valve to allow removal for maintenance.
• The valves shall be designed for a wet pipe water sprinkler system and actuated by breaking
sprinkler heads.
• Each alarm valve shall be fitted with a water motor and gong, and an alarm contact for
connection to the central fire alarm panel.
• The following items shall be included :
o Water motor Gong shall be made of aluminum, stainless steel and other non-corrosive
materials to prevent rust and staining. Water motor gong shall be UL listed and FM
approved.
o Retard chamber shall be ductile-iron body, FM approved, and UL listed rated for 20
kg/cm2 (300 psi.).
o Pressure switch shall be UL listed and FM approved.
o Water Supply Pressure Gauge
o System Pressure Gauge
o Main System Drain Valve
• Alarm valves shall be UL listed and FM approved.
(7) Multi-Jet Control Valves
• Multi-jet control valves shall be single inlet with double outlets.
• Multi-jet control valves shall be included with following :
o Frangible glass bulb
Multi-Jet control valves shall be temperature rating at 68oC for SOR room, and 93oC for ESPS.
o Electric Actuators
• Multi-jet control valves shall be listed of LPCB approved for Fire and Security Products and
Services, Part 5, Section 7.
(8) Multi-Jet Control Panel
• Control panel shall be included with following :
o Microprocessor controlled
o Alarm and trouble resound
o General alarm and trouble relays
o Disable / Enable controls per initiating zone
o Battery / Earth Fault supervision
o 7 AH to 15 AH battery options, up to 90 hours standby
o Resettable / non-resettable regulated power outputs
o Cross zone detection
• Circuit Specification shall be included with following:
o Input Circuits
 Detector Circuit 1
 Detector Circuit 2
 Waterflow
 Supervisory Switch
o Output Circuits
 Alarm/Waterflow Bell
 Waterflow/Supervisory Bell
 Releasing Circuit 1
 Supervisory Bell/Release Circuit 2
o Front Panel Control Switches
 Switch 1 - Tone Silence
 Switch 2 - Alarm Silence
 Switch 3 - Alarm Activate
 Switch 4 - System Reset
• Multi-Jet Control Panel shall be UL listed and FM approved.
(9) Hose Valves

• Angle Hose Valves
o Valves of size 65 mm. in diameter shall be cast brass body with female thread at both
inlet and outlet sides.
o Adjustable pressure restricting angle hose valve shall be used where the inlet water
pressure is exceed 7.0 kg/cm2
o Angle Hose Valves shall be UL listed and FM Approved.
(10) Pressure Relief Valves
• Pressure relief valves shall actuate to relieve excess pressure in a fire protection system.
• They shall be pilot controlled and back pressure shall not affect the set point. They shall
be actuated by line pressure through a pilot control system and open fast in order to
maintain steady system pressure as system demand decreases. They shall close gradually
to control surges and shall re-seat driptight within 5% of its pressure setting.
• The main valve shall be of the hydraulically-operated, pilot-controlled, diaphragm type,
globe or angle valve.
• The pilot control shall be a direct-acting, adjustable, spring-loaded, diaphragm type valve
designed for modulating service to permit flow when controlling pressure exceeds spring
setting.
• The body of main valve shall be cast-iron with screwed or flanged ends.
(11) Sprinkler Heads
Sprinkler heads shall be UL listed and FM approved.
• Upright Sprinkler Heads
The exposed sprinkler heads shall have the following features :
o Applicable for areas without false ceilings and as specified on the drawings.
o Frangible bulb type.
o Upright style.
o 15 mm. (1/2 inch) in diameter nominal orifice, Unless otherwise specified.
o Chrome finish.
o Temperature rating shall be ordinary hazard.
o Sprinkler guards shall be provided as indicated on the drawings.
• Pendant Sprinkler Heads
Pendant sprinkler heads shall be of the recessed type suitable for incorporation into a high quality metal tray type
false ceiling.
They shall be the following features :
o Minimum projection below ceiling.
o Frangible bulb type.
o Pendant style.
o Chrome-plated with ceiling plate finish to suit decorative scheme.
o Sprinkler guards shall be provided as indicated on the drawings.
• Sidewall Sprinkler Heads
The sidewall sprinkler shall be the following features :
o Applicable for those areas where ceiling sprinklers cannot be used.
o Frangible bulb type (open type within escalator trusses).

o Chrome finished.
o Water distribution at pressure 2.0 kg/cm2 not less than 6 m. length and 4.5 m. width.
(12) Flow Switches
• Flow switches shall be fitted on all sprinkler systems, hydrants and hose points, along with
other pipe branches as indicated on the drawings.
• Each unit shall have tamper-proof switch housing with flexible flow paddle, micro-switches
and retard feature to minimize false alarm. Retard setting shall be adjustable.
• Each unit shall have a volt-free contact, the wiring from which will be carried out under the
fire detection and alarm system work.
• Flow switch shall be UL listed and FM approved.
(13) Supervisory Switches
• Supervisory switches or monitor switches shall be fitted on main and branch isolating valves
in the fire pump room and/or as indicated on the drawings. The monitor switches are for
the supervision of the open position of valves which control water supplies to automatic
sprinkler or stand pipe fire protection system. Supervision of the open position of a main
control valve is to indicate a condition, i.e., closing of the valve, that could prevent the
required operation of a fire protection system.
• Supervision switches or monitor switches are operated by movement of the trip rod or by
removal of the cover. The trip rod is spring loaded and double action, consequently, lateral
movement of the trip rod, in either direction from its normally installed position, will result
in operation of the switching components.
• The monitor switch has one single pole double throw snap-action switch.
• The switching components are enclosed in NEMA type 1 general purpose indoorrated
housing. The electrical switch contacts are rated at 220 VAC,15A.
• In addition, all valves indicated as supervised on the drawings shall be locked open with
strap and padlock.
• All Φ 65 mm. hydrants shall be locked closed using the same method.
• Supervisory Switches shall be UL listed and FM approved.
(14) Pressure Gauges
• Pressure gauges shall be of the bourdon type, stainless steel casing, round type of 100 mm.
dial and scale range of approximately 150 percent of the normal operation. Pressure
readings shall be in kg/cm2 and psig (dual scale).
• gauge cock with working pressure corresponding with the piping system shall be provided
for each pressure gauge.
• Oil filled pressure gauges shall be selected where used adjacent to moving machinery, e.g.
pumps.
• Automatic air vent shall be of cast iron body, thread end connection, dia. 25 mm. inlet, dia.
15 mm. outlet, working pressure at least 12 kg/cm2 (175 psi).
• Automatic air vent shall be FM approved.
(16) Flexible Connections
• Flexible connections at inlet and outlets of pumps shall be of stainless steel corrugated
inner tube and stainless steel wire braid outside the tube with flanged ends.
• The flexible connectors shall be designed for excellent vibration and noise protection.
Isolated tension members shall be provided to prevent excessive elongation.
• Flexible connections shall be suitable for the specified working fluid or specified working
pressure and temperature.
(17) Expansion Joints
• Packless type expansion connectors shall be used where the expansion and contraction of
the pipe is excessive or cannot be compensated by expansion loops or offsets.
• Anchors and pipe guides shall be provided and installed at the recommended locations.
• All expansion connectors shall have flanged ends with working pressure corresponding with
the piping system.
(18) Strainers
• Water strainers shall be of the Y type.
• Strainers size of 50 mm. and smaller shall be bronze body with screwed connections and
size of 65 mm and larger shall be cast iron and flanged connections. They shall have the
same rating as the piping system.
(19) Sight-glass
• Sight-glass shall be suitable for the specified working fluid or specified working pressure.
• Sight-glass shall be of cast iron body. Clear acrylic iron window, Buna-NO-ring.
(20) Fire Department Connections

• The fire department connection shall be of cast brass body with 65 mm. diameter two-way
male instantaneous outlet connections, including caps and chains and incorporating
individual clapper type non-return valves. The unit shall be mounted as indicated on the
drawings.
• Fire Department Connections shall be UL listed and FM approved.
(21) Fire Hose Reel Cabinets and Fire Hose Box Cabinets
• The cabinets shall be fabricated from stainless steel sheet with a minimum thickness of 1.6
mm.
• The cabinets shall be suitable for accommodating the fire fighting equipment as specified
on the drawing and shall be complete with internal hinges, door locks and letter signs. The
door shall be openable to 180°.
(22) Jet/Fog Spray Nozzle
• Jet/Fog spray nozzle shall be adjustable combination straight stream and spray and installed
in fire hose box or as indicated on drawings.
• Jet/Fog spray nozzle shall be of 65 mm. with inlet quick coupling type.
(23) Fire Hose
• Fire hose shall be of 100 percent polyester with extrude rubber liner and designed for fire
protection propuse with water pressure not less than 250 PSIG.
• Fire hose shall be installed in fire hose box or as indicated on drawings.
• Fire hose shall be size of 65 mm. with 30 m. long, completed with male and female quick
coupling on each end.
(24) Quick Coupling Reducer
• Quick coupling reducer shall be installed in fire hose box or as indicated on drawings.
• Quick coupling reducer to reduce hose size with size of 65 mm. male inlet and dia. 40 mm.
female outlet.
(25) Fire Hose Reel

• Fire hose reel shall be installed in fire hose reel cabinet or as indicated on drawings.
• Fire hose reel shall be Automatic, Recessed Swing Hose Reel type.
• Fire reel hose shall be red colour, dia. 25 mm. x 30 meters conform to BS EN 694 Type A.
Maximum working pressure at 15 kg/cm2 and theoretical burst pressure at 50 kg/cm2.
• Hose nozzle shall be manufactured in red nylon, include both twist grip and lever control
to allow adjustment through jet/spray, shut-off positions. Hose nozzle shall comply with BS
EN 671-1.
• The automatic stop valve shall be opened to providing full capacity within just two
revolutions of the reel.
• Fire hose reel shall conform to BS EN 671-1 completely assembled from the factory.
(26) Portable Fire Extinguisher
• Multi-purpose dry chemical fire extinguishers
o Each unit shall have capacity of 4.5 kg. and at least TIS 332 rating 6A:20B.
o Multipurpose dry chemical fire extinguishers shall comply with TIS 332.
• CO2 portable fire extinguishers
o Each unit shall have CO2 capacity of 4.5 kg. with at least UL rating 10B:C.
o CO2 portable fire extinguisher shall be UL listed.
• Halotron fire extinguishers

o Each unit shall have capacity of 7 kg. with at least UL rating 2A:10B:C
o Halotron fire extinguishers shall be UL listed.
PART III EXECUTION
1. Installation
Installation shall be followed instruction manual from manufacturer.
(1) Hydrant Test
• Each hydrant shall be fully opened and closed under system water pressure.
• Dry barrel hydrants shall be checked for proper drainage.
• The tests shall be completed with the pumps running.
(2) Control Valves Test
All control valves shall be fully closed and opened under system water pressure to ensure proper operation.
(3) Hose Connection and Fire Department Connection Test
All hose connection and fire department connection threads shall be tested to verify their compatibility with
threads used by the local fire department. The test shall consist of threading coupling samples, caps, or plugs
onto the installed devices.
(4) Manual Valve Test
Each valve intended to be manually opened or closed shall be operated by turning the hand-wheel crank or
wrench for its full range and returning it to its normal position. Hose valve caps shall be tightened sufficiently to
avoid leaking during the test and removed after the test to drain water and relieve pressure.
(5) Pressure Reducing Valves
• Each pressure-reducing valve shall be tested upon completion of installation to ensure
proper operation under flow and no-flow conditions.
• Testing shall verify that the device properly regulates outlet pressure at both maximum and
normal inlet pressure conditions.
• The results of the flow test of each pressure-reducing valve shall be recorded on the
contractor's test certificate.
• The results shall include the static and residual inlet pressures, static and residual outlet
pressures, and the flow rate.
(6) Hydrostatic Tests
• All piping and attached appurtenances subjected to system working pressure shall be
hydrostatically tested at 13.8 kg/cm2 (200 PSI) and shall maintain that pressure without loss
for 2 hours.
• The test pressure shall be read from a gauge located at the low elevation point of the
system or portion being tested.
• Piping between the exterior fire department connection and the check valve in the fire
department inlet pipe shall be hydrostatically tested in the same manner as the balance
of the system
END
5.6.4 DIESEL ENGINE FIRE PUMP

PART I DESCRIPTION
(1) The contractor shall furnish and install the fire pump as shown on the drawing and/or specified
herein.
(2) All pumps used in the fire protection system shall be of one manufacturer.
Pumps shall comply with the following codes and standards.
UL 218 : Fire Pump Controllers
UL 448 : Pumps for Fire-Protection Service
UL 1008 : Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment
UL 1478 : Fire Pump Relief Valves
3. Submittals
(1) The contractor shall submit pump performance curves, material lists and technical data for
approval.
(2) The pump supplier shall submit certificate test of origin from manufacturer before the pump on
site.
(3) The Contractor shall submit the following technical data for approval before installation:
• Dimension plan and elevation view drawing of the fire pump, required clearances, and
location of all field piping and electrical connections.
• Diagram of control system indicated points for field interface and field connection.
• Installation and operation manuals.
The manufacturer must specialize in the specified equipment and have a quality management system and shall
be meets to ISO 9001 certified.
All part of the fire pump shall guaranteed by the manufacture and/or by the contractor at least two (2) year after handover.
PART II PRODUCTS
1. Description
(1) Pumps shall furnish not less than 150 percent of rated capacity at a total head of not less than
65 percent of the total rated head. The total shutoff head shall not exceed 140 percent of the
total rated head on pumps.
(2) Pumps shall be selected for a total efficiency of not less than 70 percent.
(3) Pumps shall be UL Listed and FM approved.
(4) The pump type shall be specified as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein.
General Classification type shall be as the following.
• Horizontal Split Case Centrifugal Type
Pumps shall be of the non-overloading, centrifugal, volute type. They shall be of the horizontally
split, double suction type with suction and discharge connections in the lower half of the casing, allowing removal
of the rotating element without disturbing pipe connections.
• Vertical Multi-Stage Turbine Type
Fire Pumps shall be of the vertical water lubricated multi-stage turbine type. Each unit shall include
a bowl assembly, strainer, column and shaft, surface discharge head, vertical hollow shaft, right angle gear and
flexible gear engine shaft, automatic air release and pressure gauge.
2. Component
(1) Horizontal Split Case Centrifugal Pumps
• Casing
Casing of horizontally split pumps shall be designed for a working pressure of 20 kg/cm2 (300 psig) or
1 3/4 times the actual discharge pressure, whichever is greater. Pressure classification of flange connections shall
correspond to casing working pressure. Casing material shall be cast-iron, precision manufactured for best
performance and long-term duty. Water discharge diffusers shall be included to reduce radial torques to impellers.
• Wearing Ring
Wearing rings shall be of bronze suitable for an individual application. Rings shall be replaceable, and
positively keyed to prevent rotation
• Impeller
Impellers shall be one piece, cast-bronze SAE 40 and dynamically balanced. Impellers of pumps shall be
fully enclosed and hydraulically balance. Impellers shall be accurately keyed to the shaft and fixed in an axial position
by shaft sleeves and separate snap rings. Impellers shall be fully protected against damage from reverse rotation.
• Shaft
Shafts for pumps with stuffing boxes shall be of stainless steel extending through the stuffing boxes.
Where stuffing boxes are used, shafts shall be provided with water slingers. Shafts shall be provided with water
slingers. Shafts shall be designed with high safety precautions to easily withstand the torsion loads with other
stresses to which they may be subjected. They shall be so designed that there will be no detrimental vibration
stresses. All shaft threading shall be external stresses. All shaft threading shall be external to the water passage
and stuffing boxes. Shaft sleeves shall be keyed to the shafts and extended through the stuffing boxes. O-rings or
gaskets shall be provided at sleeve ends to protect the shafts from water corrosion. They shall be so designed
that no dismantling of the pump casings is required to replace the sleeves.
• Bearing
Bearing shall be heavy-duty ball bearing with a minimum average life of 100,000 hours. The bearing
shall be self-sealed, and housed in malleableiron housings aligned to a bearing bracket by means of large precision
registers. Bearings shall be removable without dismantling any rotating elements or pumps.
• Stuffing Boxes
Stuffing boxes shall be deep enough for not less than 4 rings of packing and shall have bronze glands.
Packing shall be suitable in all cases for the service required with proper consideration of water pressure,
temperature, temperature changes and sediments carried in the water.
• Couplings
Pumps shall be provided with urethane flexible couplings or universal joint with a service factor of at
least 1.5 for an individual application. Couplings shall impose no restriction on normal end play or expansion.
• Base Plate
Pumps shall be provided with a cast-iron or fabricated steel base plate to hold both the pump and
the motor in correct alignment. Pumps and motors shall be accurately aligned.
• Miscellaneous Fittings
High points of pump casings shall be provided with air vent cocks. Low points of casings shall be
provided with valve drains and both inlet and outlet connection with properly located gauge tapping.
Casing brackets of pumps equipped with stuffing boxes shall be arranged to form drip pockets. A drip
pipe shall be run from each drip pockets. A drip pipe shall be run from each drip pocket to the nearest drip funnel
or floor drain.
• Circulation Relief Valve
Each pump shall be provided with a 20 mm. (3/4 inch) circulation valve for pump overheat protection.
Furthermore, Relief valves for over pressure protection shall be provided with sizes conforming to Table 2.20 in
NFPA 20/2002. Relief water pipes shall terminate at the fire reservoir.
• Pressure Switch
Switches shall be used for pump control and shall be able to withstand 28 kg/cm2 (400 psig) working
pressure without any damage.
• Anti-Vibration
Each pump shall be mounted on approved vibration isolators which are, In turn, placed on a concrete
base. The isolators shall be selected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation such
that no disturbing vibration and noise is being transmitted to the nearby structure.
(2) Vertical Multi-Stage Turbine Pumps
• Bowl
The intermediate bowls, suction bell, and discharge bowl shall be flanged type constructed of close
grained cast iron, and shall conform to ASTM designation A48, class 30. They shall be free from sand holes,
blowholes, or other faults and must be accurately machined and fitted to close tolerance. The intermediate bowls
shall have enamel or epoxy lined waterways for maximum efficiency and wear protection. All intermediate bowls
shall be of identical design for interchangeability. A discharge bowl shall be used to connect bowls to the discharge
column.
• Impellers
The impellers shall be constructed from Bronze and shall be the enclosed type. They shall be from
defects and must be accurately cast, machined for optimum performance and minimum vibration. Impellers are
to be static and dynamically. They shall be securely fastened to the bowl shaft with taper locks steel and split
thrust ring of SS. The impeller running position shall be adjustable by shaft adjusting nut in the discharge head or
on top of the hollow shaft driver.
• Suction
The suction bell shall be provided with non-soluble grease packed bronze bearing and a bronze sand
collar shall be incorporated in the pump design to protect this bearing from abrasives. The bearing housing shall
have sufficient opening at the bottom for removal of the bearing. A bronze basket type strainer shall be attached
to the suction bell. It shall have a free area of at least four times the flow area of the suction connection size and
the opening shall be sized to restrict the passage of 15 mm (1/2 inch) solids.
• Wearing Ring
Bowl assembly shall be fitted with replaceable wearing ring of bronze or aluminum bronze material
in the suction bowl and intermediate bowls. Wearing rings shall have the mating cylindrical surface of the impeller
to provide adequate sealing independent of vertical positioning of the impellers.
• Shaft
The bowl shaft shall be constructed from ASTM 582 type 416 stainless steel. It shall be precision
turned and ground with surface finish better than 40 RMS and shall be supported by water lubricated bearings of
C89835 bronze alloy.
• Column Pipe
The column pipe shall be furnished in sections not exceeding a normal length of 10 ft and shall be
connected by threaded-sleeve couplings or flanges. The length of top and bottom sections shall not be more
than 5 ft. It shall be of ASTM A53 grade A steel pipe and the weight shall be not less than schedule 30. The
threaded pipe shall be with 8 threads per inch with 3/16" taper per foot thread and faced parallel to butt against
the centering spiders to from accurate alignment. All column flange faces shall be parallel and machined for
rabbet fit to permit accurate alignment. The inside diameter of the pipe shall be such that the head losses shall
not more than 5 feet per 100 feet of pipe.
• Lineshaft
The lineshaft shall be furnished in interchangeable section not over ten feet in length, and shall be
couplings machined from solid steel bar. It shall have left- hand thread to tighten during pump operation. The
diameter of the shaft shall be based on a combined shear stress of not more than 18% of the ultimate strength
or not excess of 30% of the elastic limit in tension of the shafting material. The coupling shall be designed with
higher safety factor than shaft. Lineshaft and coupling shall be of type 416 stainless steel. Centering spiders shall
be furnished at each column pipe joint for shaft stabilization. Bearings shall be fluted rubber.
• Discharge Head
It shall be of the high profile type to allow shaft coupled above stuffing box and provided for mounting
the driver and support the column and bowl assemblies it shall be high-grade cast iron, ASTM A48 Class 30, or
fabricated steel. The above ground outlet shall be flanged. It shall have a 1/2" NPT connection for a pressure
gauge.
• Stuffing Box
The stuffing box shall be cast iron and shall contain a minimum of five rings of packing with lantern
ring. It shall have a pressure relief connection. The packing gland shall be a 316SS split type secured in place with
non-corrosive studs and nuts. The bearing shall be bronze. A rubber slinger shall be secured to the shaft above
the packing gland.
(3) Diesel Engines
The engine brake horse power shall be rated at least 1.10 times the maximum power required. The engine shall
be rated at standard SAE conditions for (152.4 meters above sea level and 0.746 meters HG (at 29.4 °C) by the
testing laboratory. The engine shall be of a reputable manufacturer form which spare parts can be obtained easily.
• Governor
The engine shall be provided with an adjustable governor capable of regulating engine speed within
a range of 10 percent between shut-off and maximum load conditions of the pump. The governor shall be set to
maintain the rated pump speed at maximum pump load.
• Overspeed Shut-Down Device
The device shall be arranged such that the engine is shut-down at a speed approximately 20 percent
above the rated engine speed, and that it can be manually reset.
The position of the overspeed shut-down device shall be indicated at the controller and will continue
to show an overspeed trouble signal until the device is manually reset to normal operating position.
• Tachometer
A tachometer shall be provided to indicate revolutions per minute of the engine. An hour meter shall
be provided to record total time of engine operation.
• Oil Pressure Gauges
The engine shall be provided with oil pressure gauges indicating lubricating oil pressure.
• Temperature Gauge
The engine shall be provided with a temperature gauge to indicate cooling water temperature.
• Instrument Panel
All engine instruments shall be placed on a suitable panel secured to the engine at a suitable point.
• Automatic Controller Wiring
All connecting wires for automatic controllers shall be hardness or flexibly enclosed, mounted on the
engine and connected in an engine junction box to terminals numbered to correspond with numbered terminals
in the controller, for ready wiring in the field between the two sets of terminals.
• Battery and Charger
The engine shall be provided with two storage battery units, each having sufficient capacity, at 5 °C,
to maintain cranking speed recommended by the engine manufacturer through a 6 minute cycle (15 second
cranking and 15 second rest, in 12 consecutive cycles).
Two means for recharging shall be provided. One shall be the generator furnished with the engine.
The other shall be an automatically controlled charger taking power from the building power supply.
• Signal for Engine Running and Crank Termination
The engine shall be provided with a speed sensitive switch to signal engine running and crank
termination. Power for these signals shall be taken from a source other than the engine generator.
• Cooling System
A completely closed circuit cooling (Heat Exchanger) waste circulation system shall be provided.
• Engine Exhaust Pipe
The exhaust pipe shall be galvanized steel sized in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. This exhaust pipe shall be as short as possible and shall not exceed 4.5 m. in length, unless
than one pipe size for each 1.5 m. in excess length. The exhaust pipe shall be insulated with 40 mm. of preformed
fiberglass with aluminium jacket.
Stainless steel flexible connection shall be made between the engine exhaust outlet and the exhaust
pipe.
• Fuel Tank
The tank shall be fabricated from at least 3 mm. steel sheet and shall hold enough storage for an 8
hour operation of the pump. The tank shall be installed above ground or as indicated on drawing and equipped
with fuel piping, drain, air vent and sight-glass.
(4) Controller
The controller shall be UL listed or FM approved completely assembled and wired from the factory the following
items shall be included :
• Pressure transducer
• Weekly test program timer
• Automatic test run program
• Solid state crank cycle control

• Battery charger (2 sets)
• Pressure recorder
• Stop button
• Reset button
• Ammeter, Voltmeter
• Alarm devices such as for oil pressure, low fuel level, water temperature, failure to start,
overspeed, battery no. 2 failure, charge loss and water storage tank low level.
• Other standard control accessories such as relays, pilot lamps, fuses, pushbuttons and alarm
bell.
• Selector switch "AUTO-OFF-MANUAL"
PART III EXECUTION
1. Installation
(1) Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
(2) The contractor shall align the pump and engine shafts to within the manufacturer’s
recommended tolerances prior to system start-up.
(1) General
All hydrostatic tests, flushing and field acceptance test procedures outlined in Chapter 14
Acceptance Testing, Performance, and Maintenance of NFPA 20/2007, shall be carried out.
(2) Hydrostatic Tests and Flushing
• Suction and discharge piping shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than 13.8 kg/cm2
(200 psi) pressure, or at 3.4 kg/cm2 (50 psi) in excess of the maximum pressure to be
maintained in the system, whichever is greater. The pressure shall be maintained for 2 hours.
• Suction piping shall be flushed at a flow rate not less than indicated in tables or at the
hydraulically calculated water demand rate of the system, whichever is greater.
Pipe Size Flow Rate

(mm.) gpm L/min
100 590 2,233
125 920 3,482
150 1,360 5,148
200 2,350 8,895
250 3,670 13,891
300 5,290 20,023
Flow Rate for Stationary Pumps
Pipe Size Flow Rate

(mm.) (gpm) L/min
40 100 378.5
50 250 945.25
75 400 1514.00
100 450 1703.25
150 500 1892.50
Flush Rate for Suction Piping (Positive Displacement)
• The installing contractor shall furnish a certificate for flushing and hydrostatic test prior to
the start of the fire pump.
(3) Field Acceptance Tests
• All electric wiring to the fire pump motors, including control (multiple pumps) inter-wiring,
emergency power supply, and jockey pump, shall be completed and checked by the
electrical contractor prior to the initial startup and acceptance test.
• A copy of the manufacturer’s certified pump test characteristic curve shall be available for
comparison of results of field acceptance test. The fire pump as installed shall equal the
performance as indicated on the manufacturer’s certified shop test characteristic curve
within the accuracy limits of the test equipment.
• The fire pump shall perform at minimum, rated, and peak loads without objectionable
overheating of any component.
• Vibrations of the fire pump assembly shall not be of a magnitude to warrant potential
damage to any fire pump component.
Emergency governor valve for steam shall be operated to demonstrate satisfactory performance of
the assembly. Hand tripping shall be acceptable.
• Both local and remote alarm conditions shall be simulated to demonstrate satisfactory
operation.
• The fire pump or foam concentrate pump shall be in operation for not less than one (1)
hour total time during all of the foregoing tests.
(4) Field Acceptance Test Procedures
• Test Equipment
Test equipment shall be provided to determine net pump pressures, rate of flow through the pump,
volts and amperes for electric motor-driven pumps, and speed.
• Flow Tests
o The minimum, rated, and peak loads of the fire pump shall be determined by controlling
the quantity of water discharged through approved test devices
o The pump flow for positive displacement pumps shall be tested and determined to
meet the specified rated performance criteria. One performance point is required to
establish positive displacement pump acceptability.
• Measurement Procedure
o General
The quantity of water discharging from the fire pump assembly shall be determined and stabilized.
Immediately thereafter, the operating conditions of the fire pump and driver shall be measured. Foam concentrate
pumps shall be permitted to be tested with water; however, water flow rates can be lower than expected foam
flow rates because of viscosity.
o The pump flow test for positive displacement pumps shall be accomplished using
a flowmeter or orifice plate installed in a test loop back to the foam concentrate
tank or the inlet side of a water pump. The flowmeter reading or discharge pressure
shall be recorded and shall be in accordance with the pump manufacturer’s flow
performance data. If orifice plates are used, the orifice size and corresponding
discharge pressure to be maintained on the upstream side of the orifice plate shall
be made available to the authority having jurisdiction. Flow rates shall be as
specified while operating at the system design pressure.
o For electric motors operating at rated voltage and frequency, the ampere demand
shall not exceed the product of a full-load ampere rating times the allowable
service factor as stamped on the motor nameplate
o For electric motors operating under varying voltage, the product of the actual
voltage and current demand shall not exceed the product of the rated voltage and
rated full-load current times the allowable service factor. The voltage at the motor
shall not vary more than 5 percent below or 10 percent above rated (nameplate)
voltage during the test.
o Engine-driven units shall not show signs of overload or stress. The governor of such units
shall be set at the time of the test to properly regulate the engine speed at rated pump
speed.
o The gear drive assembly shall operate without excessive objectionable noise, vibration,
or heating.
• Loads Start Test
The fire pump unit shall be started and brought up to rated speed without interruption under the
conditions of a discharge equal to peak load.
• Phase Reversal Test
For electric motors, a test shall be performed to ensure that there is not a phase reversal condition
in either the normal power supply configuration or from the alternate power supply (where provided).
(5) Controller Acceptance Test
• Fire pump controllers shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended
test procedure. As a minimum, no less than six automatic and six manual operations shall
be performed during the acceptance test.
• A fire pump driver shall be operated for a period of at least 5 minutes at full speed during
each of the operations.
• The automatic operation sequence of the controller shall start the pump from all provided
starting features. This sequence shall include pressure switches or remote starting signals.
• Tests of engine-driven controllers shall be divided between both sets of batteries.
• The selection, size, and setting of all overcurrent protective devices, including fire pump
controller circuit breaker, shall be confirmed to be in accordance with this standard.
• The fire pump shall be started once from each power service and run for a minimum of 5
minutes.
•
END
5.6.5 ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP

PART I DESCRIPTION
(1) The contractor shall furnish and install the fire pump as shown on the drawing and/or specified
herein.
(2) All pumps used in the fire protection system shall be of one manufacturer.
UL 218 : Fire Pump Controllers
UL 1478 : Fire Pump Relief Valves
3. Submittals
(1) Pump performance curves shall be submitted for approval together with the pump technical
data.
(2) The pump supplier shall submit certificate test of origin from manufacturer before the pump on
site.
• Dimension plan and elevation view drawing of the fire pump, required clearances, and
All part of the fire pump shall guaranteed by the manufacture and/or by the contractor at least two (2) year after
handover.
PART II PRODUCTS
1. Description
(1) Pumps shall furnish not less than 150 percent of rated capacity at a total head of not less than
65 percent of the total rated head. The total shutoff head shall not exceed 140 percent of the
total rated head on pumps.
(2) Pumps shall be selected for a total efficiency of not less than 65 percent.
(3) Pumps shall be UL Listed and FM approved.
(4) The pump type shall be specified as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. General
Classification type shall be as the following.
• Horizontal Split Case Centrifugal Type
Pumps shall be of the non-overloading, centrifugal, volute type. They shall be of the horizontally split,
double suction type with suction and discharge connections in the lower half of the casing, allowing removal of
the rotating element without disturbing pipe connections.
• Vertical Multi-Stage Turbine Type
Fire Pumps shall be of the vertical water lubricated multi-stage turbine type. Each unit shall include
a bowl assembly, strainer, column and shaft, surface discharge head, vertical hollow shaft, right angle gear and
flexible gear engine shaft, automatic air release and pressure gauge.
2. Component
(1) Horizontal Split Case Centrifugal Pumps
• Casing
Casing of horizontally split pumps shall be designed for a working pressure of 20 kg/cm2 (300 psig) or
1 3/4 times the actual discharge pressure, whichever is greater. Pressure classification of flange connections shall
correspond to casing working pressure. Casing material shall be cast-iron, precision manufactured for best
performance and long-term duty. Water discharge diffusers shall be included to reduce radial torques to impellers.
• Wearing Ring
Wearing rings shall be of bronze suitable for an individual application. Rings shall be replaceable, and
positively keyed to prevent rotation.
• Impeller
Impellers shall be one piece, cast-bronze SAE 40 and dynamically balanced. Impellers of pumps shall
be fully enclosed and hydraulically balance. Impellers shall be accurately keyed to the shaft and fixed in an axial
position by shaft sleeves and separate snap rings. Impellers shall be fully protected against damage from reverse
rotation.
• Shaft
Shafts for pumps with stuffing boxes shall be of stainless steel, extending through the stuffing boxes.
Where stuffing boxes are used, shafts shall be provided with water slingers. Shafts shall be provided with water
slingers. Shafts shall be designed with high safety precautions to easily withstand the torsion loads with other
stresses to which they may be subjected. They shall be so designed that there will be no detrimental vibration
stresses. All shaft threading shall be external stresses. All shaft threading shall be external to the water passage
and stuffing boxes. Shaft sleeves shall be keyed to the shafts and extended through the stuffing boxes. O-rings or
gaskets shall be provided at sleeve ends to protect the shafts from water corrosion. They shall be so designed
that no dismantling of the pump casings is required to replace the sleeves.
• Bearing
Bearing shall be heavy-duty ball bearing with a minimum average life of 100,000 hours. The bearing
shall be self-sealed, and housed in malleableiron housings aligned to a bearing bracket by means of large precision
registers. Bearings shall be removable without dismantling any rotating elements or pumps.
• Stuffing Boxes
Stuffing boxes shall be deep enough for not less than 4 rings of packing and shall have bronze glands.
Packing shall be suitable in all cases for the service required with proper consideration of water pressure,
temperature, temperature changes and sediments carried in the water.
• Couplings
Pumps shall be provided with urethane flexible couplings or universal joint with a service factor of at
least 1.5 for an individual application. Couplings shall impose no restriction on normal end play or expansion.
• Base Plate
Pumps shall be provided with a cast-iron or fabricated steel base plate to hold both the pump and
the motor in correct alignment. Pumps and motors shall be accurately aligned.
• Miscellaneous Fittings
High points of pump casings shall be provided with air vent cocks. Low points of casings shall be
provided with valve drains and both inlet and outlet connection with properly located gauge tapping.
Casing brackets of pumps equipped with stuffing boxes shall be arranged to form drip pockets. A drip
pipe shall be run from each drip pockets. A drip pipe shall be run from each drip pocket to the nearest drip funnel
or floor drain.
• Circulation Relief Valve
Each pump shall be provided with a 20 mm. (3/4 inch) circulation valve for pump overheat protection.
Furthermore, Relief valves for over pressure protection shall be provided with sizes conforming to Table 2.20 in
NFPA 20/2002. Relief water pipes shall terminate at the fire reservoir.
• Pressure Switch
• Anti-Vibration
Each pump shall be mounted on approved vibration isolators which are, In turn, placed on a concrete
base. The isolators shall be selected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation such
that no disturbing vibration and noise is being transmitted to the nearby structure.
(2) Vertical Multi-Stage Turbine Pumps
• Bowl
The intermediate bowls, suction bell, and discharge bowl shall be flanged type constructed of close
grained cast iron, and shall conform to ASTM designation A48, class 30. They shall be free from sand holes,
blowholes, or other faults and must be accurately machined and fitted to close tolerance. The intermediate bowls
shall have enamel or epoxy lined waterways for maximum efficiency and wear protection. All intermediate bowls
shall be of identical design for interchangeability. A discharge bowl shall be used to connect bowls to the discharge
column.
• Impellers
The impellers shall be constructed from Bronze and shall be the enclosed type. They shall be from
defects and must be accurately cast, machined for optimum performance and minimum vibration. Impellers are
to be dynamically. They shall be securely fastened to the bowl shaft with taper locks C1018 steel and split thrust
ring of SS. The impeller running position shall be adjustable by shaft adjusting nut in the discharge head or on top
of the hollow shaft driver.
• Suction
The suction bell shall be provided with non-soluble grease packed bronze bearing and a bronze sand
collar shall be incorporated in the pump design to protect this bearing from abrasives. The bearing housing shall
have sufficient opening at the bottom for removal of the bearing. A bronze basket type strainer shall be attached
to the suction bell. It shall have a free area of at least four times the flow area of the suction connection size and
the opening shall be sized to restrict the passage of 1/2" solids.
• Wearing Ring
Bowl assembly shall be fitted with replaceable wearing ring of bronze or aluminum bronze material
in the suction bowl and intermediate bowls. Wearing rings shall have the mating cylindrical surface of the impeller
to provide adequate sealing independent of vertical positioning of the impellers.
• Shaft
The bowl shaft shall be constructed from ASTM 582 type 416 stainless steel. It shall be precision
turned and ground with surface finish better than 40 RMS and shall be supported by water lubricated bearings of
bronze alloy.
• Column Pipe
The column pipe shall be furnished in sections not exceeding a normal length of 10 ft and shall be
connected by threaded-sleeve couplings or flanges. The length of top and bottom sections shall not be more
than 5 ft. It shall be of ASTM A53 grade A steel pipe and the weight shall be not less than schedule 30. The
threaded pipe shall be with 8 threads per inch with 3/16" taper per foot thread and faced parallel to butt against
the centering spiders to from accurate alignment. All column flange faces shall be parallel and machined for
rabbet fit to permit accurate alignment. The inside diameter of the pipe shall be such that the head losses shall
not more than 5 feet per 100 feet of pipe.
• Lineshaft
The lineshaft shall be furnished in interchangeable section not over ten feet in length, and shall be
couplings machined from solid steel bar. It shall have left- hand thread to tighten during pump operation. The
diameter of the shaft shall be based on a combined shear stress of not more than 18% of the ultimate strength
or not excess of 30% of the elastic limit in tension of the shafting material. The coupling shall be designed with
higher safety factor than shaft. Lineshaft and coupling shall be of type 416 stainless steel. Centering spiders shall
be furnished at each column pipe joint for shaft stabilization. Bearings shall be fluted rubber.
• Discharge Head
It shall be of the high profile type to allow shaft coupled above stuffing box and provided for mounting
the driver and support the column and bowl assemblies it shall be high-grade cast iron, ASTM A48 Class 30, or
fabricated steel. The above ground outlet shall be flanged. It shall have a 1/2" NPT connection for a pressure
gauge.
• Stuffing Box
The stuffing box shall be cast iron and shall contain a minimum of five rings of packing with lantern
ring. It shall have a pressure relief connection. The packing gland shall be a 316SS split type secured in place with
non-corrosive studs and nuts. The bearing shall be bronze. A rubber slinger shall be secured to the shaft above
the packing gland.
• Pressure Switch
(3) Motor
Each pump shall be driven not over 3,000 rpm, 380V/3PH/50Hz totally enclosed fan-cooled Class F, IP54 motor.
The rated HP shall be at least 1.15 times the maximum power required. Starter shall be of star-Delta opened
transition reduced voltage starter.
(4) Controller
The controller shall be UL listed or FM approved completely assembled and wired from the factory the following
items shall be included :
• Pressure transducer
• Weekly test program timer
• Voltage surge protector
• Circuit breaker
• Motor contactors
• Start and stop button
• Emergency manual
• Running period timer
• Ammeter, Voltmeter
• Other standard control accessories such as relays, pilot lamps, fuses, pushbuttons and alarm
buzzle.
• Selector switch "AUTO-OFF-MANUAL"
PART III EXECUTION

1. Installation
(1) General
All hydrostatic tests, flushing and field acceptance test procedures outlined in Chapter 14 Acceptance Testing,
Performance, and Maintenance of NFPA 20/2007, shall be carried out.
(2) Hydrostatic Tests and Flushing
• Discharge piping shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than 13.8 kg/cm2 (200 psi)
pressure, or at 3.4 kg/cm2 (50 psi) in excess of the maximum pressure to be maintained in
the system, whichever is greater. The pressure shall be maintained for 2 hours.
Pipe Size Flow Rate

(mm.) gpm L/min
100 590 2,233
125 920 3,482
150 1,360 5,148
200 2,350 8,895
250 3,670 13,891
300 5,290 20,023
Flow Rate for Stationary Pumps
• The installing contractor shall furnish a certificate of hydrostatic test prior to the start of the
fire pump.
(3) Field Acceptance Tests
• All electric wiring to the fire pump motors, including control (multiple pumps) inter-wiring,
emergency power supply, and jockey pump, shall be completed and checked by the
electrical contractor prior to the initial startup and acceptance test.
• A copy of the manufacturer’s certified pump test characteristic curve shall be available for
comparison of results of field acceptance test. The fire pump as installed shall equal the
performance as indicated on the manufacturer’s certified shop test characteristic curve
within the accuracy limits of the test equipment.
• The fire pump shall perform at minimum, rated, and peak loads without objectionable
overheating of any component.
• Vibrations of the fire pump assembly shall not be of a magnitude to warrant potential
damage to any fire pump component.
• Emergency governor valve for steam shall be operated to demonstrate satisfactory
performance of the assembly. Hand tripping shall be acceptable.
Both local and remote alarm conditions shall be simulated to demonstrate satisfactory operation.
• The fire pump or foam concentrate pump shall be in operation for not less than 1 (one)
hour total time during all of the foregoing tests.
(4) Field Acceptance Test Procedures
• Test Equipment
Test equipment shall be provided to determine net pump pressures, rate of flow through the pump, volts and
amperes for electric motor-driven pumps, and speed.
• Flow Tests
o The minimum, rated, and peak loads of the fire pump shall be determined by controlling
the quantity of water discharged through approved test devices
o The pump flow for positive displacement pumps shall be tested and determined to
meet the specified rated performance criteria. One performance point is required to
establish positive displacement pump acceptability.
• Measurement Procedure
o General
The quantity of water discharging from the fire pump assembly shall be determined and stabilized.
Immediately thereafter, the operating conditions of the fire pump and driver shall be measured. Foam concentrate
pumps shall be permitted to be tested with water; however, water flow rates can be lower than expected foam
flow rates because of viscosity.
o The pump flow test for positive displacement pumps shall be accomplished using a
flowmeter or orifice plate installed in a test loop back to the foam concentrate tank or
the inlet side of a water pump. The flowmeter reading or discharge pressure shall be
recorded and shall be in accordance with the pump manufacturer’s flow performance
data. If orifice plates are used, the orifice size and corresponding discharge pressure to
be maintained on the upstream side of the orifice plate shall be made available to the
authority having jurisdiction. Flow rates shall be as specified while operating at the
system design pressure.
o For electric motors operating at rated voltage and frequency, the ampere demand shall
not exceed the product of a full-load ampere rating times the allowable service factor
as stamped on the motor nameplate
o For electric motors operating under varying voltage, the product of the actual voltage
and current demand shall not exceed the product of the rated voltage and rated full-
load current times the allowable service factor. The voltage at the motor shall not vary
more than 5 percent below or 10 percent above rated (nameplate) voltage during the
test.
o Engine-driven units shall not show signs of overload or stress. The governor of such units
shall be set at the time of the test to properly regulate the engine speed at rated pump
speed.
o The gear drive assembly shall operate without excessive objectionable noise, vibration,
or heating.
• Loads Start Test
The fire pump unit shall be started and brought up to rated speed without interruption under the
conditions of a discharge equal to peak load.
• Phase Reversal Test
For electric motors, a test shall be performed to ensure that there is not a phase reversal condition
in either the normal power supply configuration or from the alternate power supply (where provided).
(5) Controller Acceptance Test
• Fire pump controllers shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended
test procedure. As a minimum, no less than six automatic and six manual operations shall
be performed during the acceptance test.
• A fire pump driver shall be operated for a period of at least 5 minutes at full speed during
each of the operations.
• The automatic operation sequence of the controller shall start the pump from all provided
starting features. This sequence shall include pressure switches or remote starting signals.
• Tests of engine-driven controllers shall be divided between both sets of batteries.
• The selection, size, and setting of all overcurrent protective devices, including fire pump
controller circuit breaker, shall be confirmed to be in accordance with this standard.
• The fire pump shall be started once from each power service and run for a minimum of 5
minutes.
END
5.6.06 JOCKEY PUMP

PART I DESCRIPTION
The contractor shall furnish and install the jockey pump as shown on the drawing and/or specified herein.
(2) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 218 : Fire Pump Controllers
3. Submittals
(1) Pump performance curves shall be submitted for approval together with the pump
technical data.
(2) The pump supplier shall submit certificate test of origin from manufacturer before the
pump on site.
• Dimension plan and elevation view drawing of the jockey pump, required clearances, and
All part of the jockey pump shall guaranteed by the manufacture and/or by the contractor at least two (2) year
after handover.
PART II PRODUCTS
1. Description
Pumps shall be regenerative turbine or vertical multistage inline pumps with suction arrangement suitable for
suction of water from the water reservoir.
2. Component
(1) Motors
Each pump shall be driven by a 2,900 rpm, 380V/3 Φ /50 Hz totally enclosed fancooled class F
insulation motor. The rated Hp shall be at least 1.15 times the maximum power required.
(2) Casings
Casings of jockey pumps shall be designed for a working pressure of 20 kg/cm2 or 1.5 times the
actual discharge pressure, whichever is greater. Casing material shall be cast-iron, precision manufactured for best
performance and long-term duty. Specification for wearing rings, impellers, shafts, bearings, stuffing box couplings,
base-plates, circulation relief valves, anti-vibration pads differential pressure switches shall be similar to the fire
pump specification.
(3) Controller
The controller shall be UL listed or FM approved, completely assembled and wired from the
factory.
The following items shall be included :
• Isolating switch
• Circuit breaker
• Direction line motor starter with overload relay and external reset.
• Pressure switch
• Other standard control accessories such as relays, pilot lamps, fuses and pushbuttons.
• Minimum running timer
PART III EXECUTION
1. Installation
All hydrostatic tests, flushing and field acceptance test procedures, Acceptance Testing, Performance, and
Maintenance of NFPA 20/2007 shall be carried out.
END
5.6.7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART I DESCRIPTION
1. Introduction
The fire alarm system shall be an analog addressable pre-signal, non-coded system in accordance with NFPA and
shall be UL listed and FM approved.
2. Scope of work
The contractor shall supply and install the following fire alarm system and equipment as shown on the Drawings.
PART II PRODUCTS
1. Technical Requirements
1.1 Fire alarm system shall consist of the following equipment: Fire Alarm Control Panel (FCP), Annunciator,
Battery charger and Battery, initiating devices, alarm indicating device, conduit and wiring system.
(1) Fire Alarm Control Panel (FCP)
The control panel shall be a microprocessor-based modular system, with fire alarm zones as
indicated on the Drawings, and complete with 220Vac/24 Vdc power supply unit. The panel shall be a dead-front,
heavy gauge steel enclosure and include the following devices:
(a) LED indicators and trouble-sounding device as follows:
(i) AC power ON indicator
(ii) Alarm indicator
(iii) Alarm silence indicator
(iv) Trouble indicators
(v) Microprocessor to central control
(b) Control switch:

(i) Reset switch
(ii) Alarm silence/Acknowledge switch
(iii) Trouble silence switch
(iv) General alarm
(v) Lamp test switch
(c) Firefighter’s emergency telephone system:
(i) Firefighter’s telephone handset
(ii) Associate equipment for communication signal
(2) Annunciator
The annunciator and remote annunciator (if specified) shall be the graphic board type with graphic
representation of the location, or zone of fire upon operation of a manual, or automatic detectors. The LCD
monitor of building control system shall pop-up the graphic plan of the alarm location and CCTV monitor (if
provided) shall pop-up the video of that area at the same time.
(3) Battery charger and Battery
The battery charger shall be consist 220 VAC 50 Hz/24 Vdc rectifier, voltage regulator, overcurrent protection, short
circuit protection, indicator lamps to show the system status, etc. The standby batteries shall be maintenance-free
sealed lead-acid or nickel cadmium type, and shall be able to supply back-up power for 24 hours operation during
main power failure. The power supply shall be able to supply adequately the complete fire alarm system.
(4) Initiating Devices
(a) Heat Detectors shall be of the type with combined fixed temperature and rate of rise detectors. The
fixed temperature setting shall be 57°C (135°F). The rate of rise setting shall be approximately 8°C (15°F) per
minute.
(b) Smoke detectors shall be the low voltage photo-electric type, complete with indicator light.
(c) Fully addressable smoke detectors (if applied) shall be the complete set of photo-electric smoke
detectors and addressable devices.
(d) Duct smoke detectors which are installed at return air duct of VAC system, shall be analog addressable
device type completed with photo-electric smoke detector, remote test switch, indicator light and auxiliary
contacts (2NO+2NC).
(e) The manual stations shall be semi-flush mounted type, signal pull operation and break glass type with
key for initiating a general evacuation alarm and suitable for pre-signal non-coded application. The stations shall
be of a pleasing modern streamlined design with drop front construction, permitting easy inspection and test
operation. The front shall be of shock- resistant material.
(f) Sprinkler water flow switches which are in the scope of the fire fighting work, shall be wired and
connected to the fire alarm system such that the activation of the sprinkler system shall sound an alarm at the
center console.
(g) Sprinkler supervisory switches which are in the scope of the fire fighting work, shall be wired and
connected to fire alarm system such that the movement of a valve from the normal position (open) shall sound
a supervisory trouble signal at the center console.
(5) Alarm Indicating Device
The alarm indicating device shall be piezoelectric mini horn with strobe,which produce high sound output
(minimum 90 dBA at 10 feet) and strobe output not less than 75 candelas.
(6) Alarm report printer
The printer shall be a serial dot matrix impact printer 24 pins 80 columns, 360x360 dpi resolution, bi-directional
optimized in text and graphic, 200 cps at 10 cpi printing speed in draft mode, and complete with standard pin-
feed paper guide. The 2,000 pages of standard pin-feed paper and 2 sets of black ribbon shall be furnished for the
printer.
The printer shall printout all event and alarm of the system with time-stamp in the current time-of-day and date.
(7) Fire fighter’s telephone outlet
The telephone outlet shall be a single pole phone receptacle flush mounting type, complete with aluminium face
plate.
(8) Portable plug-in telephone handset
One set of portable telephone handset shall be furnished for communication between the FCP in control room
and the position of firefighter’s telephone outlets in case of fire. The telephone handset shall be completed with
1500 mm coiled cord and single pole phone jack.
1.2 The system wiring shall be :
(1) Class B loop with terminated by an end-of-line device per one zone circuit for the analog wiring
from terminal cabinets (monitor/control modules) to non-addressable devices (initiating devices and alarm
indicating devices).
(2) Class A loop for the multiplex signal wiring from the FCP to all terminal cabinets (monitor/control
modules) or/and to all addressable detectors.
1.3 The fire alarm system has been designed to control the initial operation of any manual or automatic
alarm initiating devices, to obtain the primary alarm sound at the control panel. Authorized personnel with special
keys may initiate a general evacuation alarm from any manual station.
Control circuits for time delay in pre-signal (1-5 min) preceding the general alarm shall be provided
and installed in the system.
Alarm contacts and alarm signal cables shall be wired to electric fire pump control panel, all elevator control
panels and all pressurized fans for fire condition operation.
1.4 Conduit and Wiring
All wiring shall be as listed below :
(1) 2x1.5 mm2 THW via for initiating devices.
(2) 2x2.5 mm2 FR Cable for alarm indicating devices and power supply to various
monitor/control modules.
(3) 2C-1.5 mm2 twisted pairs with shielded FR Cable for multiplex signal loop.
(4) 4x1C-1.5 mm2 FR Cable for alarm output contacts.
The number of wires and size of conduits shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendation and/or as shown on the Drawings.
1.5 Interfacing
The fire alarm system shall be able to fully communicate with the SCADA system by the system’s
Interface Unit and associate equipment.
PART III EXECUTION
1. Installation
All final connections, tests, adjustments and calibrations shall be made under the direct supervision of a factory-
trained technician of the fire alarm system supplier.
END
5.6.8 FIRE BARRIER WORK

PART I DESCRIPTION
After erection of materials and equipment through wall and opening had been completed, it is the responsibility
of The Contractor to fill up voids and openings with fire resistant materials which conform to NEC article 300-21,
BS476, AS1530 and ASTM to protect fire or smoke from spreading out from one room to another room through
these voids and openings.
The fire barrier and its components shall comply will the following codes and standards.
(1) NEC 300-21
(2) ASTM
(3) UL
(4) BS476
(5) AS1530
3. Submittals
The contractor shall submit material selector, catalog, material lists, technical data and method of installation for
approval before purchasing and installation.
All material and installation of the fire barrier work shall be guaranteed by the contractor at least two (2) years
after handover.
PART II PRODUCTS
1. Description
(1) The applied to wall considered to be a fire or acoustical protection wall, unless otherwise
specified. Cover or escutcheon plates shall be provided, wherever exposed, and shall be neatly
placed to the satisfaction of the engineer.
(2) Also, after the erection of all conduits, wirings, and raceways in the shaft, blockout or any floor
openings, the voids must be sealed with 2-hour fire rating material, and approved by the engineer
unless otherwise specified.
2. Component
The fire barrier materials shall have properties as the following :
(1) The fire barrier materials shall be based on the standards of Underwriter’s Laboratory Inc.
(2) The fire barrier materials shall be of minimum 2-hour fire resistant rating.
(8) The fire barrier materials must be submitted to the engineer for approval before installation.
3. All fire barrier products shall be supplied by single brand.
PART III EXECUTION
1. Installation
At every voids and openings, fire barrier materials shall be installed where :
(1) Every voids, sleeves, and openings appear on wall, floor, beam and shaft, provided for raceway
or pipes or ducts installation, must be sealed after the erection work had been completed.
(3) Voids between electrical conduits or pipes or ducts and sleeves.

The testing method shall be provided from the manufacturer.
END
5.6.9 TEST AND STERILIZATIONS

PART I DESCRIPTION
(1) All piping shall be tested by the contractor and approved by the Employer’s Representative
before acceptance.
(2) All equipment, materials, labour, etc. required for testing the fire protection system or the part
thereof shall be furnished by the contractor at no additional cost.
(3) All new, altered, extended or replaced plumbing shall be left uncovered and unconcealed until
it has been tested and approved.
(4) Where such work has been covered or concealed before it is tested and approved, it shall be
exposed for testing.
(5) Underground fire protection piping shall be tested and approved before back filling.
Test and sterilizations shall comply with the following codes and standards.
NFPA 14/2002 : Standard for the Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant,
and Hose Systems
NFPA 24/2002 : Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains
and Their Appurtenances
PART III EXECUTION
1. Field Testing
(1) Test all electrical equipment upon completion of installation to ensure that the equipment
operates satisfactorily and to conform to contract documents.
(2) Field testing shall be required for all cables and electrical equipment furnished, installed or
connected by the contractor to assure proper installation, setting, connection, and functioning in
accordance with the plans and specifications and manufacturer's recommendations.
(3) Testing shall be conducted in the presence of the Employer’s Representative and, when
necessary, under the supervision of equipment manufacturer's field Engineer.
(4) All tests recommended by the equipment manufacturer whether specified in these Specifications
or not, shall be included, unless specifically waived by the engineer.
(5) Testing shall include any additional tests issued by the engineer conditions to determine that
equipment, material and system meet requirements of these Specifications.
(6) The contractor shall maintain in quadruplicate a written record of all tests showing date,
personnel making test, equipment or material tested, tests performed and results. Two copies of
test records shall be given to the engineer.
(7) The contractor shall notify the Employer’s Representative two weeks prior to commencement
of any testing, except for meggering.
(8) Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to equipment or material due to improper test
procedures or test apparatus handling, and shall replace or restore to original condition any
damaged equipment or material.
(9) Safety devices such as rubber gloves and blankets, protective screens and barriers, danger signs,
etc. shall be provided by the contractor and shall be used to adequately protect and warn all
personnel in the vicinity of the tests.
(10) The contractor shall furnish all testing equipment, and furnish temporary power source of proper
type for testing purposes when normal supply is not available at the time of testing.
(11) The conduit and wiring system, shall be checked to ensure that the system has been installed in
such a way as to provide a safe and reliable system.
(12) The lighting system shall be checked at night to ensure that illumination levels as specified have
been met.
(13) All interlocks, control and alarm circuits shall be given an operation test.
(14) The insulation test of each conductor shall not be lower than the accepted level as required by
Authority concerned.
(15) The grounding system test shall not be more than 5 ohms.
(16) Test all miscellaneous equipment furnished by equipment manufacturer as recommended by
the manufacturer, circuit breaker, low voltage switchboard, motor, etc unless specifically waived
by the engineer.
(17) Include all additional tests issued by Employer’s Representative that he deems necessary
because of field conditions, to determine that equipment and material and systems meet
requirements of these specifications.
(18) Be responsible for all damage to equipment or material due to improper test procedures or test
apparatus handling.
(19) Cost incurred during testing i.e, electricity, city water, labour, etc, shall be borned by the
contractor, unless stated specifically otherwise in these specifications or the contract documents.
2. Flushing of Piping
(1) Underground mains and lead-in connections to system risers shall be completely flushed before
connection is made to sprinkler piping.
(2) The flushing operation shall be continued for a sufficient time to ensure thorough cleaning.
(3) The minimum rate of flow shall be not less than one of the following:
• Hydraulically calculated water demand flow rate of the system, including any hose
requirements.
• Flow necessary to provide a velocity of 3.1 m/sec (10 ft/sec).
• Maximum flow rate available to the system under fire conditions.
(4) Piping between the fire department connection and the check valve in the inlet pipe shall be
flushed with a sufficient volume of water in order to remove any construction debris and trash
accumulated in the piping prior to the completion of the system and prior to the installation of
the fire department connection.
3. Equipment Tests
In addition to the tests required by NFPA 20, the contractor shall carry out functional tests on all flow
switches, monitoring points and interface connections with the fire alarm, BMS and SCADA systems.
Packaged pump units shall be tested at the manufacturers works, and a detailed test certificate shall
be provided.
4. System Operational Tests
(1) Waterflow detecting devices including the associated alarm circuits shall be flow tested through
the inspector’s test connection to result in an alarm on the premises within 5 minutes after such
flow begins.
(2) The main drain valve shall be opened and remain open until the system pressure stabilizes. The
static and residual pressures shall be recorded on the contractor’s test certificate.
(3) Operating tests shall be made of exposure protection systems upon completion of the
installation, where such tests do not risk water damage to the building on which they are installed
or to adjacent buildings.
5. Defective Work
(1) If the inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or
repaired as necessary. Then inspection and tests shall be repeated.
(2) Repairs of piping shall be made with new materials. No caulking of screwed joints or holes will
be acceptable.
6. Cleaning and Adjusting
Equipment, pipes, valves, fittings, and fixtures shall be clean without grease, metal cuttings, or sludge
that may have accumulated from operation of the system during the test. Any stoppage,
discolouration, or other damage to the finish, furnishings, or parts of the building, due to the
Contractor's failure of cleaning the piping system properly, shall be repaired by the contractor at his
properly, shall be repaired by the contractor at his own expense. When the Works is completed. Flush
valves and automatic control devices shall be adjusted for proper operation.
7. Works to completion
(1) The contractor shall commission, clean down, and leave in full working order the works as
specified.
(2) The contractor shall operate the systems in such a manner to be able to and ready to operate
at full load anytime within a period of 24 consecutive hours. The cost incurred during this
operation shall be borne by the Contractor.
(3) As the installation proceeds the contractor shall prepare record drawings of the Electrical
Installation, 'as built drawing. It will be sufficient to modify these contract drawings showing any
amendments to the services which have taken place and submit the marked-up prints to the
Employer’s Representative for approval.
(4) The contractor shall deliver to the owner representative on completion of the works,
manufacturer's literature, specifications, technical information and record drawings for all
equipment installed.
8. Reports
shall be made to assure that all equipment will operate with the required performance. Test run
reports with all necessary data such as pressure, temperature, flow rate, current, voltage, etc., shall be
recorded.
END

PART I DESCRIPTION
items :-
(1) The wiring, cabling and conduit of the mechanical installation are to be determined from the Drawings
and diagrams.
(2) All small items not specifically mentioned but necessary for a complete installation, are to be estimated,
based on good, acceptable practice and proper workmanship.
(3) Data regarding capacities are given in the tabulation table on the Drawings and/or specified in
1.4 In the event the Contractor proposes to use materials/equipment other than of those listed in the
“approved manufacturers” stipulated in this Specification, the Contractor shall ascertain that such
propose material/equipment shall be of the same or equivalent quality. The Contractor shall
furnish and submit details of such propose material/equipment for Employer’s Representative
approval prior to its use.
1.5 All equipment, whether on this list or offered as an alternative, must be supported by adequate,
locally available supplies of spare parts.
(1) Black Steel Pipe and Galvanized Steel Pipe
 Thai Union Steel Pipe
 Saha Thai Steel Pipe
 Samchai Steel
 Pacific Pipe
 KLM Steel Pipe
 MCC Steel Pipe
 Or Equivalent
(2) Gate Valve/ Ball valve
 Kennedy
 Nibco
 Tyco
 Victaulic
 Giacomini
 AVK
 Viking
 Or Equivalent
(3) Butterfly Valve
 Kennedy
 Nibco
 Tyco
 Sapag
 Victaulic
 Viking
 Or Equivalent
(4) Check Valve
 Kennedy
 Nibco
 Tyco
 Victaulic
 Viking
 Or Equivalent
(5) Pressure Reducing Valve/Pressure Relief Valve
 Bermad
 Singer
 OCV
 Watts
 Or Equivalent
(6) Pressure Restricting Valve, Hose Valve, Hose Gate Valve
 Potter Roemer
 Powhatan
 Allenco
 Change Der Fire
 Or Equivalent
(7) Flow Meter
 Eagle Eye- Annubar
 Gerand
 Meriam Instrument
 Preso
 Or Equivalent
(8) Strainer
 Kitz
 Toyo
 Metraflex
 Crane
 Nibco
 Or Equivalent
 Metraflex
 Maid O Mist
 Val-Matic
 ITT Hoffman
 Crispin
 Or Equivalent
(10) Pressure Gauge
 Trerice
 Weksler
 Weiss
 Wika
 Winters
 Or Equivalent
(11) Alarm Valve
 Globe
 Reliable
 Victaulic
 Tyco
 Central
 Viking
 Or Equivalent
(12) Fire Hose Reel
 SRI
 Zerofire
 Spark
 Or Equivalent
(13) Fire Hose
 Snap-Tile
 Nation Fire Hose
 Potter Roemer
 North American Fire Hose
 5 Elem
 Or Equivalent
(14) Fire Department Connection
 Potter Roemer
 Powhatan
 Allenco
 Giacomini
 Elkhart
 Or Equivalent
(15) Hydrant, Roof Manifold
 Potter Roemer
 Powhatan
 Allenco
 Giacomini
 Elkhart
 Or Equivalent
(16) CO2 Fire Extinguisher
 Badger
 Ansul
 Kidde
 Or Equivalent
(17) ABC Dry Chemical Fire Extinguisher
 Gaurdian
 Anti Fire
 Zero Fire
 Or Equivalent
(18) Switch Gear
 Square D
 GE
 Westinghouse
 Siemens
 ABB
 Merlin Gerlin
 Or Equivalent
(19) Starter
 Square D
 GE
 Westinghouse
 Siemens
 ABB
 Telemechanique
 Or Equivalent
(20) Cable
 Thai Yazaki
 Phelps Dodge
 BKK Cable
 MCI
 CTW
 Or Equivalent
(21) Conduit
 Matsushita
 TSP
 TAS
 ABSO
 Maruichi
 Or Equivalent
(22) Supervisory Switch
 Potter Electric
 Victaulic
 Notifier
 System Sensor
 Johnson controls
 Or Equivalent
(23) Flow Switch
 Potter Electric
 Victaulic
 System Sensor
 Johnson Controls
 Or Equivalent
(24) Sprinkler Head
 Victaulic
 Central
 Tyco
 Globe
 Reliable
 Or Equivalent
(25) Mechanical Coupling
 Tyco- Grinnell
 Victaulic
 Anvil
 Gruvlok
 Or Equivalent
(26) Fire Pump
 Peerless
 Aurora
 Patterson
 Armstrong
 ITT
 American Marsh
 SPP
 Or Equivalent
(27) Jockey Pump
 MTH
 Groundfos
 Willo
 ITT
 SPP
 Armstrong
 Or Equivalent
(28) Diesel Engine
 Caterpillar
 Clarke
 Cummins
 Or Equivalent
(29) Electric Motor
 Marathon
 US Motor
 Reliance
 Or Equivalent
(30) Controller
 Firetrol
 Metron
 Master
 Or Equivalent
(31) Fire Barrier
 3M
 Wilhams
 Bitec
 Bio fireshield
 STI
 Or Equivalent
(32) N2 Fire Suppression System
 Siemens
 NN100
 LPG
 Rotalex
 Kidde
 Or Equivalent
(33) Paint
 Jotun
 TOA
 TOA Chugoku
 ICI
 Pamastic
 Shewin William
 Rust –Olium
 Or Equivalent
 Mason
 Tozen
 Metraflex
 Kinetics
 Or Equivalent
PART II PRODUCT
PART III EXECUTION

END
5.7 ELEVATOR & ESCALATORS

5.7.1 ELEVATOR (MACHINE ROOMLESS)
PART I DESCRIPTION
1. Introduction
1.1 These general Specifications and requirements describe the materials and installation of the elevator
system and related work for the Project.
1.2 The Works shall be executed to completion and in conformity with the Drawings and these
Specifications.
1.3 Elevator Manufacturer shall have a quality management system and shall be meets to ISO 9001
certified.
2. Environment
The materials and equipment shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and shall be suitable for
use in tropical climatic area mentioned below.
2.1 Altitude : Approximately mean sea level.
2.2 Ambient Temperature
(1) Maximum : 40º C
(2) Average : 30º C
2.3 Relative Humidity
(1) Maximum : 85%
(2) Average : 60%
The entire system and its basic components shall conform in all respects to the standards and
regulations of SRT. The following standards are mentioned in these Specifications for systems and/or
components and, where described, the systems and/or components shall conform to such standards.
ANSI - American National Standard Institute
ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials
IEC - International Electro Technical Commissions
JIS - Japanese Industrial Standard
EN - European Norm
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
PEA - Provincial Electricity Authority
TISI - Thai Industrial Standard Institute
UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
In the case of conflict or uncertainty in the application of the above standards and codes, the most
All regulations and standards shall be of the latest issue unless governing authorities require an earlier
issue.
4. Scope of Work
4.1 The elevator system work includes the furnishing of materials, labour, equipment, tools,
transportation and services required to construct, install and test the complete elevator system as
shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.
4.2 It shall be the Contractors responsibility to provide a completely safe and workable system in
accordance with the requirements of these Specifications, and the accompanying Drawings and
schedules all to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.3 The Contractor shall coordinate with other related parties to ensure that the system and its
components furnished form a complete elevator system with the established construction schedule.
4.4 The Contractor shall keep a diary on Site which shall contain records of the following essential
information.
(1) Names and number of workers on site (separate list of workers of the Contractor and his
subcontractors).
(2) Types and quantities of materials brought to Site.
(3) Kinds and number of mechanical equipment on Site.
(4) Phase of works executed.
(5) Points of delay in reference to the status of work achieved, if any.
(6) Any written instructions or variation orders received from the Engineer.
(7) Shop-Drawings received.
(8) Special occurrences, accident, etc.
Four copies of the diary shall be submitted daily to the Engineer for approval.
4.5 The Contractor shall further prepare and issue monthly reports from the information already recorded
in the diary during a particular month of reporting, and shall also indicate the precise state of the
progress in comparison with the prevailing approved programmer of Works (progress planning).
The monthly reports shall be issued not later than 1 week after the last day of the month concerned.
5.1 The installation works shall be guaranteed against defects in other equipment, materials, and
workmanship of the elevator system.
5.2 The Contractor has to guarantee the quality and function of all installation included in the
contract for period of 2 years after the acceptance date of complete work.
5.3 The guarantee shall include all parts required, labour, traveling expenses and all other expenses. Work
done under this guarantee shall be performed at no charge to SRT.
PART II PRODUCTS
1. Materials and Equipment
1.1 Technical Requirements
(1) General
Provide manufacturer’s standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherwise
indicated, provide standard components, published by manufacturer as included in standard pre-
engineered elevator systems and as required for a complete system.
The elevators shall be of the public service type and rated at minimum 180 starts per hour. The
elevators shall be proven technology and designed to have low energy consumption, low
operational costs and shall be environmentally friendly. The availability shall be more than 97%.
(2) Machine and Drive System
Machine shall be Gearless type to save energy consumed by the gear reduction unit. Permanent
magnet shall also be utilized to save energy from excitation current. Drive shall be Variable
Voltage Variable Frequency drive system. Three-phase AC mains supply is rectified to DC,
smoothed, then converted back to variable voltage variable frequency AC to provide precise
control of the elevator motor. AC drive current is generated from the DC by a chopping circuit
with the latest technology
Power Supply: Power source for elevator shall be 400 V AC, 3-phase, 50Hz for power and 230 V
AC, single phase for lighting circuit
(3) Control
Control shall be full Collective selective control. The group control (where applicable) will assign
the hall calls to the individual elevators in the way best suited to the existing traffic in order to
achieve the optimum possible handling capacity and waiting time.
Control has a decentralized structure, with group control facilities residing in each control
processor (where applicable).
1.2 Control Features
(1) Overload control
Prevents an overloaded car from commencing a trip. If the car is overloaded the “overload”
signal on the car operating panel is illuminated.
(2) Elevator alarm
When a passenger presses the alarm button in the car, the alarm bell sounds in the hoistway.
The alarm system is powered by battery, so it functions even in the event of a power failure. If
an intercom system is provided, pressing the alarm button activates the intercom.
(3) Car fan and light automatic switched off
The car fan and light are automatically switched off after an elapsed time in which the car was
empty or no call was registered.
(4) Car fan manually off switched
The car fan can be switched manually off by a key switch on the car operating panel.
(5) Car light manually off switched
The car light can be switched manually off by a key switch on the car operating panel.
(6) Emergency light in the car
In the event of a power failure an emergency lighting element in the car is switched on.
(7) Anti-nuisance
To prevent improper operation of the elevator, if there are car calls but no passenger in the car,
the elevator serves the next two car calls and cancels all other car calls afterwards (applicable
to elevator served more than 3 floors).
(8) Emergency lighting
In case of normal power failures in the system, an emergency light in the car automatically lighted
by the battery. In addition, this battery also supplies to the alarm and the intercom system power
not less than 1 hour.
(9) Fire Emergency Return
When the fire alarm signal interfaced to elevator controller is activated, all calls will be cancelled
and the elevator returns to the fire recall floor and remains blocked with the doors open. The
alarm signal shall be provided by others.
(10) Emergency power control
In the event of a power failure, cars are evacuated sequentially to the next lowest floor or to a
pre-defined floor using power from an emergency generator provided by others.
(11) Monitoring and command system
Monitoring and command system will be provided in each station’s control room. It provides
functions to interact with the elevator and collects traffic information for statistics. Provides the
following different overview pictures
- Traffic monitoring
- Deviation alarming
- Traffic history play back
Elevator functions can be commanded such as:
- Car call or Hall call lock

- Out of service
- Priority at landing
1.3 Buffers
Buffers are spring type for speed not exceeds 1 m/s and are oil type for speed higher than 1 m/s.
1.4 Guide Rails & Shoes
- Steel rails of heavy gauge
- Guide shoes are roller type for car and counterweight for speed higher than 1.75 m/s and
are sliding type for speed not exceed 1.75 m/s.
1.5 Overspeed Governor
In case that the speed of travel in the downward direction rises above the permitted tolerance, the
system will operate the safety switch or engage the safety gear.
1.6 Safety Gear
Car safety gear will be provided to prevent falling of the car or excessive speed of the car on down
travel. The safety gear will be in the position to slow down and brake the car and clamp it to the guide
rails at tripping speed of the overspeed governor or at free
1.7 Car Door & Door Protection
Complete with electro-mechanical interlocks & electrical sensor device. Car Door & Door protective
shall be touch-less, multiple beams, light curtain passenger detector. It detects passengers and goods
between the car doors and protects them from being touched by the closing door. The system
generates invisible rays of light in the infra-red spectrum. This light curtain operates between landing
doors and car doors.
1.8 Emergency Exit
Provide on the ceiling.
1.9 Anti-rust
All parts of the steel equipment shall be applied with anti-rust primer prior to painting.
1.10 Safety features
The safety features consist of :-
(1) Short circuit protection
(2) Phase-failure and phase-reverse protection
(3) Motor overload protection
(4) Motor overheat protection
(5) Safety gear with flexible guide clamp for excessive travel speed and/or break in the steel rope.
(6) Landing door - interlocking system to prevent elevator operation if the gap between the two
panels is over 3 mm
(7) Overload sensor
(8) Final up/down limit switches
(9) Provision for fire alarm interfacing system
1.11 Inserts
Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails,
machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified in another
Specification Section.
1.12 Machine beams
Provide framing to support the elevator hoisting machine and deflector sheaves from the building
structure.
1.13 Operation system

(1) General
Provide manufacturer’s standard microcomputer operation system for each elevator or group of
elevators as required
Single elevator-passenger: provide “Simplex Selective-Collective Automatic Operation”
Two –car group-passenger: provide “Duplex Automatic Operation”
Multiple-car group–passenger: provide “Group Automatic Operation” (Applicable for 3-car group
or more).
(2) Emergency communication system
Provide hands-free audio 2-way emergency communication between each car and control room
and identifies elevator location. System is contained in flush – mounted cabinet complete with
identification, instructions for use, and battery back-up power supply, and complies with
accessibility regulations.
(3) Car-top alarm
Provide switches on top emergency exits that will cause alarm to sound when cover is opened.
(4) Hall call-button stations
Provide 1 hall call-button station at each landing for each elevator or group of elevators, but not
less than 1station for each 4 elevators in a group. For each group of passenger elevators, locate
between 2 elevators at center of group or at location most convenient for approaching
passengers.
Provide units with flat stainless steel faceplate designed for mounting on wall with
body of units recessed in wall: 2-button stations at intermediate landings, 1-
button stations with direction indicator at terminal landings.
(5) Hall lanterns
Provide illuminated units behind a single lens. Floor indicator shall be provided in this hall lantern.
It shall be of Dot Matrix or LED type and not less than 50 mm high. Match materials, finishes, and
mounting method of hall-button station.
(a) Provide units projecting from faceplates for ease of angular viewing.
(b) Place lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance, unless otherwise shown.
Mount at minimum of 1800 mm above finished floor.
(c) With each lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel.
Signals sound once for up and twice for down.
(6) Car Operating Panels
Provide one panel in each car, located at least 400 mm from the front return panel to
accommodate the usage of Disabilities.
Car Push buttons shall be installed in accordance to Disabilities regulation. Car operating panel
shall be provided with audible, visible and tactile signals.
1.14 Operation by Emergency power source
If normal power fails, preassigned elevators are automatically called to a specified floor in selected
sequence using the building’s emergency power source. Once the elevators have arrived at the floor,
an elevator can operate normally.
1.15 Fire Emergency Return
If a fire breaks out, when a key switch on the supervisory panel is turned on or the fire sensors in the
building are activated, all calls are cancelled. All cars are immediately calls to a specified rescue floor
and park with the doors open.
1.16 Door safety devices

(1) Infrared Light Curtain: provide safety device with a uniform curtain of microprocessor – controlled
infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams
shall cause the doors to stop and reopen.
(2) Door edge device: provide retractable edge shoes on elevator entrance doors that cause doors
to stop and reopen upon contacting an obstruction (not applicable to glass door).
(3) Nudging feature: after car doors are prevented from closing for a predetermined adjustable time
period, through activating detection device or door edge, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors
shall begin to close at reduced rate of speed.
1.17 Graphics
Car and entrance graphics, including “ NO SMOKING” signs floor designations, and control symbols,
shall be of a single typeface selected by the Engineer.
1.18 Source finishing
Paint elevator equipment with manufacturer’ s standard source applied finish unless otherwise
indicated, including elevator machines, motors, door operators, non-wearing surfaces of guide rails, car
frame and platform, and safety plank.
1.19 CCTV interfacing
The CCTV interfacing shall enable the security personal to monitor the movement inside
the elevator for preventing criminal.
1.20 All equipment, materials and parts used shall be new and unused, of current manufacture, of the
highest quality and free from defects or imperfections affecting the performance or life of the item
1.21 Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or in these Specifications, all materials and
equipment shall be installed, with the approval of the Engineer, in accordance with recommendations
of the manufacturer. However, the approval of the Engineer shall not release the Contractor from his
responsibility or his liability regarding the properties of installations.
1.22 Certain major elevator equipment defined in these Specifications will be furnished to the Contractor,
on site. The Contractor shall assemble, align, level and fix this equipment as instructed by the
manufacturer and to the Engineer's satisfaction. In this case herein specified (if any).
1.23 After the materials and equipment have been installed completely in accordance with the instructions,
the responsibility for protecting of material and equipment from damages shall rest with the
Contractor's own expenses.
2.1 Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide any pay for all tools and other facilities
necessary for the execution and completion of the Works.
2.2 If at any time prior to commencement or during the progress of works, tools, equipment and materials,
in the opinion of the Engineer, appear to be insufficient, of inappropriate to secure the required quality
of works or proper rate of progress, the Engineer may order the Contractor to increase their efficiency,
improve their character, augment their number or replace with new tools, equipment and materials as required.
3.1 The Contractor shall submit in advance a transportation schedule of materials to the Engineer and
coordinate with the Contractor in preparing passage ways and storage facilities.
3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for all expenses incurred during shipping and transporting of
materials and equipment to the Site. The materials and equipment shall be handled in a manner to
prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting and any injury, theft of damage or any
kind whatsoever.
3.3 The shipping documents of particular materials and equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer as
soon as the materials and equipment have arrived at the Site.
4.1 The Contractor shall prepare storage areas of sufficient size for all necessary materials and equipment
brought to the Site. The storage areas shall be provided with access for inspection and removal of the
stored materials and equipment.
4.2 Materials and equipment delivered to the Site without suitable storage shall not be accepted.
5. Shop Drawings
5.1 The Contractor shall examine all Drawings to make sure that all requirements are thoroughly
understood. In cases where, in his opinion, there are omissions and/or errors in any of these documents,
he shall inform the Engineer immediately.
5.2 Figured dimension as indicated on the Drawings are to be followed and in no case shall dimensions
be scale from the Drawings. Wherever possible, dimensions are to be measured from the building.
Before the Contractor commences any works, he shall ensure that dimensions are checked on the site
and/or building and agree with those on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
accuracy of such dimensions regardless of the comparable dimensions on the Drawings.
5.3 The Contractor shall submit 5 copies of complete shop drawings to the Engineer for approval at least
30 days before starting the installation.
5.4 Size and scale of shop drawings shall be similar to the Contract Drawings, except for enlarge scale
details done for clarify, which shall be in conformity with international standard or as directed by the Engineer.
5.5 All details of the installation of the elevator system, including the required clearance for accessibility,
shall be clearly indicated to avoid conflicts with other trades.
6. Elevator Schedule
Specific Requirement of each elevator at each station is stated in the elevator schedule in this clause.
STATION 1 2 3 …
ELEVATOR No.
Machine Type
Elevator User
Capacity (Kg.)
Speed(m/s)
Hoistway Size(w x d) (mm.) (Per unit)
Pit Depth (mm.)
Minimum Overhead Clearance (mm.)
Travel Distance (mm.)
Number of Landing
Car, Hoistway entrance size (w x h)(mm.)
Automatic Door Operator Type **
Number of Car Operating Panel
Car ceiling Height
Emergency power operation
2 way Emergency Communication System
Door safety edge device
* MRL = MACHINE ROOMLESS
** C.O.2 = CENTER OPENING, 2 PANELS
PART II EXECUTION
1. Responsibility
1.1 The Contractor shall establish, maintain, and supervise all precautions and programs for safety and
provide protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
(1) All Employees on the Site and other persons who may be affected thereby.
(2) All works and all materials or equipment to be incorporated herein, whether in storage on or off
the Site.
1.2 As the work proceeds, the Contractor shall progressively remove rubbish and surplus materials away
from the construction Site and shall maintain his working area in a clean and tidy condition as far as is
practicable.
1.3 Upon completion of the Works he shall, without delay, remove all his temporary works and buildings,
all tools, equipment and surplus materials, and shall clean the whole area affected by his work and
leave it ready for immediately occupation.
1.4 All materials, equipment and finished works shall be kept in good condition. The completed work shall
be the Contractor's property until handed over to the Employer..
2. Field Testing
2.1 Test all equipment upon completion of installation to ensure that the equipment operates
satisfactorily to the Engineer approval.
2.2 Field testing shall be required for all cables and electrical equipment furnished, installed or connected
by the Contractor to assure proper installation, setting, connection, and functioning in accordance with
the plans and Specifications and manufacturer's recommendations.
2.3 Testing shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer and, when necessary, under the supervision
of equipment manufacturer's field Engineer.
2.4 All tests recommended by the equipment manufacturer whether specified in these Specifications or
not, shall be included, unless specifically waived by the Engineer.
2.5 Testing shall include any additional tests issued by the Engineer to determine that equipment,
materials and system meet requirements of these Specifications.
2.6 The Contractor shall maintain in quadruplicate a written record of all tests showing date, personnel
making test, equipment or material tested, tests performed and results. Two copies of test records
shall be given to the Engineer.
2.7 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer two weeks prior to commencement of any testing, except for
meggering.
2.8 Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to equipment or materials due to improper test
equipment or materials.
2.9 Safety devices such as rubber gloves and blankets, protective screens and barriers, danger signs, etc.
2.10 The Contractor shall furnish all testing equipment, and furnish temporary power source of proper type
for testing purposes when normal supply is not available at the time of testing.
2.11 Include all additional tests issued by the Engineer that he deems necessary because of field conditions,
to determine that equipment and material and systems meet requirements of these Specifications.
2.12 The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to equipment or materials due to improper test
procedures or test apparatus handling.
2.13 Cost incurred during testing, i.e., electricity, labour, etc, shall be borne by the Contractor, unless stated
specifically otherwise in these Specifications or in the Contract Documents.
staff of SRT for a period of not less than 15 consecutive days until they are competent to operate the
system by themselves.
4. Maintenance Service
4.1 The Contractor shall prepare service man for maintenance and service equipment in good performance
every month in a year.
4.2 Service shall include all required examinations, adjustments, lubrications, cleaning, supplies, and parts
to keep the equipment in proper operation, except such adjustments, parts, or repairs made necessary
by abuse, misuse, or any other such causes beyond the control of the Contractor.
4.3 The Contractor shall sent report for maintenance and service of equipment to the Engineer in 7 days
after service.
END

PART I DESCRIPTION
1.3 Quantities of each piece of materials shall be as specified on the Drawings except for the following items:-
(2) All small items not specifically mentioned but necessary for a complete installation, are to
be estimated, based on good, acceptable practice and proper workmanship.
(1) Lift and Escalators
 Mitsubishi
 Hitachi
 Kone
 Thyssenkrupp
 Schindler
 Or Equivalent
PART II PRODUCT
PART III EXECUTION

END OF SECTION 5
SECTION 6
PIPES AND DRAINAGES
Tender Documents Section 6: Pipes and Drainages
SECTION 6: PIPES AND DRAINAGES
6.1 REINFORCED CONCRETE CULVERTS

6.1.1 DESCRIPTION
6.1.1.1 Scope
(1) This section specifies reinforced concrete pipe culverts furnished and installed at such
locations as are shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer in accordance with
these specifications and in accordance with the classes, lines, levels, grades and dimensions
shown on the drawings.
(2) The work shall include the furnishing and construction of such joints and such connections
to other pipes, catch basins, and walls and other items as may be required to complete
the structure as shown on the drawings.
(3) More culverts than shown on the drawings may be required and, if so, the Engineer will
indicate their location and dimensions as the work proceeds.
(4) The horizontal and vertical location of pipe culverts, their dimensions, skew, inlets and
outlets, as indicated on the drawings, are subject to final decision and instruction to be
given by the Engineer in writing.
(5) Changes that occur as described above shall in no way affect or invalidate the unit rates
concerned, except as provided in the following and in the Conditions of Contract.
6.1.1.2 Tolerances
(1) Permissible Variations
(a) Dimensions
The internal diameter of 300-600 mm pipes shall not vary more than 1.5% from the
design diameter. The internal diameter of 700-2,700 mm pipes shall not vary more
than 1.0% or shall not be less than shown in the design by more than 5% or 5 mm
whichever is the greater.
(b) A wall thickness more than that required in the design shall not be a cause for
rejection. Pipes having localised variations in wall thickness exceeding those specified
above shall be accepted if three edge bearing strength and minimum steel cover
requirements are met.
(c) The maximum variation in the nominal position of the reinforcement shall be +10%
of the wall thickness or +10 mm whichever greater. Pipes having variations in the
position of the reinforcement exceeding those specified above shall be accepted if
the three bearing strength requirements obtained on a representative specimen are
met. In no case however shall the cover over the reinforcement be less than 10 mm.
(d) Laying Lengths
Variations in laying length of two opposite sides the pipe shall not be more than 1%
of the diameter with a maximum of 15 mm in any length of pipe, except where
bevelled end pipe for laying in curves is specified by the Engineer.
(e) The underrun in length of a section of pipe shall not be more than 1% of the diameter
with a maximum of 15 mm in any length of pipe.
6.1.2 PRODUCTS
6.1.2.1 Materials
(1) Cement
Shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.3: CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES,
subsection 4.3.2.1(1)
(2) Aggregates
subsections 4.3.2.1(3) and 4.3.2.1(4)
(3) Water
subsection 4.3.2.1(2)
(4) Pipes
Shall be tongue and groove type and shall conform to TIS 128-2549 Grade III. Culvert pipes
manufactured by the Contractor at the site of the project will be subject to acceptance on
the basis of TIS 128-2549 Grade III. Factory made culvert pipes shall be subject to
acceptance on the basis of TIS 128-2549 Grade III.
(5) Moulds
Shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.1: FORM AND FALSEWORK.
(6) Reinforcement
Shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.2: REINFORCEMENT.
(7) Bedding
Shall be type 1 subbase material conforming to the requirements of Section 2.6: SUBBASE
AND SUBBALLAST.
(8) Backfill
Shall be selected embankment fill having CBR 10 or more.
6.1.2.2 Finish
Pipes shall be substantially free of fractures, large or deep cracks and surface roughness. The ends
of a pipe shall be normal to its walls and centreline.
6.1.2.3 Testing
(1) Test Specimens
The specified number of pipes required for the tests shall be furnished without charge by
the Contractor and shall be selected at random by the Engineer, and shall be pipe that
would not otherwise be rejected under these specifications. The selection shall be made
at the point or points designated by the Engineer.
(2) External Load Crushing Strength Test requirements:
(a) The test load shall be in accordance with AASHTO M170, Table 4A.
(b) Pipes shall be considered to meet the strength test requirements when all test
specimens conform to the requirements. Should any of the test specimens fail to
meet the test requirements the Contractor shall be allowed a retest on two additional
specimens for each specimen that failed and the pipe shall be acceptable only when
all of the retest specimens meet the strength requirements.
(3) Compression Test. Compression tests shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of Section 4.3: CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
(4) Absorption Test. The absorption of a sample from the wall of a pipe as determined in
accordance with AASHTO Test Method 133 shall not exceed 8% of the dry weight. Pipes
shall be considered as conforming to these specifications for absorption when not less than
80% of the number of specimens including those retested, conform to the test
requirements. When the initial absorption specimen from a pipe fails to conform to these
specifications, the absorption test shall be made on another specimen from the same pipe
and the results of the retest shall be substituted for the original test results
(5) Test Equipment. The Contractor furnishing pipes under these specifications shall furnish all
facilities and personnel necessary to carry out the tests described above.
6.1.2.4 Markings
(1) The following information shall be clearly marked on each section of the pipe:
(a) The pipe class
(b) The date of manufacture
(c) The name or trademark of the manufacturer.
6.1.3 EXECUTION
6.1.3.1 Execution
(1) Method A
The width of the pipe trench shall be sufficient to permit satisfactory jointing of the pipe
and thorough tamping of the bedding material under and around the pipe.
Where rock, hard pan or other unyielding material is encountered it shall be removed
below the foundation grade for a depth of at least 300 mm or 40 mm for each meter of
fill over the top of the pipe, whichever is greater, but not to exceed three quarters of the
inside diameter of the pipe.
(2) Method B
Before laying, the ground shall be trimmed true to line and grade, as directed by the
Engineer, over sufficient width to permit satisfactory construction of the bedding. Special
care shall be taken to remove any hard or deleterious material from the foundation area.
When a firm foundation is not encountered, due to soft, spongy or unstable soil, such
unstable soil under the pipe and for a width of at least one diameter on each side of the
pipe shall be removed to the depth directed by the Engineer and replaced with gravel or
other suitable selected material properly compacted to provide adequate support for the
pipe, unless other special construction methods are called for on the drawings.
(3) The prepared surface shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the
length of the culvert.
(4) Excavated materials shall not be deposited in the drainage channel and only material
classified as suitable shall be utilised as backfill or embankment.
6.1.3.2 Bedding
(1) The bedding for pipe culverts shall be selected and compacted as for embankment fill for
layers at the depths concerned below subgrade. Where catchpits, inlets, or manholes are
required by the Engineer they shall be made as shown on the drawings.
(2) Where a section of pipe culvert is to be placed under more than a 9 m high fill the work
of preparing foundation and bedding, filling and compacting, excavating trench, placing or
constructing culvert and of backfilling shall be carried out in accordance with the drawings.
(3) Where indicated on the drawings, or as instructed by the Engineer, existing pipe culverts
that would be rendered inoperative or blocked by construction activities of the Works, shall
be carefully excavated and removed from their present location. If ordered by the Engineer,
they shall be relocated and re-laid at the designated place.
6.1.3.3 Installation
All reinforced concrete culvert pipe shall be laid with cemented joints. The pipe shall be laid
carefully hubs up-grade, spigot ends fully entered into the adjacent hub, and true to lines and
grades as shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer. Before succeeding sections of pipe
are laid, the lower half of the hub of the preceding section shall be plastered on the inside with
cement mortar (proportioned 2 sand to 1 cement) of sufficient thickness to bring the inner surface
of the abutting pipes flush and even. At the same time the upper half of the spigot of the
succeeding pipe shall be similarly plastered with mortar. After the pipe is laid, the remainder of
the joint shall be used to form a bead around the joint. The inside of the joint shall be wiped and
finished smooth. The mortar on the outside shall be protected for two days or until the Engineer
allows backfilling to proceed.
6.1.3.4 Backfilling
(1) Backfilling shall be carried out with material approved by the Engineer placed in uniform
layers not exceeding 300 mm in uncompacted depth and thoroughly compacted.
Each layer of backfill material, if dry, shall be wetted uniformly to a moisture content
approved by the Engineer to obtain a density comparable with the density of the adjacent
undisturbed material.
(2) Special care shall be taken to compact thoroughly the material under the haunches of the
pipe and to ensure that backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe for
the full required length.
6.1.3.5 Jacked Pipe
Prior to commencement of this work, submit a complete plan and schedule for pipe installation.
Include complete details of sheeting, shoring, and bracing for the protection of facilities above
the pipe, as well as materials and equipment pertinent to the jacking operation.
Do not proceed with pipe installation until the plan and schedule have been accepted. Proceed
in a manner which will not disturb facilities or cause settlement of the ground above the pipe.
Provide free and unobstructed use of facilities above the pipe, without delay or danger to life,
equipment, or property.
Install pipe immediately following the heading or tunnelling excavation. After completion of the
jacking operation fill voids around the pipe with grout placed under pressure. Properly protect the
grout for not less than 3 days.
Place joint sealant material on concrete pipe in front of the jacking frame. As directed, replace or
repair pipe damaged during the jacking operations. When steel casing pipe is used, butt-weld the
joints as installation progresses. Make joints watertight.
If it is determined that the pipe installation is being conducted in an unsatisfactory manner, stop
this work and place a bulkhead at the heading until an alternate procedure is proposed and
accepted.
6.1.3.6 Extension of Existing Pipe
When extensions of pipe culverts or drains are indicated or required, remove the existing endwalls,
if indicated or directed. Cut the existing pipe to a true edge, as required, to make a satisfactory
joint. Join the new pipe to the existing pipe or endwalls, using acceptable collars constructed of
Class A Concrete or acceptable metal connecting bands. Clean the existing pipe being extended.
Repair or replace existing pipe damaged during construction.
6.1.3.7 Cleaning Existing Pipes
Clean existing pipe culverts, clean inlets, bridge scuppers and piping, manholes, endwalls, and
other drainage appurtenances connected to the pipes, as directed. Clean in an acceptable manner
and repair damage resulting from the cleaning operation. Remove any material deposited in inlets
during paving operations. Prevent material cleaned from the drainage system from entering
streams or other bodies of water, and dispose of this material in a satisfactorily manner.
6.1.3.8 Quality Control
(1) Pipes shall not be installed by the Contractor until the length called for at each station has
been approved by the Engineer.
(2) Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, pipe culverts to be laid on existing ground
and/or under fill embankment shall have the fill constructed to a height of at least
600 mm above the top of the pipe and then a trench excavated to receive the pipe. The
method of excavation employed shall be as Excavation, Method A.
(3) Where circumstances permit and only with the approval of the Engineer, the Contractor
will be permitted to construct pipe culverts on or in existing ground without first forming
embankment. When this approval is given Method B will be employed.
(4) Heavy and earthmoving and compacting equipment shall not operate closer to the culvert
than 1.5 m until covered to a depth equal to at least one fourth of the diameter of the
culvert, but in no case less than 600 mm, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Light
weight equipment may be operated to give a minimum cover of 300 mm over the top of
the culvert.
(5) Only when all backfilling has been completed in accordance with this section shall the
Contractor continue with forming the embankment which shall be done in conformity with
the requirements of Section 2.5: EMBANKMENT.
6.1.3.9 Defects
(1) The quality of materials, the process of manufacture and the finished pipe shall be subject
to inspection and approval by an inspector employed by the Engineer.
(2) Pipes shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the
specification requirements. Individual sections of pipe may be rejected because of any of
the following.
(a) Fractures or cracks passing through the wall, except for a single end crack that does
not exceed the depth of the joint.
(b) Defects indicating imperfect proportioning mixing and moulding.
(c) Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture.
(d) Damaged ends where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint.
6.1.3.10 Repairs
Pipes may be repaired, if necessary, because of occasional imperfections in manufacture or
accidental injury during handing and will be acceptable if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the
repairs are sound and properly finished and cured and the repaired pipe conforms to the
requirements of this specification.
6.2 DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE

6.2.1 DESCRIPTION
6.2.1.1 Scope
This section specifies external sewerage works. This shall include, but not be limited to, pipes,
manholes, soil drains, septic tanks, filter beds, soakaways and effluent pipes.
6.2.1.2 General
(1) 100 mm soil drains shall have a minimum gradient of 1:60 and for 150 mm the minimum
gradient shall be 1 in 80.
(2) The Contractor shall determine the overall depth of septic tank and filter bed from the
invert level of the first manhole and the falls of the drain, as no claim in connection with
the increase in depth of the septic tank and filter bed will be entertained.
(3) All soil pipes under roads, hardstandings, covered ways, and under buildings shall be in
cast iron and encased in 150 mm thick concrete all round and through the entire length of
road and shoulders.
(4) Precast Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 4.4: PRECAST CONCRETE.
6.2.2 PRODUCTS
6.2.2.1 Materials
(1) Precast Concrete Pipes and Fittings Shall be standard products conforming to TIS 128.
Internal diameters shall be as shown on the Drawings.
(2) Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings
Shall be spigot-and socket type, made of homogeneous cast iron, be airtight and watertight,
flawless and of true form. They shall comply with ASTM A-120 Schedule 40 Commercial
Standard CS188 or be of higher quality.
(3) Jointing Materials
(a) Packing yarn: Tarred hemp.
(b) Concrete pipe jointing compound: Asphalt filler with up to 40% filler containing
granulated rubber and/or fibre.
(c) Cast iron jointing compound: Lead which shall be clean, non-brittle, soft and pliable
and have a specific gravity of minimum 11.3 g/ cm3. Lead bars must not be re-melts
and shall bear the original manufacturer's stamp.
(d) Precast inspection chambers and similar units: Shall be constructed of rings and
eccentric cones, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
The cylindrical and conical elements shall be tongued and grooved and have a wall
thickness of 100 mm. The heights of the elements, as related to the unit diameters,
shall be as follows.
Element Inside Diameter of Unit Height of Element

Cylindrical Elements 1,000 or 1,500 mm 500, 750 or 1,000 mm
Conical Elements 625/1,000 mm 1,000 mm
Top Cylindrical Elements 625 mm 100, 150 or 200 mm
The heights and diameters of the finished units are given in the drawings.
(e) Cast iron drain covers: Shall be single seal cast iron covers and frames light duty except
in roads and hardstanding where they shall be medium or heavy duty as shown on
the drawings.
(f) Cast iron steps: For inspection chambers galvanised malleable cast iron, to project at
least 100 mm. from chamber wall.
6.2.3 EXECUTION
6.2.3.1 Trenching
(1) Trenches shall be dug in a straight line from point to point and all pipes shall have a
minimum cover of 450 mm
(2) The trenches for pipes shall be made to the exact depth necessary for the laying of the
pipes. Where the excavations are carried out to a deeper level than specified or directed
by the Engineer, they shall, on the Contractor's account, be filled in to the required level
with compacted gravel.
(3) The width of the trenches for the sewerage and rainwater pipes shall be at least 750 mm
more than the outside diameter of the pipes, and necessary supports and strutting shall
be provided.
6.2.3.2 Pipe Laying
(1) The pipes shall be laid in true lines between the various units (bends, drains, traps, chamber,
tanks, etc.) to the grades indicated by means of levels and target rods (tolerance 1:100).
(2) Concrete pipes shall have the spigot end of each concrete pipe wound with a double ring
of tarred hemp which shall be caulked to assure correct centring, and the spigot-and-socket
joint shall then be packed with packing yarn and filled with asphalt joint material, which
shall be of a recognised manufacture approved by the Engineer.
(3) Branches for concrete pipe lines with a diameter up to 250 mm shall be constructed by
means of 45 degree branch pipes, and for pipe lines with a diameter of 300 mm or more
by cutting a branch into the main pipe. In the latter case the branch shall be grouted into
the main pipe with cement mortar (1:3) taking care that no excess mortar is left in the pipe
and that the branch does not project into the main pipe.
(4) The spigot-and-socket joints of cast iron pipes shall be packed with packing yarn and filled
with lead casting which shall be carefully caulked after it has cooled.
6.2.3.3 Backfilling
(1) No filling of the trenches must take place before the pipe lines have been inspected and
(2) The trenches shall be backfilled by hand, until 250 mm above the top of the pipes and
carefully tamped under and around the pipes with hand tamper.
(3) Further backfilling may be made mechanically, but the layer of fill must not exceed
250 mm and shall be carefully tamped by hand or with motorised earth tamper. Filling
materials must not contain stones weighing more than approximately 2 kg, and shall be
approved by the Engineer before application. Surplus material shall be removed.
6.2.3.4 Inspection Chambers
(1) Each unit shall be placed on a bottom slab made of Class C concrete, 150 mm thick, with
the diameter being 250 mm greater than that of the unit being placed upon it.
(2) When the bottom slab has been laid, the rings and the cones shall be assembled with
cement mortar 1:3. Recesses shall be cut into the sides of the units and ladder rungs of
hot-galvanised 20 mm steel shall be embedded. The ladder rungs shall be spaced vertically
250 mm apart.
(3) The inlet and outlet pipes shall be placed by cutting holes in the rings or cones and sealing
the joint with cement mortar 1:3.
(4) The bottom of the inspection chambers shall be cast of concrete Class C and shaped as
indicated on the drawings and with floated off surface.
(5) All the units shall, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, be provided with top rings
as necessary to bring the cast iron lids of the chamber up flush with the finish grade.
(6) The frames for the lids shall be embedded into the top of the units with cement mortar
1:3, making sure that the joint is air and watertight.
(7) No backfilling with earth shall take place, until the construction work has been approved
by the Engineer. Surplus material shall be removed.
6.2.3.5 Septic Tanks
(1) Necessary excavation, support, strutting and backfilling shall be provided and surplus
material shall be removed.
(2) Reinforcement, formwork, pipe connections, step iron, covers including cast iron covers for
heavy traffic shall be included.
6.2.3.6 Soakaways
(1) Areas determined for placing of soakaways are assumed to be without waterlogging ground
materials. Trenches shall be excavated to straight lines, widths and depths and with
horizontal bottoms as shown on the drawings. Where the excavations are carried out to
deeper levels than specified or directed they shall on the Contractor's account, be filled in
to the required levels with compacted gravel.
(2) Necessary supports and strutting shall be provided. Crushed rock with grain size
approximately 30-60 mm shall be filled in as indicated.
(3) No backfilling with earth shall take place before approval by the Engineer. Surplus earth
shall be removed.
6.2.3.7 Gullies
(1) The elements shall be assembled with cement mortar 1:3. The gullies shall be placed in
correct levels so that gratings and covers will fit in with the finished surface of the pavement
(2) The water trap on the lower element shall be placed on a bed of concrete Class C as
shown on the drawings.
(3) The frames for gratings and covers shall be embedded into the units with cement mortar 1:3.
6.3 PIPE DRAINS

6.3.1 DESCRIPTION
6.3.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the provision of perforated pipe drains and pipe outlets constructed in
accordance with this specification and in accordance with the lines, Levels, grades, sizes,
dimensions and types shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
6.3.1.2 General
Where the presence of ground water may create difficulties for excavating deep cuts in earth a
network of drainage pipe shall be placed below the surface of the side slopes, as the excavation
proceeds and as instructed in writing by the Engineer.
6.3.2 PRODUCTS
6.3.2.1 Materials
(1) Precast Concrete Pipe
Shall be 200 mm internal diameter perforated concrete pipe conforming to the
requirements of AASHTO M175, type 1 or 2, and all applicable requirements of AASHTO
M86, Table 1A, class 1.
(2) Corrugated Steel Pipe
Perforated corrugate metal pipe shall conform to the requirements of Standard
Specification AASHTO M136.
(3) Bituminous Corrugated Steel Pipe
Shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO Standard Specification M136.
(4) Plain Pipe
Shall be identical with the perforated pipe as described except that there shall be no
perforations.
(5) Backfill
(a) Porous backfill material for bedding and backfilling pipe underdrains shall conform to
the requirements of Section 2.5: EMBANKMENT but shall be of material retained on
3/8" sieve.
(b) Impervious backfill material shall be a final compactable soil approved by the
Engineer.
(6) Rockfill
For open drains shall be broken stone with maximum dimension 150 mm and minimum
50 mm in any direction.
(7) Selected Gravel Material
Shall be well graded gravel 25 mm - 6 mm.
6.3.3 EXECUTION
6.3.3.1 Excavation and Bedding
(1) Trenches shall be 800 mm x 800 mm deep and shall be bedded on backfill material.
(2) The drains shall be placed parallel to the surface of the side slope in a "herring bone"
pattern. Counteriort (or collector) drains shall be perpendicular to the railway or road and
spaced approximately twice their total estimated length to the bottom of the side ditch.
Slope drains shall be placed at a 30° degree angle to the counterfort and spaced as
indicated by the Engineer. Drain outlets in excavation shall be protected with stone rip-rap.
6.3.3.2 Pipe Laying
(1) Pipe of the kind and size required shall be embedded firmly in the bedding material.
(2) Spigot and socket pipe shall be laid with the socket ends upgrade and the spigot ends fully
entered in the adjacent socket and spot mortared to provide for centring of pipe, but not
closed to the desired infiltration of water.
(3) The joints of butt-jointed pipe shall be covered with two-ply tar paper strips not less than
150 mm in width and of sufficient length to permit the ends being turned outward and laid
flat on the bedding material on either side of the pipe for a distance of 80 mm.
In lieu of tar paper, the joints may be wrapped twice around with a strip of burlap or other
approved material.
(4) Perforated pipes shall be laid with the perforated side of the pipe down, and separate
sections shall be firmly joined with approved metal bands.
6.3.3.3 Backfilling
(1) After the pipe has been laid and has been inspected and approved by the Engineer, porous
backfill material shall be placed to the depth indicated on the drawings.
Care should be exercised not to displace the pipe or joint covering around and over the
pipe.
The upper portion of the trench shall then be filled with suitable material of either porous
or impervious type as shown on the drawings.
All filling material shall be thoroughly compacted.
(2) All work shall be constructed to the dimensions and other requirements stated on the
drawings.
6.3.3.4 Open Stone Drains
Open stone drains may be used instead of pipe under-drains for surface runoff on slopes, whether
in cut or fill. The pattern and location of drains shall be as described in pipe-laying, but trenches
shall be 500 mm wide and 300 mm deep only and filled with stones.
6.3.3.5 Formation Drains

(1) Formation drains are to be constructed, in station areas and where directed by the Engineer,
in accordance with the details shown on the drawings, with approved selected gravel
material
(2) The drains shall be constructed after the completion of the subbase and formation works.
(3) All materials to be used for formation drains shall conform to the following standards:
Galvanised Steel Pipes TIS 277
HDPE Pipes TIS 982
PVC Pipes TIS 17
Steel Plate TIS 55 Grade SR 24
6.4 MISCELLANEOUS DRAIN STRUCTURES

6.4.1 DESCRIPTION
6.4.1.1 Scope
This work specifies furnishing miscellaneous types of structures built according to the specification
for concrete structures, except as noted herein. Included are such items as pipe end walls and
head walls, pipe encasements, retaining walls, inlets catch basins, manholes, and other incidental
items, not specified elsewhere.
6.4.1.2 Tolerance
The tolerances permitted under Section 4: Structural Works shall apply to this sections.
6.4.2 PRODUCTS
6.4.2.1 Materials
(1) Concrete: Shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.3: CONCRETE FOR
STRUCTURES.
(2) Reinforcement: Shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.2: REINFORCEMENT.
(3) Formwork: Shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.1: FORMWORK AND
FALSEWORK.
(4) Cast Iron: Shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO Standard Specification M105
Class 30.
(5) Manhole and Intel Steps: Shall comply with ASTM A-207.
(6) Rip rap is described under Section 4.12: REVETMENTS.
6.4.3 EXECUTION
Construction methods given under Section 4: Structural Works shall apply for this item, except as
noted herein.
(1) Underground Drainage Structures
Underground drainage structures, including earthwork and backfill incidental thereto, shall
be completed before the adjacent surfacing is placed, but pipe end walls shall not be
constructed until grading has been completed, as developments during construction may
justify alteration in design or location of such end walls
(2) Manholes, Catch Basins and Inlets

Manholes, catch basins and inlets shall not be completed to final grade until after the grading
has been finished and all necessary arrangement have been made to insure suitable
connections at proper grade and alignment with pavement with pavements, gutter, kerbs, etc.
(3) Grates, Frames and Covers
Grates, and frames for grates, and covers for inlets and manholes shall be set in full beds
of mortar or be otherwise properly secured as indicated in the drawings so as to be held
rigidly in place, and to grade and alignment.
(4) Inlets and Outlets
Inlet and outlet pipes at inlets and manholes shall be set or cut flush with the inside faces
of the walls of such structures and shall extend a sufficient distance beyond the outside
faces of the walls to provide ample room for making proper connections.
The joint around the pipe in the structures wall shall be completely and neatly filled with
mortar, or other material as may be specified, so as to make it watertight.
(5) Pipe Surrounds
Pipe surrounds shall be constructed of class B concrete, unless otherwise specified. All
work shall be constructed in accordance with the drawings.
6.5 EARTH DITCH EXCAVATION

6.5.1 DESCRIPTION
The work shall consist of excavation of existing ground or existing embankment to become earth
ditch to the shapes, levels and lines as shown on the Drawings.
6.5.2 PRODUCT
6.5.2.1 Materials
Earth ditch excavation is classified by types of material the purposes of ditch excavation shall be
defined into 3 categories.
(1) Earth Excavation
The work shall consist of the ditch excavation which the excavated material is generally
earth and not classified in Sections 6.5.2.1(2) and 6.5.2.1(3) or not specified otherwise on
the Drawings.
(2) Soft Rock Excavation
The work shall consist of the ditch excavation which the excavated material is soft rock. To
prove as soft rock, the material shall excavated by using a crawler tracktor perfect equipped
with ripper condition. After proof, the soft rock excavation can be done with any
equipment.
(3) Hard Rock Excavation
The work shall consist of the ditch excavation which excavated material is hard rock or
boulders each having a volume of 0.75 cubic meters or more. Drilling and blasting shall be
required.
6.5.2.2 Equipment
The Contractor shall furnish equipments appropriate for the ditch excavation in each category
and by approval of the Project Engineer.
6.5.3 EXECUTION
(1) All ditch excavation shall be done to the shapes, levels and lines as shown on the Drawings
or specified by the Engineer. Where existing ground is classified into many categories,
excavation shall be performed by changing the back slope and providing steps as detailed
on the Drawings. The back slope shall be neatly shaped and free from any loose material
which a slide may occur.
(2) Excavated material, in excess of those being used, shall be transported and disposed in the
areas specified on the Drawings or suitable areas as consented by the Engineer to be in
neat condition and not to impair or obstruct any drainage or not cause any damages to
embankment works and SRT property and others.
6.5.3.2 Construction Control
(1) Elevation Check
Excavation limited to the existing ground shall conform to the shapes and smoothness
according to the Drawings. The deviation of elevation checked by a 3.0 meter long straight
edge shall be less than 10 millimetres in both directions of perpendicular and parallel to
the centre line. The elevation shall be different from that shown on the Drawings by not
greater than 15 millimetres. The elevation check shall be performed at 25 meter interval
or less as consented by the Engineer.
END OF PIPES AND DRAINAGES
SECTION 7
UTILITIES
Tender Documents Section 7 : Utilities
SECTION 7: UTILITIES
7.1 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

7.1.1 DESCRIPTION
7.1.1.1 General Requirements
(1) The High Voltage switchgear will be supplied and installed as indicated on the Drawings
and will comply with the Technical Specifications specified herein.
(2) The High Voltage switchgear will be rated as indicated on the Drawings and fully operate
7.1.1.2 Standards and References
The High Voltage switchgear shall comply with the following the latest editions of Standard.
(2) IEC 60694: Common specifications for high-voltage
switchgear and controlgear standards
(3) IEC 62217-200: High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – part 200: AC
metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated
voltages above 1kV and up to and including 52kV
(4) IEC 62271-100: High-voltage alternating-current circuit breakers
(5) IEC 62271-102: High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – part 102:
Alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches
(6) IEC 60265-1: High voltage alternating current switches
(7) IEC 60801: Monitoring and control
(8) IEC 60529: Degree of protection provided by enclosures
(9) IEC 60044-1: Current transformers
(10) IEC 60044-2: Voltage transformer
7.1.1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the detailed technical data and catalogues of the UPS for
(2) The Contractor shall submit the installation details and routing plans of the UPS for
(3) The Contractor shall submit calculation sheets for batteries capacity which is based on
25C operating temperature
(4) The Contractor shall submit the battery de-rating curve and the life expectancy decreasing
data due to room temperature variation.
(b) The Contractor shall submit test certificates of equipment and materials issued by the
the Engineer.
(c) The test certificates or reports submitted shall indicate the validating time which is
(d) All Printed Circuit Board (PCB) shall conform coating to protect dust from
environment.
(e) The Contraction shall guarantee the quality and functioning of all installations
complete work.
7.1.2 PRODUCTS
7.1.2.1 Technical characteristics
The switchgear shall be designed and tested for the following electrical values:
Basic Switchgear
Rated Voltage 36 kV 24 kV 7.2 kV
Operating Voltage 33 kV 22 kV 6.6 kV
Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
Insulated Level 70kV – 50 Hz, 1 50kV – 50 Hz, 1 min. 20kV –50 Hz, 1 min.
min., 170kV – 125kV – 1.2/50μs 60kV – 1.2/50μs
1.2/50μs
Busbar rated current 1250A 1250A 1250A
Short-circuit current 25kA – 3 sec 25kA – 3 sec 25kA – 3 sec
7.1.2.2 Switchboards
The switchboards shall meet the criteria for indoor, air-insulated, metal-enclosed switchgear, in
compliance with IEC 62271-200.
7.1.2.3 Functional units
Each functional unit shall contain all the elements needed to perform its function.
The functional units shall comprise:
- An air-insulated, metal-enclosed cubicle, for indoor use
- A withdrawal switchgear device with vacuum breaking
- A digital protection and control system
7.1.2.4 Cubicles
(1) Performances
The values below are given for normal operating as defined in IEC 62271-200 and IEC 60694.
Basic cubicle Units
Rated voltage Ur KV rms 33 22 6.6
Rated frequency Fr Hz 50 50 50
Rated normal current In A rms 1250-2000 630-2500 630-3150
Rated insulation voltage Ud KV rms 70 50 20
Up KV peak 170 125 60
Rated short-time withstand Ik KA rms-3s 25 25 25
current
Standard protection index Enclosure IP4X IP4X IP4X
Busbars
Rated normal current max In A rms 3150 3150 4000
Circuit breaker
Rated short-circuit breaking Isc KA rms 25 25 25
current
(2) Architecture and enclosure
The cubicles shall be for the “metal-enclosed switchgear” type, in accordance with the
definition given in IEC standard 62271-200.The outer enclosure shall therefore be metallic
and earthed.Each cubicle shall be built on a self-supporting chassis made of folded steel
plates.They shall naturally be protected against corrosion, without requiring additional
treatment.Since the front doors and end cover plates comprise the visible parts of the
switchboard, both sides shall be painted.They shall be made of zinc-plated steel.
(3) Compartments
The cubicles shall comprise four electrically independent compartments, in accordance
with the definition of metal enclosed switchgear given in IEC standard 62271-200.
Composed of; Busbar compartment, Switchgear compartment, Cable compartment and
Low voltage cabinet. Compartment access shall however be restricted by the presence of
safety mechanisms and interlocks
(4) Fixed main circuit
The power circuit (also called main circuit) is the group of components, within a cubicle,
which participate in conveying power
(5) Earthing circuit

The earthing circuit of a functional unit is the group of components that contribute to
equipment earthing.
The component include:
- The main earth collector.
- Secondary collectors.
- The cable earthing switch.
7.1.2.5 Switchgear device

(1) Withdrawable vacuum circuit breaker
The circuit breaker shall be designed in accordance with IEC standard 62271-100.
Circuit breaker devices shall be arranged for local and remote operation.
7.1.2.6 Protection and control system
(1) Protection and control unit
The manufacturer of cubicle and circuit-breaker shall manufacture the protection and
control unit. The functional units shall be equipped with integrated multi-functional digital
micro-processor protection relay and control units, which include the protection, control
and monitoring functions
(2) Protection
Each Protection and Control Unit shall contain all the necessary ANSI code protections
according to the considered applications.
Each protection device shall have wide setting ranges, mainly for current protections,
providing a large choice of tripping curves: DT, IDMT, IEC (SIT, LTI, VIT, and EIT).
(3) Measurement
Each Protection and Control unit shall include the measurements needed for operation
and commissioning:
- Phase current, residual current measurement
- Demand current and peak demand currents
- Voltage and frequency
- Active, reactive and apparent power.
- Power factor
- Peak demand powers
- Energy
- Temperature
Measurement accuracy shall be 1% (according to IEC 60255-4).
(4) Operation
The Protection and Control unit shall include an alphanumeric display unit that indicates:
- Measurement values.
- Operating messages (choice of language to be specified on order, with a choice of at
least the following: English or local).
- Maintenance messages.
(5) Communication
The Protection and Control unit shall be fitted with different possible communication
interface protocols:
- Modbus type, RS 485 twisted pair or fiber optic type
- Modbus type over Ethernet TCP-IP 10/100/1000 Mbits/s
- Or equivalent
The unit shall provide time tagging of events within a ms, with an adapted input available
for an external clock synchronization contact.
7.1.2.7 Current transformers

- Shall be conventional current transformer
- Shall be epoxy resin moulded and labelled individually.
7.1.2.8 Voltage transformers
- Shall have the same rated voltage withstand as the switchgear.
They shall be epoxy resin moulded and labeled individually.
7.1.2.9 Electrical operating mechanism interface
The withdrawable switchgear device (circuit breaker) shall be operated by a mechanism that
includes the following :
- Selection of the relay control mode (local, remote)
- Local opening and closing of the switchgear device controlled by the relay.
This mechanism should be included in the relay device or installed on the front of the low voltage
compartment
7.1.3 EXECUTION
7.1.3.1 Operating mechanism
All operating mechanisms and access points shall be on the front of the functional units.In
particular, cable and busbar connections must be possible via the front.
Racking out and racking in of the circuit breaker shall be carried out with the door closed.
The door shall include inspection ports for unequivocal viewing of the circuit breaker position
(racked in or racked out).
In no case must the breaking device contacts be visible.
The different operations shall be validated once they have been completed by a special-purpose
selector switch that may be locked out by key-type lock or padlock.
7.1.3.2 Mechanical safety devices
The functional units shall have a large number of fail-safe mechanical devices so as to make the
use of the switchgear safe:
- Impossible to ground cables unless the switchgear device is racked out,
- Impossible to rack in or rack out switchgear device when the earthing switch is closed.
- Impossible to rack out a closed switchgear device.
- Impossible to open the switchgear compartment door unless the device is racked out.
- Impossible to gain access to the compartment, which contains the cables when, the
earthing switch is open.
- Impossible to gain access to the voltage transformers and their protection fuses unless the
VTs have been withdrawn.
- Impossible to extract a switchgear device from a cubicle unless the extraction truck is
solidly locked to the cubicle.
- Locking of the switchgear device to the truck when it is disconnected from the cubicle.
None of these safety measures may be ensured by the use of a key-lock or padlock.
7.1.3.3 Testing
(1) Type testing
The switchgear supplier shall submit the following type of testing certificates:
- Impulse dielectric withstand test.
- Temperature rise test.
- Admissible short time current withstand test.
- Degree of protection check.
- Switchgear device breaking capacity check.
- Switchgear device making capacity check.
The test shall be carried out in accordance with the corresponding IEC standard and the
certificate from license owner shall be acceptable.
(2) Routine testing
The switchgear supplier shall perform the following individual routine testing certificates
during the witness test as following topic:
- Relay and low voltage auxiliary functional test.
- Checking of conformity with drawings and diagrams.
7.2 HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE

7.2.1 DESCRIPTION
(1) The Contractor shall furnish, install and test the high voltage cables and accessories as
described or indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
(2) This Specification of high voltage cables shall be provided for wiring in elevated structures,
IEC 60502-2: Compact round stranded Copper 18/30(36kV), and PEA standard.
7.2.1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data, catalogues, cable installation drawings,
cable routes, cable connection and other necessaries accessories of the high voltage
cables for approval before purchase.
(2) The Contractor shall submit routine test reports and type test reports as necessary for
each type of cable in accordance with the standards as mentioned above.

internationally recognized institutes, such as ASTA, LPCB, KEMA, TUV, etc accepted by the Engineer.
(4) The Contraction shall guarantee the quality and functioning of all installations included
7.2.2 PRODUCTS
7.2.2.1 Aluminium Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR)
The cables shall be manufactured in accordance with
- IEC 60209
- TIS.86-2522
7.2.2.2 Partial Insulated Cable (PIC)
- IEC 60502-1&2
- TIS.2143-2546
7.2.2.3 Cross-linked Polyethylene (XLPE)
- IEC 60502-1&2
- TIS.2143-2546
7.2.2.4 Spaced Aerial Cable (SAC)
- ICEA S-66-524
7.2.3 EXECUTION
(1) The high voltage cable 22/33 kV distribution lines shall be installed as overhead lines in
accordance with PEA standards.
(2) Splicing of wires and cables shall be allowed only in the handhole, Manhole and high -
voltage switchgear.
(3) Splicing of high voltage cables shall be by compression type, solderless lugs indented by
proper tool shall be used at the end of all wires and cables and shall be connected to
the splicing kit terminals of the equipment and Install high voltage cable and accessories
as recommended by the manufacturer.
7.2.3.2 Testing and Commissioning
(1) Megger testing shall be conducted for all high voltage cables, 18/30(36kV) volts rated with
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground prior to connecting to equipment and conduct
phase-to-ground testing after the equipment was connected including all connections
were tapped.
(2) Insulation resistance tests shall be performed by using a 500 Vdc megger on the 400 volts
system. Insulation resistance shall be complied with IEC 60502-1.
7.3 CONCRETE POLE

7.3.1 GENERAL
Concrete poles and materials shall be utilized as supporting structure of the overhead lines.
The concrete poles and material shall conform to PEA and specified herein.
the Engineer.
7.3.1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data, catalogues, and other necessaries
accessories of the Concrete poles or bus duct for approval before purchasing.
a) The equipment manufacturer shall be the latest ISO 9001 certified.
b) The Contractor shall submit test certificates of equipment and materials issued
by the internationally recognized institutes, such as ASTA, LPCB, KEMA, TUV, etc
c) The test certificates or reports submitted shall indicate the validating time which
d) The Contraction shall guarantee the quality and functioning of all installations
included in the Contract for a period of two (2) years after the acceptance date
of complete work.
(4) Final field measurements shall be made by the contractor prior to release for manufacture
to assure coordination with other trades and shall be approved by the Engineer.
7.3.2 PRODUCT
7.3.2.1 Concrete Poles
Concrete poles shall be prestressed concrete. The pole surface shall be free pock marks and air holes.
Cement shall be “Portland Cement” and conformed to latest applicable ASTM C-150 or equivalent. The
concrete and the prestressed wire of the pole shall have properties to be conformed with PEA
regulations. The remaining dimensions of the concrete pole shall be as specified in PEA regulations.
7.3.2.2 Crossarms
The concrete crossarms shall be fixed on top of the concrete poles installed along the overhead
lines. The concrete crossarms shall be manufactured, fabricated and furnished to conform to the
PEA regulations.
7.3.2.3 Overhead Grounded Wire and Bayonet
The overhead conductor wires installed on concrete poles shall be protected by overhead
grounded wire. The overhead grounded wire conductor size shall be as specified in the Drawings.
The bayonet shall be utilized as overhead grounded wire support. The bayonet shall be made of
galvanized steel and shall be of size and shape as specified in PEA regulations.
7.3.2.4 Guys
Guys shall consist of guy wire, anchor rod, anchor block an installing accessories. The guy wire
shall be double galvanized stranded steel wire. The size in cross-section area of the guy wire, type
and dimensions of anchor rod and anchor block used for furnishing and installation of the
overhead lines shall be in accordance with requirements or regulations of PEA.
7.3.2.5 Miscellaneous Materials
The miscellaneous materials or installing accessories shall be galvanized steel flat brace for fixing
concrete crossarm, bolts, washers, nuts, aluminium tie wire, connectors, clamps, PVC tube, PVC
connecting insolated type, and concrete backfill. The miscellaneous materials shall be
manufactured, fabricated and furnished to conform to PEA regulations.
7.3.3 EXECUTION
Method of installation of the concrete pole under this Contract shall be in accordance with the
requirements or practice regulations of the Provincial Electricity Authority (PEA) and shall be
divided into the following parts.
7.3.3.1 Concrete Poles
The spacing and embedment depth of concrete poles shall be as specified in the Drawings or PEA
regulations, or as approved by the Engineer.
7.3.3.2 Grounding Installation
The ground wire and rod of overhead lines shall be furnished and installed as specified herein.
(1) At Metering Transformers and Revenue Meter
The high-tension current and potential transformers cases and the revenue meter cabinet
and high-tension lightning arresters shall be electrically connected to separate ground wires
and ground rods. The groundwire of the metering transformers and lightning arresters shall
be fixed on the opposite sides of the concrete pole and shall be insulated above the ground
by 2.50 m PVC pipes. The ground rods of each of the ground wires shall be buried in the
ground at the depth of 0.05 m, also in opposite pole sides.
(2) The grounding resistance of the previously specified ground wire and rod, together with
the tests shall be as specified in PEA regulations.
7.4 HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT

7.4.1 DESCRIPTION
The work under this section shall include the furnished and installation of the high tension 22/33
kV distribution lines together with the specified electrical connection of components and
accessories, complete in accordance with as specified herein.
the Engineer.
7.4.1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the technical data, catalogues, and other necessaries
accessories of the Concrete poles or bus duct for approval before purchasing.
(b) The Contractor shall submit test certificates of equipment and materials issued
(c) The test certificates or reports submitted shall indicate the validating time which
of complete work.
(4) Final field measurements shall be made by the contractor prior to release for
manufacture to assure coordination with other trades and shall be approved by the
Engineer.
7.4.2 PRODUCTS
7.4.2.1 Standards
The high-tension 22/33 kV equipment and materials as specified hereinafter shall be
manufactured, fabricated and furnished to conform with the latest standard specifications
applicable of PEA, or IEC, or UL, or TIS, or approved equivalent.
7.4.2.2 Lightning Arresters

The high-tension lightning arresters shall be utilized to protect high-tension equipment and
materials against damage from lightning surge induced in the lines.
The lightning arresters shall manufactured, fabricated and furnished to conform with the latest
applicable IEC 60099 or equivalent.
The lightning arresters shall have the following ratings and features:
(a) Type Single-pole,outdoor type Single-pole,outdoor
type
(b) Rated voltage 20-21 kV 30-31 kV
(d) Lightning impulse 150 kV 200 kV
(e)Interrupting current 10 kA 10 kA
7.4.2.3 Current limiting Power Fuses
The high-tension current limiting power fuses shall be utilized to isolate an electric short circuit
from the system in order to protect system equipment from damage.
The current limiting power fuses or cutout fuse dropout shall be manufactured, fabricated and
furnished to conform with the latest applicable IEC 60282, or ANSI C37.41, or approved equivalent.
The current limiting power fuses shall have the following ratings and features:
(a) Type Single-pole,outdoor, Single-pole,outdoor,
vertical mounted type vertical mounted type
(b) Rated voltage 27 kV 38 kV
(d) Rated impulse 125 kV 150 kV
withstand voltage (BIL)
(e) Rated nominal 100 A (cont.) 100 A (cont.)
current
(f) Interrupting current 10 kA(Asym. rms.) 10 kA(Asym. rms.)
7.4.2.4 Metering Transformers and Revenue Meter
All equipment shall consist of potential transformers, current transformers and revenue meter
shall be specified and furnished by the Provincial Electricity Authority (PEA)
7.4.2.5 Overhead 22/33 kV Lines
The overhead 22/33 kV lines shall be made of Partial Insulated Cable (PIC). The cable shall be
manufactured, fabricated and furnished to conform with TIS 86-2517 standard, or approved
equivalent. The wires shall have cross-section area as shown in the drawing.
7.4.2.6 Concrete Poles and Materials
Sec Section 7.3: CONCRETE POLE
7.4.3 EXECUTION
7.4.3.1 Method of Installation
Method of installation of the high-tension 22/33 kV electric lines under this Contract shall be in
accordance with the requirements or practice regulations of the Provincial Electricity Authority
(PEA) and shall be divided into the following parts.
(1) Concrete Poles and Materials
See section 7.3: CONCRETE POLE
(2) Lightning Arresters
The high-tension lightning arresters shall be installed at the 3-phase distribution transformer
station on spun prestressed concrete beam with the size of 100 by 100 by 3,200 mm and
otherwise on spun prestressed concrete crossarm with the size of 100 by 100 by 2,500 mm.
(3) Current Limiting Power Fuses
The current limiting power fuses or the high-tension dropout fuse links and cutouts shall
be installed at the 3-phase distribution transformer station on spun prestressed concrete
beam with the size of 100 by 100 by 3,200 mm. At the high-tension metering transformer,
22/33 kV the high-tension dropout fuse links and cutouts shall be installed on spun
prestressed concrete cross-arm with the size of 100 by 100 by 2,500 mm.
(4) Metering Transformer and Revenue
The metering transformer and revenue meter in the anodized aluminium cabinet shall be
furnished by PEA.
(5) Grounding Installation
The grounded wire and rod of high-tension 22/33 kV overhead lines shall be furnished and
installed as specified herein.
(a) At Metering Transformers and Revenue Meter
The high-tension current and potential transformers cases and the revenue meter cabinet
and high-tension lightning arresters shall be electrically connected to separate grounded
wires and grounded rods. The grounded wire of the metering transformers and lightning
arresters shall be fixed on the opposite sides of the concrete pole and shall be insulated
above the ground by 2.50 m PVC pipes. The grounded rods of each of the grounded wires
shall be buried in the ground at the depth of 0.05 m, also in opposite pole sides.
(b) The grounding resistance of the previously specified grounded wire and rod, together
with the tests shall be conformed as specified in section 5-4-0
7.5 TRANSFORMER
7.5.1 DESCRIPTION
7.5.1.1 General
For three-phase transformers of cast resin dry type, The transformer (including magnetic core,
HV&LV winding, electrical protection and metal enclosure) shall be completed set and tested
from the manufacturer, indoor installation, destined for use in three-phase HV/LV distribution
systems. These transformers shall be manufactured in accordance with a quality system in
conformity with ISO 9001 an environmental management system in conformity with ISO 14001,
both certified by an official independent organization.
For three-phase transformers of oil type, this specification covers three phase, oil immersed,
natural self-cooled, hermetically sealed type transformer suitable for outdoor installation.
(1) Cast resin dry type transformers shall be in compliance with the following standards:
(a) IEC 60076-1 to 5: Power Transformers
Part 1: General
Part 2: Temperature rise for liquid-immersed transformers
Part 3: Insulation levels, dielectric tests and external clearances
in air
Part 4: Guide to the lightning impulse and switching impulse
testing - Power transformers and reactors
Part 5: Ability to withstand short circuit
(b) IEC 60076-11: Dry-type transformers
(c) IEC 60076-12: Loading guide for dry-type power transformers
(d) BS EN 50541-1: Three phase dry-type distribution transformers 50 Hz, from 100
kVA to 3150 kVA, with highest voltage for equipment not
exceeding 36 kV.
(e) Specific Standards according to local country requests
The manufacturer shall produce a test report from an official laboratory on a transformer of
the same design as those produced and on the same transformer which have initially passed
the above Climatic and Environmental tests. This test shall be performed in accordance with
IEC 60076-11.
(2) Oil type transformer shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest
applicable standard specifications and codes in the following:
(a) VDE AND DIN Regulation and Din Standard (VDE 0532/11)
(b) IEC International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC 60076)
(c) BSI British Standard Institute (BS 171-1 to 171-5)
(d) TIS 384-2543 Thai Industrial Standards Institute
7.5.1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the detailed technical data and catalogues of The Transformer
for approval before purchasing.
(a) Copy of Short Circuit Test results
(b) Copy of Type Test Certificate of lightning impulse on line terminals of transformer
from recognized government test laboratory.
(c) Dimensional drawings.
(d) Technical catalogues.
(e) Manufacturers’ test certificates provided by the supplies.
(f) Installation, operation & maintenance manuals.
(2) The Contractor shall submit the installation details and routing plans of The Diesel Engine
Generator for approval before installation.
(a) Installation detail drawings of The Diesel Engine Generator (Dimension plan,
(b) Installation detail drawings of Cables & Raceways and its accessories connected
with The Diesel Engine Generator
(b) The Contractor shall submit test certificates of equipment and materials issued
(c) The test certificates or reports submitted shall indicate the validating time
which is still effective during the date of approval.
of complete work
7.5.2 PRODUCTS
7.5.2.1 Cast resin dry type transformer
(1) Technical Requirements
- Rated power: As indicated on Drawing with natural air cooling system up to 40% of
AN for air forced cooling system
- HV Network: 33/22 kV, 3-phases, 3-wires as indicated on the Drawing
- LV Network: 3-phases, 4-wires, 230/400V, 50Hz, TN grounding system (TN-C or TN-
S or TN-C-S according to indicated on the Drawing).
- Cooling system: Air natural and Air Forced
- HV tapping range: Off load tap changer ±2 X 2.5 %
- Impedance Voltage: As indicated on the Drawing
- Vector group: Dyn11
- Rated primary insulation level: 36/24kV
- Rated primary voltage: 33/22kV as indicated on the Drawing
- Rated secondary voltage at no load: 230/400V
- Power frequency withstand voltage: 70kV at 36kV or 50 kV at 24kV, 50Hz at 1
min.
- Basic Impulse Level (BIL): 170kV at 36kV or 125kV at 24kV, 50Hz at 1.2/50μs.
- HV & LV winding conductor: Aluminium & Aluminium or Copper & Copper as
indicated on Drawing
- HV winding & Insulation class: Encapsulated in cast resin & class F with
temperature rise ≤ 100K
- LV winding & Insulation class: Pre-impregnated epoxy resin or Prepreg insulation &
class F with temperature rise ≤ 100K
- Fire behaviour classification: F1, IEC 60076-11
- Climatic classification: C2, IEC 60076-11
- Environmental classification: E2, IEC 60076-16
- Partial discharges: ≤ 10 pc at 1.3 Un
- Losses: no load losses ≤ 0.35%
load losses at 75 °C ≤ 1.00%
- Efficiency (%): ≥ 98% at load 75%, cos φ = 0.8 and 120 °C
≥ 97% at load 100%, cos φ = 0.8 and 120 °C
- Metal enclosure protection: IP21
(2) Materials
(a) Magnetic core
The magnetic core shall be made from laminations of insulated silicon steel, and
protected against corrosion with a coat of varnish. The magnetic core shall be stacked
using overlapping-interlocking or step-lap technology and noise-damping devices.
(b) LV windings
The LV winding shall be produced using aluminium or copper foils, according to
indicated on Drawing. This foil shall be insulated between each layer using a heat-
reactivated class F pre-impregnated epoxy resin film or prepreg insulation. The ends of
the winding shall be protected and insulated using a class F insulating material. The
whole winding assembly shall be polymerised throughout by being autoclaved for 2
hours at 130°C.
(c) HV windings
The HV winding shall be separated from the LV windings to give an air gap between the
MV and LV circuits in order to avoid depositing of dust on the spacers placed in the
radical electrical field and to make maintenance easier. These shall be made of
aluminium or copper wire or foil (according to the manufacturer's preference) with class
F insulation. The HV windings shall be vacuum cast in a class F fireproof epoxy resin
casting. The flame-retardant filler shall be thoroughly mixed with the resin and hardener.
It shall be composed of trihydrated alumina powder (or aluminium hydroxide) or other
flame-retardant products to be specified, either mixed with silica or not. The casting
system shall be of class F. The interior and exterior of the windings shall be reinforced
with a combination of glass fibre to provide thermal shock withstand.
(d) MV winding support spacers
The MV winding support spacers shall provide sufficient support in transport, operation
and during bolted short circuit conditions as well as in the case of an earthquake. The
spacers shall be circular in shape for easy cleaning. They will give an extended tracking
line to give better dielectric withstand under humid or high dust conditions. The spacers
should be include an Elastomer cushion that will allow it to absorb expansion according
to load conditions. This Elastomer cushion shall be incorporated in the spacer to prevent
it being deteriorated by air or UV.
(e) HV connections
The HV connections shall be made from above on the top of the connection bars. Each
bar shall be drilled with a 13 mm hole ready for connection of cable lugs on terminal
plates. The HV connection bars shall be in rigid copper bars protected by heat shrinkable
tubing. HV connections in cables are not allowed, in order to avoid all risk of contact,
due to cables flapping. The HV connections shall be in copper.
(f) LV connections
The LV connections shall be made from above onto bars located at the top of the coils
on the opposite side to the HV connections. Connection of the LV neutral shall be
directly made to the LV terminals between the LV phase bars. The LV connection bars
shall be in copper or in tinned aluminium (according to preference of the manufacturer).
The output from each LV winding will comprise a tin-plated aluminium or copper
connection terminal and shall be using a contact interface with aluminium-copper bi-
metallic strip for connection between copper to aluminium. These shall be assembled
according to current practices, notably using spring washers under the fixings and nuts.
Devices in the 630 to 2500 kVA range shall be easy to connect using factory-built
electrical ducting through an optional interface. Stress withstand in the instance of a
bolted short circuit on the connector shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer.
(g) HV tapping
The tapping which act on the highest voltage adapting the transformer to the real supply
voltage value, shall be off-circuit bolted links. Tapping with connection cables are not
allowed. These bolted links shall be attached to the HV coils.
(3) Accessories and standard equipment
(a) 6 PT100 for winding temperature sensor
(b) 4 flat bi-directional rollers
(c) Lifting lugs
(d) Haulage holes on the undercarriage
(e) Earthling terminals
(f) Rating plate
(g) "Danger Electricity" warning label
(h) Routine tests certificate
(i) Instruction manual for installation
(j) Commissioning and maintenance in English.
(4) Thermal protection
These transformers shall be equipped with a thermal protection device which will
comprise:
(a) 6 each PT100 thermal detection systems (1 by phase and 1 for spare), installed in the
active part of the transformer. The sensors shall be placed in a tube to enable them
to be replaced if ever necessary.
(b) An electronic converter with two independent monitoring circuits equipped with a
changeover switch, one for "Alarm 1" the other for "Alarm 2". The position of the relays
shall be indicated by different coloured indicator lights. A third indicator light will
indicate the presence of voltage. These three indicator lights shall be on the front of
the converter. The electronic converter shall be installed away from the transformer.
(c) A plug-in terminal block for connection of the sensors to the electronic converter.
(d) The sensors shall be supplied assembled and wired to the terminal block fixed on the
upper part of the transformer. The converter shall be supplied loose with the
transformer, packaged complete with its wiring diagram.
(5) Metal enclosure
The transformers shall be equipped with a metal enclosure for indoor installation
comprising an integral IP 31 enclosure, which can be dismantled. The metal enclosure shall
have anti-corrosion protection in the manufacturer's standard colour.
(6) MV surge arresters
The transformer shall be protected by phase-earth surge arresters installed directly on the
MV connection terminals (top or bottom). Phase-earth surge arresters shall be according to
IEC 60099-4 with 10kA at 8/20 μs wave.
(7) Installation
The transformer shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’
recommendations and regulations of the local Electricity Authority:
(a) The transformer shall not be installed in a flood hazard area.
(b) The altitude shall not be over 1000 metres above mean sea level.
(c) The ambient temperature for the transformer to be within the above limits.
(d) The local ventilation shall be allowed for the dissipation of heat from the transformer.
(e) Provision shall be made for access to bushings and tapping links of the transformer.
(8) Testing and Commissioning
(a) The transformer shall be completely assembled at the factory. The transformer shall
be subject, unless otherwise noted, to the following tests by and at the expense of
the Contractor.
(b) All tests described below shall be performed in the presence of the Employer’s
Representative.
(i) Applied potential test
(ii) Induced potential test
(iii) No-load loss by the average-voltage voltmeter method (To be made after the
impulse tests)
(iv) Exciting current test
(v) Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection
(vi) Resistance measurements on all windings on the rated voltage connections of
the transformer and at each tap
(vii) Temperature rise (heat run)
(viii) Ratio tests on the rated voltage connections and on all tap connections
(ix) Polarity and phase-relation tests
(x) Audible noise level tests shall be made in accordance with the applied
standards
(c) Electrical tests
(i) Routine tests
These tests shall be carried out on all the transformers after the manufacturing,
enabling an official test certificate to be produced for each one:

- Measurement of windings resistance
- Measurement of the transformation ratio and vector group
- Measurement of impedance voltage and load loss
- Measurement of no load loss and no load current
- Applied voltage dielectric test
- nduced voltage dielectric test
- Measurement of partial discharges. For this measurement, the
acceptance criterion shall be less than or equal to 10 pC at 1.30 Un.
All these tests shall be defined in the IEC 60076-11 and IEC 60076-1 to 60076-
3 standards. The transformer shall be tested in metal enclosure.
(ii) Type tests or special tests
These tests can be requested as option, but are subject to prior agreement of
the supplier:
- Temperature rise test carried out in accordance with the simulated
loading method as defined by the IEC 60076-11 standard
- Lightning impulse test in accordance with IEC 60076-3
- Short circuit test in accordance with IEC 60076-5
- Noise level measurements in accordance with IEC 60076-10.
All these tests shall be defined by the IEC 60076-11 and IEC 60076-1 to
60076-5 standards.
(d) The Contractor shall furnish four (4) certified copies of reports of the results of tests,
curves and standard application data. The costs of the tests and report shall be borne
by the Contractor.
7.5.3 EXECUTION
(1) The transformer shall always be handled in the normal upright position unless information
(2) Where a transformer cannot be handled by a crane, it may be skidded or moved on rollers
into place, depending upon compatibility of transformer base design and the type of
surface over which it is to be moved. During the handling operation, care shall be taken to
prevent overturning.
(3) The transformer shall never be tilted at an angle greater than 15° from vertical.
(4) When a transformer is shipped it is usually ready to be set in place after the crating and
shipping braces are removed. Bushings and accessories, which are shipped separately, shall
be thoroughly protected against moisture until they are installed.
(5) Proper precaution shall be taken during installation of these parts to protect the
transformer against the entrance of moisture.
(6) Lifting lugs and eyes are designed for lifting with a maximum sling angle of 30° from vertical.
For lift angles of greater than 30° from vertical, spreader bars shall be used to provide a
vertical lift on the lugs.

(1) The transformer shall be completely assembled at the factory. The transformer shall be
subject, unless otherwise noted, to the following test by and at the expense of the
Contractor.
(2) All tests described below shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer.
(a) Applied potential test
(b) Induced potential test
(c) No-load loss by the average-voltage voltmeter method (To be made after the impulse
tests)
(d) Exciting current test
(e) Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection
(f) Resistance measurements on all windings on the rated voltage connections of the
(g) Temperature rise (heat run)
(h) Ratio tests on the rated voltage connections and on all tap connections
(i) Polarity and phase-relation tests
(j) Audible noise level tests shall be made in accordance with the applied standard
(k) Leakage test
(3) The Contractor shall furnish four (4) certified copies of reports of the results of tests, curves
Contractor.
(4) After installation, before being energized, the transformer shall be tested as follows:
(a) Visual and dimensional check
(b) Measurement of insulation resistance
(c) Measurement of voltage ratio
(d) Check of vector-group symbol
(e) Check of insulation oil
(f) Function test for protective devices
(5) Checks before commissioning
(a) Remove the protective cover and check all the connections (arrangements, distances,
(b) Check cable and bus bars entries after connection to ensure IP rating has been
maintained
(c) Verify the position identity of tapping links on the three phases are in accordance with
(d) Verify cleanliness of the transformer and carry out an insulation test
(e) Verify HV, and LV insulations using a 2500V insulation tester (Megger) or as the
manufacturers recommendation. The values of resistances shall be not less than
these specified on instruction manual.
7.5.3.3 Oil type transformer
(1) Technical Requirements
- Rated power: As indicated on Drawing
- HV Network: 33/22 kV, 3-phases, 3-wires as indicated on the Drawing
- LV Network: 3-phases, 4-wires, 230/400V, 50Hz, TN grounding system (TN-C

or TN-S or TN-C-S according to indicated on the Drawing).
- HV tapping range: Off load tap changer ±2 X 2.5 %
- Impedance Voltage: As indicated on the Drawing
- Vector group: Dyn11
- Rated primary insulation level: 36/24kV
- Rated primary voltage: 33/22kV as indicated on the Drawing
- Rated secondary voltage at no load: 230/400V
- Power frequency withstand voltage: 70kV at 36kV or 50 kV at 24kV, 50Hz at 1 min.
- Basic Impulse Level (BIL): 170kV at 36kV or 125kV at 24kV, 50Hz at 1.2/50μs.
- HV & LV winding conductor: Aluminium & Aluminium or Copper & Copper as
indicated on Drawing
- Losses: no load losses ≤ 0.35%
- Efficiency (%): ≥ 98% at load 75%, cos φ = 0.8 and 120 °C
≥ 97% at load 100%, cos φ = 0.8 and 120 °C
- Sound pressure level LPA: ≤ 68 dB(A) at 1m.
(2) Materials
(a) Tank
Each transformer shall be provided with steel housing of substantial construction
which shall be oil tight and gas tight. The tank shall be an effective cooling and
ventilation construction to release internal heat produced during service. Each of the
four sides shall be produced from a single sheet of metal which is fabricated of a rigid
bottom with an oil drainage outlet, corrugated side walls with a thickness greater than
1.2 mm. The tank shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage or permanent
deformation, the oil pressure at a maximum over pressure of 0.21 Kg/cm2 and a
vacuum of 755 mm.Hg and have sufficient strength to withstand internal and external
faults. The tank cover shall be provided with a sufficient slope on all sides so as to
avoid collection of rainwater or other moisture.
The hermetically sealed type transformer tank shall be completely hermetically
closed and filled with oil at ambient temperature to prevent any humidity to
penetrate which is the major agent for oxidation. The cooling fins of the tank shall be
designed to absorb dilatation of transformer oil according to the increase of
transformer load.
(b) Core
The core shall be constructed entirely of high quality, cold rolled grain oriented, non-
aging; high permeability silicon steel and designed to accessible 110% rated voltage
without making any damage to the transformer core. The steel shall be in thin
laminations thus allowing a good lamination factor, annealed after cutting by highly
precise machines and rolled to insure smooth surface at the edges. Both sides of
each steel sheet shall be insulated with a durable, heat-resistance baked enamel or
vanish. The overlapping joint core shall be rigidly clamped with positive locking
devices to insure adequate mechanical strength to support the winding, prevent
shifting of laminations during shipment and to reduce vibration to minimize noise level
during operation.
(c) Winding
The design, construction, and treatment of the winding shall be given properly,
consideration to all service factors, such as high dielectric and mechanical strength of
insulation, coil characteristics, uniform electrostatic flux distribution, prevention of
corona formation and minimum restriction to free oil circulation.
Winding conductor shall be free from scale, burrs, splinters and shall be uniformly
insulated. Permanent current-carrying joints for splices shall be welded or brazed,
properly formed and finished, and insulated to conform to the basic insulation. The
completed assembly of core and coils shall be dried in vacuum sufficient to insure
elimination of air and moisture within the insulating structure. After the drying process
the assembly shall be immediately impregnated with dry oil.
(i) H.V. Winding
The H.V. winding shall be either round or rectangular copper conductors
enameled or paper insulated which has a high dielectric strength and good
temperature stability. The winding shall be firmly braced in the axial and radial
directions so that short-circuit forces can cause no loosening. The internal
insulation shall be designed to withstand impulse voltage stresses at all points
in order to give protection against surges.
(ii) L.V. Winding
The L.V. winding shall be copper winding to allow the current density to
distribute freely along the width of the conductor to reduce axial short-circuit
force. The winding insulation shall also be designed to provide the strength
necessary to resist radial short-circuit forces.
The insulation resistance between winding and earth tested by mega ohm
meter not less than 2,000 V. At the average temperature 35°C and relative
humidity 80%.
Primary-Secondary not less than 1,000 Meg.Ohm.
Primary -Earth not less than 1,000 Meg.Ohm.
Secondary - Earth not less than 600 Meg.Ohm.
(d) Bushing
The bushing shall conform to the requirement of the reference standard. All porcelain used
in bushing shall be wet process, homogeneous, and free from cavities or other flaws. The
glazing shall be uniform in color and free from blisters, burns or other defects. The color of
all porcelain insulators shall be chocolate brown and all porcelain parts shall be one piece.
(e) Transformer Oil
The transformer oil shall be well filtered. The dielectric strength shall not less than 35
kV, before filling in the transformer tank shall, as tested by ASTM D 877 or equal. The
dielectric strength of the sample of insulation oil taken from the new transformer shall
not be less than 27 kV, when measured in accordance with ANSI Standard method of
testing electrical insulation oil C 59.12-1966 or equivalent.
(f) Tank Cleaning and Painting

All surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by sand blasting or shot blasting before painting.
Interior surface of the tank shall be finished with oil resisting paint. Exterior surface shall
be painted with a primer coat and the tank finish shall be a ash-gray color. The paint
used for the tank finish shall have special heat, oil and weather-resisting properties.
(g) Tapping and Tap Changing
Tapping shall be changed with an off-circuit tap changer, provided on the high-voltage
winding so that the ratio can be matched to local system voltage conditions. The tap
changer positions are identified and located by means of a locking screw.
(h) Terminal Arrangement
H.V. and L.V. bushing shall be equipped with solderless clamp type connectors suitable
for the conductor used, aluminum or copper.
(i) Accessories
Each transformer shall be equipped with the following accessories:
(i) H.V. and L.V. bushing with terminal connectors
(ii) Tap changer
(iii) Oil level indicator
(iv) Lifting lug
(v) Thermometer pocket
(vi) Corrugated tank
(vii) Name plate with connection diagram
(viii) Oil check valve
(ix) Draining plug
(x) Earth terminal
(xi) Transport rollers
(xii) Dial-type thermometer with alarm and trip contacts
(xiii) Mechanical pressure/relief device
The contacts of all relays, gauges, and thermometers shall be insulated from ground and
shall be of a positive, snap-action or mercury type.
7.5.4 EXECUTION
(1) The transformer shall always be handled in the normal upright position unless information
(2) Where a transformer cannot be handled by a crane, it may be skidded or moved on rollers
into place, depending upon compatibility of transformer base design and the type of
surface over which it is to be moved. During the handling operation, care shall be taken to
prevent overturning.
(3) The transformer shall never be tilted at an angle greater than 15° from vertical.
(4) When a transformer is shipped it is usually ready to be set in place after the crating and
shipping braces are removed. Bushings and accessories, which are shipped separately, shall
be thoroughly protected against moisture until they are installed.
(5) Proper precaution shall be taken during installation of these parts to protect the
transformer against the entrance of moisture.
(6) Lifting lugs and eyes are designed for lifting with a maximum sling angle of 30° from vertical.
For lift angles of greater than 30° from vertical, spreader bars shall be used to provide a
vertical lift on the lugs.
(1) The transformer shall be completely assembled at the factory. The transformer shall be
subject, unless otherwise noted, to the following test by and at the expense of the
Contractor.
(2) All tests described below shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer.
(a) Applied potential test
(b) Induced potential test
(c) No-load loss by the average-voltage voltmeter method (To be made after the impulse
tests)
(d) Exciting current test
(e) Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection
(f) Resistance measurements on all windings on the rated voltage connections of the
(g) Temperature rise (heat run)
(h) Ratio tests on the rated voltage connections and on all tap connections
(i) Polarity and phase-relation tests
(j) Audible noise level tests shall be made in accordance with the applied standard
(k) Leakage test
(3) The Contractor shall furnish four (4) certified copies of reports of the results of tests, curves
Contractor.
(4) After installation, before being energized, the transformer shall be tested as follows:
(a) Visual and dimensional check
(b) Measurement of insulation resistance
(c) Measurement of voltage ratio
(d) Check of vector-group symbol
(e) Check of insulation oil
(f) Function test for protective devices
(5) Checks before commissioning
(a) Remove the protective cover and check all the connections (arrangements, distances,
(b) Check cable and bus bars entries after connection to ensure IP rating has been
maintained
(c) Verify the position identity of tapping links on the three phases are in accordance with
(d) Verify cleanliness of the transformer and carry out an insulation test
(e) Verify HV, and LV insulations using a 2500V insulation tester (Megger) or as the
manufacturers recommendation. The values of resistances shall be not less than these
specified on instruction manual.
7.6 ROAD AND YARD LIGHTING

7.6.1 DESCRIPTION
This Section covers the supply of all lanterns, complete with brackets, columns and other
supporting devices, bases, cables, switchgears and all necessary ancillary equipment together with
the transportation, storage, assembly, erection, connection and testing of the same in order to
supply a complete lighting system for road and yard in accordance with the details shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
The Contractor shall search for and take special precautions to protect any existing utility services
such as power lines, telephone lines, gas and oil pipelines, sewers and water works etc, affected
by his operations at his own cost, and shall minimize and be responsible for any damage cause
thereby. He shall at all times and at his own expense conduct his operations in accordance with
the requirements of the Utility Authorities having jurisdiction.
The Road & Yard Lighting shall comply with the following codes and standards:
(2) Standard of Department of Highways
7.6.1.3 Submittals
(1) The Contractor shall submit the detailed technical data and catalogues for approval before
purchasing.
(2) The Contractor shall submit the installation details and routing plans for approval before
installation.
(a) Installation detail drawings (Dimension plan, sectional view, required clearances and
location of all associate equipment).
(b) Installation detail drawings of Cables & Raceways and its accessories
(b) The Contractor shall submit test certificates of equipment and materials issued by
the internationally recognized institutes, such as ASTA, LPCB, KEMA, TUV, etc accepted
by the Engineer.
(c) The test certificates or reports submitted shall indicate the validating time which is
complete work.
7.6.1.4 Responsibility for Design and Materials
(1) A design of the ROAD & YARD LIGHTING has been carried out and the structures have been
designed to accommodate wirings, lanterns and columns in the positions shown on the
layout drawings.
(2) The Contractor shall review the design and co-ordinate functioning of all electrical work
and constructions relating to ROAD & YARD LIGHTING.
(3) The equipment offered and the work done shall be suitable for continuous trouble-free
operation under adverse climatic conditions of heavy rain, high humidity and intense sun
light. The equipment shall be able to withstand over long periods ambient air temperatures
varying from a normal of 10°C to a maximum of 50°C.
7.6.1.5 Compliance with Manufacturer's Specifications
The Contractor shall ensure that the equipment used will be entirely suitable for the work to be
performed and that they will be manufactured to proper clearances and fit. The Contractor will
further ensure that the loading of equipment will, under all normal circumstances, not exceed
the maximum specified in writing by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the inspection of all equipment before installation to ensure that they comply with the conditions
of the Contract and that they are not defective in any way as regards materials or workmanship.
Should any such non-compliance or defects be found during the inspection, the Contractor shall
correct such non-compliance and defects to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
7.6.1.6 Spare Parts
(1) The Contractor shall supply spare parts; 5 percent of total lanterns and accessories
complete with control gears, lamps and starters.
(2) All spare parts shall be of the same materials and workmanship as the corresponding
original parts and shall be interchangeable therewith. The Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer list of recommended spare parts; 5 percent of total lanterns and accessories as
follows:
(a) Street Lighting Lanterns 250 w
 Street Lighting Fixture
(b) Soffit Lanterns 250 w
 Soffit Fixture
(c) Flood Lighting Lanterns 400 w
(d) Light Emitting Diode (LED)

 LED lamp
 Driver
7.6.1.7 Electricity Supply
(1) The provision of an electricity supply at the positions shown on the Drawings has been
arranged with the PEA or MEA. The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging the date
and time of the final connection at each position and maintaining an effective liaison with
PEA or MEA.
(2) The Contractor must ensure that the equipment supplied will function correctly at the
supply voltage and must allow for normal variations and surges.
7.6.1.8 Excavation and Backfill
Excavation and backfilling for conduit laying and for foundations shall be carried out in accordance
with appropriate standard. Reinstatement shall be such that the surface is restored to at least its
original condition.
(1) The approximate location of the trench is shown on the Drawings but the Contractor shall
obtain the approval of the Engineer for each final location before breaking the ground. The
trenches shall be cleanly excavated, reasonably straight and free from loose soil or stones
or water before the conduits are laid. Trenches where necessary shall be adequately
shored. Where trenches change depth to accommodate access to conduits, or for similar
reasons, the change in level shall be gradual and wherever possible the slope should be
not more than 1:5.
(2) No conduits shall be laid in a flooded trench and the Contractor is responsible for dealing
with any surface water and any pumping or bailing of the trenches. Trenches which are
flooded after the conduits are laid and before backfilling has commenced shall be carefully
bailed or pumped dry. If instructed by the Engineer the conduits shall be removed prior to
pumping or bailing.
(3) Conduits shall not be laid in the trench until the Engineer has inspected and approved the
excavation. Backfilling shall not commence until the Engineer has inspected and approved
the conduits and accessories in the trench.
7.6.2 PRODUCTS
7.6.2.1 Street Lighting Lamps
The size and type of lamp at each location is shown on the Drawings.
(1) High Pressure Sodium Lamps
(a) The lamps shall be new and have a colour temperature of approximately 2,000 K.
(b) The rated average life of the lamp shall be 24,000 hours assuming 10 hours per start.
(c) The lamp shall have an initial luminous efficiency of not less than 100 lumens/watt
(d) The run up time of the lamp shall not be longer than 5 minutes to reach 80% of its
final luminous flux, and it shall be capable of re-ignition within 2 minutes after being
switched off.
(e) The majority of the lamp output shall be concentrated and fall within the visible
spectrum.
(f) In the event that the supply voltage drops by 1% the lamp luminous flux output shall
not be reduced by more than 3%
(2) LED Lamps
(a) LED and LED module shall comply with the following requirements
 IEC 62031 Edition 1 Publication 2008 : LED Modules for General Lighting, Safety
Specification
 IEC TS 62504 : LED Modules for General Lighting, Term and Definition
 IES LM-80 : Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Depreciation of LED Light
Sources
 Nominal Color Rendering Index (CRI) : shall not be less than 70,
 Correlated Color Temperature shall be 6,000 +/-500 K,
 LED selected shall have expected luminosity at 50,000 hours of not less than
70% of initial value (L70) when tested in accordance with IES LM-80 and IES
Technical Memorandum 21 (TM-21).
(b) Luminaires or Lanterns shall comply with the following requirements
 The lantern shall be made of high-pressure die-cast aluminum suitable for
installation on standard Department of Highways’ lighting poles
 The complete lantern with all accessories shall have a minimum operating life of
not less than 50,000 hours, when operating at not less than 35˚C ambient
temperature. When operating under normal conditions, the temperature inside
the lantern shall not exceed the rated operating temperature of each and every
components.
 The lantern shall have passive ventilation system. Active ventilation system such
as electric fan will not be accepted.
 The lantern shall have IP rating of not less than IP 66
 The lantern shall have power efficiency of not less than 90 Lumen/W.
 The lantern shall operate normally under ambient temperature of between -20˚C
to 45˚C
 The lantern shall pass Static Load Test in accordance with IEC 60598-2-3 or
equivalent
 The lantern shall pass Vibration Test in accordance with IEC 60598-1 or equivalent
 The lantern shall pass Resistance to Corrosion Test in accordance with IEC 60598-
1 or equivalent
 The lantern shall conform with TIS 1955 or equivalent, for radio disturbances
 The lantern shall comply with Safety Standard of IEC 60598-2-3 or equivalent
(c) Driver shall comply with the following requirements

 IEC 61347-1 : General and Safety Requirements
 IEC 61347-2-3 : Particular Requirements for DC or AC Supplied Electronic Control
Gear for LED Modules
 IEC 62384 : DC or AC Supplied Electronic Gear for LED Modules. Performance
Requirements
 Voltage : 230 V +/- 10% 50 Hz
 The driver shall have minimum life expectancy of 50,000 hours at maximum
rated case temperature (Tcmax), separately packaged independently of LED
module for better ventilation.
 The driver shall be fully functional at case temperature (TC) of not less than 70˚C
 LED and driver shall be separately removable and serviced
 The driver shall have total harmonic distortion of not more than 15%
 The driver shall have power factor at maximum load of not less than 0.95
 The driver shall have surge protection capable of resisting a voltage surge of not
less than 2kV (Line-Neutral)
 The driver shall have suitable short circuit and over voltage protection
 The driver shall pass appropriate electro-magnetic compatibility test
7.6.2.2 Road Lighting Lanterns
(1) All lanterns shall be new.
(2) Cut-off lanterns shall be used unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
(3) The maximum luminous intensity of a cut-off lantern shall conform to IEC or BS Standards.
(4) All lanterns shall be supplied complete with control gears and other accessories and be
fully wired and ready for erection.
(5) The lantern wiring shall be of a size, and insulated with materials that shall effectively
withstand the current, voltage and temperature expected within the lantern during both
the starting and operating modes in the ambient temperature of the site.
(6) All lanterns shall have a side entry socket fitted to the lighting column arm spigot.
(7) The bowl shall be made from glass, polymethlymetacylate, polycarbonate or methacylate
and shall have a detachable mirror reflector of anodised aluminium sheet.
(8) The lantern shall be made watertight with gaskets of high heat, ozone and ageing resistant
material.
(9) Steel lantern housings shall not be used.
(10) Stainless steel screws shall be used for fixing.
(11) The power factor to the lantern set shall not be less than 90% lagging.
(12) The physical size for 250 W and 400 W shall be the same.
(13) All wiring within the lantern shall have an insulation resistance of not less than 0.5 Megohm.
(14) The lanterns shall provide the requisite light distribution with the size and type of lamp
specified.
(15) Any adjustments required to accommodate any alternative lamp size shall be positive and
lockable in the final position.
7.6.2.3 Flood Lighting Lanterns

(1) For the toll area, flood lighting shall be installed on 10 m columns along the outside of
the area as shown in the Drawings. Each column shall have provision for the mounting of
one or more lanterns. These lanterns shall house all the control gear and other accessories
for their operation and produce a wide angle light distribution not less than 2 x 25 with
good optical control. Housing and rear cover shall be low-pressure die cast aluminium
construction or equivalent. The casting shall be of low-copper-content for good corrosion
resistance. Lamp replacement is effected by removing the rear cover for easy maintenance.
Reflectors shall be of high-grade aluminium. The front glass is to be provided with a gasket
of high heat, ozone and ageing resistant material to ensure it is dustproof and watertight.
The power factor shall not be less than 90% lagging. All wiring within the lantern shall
have an insulation resistance not less than 0.5 Megaohm.
(2) The lantern shall be carried on a mounting which will allow movement vertically and
horizontally.
7.6.2.4 Soffit Lanterns
Soffit Lanterns are required at those places where the crosses existing roads and lighting of the
low level roadway is required. The quantities, types and sizes of the lanterns required are shown
on the Drawings. The lanterns shall be mounted in the position shown and interconnected by
means of an exposed conduit system. No part of any soffit lantern shall protrude below the soffit
of the brigde. The lanterns shall be installed so that the photometric axis of the lanterns is normal
to the road.
7.6.2.5 Street Lighting Column and Bracket
(1) The vertical column of the lighting pole and its detachable bracket(s) shall be made of round
single length (without joint) steel tapered tube from 4.5 mm thick hot rolled sheet steel with
yield point not less than 25 kg/mm2 and ultimate tensile strength of not less than 41 kg/mm2.
The bracket is to be provided with spigot to suit the manufacturer's lanterns. The outreach of
the bracket shall be 2.50 m or as otherwise specified in the Drawings. Each column shall be
provided with a base-plate for mounting the column onto a suitable foundation by means of
anchor bolts. The column, arm(s), lanterns together with other accessories shall be designed
to withstand a distributed wind load corresponding to the wind- speed given on the Drawings.
Each column shall be provided with a weather proof service door.
(2) The columns shall conform to the outlines on the Drawings and shall be manufactured to
BS 1840 or equivalent such as ANSI, ASTM
(3) A non-hygroscopic mounting board composed of electrically insulating material shall be
fixed in an easily accessible position inside the column and shall be of suitable size to take
all necessary electrical equipment such as connectors, fuses etc. Adjacent to this mounting
board, there shall be provided on the inside of the column a grounding bus complete with
two stainless steel bolts, lock nuts and washers, for use as grounding points.
(4) All the columns shall be erected in a truly vertical position with the arms at right angle to the
traffic flow. In the case of median mounted columns, the column doors shall all face in the
same direction along the road. The doors of the column erected at the side of the road shall
be positioned away from the approaching traffic. In each run of columns of five or more, every
fifth column shall be checked for vertically by means of a theodolite. The columns between
each checked column must be in line along the road and parallel to the check columns. Shim
washers may be used to achieve vertically where necessary. Each group of columns shall be
inspected by the Engineer prior to installation of the lanterns and wiring. Each column must
be grounded. After erection, each column shall have an identification code stencilled 50 mm
high on one side of the single arm columns and on two sides of a double arm column.
7.6.2.6 Wire and Cable
(1) All wires and cables shall be copper, PVC insulated PVC sheathed and free of joints except
at terminal blocks and junction boxes. Wires conveying power supplies to lighting columns
shall terminate in suitable sockets or terminal blocks which shall be covered and protected
so that no live parts are exposed. The cables shall be pulled through conduits as shown
in the Drawings.
(2) All wires and cables shall conform to the size and current rating of IEC 60227 and IEC 60502
(3) All non-current carrying metallic parts shall form an electrically continuous system which
shall be grounded or separately grounded as specified in the latest version of National
Electrical Code. All items below ground level shall be so designed and installed that they
will continue to operate without fault if immersed in ground water.
(4) Where tees and joints are used, they shall be made in compound filled joint boxes and
accessories specially manufactured for the cables. The compound shall be two part resin-
hardener which will form a void-free quick-setting compound. Alternatively an equivalent
insulating sealing compound, to be applied and then wrapped with electrical insulating
tape, may be used.
(5) The conductor connections within the joint shall be made using compression crimps or other
means of positive mechanical clamping to ensure that the electrical continuity of the wire is
maintained without significant increase in resistance as compared with that of straight cable runs.
(6) The design of the joint box and the composition of the compound shall provide an effective
seal to prevent moisture ingress to the circuit connections and clamps.
(7) No joint shall be made in a cable without the specific approval of the Engineer in writing.
7.6.2.7 Conduits, Boxes and fitting
(1) Equipment and materials to be provided shall be the standard catalogue products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products.
(2) The type, size and locations of conduits, fittings and boxes shall be as indicated on the
Drawings or otherwise approved by the Engineer.
(3) Steel conduit shall comply with SECTION 5
(4) High Density Polyethylene Conduit (HDPE) shall comply with ASTM-D1248 and used in the
corrosive area both underground and above ground installation.
(5) Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) pipes and fittings shall comply with ASTM D2665-85 for
different diameters and joints should be made to comply with ASTM D 2672-89, ASTM D 2855.
7.6.2.8 Supply Pillars
(1) The Contractor shall supply and erect the pillars in accordance with the Drawings.
The pillar shall be manufactured from steel. The final appearance and finish of the
pillars shall be identical to that shown on the Drawings irrespective of the material
used. The pillars shall be of sufficient size to house the equipment shown on the
Drawings and leave 10% spare usable space.
(2) The supply pillars shall be fitted with a steel channel base. The door shall be lockable
with either wedge type locks protected by screw plugs or some other form of secret lock
approved by the Engineer. The pillars must be self ventilating and rainproof. The doors
shall be hinged internally to prevent unauthorized access. All the supply pillars shall have
the same lock and key. Six keys shall be provided.
(3) The Contractor shall provide, mount and wire the equipment as shown on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall install the incoming cable from the meter to the supply pillar and the
weather head if required. The equipment includes main safety switch, distribution fuse
board, connectors, multi-terminal blocks, time switches etc. and some space must be left
free for the possible future installation of additional equipment.
(4) In addition to the items shown on the Drawings, the following shall be provided and
installed at each supply pillar:-
 A multi ground terminal block shall be provided for the connection/bonding of all non-
current carrying metallic parts, common grounding conductor and grounding electrode
conductor. The size of the conductor shall be 16 mm2 insulated stranded copper.
 A circuit identification chart sealed within a clear plastic envelope and fixed to the
inside of the door.
 An approved sign fitted to the outside of the pillar to indicate that the pillar houses
electrical equipment.
 All necessary internal wiring which shall be of a size to take the current of the
protective fuse.
7.6.2.9 Magnetic Contactors
The photo switches and time switches shall operate the road lighting in groups via a lighting
control with mercury displacement relays. These relays shall be those best suited for installation
where maintenance free operation is required. All contacts shall be sealed and are to be
impervious to corrosive atmosphere and gases, humid conditions and dust. The various capacities
are specified in the Drawings.
7.6.2.10 Main Switches (Safety Switches)
(1) Main or Safety switches shall comply with NEMA 1 or IP31, and be the heavy-duty type
with enclosure conforming to NEMA Type 3R, or IP54. Voltage, current rating, number of
poles, and fusing shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Switch construction shall be such
that, when the switch handle in the “ON” position, the cover or door cannot be opened.
Cover release device shall be coin-proof and be so constructed that an external tool shall
be used to open the cover. Make provisions to lock the handle in the “OFF” position, but
the switch shall not be capable of being locked in the “ON” position.
(2) Provide switches of the quick-make, quick-break type. Approved terminal lugs for use with
copper conductors.
(3) Safety colour coding for identification of safety switches shall conform to ANSI Z535.1.
7.6.2.11 Fuses and Fuse Distribution Board

(1) Fuses shall be time delay fuses which have an interrupting capacity not less than 80,000
amperes symmetrical. The fuse unit shall be manufactured from non-tracking thermo
setting plastic, cast aluminium or porcelain. The dimensions of the unit shall be such that
the unit will easily fit to the base board within the columns and to the fuse distribution
board. In every street lighting column, there shall be a cartridge fuse for each lantern to
protect against a short circuit current.
(2) The fuse supplied for this Contract shall be totally enclosed and be designed properly to
accept the fuse units. The enclosure shall be manufactured from metal or sheet metal
which is suitably stiffened to prevent twisting and wrapping of large areas such as doors.
The doors shall be internally hinged and lockable.
(3) The bus bars and fuse holders shall be fully shrouded. All spare fuse holders shall contain
a fuse of the same rating as those used.
(4) In each board a fuse chart recording fuse size and incoming and outgoing circuit connections
shall be supplied. This chart shall be read in the same manner as the fuses are installed.
The chart shall be enclosed in a clear transparent envelope firmly secured to the inside of
the door.
(5) The outgoing terminals of the fuse shall be large enough to take any incoming or outgoing
cable as specified in the Drawings.
7.6.2.12 Timer Switches
(1) At each station, a time switch is required to switch off part of the lighting circuit during the
period of darkness.
(2) The time switch shall be an electrically wound motor driven from 220 volts, 50 hertz supply
and shall have a spring driven clock-work reserve of not less than 12 hours.
(3) The contacts shall be inductively rated to accept an inrush current of contactor coils and
auxiliary relays.
7.6.2.13 Photo Electric Control
(1) Photo sensitive lighting controls shall be weatherproof and enclosed, and suitable for
operation on 200-250 volts, 50 Hz. A.C.
(2) The controls shall function to energise artificial lighting when the natural lighting level falls
to a preset, adjustable value, and to de-energise artificial lighting when natural lighting level
rises to a preset adjustable value.
(3) The operation shall be fail-safe, in that, in the event of failure of any components of the
control, the artificial lighting shall be continuously energised.
(4) Time delay devices shall be included to prevent switching of artificial lighting due to
transient lighting changes.
(5) The controls shall be completely unaffected by humidity.
(6) The switch mechanism shall be snap acting of sufficient capacity to adequately handle
loads of inrush rating of contactor coils or auxiliary relays.
(7) Suitable mounting sockets and brackets shall be provided.
(1) The size of each conduit shall be such that the sum of the areas of the cross-section of all
conductors, including insulation and protective coverings, shall be not greater than 40
percent of the inside area of conduit, except that no conduit encased in concrete or
installed underground shall be less than 50 mm. inside diameter.
(2) All conduit sizes and conduit layouts shall be approved by the Engineer before installation
and the Contractor shall submit data on the layout for the exact make up, overall diameter,
and cross-sectional areas of the actual conductors he intends to use and the sum of the
areas of the conductors in each conduit.
(3) Bends shall be of long sweep, free from kinks and of such easy curvature as to permit the
drawing in of the conductors without injury. The radius of curvature of inner edge of bends
shall not be less than that shown in Table 346-10 of National Electrical Code. Conduits
shall not be flattened or distorted. The total angle of all bends between any two boxes
or fittings shall not exceed 360 degrees.
(4) Exposed conduit runs shall be parallel to or at right angles to walls, slabs, girders and in
locations giving greatest accessibility for painting and least accumulation of dirt. All
exposed conduit runs shall be attached to steel, masonry, concrete or timber by galvanized
malleable iron or galvanized steel straps, clamps, or hangers of an approved type, held at
not less than two points by galvanized steel bolts or lag screws. The runs shall be
supported at not greater than 3m centres on horizontal runs, unless otherwise specified,
and not less than 50 mm. clear of the supporting members. Conduits mounted on
structural steel member shall be securely clamped to prevent rattling and wear.
(5) All ends of conduits installed during construction, or for future use, shall be closed against
the introduction of foreign material by the use of bush caps.
(6) All conduits installed underground shall be at least 600 mm. below ground level and have
a concrete envelope which shall afford a 70 mm. cover beyond the maximum dimension
of the conduit. Class 20 concrete shall be used.
(7) Excavation for the encasement shall be carefully done, sidewalls trimmed to line and
bottom of trench graded, so that the envelope will be uniform, and there will be no
pockets or low points in the conduit run. All back fill shall be carefully tamped unless
otherwise specified, and care shall be taken not to injure the concrete envelope or conduit.
(8) All conduits, boxes, etc., to be encased in concrete must be accurately placed and rigidly
held in position so that no variation from line or grade occurs when concrete is placed.
(9) Upon completion of the conduit installation, the system shall be cleaned in the presence
of the Engineer before any conductors are installed. Immediately prior to the installation
of conductors in any run, the conduits comprising that run shall again be checked. Any and
all obstructions shall be removed to the approval of the Engineer.
(10) The Contractor shall install and leave in place a No.10 galvanized iron pull wire in all
conduit runs installed for future use.
7.6.2.15 Draw Pits
(1) Draw pits shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in any case at not more than
100m intervals on straight runs and at every change of direction of the conduit run. The
Contractor may install additional draw pits without extra charge if he so wishes.
(2) Draw pits shall be of reinforced concrete as detailed on the Drawings.

(3) Covers shall be of cast iron, recessed for concrete filling, and shall be seated in cast iron
frames. The seating faces of all components in metal to metal contact shall be machine
finished to ensure that the installed covers are watertight. Covers shall be designed to
carry a distributed load of 3,000 kg/m2 unless sited in a roadway when they shall be
designed to carry a 10 tonne wheel load (contact pressure 11 kg/cm2).
(4) Covers shall be inscribed "Street Lighting" and shall be provided with a recessed means of
lifting.
(5) Tops of draw pits shall be effective level with the surrounding areas, whether paved or
unpaved. The bottoms of draw pits shall be bedded in sand and cement or crushed rock
in accordance with the Drawings.
7.6.2.16 Grounding
(1) The rods shall have clean, smooth, continuous copper surfaces and the proportion of
copper shall be uniform throughout the length of the rod. Ground wires shall be secured
to the upper ends of ground rods by an exothermic process.
(2) Ground rods shall be at least 3.0 m long unless otherwise specified, and shall have
diameters sufficient to permit driving to the necessary depth without being damaged, but
in no case shall they be less than 16 mm diameter.
(3) The maximum resistance of the grounding systems shall not exceed 5 ohms.
(4) If this resistance cannot be obtained by one rod, a sufficient number of additional rods
shall be installed not closer than two meters centres and bonded to the main system.
(5) Grounding system for all lighting column structures shall be accomplished by common
ground wire run along with power conductor circuit and bonded to grounding terminals at
supply pillars, unless otherwise specified.
(6) The last columns of each circuit shall be connected to a ground rod.
7.6.2.17 Working Drawings
The Contractor shall furnish working drawings in duplicate for the Engineer to make preliminary
examination. After working drawings have been approved by the Engineer and revisions made,
the Contractor shall furnish additional copies as may be requested.
7.6.3 EXECUTION
7.6.3.1 Testing of the Lighting System
(1) Functional test shall be made on completion of the work in order to demonstrate that
every part of the equipment and installation functions as intended and specified. The test
shall consist of not less than five nights (5 x 24 Hours) continuous and satisfactory operation.
If any defects or unsatisfactory operation are revealed, this condition shall be corrected
and the test repeated until the required five successive nights of satisfactory operation has
been achieved.
(2) The Contractor shall make available to the Engineer a photo-meter, and other related
accessories, suitably calibrated by an authorized authority, for measuring the illumination
on the road surface if desired.
(3) Prior to the functional test, the Contractor shall provide the testing equipment and
accessories and shall carry out the following tests to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer:-
(a) Each circuit shall be tested for continuity and polarity.
(b) Each circuit shall be tested for ground continuity and ground resistance.
(c) Voltage drop in each circuit shall be measured.
(d) Power factor for each circuit shall be determined.
(4) On the completion of testing, the Contractor shall supply to the Engineer of "As- built"
drawings and circuit diagrams, which shall clearly indicate any modifications which have
been made to the original design.
7.7 COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPING WORK

7.7.1 DESCRIPTION
7.7.1.1 Scope
This section specifies the providing of cold water supply and the installation of cold water
supply which connect to main piping work, water meter, gatevalve and equipments.
7.7.1.2 General Requirement
The Contractor shall provide the cold water supply from the suitable available existing source,
furnish and install all piping work including all necessary parts as shown on the Drawings.
(1) See Section 5-4 (Plumbing System)
(2) In the case of conflict or uncertainty in the application of the above standards and codes,
the most stringent regulation shall govern.
(3) All regulations and standards shall be of the latest issue unless governing authorities
require an earlier issue.
(4) Internationally recognized standards and codes other than those listed in sub-clause 3.1
above may be proposed for consideration by the Engineer. The Engineer shall have full
authority in determining whether the proposed standard or code adequately supports
the design intent.
7.7.1.4 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit all material, catalog, material lists and technical data request for
The manufacturer must specialize in the specified equipment and having experience about the
equipment which have been installed in Thailand or in foreign countries.
All parts of the piping work shall be guaranteed as specified in the main contract.
7.7.1.6 Delivery, Handling, Storage and Cleaning
temporary covers during erection. Before any pipe is installed, it shall be opened and
pounded to remove any foreign substances, or swabbed, if necessary, for thorough cleaning.
(2) Pipes shall be stored on racks in a suitable warehouse or cover to avoid rusting. If
necessary, carbon steel pipes shall be coated with anodic rust inhibitor or redlead primer.
(3) During the course of installation, the Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent
any debris from being left in the pipes. He shall be responsible for any damage that may
occur.
(4) Immediately after installation, exposed threads at all fittings shall be painted with zinc-
chromate paint, and after welding each joint shall be wire-brushed and then painted with
zinc-chromate paint.
(6) Fixtures and equipment shall be covered and protected against damage. At the
completion of the work, fixtures, materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned
and delivered in a satisfactory condition.
7.7.2 PRODUCTS
7.7.2.1 Description
The rated pressure of the cold water piping system shall be at least 1. 5 times of the actual
working pressure, but not less than 1,034 kPa (150 PSIG.).
7.7.2.2 Component
(1) Cold water pipe
Underground cold water pipe shall be High Density Polyethylene ( HDPE) pipe Class PN
10 conforming to ASTM D2239 or TIS 982.
Fittings for polyvinyl chloride pipes shall be rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride ( PVC)
complying with TIS 1031, TIS 1132.
Fitting for HDPE pipes shall be high density polyethylene as required or recommended
by the manufacturers.
Fittings for galvanized steel pipes shall be galvanized malleable cast-iron, conforming to
TIS I249.
7.7.3 EXECUTION
(1) General Piping Installation
All piping shall be installed parallel to, or at right angles with the structures, walls. A Gravity
pipes shall have slope in the direction of flow not less than 1: 500. Branches from water
mains shall be taken in a manner that facilitates the outdoor usings.
(2) Workmanship
(a) All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site, and shall
be worked into place without springing or forcing.
(b) Piping shall be installed so that it may expand and contract freely without injury to itself
or other work. Steel and wrought-iron pipe shall be cut with pipe cutters and threaded
with sharp, clean dies. All cut sections shall be reamed to remove all burrs and to restore
the pipe to full diameter. All changes in size shall be made with reducing fitting.
(c) Pipe bends and bushings are prohibited.
All valves, cleanouts, equipment, accessories, and devices shall be so located that they
are accessible for repair and replacement.
(4) Connection to Equipment
(a) Connections to coils, pumps and other equipment shall be made in such a manner
that undue strains between pipes and equipment are eliminated.
(b) Unions and/or flanges shall be used to facilitate the removal of the equipment.
(a) The piping systems shall be installed so that there will be no damage due to
expansion and contraction during operation.
(b) Expansion connectors shall be used where the expansion and contraction of the pipe
is excessive or cannot be compensated by expansion loops or offsets.
settlement of the pipe supports after installation. The problems shall be avoided by
providing flexible connections.
(7) Pipe Joints
(a) Joint for Threaded Pipe
Joints for threaded pipes shall be made with an approved teflon tape or graphite
compound applied to the male threads only. Threads exposed after joints are made
up shall be covered with compound.
Threads shall be of the cleanout, tapered threads with the ends being reamed before
installation.
(b) Joint for Flanged Pipe
Flanged joints shall be installed at all valves larger than 50 mm. and at other places
where necessary.
Jointing flanges shall be truly parallel to each other so that bolts are used only to
tighten joints, rather than correct alignment. Flanges shall be chosen to suit the
maximum working pressure of the system. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be cadmium-
plated steel.
(c) Welded Pipe Joint
The edges of the pipe to be welded shall be machine-beveled wherever possible. Gas
cuts shall be true and free of all burnt metal. Before welding, the surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned and degreased. The welding technique shall be such as to ensure
penetration to the full thickness of the pipe wall and through fusion of the deposited
metal with the parent metal. During welding the ends of the pipes shall be held firmly
together by suitable lugs, welded-on-bridge pieces or adequate tack welding. Special
care shall be taken to prevent formation of welded obstructions and lodgment of
welding residue inside the pipes. Cracks, pinholes, excessive under-cutting, etc. shall
be removed and the joints rewelded. Welding materials and workmanship shall be in
accordance with AWS or the approval of the Engineer.
Welders must be entirely competent and may be required to perform site tests. Should
the engineer not be satisfied, the welder must be replaced. The engineer reserves the
right to order the cutout for inspection of up to 1 percent of the total number of welds.
In the event of any inspected welds being, in the engineer opinion, unsatisfactory he
reserves the right to order the removal of further welds which in his opinion indicate
faulty workmanship. Welds removed for inspection shall be reinstalled at no cost to the
Project.
Either the electric arc or the oxy- acetylene welding method may be used. Welding
rods or electrodes shall have such composition that the welds produced by them
shall have the same analysis as the parent metal and shall be of an approved type
and brand.
(a) All hangers and steel supports shall be hot dip galvanized.
(b) Underground pipe support and hanger shall be all stainless steel.
(10) Termination of Water Piping
If trenches are closed, or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the
utility systems, the locations of the end of each pipe shall be marked with a stake properly
tagged or otherwise identified.
(a) Underground pipe supports attached to the building structure shall be made of
stainless steel.
(b) Back fill and under-fill shall be made with sand.
(c) The approximate location of the trench is shown on the Drawings but the Contractor
shall obtain the approval of the Engineer for each final location before breaking the
ground. The trenches shall be cleanly excavated, reasonably straight and free from
loose soil or stones or water before the conduits are laid. Trenches where necessary
shall be adequately shored. Where trenches change depth to accommodate access
to conduits, or for similar reasons, the change in level shall be gradual and wherever
possible the slope should be not more than 1:5.
(d) No conduits shall be laid in a flooded trench and the Contractor is responsible for
dealing with any surface water and any pumping or bailing of the trenches. Trenches
which are flooded after the conduits are laid and before backfilling has commenced
shall be carefully bailed or pumped dry. If instructed by the Engineer the conduits
shall be removed prior to pumping or bailing.
(e) Trenches and covers for water supply pipes shall be u- shape concrete structures as
specified in the Drawings or as the approval of the Engineer.
(12) Supply Pipes
(a) The supply pipes from the suitable available existing source of cold water supply
shall be underground or elevated by the approval of the Engineer or as shown in the
Drawings.
(13) Valve
The location of the principal valves shall be as indicated on the Drawings, but, whether or
not so indicated, shutoff gate valves shall be furnished and installed in each supply main
where it enters the building. All valves shall be installed in accessible locations. These
valves shall be rated for 1034 kPa ( 150 psi) working pressure or more, unless otherwise
7.7.3.2 Testing and commissioning
(1) Testing and commissioning shall be as specified in the section 5-4 (Plumbing System).
(2) Piping may be tested a section at time in order to facilitate the construction.
(3) Leaks in screwed fittings shall be corrected by remaking the joints. Leaks in welded joints
shall be cut out and rewelded.
(4) After pressure tests have been made, the entire water-distribution system to be sterilized
shall be thoroughly flushed with water until all entrained dirt and mud have been
removed before introducing chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be
either liquid chlorine or hypochlorite. The chlorinating material shall provide a dosage of
not less than 50 PPM. And shall be introduced into the system in an approved manner.
The treated water shall be retained in the pipe long enough to destroy all non spore-
forming bacteria. Except where a shorter period is approved, the retention time shall be
at least 24 hours and shall produce not less than 10 PPM of chlorine at the extreme end
of the system of the retention period. All valves in the system being sterilized shall be
opened and closed several times during the contact period.
(5) The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is reduced
to less than 0.2 PPM. During the flushing period all valves and faucets shall be turned on
and off several times.
7.8 DEEP WELL AND ELEVATED TANK

7.8.1 DESCRIPTION
7.8.1.1 Scope
(1) This section specifies the drilling of a deep well to a suitable depth for water supply to
cover the water consumption of at least 5 cu.m per day and erection of a 20 cu.m capacity
mild steel elevated tank, or as shown in the Drawings.
(2) Works Include: Drilling of bore hole, casing and screen lining’ installing submersible
pump and electric power pumping system and control, mild steel elevated tank
disinfecting.
(3) Works not included: Water reticulation system.
7.8.1.2 System description
(1) Form and line permanent well, sealing off unrequired water bearing strata.
(2) Install submersible pump and pipelines connecting to the Elevated Tank including
necessary accessories needed to install at the well head and tank outlet in order to be
connected to the distribution of water supply system.
7.8.1.3 Submittals
(1) Drilling Company's brochure and supporting recommendations.
(2) Typical well drilling and construction design, technical data and performance curves for
pumps and controls together with pump manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
(3) Construction method statement.
(4) Report consisting of Vertical Electric Sounding (Resistivity survey), well drilling and
construction, borehole electric logging result, well water quantity and quality test, pump
capacity with depth intake.
(1) Water Quality shall be Department of Groundwater Resources' standard for potable water
as specified in the Groundwater Act. B.E. 2520, Standard Grade. The Contractor shall provide
water treatment system approved by the Engineer if needed.
(2) Drilling Company shall have driller and engineer (or geologist) who obtained the well drilling and
supervision certificates from The Department of Groundwater Resources and the Drilling
Company shall also have The Department of Groundwater Resources registration for performing
deep well drilling and construction for at least 5 years.
7.8.2 PRODUCTS
7.8.2.1 Materials
(1) Diameter of casing shall be 150 mm using API 5L, Grade B schedule 40, WRW or ASTM A53
schedule 40, WRW pipe, each pipe length to have a coupling type connection. The outside
of each length of pipe is to be painted in with bituminous coat or equal.
(2) Screen shall be V-Shape Stainless Steel Wire Wound 150 mm in diameter, 1 m, or 2 m, or
3 m long per piece with proper slots opening.
(3) Submersible Pump: Technical data of the pump shall conform to the following.
(a) General Data
Type of Pump Multistage Submersible pump
Pump Efficiency  60%(or approved by the Engineer)
Capacity As shown in the Drawings
Pump Speed >2850 RPM
Connection Pipe Diameter As shown in the Drawings
Other data shall be as shown in the Drawings.
(b) Material
Shaft Coupling Stainless steel
Impeller Stainless steel
Line shaft Stainless steel
Discharge Case Stainless steel
Bowl Stainless steel
Bearing Retainer Stainless steel
Wearing ring NBR
(c) Electric Motor
Type of Motor Submersible Motor
Motor H.P/Speed RPM >2850 RPM
Type of Starter Switch Automatic Start
Power Source, Volt/Phase/Hz 400/3/50 (or =220/1/50)
Insulation Class F
Type of Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection
Degree of Protection IP68
(4) Electric Cable and Controls
(a) Wire and Cable shall comply with appropriate requirement in section 5.3.23 (Electrical
System).
(b) Switchboard shall comply with appropriate requirement in section 5. 3. 23 ( Electrical
System).
(c) Magnetic Starter Relay Switch shall comply with appropriate DIN, IEC, ANSI or NEMA
Standards, and shall have a standing voltage of not less than 500 Volt.
(d) Disconnection Switch and Fuses shall be HRC type of voltage rating up to 750 volts
complying with DIN, NEMA or IEC Standards.
(e) Overload Protection Devices shall comply with NEMA-3R.
(f) Automatic Non-floating Switches shall be approved by the Engineer.
(g) Miscellaneous item of electrical control equipment shall comply with section 5.3.23
(Electrical System).
(5) Gravel Pack : Clean river gravel conforming with the screen slut opening which is not more
than 10% smaller size.
(6) Elevated tank shall be made of mild steel with a capacity of 20 cu. m. or as shown in the
Drawing.
(7) Height and structural details of elevated tank shall be as shown in the Drawings.
7.8.3 EXECUTION
7.8.3.1 Site Survey
(1) Contractor shall conduct survey by Resistivity Test Borehole determination. Shall be casing
Borehole Electric Logging equipment function of self potential, Resistivity and Natural
Gamma Roy. Other test equipment may be needed if necessary.
(2) Submit test reports to the Engineer, including tables of resistivity values, and graphs of
resistivity together with interpretations and a projected subsurface profile.
7.8.3.2 Well Drilling
(1) Drilling equipment shall be modern with facilities drilling and handling of pipes. Method
of drilling shall be Air or Mud Direct Circulation Rotary System.
(2) A well production capability 5 cu. m. per day shall be provided or as specified in the
Drawings.
(3) Test boreholes shall be at least 150 mm diameter and capable of being converted into
the final bore. Temporary linings shall be used if necessary to prevent collapse.
(4) The final boreholes shall either be enlarged or drilled to be not less than 300 mm diameter
for unconsolidated aquifer and not less than 250 mm. diameter for rock aquifer to such
depth as has been determined from the Contractor's report, using the approved procedure
in the Contractor's method statement.
(5) Water bearing strata not used for the water supply shall be sealed by grouting. using
procedures approved by the Engineer.
(6) Well capacity shall be determined by pumping test method.
(7) Well Development shall employ air-lift equipment operating at about 250 – 600 cfm. The
Well Development shall be applied by surging and lifting method until the water is clear
and without sand coming with the water.
7.8.3.3 Disinfection
(1) After removal of the air-lift equipment the well shall be thoroughly disinfected by placing
chlorine solution into the well at 50 – 200 ppm for a period of 24 hours.
(2) After the end of the 24- hour period the well shall be flushed until all water is free of
chorine and testing records a satisfactory bacterial analysis for potable water.
7.8.3.4 Pumping Test
(1) Test pumping shall be carried out in four phases
(a) 1st Phase: Pumping for not less than 4 hours at an agreed rate which shall be
(b) 2nd Phase: to 140% of the 1st pumping rate for 4 hours.
(c) 3rd Phase: Increase the pumping rate to 180% of the 1st pumping rate for 4 hours.
(d) 4th Phase: Increase the pumping rate to 220% of the 1st pumping rate for 4 hours.
(2) The Engineer shall have the discretion to adjust the pumping rate or the length of time
that the rate shall be held constant.
(3) During pumping the well water level shall be recorded at 10 minute intervals, and after test
pumping ceases, the water level shall be recorded each minute for 10 minutes and the time
taken to restore to constant water level shall be recorded.
(4) Water quantities and water levels shall be measured by apparatus approved by the
Engineer.
7.8.3.5 Water Testing
(1) During trial drilling and during permanent well drilling water samples shall be obtained in
the presence of the Engineer.
(2) Samples shall each be four litres of which two shall be handed over to the Engineer for
testing by an Independent Testing Agency.
7.8.3.6 Electricity Supply
The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging the date and time of the final connection and
maintaining an effective liaison with PEA. Payment to PEA for the connection shall be made by
the Contractor.
END OF SECTION 7
การรถไฟแห่งประเทศไทย
โครงการก่อสร้างทางรถไฟ สายเด่นชัย-เชียงราย-เชียงของ
สัญญาที่ 2 ช่วงงาว-เชียงราย
เอกสารประกวดราคาจ้าง
ด้วยวิธีประกวดราคาอิเล็กทรอนิกส์ (e-bidding)
เล่ม III (ข้อกําหนดรายการจําเพาะด้านเทคนิค)
บริษัท เอ็ม เอ เอ คอนซัลแตนท์ จํากัด

Table of Contents
Page
SECTION 8: TRACKWORKS 8-1
8.1 RAIL 8-1
8.2 TURNOUTS 8-5
8.3 CONCRETE SLEEPERS AND BEARERS 8-16
8.4 TIMBER SLEEPERS 8-34
8.5 RAIL FASTENING SYSTEM 8-34
8.6 TESTING OF ASSEMBLED CONCRETE SLEEPERS 8-51
8.7 BALLAST 8-55
8.8 OTHER TRACK MATERIALS AND WORKS 8-59
8.9 RAIL WELDING 8-66
8.10 RAIL JOINTS 8-74
8.11 TRACKLAYING 8-79
8.12 ALTERATION AND MODIFICATION OF EXISTING TRACK 8-86
8.13 CONCRETE PANEL TYPE LEVEL CROSSINGS 8-90
8.14 TRACKWORK ON STEEL BRIDGES 8-97
8.15 BALLASTLESS TRACK 8-100
8.16 TRACK EQUIPMENT 8-114
8.17 RAIL EXPANSION JOINTS (REJ) 8-131
SECTION 9: TUNNELLING WORKS 9-1

9.1 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 9-1
9.2 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL OBLIGATIONS 9-9
9.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION 9-16
9.4 GEOLOGICAL MAPPING AND ROCK MASS CLASSIFICATION 9-22
9.5 PORTAL WORKS 9-24
9.6 TUNNEL EXCAVATION WORKS 9-26
9.7 GEOTECHNICAL MONITORING DURING TUNNELLING 9-45
9.8 GROUND SUPPORTS 9-50
9.9 WATERPROOFING SYSTEM 9-76
9.10 CONCRETE LINING AND OTHER CONCRETE STRUCTURE 9-87
9.11 TUNNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEM 9-100
9.12 TUNNEL UTILITY SYSTEM 9-102
Contract: 2 Ngao -Chiang Rai Section i
APPENDIX 1 9-178
ATTACHMENT A - TUNNEL VENTILATION FAN UNITS 9-179
ATTACHMENT B - TUNNEL VENTILATION DAMPER UNITS 9-210
ATTACHMENT C - TUNNEL VENTILATION ATTENUATOR & others 9-223
ATTACHMENT D – INTERFACES 9-225
SECTION 10: SIGNALLING & TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORKS 10-1

1 PROJECT AND GENERAL INFORMATION 1-1
2 SCOPE OF WORKS 2-1
3 PLANS 3-1
4 POWER SUPPLIES & DISTRIBUTION 4-1
5 SIGNALLING REQUIREMENTS 5-1
6 SIGNALLING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 6-1
7 SIGNALLING CABLES & WIRES 7-1
8 TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 8-1
9 CENTRALISED TRAFFIC CONTROL (CTC) REQUIREMENTS 9-1
10 RELOCATION OF EXISTING S&T INFRASTRUCTURE 10-1
11 LIGHTNING, SURGE PROTECTION, IMMUNISATION AND EARTHING 11-2
12 HOUSING OF EQUIPMENT 12-1
13 DOCUMENTATION 13-1
14 PRACTICE, STANDARDS, COMPLIANCE & SAFETY ASSURANCE 14-1
15 INSTALLATION 15-1
16 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 16-1
17 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS 17-1
18 STAFF TRAINING AND MAINTENANCE 18-1
19 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 19-1
20 QUALITY MANAGEMENT 20-1
APPENDICES
APPENDIX A: CTC AND CBI INTERFACE COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
APPENDIX B: LOCAL CONTROL PANEL SUMMARY OF CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS
Contract: 2 Ngao -Chiang Rai Section ii
SECTION 8
TRACKWORKS
Tender Documents Section 8 : Trackworks
SECTION 8: TRACKWORKS
8.1 RAILS
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
This section specifies the EN 54E1, R260 flat bottom steel rail sections to be furnished for mainline
straight track, sidings track and EN 54E1, R350HT or R350LHT rail shall be furnished for turnout except
check rail and switch rail turnouts.
Standard rail shall be EN 13674-1:2011 Grade R260 rail steel with hardness of not less than 260 BHN
and Grade R350HT or R350LHT hardness of not less than 350 BHN.
Work not included: Laying of rails, Fishplates, Fishbolts, nuts & washers. Fishbolt holes shall not be
permitted in welded track.
2.1 Rail cross- section shall be 54E1. The production, straightening, testing and the quality of material
shall conform in all aspects of the EN 13674- 1: 2011 Railway Applications- Track- Rail- Part 1: Vignole
railway rails 46 kg/m and above.
2.2 The Manufacturer of rails shall have an extensive, the reference of proven work for at least 10 years.
2.3 The Manufacturers must have been supplying steel rails to SRT for at least 5 years, according to EN
standard and EN 54E1 rails.
2.4 The Manufacturers shall have satisfactory work performance for at least 5 years from different projects.
2.5 All rails shall be sourced from one manufacturer and rolled from blooms produced by the continuous
casting process. No rail rolled before commencement date shall be used in the permanent works.
Rails shall be supplied undrilled.
2.6 The documentations with regard to Manufacturing and Qualifying Tests in accordance with EN
13674-1:2011 and proven records of rail manufacturer shall be submitted to the Employer’s
Representative for rail manufacturer approval.
2.7 Rails shall be certified by the qualified accreditation body in accordance with IEC 17020 standard or
equivalent. Mill test certificates shall be issued to the Contractor for review prior to any shipment of
product.
2.8 In addition to the demands of Section 1- 10: QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING LABORATORY for
quality assurance the Contractor is required to procure the rails from a manufacturer operating an
independently approved and audited quality control system in accordance with the requirements of ISO
9000 or equivalent.
Where the rail manufacturer cannot produce such independent and current certification the following
requirements shall apply.
(a) The Contractor shall submit the name of an independent Inspection Agency to the Engineer
for review prior to the commencement of the manufacture of the rails.
(b) The Contractor shall, at his own expense, arrange for the Inspection Agency to observe the
whole manufacturing process, witness testing, and to inspect the finished product.
(c) The Contractor shall at his own expense supply all templates, gauges, prepare and supply all
test pieces and samples of steel, sample rails and drillings, and supply all labour and apparatus
for testing which may be necessary or required for carrying out the tests in accordance with
this specification. The Contractor shall render all reasonable assistance in making such tests.
The Contractor shall also, at his own expense, supply all drillings, test pieces and samples of
steel for carrying out independent chemical analysis and tensile strength tests.
(d) Before the rails are submitted for inspection of surface, section, and finish, the Contractor shall
arrange for all rails to be properly examined and all defective rails removed and placed in a
separate stack and the remainder sorted into specific lengths for examination by the Inspection
Agency.
(e) After final inspection every accepted rail shall be clearly stamped with the Inspection Agency's
stamp at each end in the presence of the Inspection Agency.
(f) All rails rejected due to their failure to comply with the requirements of this section shall,
whether rejected singly or by casts, be stamped with the letter " R" on both ends of the rail
and on the side of the head in the middle of the rail. The Inspection Agency's acceptance
stamp, if any, on such rails shall be defaced and the ends of the rail painted red. All rejected
rails shall be stacked separately until all accepted rails have been shipped.
2.9 All rails shall be roller straightened, and afterwards ultrasonically tested.
2.10 The Desirable rail length shall be 25 m. Rail shorter than 18m shall not be used in plain line unless
their use has been endorsed by the Employer’ s Representative and shall in all cases conform to
clause 2.9 below. Should transport considerations dictate then the minimum length of 18m shall be
acceptable.
2.11 The minimum length of closure rail in the mainline shall be 12m. In the depot and yard the minimum
length shall be 4.5 m.
2.12 Tolerances
Tolerances shall be in accordance with Clause 9.2 of EN 13674-1:2011:
(1) The profile tolerances of rails shall be class ‘X’ of EN 13674-1:2011, table 8.
(2) The straightness tolerances of rails shall be class ‘A’ of EN 13674-1:2011, table 9.
2.13 The tests that shall be performed on the rail are those required by EN13674, which shall be carried
out at the stated frequency.
3. Submittals
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the following:
(a) Name and address of Manufacturer to supply rails;
(b) Broad outline description of the steel making and casting process;
(c) Manufacturer's certificates of steel making and casting processes, chemical analysis, results of
mechanical tests and position from which the test samples have been selected;
(d) Methods used by the Manufacturer:
(a) to check the depth of minor surface imperfections and method of removal.
(b) avoidance of the presence of hydrogen flakes
(e) Results of ultrasonic testing;
(f) One set of plus and minus limit acceptance gauges supplied by the Manufacturer;
(g) Name and qualifications of Contractor's Independent Inspection Agency engaged to perform:
(a) observation of manufacturing process
(b) witness testing
(c) inspection of finished rails
(h) Chemical composition.
(i) Heat records.

(j) Description of the ultrasonic and eddy current testing equipment, procedure, and certification
for the testing personnel.
(k) Brinell hardness testing records.
(l) Ultrasonic testing records, including equipment calibration results, a listing of rails tested, and
hardcopy readouts from the ultrasonic testing equipment for rails with rejectable
discontinuities.
(m) The control cooling, vacuum-treating, and heat treating records if applicable.
(n) The name and qualifications of the third party testing organization.
(o) Mill Certificate.
4. Delivery Storage and Handling
4.1 All new rails shall be shipped in a covered hold; rails shipped as deck cargo are not acceptable. Rails
shall not be delivered as bundles, but stacked upright, so that they are unloaded by a self-actuating
multi rail-lifting device.
4.2 The Contractor shall reject any rails which, in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative, on arrival
at site exhibit pitting of the rail head, or are subject to corrosion or mechanical damage beyond that
which can be corrected by normal rail surface grinding required under the Contract. The rails shall
be stock piled a minimum of 100 mm. clear of the ground and at a sufficient grade to prevent water
ponding between and on the rails, also there is to be sufficient air flow around the rails to allow
them to stay dry.
4.3 The Contractor is responsible for shipping all rail required by this contract from the mill or plant to
the storage area. The storage area layout and methods of stacking rails shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for acceptance.
4.4 Rail shall be loaded and unloaded with the use of lifting devices accepted by the Employer’ s
Representative. Rail which is damaged during delivery, storage or handling shall be replaced at the
Contractor’s expense.
4.5 Rails shall be stored only on a timber base off the ground with not less than 35 mm thick timber or
5mm thick steel packers between layers. Rails shall not be stacked more than 2.5 metres high.
4.6 Single point slinging of single or multiple rails is strictly prohibited.
Self actuating rail grip devices capable of lifting up to five rails at a time are preferred. Fabric or nylon
straps can be used for rail bundles. Rails shall always be lifted at two points using a spreader beam
or similar device.
5. Guarantee
5.1 Rails that fail in service before the expiration of the Defects Liability Period shall be replaced free of
charge at a depot designated by SRT. The cost of installing replacement rails shall be borne by the
Contractor. The defective rails withdrawn from service shall be handed over at site to the Contractor
for his disposal off railway property.
5.2 The Contractor shall make good the cost of such replacement within 60 days of advice of defects,
during which period, the Contractor shall inspect the rails, make his observations and carry out
examination jointly with the SRT's representative.
5.3 Patent Rights

The patent rights of the rails shall be the responsibility of the Contractor who will guarantee the
Employer against any claim in this connection.
PART II : PRODUCTS
1. Materials
Material and chemical composition of rails shall be in accordance Table 5 of EN 13674-1:2011.
2. Rail Identification
Identification marking of rails shall be in accordance Clause 7.4 of EN 13674-1:2011
All rails shall have the SRT logo added to the branding. Cold stamping of rails is not permitted.
The Sequence of brand marks reading from left to right shall be:
(a) Manufacturer Identification
(b) Grade of Steel
(c) Year of Manufacture
(d) Rail Profile Identification
(e) “SRT”
3. Length
3.1 Rails shall be not less than 18m.
3.2 All rails shall be painted throughout the section at both ends in accordance with length of rails as
directed by the engineer.
3.3 The usage of short rail shall be less than 3% of all rail.
4. Rail Handling Devices
4.1 The Contractor shall provide with the first shipment of rail one set of rail profile tolerance gauges
supplied by the manufacturer.
4.2 The Contractor shall provide with the first shipment of rails:
(a) 4 purpose built spreader beams, complete with suspension device suitable for a crane hook,
capable of lifting up to five 25m rails of 54E1 rail sections bundled together;
(b) 4 pairs of proprietary self actuated rail grip lifting devices capable of lifting up to 5 rails at one
time.
(c) 4 pairs of nylon/polypropylene rail lifting straps.
1. Inspection of Rails
1.1 The Contractor shall submit the name of a third party Inspection Agency to the Engineer for review
prior to the commencement of manufacture of rails.
1.2 The Contractor shall provide the Inspection Agency with reasonable access to observe the
manufacturing process, witness testing and to inspect the finished product.
1.3 The Contractor shall at his own expense supply all templates and gauges, prepare and supply all
test pieces and samples of steel, sample rails and drillings and supply all labour and apparatus for
testing which may be necessary or required for carrying out the tests and requirements of this
specification, and render all reasonable assistance in making such tests. The contractor shall also, at
his own expense, supply all drillings, test pieces and samples of steel for carrying on independent
chemical analysis and tensile tests.
1.4 Before the rails are submitted to inspection regarding surface, section and finish, all rails shall be
properly examined by the Contractor's inspectors and all defective rails removed and placed in a
separate stack and the rest sorted into specified lengths for examination by the Inspection Agency.
2. Acceptance of Rails
2.1 The manufacturer shall test the rail according to section 9 of EN 13674-1:2011.
2.2 All rails shall be ultrasonically tested by a continuous process ensuring that the entire rail length and
specified cross-sectional area are inspected.
2.3 The minimum cross-sectional area examined by the ultrasonic technique shall be in accordance with
EN 13674-1:2011 Clause 9.4.1.2
2.4 All rails shall be visually or automatically inspected on all faces for surface imperfections. In addition,
the underside of the rail foot shall be inspected automatically in accordance with EN 13674- 1: 2011
Clause 9.4.2.6. All rails shall comply with the criteria defined at EN 13674-1:2011 Clause 9.4.2.2 and
9. 4. 2. 3. Assessment and dressing of imperfections shall be in accordance with EN 13674 - 1: 2011
Clause9.4.2.5.
3. Tests
The Contractor shall propose testing in accordance with EN 13674-1:2011. Such as
Tensile test according to EN 10002-1:2001
Hardness Test (HB30) according to ASTM A370-03a
Chemical analysis followed manual of Arc-met8000
Micro Structure analysis according to ASM Handbook Vol 9-2004
Check falling Test
8.2 TURNOUTS
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
This Section specifies the furnishing of complete metre gauge turnouts with curved flexible switches and
Fixed 1 in 16, fixed 1 in 12, Fixed 1 in 10 and fixed 1 in 8 weldable cast austenitic manganese crossings to
conform with EN15689 and 54E1 rail section designed for use on concrete bearers in CWR.
The design loads shall be 20 tonnes axles at 160 kph.
The design, manufacture and test shall conform in all respects to EN 13232 Parts 1- 9 Railway
applications – Track – Switched and crossing.
The Switcheblades or Switch rail shall conform to EN 13674- 2. Use 54E1A1, R350HT or R350LHT rail
section.
The check rail use 33C1, R320Cr steel section in accordance with EN13674-3.
Work Includes: Design and setting out drawings of the turnouts. Furnishing of crossing, together with
stock, closure, tongue, and check rails, and all rail joints. Furnishing insulated rail joints. Furnishing of
baseplates, inserts and fasteners. Furnishing of track pads and insulators. Furnishing slide plates;
insulated stretcher bars; spacers; blocks; nuts; bolts and plain and spring washers, anti-creep device.
Furnishing of baseplates, inserts and fasteners. Furnishing of track pads and insulators. Furnishing slide
plates; insulated stretcher bars; spacers; blocks; nuts; bolts and plain and spring washers, anti- creep
device. Instruction in field and shop repair welding to SRT.
Detail drawings; Shop drawings. Material lists. Assembly instructions.
Work Not Included: Bearers, Point Machines; Installation.
2. Definitions
For the purposes of this specification, the following definitions apply:
"Baseplates" - Rail support members that provide a mounting for the fastener system used.
" Bearers" - Transverse components of the track system which supports the rails in switches and
crossings.
" Crossing" - A device to permit a wheel travelling on one rail to pass through another rail which
crosses its path.
" Fastener" - The device fastening the rail to the sleeper, bearer or baseplate. It shall meet the
requirements of SECTION 8-5 RAIL FASTENING SYSTEM.
"Flexible Switch" - A switch rail which flexes as it is moved from the open to closed position between
the toe of the switch rail and the first heel block.
" Insert" - Male or female insert for attaching the rail fasteners or baseplates. It shall be cast in the
sleeper at the time of manufacture.
"Insert (S & T)" - Male or female inserts cast into bearers at the time of manufacture for attachment
of signalling equipment to be selected by SRT before manufacture of turnout.
"Main Line" - The track that runs through and between stations normally utilised for scheduled train
operation between Block Stations through a yard or station area.
" Manufacturer" - The producer of the turnouts specified herein, and including the Supplier if the
context so applies.
"Contractor" - The entity signing the Contract and responsible for the performance of the work under
the Contract and including the Manufacturer if the Context so applies.
" Shop Drawings" - Drawings provided by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval before
manufacture. These drawings shall provide adequate information for the Engineer to check
dimensions, clearances tolerances and other relevant information. Shop Drawings shall not include
proprietary or commercial information and shall become the property of SRT.
"Shoulder" - Male insert embedded in the sleeper for attaching the fasteners to the sleeper.
" Slide Baseplate" - The baseplates that support the stock rail and the flexible length of the tongue
rail and permit the movement of the tongue rail.
"Switch" - The means whereby a wheel is diverted from one rail to another.
“Anti-creep device”– It is to restrict relative longitudinal movement between the switch rail and the
stock rail.
3.1 In addition to the demands of SECTION 1- 10 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING LABORATORY for
quality assurance the Contractor is required to procure the turnouts from a Manufacturer operating
an independently reviewed and audited quality control system in accordance with the requirements
of ISO 9000 and shall comply with EN13232. Where the turnout Manufacturer cannot produce such
independent and current certification the following requirements shall apply.
(a) The Contractor shall submit the name of an independent Inspection Agency to the Engineer
for approval prior to the commencement of the manufacture of the turnouts.
(b) The Contractor shall, at his own expense, arrange for the Inspection Agency to observe the
whole manufacturing process, witness testing, and to inspect the finished product.
(c) The Contractor shall at his own expense supply all templates, gauges, prepare and supply all
test pieces and samples of steel, sample rails and drillings, and supply all labour and
apparatus for testing which may be necessary or required for carrying out the tests in
accordance with this specification. The Contractor shall render all reasonable assistance in
making such tests. The Contractor shall also, at his own expense, supply all drillings, test
pieces and samples of steel for carrying out independent chemical analysis and tensile
strength tests.
(d) Before the turnouts and components are submitted to inspection regarding surface, section
and finish, all parts shall be properly examined by the Contractor and all defective
components removed and placed in separate stack and the rest made available for
examination by the Inspection Agency.
(e) The Contractor shall, at his own expense, assemble at the place of manufacture all
manufactured turnouts for independent inspection.
(f) After final inspection every accepted part shall be clearly stamped with the Inspection.
Agency's stamp at each end in the presence of the Inspection Agency.
(g) All parts rejected due to their failure to comply with the requirements of this section shall,
whether rejected singly or by casts, be stamped with the letter " R" on both ends of the rail
and on the side of the head in the middle of the rail. The Inspection Agency's acceptance
stamp, if any, on such rails shall be defaced and the ends of the rail painted red. All rejected
parts shall be stacked separately until all accepted rails have been shipped.
3.2 The design of speed railway turnouts shall be according to design conditions of the State Railway of
Thailand ( SRT) or EN standard, which the main components of turnouts include high manganese
crossings, rail and stock rails produced can be used for the main line.
3.3 The manufacturers shall have proven work for the supplying turnouts in the Railways project in
Thailand in last 5 years.
3.4 The requirements of EN 13232 Part 1- 9, EN 13674 part 1,2, and 3 for rail manufacture, EN15689 for
the manganese crossings, drawings and inspection gauges, markings, appearance and finish, and
tolerances shall be satisfied.
3.5 Certificates confirming the test and check results shall be delivered to the Engineer. Any material
which does not fulfil the test requirements shall be rejected.
3.6 The work under this section shall conform to the applicable current editions of the EN codes and
specifications.
3.7 Tolerances
The tolerances of certain dimensions of switch rail shall be given in table 6 and 7 of EN 13674- 2. If
any tolerances do not specific below, it should comply with of EN13232-5, 13232-6, and 13232-9.
(a) Crossing:
• Length overall: +/- 6mm
• Toe length: +/- 3mm
• Heel length: +/- 3mm
• Heel spread: +/- 1.5mm
(b) Rails:
• Tongue rail length: +/- 4mm
• Planning of tongue rail: - 0mm, + 50mm
(c) Hole diameters:
• "Tight Fit": + 1.5mm, -0mm
• Cored holes: + 3.0mm,-0mm
• Holes in manganese steel castings: up to 8mm over bolt diameter
(d) Track gauge in:
• completed crossing: +/- 1.5mm
• guard rail clearance: +/- 3.0mm from specified
(e) Opening at tongue rail: +3.0mm, minimum opening 110.0mm.
(f) Minimum flangeway clearance: 50mm
4. Submittals
Submit the following documents for the Engineer's approval in accordance with SECTION 1- 4:
SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
(a) Drawings of each item in a turnout with detail design drawings, design calculations,
shop drawings, working drawing and layout plans with fastener insert layout for each concrete
bearer.
(b) Certificates of material compliance required by UIC and this specification.
(c) Test reports of chemical analysis, Brinell hardness and other tests required by UIC and this
specification.
(d) Manufacturing plan describing the processes for the manufacture of the various items which
comprise the turnouts. '
(e) Details of fastener system to be used, for the Engineer's review and consent. Letter of
Compliance from the Fastener Manufacturer that the components of the fastening system
proposed are suitable for the Application.
(f) Packaging, Storage and Shipping Plan detailing proposed method of packaging,
storing and shipping track components to be submitted no later than 60 days prior to the
proposed first shipment date.
(g) Installation and replacement procedures as part of PROJECT RECORDS.
(h) Final submittal which details clearly each item of the turnout as actually produced. To be
made within 30 days of the final delivery of the turnouts.
(i) Where the Manufacturer does not possess an independently reviewed and audited quality
control system, generally in accordance with the requirements of ISO 9000, engaged to
perform:
• Inspection of finished turnouts.
5. Drawings
5.1 Turnouts:-
(a) Principal dimensions shall conform to the dimensional requirements of 54E1 rails.
(b) The Contractor shall prepare detailed designs of turnouts ( switches, check rails, crossings, etc. )
and shall be based on the geometry shown in the Contract Drawings. The design drawings
shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of any shop work and shall be based on
these specifications. The turnout drawings shall show the following components:
(i) Switch, crossing and check rail assemblies.
(ii) All special rails, castings, running rails for a complete installation.
(iii) Rail baseplates, fasteners and accessories.
(iv) All track accessories, sub- assemblies and miscellaneous items required to make the
trackwork installation complete.
(v) Materials list.
(vi) The Contractor shall indicate in the drawings the recommended position for the Glued
Insulated Rail Joint in both curved turnout rails and details of the joints.
(vii) The Contractor shall indicate in the drawings the recommended position for the anti-
creep device.
(c) Rails shall be inclined at 1/40 except part of switch and base plate
5.2 Concrete Bearers:-
(a) The Contractor shall prepare detailed designs of the concrete bearers to suit the geometry
of turnout. The design and drawings shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of
any shop work and shall be based on these specifications.
(b) Bearers shall be designed to be at half angle (fan shape arrangement). Inserts shall preferably
be oriented on the centerline and rotated as necessary to suit the angle of the rail. The
position of inserts relative to the bearer centerline must be constant for locating the pre-
tensioning tendons. Bearers shall be rectangular concrete planks of not less than 265 x
205mm deep. Point machines shall be mounted on top of a galvanised steel frame fixed to
the bearers to keep the machine outside the loading gauge.
(c) Dimensions for the rail seat areas and fastener locations and inserts must comply with the
requirements of the fastener system. The following are the requirements taken from SECTION
8-3 - CONCRETE SLEEPERS AND BEARERS. The Contractor shall take these into consideration
in preparing his design:
(i) The concrete bearers must, as far as possible, have a prismatic constant section over
their length according to the turnout design. Areas shall be left clear of reinforcing and
tendons to permit installation of fastening inserts and S & T inserts.
(ii) The minimum distance between the end of the bearer and the axis of the nearest
anchorage insert shall be at least 130 mm.
(iii) The length of bearers range from 2. 00m to 4. 00m or the contract board approved by
the Engineer. The design shall provide graduated lengths of bearers. Sufficient length
and number of bearers shall be designed for turnouts such that interlacing of standard
sleepers within turnouts is avoided.
(d) Flatness
(i) Over the length of the bearer and for each rail seat, ( a length which covers the
anchorage inserts area of more than 50 mm) , there shall be no warped surface greater
than 0.5 mm in all directions.
(ii) The depth of concavity or convexity of the rail seat with respect to the average plane
of the rail seat shall not exceed 0.5 mm. Straightness of bearer shall be +/- 2 mm over
the length of the bearers.
(e) Tolerances for Positioning of the Anchorage Inserts

The maximum tolerance for the spacing between inserts:
 For one rail : +/-0.5mm
 For two rails of the same track: +/-1.0mm
 Rail one track and diverging track :+/-1.0mm
6. Packing, Delivery, Storage and Handling
6.1 Packing
(a) Immediately after completion and before bundling and crating, all metal components shall
be treated with a suitable inhibitor. Such inhibitor must be able to prevent corrosion for a
minimum of 18 months. All machined surfaces of switches and crossings shall be painted with
a reviewed metal priming paint.
(b) Switches: Each tongue rail and matched stock rail shall be steel banded together as one set.
Each set shall have a metal tag identifying the set No. , the hand of the crossing and the
crossing number.
(c) Crossings: Each crossing shall have a metal tag secured to the crossing identifying the hand of
the crossing, the crossing number, and the crossing set No.
(d) Long Components: Stretcher bars, throw rods, gauge plates, sole plates, and all insulated
parts etc. shall be crated. The crates shall be marked in paint with the hand of the crossing,
the crossing No, and the crossing set No.
(e) Small or Loose Components: Shall be packaged by component types and contained in larger
wooden crates. The crate shall be marked in paint with the hand of the crossing and the
crossing No.
(f) Packing List: Each crate or box shall have a packing list contained in a strong waterproof
packet secured to the inside of each crate.
6.2 Delivery
(a) Each turnout shall be delivered as a single unit with all small components boxed and
packaged to reduce the number of shipping items.
(b) Turnouts shall be delivered complete and undamaged, with all packages and rails clearly
indicating crossing number, hand and crossing set No.
6.3 Storage
(a) Turnout rails and crossings shall be stacked off the ground on timber bearers.
(b) Turnout components shall be segregated by hand of turnout, crossing number, and crossing set No.
(c) Packages shall be stored off the ground and under cover.
6.4 Handling
SINGLE POINT SLINGING OF SINGLE OR MULTIPLE RAILS IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED
Self actuating rail grip devices, capable of lifting up to 5 rails at a time, are preferred. Fabric or nylon
straps can be used for rail bundles. Rails shall always be lifted at two points using a spreader beam
or similar device.
7. Guarantee
7.1 The Contractor shall guarantee the turnouts against all defects attributable to faulty manufacture,
workmanship and quality of material requiring withdrawal from service before the end of the Defect
Liability Period.
7.2 Turnouts that fail in service before the expiration of the Defects Liability Period shall be replaced free
of charge. The cost of installing replacement turnouts during the Defects Liability Period shall be
borne by the Contractor. The defective turnouts withdrawn from service shall be handed over at site
to the Contractor for his disposal off railway property.
during which period, the Contractor shall inspect the turnouts, make his observations and carry out
examination jointly with the Engineer.
7.4 Patent Rights
The patent rights of the turnouts, other than the design drawings, shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor who will indemnify the Employer against any claim in this connection.
The Manufacturer shall hold the mould patterns for all cast components in joint ownership with SRT
to permit the future supply of replacement components.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Rail and Crossing Material
1.1 Rails
(a) Turnout rails shall be Head hardened rail according to EN 13674-1 Grade R350HT or R350LHT
which shall be head-hardened to hardness of not less than 350BHN. The heat treatment process
shall be an in-line process delivering the specified hardness to a minimum depth of 25 mm.
(b) Rails shall be free from internal defects and the turnout Manufacturer shall ultrasonically test
by a reviewed system appropriate to the grade of steel.
(c) Rail shall be cut accurately to length with square rail ends. Allowance shall be made to rail
lengths as necessary for Insulated Rail Joint end posts.
(d) Milling and machining shall be accurately performed leaving surfaces free from stress risers or
irregularities.
(e) Planning shall be true and all abutting surfaces shall fit accurately.
(f) Holes shall be accurately drilled using a template at the required angle to the rail and shall
be clean, free from burrs and surface irregularities. Holes shall be cleaned free from oil and
grease, reamed, lightly chamfered.
(g) Joints in the turnout shall be welded except those required to be fitted with glued insulated
joints, as instructed by the Engineer.
(h) Forging of switch-rail shall be done in accordance with EN 16273.
(i) Crossing ends (antenna) shall be fitted with short standard rails to permit welding to standard rails.
1.2 Steel in Crossings
(a) Crossing steel shall be in accordance with EN15689 or the steel crossing Manufacturer's
standard specification as approved by the Engineer, with a typical chemistry as given in Table
8.2-1:
Table 8.2-1: Typical Steel Analysis for Crossings

Steel Analysis ( wt %)
Si S P Ni Mo Cr Co Al
C (*) Mn (*)
(max) (max) (max) (max) (max) (max) (max) (max)
11.5/1
AMS # 0.95/1.3 0.65 0.03 0.05 1.75 0.75 0.5 0.3 0.045
4
(*) Mn content shall not be less than 10 times the carbon content
# AMS: austenitic manganese steel
(b) Mechanical properties of the steel shall be in accordance with EN15689 or the steel crossing
Manufacturer's standard specification as approved by the Engineer, with typical properties as
given in Table 8.2-2:
Table 8.2-2: Typical Properties of Crossing Steels
Steel Tensile 0.2% Proof Hardness Elongation%
Strength: Stress: MPa Brinell (min)
MPa
AMS 800 400 200(300) 40
(c) Castings shall substantially conform to the reviewed drawings and shall be free from injurious
defects.
(d) (300) is final hardness after explosion hardening not less than 300 BHN.
2. Materials in Components
2.1 Switch and check blocks and main washers shall be cast steel to the following composition.
Carbon Manganese Phosphorous Sulphur
0.37 – 0.44% 0.60 – 0.90% 0.040% max 0.040% max
2.2 Steel Forgings shall be to the appropriate UIC specification with a chemical composition such that
the chemical and physical properties of the grade are satisfied. Forgings shall conform to the sizes
and shapes shown in the reviewed drawings. Forgings shall be free of injurious imperfections.
2.3 Rolled Mild Steel shall be to the appropriate UIC specification with a chemical composition such that
the mechanical properties of the grade are satisfied. Steel shall be hot rolled as bars, plates and
sheets as necessary. Steel shall be hammered, pressed, cut or machined as required for fittings and
accessories.
Steel articles shall conform to the reviewed drawings. Completed articles shall be accurately finished
for the purpose intended, and shall be free from imperfections.
2.4 Baseplates
The Contractor shall provide cast baseplates only. Welded construction baseplates will not be
accepted. By baseplates it is meant all plates used in the turnout such as standard baseplates, sliding
plates, heel plates, embedding plate, check-rail supports or crossing plates.
2.5 Baseplates material (Cast Iron)
The material will be spheroidal graphite iron to EN 1563 respectively with the mechanical properties
as detailed below:
(a) Tensile Strength (minimum): 500 N/mm2

(b) 0.2% Proof Stress (minimum): 320 N/mm2
(c) Elongation (minimum): 7%
(d) Hardness Range: 170 - 245 Brinell
2.6 Rail Pads (For use with concrete bearers)
Pads shall be a Ethyl Vinyl Acetate ( EVA) , High Density Polyethylene ( HDPE) , or similar products
complying with UIC 864-5 or international standard coloured black with the following properties:
(a) Carbon content for ultra-violet stabilisation;
(b) Only virgin material shall be used with the exception that material from runners, sprues and
rejects may be ground and reused provided that it is thoroughly mixed with the virgin material
and the reground material does not exceed 25 percent of the total material by weight.
(c) The pads shall be of suitable thickness to provide adequate impact attenuation for the specific
conditions on SRT through a correct application of low attenuation and low damping design.
2.7 Fasteners shall be an elastic rail fastener system without exposed threaded component with a proven
record in turnout applications. The system shall provide lateral, longitudinal and vertical support to
rails against imposed forces and insulation against the shunting of track circuits. The system shall be
usable with both concrete and timber bearers. The fastener system shall be subject to separate
approval by the Engineer.
2.8 Bolts, Nuts and Washers
Materials shall be as described in SECTION 8- 8: OTHER TRACK MATERIALS. Materials shall include
proprietary high strength fasteners used in railway trackwork as reviewed by the Engineer.
2.9 Not used
2.10 Welding
Welding to be used in any reviewed welding process shall be to a recognised standard recommended
for the welding process used,
2.11 Slide Base plates
Mechanical roller, ball slide baseplates or equivalent system accepted by the Engineer shall be
installed on at least 3 bearers under the two switch rails of the turnout to minimise friction and to
avoid lubrication of switches.
2.12 Not used
1. Manufacturing and workmanship
1.1 All materials used shall be new, and all work shall be carried out by skilled operators. Components
shall be carefully machined, planed, milled as required in accordance with the required drawings to
ensure a good and accurate matching between parts. Rails cut to length shall be cold cut square
across the rail and be vertical to the tolerances given in SECTION 8-1: RAILS.
1.2 Rail for curves less than 500 meters radius shall be pre-curved
1.3 All turnout sub-assemblies shall be pre-assembled using jigs and be match marked.
2. Tongue Rails
2.1 Unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings the through track tongue rail shall be straight, and the
turnout tongue rail shall be curved and both shall be individually fitted against the straight or curved
stock rail. All fits shall be of the undercut type. No forging or welding is permitted in the flexible
length of the tongue rails.
2.2 All switches shall be operated by point machines supplied under the contract. with a minimum throw
of 110 mm and provides a throwing force of 4000N and a retaining force of 5800 N. Maximum thrust
required to operate the switch assembly shall not exceed 2400N.
2.3 Rails in the switch shall be designed for a shallow depth tongue rail to be continuous one piece
" flexible" design. Use 54E1A1, R350HT or R350LHT ( Switch Rail) Using a low height thick web
asymmetrical rail profile compatible with 54E1 section stock rails.
2.4 Not used
2.5 Not used
2.6 Minimum for head cut 50 mm.
2.7 Gap for check rail 39 mm.
3. Turnout Crossings
3.1 Turnout crossings use R350HT or R350LHT rail shall be fixed monoblock castings. Crossings shall be
capable of transmitting the full longitudinal thermal forces developed in adjacent Continuous Welded
Rail ( CWR) and shall have rail stubs ( antennae) to both wings, and vee rails of sufficient length to
allow the construction of other welded.
3.2 All cast crossings specified above, shall be provided with wheel risers, but shall not be flange bearing.
3.3 Rail stubs of crossings shall be easily welded by field crews using normal welding processes.
3.4 All cast crossings will be identified by markings in embossed letters which shall indicate the following:
• Crossing No.
• manufacturer's identification;
• month and year of manufacture;
• SRT
• crossing material type
• L or R
3.5 The check rails shall be manufactured using EN33C1 R320Cr checkrail section to EN13674- 3, and
assembled with special baseplates and brackets in such a way that both the running rail and the
check rails are independent and spring clips will fit both sides of rail foot of running rails. Gauging in
steps of 1 mm must be possible without unfastening the running rail. The head of the check rail shall
be about 15 mm above the running rail.
3.6 The wing rails shall be of a comparable design as reviewed by the Engineer.
3.7 Rail shall be inclined 1:40 except part of switch rail and base plates.
4. Turnout Rails
4.1 Closure rails shall be cut to the lengths indicated on the design drawings.
4.2 Position of bearers, baseplates and fasteners shall be as indicated on the design drawings prepared
by the Contractor.
5. Factory Assembly of Crossings
Not used.
6. Acceptance of Turnouts
Preliminary and First set assembly Inspection shall be carried out by third party approved by the
Engineer before shipment. Final Acceptance shall be carried out by the Engineer.
6.1 Rails
(a) Copies of the results of chemical analysis and mechanical tests, performed by the rail
manufacturer, of the casts of rails used in fabrication together with a report on any
Manufacturer's rejections shall be submitted to the third party at the time of inspection.
(b) All accepted rails shall have smooth surfaces and shall be uniform section throughout,
perfectly sound, straight and free from twists, lack of metal and all other harmful defects.
(c) All rail dimensions shall be within the tolerances specified in SECTION 8-1 RAILS.
(d) Rails exceeding permitted dimensional tolerances shall be rejected.
6.2 Components
(a) The review of the results of chemical analysis and mechanical tests, including welds on the
materials used in fabrication shall be submitted to the third party at the time of inspection.
(b) All components shall be inspected for compliance with the workmanship requirements of
this section.
(c) A report on the Supplier's rejections of supplied rail shall be submitted to the Engineer before
fabrication of turnouts commences
6.3 First Assembly Turnout
2. The first produced turnout shall be assembled for inspection by the third party and The
Engineer witness for conformance with the reviewed drawings and acceptance inspection the
first assembly at the manufacturer.
3. Dimensions to be checked will include but not be necessarily limited to all dimensions
shown on the reviewed setting out drawings.
• Off-sets
• Lead
• Curve ordinates
• Crossing angle
• Length of planning
• Length of individual rails
• Gauge at 2m intervals on both tangent and turnout track
• Check rail and wing rail clearances
• Stock rail and tongue rail clearances
• Minimum flangeway opening.
• Gauge widening
• Head cut
4. String lining of tangent track & String lining (versine) of tongue rail curve. .
5. Fit of planed and machined faces. When in the closed position with the stock rail, the switch
rail shall bear evenly against the stock rail throughout the length of the head planning and
against the distance blocks without external aid.
6. After acceptance of the first produced turnout, quantity production of turnouts can
commence.
7. Marking
7.1 After final inspection every accepted component shall be clearly stamped with the Inspection.
Agency's stamp in the presence of the third party.
7.2 All components rejected due to their failure to comply with the requirements of this section shall
be stamped with the letter "R" on both ends and in the middle. The components shall be defaced
and painted red. All rejected components shall be stacked separately until all accepted components
have been shipped.
8.3 CONCRETE SLEEPERS AND BEARERS

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
Design, submission of drawings for review, and provision of meter gauge monoblock prestressed
concrete sleepers for 54E1 rail sections carrying a 20 tonne static axle loading with a design speed
of 160 kph. Design, submission of drawings for review, and provision of concrete bearers for 1 in 16
standard SRT turnouts of EN 54E1 rail, carrying a 20 tonne static axle loading with a design speed of
160 km/h for through direction and 60 km/h for divergent direction. Design, submission of drawings
for review, and provision of concrete bearers for 1 in 12 standard SRT turnouts of EN 54E1 rail,
carrying a 20 tonne static axle loading with a design speed of 160 km/h for through direction and 40
km/ h for divergent direction. Design, submission of drawings for review, and provision of concrete
bearers for 1 in 10 standard SRT turnouts of EN 54E1 rail, carrying a 20 tonne static axle loading with
a design speed of 160 km/ h for through direction and 35 km/ h for divergent direction. Design and
submission of drawings for approval. Manufacture in established precast concrete factories or by the
Contractor establishing his own production facilities at site.
Work Includes: Design in compliance with the design and requirements all type of the turnouts;
Submission of drawings for review; Mould manufacture; Material inspection; Quality Control; Pre-
production and production testing; Manufacture casting-in of inserts; Fixing of baseplates in turnout
bearers; Testing of assembled sleepers and bearers.
2. Definitions
"Baseplates" - Rail support members that provide a mounting for the fastener system used.
" Fastener" - The device fastening the rail to the sleeper, bearer or baseplate. It shall meet the
requirements of SECTION 8-5: RAIL FASTENING SYSTEM
" Bearers" - Transverse components of the track system which supports the rails in switches and
crossings.
"Insert" - Male or female insert for attaching the rail fasteners or baseplates. It shall be cast in the
sleeper or bearer at the time of manufacture.
" Insert ( S & T) " - Male or female inserts cast into sleepers and bearers at the time of manufacture
for attachment of signalling equipment.
"Mono-block sleeper" - Sleeper comprising only one pre-stressed concrete beam controlling track
gauge and transmitting rail loads to the ballast
"Pre-stressing" - Terms related to pre-stressing herein will apply to pre-tensioning and post-tensioning.
"Rail seat area" - Flat surface of a sleeper to receive the rail base and pad.
3.1 In addition to the requirements of SECTION 1- 10: QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING LABORATORY
the Contractor shall maintain adequate records in accordance requirements of his quality assurance
programme. These records will provide objective evidence of compliance with the requirements of
the contract, and as required by this Specification.
3.2 The Manufacturer is expected to operate an independently approved and audited quality control
system, in accordance with the requirements of ISO 9001. Where the Manufacturer cannot produce
such independent certification the following requirements shall apply:
(a) The Manufacturer shall submit the name of an independent Inspection Testing Agency's to
the Engineer for approval prior to the commencement of manufacture of the sleeper and
bearers.
(b) The Contractor shall arrange all facilities for the tests including supply of concrete sleepers
and bearers required for testing and re-testing, sampling of materials, labour, machines, tools,
gauges, apparatus, forms of report and other appliances which may be necessary or required
by the Inspection Agency for carrying out any or all of the examinations and tests mentioned
in this specification.
(c) The Contractor shall render all reasonable assistance to the Inspection Agency for inspection
of the tests and bear all the costs for tests and inspection.
(d) All pressure gauges, load gauges, measuring gauges of all testing machines and dimensioning
devices shall be examined and calibrated regularly, as directed by the Engineer, by an
independent agency. The Supplier shall provide the Inspection Agency with reasonable access
to observe manufacturing process, witness testing and to inspect the finished product.
(e) Before the products are submitted to inspection regarding surface, section and finish, all
sleepers and bearers shall be properly examined by the Manufacturer's inspectors and all
defective sleepers and bearers shall be removed and placed in a separate stack and the rest
stacked for examination by the Inspection Agency.
3.3 Materials shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of the specified tests.
In all cases the latest issue of the relevant specifications shall be used.
TIS Thai Industrial Standard
JIS Japanese Industrial Standard
BS British Standards and Codes of Practice
ACI American Concrete Institues
ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
SRT State Railway of Thailand
AREMA American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association
3.4 Manufacturers or Contractors who intend to produce concrete sleepers and bearers for this project
other than those in current use by SRT are required to provide design and all tests as specified in this
section and SECTION 8.6: TESTING OF ASSEMBLED CONCRETE SLEEPERS.
4. Sleeper and Bearer Design
4.1 The sleepers and bearers shall be designed to allow the passage of equivalent 20 tone static axle
loads at 160kph using EN 54E1.
The design shall be based on AREMA Chapter 30 Concrete Ties.
4.2 The final design shall clearly define value for:

(a) Sleeper railseat positive bending moment and test load.
(b) Sleeper railseat negative bending moment and test load.
(c) Sleeper railseat centre positive bending moment and test load.
(d) Sleeper railseat centre negative bending moment and test load.
5. Tolerances
Dimension for the railseat areas and fastener locations and inserts shall comply with the requirements
of the fastener system.
6. Concrete Bearers
(1) The concrete bearers must, as far as possible, have a prismatic constant section over their
length according to the turnout design. Areas shall be left clear of reinforcing and tendons to
permit installation of fastening inserts and S & T inserts including those for fixing points
machines.
(2) The minimum distance between the end of the bearer and the axis of the nearest anchorage
insert shall be at least 130mm.
(3) The length of bearers range from 2.00m to approx. 4.00m. The design shall provide graduated
Length of bearers.
(4) Over the length of the bearer and for each railseat, ( a length which covers the anchorage
inserts area of more than 50mm), there shall be no warped surface greater than 0.5mm in all
directions.
(5) The depth of concavity or convexity of the rail seat with respect to the average plane of the
rail seat shall not exceed 0.5mm.
(6) Bearers shall be designed such that curvature of the bearers shall not be induced by prestress.
(7) Tolerances for Positioning of the Anchorage Inserts. The maximum tolerances for the spacing
between inserts.
 for one rail: +/-0.5 mm
 for two rails of the same track: +/-1 mm
 rail one track and a diverging track: +/-1 mm
7. Submittals
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in accordance with SECTION 1- 4: SUBMITTALS AND
SUBSTITUTIONS for approval the following:
(a) The design of the concrete bearers which shall become the property of SRT, who shall take
possession of the bearer moulds on completion of the contract.
The Contractor shall submit description of sleeper and bearers which provided the method of
manufacturing, including, but not limited to:
• the design and the positioning of the wires and bars;
• the design calculations;
• drawings of each size with detail design drawings, shop drawings, working drawings and
layout plans complete with fastener and the layout.
• the method of securing the reinforcing and the inserts;
• insert material composition and record of use;
• a description of the concrete mixing, transporting, placing, vibrating, and curing

procedures and apparatus;
• pre-stressing procedures;
• the de-moulding and curing procedure;
• transport and storage methods and equipment;
• and such other information as is pertinent to the process.
(b) A description of a programme of the methods and procedures to be used for control of the
quality of the production including, but not limited to, the methods to be used for executing
all the verifications and test required herein.
(c) Design data and testing reports of the trial proportions and the proposed mixture to be
employed for the work (this shall give ample time for review prior to pre-production stage for
the concrete bearers).
The data sheet shall contain at least:
• the nature, the origin and the characteristics of aggregates;
• the type, brand name and origin, and the fineness of the cement;
• mix proportions for 1 m3 of mix;
• water/cement ratio;
• the nature and the quantity of admixtures;
• vibration (method, duration, frequency, amplitude);
• compressive strength of concrete at 7 days and 28 days;
• tensile strength of concrete at 7 days and 28 days;
• water absorption by the concrete;
The Contractor shall demonstrate by certification or test that the concrete will not be subject
to reactive aggregates.
(d) Details of the precasting yard layout, stacking yard and curing methods used in casting beds
and stacking yard.
(e) Handling, lifting and palletting arrangements for sleepers and bearers at plant and on site.
(f) Copies of all material and production test results and equipment calibration certificates.
8.1 Delivery
(a) The sleepers and bearers completely cured and accepted by SRT at the manufacturer's stacking
yard will be handled and loaded onto railway wagons or road lorries in transverse layers with
railseat up. Each layer including the bottom layer is to be supported by two wooden strips
inserted on the railseats in such a manner to avoid damage to the concrete sleepers and bearers
and to the rail fastener shoulders, and shall be loaded as nearly as possible on the middle part
of the railway wagon or road lorry.
(b) The loading of the concrete sleepers and bearers shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
who shall take all necessary precautions so as to avoid any damage to the sleepers and bearers
and the rail fastener shoulders in transit. The sleepers and bearers shall be properly secured by
appropriate means against movement and displacement. The Contractor shall be responsible
to replace free of cost all the sleepers and bearers which are found damaged in transit when
such damage is attributable to defective loading and/or improper securing.
8.2 Storage
(a) Sleepers and bearers shall be stored on a stable, levelled and compacted formation.
(b) Sleepers and bearers shall be raised off the ground on thick timber bearers placed so that
they are under the line of the railseat of the bottom layer of sleepers or bearers.
(c) Wooden strips shall be inserted between each layer of sleepers or bearers on top of railseats.
(d) Sleeper stacking shall not exceed 15 layers.
8.3 Handling
Handling and loading shall be performed by means of the same devices employed for unloading of
the concrete sleepers and bearers to the stacking yard. The number of concrete sleepers or bearers
loaded on each wagon shall be based on the permissible axle load of the vehicle, and the
Contractor's intended method of installing the sleepers.
9. Guarantee
9.1 The contractor shall guarantee the concrete sleepers and bearers against all defects attributable to
faulty manufacture, workmanship and quality of material requiring withdrawal from service until the
end of the DLP. The record of concrete sleeper replacement of the SRT shall be accepted by the
Contractor in this connection.
9.2 The Contractor shall guarantee the concrete sleepers against all defects attributable to faulty
installation workmanship requiring withdrawal from service until one year after the end of the Defects
Liability Period. The record of concrete sleeper replacement of the SRT shall be accepted by the
Contractor in this connection Warrantee Period. Bearers shall be subject to a 60 months warranty period.
during which period, the Contractor shall inspect the concrete sleepers and bearers, make his
observations and carry out examination jointly with the SRT's representative.
9.4 The patent rights of the sleeper and bearer designs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor who
will guarantee the Employer against any claim in this connection.
PART II PRODUCTS
1. General
1.1 Materials and workmanship shall be as described herein and in accordance with the Engineer's
instructions, and shall be subjected from time to time to the tests as described herein and as the
Engineer may direct on Site or at any approved testing laboratory.
1.2 Only new materials shall be incorporated in the work, and shall satisfy the properties to the specified
requirements. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer samples and test results relating to
materials proposed for the work.
1.3 Materials employed for the work shall correspond to the approved samples and other data.
2. Storage of Materials
2.1 Handling and Storage
All materials shall be handled and stored in a manner to ensure the preservation of their quality
and fitness for the work. Stored materials, even though approved before storage, may be inspected
prior to their use in the work, and they shall meet the requirements of the specification at the time
it is proposed to use them, and should be located so as to facilitate their prompt inspection.
2.2 Cement
Shall be stored covered and off the ground or in an elevated silo and shall be kept completely dry
at all times.
2.3 Steel
Pre- stressing, reinforcing, and miscellaneous steel shall be stored under cover and off the ground
or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or grease, and in position to prevent accumulations
of standing water and to minimise rusting.
2.4 Aggregates
Fine and coarse aggregates shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent segregation. Special
care shall be taken that no earth or foreign material becomes mixed therewith.
3. Materials
3.1 Cement
(a) Shall be an ordinary Portland Cement in compliance with TIS 15 check free from injurious
water, soluble salts or alkalis.
(b) The characteristics of the cement shall be verified by the cement manufacturer which
supplies the Contractor by means of certificate of conformity to the standard at each
delivery.
(c) The characteristics of the cement shall be verified by an independent testing agency, at the
Contractor's expense, who shall provide a certificate thereof to the Contractor and to the
Engineer.
3.2 Fine Aggregates
(a) Fine aggregate shall consist of either natural sand or manufactured sand, or a combination
of both, and shall comprise clean, hard and durable particles.
(b) If the fine aggregate is a combination of separately processed and sized particles from the
same or different sources, or a combination of natural and manufactured sands, the different
components shall be batched separately or blended prior to delivery to the batching plant
under conditions approved.
(c) Particles of the fine aggregate shall be spherical or cubical in shape.
(d) Grading of the fine aggregate as delivered to the mixing plant shall conform to the
requirements of Table 8.3-1.
Table 8.3-1: Grading of Fine Aggregate

Sieve Designation Cumulative Percentage passing by
(ASTM) weight
3/8" (3/8) 100

3/16" (No. 4) 95-100
No. 7 (No. 8) 80-100
No. 14 (No. 16) 45-80
No. 25 (No. 30) 25-60
No. 52 (No. 50) 10-30
No. 100 (No. 100) 2-10
(e) Fineness Modulus: 2.30 - 3.10
(f) The amount of deleterious substances shall not exceed the limits given in Table 8.3-2.
Table 8.3-2: Limits of Deleterious Substances in Fine Aggregates

Deleterious Substance Percentage by weight
Clay Lumps 1.0
Material Finer than No. 200
4.0
Sieve
Organic Materials Plate 2 maximum
Soundness 15% max loss, magnesium sulphate 10% max
loss, sodium sulphate subjected to 5 cycles
3.3 Coarse Aggregates

(a) Coarse aggregate shall consist of well- graded crushed stone, washed gravel, crushed gravel,
or other approved inert materials of similar characteristics, or combinations thereof, having
clean, hard, strong, durable pieces, and free from adherent coatings. Where necessary, dust
and other coatings shall be removed from the coarse aggregate by adequate washing.
(b) Particles of the coarse aggregate shall generally be spherical or cubical in shape. The
maximum nominal size of the coarse aggregate shall be 3/4". The coarse aggregate shall be
well graded, between the limits specified, and shall conform to the requirements of Table
8.3-3.
Table 8.3-3: Grading of Coarse Aggregate

Sieve Designation Cumulative Percentage Passing by Weight 1/2"
1” (1”) 100 -
3/4" (3/4”) 95 – 100 100
1/2” (1/2”) - 90 - 100
3/8" (3/8”) 20 – 55 40 - 70
3/16" (No.4) 0 – 10* 0 – 15*
NOTE: * Not more than 5 percent shall pass a ASTM No. 8 sieve.
(c) The amount of deleterious substances shall not exceed the limits given in Table 8.3-4:
Table 8.3-4: Limits of Deleterious Substances in Coarse Aggregates
Deleterious Substance Percentage by weight
Clay Lumps 0.25
Material Finer than No. 200 Sieve 1.0
(d) Other requirements

When subjected to 5 cycles of soundness test, the loss in weight shall not exceed 12 percent
when sodium sulphate is used or 18 percent when magnesium sulphate is used.
When subjected to Los Angeles abrasion test, percentage of wear shall not be more than 25
percent.
3.4 Pre-stressing Tendons check
(a) Tendons shall be stress relieved cold drawn crimped wire conforming to BS 2691: 1969, and
BS 5896:1980 or stress relieved cold drawn deformed wire to ASTM A864.
(b) Tendons may be laid singly or in strands.
(c) Wires conforming to BS 2691: 1969, and BS 5896: 1980 shall have the particular properties as
described herein.
(d) The wire shall be cold drawn from plain carbon steel and shall comply with the following
chemical composition:
(e) When 4mm diameter wire is employed, mechanical properties of the wire shall comply with
the following requirements:
Specified characteristic strength: 1720MN/m2
Minimum 0.2% proof stress : 1460MN/m2
Reverse bend data:
Min. No. of bends : 3
Radius of jaws 12.5 mm
Max. percent relaxation after 1000 hours from:
70% Initial stress : 8%
80% Initial stress : 12%
(f) Configuration of the wire is dependent on the manufacturer's standard. If there is no specific
national standard, the following figures shall be applied for 4 mm dia. wire:
Diameter 4mm +/- 0.05mm
Total wave height 0.40mm to 0.80mm
Pitch 20mm to 40mm
Table 8.3-5: Prestressing Wire
Element Minimum Maximum
Carbon 0.60 0.90
Silicon 0.10 0.35
Manganese 0.50 0.90
Sulphur - 0.05
Phosphorous - 0.05
3.5 Water
Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acid, alkali, organic matter, and other
deleterious substance and conform to AREMA Chapter 8 Section 1.4.
3.6 Admixtures
(a) Concrete admixtures shall be non-harmful non-chloride type.
(b) The Contractor shall present technical data of the admixtures to the Engineer for review at
the time of mix design.
3.7 Inserts
Shall be either metal rail fastener shoulders or other types conforming to the requirements of
SECTION 8-5: RAIL FASTENING SYSTEM.
4. Concrete
4.1 General
Concrete shall comprise Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water and admixture (if
required) , and shall be ready mixed at the site by means of an appropriate batching and mixing
plant.
4.2 Mix Design
Shall be designed in accordance with American Concrete Institute (ACI).
Work ability of the mixture shall be such that it can be readily worked into the corners and angles
of the moulds, around the prestressing tendons, and fastening inserts without permitting materials
to segregate or free water to collect on the surface.
4.3 Properties of Concrete
The properties of the concrete from which sleepers and bearers are made shall conform to the
following requirements:
(a) The compressive strength shall be at least 60N/mm2 at 28 days. (Works cube strength of 150
x 150 x 150mm sample).
(b) The compressive strength shall be at least 42N/mm2 at transfer (Works cube strength of 150
x 150 x 150mm sample).
(c) The flexural bending tensile strength or modulus of rupture shall be at least 6. 2N/ mm2 or fr
= 0. 62√f'c ( ACI Code) at 28 days. ( Works beam strength of 150 x 150 x 750mm sample,
loaded at a third points).
5. Manufacture of Sleepers and Bearers
5.1 General
(a) Manufacture includes the provision of materials, labour, machinery and other necessary
equipment to produce high quality pre-stressed concrete sleepers and bearers manufactured
in accordance with the structural requirements and the geometric properties shown in the
Drawings.
(b) The concrete sleepers and bearers shall be manufactured by means of long line system, by
short line system, or by carousal system.
(c) The production process shall correspond to the delivery programme of the Contractor.
5.2 Moulds
(a) Moulds shall be of high quality steel and shall be of rigid construction to prevent distortion
and so arranged as to provide bearing surfaces for the rail seat.
(b) The moulds shall not allow any leakage of cement grout in casting.
(c) Moulds shall be designed so that the rail seats of sleepers are cast against the mould and in
an upside- down position to ensure that the rail seats are smooth and even, and within
tolerances specified in the Drawings.
(d) Moulds for concrete bearers shall be designed so that the top surface is absolutely flat.
Bearers shall be cast on their side to ensure that the tendons are at their correct positions
relative to the top and bottom surfaces.
(e) Form oil shall be thoroughly applied on inside surfaces of the moulds prior to casting of
concrete. Special care shall be taken not to allow application of the oil on surfaces of tendons
or the fastening inserts.
5.3 Concrete Mixing
(a) Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed by means of a concrete batching and mixing machine
using a pan- mixer type. The machine shall be adequate in capacity to maintain continuous
feeding of concrete for the required daily production.
(b) Provision shall be made for introducing cement, aggregates water and admixture into the
mixer in the proper quantities.
(c) All materials shall be measured by weight only. The measuring scales shall be maintained in
a clean and serviceable condition and checked for accuracy; required adjustments shall be
made before further use.
(d) Mixing time shall be sufficient and not in excess, depending on characteristics of mixer, type
of aggregates, and water/ cement ratio. Particular study on the mixing time shall be carried
out prior to commencement of the pre-production.
(e) The mix design shall be in accordance with the requirements as stated herein; and the
standard deviation shall be in accordance with the limit specified.
5.4 Inserts
(a) The inserts shall be placed in moulds with particular care and shall be placed accurately
according to the dimensions and tolerances specified in the approved design.
(b) The inserts shall be fixed in position in such a way that they are firmly held and will not
become loose.
6. Concrete Casting
6.1 The layout of the casting yard and the casting and handling plant used shall be approved by the
Engineer.
6.2 Anchorage inserts in bearers must be cast in place. Fastening of turnout inserts in drilled holes will
not be accepted.
6.3 The tensioning of tendons shall be as approved. Differences in the theoretical position and actual
position of tendons in the mould shall be, unless otherwise approved, limited to a half of the
diameter of the wire.
6.4 Placing Concrete
This operation is to ensure a good compaction of concrete, a smooth upper surface to the sleepers
or bearers, and a well completed but rough lower surface to give a good friction between the
concrete sleepers and bearers and ballast in track.
The concrete mix shall conform to the approved mix. The tolerance on actual mix quantities shall
not exceed:
 cement: ± 2%
 aggregates: ± 3% for each category of aggregates
± 2% for all the aggregates
 water: ± 2% on the total quantity
 admixtures: ± 2%
Concrete shall be transported in such a manner that there shall be no segregation, or setting, or
curing taking place before placing. There shall be no evaporation or intrusion of other materials
during transport.
Concrete shall be vibrated after placing in the moulds. Vibration ( duration, frequency, amplitude)
shall conform to the approved process.
6.5 The freshly cast concrete sleepers and bearers shall be protected during the initial setting stage
against atmospheric factors by covering with a plastic sheet.
6.6 The initial curing of the concrete sleepers and bearers may employ steam at atmospheric pressure
till transfer of pre-stress.
6.7 The concrete sleepers and bearers shall not be subjected to steam curing for at least two hours after
casting. The steam shall be distributed by an approved process.
The amount of steam shall be regulated to maintain a temperature rise of not more than 15°C during
the first hour and at a rate of not higher than 10°C per hour until it reaches 60°C maximum. The
maximum temperature shall not be held for longer than 6 hours.
The curing temperature and period shall be carefully controlled. The temperature of concrete during
curing shall be registered at pre- production testing and at least 4 times per day. The chart of the
recorded temperatures shall be made available to the Engineer.
6.8. Demoulding
At the end of the curing cycle, the compressive strength shall be determined on three samples,
which shall have undergone the same curing cycle as the sleepers and bearers. Demoulding shall
not proceed unless the concrete sleepers and bearers have reached the specified minimum
requirement of 35N/sq. mm compressive strength.
The de- moulding can be immediate or deferred. It shall be done with caution, without degrading
the integrity of the concrete. Separation of the elements of the anchorage from the mould shall be
done carefully in order to avoid any damage to the concrete. After de-moulding the concrete must
be intact and well formed in all respects, polishing or smoothing of the demoulded bearer is not
permitted.
Sleepers and bearers shall be taken to the outside stacking area station where the sleepers and
bearers shall be turned right side up, and the ends of the wires clean cut to a maximum of 3. 0mm
from the surface of the concrete sleepers and bearers; and one layer of anti-corrosive paint applied.
After de- tensioning, the sleepers and bearers shall be kept wet for a period of not less than 7 days
either by submerging in water tanks or by mechanical water spraying arrangements to ensure full
humidity conditions.
After the end of the curing period the sleepers and bearers may be piled to a maximum of 15 tiers
high, each tier separated from the preceding by wooden spacers. The Contractor shall maintain a
drawing of the storage area which indicates the location of each batch.
6.9 Marking
Marking shall be made on top of each concrete sleeper and bearer between ends and railseats using
indented letters as shown in the Drawings. Markings shall also identify if a bearer is left or right
handed and its position relative to the switch end of the turnout.
Sleepers: SRT; EN 54E1, No. of Mould; year of manufacture, Manufacturers Mark.
Bearers: SRT; EN 54E1, L-left or R-right, Bearer No. of set, year of manufacture, Manufacturer's Mark.
Sleepers and Bearers with indelible paint: Day and month of manufacture.
7. Finish of Sleepers and Bearers
7.1 Visual inspection of the finished concrete sleepers and bearers shall be undertaken to ensure that
all concrete sleepers and bearers are free from the surface defects including hair cracks.
7.2 The surfaces of the concrete sleepers and bearers in contact with the steel moulds shall be smooth
and regular in shape. They shall, as far as possible, be free from pores. Water retaining pockets or
honey-combing formations shall not be admissible.
7.3 No touch up or finishing by cement grout etc. shall be permitted after the sleepers and bearers are
demoulded except that possible recesses in the end surfaces shall be plugged with cement mortar.
PART III EXECUTION

1. Quality Control
1.1 General
(a) The Contractor shall employ a competent and qualified person to be responsible for all
stages of the production including testing of materials and concrete, maintenance and
calibration of all measuring instruments and quality control of the products in accordance
with all requirements specified under the Contract.
(b) He shall also maintain records regarding quantities accepted and rejected, proportions and
sources of supply of aggregates, prestressing force actually applied, actual measurement of
elongation of the prestressing wires, nature and duration of curing. These records shall be
kept available at all times.
(c) The name of the competent person shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before
commencing manufacture.
1.2 Testing Laboratory
(a) The Contractor shall establish a testing laboratory with suitably trained staff, fully equipped
with all necessary testing apparatus, templates and other measuring instruments capable of
performing normal tests on concrete, cement, aggregates, and static loading test on finished
concrete sleepers and bearers.
(b) The manufacturer's plant laboratory may be utilised, if approved by the Engineer.
(c) In case the Contractor fails to perform the prescribed tests, the Engineer shall be entitled to
conduct the tests elsewhere at the Contractor's expense, and the certificates showing the
results of such tests shall be accepted by the Contractor.
1.3 Material Testing
The quality of materials used in the manufacture of concrete sleepers and bearers shall be
determined by testing.
(a) Cement: Shall be tested on chemical and mechanical properties in accordance with the methods
described in TIS 15 or ASTM C150.
(i) Fineness
(ii) Chemical composition
(iii) Strength
(iv) Setting time
(v) Soundness
(b) Fine Aggregate: The tests shall include and shall be in accordance with the standards specified as
following:-
(i) Size analysis ASTM C 136-76
(ii) Fineness Modulus ASTM C 125-58
(iii) Clay lumps ASTM C 142-78
(iv) Material finer than
No. 200 sieve ASTM C 117-76
(v) Organic impurities ASTM C 40-73
(vi) Soundness ASTM C 88/88M
(vii) Sulphate content using
barium chloride solution : standard method
(C) Coarse Aggregate: The tests shall include and shall be in accordance with the standards specified
as follows:-
(i) Size analysis ASTM C 136-76
(ii) Clay lumps ASTM C 142-78
(iii) Material finer than
No. 200 sieve ASTM C 117-76
(iv) Soundness ASTM C 88/88M
(v) Resistance to Abrasion : ASTM C 131-76
(d) Water: Water for concrete mixing shall be tested in accordance with the following:-
(i) Quality AREMA Chapter 8
(ii) Sulphate content Titration Method
(e) Prestressing steel: The tests to be performed for mechanical and chemical properties are:
(i) Tensile strength and bend tests.
(ii) Relaxation tests according to code or standard of practice adopted in the country of
the manufacturer.
(iii) Chemical analysis according to code or standard of practice adopted in the country of
the manufacturer.
Note: The proposed code or standard of practice mentioned in items (ii) and (iii) shall be
submitted at the same time as the results of the tests.
(f) Concrete: The tests shall be undertaken to determine and to control consistency and strength of
concrete in accordance with the following standards:-
(i) Slump ASTM C 39
(ii) Compressive strength : ASTM C 39
(iii) Beam bending tensile strength: ASTM C 78/78M
1.4 Testing Schedules for Materials and Concrete
(a) Cement
Chemical and mechanical properties
Certificate of Inspection from the Manufacturer
• at pre-production
• when source is changed
(b) Fine Aggregate
(i) size analysis
• every seven day period
(ii) fineness modulus
(iii) clay lumps
(iv) material finer than No. 200 sieve
(v) organic impurities
(vi) soundness
• every six month period
(vii) Sulphate content
(c) Coarse Aggregate
(i) size analysis
• every seven day period
(ii) clay lumps
(iii) material finer than No. 200 sieve
(iv) soundness
(v) resistance to abrasion
• every six month period

(d) Water
(i) quality
(ii) sulphate content
(e) Prestressing Steel
(i) tensile strength
(ii) relaxation
(iii) chemical analysis
(iv) Certificate of inspection from the manufacturer
• every consignment
(f) Concrete
(i) slump
• every day of production
(ii) Compressive strength
• minimum of three sets of test cylinders each set consisting of three cylinders for
tests per batch of 240 to 500 concrete sleepers.
• at transfer of pre-stress
• at 7 days age of concrete
• at 28 days age of concrete
• at other ages of concrete as directed by the Engineer
2. Design Testing of Finished Sleepers and Bearers
2.1 Before any testing of sleepers and bearers begins the Contractor shall submit test data of the
following to the Engineer:
• Cement and aggregate certification and tests,
• Compressive strength of concrete before de-moulding,
• Absorption test,
• Compressive strength of concrete,
• Tension test,
• Abrasion test.
• Ten concrete sleepers and ten concrete bearers shall be selected and from these the following
tests will be performed.
The sleepers or bearers shall first be checked for dimensional tolerances and conditions and if the
Engineer is satisfied that all the sleepers or bearers are within the specified tolerances and the
standard of finish and condition of the sleepers or bearers are also satisfactory, then the following
tests will be performed.
If the Engineer is not satisfied that all the sleepers or bearers are within the specified tolerances
and the standard of finish and condition of the sleepers or bearers are to a satisfactory standard
the Contractor shall withdraw the sample sleepers or bearers and submit to the Engineer his
proposals to improve the quality of dimensions and condition to a satisfactory standard.
If the Contractor cannot propose an appropriate improvement in the production procedure to

enable an immediate and sufficient improvement of the quality of the concrete sleepers or bearers,
in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor shall employ another Manufacturer.
2.2 Tests for sleepers or bearers:
All tests shall be performed by Testing Agency in Thailand.
• Rail seat positive and negative moment tests,
• Centre positive and negative moment test,
• Rail seat repeated load test,
• Bond development or anchorage test
(a) One concrete sleeper shall be subjected to static loading tests for positive cracking bending
moment at both rail seats.
(b) One concrete sleeper shall be subjected to static loading tests for negative cracking bending
moment at both rail seats.
(c) Two concrete sleepers and two bearers shall be subjected to static loading tests at midspan
(one for positive and another for negative cracking moment respectively)
(d) Two concrete sleepers and two bearers shall be subjected to repeated loading tests at one
railseat of each.
(e) Two concrete sleepers and two bearers shall be subjected to bond development tests of
railseats.
2.3 Moment Tests:
(a) Static loading tests shall be performed to verify the resistance of the concrete sleepers and
bearers against tension cracks according to applications of:
• Positive cracking bending moment at rail seat
• Negative cracking bending moment at rail seat
• Negative cracking bending moment at midspan
• Positive cracking bending moment at midspan
(b) Loading conditions and testing apparatus shall be set up in a manner similar to Figures 30-4-7
to 30-4-10 for concrete sleeper and 30-2-1 to 30-2-3 for concrete bearers inclusive of Section
30 of the AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering.
When tested in accordance with AREMA ( railseat vertical load test, center negative bending
moment test and positive bending moment test) using the loads give in Table as below :
Load Defnitions
Or
Test Methods Decriptions Pass Criteria
AREMA Equivalent
as SRT
Concrete Sleeper
AREMA , Chapter 30, Part 4, Railseat Negative 2Mcr No Structural
P1 = 168 kN
Clause 4.9.1.4, Fig. 30-4-7 Bending (300-75) Cracking at P1
AREMA , Chapter 30, Part 4, Railseat Positive 2Mcr No Structural
P2 = 109 kN
AREMA , Chapter 30, Part 4, Center Negative 2Mcr No Structural
P3 = 85kN
P4 = 81kN
Concrete Bearers for Turnout
AREMA , Chapter 30, Part 4, Railseat Negative 2Mcr No Structural
P1 = n/a
AREMA , Chapter 30, Part 4, Railseat Positive 2Mcr No Structural
P2 = n/a
P3 = n/a
P4 = n/a
Notes ;
Pe
1) Mcr = Sx (fr + ) + Pe e in N-mm
Ac
2) fr = 0.62√f'c in N/mm2
3) Mcr = The cracking moments is the moment that when exceeded causes concrete to begin cracking
due to flexural tensile stressed occurs.
4) fr = The flexural tensile strength of concrete or Modulus of Rupture of Concrete.
5) Sx = Section modulus of uncracked section, referred to extreme fibre at which flexural cracking
occurs. mm2.
6) Pe = Effective prestressing force after losses. (N)
7) Ac = Gross area of the concrete bearers (mm2)
8) e = Distance between the neutral axis of the concrete bearers and the center of gravity of the
prestressing steel (mm.)
2.4 Rail Seat Repeated Load Test
The test sleeper shall be loaded at the rail seat as for the positive moment test until the concrete
cracks from the bottom of the bearer to the lowest level of reinforcement. The static load shall be
removed, 6mm plywood packs fitted between the sleeper, the load and the supports, and the
bearer shall then be subjected to 3 million cycles of uniformly varying vertical loading within the
range 17kN to 110% of the design rail seat load at a rate not exceeding 10Hz.
The test concrete sleeper is considered satisfactory if the sleeper can support a load equal to 110%
of the design rail seat load.
2.5 Bond Development, Tendon Anchorage, and Ultimate Loading Test.

• The test is to determine the susceptibility of the concrete sleeper against slippage of
prestressing tendons under ultimate loading at the railseat.
• The concrete sleeper shall be supported and loaded in the same manner as for the test on
loading at the rail seat.
• Extensometers of 1/ 10,000 accuracy shall be attached to the two outer bottom prestressing
wires, and zero reading set before applying load.
• A load increasing at a rate not greater than 20kN per minute shall be applied until the load
equals 150% of the design rail seat load.
• If there is no more than 0.025mm wire slippage, the requirements of this test shall be met.
• For post tensioned sleepers and bearers the loading will be as above but the full load shall
be held for 5 minutes.
• The load shall then be increased until ultimate failure occurs and the maximum load obtained
shall be recorded as a reference.
• The mode of failure of each sleeper or bearer shall be recorded.
After having passed all the tests described above the sleepers and bearers shall be loaded till failure
for reference purposes.
3. Failure of Design Sleepers and Bearers
3.1 In case any of the concrete sleepers or bearers fail to pass the above tests, two further batches each
of ten concrete sleepers and ten bearers shall be selected and tested. If both batches pass the tests,
the design is satisfactory. The concrete sleepers or bearers remaining after the successful tests will
be considered as a part of the production.
3.2 In the event that the second design tests do not pass and the Contractor cannot propose an
appropriate modification in the design and/or the production procedure to enable an immediate and
sufficient improvement of the quality of the concrete bearers, as agreed by the opinion of the
Engineer, the Contractor shall employ another Manufacturer.
4. Pre-production Testing of Assembled Sleepers and Bearers
4.1 Before production of sleepers and bearers may commence four sleepers and four bearers shall be
subjected to all the tests listed above and all those listed in Part III of SECTION 8- 6: TESTING OF
ASSEMBLED CONCRETE SLEEPERS.
4.2 No production may commence until the Engineer is satisfied that the sleepers and bearers with their
fastening systems have matched or exceeded the requirements of all the tests. those listed in Part
III of SECTION 8.6: TESTING OF ASSEMBLED CONCRETE SLEEPERS.
5. Production Testing for Sleepers and Bearers
5.1 Sleepers and bearers shall be tested at a rate of one per 200 selected at random per day. The items
to be tested shall be:
(a) Distance and tolerance between railseats
(b) Cant of rail seat and location of fastener inserts
(c) Rail seat Vertical Positive Loading
(d) Railseat Vertical Negative Loading
(e) Centreline Positive Loading
(f) Centreline Negative Loading
The selection of the 200 sleeper or bearer batches shall where possible be based on the lines or
casting beds used by the manufacturer.
5.2 Should any sleeper or bearer fail to pass the required tests two further sleepers or bearers shall be
selected at random and tested. If either of the two additional sleepers or bearers fails for whatever
reason the remainder of the 200 will be rejected.
5.3 The Engineer may at his sole discretion direct that the testing requirement is reduced provided he is
satisfied that the necessary quality is being maintained. Should the Engineer so relax the requirement
he shall also retain the right to reimpose testing to the full requirement at any time he feels that the
quality standards are not being maintained.
5.4 In addition one sleeper in 2,000 and one bearer in 500 shall be tested for bond development or
anchorage.
A load shall be applied to the railseat with the sleeper or bearer in normal position and supported
as for the railseat positive bending test.
If there is no more than 0.025mm slippage of the tendon measured with an extensometer reading to
1/ 10,000, at 1. 5 times the design load for the sleeper or bearer the remainder of the 2,000 sleepers
and 500 bearers shall be accepted.
Should failure occur a further three sleepers and bearers shall be tested and if any of the three fail
the remaining sleepers and bearers of the batch will be rejected.
If both cases the load shall be increased till failure of the sleeper or bearer occurs and the final value
recorded.
8.4 TIMBER SLEEPERS

Not Use
8.5 RAIL FASTENING SYSTEM

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
The qualification and provision of an elastic rail fastening system and resilient fastening systems,
the system shall provide lateral, longitudinal and vertical support to rails against imposed forces
through the use of a spring steel bar in torsion and bending and with insulation against the shorting
of track circuits.
The elastic fastening shall be useable in ballasted track and the resilient fastening in the ballastless
track. The system shall be useable with all concrete sleepers and bearers in plain line and in
turnouts. Only fastening system "Pandrol", "Vossloh" and "Stedef" or "equivalent" can be used in
this project.
The resilient fastening shall be in the form of resilient baseplates, as described in the Specifications.
Work Includes: Clips, shoulders, baseplates, insulators, rail pads and other assembly components
of the fastening system.
Work Not Included: Installation, Testing of assembled track fastenings, Fastening system on steel
bridge.
2. Definitions
"Clip" - A spring steel device with the function of holding the rail upright against the outward forces
applied by the wheel flanges and to fix the rail longitudinally.
"Fastener" - The device fastening the rail to the sleeper.
" Insert" - Metal/ Nonmetallic Insert embedded in the sleeper for attaching the fasteners to the
sleeper.
" Insulator" - Insulating material to prevent electrical contact between foot of the rail and any
metallic components embedded in or attached to a sleeper, or between the rail and any metallic
components embedded in or attached to a sleeper.
"Rail Pad" - The rail pad is placed on the Rail Seat Area to cushion the effect of vertical loads.
" Rail Seat Area" - Flat surface of a sleeper to receive the rail base and pad or
according to the Fastening System Manufactory design as approved by an
Engineer.
"Set" - All the fastener components required for one sleeper.
" Sleeper" - A sleeper transmits the wheel loads to the ballast and holds the rail to gauge and to
the required inclination.
3.1 Manufacturers or Contractors who intend to use rail fastening system other than "Pandrol", "Vossloh"
and "Stedef" for this project are required to submit test report as required in PART III: EXECUTION 1.
Acceptance Procedure for Approval.
All tests shall be performed by Testing Agency in Thailand. Where no testing equipment is provided
in Thailand, such test shall be performed by Independent Testing Agency in a third country upon
approval by SRT.
Test results of SRT's past project may be used in case that such test conform to requirements of
this Specification
3.2 In addition to the requirements of SECTION 1. 10: QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING LABORATORY
the Contractor shall maintain adequate records in accordance with the requirements of his quality
assurance programme.
The manufacture is expected to operate an independently approved and audited quality control
system in accordance with the requirements of ISO 9000. Where the rail fastening system
manufacturer cannot produce such independent certification the following requirements shall
apply.
(a) The Contractor shall submit the Inspection Agency's name to the Engineer for approval prior
to the commencement of manufacture.
(b) The Contractor shall provide the Inspection Agency with reasonable access to observe
(c) The Contractor shall, at his own expense, supply all templates and gauges, prepare and
supply all test pieces and samples and supply all labour and apparatus for testing which
may be necessary or required for carrying out the tests and requirements of this specification,
and render all reasonable assistance in making such tests. The Contractor shall also, at his
own expense, supply all drillings, test pieces and samples for carrying out independent
chemical analysis and tests.
(d) Before the fastening components are submitted to inspection regarding surface, shape and
finish, all components shall be properly examined by the Contractor's inspectors and all
defective fastening components removed and placed in separate stacks and the rest sorted
for examination by the Inspection Agency.
(e) Some special tests may be conducted by a recognized laboratory as directed by the Engineer,
all expenses and costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.3 The rail fastening system to be used in this Contract shall be a proven product with at least 100 track
kms for five years in at least five railway administrations.
3.4 Components shall be the product of the Original Manufacturer of the Rail Fastening System. The
products of licensees shall only be accepted when the Original Manufacturer has established and
operates an approved Quality Control Programme at the place of manufacture used for this Contract.
3.5 Components shall be manufactured by a proper technological process to achieve a high quality for
properties of materials, dimensions and tolerances, loading performance and resistance to
atmospheric factors and fatigue all to be in compliance with the Drawings and the requirements of
this specification.
3.6 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a programme for the quality control of the materials
used in the fastener components. The programme shall include the ranges of acceptable values
where required.
(a) Clips
The quality control for the clips will include, but not necessarily be limited to:
• Characteristics of the steel before manufacturing.
• Geometry of the clip according to the drawings of the accepted design.
• Micrography and microscopy of the material before and after manufacture.
• Standard test on the steel after manufacturing: hardness; strength; distortion at breaking
stress; and breaking stress.
• Fatigue test
Test of minimum elasticity without distortion beyond the elastic limit after five
deflections equivalent to the distortions to be incurred in a track laying operation.
The vertical fatigue strength must be 3 million load cycles at an amplitude of Clip
type. The Clip fixed in a manner that the Clip arms laying on the rail foot are all pre-
tensioned with the same force in the case of installation.
• Corrosion protection.
• Corrosion test.
(b) Insert - Metal
Threaded components will be permitted only if a part of the insert system.
• Physical, metallurgical and mechanical tests necessary to verify the capability of the
insert to function in the system.
• Protection against corrosion and a corrosion test shall be defined by a recognized
standard.
• No noticeable corrosion (defined by a standard) shall occur after a salt spray test.
Insert - Non metallic.
Threaded components will be permitted only if a part of the insert system.
A material either of rubber or thermoplastic or polyamide, defined by its physical, electrical
and chemical properties
• strength and other physical properties

• control of shape,
• verification of the raw material,
• aging test after manufacturing process,
• specific tests to verify the compliance with the general performance of the fastening
system' and its environment including exposure to hydrocarbons.
(c) Clip Shoulders
The quality control for the clip shoulders will include, but not necessarily be limited to:
• Characteristics of the steel before manufacturing.
• Geometry of the clip shoulder according to the drawings of the accepted design.
• Micrography and microscopy of the material before and after manufacture.
• Standard test on the steel after manufacturing: hardness; strength; distortion at breaking
stress; and breaking stress.
• Fatigue test.
(d) Insulator
A material, normally thermoplastic or polyamide defined by its physical, electrical and
chemical properties.
• Control of shape.
• Verification of the raw material.
• ageing test after manufacturing process,
• Specific tests to verify the compliance of the insulator with the general performance of
the fastening system and its environment.
(e) Rail Pad
The mechanical physical, chemical, and ageing tests necessary to ensure the specific qualities
of the product shall be carried out.
The quality control programme shall include shape control and a test to verify the
compliance with the spring rate.
The ratio between total deflection/total thickness unloaded must be 15%.
The following minimum properties shall be defined:
• Breaking stress.
• Breaking stress after ageing.
• Distortion at the breaking stress.
• Distortion at the breaking stress, after ageing.
• Abrasion.
• Permanent distortion after ageing (24 hours - 100°C and 50% distortion)
Ageing is generally 4 days/100°C in a steam room.
These tests may be carried out on samples cut from the pads.
4. Tolerances
Dimensional tolerances shall not exceed the tolerances shown on the Manufacturer's drawings.
5. Submittals
(a) Certificate for proven record of use in other railway administrations.

(b) Name and address of Manufacturers supplying each component.
(c) Copies of all material and production test results.
(d) Three samples of each component for use as a standard to which all products shall
correspond.
(e) Certificates of Inspection.
(f) Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance with the requirements of this Specification.
6.1 Delivery
Fastenings, baseplates and appurtenances shall be delivered in manufacturer's original unopened
packaging to both concrete sleeper manufacturer and to the Contractor's Site Depot.
6.2 Storage
All components shall be stored off the ground, under cover and out of direct sunlight.
6.3 Handling
(a) Metal Components: Packaged in strong wooden boxes. Each box shall weigh less than 100 kg.
(b) Pads and Insulators: Packaged in strong wooden or cardboard boxes. Each box shall weigh less
than 100 kg.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. General
The Engineer shall approve elastic rail fastening system and resilient fastening system that satisfies
the requirements of this specification and SECTION 8- 6: TESTING OF ASSEMBLED CONCRETE
SLEEPERS subject to the requirements of SECTION 1- 2: APPLICABLE STANDARDS, The complete
fastening system when assembled shall be located in and above the top surface of the sleeper.
Threaded components will only be permitted when they are part of the insert embedded in the
sleeper.
Acceptance of the fasteners requires the performance of three stages of qualification; the design
qualification; the performance tests; and production testing.
System performance requires the following mechanical characteristics:
• Clip deflection on clamping 11 mm ±1.5 mm.
• Clamping force per rail seat 17 – 19 kN.
• Rail Creep resistance per rail seat: 9 - 22kN with proposed rail pad
• Electrical resistance > 4000 Ohms*
* or meet minimum requirements for the function of SRT’s track Circuits
• When used on turnouts the system shall be proven of withstanding upward loads from
mechanized on track switch maintenance equipment.
2. Marking
Clips and Pads shall be marked, and packages containing components will be identified with the
following information:
(a) Type of component.
(b) Date of manufacture and/or packaging.
(c) Number c products per package.
(d) Gross weight of package.
Pads shall be marked on the top of one edge of each pad with the following ribbed letters:
(a) SRT.
(b) Fastener Trade Name.
(c) EN 54E1.
(d) Year of manufacture.
No marking is made on inserts, clips or insulators.
3. Spring Clips
3.1 Design
The spring clip shall obtain its toe load force by the combination of torsion and bending. Clips
relying on bending only shall be unacceptable.
The spring clips shall be specifically designed to prevent illegal removal of the clip from its housing
without the use of a special tool.
The steel shall be an alloy spring steel free from detrimental surface and internal defects.
Chemical Composition: The steel shall be a silicon manganese steel with a chemical composition
that complies with Table 8.5-1., or a recognized internationally or UIC standard.
Table 8.5-1 Spring Clip Composition

Either (i) Min Max Or (ii) Min Max
C 0.52 0.57 C 0.35 0.42
Si 1.7 2.1 Si 1.5 1.8
Mn 0.8 2.1 Mn 0.50 0.80
Cr 0.2 0.3 P 0.025
Mo 0.01 0.06 S 0.025
Ni 0.30 Cr 0.30
Cu 0.035
Sn 0.035
S 0.035
P 0.035
3.2 Hardness: The clips shall be heat treated to achieve a surface hardness in the range 44 – 48 Rockwell
C or 385 - 425 Brinell Hardness Number
3.3 Workmanship
(a) The rail clips shall conform to the dimensions detailed by the proprietor of the system.
(b) Clips shall be supplied free of burrs which may be considered harmful when handled or affect
efficient assembly of the clip.
(c) Clips shall be provided in standard bituminous or oil coating or powder coating or equivalent.
4. Inserts
Threaded components will only be permitted as part of the insert subsystem. The material shall
conform to the proprietor's design requirements regarding the physical properties and dimensions
detailed on the appropriate manufacturer's drawing.
The insert shall be fully compatible with the threaded components, and the insert, if rubber or
thermoplastic or polyamide, shall be fully replaceable without coring out the old insert and grouting
in a replacement.
5. Clip Shoulders
5.1 Material
The material will be a pearlitic malleable iron or a spheroidal graphite iron to BS 3333 or BS 278
respectively with the mechanical properties as detailed below:
(a) Tensile Strength (minimum)
Pearlitic Malleable: 510N/mm2
Spheroidal Graphite: 500N/m2
(b) 0.5%Proof Stress(minimum)
Pearlitic Malleable: 310N/mm2
(c) 0.2% Proof Stress (minimum)
Spheroidal Graphite: 320N/mm2
(d) Elongation (minimum)
Pearlitic Malleable: 4%
Spheroidal Graphite: 7%
(e) Hardness Range
Pearlitic Malleable: 170-220 Brinell
Spheroidal Graphite: 170 - 245Brinell
5.2 Workmanship
(a) The cast shoulders shall conform to the dimensions detailed on the appropriate
manufacturer's drawing.
(b) The casting shall be well dressed and fettled, and free from burned or sand cavities, blow
holes, or other visual surface defects.
(c) All fins shall be removed from castings except that:
• maximum fin height of 0. 8 m will be allowed on the casting at the mould join line
where this is above the level of the concrete.
• maximum fin height of 2mm will be allowed on those casting portions which are to
be below the concrete level.
(d) Casting must be free from cracks or tears revealed by magnetic or equivalent non-destructive
crack testing. Cracks or tears to a depth of 0.5mm in the general body of the casting maybe
removed by grinding to the full depth of the crack. Defects within the riser or the casting
may be removed by grinding to the full depth of the riser.
6. Rail Insulators
6.1 Material
(a) The material shall be nylon 66 or polyamide 6 with 30% to 35% glass fibre reinforcement.
An additional ultra violet stabilizing agent shall be added to the raw material. A maximum
of 10% clean reground insulator sprues may be added to the virgin raw material. The sprues
are to be ground when still hot.
(b) The raw material shall have the following properties:

• Density - Test method DIN 5347 or ASTM 792
1.2 - 1.45 g/cm3
• Melt point - Test method ASTM 78
215 - 270 °C
• Electrical Volume Resistivity - Test method ASTM 257
As moulded: min 1012 ohm cm.
• Conditioned as below: min 107 ohm cm.
Water Absorption (Conditioning)
(c) All insulators shall be conditioned in water at a minimum of 95°C until they have absorbed
0.8 -1.2% of water by weight above their original "as moulded" weight.
(d) Conditioned samples shall be fixed in a rigid clamp and a test load shall be applied. A
minimum load of 450kg shall be applied to the insulator without failure occurring.
(e) Conditioned samples shall be hardness tested using Rockwell Scale C to test method ASTM
785 procedure A. The average of two readings shall be taken. Visual rolling faults such as
cracks, laminations, overlappings and other surface imperfections shall be determined with
a microscope.
7. Pads
7.1 Material
Pads shall be a natural rubber, ethyl vinyl acetate (EVA), high density polyethylene (HDPE) or other
products complying with UIC 864- 5- 0 or international standard coloured black with the following
properties:
(a) Carbon content for ultra-violet stabilisation.
(b) Only virgin material shall be used with the exception that material from runners, sprues and
rejects may be ground and reused provided that it is thoroughly mixed with the virgin material
and the reground material does not exceed 25 percent of the total material by weight.
7.2 Workmanship
(a) The pads shall be injection moulded in accordance with the general rules of plastic moulding
technology.
(b) Moulding shall be free from any flaking, knifing, overlapping and flow marks, which could
weaken the mechanical properties of the pads.
8. Baseplates
8.1 Shall be an Iron Casting or Steel that conforms to the requirements of BS310- 1972 or BS2789- 1985
or EN 1563.
8.2 Workmanship
(a) The baseplates shall conform to dimensions shown on the proprietor's drawings.
(b) In addition to carrying the appropriate manufacturers shall be marked SRT and EN 54E1, and
with the last two digits of the year of manufacture.
(c) Castings shall be free of burned- on sand, cavities, blow holes or other defects visible on the
surface. No fins are allowed on the rail seat or on the underside of the baseplates. Materials,
cast material, and finished baseplates shall be tested on a sample basis as determined by an
approved standard as provided in SECTION 1-2: APPLICABLE STANDARDS.
9. Resilient Baseplate
9.1 The resilient baseplates shall be provided between the rail and concrete slab in the ballastless track.
The elastomer shall be provided within the baseplate structure. The maximum “ footprint” size of
the resilient baseplates shall not exceed 200mmx550mm
9.2 The baseplates shall consist of either a bonded baseplate, whereby top and bottom plates are
separated by an annular resilient insert bonded to each plate or preassembled resiliently mounted
assembly where the plate is separate from the concrete by a natural rubber pad. The resilient
baseplate pads shall be manufactured in accordance with UIC 864- 5 and the manufacturer’ s
approved specification and shall be tested in accordance with SECTION 8-6.
9.3 The plates shall provide vertical adjustment of 20mm and horizontal adjustment + / - 10mm. The
plates shall be suitable for installation in plain track.
9.4 The baseplates shall consist of two separated castings which shall be referred to as top and bottom
plates. The top and bottom plated shall be separated by a resilient insert that may be fully bonded
to each plate.
9.5 The plate shall be of spheroidal graphite malleable cast iron to EN1563 Grade EN-GJS-500-7
9.6 The top plate shall incorporate elements designed by the manufacturer of the approved elastic clips,
high viscosity nylon insulators and a 5mm minimum thickness EVA or HDPE rail pad as shown on the
drawings.
9.7 The annual resilient insert or rubber pad used within the baseplate shall be natural rubber or natural
rubber blend. It shall be compounded with suitable reinforcing agents, antioxidants, etc. to provide
adequate resistance to frequent repeated loadings and provide adequate impact, abrasion,
weathering and ageing properties.
9.8 The static vertical stiffness of the baseplate shall be based on conventional track. On conventional
track, about half the resilience is provide by the ballast bed and other half by the subgrade. Ideally,
the stiffness of the overall track structure should be in the order of 100kN/ mm, which is equivalent
to a deflection of 1mm under an axle load of 20 tonnes. On the ballastless track, where the rails are
fixed down directly, additional resilience shall be added to the system in order to compensate for
the absence of ballast. The additional resilience shall be provided adequately by the resilient insert
within the resilient baseplate.
9.9 In addition to any component testing required by manufacturer, the baseplates and components
shall be subject to assembly tests, as described in these specifications. Such testing shall be
completed and the results shall be subject to the Engineer’ s approval before mass production of
the baseplates commence.
9.10 Testing of component parts of the baseplate shall be carried out in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendation. These component part tests shall be subject to approval.
9.11 The baseplates shall be protected from corrosion by dry shot blasting and coating with intex or similar
to a minimum dry film thickness of 50 microns. The dry shot blasting process shall be subject to
approval of the protection material manufacturer and the Engineer.
9.12 The resilient baseplates shall have a satisfactory service proven record and shall have been used by
five major railways in similar conditions for at least 5 years.
9.13 The baseplates shall be indelibly marked in 10mm minimum raised characters with the following:
(a) Baseplate designation
(b) The last two digit of the year of manufacture.
(c) The letters “SRT”
9.14 These marking shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

10. Bolts
10.1 All track bolt and holding down bolts shall be manufacture in accordance with UIC 864- 2, and shall
be sheradized to Class 1 in accordance with BS4921 Table1 or galvanized accordance EN ISO 1461.
10.2 The bolt shall be Grade 8.8 to UIC 864-2, unless stated otherwise.
11. Flat Washers
Flat washers shall be black washers; from E to BS4320 zinc electroplated and passivated to BS1706
or shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with BS729 with coating thickness to BS729 Table 1.
12. Double Coil Spring Washers
12.1 Spring washers shall be of the double coil “ Fe 6” type manufactured in accordance with UIC Code
864-3
12.2 The Spring steel shall be 38 S 7 in accordance with Article 1.1 of UIC Code 864-3
12.3 The finished spring washers shall be galvanized in accordance with BS 729 with coating thickness to
BS 729 Table 1.
13. Helical Spring Washers
13.1 The spring shall be manufactured from oil-tempered spring steel in accordance with DIN 17223 Type
FD. The end form of the coil shall be closed end and ground in accordance with BS1726, Part 1,
Figure 1.
13.2 The Spring shall be manufacture from high quality carbon spring steel to BS5216, BS 1429 or BS 2803.
13.3 The Spring shall be sherardize to Class 1 in accordance with BS 4921 Table 1.
14. Conforming Pad
14.1 The purpose of conforming pad is to provide adequate bearing contact between the baseplate and
the concrete sleeper or bearer. The pad shall be a Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE) and 3mm thick.
14.2 Raw Material
(a) The raw material shall have the following properties:
i) Density : 0.90-0.96g per cm3. Test Method ASTM D1505 or EN 1183-1
ii) Melt Flow Index (MFI) : Using a 2kg load at a temperature of 190C, it shall not be greater
than 20-30g/10 minutes. Test Method ASTM D1238
(b) The raw material supplier shall submit certification with each batch of raw material conforming
that the pad raw material has been supplied against the raw material manufacturers published
data sheets
14.3 Workmanship
(a) The pads shall conform to the dimensions and tolerances as detailed on the relevant drawings
(b) The pads surface shall be clean and free from sinking, gassing or burning.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Acceptance Procedure
The acceptance of the fasteners, resilient baseplates and other items mentioned herein requires
the performance of three stages of qualification: the design qualification; the performance tests;
and the production tests.
Contractors who intend to locally manufacture the rail fastening system for use on this project are
required to obtain Thai industrial Standards Institute registration for their products before they will
be acceptable to the Engineer.
1.1 Design Qualification

Design qualification consists of two steps.
(a) Submittal of the fastener design as required herein.
(b) Successful execution of the design tests.
1.2 Design Tests
The design tests are:
(a) Clip spring rate.
(b) Longitudinal creep resistance.
(c) Torsional resistance in the horizontal plane.
(d) Horizontal rotation.
(e) Inclination, gauge retention, and fatigue.
(f) Pad spring rate.
(g) Electrical insulation.
1.3 Performance Tests
Acceptance of the fasteners, baseplates and other items produced requires submission of quality
control programmes as described herein, and also successful performance of the tests.
The performance and quality control tests are:
(a) Material quality tests described in PART II: PRODUCTS.
(b) Tests of compliance with the whole fastening system as described in SECTION 8- 6: TESTING
OF ASSEMBLED CONCRETE SLEEPERS.
(c) Baseplates assembly tests in accordance with the UIC codes or similar approved by the
Engineer.
1.4 Production tests
The production tests require the repetition of the design tests at intervals, as agreed by the Engineer,
during production.
2. Certificate of Inspection
2.1 The Contractor shall submit Certificates of Inspection of the materials used for manufacture of the
fastenings together with all testing and inspection reports of manufacturing quality control of every
batch to the Engineer for approval prior to presentation for acceptance of such batches of the
fastener components.
All Quality Assurance records of the fastenings supplied shall be kept for a minimum of five years.
2.2 The Certificate of Inspection shall include the chemical analysis and other testing reports required in
compliance with the specification of the standard referred to.
2.3 Upon submission of the rail fastenings to the Inspection Agency for acceptance, the Contractor shall
submit a Certificate ( or certificates) of Inspection which shall include the report of tests on raw
materials used for manufacture of each component, and the report of tests and inspection of
manufacturing quality control.
2.4 The test procedures may comply with the codes or standard adopted in the country of the
manufacturer or other international recognized standards. Such Codes or Standards shall be
presented together with the Certificate of Inspection.
3. Acceptance of Clips
3.1 Testing
(a) One clip in four thousand shall be checked for dimensional accuracy. The surface of the
clips shall be smooth and free from defects which may cause an injurious or fatigue resistance
of the rail fastenings. Bar diameter tolerance shall not exceed ± 0. 25% on diameter and
0.25mm on maximum ovality. Surface defects shall not have a depth greater than the partial
decarburised layer (1.5% of diameter) at that point and shall not at any time exceed 0.25mm.
(b) One clip in every four thousand clips shall be tested for surface hardness
(c) One clip in every two thousand clips shall be tested for load deflection. The force exerted
by the clip in fastening an assembly shall be determined using a calibrated test rig. The clip
assembly with shoulders shall have load deflection characteristic curves which achieve a
clamping force of 1700 – 1900 kg per rail seat at 11 mm deflection.
3.2 Acceptance
(a) Each production batch shall be accepted if the samples meet the test requirements.
(b) All test results shall be treated as independently obtained. In the case of a failure the batch
shall be re- inspected to the original sampling plan for the failed property only. If further
failures result the batch shall be rejected. In the case of dimensional failures, surface defects,
cracks and tears or hardness the batch may be 100% inspected and resubmitted for
acceptance.
3.3 Re-tests of Clips
(a) Should the conditions in sub-clauses 3.1 and 3.2 not be met two further tests shall be made
on samples selected from the clips represented by the original test.
(b) Provided the results of both these further tests fulfil the requirements all the clips shall be
deemed to comply with this specification.
(c) If the results of either of the two additional tests do not fulfil the requirements the clips
represented shall be rejected.
(d) The clips rejected for hardness greater than 45 Rockwell C may be retempered and
resubmitted for inspection
4. Acceptance of Inserts
4.1 Testing
(a) Tensile test pieces shall be cast with each batch of inserts from the same batch of material as
the inserts they represent. Additional test pieces shall be cast to allow for retests. All test
samples shall be subject to the requirements of the relevant material specification.
(b) Tests pieces shall undergo heat treatment if required, at the same time and in the same
furnace as the inserts they represent.
(c) Tests shall be carried out to confirm the acceptability of the material. All tests shall be as
detailed in the relevant material Specifications.
(d) Physical Test: One tensile test piece will be tested for each cast of material, provided that
this does not exceed 2000kg in which case an additional test piece shall be tested from each
additional 2000kg or part 2000kg. In the case of a continuous casting process one test piece
shall be tested for each four hour period. The results shall comply with requirements.
4.2 Sampling
(a) A minimum of one in every four thousand inserts shall be inspected with regard to
significant dimensions. The inserts shall conform to the dimensions and allowable tolerances
detailed in the Drawings.
(b) For a 50,000 batch size 20 samples shall be taken at random from the batch and the batch
shall be rejected if 11 No. or more samples fail to meet the test requirements.
(c) Surface Irregularities: The surface of the inserts shall be smooth and free from defects which
may cause a reduction in fatigue resistance of the rail fastenings. Any occurrence of the
surface defect shall not have a depth greater than decarburized layer at that point and shall
not at any time exceed 0.30mm. The approved pre-production samples define the surface
finish required.
(d) Cracks and Tears: The castings shall be free from cracks and tears. Inspection shall be by a
recognised non-destructive crack testing procedure.
(e) Hardness: One in every four thousand inserts manufactured in Pearlitic Malleable and one in
every three thousand shoulders manufactured in Spheroidal Graphite shall be hardness tested.
4.3 Acceptance
(a) Each production batch shall be accepted if the samples meet all the test requirements.
(b) All test results shall be treated as independently obtained. In the case of a failure the batch
shall be re- inspected to the original sampling plan for the failed property only. If further
failures result the batch shall be rejected. In the case of dimensional failures, surface defects,
cracks and tears or hardness the batch may be 100% inspected and resubmitted for
acceptance.
4.4 Retests
(a) Should the physical condition or the tests or any part thereon not be met, two further tests
shall be made on samples selected from the inserts represented by the original test.
(b) Provided the results of both these further tests fulfil the requirements, all the inserts shall
be deemed to comply with this specification.
(c) If the results of either of the two additional tests do not fulfil the requirements, the inserts
5. Acceptance of Clip Shoulders
5.1 Testing
(a) Tensile test pieces shall be cast with each batch of shoulders from the same batch of metal
as the shoulders they represent. Additional test pieces shall be cast to allow for retests. All
test samples shall be subject to the requirements of the relevant material specifications.
(b) Test pieces shall undergo heat treatment, if required, at the same time and in the same
furnace as the cast shoulders they represent.
(c) Tests shall be carried out to confirm the acceptability of the material. All tests shall be as
detailed in the relevant material Specifications.
(d) Physical Test: One tensile test piece will be tested for each cast of metal, provided that each
cast does not exceed 2000 kg in which case an additional bar shall be tested from each
additional 2000kg or part 2000 kg. In the case of a continuous casting process one test piece
shall be tested for each four hour period. The results shall comply with requirements.
5.2 Sampling
(a) A minimum of one in every four thousand clip shoulders shall be inspected with regard to
significant dimensions. The clip shoulders shall conform to the dimensions and allowable
tolerances detailed in the Drawings.
(b) For a 50,000 batch size 20 samples shall be taken at random from the batch and the batch
shall be rejected if 11 No. or more samples fail to meet the test requirements.
(c) Shoulders shall be inspected to a Normal Single Sample Plan, Inspection Level I, as specified
in British Standard 6001, with regard to significant dimensions.
(d) Surface Irregularities: Shoulders shall be inspected to BS 6001, Normal Single sample Plan,
Inspection Level I, AQL of 2.5% for surface defects (i.e. burned on sand, cavities, blow holes
or other visual defects) . The approved pre- production samples define the surface finish
required.
(e) The castings shall be free from cracks and tears when inspected in accordance with BS 6001,
Single Normal inspection at Level I and AQL of 0. 4% . Inspection shall be by a recognized
non-destructive crack testing procedure.
(f) Hardness: Five percent of shoulders manufactured in Pearlitic Malleable and 10% of
shoulders manufactured in Spheroidal Graphite shall be hardness tested.
5.3 Acceptance
(a) Each production batch shall be accepted if the samples meet all the test requirements.
(b) All test results shall be treated as independently obtained. In the case of a failure the batch shall
be re-inspected to the original sampling plan for the failed property only. If further failures result
the batch shall be rejected. In the case of dimensional failures, surface defects, cracks and tears
or hardness the batch may be 100% inspected and resubmitted for acceptance.
5.4 Retests
(a) Should the physical condition or the tests or any part thereon not be met, two further tests
shall be made on samples selected from the shoulders represented by the original test.
(b) Provided the results of both these further tests fulfils the requirements, all the shoulders
shall be deemed to comply with this specification.
(c) If the results of either of the two additional tests do not fulfil the requirements, the shoulders
6. Acceptance of insulators
6.1 Sampling
A minimum of one insulator in every two thousand shall be selected at random and checked for
dimensional accuracy and material properties. The insulators shall conform to the dimensions and
allowable tolerances detailed in the Drawings.
The acceptance for the insulators shall be made under the conditions in accordance with those for
the clips in sub-clause 3 herein.
7. Acceptance of Pads
7.1 Production Quality Control
The following frequency of tests and inspection shall be conducted to ensure the uniformity and
high quality of the product:
(a) 0.50 percent of the production shall be checked for shape deviation and surface condition.
(b) 1. 00 percent of the production shall be checked for dimensions and tolerances. The
dimensional checks shall be made by means of GO/NO GO gauges at 24 hours or longer after
the pads have been moulded.
7.2 Dimensional Accuracy
(a) The surface of the pads shall be smooth and free from visible cracks. Deviations of more than
3. 0mm from the ideal shape shall not be allowed when a pad is placed on a flat surface
without loading. Such deviation shall be measured horizontally using a straight metal rule
from the diagonal centre of the plate to the edges.
(b) No voids in the moulded plate greater than 1mm shall be allowed.
(c) The pads shall conform to the dimensions and allowable tolerances detailed in the
Manufacturer's Drawings.
7.3 Re-tests
In the event of a rejection the test which failed shall be repeated by taking further samples at the
same frequency from the rejected production batch. If this repeat test results in a failure the batch
shall be rejected except in cases where the batch may be 100% inspected and tested and
resubmitted for acceptance.
(a) Should the conditions in Sub- Clause 7. 2 not be met, two further tests shall be made on
samples selected from the pads represented by the original test.
(b) Provided the results of both these further tests fulfil the requirements, all the pads shall be
deemed to comply with this specification.
(c) If the results of either of the two additional tests do not fulfil the requirements, the pads
(d) The pads rejected on dimensional tolerances may be resorted provided each pad is rechecked.
8. Acceptance of Helical Springs
8.1 Helical springs shall be tested to an approved inspection schedule for permanent set. Springs shall
be compressed to working load 10 times without suffering any permanent reduction I free length.
8.2 Ten pre-production samples of spring shall be subjected to a fatigue test with the spring compression
varying between the design pre-load compressions +/- 1.5mm. The test shall be conducted a 10Hz
for 250 hours. The free length of each spring shall be examined before and after the test and there
shall be no reduction in its length and no evidence of damage or failure.
9. Acceptance of Cast Baseplates
Cast baseplates shall be tested and inspected in accordance with EN1561, EN1562 or EN1563 and
the manufacturer’s approved procedure.
10. Acceptance of Resilient Baseplates
10.1 Resilient Baseplate Pads (Elastomer)
(a) Resilient baseplate pads shall be tested and inspected in accordance with UIC Code 864-5
(b) The resilient baseplate pads shall be tested at 210C for deflection after being aged for a
minimum of 7 days at 700C in accordance with DIN53508
(c) The pad shall then be tested and the load/ deflection diagram produced for a minimum of
10 load cycles with the deflection being taken up to 5mm.
(d) The calculated stiffness from the length recording shall not vary from the designed stiffness
by more than +/-10%
(e) The pads shall be fatigue tested by placing a full pad between two steel plates and applying
a changeable sinusoidal load in the range 10kN to 70kN at a frequency of 5Hz for a minimum
of 2 million cycles. On completion of the test there shall be no sign of physical deterioration
of the pad.
(f) On completion of the fatigue test the pad shall be tested for both static and dynamic stiffness.
The dynamic stiffness shall be obtained at the frequencies 10Hz, 20Hz and 40Hz. The test
methods for obtaining the dynamic stiffness’ s shall be submitted by the Contractor for
approval.
(g) The static stiffness test result of one pad under any designed baseplate area at 210C shall be
25Mn/m or the pad designed value.
(h) The calculated static to dynamic stiffness ratio of the spring coefficients of test results shall
be greater than 1.4 at all frequencies list in paragraph (f) above.
10.2 Baseplate Assembly
(a) The baseplate assembly shall be fixed to precast concrete beam using the method for works
and complete with all nuts, bolts, insulators, pads, shim, bushes or ferrules, clips, rail and
grout levelling layer as necessary.
(b) The bushed or ferrules used in the test assembly shall be measured for actual diameter of holding
down bolt holes, in a minimum of four equally spaced positions, prior to commencing the tests.
(c) The baseplates shall be set to gauge, i.e. rails running faces at 1000mm apart.
(d) The baseplates shall be tested, as detailed hereunder, for fastening repeated load test,
electrical insulation test and fastening longitudinal restraint test.
(e) Three turnout concrete bearer, type1, 2 and 3, as describe below shall be assembled
complete with all clips, pads, insulators and rail as per the assembly to be used in the works.
These assemblies shall be tested, as detailed hereunder, for fastening repeated load test,
electrical insulation test and fastening longitudinal restraint test.
(f) For the purpose of the tests each type of bearer shall be describe as follows:
i) Type 1: Two rail fastening type through the switch slide baseplate area.
ii) Type 2: Four rail fastening types through the lead
iii) Type 3: Three/four rail fastening types through the checkrail/crossing areas.
10.3 Fastening Repeated Load Test
(a) Two short sections of rail shall be fastened to each assembly using the complete rail fastening
assembly. The repeated load shall be applied by a scissor arm oscillator. The scissor arm
oscillator shall be set to apply the load to the rail head at an angle of 26.50 to the vertical
(b) With the assembly supported as described, a repeated load test shall be undertaken at
maximum 5Hz for a minimum of 3 million cycles.
(c) The loads to be applied to the scissor arm oscillator are as follows:
i) Baseplate assemblies 90kN
ii) Concrete bearers 120kN
(d) The minimum load shall be 10kN and the assemblies shall have a static preload applied prior
to starting the sinusoidal oscillations and an amplitude and range as defined in the table
below
Element Static preload Amplitude Range

kN kN kN
Baseplate 50 +/-40 10-90
Assemblies
Concrete Bearers 65 +/-55 10-120
(e) Prior to apply the preload and commencing the oscillations the load shall be applied at a
rate not exceed 25kN/ sec up to 150kN and oscillated for 2000 cycles to ensure the rail is
against the outside fasteners. The load shall be released to 20kN maximum and all gauges
reset to zero before applying the static preload and commencing the repeated load test. This
repeated load test may generate heat in the pads and this heat shall not be allowed to
exceed 500C
10.4 Electrical Insulation Test
(a) Short pieces of clean rail shall be fitted to an assembly using the complete rail fastening
system as specified by the Engineer. The complete assembly shall then be immersed in
distilled water for a minimum of 6 hours. Within one hour of removal from the water a DC
10V potential shall be applied across the two rails for period of 15 minutes. If the rails become
rusty or contain mill scale, the contact points shall be cleaned.
(b) The current flow in amperes shall be read using a DC ammeter and the resistance determined
by dividing the voltage, 10V, by the current flow in amperes. The requirement of the test shall
have been met only when a resistance in excess of 20,000 ohms or achieving minimum
requirements for the function of SRT’s track Circuits is recorded.
10.5 Fastening Longitudinal Restraint Test
(a) The longitudinal restraint test shall be performed in accordance the manufacturer’ s
procedure.
(b) The requirements of the test shall have been met only when there is no continuous rail
movement per fastening assembly with an axle load of not less than 10kN.
(c) The test shall be undertaken using clean, rust/mill scale free rail without corrosion protection
on any components.
11. Guarantee
11.1 The Contractor shall guarantee the fastening system against all defects attributable to faulty
manufacture, workmanship and quality of material requiring withdrawal from service until one year
after the end of the Defects Liability Period. The record of fastening system replacement of the SRT
shall be accepted by the Contractor in this connection.
11.2 The fastening system components that fail in service before the expiration of the Defects Liability
Period shall be replaced free of charge at a depot designated by SRT. The cost of installing
replacement fastening system fastening system shall be borne by the Contractor. The defective
fastening system components withdrawn from service shall be handed over at site to the Contractor
during which period, the Contractor shall inspect the fastening system, make his observations and
carry out examination jointly with the SRT's representative.
11.4 Patent Rights

The patent rights of the fastening system shall be the responsibility of the Contractor who will
indemnify the Employer against any claim in this connection.
8.6 TESTING OF ASSEMBLED CONCRETE SLEEPERS

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
This section specifies tests to be performed on assembled concrete sleepers at the pre-production
stage of sleeper or bearer manufacture.
2. Definitions
"Fully Assembled" - A sleeper with rails which has all the components of the rail fastening system
applied to both rails.
"Set" - All the components of a sleeper fastening system that are required to secure two rails on to
one sleeper.
(a) In addition to the requirements of SECTION 1-10: QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING LABORATORY
the Contractor shall maintain adequate records in accordance requirements of his quality
assurance programme. These records will provide the objective evidence of compliance with
the requirements of the contract, and as required by this Specification.
(b) Tests shall be performed using products accepted under:
(i) SECTION 8-3: CONCRETE SLEEPERS AND BEARERS
(ii) SECTION 8-5: RAIL FASTENING SYSTEM
(c) Tests shall be performed as described herein.
(d) Tests shall be performed by Testing Agency in Thailand. Where no testing equipment is provided
in Thailand, such test shall be performed by Independent Testing Agency in third country upon
approval by SRT.
4. Submittals
The Supplier shall submit to the Engineer in accordance with SECTION 1- 4: SUBMITTALS AND
(a) Name and address of the test site, together with
(i) A detailed list of equipment to be employed in the tests.
(ii) Manufacturer's data sheets, product catalogues;
(iii) Operating manuals.
(b) Name, address and qualifications of an Independent Inspection Agency, engaged to witness
testing.
(c) Copies of all test reports.
PART II: PRODUCTS
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Assembly Tests
(a) The assembly tests are tests performed to determine the suitability of the rail fastenings
assembled with the concrete sleepers and the specified rails, against various types of loading
applications and fatigue behaviour. These tests are performed at the pre-production stage of
sleeper manufacture prior to commencement of the actual production. The tests shall be
performed with EN 54E1 rails.
(b) 50 concrete sleepers, selected at random, or ten (10) bearers together with the rail fastenings
shall be available for testing to determine compliance with the specified requirements.
Twenty-three sleepers are subjected to these tests.
(c) The tests performed shall be:
(i) clamping force,
(ii) fastening insert resistance (pull out),
(iii) fastening uplift,
(iv) fatigue resistance
(v) creep resistance,
(vi) lateral resistance,
(vii) electrical resistance
(viii) control of track gauge.
1.1 Four concrete sleepers, selected at random by the Inspection Agency from the 50 shall be carefully
measured and examined to determine compliance with the dimensional requirements.
Two bearers only shall be subject to this test
1.2 Clamping Force
(a) Arrangement
The testing arrangement requires a fully assembled concrete sleeper with two short pieces
of rail.
(b) Procedure
(i) A load shall gradually be applied to lift up a toe of one of the clips until a metal shim
of 0. 10mm can be extracted from under the clip toe. The load recorded at this point
shall be taken as the toe load.
(ii) The toe loads shall then be measured on the other three clips of the set. The average
of the four values shall be taken as the result of the load.
(iii) The clamping force for one railseat is two times the average toe load.
(c) Acceptance
The assembly shall be considered satisfactory when the calculated clamping force per railseat
is within the range of 17 – 19 kN
1.3 Fastener Insert Resistance (Pull out)
(a) Arrangement
The testing arrangement consists of a hydraulic jack with dial gauge and a clamping device
gripping the shoulder leg on such a way to pull the shoulder up.
(b) Procedure
The force shall gradually be applied to pull the shoulder up until the load has reached 55kN
and remain for 3 minutes or the shoulder moves up.
(c) Acceptance
The insert shall be considered satisfactory when the shoulder can sustain the pull- out force
of not less than 55kN without movement or cracking of concrete.
1.4 Fastener Uplift
(a) Arrangement
The testing arrangement consists of a section of rail fitted to the railseat of one rail with the
complete fastening assembly. The rail shall be supported on both sides of the sleeper and a
loading frame, with a hydraulic jack, shall apply load to both sides of the railseat at least
50mm from the outer edges of the fastening assemblies.
(b) Procedure
A load shall be applied so as to just lift the rail clear of the rail pad or the rail pad clear of
the rail seat. The load including the unsupported weight of the sleeper shall be recorded and
released.
A load equal to 1.5 times the recorded load but not exceeding 50kN shall then be applied in
the same manner.
(c) Acceptance
The sleeper and fastening shall be considered satisfactory if the fastener inserts do not pull
out or loosen, no part of the fastening system fractures, and the rail is not released.
1.5 Fatigue Resistance
(a) Arrangement
(i) The testing arrangement consists of one fully assembled sleeper or bearer with two rails
with the sleeper securely fastened to a support
(ii) A hydraulic ram shall apply vibratory loading to the rail head at 20°from vertical.
(b) Procedure
(i) The vibratory loading shall be applied to the assembly at the rate of 300 cycles per
minute with downward loading of 150 kN and upward loading of 0.6 times of the load
recorded in 3.5 above.
(ii) The loads shall be applied to three million cycles or until failure occurs.
(c) Acceptance
(i) The assembly shall be considered satisfactory when it can sustain a minimum of three
million cycles of the repetition of the loads without any defect.
(ii) The test shall be performed to failure for reference purpose.
1.6 Creep Resistance
(a) Arrangement
The testing arrangement consists of two fully assembled sleepers fixed at 600mm centers,
with two pieces of rail each of 2.0m in length fixed over the four rail seats.
(b) Procedure
A gradually increasing load shall be applied horizontally in graduated steps, in accordance
with AREMA Chapter 30-1-23, at the end of each rail and the movement is recorded. The test
records of both rails shall be averaged and taken as the result.
(c) Acceptance
The assembly shall be considered satisfactory when the creep resistance meets the
requirements of not less than 20 kN for two railseats, at not more than 5mm initial longitudinal
movement of the rail within the initial three minutes, the load is held for a further 15 minutes
and any additional movement does not exceed 0.5 mm.
1.7 Lateral Resistance
(a) Arrangement
The testing arrangement consists of a short section of rail fastened to the rail seat of one
sleeper, or bearer, with the rail fasteners.
(b) Procedure
A load shall be applied to the gauge face corner of the rail at an angle of 30° from vertical of
90 kN. This load shall then be released and the measuring equipment zeroed.
Load will then be applied at a rate of not more than 22 kN per minute until a total load of
155 kN has been applied.
(c) Acceptance
If the rail base moves laterally by 3 mm or less under 155 kN load the assembly will be
considered satisfactory.
1.8 Electrical Resistance
(a) Arrangement
The testing arrangement comprises two lengths of rail not less than 1.5 metres long fixed on
the rail seats of a concrete sleeper or bearers at 600mm centres complete with all fastening
components placed in ballast.
(b) Procedure
(i) The complete assembly shall be immersed in water for six hours. One hour after
removal a 10 Volts AC current shall be applied across the rails for 15 minutes.
(ii) An AC ammeter shall record the electric current whilst the spraying of water is being
carried out.
(iii) The electrical resistance of the assembly shall be calculated as follows;
Electrical resistance in ohms =10 / Recorded amperes
(c) Acceptance
The assembly shall be considered satisfactory when the calculated electrical resistance is
equal to or higher than 4,000 ohms or meet minimum requirements for the function of SRT’s
track Circuits.
1.9 Control of Track Gauge
An approximate 6 metres of track shall be assembled with concrete sleepers, rail fasteners and rails
for a check of track gauge.
Should the track gauge be out of tolerance, the placing and fixing of the rail fasteners in the moulds
shall be corrected. The production shall not be started until it is proved that the track gauge is
within the specified tolerance of +0.5 mm/ -1.5mm.
The surface finish and dimension of the concrete sleepers in the test length of track will be used by
the Engineer as a basis for accepting track gauge, surface finish and dimensions of production run
concrete sleepers.
8.7 BALLAST
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
This Section specifies the acceptance testing and the provision of crushed rock as track ballast for
ballasted trackwork.
2. Definitions
" Ballast" - An integral part of the ballasted track structure, comprising crushed stone, in which the
sleepers are embedded.
"Formation" - The upper surface of the finished sub-ballast layer.
" Sub- Ballast" - A layer of material superior in quality to the formation material above the
embankment soil.
"Trackbed" - Bed to support the track structure, ballast sleepers and rails, etc.
3.1 In addition to the requirements of SECTION 1- 10: QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING LABORATORY,
programme. These records will provide the objective evidence of compliance with the requirements
of the contract, and as required by the various Sections of these Specifications.
3.2 Deleterious Substances
Track ballast shall not exceed the following amounts of deleterious substances:
Table 8.7-1 Deleterious Substances
Materials % by Weight Method of Test
Soft Pieces 5.0 ASTM C235
Fines Less than No. 200 sieve 1.0 ASTM C117
Clay Lumps and Friable Particles 0.5 ASTM C142
3.3 Los Angeles Abrasion
The percentage of wear determined in accordance with ASTM C535 - grading 1 and shall not exceed 25.
3.4 Sulphate Soundness
The weighted average loss as determined in the sodium sulphate soundness test in accordance with
ASTM C88 shall not exceed 7% after 5 cycles of the test.
3.5 Ballast Weight
The weight of ballast per cubic metre shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C29.
3.6 Limits of Flakiness
The flakiness index shall be determined in accordance with BS 812 section 105. 1: 1989. Ballast is
classified as flaky when the thickness is less than 0. 6 of the nominal size. The Flakiness index must
not exceed 30% by mass.
3.7 Limits of Elongation
The Elongation Index shall be determined in accordance with BS 812 section 105. 2: 1990. Ballast is
classified as elongated when the length (greatest dimension) exceeds 1.8 times the nominal size. The
Elongation Index must not exceed 30% by mass.
3.8 Testing Laboratory

Acceptance testing of ballast shall be carried out by an approved Independent Testing Laboratory.
4. Submittals
(a) Name and address of Quarries to supply Ballast.
(b) Results of Initial Testing of Quarry materials for use as Ballast.
(c) Contractor's proposals for source Quality Control
5.1 Delivery
If material loaded or being loaded does not conform to these Specifications the Contractor shall stop
further loading until the fault has been corrected. The Engineer will reject ballast arriving at the site
for unloading that does not conform to the specifications.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that vehicles ( both road and rail) used for
transporting ballast are clean and free from contaminating material and that they are tight enough
to prevent any leakage.
Repeated loading, unloading, and reloading of ballast will not be accepted. The Contractor shall co-
ordinate his work in such a manner that a major portion of the ballast shall be placed immediately
after it has been transported from the quarry to site.
5.2 Storage
If the Contractor stores ballast, the maximum height of stockpiles shall not exceed 3 metres.
The ballast stockpile shall be built up in layers, starting from the bottom. Ballast shall not be pushed
over the edge of the stockpile. All equipment used for handling ballast on the stockpile shall be
equipped with rubber tires.
The operation of equipment on the ballast shall be kept to a minimum necessary for the efficient
handling of the ballast and the equipment shall not be operated repeatedly over the same levels of
a stockpile.
5.3 Handling
Washing is required for ballast containing soil, foreign bodies, stones covered with dust, or fines
exceeding 1%. Water used for washing should be free of salt, clean, and not contaminated.
The ballast shall be handled and loaded in such a manner that the ballast is kept clean and free
from segregation of sizes, and that abrasion of particles is minimised at all times.
Inspect and sample ballast in hoppers or stockpile for grading and visual inspection. Any ballast that
is found to be unacceptable for size or for quality shall not be accepted in track and shall be removed
completely from the track and replaced by conforming ballast.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Source Quality Control
The Contractor shall, before commencing and during the work, determine whether the rock meets the
basic requirements and shall carry out all tests specified in Part I Clause 3 above on all the faces of the
quarry. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a detailed technical report on his investigations and
on the results of the tests. The same procedure shall be followed by the Contractor during the progress
of work whenever he intends to change supply quarries or to start production from new quarries. All trial
and test samples shall be taken from conveyor belts before reaching the stockpile.
The Engineer, on the basis of the report submitted by the Contractor, shall give his approval or
otherwise to commence the supply. The Engineer's preliminary approval shall not relieve the
Contractor of his obligation to ensure that production, throughout the supply period, meets the
requirements set forth in this Specification.
2. Sampling of Ballast
2.1 Samples taken from Conveyor Belts
A minimum of 4 single samples of at least 50kg each shall be taken from the final conveyor before
stockpiling at hourly intervals and a collective sample of 4 x 50kg ( minimum) formed. An average
sample will be taken as described in item 2.4 below.
2.2 Samples to be taken from Stockpiles and Heaps
For each 5000m3 of ballast stockpiled at the quarry or the loading site, samples shall be taken as
described in this Clause for the specified tests.
A minimum of 4 single samples of at least 50kg each shall be taken form the stockpile at different
depths and a collective sample of 4 x 50kg (minimum) formed. An average sample will be taken as
described in item 2.4 hereof.
2.3 Samples Taken from Ballast Trains or Trucks
A minimum of 4 single samples shall be taken from each ballast train loaded for delivery to the site.
The samples shall be taken from different locations in the train and varying depths in the ballast cars.
An average sample will be taken as described in item 2.4 hereof.
2.4 Forming of an Average Sample
The collected single samples shall be placed on a clean smooth surface to form the collective
sample. A steel sheet, wooden plank or rubber mat shall be used as support. The collective sample
shall be mixed sufficiently by thorough shovelling. The shovelled amount is placed on top of the
pyramid to permit the material to flow down on the sides equally. The average sample will be
formed by flattening the last obtained pyramid and by cutting this are into four, and then by removing
the two opposite quarters.
The remaining amount shall be mixed and divided as described above as long as necessary to obtain
a single sample of approximately 50kg.
The samples shall be identified including the following information:
• Name of Quarry.
• Date.
• Location/Position.
• Contractor's Supervisor.
In the event of the results of the inspection and tests being unacceptable, the quantity of ballast
to which they relate shall be rejected and shall be removed from the site, unless otherwise
3. Ballast Testing
3.1 The Ballast shall be subject to, but not limited to, the following routine tests:
• Los Angeles abrasion.
• Sieve analysis.
• Limits of flakiness.
• Limits of elongation
3.2 Each 5000 cubic metres or part 5000 cubic metre tests shall be designated with a log number for
identification and reference.
4. Ballast
4.1 All ballast material shall be approved by the Engineer before being incorporated in the Works.
4.2 The ballast shall consist of crushed Granite, Basalt, Rhyolite, Quartzite, Andesite, Diorite, or Gabbro.
Weathered rock shall not be acceptable.
4.3 The ballast shall be of clean angular fragments made from hard rock and shall be free from
deleterious material and without thin or elongated pieces.
4.4 The stones shall be produced by crushing rock and shall have a high percentage of fractured faces
and be cuboid in shape.
4.5 In the crushing process secondary crushing shall be by gyroscopic crusher.
4.6 Ballast Grading
The following Ballast Grading as shown on Table 8.7-2 and Table 8-7-2a can be used as require
Table 8.7-2 Ballast Grading
Sieve Size (mm) % passing by weight
60 100
50 80 – 100
40 25 - 70
25 0 - 20
20 0-5
Table 8.7-2a Ballast Grading

Sieve Size (mm) % passing by weight
60 100
50 80 – 100
40 25 - 70
25 0 - 25
20 0-5
Remarks: In case SRT revise or update the ballast specification prior to the Project implementation,
the Contractor shall propose ballast according to the updated specification for approval by the
Engineer before using in the Project.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Ballasting
1.1 The first layer of ballast shall be placed on the formation to minimum thickness of 15cm, and shall
be compacted with a pneumatic tyred roller, except if the ballast is laid by a paving machine.
1.2 After laying the track a second ballast layer shall be placed and the cribs shall be filled, either by
trucks or rail wagons, to a height of at least 15cm above the bottom of sleepers and the width of the
ballast shoulders shall be not less than 40cm outside the ends of the sleepers.
1.3 After the second ballast layer the track shall be lifted approximately 5cm and levelled, lined and
tamped with a tamping machine.
1.4 The cribs shall once again be filled to a height of 15cm, and the ballast shoulders shall be established
to their full width.
1.5 The final levelling, lining and tamping with a tamping machine shall lift the track a further 5cm to its
final level, as closely as possible. The final, total depth of compacted ballast below the bottom of
sleepers shall be 30 cm or according to the design approved by engineer.
1.6 The final operation shall be the placing of any remaining ballast required to form the full ballast
profile and the regulating of the ballast shoulders to the final design profile.
8.8 OTHER TRACK MATERIALS AND WORKS

PART 1: DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
This Section specifies the furnishing of miscellaneous track materials: Fishplates, Fishbolts, Nuts and
Washers, Line side Markers, Rail Expansion Joints and other items.
2. Definitions
" Manufacturer" - The producer of the materials specified herein, and including the Supplier if the
context so applies.
"Contractor" - The entity signing the Contract and responsible for the performance of the work under
the Contract and including the Manufacturer if the Context so applies.
"Track Possession"- A limited period of time when operational train service is suspended to permit
work on operational railway track or tracks.
programme. These records will provide the objective evidence of compliance with the requirements
of the contract, and as required by the various Sections of these Specifications.
3.2 In additions:
(i) The Contractor shall submit the Inspection Agency's name to the Engineer for approval prior to
the commencement of manufacture.
(ii) The Contractor shall provide the Inspection Agency with reasonable access to observe
(iii) The Contractor shall, at his own expense, supply all templates and gauges, prepare and
supply all test pieces and samples of steel, sample rails and drillings and supply all labour
and apparatus for testing which may be necessary or required for carrying out the tests and
requirements of this specification, and render all reasonable assistance in making such tests.
The contractor shall also, at his own expense, supply all drillings, test pieces and samples of
steel for carrying on independent chemical analysis and tensile tests.
(iv) Before the products are submitted to inspection, all products shall be properly examined by
the Contractor's inspectors and all defective products removed and placed in separate stacks
for examination by the Inspection Agency.
3.3 The tests that shall be performed on the products are those required by the respective specifications
and carried out at the stated frequency.
3.4 Fishplates, fishbolts and nuts, and washers shall be the product of a Manufacturer who has previously
supplied track components for BS rail sections.
3.5 Tolerances
(a) Dimensional tolerances for fishplates:
• Length: + 1.6mm
• Hole diameter: +0.8mm - 0.0mm
• Relative position of hole: + 0.8mm
• Squaring of ends horizontally and vertically: 0.4mm
(b) Dimensional Tolerances for Fishbolts:
• Diameter of fishbolt: + 0.8mm - 0.5mm
• Length of bolt: + 3.0mm
• Length of screwed portion of bolt: + 5.0mm
• Thickness of head: + 1.0mm
• Thickness of nut: + 1.0mm
4. Derailment Guards
4.1 General
Derailment devices shall be installed on bridges tracks as specified in this Clause and shown on the
Drawings. The device has to be strong enough to resist all forces produced by derailed vehicles. The
gaps between the running edge of the running rail to the neighbouring edge of the guide rails shall
be 180mm. Rail head level of both the running rail and the guide rail shall be the same. The
minimum pull-in range is to be 5.0m.
4.2 Drawings
The Contractors is to submit with his tender, complete drawings showing the system with all major
components, especially the fastenings, together with a detailed description of the components and
their function.
5. Submittals
5.1 Name, address and experience of each Manufacturer or supplier of track materials covered by this
specification together with Manufacturer's product data and technical specification.
5.2 Name, address and experience of an independent Inspection Agency engaged by the Manufacturer
where required by the specifications herein to perform:
• Witness manufacture.
• Monitor testing.
5.3 From each Manufacturer a Certificate of Compliance with the requirements of this specification.
5.4 In the case of level crossing blocks the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the
following:
(a) A description of the method of manufacturing, including, but not limited to:
• the method of securing the reinforcing and the inserts;
• a description of the concrete mixing, transporting, placing, vibrating, and curing
• the de-moulding procedure;
• transport and storage methods and equipment;
• and such other information as is pertinent to the process.
(b) Design mix and test reports of the trial proportions and the proposed mixture to be employed
for the work ( this shall give ample time for review prior to pre- production stage for the
concrete blocks).
(c) Details of the precasting yard layout, stacking yard and curing methods used in casting beds
and stacking yard. Handling, lifting arrangements at plant and on site.
(d) Copies of all material and production test results and equipment calibration certificates.
(e) Detailed programme for the Contractor's method of work at each level crossing where total
road closure during the "window" cannot be obtained.
(f) Detailed method statement for the raising of road surfaces in the different materials. Including
list of construction plant to be used.
6.1 Delivery
(a) Packaged products shall be delivered in the Manufacturer's original unopened packaging
clearly labelled with the contents, number, and type.
(b) Loose materials shall be delivered such that there is no segregation in transportation.
6.2 All fishplates shall be thoroughly cleaned, after which they shall be dipped in hot boiled linseed oil
or other approved composition before being bundled.
All finished fishbolts and nuts shall be clean, free from rust and oiled before being packed.
6.3 Handling
(a) All packages shall be handled in such a manner as to prevent damage to the containers and
contents.
(b) Equipment shall not be operated repeatedly over stockpiles of loose materials.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Fishplates
1.1 Fishplates shall conform to the requirements of UIC 864- 4 for EN 54E1 rails and SRT Standard
Specification for Steel Fishplates for EN 54E1 Rails.
(a) Steel shall be a chemical composition conforming to the following limits by weight.
Carbon: 0.3 - 0.42%
Manganese: Not to exceed 0.80%
Silicon: Not to exceed 0.15%
Phosphorous: Not to exceed 0.075%
Sulphur: Not to exceed 0.075%
These limits apply in ladle and all check analyses.
(b) Manufacture shall be either Oxygen, Open Hearth - Basic, or Electric-arc process. The process
shall not be changed during manufacture.
(c) Rolled fishplates shall have a minimum tensile strength of 600N/mm2.
1.2 Branding
Branding Marks shall be in suitable sized characters on such form and size and in such a position,
clear of the bearing on the fishbolts heads and nuts, that the characters can be seen when the
fishplate is fixed in place.
The sequence of brand marks reading from left to right shall be:
(a) Manufacturer's mark.
(b) Year of manufacture.
(c) Number of month in Roman Letters.

(d) Steel making process:
• Oxygen.
• Open Hearth-Basic.
• Electric-arc.
(e) EN 54E1
(f) SRT
Each component of the brand mark shall be demarcated by a hyphen.
1.3 Finish
(a) All fishplates shall be cut by sawing to the specified length and straightened. Straightening
shall be done either cold or hot by gradual pressure and without impact.
(b) The ends shall be square and all burrs removed.
(c) Holes for fishbolts shall be drilled through the fishplates when cold. A jig shall be used and
all holes drilled in one operation. Holes shall be clean without burrs on either side, accurate
in pitch, and exactly in the position and the dimensions shown. Size and position of holes
shall be checked by means of gauges approved by the Inspection Agency.
1.4 Weight
Five percent of each batch of fishplates shall be weighed, and the average weight determined. The
average weight shall not be more than 2 percent above or below the calculated weight. Should the
weight exceed the limits the fishplates are liable to rejection.
1.5 Acceptance of Fishplates
All acceptance inspection shall be carried out by SRT Inspectors on Site.
(a) All results of chemical analyses and mechanical tests on the casts of fishplates to be
inspected, together with a report of the Manufacturer's rejections, shall be submitted to the
Inspection Agency and to SRT's inspectors before the final inspection takes place.
(b) Fishplates from each cast shall be kept separate until the analysis, tests and inspection have
been completed and the results have been approved by the Inspection Agency.
(c) Five percent of each batch of the finished fishplates presented for inspection at any one time
shall be taken at random for dimensional inspection. If the tolerances are exceeded the batch
shall not be accepted.
2. Fishbolts and Nuts
2.1 Fishbolts and nuts shall conform to the quality requirements of UIC 864- 4 to the sizes required by
the Manufacturers design.
High strength bolts shall conform to BS 1083, Appendix A. High strength friction grip bolts shall
conform to UIC 864-4. Nuts for HT bolts shall be proprietary lock nuts with appropriate threads.
Fishbolts and nuts shall be hot forged from steel of the best quality made by Oxygen or Open
Hearth ( acid or basic) or other approved process providing a tensile strength in the range 540 to
650N/mm2 for bolts and 460 to 620N/mm2 for nuts.
The head of the bolts shall be marked with the initial SRT and the Manufacturer's initial in raised
letters.
2.2 Finish
(a) Bolts shall be accurately made to the required dimensions, shall be straight with round shanks
and well finished. The head shall be well formed and concentric with the body of the bolt
and the underface shall be at right angles to the axis of the bolt.
(b) Nuts shall be accurately made to the required dimensions and shall have faces at right angles
to the axis of the thread and the holes truly central.
(c) Screw thread for bolts and nuts shall be to ISO metric type and all dimensions conforming
strictly to the latest Specification. All bolts and nuts shall be interchangeable and nuts shall
fit properly on the bolts without any under-force and not too tightly or too loosely.
2.3 Tolerance
Nuts and bolts shall be selected at random and if 10% from any shipment do not fit properly the
shipment shall be rethreaded and made correct.
3. Washers
Spring washers shall be manufactured to the quality of BS 1802 Steel Spring Washers for General
Engineering and Automobile Purposes Table 5 type 'C' Heavy Series.
4. Line Side Markers
4.1 General
The Contractor shall supply line side markers in both steel and concrete for: Track Alignment,
Kilometre Posts, Half Kilometre Posts, Limit of Shunt Marks, Clearance Posts, Road Signs.
4.2 Supply of Material
(a) Salvaged rail from demolished trackwork may be used by the Contractor.
(b) Precast reinforced concrete shall conform to the requirement specified in Specifications
SECTION 4-4: PRECAST CONCRETE.
(c) Steel pipe and carbon steel sheet shall comply with the relevant TIS.
4.3 Marker Requirements
(a) Track Alignment
The pegs shall be painted on the top surface and the rail foot facing the track as follows:
(i) straights: white.
(ii) curves: red.
(iii) transition curves: yellow with black figures indicating the cant in mm.
(iv) vertical curves: green.
(v) bridges: marking shall be made by paint marks on the concrete
structure as directed by the Engineer.
(b) Concrete Posts
Kilometer, Half Kilometer, Clearance Posts, Limit of Shunt, etc. , shall be in accordance with
SRT standard drawings.
(i) Letters and figures shall be according to the SRT standard.
(ii) Paint shall be applied in 2 coats of the indicated colour by use of Snowcem concrete
paint or similar quality.
(c) Road Signs and Crossings
At grade road crossing signboards and marking of the road surface shall be supplied and
placed by the Contractor as shown in the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
4.4 Tests
Tests shall be performed as described in Specifications Section 4-3: CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
5. Derailment Guards
5.1 The following additional components to those already specified for ballasted tracks are required:
(a) Salvaged BS 80 or BS100A rail. These rails shall be called guard rails and are considered to be
an integral part of the tracks on bridges.
(b) Rail fastening system as specified in SECTION 8- 5: RAIL FASTENING SYSTEM, but modified in
order to accommodate both the running as well as the guide rail. The modified fastening
system shall be installed on every second sleeper.
5.2 Fastenings
(a) The guide rail fastening shall not require drilling or welding of the guide rail and such fastening
shall consist of the same components as used for the running rail.
(b) The Contractor's proposed derailment guide rail baseplates shall be subject to testing to the
satisfaction of the Engineer to ensure they shall not break at midpoint under service
conditions.
6. Rail Expansion Joints (REJ)
6.1 REJ Design
Design loads shall be 20 tonnes axles at 160 kph. The Contractor shall prepare detailed designs and
setting out drawings of REJ. The design and drawings provided by the qualified Manufacturer shall
have the consent of the Engineer prior to the commencement of the manufacture of the REJ. Principal
dimensions of REJ shall conform to the dimensional requirements of EN 54E1 rails. Maximum and
minimum expansion and contraction of REJ shall be computed from the longitudinal thermal forces
developed in the Continuous Welded Rail ( CWR) on adjacent steel bridge to which REJ shall be
installed. The drawings of the REJ panel, inner and outer tongue rails shall provide adequate
information for the Engineer to check dimensions, clearances tolerances and other relevant
information. Inner and outer tongue rail displacement shall be between 1- 2 mm. The monoblock
concrete sleepers shall be designed to fit with all the steel components of REJ.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. General
Installation of trackwork materials is described in SECTION 8-11 TRACKLAYING.
2. Acceptance
Products shall conform to the acceptance requirements of the respective specifications. Acceptance
shall be carried out by the Engineer and the SRT Inspection Committee.
3. Line Side Markers
3.1 Track Alignment Setting out
(a) The alignment and the elevation of the track shall be indicated by 1 m long pieces of old
rails ( 50- 80 lb rail section) driven into formation to such depth that the top of the peg is
about 80 mm above top of running rail.
(b) On curves the pegs shall be on the inner side and indicate the level of the low rail.
(c) Pegs shall not be permanently installed in the yard or by turnouts.
(d) The pegs shall have the foot of the rail facing the track.
(e) A saw-cut in the edge of the rail foot shall indicate the level of top of rail.
(f) A saw- cut in the rail web shall indicate the distance 2,000mm from track centerline. The
alignment saw- cut shall on straight lines be located by use of theodolite or similar accurate
survey instrument.
(g) On curves including transition curves the final adjustment of the track alignment and the
alignment marks shall be made by measuring with string line on 20m chords and regularization
of the versines by the plus and minus method.
(h) The tolerance on alignment and levels is +5mm respectively.
3.2 Spacing
The spacing of alignment pegs shall be:
(a) Standard Interval:
• Straights 50 m, Curves of 800 m radius and above: 20 m,
• Curves of below 800m radius: 10m.
• Beginning of transition curves.
• End of transition curves.
(b) Vertical Curves:
• Commencement.
• Gradient Intersection.
• Termination.
3.3 Concrete Posts
Precast reinforced concrete line side marker posts shall be placed by the Contractor according to
the drawings and the instructions of the Engineer.
4. (Not Used)
5. Rail Expansion Joint (REJ)
5.1 Furnishing and installation of REJ shall conform to the requirements of SECTION 8: TRACKWORK.
5.2 REJ furnishing includes: machined tongue rails, all rail joints, base plates, inserts and fasteners, track
pads, insulators, slide chairs, blocks, nuts, bolts, and spring and plain washers; furnishing of shop
drawings, material lists and assembly instructions.
5.3 Installation of the assembled REJ and jointed track shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and the relevant Specifications.
6. Guarantee
6.1 The Contractor shall guarantee the materials herein against all defects attributable to faulty
manufacture, workmanship and quality of material requiring withdrawal from service until one year
after the end of the Defects Liability Period. The SRT record of materials replacement shall be
accepted by the Contractor in this connection.
6.2 Materials that fail in service before the expiration of the Defects Liability Period shall be replaced free
of charge. The cost of installing replacement track materials shall be borne by the Contractor. The
defective materials withdrawn from service shall be handed over at site to the Contractor for his
disposal off railway property.
during which period, the Contractor shall inspect the materials, make his observations and carry out
6.4 Patent Rights
The patent rights of the materials and the design and drawings shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor who will indemnify the Employer against any claim in this connection.
8.9 RAIL WELDING

PART 1 DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
This Section describes the requirements for Shop Welding and Site Welding. Work Includes: Flash-
Butt, gas pressure and thermit methods.
2. Definitions
"Continuous Welded Rail" - (CWR) Standard rails welded into a single string.
"Long Welded Rail" - (LWR) Standard rails welded into a rail panel of not less than 150 m., preferably
250 m.
“Shop Welding" - Means the welding of rails under factory conditions into LWR and then transporting
the rail on special rail vehicles and off-loading at the site of installation.
"Site Welding" - Means the welding at site of either individual rails or LWR into CWR by Gas pressure,
Thermit or Mobile Flash Butt Methods.
3.1 In addition to the requirements of SECTION 1- 10 the Contractor shall maintain adequate records in
accordance requirements of his quality assurance programme. These records will provide the
objective evidence of compliance with the requirements of the contract, and as required by this
Specification.
3.2 All welding operators and ultrasonic test personnel shall be certified. Welders recruited in Thailand
shall be trained at the site for a minimum of four weeks by certified instructors from the welding
equipment manufacturer. Qualification of all welders shall be approved by the Engineer
3.3 The Contractor shall provide continual supervision and tests of all rail welding and handling, including
that performed by subcontractors, in order to assure the Engineer of conformity to applicable
standards, specifications, and drawings with respect to materials, workmanship, fabrication, and
identification. The programme shall specifically provide for:
(a) Inspection procedures, testing, acceptance criteria, and records.
(b) Production equipment and instrument calibration, maintenance, and data recording.
(c) Failure reporting and corrective action.
3.4 Tolerances
Weld alignment for shop and site welds measured at a point 500mm on either side of the centre of
the weld:
(a) Horizontal: Maximum deviation from straight measured on the gauge face of the rail head: ±
0.5mm over a length of 1000mm
(b) Vertical: Maximum deviation from flat after grinding on rail head: 0 to + 0.4mm over a length
of 1000mm.
4. Qualification of Welders
4.1 Each welding team, including the welding foreman or supervisor for that crew, shall be pre-qualified
to perform rail end cutting, cleaning, welding and finishing.
(a) The welding of a test sample shall be done in accordance with the approved procedure and
welding specification and will be witnessed by the Engineer.
(b) The qualification weld shall meet the requirements of these specifications, subsection 6 -
Approval of Shop Welding Procedures, of Part I herein, and sub-section 5 -Finishing, of Part III.
The qualification weld shall also meet the Brinell hardness requirements and be ultrasonically
tested.
(c) Submit three copies of the welder qualification test report to the Engineer for approval.
4.2 The test report shall include the names, experience and duties of the team that performed the weld.
4.3 The Engineer reserves the right to require the re- qualification, at the Contractor's expense, of any
welding team whose work fails to meet the specified requirements.
4.4 All welding shall be performed under the direct supervision of an experienced welding foreman or supervisor.
5. Submittals - Shop Welding
Before any test welding commences the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in accordance with
SECTION 1-4: SUBMITTALS
5.1 Pre-production
(a) Welding plant site requirements for rail welding at Contractor's depot. Plan for storage of rails
before welding and for LWR.
(b) Welding plant location, methods of rail transportation, conversion of wagons.
(c) Welding machine standards of performance as determined by the Manufacturer.
(d) Welding procedure, welding team data, equipment description, calibration methods, grinding
and rail straightening method.
(e) Ultrasonic inspection procedure, equipment description and calibration methods.
(f) Procedure for defective weld cut-out and rewelding.
(g) Platen movement and current impulses for each flash-butt weld.
(h) Test method and report.
5.2 During Production
a) Ultrasonic inspection records of each weld for inspections conducted prior to installation.
b) Daily calibration of ultrasonic inspection equipment.
c) Inspection records of each weld for straightness as per AREMA documentary requirements
and the specification.
d) Reports of other tests required.
6. Approval of Shop Welding Procedures
6.1 General
(a) The welding of individual rails into LWR shall be done by shop welding and thereafter the
LWR shall be transported to the site and be positioned to be welded into CWR by site welding,
except where all the welding will be carried out by a specialist internationally recognised
welding company using trained and fully experienced personnel.
(b) Upon approval of the Engineer of the proposed shop welding procedures make test welds in
the presence of the Engineer, using the same method and procedure proposed for production
welding, The Contractor shall furnish all rail needed to prepare the test welds.
6.2 Shop Test Welds
The Contractor shall prepare eight welds in the as welded condition before any trimming or other
finishing work is undertaken.
(a) Weld trimming:

All welds in the " as welded" condition are measured to determine the maximum upset. In
addition the welds are inspected for evidence of tearing, undercut or damage to the rail.
(b) Welded Joint Alignment:
All welds are to be finished and are all to comply with specified straightness criteria.
(c) Weld Appearance:
All finished welds are inspected visually and using ultrasonic detection around the ground
surface.
(d) Bend testing:
Two finished welds are tested with rail foot in tension to failure. All to exceed minimum
criteria for relevant section and grade.
(e) Fatigue Testing:
Two finished welds are tested at fixed load range, to exceed 2 x 105 cycles. A further two
finished welds to be tested at a range of loads, as specified by the Engineer.
(f) Macro Examination/Hardness Testing:
Two welds to be prepared for macro examination and hardness testing in accordance with BS 427.
6.3 Upon completion of the weld tests, submit a report describing the methods and procedures used
and test results for the approval of the Engineer before the commencement of any shop production
welding. The report shall include a description of the remedial measures required to prevent
reoccurrence of defective welds.
7. Submittals - Site Welding
7.1 Pre-production
(a) Method Statement.
The Contractor shall prepare for the Engineer's approval a detailed method statement
covering the step by step procedures to be employed in making the site welds by thermit,
flash- butt, or gas pressure methods. A complete description of each of the following items
and any other essential characteristics shall be included in the method statement:
(i) method of rail distribution;
(ii) manufacturer's trade name for the welding process;
(iii) method used for cutting and cleaning the rail ends;
(iv) minimum and maximum gap between rail ends;
(v) method used for adjusting the rails in alignment before welding;
(vi) method used for maintaining the rails in alignment during welding;
(vii) method used for preheating including time and temperature;
(viii) method used to ensure the rail flange does not distort under heat or pressure;
(ix) method used for measuring the correct pre-heat temperature;
(x) for thermit welds the tapping procedure, including the minimum time required to cool
the weld under the mould insulation;
(xi) for flash butt and gas pressure welding method used to permit rail movement under
forging process;
(xii) method used, including a description of special tools and equipment, for removing
upset, or excess, weld metal and finishing the weld to the final rail head contour;
(xiii) method of measuring straightness of rail after welding and grinding;
(xiv) ultrasonic inspection procedure;

(b) Site welding procedure qualification test records.
(c) Site welders qualification test records.
(d) Procedure for defective weld cut out and rewelding.
7.2 During production
Same as 5.2 of Part I
8. Approval of Site Welding Procedures
8.1 Upon approval by the Engineer of the proposed welding procedures make test welds in the presence
of the Engineer using the approved procedures to be used for production welding.
8.2 Site Weld Test Samples
(a) Gas Pressure weld, Flash- Butt, and Thermit weld testing shall be the same as described for
Shop welding in Clause 6 hereof.
(b) If a defective weld is detected in the test series, the welding procedure shall be modified and
the test series repeated on new sample rails until the test samples are acceptable.
8.3 The Brinell hardness of the weld measured on the head of the rail in the centre of the weld shall be
equal to the hardness of the adjoining rail plus or minus 20 Brinell hardness number.
8.4 Upon completion of the test welds submit a report describing the methods and procedure used and
the test results for the Engineer's approval prior to production welding.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Materials
1.1 Rails shall comply with the requirements of SECTION 8-1 RAILS.
1.2 The welding equipment provided by the Contractor for his use on this contract shall be purpose built
for the welding of rails and suitable for EN 54E1 rail sections.
1.3 Thermit Welding
(a) Thermit welding portions shall consist of one portion of welding material necessary to
execute one thermit weld. The welding material portion shall be suitable for welding with a
normal welding gap as recommended by the manufacturer for UIC 860 wear resistant Grade
A rail.
(b) The Contractor shall produce evidence that the portions foreseen to be used are of a type
accepted by major world railways for performing welds on mainline tracks and EN 54E1rail
as specified. The manufacturer must have ISO 9000 or equivalent accreditation.
(c) The portions shall be packed in sea water tight sealed bags marked with identification:
• type of weld;
• type of rail;
• type of rail steel.
Particular care will be taken in the storage of the weld portions and only portions from
unopened and undamaged bags shall be used to produce field welds. No mixing or
remeasuring of weld portions shall be permitted.
1.4 Industrial gases used for preheating shall be standard products readily available in Thailand produced
to recognised quality standards and determined calorific values suitable for the application.
2. Straightness Measurement Device

Provide at least two rail head measurement devices for the recording of welding alignments.
Recordings shall be provided for an immediate visual check and also a permanent record either by
electronic or trace means. The measuring length shall be 1,000mm. The device shall also be
capable of recording dipped rail joints.
PART ILL: EXECUTION
1. General
1.1. All running rail shall be continuous welded except where otherwise required as described in SECTIONS
8-8 and 8-10.
Where rail end tolerances are exceeded cut rail ends square and clean by means of either rail saws
or abrasive cutting disk. Flame cutting of rail ends is not permitted.
1.2 All welds shall be located at the midpoint between sleepers.
2. Shop Welding
2.1 Long welded rail strings shall be shop welded into lengths of at least 150m except that, where the
spacing of glued insulated joints is less than the minimum specified length, the rail shall be shop
welded into lengths which require a minimum of site welds. The number of site welds in a string of
CWR shall be minimised.
(a) Continuous welded rail shall be fabricated from rails with a nominal length of 25 m.
(b) The normal number of manufacturer generated short rails shall be accepted as described in
SECTION 8-1: RAILS.
(c) The shortest rail welded into LWR shall be 9 metres.
(d) Welding shall be by flash butt or gas pressure welding.
2.2 When all specified approvals have been received, welding may commence as soon as sufficient rail
is available. However, no rail string containing short rails may be welded until all running rail has been
received.
2.3 Marking
After welding, the string designation shall be marked on each end of each string with a paint that is
suitable for application to steel and is weather resistant for a period of two years. In addition, a
marking shall be made to distinguish between the two ends.
2.4 Rail Straightness
All rails shall be inspected before welding. Rails having vertical or horizontal misalignment at the
ends such that the alignment tolerances for rails cannot be achieved in the rail after welding shall
be rejected.
2.5 Manufacture
(a) Remove rust and mill scale on the head, base and ends of the rail down to bare metal for a
length of 150 millimetres from the rail end or as recommended by the manufacturer.
(b) Remove burrs, rust, and mill scale from the area where the welding current-electrodes contact
the head and base of the rail.
(c) Forge the electric- flash butt weld to the point of refusal of further plastic deformation. The
upset weld shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. The upset
cylinder shall not bottom out during the upset portion of the weld cycle.
(d) When the weld has solidified shear off the upset weld metal while the weld is still hot. Leave
about 1mm of weld upset proud of the rail.
2.6 Post- weld straightening will be permitted only when the rail temperature has reached ambient
temperature.
2.7 The alignment of the completed weld shall conform to the requirements of Clause 4 below.
2.8 After pressing the rail shall be firstly rough ground followed by final grinding to specified tolerances.
2.9 All welding shall be ultrasonically inspected in accordance with ASTM E164 prior to installation. Each
completed weld shall have full penetration and complete fusion and be entirely free of flaws when
subject to the specified inspection.
2.10 Welding records shall be provided by the Contractor which shall be continuously maintained to record:
(a) date and time;
(b) weld number;
(c) contractor's Foreman;
(d) weld method;
(e) Ultrasonic inspection records of each weld
(f) Inspection records of each weld for straightness as per AREMA documentary requirements.
(g) Daily calibration of ultrasonic inspection equipment.
3. Site Welding
In general thermit welding will be permitted for welding LWR into CWR only. Electric flash butt or
gas pressure welding may be permitted in exceptional cases.
3.1 End Preparation
The ends of the rails to be welded shall be cleaned to remove all grease, oil, dirt, loose scale, rust
and moisture. The cleaned area shall extend at least 150 millimetres back from the rail ends and
shall include all of the rail surfaces. A new rail end face shall be made where there is a pulling hole
or fishbolt holes in the rail. The new rail end shall be 25mm from the hole( s) , away from the rail
end and perpendicular to rail.
3.2 Alignment
(a) The ends of the rails to be welded shall be properly gapped and aligned and clamped in a
rail jig to produce a weld which will conform to the alignment tolerances. The rail alignment
shall be held without change during the complete site welding cycle.
(b) Thermit welds shall be aligned, before welding, so that the rail gap is higher relative to datum
points 500mm either side of the gap as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.3 Preheating
(a) The rail ends shall be preheated prior to welding according to the weld manufacturer's
requirements and to a sufficient temperature and for sufficient time to ensure full fusion.
(b) Preheating shall continue until the process manufacturer's recommended working temperature
has been achieved. This temperature shall be determined by the use of suitable temperature
indicating crayons.
3.4 Flash butt or Gas Pressure Welds
(a) Forge the weld to the point of refusal of further plastic deformation. The upset weld shall be
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. The upset cylinder shall not bottom
out during the upset portion of the weld cycle.
(b) Shear off the upset weld metal while the weld is still hot.
(c) Post- weld straightening shall be carried out after verification of tolerances by a rail head
measurement device.
3.5 Thermit Welds

Thermit moulds shall be left in place after tapping according to the weld manufacturer's instructions
and for a minimum of five minutes to permit complete solidification of the molten metal and proper
slow cooling to prevent cracking and provide a completed weld with the proper hardness and
ductility. Shear off the surplus weld metal while the weld is still hot.
3.6 Weld Finishing and Tolerances
The completed weld shall be finished by mechanically controlled grinding to conform to the
requirements of Clause 5 below.
3.7 Weld Quality
Inspect 100% of welds by ultrasonic inspection in accordance with ASTM E164. Each completed
weld shall have full penetration and complete fusion and be entirely free of cracks. All welds giving
fault indication shall be cut out and the rails rewelded according to these specifications.
3.8 Hardness
The hardness of the weld measured on the head of the rail in the centre of the weld shall be equal
to the Brinell hardness of the parent metal with a tolerance of plus or minus 20 Brinell hardness
numbers.
3.9 Site welding records shall be provided by the Contractor. The site welding record shall be
continuously maintained to record details of site welding as follows:
(a) date and time;
(b) location by chainage and weld number;
(c) contractor's Foreman;
(d) Engineer's representative;
(e) weather, air and rail temperature;
(f) weld method;
(g) results of ultrasonic testing.
(h) Ultrasonic inspection records of each weld
Inspection records of each weld for straightness as per AREMA documentary requirements.
(i) Daily calibration of ultrasonic inspection equipment.
3.10 Weather Conditions
During rainy weather, site welding is permitted only under cover. The Contractor shall guarantee
that crucibles, moulds, thimbles, portions etc., remain completely dry during the entire operation.
3.11 Passing Traffic
Traffic must not be allowed to pass over newly welded joints until:
• trimming is complete and weld has cooled sufficiently;
• 30 minutes has elapsed since the weld was made;
• speed is restricted to 10 km/h until final profile grinding is complete.
4. Alignment of Rail
4.1 The requirements of this clause shall apply to both shop and site welds.
(a) Alignment of the rail shall be done on the top of the head and the gauge face of the rail.
(b) Vertical alignment shall provide fora flat running surface. Any difference of height of the rails
shall be in the base.
In compromise rail welds, the gauge sides of the rails shall be in alignment.
5. Finishing
5.1 The sides of the rail head shall be finished to +0.5mrn of the parent section. The bottom of rail base
shall be finished to within 0 to + 0.5mm of the lower rail.
5.2 The web zone ( underside of head, web, top of base, both fillets each side) shall be finished to not
greater than 4mm of parent contour or closer but shall not be deeper than parent section. Finishing
shall eliminate all cracks and porosity.
5.3 All notches created by offset conditions or twisted rail shall be eliminated by grinding to blend the
variations. All fins on the weld due to grinding drag shall be removed. Final grinding shall allow no
more than a maximum deviation of 0.25mm from a smooth surface.
6. Testing
For every 1,000 flash butt and gas pressure welds, two specimens of slow bending test are to be
carried out as directed by the Engineer. The test piece shall be taken from the works and be 1. 3m
long with the weld located at midpoint. The rail shall be supported on cylindrical bearings spaced
1. 0m apart. The load shall be slowly applied on the rail head ( HU) and bottom ( HD) side of the
weld and the deflection of the weld portion shall be continuously recorded.
Apply the test load, without shock, at a maximum loading rate of between 4. 5 and 5 kN and record
continuously the load and deflection of the rail at midspan throughout the test until failure.
Table 8.9.1: Minimum Bending strength and Deflection Criteria
Rail Flash Butt Gas Pressure Thermit
BS 80A HU 70 - 25 70 - 25 55 -10
HD 65 - 20 65 - 20 55 - 13
BS100A HU 100 - 25 75 - 25 80 -10
EN 54E1 HD 90 - 20 75 - 20 80 - 13
(Load, ton - Deflection, m)
Test report shall be as follows:
(a) Date of testing
(b) Name of Testing Agency.
(c) Reference to the test method.
(d) Midspan deflection at the specified elastic response load
(e) Midspan deflection at the specified minimum break load
(f) Load and midspan deflection at failure
(g) Condition of fracture face.
(h) Other as required.
8.10 RAIL JOINTS

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
This Section specifies the provision and testing of Standard Joints and Glued Insulated Joints. Joint
components shall be ready made for assembly at the depot site prior to installation.
Work Includes: Pre-qualification and testing of crews.
2. Definitions
" Standard Glued Joint" - A fishplated joint that uses a fast setting epoxy resin compound as the
bonding adhesive.
" Glued Insulated Joint" - A glued joint with electrical isolation provided at specific locations for
railway signalling.
"Mechanical Insulated Joint" - An insulated joint without glue used under temporary conditions only.
To be replaced by a permanent joint within 48 hours.
assurance programme. These records will provide the objective evidence of compliance with the
requirements of the contract, and as required by this Specification.
3.2 Glued Joint systems shall have an extensive, proven, in- service history of at least 5 years in at least
five railway systems.
3.3 Installation teams shall be pre- qualified in accordance with the requirements of the tests specified
herein.
(a) Each crew and its foreman shall be qualified for installing glued joints by testing one sample of
each type of glued joint in accordance with the longitudinal compression test specified hereof.
(b) Failure of a test sample disqualifies the responsible foreman for permanent installation work.
3.4 Tolerances
(a) Dimensional tolerances shall not exceed the tolerances for each product specified in this
Section or in the Drawings of SRT Standards.
(b) Where no tolerances are stated the accepted tolerances shall be those of normal commercial
standards for the product.
4. Submittals
(a) Name, address and evidence of each manufacturer's product experience together with
Manufacturer's product data and technical specification. Material shall include information
on procedure for "breaking" a bonded joint.
(b) Shop drawings and product data for both types of joint.
(c) From each Manufacturer a Certificate of Compliance with the requirements of this
specification.
(d) Name, address and experience of an independent Inspection Agency engaged by the
Contractor to conduct the tests required by the specifications hereof.
(e) Test results for glued insulated joints and standard joints.
(f) Crew qualification test results.

5.1 Delivery
(a) Packaged products shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original unopened packaging
5.2 Storage
(a) Products shall be stored off the ground with packages under cover and out of direct
sunlight.
(b) Loose materials shall be carefully stored to prevent segregation and be kept free of
contamination from earth and other foreign contaminants.
5.3 Handling
(a) All packages shall be handled in such a manner as to prevent damage to the containers and
contents.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Joint Criteria
Minimum criteria applicable to IRJ's shall be as follows:
- Tensile strength not lower than 98,000 PSI
- Bending strength not lower than 98,000 PSI
- Compressive strength not lower than 98,000 PSI
- Axle Load not lower than 20 Tons
- Bending / Breaking force not lower than 250 KN
- Elongation not lower than 20 %
- Bolts High Tensile strength
2. Joint Requirements
The Contractor shall arrange any cutting of the rail and provision of all new insulated rail joints that
are required.
2.1 The preferred method for assembling glued joints shall be at the Site Depot, where the joint shall be
installed between two lengths of EN 54E1 rail at least 4.5m each, and after curing installation at site
by welding.
All joints in the main line and in turn-outs shall be depot made glued joints of a type able to withstand
the high tension and compression stresses inherent in continuously welded track and shall be subject
to the specific approval of the Engineer.
Insulated rail joints within non-welded track such as station tracks and sidings may be of the non-glued
type, but must in any case utilise steel-bar fishplates within the construction to provide the required
strength and durability. Insulated rail joints shall not be installed between rail of different section.
2.2 Joints may be installed at site only under individually approved circumstances by the Engineer.
2.4 Glued Insulated Joints for track circuits shall be provided at locations specified in SECTION 10
SIGNALLING
2.5 Standard Joints shall be provided in turnouts for joining the turnout components, but permit
components to be changed by "breaking" the bond.
2.6 The design of joints must permit the epoxy glue to flow into the bolt hole and around the insulating
ferule to firmly secure the bolt and ferrule in the holes in the rail and fishplate.
2.7 A set of ready-made parts for assembly for one joint shall include:
• 2 No. Rolled steel joint bars ( fishplates) purpose made to accommodate the rail
fastening system selected;
• 4 or 6 No. Non-shouldered multiple groove locking (MGL) pins with standard collars; or Tension
Control Bolts (TCBs) Grade S10T;
• 2 component epoxy resin glue compound;
and additionally for insulated joints:
• 4 or 6 No. Insulating ferrules;
• 1 No. Insulating end post;
• 2 No. Glass fibre epoxy resin coated insulating medium.
3. Glued Insulated and Standard Joints
3.1 Fishplates shall be 4 or 6 hole type manufactured from UIC Code 864- 4 quenched and tempered
carbon steel. Each fishplate shall be branded with stamped characters on the exposed face of the
bar. The characters shall read SRT EN 54E1 as appropriate. The fishplates shall be provided with
specially prepared rail fastening cut-outs.
3.2 Glued Joint Adhesive - The Contractor shall demonstrate that the adhesive to be used for fabrication
of the Glued Standard Joint and the Glued Insulated Joint has a proven life in service in excess of 20
years. The adhesive shall also have properties such that the joints will satisfy the requirements of
the tests described in Clause 3 hereof.
3.3 High strength bolts, either threaded or pin type, shall comply with the requirements of BS 4604.
3.4 Washers shall comply with the requirements of BS 1802.
3.5 Insulating material shall be high pressure, laminated design, impervious to oil, grease, and water, and
shall pass the electrical resistance test specified in Clause 3 hereof.
4. Joint Qualification Tests
4.1 In lieu of qualification testing the Contractor may submit certification by an independent testing
laboratory that the joints have passed the tests specified in this Section or equivalent tests.
4.2 Test sequences
(a) Testing shall not commence until the Engineer has approved products, shop drawings and
installation procedures.
(b) Assemble two each of joint test specimens complete, in accordance with Manufacturer's
instructions, using two pieces each of EN 54E1 rail, one piece 600mm long, the other
1,000mm long.
(c) Test specimens shall first be subject to the electrical resistance test (insulated joint only)
followed by the longitudinal compression test on one specimen and the stroke rolling
load test on the other.
4.3 Test Results
(a) The contractor shall propose a factory testing procedure criteria which will demonstrate that
the electrical resistance requirements in the Train Control and Signalling System will be met
by the Insulator Joints.
(b) Stroke Rolling Load Test.
(i) The joint shall show no evidence of failure by bending of the joint after
2,000,000 cycles.
(ii) Deflection over the joint shall be equal or less than 1.65mm.
(c) Joint compression test
(i) No indication of slippage of rail joint before total test load reaches 250,000 kilograms.
(ii) Not more than 3mm of any movement in the joint.
(iii) Not more than 0. 8mm of differential movement between the original position of
fishplates and rail and the final position after the test load has been released.
(d) The joint shall withstand, without showing any slippage or cracking and without loss of
insulation, a 100 tonne tensile load.
PART III: EXECUTION
1. Assembly
Rail joints shall be end hardened as described in SECTION 8-11: TRACK LAYING.
1.1 Holes for bolts shall be drilled through in one operation using a jig. The fishplates shall not be used
as a jig. Holes shall not be formed by using high speed drills.
(a) Holes shall be clean without burrs on either side, accurate in pitch, and exactly in position and
dimensions required.
(b) Size and position of holes shall be checked by means of gauges.
(c) Holes shall be reamed and chamfered. Broaching is not acceptable.
(d) Holes shall be cold expanded.
(e) Remove all rail drillings from site.
1.2 Preparation
(a) Joints shall be prepared in the Site Depot or in a factory.
(b) End-harden rail ends as specified in SECTION 8-11: TRACK LAYING.
(c) Calibrate bolt or pin-tightening equipment.
(d) During the assembly a device capable of applying a compressive end load of 10kN to the
joint is required.
(e) The joint shall be supported on a suitable support and brought to rough line and level. The
compression device shall be placed in position, with all other components close to hand,
ready for assembly.
(f) The rails shall be sand or grit blasted for at least 480mm from the end of to be joined for 6-
hole joints or 270mm for 4- hole joints. The areas to be treated are the end face, the fishing
surfaces and the web. Remove all rail brands and markings that are located under the
fishplate area as required by joint manufacturer.
(g) Not more than one hour before assembling the joint, the inside face and fishing surfaces of
the fishplates and inside of the fishbolt holes shall be sand or grit blasted.
1.3 Assembly
(a) Joints shall be assembled by the qualified installation crew under the supervision of the
qualified foreman.
(b) The rail end faces shall be coated with adhesive.
(c) The rails shall be brought together, trapping the end-post in between, to a fine line and level
using a lm straight edge, to meet the tolerances.
(d) The rail web, fishing surfaces and boltholes shall be coated liberally with adhesive,
avoiding air bubbles.
(e) The insulating liners shall be offered up to the rails ensuring alignment of the bolt holes.
(f) Both the inside and outside of the bushes shall be coated with adhesive and inserted into
the fishplate bolt holes.
(g) The rail side of the fishplates, including the fishing surfaces, shall be coated liberally with
adhesive, avoiding air bubbles.
(h) First a steel washer and then an insulating washer shall be placed on the fasteners to be
used, ensuring that the chamfered side of the washer is against the head of the fastener.
(i) The fishplates shall be offered up to the rails, ensuring alignment of the fish bolt holes. Some
fasteners may be placed in the first fishplate to be offered up to aid alignment.
(j) The remaining fasteners shall be inserted.
(k) An insulating washer and then a steel washer shall be placed on the protruding ends of the
fasteners.
(l) The protective covering shall be removed from the fasteners and the collars or nuts placed
on them.
(m) An axial compression of 10kN shall be applied to the joint.
(n) With the fasteners numbered 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 as appropriate from one end, they shall be
tightened in the sequence 3-4-5-2-1-6 or 2-3-4-1 as appropriate.
(o) Excessive adhesive shall be scraped away, especially from the rail fastening cut-outs.
(p) The compression device shall be released and removed.
(q) The joint shall not be moved for 24 hours.
(r) After 24 hours any adhesive or portion of the end- post that protrudes above the rail head
shall be ground or filed flush.
2. Electrical Resistance Tests
2.1 An insulation/resistance meter operating at 500VDC shall be used. its probes or clips shall be clean,
free of grease or any other insulating materials. The point of contact of the clip shall be clean and
free from grease, rust and any other insulating material.
2.2 Test Sequence
(a) The clean dry joint shall be supported on dry, insulating materials.
(b) Both probes shall be attached to the left hand rail; zero ohms shall be indicated.
(c) A probe shall be attached to the left hand rail and contact made with:
(i) the near side fishplate
(ii) the far side fishplate
(iii) not less than 10-kilo ohms shall be indicated in both cases.
(d) Test (c) repeated for the right hand rail, with not less than 10-kilo ohms indicated.
(e) One probe shall be attached to the left hand rail and the other probe to the right hand rail.
Not less than 10-kilo ohms shall be indicated.
(f) Both probes shall be attached to the right hand rail; zero ohms shall be indicated.
(g) A probe shall be attached to the near side fishplate and contact made with each pin or bolt
in turn. Not less than 10-kilo ohms shall be indicated.
(h) A probe shall be attached to the far side fishplate and contact made with each pin or bolt in
turn. Not less than 10 kilo ohms shall be indicated.
3. Alignment Check
After curing, the vertical and lateral alignment of all joints shall be checked using a 1-metre straight
edge centred at the joint centre. Joints shall be rejected unless:
• the horizontal distance between the edge of the railhead and the centre of the straight edge
does not exceed 0.5mm, and
• the vertical distance between the running surface and the centre of the straight edge
does not exceed 0.5mm.
Joints shall not be bend-straightened.
Where joints are assembled pre-curved, the Contractor shall be responsible for the correct horizontal
offset at the centre of the joint.
4. Performance Test
At the end of the Defects Liability Period, all joints in that Section shall be visually inspected. The
joints shall be fully bonded and uncracked. A joint shall be considered defective if there is any
evidence of movement between fishplate and rail.
Insulated joints shall additionally be given an electrical test identical to that made at the time of
installation. If the test result is inferior to that at the time of installation, the joint shall be considered
defective.
All defective joints shall be replaced at no cost to the Employer, and shall be subject to a further
12 months Defects Liability period.
5. Guarantee
5.1 The Contractor shall guarantee the joints against all defects attributable to faulty manufacture,
workmanship and quality of material requiring withdrawal from service until the two years after the
issue of the Taking-Over Certificate. The record of joint replacement by the SRT shall be accepted by
the Contractor in this connection.
5.2 Joints that fail in service before the expiration of the Defects Liability Period shall be replaced free
of charge by the Contractor. The cost of installing replacement joints shall be borne by the
Contractor. The defective joints withdrawn from service shall be handed over at site to the Contractor
during which period, the Contractor shall inspect the joints, make his observations and carry out
8.11 TRACKLAYING
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
This Section specifies the installation of track on the new construction and work on existing tracks.
Work includes: Temporary works, safety of construction traffic, employment of Contractor
owned/ hired/ leased track mounted specialised track maintenance equipment, track records, and
maintenance.
The locations of track, turnouts and other special trackwork are shown in the Contract Drawings.
The Contractor may propose, in writing, alternatives for performing the work specified herein at any
time during the performance of the Contract. Those alternatives may be used in lieu of the
procedures specified in the Specifications only if written consent to those alternatives has been
issued by the Engineer.
2. Definitions
The following abbreviations and terms represent the glossary of trackwork terms for the work under
the Contract.
"Bearer" - A transverse member of the track structure which supports a turnout or other special track
component.
"Crossover" - Two turnouts, with track connecting the crossings and arranged to form a continuous
passage between two adjacent and generally parallel tracks.
"De-stress" - The process in which the rail is positioned and fastened longitudinally so that if the rail
was at the Neutral Temperature the rail would have no longitudinal stress.
"Direct Fixation Fastener" - A resilient rail support and fastener system secured directly to a stiff track
base.
" Glued Joint" - A rail joint system that uses high- strength adhesives in addition to full section
fishplates and high tensile bolts to join two rails together. The joint may be insulated or non-
insulated.
"King Points" - The points at both ends of a station with loops that controls the entrance to a ladder
of tracks.
"Neutral Temperature" - The temperature at which a length of continuous welded rail will have no
stress in it due to thermal expansion or contraction. ( Also De- stressing Temperature, normalising
temperature, optimum temperature).
" Compromise Rail" ( CR) - A rail at least 9. 0 m long combining two or more rail sections welded
together. Used for jointing two differing rail sections. Made in pairs to opposite hands.
"Track Panel" - A complete assembly of track of one standard rail length.
3.1 General
In addition to the requirements of SECTION 1- 10: QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING LABORATORY
requirements of the contract, and shall include the following:
(a) Evaluation of subcontractor's and supplier qualifications and test performance.
(b) Results of inspections and tests.
(c) Certificates of compliance.
(d) Qualified procedures for tracklaying processes.
(e) Personnel certifications.
(f) Measuring and test equipment calibration certificates.
(g) Transmittals of contract related information.
All track materials and construction shall be in accordance with the requirements of this specification
and the requirements of SECTION 1-2: APPLICABLE STANDARDS.
3.2 Work Practices
(a) Conform to the requirements of the Contract Drawings and these Specifications.
(b) Employ personnel qualified by experience in track and turnout installation as foreman or
leadmen for trackwork installation.
(c) Use proper tools and techniques. Any practice liable to damage the track material or existing
installations will not be permitted.
(d) Use qualified engineering surveyors to establish and maintain survey reference points for
alignment and elevation.
(e) Lubricate with approved lubricants and maintain turnout installations until final acceptance
by the Client.
3.3 Equipment
The Contractor shall provide the necessary track construction and maintenance equipment that has
the Engineer's consent for use on the project and that complies with:
(a) Clearance requirements of SRT Loading Gauge when in running order;
(b) Maximum axle loads of 15 tonnes;
(c) Maximum uniform load of 4.5 tonnes per m.
4. Submittals
Submit the following documents in accordance with SECTION 1-4: SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
4.1 Prior to start of track construction.
(a) Qualifications of assigned personnel.
(b) Construction equipment data showing compliance with wheel contour, gauge, loads, and
clearances for on- track equipment. Long welded rail transporting equipment shall be
equipped with a safe braking system, safety chains or safety devices for couplers and a rail
end protection device to prevent LWR from excessive movement if the load rail centre anchor
system fails or slips. Submit calculation for braking system.
(c) Procedures for track laying including schedule on both new formation and existing lines.
(d) Procedures for unloading and stacking materials.
(e) Procedures for handling and fastening LWR.
(f) Procedures for de-stressing rail prior to final fastening including data on mechanical vibrators
and heating devices for relieving internal rail stresses.
(g) Procedures for rail grinding and subsequent cleanup.
(h) Procedures for end hardening EN 54E1 Grade A rails.
(i) Procedures and equipment for bringing bolts to specified torque and for calibration of torque
wrench by independent testing laboratory.
(j) Procedures for bending rail.
4.2 During trackwork.
(a) Torque wrench certification records and torque measuring records.
(b) Complete and current record of field welded or fishplate joints and locations of short rails
and compromise rails in accordance with information as specified in Table 8-11.1.
(c) Rail end-hardening test results.
(d) Pre-construction inspection reports.
(e) Final inspection and acceptance procedures with material specific tolerances.
4.3 Product data - Manufacturer's printed information and recommendations for:
(a) Product data of rail thermometers to be furnished to the Engineer.
(b) Product data for bolt hole expansion machine.
(c) Product data for rail bending machine.
(d) Adhesive for bonding metal tags to concrete.
(e) Power tools to be used by the Contractor.
4.4 As-Built Drawings
To be provided by the Contractor in timely manner as the work progresses:

(a) Vertical and horizontal rail alignment, the applied cant. The locations of level crossings,
bridges, culverts and turnouts.
(b) Track charts obtained from SRT track inspection vehicle.
(c) The Contractor shall make the necessary revisions to reproducible copies of the layout
drawings.
(d) Rail Types: Show rail section, location of site welds, location of fishplated rail or compromise
rail.
5. Alignment and Profile
5.1 Track shall be constructed conforming to the alignment and profile data shown on the drawings and
as approved by the Engineer. Alignment is based on the centreline of track, equidistant between the
gauge faces of the running rails, and profile refers to the top of the lower rail in final position.
(a) Gauge: 1,000mm except where otherwise provided, measured 14mm below the plane of the
top of the rails. Gauge through turnouts will be specified on the turnout manufacturer's
drawings.
(b) Rail inclination: to be 1 in 40.
(c) Cant: 90mm maximum.
(d) Cant deficiency: 50mm maximum.
(e) Vertical curve radius: Normal 10,000m exceptionally 5,000m.
(f) Sleeper spacing for all tracks: 600mm. 500mm in special cases.
(g) Axle load: Static - 20 tonnes.
(h) Ballast thickness as shown in the drawings.
5.2 Static Track Construction Tolerances
Table 8.11-1: Track construction tolerances
1. Horizontal alignment position: ± 10mm of the design position
Mid-Ordinate (versine) 10m chord: ± 2mm from the theoretical position
2. Final top of rail elevation: ± 10mm of design elevation
Rate of change of deviation: < 1mm per metre
Mid-ordinate on a 10m chord: ± 3mm
3. Cross level: ± 2mm
Twist (5m chord): ± 5mm
4. Cant
Maximum Deviation ± 4mm
Rate of change of deviation ± 3mm over 5 metres
5. Gauge - All tracks: ± 3mm
Rate of change of gauge: ± 2mm per sleeper
6. Gauge in Turnouts ± 1.5mm
7. Level at fishplated joints (chord 2m): - 2mm
8. Sleeper spacing all tracks: ± 5mm
9. Turnout longitudinal location: ± 10mm
10. Ballast profile: - 10mm
5.3 Final Alignment

For the purposes of issuing a Taking-Over certificate for the Works or Section of the Works as defined
in the Contract Documents.
(a) Deviations and tolerances for track construction shall be checked for track acceptance.
(b) The Engineer will make an inspection of the track prior to acceptance. The final horizontal
and vertical alignment, gauge, cross level, and cant shall be within the specified construction
tolerances.
(c) The Contractor shall correct track deviations, as disclosed by the survey, which exceed
specified tolerances at no additional cost to SRT.
(d) At the completion of each of the Works or any Section the Engineer will prove that the
dynamic tolerances are met by using the SRT Track Recording car owned and operated by
SRT.
(e) Dynamic tolerances as recorded by SRT's owned and operated Track Recording car shall not
exceed:
Parameter Tolerance
Longitudinal profile (5m chord) ± 4mm
Gauge + 5 to -2
Cross level ± 4mm
Twist (5m) ± 7mm
Alignment (mid-ordinate 10m chord) ± 5mm
6. Turnouts
6.1 General
(a) Conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and these specifications.
(b) Use proper tools and techniques. Any practice liable to damage the track material or existing
(c) Lubricate with approved lubricants and maintain turnout installations until final acceptance
by the Client.
6.2 Construct a demonstration turnout prior to the installation of the first main line turnout, to
demonstrate construction techniques and procedures that are intended to be employed on the
project. Submit a report to the Engineer indicating the procedures that will be finally used in
installation.
6.3 Delivery, Storage and Handling
6.3.1 Storage
(a) Turnout rails and crossings shall be stacked off the ground on timber bearers 150 mm thick and
spaced 3 to an 18 m rail with 3 m overhang.
(b) Turnout components shall be segregated by hand of turnout and by crossing number.
(c) Packages shall be stored off the ground and under cover.
6.3.2 Handling
(a) Rail components shall only be lifted by rail dogs or nylon straps.
(b) Packages shall not be dropped or otherwise mishandled.
(c) Rails shall not be damaged by the rail handling method.
7. Qualification Tests for Rail End Hardening Crew

7.1 General
(a) Two samples of end hardened standard rails shall be prepared in accordance with the
approved procedures.
(b) The test samples shall be prepared by the same crew which will perform the rail end
hardening process at site or in the factory.
(c) Testing of the samples shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory approved
by the Engineer.
(d) Rail end hardening process shall not commence before procedures, crews, and qualification
tests are approved by the Engineer.
7.2 Test two samples for Rockwell hardness in accordance with ASTM 18, Rockwell Hardness and
Rockwell Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials, using a 150kgf diamond spheroconical penetrator
in a grid pattern of 3-2mm increments for a distance of 154mm from the end of the rail. Section one
sample for 300mm along the centreline of the rail and section the other sample transversely 12.7mm
from the rail end. These cross sections shall be etched for observations of the hardness pattern
obtained.
7.3 The Rockwell hardness number shall not be less than C29.5 nor more than C37.0 when measured at
a point- on the centreline of rail 12. 7mm from the rail end. The hardness shall decrease uniformly
from the end of the rail to the hardness of the untreated rail in a distance of not less than - 50mm.
The hardness pattern shall be uniform across the top surface of the rail head. The etched cross
section of the rail shall be examined and shall exhibit a uniformly distributed hardness pattern.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Ballasted Track
Refer to SECTIONS 8.1 to 8.10.
2. Compromise Rails
Compromise rails for joining EN 54E1 to the existing rail sections shall be fabricated by the
Contractor by flash butt welding according to the requirements and tests of SECTION 8. 9: RAIL
WELDING. Permanent compromise rails shall be provided as follows for the main line.
Permanent compromise rails shall be a minimum length of 9 metres. No rail in a length of
compromise rail shall be less than 4. 5 metres long. Permanent compromise rails shall be formed
by heating and forging one end of a 4.5 metre length of EN 54E1 rail to the shape of the smaller rail
over a length of not less than 300mm and flashbutt welding a length of the smaller rail section to
the forged section.
The forging shall produce a rail with the rail top and gauge face of the head of the two sections in
alignment to a tolerance of 1 and 2mm respectively. The transition section shall be retempered, if
necessary, to produce hardness approximately equal to the original rail material. Light grinding of
the finished transition and weld to ensure a smooth profile and finish will be permitted. All finished
joints shall be subject to ultrasonic and visual examination and evidence of incomplete fusion, or
inclusions shall be cause for rejection.
The length of the transition between the EN 54E1 section and the smaller rail plus the weld shall
not exceed 500mm and shall, when the rail is installed, be placed between the sleepers.
The rail shall be delivered to site with blank ends and be cut and drilled to suit at site. The bolt
holes shall be cold expanded. Fishplates, bolts and washers shall be to SRT standard furnished by
the Contractor.
3. Curved Rails
Rails in a curve less than 500m radius shall be pre-curved. Bending of rails shall be carried out only
in a rail bending machine. See Schedule 8.11.B
4. Turnouts
4.1 Turnouts, fasteners, baseplates, and fastener inserts shall be to the requirements of SECTION 8. 2:
TURNOUTS. Bearers shall comply with the requirements of SECTION 8. 3: CONCRETE SLEEPERS AND
BEARERS.
4.2 Lubricant - Provide a dry film lubricant for application to slide plates. The lubricant shall have low
electrical conducting properties and be approved by the Engineer.
4.3 For rail bending - Hydraulic operated rail bending machine and rail end straightener capable of
straightening rails with dipped joints up to rails of EN 54E1 section.
5. Rail Thermometers
The Contractor shall furnish under the requirements of SECTION 1. 10: QUALITY ASSURANCE AND
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES correctly calibrated contact rail thermometers. Shall be a mercury
thermometer inside a copper or aluminium case. Dial types will not be acceptable.
6. Track Gauges
The Contractor shall furnish under the requirements of SECTION 1. 10: QUALITY ASSURANCE AND
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES correctly calibrated adjustable track gauges. Track gauges shall be
lightweight and portable providing measurement accuracy of gauge and cant to one millimetre.
Gauge shall be measured 14 mm below rail head.
7. Track Tools
The Contractor shall provide adequate numbers of power and hand track tools, including any
specialised tools.
8. Metal Tags
Brass or anodized aluminium; 30 mm wide by 50 mm long by 1.0 mm thick; stamped with numerals
8 mm high. Tags to be stamped in 10mm increments from zero cant to maximum cant. Adhesive
for fixing tags to concrete shall be Araldite CA 111 AB or approved equal.
9. Equipment
Mechanical equipment shall be used for construction and maintenance of the track at the discretion
of the Contractor. Any machines used must be of a type and manufacture for which the Engineer
has given his consent for their use, and shall be designed to work without damage to the track
components or ballast.
10. Surplus Recovered Materials
10.1 Track materials surplus to requirements shall be inventoried and recovered from the existing track,
and shall be sorted and stored at an agreed location.
8.12 ALTERATION AND MODIFICATION OF EXISTING TRACK

1. Scope
This Section defines the requirements for alterations to the existing track mainly in station yard areas.
Before commencement of the Works the Contractor shall carry out a condition survey of the existing
track to confirm its line, level, and position of turnouts, location of existing redundant IRJ’s, etc. The
condition survey shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval together with an inventory of
material to be recovered from each location.
Alter and maintain ballasted track including: setting out survey pegs to new profile and improved
alignment; removal of existing track; sloughing out ballast cribs; scarifying of existing ballast bed;
installation of concrete and timber sleepers, complete with all rail fastener hardware; installation of
continuous welded rail, fasten rail, align, weld into CWR; installation of permanent compromise rails;
installation of asphalted track; installation and removal of rails and turnouts; installation and removal
of temporary compromise rails; ballast, lift, line, cross level and pack existing track to indicated lines,
gradients, and elevations: installation and removed of level crossings.
Generally new turnouts are supplied with IRJ’ s installed in the curved closure rails. The Contractor
shall provide other IRJ’ s to achieve series bonding. Should it not be possible to install the joints as
shown due to short rails, short length of track circuit, or rails strength is compromised by many rail
cuts alternative arrangements may be proposed to the Engineer for his review and approval.
Work includes: supply of all the above materials and other track materials as required to complete
alterations and maintenance; and de- stressing CWR. Contractor’ s rail mounted maintenance
equipment, power tools and equipment, manual tract tools, Additional Insulated Rail joints shall be
provided and all existing IRJ’s, which become redundant, shall be removed.
Load up recovered track material, off load, sort, and store at SRT’s or Contractor’s Site Depot; Perform
final adjustments and cleanup work site.
The Contractor may propose, in writing, alternatives for performing the Work specified hereof as
described in SECTION 1- 4: SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS. Alternatives may be used in lieu of the
procedures specified herein only if written acceptance of those alternatives has been received from
the Engineer.
2. Definitions and Abbreviations
“ SLG” – Single Line Gantry. A self- propelled gantry arrangement that spans across the track being
relayed, picks up, and sets down sleepers or track panels.
“TRM”– Track Relaying Machine. A self-propelled machine that carries out the exchange of sleepers
and rail in one pass.
“ Relaying System” – Comprising SLG’ s or TRM and sleeper wagons together with ballast wagons,
ballast tampers and regulations.
“ Relaying Unit” – A unit that will remove the old rail, remove the old ballast, profile the existing
ballast, lay in the new sleepers and position new rail on new sleepers.
3.1 In additional to the requirements of SECTION 1-10 and 8- 11 the Contractor shall maintain adequate
records, in accordance with the requirements of his quality assurance programme. The records will
provide the objective evidence of compliance with the requirements of the contract.
3.2 Materials, construction, and tolerances shall be in accordance with the requirement of this
specification and the requirements of SECTION 8-11 TRACKLAYING.
4. Submittals
4.1 Submit documents in accordance with SECTION 1-4: SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
4.2 As required by SECTION 8-11 TRACKLAYING and other Sections of these Specifications.
PART II : PRODUCTIONS
1. Materials
Refer to SECTIONS 8.1 TO 8.11
1. Trackworks
1.1 Finishing Off work before the line can be handed back to traffic shall include:
(a) Insertion of fastener system and clipping down;
(b) ballasting;
(c) welding into previous track installation;
(d) lifting, leveling and alignment fit for opening to traffic at a minimum speed of 40kph; and
(e) Cut existing rail to required length, and using clamp fishplates install temporary compromise
rails, bolt up and grade out the difference in rail levels by lifting and tamping the old track at
a grade not to exceed 2.3 per mile.
(f) On the second possession, or third possession as required, final lifting, lining and packing shall
be performed.
1.2 The initial clipping down of rail shall be done as the work proceeds, and rails shall be clipped down
at 38๐C ±8๐C. The closing weld shall be made at 38๐C ±5๐C or under 33๐C by using rail tensors.
2. Inspection
2.1 Inspect the site where the existing track is to be altered or maintained in accordance with the
requirements of SECTION 8.11: TRACKLAYING and of SECTION 1-9: CONSTRUCTION SURVEYS.
2.2 Study carefully the requirements for the laying out of the new rails, with particular reference to open
deck bridges, where special types of sleeper for the rails may be necessary. The Rails should be laid
so that they are clear of any debris and damage caused by the ploughing out and spreading of the
old existing ballast.
3. Preparation
3.1 Establish track alignment, profile and cant based on the approved survey drawings, establishing rail
markers for the beginning and end of each transition curve, and the commencement, intersection
point and termination of each vertical curve.
3.2 Identify and prepare for disconnecting all existing track circuits within the scheduled work area.
Establish temporary connections, if any. Prepare new LWR with Insulated Rails Joints as described in
SECTION 8-10.
3.3 Site weld rails into one length of LWR suitable for the length of track to be installed under the
possession, if necessary.
3.4 Prior to track possession ease off, and then restore all track fasteners to existing track.
3.5 Prepare rail ends of the LWR for compromise rails at end of relaying.
3.6 Before commencement of tamping and lining the existing track the following work shall be executed;
(a) replacement of damaged or missing fastening components;
(b) adjustment of gauge;

(c) preparation, repair, replacement of insulated rail joints and fishplates rail joints;
(d) repair or replacement of weld;
(e) replacement of damaged and broken sleepers;
(f) unloading and distribution of ballast;
(g) repair damage to sub-ballast;
(h) temporarily relocate any obstructions to trackwork machinery.
4. Track Possession
4.1 When the track possession commences the Contractor is to ensure that the necessary protection of
the working sites by the Contractor’s staff has been put in place for each working site.
4.2 Remove all fastenings from existing sleepers and store for removal from site.
4.3 Perform the track relaying as described hereof.
4.4 Carry out the appropriate stage of Finishing Off as described hereof.
4.5 At the end of the track possession the Contractor must ensure that the track has been reinstated fit
for traffic at the designed speed, and the protection provided by the Contractor has been removed,
and that no obstruction remains to the safe movement of SRT’s trains.
4.6 The Contractor shall ensure that the necessary train speed boards for trains in both directions have
been relocated as required by the Contract Documents before the possession has finished.
4.7 When the Contractor is satisfied the has completed the assigned work for the possession, or that all
the work that can be completed in the possession has been completed, the Contractor shall request
the Senior SRT Officer present to inspect the track as being safe to allow trains to use the track and
for permission to leave the site. Permission shall not be unreasonably withheld.
5. Ballasting, Tamping and Aligning
5.1 The number of combined tamping and lining operations is dependent on the total amount of lift and
alignment required, and type of plant employed, but generally shall be determined as followings:
(a) for a lift of up to 50mm one tamping – lining operation is sufficient;
(b) for a lift of 50 – 70mm two tamping – lining operation shall be executed;
(c) for lifts exceeding 70mm or for alignments exceeding 50mm a preliminary tamping lining
operation is needed.
In the case of increasing the nominal amount of super elevation the amount of lifting of lifting of the
high rail shall determine the number of tamping – lining operations. The first lift shall be high enough
to ensure that only new clean ballast is tamped under the sleeper.
5.2 For each track raise place ballast in cribs and shoulders, and in quantities which will fill the sleeper
cribs and be sufficient both for each track raise and the hold track in position after the track raise.
5.3 Raising, leveling, and alignment should be done simultaneously.
5.4 After each raise the elevation and alignment of the track must be with respect to the prescribed
position:
Elevation Alignment
Track laid -100mm ± 20mm
Last lift but one ± 10mm ± 6mm
On completion of compaction track tolerances shall be exceed the requirements of SECTION 8- 11:
TRACKLAYING.
5.5 Lifting and tamping shall be achieved by methods which will neither bend rail, strain joints, nor
damage rail fastenings.
5.6 Stabilisation of the ballast by stabiliser shall be done before and after the last raise.
5.7 After the existing track has been initially raised and aligned, distress, weld and fully fasten rails at the
optimum temperature.
5.8 Contractor’s tampers if used for the project shall be a powerful type of modern design approved by
the Engineer. For final finishing of track the tamping machine shall be an automatic tamper capable
of lifting and fine lining to finish to the tolerances specified under this Contract.
5.9 Shape the ballast to the profile not less than the dimensions shown in the Drawings by heavy on-track
ballast regulator. Ballast shall not be above the top of the sleeper over the full length of the sleeper.
Cribs and shoulders shall be compacted with a rail mounted compactor acceptable to the Engineer.
6. Insulated Rail Joints (IRJ)
Removal of IRJ’ s shall include all work necessary to reinstate the track to its original form and
condition, including rewelding of rails, reinstatement of track fittings and ballast profile and
replacement of timber sleeps with concrete, including necessary re-spacing.
Rail cutting for the installation of rail joints shall be subject to the Engineers approval. The Contractor
shall show all locations of proposed rail cutting on the Rail Bonding plans submitted for approval.
The joint shall be formed at the point of cutting a single rail. The joint shall be cut by disc or saw
and the cut shall be square within + 2mm in any direction across the section. Both pieces shall be
marked so that they are clearly identified as a matched pair.
Due consideration shall be taken of the accurate alignment of the joint gap and alignment and
diameter of holes of the securing plates to ensure correct installation of the insulated joint.
Securing bolts shall not be bent, and any such bolts shall be discarded and shall not be used.
7. Redundant Materials and Equipment
7.1 All materials and equipment made redundant by the Works shall be recovered. The materials and
equipment shall be identified, categorized, removed, catalogues, stockpiled and returned to SRT
stock as required.
7.2 The process shall be managed and supervised by Working Group comprising the Engineer’ s and
Contractor’s representatives.
7.3 All items shall be assigned to categories:
 Transfer to SRT stock, or
 Reuse, or
 scrap
7.4 On recovery from site, materials and equipment shall be disposed of as:
 Stock and Reusable items shall be carefully recovered and delivered to a designated location
within the Works site area, unloaded, and stacked nearly by type in places designated by SRT.
 Scrap items shall be delivered to a depot to be designated by SRT within the Works site area.
7.5 Auditable documentation and records for the whole process shall be maintained including:
 Inventory lists
 Category schedules
 Delivery / receipt dockets etc.
All such documentation shall be certified by the Working Group, approved by the Engineer and signed
by the delivery / receiving agencies.
8.13 CONCRETE PANEL TYPE LEVEL CROSSINGS

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
This Section describes the installation of Concrete Panel Level Crossings in the new tracks and
associated track and road works. Level crossing systems shall be provided from approved
proprietary manufacturers and shall have been manufactured for at least five years. The system
may be produced under the manufacturer’s license by the Contractor in Thailand. The system shall
be formed of panels supported by the rails and edge beams without direct load bearing on the
sleepers or the ballast, and shall also provide full insulation between the rails.
The system shall allow the removal and replacement for the road surface by authorized persons
to permit maintenance of the track below the crossing by on- track equipment, without the need
for mechanized lifting equipment or repair of road surfaces.
Work includes: Provision of all materials forming the crossing system; Temporary roadworks;
adjustment to road surface levels; deep ballasting: installation of crossing materials; track drainage;
Co-ordination with Local Police and Highway Authorities.Temporary road signs and controls.
2. Definitions
“Concrete” – A material formed of cement, fine and coarse aggregates.
“High Strength Concrete” – Compressive strength (in Cube) shall be at least 45N/mm2 at 28 day.
“Filler” – The filling medium to fill the spaces around the rail to prevent the ingress of water and
soil around the rail.
“ Flangeway” – The space on the gauge face of the rail for the passage of the flanges of the rail
wheel.
“Level Crossing” – The crossing of a railway track and a vehicular roadway at the same elevation.
Conventionally constructed of timber, asphalt, rubber, or concrete.
“Surface”– The wearing course of the vehicular roadway.
(a) In additional to the requirements of SECTION 1-10: QUALITY ASSURANCE the Contractor shall
maintain adequate records in accordance with the requirements of his quality assurance
programme. These records shall provide objective evidence of compliance with the
(b) The crossing system manufacturer is expected to operate an independently approved and
audited quality control system, in accordance with the requirements of ISO 9000. Where the
Manufacturer cannot produce such independent certification the following requirements shall
apply:
(i) The Contractor shall submit and Inspection Agency’ s name the Engineer for approval
prior to the commencement of manufacture of the level crossing system.
(ii) The Contractor shall arrange all facilities for the tests including supply of samples
required for testing and re-testing, sampling of materials, labour, machines, tools, gauges,
apparatus, forms of report and other appliances which may be necessary or required by
the Inspection Agency for carrying out any or all of the examinations and tests
mentioned in this specification.
(iii) The Contractor shall render all reasonable assistance to the Inspection Agency for
inspection of the tests.
(iv) All pressure gauges, load gauges, measuring gauges of all testing machines and
dimensioning devices shall be examined and calibrated regularly, as directed by the
Engineer, by an independent agency. The manufacturer shall provide the Inspection
Agency with reasonable access to observe manufacturing process, witness testing and
to inspect the finished product.
(v) Before the products are submitted to inspection regarding surface, section and finish,
all components shall be properly examined by the manufacturer’ s inspectors and all
defective components removed.
(c) Manufacturing Requirements
Components shall be manufactured to the dimensions shown on the Manufacturer’s drawings
and to the standards of materials and workmanship approved by the Engineer.
Concrete products shall be cured by being kept moist for 7 days after casting and shall be
fully cured before shipping or transport.
(d) Testing on the concrete shall be performed as described in SECTION 8.3: CONCRETE SLLEEPERS
AND BEARERS.
(e) Temporary Highway Controls and Warming Boards as required by SECTION 1. 8: TEMPORARY
FACILITIES AND CONTROLS.
4. Submittals
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in accordance with SECTION 1- 4: SUBMITTALS &
SUBSTITUTIONS for approval of the following:
(a) Design
The units shall be designed to accommodate the maximum permitted road vehicle loading as
determined by the Department of Highways, H(M) and HS (MS) loadings with the ability to carry
a single wheel load of 150kN.
(b) A description of the method of manufacturing, including, but not limited to:
 manufacture and galvanizing of steel components
 manufacture of rubber components
 the method of securing reinforcement and insert;
 a description of the concrete mixing, transporting , placing, vibrating, and curing
 the de-moulding procedure;
 transport and storage methods and equipment;
 and such other information as is pertinent to the process.
(c) A description of a programme of the method and procedures to be used for control of the
quality including, but not limited to, the methods to be used for obtaining test results.
(d) Design mix and test reports of the trial proportions and the proposed mixture to be employed
for the work where manufacture will be undertaken in Thailand (this shall give ample time for
review prior to pre-production stage of concrete components).
(e) Detailed of the pre-casting yard layout, stacking yard and curing methods, used in casting beds
and stacking yard. Handling, lifting arrangements at plant and on site and packing for shipment.
(f) Copies of all material and production test results and equipment calibration certificates.
(g) Copies of design load test reports confirming the system complies with the specified load
performance.
(h) Detailed programme for the Contractor’ s method of work at each level crossing where total
road closure during the “window” cannot be obtained.
(i) Detailed method statement of the raising of road surfaces in the different materials. Including
list of construction plant to be used.
5.1 Delivery
(a) All concrete components shall be completely cured before shipping and shall be handled and
loaded to avoid damage.
(b) The handling of material shall be the responsibility of the Contractor who shall take all
necessary precautions so as to avoid any damage in transit. The block and slabs shall be
properly secured by appropriate means against movement and displacement. The Contractor
shall replace free of cost all components which are damaged in transit.
5.2 Storage
(a) Heavy components shall be stored on a stable, levelled and compacted formation and be
raised off the ground on thick timber bearers.
(b) Stacking shall not exceed 4 layers.
(c) Small components shall be packed in an approved manner and shall be stored to prevent
loss or damage.
5.3 Handling
Handling and loading shall be performed by means of the same devices as approved by the
Manufacturer for the installation and removal for maintenance.
PART II: PRODUCTS
The system offered shall have been produced for at least five years by a recognized manufacturer of
level crossing systems and shall provide, or allow:
 The use of the standard track structure below the crossing and on rail approaches.
 A self-supporting structure able to carry Department of Highways H(M) and HS(MS) road
vehicle loadings and a single road wheel load of 225kN without damage, cracking,
excessive or permanent deflection.
 Load bearing on rails only
 Use with top mounted elastic rail fasteners
 Electrical isolation between the rails
 Sealing at the rails to prevent corrosion and ingress of dirt
 High skid resistance on road surfaces
 Uniform level surface
 Low maintenance
 Easy installation and removal without the need for mechanised lifting equipment, or for
repairs to road surfaces.
 Flangeway clearances of not less than 45mm deep below railhead and not less than
65mm from the gauge face of the rail. The clearance of the outer face shall not be
greater than 50mm.
 Longitudinal restraints to hold the panels in place and prevent separation
 Deflector plates at the ends of the crossing to prevent damage from dragging
equipment.
2. Concrete
All concrete placed during a track possession will be pre-cast.
The Contractor shall propose to the Engineer for approval the necessary criteria and design mix that
the Contractor wishes to use for concrete to be placed outside the possession.
The Contractor may produce precast concrete for edge beams in his Site Depot or employ a pre-
cast concrete manufacturer approval by the Engineer, all subject to requirement of Section 8- 15
Concrete Panel Level Crossings Part I Description clause 3.
(a) Concrete Materials shall be stored under conditions that comply with the requirements of
SECTION 8-3: CONCRETE SLEEPERS AND BEARERS Clause 2.2.
(b) Moulds
The concrete shall be cast in moulds also employing the steel angles forming the arrises at all
the top and bottom edges of the crossing panels.
(i) Shall be of steel or plywood panels, and shall be rigidly assembled so that no
displacement or deformation can take place during casting. Formwork shall be designed
so that it can be removed without shock or damage to the concrete, and it must be
braced and held in position in such a way as to void any holes or fastenings through
the member except as required by the design.
(ii) Construction: The shape, strength, rigidity, watertightness and surface smoothness of
moulds shall be maintained at all times. Any warped or bulged shapes must be re-sized
before being reused. Moulds which are unsatisfactory in any respect shall not be reused.
Internal ties shall be so arranged as to permit their removal to a depth of at least 25mm
from the concrete face without injury to the concrete. No permanently embedded
metal shall less than 25mm cover to the finished concrete surface.
(c) Properties of Concrete
Concrete forming the panels shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’ s instructions and
as approved by the Engineer and shall be formed of polymer resins and mineral fillers.
For other works the compressive strength shall be at least 65 N/mm2 at 28 days (Works cube
strength of 150 x 150 x 150MM sample).
Work ability of the mix shall be such that it can be readily worked into the concerns and angles
of the moulds, around reinforcement, and fastening inserts without segregation or free water
collecting on the surface.
3. Level Crossing Panels
Panels shall be manufactured with galvanised steel frames and high strength concrete. The panels
shall provide a crossing width sufficient to allow the use of the standard concrete sleeper below the
crossing surface and shall have a minimum thickness of 120mm for gauge panels and 110mm for
field panels.
(a) Materials
High strength concrete and reinforcement shall conform to the specified requirements of the
Manufacturer as approved by the Engineer.
(b) Bars shall be cut and bent cold, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, to dimensions
and shapes shown on the Manufacturer’s drawings. Stirrups and tie bars shall be bent around
a pin having a diameter at least four times the minimum thickness of the bar. Bends for other
bars shall be made around a pin at least six time the bar diameter. The reinforcement shall
be held securely in place at the exact position and spacing as indicated on the drawings. The
cover to the reinforcement shall not be less than 25mm.
(c) Surface Finish
The road surface of the level crossing panels shall be provided with an approved skid resistant
coasting.
(d) Steel Frames
Steel frames shall be manufactured of structural steel and all joints in the finished frame shall
be formed by welding only. The minimum thickness of steel used in the frame shall not be
less than 5mm.
All concerns and arises shall be sharp and well-formed and the sides shall be flat, straight and
square to each other such that when the complete crossing in installed the maximum gap at
any point between any two adjoining units does not exceed 3mm.
After fabrication the frame shall be sandblast cleaned and hot dip coated with pure zinc
galvanizing with a minimum average weight of 610 g/m2
4. Flange Bearing Pads
Preformed flange bearing pads will be provided to both sides of each rail to carry the panels and all
live loading to the foot of each rail. The pad shall provide a seal prevent contamination of the ballast
structure.
(a) Pads shall be shaped to occupy the whole of the rail section from the top of the flange to
the underside of the head the rails.
(b) Pads shall be manufactured of rubber stabilised for use in tropical conditional and shall
conform to the following requirements:
 Durometer Shore A ≥ 85
 Tensile Strength ≥ 10 N/mm2
 Elongation at Break % 190% - 210%
 Density ≥ 1.27 g/cm3
 Rebound Resilience ≥ 20%
 Abrasion (relative volume loss) ≥ 160 mm3
5. Filler
5.1 Preformed fillers shall be used on the field side of each rail. The filler is to provide a seal to minimise
water and soil contamination of the ballast structure.
(a) The access side of the rail shall be a full depth filler to provide a level and flush face between
concrete slab and the rail head.
(b) The filed face of the filler shall provide a smooth and level surface between the field panels
and the rail flangeway for the wheels.
(c) The filler may be joined by proprietary pins or by galvanized reinforcing bars, but when joined
shall provide a continuous run from one side of the crossing to the other.
(d) Materials
The filler shall be formed from extruded virgin rubber with the following typical properties:
 Durometer Shore A ≥ 85
 Tensile Strength ≥ 10 N/mm2
 Elongation at Break % 190% - 210%
 Density ≥ 1.27 g/cm3

 Rebound Resilience ≥ 20%
 Abrasion (relative volume loss) ≥ 160 mm3
6. Deflector Plates
The completed crossing shall be provided with deflector plates to the end centre panels to prevent
damage to the crossing from items dragging from trains.
The plates shall be manufactured from structural steel of not less than 6mm thickness and shall
have a minimum width of 700mm, but shall not cause interference with rail fastenings nor cause
shunting of track circuits.
Plate shall be securely fixed to the end panels of the crossing and to the adjacent concrete sleepers
by a method that does not involve the use of special sleepers nor the drilling, or other modification,
of the standard concrete sleeper. The method shall permit the removal and replacement of the
plate and panel for maintenance purposes but shall not cause the plate to become dislodged when
stuck by dragging objects.
Deflector plates and fixing components shall be protected from corrosion by hot dip pure zinc
galvanizing with a minimum average weight of 610 g/m2.
7. Longitudinal Restraint
The completed crossing shall be provided with devices to prevent the crossing units moving
longitudinally in relation to the track, or separating.
The method of restraint shall not require the use of special sleepers nor the drilling or other
modification of the standard concrete sleeper but shall permit the removal and replacement of the
restraint and panel for maintenance purposes. Restraint devices manufactured of steel shall be not
dip coated with pure zinc galvanizing with a minimum average weight of 610 g/m2.
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Preparation
(a) Co- ordinate all activities well in advance of planned date of work with all Authorities
concerned for the regulation and control of road traffic over the crossing during the works,
both inside and outside the Possession.
(b) Carry out the necessary works related to road detours and temporary crossings including all
temporary road, signs and notices related to the work. Including temporary road markings,
provision of temporary road signaling arrangements including flagmen and watchmen.
(c) Establish track alignment, profile and cant based on the approved survey drawings establishing
scrap rail markers for the beginning and end of each transition curve, and the commencement,
intersection point and termination of each vertical curve. Mark rails from cutting. Prepare two
9.0m long track panels if the road has to be kept open during the construction.
Establish new road profiles. Approach ramps from the existing crossing to the new road, level over
the new crossing shall be adjusted between tracks and shall not be steeper than 1 in 20. Approach
ramps shall not extend outside the SRT Right of Way. Set out position of concrete blocks and slabs.
If necessary, on the case by case basis, the existing level crossing shall also be raised to provide a
satisfactory road surface level across the whole crossing. The existing track under these circumstances
shall be lifted over a length of not less than 25 metres and ramps formed at a gradient of not less
than 30mm in 20 metres.
2. Installation
The Contractor must prepare his installation programme and method statement for each individual
location and submit to the Engineer for approval one month prior to the date of work. Items to be
included on the programme shall include at least the following:-
 Planning and agreement with relevant authorities
 Site preparation
 Implementation of road closure
 Detailed construction methodology
 Complete permanent road surfaces
 Install road marking
 Tidy up site. Remove all temporary warnings etc.
3. Asphaltic Cement Road Surfacing
(a) General
All asphalted and concrete roads that are to be raised to new levels shall be formed of an
overlay of hot rolled asphalt surfacing on the existing surface when the new finished surface
will be less 200 mm above the existing surface. The existing surface shall be left intact but
cleaned and primed to accept the new surface.
Where the height of the new surface above the existing is 200 mm or greater, the new
pavement shall be formed of an asphalt course of 100 mm on a base course. The existing
surface shall be broken and removed.
Where the height of the new surface above the existing is greater than 400 mm the pavement
construction shall be :
 100 mm of asphalt
 200 mm of road base
 Subbase material with a CBR > 25.
The existing surface shall be broken so that no part is greater than 100 mm but left in place.
Where the depth of the new surface is greater than 600 mm the construction shall be :
 100 mm of asphalt
 200 mm of road base
 220 mm SSubbase
 Selected fill with CBR > 10%.
The existing surface shall be broken so that no part is greater than 100 mm but may be left in place.
(b) Spray Prime Coat and Tack Coat
All prepared granular bases or old pavements which are to be paved shall be prime coated
or tack coated at specified rates and at locations as directed by the Engineer.
(c) Placing
Prior to the placement of an asphalt pavement overlay, the Engineer may require that sections
of the existing pavement receive a leveling course of asphalt concrete to correct elevation
and to level the roadway as required.
4. Acceptance of Asphalt Surfaces
All finished pavement shall be free from depressions bumps, or other irregularities exceeding 5 mm
over a 3 mm straight edge, placed in any direction.
The pavement shall be homogeneous, free from segregation and shall be consistently uniform with
respect to surface texture.
All work shall be in accordance with SECTION 3.3: ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT.
5. Gravel Road Surfacing
Grave road surfacing and construction shall follow the requirements of Clause 3.3(a) hereof but the upper
surface shall be of graved surfacing material and shall be constructed as shown on the drawings.
6. Road Base, Sub Base, and Selected Fill
These materials will be placed and compacted as shown on the drawings and in accordance with SECTION
3.1: AGGREGATE ROADBASE; SECTION 2.6: SUBBASE & SUBBALLAST; and SECTION 2.5: EMBANKMENT,
respectively. The finished surface of the road base material shall be within 10 mm. of design level and
maximum deviation from a 3 metre straightedge shall not exceed 10 mm. when placed in any direction.
7. Road Marking
On asphalt surfaces new road markings shall be placed by the Contractor in accordance with the
standards and materials of the Department of Highways.
8.14 TRACKWORK ON STEEL BRIDGES

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
The Section specifies the work to be carried out to lay track on steel bridges using galvanised steel
bearers
Work Includes: Providing and fixing steel bearers on steel bridges including insulated rail fastening
system
2. Definitions
“ Galvanised Steel Bearer or Steel Sleeper ” – A galvanised steel beam that supports the rail and
spans between longitudinal girders on an open deck bridge.
“Longitudinal” – A steel bridge girder parallel to the track is supporting the cross bearers.
“Longitudinal Restraint” – The ability of a track fastener to prevent rail creep.
“Abutment” – The end of the bridge adjacent to the track formation that carries the load from the
longitudinal girders.
“Pier” – An intermediate support to a bridge or open culvert.
“Direct Fixation Fastener” – A resilient rail support system secured directly to a stiff track base.
3.1 In additional to the requirements of SECTION 1-10: QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING LABORATORY
requirements of the contract, and with this Specification.
3.2 The use of drilling templates, approved by the Engineer, is required to ensure standard uniform hole
locations for all works.
4. Submittals
SUBSTITUTIONS for approval of the following:
(a) Detail shop drawings and design details for approval by the Engineer.
(b) Details of the rail support system including insulation and noise attenuation. Design test results
and production test results.
(c) A method statement for bridge works together with a list of mechanical plant to be used.
(d) Epoxy mortar mix design, bond strength and “pot life”
(e) Drilling templates.
5.1 Delivery
(a) Galvanised steel bearers shall be delivered to site with fasteners fixed and all ready for
installation.
(b) During transportation, bearers shall be separated by wooden spacers.
(c) Fastenings and galvanised nuts and bolts shall be shipped boxed.
5.2 Storage
(a) Beams shall be stored out of mud and dirt and prpper drainage for the storage area provided.
(b) Protect material by keeping under cover until fully painted.
5.3 Handling
(a) Steel shall not be handled until paint has thoroughly dried.
(b) Steelwork shall not be dropped and care taken to avoid paint abrasions and other damage.
(c) All damaged steelwork shall be rejected.
PART II PRODUCTS
1. Materials
(a) Steel sections shall conform to the requirements of TIS 116 Structural Steel Sections. To be
delivered to site primed and painted.
(b) Steel plates shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A6
(c) Track pads and rail pads shall be either virgin rubber, or ethylene vinyi acetate (EVA), HDPE, or
similar proven product, coloured black.
(d) Rail fasteners shall be of zero longitudinal restraint on the rail by the Engineer. Loosening of
bolts or threaded components to achieve ZLR shall not be accepted.
(e) Electrodes shall be standard commercial products for the grade of steel being welded.
(f) Nuts and bolts shall be to ISO metric threads, and in accordance with TIS 171 Bolts, Screws,
Nuts and Studs. Proprietary lock nuts shall be as approved by the Engineer.
2. Baseplates for Steel Bearers
(a) The rail baseplates to be secured to the steel bearers shall provide electrical isolation as well
as noise attenuation. The fastener system shall provide no longitudinal restraint to the rail so
that the rail moves longitudinally independently of the movement of the bridge, but at the
same time providing restraint against lateral translation and rail rotation.
(b) The baseplate securing system to the steel bearer shall be two bolts with an adjustment range
of ± 12. 5mm to permit adjustment for alignment and rail head wear. Each increment of
adjustment shall be capable of not more than 3-5mm.
(c) The complete fastening assembly shall provide an equivalent Lumped Track Stiffness of 50-
80kN/mm assuming zero deflection of the immediate supporting steel beams.
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Installation of Steel Cross Beams
(a) Conduct a review of the design of each bridge, to determine stringer spacing, beam spacing,
working platforms and the necessary method of working.
(b) Confirm safe loadings for the bridge and determine that temporary working loadings are safe.
(c) Prepare the top surface of the bridge longitudinal girders to accept the steel cross beams such
that the cross beams can be seated securely on the longitudinal girders without conflicting
with welds, both heads or nuts.
(d) Drill the upper flanges of the longitudinal girders to accept the fastenings for the cross beams
to the longitudinal girders. This work is to carried out using drilling templates that locate the
bolt holes at both ends of one steel bearer at the same time.
(e) Holes shall be drilled in accordance with the requirements set out in SECTION 4- 10:
STRUCTURAL STEELWORK and flame cutting of holes is strictly forbidden.
(f) The steel bearers shall be fixed so that they are correctly centred in relation to the longitudinal
girders and the upper surface of all the beams shall be within 1mm of the same horizontal
plane. Steel packing shims will be provided as necessary between the steel bearers and
longitudinal girders to ensure the correct vertical alignment. The shims are to cover the same
bearing area as the steel bearers and be drilled to fit over all the fixing bolts.
(g) Each steel bearer shall be level, or correctly set to the design cant if so applicable.
2. Installation of Rail on Steel Cross Beams
(a) This work involves the placement of rail, baseplates and fastener system only on the bridge.
Rail shall be continuously welded over the length of the bridge. Fastening system shall be the
same as used for other parts of track.
(b) No rail welding shall be carried out on the bridge structures.
(c) Rail shall be moved onto to the bridge, after welding into a continuous length, by the use of
winches and temporary rollers. The rail shall not be dragged over the bridge at any time
without roller supports.
(d) All baseplates and fasteners shall be installed before rail is moved onto the bridge and as
soon as the rail is located in the final position the temporary rollers shall be removed and the
rail securely fastened in positing.
8.15 BALLASTLESS TRACK

1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers the engineering design, construction, installation and testing of ballastless
track.
1.2 Work to be carried out under this specification includes:
 Detailed design of track structure as provided herein:
 Supply of all necessary materials to complete the work which is not included in other pay
items.
 Installation of ballastless track
 Quality assurance and quality control
 Temporary works, safety of construction traffic, equipment to be used, track records, and
maintenance.
 Verification of the track alignment as shown in the Contract Drawings.
1.3 Work not covered under this specification:
 Design of track alignment.
1.4 Related Sections include the following:
 Section 8.1 - Rails
 Section 8.2 - Turnouts
 Section 8.3 - Concrete Sleepers and Bearers
 Section 8.5 - Rail Fastening System
 Section 8.6 - Testing of Assembled Concrete Sleepers
 Section 8.8 - Other Track Materials and Works
 Section 8.9 - Rail Welding
 Section 8.10 - Glued Rail Joints
 Section 8.11 - Tracklaying
 Section 8.12 - Alterations and Modifications of Existing Track
1.5 The Contractor may propose, in writing, alternatives for designs, materials or methodology specified
herein at any time during the performance of the Contract. Those alternatives may be used in lieu
of the requirements of the Specifications only if written approval of those alternatives has been
issued by the Engineer.
2. Definitions
“Ballastless Track” - track structure in which the rails are fastened to a structural base, either directly
or through sleepers or track slabs which in turn are mounted to be structural base.
“ Optimum Temperature” – The temperature at which a length of continuous welded rail will have
no stress in it due to thermal expansion or contraction. ( Also de- stressing temperature, neutral
temperature, normalizing temperature).
“Rail Inclination” - the mounting of the rail in a slightly rotated position, so that the head of the rail
inclines toward the centre of tract. Rails are normally inclined at 1: 40m, but in some exceptional
situations rails are laid without inclination.
“Track Cant” - the tilting of the track structure so that the outer rail on curves is higher than the inner
rail. Cant is provided to reduce the effects of centrifugal force in trains.
“Track Base” - a reinforced concrete fill which is placed between the track sleepers and the basement
structure, to support the track and hold it to the correct alignment.
“Track Gauge” - the distance between the sides of the rail head nearest the centre line of the track.
The tract gauge shall be measured 14 mm below the top of rail and normal to the centre line of the
track.
“ Derailment Containment” – the device to restrain derailed vehicle from moving sufficiently and
laterally to endanger nearby vehicle and adjacent structure and to prevent the derailed vehicle to
fall of elevated structure.
3.1 General: In additional to the requirements of the General Specification for Quality Assurance the
Contractor shall maintain adequate records in accordance with the requirements of this quality
requirements of the contract, and shall include the following:
(1) Evaluation of subcontractors’ and supplier qualifications and test performance.
(2) Results of inspections and tests.
(3) Certificates of compliance.
(4) Qualified procedures for track laying processes.
(5) Personnel certifications.
(6) Measuring and test equipment calibration certificates.
(7) Transmittals of contract related information
3.2 Standards: All track materials and construction shall be in accordance with the requirements of the
specification and the requirements of the General Specification for Applicable Standards.
3.3 Work Practices : The Contractor shall:
(1) Conform to the requirements of the Contract Drawings and these Specifications.
(2) Employ personnel qualities by experience in track and turnout installation as foreman or
leadmen for trackwork installation.
(3) Use proper tools and techniques. Any practice liable to damage the track material or existing
(4) Use qualified engineering surveyors to establish and maintain survey reference points for
alignment and elevation.
3.4 Equipment: Construction equipment must comply with –
(1) Clearance requirements of SRT Loading Gauge when in running order:
(2) Maximum axle loads of 15 tons.
(3) Maximum uniform load of 4.5 tonnes per m.
3.5 Acceptance: For the purposes of issuing a Taking- Over certificate for the Works or Section of the
Works as defined in the Contract Documents:
(1) Deviations and tolerances for track construction shall be checked for track acceptance.
(2) The Engineer will make an inspection of the track prior to acceptance. The final horizontal and
vertical alignment, gauge, cross level, and cant shall be within the specified construction tolerances.
(3) The Contractor shall correction track deviations, as disclosed by the survey, which exceed
Specified tolerances at no additional cost to SRT.
4. Design of Ballastless Track

4.1 General
4.1.1 The ballastless track shall be engineered to accommodate all the forces and displacements
generated at the wheel and rail contact point by train operations.
4.1.2 The ballastless track design shall utilize the following components:
(1) EN 54E1 rail in accordance with the Specification for Rail;
(2) Resilient fastening system in accordance with the Specification for Rail Fastening System.
(3) Pre- stressed concrete sleepers and bearers in accordance with the Specification for Concrete
Sleepers and Bearers;
(4) Reinforced concrete trackbase as specified below:
(5) Welded rail joints in accordance with the Specification for Welded Rail Jonts;
(6) Insulated joints in accordance with the Specification for Insulated Rail Joints: and
(7) Compromise rails, rail movement joints, and buffer stops in accordance with the Specification
for Other Track Materials and Works.
4.1.3 General arrangement of track shall be as shown in the drawings. Care shall be taken to ensure that
the track structure design conforms to requirements of the loading gauge and does not interfere with
turnouts, rail movement joints, other special trackwork, signal gear, platforms or other elements of
viaducts, station or railway systems.
4.1.4 The running rails shall be electrically insulated from earth to prevent earth.
4.1.5 The Contractor shall base his design on existing proven technology which has been used successfully
under similar or more severe service conditions.
4.2 Design Data
4.2.1 Major design data, which shall be confirmed by the Contractor, is given in the following table:
Table 8.15-1: Basic Design Criteria

Description Value
Passenger speed / axle load: 160 km/h / 200 kN
Freight speed / axle load: 120 km/h / 200 kN
Track gauge 1000 mm
Rail inclination 1:40 (*)
Maximum track cant 90 mm
Lateral force 115 kN/m
Longitudinal force per fastening 6.0 kN
Minimum electric resistance (rail to rail) 100 ohms/km or meet minimum requirements
for the function of SRT’s track circuits
Minimum electric resistance (rail to earth) 100 ohms/km or meet minimum requirements
for the function of SRT’s track circuits
(*) except as noted elsewhere in this specification
4.2.2 Design Gauge
4.3.1 Gauge shall be 1,000 mm except through turnouts, rail movement joints and other special trackwork,
where gauge will be specified on the trackwork manufacturer’s drawings:
4.2.3 Gauge transition shall be uniform and shall not exceed tolerances for horizontal track alignment.
4.2.4 Ballastless track design shall make provision for lateral adjustment of ± 20 mm.
4.3 Rail Inclination

4.3.1 Rail inclination on all ballastless track other than turnouts shall be 1:40.
4.3.2 Turnout rails shall be inclined at 1: 40, in accordance with the Specification for Turnouts and Special
Tracwork.
4.4 Track Design
4.4.1 The Contractors shall be propose the design of the ballastless track in accordance with these
specifications.Ballastless track shall be of embedded sleeper design, and replaceable, Plinth, pedestal
or slab track designs shall not be acceptable.
4.4.2 Ballastless track designs shall provide sufficient internal resilience to limit the levels of stress and
vibration transmitted to support structure. At locations specified by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
provide additional track resilience to further attenuate vibration.
4.4.3 Drainage: The Contractor shall ensure that adequate provision is made for drainage of the top surface
of the track structure, and also from one side of the track structure to the other.
4.4.4 Track Interfaces: The Contractor shall take special notice in his design of the interface details required
at the following locations:
 Change from ballastless to ballasted track: and
4.4.5 Rail Expansion Joints: All main line tracks including turnouts shall be laid as CWR. Where feasible,
movement of supporting structures at structural expansion joints shall be accommodated in the track
by the use of a low- longitudinal restraint rail fastening system in the vicinity of the structural joint.
Rail Expansion Joints shall not be used, except at locations where structure movements are too large
to be accommodated in the track, and only as approved by the Engineer.
4.5 Protection of Derailed Vehicles: Derailment containment shall be design and installed along the entire
length of elevated tracks to withstand the impact of derail vehicles. The derail containment shall be
at the same level as the extended connecting line between the top of rail and positioned outside of
the rail. Derailment containment is not required for ballastless track in tunnel.
5. Submittals
The Contractor shall submit the following documents in accordance with the General Specification
for Submittals and Substitutions.
5.1 After completion of ballastless track design:
(1) Design concepts and design criteria used.
(2) Design calculations in support of the proposed track design including the effect on behaviour
of the lateral and vertical forces generated at the wheel and rail.
(3) Calculations of vibration and noise attenuation, track deflection under load, track modulus
and the vertical, lateral and longitudinal loads, transmitted to supporting structure.
(4) Calculations and estimates of service life of the track components.
(5) Preliminary maintenance procedures for adjustment of the track and repair or replacement of
track components including rail, fasteners and sleepers.
(6) Locations where ballastless track of similar design is currently in service, including contact
information for the relevant railway operators.
5.2 Prior to start of track construction:
(1) Qualifications of assigned personnel.
(2) Construction equipment data showing compliance with wheel contour, gauge, loads, and
clearance for on-track equipment. Ling welded rail transporting equipment shall be equipped
with a safe baking system, safety chains or safety devices and couplers and a rail end protection
device to prevent LWR from excessive movement if the load rail centre anchor system fails or
slips. Submit calculation for braking system.
(3) Procedures for track laying including schedule.
(4) Procedures for unloading and stacking materials.
(5) Procedures for handling and fastening LWR.
(6) Procedures for de- stressing rail prior to final fastening including data on mechanical vibrators
and heating devices for relieving internal rail stresses.
(7) Procedures for rail grinding and subsequent clean up.
(8) Procedures for end hardening rails.
(9) Procedures and equipment for bringing bolts to specified torque and for calibration of torque
wrench by independent testing laboratory.
(10) Procedures for bending rail.
5.3 During track construction work.
(1) Torque wrench certification records and torque measuring records,
(2) Complete and current record of field welded or fishplates joints and locations of short rails
and compromise rails in accordance with information as specified in Schedule 8-1.1.
(3) Rail end-hardening test results.
(4) Pre-construction inspection reports.
(5) Final inspection and acceptance procedures with material specific tolerances.
5.4 Product data-Manufacturer’s printed information and recommendations for:
(1) Product data of rail thermometers to be furnished to the Engineer.
(2) Product data for bolt hole expansion machine.
(3) Product data for rail bending machine.
(4) Adhesive for binding metal tags to concrete.
(5) Power tools to be used by the Contractor
5.5 As-built Drawings: To be provided by the Contractor in timely manner as the work progresses:
(1) Vertical and horizontal rail alignment, the applied cant. The locations of level crossings,
bridges, culverts and turnouts.
(2) Track charts obtained from track inspection vehicle.
(3) The Contractor shall make the necessary revisions to reproducible copies of the layout
drawings.
(4) Rail Types: Show rail section, location of site welds, location of fishplate rail or compromise
rail.
6. Guarantee
(1) The Contractor shall guarantee the ballastless track against all defects attributable to faulty
design, workmanship and quality of material requiring withdrawal from service before the end
of the Defect Liability Period.
(2) Ballastless track that performs below specification or fails in service before the expiration of
the Defects Liability Period shall be repaired free of charge. The cost of installing replacement
materials shall be borne by the Contractor. Effective materials released from ballastless track
shall be handed over at site to the Contractor for this disposal off railway property.
(3) The Contractor shall make good that cost of such replacement within 60 days of advice of
defects, during which period, the Contractor shall inspect the ballastless track, make his
observations and carry out examination jointly with the SRT’s representative.
(4) Patent Rights: The patent rights of the ballastless track design shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor who will indemnify the Employer against any claim in this connection.
7. Track Materials and Components
7.1 General
All materials and components proposed for incorporation into the ballastless track shall have a
proven service record and shall have been in service successfully under similar operating and climatic
conditions for a minimum of 5 years.
7.2 Rail
Rail section for ballastless track and turnouts shall be EN 54E1, in accordance with the Specification
for Rail, except for special rail sections for use in switch points and check rails and noted below.
7.3 Rail Joints
7.3.1 All rail joints on ballastless track shall be welded in accordance with the Specification for Welded
Rail Joints, with the exception of insulated rail joints.
7.3.2 Insulated rail joints shall be glued- type shop manufactured in accordance with the Specification for
Insulated Rail Joints.
7.4 Rail Fastening System
7.4.1 The fastening system shall be in accordance with the Specification for Rail Fastening System. It shall
provide an adequate resilience to the system, electrical insulation between the rails and the support
structure, support and security to ensure the gauge and rail inclination are safely maintained.
7.4.2 For maintenance purposes, the fastening system in ballastless tracks shall be verticality adjustable.
The total vertical adjustability of the rail shall be at least 20mm. The vertical adjustment shall be
possible by the insertion of shims whilst maintaining the elements of the standard fastening system.
The means of providing the adjustment shall not affect the resilience or stability of the system.
7.4.3 Fastener assemblies are to have the provision for lateral adjustment of at least 20mm.
7.5 Sleepers and Bearers
7.5.1 Sleepers and bearers shall be concrete sleepers and bearers, designed and manufactured in
accordance with the Specification for Concrete Sleepers and Bearers.
7.6 Turnout, Rail Movement Joints and Special Trackwork
7.6.1 Turnout and special trackwork shall be in accordance with the Specification for Turnouts and Special
Trackwork. Rail movement joints shall be in accordance with the Specification for Other Track
Materials and Works.
7.7 Track Base
7.7.1 Concrete track base supporting sleepers and bearers shall be engineered to AREMA Manual ( 2002)
Chapter 8: Concrete Structures and foundations, or approved equivalent international standards.
8. Track Construction
8.1 General
8.1.1 Track shall be constructed conforming to the alignment and profile data shown on the drawings and
as approved by the Engineer. Alignment is based on the centerline of track, equidistant between the
gauge faces of the running rails, and profile refers to the top of the lower rail I final position.
(1) Gauge : 1,000 mm measured 14 mm below the plane of the top of the rails. Gauge trough
turnouts will be specified on the turnout manufacturer’s drawings.
(2) Rail inclination: to be 1 in 40.

(3) Cant: 90mm maximum.
(4) Cant deficiency: 50mm maximum.
(5) Vertical curve radius: Normal 10,000 m exceptionally 5,000 m.
(6) Fastener spacing for all tracks: 600 mm.
(7) Axle loads and speed:
Axle loads and speed 20 T at 160 km/h
8.1.2 Ballastless track shall be constructed in the following sequence:
(1) Preliminary set- out of track location during tunnel construction: Track location to be marked
on shop drawings to facilitate provision of reinforcement trackbase.
(2) Set out track alignment on viaduct structure: After the finishing of the tunnel, setting out shall
be completed on the structure accordance with Section 8. 2 below. Setting out shall be
checked and approved by the Engineer.
(3) Lay out trackbase reinforcement: The Contractor shall install the reinforcement mat between
the tunnel walls and ties to the tunnel structure.
(4) Place concrete sleepers: The sleepers shall be laid out between the tunnel walls, supported
on temporary blocks so as not to disturb the reinforcement mat. Rail pads shall be placed in
the rail seat area using approved adhesive.
(5) Place Long Welded Rail on sleepers: the LWR shall be carefully laid in the rail seats checking
that no welds are closer than 50 mm to the rail seat area.
(6) Adjust sleeper spacing and alignment: The Contractor will use a template or other approved
method to ensure that sleepers are uniformly spaced at 600 mm and are perpendicular to the rail.
(7) Fasten Long Welded Rail to sleepers: The LWR shall be fastened LIGHTLY to the sleepers,
taking care to ensure that sleeper are snugly attached to rail, yet allowing the possibility to
longitudinal movement of the rail with respect to the sleepers.
(8) Support track and align to correct position: Using approved devices, the track shall be
suspended in a secure manner at the correct height, alignment and cant. Temporary blocking
material shall be removed from sleepers and trackbase reinforcement shall be adjusted to the
correct position. Sleeper reinforcement shall be wired to trackbase reinforcement. Track gauge,
horizontal alignment, vertical alignment, and cant shall be checked and approved by the
Engineer.
(9) Pour concrete trackbase: The Contractor shall pour the trackbase using non- shrink concrete.
Concrete shall be carefully placed and vibrated using approved vibrating devices, taking care
not to disturb the position of reinforcement or sleepers. The concrete shall be given a smooth
trowelled finish, flush with the top surface at the contre of the sleepers, or slightly below. The
full top surface and markings of each sleeper shall be kept clean and visible. The contractor
shall endeavor to keep the rail at the same temperature during initial setup of the trackbase.
The trackbase shall be kept moist while curing.
(10) Release track supports: Once the trackbase has set up sufficiently to support the weight of the
track structure, the track supports shall be released and removed. Rail fastener shall be further
loosened to allow temperature movement of the rail.
(11) Clean track and check tolerances: After initial curing, the track shall be cleaned of debris and
the gauge, horizontal alignment, vertical alignment and track cant shall be remeasured. Any
out of tolerance dimensions shall be corrected by horizontal and vertical adjustment of the
fastening system. The final tolerances after adjustment shall be reviewed and approved by
the Engineer.
(12) Perform insulation test: The Contractor shall carry out the rail insulation test, the results of
which shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer.
(13) Join LWR by welding to form CWR: The Contractor shall following procedures set out in Clause
8.9.
(14) De- stressing and final fastening of rail: The Contractor shall following procedures set out in
Clause 8.9. The distressing shall be checked and approved by the Engineer.
(15) Install track signs and markers: The Contractor shall place track signs and markers in
accordance with the Specification for Other Track Material and Works.
(16) Final cleanup of track and track bed: The Contractor shall pick up all loose debris and
removed from the site.
(17) Detailed inspection of track: Each completed section of the track shall be given a final
inspection in accordance with Clause 9. 8. All defects encountered shall immediately be
rectified, and track gauge, alignment and cant adjusted to within tolerance by the Contractor.
(18) Final Check with recording vehicle: Prior to Acceptance of completed track, the track shall be
inspected using SRT’s EM-80 Track Recording Car.
8.2 Setting Out
8.2.1 The Contractor shall carry out all necessary survey work and alignment computations to enable the
detailed setting out of the tracks. The setting out shall take into consideration the as- built data for
tunnel structures, station platforms and other fixed points along the line, and the alignment data.
8.2.2 Setting out points shall be placed indicating the alignment. The points shall be located on the tunnel
structure at the track centre line with a spacing of 50 m on tangents, 20 m on curves with radii of 800
m or greater, 10 m curves with radii less than 800 m and on transition curves.
8.2.3 The beginning and end points of transition curves and well as beginning and end points of vertical
curves shall be marked.
8.2.4 Track elevation reference points shall be located at least every 50 m or as directed by the Engineer.
8.2.5 Track chainage shall be marked at every 100 m point.
8.2.6 The marking of the track as well as the computations and the survey methods shall be subject to
approval by the Engineer.
8.3 Long Welded Rails
8.3.1 Long welded rails shall be produced off site by a static or mobile fusion welder.
8.3.2 Prior to being welded all rails shall be straight and rails that have been bent or deformed in any way
shall be returned to the rail yard for straightening.
8.3.3 Rails shall be welded with the rolling marks on the same side.
8.3.4 The welding of minimum length rails into long welded rail lengths for ballastless track shall be by a
fusion welding system. Alumino-thermic welding shall only be used for closing welds during the final
fastening down, and for locations in turnouts or other locations where fusion welding is not practical.
8.3.5 A schedule of the long welded rails shall be approved by the Engineer prior to commencing
production of long welded rail.
8.3.6 Welding of rail joints shall be undertaken as detailed in (rail welding spec), and inspected and tested
in accordance the specification.
8.3.7 All long welded rails shall be numbered with the number painted on the web of the rail at both
ends.
8.3.8 The Contractor shall be responsible for the transport of long welded rails from the production
location to the installation site.
8.3.9 All welds shall be a minimum of 50 mm clear of the rail fasteners.
8.3.10 Welded joints in track shall not be staggered by more than the tolerances state in the specification.
Staggering of joints in turnouts shall be accordance with (turnout spec).
8.3.11 The ends of a pair of long welded rails shall be square to each other or staggered by one or more
sleeper spacing. In order to give ample space for the rail welding no rail end may be located nearer
than 150 mm from the edge of sleeper. Adjusting of the distance to rail ends can be made by moving
the nearest sleepers within spacing tolerance and by cutting of the rail ends.
8.4 Cutting and Drilling of Rails.
8.4.1 No cuts or holes shall be permitted except as shown and specified.
8.4.2 Rails shall be cut square and clean by means of either rail saws or abrasive cutting discs. Flame
cutting will not be permitted. Rails shall not be cut for installation of bonded joints within 4.5 metres
of any weld.
8.4.3 All fish boltholes in rails shall be drilled 1 mm smaller and cold expanded to the correct diameter.
Cold expansion shall be in accordance with a procedure to be proposed by the Contractor and
8.4.4 Holes drilled in rails other than fish holes shall be drilled 1 mm smaller and reamed to the correct
diameter.
8.4.5 Holes required in rails for the attachment of signal or traction bonds shall be drilled in accordance
with the rail bond manufacturer’s recommendation.
8.4.6 All holes shall be drilled using approved templates prior to accurately locate the drilling. The
fishplate shall not be used as a drilling guide.
8.4.7 Drill the hole at the required location accurately so that the tolerance in diameter is 0. 2mm. This
shall be achieved by a two stage process of drilling and reaming.
8.4.8 High speed drilled shall not be used. The drills to be used shall be approved by the Engineer.
8.4.9 For joining rails with fishplates joints, drill and space bolt holes in rail to provide SRT standard gap
between rail ends.
8.4.10 For joining rails with insulated joints, drill bolt holes in rail to provide the manufacturer’ s
recommended gap for insulated endposts.
8.4.11 Clean the bolt hole carefully ensuring that all grease and oil are removed. A high degree of finish is
required for the bolt hole. All burrs and sharp edges shall be removed. The Contractor shall collect
and remove drilling particles from site.
8.5 Pre-curving of Rails.
8.5.1 Rails which are to be installed in curved track with a centre line radius of less than 300 metres shall
be pre- curved throughout their length, using approved equipment that bends the rails about the
longitudinal neutral axis.
8.6 Hardening of Rail Ends.
8.6.1 Rail ends of standard rail only shall be end hardened.
8.6.2 The Contractor shall submit a proposed procedure for the hardening of the end 40mm of the head
of rails connected by insulated joints, or standard joints for the approval of the Engineer prior to
commencement of joint construction.
8.6.3 The rail end hardening procedure shall be carried out by the qualified crew satisfying the
requirements of this section.
8.6.4 Upon completion of every fifty hardened rail ends prepare a test sample in the field and test in
accordance with the specified test requirements. Should the test sample fail the rail end hardening
crew will be required to re-quality.
8.7 Turnouts, Rail Expansion Joints and Special Trackwork (Not used)
8.8 Insulated Joints
8.8.1 Insulated rail joints shall be tested in accordance with the Specification for Signalling and Train
Control.
8.8.2 Insulated rail joints shall be precisely located in accordance with the Specification for Insulated Rail
Joints and this specification.
8.8.3 Bevel Rail ends in joints in accordance with the bonded joint manufacturer’s written specifications.
8.9 Distressing of CWR
8.9.1 Temporary joints between LWR shall be made using fishplates and clams as approved by the
Engineer.
8.9.2 The Contractor shall submit a detailed procedure for joining LWR and distressing the rail, for the
approval of the Engineer. The optimum rail temperature shall be based on rail temperature
measurements taken by the Contractor over a period of several days, and shall be approved by the
Engineer.
8.9.3 Once the track installation is completed and approved, the LWR shall be in- situ welded to form a
continuously welded rail (CWR) system. Welding of LWR shall not be located closer than 4.5 metres
from the centre of shop welds or other joints in the same rail.
8.9.4 Rail temperature shall be measured using approved magnetic rail thermometers placed on the web
of the rail on the shaded side. A minimum of six thermometers per ling welded rail length shall be
used and the rail temperature shall be taken as the mean of the six or more readings.
8.9.5 Final fastening of the CWR to the sleepers shall take place only when the rail is within 30๐ C of the
optimum temperature. The Contractor shall record the rail temperature every 30 minutes during the
final fastening process. If the rail temperature deviates more than 30๐ C from the optimum
temperature, he shall be cease final fastening until the rail temperature returns to within the specified
range.
8.10 Clean Up
8.10.1 All loose debris, track materials rail saw, rail drillings and rail welding particles shall be picked up and
removed from the site
8.10.2 Examine drainage inverts, pipes, sumps, and other conduits for spilled concrete, rail debris, ballast
material, and other debris. Remove such obstructions at no additional cost to the Employer.
8.10.3 All the Contractor’ s storage and work areas at the site shall be maintained in a neat and orderly
conditional. Debris, scrap materials, recovered materials or any of the Contractor’ s operations that
are unsightly or that cause unsafe working conditions will be corrected immediately when required
by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Employer.
8.11 Rectification Works.
8.11.1 When any section of track or a junction has been identified and agreed as requiring rectification work,
the Contractor shall submit, for approval, his methods for rectification and his programme for
completion of the works.
8.11.2 On satisfactory completion of any rectification works a complete set of as constructed records shall
be obtained by the Contractor for that section of the Works, including a continuous trace record.
These records shall be submitted for approval.
9. Track Inspection and Testing
9.1 General
9.1.1 The Contractor shall have all materials, components and assemblies, unless otherwise noted, tested
by an approved and certified testing facility to demonstrate that satisfy the requirements of the
Specification.
9.1.2 Where no standard procedure, frequency or acceptance criterion is defined, the Contractor shall
propose suitable standards, procedure frequency and acceptance criteria for approval.
9.1.3 A comprehensive schedule of all material inspections and tests, and the required or specified
frequency of testing shall be produced by the Contractor.
9.2 Allowable Track Tolerances
9.2.1 General
1. The completed track shall be measured and the measurements recorded and submitted in an
approved hard copy and electronic format and state herein.
2. The Variations in horizontal alignment, vertical alignment, versines, ion, cross level / cant, twist
and gauge shall not exhibit cyclic patterns.
3. All the manually obtained track records shall be measured and recorded on the maximum 5m
base and with the track in the unloaded condition.
4. No individual material, component or manufactured item assembly tolerances shall be
allowed to deviate from the specified completed track tolerances of this Specification.
9.2.2 Dimensional Tolerance: Completed track tolerances ( variation from design) shall comply with the
following minimum limits:
1. Gauge ± 2 mm
2. Cant / Cross Level
(a) Straight track and constant canted ± 3 mm
curved track
(b) Cant transitions ± 3 mm
(c) Zero canted curves + 53 mm,
- 0 mm
3. Horizontal Alignment ± 3 mm
4. Maximum Horizontal Rate of Change 1:1500
5. Maximum Vertical Rate of Change 1:1500
6. Maximum Cant Gradient* 1:350
7. Maximum Twist 1:1500
8. Sleeper / Baseplate / Block Spacing ± 5 mm
9. Versine
(a) Permitted variation from the design versine / offset
measured at the centre of the chord:
Variation (mm)
Chord Length (m) Curve Straight
20 6 6
10 4 4
5 2 2
(b) The maximum variation between 1:1500
offsets measured at any location along
the chord
(c) The difference between the permitted variations in
consecutive versines shall not exceed:
Chord Length (m) Variation (mm)
20 6
10 4
5 2
*- takes precedence over Clause 9.2.2 (2)(b) in cant transitions.
9.3 Methods of Measuring and Recording
9.3.1 The constructed recordings of rail level and horizontal and longitudinal location with respect to the
design location shall be obtained by the use of standard electronic survey instruments. Horizontal
location readings shall be presented as coordinates with the offset to designed location also shown.
9.3.2 The vertical and horizontal rail location readings shall be taken at coincidental kilometres. The
recordings of rail level horizontal location shall be taken at the following intervals:
1. Vertical Every 5m
2. Horizontal At every change of geometry
Every 15m in curved track
Every 30m in straight track
9.3.3 Record of distressing at the time of final fastening shall include

1. Location by distance, track designation, and rail.
2. Date and time
3. Air temperature, rail temperature, and approximate weather conditions.
9.3.4 All records shall be submitted in hard copy and electronically.
9.3.5 The Contractor shall analyze all records prior to submission. He shall mark all records where further
detail is required in addition to all sections / parameters that are outside the specified tolerances.
9.3.6 All sections / parameters agreed as requiring rectification work shall be rectified by the Contractor.
9.4 Inspection Before Pouring Trackbase
9.4.1 After the track structure has been assembled and positioned in accordance with Clause 8.1.2 (8) to
(10), the track shall be rigorously checked in accordance with Clauses 9.2 Allowable Track Tolerances
and 9.3 Methods of Measuring and Recording.
9.4.2 All deficiencies shall be promptly corrected and all out- of- tolerance conditions adjusted to within
tolerance.
9.4.3 All corrections and adjustment shall be remeasured to confirm that the deficiencies have been
corrected, and the results submitted to the Engineer for Approval.
9.5 Inspection after Pouring Trackbase.
9.5.1 Immediately after installation or the track, the rails, the rail fastenings, the concrete trackbase,
including ducts, troughs and cross track drains, and the invert slab or face of sleepers shall be made
clean by the Contractor.
9.5.2 The track shall be rigorously checked in accordance with Clauses 9.2 Allowable Track Tolerances and
9.3 Methods and Measuring and Recording.
9.5.3 All deficiencies shall be promptly corrected and all out- of- tolerance conditions adjusted to within
tolerance.
9.5.4 All correction and adjustments shall be remeasured to confirm that the deficiencies have been
corrected, and the results submitted to the Engineer for Approval.
9.6 Rail Insulation Test
9.6.1 All tracks shall be submitted to a rail insulation test. The minimum resistance value shall be 100
ohms per 1000m of single track or according to the signaling minimum requirement to ensure the
functional of SRT’ s track Circuits. The minimum resistance shall be measured from rail to rail, and
from each rail to earth.
9.6.2 The rail insulation test shall be undertaked after the track has been completed and cleaned but
before it finally formed into a continuously welded system and before bonding is installed.
9.6.3 When taking resistance measurements, the test equipment probes shall be brought into full electrical
contact with each rail and with an approved earthing point.
9.6.4 The test shall be undertaken on track lengths up to maximum length of 1000 m. For track length less
than 1000m, the minimum resistance shall be divided by the track length in metres accordingly (e.g.
for 200m track length, the minimum resistance shall be the minimum resistance required for 1000-
metre track / 200 ohms).
9.6.5 The measured resistance values shall be recorded together with a description of the earthing point
and a description of track segment.
9.6.6 The track shall not be joined into a continuous length, nor shall the track be jointed to adjacent
tracks, until the rail insulation test results have been approved by the Engineer.
9.7 Turnouts, Rail Expansion Joints and Special Trackwork

Not used
9.8 Final Inspection
Not used
9.9 Test Using Track Recording Car
9.9.1 At the completion of each of the Works or any Section the Engineer will prove that the dynamic
tolerances are met by using the SRT Track Recording Car owned and operated by SRT.
9.9.2 Dynamic tolerances as recorded by SRT’s owned and operated track recording shall not exceed.
Parameter Tolerance in mm
Longitudinal Profile -5m chord ±4
Gauge +5 to -2
Cross Level ±4
Twist – mid-ordinate 5m chord ±7
Alignment – mid ordinate 10m chord +5
9.10 Qualification Tests for Rail End Hardening Crew

9.10.1 General
(1) Two samples of end hardened standard rails shall be prepare in accordance with the approved
procedures.
(2) The test samples shall be prepared by the same crew which will perform the rail end hardening
process at site.
(3) Testing of the samples shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory approved by
the Engineer.
(4) Rail end hardening process shall not commence before procedures, crews, and qualification
tests are approved by the Engineer.
9.10.2 Test two samples for Rockwelll hardness in accordance with ASTM 18, Rockwell hardness and Rockwell
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials, using a 150kgf diamond sphero-conical penetrator in a grid
pattern of 3.2mm increments for a distance of 154m from the end of the rail. Section one sample for
300mm along the centerline of the rail and section the other sample transversely 12.7mm from the rail
end. These cross sections shall be etched for observations of the hardness pattern obtained.
9.10.3 The Rockwell harness number shall not be less than C29. 5 nor more than C37. 0 when measured at
a point- on the centerline of rail 12. 7mm from the rail end. The hardness shall decrease uniformly
from the end of the rail to the hardness of the untreated rail in a distance of not less than - 50mm.
The hardness pattern shall be uniform across the top surface of the rail head. The etched cross
section of the rail shall examined and shall exhibit a uniformly distributed hardness pattern.
10. Final Track Records
At completion of the works the Contractor shall in cooperation with the State Railway of Thailand
and the Engineer produce a set of “ Final Track Records” In size A1 and deliver 1 set of originals, 1
set of transparent prints and 6 sets of blue line or black line prints.
The original shall be made on polyester tracing firm of a quality approved by the Engineer.
Each drawing shall cover the line and show but not be limited to the following:
 Actual lengths between kilometer posts.
 Longitudinal profile.
 Curvature.
 Type of rails
 Type of fastenings.
 Type of sleepers.
11. Defects Liability
11.1 Liability: During the Defects Liability period the Contractor shall execute repair, amendment,
reconstruction, rectification and making good of defects, if the defects shall be due to the use of
material or workmanship not in accordance with the contract or to neglect or failure on the part of
the Contractor to comply with any objection.
11.2 Defects: In the event of failure due the an inherent defect of any part of the track the Contractor
shall immediately replace the defective part and restore the track to the prescribed condition at no
cost to SRT.
8.16 TRACK EQUIPMENT

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
This Section specifies the Track Equipment to be provided by the Contractor for use on this Contract
and subsequently handed over to SRT. The equipment shall be imported complete. Also included
are the requirements for the Contractor’s own equipment that is to be imported for the Contractor’s
own use on the project.
Work includes: Design and provision of the specified equipment with automatic couplers and air
brakes, painted and complete in every way with all equipment, fittings and accessories in full working
order and training SRT’ s staffs. Repainting of the equipment before handover to SRT at the end of
the Contract.
Contractor’ s Responsibility: Notwithstanding anything stated in the Contract, the supply of the
equipment specified hereof shall be subject to the following additional requirements:
The Contractor shall guarantee to remedy and/or replace free of all costs, including duties and labour
cost incurred for such remedy and/ or replacement, to SRT any part or parts of the vehicle which,
owing to defective design, material or workmanship, or the use of improper materials for the required
purpose may fail in service within three years after the actual date of acceptance by SRT. Except that
complete bogie frames, wheel and axle sets for which the Contractor shall guarantee for five years
after actual date of acceptance by SRT
2. Definitions
“Plain Line Tamper” A self-powered, self contained track mounted machine designed
to lift, align, level and pack plain track.
“Switch & Crossing Tamper” A self powered, self contained track mounted machine designed
to lift, align, level and pack switch and crossing and plain track.
“Ballast Regulator” A self powered, self contained track mounted machine designed
to shape and distribute the gravel track ballast the support the
ties in rail track.
“Track Stabilizer” A self powered, self contained track mounted machine designed
to consolidate ballasted track by a combination of horizontal
vibration and vertical loading.
“Ballast Wagons” A series of unpowered railroad freight vehicles designed to

particurly transport track ballasts for construction and
maintenance activities with a self powered track mounted
machine.
“Manufacturer” The designer and the maker of the equipment or if the context
so applies, the maker of any of the components specified
herein.
“Contractor” The entity signing the Contract for the “ New Track Doubling
Project: Den Chai – Chiang Rai – Chiang Khong Section” and
responsible for the procurement of the equipment under the
Contract.
(a) In addition to the requirement of QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL the Contractor shall
maintain adequate records in accordance with the requirements of his quality assurance
programme. These records shall provide objective evidence of compliance with the
requirements of the Contract, and as required by this Specification.
If the Manufacturer does not have a certified quality assurance programme in accordance with
the requirement of ISO 9000 the Contractor shall submit an independent Inspection Agency’s
name to the Engineer for approval before the commencement of any manufacturing..
(b) The Vehicles will be used on the meter gauge track. Any parts of the vehicle and option shall
not inflinge the loading profile per SRT’s Standard Drawing No. 1966-35 (Single Track), 1966-30
( Double Track) and 1966- 34 ( Track Electric) . Moreover the vehicles shall comply with the
requirements of SRT’s Standard Specifications.
(c) Where the SRT’ s Standard Specifications do not provide the necessary requirements,
documents from the following Organizations shall be used, subject to the approval of specific
documents by the Enginee:
(i) Association of American Railroads, (AAP)
(ii) International Union of Railways (UIC)
(iii) Document of “Accepted Railway Engineering Practice”.
(d) Unless otherwise specified the Contractor is responsible for the performance of all inspection
requirements and tests as specified herein. Except as otherwise specified, the Manufacturer
may use this own or any other facilities suitable for the performance of the inspection
requirements as approved by the Engineer.
(i) Inspection records of the examination and tests shall be kept complete and available
for inspection by SRT or Inspecting Engineer.
(ii) Five (5) copies shall be forwarded to the Engineer for Records.
(iii) SRT reserves the right to perform any of the inspections that are deemed necessary to
assure the supplies and services conform to the prescribed requirements in the
referenced or approved specifications.
(e) Inspection
All materials and workmanship shall be tested and/ or approved by SRT’ s Inspectors during
manufacture.
(i) The Inspectors shall have free access to the Manufacturer’ s factories whilst work is in
progress on the vehicles or vehicles or vehicle components.
(ii) The Inspectors will be at liberty to inspect manufacture or fabrication at any stage and
to reject any material or workmanship that does not conform to the requirements of
this specification.
(iii) The Inspectors shall have the right to authorize any corrections as the work progress.
(f) Test
Material tests shall be carried out in the Manufacturers works, but notwithstanding the material
or components have be obtained from other, the Contractor shall be responsible for the
materials having the specified chemical contents and physical tests to the Inspector’ s
satisfaction.
(i) The costs of all tests, analyses, royalties and patent rights shall be borne by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall provide all labour, tools, equipment and facilities for
all inspection and testing, as required by the Inspectors without cost to SRT.
(ii) It is not mandatory that all materials shall be tested in conformance by the reference
specifications in each individual case. However, the Inspectors will require these
referenced tests, whenever, in their judgment, they are necessary to ascertain that the
quality of the materials used, conforms to the referenced specifications.
(iii) Should any materials be found defective or fail to comply with the tests, analysis of
other requirement of the specifications, they will be rejected.
(iv) All defects determined during testing shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own
cost, before SRT will accept for commissioning.
(g) Inspection
The machine shall be examined for defects. Presence of one or more defects listed below
shall be cause for rejection:
 Material not as specified.
 Dimensions and weights not within limits specified.
 Threaded parts not as specified.
 Parts and components not interchangeable.
 Parts and components subject to replacement or adjustment not accessible.
 Tolerances and fits not as specified.
 Design and construction not as specified.
 Brake equipment not as specified.
 Does not provide the specified performance.
 Safety appliances not as specified.
 Placard holders not furnished or not applied as specified.
 Identification plate not furnished or not applied as specified.
 Painting or marking not as specified.
 Lubrication not as specified.
 Equipment does not conform to the requirements specified for SRT’ s loading
gauge.
 Other substantial defect identified by SRT.
(h) Equipment rejected for failing to pass tests or inspection, shall not be offered for re-testing or
re-inspection until the necessary corrections have been made.
4. Submittals
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in accordance with SUBMITTALS for approval the
following:
(a) Name and address of Manufacturer.
(b) Name and address of Fabricator, and all manufacturers from whom components and materials
shall be obtained.
(c) Standards to be used in the design and fabrication of the vehicles.
(d) Shop drawings of the vehicles which shall also include, but not be limited to:
(i) Dimensioned drawings showing the complete general arrangement, also showing the
location of equipment and apparatus fitted thereon including brake gear arrangement
and coupling device.
(ii) Working drawings for the underframe construction, showing dimensioned arrangement
of members and component parts pertaining to such assembled (or erected) condition
with necessary cross-sections etc.
(iii) Working drawings of bogie construction in assembled ( or erected) condition, also
showing details of components thereof.
(iv) Details of wheel and axle set construction.
(e) Notwithstanding anything stated in PROJECT DOCUMENTS drawings of the vehicles shall be
made such as to enable any of the components, equipment and fittings of the vehicles to be
identified and checked for maintenance and repair purposes.
(f) Drawings shall be fully dimensioned in SI unit which exhibiting the whole of the work as
actually made with full details given, and shall include diagrams of the vehicle with leading
particulars and dimensions as well as the performance data, details of proprietary equipment
and components with the arrangement drawings of such.
(g) Any drawings of proprietary articles shall also be clearly marked with the names of the maker
and as reference number for each component to facilitate the ordering of spare parts.
Explanation of finishing marks and any code words must be given.
(h) Each sheet of drawings, in addition to drawing titles, shall be identified with the contract
number and date, name of manufacturer, name of owner ( SRT) and shall be certified by
responsible personnel of the Maker.
(i) The Contractor shall submit with the vehicle when delivered to SRT for acceptance, tracings,
drawings and technical data in the English language except for item (iii) Instruction Books which
shall be both in English and Thai languages.
(i) ” As- Built” drawings. One complete set on tracing cloth and five prints from each
drawing. Tracings shall be packed in circular tins with hinged lid. Also supplied shall be
one complete set of reduced size white prints with one set of reduced size
transparencies and one set of standard sized micro-fiche of the prints.
(ii) Materials and Parts List: Twenty ( 20) sets of list of material and parts of the vehicle,
giving schedule of each part, number of the part required per vehicle, materials of which
made and their necessary tensile strength and elongation percentage, estimated weight
of each part or assembly of parts with their corresponding drawing numbers. For
proprietary articles the code name of the maker shall be provided.
(iii) Instruction Book: Thirty (30) copies of the instruction sheets dealing with the operation,
maintenance and repair of the equipment and specialists provided.
(iv) Bindings : Prints for “ As- Built” drawings shall be bound in stiff covers 305 x 406mm.
Bindings shall be on the 305mm side. Other data shall be provided in stiff and durable
covers A4 size preferable. The binding cover shall include the printed title, name of
vehicle maker, type and capacity of vehicle, owner’s name, contract number and date.
(v) Inspection report for the vehicle.
(vi) Nominated representative
One month prior to the Taking- Over of the vehicles the Contractor shall provide the
Engineer with a complete list of Manufacturer and the Contractor’ s Nominated
Representatives in Thailand for the Manufacturer.
The Nominated Representative shall be responsible for taking delivery of, forwarding to
the Manufacturer, taking delivery from the Manufacturer and delivering to SRT,
equipment to be repaired under warranty.
(vii) Details of Contractor’ s owned equipment, as required by the Engineer, that will be
imported into Thailand for working on SRT tracks.
(a) Unless otherwise specified, the vehicle shall be preserved, packaged and packed a one single
unit capable of being hoisted in a single lifting operation.
(b) Removed Assemblies and Components
Bolts, nuts, pins, washers and similar components shall be placed in one of the mating parts
and secured to prevent loss. Small components, such as hardware and hoses, removed from
their installed or operating location shall be intermediate packaged in close fitting wooden
boxes. Intermediate packaged components shall be blocked, braced and cushioned within the
container to prevent damage to the contents or container.
(c) Matchmarking
Removed assemblies and components shall be match marked with lusterless, white enamel
letters to facilitate re-assembly. Matchmarking shall be overcoated with varnish. Components
too small to accommodate stencil markings shall be identified with metal tags if available, or
with waterproofed cloth shipping tags, attached to the mating parts.
(d) Preservation and Packing
(i) Preservation and packaging of the vehicles, includes but it is not limited to brake
cylinders, piston rods, air lines and equipment, roller bearings, operating valves, shafts,
spindles etc. , shall be in accordance with standard commercial practice for overseas
shipment as recommended by the Contractor, subject to review, modification to the
recommendation and final approval by the Engineer.
(ii) All packing cases are to be marked with the Contractor’ s name, the gross and net
weights and port of destination. Each package shall be given a serial number
corresponding to the number in the shipping documents.
(e) Exposed Machined Surfaces
In additional to the preservation specified, unpainted exposed machined surfaces, shall be
coated with a preservative compound. When a soft non-drying compound is used, the coated
surface shall be wrapped or covered with grease proof, waterproof paper.
(f) Depreservation Guide
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with two copies of the “ Depreservation Guide”
which shall provide the recommended procedures to be used to commission the vehicles.
One additional copy shall be placed in a waterproofed envelop, marked with the words
“Depreservation Guide” and attached to the side of the vehicle.
(g) Submittal of Packaging and Packing Plans
The Contractor shall submit all packaging and packing plans to the Engineer at the time
specified.
Lifting and jacking points shall be clearly shown one the vehicle underframe.
6. Permanent Way Data
The vehicle and options will be used on SRT track with following permanent way data;
 Track gauge : 1000 mm. + 6 mm – 3 mm. Tolerance
 Rail inclination : 1:40
 Minimum curve radius : On main line 180m. and turn out 156mm.
 Maximum track gradient : 26 per 1000
 Maximum Cant : 90 mm.
 Maximum Cant deficiency : 50 mm.
 Maximum Speed of Passenger trains : 160 kph.
 Maximum axle loads : 20 tons and Loading profiles as SRT’ s standard
Drawing
Single Track SRT’s standard drawing No. 1966-35;
Double Track SRT’s standard drawing No1966-30;
Track Electric SRT’s standard drawing No. 1966-34;
 Size and standard length of rail main line and siding are as following :-
- Rail size : 50, 60 lb./yd Standard length of rail 8, 9 m.
- Rail size : 70 lb./yd Standard length of rail 12, 18 m.
- Rail size : 80 and 100 lb./yd Standard length of rail 18 m.
- Rail size UIC54 Standard length of rail 25 m.
About 75% of entire network are long welded rails.

- Type of sleeper are wooden sleeper and concrete with spacing 60-65 cm.
- Ballast is granite and lime stone and Depth of ballast under sleeper : 10-30 cm.
- Ambient temperature : 10-50 oC and Humidity 60 – 80%
PART II : PRODUCTS
1. General Description
(a) Requirements for all rail vehicle including the Contractor’s
(i) Unless otherwise specified the Contractor shall at his own cost supply all equipment
required for the timely completion of the Works, such as locomotives. Wagons, track
laying equipment, tamping machines welding plant, etc. All equipment shall conform
to the safety requirements of SRT.
(ii) The contractor shall maintain all rail vehicles, including SRT provided equipment, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer during the project, and the Contractor shall at his own cost
provide all the necessary workshops and other facilities for maintenance.
(iii) The normal maximum axle load for all track mounted railway equipment, when
travelling, shall be 15 metric tonnes but consideration will be given to isolated axle
loads that do not exceed 18 tonnes, depending on axle spacing and overall loading to
track and structures.
(iv) The Contractor shall submit details of the axle loads ( both tare and laden) together
with axle spacing of all vehicles to be used by him to the Engineer for approval.
(v) Vehicle outlines when travelling shall be within SRT’ s loading gauge. When operating
shall be able to operate on single or double track and within platforms.
(vi) All track maintenance plant shall be designed to prevent serious damage and industrial
injures resulting from faults in the plant operating systems and machines will be
designed to provide adequate safety devices. Overload alarms and automatic shutdown
devices shall be incorporated, which can be operated from emergency plunger devices
operated at track level positions. All shall be proven as satisfactory under similar
conditions as prevailing in Thailand.
(b) SRT Special Requirement for all vehicles
(i) All equipment shall be fitted with automatic couplers conforming to SRT’s Drawing No.
LV5-2047/6 at both ends of all vehicles. The couplers may be purchased from SRT but
must be fitted prior to permission being granted to operate on SRT property. Coupler
height is to be fixed at 850mm above rail head.
(ii) Wheels shall be solid pressed- on- axle, with contour conforming to SRT’ s Drawing No.
SDI-2014/6, and with a new unworn diameter of more than 700mm. Axles shall be non-
insulated.
(iii) Vehicle shall be equipped with air operated block brakes acting on all wheels according
to UIC or AAR regulations. Vehicles shall be equipped with mechanically operated
parking brakes. All vehicles shall be equipped with a through brake pipeline.
(iv) All non- self propelled vehicles shall be suitable for being attached to trains, and
travelling at a maximum speed of 80kph and axle suspensions shall provide stability
when running at 80kph.
(v) Operating equipment and locomotives shall be provided with pneumatic warning horns
to warn workers on the track and others approaching the machine. Such horns shall be
capable of being heard at a distance of 2kms in rural areas.
(vi) Each operating vehicle shall have:
 1 halogen headlight at each end of the vehicle;
 4 red signal lights (2 at each end);
 Floodlights with arms and sockets for illuminating the level/side controls; and;
 Rotating amber beacons
2. General Requirements for Plain Line Tamper, Switch and Crossing Tamper, Ballast Regulator,
and Dynamic Track Stabilizer.
(a) Main Engines shall be GM Detroit or Deutze or Cummin or “ Equivalent” as specifically
approved by the Engineer. Spare Parts are to be readily available in Thailand. All engines shall
be fitted with heavy duty water cooling systems. All engines shall be derated for ambient
temperature conditions and shall provide at least 5% excess power over maximum output
demand. All machine’s engine shall have the same manufacturer.
(b) Machines with hydraulic power transmissions for propulsion or for working shall have adequate
cooling facilities. Oil temperatures in hydraulic circuits shall be kept below 90oC and all
hydraulic components shall be capable of working satisfactorily under severe climatic

conditions prevailing in Thailand.
(c) All cabling, oil pipelines, and electrical installations shall be protected against climatic
conditions and high frequency vibrations.
(d) Vehicle layout shall permit ease or access to installed equipment for maintenance, and easy
removal of major components.
(e) Operator’s Cabins
(i) Shall be provided with enclosed operator’ s cabins, permitting the driver to be seated
when driving or operating. Tinted safety glass windows, with wipers giving a good view
of the track ahead and of the working parts of the machine shall be provided. Interior
lights for night operations are required. If two cabins or more are provided these shall
be linked by interphone. Alarm buttons shall be mounted on the outside of the vehicles
easily reached from track level.
(ii) Cabins shall be adequately sound insulated in a manner suitable for tropical conditions.
Enclosed cabs shall be air-conditioned, open cabins provided with fans.
(iii) Engine and other equipment indicators shall be provided. These shall indicate oil
pressures, coolant temperatures, engine rpm, battery status, etc. reading in metric units.
(f) Power supplies
(i) Sufficient power supply shall be available to provide necessary lighting systems for
night-work as well as self-propelled travel.
(ii) The battery/batteries provided for the machine shall have adequate capacity for starting
the engine and for providing reserve current for lighting and other appliances. The
battery shall be capable of being float charged when the engine is running, and be
designed for being isolated when the machine is not is use.
(g) Equal Submission
(i) Contractor may submit equipment which has different details than the specification
with the condition in equivalent technical performance, spare parts and maintenance
points of view with the specified equipment.
(ii) Data support or evidence for proving of the equivalent performance shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
3. Particular requirement for Plain Line Tamping Machine
(a) Machines shall be self- propelled and be capable of running at a speed of not less than
65kph on level track and not less than 25kph on a 26 per mil gradient. When towing a similar
machine it shall be capable of at least 35kph on level track.
(b) Bogie Pivot Distance: To guarantee a smooth bending line of the rails, the bogie pivot
distance shall be not less than 13 m.
(c) N/A
(d) The frame and chassis shall be of all-welded steel construction to form a rigid structure with
adequate strength to withstand all loads borne by the machine under service conditions
including train buffing loads.
(e) A material wagon shall be joined to the machine by means of an articulated frame. The rear
part shall ride on a steering axle. The upper part of the material wagon shall provide a
loading platform with side panels. The material wagon shall be accessible over lateral steps.
(f) Tamping operations shall be controlled from one operator's cabin. Two driving positions
shall be provided where the vehicle configuration prevents driving in either direction from
the central position.
(g) Machine output shall be not less than 1500m/ hr lifting, lining and tamping under the
following conditions: two sleepers penetration; sleeper interval approx.. 600mm; lift 25mm
on tangent track; welded rail and concrete sleepers with sound ballast at least 150mm
below sleeper.
(h) The Machine should be designed for tamping minimum two sleepers at a time and be
designed to tamp both automatically in a continuous mode with the mainframe of the
machine moving at uniform speed and also to individually tamp selected sleepers.
(i) Tamping vibration at a frequency above 30 Hz.
(i) All work heads shall operate under the same pressure, but independently of one another.
The tamping pressure shall be variable and easy to set. Every tamping arm shall be
capable of independent movement to accommodate variations in the ballast bed.
(ii) Tamping depth to be adjustable from the operator’ s position and shall be displayed.
Penetration depth shall be greater than 400mm from the top of rail to the top of the tines.
(j) During lifting and lining the machine shall not be supported on the ballast. The lifting system
shall not bend the rail during lifting and lining. The lifting system shall automatically adjust
the lifting points when fishplates are encountered. The lifting and lining action shall be
independent of the tamping movements.
(k) The machine shall be equipped with an automatic cross level control on the sleeper being
tamped, with a further device to show the actual cross level after tamping.
(l) The machine shall be equipped with a lining system controlling lining and lifting
automatically. The leveling system shall not be affected by weather conditions. The
machine shall be capable of attaining a horizontal accuracy of 1.5mm or less over the length
of the machine.
(m) The vehicle shall be provided with the following equipment:
(i) Double tamping capability one side or both sides;
(ii) Industrial computer for track geometrics, particular application for ramps into and out
off track lifts, and for changes in cant for transition curves;
(iii) Optical track reference system or system with equivalent accuracy.
(iv) Laser lining leveling system or system with equivalent accuracy;
(v) Measuring device for track recording;
(vi) Record for reporting the different types of work performed;
(vii) All measuring data shall be recorded and retrieved easily with an operation log. User
can view, copy or print report from those data.
(viii) At least ten ( 10) weather proof CCTVs shall be installed around machine with color
monitor in control cabin to assist operator during operation.
(n) The proposed machine shall have a track record of supply to international railways outside
of the country of manufacture.
(o) If contractor propose machine which has characteristic different from specified in (a) to (n)
above he shall submit the technical data which shows that the machine can perform as
well as or better than one complying with (a) to (n). In this case the contractor’s proposal
shall be subject to acceptance by the engineer. He shall submit the following information,
(i) Country of manufacture

(ii) Records of supply to other international railways
(iii) Technical data which shows that the machine can perform as well as or better than
one complying with (a) to (n)
** Due to limited number of manufacturers and consideration of spare part management particular
requirement are not exclusive, but for evaluation purpose.
4. Particular requirements for Switch and Crossing Tamping Machine
(a) Machines shall be self- propelled and maintain a speed of 65kph on level track and not less
than 25kph on a 26 per mil gradient. It shall be capable of hauling a similar machine in an
emergency.
(b) The frame and chassis shall be of all- welded steel construction to form a rigid crush proof
signal self- supporting structure with adequate strength to withstand all loads borne by the
machine under service conditions including train buffing loads of at least 100 tonnes.
(c) Tamping operations shall be controlled from one central operator’ s cabin. Two driving
positions shall be provided where the vehicle configuration prevents driving in either direction
from the central position.
(d) Machine output shall be not less than 500m/ hr lifting, and tamping under the following
conditions: Plain line; single penetration; sleeper interval approx. 600mm; lift 25mm on tangent
track; welded rail and concrete sleepers with sound ballast at least 150mm below sleeper.
(e) The machine shall also be capable of tamping switches and crossings with rails greater than
50kg per metre on concrete turnout bearers upto 3.5 metres in length.
(f) The tamping unit shall be a dedicated unit provided for switch & crossings.
(g) The machine will be equipped with 16 tamping tines for tamping one sleeper at a time when
tamping plain track. The workheads and tines shall be capable of at least 850mm lateral
movement to either side of the centerline.
(h) Tamping shall be by pressure and vibration at a frequency above 30Hz.
(i) All workheads shall operate under the same pressure, but independently of one
another. The tamping pressure shall be variable and easy to set. Every tamping arm
shall be capable of independent movement to accommodate variations in the ballast
bed.
(ii) Tamping depth shall be adjustable from the operator’s position and shall be displayed.
Penetration depth shall be greater than 400mm from the top of rail to the top of the
tines.
(i) During lifting and lining the machine shall not be supported on the ballast. The lifting system
shall not bend the rail during lifting and lining and shall automatically adjust the lifting points
when fishplates are encountered. It shall be capable of lifting at either the head or the base
of the rail. The lifting and lining action shall be independent of the tamping movements.
(j) The machine shall be equipped with an automatic cross level control on the sleeper being
tamped, with a further device to show the actual cross level after tamping.
(k) The machine shall be equipped with a lining system controlling lining and lifting automatically.
The leveling system shall not be affected by weather conditions. The machine shall be capable
of attaining a horizontal accuracy of 1.5mm or less over the length of the machine.
(m) The vehicle shall be provided with the following equipment.
(i) Double taping capability one side or both sides;
(ii) Industrial computer for track geometrics, automatic calculation and control of optimum
track slewing, ramps into and out off track lifts, and for changes in cant for transition
curves;
The computer shall also be capable of manual override to allow for obstructions and
for the determination of machine faults;
(iii) Optical track reference system or system with equivalent accuracy;
(iv) Laser lining leveling system or system with equivalent accuracy;
(v) Measuring device for track recording;
(vi) Recorder for reporting the different types of work performed.
(vii) All measuring data shall be recorded and retrieved easily with an operation log. User
can view, copy or print report from those data.
(viii) At least ten ( 10) weather proof CCTVs shall be installed around machine with color
monitor in control cabin to assist operator during operation.
(n) The proposed machine shall have a track record of supply to international railways outside of
the country of manufacture.
(o) If contractor propose machine which has characteristic different from specified in ( a) to ( n)
above he shall submit the technical data which shows that the machine can perform as well
as or better than one complying with (a) to (n). In this case the contractor’s proposal shall be
subject to acceptance by the engineer. He shall submit the following information,
one complying with (a) to (n)
requirement are not exclusive, but for evaluation purpose
5. Particular requirements for Ballast Regulator
(a) Machine shall be self-propelled and be capable for running at a speed of not less than 65kph
on level track and not less than 25kph on a 26 mil gradient.
(b) When towing a similar machine it shall be capable of at least 35kph on level track.
(c) The frame and chassis shall be of all- welded steel construction to form a rigid crush proof
single self- supporting structure with adequate strength to withstand all loads borne by the
machine under service conditions including buffing loads of at least 100 tonnes.
(d) The vehicle shall perform the following functions in either direction :
(i) Fill between the rails from both sides of the track;
(ii) Move ballast from one side of the track to another;
(iii) Ploughing excess ballast from between the rails to outside the rails;
(iv) To regulate the quantity of ballast being re-distributed.
(v) To sweep the sleepers free of ballast and distribute to the shoulders/
(vi) To profile ballast shoulders and to shape the cess.
(e) Main plough
(i) Height adjustment by hydraulics to adapt to the level of the sleepers. The plough shall
be fitted with strong steel sheets capable of moving the ballast.
(i) The front plough shall be equipped with rail fastener protection “tunnels”
(f) Shoulder Ploughs

(i) Adjustable hydraulically both horizontally and vertically. They shall allow stepless
adjustment for any shoulder angle up to 45o.
(ii) Each shoulder plough shal have a reach of at least 3 metres adjustable in stepless
variation from track centre.
(iii) Each shoulder plough shall be capable of avoiding obstacles on the shoulder, such as
kilometer posts, etc., in such a manner as to prevent ballast from heaping.
(iv) It shall be possible to work one or both shoulders at the same time.
(v) The shoulder ploughs shall be arranged in such a way as to allow them to form a box-
shape for the transport of minor quantities of ballast.
(g) The sweeper/pick up unit shall be fixed to the rear part of the machine. A rotating brush shall
sweep the sleepers. The direction of the brush rotation shall be reversible. Surplus ballast
shall be swept from the sleepers and deposited on the shoulders. The sweeper shall be
adjustable laterally to brush the rail fasteners.
(h) The proposed machine shall have a track record of supply to international railways outside of
(i) If contractor propose machine which has characteristic different from specified in ( a) to ( h)
as or better than one complying with (a) to (h). In this case the contractor’s proposal shall be
(iv) Country of manufacture
(v) Records of supply to other international railways
(vi) Technical data which shows that the machine can perform as well as or better than
one complying with (a) to (h)
6. Particular requirements for Track Stabilizer
(a) Machines shall be self-propelled and be capable of running at a speed of not less than 65kph
on level track and not less than 25kph on a 26 per mil gradient. When towing a similar machine
it shall be capable of at least 35kph on level track. The machine shall be fitted with a through
brake pipe for travelling in a train formation and shall be designed to be towed at a minimum
of 80kph.
(b) The frame and chassis shall be of all- welded steel construction to form a rigid crush proof
single self- supporting structure with adequate strength to withstand all loads borne by the
machine under service conditions including train buffing loads of at least 100 tonnes and the
vertical loading applied during operation.
(c) The machine shall be provided with two bogies each of two axles For travelling either two or
all axles shall be powered, When the machine is working all axles shall be powered,
(d) The machine shall be provided with two cabins to ensure excellent visibility during driving,
one on the front and one on the rear. Both cabins shall be equipped with full driving and
braking controls. Additionally one cabin shall also be installed with all working operation
controls.
(e) Vertical loading and vibration shall be applied to the track between the bogies using four sets
of wheels operating in pairs vibrating horizontally, and to each pair it shall be possible to
simultaneously apply a vertical load of upto 120kN.
(f) The vertical loading applied shall be adjusted proportionally to the settlement value.
(g) Vibration shall be adjustable in the range 0- 45Hz and the vertical thrust applied shall also be
adjustable in a range 0-240KN.
(h) The machine shall be capable of inducting a track settlement of 20-25mm in one pass, of track
in good condition on clean ballast following a tamping operation.
(i) Machine output shall be not less than 1000m/hr whilst producing a track settlement of 20mm
and shall be a continuous operation.
(j) The stabilizing units shall be capable of being lifted and locked either hydraulically and/ or
pneumatically by the operator from the cab before traveling machine.
(k) The machine shall be provided with a control system to the vibration units that shall stop the
vibration when the machine comes to a standstill. A control device shall also be provided
that limits the vertical loading and prevents derailment of the machine.
(l) The machine shall be capable of moving whilst operating at an adjustable velocity in the
approximate range of 0-3kph.
(m) During operation the machine shall not be supported on the ballast and shall be capable of
working on fishplate and welded track, with timber or concrete sleepers, without the need for
manual adjustment or modification.
(n) The machine shall be equipped with an automatic cross level after stabilization.
(o) The machine shall be equipped with a system controlling leveling, The system shall not be
affected by weather conditions and the machine shall be capable of attaining and accuracy
of 1.5mm or less over the length of the machine
(p) The vehicles shall be provided with a recorder capable recording the following parameters
 Longitudinal levels of left and right rails
 Cross level before stabilization
 Cross level after stabilization
 Curvature
 Twist.
 Work record
(q) The proposed machine shall have a track record of supply to international railways outside of
(r) If contractor propose machine which has characteristic different from specified in ( a) to ( q)
as or better than one complying with (a) to (q). In this case the contractor’s proposal shall be
(vii) Country of manufacture
(viii) Records of supply to other international railways
(ix) Technical data which shows that the machine can perform as well as or better than
one complying with (a) to (q)
* * Due to limited number of manufacturers and consideration of spare part management particular
7. Particular requirements for Ballast Wagon

(a) The Bogie Ballast Hopper Wagons shall operate under severe dust conditions and abrasion.
The wagons shall be of all steel construction, based on the specifications herein. Particular
attention shall be paid to the reinforcement and easy replacement of components subject to
wear and dust.
(b) The wagons shall be hopper wagons with 28 (twenty-eight) cubic metre capacity, to carry and
transport railway track ballast ( crushed stones 30 - 60mm in size) and discharging under the
wagon to metre gauge track at the site to be ballasted.
(c) The slide valves, each arranged in a longitudinal line, shall form one pair of slide valves which
are connected by a continuous locking shaft and which are opened and closed simultaneously.
Four spindles with four hand wheels shall be arranged on an open platform at one wagon
end. Each pair of slide valves shall be operated by one hand wheel via its pertaining spindle
in a stepless way, in order to allow the ballast to be continuously discharged and to be
measured out or regulated at any required quantity whilst the wagon is moving. The two
exterior pairs of slide valves shall be for distribution of the ballast outside the rails on both
sides and the two interior pairs for distribution of the ballast between the rails.
(d) The full opening of the rotary slide valves shall be 300mm wide and 2,200mm long. The lower
edge of the discharging chutes of the empty wagon shall have a height of 250mm above top
of rail, with the distance from the wagon centre of 300mm (inner chutes) and 850mm (outer
chutes) respectively.
(e) The operating mechanism shall be of solid construction and easily handled. Two hinged flaps
shall be arranged on the top of each wagon side, and shall fold down to facilitate loading of
the wagon by hand.
(f) The centre of gravity of the full laden wagon shall be designed to be no higher than 1, 700mm
from top of rail level and shall ensure the perfect stability of the wagon under all operations
and on imperfect conditions of the track.
(g) Should, whilst discharging ballast, the protrusion of parts of the wagon and equipment beyond
the loading gauge limit be unavoidable, then arrangements shall be made so that they do not
foul the loading gauge limit when travelling or in transit.
(h) The wagon shall be provided with necessary protection devices to prevent derailment during
discharge operations.
(i) The underframe shall be of electric welded steel construction comprising:
(i) sole bars,
(ii) intermediate longitudinals,
(iii) headstocks,
(iv) main and intermediate cross bearers.
(j) A cast steel casing shall be provided to take up the automatic centre coupler. It shall be
reinforced underneath the intermediate longitudinals by means of welded- in channels to
withstand 1,500kN slatic buffing load.
(k) Anti-skid steel plate shall be used for access footsteps and operating platforms.
(l) Steel ladders, handrails, and other safety protection for wagon operators shall be provided as
necessary and appropriate. Two lateral steel grab handles shall be provided at each wagon
headstock.
(m) Bogie
(i) The bogie shall be designed for the specified gauge and shall comprise side frame,
bolster, brake rigging including brake beam, friction wedge, and snubber spring. The
bogie shall be cast steel of 3 piece construction.
(ii) The bottom centre pivot and the side bearer seating shall be cast integral with the
bolster unit.
(iii) Side bearers shall be spaced at 950mm centres.
(iv) The bolster shall be held in the normal position in relation to the sideframe by the
pressure of the four seats of damping force control friction surfaces.
(v) Secondary suspension shall be constant friction damping to provide control in both
loaded and unloaded condition. Long travel load springs with a minimum travel of
90mm to reduce track impacts.
(vi) The springs shall be arranged as a unit which facilitates installation and examination
under service conditions.
(vii) The snubbing device shall be spring activated to produce pressure on the friction
surfaces.
(viii) Four friction blocks shall be special cast steel and the friction surfaces shall be hardened
and built-up between bolster and side-frame.
(ix) The bogie snubbing springs shall be located between the friction wedge and the side
frame spring seat.
(x) Friction springs shall be coil spring groups and with friction snubbers to control lateral and
vertical motions by variable pressure between friction wedge and sideframe friction plates.
(n) Break System
(i) Wagons shall be provided with automatic air brakes with automatic slack adjusters and
vacuum brake through piping complete with fittings, so that they can be run in either
air braked or vacuum braked trains. The brake application and release operation shall
be quick and uniform. Brake gear shall be arranged for braking on all wheels.
(ii) Air brakes for the wagons shall be designed for a maximum operating speed of 80km/hr.
The system shall stop the wagons, either in empty or loaded condition, within 700
metres in case of emergency on level track and the wheels must not lock and the
wheel tyres shall not be loosened or cracked.
(iii) Automatic brake load adjusters to be installed shall be of the pressure changing type
with two stage changeover weight. The changeover weight for the brake system shall
be calculated so that the brake application shall meet the requirement as mentioned.
The brake calculations shall be based on 3.8 bars air pressure.
(iv) The connecting threads for pipe fittings and swan necks of the vacuum system shall
conform to BS 21 ( Whitworth taper thread type) ; and those for the angle cocks and
couplings of the air brake system shall conform to ISO 228 (straight thread type).
(v) The release means for the air brake shall be in accordance with UIC 541-1. The cut-off
cocks for isolating the improper functioning of brake system during operation shall be
provided upstream to the distributor valve for air brake.
(vi) The wagon shall be provided with a horizontal shaft type handbrake operated by hand
wheels on each side of the wagon. It shall be located at the end of the wagon and
shall be operational from the ground.
Force developed by the hand brake shall not be less than 30% of the wagon tare
weight.
" ON" and " OFF" positions with arrows shall be marked at suitable place to indicate
direction of rotation of handle or wheel to apply or release brake.
(vii) Safety hangers shall be provided for brake rods as required to secure them to the
underframe or bogie frame with high-tensile steel bolts and lock-nuts with nylon inserts.
(o) Coupler shall correspond to the standard E type of National Castings Incorporated ( or equal
approved), AAR 10-A contour, with 11 inch single bottom operated knuckle, 5 by 7 inch swivel
shank lower part which shall be fitted with replaceable manganese steel wear plate, 26 inches
from coupler coupling line to centre of 2-9/16 inch diameter coupler yoke pinhole. Distance
from the knuckle pulling face to headstock is 400mm. Uncoupling rigging to be fitted at right
hand side when facing wagon end.
Coupler height shall be 850mm nominal from top of rail when the wagon is in the tare state.
(p) Superstructure
(i) The wagon body shall be of copper bearing steel with two loading compartments
constructed of electrically welded steel plates and sections.
(ii) The wagon body shall be provided with permanent cubic content levelling marks,
graduated at every three cubic metres.
(iii) The inside of the hopper, hopper chutes and door leaves shall all be reinforced with
easily replaceable wear plates.
* * Due to limited number of manufacturers and consideration of spare part management
particular requirement are not exclusive, but for evaluation purpose
(q) The proposed machine shall have a track record of supply to international railways outside
of the country of manufacture.
(r) If contractor propose machine which has characteristic different from specified in ( a) to ( q)
as or better than one complying with (a) to (q). In this case the contractor’s proposal shall
be subject to acceptance by the engineer. He shall submit the following information,
one complying with (a) to (q)
1. Fabrication
(a) Metric system shall be used as far as possible for weights and measures. Weights and
dimensions of the vehicle and equipment shall include variations inherent to manufacturing.
(b) Threaded parts shall in general conform to ISO Metric Standard or Whitworth Standard where
applicable except in the case where other standard of thread must necessarily be used to
meet special requirements.
(c) All material used shall be new and of the best quality. Materials shall be as specified and shall
comply with the chemical composition and requirments mentioned in the Manufacture’ s
specification and as approved by the Engineer. When a definite material is not specified, the
material shall be of the best quality normally used for the purpose in good commercial railway
practice and shall conform to worldwide proven International standards. Material used in
fabrication of the vehicles shall be free from kinks and sharp bends. Straightening shall be
done only be methods that will not cause damage to the metal.
(d) Shearing, cutting, chipping and similar operations shall be carried out neatly and accurately
and all corners shall be neat and true. Flame cutting may be employed. Burned surfaces of
flame- cut material shall be ground or machined to remove slag, flame gouging and cooling
checks. All re-entrant cuts shall be made in the best possible manner.
(e) All bends of a major character shall be made with metal dies or fixtures to insure uniformity
of size and shape.
(f) Care shall be taken to avoid overheating of metal, and the metal shall be allowed to cool slowly.
(g) The surface of all parts to be bolted shall be thoroughly cleaned and applied with two coats
of anti- corrosive paint and then be bolted together. All surfaces of metals which are to be
painted shall be firstly sand blasted to remove rust thoroughly and then painted with shop
primer or anti-corrosive paint.
(h) Welds shall develop the strength as required for the parts to be connected. All welding shall
be in accordance with the latest accepted practice. Welders shall be certified.
2. Tolerances and Fits
Tolerances and fits shall conform to standard commercial practices unless otherwise specified herein,
or in the document listed in Section 8-16: TRACK EQUIPMENT – Part I Description clause 3.
3. Interchangeability of Parts
Components and parts of any vehicle shall be interchangeable with the corresponding components
and parts ( without requiring modification for replacement) of vehicles of the same type and
Manufacturer.
4. Workmanship
(a) Workmanship shall be first class in all respects.
(b) All parts and sub-assemblies of the vehicles shall be manufactured and finished in a thoroughly
workmanlike manner and shall be within manufacturing tolerance to permit fitting during
erection and to ensure interchangeability.
All the corresponding parts shall be made in appropriate and proper mechanical or pneumatic
or hydraulic fixtures and jigs. Templates and gauges shall be used to ensure accurate
dimensioning and interchangeability.
(c) All parts and fittings necessary for the vehicles are to be supplied whether mentioned or not
in this specification.
(d) The assembled vehicles shall be free from any defect that could cause malfunctioning of
components or interfere with its safe operation.
5. Painting, Marking and Lettering
(a) General
Painting shall be carried out as described in SURFACE FINISHES. All parts of the vehicles shall
be pained at least twice with finish paint after twice coatings of anti-corrosive paint have been
applied. The overall film thickness shall not be less than 150 microns.
(b) Paints shall be of best quality, shall bind tightly to the surface and shall last and be durable
for all weather conditions in Thailand.
(c) The chassis, under frame, brake works and those parts relating to under frame shall be finished
in black paint.
The superstructure shall be finished in SRT standard yellow colour for trackmounted
equipment. The painting is be done in accordance with the best possible practice of railway
vehicle painting.
(d) All name plates, indications or instruction plate as provided to parts and equipment shall be
in English. Letters “ SRT” shall be marked or stamped on all necessary major parts and
assemblies unless otherwise stated.
(e) Lettering for “ SRT” ownership, vehicle number etc. , shall be carried out in Thailand by the
Contractor and as instructed by the Engineer.
6. Tools, Manuals, Manufacturer’s Recommended Spare Parts
(a) Servicing tools, operating manuals, catalogues, including part numbers for those parts readily
available in Thailand, necessary for maintaining the machine as detailed in the Contract shall
be supplied free of charge with the machine.
(b) Manufacturer’ s recommended spare parts shall be supplied with the machines, adequate for
three years intensive use. The Contractor will be permitted to use these components during
the project, but shall provide SRT with a complete set as supplied with the machine at the
time of vehicle hand-over to SRT.
7. Commissioning and Training
The Contractor shall provide:
(a) Qualified service engineers shall be provided by the Manufacturer for the purpose of
commissioning the Machines in Thailand at the Contractor’s Site Depot.
(b) Training of SRT appointed Staff and Technicians during the Contract Period as detailed in
TRAINING.
8.17 RAIL EXPANSION JOINTS (REJ)

PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. Scope
This Section specifies the furnishing of meter gauge Rail Expansion Joints ( REJ) with monoblock
concrete sleepers, Fishplates, Fishbolts, Nuts and Washers for use in turnouts and composite rails,
and for general fishplated joints in 54 E1 rail and also Head Hardened rail to 54 E1 rail section.
Work Not Included: Fishplates for use in glued joints.
REJ Work includes design, furnishing and installation as follows,
REJ Design:
Design loads of REJ shall be 20 tonnes axles at 160 kph. The Contractor shall prepare detailed
designs and setting out drawings of REJ. The design and drawings provided by the qualified
Manufacture shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the manufacture
of REJ. Principal dimensions of REJ shall conform to the dimensional requirements of BS 100A rails.
Maximum and minimum expansion and contraction of REJ shall be computed from the longitudinal
thermal forces developed in the Continuous Welded Rail (CWR) on adjacent steel bridge to which
REJ will be installed. The drawings of REJ panel, inner and outer tongue rails shall provide adequate
information for the Engineer to check dimensions, clearances tolerances and other relevant
information. Inner and outer tongue rails of REJ shall be fully canted to 1/ 40 and clearance for
tongue rail displacement shall be between 1- 2 mm. The monoblock concrete sleepers shall be
designed to fit with the all steel component of REJ.
REJ Furnishing
All materials shall be as provided under SECTION 8 TRACKWORK.
REJ Furnishing includes; machined tongue rail, all rail joints, base plate, inserts and fasteners, track
pad and insulators, slide chairs, blocks, nuts, bolts and plain and spring washers; furnishing of shop
drawings, material lists and assembly instructions.
REJ Installation:
Installation works shall be as described in PROJECT EXECUTION.
Installation of the assembled REJ and jointed to the track shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and the relevant Specifications.
2. Definitions
" Manufacturer" The producer of the materials specified herein, and including the Supplier if the
context so applies.
" Supplier" Also termed the " Contractor" . The entity signing the Contract and responsible for the
performance of the work under the Contract.
(a) In addition to the requirements of this section the Contractor shall maintain adequate records
in accordance requirements of his quality assurance programme. These records will provide the
objective evidence of compliance with the requirements of the contract, and as required by the
various Sections of these Specifications.
(b) The Manufacturer is expected to operate an independently approved and audited quality
control system, generally in accordance with the requirements of ISO 9000. Where the
Manufacturer cannot produce such independent certification the following requirements shall
apply:
(i) The Manufacturer shall submit an Inspection Agency's name to the Engineer for approval
prior to the commencement of manufacture.
(ii) The Manufacturer shall provide the Inspection Agency with reasonable access to observe
manufacturing processes, witness testing and to inspect the finished product.
(iii) The Manufacturer shall, at his own expense, supply all templates and gauges, prepare
and supply all test pieces and samples of steel, sample rails and drillings and supply all
labour and apparatus for testing which may be necessary or required for carrying out the
tests and requirements of this specification, and render all reasonable assistance in
making such tests. The Manufacturer shall also, at his own expense, supply all drillings,
test pieces and samples of steel for carrying on independent chemical analysis and tensile
tests.
(iv) Before the products are submitted to inspection, all products shall be properly examined
by the Manufacturer's inspectors and all defective products removed and placed in
separate stacks for examination by the Inspection Agency.
(c) The tests that shall be performed on the products are those required by the respective
specifications and carried out at the stated frequency.
(d) Fishplates, fishbolts and nuts, and washers shall be the product of a manufacturer who has
previously supplied track components for BS rail sections.
(e) Tolerances
(i) Dimensional tolerances for Fishplates:
 Length : +1.6 mm
 Hole diameter : +0.8 mm -0.0 mm
 Relative position of hole : +0.8 mm
 Squaring of ends : 0.4 mm horizontally & vertically
(ii) Dimensional tolerances for Fishbolts:
 Diameter of fishbolt : +0.8 mm -0.5 mm
 Length of bolts : ± 3.0 mm
 Length of screw portion of bolt : ± 5.0 mm
 Thickness of head : ± 1.0 mm
 Thickness of nut : ± 1.0 mm
(f) The Contractor shall guarantee REJ against all defects attributable to faulty design,
manufacturing, workmanship and quality of material requiring withdrawal from service before
the end of the Defect Liability Period. REJ that fail in service shall be replaced free of charge
within 60 days of advice of defects, during which period, the Contractor shall make his
observations and carry out examination jointly with the SRT's representative. The patent right of
REJ, other than the design drawing, shall be responsibility of the Contractor who will indemnify
the Employer against any claim in this connection.
4. Submittals
The Contractor shall submit the Detailed Engineering for the Engineer's review as based on the
information obtained from the site survey and the Employer's definitive design, inter alia the following:
(a) Name, address and experience of each manufacturer or supplier of track materials covered by
this specification together with manufacturer's product data and technical specification.
(b) Name, address and experience of an independent Inspection Agency engaged by the
Manufacturer where required by the specifications herein to perform:
(i) Witness manufacture
(ii) Monitor testing.
(c) From each Manufacturer a Certificate of Compliance with the requirements of this specification.
(a) Delivery
(i) Packaged products shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original unopened packaging
(ii) Loose materials shall be delivered such that there is no segregation in transportation.
(b) All fishplates shall be thoroughly cleaned, after which they shall be dipped in hot boiled
linseed oil or other approved composition before being bundled.
All finished fishbolts and nuts shall be clean, free from rust and oiled before being packed.
(c) Handling
(i) All packages shall be handled in such a manner as to prevent damage to the containers
and contents.
(ii) Equipment shall not be operated repeatedly over stockpiles of loose materials.
PART II PRODUCTS
1. Fishplates
(a) Fishplates shall conform to the requirements of UIC 864- 4 for Fishplates, but with respect to
dimensions shall follow the requirements of British Standard 11, 1985.
(i) Steel shall be a chemical composition conforming to the following limits by weight.
Carbon : 0.40 - 0.55 %
Manganese : 0.55 - 1.00 %
Silicon : Not to exceed 0.04 %
Phosphorous : Not to exceed 0.04 %
Sulphur : Not to exceed 0.045 %
These limits apply in ladle and all check analyses.
(ii) The mechanical properties after heat treatment shall be:
Tensile strength : 700 N/mm2
Elongation : 12 %
Hardness HBW : 262 - 331
(iii) Manufacture shall be either Oxygen, Open Hearth - Basic, or Electric- arc process. The
process shall not be changed during manufacture.
(iv) Fishplates shall be manufactured by either rolling or forging.
(v) Fishplates shall be quenched and tempered for heat treatment
(b) Branding
Branding Marks shall be in suitable sized characters of such form and size and in such a position,
clear of the bearing on the fishbolts heads and nuts, that the characters can be seen when the
fishplate is fixed in place.
The sequence of brand marks reading from left to right shall be:
(i) Manufacturer's mark
(ii) Year of manufacture
(iii) Number of month in Roman Letters
(iv) Steel making process:
 Oxygen
 Open Hearth-Basic
 Electric-arc
(v) 54 E1 Rail
(vi) SRT
(vii) Each component of the brand mark shall be demarcated by a hyphen
(c) Finish
(i) All fishplates shall be forged or cut by sawing to the specified length and straightened.
Straightening shall be done either cold or hot by gradual pressure and without impact.
(ii) The ends shall be square and all burrs removed.
(iii) Holes for fishbolts shall be drilled through the fishplates when cold. A jig shall be used and all
holes drilled in one operation. Holes shall be clean without burrs on either side, accurate in
pitch, and exactly in the position and to the dimensions shown. Size and position of holes shall
be checked by means of gauges approved by the Inspection Agency.
(d) Weight
Five percent of each batch of fishplates shall be weighed, and the average weight determined. The
average weight shall not be more than 2 percent above or below the calculated weight. Should the
weight exceed the limits the fishplates are liable to rejection,
(e) Acceptance of Fishplates
All acceptance inspection shall be carried out by SRT Inspectors.
(i) All results of chemical analyses and mechanical tests or the casts of fishplates to be inspected,
together with a report of the Manufacturer's rejections, shall be submitted to the Inspection
Agency before final inspection.
(ii) Fishplates from each cast shall be kept separate until the analysis, tests and inspection have
been completed and the results have been approved by the Inspection Agency.
(iii) Five percent of each batch of the finished fishplates presented for inspection at any one time
shall be taken at random for dimensional inspection. If the tolerances are exceeded the batch
shall not be accepted.
2. Fishbolts and Nuts
(a) Fishbolts and nuts shall be hot forged from steel of the best quality made by Oxygen or Open
Hearth ( acid or basic) or other approved process providing the following properties and in
accordance with SRT Standard Specification for the Supply of Fishbolts and Nuts for 54 E1 Rails
BE 2540:
Properties Fishbolts and Nuts
2
Minimum Tensile Strength N/mm 550
Minimum Elongation % 25
The head of the bolts shall be marked with the initial SRT and the manufacturer's initial in
raised letters.
The nut must contain an integral elliptical spring steel insert that maintains tension on the bolt.
The nut shall have its face at right angles to the axis of the thread and the hole truly central.
The screw threads on the bolts and nuts shall conform to TIS No. 159-2518. All bolts and nuts
shall be interchangeable. The nut itself must have the properties of a locknut and shall not
loosen under vibration or impact loading when used without other parts or spring washers, and
shall provide easy, quick and convenient use.
After installation the nut must maintain tension on the bolt regardless of vibration, high
temperature or loading and shall retain its locknut properties.
(b) Finish
(i) Bolts shall be accurately made to the required dimensions, shall be straight with round
shanks and well finished. The head shall be well formed and concentric with the body of
the bolt and the underface shall be at right angles to the axis of the bolt.
(ii) Nuts shall be accurately made to the required dimensions and shall have faces at right
angles to the axis of the thread and the holes truly central.
(iii) Screw thread for bolts and nuts shall be to ISO metric type and all dimensions conforming
strictly to the latest Specification. All bolts and nuts shall be interchangeable and nuts
shall fit properly on the bolts without force and not too tightly or too loosely.
(c) Tolerance
Nuts and bolts shall be selected at random and if 10% from any shipment do not fit properly
the shipment shall be rethreaded and made correct.
3. Washers
Spring washers shall be manufactured of spring steel in accordance with UIC 864-3 Supply of Spring
Steel Washers for Use in the Permanent Way.
Washers shall be of Steel Category 51 S 7 with the following properties after quenching and
tempering:
Minimum limit of Elasticity N/mm2 : 1130
2
Tensile Strength N/mm : 1320 - 1570
Minimum Elongation % : 6
Hardness (Rockwell) : 43 - 49
Washers shall be protected against rust with a coating which does not cause packed washers to
adhere to one another.
PART III EXECUTION
1. Acceptance
Products shall conform to the acceptance requirements of the respective specifications. Final
Acceptance shall be carried out by a Work Acceptance Committee in Thailand.
END OF SECTION 8
SECTION 9
TUNNELLING WORKS
Tender Documents Section 9: TUNNELLING WORKS
SECTION 9: TUNNELLING WORKS
9.1 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

9.1.1 SCOPE
NATM tunnelling, mechanized tunnelling, cut-and-cover tunnel construction and open
excavation at portal are to be carried out by the Contractor following the tender design
drawings. List of the Works is as follows:
(i) Tunnel portal structure and slope protection;
(ii) Tunnels, including railway tunnels, cross passages, equipment rooms and
shafts;
(iii) Groundwater drainage and waterproofing system; and
(iv) Tunnel utility system.
9.1.2 WORKS INCLUDED
The specifications contained in the following sections cover the Contractor's general
obligations for the excavation, stabilization of ground, instrumentation works, concrete
lining and drainage system and utility system.
Underground works include construction of tunnels, adits and other underground
structures by means of NATM tunnelling, mechanized tunnelling and cut-and-cover tunnel
construction in rock of varying degrees of weathering and soil-like and soil materials.
The Works include temporary and permanent ground support measures as shown in the
Tunnel Drawings, instructed by the Engineer and as necessary to execute a safe and
economic tunnel construction within the time frame set out in the construction program
being a part of the Contract Documents.
Cast- in- place concrete liner constructed as a finishing surface of the entire length of the
tunnel shall be protected by sheet waterproofing membranes in its extrados face only in
section where water inflow exceeds the requirements.
The underground structures are to accommodate train tracks, communication, signalling,
ventilation and power facilities, as well as emergency response facilities as shown.
The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the Contract Documents in their entirety and
with this part for tunnelling works in particular.
The Contractor shall carry out pre- construction geotechnical investigation as deemed
necessary for detailed design of tunnel excavation and support to ensure a safe and
economic tunnel construction.
Contract 2: Ngao - Chiang Rai Section 9-1
The Contractor shall develop a construction design that clearly sets out all procedures,
methods, sequences, all details, equipment and materials to fulfil the contract
requirements. The construction design shall be subjected to the Engineer’s approval.
9.1.3 GENERAL NOTES
The Works shall be carried out in compliance with the General Requirements of the
Contract.
The Works should be designed and carried out in compliance with State- of- the- Art in
Tunnelling Technology as per Guideline for the Geotechnical Design of Underground
Structures with Conventional Excavation or NATM The Austrian Practice of Conventional
Tunnelling given by Austrian Society for Geomechanics ( OGG) or General Report on
Conventional Tunnelling Method issued by International Tunnelling Association ( ITA)
and/ or Specification and Guidelines for the Use of Specialist Products for Mechanised
Tunnelling (TBM) in Soft Ground and Hard Rock published by the European Federation of
Producers and Contractors of Specialist Products for Structures (EFNARC).
No construction work shall be carried out prior to approval of all required submittals and
construction design conforming to this specification, the General Requirements of the
Contract and any applicable codes and regulations.
The Specification indicates minimum standards of materials and workmanship. The
specifications pertaining to related underground civil engineering works such as structural
concrete, structural steel, etc. can be found in other parts of the specification.
Payment shall be made in accordance with the General Requirements of the Contract,
Preambles, Bill of Quantities for materials and workmanship as specified herein or in any
other relevant specification section as approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit his construction cost estimate in relation to the excavation
and support measures shown and specified herein as part of the Ground Support Classes
as well as for local support measures that may be required to augment the standard
support in response to adverse ground conditions.
9.1.4 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION DESIGN
The Contractor shall develop detailed and final design of tunnel excavation, support
system, tunnel instrumentation, drainage system, concrete lining and utility system.
The cost for such design and the Works required for it shall be included in his cost proposal.
The Contractor shall, as part of his proposal submittal, outline the amount of works
required for his detailed design, including additional ground investigation, a work plan on
design approach including design methodology, methods of analyses and design
calculations, used standards and codes, deliverables and a program by which he will
submit the design or parts thereof in agreement with the overall project program for the
Engineer's approval.
The Contractor shall allow for a 6 weeks review period for the Engineer to review all
submitted design documents for subsequent approval/rejection.
The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the local geographical, geological and climate
conditions as well as all requirements in power by the jurisdictional authorities.
It is anticipated that the Contractor shall carry out ground investigation including borings,
in-situ tests, laboratory tests and hydro-geological investigations to further the knowledge
about the site conditions for the development of his detailed and final design.
The Contractor shall use available empirical and state- of- the- art methods for his design,
including ground structure interaction analyses ( FE of FD) to assess initial support
performance and general lining loading, wedge analyses to assess rock wedge loads on the
linings and groundwater flow- analyses to assess groundwater inflow during construction
and for long-term drainage analyses.
For his construction design, the Contractor shall employ a designer with sufficient
experience in design of similar works. This includes tunnel design in hard rock, soft rock
and soil under the anticipated geological and hydrogeological conditions.
If an international designer will be employed, his design shall be endorsed by a Professional
or Chartered Engineer (or equivalent) who is familiar with the national Thai regulations and
who is authorized to endorse the design.
The Contractor shall have on site at least one representative of his designer during all
times of tunnel construction who is sufficiently experienced and knowledgeable to assess
minor design modifications as may become necessary due to the prevailing ground
conditions.
No major deviation from the approved Contractor's construction design shall be permitted
without the authorized and written consent of the Contractor's designer organization and
the approval of such changes by the Engineer.
Deliverables shall be in the format as specified in the General Contract Requirements and
as agreed with the Engineer.
All design deliverables shall be submitted in time as specified herein to avoid delay of the
Works. No construction works may be commenced without the approval of the relevant
design by the Engineer.
All design assumptions shall be verified or otherwise during the construction based on the
actual conditions found. Any deviation from the assumed conditions during the design
shall be recorded, analyzed and evaluated as to the resulting changes of the design that
may or may not be required. The result of such evaluation shall be submitted to the
Engineer as early as practically possible.
The basis for the evaluation, confirmation of the design or change of the design shall be
the tunnel performance in relation to groundwater conditions, tunnel deformation, surface
settlements (where applicable), tunnel face mapping, progress and other observations that
may become available during the construction.
9.1.5 DEFINITIONS
As Shown: Arrangements and details as shown on the Contract Drawings.
NATM Excavation: The New Austrian Tunnelling Method, also known as the Sequential
Excavation Method (SEM) or Sprayed Concrete Lining method (SCL), is a method of modern
tunnel design and construction. The NATM integrates the principles of the behaviour of
rock masses under load and monitoring the performance of underground construction
during construction. The NATM has been referred to as a "design as monitored" approach
by providing an optimized support based on observed ground conditions and observed
convergence and divergence in the shotcrete layer.
NATM has seven elements:
(i) Exploitation of the strength of native rock mass – Relies on the inherent strength
of the surrounding rock mass being conserved as the main component of tunnel
support. Primary support is directed to enable the rock to support itself.
(ii) Shotcrete protection – Loosening and excessive rock deformation must be
minimised. This is achieved by applying a thin layer of shotcrete immediately after
face advance.
(iii) Measurement and monitoring – Potential deformations of the excavation must be
carefully monitored. NATM requires installation of sophisticated measurement
instrumentation. It is embedded in lining, ground, and boreholes. In the event of
observed movements, additional supports are installed only when needed, with
a resultant overall economy to the total cost of the project.
(iv) Flexible support – The primary lining is thin and reflects recent strata conditions.
Active rather than passive support is used and the tunnel is strengthened by a
flexible combination of rock bolts, wire mesh and steel ribs, not by a thicker
concrete lining.
(v) Closing of the invert – Especially crucial in soft ground, the quick closing of the
invert ( the bottom portion of the tunnel) which creates a loadbearing ring is
important, and has the advantage of engaging the inherent strength of the rock
mass surrounding the tunnel.
(vi) Contractual arrangements – Since the NATM is based on monitoring
measurements, changes in support and construction method are possible, but
only if the contractual system enables them.
(vii) Rock mass classification, ranging from very hard to very soft, determines the
minimum support measures required and avoids economic waste that comes from
needlessly strong support measures. Support system designs exist for each of the
main rock classes. These serve as the guidelines for tunnel reinforcement.
Mechanized Tunnelling: All the tunnelling techniques in which excavation is performed
mechanically by means of a wide range of different machines, from roadheader to Tunnel
Boring Machines (TBM). These machines not only carry out the excavation of the ground,
sometimes they also provide support.
Excavation Line: Theoretical line of excavation inside of which no ground may protrude
including:
(i) A-line which is the theoretical excavation line; and
(ii) B-line which is over break of up to as specified herein beyond the theoretical
excavation line will be classified as normal over break.
Portal Wall: A temporary, rigid structure that supports a mass of ground from which tunnel
excavation can begin.
Ground Support System: Support for tunnel construction as shown for the individual
Ground Support Classes includes those measures necessary to maintain the inherent
strength of the ground surrounding the tunnel openings while preventing unnecessary
loosening and enhancing the stress redistribution process. This function of support is
augmented by installation of local support where required by ground conditions. Support
as specified for the Ground Support Classes and local support.
Ground Support Class: A set of pre-defined excavation sequences and support measures
in accordance with the ground conditions as anticipated for the tunnel construction as
shown. The standard support measures may be augmented by local measures as specified
and shown.
Pre-support: Systematic or non-systematic measures including pipe roof or spiles installed

by drilling as shown prior to or during tunnel excavation. In areas of ravelling ground steel
sheeting may be used as pre-support.
Additional Local Support: Support measures installed in a non- systematic manner to
augment the standard support measures in the respective Ground Support Classes
including spiles, additional rock bolts, face shotcrete, additional shotcrete at the tunnel
periphery and face stabilization wedge.
Spiles: Self-drilling hollow bars or rebars as specified herein systematically installed at the
tunnel heading ahead of excavation and grouted as a mean to pre- support the ground.
Spiles are also to be used as local support measure.
Pipe Forepoling and Pipe Roof: Grouted steel pipes systematically installed into the
ground above the tunnel roof and shoulders ahead of excavation to form a tunnel arch as
a mean to pre-support.
Reinforced shotcrete: Sprayed concrete layer of a minimum of thickness as shown
reinforced with welded wire fabric or steel fiber and, if necessary, steel support as shown.
The shotcrete lining shall be completely installed after completion of each excavation
round.
Concrete Lining: Cast-in-place concrete placed after installation of shotcrete initial lining
and waterproofing membrane.
Break-out: Support installed at portal walls, tunnel and shaft walls prior to and during the
start- up of NATM tunnelling including reinforced shotcrete collar, rock bolts, pre- support
measure and thickened shotcrete lining.
Drilling: All drilling shall be carried out as rotary-percussion drilling.
Charge Holes: Charge holes shall be drilled in accordance with the approved blasting
pattern to minimise the adverse impact on the ground.
Rock Bolts: Pre- tensioned or non- tensioned reinforcement element installed as a
component of Ground Support System. Rock bolts shall be equipped with hardware as
specified herein. Rock bolts shall be installed after the completion of each excavation
round as shown.
Round Length: Length of the unsupported span of exposed ground opened up during one
round of excavation as shown. Excavation to be immediately followed by the installation
of support as shown.
Shotcrete: Portland cement concrete mix containing admixtures to provide quick set, high
early strength, and satisfactory adhesion and that is conveyed through a hose and
pneumatically projected at high velocity onto a surface.
Lattice Girders/ Steel Arches: Lattice Girders or Steel Arches are used to reinforce the
shotcrete.
Rebound: Shotcrete constituents that fail to adhere to the surface to which shotcrete is
being applied.
Fiber Reinforced Shotcrete: The same as “plain shotcrete” except that in addition to the
plain shotcrete mix, steel fiber are incorporated into the mix.
Wet Mix Process: Shotcrete in which all the ingredients except accelerator are mixed
before introduction into the delivery hose. Accelerator is added to shotcrete mixture at
the nozzle in such a way that the quantity can be properly regulated.
Dry Mix Process: The shotcrete in which most of the mixing water is added at the nozzle.
The mixing of cement and wet aggregates at required proportion is conducted before
supplying it to the shotcreting device.
Face Stabilization Wedge: Unexcavated portion of the heading temporarily left in place
to enhance face stability.
Flashcrete: Layer of shotcrete of minimum 50-mm thickness installed at the entire or parts
of the tunnel face in loose ground conditions to stabilise the face.
Drain Pipes: Perforated PVC pipes or other pipes approved by the Engineer, with filter
fabric inserted into the ground from within the tunnel to drain water and perched water
by gravity during excavation. It is also installed in order to drain off ground water from
areas at either the excavated ground surface before applying shotcrete lining to prevent
hydrostatic pressure build-up behind the shotcrete lining and/or for dewatering of seepage
through the shotcrete lining.
Geologic Overbreak: The amount of ground dislocated beyond the theoretical excavation
line primarily due to ravelling in materials or dislocation of rock wedges/blocks/slabs.
Sawtooth: Tunnel enlargement beyond the theoretical excavation line caused by the use
of the Pipe Arch for systematic Tunnel Pre- Support ( Ground Support Class Portal) and
required for the installation of the steel grouting pipes as required for local support.
Mixed-face excavation: Excavation in mixed-face condition, where two or more geological
formations present simultaneously on the tunnel face, needs appropriate blasting and
customized machine design. Most commonly, this is presented by contacts between rock
units with different mechanical properties, and by veins or dykes within the formation.
Over- excavation: The amount of excavation beyond the theoretical excavation line to
allow for tunnel deformation, waterproofing installation and assumed construction
tolerances. The radial over- excavation allowance shall be determined by the Contractor
for approval by the Engineer.
Waterproofing System: A layered system comprising of a geotextile layer and a sheet
waterproofing membrane affixed to the intrados side of shotcrete facial support as shown
and specified herein. The waterproofing system shall be affixed to the Ground Support
System by compatible cushioned disks as specified herein. Water barriers for the sectioning
system form an integrated part of the waterproofing system.
Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM): A machine used to excavate tunnels with a circular cross
section through a variety of soil and rock strata. They can bore through anything from hard
rock to sand. Tunnel boring machines are used as an alternative to drilling and blasting
(D&B) methods in rock and conventional "hand mining" in soil. TBMs have the advantages
of limiting the disturbance to the surrounding ground and producing a smooth tunnel wall.
Unshielded, Open-type or Main Beam TBM: No shield TBMs, leaving the area behind the
cutter head open for rock support. To advance, the machine uses a gripper system that
pushes against the side walls of the tunnel. Lateral gripper pads are fitted to provide
adequate reaction for the forward motion of the machine without imposing excessive loads
on tunnel lining, tunnel supports or the surrounding ground.
Back-up system: Trailing support decks behind all types of tunnel boring machines, inside
the finished part of the tunnel. Support mechanisms located on the back-up can include
conveyors or other systems for muck removal, control rooms, electrical and ventilation
systems, dust removal, etc.
9.2 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL OBLIGATIONS

9.2.1 RESPONSIBILITY
The Contractor is responsible for means and methods in construction including same for
his Sub-contractors, the maintenance of safe working conditions in his undertaking, i.e. for
the protection of safety operation of pre- excavated tunnel, and safety to personnel,
equipment, the Works and adjacent structures and installations occupied by others.
The Contractor shall adopt and be fully responsible for safe systems of work, which
minimize the risk to health and safety. All persons working on the site shall be competent
to carry out their tasks and duties safely and in a manner that will not endanger their own
health nor the health of others. Persons, when first employed on the site, shall be
subjected to appropriate pre- employment occupational health checks, instructed on the
hazards inherent in the site, precautions to be taken, the form of construction, and
emergency procedures and fire safety. Such instructions shall be given whenever there is
a material or process change in the working arrangements. The Contractor shall maintain
a record of all persons instructed and each person shall be required to sign such record
confirming that instruction has been received. No person shall be permitted on site without
being inducted as set out above. The Contractor shall prepare a written statement of Safe
Systems of Working which shall be issued to all persons at site.
All parties shall comply with the Health and Safety at Work etc. They shall also comply
with the requirements and recommendations of:
(i) BS 6164 Health and Safety in Tunnelling in the Construction Industry:
Code of Practice
(ii) BS EN 12111 Tunnelling Machines – Road Headers, Continuous Miners and
Impact Hammers: Safety Requirements
(iii) BS EN 16191 Tunnelling Machinery: Safety Requirements
(iv) BS 7671 Requirements for electrical installations ( IEE Wiring
Regulations)
The Contractor shall also comply with the requirements of the Employer’ s codes of
practice for safe working and those of any authority or body where their services or
property are affected by the Works.
All safety and emergency procedure training shall be reinforced by regular practice drills.
A person responsible for Safety shall be appointed by the Contractor and this person shall
be conversant with corporate policy, management operational instructions, regulations,
legislation and current best practice and how these relate to health, safety and welfare.
Compliance with health and safety requirements is the responsibility of managers and
individuals at each and every level.
The Contractor shall establish on site welfare and first aid facilities with appropriately
trained personnel required by the scale of the Works, all necessary equipment, safety
barriers, notices, comprehensive fire detection and fire fighting facilities.
9.2.2 DOCUMENTATION OF MATERIALS AND PROCEDURES
9.2.2.1 General
Before commencing any underground works pertaining to this project, the Contractor shall
provide the Engineer with detailed proposals for carrying out the relevant work, including
programs, methods, equipment and materials. Such proposal shall include the Risk
Management Plan, the Safety Management Plan, the Geotechnical Interpretation Report,
the Baseline Construction Plan, Construction Method Statement, Construction Site
Organization, Construction Personnel Qualification, etc. Work operations shall not be
commenced without the prior approval of the Engineer and the Contractor shall not vary
approved procedures without the prior consent of the Engineer.
9.2.2.2 Protection of Excavated Tunnel
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with full and complete method statements for
protection of the excavated tunnel and this method shall comply with international
practices and standards. A monitoring system for excavated tunnel shall be adopted.
9.2.2.3 Tunnel Excavation
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with method of rock excavation by drilling and
blasting method and/or cut-and-cover method and/or Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM) and/or
mechanical excavators. The excavation shall be performed by such methods, and in such
a manner, as will leave stable, regular surfaces with a minimum of over break.
The Contractor shall provide details of his proposed methods for excavation and spoil
removal to the Engineer for approval. No excavation shall take place until the Engineer’s
approval has been obtained.
The Contractor shall submit his plans for blasting adjacent to finished structures, such as
safety distance and protection measures to be taken to avoid excessive vibration or flying
rock.
9.2.2.4 Ground Support System
The Contractor shall carry out ground support measures with minimum delay after
completion of each excavation round. In order to facilitate this, the Contractor shall always
request the Engineer to accompany him when inspecting the rock surfaces revealed after
excavation activity.
9.2.3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
9.2.3.1 General
At an early stage of the work, the Contractor shall undertake the setting up of an
information system with SRT operations Dept. to setting up an organization for
communication
The Contractor shall train rescue teams in case of any damage of the existing tunnel and
track. These teams shall be trained in underground rescue work and co-operate with SRT
organizations.
No workmen shall be employed underground until they have shown themselves
conversant with basic safety precautions. The Contractor shall strictly enforce all safety
regulations and shall provide adequate protective clothing and safety gear for his workmen
throughout the period of the Works.
The Contractor shall observe all precautions to avoid accidents or injury to Workmen or
the Works and to minimize the extent and severity of any accident or injury which may
occur. Such precautions shall have due regard to the skill and training of the labour force
employed underground and shall comply with local mining or other applicable regulations.
9.2.3.2 Use, Storage and Handling of Explosives
The Contractor shall observe all rules and regulations regarding the import, transport,
storage and use of explosives issued by the public authority having jurisdiction in respect
of the same.
The method of drilling and blasting shall be complied with Government Regulation for
Dangerous Good Act. i.e. storage of explosive, drilling, charging, firing, ventilation, and safety
matter.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for injury to any person, for damage to the
Works or any other property and for any accidents resulting from blasting in connection
with the Works.
Before firing where basting is to take place shall be evacuated and, for at least three
minutes prior to firing, a loud siren shall be sounded. The times for blasting shall be
coordinated with SRT train operation diagram so as not to disturb train operation
unreasonably.
Warning systems for thunderstorms and stray currents shall be installed at the blasting site
and preventative measures taken against accidental ignition of charges by lightning or stray
current.
9.2.3.3 Fire Hazard
When welding equipment or other high temperature equipment is used underground,
safety precautions shall be taken to prevent the initiation and spread of fire and follow
Safety of Explosives Regulations.
9.2.4 CONSTRUCTION SITE FACALITIES
9.2.4.1 General
The Contractor shall submit descriptions of the work site layout, office, plant, and labour
facilities to the Engineer. The construction facilities will also be required to be submitted
following the use for supply of water, ventilated air, compressed air, lighting, power supply,
etc., and for the disposal of water, contaminated air, etc., for the approval of the Engineer
well in advance of starting underground works.
9.2.4.2 Telephone Communications
Telephone communications shall normally be provided between the working faces, portals
and other areas where work is going on. Telephone locations shall be prominently
displayed. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all key personnel communication
lists.
9.2.4.3 Electric Cables
All lighting and power cables installed underground shall be adequately insulated with
joints made in an approved manner. All installation and maintenance work shall be done
by qualified personnel to a high standard. Cables shall be securely fixed above floor level
with the exception of cables needed for occasional work.
Separate circuits shall be provided for the supply of power and lighting, respectively, and
they shall be kept well separated from signalling and telephone cables.
Circuits used for firing explosives shall be kept separate from all other circuits by placing
them on the opposite wall.
All electric installations shall be adequately earthed in accordance with normal practice,
local requirements, and emergency stand by power and be approved by the Engineer.
Installations shall furthermore be protected by earth-fault breakers, all in accordance with
modern practices and safety standards.
9.2.4.4 Ventilation
The underground ventilation system shall comply with the Underground Construction Act.
After installation of ventilation ducts, these shall be checked at regular intervals and any
damage which might decrease their efficiency shall immediately be reported and then
repaired. Spare ducts and spare ventilators shall be available on site for this purpose.
Diesel engines working underground shall be regularly checked and kept well-adjusted so
that all harmful substances in the exhaust gases are kept to the minimum. Petrol engines
shall not be permitted underground.
At intervals approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall perform measurements of gas
pollution underground in order to detect at an early stage of the presence of carbon
monoxide, nitrogen dioxide, methane and other harmful or doing so, the Contractor shall
ensure that pollution percentages including that resulting from dust are kept within
acceptable limits according to internationally recognized standards. The results of
measurements shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer on a regular basis.
Satisfactory ventilation shall be maintained as long as any work is carried out underground
and no part of any ventilation system shall be dismantled and removed without the prior
9.2.4.5 Lighting
All underground areas where work is going on shall be illuminated with electric lights of
adequate strength and number to allow effective work, inspection, mapping, and surveying
to be carried out in a proper and safe manner
Generally, the illumination on a horizontal plane at floor level shall be not less than 10
lux. At working faces, the illumination shall be not less than 50 lux. Hand inspection lamps
and electric battery torches shall be available at working faces at all times, together with
emergency backup lighting for evacuation.
9.2.4.6 Dewatering (Water Drainage during Excavation)
The Contractor shall keep all underground areas substantially free from water by providing
drains, ditches, pipes, pumps, sumps, etc. to drain water away. The Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer details of his proposals for dealing with water from any source prior to
commencing underground work. It is of eminent importance to always keep the
carriageway in the tunnel in dry conditions.
In the event that gravity flow cannot be satisfactorily arranged, the Contractor shall remove
the water by pumping and the contractor shall provide, install, operate and maintain all
necessary pumps, piping and other equipment required. The Contractor shall also provide
sufficient numbers of standby pumps to serve during periods of breakdown or

maintenance.
Where water bearing seams, fissures or broken ground is yielding undesirably large
quantities of water, the Contractor shall grout such seams, fissures or broken ground to
maintain safe operation.
The Contractor shall provide devices for measuring the quantities of water removed from
underground excavations, by pumping or by gravity as the case may be. The Contractor
shall provide certified calibration charts for all measuring devices and shall submit to the
Engineer a complete record of the quantities of water disposed of, either by pumping or
by gravity, and the times during which pumping has occurred.
The Contractor shall provide water treatment facilities for wastewater disposal from
construction site and Office/Camp that satisfies the stated environmental standards.
9.2.5 RECORDS
9.2.5.1 Daily Records
The Contractor shall keep records of:
(i) Geological data, including tunnel face map and subsequent geological profile
and plan along the tunnel, location of excessive overbreak and and/or high
water inflow, and distribution of rock mass quality and its behaviour types,
(ii) Tunnel convergence monitoring
(iii) Cycle time of each round of excavation, including location, bore hole
diameters and lengths, drilling, charging, firing patterns with vibration
measurement, etc.
(iv) Rock support arrangement, including location, position, type and dimension of
rock bolts, shotcrete, and steel sets, etc.
(v) Drainage arrangement, including location, inflow rate and quality of discharge
water.
(vi) The data of grouting operation, including number of grout holes, location of
grout hole, grout take, grouting time and grouting pressure, etc.
(vii) The results of compressive strength tests of cores extracted from shotcrete
and pull out tests on rock bolts, etc.
(viii) Relevant data pertaining to structural concrete and other ancillary work
described in other Sections of this specification.
All records shall be kept up-to-date and shall be made available immediately for the
Engineer's inspection on request.
The original records shall be kept at the Contractor's office. The Contractor shall furnish
the Engineer with a copy of the records each day covering the progress achieved during
the previous day where work is being performed.
9.2.5.2 Other Records
The Contractor shall, on a daily basis, provide the Engineer with documentation in the
form of geological maps and photographs showing the pertinent geological features as
observed at excavated face opened up after each excavation operation. Similarly, the
Contractor shall provide the Engineer with documentation recording the excavation's
adherence to line, level and profile over break or under break.
9.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION

9.3.1 GENERAL
Pre-construction geotechnical investigation should be carried out with reference to
Geotechnical Investigation in Technical Manual for Design and Construction of Road
Tunnels — Civil Elements Chapter 3 proposed by U.S. Department of Transportation
Federal Highway Administration in 2009 or BS 5930 Code of practice for site investigations.
Most of pre-construction investigation work shall be performed within 180 days after
noticed to proceed the Works so that the Geotechnical Interpretation Report could be
then completed before the construction started.
Lists of pre-construction geotechnical investigation which should be conducted before final
design stage are as follow:
(i) Topographic survey;
(ii) Engineering geological mapping;
(iii) Subsurface investigation: including
- Boreholes with coring,
- Soil and rock identification and classification,
- Field testing techniques, and
- Groundwater investigation, i.e. borehole permeability test and
groundwater monitoring in boreholes;
(iv) Laboratory tests; and
(v) Geophysical investigation, including
- High resolution resistivity survey,
- Seismic reflection/refraction survey,
- Geophysical borehole logging.
The Contractor should follow referenced standards of each method as shown in Table
9.3-1.
Table 9.3-1 Pre-construction geotechnical investigation methods and its referenced standards
Investigation Method Referenced Standard
Engineering geological mapping FGDC-STD-013-2006: FDDC Digital Cartographic Standard for
Geologic Map Symbolization
Boreholes with coring ASTM D 2113
High resolution resistivity survey ASTM D 6431
Seismic reflection survey ASTM D 5777
Seismic refraction survey ASTM D 7128
Geophysical borehole logging ASTM D 5753
Borehole permeability test ASTM D 4630 or other standards approved by the engineer
Laboratory test
Index properties of soil ASTM C 136, ASTM D 4318, ASTM D 2216, and ASTM D 854
Uniaxial compressive strength test ASTM D 7012 or ISRM Suggested Methods
Slake durability test ASTM D 4644 or ISRM Suggested Methods
Direct shear strength test ASTM D 5607 or ISRM Suggested Methods
Point load test ASTM D 5731 or ISRM Suggested Methods
Brazilian tensile strength test ASTM D 3967 or ISRM Suggested Methods
Groundwater quality analysis As approved by the engineer
Petrographic examination of rock ASTM C 1721 or ISRM Suggested Methods
9.3.2 REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall propose work quantity, locations, layout and method statement of
the Works to the Engineer for approval prior to commence the investigation.
The Contractor shall employ contractors or subcontractor itself with sufficient experiences
in geotechnical investigation and/ or geophysical investigation of rocks or similar works.
Profiles of the operators who would conduct the investigation should be submitted for
approval prior to investigation.
Without the approval of the required document, the works shall not be commenced.
The contractor shall submit final report of each of the Works consisting introduction,
summary of concepts related to the Works, methodology, results, and discussion and
conclusions. Back-up document shall be included in appendices of the report.
All of the investigation resulted shall be studied and analyzed in order to create the
Geotechnical Interpretation Report of the project.
9.3.2.1 Engineering Geological Mapping

The Contractor shall employ experienced engineering geologists to conduct engineering
geological survey and integret field geological data, results of borehole logging, geophysical
investigation, field and laboratory tests in order to establish the maps and cross-sections
consisting of all these following features:
1) Distribution of rock groups/formations with similar lithological characteristics and
techtonic regimes;
2) Hydrogeological characteristics, i.e. degree and type of permeability, of rock
masses;
3) Structural features and alignment of discontinuities, including beds, joints, faults,
shear surfaces and folds;
4) Distribution of rock masses having similar geomechanical characteristics, i.e. rock
mass quality and behavior type (BT);
5) Distribution of geotechnical unit (GTU) having similar geotechnical characteristics,
i.e. lithology, mechanical properties and hydrogeological properties.
9.3.2.2 Boreholes
The Contractor shall conduct borehole drilling with rock coring in a sufficient amount which covers
all uncertainty area along the tunnel alignment. Work quantity, locations, layout and method
statement of borehole with coring shall be porposed to the Engineer before commencement.
The Contractor shall employ contractors or subcontractor itself with sufficient experiences
in borehole drilling in rock with coring. In rock, continuous rock core should be obtained
below the surface of rock, with a minimum NX-size core (diameter of 2.16 inch or 54.7
mm). Double and triple tube core barrels should be used to obtain higher quality core
more representative of the in situ rock. For deeper holes, coring should be performed with
the use of wire-line drilling equipment to further reduce potential degradation of the
recovered core samples. Core runs should be limited to a maximum length of 3.0 m in
moderate to good quality rock, and 1.5 ft in poor quality rock.
The rock should be logged soon after it was extracted from the core barrel. Definitions and
terminologies used in logging rock cores shall be widely recognized. Primarily, the following
information is recommended to be noted for each core run on the rock coring logs:
a. Depth of core run
b. Core recovery in inches and percent
c. Rock Quality Designation (RQD) percent
d. Rock type, including color texture, degree of weathering and hardness

e. Character of discontinuities, joint spacing, orientation, roughness and alteration
f. Nature of joint infilling materials
In addition, drilling parameters, such as type of drilling equipment, core barrel and casing
size, drilling rate, and groundwater level logged in the field should also be noted.
9.3.2.3 Geophysical Investigation
1) Resistivity survey
Resistivity survey shall be conducted along the tunnel alignment to determine a
resistivity profile of the geological strata beneath the array to the depth of tunnel
location. Method statement of resistivity survey shall align to guidance listed in
Table 9.3-1.
2) Seismic survey
Seismic survey shall be conducted along the tunnel alignment to determine a
seismic profile of stratigraphy and associated structural geology of rock beneath
the array to the depth of tunnel location. Refration seismic survey is preferable
rather than reflection method. Method statement of seismic survey shall align to
guidance listed in Table 9.3-1.
3) Geophysical borehole logging
Borehole geophysical logging provides a series of profiles down the length of a
borehole, each profile giving a different geophysical parameter measured with an
appropriate sonde. Locations of boreholes to be logged shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to commencement.
Logging tools required for geotechnical investigation of tunnel construction may
be divided into three main categories as follows:
a) formation logs, which provide information on the geological formations
immediately surrounding the borehole, i.e. natural gamma and electrical
logs;
b) fluid logs, which provide information on the fluid filling the borehole, i.e.
electrical, neutron and/or sonic logs;
c) physical properties logs, from which the geotechnical and hydrogeological
parameters of the rock mass surrounding the borehole can be derived,
i.e. sonic and density logs;
9.3.2.4 Groundwater Investigation

1) Borehole permeability test
Borehole permeability test shall be conducted in rock strata, where it is approved
by the Engineer, at and around tunnel location.
The packer type of this test shall be performed in rock by forcing water under
pressure into the rock surrounding the borehole. By doing packer tests, the
apparent permeability of the rock mass and also a qualitative assessment of rock
quality could be determined.
The test is performed by selecting a length of borehole for testing, then inflating
a cylindrical rubber sleeve (“packer”) at the top of the test zone to isolate the
section of borehole being tested. Packer testing can thus be performed
intermittently as the borehole is advanced. Alternatively, testing can be performed
at multiple levels in a completed borehole by using a double packer system in
which packers are positioned and inflated at both the top and bottom of the zone
being tested. Once the packer is inflated to seal off the test section, water is
pumped under pressure to the test zone, while the time and volume of water
pumped at different pressures are recorded.
2) Groundwater monitoring in borehole
Groundwater monitoring in borehole shall be performed by installing observation
wells where the groundwater table is located at and near the tunnel location in
order to monitor changes in groutwater level by time during the period of tunnel
installation. Locations of boreholes, in which observation well would be installed,
is required to be get approval by the engineer before installation.
In stratified soils or rocks with two or more aquifers, water pressures may vary
considerably with depth. For such variable conditions, it is generally more
appropriate to use piezometers. Piezometers have seals that isolate the screens
or sensors within a specific zone or layer within the soil profile, providing a
measurement of the water pressure within that zone.
Observation wells and piezometers should be monitored periodically over a
prolonged period of time to provide information on seasonal variations in
groundwater levels. Monitoring during construction provides important information
on the influence of tunneling on groundwater levels, forming an essential
component of construction control and any protection program for existing
structures and facilities. Local and state jurisdictions may impose specific
requirements for permanent observation wells and piezometers, for documenting

both temporary and permanent installations, and for closure of these installations.
9.3.2.5 Laboratory Test
The Contractor shall conduct laboratory tests, as listed in Table 9.3-1, of all kinds of rock
mass type and quality which are located near tunnel location in a sufficient amount. Work
quantity, locations, layout and method statement of borehole with coring shall be
porposed to the Engineer before commencement.
Tests shall be conducted by well recognized geotechnical, geomechanical and/or
geological test laboratories where approved by the Engineer.
9.4 GEOLOGICAL MAPPING AND ROCK MASS CLASSIFICATION

9.4.1 PORTAL EXCAVATION
9.4.1.1 Mapping of Cut Slope
Prior to conducting portal excavation by means of power tool, ripping or drilling and
blasting, the exposed geological condition in the portal area shall be inspected by an
experienced tunnel geologist and recorded and summarized in the form of map and tables.
9.4.2 TUNNEL EXCAVATION
9.4.2.1 Mapping of Tunnel Face
After each round of tunnel excavation by drilling and blasting or mechanical excavator
under the conventional tunnelling method, the exposed geological condition on the
tunnel face and tunnel wall and roof shall be inspected by an experienced tunnel geologist
and recorded and summarized in the form of map and tables. The geological data to be
recorded are rock/soil types and their locations, boundaries, geologic discontinuities (types
and orientation), degree of weathering, major weak zones, groundwater, over breaks.
An objective of the geological face mapping are: updating of predicted geological models,
assessment of actual rock mass types, classification of rock mass at the location, basis in
determination of tunnel support requirement (following an adopted rock mass
classification system or support classes) and documentation.
The contractor shall submit the updated geological profile and plane with all necessary
information displayed along the tunnel to the Engineer on monthly basis.
9.4.2.2 Adopted Rock Mass Classification System
Depending on intact rock strength, jointing, presence of disturbed zones, degree of
weathering and presence of groundwater, the rock mass in underground excavations will
be classified as belonging to Rock Class I-V according to Rock Mass Rating (RMR) proposed
by Bieniawski (1989) and the latest revision in 2014 and the lastest update in 2015 and/or
Geological Strength Index (GSI) proposed by Hoek et al. 1998; Marinos and Hoek 2000, 2001
and/or Q-system proposed by Barton et al. (1974).
The characteristics of the different Rock Classes are shown as Table 9.4-1:
Table 9.4-1 Rock mass class characterization

Rock Mass Class Characteristics
I Very good quality Very hard and massive to slightly jointed rock. No signs of influence of water.
The joint interval is approximately 50-100 cm.
II Good quality Hard, fresh and moderately jointed rock. Some slight weathering of joint
surfaces and no influence of water. The rock splits along planes of bedding,
schistosity of joint direction. The joint interval is approximately 30-70 cm.
III Fair quality Softening of the rock due to weathering and prominent bedding planes.
Medium joint spacing and locally some clay in fissures, i. e. minor weathering
of joint surfaces. The joint interval is typically < 50 cm.
IV Poor quality Significantly developed cracking and weathering are present in the rock. Closely
bedded and jointed rock with local mylonites and crushed zones. Chemical
alteration and skin-weathering partly present.
Va Very poor quality Strongly folded and sheared rock with faults and fractured zones. Rock is highly
fractured with small fragments and clay gouge. The fragments are loose and
not interlocked.
Vb Very poor quality Strongly folded and sheared rock with faults and fractured zones. Rock is highly
with high fractured with small fragments and clay gouge. It behaves plastically under the
overburden weight of overlying ground which has deformed and squeezed into an
excavation as a result of overstressing. High overburden depth is normally
considered as 150 m upward.
S Completely All rock material is decomposed and/or disintegrated to soil. The original mass
weathered and soil- structure is still largely intact.
like rock and soil
In accordance with state of the art of geotechnical tunnelling, the descriptions of the Rock
Mass Behaviour for each individual rock class under conditions of construction should be
defined and to be agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer.
9.5 PORTAL WORKS

9.5.1 PORTAL GROUND CLASSIFICATION
9.5.1.1 Soil
These should include all kinds of soils containing sand, silt, hard and soft murrum and/or
shingle, gravel, clay, loam, peat, ash, shale, etc., which can generally be excavated by
excavator or other power tools with horse power (hp) of at least 100, and which is not
classified under “soft or hard rock”.
This also includes embedded rock, rubble not longer than 500 mm in one direction and
not more than 300 mm in the other two directions.
Removal of such soils by mechanical excavators, power tools etc. is payable at the rate
for soil excavation.
9.5.1.2 Soft Rock
Soft rock should include rock, boulders, slag, chalk, slate, hard mica schist, laterite and all other
materials which is rock, but does not need blasting and could be removed with a crawler
tractor perfect equipped with ripper condition or power tools. The engine power should be
not less than 270 horse power and the gross weight shall be not less than 28 metric tons.
This also includes rock boulders longer than 500 mm in one direction and not more than
500 mm in any one of the other two directions. This also includes excavation in macadam
and tarred roads and pavements.
Removal of such materials by mechanical excavators, power tools etc. is payable at the
rate for soft rock excavation.
9.5.1.3 Hard Rock
This includes all rock occurring in large continuous masses, which cannot be removed
except by blasting for loosening it. Hardened varieties of rock with or without veins and
secondary minerals, which require blasting is considered as hard rock. Boulders of rock
occurring in such sizes and not classified under “soil” and “soft rock” above is also
classified as hard rock.
In the judgement of the Engineer, hard rock can be loosened with a tractor mounted and
drawn ripper of the following description:
(I) Tractor Unit: Equipment with a minimum weight of 17 tonnes and net horse power
rating of 150 HP or more. The tractor unit is to be in good condition and operated
by experienced personnel skilled in the use of ripping equipment.
(II) Ripping Unit: The ripper to be attached to the tractor should be the most efficient
parallelogram type recommended by the tractor or ripper manufacturer. The ripper
should have a single shank in first class condition with sharpened cutting point.
9.5.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
Shall comply with the requirements of SECTION 2.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING.
9.5.3 PORTAL EXCAVATION
Shall comply with the requirements of SECTION 2.3 EXCAVATION and/or clause 9.6.1.2
Rock Excavation of SECTION 9.6 TUNNEL EXCAVATION WORKS.
9.5.4 TUNNEL PORTAL SUPPORT AND SLOPE PROTECTION
9.5.4.1 Shotcrete
Shall comply with the requirements of SUB-SECTION 9.8.2 SHOTCRETE.
9.5.4.2 Soil Nails and Rock Bolts
Soil nails shall be used to stabilize any slopes where it is soil. Rock bolts shll be installed
where it is fractured rock which it is susceptible to have shallow movement. Locations of
soil nails and rock bolts shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior installation.
Material shall be galvanize-coated deformed bar of types approved by the Engineer and
shall as a minimum meet the requirements of ASTM-A615, Grade 40. The method of
galvanization shall be hot-dip. Other methods shall not be permitted unless approved by
the Engineer. Centralizers shall be equipped every at least 1 m in order to maintain its
position in the center of drilled holes.
Other specifications which is not specified here shall comply with the requirements of SUB-
SECTION 9.8.4 ROCK BOLTS.
9.5.5 TUNNEL PORTAL CONCRETE STRUCTURES AND ITS FOUNDATIONS
9.5.5.1 Tunnel Portal Concrete Structures
Shall comply with the requirements of Concrete Lining in SUB-SECTION 9.10.1 CAST-IN-
PLACE CONCRETE LINING.
9.5.5.2 Foundation of Tunnel Portal Concrete Structures
Shall comply with the requirements of Concrete Invert in SUB-SECTION 9.10.2 OTHER
CONCRETE STRUCTURES.
9.5.6 COMPACTED BACKFILLING
Shall comply with the requirements of SECTION 2.5 EMBANKMENT.
9.6 TUNNEL EXCAVATION WORKS

9.6.1 TUNNEL EXCAVATION
9.6.1.1 General
The Contractor shall perform all underground rock excavation, as well as that required in
open cuts, in accordance with this Specification or as directed by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall excavate by drilling and blasting, or by mechanical excavators, or by
Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM), or by other approved methods and shall load, haul and use
it in the Works or dispose of it in spoil dumps as approved by the Engineer. Mechanised
techniques by use of excavators for excavation shall be used wherever practicable to
eliminate or reduce health and safety risks.
The excavation shall be performed by such methods, and in such a manner, as will leave
stable, regular surfaces with a minimum of over break.
The Contractor shall provide details of his proposed methods for excavation and spoil
removal to the Engineer for approval. No excavation shall take place until the Engineer’s
approval has been obtained. Such agreement shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his
obligations under the Contract.
Excavation shall be carried out in a uniform and controlled manner and over-cutting shall
be kept to a minimum consistent with the need to maintain the necessary clearance for
construction of the Works.
The invert of the tunnel shall be protected against damage and deterioration which may
be caused by construction traffic. Any other surfaces which are deteriorated or damaged
shall be made properly to meet a standard agreed with the Engineer.
Any voids formed during the excavation process by machine overcut slips, falls of material,
overbreak and temporary works shall be filled completely with grout, concrete, shotcrete
or other approved durable material.
Where the Contract specifies limits to surface settlement and/or protection in respect of
existing services or structures, the Contractor shall provide calculations demonstrating that
the method of excavation will result in compliance with those requirements. Details of the
monitoring arrangements which are proposed for the recording of movements and the
verification of the degree of any settlement or damage to services or structures shall be
as specified herein.
All excavation shall be carried out to a profile as close as possible to the specified
excavation line.
The Contractor shall be constantly aware of the possibility of slips and ground movement
which may be caused by his method or order of excavation. He shall maintain on-site
materials and equipment for use in ensuring the stability of the face.
9.6.1.2 Rock Excavation
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with method of rock excavation by mechanical
excavators or drill-and-blast method or Tunnel Boring Machine. The method of drilling and
blasting shall be complying with Government Regulation for Dangerous Good Act. i.e.
storage of explosive, drilling, charging, firing, ventilation, and safety matter. Similarly, the
Contractor shall submit his plans, containing safety distance and protection measures to
be taken to avoid excessive vibration or flying rock, for blasting adjacent to finished
structures such as private properties.
The Contractor’s proposal to excavate tunnels without explosives shall be submitted as
full details for the Engineer approval.
Where excavation requires the use of blasting, the provisions of the relevant section herein
shall also apply.
On exposure of a fresh rock face, the rock strata in the face walls and roof shall be mapped
geologically in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. The Contractor shall
provide enough and safe access for mapping.
Any unsound area of rock shall be reported to the Engineer immediately together with a
record of the Contractor’s action. The face shall not be advanced until the area is properly
secured.
Where an in-situ lining is specified, at no point will rock be allowed to intrude within the
specified limit as shown.
Any face of exposed ground, where excavation is to be discontinued for whatever reason,
shall be supported by rock dowels, shotcrete or other means agreed with the Engineer.
9.6.1.3 Soft Ground Excavation
Excavation in soil or rock of soil-like condition or completely to highly weathered rock,
measures shall be taken to ensure that no undue loss of or softening of the ground occurs
at the face, and that there is no run of material from behind supports or lining.
In any exposed ground, temporary emergency support shall be available at the face at all
times. Ground and groundwater conditions in any exposed face shall be logged.
9.6.1.4 Mixed-face Excavation

Excavation in mixed-face condition, where two or more geological formations present
simultaneously on the tunnel face, needs appropriate blasting to avoid excessive over
break and TBM design customization in order to be more suitable for the ground condition.
9.6.2 SHAFT EXCAVATION
9.6.2.1 General
Excavation shall comply with SUB-SECTION 9.6.1 TUNNEL EXCAVATION and the relevant
clauses of BS 6164.
Prior to excavation, the shaft area shall be thoroughly checked for existing pipes, cables or
structures and the appropriate measures taken in agreement with the Engineer.
9.6.2.2 Safety
Shafts shall be provided with guardrails and toe boards or rings at least 1.2 meter above
the surrounding ground level.
At all times shafts shall be provided with safe primary and secondary means of access and egress.
Should heavy plant and heavy loads have to be located in close proximity to any shaft,
the Contractor shall take into account the effects of these loads as well as any ground
loads when designing the shaft.
The Contractor shall guard against distortion of shaft lining during construction and the
possibility of shaft settlement or uplift at an intermediate stage of construction.
9.6.2.3 Temporary Shafts
Full details of temporary shafts required by the Contractor’s working methods shall be
submitted to the Engineer for his agreement. Such shafts shall be adequately sized for all
operations required for the execution of the Works.
Backfill for temporary working shafts shall comprise material agreed by the Engineer.
Where the Contractor wishes to recover temporary shaft linings the structure shall be
removed in safe stages as backfilling proceeds, taking care to maintain the safety and
structural integrity of the remaining lining. No part of Temporary Works shall be left in the
ground with in 2 m of the designed final surface level.
9.6.2.4 Shaft Construction
Excavation in rock shall generally be carried out by methods outlined for rock excavation
herein and as shown. Where explosives are used, full-width shaft covers and blasting mats
shall be installed during blasting.
Full details of Temporary Works required by the Contractor’s method of working for the
construction of tunnel or pipe jack eyes in the shaft lining, shall be submitted to the
Engineer for his agreement.
Shaft bases shall be concreted. In the case of Temporary Works shafts the Contractor shall
submit his proposals for the shaft base structure taking account of ground and groundwater
forces and sealing the shaft against water entry. Water pressure shall not be allowed to
build up under shaft bases until the shaft has sufficient resistance to prevent flotation. The
construction sequence shown on the Drawings shall be followed unless agreed with the
Engineer.
In the event that dewatering, grouting for ground treatment is employed, the work shall
comply with Clause 9.2.4.6 Dewatering and SUB-SECTION 9.8.6 GROUTING.
9.6.3 BLAST HOLE DRILLING
9.6.3.1 General
Drill rigs shall meet the requirements of BS EN 16228-2 Drilling and Foundation Equipment
– Safety: Mobile Drill Rigs for Civil and Geotechnical Engineering.
Use of hand-held drilling rigs shall comply with the guidance given in The Management of
Hand-Arm Vibration in Tunnelling Guide to Good Practice, by the British Tunnelling Society.
Drilling shall be carried out to provide holes of the diameters, lengths and inclinations
required within the deviation limits given on the Specification and Drawings.
The Contractor shall keep a written record of all holes drilled, material recovered and
water-flows or seepage and provide the Engineer with a copy if required.
Holes intended to be charged with explosives for blasting shall be drilled in strict
accordance with the agreed pattern, spacing, direction and depth.
9.6.3.2 Types of Drilling
1) Percussion drilling
Percussion drilling shall normally be used for drilling holes for rock bolts and
anchors, as well as for grouting, drainage and investigation purposes. Water flushing
shall be employed.
2) Rotary drilling
Rotary drilling shall be carried out with water flushing and with or without coring.
For rotary drilling without coring, the core diameter shall be at least 60 mm. For
rotary drilling with coring, core diameters shall be at least 42 mm with normal
double core barrels and 37.8 mm with double core barrels with split inner tube.
The equipment shall be capable of drilling holes in any direction to a length of at

least 100 m. The deviation of bore holes shall not exceed 5% of the bore hole
length.
Where approved by the Engineer, drill holes shall be provided with casings through rock
of poor quality.
Filling of part of the hole with grout and subsequent re-drilling shall be carried out in zones
of poor rock as directed by the Engineer.
During drilling with coring, the rotation speed, feeding pressure and amount of flushing
water shall be adapted to the rock type, so as to obtain cores of the best possible quality.
Cores shall be placed in core boxes of a type approved by the Engineer. The depth of
each run shall be noted in the box and core losses marked by pieces of wood of
corresponding length. The core boxes shall be transported and stored under roof in a
fenced area.
Records of core drillings shall be submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours and shall
comprise:
(i) Core recovery per run, as well as all core losses, Rock Quality Designation (RQD)
and fracture spacing;
(ii) Depth at each run; and
(iii) Length of casing, lengths grouted and re-drilled.
The Engineer shall approve the format of the records.
9.6.3.3 Washing of Drill Holes
All drill holes shall be washed after completion of drilling and prior to water pressure tests
during drilling.
The washing of holes shall be carried out by flushing, alternately with compressed air and
water under pressure through pipes or stiff hoses reaching the bottom of the holes.
Normally, flushing shall commence at the bottom and proceed towards the mouth of the
drill hole. Finished drill holes shall be properly plugged. Washing and plugging of drill holes
will not qualify for separate payment.
9.6.3.4 Water Pressure Testing of Drill Holes
Water pressure tests shall be performed during drilling or after completed drilling as
directed by the Engineer. The minimum inner diameter of the water conduit shall be 18
mm. Testing shall be made by means of single or double-type packers. Double-type
packers shall be spaced at a maximum of 3 m apart. Suitable packers for testing of holes
of all occurring diameters shall be available at all times. Packers used in weak rock shall
have a length of at least 500 mm.
During testing, the water pressure shall be kept constant over three consecutive two-
minute periods and the water leakage shall be measured during each of those periods.
Testing for investigation purposes wit be required at four different pressure levels
comprising 25, 50, 100 and 150% the total overburden pressure. Normally, testing of
grouting holes shall be performed in one stage at a pressure level of 10 kg/cm2. All gauges
used shall be such that the pressures adopted are around the middle of the measuring
range of the gauge.
9.6.4 BLASTING
9.6.4.1 General
The Contractor shall use explosives only in circumstances where it is safe to do so having
due regard to the safety of persons, third-party properties and the safet y of the Works.
Explosives shall not be used without the agreement of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall obtain all necessary licences and consents and shall provide secure
storage facilities for all explosives and equipment in accordance with BS 5607 Code of
Practice for the Safe Use of Explosives in the Construction Industry and the requirements
of the local police force and the Engineer.
Explosives shall be handled and used only by the Contractor's duly authorised personnel.
The names and qualifications of such personnel shall be submitted to the Engineer in
writing in advance of any possible use of explosives.
Blasting operations shall be carried out only under the direction of an experienced
operator. The Contractor shall appoint one competent person to be responsible for the
security of explosives.
At an early stage, in advance of the proposed use of explosives, the Contractor shall notify
the Engineer, third parties, statutory authorities and services which have an interest in or
are likely to be affected by blasting operations, of the general nature of the operation. The
Contractor shall subsequently give a minimum of 14 days to notice the Engineer and others
described above of the proposed use of explosives. With this notification the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer a detailed method statement on all aspects of the proposed
use of explosives, including the treatment of misfires.
Blasting shall be carried out carefully so as to avoid loosening or shattering rock beyond
the required line of excavation, and loose or shattered rock (where it does not contribute
to stability of the excavation) shall be removed by scaling down or other means before
personnel will be permitted to restart operations after blasting.
Notices of blasting operations shall be posted on site. Before each firing, the Contractor
shall give audible warning, clear the area, and shall take positive measures to prevent
personnel from entering the danger area.
The Contractor shall monitor the results of blasting closely and, where it is proper to do
so, shall propose changes to his blasting operation for the agreement of the Engineer.
Under no circumstances shall any holes be charged until completion of all drilling
operations at the face.
After each blasting operation the tunnel drive shall be sufficiently ventilated to remove
any nitrous gases and the atmospheric conditions shall be constantly checked prior to
personnel accessing the excavated face.
No person shall be allowed to approach the face and no face operation shall commence
until the Contractor's authorised person in charge of the operation has given permission.
As soon as practicable after blasting and without undue delay the Contractor shall erect
such support as may be necessary to safeguard the excavation and personnel.
The shot-firer must keep a record of the number of shots fired, their time of firing, type
and weights of explosives used and the type and number of detonators used, together
with a record of the post-blast situation for each and every location.
A copy of the record shall be available to the Engineer at the end of every shift on which
shots are fired.
The Contractor shall comply with the following documents in respect of the use of
explosives:
(i) Act of firearms, ammunition, explosive, fireworks and artificial arms since 1947,
Kingdom of Thailand; and
(ii) Act of arms control since 1987, Kingdom of Thailand.
9.6.4.2 Blasting Vibration
For structures in the proximity of blasting, the peak particle velocity shall be immediately
measured at the locations adjacent to the structure nearest to the face being blasted or
any other location where it is necessary to limit vibration.
Vibration monitoring proposals shall be submitted to the Engineer for his agreement.
The measurement of peak particle velocity shall be obtained from instruments capable of
measuring along three orthogonal axes, one of which shall be aligned parallel to the center
line of the excavation and another shall be vertical. The Contractor is to provide supports
for the measuring instrument if so required by the manufacturer's instructions.
The measurements of the particle velocities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Copies of the readings in an agreed form shall be supplied to the Engineer.
Equipment for measurement of vibration shall be in accordance with BS 7385-2 Evaluation
and Measurement for Vibration in Building: Guide to Damage Levels from Ground Borne
Vibration.
Prior to the commencement of blasting in any location, the Contractor shall demonstrate
by the use of test firings, or by other means, that neither the peak particle velocities given
in BS 7385-2 nor those stated in the Particular Specification will be exceeded.
9.6.4.3 Control Blasting
1) General
Contour blasting shall be performed by means of pre-splitting or smooth blasting.
Where contour blasting is prescribed the collaring and alignment of the drill holes
shall be made with special care to ensure good results. The deviation in collaring
of the holes in relation to the bottom of holes in the previous round shall be kept
at an absolute minimum and the error in alignment shall not exceed 5% of the
depth of the holes.
2) Smooth blasting
Smooth blasting implies that the contour holes are closely spaced and lightly
charged. The ratio between the spacing of contour holes and the burden shall be
less than 0.8
Smooth blasting shall be used for the excavation of walls and roofs in tunnels and
chambers in order to get smooth tunnel wall periphery and less fracturing. Smooth
blasting will not quality for separate payment but shall be included in the
excavation rate.
9.6.4.4 Smooth Blasting
The common cycle of drill and blast rock excavation is known as part of Conventional
Tunnelling. This cycle includes sequential drilling, charging, blasting, ventilation, loading,
mucking, scaling, rock support installation and surveying. Drill and blast tunnelling
emphasizes on productivity, cost efficiency, and safety during rock excavation.
Modern drilling demands for multipurpose drilling equipment to drill effectively blasting
and bolting holes, injection and probing holes and even install casing tubes under fractured
rock conditions. User friendly drilling units provide integrated drill and blast design and
drilling operation as well as data collection and reporting features. Advanced intelligent
drilling jumbo technology combines advanced tunnel management.
Drilling should be performed effectively with high accuracy and following well designed
drill and blast plan. To achieve effective production, optimized excavation sequence has
to be repeated without interruption over the whole tunnelling project.
Tunnelling jumbo features include data collection of production and process information
such as round data, cumulative production data and drilling parameters, logging in order
to guide the production logistics planning, scheduled maintenance and productivity
improvements.
Blasters shall mainly use smooth (perimeter or contour) blasting. An ideal blast causes
minimum damage to the host rock such keeping the host rock as undisturbed as possible.
Blasters drill holes in the roof of tunnels and headings, parallel to the direction of the
excavation and space them closely, loading them with decoupled charges which are then
fired, delayed and/or simultaneously.
Working Instructions;
(i) Prepare the rock as well as the surrounding area for the blasting process. This
is an essential step to make sure the procedure is absolutely safe and goes
through as smoothly as possible. Remove all objects that could be damaged
by the blast. Also, secure the area completely to ensure no other people are
near the rock during the blasting process.
(ii) Reveal the rock by removing the soil around it. Make sure the biggest part of
the rock is easily accessible. Use common tools for digging.
(iii) Clean the rock once you have removed the extra loose rock/soil. Use a stiff
brush to wipe off the dirt, and other residue. Note that a clear view of the rock
is needed to plan the blast and then perform it.
(iv) Drill holes in the rock, following the pattern so the holes are of equal distances.
Clean all the holes by blowing the dust out with strong air pressure. This will
make the blasting product much more efficient.
(v) Choose the blasting product for breaking the rock. Inspect the condition of the
rock, its size and structure and choose the blasting product accordingly. Seek
professional advice if necessary.
(vi) Place blast cartridges, or whatever blasting product was chosen into the
previously drilled holes. Just be sure the product comes from a known,
reputable manufacturer.
9.6.5 TUNNEL BORING MACHINES (TBM)

9.6.5.1 General
1) General requirements
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the Contractor shall be fully responsible
for the selection, design and supply of tunnelling machines and ancillary
equipment.
The Contractor shall take into consideration all geological and other relevant
information made available to him. The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the
suitability of the machines or shields which he will provide.
The tunnelling machine selected shall provide adequate settlement control when
operating in the anticipated strata and shall be suitable to meet settlement limits
where defined in the Particular Specification.
The primary standard to be complied with is BS EN 16191 Tunnelling Machinery:
Safety Requirements.
2) Machine Characteristics
All tunnelling machines shall be designed with adequate safety margins for the
anticipated duty and manufactured to comply with all relevant safety standards.
The design and layout of the TBM control and other workstations shall be carefully
considered to provide good ergonomics, visibility and a safe working environment.
Adequate provision shall be made for maintenance, including handling heavy
components. Individual replacement of major components such as electric
motors, hydraulic pumps and motors, propulsion and face rams shall be possible
The machine design shall consider the safe replacement of excavation tools during
the tunnel drive.
The external diameter of the TBM or shield shall be designed to produce minimum
overbreak and the least necessary clearance for the proper construction of the
Works. Design shall take into account the horizontal and vertical alignment to be
negotiated. Provision shall be made to limit and correct roll of the machine.
Where probing ahead may be required, there shall be a provision for making
horizontal and raking exploratory holes. Where machines have pressure bulkheads
the probing and grouting points shall have the facility to install glands and valves
to withstand the pressures envisaged.
All machines and shields except those used exclusively for pipe jacking shall be
self-propelled. Where propulsion is by means of hydraulic rams thrusting off
previously constructed segmental lining, ram shoes and facings shall be designed
to distribute the thrust without causing damage to the constructed lining. Ram
shoe pads shall be adequately secured. Propulsion rams
Where open shields are to be equipped with face rams for the support of
excavation they shall be capable of operating individually or collectively in any
combination. Face rams shall be designed to accommodate the loads necessary
to make the face secure. The operation of face rams shall be interlinked with that
of the propulsion rams.
Arrangements for extraction, transport and disposal of spoil shall be appropriate
for the material to be handled.
Segment erection systems shall be capable of picking up and placing segments
safely and accurately. Lifting and gripping systems shall be designed to handle the
loads with an adequate factor of safety and without damaging segment sealing
systems. If required, erection systems shall be capable of compressing joint
gaskets.
The erector shall be in clear view of the operator. A safety device shall be fitted
to avoid accidental release of segments during handling and placing.
All operating functions of TBM or shield, including rate of advancement, shall be
accessible to the TBM or shield driver.
3) Guidance
An adequate guidance system shall be installed on tunnelling machines with a
display to show the position and attitude of the machine relative to the design
alignment. The display shall be visible to the machine driver at all times
A secondary means such as a plumb-bob or other apparatus shall be used to
check inclination, and to indicate roll. Shields shall be furnished with a means of
controlling orientation.
Detailed guidance information shall be checked against the tunnel alignment
control at regular intervals as agreed with the Engineer.
4) Fire Protection
The relevant standards shall be incorporated on all shields and tunnelling
machines. The equipment shall include, but not be limited to:
(a) fire extinguishers
(b) sprinkler systems

(c) a high-density foam drencher system.
A warning signal both audible and visual shall be provided.
Tunnel boring machines, other than remote control shall also be equipped with
the following:
(a) significant electrical items protected by direct injection of extinguishant into
enclosures from a fixed system
(b) a fixed extinguisher system discharging foam or powder over hydraulic
pumps, motors and storage tanks
(c) water spray curtain at the out bye end
(d) additional lire protection as appropriate to size and layout of the tunnelling
machines
5) Contractor‘s Submission
The Contractor shall as soon as possible agree with the Engineer a program for the
design, provision, inspection, testing, transport, erection and commissioning of
each TBM or shield.
6) Inspection and Testing
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of materials used or present
within the TBM or shield and must ensure that all materials used or present are
adequate for the task they are to perform.
The Engineer shall be permitted at any stage during manufacture to inspect,
examine and test on the manufacturer’s premises the materials, workmanship and
performance of all plant and components to be supplied under the Contract.
Such inspections, examination or testing shall not release the Contractor from any
obligation as specified under the Contract.
When tests are to be made at the premises of the manufacturer or elsewhere,
except where otherwise specified. The Contractor shall provide such assistance,
labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be
requisite and as may be demanded to carry out such tests efficiently.
New and reconditioned machines shall be assembled at the manufacturer's works
on completion of fabrication or modification and tested to demonstrate that
components operate correctly. Test running will also be required at site following
assembly, prior to commencement of tunnel driving.
7) Personnel and Training

The Contractor shall ensure that all key personnel who are responsible for driving,
maintenance and controlling the machine have received the necessary training in
the duties that they are required to perform. Preferably the training shall be done
within a system of national vocational qualifications. Such training shall include
emergency procedures.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain a complete list of the names of
persons, and their duties, responsible for the operation of the machine, who have
completed the appropriate training to an accepted standard.
9.6.5.2 Unshielded Tunnel Boring Machines
The Unshield, Open-type or Main Beam TBM can be used in hard rock. It does not require
installation of concrete segmental lings behind it as other types of machine do. Instead,
the rock is held up using ground support methods such as ring beams, rock bolts, shotcrete,
steel arch ribs (rings). The design of open-type or main-beam TBMs shall permit the
installation of ground support adjacent to the tunnel face as required by the ground
conditions. The design of gripper pads and trailing gear of unshielded machines shall allow
installation of full profile steel arch ribs within 3 m of the tunnel face.
The TBM excavate rock using disc cutters mounted in the cutter head. The disc cutters
create compressive stress fractures in the rock, causing it to chip away from the rock in the
tunnel face. The excavated rock (muck) is transferred through openings in the cutter head
to a belt conveyor, where it runs through the machine to a system of conveyors or muck
cars for removal from the tunnel.
The cutterhead shall be designed to allow access to the face for the purpose of inspection,
testing, sampling and repair. Access dimensions shall be in accordance with the
requirements of BS EN 16191. Where required by the ground conditions, the machine shall
be equipped with a water spray system, dust shield and dust scrubber system.
The machine design shall allow the mounting of rock drills capable of drilling radial holes
within 3m of the tunnel face at any point on the tunnel circumference including side walls
and invert.
Provision shall be made in the machine design for installing temporary or primary lining,
including sprayed concrete and mesh, behind the TBM gripper assembly.
9.6.5.3 Tunnel Boring Machine Operation

1) General
The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the performance of the tunnelling
machines and shields engaged on the Works. He shall employ personnel who are
trained in and have experience of, the type of machine or shield used.
The Contractor shall plan his excavation processes, especially at the
commencement and completion of drives, in such a way as to prevent ground
movement which might adversely affect the permanent work and existing
structures. The Contractor shall present a detailed method statement to the
Engineer for his agreement. This statement shall include but not be limited to:
(a) the proposed method of transportation and erection of tunnel boring
machines
(b) the proposed method of commencing the tunnel drives until all the
ancillary equipment is installed, including any ground treatment or
dewatering required; temporary thrust arrangements shall be detailed
(c) the method of determining ground conditions ahead of the face and the
assessment of the risk of altered ground conditions
(d) the proposed method for controlling volume loss from tunnelling
(e) the proposed method for reconciling the volume of material excavated
with the volumetric rate of advance of the tunnel
(f) the proposed method of junctioning including dismantling the machines or
shields
(g) the method of ensuring that any voids created during the excavation
process are adequately grouted as soon as practicable after excavation.
Before tunnelling commences, the Contractor shall ensure that all machine
systems are operational including all temporary and permanent ground support
systems.
2) Excavation
Machines and shields shall be moved forward and excavation made for one unit
of the tunnel excavation and lining at a time and only after completion of the
previously erected support. The method used shall ensure correct alignment at
all times without imposing excessive loads on the tunnel supports, lining or on
the surrounding ground. Careful control of the working face shall be maintained
to prevent overbreak and loss of ground.
When tunnelling under or near existing structures or utility infrastructure, a specific
method statement shall be submitted to the Engineer for agreement.
9.6.6 OVERBREAK
9.6.6.1 General
No projection of rock points will be accepted inside the theoretical excavation A-line. The
Contractor shall remove all such rock points at his own cost.
All excavation outside the theoretical line will be classified as overbreak. A distinction will
be qualified for payment purposes between “ordered overbreak” or “approved
overbreak”, both of which are conditioned by adverse geological conditions, and “normal
overbreak”.
Overbreak beyond the theoretical excavation line (A-line) up to “Line B” as specified in
Table 9.6-1 for tunnel excavation by drilling-and-blasting and mechanized tunnelling by
excavators and Table 9.6-2 for tunnel excavation by Tunnel Boring Machines will be
classified as "normal overbreak". Normal Overbreak shall be qualified for payment.
Where overbreak occurs more than specified, the Engineer will inspect the area and instruct
if shotcrete or concrete shall be provided as backfill. In areas where there is to be a
concrete lining or concrete structure adjoining the rock, the overbreak backfill shall be of
the same quality as that required for the lining or structure.
Table 9.6-1 Payment line of each support class for tunnel excavation by drilling-
and-blasting and mechanized tunnelling by excavators.
Support Class Excavation Line Qualified for Payment “Line B”
I Not more than 100 mm from line A
II Not more than 100 mm from line A
III Not more than 150 mm from line A
IV Not more than 250 mm from line A
Va Not more than 250 mm from line A
Vb Not more than 200 mm from line A
S Not more than 150 mm from line A
Portal Not more than 150 mm from line A
Table 9.6-2 Payment line of tunnel excavation by Tunnel Boring Machines.

Method of
Excavation Line Qualified for Payment “Line B”
Excavation
TBM Not more than 100 mm from line A
9.6.6.2 Ordered Overbreak
Ordered overbreak is overbreak that is specifically ordered by the Engineer in order to
prevent future rockslides or falls in weak zones.
9.6.6.3 Approved Overbreak
Approved overbreak is such overbreak which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is the
unavoidable result of weak rock and is not due to excavation methods neither chosen by
the Contractor to facilitate progress nor caused by carelessness.
9.6.7 CLEANING AND SCALING
Scaling, involving the removal of loose rock from excavated walls and roofs, shall be
performed immediately after blasting and at intervals thereafter as necessary to prevent
accidents. A complete final scaling of excavation surfaces which have not been covered
with shotcrete or concrete shall be carried out prior to acceptance of the underground
works.
The final cleaning of the invert of all excavations shall be carried as carefully as possible
using mechanised equipment approved by the Engineer.
Cleaning and scaling will not qualify for payment.
9.6.8 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
Excavated material, which is not acceptable or cannot be accommodated for use in the
Works shall be disposed of in spoil dumps or elsewhere as approved by the Engineer.
Excavated material, which can be used at a later stage in the Works shall be temporarily
stockpiled. Excavated material which would be used as part of the Works is free of charge.
While building up a spoil dump, layers of 1 m thickness shall successively be graded to
reasonably even surfaces by a D8 Bulldozer, or similar, by pushing part of the material over
the edge of the spoil dump so that safe slopes, approved by the Engineer, are achieved.
When a spoil dump has been filled up to its final elevation, the top surface shall be graded
to a slight inclination in order to facilitate proper runoff of rainwater and the edge of the
slope shall be smoothly rounded off.
Transportation and stockpiling of excavated material, as described above, will not qualify
for separate payment.
9.6.9 BREAK-OUTS FROM SHAFTS AND TUNNELS

For the junctions of tunnels and shafts the Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer’s
approval, Temporary Works details and method statement describing the details of the
Works, with drawings and calculations. They shall take account of relevant information
provided by the Engineer and Designer.
Ground surrounding break-outs shall be secured with splies or pipe roofs to prevent
excessive overbreak during break-out.
Where necessary, strengthening of the shaft or tunnel lining shall be installed prior to
break-out.
Tunnel and shaft linings shall not be broken out until all necessary Temporary Works,
including ground treatment, where appropriate, have been completed to ensure the
structural and geotechnical stability of the Works.
The break-out shall be of sufficient dimensions to accommodate the permanent structure
to be built. Adequate working space shall be provided to enable the Works to be
undertaken safely.
9.6.10 EXCAVATION FOR CONTRACTOR’S CONVENIENCE
Excavations for the Contractor's own use and convenience shall conform in every aspect
with this Specification. For this purpose, the Contractor shall submit detailed proposals to
the Engineer for his approval. The proposals shall, if necessary, include the Contractor's
method of backfilling and reinstatement.
Excavation for the Contractor's convenience, as described above, will not qualify for
payment.
9.6.11 FIELD CONTROL MEASUREMENT
Field control measurement required for this works includes as follows:
(i) Structure soundness - from construction vibration
(ii) Visual inspection required before any train passing through tunnel
- Existing tunnel lining joint and cracks monitor
- Water leakage - flow rate and quality of water
- Monitoring of volume and quality of water pumped out during tunnel
excavation
- Movement of rail track - vertical and horizontal
- Monitoring of track movement within SRT regulation, Contractor shall be

set up emergency action plan for safety operation, stand-by equipment,
and stand-by materials.
(iii) Monitoring of excavated tunnel profile
The Contractor shall survey, monitor and record tunnel and shaft construction
as it proceeds, to form a record of the work. Monitoring shall generally be per
unit of advance and include line, level, cross-sectional accuracy, shift advance,
total advance.
All information recorded by the Contractor shall be provided to the Engineer
on a daily basis unless another interval has been agreed.
Where the Contractor considers that any corrective action, he may take will
exceed the tolerances in the Contract, he shall so inform the Engineer and
obtain his agreement.
The strata exposed in the tunnel face shall be mapped and recorded where
possible, and the nature of the excavated material shall be noted in all cases.
(iv) Setting out of line, level and profile
Prior to starting underground work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
for his approval proposals on the setting out the Works and for correcting any
deviations. The Contractor shall keep daily records showing the line, level and
profile of excavation works.
(v) Chainage Markers and Benchmarks.
Chainage markers shall be provided in tunnels at 10 m intervals. The markers
shall be painted in white durable paint. The Contractor shall provide the
Engineer the location and description of all survey stations, and all survey data.
9.6.12 GROUNDWATER
Unless specifically authorized or approved by the Engineer under the Contract, lowering
of the natural groundwater table shall not be permitted.
Any proposals for lowering groundwater table shall take account of the risks of induced
ground settlement. Removal of groundwater shall not cause damage to the Works nor to
third-party property and shall not cause nuisance by ground settlement.
Any impact on other groundwater dewatering shall be assessed, mitigated and monitored
in line with the agreement with the holder of the abstraction license and the Environment
Agency.
The Contractor’s working methods and systems shall be designed to control groundwater
to permit the construction of shafts, tunnels, breakouts and connections. Methods shall
be in accordance with best practice as outlined in CIRIA Report C515 Groundwater Control
– Design and Practice or any other relevant industry standards. The Contractor shall submit
proposals to the Engineer for controlling and monitoring any dewatering system, including
monitoring changes in groundwater level/pressures and ground surface settlement
monitoring, prior to commencing installation and running of any dewatering system. The
dewatering system shall include a system for identifying ingress of soil material during the
dewatering operation.
In planning temporary pumping systems, the Contractor shall take due consideration of
water quality, pressure, quantity and variations in water levels.
The Contractor may need to, if necessary, consents from the appropriate authorities to
abstract recharge and dispose of groundwater.
In areas of contaminated land, abandoned mine workings and other possible water-filled
voids, the Contractor shall take account of the potential hazards of inundation of the
Works.
9.7 GEOTECHNICAL MONITORING DURING TUNNELLING

9.7.1 GENERAL
The Contractor should submit to the Engineer for agreement a detailed method statement
for instrumentation and monitoring, including instrumentation layout, equipment, design
and trigger values and the procedures for evaluating the monitored data.
The method statement and design of all geotechnical monitoring works should be in
compliance with guidance of Geotechnical Monitoring in Conventional Tunnelling
proposed by Austrian Society for Geomechanics (OGG) in 2014.
The Contractor should hire within his site team an experienced monitoring Engineer who
shall lead the Contractor's monitoring team. The monitoring Engineer should present and
provide the results of the previous day's monitoring in the daily monitoring meeting with
the Engineer. Also, the Contractor should make all recorded results available to the
Engineer in accordance with an agreed program; however, movement greater than
predicted shall be reported to the Engineer immediately.
The frequency of such review meeting may be increased if requested by the Engineer.
The Contractor's Site Manager should attend monitoring review meetings if requested by
the Engineer.
Assessments should be carried out to establish the zone of influence due to tunnelling
works and to determine the likely damage that will occur to an existing hove-ground and
subsurface infrastructure.
Early pre-construction instrumentation requirements should be determined so that
baseline measurements can be taken for an appropriate period to establish the stability
of the monitoring system and any possible effects of any underlying environmental trends
that could be attributed to the Works.
9.7.2 TUNNEL CONVERGENCE MONITORING
Unless otherwise provided for in the contract, the Contractor should assess the system
behavior of the tunnel by means of tunnel displacement monitoring immediately after
tunnel excavation.
The Contractor should conduct the measurement of tunnel three-dimensional
displacement using an automatic total station (tachymeter) and targets which shall be
provided by the Contractor. Precise prism-targets as well as bireflex-targets (reflectors)
should be used. The targets should be removable so that they could be removed once
no measurement and installed again without deviation from their original position. The
accuracy of the measurement of tunnel displacement should be within 1 mm. As the
completed monitoring generally cannot be carried out from one station, interlinked
observation scheme is required, which could be established using identical reference
points.
To get meaningful results of tunnel displacement, the Contractor should install the targets
as soon as possible to the tunnel face and not beyond last round of excavation. The target
should be installed with a protection box and the zero reading shall be taken without
delay. Targets for another construction phase, i.e. benching and invert, shall be installed
at the same chainage as those of previous construction phase, i.e. top heading. The spacing
of each displacement monitoring section shall be dependent on the rock mass quality and
support class, normally every 25 m for poor-very poor rock masses and every 50 m for fair
to good rock masses.
The measurements should be taken by repeated measurements, generally on a daily basis
for the first week. After the first week, the measurement shall be taken in every two days.
Although, the radial displacement has already stopped, the Contractor shall take the
measurement on a monthly basis in particular monitoring sections every 250 meter or
shorter.
Tunnel displacement results should be evaluated in every sequence of tunnel excavation.
In other words, before commencing benching or invert excavation, the displacement
should be stable at a certain amount and not more than allowable values.
The Contractor should report the monitored data in the form of plots. The trend of tunnel
convergence, tunnel displacement both horizontal and vertical direction with time and
displacement vector plot should be the minimum required graphs used for evaluation and
interpretation of the system behavior.
9.7.3 GROUND MOVEMENT MONITORING
Unless otherwise provided for in the contract, the Contractor shall monitor the effects of
tunnel construction at the surface, including all ground movements and the effects on all
structures, including the Works. Where specifically requested, the subsurface effects,
including movements of the water table, shall also be monitored.
Unless otherwise provided for in the contract, monitoring equipment and instruments shall
be provided by the Contractor to enable the response of structures to be determined.
Equipment and instruments shall be installed following the manufacturer’s instructions
and shall be calibrated and tested as appropriate. Monitoring pins and devices shall be
securely fixed in position. Due regard shall be given to the construction of the structure to
be monitored and the layout of its primary support
Monitoring shall be referenced to stable survey stations located outside the zone of
influence of the Works and not subject to ground movement. Such benchmarks and
coordinated stations shall be established and agreed with the Engineer before any ground
is excavated and before any ground treatment or dewatering takes place. They shall be
checked at intervals during the duration of the Works.
The Contractor shall observe record and analyses the readings to establish trends in
movement and reconcile movements measured with those predicted.
Prior to construction commenced, a defect survey shall be carried out of all structures
within the zone of influence and a schedule of defects shall be prepared. This schedule
shall be agreed by the Contractor and the owner of the structure, or his representative,
prior to the start of construction. Existing pipelines, tunnels and services shall be regarded
as structures.
During the execution of the Works, defects which have been scheduled shall be inspected
and monitored as necessary. Defects which arise during the construction of the Works shall
be recorded. The Contractor shall keep records of such inspections and a copy shall be
available to the Engineer.
Monitoring of settlement, scheduled defects and defects arising during the construction of
the works shall continue at agreed intervals for a period of at least 6 months after
completion.
9.7.4 VIBRATION MONITORING
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 9.6.4.2 Blasting Vibration.
9.7.5 GROUNDWATER LEVEL MONITORING
Shall comply with the requirements of SUB-SECTION 9.6.12 GROUNDWATER.
9.7.6 OTHER TUNNEL INSTRUMENTATION
Due to uncertainties in the geological model and ground parameters used in the final design,
other tunnel instrumentation might be needed to observe the actual system behavior so that
design verification and interpretation of ground behavior and response could be conducted.
Multi-point borehole extensometers (MPBX), rock bolt load cells, vibrating wire strain
gauges, and pressure cells shall be required to install in particular sections representing
rock mass and ground behaviors of poorer conditions along the tunnel alignment for
purpose of support design verification. For MPBX, it shall be installed into rock mass with
loosening or squeezing behavior.
Specification of the instruments mentioned above, in terms of standard ranges of each
parameters and its accuracy shall be capable to measure the minimum and maximum
extent of each parameter which might include pressure, load and displacement. Design
and its arrangement and location, including quantity shall be submitted by the Contractor
and approved by the Engineer prior to installation.
9.7.7 MONITORING INSTRUMENTS
The Contractor shall provide instruments for measurement of ground movement, tunnel
displacement, stress, strain and groundwater pressure along excavation perimeters. The
instruments shall be installed where directed by the Engineer.
The provision and installation of the above described instruments will not quality for
separate payment but shall be included in the unit rate.
Measurements of all types of instruments shall be performed by the Contractor as directed
by the Engineer. Results from each measurement shall be submitted to the Engineer
expeditiously. The taking of measurements with all types of instruments, monitoring data
management software and reporting in approved forms will not qualify for separate
payment but shall be included in the unit rate.
9.7.8 MONITORING DATA MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The contractor shall employ a software for data management of all kind of monitoring
results. The software should directly receive the data from total stations and readout units.
The software should be able to:
(i) Determine coordination of instrument stand from that of target point and
standard deviation in three dimension;
(ii) Determine displacements in all three direction and convergence;
(iii) Adjustment of deviation due to working environment;
(iv) Transform coordination system already referenced to control point;
(v) Illustrate monitoring results in terms of graph and table.
The software should be capable to illustrate plots of:
(i) Displacement (including convergence, vertical displacement, horizontal
displacement of tunnel and shotcrete, ground movement and settlement) vs
Time, together with tunnel chainage of top heading and/or benching vs time;
(ii) Ground movement at different depths (obtained from MPBX) surrounding the
tunnel vs time;
(iii) Stress measured by pressure cells vs time, together tunnel chainage of top
heading and/or benching vs time;
(iv) Load measured by pressure cells vs time, together tunnel chainage of top
heading and/or benching vs time;
(v) Vectors of displacement in cross and longitudinal sections;
(vi) Comparison of calculated displacement and actual displacement;
(vii) Other plots requested by the engineer.
9.8 GROUND SUPPORTS

9.8.1 GROUND SUPPORT SYSTEM
9.8.1.1 Permanent Ground Support System
The permanent ground support system to be applied with respect to each of Rock Classes
will be determined by the Contractor and agreed upon by the Engineer based on
overburden depth, geological investigation information, analysis of ground behavior and
ground-support interaction, and past experience. In case agreement cannot be reached,
the Engineer's opinion shall prevail.
The preliminary design of the support class is shown on the Drawings. However, these
systems may be modified, with the consent with the Engineer, to suit actual ground
conditions and specific experience gained during the tunnelling works. In doing so,
systematic observation of tunnel stability shall be carried out in order to verify if the
selected support systems are adequate or need to be modified.
In addition to tunnel support consisting of shotcrete, rock bolts and steel arch (ribs and
lattice girders), tunnel pre-support may be required. All above stabilization measures are
further detailed in the following sections.
In order to facilitate satisfactory advance rates, the permanent support systems may be
carried out in two stages, namely as primary stabilisation and final stabilisation.
Primary stabilisation shall comprise such measures which, as a minimum, are required in
order to strengthen and support the rock perimeter sufficiently to allow the excavation to
proceed until such time as final stabilisation can take place. Primary stabilisation shall be
carried out as soon as possible after excavation and after mapping of the blasted area.
Final stabilisation shall comprise such measures which are required to safeguard the proper
function of the Works for intended purposes. Final stabilisation shall be carried out in
accordance with an approved program.
9.8.1.2 Non-permanent Support System
The Contractor may, as conditioned by his working method, carry out temporary
stabilization measures. However, the temporary stabilization as used cannot be accepted
as forming part of the primary or final stabilization measures.
Where approved by the Engineer, the Contractor may install supports for his own
convenience. Non-permanent support systems will not qualify for payment.
9.8.2 SHOTCRETE
9.8.2.1 General
The Engineer shall approve the materials, equipment, methods and procedures used by
the Contractor for installing shotcrete.
In general, the practices set out in ACI-506 and ACI-506.2 shall be followed. These practices
may be modified, as directed or approved by the Engineer, to suit actual conditions
The Contractor is free to use either dry mix or wet mix shotcrete
9.8.2.2 Materials
Cement shall be low alkali Portland cement meeting the requirement of ASTM C150, Type
1, Type 2, Type 3 or other standards approved by the Engineer.
For aggregates, relevant parts of the specification relating to concrete shall apply.
Aggregates for shotcrete shall have gradation within the range indicated in Table 9.8-1 for
the combined coarse and fine mixture.
The gradation and maximum size of aggregates may be varied, subject to the approval of
the Engineer, in sections of greater or lesser thickness than those normally occurring.
Table 9.8-1 Allowable percent passing of each aggregates size.
Sieve size Percent passing
US Sieve Standard (by weight)
3/4 inch 100
1/2 inch 70 to 100
3/8 inch 65 to 90
No. 4 50 to 70
No. 8 35 to 55
No. 16 20 to 40
No. 30 10 to 30
No. 50 5 to 18
No. 100 2 to 10
No. 200 1 to 6
When early setting is required, an accelerating admixture conforming to the requirements
set out in the specification relating to concrete shall be used to develop quick setting and
high early strength. The suitability and the required amounts of the admixture shall be
established in pre-construction tests. Admixtures shall not contain water-soluble chlorides
or substances corrosive to steel. Furthermore, admixtures shall not promote other
detrimental effects, such as cracking and spilling of applied shotcrete. The proportion of
admixture shall normally be restricted so that the strength requirements specified in

Clause 9.8.2.6 Control of Applied Shotcrete are satisfied. However, a higher proportion of
admixtures may be accepted where rapid treatment of weak rock is needed
Water shall conform to the requirements set out in the specification relating to concrete.
9.8.2.3 Reinforcement
1) Steel reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall be conformed to the SECTION 4.2 REINFORCEMENT
which is equally binding on all trades. This section of this specification shall be
read in conjunction with all other sections. Steel reinforcement shall consist of
hot rolled, deformed bars meeting the requirements of ASTM A615, Grade 40.
2) Welded wire fabric
Welded wire fabric shall comprise hard-drawn wire in accordance with AASHTO
Standards. It shall be firmly fixed in place using an agreed method. Overlap
between adjacent sheets of welded wire fabric shall be a minimum of 2 squares.
Welded steel wire fabric shall meet the requirements of ASTM-A 1064.
3) Fiber reinforcement
Fiber reinforcement shall be obtained from a supplier meeting the requirements
of BS EN, ISO 9001 or similar.
Steel fibers can be either deformed steel fiber in accordance with BS EN 14889-1
Fibers for Concrete – Part 1: Steel Fibers – Definitions, Specifications and
Conformity or mild steel or cold-drawn steel. Fibers in accordance with ASTM A820
may be used with the approval of the Engineer.
Structural, macro-synthetic fibers shall be in accordance with BS EN 14889-2 Fibres
for Concrete -Part 2: Polymer Fibres – Definition, Specifications and Conformity.
Only Class II fibers shall be used where fibers are incorporated for structural
purposes. Alternative fibers may be utilised following successful completion of
proving trials which meet the Designer's performance requirements.
Fibers shall be stored, handled and dosed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Generally this will require them to be stored in dry, sealed
containers until ready for use and shall be free from corrosion, oil, grease,
chlorides, and deleterious materials which may reduce the efficiency of mixing or
spraying processes, or which may reduce bond between the fibers and the sprayed
concrete.
Steel fibers to be used for reinforcement of shotcrete shall be in accordance with

ASTM-C1116 Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and ACI-544
Measurement of Properties of Fiber Reinforced Concrete and ASTM-C1550. Length-
thickness ratio for the fibers of 65±1 is preferable, but fibers with other ratios may
be used if approved by the Engineer.
The steel fiber content in the shotcrete shall normally be 30 kg/m3. The fibers
shall be added to the mix at the concrete station and be well mixed into the
shotcrete.
Before applying steel fiber as reinforcement of shotcrete, testing on shotcrete
mixed with steel fiber in appropriate contents shall be conducted by certified
laboratory. Test method shall conform to ASTM 820 or ASTM 1116 or equivalent
standard by engineer approval. Flexural toughness test according to ASTM C1550
shall exceed 320J after 7 days and 400J after 28 days.
9.8.2.4 Batching and Mixing
1) Dry mix
The quantities of cement and aggregates shall be gauged by weight and be mixed
dry in a mixing drum for at least 2 minutes or by continuous mixing methods
Proportioning by volume may be allowed in the case of mobile mixers, provided
that regular checking of mix proportions is carried out and have been approved
by the Engineer.
The dry mix shall be batched in special batching plants or mobile mixers, solely
used for this purpose, and placed within an appropriate distance from the various
places where shotcrete shall be applied. The aggregate and the cement shall be
well protected against water and sunshine. The transport of the dry mix from the
respective batching plant to the place of application shall be carried out with
specially equipped vehicles and the dry mix shall be protected against water and
sunshine throughout its transport.
2) Wet mix
Wet mixed shotcrete shall be transported from the concrete plant, ready to use,
to the place of work by trans mixers. The shotcrete shall be well protected against
water and sunshine before spraying.
Proportioning by volume may be allowed in the case of mobile mixers, provided

that regular checking of mix proportions is carried out and have been approved
by the Engineer.
The proportions of cement, aggregates and admixture shall be determined in pre-
construction tests. The proportions of cement to dry aggregates shall be between
1:3 and 1:5 by weight.
9.8.2.5 Equipment and Application
The Contractor shall provide an adequate number of mobile units with a remote-
controlled swivel nozzle mounted on an extendable boom of such length that the
operator can work under the shotcrete cover applied during the previous round. In addition
to the mobile units, the Contractor shall provide an adequate number of manually held
and operated nozzles.
The water shall be added in the nozzle when installing dry mix shotcrete and be supplied
through a regulating valve, easily and accurately controllable by the certified experienced
"nozzle man" .
Air shall be supplied at constant and sufficient pressure and volume. The air shall not be
contaminated by oil.
Before the commencement of spraying, loose rock fragments shall have been removed,
The rock surface or the surface of previously applied shotcrete shall be cleaned in order
to ensure proper bond. Cleaning with water/compressed air is required. Groundwater
percolating from the rock shall be drained by means of pipes, hoses or other appropriate
methods approved by the Engineer.
In case welded steel wire fabric is to be used, it shall be fixed with long steel nails, driven
into previously drilled holes provided with plastic plugs, or with appropriate method
Shotcreting shall only be carried out by experienced nozzleman. When required by the
Engineer, each crew shall demonstrate its proficiency by producing test panels before
beginning production work Spraying shall be carried out with the nozzle at right angles to
the rock surface and at a distance of about one meter.
Should the mix be too dry or too wet or of uneven quality, the spraying shall be stopped.
The shotcrete shall be applied in layers about 30 mm thick when dry mix shotcrete is
applied and about 50 mm thick when wet mix shotcrete is applied. Before the application
of the next layer, the shotcrete of the previous layer shall have attained initial set.
Rebound materials shall be removed and dumped.
The Contractor shall, when so directed by the Engineer, execute a systematic drilling of
drainage holes after Concreting.
9.8.2.6 Control of Applied Shotcrete
The control of the applied shotcrete shall include:
1) Compressive strength and density tests of drilled core
(i) The tests shall each be made on three specimens drilled within max. 0.5 m
of each other. Core diameter shall be at least 60 mm. The specimens shall
after trimming have an H/D ratio not less than 1.0, and preferably in the range
of 1.5-1.7. The specimens shall be drilled when the concrete is of sufficient
strength and not earlier than 3 days after shotcreting. The specimens shall
be stored in water until testing after 28 days.
(ii) Frequency: One test for each 250 m3 of shotcrete or 20 m/interval.
2) Bond
(i) The bond shall be checked by random knocking (e.g. with a crowbar).
Minimum one knock per 5 m2 and the results shall be included in a written
report. Areas with no bond shall be marked off as the checking progresses.
The concrete shall be 7-28 days old when the bond is checked, If there are
areas with no bond, the reasons for this shall be investigated, and the need
for additional stabilization shall be evaluated.
(ii) Frequency: To be performed on all shotcreted areas.
3) Thickness
(i) The average applied thickness shall be at least the specified thickness. The
thickness shall be measured by drilling through the hardened shotcrete.
(ii) Frequency: 20 drillings for each 100 m of shotcrete.
4) Smoothness of shotcrete surface
(i) The smoothness of surface finish of sprayed concrete layer for effective
installation of sheet waterproofing membrane shall be not less than
minimum unevenness ratio of 5:1 (length/depth). For example, the radius of
curvature or the depth of the shotcrete surface for the tunnels shall not less
than 200 mm for the length of 1000 mm. Moreover, the angle of the curve-
shaped shotcrete surface from the normal surface should be not higher than
45 degree as shown in Figure 9.8-1.
Figure 9.8-1 The typical smoothness of shotcrete surface prior to installation of sheet
waterproofing membrane.
5) Fiber contents
(i) The fiber contents shall be established by crushing drilled cores or flushing
fresh shotcrete.
9.8.2.7 Testing of Shotcrete
In advance of placing any shotcrete, the Contractor shall prepare and test not less than
three test panels for each mix design and all the nozzleman. Sets of test panels shall
comprise one shot downwards onto a horizontal surface, one shot onto a vertical surface
and one shot upwards onto a horizontal surface. The panels shall be obtained by attaching
500 x 500 x 100 mm deep timber boxes securely to appropriately aligned surfaces and
applying shotcrete to the areas contained in the boxes using the same mixing, placing
equipment, and same nozzleman as for the production work
When the final set has taken place, the test panels shall be transported to the laboratory
where the Contractor shall determine the crushing strength by testing cores cut from the
panels. The following minimum compressive strength requirements shall normally be met:
(i) 12 MPa (120 kg/cm2) at 3 days; and
(ii) 30 MPa (300 kg/cm2) at 28 days.
Strengths shall be determined from test cylinders with length and diameter both of 100
mm.
In order to facilitate a decision regarding the use of accelerators, the Contractor shall
perform tests using at least two different percentages of each type of acceleration
admixtures he proposes to use; the percentages being determined with due consideration
of the recommendations given by the manufacturer. The compressive strength of three
specimens shall each be determined after 3 hours, 8 hours, 24 hours, 3 days and 28 days.
As a control measure, an equal number of samples without admixture shall be tested at
indicated time intervals.
During the placing of shotcrete, routine test panels shall be prepared beside the
application zones for the purpose of quality control in accordance with ASTM C1140
Standard Practice for Preparing and Testing Specimens from Shotcrete Test Panels. From
each test panel, 9 cores shall be drilled. Three cores shall be tested after 3 days, three
cores after 28 days and three cores shall be kept as spare. One panel shall be prepared
from each 50 m3 of the first applied 500 m3 of shotcrete. The Engineer may decrease the
frequency of testing if satisfactory results are obtained consistently.
The quality of shotcrete will be considered satisfactory if at least 90% of the tested cores
meet the specified strength. No single core shall have a strength less than 80% of the
specified strength.
9.8.3 STEEL SUPPORT
9.8.3.1 General
Where used, steel arches shall be installed to maintain the designed shape of the opening
and, if necessary, provide an immediate support at the working face over the length of the
last excavation completed. If necessary, the installation of steel arches or lattice girders
shall also prevent ground loss and shall improve load distribution.
Lattice girders and steel arches shall be fully encapsulated in shotcrete.as shown.
The design of the steel sets and the method for their Installation shall be proposed by the
For the design of support arches and lattice girders the following shall be taken into
account:
(i) axial stress and bending moment in the steel support induced by the ground
loads and self-weight;
(ii) dead-weight of any reinforcement to be supported;
(iii) lateral stability and bracing of steel arches or lattice girders;
(iv) method of installing the steel arches or lattice girders;
(v) method of blocking and spacing of blocking points;
(vi) bearing capacity of the ground at the toe of the arch ribs;
(vii) the stand-up time of the unsupported part of the excavation; and
(viii) the ground water regime and permeability of the ground.
9.8.3.2 Steel Arches
Arches, base plates, ties and connections shall be formed from steel conforming to BS
7668 Weldable structural steels. Arches shall be rolled to suit the dimensional
requirements of the Contract. Welding shall conform to BS EN 1011-1 Welding -
Recommendations for Welding of Metallic Materials Part 1: General Guidance for Arc
Welding. Holes for ties, struts and any bolted connections shall be drilled. No burning will
be allowed whether for temporary Works items or permanent elements.
Threaded tie rods and struts shall be of adequate length to suit arch center and allow 25
mm projection each end beyond the nut.
Bolts for bolted connections shall be black bolts to BS 4190 ISO metric black hexagon
bolts, screws and nuts - Specification.
Where arches are to be provided as part of the Contractor’s obligation for support the
Contractor shall provide dimensional details of the arches, calculations regarding imposed
loads and design and such other information that the Engineer may reasonably request.
9.8.3.3 Lattice Girders
Lattice girders shall consist of three or four primary bars, connected by stiffening elements
to the manufacturer’s design. They shall be designed so as to:
(i) facilitate shotcrete penetration into and behind the girder, thereby minimising
the creation of projection shadows and/or voids;
(ii) provide good-quality bonding between the steel and shotcrete, to form a
composite structure acting as a continuous reinforced concrete lining; and
(iii) make allowance for the specified tolerances including convergence.
1) Stiffening elements
A minimum 5% of the total moment of inertia shall be provided by the stiffening
elements. This percentage is calculated as an average along the repeatable
lengths of the lattice girder. To ensure stability against buckling, the maximum
spacing between the stiffening elements shall be less than three times the cross-
sectional height of the girder. Loading and bending test shall be conducted on the
girder to analyse its mechanical behaviour. Lattice girder to be used as steel
support shall have equivalent capacity as traditional steel support, steel arches.
2) Dimensions and tolerances
The lattice girders shall be fabricated to meet minimum clearances and tolerances
shown under consideration of accuracy of placement during construction,
manufacturing tolerances, and of lining deflection following installation. Prior to
installation, each girder shall be inspected as specified below and all
measurements taken shall be recorded along with any comments. Any changes in
the inspection frequency must be authorised by the designer following a review
of previous inspection results.
Each girder inspection shall check the following criteria:

(i) the girder is fully identified with the girder type and the unique traceability
reference.
(ii) the girder chord length (±25 mm) and height (±15 mm) is in accordance
with the appropriate drawing detail subject to the specified tolerances.
(iii) the girder links and sinusoidal are in the correct positions and are
adequately welded.
(iv) the reinforcement and plate types and sizes areas specified on the
Drawings.
When inspecting weld quality, the following criteria shall be used:
(i) the reinforcement shall be free from undercut in excess of 1 mm.
(ii) the weld metal deposition shall be even and blend smoothly with the
bars.
(iii) the weld metal shall be free from cracks and porosity.
The chord length shall be checked by measuring the distance from the outer edge
of the connection plate to the corresponding point on the connection plate at
the other end of the girder. The measurement shall be taken to the nearest
millimetre.
The chord height shall be checked by placing a tight cord across the centerline of
the girder between the outer edges of the end plates then measuring the height
from the chord to the inside edge of the lower main bar. The measurement shall
be taken to the nearest millimetre. Where the girder consists of a double radius
the chord lines, the measurement shall be taken along the outer edge of the
connection plates to the point at which the radius changes.
3) Fabrication
Each of the primary bars of the lattice girder segment shall be composed of only
one piece of high-yield steel to BS 4449 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete –
Weldable reinforcing steel, bar, coil and decoiled product (minimum grade 500) or
equivalent. Secondary bars are either plain round profile or deformed of high yield
to BS 4449 (minimum grade 500) or equivalent. Stiffening bars shall conform to BS
4449 (minimum grade 500) or equivalent.
The connection elements at the end of the girder segments shall be constructed
of flat or angle steel to BS EN 10025 Hot rolled products of structural steel –
Technical delivery conditions (grade S275JR) or equivalent. Connections between

lattice girder segments shall be bolted; welded connections between segments
shall not be permitted. Nuts and bolts supplied are to be grade 8.8 or higher.
All welding shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 1011-1:2009, with
welding personnel and fabrication facility approved.
9.8.3.4 Procedures
The Contractor shall provide method statements for the erection of arches to the Engineer
for agreement. Arch materials shall be as specified herein.
Steel arch ribs and full circle lattice girders shall be firmly fixed in their final positions
against the excavation as shown. Arch bases shall be provided with integral base plates of
size to suit the bearing capacity of the ground and shall bear on rock or concrete of
adequate strength. Arches and ribs shall be sufficiently clear of the excavation and the
final internal profile of the structure to accommodate any required concrete cover.
The number of joints in the arch shall be varied to suit the Contractor’s method of working
subject to the Engineer’s agreement. Steel tie bars and struts between arches shall be
installed where shown on the Drawings.
A minimum 50 mm thick shotcrete layer must be in place before the installation of the
lattice girders. Under no circumstance shall lattice girders be installed under unsupported
ground.
Lattice girder segments shall be secured by use of temporary wood blocking, steel wedges,
concrete spacers, mortar sacks and/or other appropriate means to maintain position during
application of shotcrete. The means of support shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. All wood blocking shall be removed during the next phase of excavation and any
void in filled with shotcrete to ensure continuity of the primary lining.
Lattice girder segments shall have butt plates or lap joints and the method of installation
shall ensure tight connection of all elements.
Immediately prior to concreting, casting or spraying, the arches, ties and struts shall be
rendered clean and free from deleterious matter.
Lattice girders shall be firmly fixed in their final position against the excavation prior to
application of shotcrete. Lattice girders shall be sufficiently clear of the excavation and
final internal profile of the structure to accommodate the required shotcrete cover.
9.8.4 ROCK BOLTS

9.8.4.1 General
The Engineer shall approve the materials, equipment, methods and procedures to be used
by the Contractor prior to the installation of rock bolts.
9.8.4.2 Requirements
Holes shall be carried out by means of percussion drilling.
Drill holes shall have diameters recommended by the supplier or as proposed by the
Rock bolts shall be thoroughly cleaned and be free from loose rust, scale, dirt, grease or
any other coating before they are inserted into the drill holes. Where required, bolts shall
have corrosion protection to extent its life spans.
The protruding end of the bolts shall be provided with rolled or cut threads for fixing of
anchor plates by nut and washer, but it shall not slip off before rebar damage during
assembly test of rock bolt design tensile loading. It shall be covered with shotcrete after
installation.
Bolts shall normally be grouted in over the entire hole lengths with a grout consisting of
cement and water with, if necessary, the addition of sand. The grouting shall be carried
out in a manner preventing formations of voids or air pockets.
9.8.4.3 Types of Rock Bolts
1) Pre-tensioned rock bolts
Tensioned rock bolts shall be applied in which rock mass quality is either very
good, good or fair in order to provide immediate support and prevent block fall.
Classification of rock bolts for each type of rock mass is given in Table 9.8-2.
The bolt can be in the form of anchor rod or anchor threaded bar with expansion
shell at the tip (section 9.8.4.2). Anchor rod should be cold rolled to form rope
thread profile in compliance with ISO 10208 (yielding load ≥ 200 kN). Anchor
threaded bar should at least comply with steel grade of Gr40 according to ASTM
A615. The shell shall be approved by the Engineer prior to installation and shall,
as a minimum, meet the requirements of ASTM A29 Grade 1045. The pre-stressing
force shall be achieved immediately after installation. The bolts shall be installed
in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Table 9.8-2 Classification of various types of rock bolt for each rock class
Rock classes Types of rock bolts
Pre-tension rock Non-tensioned Non-tensioned rock
bolts rock bolts: bolts: self-drilling
deformed bar anchor rod
I Very good quality ü - -
II Good quality ü - -
III Fair quality - ü -
IV Poor quality - - ü
Va Very poor quality - - ü
Vb Very poor quality with - - ü

high overburden
S Completely weathered - - -
and soil-like rock and soil
Portal Portal location - - ü
(where it is rock)
2) Non-tensioned rock bolts
Non-tensioned rock bolts should be either deformed bar or anchor rod with
sacrificial drill bit. Classification of rock bolts for each type of rock mass is given in
Table 9.8-2.
Deformed bar shall be at least 25-mm-diameter of types approved by the Engineer
and shall as a minimum meet the requirements of ASTM A615, Grade 40.
Anchor rod should meet the requirements as one used for pre-tensioned rock
bolts. Sacrificial drill bits should be chosen to suit with rock mass condition and
well contacted with the rods. All rods shall be chamfered with precised coupling
to enable the rod ends to have the correct seating of each bar within the coupler.
9.8.4.4 Finishing Materials
Each bolts shall be furnished with bearing plate, washer and nut. Nuts shall have hexagonal
heads of the heavy-duty type, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A325.
Bearing plates shall conform to ASTM A36 and shall be of 9-mm flat steel or equal,
providing not less than 22,500-mm2 contact area for each bolt.
Washers shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A325 and shall be quenched and
tempered to a Rockwell hardness of C38 to C45. The round center hole shall be 4 mm
larger in diameter than the rock bolt to be used. Washers shall be beveled to the required
angle and shall be placed between the plate and the nut.
Alternatively, the bearing plate shall be under packed with mortar so that it becomes
normal to the bolt.
9.8.4.5 Grouting of Rock Bolts
Cement grout for rock bolts shall be required for every kind of rock bolts. Requirements
of cement grouting is listed in Table 9.8-3. Suitable accelerators, for generating immediate
loading capacity, and other types of additives may be used following the Engineer's
approval after site trials conducted by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer. The
composition of the grout and the grouting procedures shall be subjected to the approval
of the Engineer. Any material used to fill instead of cement grout shall be approved by
the Engineer. Test of cement grout shall be determined in tests at frequencies directed by
the Engineer.
Table 9.8-3 Requirement for cement grouting of rock bolts
a. W/C = 0.35-0.45
b. Compressive strength for 3 days shall exceed 35
Cement grouting MPa, for 10 hours shall exceed 10 MPa.
c. Sagging is unallow.
d. Strip packing is available.
9.8.4.6 Furnishing of Rock Bolts
Where so directed by the Engineer, rock bolts shall protrude a sufficient length outside the
rock surface to allow load testing according to the next section. For such purpose, the
protruding ends of rock bolts shall be threaded and provided with anchor plates. Where
the rock surface will be covered with reinforced shotcrete, the anchor plates shall be
located outside the reinforcement. After testing, protruding ends shall be bent back and
covered with shotcrete.
Where rock bolts are installed at an angle to the surface, the plates may be aligned normal
to the bolt by setting on a pad of mortar. This pad must extend under the whole area of
the plate, to avoid subsequent voids or inclusions of shotcrete rebound. When plates are
set, beveled washers may be omitted.
The protruding ends of anchors shall have been bent at right angles and as a minimum
extend one anchorage length from the rock surface.
9.8.4.7 Testing of Rock Bolts
The reliability and performance of the procedures for grouting and fixing rock bolts shall
be ascertained in pre-construction tests carried out by the Contractor as directed by the
Engineer. For this purpose, the Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment.
Pull equipment shall consist of a suitable size hollow ram jack, an adjustable bearing truss
or bridging device for the alignment of the direction of pull with the centerline of the bolt,
extension bar for attaching the jack to the bolt, a hydraulic pump with a gauge with 50 kPa
interval marks calibrated to read directly in kilograms (or pounds) for the ram being used,
a dial gauge which reads in increments of 0.05 mm over a range of 50 mm, a magnetic or
independent dial gauge mounting and all other necessary accessories.
The hydraulic pump gauge shall be calibrated while connected to the jack by a uniaxial
testing machine prior to field use. The hydraulic pump gauge shall be recalibrated at times
directed by the Engineer during the period of construction.
The Contractor shall use equipment certified by an independent laboratory and shall
furnish the Engineer with the respective certificates and calibration charts to convert the
hydraulic pressure of the pump into tensile load applied by the ram.
Running tests shall be performed routinely on 5% of all rock bolts. Such bolts shall be tested
to 1.5*working load or at least 15 tons for both pre-tensioned and non-tensioned rock bolts. If
pre-tension of rock bolt is necessary, expansion shell for reaching pull out load (minimum 100
kN) shall be used. Strength requirement can be adjusted to suit with site condition upon the
Engineer’s approval. In case bolts fail before this load is achieved the Contractor shall test
additional bolts as directed by the Engineer. If the failure depends on poor materials and/or
workmanship, the Contractor at his own expense shall replace the bolt. If satisfactory results
are consistently obtained, the number of tests may be decreased.
All tensioned rock bolts shall be tested between 7 and 10 days after installation. If tension
has not been maintained, such bolts shall be re-tensioned to the working load. Bolts,
which have lost more than 30% of their load, shall be considered defective and shall be
replaced at the Contractor’s expense. The Engineer for all or any bolts may direct further
testing and re-tensioning.
9.8.4.8 Records
The reliability and performance of the procedures for grouting and fixing rock bolts shall
be ascertained in pre-construction tests carried out by the Contractor as directed by the
Engineer. For this purpose, the Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment.
For each installed, the following information shall be recorded:

(i) reference number;
(ii) type of installation;
(iii) name of person taking record;
(iv) date of drilling;
(v) length and orientation of drill hole;
(vi) consistency, colour, structure and type of rock or material;
(vii) rates of penetration and water flow (if any);
(viii) date of dowel installation;
(ix) length of installation; and
(x) grout take quantities (if more grout is injected than the theoretical quantities
required to fill the drill hole).
9.8.5 PRE-SUPPORT
9.8.5.1 Spiles
1) General
Spilling is defined as non-tensioned rock bolts, installed to stabilise fractured rock
mass at the tunnel face. Classification of pre-support for each type of rock class is
given in Table 9.8-4. Spilling is placed at about 0.3 m intervals along the roof and
wall perimeter and deviate outwards at an angle of about 15°.
Deformed bar as spiling shall be at least 32-mm-diameter of types approved by the
Engineer and shall as a minimum meet the requirements of ASTM-A615, Grade 40.
Anchor rod to be used for spiling should meet the requirements as one used for non-
tensioned rock bolts. Sacrificial drill bits should be chosen to suit with rock mass
condition and well contacted with the rods. All rods shall be chamfered with precised
coupling to enable the rod ends to have the correct seating of each bar within the
coupler.
The number, location, overlap and angle of spiles shall be commensurate with the
ground conditions and methodology as shown or instructed by the Engineer. Details
of spiling shall be approved by the Engineer in accordance with the relevant clauses
herein.
Spiles shall be installed such that a tensile bond is formed between the spile, the
ground ahead of the proposed excavation, and the shotcrete lining. This requires
grouting of the spile into the hole.
Care shall be taken during installation of spiles to ensure minimum disturbance of
the ground due to the installation process.
2) Grouting of Spiles
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 9.8.4.5 Grouting of Rock Bolts.
3) Record
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 9.8.4.8 Records.
Table 9.8-4 Classification of various types of pre-support for each rock class
Rock classes Types of pre-support
Spiles Pipe forepoling Pipe roof
I Very good quality - - -
II Good quality ü - -
(where required)
III Fair quality ü - -
(where required)
IV Poor quality ü ü -
(where required) (where required)
Va Very poor quality - ü ü
(where required)
Vb Very poor quality with high - ü ü
overburden (where required)
S Completely weathered - - ü
and soil-like rock and soil
Portal Portal location ü ü ü
(where it is soil)
9.8.5.2 Pipe Forepoling and Pipe Roof
1) General
Pipe forepoling and pipe roof should be used for pre-support measures following the
classification of pre-support for each type of rock class given in Table 9.8-4.
The Contractor shall submit with his submittals all details on equipment, sequence,
grouting procedure and grouting pressure control for the Engineer’s approval.
Installation of the steel pipes will be as horizontal as possible in portal locations,

where only one arch will be required. If repetitive pipes arch installation within the
tunnel is required, the pipe shall be installed at a sufficient angle to provide sufficient
headroom for further subsequent pipe arches.
For pipe forepoling should be drilled through steel arch profile such as lattice girders
or pre-fabricated holes along the H profile to minimize the gap with shotcrete surface.
For umbrella pipe roof, the end pipe shall use the removable type for non-over
excavation to keep the same profile preventing the disturbance of the surrounding
geology and different scales of steel arch profiles and extra consumption of concrete,
shotcrete and rebars. The maximum deviation of any steel pipe in any direction shall
not exceed 1/100 measured against the installed pipe length. Rotary percussion
methods shall be permitted for pipe installation only.
The installation of forepoling shall be one piece without connection. For preventing
disturbance of the tuunel crown during the installation, using self-drilling tools with
lost bit is required. And the pipe is 54mm diameter with at least 3.0mm thickness and
10mm grouting holes along the pipe at every 500mm pitch, steel grade S355.
The umbrella pipe roof is 114.3mm diameter with 6.0mm thickness and 10mm
grouting holes along the pipe at every 500mm pitch, steel grade S355. The connection
of steel pipes shall be proposed by the Contractor. However, the connection strength
of steel pipes shall be higher than pipe’s tensile strength itself and also cannot be
damaged through the bending test of steel pipes assembly. The steel pipes arch shall
be installed that they will not protrude into the excavation area.
2) Grouting of Pipe Forepoling and Pipe Roof
Grouting of the steel pipes shall be carried out in such a manner that the pipes are
fully encased along their entire length. If voids exist in vicinity or around the pipes,
those shall be grouted. Types of grouting should conform to clause 9.8.6.2. Grouting
work of pipe roof shall use special injection set as specified in Table 9.8-5.
Table 9.8-5 Requirement for grouting of pipe forepoling and pipe roof.
Cement Grouting a. Special insert toolset with 12 m ventilation tube.
b. Non-return valve shall be installed on the perforation
hole of steel pipe for avoiding paste lost.
Chemical Grouting a. At least 3 stages injection method is necessary.
Site trials under the inspection by the Engineer shall be carried out to assess the ideal
water-cement ratio for most efficient grouting. The maximum grouting pressure
measured at the connection between grouting hose and steel pipe shall not exceed
50% of the equivalent overburden pressure at installation location. The steel pipes
shall be completely filled with grout upon completion of installation. Recording of
grouting pressure, grout volumes and shut-off pressure level for each grouting
location. The overlap length between the grouted pipe arches shall be minimum 2.0
m for pipe forepoling and 3.0 m for pipe roof.
3) Record
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 9.8.4.8 Records.
9.8.6 GROUTING
9.8.6.1 General
The Engineer shall approve the materials, equipment, methods and procedures to be used
by the Contractor for grouting operations.
The Engineer shall approve the pressure and the mixture for grouting and the depths at
which the grout shall be injected.
The Contractor shall provide for the adequate disposal of all wash water and waste grout
resulting from grouting operations. He shall not allow such water and grout to contaminate
any part of the Works or flow into any water course, until it has passed through settling
ponds or tanks approved by the Engineer and also government authorities.
9.8.6.2 Types of Grouting
There are three types of grouting of rock in tunnel excavation:
1) Pre-excavation grouting
a) Consolidation grouting
Consolidation grouting by means of cement grouting may be required in order
to stabilize zones of excessively weak and highly fractured rock before
excavation which cannot be adequately secured by only means of pre-
support measures.
b) Sealing grouting
Sealing grouting may be carried out control the inflow of water at the tunnel
face and crown. Measured inflow of water will indicate the necessity of such
type of grouting. The drilling of grout holes shall cover as many blasting
rounds as practicable. Cement grouting or chemical grouting as sodium silicate
may be applied.
c) Foam grouting
Foam grouting shall be conducted in section where highly water inflow at the
tunnel face, especially the crown to seal water conductive fractures before
excavation and unpredictable collapse in very poor geological condition,
when immediate support is required.
2) Post-excavation grouting
Post-excavation grouting shall be performed by means of cement grouting or
chemical grouting as sodium silicate to reduce rate of water inflow to not higher
than 20 liter/minute per 100 meter of tunnel length before installation sheet
waterproofing membrane system and concrete lining.
3) Cavity Filling
Cavity grouting will be used to fill any large voids in rock, particularly in the zone
above tunnel roof surrounding by unstable rock.
9.8.6.3 Contractor's Proposals
Grouting may be required, either of complete drill holes in one operation, or of stages of
drill holes down to two metres in length. When grouting of a hole is completed, the packer
shall remain in place a period of time directed by the Engineer.
The suitable time for drilling of a new round after grouting will be determined by the
Engineer on the basis of experience gained on the setting time of the grout mix used.
Grouting will be carried but in one hole at time or as multi-hole grouting i.e. several holes
grouted from one pump unit.
A cement-based grout mix shall normally be used with suitable additions of sand,
bentonite, and/or additive. At high inflows of water a chemical grout (sodium silicate or
polyurethane or similar) shall be used as directed by the Engineer.
9.8.6.4 Contractor's Proposals
The Contractor shall agree with the Engineer details of the proposed grouting scheme
including:
(i) information and case studies to support the grouting proposed in respect of its
ability to penetrate the strata and its ground enhancement effect;
(ii) specific criteria to measure the adequacy, sufficiency or completeness of the
ground treatment;
(iii) details of the treatment zone and grout injection patterns with respect to the
Works and adjacent structures;
(iv) details of plant proposed;
(v) method statement and program including arrangements for storage of

materials, mixing grout, quality control of grout, recording grouting pressures
and grout take and tests to prove the efficiency of the grout in the ground,
health aspects associated with the materials and grout proposed at all stages
of the process and during excavation of treated ground and means of
protecting persons from any adverse defects;
(vi) an assessment of the environmental impact of the materials and methods
proposed; and
(vii) an occupational health risk assessment, including methods of risk reduction on
all aspects of the grouting operation.
Where grouting, Contractor is responsible for the design of the grouting, he shall
automatically record grouting pressures and flows and produce ongoing assessments of
the grout performance in relation to the objectives of the design.
9.8.6.5 Grouting Equipment
Grouting and injection equipment shall meet the requirements of BS EN 16228-6 Drilling
and Foundation Equipment – Safety: Jetting, Grouting and Injection Equipment.
Grouting equipment shall be capable of effectively batching, mixing and maintaining grout
mixtures in suspension and of delivering and pumping grout into the grout holes and joints
in a continuous uninterrupted flow at any constant pressure up to the limiting pressure
specified.
Pressure gauges and valves shall be provided at the pump, at each hole being grouted,
and elsewhere as required, to ensure the necessary control of grouting operations.
Grouting equipment shall be to the following minimum requirements and shall include all
valves, pressure gauges, water flow meters, pressure hoses, steel pipes, sleeves, packers,
fittings, spares and small tools necessary to complete the grouting:
(i) double acting flush pumps capable of operating at a discharge pressure of at
least 2.5 MPa (25 kg/cm2);
(ii) high speed mixers, capable of preparing a colloidal-formed grout;
(iii) mechanically agitated tanks with arrangements for screening and removing
particles not passing a 1.2 mm U.S. Standard Sieve, and with a capacity
corresponding to not less than three batches of grout, each of minimum 50
liter.
(iv) adequate supply of air and water at a pressure of 0.6 MPa (6 kg/cm2) for
washing of holes and crevices, pressure testing and grouting.
Grouting equipment shall be brought to site and maintained in good Working order.
Hatching and mixing plant shall be provided with gauges and equipment which will control
accurately the proportions of materials within the required limits and ensure proper mixing
and injection of the grout. Gauges shall be checked at the start of each shift. Spares for
plant and spare gauges shall be held at site. Current calibration certificates shall be
available on site for all electronic measurement equipment.
9.8.6.6 Materials
Cement grout shall be composed of the following ingredients which may be used in varying
combinations as directed by the Engineer:
(i) Portland cement, Type l, meeting the requirements of ASTM C - 150 or other
standard approved by the Engineer. Or, if required, microfine cement with
specific area of more than 6250 cm2/g and the minimum requirement of grain
size (d50) under 10 µm and grain size (d95) under 25µm;
(ii) clean water;
(iii) silica slurry or bentinite as stabilizing compound;
(iv) Superplasticisers and/or accelerator in accordance with the manufacturers'
recommendations;
Materials of sodium silicate and polyurethane as main components for chemical grouting
shall be proposed to the Engineer for approval prior to grouting operation started.
Tests to establish the composition of the grout shall be carried out by the Contractor and
shall be approved by the Engineer before the grouting operations start. Different grout
mixes shall be prepared in full scale using the actual grout mixer. Samples shall be taken
for checking of segregation, bleeding, hardening, etc. Similarly, samples shall also be taken
from time to time during grouting operations, as directed by the Engineer.
9.8.6.7 Procedure
Any drilling to be undertaken for the grouting works shall be carried out in such manner
as to minimise ground disturbance and soil loss. Where drilling or treatment techniques
employing air or foam/air are proposed, the issues of escape of air into the ground and
disturbance of previously grouted ground shall be agreed with the Engineer.
Grouting shall normally be preceded by a few minutes of pumping water into the holes.
Where pressure tests give small water losses, grouting shall commence with a method
For consolidation and sealing grouting, water-cement (w/c) ratio of the grout shall be not
higher than 0.7. In holes with large water losses, a thicker mix (lower w/c ratio) shall be
used. The water content of the mix shall be adjusted so that the grouting pump is operating
at normal and practically constant speed, irrespective of the permeability of the grouted
rock. The w/c ratio shall be decreased, if necessary, to reach the required pressure. If,
however, the pressure tends to rise excessively, the w/c ratio shall be increased and
periodic injection of water under pressure shall be carried out to counteract premature
stoppage. Under no conditions shall the grouting pressure or the rate of pumping be
allowed to increase suddenly.
The Contractor shall take precautions to minimise hydrofracture stress levels within the
ground imposed by grouting which might cause damage to structures and/or heave, where
significant stress changes are likely to the imposed, the Contractor shall employ systems
to monitor and protect sensitive structures.
Grouting in a given hole shall normally continue until either no grout is taken at 75% of
the maximum pressure permitted by the Engineer or less than 20 litres of grout is taken
per 10-minute period at the maximum pressure. The w/c ratio by weight shall normally
not exceed 5. Holes which do not take grout shall be filled with mortar.
The Contractor shall dispose of leakage and wash-out water from injection points and risers
in a sale way and shall not allow them to contaminate the site or watercourses or property
elsewhere. The Contractor shall take preventative measures to avoid leakage and shall
take measures to stop up leakages should they occur. The Contractor shall submit
proposals to the Engineer for approval.
The Contractor shall adopt proper safety precautions to avoid health hazards to all
persons, dependent on the nature of the grouts in use.
9.8.6.8 Records
The Contractor shall keep full and detailed records as appropriate to the type of treatment
being carried out, including direction and full depth of injection pipe, quantities of materials
used, time, location and volume of grout injected, volume of grout to waste by leakage or
other reasons, pressure of injection (measured as close to the injection point as possible),
both for initial injections and re-injections. Consequently, the performance of any grouting
system shall be monitored by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract, and
interpretation of the results shall be conducted as agreed with the Engineer. Copies of
such records shall be given on a daily basis to the Engineer. Continuous automated
monitoring of grout pressures and flows shall be made and presented electronically along
with summary records. Records of tests carried out on the treated ground shall also be
given to the Engineer.
9.8.7 EXPLORATION AHEAD OF TUNNEL FACE

9.8.7.1 Probe Ahead of Tunnel Face in Difficult Ground Zone
Where required, the Contractor shall be responsible for probing ahead of the tunnel face
in order to prove or investigate the ground.
The selection of plant and method and all information relevant to this shall be submitted
for the approval by the Engineer. The method proposed shall take into account the
probable nature of the ground ahead and its water-bearing capacity.
Probing shall be carried out such that at all times the distance of probed ground ahead of
the face is sufficient to allow modification of the method of working ahead of any change
in ground conditions. The number of probes, their positions in the face and angles with
respect to the tunnel drive shall be governed by the actual ground conditions encountered
and the machinery in use subject to approval by the Engineer.
The maximum probed distance ahead of the face shall be governed by the ground
conditions and the degree of uncertainty with distance. However, the minimum probed
hole shall be at least 20 m.
Should the information obtained from probing indicate that forward ground conditions will
require a modification of the method of working, the Contractor shall prepare proposals
for the Engineer’s approval.
The diameter of probe holes shall be not less than 38 mm.
The flush used shall be suitable for the type of ground conditions anticipated and the
machinery in use. This is particularly relevant in soil and soil-like ground conditions.
A trial shall be carried out in advance of tunnelling activities in order to identify the
optimum drill bit, drill diameter, flush and percussion rate. These parameters shall be kept
constant during drilling to allow direct comparison between probe holes.
Full facilities shall be provided for the Engineer to inspect probing work in progress.
The Contractor shall keep logs of all probe holes drilled. The following data, together with
such additional data as the Engineer may direct, shall be given on the logs:
(i) probe hole positions (positions in the face and angles with respect to tunnel
drives);
(ii) plot of the rate of drill penetration versus drilled length;
(iii) drill parameters (percussion, torque, thrust);
(iv) flush (colour, percentage return);
(v) drilling sounds (loud, quiet, intermittent);

(vi) location, nature and quantity of any water inflows; and
(vii) interpretation of the nature of the ground ahead.
A copy of each probe hole log shall be submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours of the
completion of the probe hole.
Probe holes that discharge quantities of more than 1.0 l/sec for more than 12 hrs. shall be
equipped with appropriate drainpipes that are screened such to prevent flush-out of fines.
If boreholes discharging more than 1.0 l/sec for longer than 12 hrs. are found, additional
investigation holes and relief holes shall be installed in agreement with the Engineer.
9.8.7.2 Treatment of Zones with Unstable Rock Adjacent to the Tunnel Face
When a zone of suspected unstable rock or major water inflow has been encountered
adjacent to the tunnel face, further exploratory drilling shall be made in an attempt to
establish the character and extent of the zone.
Based on the findings, a method statement shall be worked out by the Contractor which
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The method statement shall establish the
procedure of excavation, including if spilling is required, assess the type and extent of
primary stabilization required and propose whether or not pre-treatment of the zone by
means of consolidation grouting or sealing grouting is required before tunnelling may
resume. In the latter case, drainage of the zone shall normally be carried out first in an
attempt to release water pressure.
9.8.8 TOLERANCES FOR TUNNELS, SHAFTS AND UNDERGROUND WORKS
Tunnels and shafts shall be constructed to the centerlines required by the Contract and
subsequently agreed on site with the Engineer.
Unless otherwise stated on the Drawings, overall tolerances allowed in respect of the
departure of any point on the internal profile of the structure from its established
centerline shall be as given in Table 9.8-6, measured on completion of the shotcrete,
concrete lining and concrete invert construction. The tolerance includes all construction
errors.
Table 9.8-6 Overall tolerances

Type of Structure Tunnel diameter
<5m >5m
Shotcrete Line and Level ±35 mm ±75 mm
Cast-in-situ concrete lining Line and Level ±35 mm ±50 mm
and invert
Where hydraulic requirements, no back falls forming localised ponding shall be allowed.
9.9 WATERPROOFING SYSTEM

9.9.1 GENERAL
As stated in the contractual documents, a sheet waterproofing membrane system shall be
predominantly used for tunnel waterproofing. However, spray-applied waterproofing
system could either be used sectionally upon approval of the Engineer.
In case that the Contractor requires to apply sprayed-applied waterproofing membrane
system. The Contractor shall prove the Engineer that it is equivalent to or better than
sheet waterproofing membrane system in terms of its fuctions, technical properties and
reliability in both long term and short term period. Moreover, its unit cost should not be
more than one of sheet waterproofing membrane system already indicated in contractual
documents. Before commencement of sprayed-applied waterproofing membrane system,
the Contractor may propose proposal for approval in accoradance with General Condition
of Contract Clause 25 Alterations, Additions and Omissions.
The waterproofing system with drainage system should be installed where water inflowing
in order to reduce hydrostatic loads on structures. Allowable water infiltration rate varies
depending upon the purpose of tunnel, tunnel dimension and local environmental law
requirements. According to allowable water infiltration specified in FHWA-NHI-10-034 -
Technical Manual for Design and Construction of Road Tunnels — Civil Elements discussed
by U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration in 2009, a rate of
0.5 l/min per 100 m of tunnel length is used as the limit. The local infiltration limit is 1
l/day for 1 sq.m of area, and 1 drip per minute at any location. Before the commencement
of the Works, the length of waterproofing section and method statement should be
9.9.2 SHEET WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM
9.9.2.1 General
Sheet waterproofing membrane systems for tunnels should comprise a geotextile fleece
fixed to the primary lining substrate, with a sheet waterproofing membrane fastened to
this.
Before install waterproofing sheet, strip drain can be used on water-ingress section for
reducing construction disturbance and difficulty.
9.9.2.2 Materials
1) Geotextile Fleece
The purpose of the geotextile fleece is to protect the sheet membrane against
mechanical puncture.
The geotextile, when used with a sheet waterproofing membrane, provides a drainage
path for any water seepage around the final tunnel structure and to convey the
groundwater into the sidewall drains.
The geotextile fleece will also create a sliding surface to minimise tension and stress
forming in the membrane and allow dissipation of the stresses, such as those generated
via early-age thermal behaviour and settlement, generated in a secondary lining.
The geotextile fleece shall be a non-woven fleece and conform to the performance
requirements shown in Table 9.9-1.
The geotextile is to provide adequate protection from chemical aggression caused in
the curing processes of concrete.
Table 9.9-1 Performance requirements for geotextile fleece
Property Test method Requirement
Weight DIN 53352 Not less than 500 g/m2
Water transmissivity of the geotextile fleece should be designed to suit expected

volume of water ingress.
2) Sheet Waterproofing Membrane
The sheet waterproofing membrane shall consist of a continuous impermeable heat-
welded sheet of one of the following materials:
(i) soft polyvinylchloride (PVC) unreinforced;
(ii) flexible polyolefin (FPO/TPO) unreinforced; or
(iii) modified high-density polyethylene (HDPE) in accordance with DIN 16776 Parts
l and Part 2.
The membrane as supplied shall be of such dimensions and shape as will result in the
minimum of on-site seam welds.
Unless otherwise stated in the contract, the membrane shall conform to performance
requirements and have properties shown in Table 9.9-2.
Table 9.9-2 Performance requirements of sheet waterproofing membranes

Properties Test methods Requirements
Thickness BS EN 1849-2 2.0 mm ±10%
Tensile strength BS EN 12311-2 Not less than 14.5 MPa
Breaking elongation BS EN 12311-2 Not less than 300%
Tensile strength of welded seam BS EN 12317-2 Cracks occur next to the seam
Tear resistance BS EN 12310-2 80 N/mm
Watertightness BS EN 1928 Method B 5 bars at 1 hour
Water absorption BS EN ISO 62 Not more than 4.0%
Acid and alkali-resistance (28 days) DIN 16726 Tensile strength loss: ±20% or less
Breaking elongation: ±20% or less
Smoke class BS EN ISO 11925 E
Fire Rating BS EN ISO 11925-2 Self- extinguishing
Further guidance on test methods and requirements for mechanical properties and
durability can be found in BS EN 13491:2018 Geosynthetic barriers – Characteristics
Required for Use as a Fluid Barrier in the Construction of Tunnels and Underground
Structures.
Where reinforced concrete is to be placed against the sheet waterproofing membrane
a signalling layer, to give a visual indication of any mechanical damage, shall be
provided on the exposed surface of the waterproofing membrane. The signalling layer
shall be such that it does not adversely affect the seam welds.
3) Fixing Elements for Sheet Waterproofing Membranes
The geotextile is fixed onto the substrate with non-projecting disks. The disks are
secured through the geotextile and into the substrate with shot-fired nails.
The disks should be made of a compound that allows the sheet waterproofing
membrane to be fully welded to the disk’s surface.
In order to prevent stresses being transferred from the secondary lining to the sheet
waterproofing membrane, the resistance to failure in shear of the nails and disks must
be less than the shear resistance of the sheet membrane itself.
9.9.2.3 Installation of Sheet Waterproofing Membrane System

1) Surface Preparation
Prior to application of the geotextile fleece layer, the primary lining shall be surveyed
confirming that it does not exceed tolerances specified in SUB-SECTION 9.8.8
TOLERANCES FOR TUNNELS, SHAFTS AND UNDERGROUND WORKS. Any proposals to
rectify areas of the primary lining shall be agreed with the Engineer.
The surface shall be prepared in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Except where indicated on the Drawings, all fixtures shall be removed from the primary
lining prior to application of the geotextile fleece layer. All core holes shall be backfilled
with mortar to be flush with the surface of the primary lining.
For sheet waterproofing membranes, the profile of the substrate (tunnel surface) shall
not have any irregularities that exceed a ratio of length to depth of 5:1. The substrate
surface shall be free from protrusions or sharp edges which may lead to membrane
puncture. Crushed aggregates of a grain size greater than 10 mm shall not be used.
Groundwater penetrating through the primary tunnel lining shall be collected and
drained by appropriate measures. This drainage shall be maintained throughout the
membrane placing process and shall be so arranged that excess water pressure behind
the membrane cannot develop.
2) Geotextile Fleece Layer
A layer of protective geotextile shall be attached to the substrate by suitable non-
projecting fastenings installed directly through the geotextile fleece. When fixing the
geotextile fleece overhead, sufficient fixings shall be installed to ensure the fleece is in
close contact with the substrate and is self-supporting. The sheets shall overlap by at
least 200 mm.
3) Waterproofing Membrane
The applicator shall undergo thorough on-site training and be approved by the
manufacturer or supplier of the welding equipment. Only experienced and approved
applicators shall be employed for this work.
When placing the sheet waterproofing membrane, no other Works shall be carried out
in the vicinity which may cause personnel or equipment to come into contact with the
sheet waterproofing membrane before it has been protected. If it is likely that excessive
dust may be generated in the vicinity of the Works (vehicle movements etc.) then dust
suppression measures shall be put in place.
Waterproofing membranes shall not be stored in direct sunlight prior to use.

Waterproofing membranes shall be protected from damage at all times.
The amount of membrane stored in the tunnel shall not exceed one day’s production
to minimise the fire load stored underground.
The sheet waterproofing membrane shall be fixed to the tunnel structure by means of
fastening devices which preserve the integrity of the sheet waterproofing membrane.
Sufficient fixings shall be installed to ensure snug fit to the substrate surface and is self-
supporting.
All sheet waterproofing membrane overlaps shall be welded in accordance with the
membrane manufacturer’s instructions.
Double-weld systems shall be the standard means of sheet welding.
Single welds or patch welding shall only be permitted for repair patches where double
welds are physically impossible.
Where waterproofing membrane has been installed in the tunnel invert, it shall be
protected from any damage as soon as possible after testing.
4) Construction Joints: Geotextile Fleece
Joints shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Joints shall have a
minimum overlap as specified earlier.
5) Construction Joints: Sheet Waterproofing Membrane
Radial joints between sheets of sheet waterproofing membrane shall be welded using
flat-faced fillet welds. Two lines of weld shall be used on each joint forming a double
seam of at least 15 mm wide, with the minimum sheet waterproofing membrane
overlap 80 mm for manual welding and 100 mm for automatic welding.
If protrusions through the membrane are required, they shall be fitted with collars to
maintain the water tightness of the system. The Contractor shall submit the design for
such protrusions for the Engineer’s approval. Star or cross joints shall be avoided.
The length of material roll shall be procured to enable a complete tunnel arch length
to be installed as a continuous length. Longitudinal joints shall be avoided.
Water barriers shall be installed as shown. Water barriers shall be fully welded to the
waterproofing membrane in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
6) Additional Items
The waterproofing system is to be divided into sectors by water barriers as shown.
Water barriers shall be continuous strip weldable to waterproofing membrane with four
embedment ribs of the following minimum dimensions: 360 mm minimum width,
25mm minimum height.
Intersections of water barriers shall be prefabricated at workshop on site or by
manufacturer.
If required, additional drainage capacity can be provided by studded drainage
membrane made from thermoplastic material attached prior to installation of the
geotextile fleece.
9.9.2.4 Quality Assurance and Control – Construction Testing
A visual inspection of the sheet waterproofing membrane shall be carried out. Areas where
the sheet waterproofing membrane is damaged shall be marked up; repairs carried out
and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
All welded joints shall be tested in accordance with Table 9.9-3. Any joints that fail the
test and require repair shall be marked with a permanent marker, at the time of the test.
Repairs and hand-welded joints shall be tested by hand-held vacuum chamber in
accordance with Table 9.9-3.
Table 9.9-3 Construction testing for sheet waterproofing membrane
Parameters Test methods Requirements
Coverage Visual inspection to be carried out 100% coverage
continuously while the membrane
is applied
Double welded seam joints DIN 16726 every joint Pressure drop not to be greater
than 10% when a 2-bar pressure is
applied for 10 minutes
Hand welding and repairs ASTM D5641 every hand-weld and Pressure drop not to be greater
repair than 20% when a 0.3-bar pressure is
applied for 10 minutes
A visual inspection of the fleece shall be carried out. Areas in which the substrate is still
visible, or where the fleece is damaged, shall be marked up and an additional layer of
fleece applied with a minimum lap of 200 mm around the area.
9.9.2.5 Defective Waterproofing Membrane System
Where tears, rips or defective joints in the geotextile fleece are noted these shall be
repaired with a minimum overlap of 200 mm.
Where tears, rips or defective joints in the sheet waterproofing membrane are noted these
shall be repaired in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. These shall be
tested by hand-held vacuum chamber.
Any sheet waterproofing membrane not meeting specified requirements shall be removed
and replaced including any associated water management measures or smoothing layer.
The cause of the problem shall be rectified before placing any further sheet waterproofing
membrane.
At least 4 weeks prior to commencement of any waterproofing works, the Contractor shall
submit the complete repair procedure including procedures, materials and equipment for
waterproofing repair for the Engineer’s approval
(i) before secondary lining installation;
(ii) after installation of the secondary lining upon observation of water seepage
through the control and grouting pipes, construction joints or other locations of
the secondary lining.
The repair shall be carried out through the control and grouting pipes shown and shall be
in accordance with the repair grout manufacturer’s requirements.
9.9.3 SPRAYED-APPLIED WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM
9.9.3.1 General
Spray-applied waterproofing systems include waterproofing linings formed in situ and cured
in place. Selected spray membrane systems must permit the safe construction of the
secondary lining (cast-in-situ or sprayed) without reduction in waterproofing properties.
9.9.3.2 Materials
The materials will be prepared in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. No site
batching variations from these instructions will be permitted without written agreement
from all parties including Designer and Manufacturer,
The product shall conform to the performance requirements shown in Table 9.9-4.
Table 9.9-4 Material performance criteria
Property Requirements
Bond to substrata Failure shown to be in substrate or bond >0.5 MPa
Permeability Zero penetration of water through membrane
Crack bridging Capable of bridging a 2 mm gap without diminishment of resistance
to water permeation
Storage conditions of the product shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The manufacturer shall demonstrate the durability of the product for the design life of
the project.
9.9.3.3 Materials - Health and Safety during Application
Where the application of a particular product presents fire and Control of Substances
Hazardous to Health Regulations (COSHH)-related hazards, notably in respect to the
confined space environment. Then measures shall be put in place to control these
hazards, appropriate measures could include:
(a) adequate ventilation
(b) fire detection
(c) fire suppression
(d) specialised personal protective equipment
(e) exclusion zones
(f) specific trained operatives
(g) remote application
(h) eye wash and first aid facilities,
For a particular product, where some or all of the identified hazards arc adequately
covered by a manufacturer's recommended application method, then when this product
is used it shall be applied strictly in accordance with those recommendations.
9.9.3.4 Selection of Spray-applied Membrane Systems - from Track Record or Appropriate
Trials
The capability of the equipment, workmanship, materials and application methods under
field conditions should be demonstrated by either:
(a) previous relevant performance in similar conditions for projects with equivalent
acceptance criteria
(b) appropriate trials.
The criteria for the acceptance of the applied waterproof membrane’s performance shall
be in accordance with the project-specific requirements for degree of watertightness.
The testing program shall be started sufficiently early prior to installing the membrane to
allow verification that the required watertightness can be achieved and allow repetition of
the trials should the initial results prove unsatisfactory. All trials and acceptance tests shall
be completed satisfactorily by the time installation commences.
Evidence must be available to demonstrate safe application of the proposed secondary
lining within the chosen spray-applied waterproofing system. For a sprayed concrete
secondary lining this evidence shall demonstrate that a sprayed lining can be applied to a
fully cured spray membrane lest section in the main tunnel crown with no observed
instability of the freshly applied sprayed concrete. Such as sagging or sprayed concrete
fallout.
9.9.3.5 Quality Assurance and Requirements during Trials
Trials, as required by the engineer to validate previous data, shall be carried out within the
tunnel to assess the performance of the spray-applied waterproofing system in all
conditions to be encountered during the permanent Works, including where appropriate:
(a) a dry area
(b) a damp area
(c) an area with active groundwater ingress.
The waterproofing system can include integrated water management measures as
appropriate, including:
(a) locally applied grout/injection systems
(b) faster curing mix solutions
(c) active drainage such as strips or pipes.
The test area shall be sufficiently large to adequately represent the permanent situation.
During trials the membrane and waterproofing shall be applied using the same equipment
and methods, and by the same approved personnel, as those intended for the permanent
Works.
Substrate surface roughness- the trials shall be carried out on the full range of surface
roughness to be encountered during application of the permanent Works. This trial shall
confirm the requirement or otherwise for smoothing layers additional to those required as
part of the standard waterproofing system.
A visual inspection of the spray-applied waterproof membrane shall be carried out Areas
in which the substrate is still visible, the spray-applied membrane is not sufficiently opaque
(for opaque coloured membranes) or where the spray-applied waterproofing membrane is
damaged, shall be marked up and an additional layer of spray-applied waterproof
membrane applied with a minimum lap of 200 mm around the area.
Where the trials are carried out in the tunnel the spray-applied waterproofing membrane
shall be repaired as for a defect.
Manufacturers shall detail post-application non-destructive testing to identify the integrity
(in accordance with the specified dryness criteria) of the lining, these tests shall be carried
out at a frequency and spacing as identified by the manufacturer. Where the integrity of
the lining is shown to be insufficient, repairs shall be carried out and approve by the
Engineer.
In order to provide an additional reference during full-scale application, the quantity of
spray-applied waterproofing membrane applied to achieve the required thickness per
metre squared (over the given substrate condition) shall be assessed and recorded.
Table 9.9-5 Trial criteria for spray-applied waterproof membranes
Property Test method Requirements
Bond to substrate BS EN ISO 4624:2003 – Pull off test Failure of the substrate or
for adhesion, for resin-based bond >0.5 MPa at 28 days (as
materials (using a 50 mm dolly) evidence of long-term water
or path obstruction)
BS EN 1542:1999 - Pull off test, tor
all other materials
Permeability BS EN 12390-8:2000 Zero penetration of water
(but sealed and tested for 28 days through membrane
with spray-applied waterproof
membrane located <25 mm from
tested face of the specimen, within
the primary and secondary layers)
or
Taywood Testing/similar appropriate
where the lining is put to a 10 bar
test for 28 days
Crack bridging static test BS EN 1062-7:2004 Part 7 Capable of bridging a 2 mm
gap without diminishment of
resistance to water permeation
Cores (concrete-membrane-concrete sandwich) and patches shall be taken from test

panels or the testing area as required by the specification, in order to demonstrate the
properties of the combined system specified in Table 9.9-5.
9.9.3.6 Quality Assurance Construction Testing
Coverage/continuity, a visual inspection of the spray-applied waterproof membrane shall
be carried out. In addition manufacturers shall detail post-application non-destructive
testing to identify the integrity of the lining, These tests shall be carried out as specified in
Table 6 below, Areas in which the substrate is still visible, or where the spray-applied
waterproof membrane's integrity is impaired, shall be marked up and an additional layer

of spray-applied waterproof membrane applied with a minimum lap of 200 mm around
the area.
Thickness, Product allowing, thickness measurements shall be carried out, as specified in
Table 9.9-6, using a simple depth gauge, The equipment used shall be approved by the
Engineer, with the thickness and location of the test recorded as appropriate, Adequate
applied thickness may be additionally cross-referenced to the quantities per metre squared
identified during trials.
The location of the thickness and coverage tests shall be determined to give even
distribution around the entire lining (i.e. samples from the crown, axis and invert).
Table 9.9-6 Construction testing for spray-applied waterproof membranes
Parameter Test method Frequency Pass/fail criteria
Coverage/continuity Visual A visual inspection to 100% coverage Where
be carried out appropriate: lining should
continuously while the be 100% opaque
membrane is applied
Thickness Wet film thickness As required in the Not less than 4 mm after
– depth gauge Particular Specification 2nd coating applied or as
but minimum 10 tests per manufacturer’s
per 100 m2 recommendations in given
conditions, verified by site
trials
Application Per batch Kg/m2 to match minimum
quantity applied quantity
measurement determined during field
trials
Patch test As required in the As per manufacturer’s
Particular Specification recommendation in given
but minimum 1 test per conditions, verified by site
200 m2 trials
9.10 CONCRETE LINING AND OTHER CONCRETE STRUCTURES

9.10.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LINING
9.10.1.1 General
Concrete lining shall meet requirements of the specifications pertaining to concrete.
Concrete resistance to fire shall be improved by use of polymer fibers such as
polypropylene or equivalent in accordance with European Standard.
All surfaces to be in contact with the in situ concrete lining shall be thoroughly cleaned
and scaled of all loose or defective material.
The tunnel surfaces for installation of waterproofing membranes shall be thoroughly
cleaned to remove any loose and foreign materials. They shall be cleaned by washing with
a stream of air and water, but care shall be taken not to displace the membrane or its
fixing and seals.
Reinforcement by mesh or bar shall be fixed with sufficient amount for each rock mass
type in order to support the tunnel and prevent concrete surface cracking. The amount of
steel reinforcement of each support class should be approved by the Engineer prior to
installation.
Concrete shall not be placed in still or running water and shall not the subjected to the
action of running water until after the concrete has set. Where water flows from surfaces
against which the concrete is placed, it shall be excluded from the space to be filled with
concrete.
All shutter shall be true to form, securely made and supported, and joints shall be sealed
to prevent the loss of cement from the mix. Where required, grout pipes shall be
incorporated for pressure relief and subsequent grouting.
Concreting shall not commence until the shutter has been inspected and agreed with the
Engineer.
Concrete shall be placed continuously in each length of shutter.
Care shall be taken in the case of exposed concrete faces of the tunnel and shaft linings
that no irregularity occurs between successive sections.
The build-up of water pressure behind uncured linings shall be prevented.
The sequence of work within the tunnels or shafts shall be so arranged that no damage
occurs to permanent linings. The proposed sequences and methods of operations shall
be agreed with the Engineer.
Before any concrete is placed for tunnel linings the Contractor shall demonstrate to the
Engineer that his concrete mix, equipment and working methods are capable of producing
fully compacted concrete to the required surface finish. If required by the Particular
Specification this shall take the form of a trial length.
9.10.1.2 Specific Requirements
1) Quality of concrete
Concrete class for concrete lining shall be class A where the compressive strength
of concrete should be at least 250 kg/cm2 (25 MPa) as determined by tests on
15×30 cm cylinders aging minimum 28 days.
2) Mix design
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.1.4 Mix Design of SECTION 4.3
CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
3) Trial mixes
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.1.5 Trial Mixes of SECTION 4.3
4) Sampling and testing
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.1.6 Sampling and Testing of
SECTION 4.3 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
5) Tolerances
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.1.2 Tolerances of SECTION 4.3
9.10.1.3 Materials and Equipment
1) Materials
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.2.1 Materials of Concrete for
Structures.
2) Fixing bar and mesh reinforcement
The Contractor may adjust the position of lap joints to fit in with available stock
lengths, or construction joints, subject to the Engineer's agreement to the altered
positions. The Contractor shall amend the bending schedules, as necessary, to
allow for such alterations.
The bending of reinforcement bars shall be in accordance with BS 8666 unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings and bending schedules. Bars shall be bent cold.
Reinforcement shall be free of all mill scale and thoroughly cleaned to remove
all loose rust, oil, grease, or other harmful matter immediately prior to being
placed in position in the Works and maintained thus until finally encased in
concrete.
All reinforcement shall be accurately placed, securely fixed, and adequately
maintained in the positions shown on the Drawings. The reinforcement shall be
fixed so that the cover specified on the Drawings or in the Particular Specification
is achieved, subject to the tolerances specified therein.
Reinforcement shall not be rebent on site unless agreed with the Engineer.
Spacers and chairs shall comply with BS 7973-1 and be 'Heavy' category as per
Table 1 of that standard. Spacer blocks shall be of comparable strength, durability
and appearance to the surrounding concrete and shall be factory produced.
Site-produced concrete or mortar cover blocks shall not be used.
Spacers and chairs shall ensure that the reinforcement is correctly positioned, be
as small as possible consistent with their purpose, and designed so that they will
not overturn or be displaced when the concrete is placed. Wire cast in the block
for the purpose of tying it to the reinforcement shall be as specified below.
Spacers and chairs shall be fixed in accordance with BS 7973-2.
Projecting ends of ties or clips shall not encroach into the concrete cover.
Tying wires shall be 1.6 mm soft annealed iron wire unless the Particular
Specification or Drawings require the use of stainless-steel tying wire. Where
stainless steel tying wire is required it shall be 1.2 mm diameter stainless steel
wire throughout the structure.
Concreting shall not commence until the reinforcement has been inspected in
accordance with the Inspection and Test Plan.
3) Shutter
Before construction commences, the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s
agreement to the general method and system proposed and shall submit detailed
drawings of the shutter to the Engineer for agreement where required by the
Particular Specification.
All shutter shall be so dimensioned, constructed and securely braced as to
prevent displacement.
All joints in the shutter and between the shutter and previous work shall be
sufficiently tight to prevent loss of liquid from the concrete.
Formers for all chases, grooves, recesses, etc. shall be securely fixed as part of the
shutter. No part of the concrete shall be cut away for any such item, or for any
other reason, without the Engineer’s agreement.
The face of the shutter shall be clean and applied with non-staining release agent.
The agent shall not touch reinforcement, or items to be embedded, and shall not
be allowed to collect in the bottom of the shutter, or flow onto previously placed
concrete.
Before any concrete is placed, the Contractor shall examine and clean out the
shutter, and ensure that the specified reinforcement cover is attained.
shutter shall be eased, struck or removed in such a manner that the structure is
not distorted, damaged or overloaded.
Except where otherwise agreed. Shutter shall not be eased or struck until:
(i) the concrete has attained sufficient strength to support itself in the
position cast without deformation; or
(ii) a minimum period in line with SECTION 6 ENV 13670-1.
Where cyclical casting, e.g. in situ concrete tunnel lining, striking times may be
agreed with the Engineer following criteria determined from trial lengths.
4) Concrete placing equipment
Concrete shall be placed by pumping equipment of suitable types, subject to the
agreement of the Engineer.
Where pumping equipment is used it shall have adequate placing capacity and be
capable of delivering the concrete in a continuous uninterrupted flow. The
equipment shall incorporate gauges for measuring the pressure in the delivery line
and a pressure regulating system. Pumping equipment, storage hoppers, and
delivery pipelines shall be lubricated at the start of each concreting operation with
a batch of cement-sand mortar and shall be thoroughly cleaned at the end of the
operation.
Concrete placing using pneumatic equipment shall be subject to the agreement
of the Engineer.
9.10.1.4 Execution
1) Preparations
Shutter, Falsework and Centring: Before concrete is placed the Engineer shall
inspect all shutter, falsework and centring and no concrete shall be placed until
the Engineer has inspected and approved such shutter, falsework, and centring.
Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under
the Contract for the successful completion of the structure.
Reinforcement: The Engineer shall inspect and approve all reinforcement in place,
before concrete is placed. An experienced steel fixer shall be present while all
concrete is placed to ensure that no reinforcement becomes displaced during
placing and if it does to reposition such reinforcement before placing continues.
2) Transport of concrete
Mixed concrete shall be conveyed to its position in the tunnel by pumping,
agitator cars or as otherwise agreed with the Engineer. Alternative methods will be
required to prove their success in conveying concrete rapidly, without segregation
and the loss of materials.
Concrete conveying equipment shall be checked by means of site trials prior to
general use for its ability to deliver uniform concrete. Slump tests shall be made
on samples of concrete taken from the first and last one-tenth of a batch of mixed
concrete. If these slumps differ by more than 25 mm the equipment shall not be
approved for use until the condition causing the inconsistency is corrected.
Concrete conveying equipment used shall be examined daily for accumulations
of hardened concrete or mortar, or for wear of the blades. Where necessary, the
uniformity test may be repeated.
3) Placing concrete
Concrete shall be placed while still sufficiently plastic for adequate compaction
and shall be carefully worked around all reinforcement and embedded fixtures
and corners of the shutter.
Concrete shall be placed as close as possible to its final position, in continuous
near level layers not exceeding 500 mm. Each layer shall be compacted before
succeeding layers are placed.
Placing equipment shall be operated by experienced operators only. In general,
the concrete placing shall continue uninterrupted until the structure is filled over
the entire length of the shutter. In the event of equipment breakdown or if for
any other unavoidable reason placing is interrupted, the Contractor shall
thoroughly compact the concrete to a reasonable level or flat slope while the
concrete is plastic. The concrete at the surface of such cold joints shall be cleaned
with a high-pressure air water jet before the concrete achieves a primary set, to
provide an irregular clean surface free from laitance. Prior to restarting concreting,
the surface shall be wetted. The work shall be so carried out that a sound dense
homogeneous structural element is produced.
Concrete shall not be subjected to disturbance between 4 hours and 24 hours
after placing.
The Contractor shall keep on the site a complete record of the work showing the
time. date and location of concrete placed in each part of the Works. This record
shall be available for inspection by the Engineer.
4) Compaction
Concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense uniform mass.
Except where otherwise agreed with the Engineer, vibration shall be applied
continuously and evenly along the work during the placing of concrete in a
manner which does not promote segregation of the components and until the
expulsion of air has ceased.
Unless otherwise agreed, concrete shall be compacted by high frequency
mechanical vibrators.
Immersion-type vibrators or heavy-duty shutter vibrators shall be used. Immersion
vibrators shall, wherever practicable, be operated in a near vertical position, and
the vibrating head shall penetrate and re-vibrate concrete in the upper portion of
the underlying layer. They shall be withdrawn slowly to avoid the formation of
voids and shall be carefully positioned to avoid contact of the vibrating head with
the form work.
Vibrators shall not be allowed to contact reinforcement or inserts, nor shall they
be used as a means of moving concrete along the shutter. The Contractor shall
provide standby vibrators during concreting.
Particular care shall be taken with the compaction of concrete surrounding water
bars to avoid honeycombing and to prevent the displacement of the water bar.
Care shall also be taken to avoid displacement of prefixed pipes, blockouts,
thermocouples and the like.
Where placing concrete for tunnel linings, shutter vibrators shall be used for
compacting concrete in the tunnel arch above the highest openings in the shutter.
They shall be operated at intervals of not more than 1.2 m behind the advancing
slope of the concrete in the shoulders and crown of the arch. The location and
operation of the vibrators shall be carefully coordinated with the withdrawal of
the discharge line so as to avoid settlement and flow of the concrete from the
filled crown.
5) Curing and protection
Immediately after compaction and thereafter for the curing period the concrete
shall be protected against harmful effects of weather, rain, rapid temperature
changes, frost and from drying out.
All concrete should be allowed to cure by methods which will ensure the
production of concrete of the specified quality.
Curing materials and methods shall be compatible with any subsequent
waterproofing.
Periods for curing shall be as recommended in SECTION 6 OF ENV 13670-1. The
Contractor shall agree his proposals with the Engineer.
Concrete shall not normally be placed when the temperature at the location of
the Work is below or likely to fall below, 5˚C before the section of work can be
completed except in emergencies.
6) Construction joints
Construction joints shall be positioned only where agreed with the Engineer.
Formed construction joints shall be formed using stop ends made on purposes.
Expanded metal stop ends shall not be used.
Unformed construction joints shall be formed using a grout check or similar so
that the exposed edge is a crisp true line.
Kickers shall be constructed integrally with the structure below.
The joint surface shall be either: brushed using water to remove laitance and
expose the aggregate without disturbing it, treated with retarder and then water-
jetted to remove laitance and expose the aggregate without disturbing it; or lightly
roughened by light chipping or needle-gunning of set concrete. Hacking of set
concrete shall not be permitted.
Construction joints shall be clean and damp, with no standing water, immediately
before wet concrete is placed against them.
9.10.1.5 Concrete Finishes
1) Formed surfaces
Formed concrete finishes shall be as specified on the Drawings with reference to
Table 9.10-1 below.
Table 9.10-1 Formed concrete finishes

F1 No specific requirement
F2 The irregularities in the finish shall be no greater than those obtained from the use of
wrought thickness square- edged boards arranged in a uniform pattern. Fins shall be
removed, and imperfections shall be made good.
F3 The resulting finish shall be smooth and of uniform texture and appearance. The
shutter lining shall leave no stain on the concrete and shall be so joined and fixed to
its backing that it imparts no blemishes. It shall be of the same type and obtained from
only one source throughout any one structure. The Contractor shall make good any
imperfections in the finish. Internal ties and embedded metal parts shall not be used.
All shutter joints for F2 and F3 finish shall form a regular pattern.
2) Unformed surfaces
Unformed concrete finishes shall be as specified on the Drawings with reference
to Table 9.10-2 below.
Table 9.10-2 Unformed concrete finishes
U1: Screeded finish The concrete shall be leveled and screeded. No further work shall be applied
to the surface unless it is a first stage for a wood float or steel trowel finish.
U2: Wood float A pre- screeded finish shall be floated with light finish pressure using a
wooden float to eliminate surface irregularities.
U3: Steel trowel finish A steel trowelled finish shall be first wood- floated and then trowelled under
firm pressure with a steel float to produce a dense, smooth, uniform surface.
The final surface shall be free from trowel marks.
When required in the Particular Specification and before commencing concreting
the Contractor shall prepare a trial panel to demonstrate that the required surface
finish can be achieved by the equipment and methods proposed. The panel shall
be filled with the proposed concrete compacted by the method to be used in
the work. When agreed with the Engineer the trial Panel shall be retained and will
form the benchmark against which all Works concrete shall be prepared.
When stated in the Particular Specification. Each constituent material shall be
obtained from a single consistent source. The aggregates shall be free of any
impurities that may cause staining. The mix proportions and the grading shall be
maintained constant. The same type of material and release agent shall be used
in form work throughout similar exposed areas.
Release agents shall be selected to leave no stains on the concrete surface and
shall be applied evenly.
Where the concrete surface is to receive waterproofing, it shall be in accordance
with the waterproofing system manufacturer's recommendations.
Permanently exposed concrete surfaces shall be protected from rust marks and
stains of all kinds.
After removal of the shutter, no treatment, other than that approved for curing,
shall be applied to the concrete until its surfaces have been inspected by the
Engineer.
Where any surface fails to comply with the Specification in respect of finish,
dimensional tolerance, or in any other way, the Contractor shall rectify the work
as agreed with the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing any damage to the finished
concrete surfaces and shall adopt any necessary protective measures to prevent
subsequent staining from any cause.
9.10.1.6 Inspection of Completed Structure
The Contractor shall carry out a cover meter survey over all reinforced concrete surfaces
within 24 hours of removal of shutter. The cover survey shall be undertaken on a 500 mm
grid over the whole structure. Access for the Engineer to verify cover meter surveys shall
be provided.
9.10.1.7 Defective Work
Concrete which is honeycombed, damaged by faulty curing, or fails to attain the specified
or characteristic strength, and concrete work which in any way fails to comply with the
Specification, will be considered to be defective.
Defective work shall be removed and replaced. The methods used for such removal and
subsequent reconstruction shall be agreed with the Engineer.
9.10.2 OTHER CONCRETE STRUCTURES
9.10.2.1 General
Concrete invert should be constructed by cast in-situ reinforced concrete.
Concrete blinding and embedment is applied prior to installation of groundwater drainage
system and concrete invert. It provides smoothening and flat layer. Plain concrete is
suggested for this type of structure. Before pouring the concrete, tunnel floor shall be
properly firm.
Concrete Walkway is used in the case of emergency that passenger need to evacuate.
Another use of the structure is to be ducts for cables. In the same way as concrete invert,
cast in-situ reinforced concrete should be applied for this structure.
Concrete walls which would be constructed on both sides of cross passages and
equipment rooms should be made of reinforced concrete resembling to the walkways.
These structure should meet every requirement specified herein. The Contractor shall
demonstrate to the Engineer that his concrete mix, equipment and working methods are
capable of producing the concrete to the required surface finish.
Use of polymer fibers, i.e. polypropylene or equivalent in accordance with European
Standard, shall be applied for concrete walkways and concrete walls so that the concrete
could resist to fire.
9.10.2.2 Specific Requirements
1) Quality of concrete
(a) Concrete invert: Concrete class shall be class A where the compressive
strength of concrete should be at least 250 kg/cm2 (25 MPa) as
determined by tests on 15×30 cm cylinders aging minimum 28 days.
(b) Concrete blinding: Concrete class shall be class C where the compressive
(c) Concrete embedment: Concrete class shall be class C where the
compressive strength of concrete should be at least 150 kg/cm2 (15 MPa)
as determined by tests on 15×30 cm cylinders aging minimum 28 days.
(d) Concrete walkway: Concrete class shall be class B where the compressive
(e) Concrete walls: Concrete class shall be class B where the compressive
2) Mix design
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.1.4 Mix Design of SECTION 4.3
3) Trial mixes
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.1.5 Trial Mixes of SECTION 4.3
4) Sampling and testing
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.1.6 Sampling and Testing of
5) Tolerances
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.1.2 Tolerances of SECTION 4.3
CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
9.10.2.3 Materials and Equipment
1) Materials
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.2.1 Materials of SECTION 4.3
CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
2) Fixing bar and mesh reinforcement
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 9.10.1.3 Materials and Equipment
of SUB-SECTION 9.10.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LINING.
3) Plant and equipment
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.2.2 Plant and Equipment of
SECTION 4.3 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
4) Mixing concrete
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.2.3 Mixing Concrete of SECTION
4.3 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
9.10.2.4 Execution
1) Preparations
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.3.1 Preparation of Concrete of
2) Transport of concrete
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.3.2 Transport SECTION 4.3
3) Placing concrete
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.3.3 Placing Concrete of SECTION
4.3 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
4) Compaction of concrete
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.3.4 Compaction of Concrete of
5) Finishing concrete
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.3.5 Finishing Concrete of
6) Curing and protection
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.3.6 Curing and Protection of
7) Repair of concrete defects
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.3.7 Repair of Surface Defects of
8) Loading
Shall comply with the requirements of Clause 4.3.3.8 Loading of SECTION 4.3
9.10.3 FIRE RESISTANCE STEEL DOORS
9.10.3.1 General
Doors for both cross passages and equipment rooms should be self-closing fire resistance
steel doors having a fire protection rating of at least 1.5 hours according to NFPA 130 –
Standard for Fixed Guideway Transit and Passenger Rail System. The certificate of test for
firing resistance shall be attached with the proposal for the Engineer’s approval prior to
the installation.
The door should at least consist of a steel door itself, a door closer, a door handle with
locks, a fire-resisting glazing vision panel, hinges and a frame.
9.10.3.2 Fire Resistance Steel Doors for Cross Passages
The doors for cross passages should be double swing type. Its dimension shall be designed
to be capable to transfer a particular number of passengers to another tube within a certain
time in case of emergency according to NFPA 130.
9.10.3.3 Fire Resistance Steel Doors for Equipment Rooms

The doors for equipment rooms should be double swing type with specification given. Its
dimension shall be designed to be big enough to allow any equipment which would be
stored in equipment room suitably moved into or moved out of the storage.
9.11 TUNNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEM

9.11.1 GROUNDWATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM
In the drained waterproofing systems, groundwater drainage system comprising pipes and
drainage layers are required to remain open and flowing to prevent the build-up of
hydrostatic pressures. Regular inspections and maintenance of the drainage system are
required to prevent hydrostatic loads rising to a level that could exceed the capacity of
the structure.
In order to drain water, which flows through geotextile behind the waterproofing
membrane, into groundwater drainage system so that it would then be drained out of the
tunnel, the drainage should be installed systematically at the floor of the tunnels. The
system should consist of main drain, side drain and cross drain.
The mechanics of drainage system start from flowing of the water into side drain by gravity
force via geotextile and envelopes. It then would travel through cross drain and discharge
main drain. Eventually, it is drained out of the tunnel.
9.11.1.1 Main Drains
Major role of main drain is to receive all the water from side drain of both sides via cross
drain. PVC pipe grade 8.5 conforming to TIS 17 standard shall be used and enclosed by
reinforced concrete. The location of the drain should be at the centerline of tunnel with
drainage pit of man hole every 50 m. Size of the PVC tube for main drain shall be designed
to be sufficiently capable to drain groundwater out of the tunnel.
Specification of reinforced concrete for main drain shall comply with concrete invert in
SUB-SECTION 9.10.2 OTHER CONCRETE STRUCTURES.
9.11.1.2 Side Drains
Side drain is the first place to collect the water so its component shall consist of envelopes
and geotextile for preventing blockage of the pipe and damages and creating good
permeability around the pipe.
The pipe should be perforated PVC pipe grade 8.5 and shall conform to TIS 17 standard.
Size of the PVC tube for side drain shall be designed to be sufficiently capable to drain
groundwater behind tunnel lining.
The geotextile acting as filter of the drain shall comply with geotextile fleece of SUB-
SECTION 9.9.2.2 MATERIALS of SECTION 9.9 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE.
The envelopes for drainpipes could be ranging from organic and mineral materials, to
synthetic material and mineral fibers. Organic material is mostly fibrous, and includes peat,
coconut fiber, and various organic waste products such as straw, chaff, heather and
sawdust. Mineral materials are mostly used in a granular form; they may be gravel, slag of
various kinds (industrial waste products) or fired clay granules. Synthetic materials may be
in a granular (e.g. polystyrene) or in a fibrous form (e.g. nylon, acryl and polypropylene).
Glass fiber, glass wool and rock wool, which all are mineral fibers, are also used. Any
envelopes to be used in drainage works should be approved by the Engineer prior to the
installation.
9.11.1.3 Cross Drains
Cross drain connects side drain with main drain in every 50 m. It should lie on concrete
blinding all the length. The pipe should be PVC grade 8.5 conforming to TIS 17 standard.
Size of the PVC tube for cross drain shall be designed to be sufficiently capable to drain
groundwater from side drain to main drain.
9.12 TUNNEL UTILITY SYSTEM

9.12.1 GENERAL
It shall be noted that within this section of the documentation the term "provide" shall
mean "the detailed design, manufacture and factory testing, delivery, off loading,
installation, functional testing and integrated testing, commissioning, handover, site staff
training, documentation, maintenance, and warranties."
The design and supply of all elements shall be to the approved internationally recognized
specifications and standards which must be stated at the time of tendering. The designs
shall be fully integrated with compatible components including where these interface with
other Designated Contractors' works.
The Contractor shall undertake complete responsibility for the design, manufacture,
performance, maintenance, and warranty of the equipment and systems supplied under
this Contract.
The Contract includes the provision of all services required in the Contract for tunnel
utilities which are not specifically excluded. The Services covered are those necessary to
permit the railway system to perform its design functions in a safe and efficient manner in
compliance with the requirements of the Specifications and in accordance with modern
International Railway Practice. Equipment and Systems provided shall be compliant with
General Conditions of Contract, National or International Codes and Standards appropriate
to a modern Railway and all relevant Thai National and/or Local Codes and Regulations.
Refer to General Conditions of Contract for hierarchy of compliance in event of conflicting
requirements arising.
9.12.2 SCOPE OF WORKS
The Contractor shall provide the tunnel utility described herein and on the Drawings. These
works include the detailed design, manufacture and factory testing, delivery, off loading,
installation, functional testing and integrated testing, commissioning, handover, staff
training, documentation, maintenance, and warranties. The extent of works shall include,
but not be limited to, the following:
(a) Tunnel Ventilation system
(b) Tunnel Fire fighting System
(c) Tunnel Lighting, including Normal lights, Security lights, Emergency Lights and
Small Power
(d) Environmental Control Systems
(e) Fire Alarm System
(f) Fire Protection System

(g) High Voltage Power Distribution System
(h) Low Voltage Power Distribution System
(i) Emergency Power System
(j) Earthing and Lightning Protection
(k) Lighting and Receptacle.
(l) CCTV System
(m) Telephone Blue Light
(n) SCADA of Tunnel Utility System
(o) Signage/Graphics
(p) Tunnel Control Facilities
(q) Vent buildings
(r) Cable supports, ducts and draw pits for cables.
(s) Fixings on the structure for equipment.
The Contractor shall provide the Tunnel utilities described herein and on the Drawings.
These works include the detailed design, manufacture and factory testing, delivery, off
loading, installation, functional testing and integrated testing, commissioning, handover,
staff training, documentation, maintenance, and warranties. The extent of works shall
include, but not be limited to, the following:
Specifically excluded and to be provided by Designated Contractors are:
(a) SCADA for Train Operation
(b) Trackwork
(c) Communications
(d) Signaling
(e) Rolling stock
9.12.3 TUNNEL VENTILATION SYSTEM

9.12.3.1 General
1) General
This TVS Outline Design Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Special
Conditions of Contract for tunnel utilities system and other documents forming
part of the Contract.
2) Qualifications of Equipment Manufacturer
All materials and equipment to be provided for the TVS shall be of proven design
and shall be provided by manufacturers who have accomplished similar TVS
projects over the last 10 years.
3) Qualification of the Contractor’s Designer
The Contractor shall employ specialist engineers with proven engineering
experience to carry out the computer simulations and engineering design of TVS.
The appointment of the Contractor’s TVS designer shall be subject to consent by
the Engineer.
9.12.3.2 Codes and Standards
1) Local Codes, Regulations and Standards
The design, manufacture, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the
Works shall be governed by all applicable local and international codes,
regulations, standards and requirements as listed below. The Works shall comply
with the various international and local standards and manuals.
In addition to local requirements, TVS designs shall also comply with the following
codes of practice, standards, specifications and manuals international standards
shall take precedence where these standards or requirements are more onerous
than other local codes, regulations and standards.
2) Codes and Standards
The following codes and standards shall apply to the TVS Works:
a) The performance of the Tunnel Ventilation System shall comply with the
ventilation and evacuation guidelines contained in the latest edition, at
time of Contract award, of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Standard 130 for the Design of Fixed Guideway Transit Systems; any non-
compliance shall be consented to by the Engineer.
b) British Standards or other equivalent internationally recognized standards

subject to consent by the Engineer.
c) Tunnel Ventilation system for tunnels are to be based on the current
"Handbook" series published by the American Society of Heating,
Refrigeration and Air Conditioning and the "Subway Environmental Design
Handbook" published under the sponsorship of the United States
Department of Transportation, Urban Mass Transportation Administration.
d) Fans shall be rated in accordance with the "Standard Test Code for Air
Moving Services" and the "Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices"
of the Air Moving and Conditioning Association Inc., USA.
e) Noise criteria shall be as described herein and in the current four volume
"Handbook" series published by the American Society of Heating,
Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
f) The standards to be followed during the design, construction, and
installation of the Tunnel Ventilation System shall be generally as listed,
except where specific requirements are given in the Specification, which
shall take precedence. The Contractor may propose alternative or
additional standards for review by the Engineer at least 60 days before
application.
g) All codes and standards shall be submitted in English language. The
design of any one system shall be to a single code or specification. The
parallel use of different codes for particular items or components shall
not be allowed.
3) Reference International Standards
Title/Reference Description
Anti-Friction Bearings Manufacturers l 9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.;
Association (AFBMA) or equivalent l 11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
standards subject to consent by
the Engineer
Air Moving and Control Association l 210, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating;
(AMCA) or equivalent standards l 250 Laboratory Methods of Testing Jet Tunnel Fans for
subject to consent by the Engineer Performance
l 300 Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans
l 301 Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from
Laboratory Test Data
l 500D Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Ratings
l 500L Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Ratings
l 1011 Certified Ratings Program – Acoustical Duct Silencers
American National Standards l S12.34 Survey Methods for Determination of Sound Power
Institute (ANSI) or equivalent Levels of Noise Sources.
standards subject to consent by l B46.1 Surface Texture, Surface Roughness, Waviness and
the Engineer Lay, Part 1.
l C1 Specification of General Requirements of a Quality
Program;
l S12.36 Survey Methods for Determination of Sound Power
Levels of Noise Sources;
l Z49.1 Safety in Welding and Cutting
l Z55.1 Grey Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment
American Welding Society (AWS) or l D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel
equivalent standards subject to l D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel
consent by the Employer's
Representative
American Society for Testing and l A 36, Structural Steel
Materials (ASTM) or equivalent l A 123, Zinc (Hot Galvanised) Coatings on Products
standards subject to consent by the
Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes,
Engineer
Plates, Bars, and Strip.
l A 193, Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel bolting Materials for
High-Temperature Service
l A 194, Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-
Pressure and High-Temperature Service
l A 239, Locating the Thinnest Spot in Zinc (Galvanised)
Coating on Iron or Steel Articles by the Preece Test
(Copper Sulfate Dip).
l A 276, Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes
l A 525, Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Hot Galvanised) by the
Hot-Dip Process.
l A 588, High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi
(345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to 4 Inch (100 mm) Thick.
l A 666, Authentic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate, and
Flat Bar for Structural Applications
l B 247, Certification for Aluminium Alloy Die Forgings, Hand
Forgings and Rolled Ring Footing.
l B 686, Aluminium Alloy Castings, High Strength
l E 84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
l E 94, Radiographic Testing.
l E 138, Wet Magnetic Particle Inspection.
l E 155, Reference Radiographs for Inspection of Aluminium
and Magnesium Castings.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic l Standard Test Procedure for Airborne Sound
Engineers (IEEE) or equivalent Measurements on Rotating Electric Machinery
standards subject to consent by the l 112, Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Employer's Representative Generators.
l 519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for
Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems.
Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.) or l MIL-P-24441/A, General Specification for (Ships), Paint,
equivalent standards subject to Epoxy Polyamide.
consent by the Employer's l MIL-P-24441/1A, Paint, Epoxy Polyamide, Green Primer,
Representative Formula 150, Type 1.
l MIL-P-24441/2A, Paint, Epoxy Polyamide, Exterior Top
Coat, Haze Grey, Formula 151, Type 1.
l DOD-P-21035A Paint, High Zinc-Dust Content, Galvanising
Repair (Metric)
National Electrical Manufacturer's l ICS-1, General Standards for Industrial Control and
Association (NEMA) or equivalent Systems.
standards subject to consent by the
Engineer l ICS-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation
and Maintenance of Solid-State Control.
l ICS-2, Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and
Assemblies.
l ICS-3, Industrial Systems.
l MG-1, Motors and Generators.

l MG1-12.54 Efficiency
Steel Structures Painting Council l Applicable codes
(SSPC) or equivalent standards
subject to consent by the Engineer
4) TVS Objectives and Scope of Work
a) The objective of the TVS is to promote both passenger comfort and safety
during the expected range of operating conditions. The TVS shall also enable
the continued functioning of the trains’ air-conditioning systems during both
normal and congested train operations. In general, it is intended to provide:
(i) an effective means of controlling smoke flows during emergency
conditions (such that both patrons and employees could evacuate
safely and also to ensure that fire-fighting personnel could reach an
incident location without traversing a smoke-filled path).
(ii) an acceptable environment in the tunnels for the operation of the
trains (including tunnel air quality environment to meet local
environmental protection regulations).
b) The TVS shall provide environmental control of the tunnel sections during normal,
congested, emergency conditions and during maintenance operations.
c) The Works to be executed under the Contract include the design, manufacture,
verification, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning and technical support for
a complete, integrated Tunnel Ventilation System, including all control centers,
fans, dampers, ducts and computer simulations, necessary to deliver the
requirements of this Outline Design Specification.
d) Work Included in the Services
This Outline Design Specification (ODS) describes the minimum standards
applicable to the TVS.
e) The Contractor’s scope work shall comprise of all tunnel ventilation system’s
engineering design, manufacture, delivery, installation, submittals, approvals by
the relevant authorities, training, testing & commissioning, and completion of the
TVS, all in accordance with the requirements of the ODS.
f) The Contractor shall supply services, equipment, and facilities necessary to meet
the requirements of this technical specification, including, but not limited to the
following:
g) Computer Modeling using SES program, all contracts, for this project, tunnel
sections should be conducted in good interface and submission of results.
h) An industry-recognized Subway Environment Simulation (SES) computer program
acceptable to the Employer or the Engineer shall be employed by the Contractor
to aid in design and to verify the adequacy of all systems during normal, congested
and emergency operations and to demonstrate the ability of the system to
provide a tenable environment along the path of egress from a fire incident in
tunnels as required by NFPA 130.
i) As a minimum, the SES program shall generate from the train performance,
thermodynamic, aerodynamic and fire simulations, design output data necessary
to demonstrate compliance with the above.
j) Design, manufacture, delivery, system assurance, installation, testing and
commissioning of the Tunnel Ventilation System;
(i) Control equipment, including accessories / components,
(ii) Tunnel ventilation fans and jet fans;
(iii) Tunnel ventilation dampers
(iv) All cables and cabling necessary for the works
(v) Enclosures and supporting brackets for housing and fixing equipment;
(vi) Power supply and distribution panel, circuit breakers, and isolators;
(vii) All equipment associated with any interfaces required to ensure
operation within the performance requirements;
(viii) Design coordination’s with all related contracts;
(ix) All special test equipment and tools, including data configuration
tools, maintenance tools.
(x) All equipment necessary to carry out factory and on site testing and
commissioning;
(xi) All software, appropriately safety validated, verified and certified, to
meet the requirements of the specification;
(xii) All software and hardware required for data logging;
(xiii) Presentations, reviews and audit support as specified in the

Specification;
(xiv) Interface management as specified in the Specification;
(xv) System operations and maintenance support services;
(xvi) Training for the Employer's Engineers and Training Instructors,
operations staff, maintenance staff and Engineering staff;
(xvii) Decommissioning, removal and/or disposal of Temporary Works;
(xviii) Warranty period after commissioning.
k) Please note that the location of Ventilation Shaft, Vent Building Tunnel Control
Facilities specified in the drawing is only the rough location which can be used as
a guideline only. The contractor should carry out the following tasks:
(i) Conduct field investigation in order to verify exact location of the Fan
Plant.
(ii) Size and building area of Fan Plant should be sufficient to
accommodate fan, fan controller, small power generator set and other
equipment.
(iii) Process and coordinate with MEA for the detailed installation
procedures of MV feeder for the fan.
(iv) Conduct route surveying for constructing access roadway to the
project site which will be used as a haul road during construction
course.
9.12.3.3 Design Requirements
1) General
The following design requirements shall be adopted by the Contractor and are in
addition to those specified in the Employer’s Requirements.
The Contractor shall submit a list of all design review documents for the review
of the Engineer.
The tunnel ventilation system shall be designed to provide for the following:
i) Heat and train exhaust removal during normal, congested and emergency
conditions and during maintenance operations.
ii) Tunnel air velocity control.
iii) Draft pressure relief.
iv) Fresh air supply.

v) Condensation control.
vi) Smoke control and removal during Emergency (fire) conditions.
vii) Tunnel air quality environment to meet local environment protection
regulations.
viii) Means of Ventilation
Ventilation shall be provided as follows:
(i) Normal conditions – train piston action and/ or mechanical
ventilation;
(ii) Congested conditions – mechanical ventilation (fan capacity and
operation mode are to be determined by computer simulation
analysis).
(iii) Emergency conditions – mechanical ventilation (fan capacity and
operation mode to be determined by computer simulation analysis).
(iv) Congested conditions means the period when any train is stationary
in the tunnel.
(v) Fan operation shall be activated manually by the operator at the
Tunnel Facility Building or automatically by the linear type heat
detection cable fixed to the roof of the tunnel.
(vi) System Sizing
Normal conditions
During normal operations tunnel ventilation shall be by train piston
action only assisted by mechanical ventilation as necessary.
The Contractor shall demonstrate that the train piston effects
result in an efficient the ventilation system scheme for removing
heat and exhaust.
The design of tunnel ventilation systems shall be such that during
normal operation an average tunnel temperature is limited to a
maximum of 40°C without exceeding a local temperature of 45°C
at any point with an outdoor ambient temperature of 35°C.
In the design of draught relief shafts and tunnel portals, all

necessary steps shall be taken to minimize the effects of rapid
pressure changes on passenger comfort.
The pressure changes should lie within the following limits both on
the trains and in the stations:
- maximum isolated pulse not to exceed 3 kPa within a period
of 4s.
- maximum repeated pulses not to exceed 0.7 kPa within a
period of 1.7s.
Draught relief shafts (or vent shaft) sectional area shall be sized
and verified by calculations.
Congested and Emergency (fire) conditions
Mechanical ventilation shall be sized to provide the following
capabilities:
- Maintain an average air temperature a maximum of 5°C over
outdoor ambient conditions during congested condition,
without exceeding a local temperature of 45°C at any point in
tunnel, which is the cut-off temperature for the train A/C
system.
- Maintain an average air quality to meet local environmental
protection regulations during congested condition.
- Produce a stream of non-contaminated air having a minimum
air velocity of 2.5 m/s and a maximum of 5 m/s in any section
of the tunnel in order to maintain a smoke free path for
passenger evacuation during emergency conditions. These air
velocities shall be taken in the annulus between train and
tunnel wall. Maximum air velocity in the emergency mode
anywhere in the system shall not exceed 11.0 m/s.
- Expose passengers in exit pathways to a temperature not
higher than 50°C during emergency conditions for not longer
than a few minutes.
- Cater for the fire loading of the trains. Sufficient air shall be
provided to ensure a relatively smoke free route for safe
evacuation.
- Shafts terminating in areas occupied by the public shall be

sized for a maximum airflow velocity of 2.5 m/s at the
termination. Terminations in unoccupied areas shall be sized
for a maximum airflow velocity of 5.0 m/s. Shaft terminations
shall not be located in any area where airflow can be
obstructed. Shafts shall be arranged such that recirculation of
air between different systems is not possible.
- Fans, cables, motors and all their appurtenances shall be
capable of handling minimum 250°C air at the maximum
specified air volume (this fire rate shall up to CFD simulation)
and total pressure for a minimum of two hours without
electrical, mechanical or structural failure, in either the
forward or reverse mode.
2) Design process
The Contractor shall adopt a structured design process, including, but not limited
to:
a) Preliminary and final (definitive) design and reviews with the Engineer for
TVS
b) Preliminary, and final (definitive) design and reviews with the Engineer, for
the software design, including but not limited to: the software requirements
specification, software architecture, logic flow diagrams, prototypes, and
verification and test approach, computer modeling.
c) Fan sizing and capacity calculations shall be based upon Local climatic
condition data as listed by Thai meteorological department.
3) Design data input
The Contractor shall liaise with the respective Contractors to confirm the current
status of design input information as follows, but not limited to:
a) Train weight empty (including locomotive and carriages)
b) Numbers of passengers
c) Headways
d) Train running curve showing speed vs. distance
e) Regenerative effectiveness
f) Train A/C capacity (per car and per train)
The project is involved with both freight and passenger trains, for which contractor
shall perform computer analysis simulations.
4) Preliminary design
The Contractor shall prepare a system-wide model of the TVS system using the
Tender Phase information from all relevant sources, information from their own
design criteria, and information from the Employer. The results of this preliminary
design phase will confirm the design proposed by the Contractor as base design
criteria for their TVS systems.
The minimum information to be passed from the preliminary design phase will
include:
a) A listing of all computer model input data relevant to the tunnel sections
b) Proposed Fan capacities and vent shaft sectional area
c) Tunnel congestion and emergency airflows and tunnel residual pressures
d) Tunnel vent shaft resistance for draught relief and fan operation
5) Pre-final (intermediate analysis) design
The input data used by the Contractor for the tunnels and shafts will be
progressively refined. The results of this phase will confirm that a co-ordinated
design is proposed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit the
Intermediate Analysis Report.
6) Final design
The Final Design Phase will incorporate all the changes and comments from the
Pre-Final Design Phase. This Phase will culminate with complete design
submissions including:
a) Drawings,
b) TVS Report,
c) Coordinated among contractors, mode tables,
d) Shaft/fan pressure loss calculations to verify fan characteristics.
e) The Contractor shall submit their system-wide computer modeling report
verifying the TVS capability to handle normal, congested and emergency
operations.
7) Software requirements
All software shall conform to the CENELEC/standard EN50128 or equivalent.
Software validation and verification shall conform to the IEEE Standards 1012-1998
and 1059-1993 or equivalent.
The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer the correct application of the
standards specifically detailing the allocation of software integrity levels for all
software. The Contractor shall submit with the Design Plan for the review of the
Engineer a list identifying all software that will be maintainable and re-configurable
by the Employer.
8) Design documentation
The Contractor shall, in addition to the documentation requirements specified in
the Employer's Requirements, supply, as a minimum, the following hardware and
software design documentation:
a) conceptual design specifications, details and drawings and tunnel
ventilation computer simulation report;
b) preliminary design specifications, details and drawings and tunnel
ventilation computer simulation report;
c) final design specifications, details and drawings and tunnel ventilation
computer simulation report;
The submission of the above documentation shall be included in the Submission
Programme.
The Contractor design submission must be approved by the Employer prior to
proceeding to the next design stage.
9.12.3.4 Tunnel Ventilation System Design
1) Tunnel Ventilation System Description
The Contractor shall provide a detailed, tunnel sections, system-wide computer
simulation study to evaluate the air velocity, size of draught relief shafts and
operational scenarios under normal, congested, emergency conditions and routine
tunnel maintenance during Traffic block time (non-revenue period).
The Contractor shall determine the tunnel ventilation requirements with the use
of the SES computer simulation program to determine the individual fan
capacities.
The Contractor shall determine the size and location of draught relief shafts.
Draught relief shafts shall be provided for train piston action pressure relief and
mechanical ventilation.
The Contractor shall calculate the critical air velocity required to prevent
backlayering using the calculation procedure described in Section 9 of the Subway
Environmental Design Handbook, US Department of Transportation, Urban Mass
Transit Administration.
Jet fan or equivalents system shall be considered to supplement the TVS if
applicable at required locations in tunnels and portals where the regular TVFs
cannot control the air flow and consequent the smoke in case of fire, the
Contractor to verify the consolidated applications of TVFs and jet fans by
computer simulation analysis.
The Contractor may consider adopting multiple vent shafts proposed in tunnel
sections for tunnel ventilation. Necessary engineering analysis shall be conducted
to verify the design concept.
The Contractor shall provide a TVS design in which all equipment in tunnel shall
be operated in coordination under normal, congestion and emergency operations.
Bypass dampers shall be provided to allow airflow between the tunnel and the
surface during periods for normal operation.
Isolation dampers shall be provided to allow airflow between the tunnel and the
surface during emergency operation.
The cable used for the feeders from the essential bus to the fan motor control
center and including all inter connecting feeder cables from the control center to
the motors shall be rated for operation at minimum 250 °C for two hours without
failure (this fire rate shall up to CFD simulation).
2) Design Life
All TVS equipment, cables, and wiring shall be designed, manufactured and
installed so as to secure a service life of 30 years, subject to maintenance being
carried out in the manner laid down by the Contractor.
3) Computer Simulation
The Contractors shall design the TVS in accordance with the Subway
Environmental Design Handbook, published by US Department of Transportation,
Urban Mass Transit Administration. The latest version of the Subway Environment
Simulation Computer Program shall be used by the Contractor to model the

tunnel environment.
The computer program shall use train performance, civil design data and
ventilation plant characteristics to demonstrate that the ventilation system will
meet the normal, congested and emergency situations and for maintenance during
traffic block period. The tunnel air quality shall be simulated to meet local
environmental protection regulations.
The results of the analysis shall include the no-fire (or cold) air velocities that can
be measured during commissioning to confirm that the mechanical ventilation
system, as built, meets the requirements determined by the analysis.
A Fan-Damper Operation Table shall be prepared for integration within SCADA of
tunnel utility system.
Where necessary, CFD shall be performed for tunnels with more complex
configuration such as crossover section area (if any) prior to finalizing the
engineering design to verify the design achieved concerning the distribution of heat
and smoke in a major fire at relevant locations, and the ability to maintain a
tenable environment for the purpose of system evacuation.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide any information necessary
regarding his design to permit this work to be accurately performed. The
Contractor shall embody the requirements resulting from the simulation into his
design.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Signalling, and Rolling Stock Contractors
to obtain the necessary data for the development of the simulation model so that
this work shall be accurately performed.
The personnel employed by the Contractor or the Contractor's Sub-consultant
should have conducted computer modeling as described in this Section for at
least two underground rail transit systems or tunnel railway system within the past
five years. Resumes of the personnel and descriptions of the systems designed
will be submitted for approval.
9.12.3.5 Tunnel Ventilation Control System
1) System Description
Tunnel ventilation system controls are electric/electronic with provisions for
automatic, manual, local and remote control. The tunnel ventilation operate in
automatic mode in congested conditions.
The tunnel ventilation control system design philosophy embraces the provision
of a multi-alternate facility and will operate in a hierarchical manner. In principle
it will be possible to control any piece of equipment either from the relevant VCP,
or from the SCADA of tunnel utility system work station in the Tunnel Facility
Building. However control will only be made possible from one location at any
one time, by means of assigning authorities to each control location. The location
where the authority is assigned will be indicated in the other locations.
The hierarchy is as follows:
a) Operation of fans ‘centrally’ from control room at Tunnel Facility Building.
b) Override provision for operation of fans ‘remotely’ by the fire rescue service
authority from the Fireman’s Panel, located at each tunnel portal.
c) Back-up for operation of fans manually, ‘locally’ from the Ventilation
Control Panel (VCP).
From each VCP it will be possible to control all the equipment associated with
the panel, but only if the panel mode switch has been set to Local. This mode
will disable all automatic and remote controls.
From the SCADA of tunnel utility system work station in Tunnel Facility Building it
will be possible to control all the equipment associated with that tuunel, but only
if, for each electrical room in tunnel the relevant VCP has been set to Remote
mode, and only if the SCADA of tunnel utility system work station in the Tunnel
Facility Building has delegated control to that tunnel portal.
From the SCADA of tunnel utility system work station in the Tunnel Facility Building
it will be possible to control any of the tunnel ventilation equipment, but only if
control of a tunnel has not been delegated down to the electrical rooms in tunnel,
and only if the relevant VCP has not been switched to Local mode.
In addition, it will be possible to accept authority for remote control of the tunnel
ventilation system from the Tunnel Facility Building, and to hand back that
authority to the Tunnel Facility Building.
Note : All these levels of Authority are valid only if the Local/Remote switch
of the Fireman panel is in the Remote position. In the local position this
disables and override all other controls.
The tunnel ventilation control system shall include all hardware and software
needed to monitor and control the tunnel ventilation equipment.
The system shall include a local PLC to manage both in manual and automatic
modes tunnel ventilation equipment of each shaft and provide local/remote
facilities for monitoring and control.
Remote control and monitoring of all tunnel ventilation equipment shall be
available from the Tunnel Facility Building by means of SCADA of tunnel utility
system workstations.
The ventilation control system shall be designed to enable the equipment to be
set up manually in any combination except as restricted by any necessary safety
interlocks. It shall also control the equipment automatically as defined below:
a) During normal and congested operations the equipment will be controlled
automatically.
b) During emergency operations the equipment will be set into operation
manually by the operator at the Tunnel Facility Building, with a
recommendation made to the operator by the SCADA of tunnel utility
system.
c) If no fire has occurred, the ventilation will operate automatically based on
the train-piston effect action during normal operations, and forced
ventilation for congested conditions. The TVS control is also monitoring
tunnel air quality and is activating TVS automatically to maintain air quality,
except for fire incidents.
d) The following Safety Interlocks shall be provided but not be limited to:
(i) Tunnel ventilation fans shall not be started unless their associated
fan isolation damper, and at least one tunnel isolation damper, has
been confirmed to be open (or at least partially open, in case of
partial damper actuator failure). The jet fans shall be operated in
accordance with operation modes.
(ii) Draught relief dampers to be closed when either fan is running.
(iii) No fan will be allowed to run when both sets of tunnel dampers
are closed.
(iv) If both fans run, they shall be in same direction.
(v) Fans or dampers should not be operational when the system is
under maintenance.
e) The hardware and software necessary for automatic control of the
ventilation system equipment shall be contained in each local VCP with
the SCADA of tunnel utility system providing central control and monitoring
facilities.
f) The Contractor shall coordinate as appropriate with SRT and the related
contractors to design the tunnel ventilation system control concept.
2) LV Electrical Services
Dual independent ‘A’ & ‘B’ supplies will be provided for each MCC.
3) Control System Transmission Network
High speed is essential for the operation of the TVS and semiconductor memory
is preferred. Hard disks shall be provided for data storage including, but not limited
to, time stamped alarms data prior to transmission to Tunnel Facility Building,
operating parameters and software. Volatile memory shall be protected by battery
and charger units provided by the Contractor. The TVS Control System shall be
supported by the self-diagnostic function on the hardware of each circuit board.
High level control oriented language shall be used for the application programs
with provisions for direct functions of arithmetic and logical operations, data and
program control, data conversion, time delay, dead-band, integration, and other
special functions necessary to perform closed-loop control and analogue/digital
conversions.
It shall be designed to operate without error in an environment of 95% relative
humidity and 40°C and vibration due to train movement and shock and vibration
during operation and shall have a degree of protection of not less than IP55. The
TVS Control System shall have a meantime between failure figure of not less that
5 years.
The hardware shall be configured of modular power supply units of 230 V a.c.,
with maximum power consumption not more than 5 kVA, and functional circuit
boards for the CPU, memory and programmable logic controller (PLC). Each circuit
board shall have individual alarm indicators for hardware failure. It is preferable
that all circuit cards shall have the same dimension and be installed in a standard
card frame which facilitates individual card removal for servicing.
The LSC shall be auto-restarted after power recovery.
4) PLC CPU
The computer system shall be of industrial type and consists of two identical
central processing units (CPUs). Both CPUs shall be equipped with their own hard
disk unit so that they stand as two independent computer systems operating in a
duplex mode. On detection of trouble, the faulty computer shall be detached,

and the standby computer, which shall be of a hot standby unit, shall be switched
on-line by the system software. No on-line data loss shall occur during switchover.
The microprocessor speed shall be sufficiently high such that the operational
requirements as specified shall be met satisfactorily.
The Contractor may offer alternative ‘hot standby/100% parallel redundancy
configurations for the Employers consideration.
5) Failsafe Positions
Upon loss of control power, tunnel ventilation systems shall fall back to the
highest level of control available, which shall be the default emergency condition
operation mode.
Upon the failure of a particular fan, the associated fan damper shall close.
9.12.3.6 Interfaces
The TVS design interacts with a wide range of other disciplines throughout the project. It
is the duty of the Contractor to establish lines of communication with representatives of
these disciplines to ensure a fully coordinated design.
These interfaces are presented in the following table:
Interfaces with disciplines Description
Alignment Location of vent shafts and intakes
Civil design Accommodation of ventilation equipment (e.g. sound
attenuators, fans, dampers, transition pieces) supporting
steel work and fixings, geometry to achieve low pressure
losses, ducting, portal sections for transient pressure
control, shaft intakes, surface finishes.
Architectural Aspects plus plant room and shaft intake louver design
E&M Power supplies, control system, maintenance, fire loads
in tunnels, heat emission from fixed equipment in
tunnels.
RoIling Stock Train exhaust and pollutant emission, Heat emission
from traction inefficiencies, brakes, on board equipment
(lighting, a/c plant etc), line transmission losses,
aerodynamicdrag/ rollingresistance, regenerative brake
design, fire loads
Commercial Train throughout, numbers of passengers
Interfaces with disciplines Description

Operations Timetable for normal operations, operations
management grid, passenger evacuation in an emergency
Signalling Control system
Communications Control system
Statutory Authorities Liaise as required by Contract to gain acceptance of
design
Contractors Liaise on all aspects of the Ventilation Design to achieve
coordination between contractors covering tunnel
sections of the system
Interface to signaling system
Interface between the Tunnel Ventilation Control system (Linear Heat Detection
System), and the Signalling system are provided by the SCADA system, which represent
the only common interface.
9.12.3.7 Tunnel Linear Heat Detection System (LHD)
The LHD shall be installed along tunnels and looped to local PLC unit, located in Vent
buildings. The use of LHD to detect high temperature shall be combined with CCTV units
for locating any fire incident. The installation of LHD in the tunnels shall be well
coordinated with train supplier.
1) Materials
All materials and equipment to be provided for the LHD shall be of proven design
and shall be provided by manufacturers who have accomplished similar Tunnel
Linear Heat Detection System (LHD) system projects over the last 5 years.
The (LHD) system shall comprise:
(i) Fiber optic LHD cable along the tunnels
(ii) LHD system control panel at each station
The LHD shall perform the following functions:
(i) Identifies high temperature locations during congested operations, and
(ii) Identifies the fire location during emergency operations along the
tunnel.
The LHD system shall be connected to the corresponding zone control panel at
Vent buildings, and at the Tunnel Ventilation control room for local control, status,
and alarm.
The LHD system shall monitor a length of tunnel the distance towards the
adjacent Vent buildings in both directions.
The LHD system shall reports the zone of an over heat or fire condition anywhere
along its length.
The LHD system includes voltage free relay contacts to interface to the
corresponding control panel, and shall also provides analog output signals (4-
20mA) to report an average tunnel temperature, and maximum temperature to
the SCADA system.
In the tunnel traffic area, the LHD cable (or fiber-optic sensor cable) shall provide
for the functionality of measurement of the tunnel ambient temperature shall
fulfill the following requirements:
(i) Immunity to electromagnetic interference of all kinds, and does not
contain any electronics
(ii) A sensor cable designed for very robust applications and therefore is
resistant to all environmental influences such as temperature, pressure,
high humidity or water, dirt, dust and exhaust fumes containing a high
amount of corrosive material.
(iii) It shall not contain any elements protruding from the tunnel roof.
(iv) The sensor cable shall be maintenance free.
The LHD system shall continuously acquire the following measuring data:
(i) Actual absolute temperature of the resolution points (max. temperature
alarm)
(ii) Temperature gradient of the resolution points
(iii) Temperature difference between the measuring point and the zone
average
(iv) The above parameters shall be fully programmable per zone
(v) The system shall respond to convection heat as well to radiated heat.
(vi) Adjustable Spatial resolution
The LHD system shall have simulation program for testing of the different
configurations and interface with an open platform operating system such as
Window 10 or higher.
The LHD Cable shall meet the following minimum requirements:
(i) 2 multimode glass fiber 62.5/1 25 micron in high grade steel tube
(ii) Insulation: HDPE, halogen free, red colour
(iii) Temperature range: 30°C to + 90°C, up to +120°C per one hour.
(iv) Service life 30 years
2) Description of Operation - Congested
During congested operations, when the tunnel temperature reaches the alarming
temperature of 45°C, the high temperature location will be identified by the LHD
cable continuously affixed to the running tunnel roof. A digital output signal
(voltage-free contact) will be sent to the tunnel ventilating system control panel
for automatic actuated jet fans and tunnel ventilation fans in push-pull operations.
When the tunnel temperature falls below the alarming temperature, the LHD
system will be restored automatically to normal condition.
3) Description of Operation - Emergency
During emergency operations, when the tunnel temperature rises to the alarming
temperature of 50°C, or when the rate-of-rise of the temperature increase exceeds
a value of 12°C /min, the LHD cable continuously affixed to the running tunnel
roof will identify the fire location. A digital output signal (voltage-free contact) will
be sent to the fire control panel at the corresponding Tunnel Facility Building
control panel for manual jet fans and tunnel ventilation fans actuation.
When the tunnel temperature falls below the temperature alarm set point, the
LHD system will remain in alarming mode until the LHD system is reset manually
via control panel.
9.12.3.8 Performance Requirements
1) General
Environmental Design Conditions:
a) The outside air design conditions
Season: Summer
Dry Bulb Temperature: 35 °C
Wet Bulb Temperature: 25.4°C
Atmospheric pressure: 101.3 KPa
b) The tunnel inside air quality requirement

CO: <150 ppm
SO2: <150 ppm
2) Normal Operating Conditions
Normal operating conditions are the TVS operational modes that are in effect
when the movement of SRT trains is according to schedule and the flow of
passengers and freights into and out of the tunnels is unobstructed.
The main source of ventilation for the tunnels, during normal operating conditions,
will be the piston-generated airflows produced by moving trains.
Openings in the tunnel ceiling and the vent shaft shall be located so as to achieve
the draft pressure relief effects to design accordingly, piston-generated airflows
produced by moving trains.
The Contractor shall closely co-ordinate with the designated contractors.
3) Congested Operating Conditions
Congested operating conditions are the TVS operational modes corresponding to
situations when delays disrupt the movement of SRT trains. These delays will
likely result in the idling of one or more trains in various tunnel segments or
stations for extended periods of time. The tunnel ventilation condition against
which the Contractor's computer analyses for congested train operations should
be measured is a maximum stratified tunnel air temperature of 45 °C and air
quality in tunnel.
The need for a distinct ventilation analysis being conducted for congested train
operations is the possibility that excessively warm tunnel air might enter the
condensers of the vehicle air-conditioning systems and smoke from locomotive
will impact the passenger environment. The recommended mechanical response
for preventing the accumulation of warm tunnel air and poor quality air around
idling trains is to activate the TVS in a push-pull mode. The TVS would be operated
so that a steady flow of fresh air is passed over the idling vehicles. To generate
the push-pull effect, the TVS would be operated so as to move the air through
the tunnel in the direction the train travels.
Because the problem of warm tunnel air entering the vehicle air-conditioning
condensers is a local one (occurring in the above car area only), the computer
analysis of the Congestion mode shall account for temperature stratification. In
the event that the tunnel air temperature, in the vicinity of the condenser inlets
exceeds 45 °C, the air-conditioning units are expected to begin “unloading” – a

condition when the efficiency of the system is drastically reduced too the point
that there is no more cooling effect for the passengers onboard.
The tunnel inside air quality shall be maintained to local environmental protection
regulations.
4) Emergency conditions
Emergency conditions are the TVS operational modes for any variety of
occurrences (including vehicle malfunctions, derailments or fires) that may result
in a smoke condition somewhere in a SRT tunnel. Emergency conditions will lead
to a planned, semi-automated response from both the TVFs and Jet Fans will
likely require the evacuation of patrons under environmentally acceptable
conditions. The design tunnel ventilation condition for emergencies is to control
smoke flows to the extent that a safe evacuation route is created for the
passengers of an incident train. The Contractor’s design shall consider the max.
number of train in a given tunnel section control over the direction of spread of
smoke emanating from a vehicle fire within the tunnel can be assumed if the
operation of the TVS is sufficient to produce the critical annular air velocity
required to prevent smoke from back layering.
While preventing backlayering (and thus, controlling the direction of smoke flow)
in the incident tunnel, the TVS must operate within three constraints: a minimum
annular air velocity in the tunnel evacuation path, a maximum allowable air
velocity in the tunnel evacuation path and a maximum allowable temperature in
that same path. The maximum allowable temperature in the tunnel evacuation
path must not exceed 50 °C.
The train fire heat release rate is assumed to be 200 MW. The Contractor may
submit to the Engineer for review and approval another value based on confirmed
train components. The submittal shall include the calculations used to derive the
proposed fire heat release rate.
The operation of the TVS for emergency tunnel conditions, like that of congested train
operations, will be designed to generate a push-pull effect in the incident tunnel.
5) Electro-magnetic compatibility
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with M&E Contractor and comply with the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Policy to ensure that the frequencies and
bandwidths employed in the Tunnel Ventilation System will not fall into the
frequencies known to be major sources of interference.
6) Structural integrity and durability

a) The Contractor shall provide a TVS to meet the conditions under which the
system shall be required to operate.
b) The TVS and enclosing facilities such as vent shafts, walls and doors shall
be structurally sound and adequate to withstand the pressures to which
dampers and fans shall be subjected.
c) The TVS as supplied shall consider the corrosive environment and provide
for compatible material for all dampers, fans and motors
d) TVS vent shafts shall be located to prevent recirculation between systems
at the openings to atmosphere.
7) Noise criteria
Noise level criteria will need to be developed for each fan plant. Consideration
will need to be given to local noise criteria and the placement of shaft outlets.
For the purpose of Tender Stage the following suggested guidelines are provided:
Noise emanating from tunnel ventilation installations shall not exceed the
following levels:
Area Noise Measurement Noise Level
Location
Urban, residential Nearest property line 50dBA
Urban, mixed Nearest property line 55dBA
Urban, non-residential Nearest property line 65dBA
Industrial Nearest property line 65dBA
Tunnel* Tunnel 80dBA
* For operation of tunnel ventilation system under congested traffic conditions

or smoke control in an emergency, train noise shall not been considered. For
normal operations, the tunnel is also assumed to maintain at a maximum of
80dBA noise level.
Nearest property line is at the vertical face of the Right of Way, plus the required
set-back, with the distance measured horizontally from the louver.
These values should be considered applicable during normal operation of the

railway. During emergency or train congestion situations, which are considered
special.
Operation of tunnel ventilation fans and jet fans during Engineering maintenance
hours after normal operation hours will be anticipated. The maximum external
noise level as stated above will be complied with during this operation.
8) Pressure transients
Both the normal operation of SRT trains and the potential operation of the Tunnel
Ventilation Fans will have an impact upon the design of the tunnel and relevant
facilities. Facilities include vent shafts, doors, walls, and fixtures along the
trackway. The facilities will experience the pressure loading as trains enter/depart
tunnel at the design headway (at a significant speed); one loading being equivalent
to the pressure variation over a train headway. They shall withstand at least
200,000 cycles per year.
1) Installation plan and program
The Contractor shall submit a Construction and Installation Plan for the review of
the Engineer 90 days prior to the start of Installation on Site.
2) Method statement
The Method Statements shall be submitted to the Engineer for review at least 30
days prior to the installation activity commencing On-Site.
3) Contractor’s resident staff
The Contractor shall ensure that a qualified Representative is available on-Site for
the duration of the On-Site Works during normal working hours and on-call to
arrive on Site within 30 minutes at all other times.
The Contractor’s Representative shall have sufficient authority to progress the
Contractor’s work on Site.
The Contractor’s Representative shall be competent and qualified to act on behalf
of the Contractor, and provide upon request information that may include:
(i) current progress of the Works;
(ii) planned work for the next 5 weeks;
(iii) audit and inspection reports;
(iv) health and safety information; and

(v) documents and records pertaining to the Works.
4) Drawings and records
The Contractor shall provide 3 copies of all drawings in A3 size, bound into circuit
books.
The Contractor shall ensure that, at each equipment location, an as-built copy of
the Site documentation is provided. This documentation shall include as a
minimum:
(i) circuit wiring book;
(ii) equipment mode tables; and
(iii) operation and maintenance manuals.
The circuit wiring books shall include as a minimum the following information:
(i) cubicle and rack profiles;
(ii) plant room layout;
(iii) interface and boundary schedules with Project Contractors;
(iv) through circuits;
(v) power supply arrangement;
(vi) earthing & bonding arrangement; and
(vii) cable circuit information.
The Contractor shall ensure that the as-built cabling infrastructure is fully
documented and accurate at the time of substantial completion of the Section.
The documentation shall include:
(i) schematic of the cable routes;
(ii) location of cable joints;
(iii) cable types;
(iv) installed dates;
(v) test data; and
(vi) core plan indicating the circuit and function of each core.
The Contractor shall be responsible for adding to all of the Combined Services
Drawings with cable installation details and the timely supply of these marked up
drawings to the Engineer for overall coordination.
5) Earthing
The Contractor shall provide at each equipment room earth bars that shall be
connected to the main earthing system. Two separate earthing points shall be
provided, one for chassis and one for signal reference. The earth bars shall be
used as common points for all earthing in that location.
6) Asset identification
The Contractor shall submit an asset database for review by the Engineer. The
database shall contain the complete asset listing for the Tunnel Ventilation
System.
The database shall be designed with a minimum of the following information:
(i) asset details;
(ii) failure history;
(iii) date installed; and
(iv) date(s) tested.
All equipment and software, down to the line replaceable unit, shall have a
unique identification number that is capable of being identified electronically and
manually.
9.12.3.10 Verification, Testing and Commissioning
1) General requirements
The Contractor shall put in place a full testing regime to demonstrate that all the
requirements of the Specification are met.
All TVS equipment including fans, dampers, louvers and attenuators shall be
tested according to method recommended by AMCA and the tests shall be carried
out by experienced and qualified commissioning engineer, the appointment of the
proposed personnel and test procedure shall be submitted for approval by the
Employer.
All the tests shall be carried out by the Contractor. The Engineer reserves the right
to carry out any additional tests he considers necessary to satisfy himself that the
System meets the requirements of the Specification.
The Contractor shall support the Engineer additional tests as necessary. The
Contractor’s support shall include, but not be limited to:
(i) provision of test equipment;
(ii) attendance of competent staff; and
(iii) provision of test procedures.
The Contractor shall submit a Testing and Commissioning program for the Engineer
review within 12 months from the Date for Commencement of the Works.
The Contractor shall provide details of the testing activities as specified in the
Specification in the Testing and Commissioning program
2) Tests on completion
On completion of the testing regime given in the Employer's Requirements
Manufacturing, Installation and Testing, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility
to restore the Tunnel Ventilation System to full operational use following site
acceptance testing (SAT).
During SAT, all interfaces with external systems to the Tunnel Ventilation System
shall be tested.
Tests on completion shall constitute the necessary tests to demonstrate that the
System meets the performance requirements of the Specification.
The plan and methodology for each test shall be developed by the Contractor
and reviewed by the Engineer no less than 120 days before the start of the test.
All tests including failures occurring during the Tests on Completion shall be
recorded in a test log.
The Contractor shall maintain and analyze test logs on a daily basis, and
summarize them on a weekly basis, to provide the following information:
(i) total accumulated operating time per equipment type;
(ii) total accumulated failures of the system per equipment type with details
of each failure; and
(iii) total accumulated repair and restore time for the failures of the system.
9.12.3.11 Operation and Maintenance Support

1) General
The Contractor shall ensure that the design of the software and hardware of the
Tunnel Ventilation System is supportable throughout the service life of the System
to address, as a minimum, the following:
(i) design errors in the System;
(ii) operational changes;
(iii) environmental changes; and
(iv) changes in infrastructure.
During the Defects Liability Period maintenance will be conducted by the
Employer with the support of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall ensure that in order to support the Employer during the DLP,
personnel are available with the relevant skills and level of competence.
The Contractor shall immediately inform the Employer upon it becoming apparent
that the quality or supply of materials and components is or is likely to be
affected, and without delay submit to the Engineer for review its proposals for
alternative sources of supply.
2) Maintenance during defects liability period
During the DLP the Contractor shall support the Authority with sufficient trained
and competent personnel.
Such persons shall have their generic competence established and must
demonstrate their specific competence and knowledge in the particular systems,
environment and procedures.
The Contractor shall provide evidence of specific competence and knowledge,
which shall include:
(i) assessment and certified training in particular software applications and
operations;
(ii) recording of competence and work in the license holders logbook; and
(iii) receiving or in receipt of sufficient and current exposure to the area of
work that the holder is licensed for.
Routine spot checks on licensing may be carried out from time to time by the
Engineer qualified personnel on the proficiency of the Contractor's staff.
As part of the Defects Liability Management Plan, the Contractor shall detail the
management and organization to be provided during the DLP.
Should the Contractor discover inconsistencies between the maintenance
drawings and documentation and the installed equipment, the Contractor shall
correct all such errors within two weeks.
3) Support documentation
Routine and corrective maintenance procedures shall be supplied for all
equipment. The format shall be as follows:
(i) uniform format and layout irrespective of equipment supplier;
(ii) color coding for each activity;
(iii) cross referenced to the Operation and Maintenance Manuals; and
(iv) document control information.
The procedures shall be submitted for review by the Engineer. The following shall
be included as a minimum:
(i) frequency of maintenance;
(ii) type of maintenance;
(iii) the equipment identification;
(iv) safety precautions to be observed;
(v) step by step guide to the maintenance required; and
(vi) explanatory diagrams.
9.12.3.12 Spare Parts, Special Tools & Test Equipment
1) General
During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall provide free of cost all
materials including consumables, unit exchange spares and emergency spares
required for maintenance (routine and breakdown) of the Tunnel Ventilation
System provided under the Contract. The provision of spares during DLP excludes
any spares / consumable required for routine / breakdown maintenance or
operation before the commission of revenue services the contractor shall supply
the spares, jigs and fixtures materials not later than 6 weeks before the
commissioning of revenue services. A list of such spares and materials require for
maintenance during the Defects Liability Period. (to be provided free of cost by
the Contractor)
If these spares are not consumed during the Defects Liability Period, these shall
become the property of the Employer at the end of Defects Liability Period.
2) Tools and test equipment
The Contractor shall provide free of cost six weeks before start of trial running
special tools and test equipment which are essential for day to day use in both
corrective and preventative maintenance and for workshop use in the overhaul of
all modules and units likely to be required over the full service life of the
installation. The Contractor shall propose a schedule of all tools and equipment
with details of calibration.
3) Spares list
The Contractor shall submit along with the tender a schedule of spare parts
required for EMS duly indicating, for each item of spares, its description, part
number, drawing number, lead time, shelf life and number of units required for
the ten years (beyond DLP) as well as for the expected life of EMS, principal as
well as secondary sources of supply and also the unit price of each spare with
escalation clause.
This schedule shall include all types of consumable, unit exchange and
emergency spares. The Contractor shall also advise upon recommended inventory
having regard to the lead time of the respective items.
All spare parts as mentioned above shall be provided by the Contractor 6 weeks
before commencement of trial running.
(i) submit to the Engineer a list of spares required for the life of the System.
(ii) base the spares calculations on the reliability and availability data and
the criticality of the equipment.
(iii) submit to the Engineer for review the calculations and spares list.
(iv) Submit to the Engineer a Cardex system for easy identification of spares.
(v) The Spares list shall be grouped by subsystem, test equipment and
special tools as applicable for stocking identification. have detailed
description with drawing references and correlation with the maintenance
manuals.
4) Second sourcing
The Contractor shall identify principal and second-source suppliers that can
supply the systems and sub-system spares listed. The Contractor shall make the
second-source supplier information available to the Engineer at the time of
submission of the final design.
5) Long lead times
The Contractor shall identify the lead times for all spare parts. Parts with long lead
times shall be identified as such to the Engineer in the spares list.
6) Routine change
In the event that any item of the supply requires to be routinely changed or
calibrated, regardless of whether it appears in the spares list or not, it shall be
identified to the Engineer together with the routine change interval.
7) Shelf life
In the event that any of the spares identified have a particular shelf life or special
storage requirement, this shall be made known to the Engineer with the
submission of the spares list, including the necessary action for disposal or storage.
8) Identification and configuration control
All spare equipment identified on the spares list, shall conform to Identification
and Configuration Control requirements established by the Contractor for the
equipment provided under the Contract.
9) Testing of spares
The Contractor shall ensure that all spares are correctly calibrated, tested and
labeled prior to their delivery. Test certificates for each item of equipment shall
be submitted to the Engineer.
9.12.3.13 Training
1) General
Training shall be provided for Employer's engineers and staff such that the Tunnel
Ventilation System can be operated and maintained in accordance with the
Manufacturer’s requirements.
The Contractor shall submit for review by the Engineer a training plan 180 days
prior to the first testing and commissioning activity.
9.12.3.14 Documentation
1) The Contractor shall submit a Submissions Programme in accordance with the
Employer's Requirements. In addition, the Submissions Programme shall:
(i) identify all design, manufacturing, testing, operations and maintenance
contract deliverables, required by the Specification; and
(ii) assign reference numbers to all submissions.
2) All documentation shall be submitted to the format contained in the Employer’s
Requirements.
3) Textual submittals, including reports, specifications, and calculations, shall also be
submitted in electronic form, wherever feasible.
9.12.4 TUNNEL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
9.12.4.1 Scope of Works
This section covers the requirements of the tunnel fire protection system installed
throughout the Contract.
Tunnel fire protection system shall include protection for, tunnels, vent buildings, tunnel
facilities controls and all electrical equipment rooms.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of the completed installation
including but not necessarily limited to: pipe work, valves, brackets, fittings and sleeves,
water supply, storage tanks and fire pumps.
The Contractor shall be responsible for pipe sizing and submit calculations for consent.
The Contractor shall also confirm the general adequacy of the space requirements within
voids or services ducts, openings, main routes etc.
The work shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 10, 14, 20, 130, 2001 and other
related of life safety requirement.
The fire fighting systems at each tunnel included within the scope of works shall include:
(i) Fire water supply system.
(ii) Tunnel fire main.
(iii) Portable fire extinguishers.
(iv) Clean agent gas suppression system.
(v) Fire barrier.
Included in the scope of the fire protection system shall be the provision of the necessary
water supplies to each valve, chamber and main.
The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing, designing and installing the
interconnecting valve arrangements in the fire pump room together with all valves, check
valves, drains, couplings and tees in order that water supplies may be run to hydrants.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all pipe work connections to and from the water
storage tank, including the provision of dual electric fire pumps, a jockey pump valves and
commissioning. The Contractor shall be responsible for bringing the supplies into the fire
pump room and installing all valves.
9.12.4.2 Fire Pump and Water Storage Tank
The contractor shall be responsible for the design and installation of the water storage
tank and fire pump room. Size of water storage tank and fire pumps shall be selected
according to NFPA 13, NFPA14 and NFPA 20.
One (1) electrical motor drive fire pump, one (1) diesel engine drive fire pump and a jockey pump
shall be provided. Fire Pumps are required to deliver water at sufficient pressure to ensure a
hydrant pressure of 7 bar at the furthest hydrant with as a design flow. Fire pumps, Jockey pump,
fittings and controllers shall be conformed to NFPA 20 standard, UL listed and FM approve.
The jockey pump shall be arranged to operate in the pressurizing mode to ensure that the
wet fire mains are pressurized at all times. Pump shall be regenerative turbine type or
Vertical multistage centrifugal type.
The pumps shall be automatically powered by the standby generator in the event of a
mains failure.
The Contractor shall furnish a full plan and elevations illustrating the fire pump room
proposed layout for the consent of the Engineer. The location of the fire pump room shall
be determined by the Contractor.
9.12.4.3 Water supply for Fire Hydrant
The Contractor to ensure that, as a minimum, the water supply to Fire Hydrants should be
such that when three (3) hydrsnt in tunnel section are in use simultaneously, each will
deliver not less than 946 l/min.
9.12.4.4 Pipe work and Fittings
Pipe work shall be heavy quality galvanized steel conform to ASTM A-53, schedule 40 or
equivalent international standard and shall be installed along the side access
walkway/fireman access walkway unless stated otherwise.
The necessary pipe work grooves to be rolled (not cut) to manufacturer's standards.
Earth continuity across each coupling and valve shall be installed either by purpose made
earth clips or 16 mm2 green/yellow cable bolted to each side of pipework via brass fittings.
9.12.4.5 Pipe Supports and Anchors
All pipe supports shall be heavy duty galvanized steel, each pipe support being of suitable
design, structural strength and density for carrying the weight of pipe plus water and
imposed angular loading.
The Contractor shall make all due allowance for pipe supports.
In addition the Contractor shall include for additional pipe supports either side of joints,
bends and where maintenance/safety is a requirement.
On every length of pipe above 1 m length there must be two pipe supports minimum.
Long radius bends shall be fitted with additional supports to mid span to avoid sagging. A
tee or cross must have its supports on any two of the connecting lengths within the nearest
third of the pipe length from the fitting.
9.12.4.6 Fire valves
The fire valve shall be UL Listed, FM Approved and the valve shall be assembled, test
certified, documented and fully painted in red enamel paint by the manufacturer, and
supplied ready for immediate installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. The supervisory device shall be provided
9.12.4.7 Fire hydrant and Fire department connector
In the fire pump room an isolating valve shall be installed to control the hydrant main.
The valve shall be both lockable and addressable.
In tunnel section, the fire main shall supply fire protection water to fire hose valves spaced
at 60 m or less.
Hose angle valves shall be 65 mm. brass or bronze body, UL Listed and or FM Approved.
inlet shall be suitable for sufficient flow of water for firefighting purposes, high pressure
regulating valve shell be used to enable a uniform fire fighting pressure to be maintained.
Fire department connector shall be double clapper, 90 degrees type, cast brass with rough
body finish, three 65mm. female inlets, brass plugs with polished finish and chains, size
150mm. and shall be UL Listed or FM Approved.
Hose storage cabinet shall be provided close to tunnel end. Each cabinet shall be
equipped with four (4) 65 mm diameter, 30 m length coiled synthetic hoses and one multi-
purpose branch pipe with shut off facilities.
9.12.4.8 Portable Extinguishers

Two(2) types of portable extinguishers shall be used:
(i) 4.5 kg Dry chemical fire extinguisher (ABC) – Public area and ancillary room.
(ii) 4.5 kg CO2 extinguisher (carbon dioxide) - HV and Switchrooms.
Extinguishers shall be mounted securely on purpose made brackets. All extinguishers shall
be selected to the requirements of NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
9.12.4.9 Alarms, Indicators and Controls
Alarms are described in the Fire Detection and Alarms Section.
9.12.4.10 Power Supplies
Secured and standby supplies are described in Course 5
9.12.4.11 Annunciation Alarm Panels
Annunciator alarm panel systems shall be provided. The panel shall show the piping
system layout and indicate status of zone valves, water supply valves, pump operation
and so forth.
Annunciator alarm panel shall be installed in control room of tunnel control facilities.
The following fire protection systems shall be tested and commissioned :
(i) Operation of hydrant.
(ii) Operation of fire water supply system.
(iii) Operation of gas agent fixed system.
The Contractor shall produce a performance test certificate for the consent of the Engineer
prior to commissioning.
Commissioning shall comprise the full integration and connection of the fire detection and
fire protection system as an integrated safety system.
9.12.4.13 Clean Agent Gas Suppression Systems
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and installation of the clean agent gas
suppresses systems conform to NFPA 2001 Standard for Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing
system.
The systems shall include MV power transformer rooms, MV/LV switchgear rooms, UPS
rooms.
The clean agent gas suppressions system shall be released automatically by the fire
detection system and shall be interlocked with the environmental control system serving
each protected room such that supply, return and relief dampers are closed during clean
agent gas suppression system operation.
Storage containers shall be designed to hold gas agents. Containers shall be constructed
in accordance with the applicable internationally recognized standard. Containers shall be
located as close as possible to the protected area, but shall not be exposed to a fire or
to mechanical, chemical or weather damage.
Piping shall be of black or galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A-53, Grade B,
Schedule 40 or equivalent international standard. Non-metallic pipe shall not be used.
The piping systems shall be securely supported and shall be designed with allowance for
agent thrust forces, and thermal expansion and contraction. Piping joints shall be suitable
for the design conditions and shall be selected with consideration of joint tightness and
mechanical strength.
Operation devices shall include gas agent releasing devices or valves, discharge controls
and shut-down equipment necessary for successful system performance. Operation shall
be by electrical means.
Clean agent gas suppression systems shall be monitored by the fire alarm system.
Clean agent gas suppression systems shall be capable of operating automatically and
manually and shall comprise:
(i) Control panels with built-in battery chargers, visible warning indicators,
supervisory buzzers, and lock-out switch.
(ii) Smoke detection systems.
(iii) Audible warning systems - alarm bell and sirens.
(iv) Visible warning systems- flashing and warning signs.
(v) Standby batteries.
(vi) Manual release (break glass) units.
(vii) Discharge nozzles and pipe work.
(viii) Gas agent bottles, associated equipment and accessories.
(ix) Positive gas pressure switch and evacuation signs.
9.12.4.14 Fire barrier
Fire barrier system shall be provided on all pipes penetrating fire rated walls. The system
installed shall have a fire rating not less than the wall’s fire rating.
9.12.5 AIR CONDITION, VENTILATION, GAS EXTINGUISHING PURGE AND PRESSURIZATION
SYSTEM
9.12.5.1 General
1) Air Condition and Ventilation System
Control room at tunnel facility building will be installed split type air conditioning to
maintained room temperature not to excess 25⁰C and mechanically ventilated using
exhaust air at rate 10 l/s/person.
EE plant room in tunnel, fire pump room and control panel room at tunnel facility
building will be mechanically ventilated using exhaust air and fresh air will be drawn in
naturally through the transfer grilles with synthetic pre-filter at air velocity not excess
1.5 m/s. Systems will be controlled by thermostat to maintain room temperature not
to excess 40⁰C.
All toilets, refuse and cleaner stores will be mechanically ventilated by exhaust air
systems. Make up air will be drawn in naturally through the transfer grills.
2) Gas Extinguishing Purge System
All areas protected by gas extinguishing system will be provided with a purge extraction
system for purging the area gas following a release, once the fire is fully extinguished,
to allow safe reoccupation of the space. These systems will be sized to give a minimum
air change rate of 6 air changes per hour.
3) Pressurization System
The implementation of cross-passages and EE plant rooms in tunnel pressurization
system provides a control of smoke movement across smoke barriers due to pressure
differentials. The application of this pressure differential will allow the following:
i) Maintain a tenable environment in the means (and route) of escape during periods
of evacuation.
ii) Control and reduce smoke from the effected fire area into the escape route.
iii) Provide a tenable conditions for emergency personnel to respond a fire situation
from the outside of the fire zone.
iv) Contribute to protection of life and deduction of property loss.
Base on NFPA 92A, the minimum air pressure difference across the door of pressurized
is approximately 40 Pa.
9.12.5.2 Performance
1) Split Type Air Conditioning
Air conditioning unit consists of an air-cool condensing unit which can be connected
with fan coil unit as recommended by the manufacturer. Split system suitable for zero
ODP (ozone depletion refrigerant) and SEER (seasonal energy efficiency ratio) shall not
less than 12.85 btu/hr/w for capacity less than 27,000 btu/hr and not less than 12.40
btu/hr/w for capacity 27,000 – 41,000 btu/hr.
2) Ventilation Fan
Fan and all parts thereof shall be capable satisfactorily withstanding the effect of all
stress and loads starting, operating and where applicable reversing condition.
Belt drive fan shall be selected, where as possible, fan shall be driven by motor with
revolution less than 1,500 rpm.
Unless specified, maximum noise level for all fans shall be less than 65 dB(A) measure
at 3 times of fan diameter from the fan outlet.
Fan and blower’s performance curve shall have certified rating by AMCA or Eurovent
standard.
3) Air Condition, Ventilation, Gas Extinguishing Purge and Pressurization System interface
with other systems :
Fire alarm system
When fire alarm activate, air condition and ventilation system in this fire alarm zone
will be shut down and pressurization system of all area will automatic start.
SCADA of tunnel utility system
Monitor room temperature of EE plant room in tunnel and control panel at tunnel
facility building.
Control and monitor ventilation system of EE plant room in tunnel and control panel
at tunnel facility building..
Override control and monitor pressurization system.
Monitor gas extinguishing purge system.
9.12.6 PLUMBING SYSTEM

9.12.6.1 General
This section covers the requirements of the soil, waste, drainage, vent, water mains and
cold water services installation for tunnel facility building and staff house.
The water main supply shall tapped from MWA main pipeline flow through the water
storage tank.
The water booster pump sets shall be provided to raise water pressure in supply pipe for
inadequate pressure area.
Water storage tank shall be calculated based on provide 200 l/staff/day, storage at least 2
days.
Wastewater treatment shall be calculated based on 90% of water consumption.
9.12.6.2 Performance
Water main pipe shall be HDPE pipe PN12.5 for underground pipe and hot drip galvanize
steel pipe sch.40 for aboveground pipe.
Cold water service pipe shall be PVC pipe class 13.5 for indoor pipe and PB pipe SDR11 for
underground pipe.
Sewage, vent and drainage pipe shall be PVC pipe class 8.5 for indoor and underground
pipe.
9.12.6.3 Plumbing System interface with other system
Monitor booster pump status and fault alarm.
High and low alarm in water level in water storage tank.
9.12.7 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
9.12.7.1 Introduction
This section has been prepared to present the criteria and concept for the design of
electrical works for the Den Chai – Chiang Rai – Chiang Khong Railway Construction Project.
The purpose of the section is to ensure that the design works had complied all approved
standards, methods and procedures which shall meet the State Railway of Thailand (SRT)
requirement.
9.12.7.2 Scope of Work
The scope of the electrical works in this Project will cover the following systems:
(i) Low voltage power distribution system

(ii) Lighting system
(iii) General small power
(iv) Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system
(v) Lightning protection system
(vi) Grounding and bonding system
(vii) Fire alarm system
(viii) CCTV system
(ix) Telephone blue light
(x) SCADA of tunnel utility
9.12.7.3 Standards, Codes and Regulations
(i) E.I.T. 2001- 45: Engineering Institute of Thailand, Standard for
Electrical Installation
(ii) E.I.T. 2002- 43: Engineering Institute of Thailand, Standard for Fire Alarm System
(iii) E.I.T. 2003- 43: Engineering Institute of Thailand, Standard for Lightning
Protection
(iv) E.I.T. 2004- 44: Engineering Institute of Thailand, Standard for Emergency light
and Exit sign
(v) PEA: Provincial Electricity Authority Code for Power Distribution and Electrical
Equipments Installation
(vi) TIS: Thai Industrial Standards
(vii) IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission
(viii) NFPA 70-2002: National Electrical Code (NEC)
(ix) NFPA 72-2002: National Fire Alarm Code
(x) NFPA 101-2000: Life Safety Code
(xi) NFPA 110-2002: Standard for Emergency and Standby Power System
(xii) NFPA 130-2003: Standard for Fixed Guide way Transit and Passenger Rail Systems
(xiii) NFPA 780-2002: Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems
(xiv) IES: Illuminating Engineering Society, Lighting Handbook
(xv) BS 7671:2001: Requirement for electrical installations
(xvi) Other Equivalent International standards

9.12.7.4 Design Criteria
1) Electrical Loading Criteria
The electrical loading allowance for lighting and small power shall be based on
E.I.T. 2001, NEPA 70 and Thailand’s regulation of energy saving. Refer to the loading
per area unit as follows:
a) Lighting
(i) Circulation Areas 15 VA/sq.m.
(ii) Plant Rooms 10 VA/sq.m.
(iii) Platform public areas 10 VA/sq.m.
(iv) Concourse public areas 15 VA/sq.m.
(v) Offices 15 VA/sq.m.
b) Small power 180 VA/set
c) ECS system Actual Load
d) Fire fighting system Actual Load
e) Sanitary system Actual Load
f) Lifts and Escalators Actual Load
g) Tunnel Ventilation system Actual Load
2) Electrical System Criteria
The electrical system criteria adopted as fundamental data for calculation of
electrical loads for both stations and tunnel:
a) System Voltage 380 Volts. 3 Phase.4 Wires. 50 Hz.
220 Volts. 1 Phase.2 Wires. 50 Hz.
b) Ambient temperature 40 degree C at 100% humidity
c) Load diversity 80 % overall
d) Load power factor 0.95
e) Voltage Drop (Feeder) 3% maximum
f) Voltage Drop (up to final circuit) 5% maximum
g) Earthing system TN-S system
h) Spare capacity 25 % for switchboards and panel boards

30 % for all cable trays and wireway
3) Illumination Criteria
Illumination criteria shown as follows will be adopted for lighting design:
Item Area Normal (Lux) Emergency (Lux)
1 Battery Room 200 15
2 Cash Handling Room 100-150 10
3 Cleaner Store 100-150 10
4 Communications Equipment Room 200 15
5 Electrical Service Room 200 15
6 Escape Route 200 15
7 Fire Water Pump Room 200 15
8 Gas Bottle Room 100-150 10
9 Interlocking Room 200 15
10 LV Switch Room 200 15
11 Office Area 500 15
12 Public Corridor 200 10
13 Signalling Equipment Room 200 15
14 Signalling Battery Room 200 15
15 Station Services Substation (SSS) 250 15
16 Operation Room 400-500 15
17 UPS Room 200 15
18 Tunnel Lighting 5 5
9.12.7.5 Design Concept

1) Medium Voltage
a) Dry Type Transformer
Transformer shall be manufactured and Tested in accordance with TIS or
IEC 60076-1 to 60076-6.
Transformer shall be dry type cast resin (under vacuum). Insulation shall
be of type class F.
kVA rating and impedance shall be determined by engineer, natural air
cooled at ambient temperature of 40°C (MAX.).
Primary shall be 22000 volts (M.E.A.) or 22000 Volts (P.E.A.) 3-phase 50
Hertz, delta connection, off-load tap changer (±4x2.5%) (M.E.A.) or
(±4x2.5%) (P.E.A.) at rated and full capacity).
Secondary shall be 400/230 volts (M.E.A.) or 400/230 volts (P.E.A.) 3-phase
4-wire Y-connection (full neutral capacity).
Vector group Dyn I (M.E.A.) or Dyn II (P.E.A.).
BIL full wave 125 kV
(i) Primary and secondary coil shall be copper conductors.
(ii) Losses shall be not more than 1.5% of the rating at p.f.1
(iii) Impedance voltage 5.6-8% at rated kVA.
(iv) Noise Level shall be not more than 65 dB.
(v) Force Air Cool Rating shall be 40% more capacity continuously.
(vi) Partial Discharge not move than 3PC at least up to 1.3 time of
service voltage.
Transformer shall be manufactured in accordance with the manufacturer's
standard suitable for mounting in the transformer enclosure, dead front
safety class IP 21.
Transformer enclosure shall be 2mm thick sheet steel, zinc-phosphate
primary painting and finish with gray stove enamel.
Lightning or surge arrester shall be connected at the primary bushings.
Arresters shall be in accordance with IEC standard for using with this dry
type of transformer.
Dial type thermometer, 45-200° (measuring the temperature directly from

the secondary coils.
Thermistor measured from the secondary coils
(i) 100°C starts the cooling fans
(ii) 135 °C warning light and bell
(iii) 155 °C cut-off the transformer
Type-test shall be submitted for approved by the engineering prior to
Manufacturing
(i) Full-wave impulse test
(ii) Temperature rise
(iii) Partial discharge
Transformer shall be tested and approved for installation by MEA. All
expenses shall be borne by the contractor.
b) Busway or Busduct
Where shown on plans, the Contractor shall furnish and install a totally
enclosed, low impedance feeder busways or bus duct system and/or
plug-in unit of the indicated ratings with all necessary fittings, power tap-
0ff, hanging devices and accessories. Arrangements, details, and locations
shall be as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
Material and installation shall comply with all applicable codes,
recommended practices, and standards of UL857,ISO 834, IEEE 693 . All
components of the busways or bus duct shall be UL Listed and type
tested assembly all rated compliance to UL857 standard. The type tested
certificate shall be certified by international third party
The housing shall be extruded aluminum or galvanized steel sheet to
provide maximum protection against corrosion from water and other
contaminants normally encountered during construction. All hardware
shall be plated to prevent corrosion. The housing shall be IP55 for indoor.
Unless otherwise specified on the drawing, busways or bus duct which
run from electrical room to shaft or to other machine room shall be
feeder type.
The conductor of busways or bus duct shall be copper high conductivity,
low resistance contact area with silver or tin plated.
The ground conductor shall be copper continuous ground bus and not
less than 50% of phase conductor.
The bolts shall brace housing and bars to withstand, without damage or
permanent distortion, short-circuit withstand strength (lcw) at 6 Cycle RMS
duration time as shown on the drawing when tested in accordance to
UL857 standard. Busway or bus duct shall be finished in grey or RAL7035
enamel.
Joints shall be tin-plated (or better) contact area, bolt
removable/isolatable type with through-bolts that can be checked for
tightness without de-energizing the system. It shall be possible to make
up a joint from one side in the event the busways or bus duct is installed
against a wall or ceiling. The joint shall be so designed as to allow removal
of any length without disturbing adjacent lengths. Springs shall be
provided to give positive pressure over complete contact area. Plug-in
and feeder shall use identical parts, and all multi-stacks shall be phase
collected.
Copper Busbars shall be suitable with thin-plated (or better) at all joints
and contact surfaces.
All insulation material shall be epoxy class B, 130 degree celsius or higher.
Horizontal runs of busways or bus duct hanging centers in any position
shall conform to manufacturer's instruction. Vertical riser runs of busways
or bus duct shall be supported with spring hangers conforming to
manufacturer's instructions.
Housing of Plug-In busways or bus duct shall completely enclose the

switching device and shall be sheet steel furnished in grey enamel or
polyester as standard manufacturer. A ground plate to engage grounding
tab on busways or bus duct shall be provided. Provide means for
padlocking cover and operating rotary handle in "OFF" position.
Plug-In Unit (PIU), if applied, The plug-in unit shall be circuit breaker type.
The Circuit breaker shall be same type of LV switchboard's circuit
breakers. The plug-in unit shall be specified as follows:
(i) The plug-in jaw shall be spring design composed of different
metal to ensure the firm, tight contact with the busbar and tin-
plate (or better) jaw contact area.
(ii) The earthing contact of the plug-in unit shall always be made
before that of the live conductors and the last to break during
removal. And it must connect to the earth bar of busways or bus
duct to ensure the safety
(iii) Circuit breaker applied in Plug-in Units shall have an interrupting
rating as specified on the Drawings. They shall have a releasable
cover interlock that prevents opening of cover except with
breaker in "OFF" position. An interlock to prevent insertion or
removal from busways or bus duct when in "ON" position shall
be provided, as well as an interlock "releasable" to prevent
closing circuit breaker with cover open.
(iv) Presence of shield shall be inside to avoid direct contact of
human.
(v) The plug-in units shall be equipped with internal barriers to
prevent accidental contact of fish tape and conductors with live
parts on the line side of the protective device during time of wire
pulling.
c) Gas Insulated Ring Main Unit
The equipment shall be manufactured and tested in conformity with the
relevant latest revision of International Electro technical Commission (IEC)
The equipment conforms to other nation standards having similar
characteristics and providing equal performer and/or quality to that
specified may be proposed In this case, the complete ENGLISH language
copies of the standard shall be submitted with the quotation
The equipment shall be connected to 22kV, 3-phase,3-wire,50Hz power
supply. The manufacturer shall have at least 2 years of supply experience
on the same type of unit. The supply record shall be attached for
consideration.
The ring main unit is designed to be used under the following conditions:
(i) Installation site Indoor
(ii) Altitude-approximately 1000 meters above mean sea level
(iii) Maximum temperature 40˚C
(iv) Mean temperature in any one year 30˚C
(v) Mean relative humidity in any one year 79%
(vi) Mean maximum relative humidity in any one year 94%

The ring main unit shall be suitable for use in tropical climate area and
shall be capable of operating at its full ratings without any derating factors
whatsoever in the service conditions mentioned above.
The ring main unit shall be self-supported, floor mounted type which
consists of two cable feeders and one or two transformer feeder(s).
The ring main unit shall be metal-enclosed type hermetically sealed in
SF6 filled container and completely independence from atmospheric
influence. All high voltage live parts shall be enclosed to meet IP65
protection class. The earthing bar shall be in cover for personal safety.
All metal surfaces shall be treated to protect against corrosion and
finished with final coat of top quality paint in light grey or factory standard
color.
The switch container shall be gastight and shall be strong enough to
withstand internal pressure for operation and for interruption and
mechanical loads even in extreme condition such as rough transport and
handling.
The transformer feeder shall be vacuum interrupter for fault interruption.
The circuit breakers shall be tripped under fault conditions by self power
relays operated by dual ratio toroidal current transformers in cooperated
on the transformer tee-off bushing the rated current of the circuit breaker
shall be 630 amps with a short circuit breaking capacity of 20 kA at 24 kV
Sufficient SF6 gas, all cable sealing end materials and other materials
required for installation and initial operation of the ring main unit shall be
furnished and delivered at the same time as the ring main unit.
All special tools and accessories required for the installation, normal
operation, maintenance and if maintenance and if necessary , functional
testing of equipment shall be furnished.
The following interlocks, padlocks and warning sign are required.
(i) The cable feeder switches and associated earthing switches ,the
transformer feeder switch and associated earthing switch shall
have mechanical interlock so that the operator cannot close and
earth at the same time.
(ii) Padlock for each load break switch to enable locking in either
"open" or " closed" position.
(iii) Necessary interlocl1s and padlocks for personnel safety and
prevent disoperation.
All part required for cable feeder shall be furnished. Cable connections
of the ring main unit shall meet the following requirements.
(i) Having cable compartment for personal safety and being free
from vermin. The cable connection shall be touchable type.
(ii) Be disconnected and then reconnected without damaging any
part of the connection systems, such as modular connectors. The
connector for cable feeder shall be bolt-on type only.
(iii) Being suitable for cable feeders of 12/20 kV and IEC Type C or
DIN Type C single core copper cable, cross linked polyethylene
insulated, copper wire screen and PE jacketed having the size as
required in the cable and transformer feeder.
Each phase of cable feeder shall be provided with voltage indicating
lamps to indicate whether it is live or dead.
The ring main unit shall be furnished as follows:
(i) Facilities to test the cable feeders.
(ii) Facilities to check whether the gas container is suitable for
operation and interruption or not.
The minimum of two earthing point shall be provided for each ring main
unit all parts shall be earthed to these points including other earthing
connections. The earthing points shall be made of noncorrosive material
throughout, such as copper alloy.
The ring main unit shall be provided with suitable lifting facilities.
The proposed ring main unit shall have successfully passed all the type
tests as specified in the relevant reference standards. The manufacturer
shall also have the internal arc test of the ring main unit for busbar and
cable compartment according to IEC 62271 and IEC 60298 appendix AA.
The type tests shall be performed by the independent test stations in
short circuit testing Liaison (STL member).
d) HV Cable, Cable Terminations and Cable Joints
HV Cable
All cables for HV system shall comply with IEC 60502-2 or IEC 60840
or HD 620 or equivalent having XLPE as their insulation medium and
be low smoke, zero halogen. The following shall be also applied:
(i) Cable insulations and sheaths shall be non-toxic.
(ii) Cable sheaths shall be extra protection against rodents and
termites.
(iii) Cable sheaths shall be embossed or printed with identification
marks for cables of different voltage grades.
(iv) The insulation and sheaths of cables used in the above ground
or in buried cable trough sections shall be fire retardant
according to IEC 60332-3-24, low smoke according to IEC 61034
and zero halogen according to IEC 60745-1. Mylar or other
suitable non-metallic armour sheathing may be employed.
(v) All cables shall be identified with cable markers, at reasonable
intervals, for easy selection during fault location or corrective
maintenance activities. The format of the markers shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the Employer for approval prior
to installation of the cables.
(vi) The cables shall fulfil the requirements of a partial discharge
test according to IEC 60885-3 or IEC 60840 with a value of max
2pC, when tested with a voltage of at least 3.5U0 (routine test).
(vii) The cables shall be longitudinally and transversally watertight.
Cable Terminations
All HV cables shall be terminated using approved proprietary products
suitable for the cables being terminated. All cable terminations shall
be carried out by suitably
Cable Joints
(i) Ideally there should be no HV cable joints however if there is a
HV cable run greater than the length of cable able to be wound
on a cable drum and joints have to be provides these joints shall
use proprietary cable jointing kits suitable for the cables being
jointed.
(ii) The position of any cable joints will clearly be shown on cables
plans, etc.
e) Diesel Engine Generator
General
The diesel engine generator shall comply with the specified latest IEC
standards or latest equivalent international standard and shall
reference the generator UL listing.
This diesel engine generator shall provide back-up power for the
emergency power distribution system during normal power (source A
and source B) outage.
Power outage sensing, generator starting, transfer of load, re-transfer
to normal power and engine cool down running time shall be a
completely automated system and shall not require attended
operation.
The manufacturer must specialize in the specified equipment and
having experience about the diesel engine generator which have been
installed in Thailand at least five years.
Performance Requirements
(i) Diesel Engine
Diesel engine shall be of the four-stroke, multi-cylinder, water-
cooled with radiator and fan, direct fuel injection, compression
ignition and preferably turbo-charged type. The crankshaft speed
shall not exceed 1500 rpm. The diesel engine shall be fitted with
speed governor to enable the engine speed to be adjusted from
the local control panel. Starting system shall be supplied with a
completely self-contained starting system consisting of an engine
driven dynamo, a lead acid battery and battery charger. Fuel tank
including level gauge, sufficient for at least 3 hours service under
full load. All moving parts shall be adequately guarded, in order
to prevent danger to personnel.
(ii) Alternator
The alternator shall be synchronous, four pole, 400/230V 50Hz,
continuous maximum rated output when operating within +5%
of rated voltage and at rated power factor, random frequency
variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not
exceed ±2.5%. The stator and rotor windings shall be insulated
with insulation material of the highest quality fully capable of
service under high humidity in tropical condition class F for the
rotor and class B for the stator. The alternator shall be completed
with all necessary cooling fans, brushless rotating field, self-
exciting and self-reglating type complete with permanent
magnets and fully connected damper windings. Over current and
earth fault protection shall be provided for the alternator.
2) Low Voltage Power Distribution System
a) General
The LV power distribution system for:
(i) Providing power to the various electrical & mechanical services
within the tunnel.
(ii) Maintaining power to the essential loads during permanent loss
of either one of the incoming power supplies.
b) System Description
(i) Main LV Switchboard arrangement
Two main LV switchboards shall be provided to achieve two
power supply source (A and B) for physically segregated to
ensure that a single fault or incident will not affect more than
one supply.
The main LV switchboards shall be split into sections for non-
essential and essential loads. Various sub-distribution boards
and motor control panels shall be connected to either the
non-essential or essential portions of these switchboards.
(ii) Essential bus bar interconnection
The essential section of each main LV switchboard shall be
interlocked with ACB switches and a bus bar interconnection
system. The operation of this system, linking the two essential
portions of the switchboard together, shall be operated only
manually, either remotely or locally as required at the
discretion of the system operator. On linking the two essential
bus bars together, a system of electrical interlocks shall
ensure that the two incoming supplies cannot be connected

together.
(iii) Essential Supplies
There are two categories of essential supplies.
Category 1 – Essential supplies with a single feed cable
Essential single feed cable shall be arranged as follows:
- The cable shall be connected from essential
section in the main LV switchboard to the
designated control panels or isolators.
- Essential single feed cable shall be provided for all
essential loads except station smoke control
system and tunnel ventilation system.
Category 2 – Essential supplies with dual feed cables
Essential dual feed cables shall be arranged as follows:
- Each load shall be fed from an automatic
changeover switch.
- The primary supply shall be derived from the
essential section of the nearest LV switchboard.
- The live standby to each automatic changeover
switch shall be derived from the corresponding
essential section of adjacent LV switchboard.
- The automatic changeover shall be set to normally
select the primary supply.
- Upon failure of the primary supply, the automatic
changeover switch shall automatically revert to the
alternative supply.
- Upon restoration of the primary supply after a
failure, a time delay shall occur before the
changeover switch reverts to its original position to
prevent hunting.
- Dual feed cables will be provided for Station
Lighting, Station cold water supply, Station Smoke
Control System and Tunnel Ventilation System.
(iv) Very Essential Loads

Very essential loads are supplied by dual supplies. The supplies
to automatic changeover switches are connected from the
essential bus bar section of both main LV switchboards. The
Uninterruptible Power Supply is provided between the
changeover switches and the loads supplied. In the event of
total power failure these loads will continue to operate with
UPS batteries providing backup power for about 3 hours.
(v) Other Essential Supplies
The Fire pump shall have dual supplies from the input side of
the main incoming circuit breakers of both main LV
switchboards.
c) Category of Loading
(i) Non – Essential loads includes:
- Chillers and associated waterside equipment
- Small power
(ii) Essential loads includes:
- Lighting
- Tunnel lighting
- Station sump pumps
- Tunnel sump pumps
- Tunnel Ventilation system (TVS)
- Trackway Exhaust system
- Stand-by Air conditioning and mechanical ventilation
system
- Cold water pumps
- Waste Water Treatment Plant (WWTP)
- Power supply to E&M UPS
- Power supply to M&E UPS
- FH & Sprinkler water pumps & Jockey pumps
- Smoke Control system
(iii) Very Essential loads includes:

E&M - Very essential loads
- Emergency lighting and Exit lighting
- Fire detection and alarm system
- Automatic gaseous fire suppression system
- Control system of TVS system
- Control system of smoke extract system
- Centralized lighting control system
M&E - Very essential loads
- Communications system
- Signaling system
- Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)
system
- Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) system
- Operation computer
d) Main and Sub-main LV switchboard
Main LV switchboards shall be installed in the LV switchgear room with
appropriate space for operation and maintenance services in accordance
with the E.I.T. standards or other equivalent international standards and
the clearance in front of all assemblies of LV switchboard shall be not
less than 1.2 metres.
Main LV switchboards shall be conformed to Form 3b with IP 54, and
passed Type Test Assembly in accordance with IEC-60439-1,TIS 1436-2540
or equivalent. These main LV switchboards shall be self standing on
concrete plinths.
Main LV switchboards shall be arranged for rear access, top cable entry,
and shall have a maximum installed height of 2.2 m.
Bus bars shall be rated according to the design load with 25% spare
capacity and to match the transformer capacity.
Main incoming devices shall be withdrawable ACB’s complete with
battery backup and charging /monitoring circuit s for the controller, the
ACB trip blocks and protective relay rated to suit the transformer sizing.
Outgoing devices shall be a combination of the following:

(i) Withdrawable ACBs
(ii) Moulded case circuit breakers
Protective devices shall be provided but not limited to the followings:
(i) Overcurrent protection
(ii) Short circuit current protection
(iii) Earth fault protection
(iv) Phase failure protection
(v) Under voltage protection
Indicating and Measuring devices shall be provided but not limited to the
followings:
(i) Mains incoming power Voltmeters, Ampmeters and Power factor
meter for each incomer
(ii) Pilot lamps for 3 phase power supply
Power factor correction equipment shall be provided to carry out the
power factor improvement to PF. = 0.95 lagging or better. Power factor
correction equipment shall comprise capacitor units, control relay,
switching equipment, protective fuses and means of isolation, all
assembled and connected to control automatically the connection and
disconnection of the capacitance in response to changes in the load
power factor.
Sub main LV switchboards shall be installed throughout the EE Room to
provide local power to the various loads and shall be MCCB/MCB type,
single/ three phase, surface mounted in lockable steel enclosures
protected to IP31. They shall be completed with integral main isolators.
All switchgears shall be rated to the appropriate fault levels within the
system. The following shall be applied as a minimum:
(i) ACB&MCCB’s – 50 KA for 1 sec (main switchboard)
(ii) MCCB’s - 25 KA for 1 sec (inside MCCB distribution board)
(iii) MCB’s - 50 Amp rating and above -10 KA
(iv) MCB’s - Less than 50 Amp rating - 5 KA
Automatic Change over switch
(i) Automatic changeover switching shall comply with IEC 947-6-1.

The ATS can also be operated manually in the event of control
circuit failure.
(ii) The operating sequence of ATS consists of an automatic transfer
of a load from the normal supply to an alternative supply in
the event of a monitored voltage supply deviation and
automatically returning the load to the normal supply when it
is restored. The transfer and re-transfer shall be with a
predetermined time delay. If the alternative supply should fail
while carrying the load, re-transfer to the normal supply shall
be made instantaneously upon restoration of the normal
supply on all phases. In case of both the normal and the
alternative supplies being present, the ATS shall assume the
normal supply position.
Types of cable/wiring
(i) All cables for non-emergency system in tunnel shall be Low
Smoke and Fume (LSF) type and mechanically protect. For all
emergency system shall be Flame Retardant, Zero Halogen and
Low Smoke (FR-ZHLS) type and mechanically protect.
(ii) Sub main cables will be 600/1000 volt grade power cables with
stranded copper conductors to international standard installed
on galvanized cable trays with cover.
(iii) Cables for fire pumps, fire protection system, UPS, tunnel
ventilation system and station smoke control system shall be
fire resistant category CWZ with LSF or FR-ZHLS outer sheath.
Fire alarm and detection wiring shall be fire resistant category
CWZ with Red LSF or FR-ZHLS outer sheath.
(iv) All components of the cable and cable support systems shall
be of LSF or FR-ZHLS properties.
Type of Cable tray, Wireway and Conduit
(i) Cable trays shall be perforated corrugated type not less than
1.5 mm thickness mild steel hot dip galvanized or zinc plated
finish. The minimum coating weight for galvanized/zinc plate
finished shall be in accordance with BS 729 or other equivalent
international standards.
(ii) Wireways shall be fabricated from steel sheet with steel covers
and shall be hot dip galvanized or zinc plated finish. The
minimum coating weight for galvanized/zinc plate finished shall
be in accordance with BS 729 or other equivalent international
standards.
(iii) Spare capacity of 30% shall be provided for all cable trays,
trucking, wireways (raceways) and bracketry, for future
expansion.
(iv) Steel conduits and fittings shall comply with TIS standard or
ANSI standard or other equivalent international standard and
shall be screwed classification.
3) Lighting System
a) General
Lighting system shall be installed throughout all Buiding to provide
adequate lighting in accordance with the illumination criteria in section
5.4.3 Design Criteria.
b) Type of luminaire
All luminaires shall be durable energy saving fluorescent or LED types.
Generally, types of luminaire shall be as following:
(i) Recessed mounted fluorescent luminaire with aluminium
reflector and glare control aluminium louver to illuminate the
Public Area.
(ii) Corrosion resistant luminaire with acrylic diffusers, protected to
IP 54 will be used in all plant rooms and protected to IP 65 will
be used in tunnels.
(iii) Recessed modular luminaire with glare control louvers will be
used in all operations/control rooms.
(iv) Batten luminaires shall be used in escape stairs and corridors
within plant areas and store rooms.
(v) Recessed modular luminaire with louvre shall be used in staff
rooms where false ceiling systems are installed but glare control
is not required.
(vi) Recessed modular luminaires with prismatic diffusers shall be

used in all toilets with false ceiling.
c) Lighting and Emergency lighting.
Lighting shall be installed in all areas to provide general illumination at
all times.
Emergency lighting shall be provided by 10-20% portion of the lighting
fed directly by the UPS system. This lighting will constantly and
continually function for three hours after a completed loss of power
supply.
d) Zoning and control
Lighting in all public areas shall be manually switched from the operation
room (except emergency lighting).
All large areas shall be sub-divided so that alternate luminaires are fed
and switched on separate circuits to allow reducing lighting level and
cater for local system failure. Adjacent group of luminaires will be
switched separately to allow further selective reduction of areas
illumination. The lighting system can be ON/OFF to suit the 25%, 50% and
100% as far as practicable by centralized control switches in operation
room.
All plant rooms and stores will be locally switched.
e) Tunnel Lighting
Tunnel lighting will be provided by the installation of luminaires over the
tunnel walkways.
Lighting in the tunnel will be fed to an approximate mid point from each
of the stations. Each section of lighting will be arranged so that alternate
luminaires are on two different circuits. Each circuit shall supply the
fixtures not exceeding the six car train in length.
Tunnel lighting shall be supplied through the UPS system and operated
by switches located in station control room and remote controlled by
SCADA system.
f) Wiring and Circuitry
Cables for emergency lighting and tunnel lighting shall be fire resistant
category CWZ with LSF or FS-ZHLS outer sheath in conduits.
4) General Small Power

a) General
Small power shall be installed throughout stations to provide electric
power for various electric devices.
b) Type of Outlet and Installation
Socket outlets for 220 VAC supply shall be 16 Amp universal pin, 3 pin
shutter protected pin pattern.
In offices, control rooms and public areas will be flush mounted
installation.
In staff rooms, plant rooms, etc. will be robust heavy duty types with
galvanized front plates, protective covers and matching enclosures.
In public areas, plant rooms, switchgear rooms and staff rooms will be
mounted at 300 mm. above finished floor levels. In control rooms, offices
and mess room will be mounted above furniture height to suit furniture
and equipment layouts.
In tunnel, at tunnel sump pump location and the scissor crossover
location, one 1 phase 220 VAC (1P+N+E) power socket outlet and one 3
phase 380 VAC (3P+N+E) power socket outlet will be provided with
enclosure IP 65 protection mounted to tunnel wall where appropriate.
The power outlets could be integrated in the motor control panel
supplying the tunnel sump pumps at that location.
c) Wiring and Circuitry
Socket outlets will be wired as radial circuits or otherwise specified using
single core LSF insulated cables with stranded copper conductors. Cables
will be installed in galvanized conduit / trunking.
Residual current devices of 30 mAsensitivity shall protect all general
socket outlets RCD’s shall be housed in an enclosure incorporated into
the distribution boards.
Conduit shall be installed above suspension ceilings, if applicable. Below
ceiling level it will be installed in accordance with the building fabric in
offices, control rooms and public areas and will be installed on the
surface for all other rooms.
5) Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System
a) General
The uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system shall comprise an UPS
supplying E&M very essential loads and an M&E UPS supplying M&E very
essential loads.
b) Performance Requirements
A dual UPS with suitable capacity and parallel redundancy shall be
provided for each tunnel to maintain the very essential loads according
to the contract, for a period of three hours, in case of both main power
supplies failure.
The UPS shall be installed in a dedicated room. It will be self-contained,
floor mounted, solid-state type with solid state and manual by pass
switches. Banks of sealed lead acid recombination cells with 3 hours
backup time for the dual UPS shall be installed in a battery room adjacent
to the UPS room.
The battery shall consist of sealed lead-acid recombination cells, thus
obviating the specific need for flame retardant case in the Battery room.
These shall be mounted in at least two cabinets. Charging current shall
be comply with 0.1C10 and supply to connected load.
The system shall be dual fed from the essential bus bar section of both
main LV switchboards. The two sections of the dual UPS system will each
feed a distribution board to feed the very essential loads.
6) Lightning Protection System
a) General
A lightning protection system is required to:
(i) Protect the above-ground structure from a direct lightning strike.
(ii) Protect the equipment housed within the structure and the
zone of protection.
(iii) Protect personnel working within the structure and the zone of
protection.
The lightning protection system shall convey lightning discharges to
ground without electrification of the structure.
The complete lightning protection system shall consist of a network of air

terminals at roof level, interconnected by horizontal tapes. The whole air
termination system shall be connected to down conductors, which shall
preferably run on outside of the building. The down conductors shall be
bonded to a number of dedicated earth electrodes, which do not form
part of structure of the building.
7) Grounding and Bonding System
a) General
Grounding system shall be provided for the following purposes:
(i) Safety from electric shock for operating personnel and the
general public.
(ii) Damage limitation, following plant, equipment or system
failure.
(iii) Protection against interference between electrical systems.
b) Performance Requirement
Grounding electrode and a main grounding bus bar shall be installed at
the station substations.
A LV grounding bar shall be installed in the main LV switchgear room and
connection to main grounding bus bar in station substations. This LV
grounding bar is provided for connection to the electrical equipment.
Generally, copper conductors shall be installed to link the LV grounding
bar to all plant rooms for electrical earthing.
The grounding and bonding cables shall be copper with green/yellow
outer sheath.
8) Fire Alarm System
a) General
The objectives of the fire detection system are as follows:
(i) To detect the presence of smoke or fire
(ii) To alert staff of the outbreak of fire with the minimum delay to
enable early investigation to take place
(iii) To warn passengers of the fire if necessary, to enable a quick
and controllable evacuation to take place without panic
The fire alarm and detection system shall comprise the equipment at
each station as follows:
(i) Fire alarm control panel (FCP),
(ii) Fire alarm graphic annunciator board,
(iii) Fire alarm repeater panel (FARP),
(iv) Ceiling Smoke detectors and probe type unit smoke detectors,
(v) Heat detectors,
(vi) Break glass manual stations,
(vii) Alarm sounders,
(viii) Input, output and control addressable modules,
(ix) Short circuit isolators,
(x) Link to the Public Address (PA) system,
(xi) Link to the SCADA system,and
(xii) all other necessary equipment
The system shall be an addressable type with Class A circuitry, and the
signals from the detectors shall be transmitted to the Tunnel Facility
Building for monitoring. The monitoring system shall be able to detect
and report faults, as well as identifying fire conditions.
The system shall be an intelligent type, alarms being generated by two
means, automatic devices and manually operated devices. Automatic
device will include photoelectric smoke detector, rate of rise heat
detectors, and supervisory switches and water flow switches in the fire
protection system. The smoke and heat detectors shall be addressable
type.
Manual device included break glass unit shall be provided throughout the
located within 30 m. next to fire exits.
Alarm sounders shall be provided in non-public areas only to alert staff
in all control rooms and station offices. The sounders shall have a distinct
tone different from any other system sounders.
The fire detection and alarm wiring shall be fire resistant cable class CWZ
with Red LSF or FS-ZHLS outer sheath.
In the event of a signal from heat detector, smoke detector or break glass
unit, station staff will investigated the incident before the general alarm
is raised. In the event of a signal from a water-flow alarm or the
confirmation of the fire from the station staff, evacuation will commence.
Once it is decided, the emergency evacuation must begin, the control
room staff will select the correct course of action from a menu of options
based on the location of the fire.
c) Fire Alarm Control Panel (FCP)
The fire alarm control panel located in the Tunnel Facility Building shall
be functioned as the overall control of all the fire detection and alarm
systems and as the center for interfacing with all related services such as
ventilation system, smoke extraction system, etc. Actuation of all
automatic or manual devices shall be identified by the FCP indications
giving the loop number and device address of the device as well as the
fire zone. Text message will simultaneously be displayed to identify the
location.
The FCP shall also be equipped with monitoring / relay points to relay
status and alarm conditions to the SCADA of tunnel utility system.
d) Fire alarm interfacing with other systems:
Fire protection system
(i) Water flow switches
(ii) Supervisory switches
(iii) Fire pumps & Jockey pump control status
(iv) Fire pumps & Jockey pump fault status
(v) Fire Suppression panel Auto / Manual status
(vi) Fire Suppression panel Healthy / Fault status
(vii) Fire Services Tank Low level alarm
(viii) Fire Services Tank High level alarm
Linear Heat Detector system
(i) Linear Heat Detector control panel healthy / fault status
(ii) Alarm status
(i) Fire alarm control panel healthy / fault status

(ii) Alarm status
9) CCTV System
a) General
The IP Closed Circuit Television System (IP CCTV) shall be provided for
visual observation of the operation area. The IP CCTV shall continuously
view remote area with video cameras and display the areas upon operator
selection. The video recorders and switching devices shall be capable of
automation and manual operation. Alarm monitor shall display alarm area
only when on alarm condition exists. The scene from each camera shall
appear clearly, crisp and stable on the respective monitor during both
day time and night time operations. Cable of CCTV network will be design
loop by camera send signal both side in case cable damage one side
sinage from camera can send signal to NVR for record video and send live
steaming video to CCTV server for shown at CCTV monitor.
The video signal must be digitized and compressed. The compression
technology must be based on the H.264 international standard. The
compression technology can be built directly into IP cameras.
The Control Center Equipment shall be located in the Tunnel Facility
Building which will display the video on a CCTV Monitor, or on multiple
Control Center Station PCs. Windows NVRs and /or Linux NVRs will record
the compressed video from the IP Cameras and Transmitters.
(i) CCTV Server
Installed in CCTV Rack 19 "in a rack type and connect via
network to record images to NVR,export file,users setup,IP
camera setup, wich interface another system.
The Video Surveillance Media Server is the core component of
the solution, providing for the collection and routing of video
from IP cameras to viewers or other media servers. The system
is capable of running on a single physical server or distributed
across the network, scaling to handle many of cameras and
users.
For archive viewing, the CCTV Server receives video from the IP
camera or encoder continuously (as configured per the archive
settings) and only sends video streams to the viewer when
requested. In environments with remote branch locations, this
becomes very efficient since traffic only needs to traverse the
network when requested by remote viewers. Branch office
traffic remains localized and does not have to traverse wide
area connections unless is requested by users other users.
Video requests and video streams are delivered to the viewer
using HTTP traffic.
(ii) CCTV Workstation
The workstation will be installed on the table connect via
network to CCTV server for access to viewing live video,
searching recorded video from CCTV server NVR, selection video
shown on CCTV monitor, import & export file video, also access
all feature of the system
(iii) CCTV Monitor will provide at least LED 42" for shown video in
the tunnel, key points and can pop-up the video incase
emergency by nearestly camera.
(iv) NVR will be Installed in CCTV Rack with backup recored 30
days/24 hour, 25FPS received
(v) Network Switch for CCTV System use layer 2.
(vi) Media Converter for Fiber Optic to UTP, installed in the CCTV
Rack, single mode, connected to the CCTV network switch.
(vii) CCTV Rack with received power supply for UPS.
(viii) IP Camera will be IP Camera Day/night along the Tunnel distane
from camera to camera 100 metre, Aim two directions from
same location install side wall tunnel by recieved signal form
POE switch at CCTV box consisted power suply.
(ix) POE Switch used a port installed the CCTV box convert signal
from fiber optic to UTP for connect signal to Camera with supply
power from switch via POE port.Power for supply POE switch
received from UPS at equipment room
(x) Fiber Optic Cable will be used 4 core Single Mode Fiber Optic
Cable.
c) CCTV interfacing with other systems:
(i) Fire alarm system
CCTV system will be shown video from camera at near the zone
of fire alarm.
(ii) Access control system
CCTV system will be shown video from camera at near the door
equipment room with emergency access.
(iii) SCADA of tunnel utility system
The SCAD A system will be shown alarm status of CCTV system
(General alarm).
10) Telephone and Blue Light System
a) General
Telephone and Blue Light System shall be provided at every entrance of
cross-passages in the tunnel. Adjacent to each blue light station,
information shall be provided that identifies the location of that blue light
station and the distance to an exit in each direction. And Telephone shall
be two-way wire emergency communications system, this system shall
have a telephone network of fixed telephone lines and telephone
handsets which install in the robust aluminium alloy, vandal resistance
and outdoor rated (IP66) housing and provide at all the blue light stations,
capable of communication with tunnel facility building (Operation Control
Center), ancillary room and at all the blue light station locations.
Telephone at the blue light stations shall have distinctive signs and lights.
b) Performance Requirement.
Blue Light
The blue light shall be activated upon pushing of the emergency
telephone button.
The blue light shall have an LED cluster and flash at rate of minimum of
60 flashes per minute.
Telephone
The Telephone shall be heavy duty handset with hearing aid

compatible receiver and automatically filters out the noise, making the
quality of the call clearer. Speaker and microphone shall be
weatherproof and operating temperature between -40⁰F to +150⁰F (-
40⁰C to +65⁰C).
The telephone shall be a push once to talk phone. Once the button
has been pushed, the telephone will call a programmed phone
emergency number. The telephone must be capable of being
programmed with up to 5 emergency numbers, dialing them in
sequence until one is answered.
The telephone shall have location message capability. Telephone
must have a minimum continuously until is pressed by the called
party. Telephone shall notify called party of the location of telephone
at the cross-passage entrance, upon it being received at the
emergency dispatch center.
The telephone shall be capable of allowing the called party to replay
the telephone location message if necessary to ensure an
understanding of the location of the call telephone.
Once call has been made (button pushed), the call can only be
terminated by the call party.
The telephone must have a LED that will light up upon push of the
button. The light shall be a solid color when the telephone is
activated, and will flash when call has been answered.
The telephone must be capable of being programmed, reprogrammed
and diagnostic testing on site and remotely.
c) Telephone and Blue Light System interface with other system
Telephone and blue light system shall be interface with SCADA for general
alarm when system activated as hardwire and fault alarm of system.
11) Access Control System
a) General
The access control shall be install at tunnel facility building and EE plant
rooms in tunnel.
The access control system shall be user friendly and only require
minimum training to allow an operator to perform his daily routine with
minimum supervision required.
All interfaces within the access control system shall be based on TCP/IP
network protocol connectivity over the corporate
intranet/internet/LAN/WAN.
Additional hardware units shall easily be added without any modification
to the existing hardware, software and network configuration.
The access control system shall be designed to provide alarm gathering,
monitoring, handling, reporting, full logging including the performance and
activities of the operators. It shall also provide monitoring and control of
inputs and outputs both locally and remotely.
The access control system workstation shall be a flexible and user-friendly
with a graphical user interfaces (GUIs) for alarm monitoring and control.
Such GUIs shall be the core of the entire access control system that
includes mapviewer with alarm list.
The system shall be provided to control access into designated security
controlled doors only personnel with a valid access card or identification
PIN and within valid time schedule. All access cards shall be authenticated
against the central and/or local database before granting access.
All security controlled doors shall be fitted with a suitable card reader,
PIN pad, an exit locally mounted door release push button and an
emergency break-glass door release to unlock the door for exit in the
event of emergency.
All door access activities shall be logged into the central database. Any
unauthorized attempt or invalid card used shall be reported to the access
control system, including door held and force opened alarm as priority
alarm transaction.
All equipment within the access control system shall continue to operate
for at least 2 hours in event of main power failure.
c) Access Control System interface with other system
Access control system shall be interface with SCADA for alarm, event and
fault alarm of system.
12) SCADA and Network System

a) General
The SCADA system is considered to be an integrated system for tunnel
utility system. The main function of the supervisory control and data
acquisition (SCADA) system is to provide remote monitoring and control
of the mechanical and electrical systems of tunnel utility system
The SCADA system will be established and equipped with all necessary
hardware and software in relevant control room of each tunnels. The
SCADA will collect all relevant information from the subsystem controller,
PLC, intelligent electronic device (JED) in each electrical room and present
them on central operation system (COS) workstation at tunnel facility
building.
The main network equipment for SCADA system is an asset to shared
services for system required such as CCTV, IP Telephone. The network
equipment supports the standard network technologies, such as Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP),
Remote Monitoring (RMON), Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) and others, including proprietary protocol enhancements and Fast
Root Failover (FRF).
The control system provides a comprehensive graphical for the
monitoring and control of mechanical and electrical system. All
mechanical and electrical system diagrams are displayed with full
graphical design. The proposed SCADA system architecture is multi server
with a client workstation.
(i) SCADA Process Servers
SCADA Process Servers consist of primary and standby process
servers as hot-standby.The primary server will maintain all
process data. The standby server will store a copy of the master
data. The standby server can take over the process control, thus
assuming the functions of the primary server. Furthermore, the
two process server functionalities incorporate the redundancy
for system availability. This process server functionality forms
the interface from the control system to the process/subsystem
controller.
(ii) Operator Interface

Central Operation System (COS) workstation is the operator
interface, provides as client workstation for SCADA System to
display graphic based control for operator at control room. The
operator interface including operator guidance, online language
switching, access rights, alarm panel, subsystem topology.
(iii) Engineering Workstations System (EWS)
Engineering Workstations System (EWS) is a computer hosts the
programming software for edit SCADA graphic, SCADA system
configuration and programing software for controllers (i.e.,
SCADA PLC). The EWS will store all relevant SCADA project
configuration and project file, firmware of SCADA PLC.
(iv) SCADA PLC, I/0 Device and HMI
SCADA system will provide set of PLCs with redundancy system
as integrated controlling and monitoring function in each
electrical room for tunnel utility system.
The PLC with redundant system, the CPUs are duplicated by
process the same project data and user program in parallel. The
two (2) CPUs are synchronized over two redundant connections.
If one of CPU fails, the other CPU maintain control of the
process. The communication to I/O Device will be TCP/IP or
PROFINET or other protocol with high availability media
redundant protocol.
The redundancy connections are separated between network
ring and synchronize connection between two CPUs. The
synchronize connection is fiber-optic cable (3) that connect the
CPUs directly over synchronization module.
One of the two CPUs in the redundant system takes on the role
of primary CPU. The other CPU takes on the role of the
following CPU (backup CPU). The role of the CPUs can change
during operation.
Synchronization of primary and backup CPU ensures rapid
switchover between CPUs in the event of a failure of the
primary CPU. If the primary CPU fails, the backup CPU takes over
control of the process as the new primary CPU.
The synchronization of the H-CPUs does not affect the

bandwidth on the communication networks.
The PLC and I/O Device for Interface to field device will be
installed inside cubicle with degree of protection IP31.
The I/O Device will be provided for hardwire interface with
subsystem equipment for controlling and indicate status/alarm.
Human Machine Interface (HMI) is a software application of
Siemens SIMATIC HMI, the HMI will locally at SCADA PLC control
panel as operator interface as capability for operator to send
command to controller and local monitor for process value and
equipment status.
(v) System Response Times
Status identification and activation of control command within
2 seconds or display of data within required time frame is
provided. Nevertheless, the operational speed is limited by the
communication system between the SCADA Control System
and the operational equipment.
(vi) System Time Synchronize
Twos of process server provide time master synchronize to
SCADA PLC and relevant workstation of SCADA system.
(vii) System Availability
This SCADA for tunnel utility system shall not be allocated to
Train Service Availability and Train Service Punctuality, as
possible monitoring information eventually provided from CTC
to SCADA (Future) must not have any influence to the CTC
system (to be ensured by the CTC system).
c) SCADA Interface with Other Systems
(i) Interface to Tunnels Ventilation System (TVS)
Tunnel Ventilation System consist of variable speed drive (VSD),
jet fan, tunnel ventilation fan and pressurize fan. The interface
between SCADA PLC and VSD will be ethernet TCP/IP or
modbus TCP/IP or PROFINET with MRP-S2 for controlling, varied
speed, status and diagnostic VSD. Signal status/alarm from jet
fan, tunnel ventilation fan (TVF) and pressurize fan (PRF) will be
hardwire to SCADA PLC.
(ii) Interface to Fire Protection System
Fire Protection Equipment consist of fire pumps with control
panel, jockey pump with control panel, supervisory switch, flow
switch, clean agent (N2) fire suppression system and water
storage tank, SCADA will provide interface at control panel of
fire pump, jockey pump, supervisory switch, flow switch, clean
agent (N2) fire suppression system and level switch of water
storage tank panel as hardwire for status and alarm.
(iii) Interface to Air Condition, Ventilation, Gas Extinguishing Purge
and Pressurization System
Interface to ventilation system for room temperature status,
control and monitor of ventilation fans and fire & smoke
dampers. Interface to pressurization system for override control
and monitor pressurization fan status. Interface to gas
extinguishing purge system for monitor fan status.
(iv) Interface to Plumbing System
Interface to monitor booster pump status and fault alarm.
Interface to water storage tank for high and low alarm of water
level.
(v) Interface to Medium Voltage System
Medium Voltage Equipment consist of switchgears, ring main
unit (RMU) and transformer. SCADA will provide interface at PLC
panel as hardwire for Control, Status and Alarm from RMU and
Transformer Equipment.
(vi) Interface to Fire Alarm System
Interface to Fire Alarm System is high level interface at
management level. SCADA system will provide interface as OPC
A&E client for alarm and event from fire alarm workstation.
(vii) Interface to CCTV System
Interface to CCTV System is high level interface at management
level. SCADA system will provide interface as OPC A&E client for
alarm and event from CCTV server.
(viii) Interface to Telephone and Blue Light System

SCADA will provide interface at Tunnel Facility Building for
general alarm when system activated as hardwire and fault
alarm of system.
(ix) Interface to Access Control System
Interface to ACS is high level interface at management level.
SCADA system will provide interface to ACS for alarm, event and
fault alarm of system.
END OF SECTION 9
APPENDIX 1
TUNNEL VENTILATION SYSTEM EQUIPMENTS
The Attachments A, B, C and D attached to this Appendix are for the Tunnel Ventilation System (TVS)
Outline Specification (Section 9-8).
ATTACHMENT A - TUNNEL VENTILATION FAN UNITS

A1 GENERAL
A1.0 GENERAL
A1.01 DESCRIPTION
This Attachment specifies the requirements for furnishing tunnel ventilation fan units and appurtenances
as specified herein. Fans shall be the product of a single manufacturer whose name shall appear on the
fan motor unit and, who shall have previously furnished emergency fan motor units to other rail transit
agencies.
A1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards:
Anti-Friction Bearings Manufacturers Association (AFBMA).
a. 9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
b. 11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
Air Moving and Control Association (AMCA):
a. 210, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. S12.34, Survey Methods for Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise Sources.
American Welding Society (AWS):
a. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
b. D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. A 123, Zinc (Hot Galvanised) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and
Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
b. A 239, Locating the Thinnest Spot in Zinc (Galvanised) Coating on Iron or Steel Articles
by the Preece Test (Copper Sulfate Dip).
c. A 525, Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Hot Galvanised) by the Hot-Dip Process.
d. A 588, High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield
Point to 4 Inch (100 mm) Thick.
e. B 247, Certification for Aluminium Alloy Die Forgings, Hand Forgings and Rolled Ring
Footing.
f. B 686, Aluminium Alloy Castings, High Strength

g. E 94, Radiographic Testing.
h. E 138, Wet Magnetic Particle Inspection.
i. E 155, Reference Radiographs for Inspection of Aluminum and Magnesium Castings.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
a. 112, Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.
b. 519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power
Systems.
Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.):
a. MIL-P-24441/A, General Specification for (Ships), Paint, Epoxy Polyamide.
b. MIL-P-24441/1A, Paint, Epoxy Polyamide, Green Primer, Formula 150, Type 1.
c. MIL-P-24441/2A, Paint, Epoxy Polyamide, Exterior Top Coat, Haze Grey, Formula 151,
Type
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):
a. ICS-1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems.
b. ICS-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid-
State Control.
c. ICS-2, Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.
d. ICS-3, Industrial Systems.
e. MG-1, Motors and Generators.
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):
a. PA-1, No. 1 Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting.
b. PA-2, Method for Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges.
c. SP-1, Solvent Cleaning.
d. SP-2, Hand Tool Cleaning.
e. SP-3, Power Tool Cleaning.
f. SP-10, Near White Blast Cleaning.
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. 508, Industrial Control Equipment.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: The fan manufacturer shall show at least ten years of
continuous and current experience in the design, assembly, and testing of axial flow
tunnel ventilating fans and experience in the design and fabrication of units capable of
operating in 250 degrees C air stream for one hour.
A1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Before providing the fan manufacturer with Notice to Proceed the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for his review and consent, evidence of the manufacturer's qualifications including, but
not limited to the following data:
1. Theoretical fan-motor composite performance curves for equipment proposed to be
furnished under this Contract.
a. Fan-motor unit performance curves from shut-off to free delivery shall have
the following data plotted as ordinates versus airflow rate, in cubic meters
per second, as abscissa:
- Total pressure, Pascals.
- Static pressure, Pascals.
- Total efficiency, percent.
- Static efficiency, percent.
- Thrust force, N (for jet fan)
- Kilowatt input to fan impeller.
- Kilowatt input to the motor.
b. Separate curves shall be furnished for forward and reverse direction. Each
curve shall be identified.
c. The system resistance curve shall be plotted on each curve. The point of
operation shall be indicated.
d. In addition, furnish the following data:
Theoretical performance curves for each rotational direction shall be plotted
for fan motor units for the following blade pitch angles:
- Maximum blade pitch angle.
- Minimum blade pitch angle.
- Design blade pitch angle.
A minimum of two intermediate pitch angles between maximum and

minimum blade pitch angle other than design pitch angle.
These performance curves shall be plotted with abscissa as cubic meters per
second and ordinates as:
- Total pressure, in Pascals.
- Trust force, in N (for jet fan)
Acceleration time for each rotational direction from standstill to operating
revolutions per minute. Plot operating revolutions per minute as abscissa and
acceleration time as ordinate.
The fan load torque curve at operating speed. Plot percent revolutions per
minute as abscissa and percent full load torque as ordinate.
e. All performance curves shall be plotted to such scales as will make it
possible to read the data accurately.
f. The following information shall be imprinted on each performance curve:
- Project title.
- Contractor's name.
- Name and address of fan manufacturer.
- Authority's fan designation number.
- Fan speed in revolutions per minute.
- Volume of air delivered in cubic meters per second.
- Fan static pressure in Pascals.
- Fan total pressure in Pascals.
- Fan trust force in N (for jet fan)
- Fan outlet velocity pressure in Pascals.
- Fan outlet velocity in meters per second.
- Fan static efficiency in percent.
- Fan total efficiency in percent.
- Fan-motor unit total efficiency in percent.
- Kilowatt input to motor.

- Air density in kilograms per cubic meter
- Fan housing diameter in millimetres.
- Fan outlet area in cubic meter.
- Fan rotor hub diameter in millimetres.
- number of fan blades.
- Direction of airflow (forward or reverse).
- Design blade pitch angle.
- Rotational moment of inertia of fan rotor assembly in kilograms per
square meter.
- Maximum acceleration time required to start fan-motor unit from rest
and accelerate it to operating speed, in seconds.
2. Theoretical fan motor performance curves shall cover the entire range of load
conditions from no load to 115 percent of full load.
a. Composite curve for each size of motor plotted with abscissa as kilowatt
output and ordinates as:
- Current in amperes.
- Speed in revolutions per minute.
- Efficiency in percent.
- Power factor in percent.
- Torque in Nm.
b. Composite curve for each size of motor plotted with abscissa as speed in
revolutions per minute and ordinates as:
- Motor current in amperes.
- Motor torque in Nm.
- Fan torque in Nm.
- Motor acceleration from standstill to synchronous speed in seconds.
c. The current versus speed and torque versus speed curves for each size of
motor shall indicate the current and torque from standstill to the
synchronous speed of motors.
d. Temperature Test: Time in minutes as abscissa versus temperature rise in

degrees C as ordinates when operated at full voltage and speed.
e. Insulation Resistance-Temperature Test: Test result values shall be plotted
on semi-logarithmic graphs, the insulation resistance values as logarithmic
ordinates and the temperature values as uniform abscissa.
f. Also, for comparison purposes, a curve indicating the safe operating value of
insulation resistance shall be plotted on the same sheet with the insulation
resistance temperature test curve.
g. The following information shall be stated on each motor performance curve
and data sheet:
- Project title.
- Contractor's name and address.
- Name and address of motor manufacturer.
- Authority's fan designation number in which the motor forms a part.
- Motor type.
- Motor serial number.
- Motor frame size.
- Motor nameplate kilowatt rating.
- Electrical characteristics (voltage-phase-frequency).
- Full load and no load current in amperes.
- Direction of rotation of motor.
- Speed in revolutions per minute.
- Service factor.
- Rotational moment of inertia of rotor in kilograms per square meter.
- Electrical characteristics of space heater, including voltage and kilowatt
input.
3. Fan sound power levels in decibels (re: db 10-12 watts) shall be submitted as
hereinafter specified. For reversible fans and for both directions of airflow. Sound power
levels in the eight frequency bands at design airflow capacity shall not exceed the
listed values on the fan schedule shown at each octave band.
4. Manufacturer's quality assurance program.
5. A complete list of projects on which similar fans for rail or transit tunnel projects have
been applied. List shall include:
- Name of owner or user.
- Contract number(s).
- Original installation date(s).
- Current condition of equipment.
A list of all known failures for the past ten years, including their apparent causes,
corrective work effected (including design changes), and a description of equipment
service and operating conditions.
6. List of components proposed to be purchased from other manufacturers, giving name
of manufacturer, type and characteristic of each item and applicable data requested
under Paragraphs 1 through 4 above.
Within 45 days after issue of a Notice from the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit the following
for the Engineer review and consent.
1. Certified shop drawings for fans, motors, fan-motor unit bases, installation drawings,
installation instructions, dimensioned drawings for anchor bolt locations, and any
additional data required to demonstrate compliance with Contract documents.
2. Certificate of Compliance signifying that equipment to be furnished under this Contract
meets the requirements specified herein and for the fan inlet conditions shown on the
drawings.
3. Shop drawings shall indicate weight of each component.
4. Data on motor bearing lubricant.
5. Factory and field-test procedures.
6. List of technical support items specified and list of any additional support items
required.
7. Fan-motor unit disassembly and reassembly instructions.
Procedures for separately removing and replacing motor, rotor and blades, as well as
procedures for removing a complete fan-motor unit without disassembly.
Within 14 days after successful completion of tests specified herein and of any additional tests
conducted at the Contractor's own option, Contractor shall submit the following:
1. Certified test results for all fan and motor factory tests conducted. All test data shall
be bound in one report. The test report shall be indexed and cross-referenced in an
easily understood manner.
2. All records and results of non-destructive examinations made at completion of each
examination.
3. Field test results
4. Radiographic inspection films.
A2 PRODUCTS
A2.01 FAN-MOTOR UNITS
Description
1. Fans shall be axial flow type with reversible operation. Emergency fan-motor units
shall be required to operate in the forward or reverse direction of airflow, with a
capability of starting, stopping, or reversing the direction of flow at any time.
2. Fan-motor units shall be direct-driven by internally mounted electric motors, with
provision for manual adjustment of the pitch of the individual blades.
3. Motors shall be the product of a single manufacturer, whose name shall appear on
the motor performance curves and other data submitted. The motors shall conform
to all applicable ANSI, IEEE, and NEMA. Motors shall not be provided with
self-contained thermal protective devices.
4. Motors shall be of the totally enclosed, air-over, cast iron or steel round frame,
induction type, continuous duty, variable torque, and shall be flange, pad, or foot
mounted.
5. Nameplate kilowatt shall be actual continuous brake kilowatts developed without
any consideration of the "air over" factor.
Operating Environment
1. Fans and all parts thereof shall be capable of withstanding the effect of all stresses
and loads under starting, operating, and reversing conditions specified. Fans and all
components shall be capable of operating for one hour in an ambient temperature
of 250 degrees C. Fans, motors and components shall be capable of withstanding
sudden temperature changes as a result of fire between the extremes of zero and
plus 250 degrees C or vice versa in a time frame of 20 seconds. Contractor shall
submit maximum design stress of rotating components at maximum fan speed and
250 degrees C Temperature and shall designate types of materials to be used in

design by their ASTM designations or approved equal.
2. Fans shall be designed and built to serve an underground subway environment and
to function under conditions of high humidity and high temperature and the inlet
and outlet conditions indicated.
Fan-Motor Unit Design Requirements
1. Fan-motor unit performance shall be rated for the airflow and total pressure
specified per the Contractor’s Drawings at a maximum air density of 1.2 kilograms
per cubic meter.
2. Fan performance curves for either direction shall rise continuously with decreasing
flow between free delivery and 60 percent of free air delivery or to maximum
kilowatt rating. Fans shall be capable of operating continuously at specified design
points for forward and reverse flow. For the purpose of this Contract, forward flow
shall be designated as exhaust mode and reverse flow shall be designated as supply
mode.
3 Emergency fan-motor units shall have a total efficiency of not less than 60 percent
in forward flow and not less than 50 percent in reverse flow, when operating at the
specified nominal flow rate.
4. Fans shall be capable of starting from a standstill to full speed, in not more than
15 seconds, without failure of any part of the unit. Fans shall be capable of reversing
to full speed from either direction of airflow and rotation during an emergency
within 20 seconds, after a 10 second delay between power interruption and the
energising of the motor for the reversed rotation, without failure of any part of the
unit.
5. Emergency fan performance, when operating in the reverse direction of airflow and
against a constant equivalent orifice, shall not deviate by more than ten percent in
airflow delivered from the fan-motor unit performance curves for operation in the
forward direction of airflow at any point between 60 percent of the nominal airflow
rate and free delivery.
6. Brake kilowatts shall not exceed the nameplate kilowatts of the fans when operating
in either direction of airflow.
7. Pressure variations of plus or minus 300 Pa induced by external causes shall not
result in movement of the fan operating point along the fan operating curve into
the region of unstable operation. This requirement does not affect the kilowatt
requirement for the design operating point.
Fans shall not operate in stalling range of fan performance curve during parallel
operation (forward or reverse direction).
9. Fans shall have a stable operating characteristic in both directions of free flow over
the range from 50 percent nominal flow of free delivery.
A2.02 FAN FABRICATION
Impeller hub and blades shall be fabricated of aluminium alloy castings (ASTM B686) or
forgings (ASTM B247) or steel (ASTM A-588, Grade A and A-151, 1020 hot rolled), suitable
for the specified performance and environment. Fan rotating components shall be
designed such that no measured or calculated stress level shall exceed 60 percent of the
components materials yield strength at design temperature. Fan blades shall not vary in
weight by more than 2 percent. Blades shall be manufactured of a homogeneous material
as specified herein and shall have no cast-in or embedded materials of any kind. Individual
blades shall be secured to the hub by not less than four bolts per blade, or shall be
clamped securely between the two halves of a split hub or between suitably designed
and manufactured clamp plates. Blade bolts, hub bolts or clamp plate bolts shall be
readily accessible. The pitch of the blades shall be manually adjustable without removing
impeller from fan unit. (Pitch is defined as the angle formed by the chord line of a blade
root cross-section and a line parallel to the direction of rotation.) The ratio of the hub
diameter to the fan-housing diameter shall not be less than 0.35. The hub shall have index
marks embossed or engraved to show the design operating blade setting and the blade
settings for a minimum of five additional increments of stagger angle with not less than
two on each side of design setting. In addition, the Contractor shall provide metal
templates or other approved devices to facilitate settings of blade angles in the field. One
template shall be provided attached to each fan unit in a location that is subject to the
Engineer consent. One template shall also be provided with each maintenance manual.
Emergency fan housings, including motor mounts and motor supports shall be fabricated
of hot-rolled steel not less than 6 mm thick. Clearance between housing inner diameter
and blade tips shall be sufficient to allow for thermal growth difference between blades
and steel housing at temperature of 250 degrees C. Fan housing shall be provided with
split joints, bolted, and gasketted to facilitate disassembly and removal of motor, rotor,
shaft and bearings without removal of entire fan-motor unit or any part of adjacent
ductwork. Welds located in the air stream shall be ground smooth. Flanged rings shall be
continuously welded to the outer periphery at each end of the housings, or flanges may
be rolled as part of the housing. Provide remote lubrication fittings for lubrication of fan
and motor bearings from easily accessible location.
The rotor assembly shall be fastened to the motor shaft by means of an approved-keyed
positive locking device. The rotor assembly shaft shall be an extension of the drive motor shaft.
Rotor assembly fastening to shaft shall be designed to prevent looseness during
temperature of 250 degree
Motor mounts and motor supports shall be designed to support the entire weight of the
impeller and the motor, and to maintain the alignment of the fan-motor unit assembly in
the specified mounting position and to maintain vibration levels within the specified limits.
Motor supports shall be sufficient in number to provide the required strength and rigidity
and shall be continuously welded to the motor mount and to the housing. Fan motor and
fan rotor assembly shall be totally enclosed within the fan housing and not protrude at
either end of the fan housing.
Nosepiece cover plates, access doors, hatch covers, and aerodynamic separation plates,
where provided, shall be secured by means of positive fastening devices which are fully
effective for both directions of impeller rotation, for all blade settings, and for all
conditions of operation specified herein.
Emergency fan-motor unit assembly supports shall be of carbon steel not less than 10 mm thick.
Supports for horizontally floor mounted fans shall include fan-motor unit structural steel base
with vertical supports extending from the base to the fan housing centerline flange and with
horizontal thrust plates extending over the full length of the fan housing. Vertical supports and
thrust plates shall be welded continuously to the surfaces with which they come into contact.
Contractor shall provide a 6-mm thick silicone gasket between all adjacent companion
flanges; width of gasket shall be same as flange width. Gaskets shall be capable of
withstanding an ambient temperature of 250-degree C for one hour without degradation
of sealing ability and without emitting toxic or noxious fumes.
Sufficient lifting eyes shall be provided on each fan assembly to facilitate on-site
installation and removal of the fans.
Bolts shall be not less than 12 mm diameter. Bolts, nuts, washers and lock washers used
on the fans and components shall be Type 316 stainless steel, silicon bronze, or other
corrosion-resistant material as approved.
A2.03 SHOP FINISHES
After fabrication and prior to assembly, all inside and outside surfaces of all fan housings, fan
housing extensions, supports and fan-motor unit bases shall be prepared in conformity to the
requirements of SP-10 New White Blast Cleaning and shall be given a rust-inhibiting coating,
which may consist of an approved plastic coating, or bonderizing, or phosphatizing, followed
by the application of a suitable rust-inhibiting primer and finish paint that is resistant to abrasion
and to exposure to elevated temperatures. Surface finish shall be capable of withstanding:
For one hour in an ambient temperature of 250 degree C without degradation of its
protective quality, and without emitting toxic or noxious fumes.
Surface finishes damaged during transport or assembly shall be restored to their original
condition and colour by the installing Contractor.
A2.04 MOTOR COMPONENTS AND CONSTRUCTION
General Requirements
1. The motors shall be designed for continuous operation for a period of at least one
hour at a maximum ambient temperature of 250 degree C.
2. Motors shall be equipped with factory installed resistance space heaters within the motor
enclosure to prevent condensation of moisture in the motor windings. The heaters shall be
energised whenever the motor is not in operation and shall be automatically de-energised
whenever the motor is in operation. The heaters shall be provided with leads terminated in
a terminal box external to the fan housing. Motor space heaters shall be energised within 24
hours of the time when the unit is delivered to the site.
3. Nameplate kilowatt of the motors shall be as indicated. Kilowatt input required by
the fans shall not exceed the nameplate kilowatt of the motors at any point on the
fan performance curve in either direction of airflow. Motors shall have a minimum
overall efficiency of 90.0 percent at the rated load. The locked rotor torque shall
not be less than 175 percent of the motor full load torque with rated voltage and
frequency at the motor terminals.
4. Motors shall be capable, under the specified operating conditions, of accelerating
the impeller from a standstill to rated rotational speed in not more than 15 seconds
after being energised. Motors shall also be capable of decelerating the impeller and
accelerating to rated rotational speed in the opposite direction in not more than
30 seconds after being energised for reverse rotation.
5. Motors shall be rated in accordance with NEMA Standards for the locked rotor input
(kilovolt-amperes per kilowatt) required to meet the specified acceleration
performance. Motor and shaft shall be designed for full plug reversal. Motors shall
have a minimum of Type H insulation and shall be rated for Class F temperature
rise when tested at the service factor load as a minimum requirement. Motor service
factor shall be 1.15.
6. Motors shall be provided with a minimum of six (two per phase) resistance
temperature detectors (RTDs) and wired to a terminal box external to the fan
housing for remote indication of excessive running temperature during normal
operation. These wires shall be taped and terminated in the junction box. The
electronics required to interpret the RTD signal and generate an alarm for each
phase shall be included in the instrument panel.
7. During continuous operation, motors shall be insensitive to line voltage variation of
ten percent above or below the rated voltage and to normal frequency variation.
Motors shall be able to accelerate to full speed at rated load with starting voltage
(dip) of 25 percent below rated voltage of the motor.
8. Motors shall be provided with magnetic induction type of speed switch, with
normally closed contacts that will open when motor speed reaches a pre-selected
value in either direction. Operating set point shall be adjustable by means of
external adjusting screws. Unit shall be wired to a terminal box external to the fan
housing.
9. Minimum power factor of motors shall be 85 percent of the high speed winding at
the rated load.
10. The motor shall be designed for accelerating fan impeller from standstill to
operating speed without exceeding the rated temperature rise.
11. The motor shall be single winding. The starting and accelerating torque on motor
windings shall be sufficient to permit the motor rotor and fan impeller to attain full
winding speed without tripping the motor controller overload relays, which shall be
set at a current corresponding to 140 percent of the motor full load current.
Motor Materials and Components
1. Motor shafts shall be steel, designed and constructed to support and drive the fan
impeller under all specified operating conditions.
2. Motor starters and controls shall be furnished under the electrical section.
3. Each motor shall have at least two ball or roller type grease lubricated, electric
motor grade, noise tested bearings selected for the specified operating conditions
of the fan motor unit. The bearings shall have a minimum L-10 life rating of 40,000
hours as defined by the latest standards of the Anti-Friction Bearings Manufacturers
Association (AFBMA).
4. Grease lines shall be brought from each bearing to accessible fittings, external to
the fan housing, at the ground floor level of the fan room. The lines shall be
fabricated of stainless steel or other corrosion resistant alloy, seamless metallic
tubing. The tubing shall not be crushed or scored during installation and the lines
shall have neither kinks nor sharp bends. Lines penetrating the housing shall be
rigidly secured to the housings to prevent vibration of the lines and be provided
with grommets. Grease supply lines shall terminate in straight lubrication fittings.
Grease fittings shall only allow the proper amount of grease to each bearing. The
bearing lubricant shall be capable of providing the lubrication properties specified
by the bearing manufacturer under conditions of operation for one hour with the
lubricant at a temperature of 250 degrees C.
5. The motor leads shall be of cable, suitable for one hour at 250 degree C, wired to
a gasketted NEMA 12 terminal box mounted externally to the fan housing. The
terminal box shall have screw type pressure terminals strips for terminating control
wires, exterior mounting lugs, full cover gasket, hinged door, minimum dimension of
600 mm, 600 mm wide, 300 mm in depth. The conduit and terminal box shall be
rigidly secured to the fan housing in a manner which will prevent vibration and air
leakage and shall be capable of withstanding 250 degree C for one hour without
causing fan failure. Terminal box shall be oriented to receive feeder conduits from
any direction. Motor leads shall be installed to avoid interference with control leads
and terminal strips. Sufficient cable slack shall be provided to permit testing of
cables without disconnecting any connections.
6. Lifting lugs shall be provided on the exterior of motors.
A2.05 NAMEPLATES
Each fan shall be provided with a stainless steel nameplate permanently stamped with
the name and address of the manufacturer, Contractor's identification number, fan type,
Authority designated fan number, shop order, serial number of fan, year manufacturer,
maximum safe operating speed of fan in revolutions per minute, fan impeller diameter,
maximum design operating speed and corresponding volume of air delivered and the fan
total pressures at density specified. The nameplate shall be securely screwed or riveted
to the exterior of fan housing in a conspicuous position.
Each motor shall be provided with two identical stainless steel nameplates permanently
stamped with the name and address of the motor manufacturer, the motor kilowatt,
voltage, phase, frequency, insulation type, full load current, locked rotor indicating code
letter, minimum overall efficiency, the design temperature rise over ambient of the motor,
type of duty, the terminal connection chart for the motor, rating of space heater, speed in
revolutions per minute, service factor, motor type and serial number, bearing numbers and
shop order number. One nameplate shall be furnished on the motor and the other either
riveted or screwed on the exterior of the fan housing immediately adjacent to the fan
nameplate.
Each fan shall be provided with a 250 mm long by 40 mm wide metallic arrow that shall
indicate the direction of forward airflow. The arrow shall be rigidly and permanently
attached to the fan housing, in a position that can be readily viewed when the fan is in its
final operating position. 20 mm letters shall be engraved on the arrow to read as follows:
"EXHAUST (FORWARD AIRFLOW)".
Each fan shall be provided with 200 mm long by 50 mm wide stainless steel plate
permanently stamped with the labels "Grease Line Supply Port" and "Grease Line Exit Port".
All the nameplates and the arrows shall be placed so as to be readily visible.
A2.06 LOW PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL SWITCHES
Fans shall be equipped with a low-pressure differential switch.
Differential pressure switches shall be diaphragm operated with 100 mm diaphragm to
actuate a single pole double throw snap switch. Motion of the diaphragm shall be
restrained by a calibrated spring that can be adjusted to set the exact pressure differential
at which the electrical switch will be actuated. Motion of the diaphragm shall be
transmitted to the switch button by means of a direct mechanical linkage.
Operating Range: Plus 1500Pa, zinc die casting and steel stamping; zinc plated for 200 hour
salt spray resistance. Diaphragm shall be moulded silicone rubber. Calibration spring shall
be stainless steel.
A2.07 JET FANS
1. Description
1.1 Furnish jet fans of the axial-flow type, arrest driven by internally mounted single-
speed motors which are capable of delivering the design thrust in both the forward
and reverse (when the motor rotation is reversed) directions. The design thrust
indicated in the fan equipment schedule shall be achieved in both the forward
and reverse directions without exceeding the nameplate motor horsepower.
1.2 Provide jet fans capable of being operated manually or automatically, either
locally from the motor control center, or remotely from the operations control
center. The operating procedures will require the fans to be operated either
individually or simultaneously, in either the forward or the reverse direction of
airflow at anytime.
2.1 Fans shall be designed and built to serve a tunnel railway environment and to
function under conditions of high humidity and high temperature and the inlet
and outlet conditions indicated.
2.2 The whole jet fan assembly, including fan, fan support, sound attenuators, fan motor,
emergency stop button and cables etc., shall not suffer mechanical, electrical or
structural failure when operating at full capacity at all in-duty conditions and at tunnel
air temperatures of 250 degrees C for a minimum of 60 minutes.
2.3 The jet fan performance requirements are as indicated herein. Performance that
does not meet these requirements shall be cause for rejection of the proposed
equipment, which shall then be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense.
The minimum thrust and exit jet velocity requirements indicated apply to jet fan
operation with an air density of 1.2 kilograms per cubic meter.
2.4 The jet fan manufacturer is responsible for the performance, installation and
coordination of the combined jet fan sound attenuator unit.
2.5 Furnish jet fans capable of satisfactorily withstanding the effects of all stresses and
loads encountered during starting, operating and reversing conditions.
2.6 Provide jet fans capable of developing a thrust and exit velocity, in either direction
of motor rotation, of not less than that indicated. Ensure that the brake
horsepower of fans, when operating in the reverse direction of airflow, does not
exceed the brake horsepower when operating in the forward direction of airflow.
2.7 Provide jet fans capable of reversing airflow in 45 seconds or less, from full speed
forward to full speed reverse or vice versa with a maximum de-energized period
of 10 seconds between reversals.
2.8 Furnish jet fan-motor units having are not less than 60 percent when operating in the
forward and reverse directions of airflow at the specified nominal thrust and exit velocity.
2.9 Furnish an emergency jet fan assembly having vibrations that do not exceed the
peak-to-peak amplitude of 1.6-mils (0.0016-inch) for a nominal operating speed of
1800-rprn.
2.10 An external motor terminal box shall be fitted to facilitate electrical power
connections. The terminal box shall be mechanically-connected to the motor with
solid conduit. Provide a separate enclosure for instrumentation.
2.11 A mounting frame shall be supplied. Anti-vibration mounts shall be selected. In

the event of mounting frame failure, galvanized steel chains shall prevent fans
from falling.
2.12 Design the support and suspension based on the space constraints shown on the
Contract Drawings. Check the actual space constraints on-site for mounting the
support. The jet fan support and suspension design must be submitted for
approval.
2.13 Emergency stop push buttons shall be metal-clad type and shall be able to
withstand the temperature conditions cited herein.
3. Jet Fan Components and Materials
3.1 Fabricate impeller hub and blades of aluminum-alloy castings or forgings, or for
the specified performance and environment.
3.2 Fasten impeller to the motor shaft by means of positive-locking devices that are
fully-effective for both directions of airflow, for all blade angle settings and for all
conditions of operation specified.
3.3 Design and construct impeller to withstand stresses and loads created by over-
speed testing to 125-percent of the nominal operating speed.
3.4 Design and construct impeller and hub such that the pitch of blades can be
manually-adjustable without removing impeller. Provide the blades and hubs with
index marks that show the design operating blade setting and a minimum of three
increments of stagger angle larger and three increments smaller than the design
operating blade setting. Clearly indicate the maximum blade angle beyond which
the motor will overload. In addition, the Contractor shall provide metal templates
or other approved devices to facilitate settings of blade angles in the field. One
template shall be provided attached to each fan unit in a location that is subject
to the Engineer consent. One template shall also be provided with each
maintenance manual.
3.5 Fabricate jet fan housing, motor mounts/supports and housing supports of hot
rolled steel. Provide fan housing of continuously-welded construction and of
thickness not less than 6 mm. Grind all welds located in air stream until smooth.
3.6 Form jet fan housing to a true-round, concentric, cylindrical shape providing
uniform clearance between the tips of the impeller blades and the housing.
Provide adequate clearance between blade tips and the housing at all points to
allow for expansion and contraction over a temperature range from 0 degrees C
to 250 degrees C for 60 minutes without developing interference.
3.7 Provide end flanges for the housing of the same thickness as the housing or thicker.
Flanges may be rolled integrally or continuously welded to the outer periphery of
the jet fan housing. Provide flanges of sufficient width having punched, or drilled,
holes to allow sound attenuators to be rigidly-bolted to the housing.
3.8 Design and construct motor mounts and motor supports to make the motor axis
and the jet fan housing axis concentric. Provide motor mounts and motor supports
in sufficient number and of a design to support the entire weight of the impeller
and the motor, and the loads developed by fan operation.
3.9 Provide access doors of adequate size in the fan housing for inspection of blade-
locking devices, and for vibration test instrumentation. Fabricate access doors of
steel construction with AISI Type 316 stainless steel hardware and provide with
not less than 6 mm. gasket to make air-tight construction. Select gasket material
that is suitable for the operating conditions specified herein. Inside face of door
shall be flush with fan housing.
3.10 Provide fan housings of sufficient length to totally enclose the fan impeller and
motor within the housing.
3.11 Make the ends of the jet fan housing straight and smooth, suitable to receive
sound attenuators at both ends. Provide connections between the fan and sound
attenuators that facilitate easy assembly and disassembly of fan and sound
attenuators in the field.
3.12 Provide lifting lugs of steel construction that are welded on the exterior of the jet
fan housing and sound attenuators. Provide lifting lugs in sufficient number to
facilitate on-site installation and removal of the fan and sound attenuators.
3.13 Grease fittings shall be brought to the outside of the fan housing using stainless
steel tubing and shall be provided with covers that effectively exclude dirt an
between lubrications. An outlet grease plug shall allow metering the amount of
grease which actually enters against over lubrication.
3.14 Instrumentation termination boxes shall be hot-dip galvanized cast iron
diagonally-split type, and suitably gasketed to prevent ingress of moisture and dirt.
3.15 Permanently mark the forward direction of airflow in conspicuous location on the
exterior of the fan housing. Each jet fan shall be provided with a 300 mm. long by
50 mm. wide metallic arrow which shall indicate the direction of forward airflow.
The arrows shall be rigidly and permanently attached to the fan, in a position
which can be readily viewed when the fan is in its installed position.
4. Jet Fan Motors
a) Provide single-speed reversible motors that conform to the NFPA 70 and NEMA
MG-1.
b) Provide motors with a built-in temperature sensing device wired to a NEMA 4X
terminal box mounted on the outside of the jet fan housing. Make the terminal
box common for all monitoring devices specified under this Section. Terminal
boxes shall be sized to provide device and wiring clearances conforming to
NFPA 70. Ensure that the temperature-sensing device is capable of interfacing
with a remote indication of motor overheating.
c) Provide jet fan motors of the totally enclosed, high efficiency, air-over, all cast
iron or high grade silicone steel frame, copper wire, induction type. Wind
motors for 380 volt, three phase, 50 hertz. Motors shall be suitable for
operation with a 400 volt, three phase, 50 hertz power distribution system.
Wire motors for full voltage starting and reversing. Motor service factor shall be
1.15.
4.2 Motor Performance Requirements
a) Provide motors capable of accelerating the emergency jet fans from stand still
to the rated rotational speed, in either direction, in not more than 15 seconds,
when started across-the-line with rated voltage (400 volts) at the motor
terminals and voltage dip of not more than 15 percent of the rated voltage
when starting.
b) Provide motors capable of reversing in 60 seconds or less, from full speed
forward to full speed reverse and vice versa with a de-energized period of 30
seconds (maximum) between reversals.
c) Rate motors in accordance with NEMA MG-1 for the locked-rotor input (kilovolt-
amperes per horsepower) required to meet the indicated acceleration
performance. Minimum locked rotor torque shall be 145 percent of full load
torque. Provide motors with a minimum of Class H insulation and rated for Class F
temperature rise, when tested at service factor load as a minimum requirement.
d) Provide motors capable of operating continuously at rated torque at any terminal
voltage between 85 percent and 110 percent of the nominal supply voltage.
4.3 Motor Components and Construction

a) Provide motor shaft of steel construction, designed to support and drive the
jet fan impeller under all specified operating conditions. Provide each motor
with lifting lugs in sufficient numbers.
b) The motors shall be designed for continuous operation for a period of not less
than 60 minutes at an ambient temperature of 250 degrees C
c) Equip motors with anti-condensation, 230 volts single-phase heaters to prevent
condensation of moisture in the motor windings. Energize heaters when the
motor is not operating and de-energize whenever the motor is in operation.
Terminate heater leads in the power terminal box mounted on the exterior of
the jet fan housing.
d) The motor leads for power, monitoring and control shall be suitable for
operation of not less than 60 minutes at a temperature of not less than 250
degrees C, and shall be wired to separate oversized power and control terminal
boxes externally mounted on the jet fan housing. Provide terminal box with
screw type or bolt down pressure terminals and exterior mounting lugs. Protect
lead wires from air stream by enclosing them in an airtight, high tensile strength,
seamless rigid metal conduit. Provide insulated bushing on conduits to protect
motor leads. Provide the terminal box of the next larger size than the NEMA
standard for the number of wires required. Orient the terminal box to receive
feeder conduit from its direction of arrival.
e) Design and construct motor bearings for maximum radial and thrust loads
anticipated during starting, operating and reversing conditions. Furnish bearings
having a minimum L-10 life rating equal to 40,000 hours as defined by the
latest standards of the Anti-Friction Bearings Manufacturers Association
(AFBMA).
f) Bring lubrication lines from motor bearings to the exterior of the jet fan housing
and terminate in straight lubrication fittings. Terminate grease release lines, if
used, in spring loaded relief fittings. Provide grease fittings with covers to
exclude water and dust.
g) Fabricate lubrication lines for motor bearings of high strength, seamless
stainless steel tubing without kinks or sharp bends. Secure lubrication lines
rigidly to the housing to prevent vibration of the lines and the leakage of air.
h) Motors shall be provided with a minimum of six (two per phase) resistance
temperature detectors (RTDs) and wired to the auxiliary box described herein,
external to the jet fan housing for remote indication of excessive running
temperature during normal operation. These wires shall be taped and
terminated in the auxiliary box and extended to a monitoring device located
in the instrument panel. The temperature monitoring device shall incorporate
a local digital display of temperature levels, alarm and trip levels, and shall be
equipped with alarm contacts to provide local audible and visual alarms of
high temperature. Alarm contacts shall also be wired back to the jet fan-motor
unit starter.
i) Design and construct motor mounts and motor supports to make the motor
axis and the fan housing axis concentric.
5. Miscellaneous Appurtenances
5.1 Fan Supports
a) Design and construct fans support and suspension system as required against
the fluctuating loads imposed by fan operations and train motion. Include
appropriate seismic restraint as required. Use AISI Type 316 stainless steel bolts
and support members, with isolating material separating the stainless steel
from the fan's steel attachment locations. Design support system to facilitate
easy dismantling and reinstallation of fan and/or sound attenuators, as required
for maintenance.
b) Fabricate the fan supports of stainless steel. Bolt supports to the fan housing
and cross-brace to provide rigidity.
c) Design supports suitable for the existing provisions in the field for mounting
the supports and the space constraints.
d) Furnish all bolts, nuts, washers and lock washers of AISI Type 316 stainless
steel.
e) Provide lifting lugs, or eyes, In sufficient numbers.
5.2 Nameplates
a) Each fan shall be provided with a stainless steel nameplate permanently
stamped with the name and address of the manufacturer, Contractor's
identification number, fan type, Authority designated fan number, shop order,
serial number of fan, year manufacturer, maximum safe operating speed of fan
in revolutions per minute, fan impeller diameter, maximum design operating
speed and corresponding volume of air devoured and the fan total pressures
at density specified. The nameplate shall be securely screwed or riveted to

the error of fan housing in a conspicuous position.
b) Each motor shall be provided with two identical stainless steel nameplates
permanently stamped with the name and address of the motor manufacturer,
the motor kilowatt, voltage, phase, frequency, insulation type, full load current,
locked rotor indicating code letter, minimum overall efficiency, the connection
chart for the motor, rating of space heater, speed in revolutions per minute,
service factor, motor type and serial number, bearing numbers and shop order
number. One nameplate shall be furnished on the motor and the other either
riveted or screwed on the exterior of the fan housing immediately adjacent to
the fan nameplate.
c) Each fan shall be provided with a 250 mm long by 50 mm wide metallic arrow
that shall indicate the direction of forward airflow. The arrow shall be rigidly
and permanently attached to the fan. Position that can be readily viewed when
the fan is in its final operating position. 20 mm letters shall be engraved on the
arrow to read as follows: "EXHAUST (FORWARD AIRFLOW)'.
d) Each fan shall be provided with 200 mm long by 50 mm wide stainless steel
plate permanently stamped with the labels "State Railway of Thailand" and
Logo.
e) All the nameplates and the arrows shall be placed so as to be readily visible.
5.3 Low Pressure Differential Switches
a) Tunnel fans shall be equipped with a low-pressure differential switch.
b) Differential pressure switches shall be diaphragm operated with 100 mm
diaphragm to actuate a single pole double throw snap switch. Motion of the
diaphragm shall be restrained by a calibrated spring that can be adjusted to
set the exact pressure differential at which the electrical switch will be
actuated. Motion of the diaphragm shall be transmitted to the switch button
by means of a direct mechanical linkage.
c) Operating Range: Plus 1500 Pa, zinc die casting and steel stamping; zinc plated
for 200 hour salt spray resistance. Diaphragm shall be molded silicone rubber.
Calibration spring shall be stainless steel.
A2.08 FACTORY TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

General
1. The Contractor shall perform factory tests as described below. The Engineer may,
at his option, witness any or all tests. Observations made during the tests and all
test results shall be recorded in a document form, certified by the Contractor and
submitted to the Engineer for consent. Three weeks notice and information as to
proposed test procedure shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to the factory
tests.
2. Pre-production fan-motor units may be furnished as production units after pre-
production testing if all parts and components are in like new and operating
condition. Each unit must satisfactorily pass all specified factory tests as described
below under production fan tests.
3. The test procedures specified herein shall be sequential in the order prescribed.
Any fan type or size or component thereof which fails to satisfactorily perform any
test as specified shall be considered unacceptable. Failing parts shall be replaced
and the entire unit shall be retested as specified herein.
4. Before manufacture is begun on any ventilation fan-motor unit to be furnished,
Contractor shall submit full details of all test procedures, samples of all test report
forms, and full details of the methods by which the raw test data has been
calculated, to the Engineer for his consent.
Motor Tests
1. Motors shall be tested in accordance with the procedures specified in IEEE
Publication 112 and NEMA MG-1. A certified test report and certified performance
curves verifying the theoretical motor performance curves for all of the co-ordinates
specified shall be submitted to the Authority for approval. Performance curves for
each type and size of fan motor shall be plotted to a scale that will facilitate
accurate readings.
2. One motor of each nameplate kilowatt rating and service factor shall be tested for
forward and reverse modes as follows:
a. Tests to obtain actual fan motor performance curves verifying the calculated
fan motor performance curves submitted and other data specified
hereinafter.
- Full load current in amperes
- No load current in amperes
- Full load input in kilowatts

- No load input in kilowatts
- Locked rotor current in amperes
- Locked rotor input in kilovolt amperes
- Locked rotor Nm.
b. Tests to determine:
- Winding resistance
- Losses, no load and full load
- Temperature rise
c. Dielectric tests
d. Visual bearing inspection
3. The remaining motors shall be tested at its rated synchronous speed unwitnessed.
Reversible motors shall be tested in one direction. Tests shall include the following:
- Winding resistance
- No load current in amperes
- Dielectric tests
- No load speed
- Visual bearing inspection
- Locked rotor current in amperes
4. The following data shall be plotted for each direction as ordinates versus kilowatts
as abscissas up to 115 percent full load:
- Current, in amperes
- Efficiency, in percentage
- Power factor, in percentage
5. The following data shall be plotted for each motor frame size as ordinates versus
revolutions per minute as abscissas:
- Current in amperes
- Torque in Nm
- Power factor in percentage
6. The following information shall be imprinted on each motor performance graph:

- Project title
- Name of Contractor
- Name of motor manufacturer
- Catalogue name and number of motor
- Direction of rotation of motor
- Speed, in revolutions per minute
- Electrical characteristics (voltage/phase/frequency)
- Motor designation number
- Motor frame size
- Motor kilowatt rating
- Full load current
- Designation of the fan of which the motor forms a part
- Service factor
- Polar moment of inertia of the fan-motor unit, in meter-kilogram squared
- Electrical characteristics of space heater, including voltage and kilowatt input.
7. Test data for the certified performance curves shall be recorded at the rated voltage
and frequency of the motor, continuously over the speed range from standstill to
rated rotational speed of the motor.
Radiographic Inspection
1. Provide a certification that, for all fan hubs and blades, x-rays have been taken, with
notation of the x-ray numbers, and also that zyglo testing has been performed. In
addition, provide a complete list of the identification numbers for all hubs and
blades actually installed in each fan.
2. Certification of visual acceptability, the x-ray procedure, the x-ray films, and proof
of traceability of conformance with alloy specifications of the metal used to cast
the hub and blades shall be submitted to the Engineer for consent for approval.
The identification number of the x-ray film shall be etched on each blade and hub
at a location that will not create adverse stress concentrations to reduce the design
safety factor at the point of critical stress.
Overspeed Tests
1. All fan rotor assemblies manufactured and furnished for this Contract shall be
subjected to an overspeed test at the factory as specified herein prior to assembly
of the complete fan-motor units.
2. After radiographic inspection and after static and dynamic balancing, each
completely assembled fan impeller shall be spin tested in both directions. Spin
testing of individual components, such as blades and rotors, in lieu of testing
complete impellers, is not acceptable. Each fan impeller shall be spun at 125
percent of the maximum design operating speed for a period of not less than three
minutes. Following each spin test, a visual inspection for surface defects shall be
made by the Contractor. Certificates of visual acceptability shall be submitted to
the Engineer for consent.
Vibration Test
1. After assembly each fan-motor unit shall be checked for bearing operation in both
directions of rotation. Defective bearings shall be replaced, and the fan shall be
rechecked before further testing. The vibration shall be measured in two radial
planes, 90 degrees apart, and in the axial direction. Measurements shall be made
for each radial plane at the front and rear of the fan. Measured maximum vibration
shall not exceed peak-to-peak amplitudes of 1.2 mils for fans operating at a nominal
speed of 1,200 revolutions per minute or less.
2. If measured vibration amplitude exceeds the specified maximum, or if the specified
vibration measurements reveal unacceptable vibration at any frequency other than
rated design operating speed, vibration amplitude shall be measured and recorded
continuously as the fan is accelerated from a standstill to rated design operating
speed, and as the unit coasts down from rated design operating speed to a
standstill. The amplitude versus frequency chart shall be analysed by the Contractor
(Fan Manufacturer) to determine the cause(s) of the unacceptable excessive
vibration. Resonant frequencies shall be determined and shall be demonstrated as
not to occur within fan operating ranges. The analysis shall be submitted to the
Authority for approval and the cause(s) shall be corrected. The Engineer shall be
furnished final vibration amplitude readings on all fan bearings.
Run-In Test
1. Each emergency fan shall be operated continuously for a total of 24 hours, 12 hours
in the forward (exhaust) mode and 12 hours in the reverse (supply) mode of rotation.
During reversal, fan shall be allowed to coast for a period of five minutes before
being restarted in the reverse direction.
Fan-Motor Unit Performance Test
1. One pre-production fan-motor unit that has satisfactorily passed the preceding test
and inspections specified, shall be tested in accordance with the procedures
specified in the AMCA 210, latest edition, using a test set-up consented to by the
Engineer.
2. Fans shall be tested without flow cones or any other static regain devices. The fans
shall be tested at the blade angle that shall produce the required volume of air at
the required system pressure. This blade angle shall not be at its maximum setting.
Test data shall be recorded on AMCA data submittal forms, or the equivalent
thereof, as consented to by the Engineer. Certified test data, and certified
performance curves for all of the co-ordinates specified shall be submitted to the
Engineer for consent.
3. Performance tests shall cover the range of airflow rates from no flow to free air
delivery. Performance tests of emergency fans shall cover this range of airflow rates
in both directions of airflow. Actual fan performance shall not be less than contract
values.
4. Triaxial Strain gauges shall be applied to two blades per impeller and to the hub of
the unloaded impeller of each fan. To accurately measure strains and stresses
developed in each rotor, one strain gauge at the midpoint and one strain gauge at
the tip of blades on each side shall be applied on minimum of two blades. In
addition, one strain gauge shall be applied on impeller hub for each strain gauged
blade. The strains developed during performance testing shall be continuously
measured and monitored. The measured strains produced under the performance
test load shall be used to calculate the corresponding stresses. Stresses found shall
not exceed sixty percent of the material yield strength at 250°C. The methods of
strain measurement and stress calculation shall be submitted to the Authority for
approval. The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's notarised certification that
the measured strains and the corresponding calculated stresses represent the strains
and stresses developed in all other blades of the pre-production fan motor unit
being tested. Calculated maximum expected stresses, and the design properties of
the material used to fabricate the impeller blades and hub, shall also be submitted
to the Engineer for consent. Strain gauge testing shall be performed using the same
testing set-up and operating conditions as the fan full scale performance test.
5. Natural frequency readings of the fan blades shall be taken and included in the test
report. Procedures used to determine natural frequency shall be submitted for
consent. No blade’s natural frequency shall occur within the fan rpm from 0 to
300% of the nominal fan operating speed.
6. In the event that the tests show that the fan-motor units do not comply with the
requirements as to characteristics and performance, or that the brake kilowatt will
exceed by five percent or more than the brake kilowatt shown in the theoretical
data submitted by the Contractor, the fan-motor units will be rejected unless
changes are made therein and tests repeated until the specific requirements are
met.
7. Upon the completion of the fan-motor units' performance tests, submit two
complete copies of all raw test data.
8. After the completion of fan-motor units performance tests, submit for each
fan-motor unit size, performance curves and tables of performance data calculated
from shop test data, at each of the test points at each rotational direction.
9. The tables shall consist of numerical values at each of the test points for the
following:
a. Volume of air delivery in cubic meters per second
b. Fan static pressure in Pascals
c. Fan total pressure in Pascals
d. Fan outlet velocity pressure in Pascals
e. Fan total efficiency in percent
f. Fan static efficiency in percent
g. Kilowatt input to fan impeller
h. Fan speed in revolutions per minute
i. Current input in amperes
j. Voltage in volts
k. Motor power input in kilowatts and power factor
l. Number of phases and frequency
10. Submit fan-motor unit performance curves verifying the theoretical performance
curves previously submitted. Test points shall be indicated on performance curves.
Noise Test
1. Preproduction unit which has satisfactorily passed all preceding tests and
inspections specified shall be tested in accordance with the induct test procedure
of ANSI 12.34 to obtain sound power level data at eight-octave band center
frequencies from 63 Hertz to 8,000 Hertz.
2. Fan shall be tested with specified nominal airflow in both forward and reverse
directions. Test data shall be submitted to the Engineer in tabular form.
Reversal Test
1. One fan motor unit which has satisfactorily passed all preceding tests and
inspections specified shall be subject to reversal tests. These tests shall require
operation at rated operating speed for approximately 3-1/2 hours with the unit
oriented in the position that it will be installed, and shall require three cycles of
rotation reversal. A cycle of rotation reversal is defined as reversal from one
direction of motor impeller rotation to the other direction of rotation, and then back
to the first direction of rotation.
2. The reversal test shall begin with the fan unit operated in the forward direction of
airflow for a period of 30 minutes.
3. At the end of the first 30-minute period of operation in the forward direction of
airflow, the motor shall be electrically reversed, with a 10-second time delay
imposed between the interruption of power and re-energising of the motor for
reversed rotation.
4. After the motor has been re-energised, the fan shall be operated in the reverse
direction of airflow for a period of 30 minutes.
5. The test shall be continued, with alternating 30-minute periods of operation in the
forward and reverse directions of airflow, until six rotation reversals have been
performed. At the end of each 30-minute period of operation, the fan-unit motor
shall be electrically reversed, with a 10-second time delay imposed between each
change in direction until six rotation reversals have been performed.
6. After three cycles of rotation reversal, i.e., six reversals of the direction of motor and
impeller rotation have been performed, the fan-motor unit shall be operated for a
period of 30 minutes.
7. At the end of the last 30-minute period of operation, the fan shall be de-energised,
and permitted to coast to a standstill.
Resistance of the motor winding insulation shall be measured just prior to the start of
the reversal test, and immediately after the end of the test. In addition, the
temperature of the motor windings and of the motor frame shall be continuously
recorded throughout the test. Certification of successful performance of the reversal
test and certified test data shall be submitted to the Engineer for consent.
A3 EXECUTION
A3.01 INSTALLATION METHODS
All fans shall be furnished and installed as specified herein. The manufacturer's rigging
instructions shall be carefully followed. The Contractor shall make certain that the
installation of all supports, gaskets, hardware, etc., are accomplished with precision and
the exercise of extreme care so as to assure safe, accurate and trouble-free fan installation.
The fan installation shall be done in the presence of the Fan Manufacture's Field Service
Representative.
Prior to proceeding with the work described above, the Contractor shall submit for the
Authority's approval eight copies of detailed drawings showing all fan installations including
dimensions, supports, hardware, installation methods, and all other pertinent data.
Fans shall be connected to transition companion flanges with 6 mm thick solid silicone
gasket between.
When installed, the orientation of each fan, as to motor end, shall be as indicated on the
Contractors Drawings. Fans which are improperly installed shall be removed and
reinstalled.
A3.03 FIELD TEST
Upon completion of the installation of the ventilation equipment at the fan room and the
installation and verification of the power and local control wiring, the Contractor shall
notify the Engineer in writing at least two weeks prior to the field testing to have the
Engineer present to witness the tests. The Contractor shall furnish written instructions for
testing of the fan motor units in the field. This instruction shall be submitted as a part of
the operating and maintenance instruction.
Field tests shall be performed under the technical guidance and supervision of the Fan
Manufacture's Field Service Representative. The Fan Manufacture's Field Service
Representative shall provide the field test instrumentation and perform the tests. The Fan
Manufacture's Field Service Representative shall measure and record the vibration
amplitude; power consumption; no-load, starting and full load voltages; starting and full
load currents; and acceleration time.
Time of operational testing shall be two hours per fan; one hour in each flow direction. All
fans in a station shall be operating simultaneously when determining and recording the
electrical measurement. Prior to the operational tests the vibration and electrical
measurements shall be recorded for each fan motor unit at design speeds in each
direction.
Testing for the ventilation equipment shall not be undertaken until electric service and
local controls can be provided for testing.
Each fan motor unit shall be checked for obviously rough operation after the fans are
installed. Defective bearings shall be replaced with new bearings and the fan(s) shall be
rechecked. Amplitude and frequency of radial and axial vibrations at the bearings shall be
measured, recorded, and checked for conformity to the Specifications.
Each fan motor unit on which the specified vibration field tests have been successfully
performed shall be tested to confirm that such fans are operational. Each emergency fan
motor unit shall be proven operational in both directions of airflow, including one reversing
of direction of rotation.
When two fans are to start, starting sequence shall be provided with 20 seconds interval.
Both fans shall achieve full speed in 35 seconds. When both fans are to be reversed, fans
shall be de-energized for 30 second. After 30 seconds, the selected fan shall be energised
for reverse rotation with successive fan energised at 20 seconds.
Electricians to energise the ventilation equipment where required and assist the Contractor
during testing shall be provided by the Contractor.
Any defect that develops within the ventilation equipment during the test shall be
corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Authority.
Any defect that develops with the installation work during the test shall be corrected by
the Contractor at no additional cost to the Authority.
After completion of all field tests and after the final visit by the Fan Manufacture's Field
Service Representative, Contractor shall submit a field test and inspection report. Field test
report shall include copies of raw data, measured results, calculations, and all data derived
from tests to confirm compliance with specified performance, noise, vibration and
equipment efficiencies.
END OF ATTACHMENT A
ATTACHMENT B - TUNNEL VENTILATION DAMPER UNITS

B1.0 GENERAL
B1.01 DESCRIPTION
This Section specifies the requirements for furnishing motor operated dampers and
appurtenances as specified herein. Dampers shall be the product of a single manufacturer
whose name shall appear on the performance curves and other data submitted and who
shall have previously furnished emergency fan and bypass dampers to rail transit agencies.
B1.02 QUALITY CONTROL
Materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the following
standards and codes to the extent specified herein. The publications listed below form a
part of these specifications to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in
the text by basic designation only.
Air Moving and Control Association (AMCA):
a. 500, Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. C1, Specifications of General Requirements of a Quality Program
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. A36, Structural Steel.
b. A123, Zinc (Hot Galvanised) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled,
Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
c. A193, Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature
Service.
d. A239, Locating the Thinnest Spot in Zinc (Galvanised) Coating on Iron or Steel
Articles by the Preece Test (Copper Sulfate Dip).
e. A525, Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Hot Galvanised) by the Hot-Dip Process.
American Welding Society (AWS):
a. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):
a. ICS, Industrial Controls and Systems.
b. IS1.1, Enclosures for Controls and Systems.
c. MG-1, Motors and Generators.

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 130, Fixed Guideway Transit Systems.
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. 508, Industrial Control Equipment.
B1.03 SUBMITTALS
Before giving the manufacturer Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for review and consent, the names and qualifications of the manufacturer of
tunnel ventilation damper units. Qualification statement shall include but need not be
limited to the following data:
1. Theoretical performance curves for dampers proposed to be furnished under this
Contract.
2. Actual performance curves verifying the theoretical performance curves previously
submitted shall also be furnished as part of the damper unit test results.
Performance curves shall be plotted to such scales as will make it possible to read
the data accurately.
a. The damper performance curves shall be damper characteristic curves as
follows:
- Curve plotted with ordinate as pressure drop in Pascals versus face
velocity in meters per second.
- Curve plotted with ordinate as duct pressure in Pascals versus
leakage in percentage of maximum flow.
b. The following information shall be printed in each performance curve:
3. Manufacturer's quality assurance program.
4. A complete list of projects on which similar tunnel ventilation dampers for rail transit
projects have been installed or furnished. List shall include:
a. Name of authority or user.
b. Contract number(s)
c. Original installation date(s)
d. Current condition of equipment, including estimate of remaining useful life
e. A list of all known failures including, their apparent causes, corrective work
affected, and a description of equipment service and operating conditions.
5. List of components proposed to be purchased from other manufacturers, giving
name of manufacturer, type and characteristic of each item and applicable data
requested under paragraph 1 through 3 above.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance signifying that
equipment to be furnished under this Contract meets the requirements specified herein.
Within 14 days after successful completion of all factory tests specified herein and of any
additional tests conducted at the Contractor's own option, the Contractor shall submit the
following:
1. Certified results for all tests conducted. All test data shall be bound in one report.
The test report shall be indexed and cross-referenced in an easily understood
manner.
2. All records and results of non-destructive examinations made at completion of each
examination.
3. Field test procedures.
4. Supply the Employer with ten (10) spare damper operators, identical to the
operators installed to operate the dampers. The damper operator motors shall be
complete and labelled with the motor characteristics.
B2.0 PRODUCTS
B2.01 MOTOR-OPERATED DAMPERS
Description
1. Dampers shall be furnished complete with damper mounting frames for each
damper module and all components and incidentals as specified herein; with all
structural support elements and hardware required for installation of the damper
modules into composite damper units, and with any additional accessories which
may be needed in order to meet the performance requirements as provided in
2. All like components shall be furnished by a single supplier.
3. Each damper module shall have integral channel frames with interconnecting
linkage between modules and operators which shall permit all blades in damper
assembly to operate in unison. Modules shall be individually removable from
composite assembly. All damper modules shall be surface mounted against the
face of structural steel members, (columns, mullions, lintels, beams and embedded
framing members) which shall be furnished by the damper manufacturer, and
installed by the installing Contractor. Structural steel members shall have pre-
drilled companion flanges matching the size and spacing of mounting holes in each
damper module frame.
4. Dampers and damper companion flanges may be fabricated in multiple sections
where required. The sections shall be interconnected with bolted splice plates. The
sections shall be of such size, which can be brought into the fan rooms and vent
shafts through the access provided and to facilitate handling, erection and
disassembly. Prior to fabrication, the existing concrete openings for dampers and
the equipment access shall be field verified.
5. Linkages and bearings of all damper modules shall be arranged in such a manner,
that they are easily accessible upon removal of gasketted cover plates, without
removal of entire damper module.
Damper Requirements
1. All motor operated dampers furnished shall be suitable for installation in either a
vertical plane or a horizontal plane, as required.
2. The dampers shall be designed to be readily assembled in the field from modular
panels. Each damper panel shall be of the multiple parallel blade type, with an
independent channel frame; and shall be factory assembled complete with frames,
blades, shafts, bearings, seals, linkage, and all accessories required to erect the
modular panels into composite damper units which are functional as specified
herein. Dampers shall be furnished complete with all structural support members
and hardware required to complete the installation.
3. Multiple modular panel dampers may be operated by use of jack shafting.
4. Dampers shall be arranged for electric or pneumatic motor operation to two blade
positions: fully-open and fully-closed. Each damper shall be furnished complete
with electric or pneumatic motor operators sufficient in number and capacity to
actuate all modular panels in a damper unit in unison under the operating
conditions specified herein. Dampers shall be suitable for continuous operation in
either open or closed position.
5. Motor operated dampers shall have a net free face area of not less than 80 percent
measured to the inside of the damper frame clear opening when blades are fully
open.
6. Upon loss of power, dampers shall move to the power-off position (open or closed)
as indicated by the Contractors design.
7. Motor operated dampers shall be so designed that the dampers will be fully
operational in accordance with the performance requirements specified herein after
exposure to an airstream temperature of 250 degrees C for one hour. Dampers and
components shall be capable of withstanding the stresses caused by pressure
transient pressures from train piston action, and by reversal of airflow and thermal
shock caused by temperature changes of from 0 to plus 250 degrees C. Submit
manufacturer's certificate of compliance and the results of previous test if
conducted for certification of such requirements.
Each damper module shall be provided with two blade mounted limit switches for
remote indication of the damper position, one for fully open position and one for
fully closed position. Switches shall be provided with independent contacts
mounted to positively detect full-open and full-closed positions. Limit switches for
dampers required to operate in high temperature shall be suitable for operating at
250 degrees C for one hour.
9. For multiple module dampers, and dampers that operate in a group, limit switches
shall be wired in series to provide a common open or closed indication for each
damper unit, or damper group.
10. All power and signal wiring for damper operators and limit switches shall be wired
to barrier strips in common weatherproof cast iron terminal box, drilled and tapped
for one-inch conduit, and mounted on the damper mullion or other suitable
position. If necessary, the terminal box can be removed for shipment, but the
manufacturer shall provide adequate instruction for installation and electrical
connection in the field.
Damper Performance
1 Damper and Motor assembly shall be capable of being fully cycled (open to close
to open, or vice versa) for a minimum of 100,000 cycles before failure occurs.
Damper manufacturer shall submit a certificate along with test data guaranteeing
this performance.
B2.02 DAMPER FABRICATION AND COMPONENTS
Damper blades shall have an airfoil cross-section and shall be fabricated of Type
Galvanized steel or aluminium alloy (ASTM B 308) extruded to a minimum thickness of 2.5
mm. The width of the blades measured in the direction of airflow shall not be less than
150 mm and shall not be greater than 300 mm. Damper blades in the open position shall
not extend beyond the damper frame. Damper blades shall have metal to metal overlap
in the closed position. Blade edge sealing strips, regardless of their composition, will not
be permitted as a substitute for a true blade to blade overlap.
Damper blade shafts and jack shafts shall be fabricated of Galvanized steel Blade shafts
shall be full-length construction and shall be not less than 20 mm in diameter or square.
Jack shafts shall be not less than 25 mm in diameter. The design of the damper blade
shafts shall incorporate the devices required for locking the blades onto the shafts. Damper
blade shaft axis shall always be horizontal.
Damper blade deflection, with blade supported by shaft, shall not exceed 1/360 of the
span length between centers of shaft bearings with damper in closed position while
withstanding the maximum combined differential pressure of 2500 Pa and maximum
temperature of 250 degrees C.
The damper blade and shaft assemblies shall be supported at each end by means of self-
lubricating sleeve type bearings, suitable for operating at 250 degrees C for one hour.
Bearing mounting shall be external to frame.
Damper linkage shall be external heavy duty industrial type, fabricated of Galvanized steel
not less than 6 mm by 20 mm flat bars. Linkage shall interconnect damper blade shaft
crank arms which shall be fabricated of Galvanized steel not less than 5 mm thick. The
linkage bearings shall be fabricated of reinforced thermoplane of other material suitable
for the specified operating conditions, as consented to by the Engineer. The linkage
brackets shall be side mounted and mechanically interconnected with the shafts. Arm to
be welded to axles. Linkage shall be capable of transmitting a minimum of 150 percent of
operator load. All linkage parts and assemblies shall be accessible for maintenance and
repair after final assembly. A turnbuckle linkage adjustment shall be provided with each
linkage to provide a convenient means of adjusting the length of the connecting rod and
thereby the damper closure.
Damper frames shall be a channel cross-section with not less than an 200 mm or greater
than 300 mm web and not less than 80 mm flanges on the mounting side or less than 50
mm on the opposite side and shall be fabricated of Galvanized steel with a minimum
thickness of 6 mm. Reinforcing bosses, and dovetail grooves for mounting frame seals, shall
be integral parts of the channel configuration. The corners of the frames shall be welded
and reinforced by means of riveted gusset plates. Linkage elements shall be sized so that
the maximum deflection of any element shall not exceed L/360, where "L" is the length.
Motor operated dampers shall be furnished complete with all structural support elements
necessary for the installation of the dampers, including the following: all intermediate
supports, both horizontal and vertical; all clip angles and other framing members as
required at the head, sill, mullion and jambs of each damper assembly; and all screws,
bolts, nuts, washers and other hardware required to complete the installation. All
intermediate supports, framing members, and hardware required for assembly and
installation of the damper modules shall be fabricated of stainless or cadmium plated
steel.
Lifting lugs shall be of the same material as the exterior damper frame not less than 9 mm
thick steel and shall be welded on exterior of damper frame in sufficient number to
facilitate future on-site installation and removal. Lugs shall be a minimum of four per each
knocked down damper component or frame and spaced to prevent deformation of
component when suspended from chains during installation.
Damper companion flange grid assemblies shall match the damper frame.
Mullion supports shall be designed by the Contractor. The mullions shall be the full length
and width of the dampers. Mullion supports shall be of galvanized steel and shall have
punched or drilled holes, equally spaced for damper module attachments. Number of
holes and space between the holes shall be selected by the Contractor. Mullion supports
shall be installed by the Contractor. The Contractor may recommend alternative method
for mullion attachment to damper companion flanges and align the equipment with the
flange.
Flanges shall have punched or drilled holes equally spaced not more than 150 mm on
centers.
In accessible areas, fasteners shall be hexagonal head bolts with hexagonal nuts, provided
with heavy-duty lock washers.
In inaccessible areas, fasteners shall be hexagonal head tap bolts, provided with heavy-
duty lock washers.
Bolts shall be not less than 12 mm in diameter. Nuts and bolts shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 193, Grade B8M or Grade B8MA, equivalent to AISI Type 316, with
suitable lock washers.
Damper operator mounting brackets shall be fabricated of not less than 9 mm thick
stainless steel Type 304 and shall be bolted to the mounting surface. Mounting bracket
shall be constructed in such a manner that bracket cannot be moved by hand to cause
binding or misalignment of bearing(s) and damper shaft(s).
Contractor shall provide a 6 mm thick silicone base gasket covering the full width of each
flange between damper frames and damper companion frames and between damper
frames and other associated companion flanges. Gasket material shall be suitable for 250
degree C for one hour without emitting toxic or noxious fumes.
Mounting members for Wall Mounted Dampers. All mounting members needed to install
each wall mounted damper in its respective opening shall be furnished and installed by
the Contractor. All mounting members shall be galvanised steel angles all sides, size 80
mm by 80 mm by 8 mm. The mounting members shall be fastened to the damper by
means of stainless steel fasteners. Each damper shall be brought to the site as an integral
unit, except that mounting members shall be fastened and installed in the field. The
mounting members specified in this paragraph are in addition to the module and damper
frames specified herein.
Provide the Authority with technical support bearings. Quantity of technical support
bearings shall be five percent of each type used on dampers. Store bearings in secure
storage containers with permanent labels identifying number, type, manufacturer, bearing
location on dampers, and the Construction Contract Number.
B2.03 DAMPER OPERATOR REQUIREMENTS
The damper operators may be electrical type or pneumatic type. Electro-Hydraulic
operators shall not be used. The motor operators shall be capable of actuating the
dampers as specified herein against differential pressure of 2500 Pa across the dampers.
The operators shall be capable of changing the position of the dampers from fully closed
to fully open, or from fully open to fully closed within a period of not more than 30
seconds. Time duration to close or to open the damper shall be adjustable in the field.
The operators shall be selected and their required quantity shall be determined, such that
the normal torque output required for each damper or damper section does not exceed
two-thirds of the rated operator capacity. This selection criterion provides that each
operator has at least 50 percent excess capacity. However, in no case shall there be less
than two motor operators provided per damper installation, and each operator shall be
linked independently to damper sections of equal size. Motor operators shall be able to
operate continuously under the specified ambient temperature conditions.
Linkage from the damper operator shall be fabricated of stainless steel Type 304 and shall
be connected to the interconnecting blade linkage with a stainless steel pin, such that full
force of operator is applied to the blade connecting linkage.
The motors shall be totally enclosed. Motor windings and motor leads shall be copper
and shall be so insulated that the temperature rise of the insulated motor windings shall
not exceed 250 degrees C measured by resistance method, above an ambient temperature
of 40 degrees C.
Motors shall be equipped with factory installed resistance space heaters within the motor
enclosure to prevent condensation of moisture in the motor windings. The heaters shall
be provided with leads terminated in the conduit box
Pneumatically powered damper actuators shall be of the piston or rotary type with a 550
to 800 kPa working pressure.
The actuators shall be furnished with spring actuated devices capable of driving the
dampers to their "POWER OFF" positions within a period of 15 seconds after the operators
are de-energised. The "POWER OFF" position of a damper (normally open or normally
closed) is defined as the position which the damper assumes when its operators are de-
energised. The spring return devices shall be fully operational as specified throughout and
following exposure to ambient and air stream temperatures of 250 degree C for one hour.
Motor leads and limit switch contacts shall be factory wired to cast iron weatherproof
conduit boxes. Conduit boxes shall have tightly fitting, gasketted covers designed to resist
the entrance of dust and fluids; and shall have threaded conduit openings. All electrical
components, conduit and boxes shall be weatherproof. Conduit boxes shall be mounted
to the motor mounting plates.
The initial charge of lubricants for damper components shall be supplied by the
manufacturer.
Co-ordinate with damper manufacturer the installation of damper motor operators from
operational and service standpoint.
B2.04 DAMPER FINISHING
All galvanised parts shall have either a hot-dipped or an electro-deposited zinc coating.
The weight of the coating shall be not less than 750 grams per square meter of surface.
The zinc coating shall be performed after the material is fabricated. The use of zinc
pigmented paint in lieu of galvanising will not be allowed. The galvanising shall conform
to ASTM A 123; and withstand an eight dip Preece Test in accordance with ASTM A 239.
B2.05 NAMEPLATES
Each damper shall be provided with a stainless steel nameplate permanently stamped
with the name and address of the manufacturer, Contractor's model type, serial number
and the Employer's designated damper number.
Each damper motor shall be provided with stainless steel nameplate permanently
stamped with the project title, name of Contractor, name and address of the manufacturer,
the motor kilowatt, voltage, phase, frequency, insulation type, full-load current, locked
rotor indicating code letters, the design temperature rise over ambient of the motor, the
terminal connection chart for the motor, rating of the space heater, speed in revolutions
per minute, motor type, service factor, motor serial numbers, bearing numbers and shop
order number and the Employer’s designated damper number.
Nameplates shall be attached to respective component in a location conspicuous after
installation.
B2.06 SCREENS
Screens mounted on damper module frame shall be one-inch mesh No. 10 U.S.S. gauge
galvanised steel wire. Each screen shall be complete with a frame for rigidity. The screen
shall be reinforced across the shorter dimension with 30 mm by 30mm by 3mm galvanised
steel angles on 600 mm maximum centers.
Screen companion flanges shall be bolted to damper companion flanges with bolts spaced
not more than 300 mm on center.
B2.07 FACTORY DAMPER TESTS
The Employer may, at his option, witness any or all of the tests specified herein. The
Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, in not less than three weeks in advance as
to the location and dates of the factory tests.
One damper unit shall be subjected to tests. The test shall be conducted in a test facility
located either at the manufacturer's plant, or at a suitably equipped testing laboratory.
The test facility shall be consented to by the Engineer.
The damper shall be tested in accordance with AMCA 500, the latest edition using a test
set-up accented to by the Engineer as appropriate for the intended installation of the
dampers. Test data shall be recorded on AMCA data submittal forms, or the equivalent
thereof as consented to by the Engineer. Certified test data, and certified performance
curves for all of the co-ordinates specified in these Specifications shall be submitted to
the Engineer for consent. Minimum test section shall be 1200 mm by 1200 mm.
Conduct the following performance tests:
- Maximum leakage in percentage of flow with 2500 Pa pressure differential across
the closed
- Damper.
- Maximum pressure drop across damper in fully open position with a uniform face
velocity of 10 m/s.
- A detailed analysis for submission by the manufacturer to demonstrate that the
various damper components at their point of critical stress do not exceed the
endurance limit stress of the material. Calculated maximum expected stresses for
both the normal design pressure condition and the test condition, together with
design properties of the material used to fabricate the damper blades and shafts,
shall be submitted to the Engineer for consent.
- Operational Test: The damper, while remaining in the fully closed position, shall
be subject to not less than 30 pressure reversals in one hour while withstanding
a differential pressure of not less than 2500 Pa.
B3.0 EXECUTION
B3.01 INSTALLATION METHODS
Dampers - General
1. All dampers, connecting bars, linkages and operators shall be installed and adjusted
so that: when a damper is fully open, the damper blades shall be parallel to air
flow to provide minimum friction loss and obstruction to airflow, when a damper is
fully closed, the damper blades shall be perpendicular to the airflow with seals
pressing against mating surfaces along their entire length to provide tight closure
and minimum air leakage.
2. There shall be no flutter, rattling or vibration of damper, connecting bar and linkage
either when the damper is operating or when the damper is in the fully open or
fully closed positions. Each damper shall be installed so as to provide smooth
operation, opening and closing without shock or slamming.
3. All damper linkage shall be properly installed and connected to its perspective
operator to prevent blade flutter and to insure against connecting bar and linkage
distortion or binding during operation. Undue flexure or bending of connecting bars
and linkage shall be cause for rejection. Such connecting bar and/or linkage shall
be replaced with either a corrected design, higher strength materials, proper size of
components or a combination of the aforesaid, as required.
4. Damper and Damper Openings. Particular attention is called to the fact that nominal
dimensions are often indicated on the drawings for construction of the dampers.
However, the actual openings where dampers are to be installed may vary from the
indicated dimensions. In providing dampers to close these openings, the Contractor
shall verify all dimensions in the field and shall design and build each frame to fit
the respective opening, without leaving spaces between the frame and structure.
All slight unavoidable spaces between the frame and the structure shall be filled
to the satisfaction of the Engineer, so that the damper openings shall be completely
airtight. The aforesaid spaces shall be filled with grout or neat Portland cement or
other approved sealing materials, all properly bonded to the existing surface.
B3.02 FIELD SERVICE
The Contractor shall provide a Field Service Representative and inspection to the Engineer
to ensure that the dampers and damper operators supplied therein are properly installed
and tested.
Field service shall be performed periodically as required during the period of performance
of this contract.
The Engineer shall be advised in writing of the name and title of the proposed Damper
Manufacture's Field Service Representative, who upon the Engineer consent shall have
complete authority to represent and to act for the Contractor.
The duties, responsibilities, and qualifications of the Damper Manufacture's Field Service
Representative shall:
- Advise installation Contractor on the proper procedures for the installation of the
damper equipment.
- To have a thorough knowledge of the damper systems.
- To have a thorough knowledge of the testing of all material and equipment
supplied.
- To prepare and submit to the Engineer a typewritten report on all activities and
findings for each visit within 15 working days of each visit. The final report shall
give results and findings of field tests below. Payment for each visit will not be
authorised until written service reports have been received and accepted by the
Engineer.
Field Test:
- The Contractor shall furnish written instructions for testing the dampers in the
field as part of the operating and maintenance instructions.
- Each damper shall be subject to rotation reversal tests. A cycle of rotation reversal
is defined as reversal from fully open to fully closed position, and then back to
fully open position. Each damper shall require five cycles of rotation reversal.
- After completion of reversal tests each damper operator shall be de-energised
and checked to confirm that it is driven to its "power off" position within 15
seconds after being de-energised.
- Damper equipment shall be energised and temporary connections shall be made

where required.
- Any defect that develops within the equipment during the test shall be corrected
by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer.
- Any defect that develops with the installation work during the test shall be
corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer.
END OF ATTACHMENT B
ATTACHMENT C - TUNNEL VENTILATION ATTENUATOR & OTHERS

C1.0 SOUND ATTENUATORS
General Requirements
1. Furnish sound attenuators for tunnel ventilation fans selected by the fan
manufacturer, to meet all operating conditions specified.
2. Provide cylindrical (tubular) sound attenuators one mounted directly on each end
of the fan housing. Match the inside diameter of sound attenuator to the inside
diameter of fan.
3. Provide inner bullet if required, of aerodynamic design. Match the exterior diameter
of the bullet to the diameter of motor and hub.
Performance Requirements
1. Furnish sound attenuator-fan-sound attenuator assemblies that do not exceed the
acceptable maximum sound power levels for tunnel environment.
2. The sound power rating is composite of the sound generated by the fan-motor unit
and the dynamic insertion losses achieved by sound attenuators. Therefore, require
the fan manufacturer to select sound attenuators to meet the requirements.
Sound Attenuator Construction
1. Select the materials and methods used to fabricate sound attenuators such that
they be operational for minimum period of one hour in ambient air temperature of
at least 250 °C without any mechanical or a structural failure.
2 Fabricate the exterior casing of not less than No. 18 United States Standard Gage
(USSG), hot dipped galvanised steel, internally lined with inorganic mineral wool or
glass fiber acoustic in fill covered with not less than No. 22 USSG stainless steel
perforated sheets.
3. Provide drain hole of 12 mm diameter minimum in the exterior cashing of each
sound attenuator, to drain water that may enter into fan assembly during tunnel
washing operations.
4. Design support system to facilitate easy dismantling and reinstallation of fan or
sound attenuators as required for maintenance.
5. Fabricate fan supports of galvanised steel not less than 10 mm thick. Weld supports
to the fan housing and cross brace to provide rigidity.
6. Design supports suitable for the existing provisions in the field for mounting the
supports and the space constraints.
7. Furnish all bolts, nuts, washers and lock washers of stainless steel AISI Type 316.
Furnish bolts that are consistent with the existing tunnel inserts.
Provide lifting lugs or eyes, in sufficient numbers, and permanently weld to fan
housing Nameplates
a. Furnish nameplates for each fan assembly. On each nameplate, show the
name and address of the fan manufacturer, the Contractor's name and
address, serial number of the fan, the maximum safe rotational speed of the
fan in revolutions per minute and the design operating conditions of the fan.
Rivet or screw nameplates to the fan houses.
b. Furnish two identical nameplates for each motor. On each nameplate, show
the name and address of the motor manufacturer, the motor model number
and serial number, motor speed in revolutions per minute, nominal kilowatt,
electrical characteristics (voltage, phase, frequency); no-load, full-load and
locked-rotor currents, NEMA code-letter designation, NEMA frame size, service
factor, rating of space heater and the terminal connection chart for the
motor. Securely fasten one of the two nameplates to the motor housing;
rivet or screw the other to the fan housing adjacent to the fan nameplates.
c. Fabricate all nameplates of stainless steel. Permanently mark the specified
data on the nameplates.
C2.0 AIRFLOW SWITCHES
Furnish each fan assembly with airflow switch that is capable of detecting airflow in either
direction of motor operation.
Differential pressure switches shall be diaphragm operated with 10 mm diaphragm to
actuate a single pole double throw snap switch. Motion of the diaphragm shall be
restrained by a calibrated spring that can be adjusted to set the exact pressure differential
at which the electrical switch will be actuated. Motion of the diaphragm shall be
transmitted to the switch button by means of a direct mechanical linkage.
C3.0 PAINTING AND FINISHING
Provide fan housings, attenuator outside casings, supports and all other steel components
either hot dipped or an electro-deposited zinc coating meeting to GS165 standard or
equivalent.
END OF ATTACHMENT C
ATTACHMENT D - INTERFACES
The following interface tables are not to be considered a complete listing of required interfaces but
read as a guideline for typical TV S interfaces.
INTERFACE BETWEEN ROLLING STOCK AND TUNNEL VENTILATION SYSTEM

Item By Rolling Stock By TVS Contractor Location Purpose
Contractor
1 Heat release rate from Tunnel ventilation system - Tunnel ventilation

train such as locomotive, system design
air conditioner and brake
system. Regeneration of
braking energy
2 Train fire load. Tunnel ventilation system - Tunnel ventilation

system design
3 Train configuration and SES input data Tunnel ventilation

specification system design
INTERFACE BETWEEN SIGNALLING SYSTEM CONTRACTOR AND TUNNEL VENTILATION SYSTEM

Item By Signalling By TVS Contractor Location Purpose
Contractor
1 Control signal and Receipt of control signal signalling Tunnel ventilation

communication from OCC equipment control according
standard. Locations room/OCC/LCP Signalling system
of stopping trains at
congestion and
emergency sent to
OCC
INTERFACE BETWEEN SCADA AND TUNNEL VENTILATION SYSTEM

Item By SCADA By TVS Contractor Location Purpose
1 ECS control and R I/O and PLC external TVS Control Control and
monitoring cable terminals in marshalling Rooms and TVS monitoring for TVS
including termination box plant Rooms equipment
to RI/O and PLC
2 Control and R I/O or PLC TVS plant Rooms Design approval of

monitoring point list or TVS Control RI/O or PLC
Rooms
3 Control and Control and Monitoring - TVS provision/design

Monitoring Philosophy
Philosophy
4 Terminal board Cabling and termination TVS Control Control and

Rooms monitoring signal of
TVS equipment
to/from OCC
5 Terminal board Cabling from MCC TVS Control Monitor TVS power
instruments and Rooms status and
termination to terminal consumption and
board control of MCC
6 Emergency stops MCC starter, terminals TVS Control Remote shut-down

and cabling including Rooms of TVS equipment
cable termination
inside MCCs
7 Demand Signals for Operating mode table OCC Systemwide control

TVS system for TVS equipment, of TVS equipment at
operation OCC
8 Graphical layout of Graphical layout OCC and SCR Graphical layout of

TVS system in information of TVS TVS
SCADA
INTERFACE BETWEEN UNITERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS; AND TUNNEL VENTILATION SYSTEM
Item By Electrical By TVS Contractor Location
Contractor
1 UPS fused connection Cabling and cable TVS Control UPS for TVS Control
units termination to UPS fused Rooms and R I/O
connection units Locations
2 UPS Power Supply MCC TVS Control Computer Power

Rooms Supply and MCCs
power switching
control
END OF ATTACHMENT D
SECTION 10
SIGNALLING & TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORKS
Tender Documents Section 10: Signalling & Telecommunications Works
Volume IIIB
Table of Contents
1. PROJECT AND GENERAL INFORMATION 1-8

1.1 Description 1-8
1.2 Main Design Parameters 1-8
1.3 Environment 1-9
1.4 List of New extended Stations 1-9
1.5 Train Control System 1-10
1.6 Immunisation of Signalling Equipment 1-12
1.7 Submission of items in the Proposal 1-12
2. SCOPE OF WORKS 2-1
2.1 General 2-1
2.2 Contractors Responsibility 2-1
2.3 Interface between Contracts 2-2
2.4 Limits of Contract 2-6
2.5 Work Included 2-6
2.6 Work Not Included 2-8
2.7 Stageworks 2-8
2.8 Provisional Works 2-8
2.9 General Details 2-9
2.10 Signalling Works 2-9
2.11 Telecommunications Works 2-10
2.12 Design Practice 2-13
2.13 Centralised Traffic Control: CTC (by C1) 2-13
2.14 European Train Control System (ETCS) Level 1 2-14
2.15 Local / CTC Control – Operators Workstations 2-15
2.16 Interlockings 2-15
2.17 Point Crank Handles 2-15
2.18 Level Crossings (if any) 2-15
2.19 Cable Routes 2-16
2.20 Planning and Execution of Work 2-16
2.21 Interfaces 2-16
2.22 Limit of Works forC1 or C2 or C3 2-17
2.23 All New Systems, Materials and Equipment 2-17
2.24 S&T Equipment Rooms (Relay Rooms) 2-17
Contract : 2 Ngao - Chiang Rai Section 1-1
3. PLANS 3-1
3.1 System Assurance Plan 3-1
3.2 Detailed Design Plan 3-1
3.3 Engineering Verification and Validation Plan 3-2
3.4 Procurement, Manufacturing and Factory Testing Plan 3-3
3.5 Operating and Maintenance Manuals Plan 3-6
3.6 Training Plan 3-6
3.7 Defect Notification Plan 3-6
3.8 Final Acceptance 3-6
4. POWER SUPPLIES & DISTRIBUTION 4-1
4.1 General 4-1
4.2 Secure Signalling, CTC & Communications Supplies 4-1
4.3 Mains Supplies 4-1
4.4 Standby Supplies (If any) 4-2
4.5 Uninterruptable Power Supplies (UPS) 4-2
4.6 Control Board 4-2
4.7 Generator Rating / Engine and Fuel Tanks (Not used) 4-3
4.8 Level Crossing Power Supplies 4-3
4.9 Interlocking and Signalling Power Supplies 4-4
4.10 Communications Power Supplies 4-4
4.11 Voltage Regulation 4-4
4.12 Distribution 4-4
4.13 Load Estimates and Cable Sizes 4-5
4.14 Safe Working Procedures 4-5
5. SIGNALLING REQUIREMENTS 5-1
5.1 Signalling System - General 5-1
5.2 Signal Aspects - Code 5-1
5.3 Signal Aspects - Displays 5-2
5.4 Proving of Signals 5-3
5.5 Indication of Signals 5-3
5.6 Signals Failure 5-3
5.7 Designation of Signals 5-3
5.8 Identification of Signals 5-4
5.9 Speed Boards 5-5
5.10 Local Operators Workstations 5-5
5.11 Operation of Points 5-8
5.12 Signal, Point and Track Circuit Indications 5-9
5.13 Automatic Block Operation and Indications 5-11
5.14 Tokenless Block Operation and Indications 5-13

5.15 Occupation Keys 5-13
5.16 Blocking 5-14
5.17 Key Locks for Hand Operated Points/Derailers 5-15
5.18 Electric Points Emergency Crank Handle Controller 5-15
5.19 Level Crossing Indications 5-16
5.20 Alarms and Indications 5-17
5.21 Event Recording and Playback Facility 5-17
5.22 Control Tables 5-18
5.23 Vital Locking and Controls 5-18
5.24 Inner Home Signals 5-21
5.25 Interlockings - Computer Based (CBI) 5-21
5.26 Signal Circuits 5-24
5.27 Points Circuits 5-24
5.28 Level Crossings 5-25
5.29 Track Circuits 5-31
5.30 Line Circuits 5-31
5.31 Axle Counters 5-31
5.32 European Train Control System (ETCS) Level1 5-32
5.33 Outline of Numbering System 5-32
6. SIGNALLING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 6-1
6.1 General 6-1
6.2 Materials General 6-1
6.3 Components General 6-2
6.4 Manufacturing 6-4
6.5 Protection and Surface Finishes 6-5
6.6 Workstations 6-9
6.7 Signals 6-9
6.8 Points 6-12
6.9 Level Crossings 6-20
6.10 Train detection 6-24
6.11 Relays and Relay Racks 6-36
6.12 Wiring and Cabling 6-39
6.13 Power Supplies 6-41
6.14 Redundant Materials and Equipment 6-46
6.15 ETCS Onboard (Trainborne) and Trackside Equipment 6-47
7. SIGNALLING CABLES & WIRES 7-1
7.1 General 7-1
7.2 Scope 7-1

7.3 Conductor 7-2
7.4 Insulation 7-2
7.5 Laying up 7-2
7.6 Core Identification 7-2
7.7 PVC Bedding 7-2
7.8 Steel Tape Armour 7-2
7.9 PVC Overall Jacket 7-2
7.10 Nylon 12 Layer (Natural) 7-2
7.11 Protective Layer 7-3
7.12 Marking 7-3
7.13 Test 7-3
7.14 Packing 7-3
7.15 Typical Cable 7-3
8. TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 8-1
8.1 General 8-1
8.2 Telecommunications System Overview 8-1
8.3 Standards Compliance 8-2
8.4 Data Transmission System 8-3
8.5 Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) 8-20
8.6 Power Supplies and Documentation 8-34
8.7 Telephone Handset Types and Locations 8-35
8.8 Cables & Cabling 8-37
8.9 Optical Fibre Cable Specification 8-41
8.10 Digital Radio System (DRS) 8-51
8.11 Voice Recording System (VRS) 8-57
8.12 Level Crossing CCTV 8-62
8.13 Open Wire Pole Route 8-62
9. CENTRALISED TRAFFIC CONTROL (CTC) REQUIREMENTS (BY C1) 9-1
9.1 General 9-1
9.2 CTC Workstations 9-1
9.3 Train Description System (TDS) 9-4
9.4 System Transmission & Response Times 9-5
9.5 Remote Workstations 9-6
9.6 Maintenance Terminals & Facilities 9-6
9.7 System Generated Warning Messages & Prompts 9-6
9.8 Local / CTC Control 9-7
9.9 Timetable Management System (TMS) 9-9
9.10 Automatic Train Reporting System (ATR) 9-9

9.11 Automatic Route Setting System (ARS) 9-10
9.12 Automatic Traffic Supervision (ATS) 9-13
10. RELOCATION OF EXISTING S&T INFRASTRUCTURE 10-1
10.1 General 10-1
10.2 Diversion, Relocation of S&T Infrastructure 10-1
10.3 Points 10-2
10.4 Cabling, Cable Routes, Ducts etc. 10-2
10.5 Open Wire Pole Route 10-2
10.6 Retention, Un-use, Re-use, Re-location etc. of Existing Materials & Equipment 10-2
10.7 Existing S&T Facilities 10-2
10.8 Retained equipment 10-3
11. LIGHTNING, SURGE PROTECTION, IMMUNISATION AND EARTHING 11-2
11.1 Lightning, Surge Protection 11-2
11.2 Immunisation from Electrical Interference 11-4
11.3 Earthing Systems 11-5
12. HOUSING OF EQUIPMENT 12-1
12.1 General 12-1
12.2 Buildings for Signalling Equipment 12-1
12.3 External Equipment 12-4
12.5 Labelling 12-8
13. DOCUMENTATION 13-1
13.1 General Requirements 13-1
13.2 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 13-4
13.3 Records 13-6
14. PRACTICE, STANDARDS, COMPLIANCE & SAFETY ASSURANCE 14-1
14.1 General 14-1
14.2 Conflict with Standards 14-1
14.3 Deviations from Specification 14-1
14.4 Accepted Railway Signalling & Communications Practice 14-1
14.5 SYSTEM ASSURANCE 14-2
14.6 Acceptability and Type Approval 14-5
14.7 Metric (SI) Systems 14-6
14.8 System Safety 14-6
14.9 Independent Design and Testing Checking Engineers 14-6
14.10 Quality of Design and Workmanship 14-6
14.11 Guarantee for Supply 14-7
14.12 Maintenance 14-7
14.13 Project Management 14-7

14.14 Clearances 14-8
14.15 Language 14-8
14.16 Safety Assurance 14-8
14.17 Rights in Computer Software and Computer Software Documentation 14-9
15. INSTALLATION 15-1
15.1 General 15-1
15.2 Competence of Contractor's Staff 15-1
15.3 General Installation 15-1
15.4 Concrete Works 15-3
15.5 Wiring Work 15-4
15.6 Indoor Installation 15-5
15.7 Installation of Field Equipment and Cables 15-6
15.8 Cabling and Cable Routes 15-8
15.9 Quality Control 15-15
15.10 Signals not in Service 15-15
15.11 Surplus Material 15-16
16. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 16-1
16.1 Signalling Testing and Commissioning 16-1
16.2 Quality Assurance 16-3
16.3 Products 16-3
16.4 Execution 16-4
16.5 Factory Tests (Pre-Site Testing) 16-5
16.6 On-Site Testing 16-6
16.7 Signalling and Power Cable Tests 16-7
16.8 Local Workstations 16-14
16.9 Block Sections 16-14
16.10 Communication Plant 16-14
16.11 Electric Release and Key Locked Points 16-14
16.12 Earth Electrode System 16-15
16.13 Commissioning 16-15
16.14 Records 16-17
16.15 Test Results and Certification 16-18
16.16 Factory Testing 16-18
16.17 Standard Tests 16-18
16.18 System Function Test 16-20
16.19 Commissioning Tests 16-23
16.20 Computer Based Systems & Equipment 16-23
17. SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS 17-1

17.1 Spare Parts 17-1
17.2 Special Tools 17-4
18. STAFF TRAINING AND MAINTENANCE 18-1
18.1 General 18-1
18.2 Local Training – Part 1 (Overview) 18-1
18.3 Local Training - Part 2 (Design) 18-1
18.4 Local Training – Part 3 (Maintenance and Operations) 18-2
18.5 Local Training – Part 4 (ETCS Maintenance Staff and Operators form the Mechanical 18-3
18.6 Training Facilities 18-3
18.7 Training Records 18-4
18.8 Training quality 18-4
18.9 Maintenance Levels 18-4
19. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 19-1
19.1 General 19-1
19.2 Environmental Categories and Definitions 19-1
19.3 Electromagnetic Environment 19-2
19.4 Temperature and Humidity 19-2
19.5 Mechanical Environment 19-2
19.6 Pollution 19-3
19.7 Packaging to meet Transport and Storage Requirement 19-3
20. QUALITY MANAGEMENT 20-1
20.1 General 20-1
20.2 Quality Standards 20-1
20.3 Organisation 20-1
20.4 System 20-3
20.5 Control of Sub-Contractors and Incoming Material 20-3
20.6 Maintenance of Records 20-3
20.7 Calibration 20-4
20.8 Submittals 20-4
20.9 Execution 20-4
20.10 Inspection 20-4
20.11 Concession Procedure 20-5
APPENDICES
APPENDIX A: CTC AND CBI INTERFACE COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
APPENDIX B: LOCAL CONTROL PANEL SUMMARY OF CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS
SECTION 10 : SIGNALLING & TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORKS
1. PROJECT AND GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 Description
The track doubling of the Den Chai to Chiang Khong route is one of a large number of projects currently
being undertaken or proposed by SRT to extend and modernize Thailand’ s Railway System. When
completed, this major improvement to the system will increase the capacity of passenger and freight
traffic particularly in the Northern regions of the country.
The project will extend a new double track railway from Den Chai toward Chiang Rai to Chiang Khong as the
complete line and will be divided into 3 sections that are, Contract 1: Den Chai to Ngao section (KM.529+509
to KM.637+600), Contract 2: Ngao to Chiang Rai section (KM.637+600 to KM.769+900), Contract 3: Chiang Rai
to Chiang Khong section (KM.769+900 to KM.769+900) to be constructed. Each section to be equipped with
all required systems as well as interfaces to the adjacent sections and interfaces to Den Chai CTC.
The Signalling and Telecommunication work shall be performed in cooperation and integrated with the
work of civil construction and track layout and the contract shall be completed on schedule
The ETCS Level 1 shall be installed in this project.
1.2 Main Design Parameters
The new line will be designed as a double track metre gauge railway extended from
the existing double track railway. The design line speed will be 160 Km/h, with a
design axle load limit of 20 tonnes (U-20). All main design parameters are listed below.
• Track Design & Geometry
Design speed: - 160 Km/h
Axle loading: - 20 tonnes (U-20)
Track gauge: - 1000 mm.
Track centres: - 5.0 m in stations, 4.5m minimum generally
(as applicable)
Max gradient: - 1.2% (1.1% compensated) generally,
but 0.1% in stations
• Track Materials
Rails: - UIC-54E1 – New Main Line and New Sidings
Rail joints: - Welded - Thermit or flash-butt
Sleepers: - Concrete - Pre-stressed monolithic at 600 mm. spacing
Fasteners: - Spring steel elastic system
Pads: - High density polyethylene (HDPE)
Ballast: - Crushed igneous rock - 300 mm. min depth
Turnouts - UIC-54E1 – New Main Line and New Sidings
• Pre-stressed concrete bearers (sleepers)

• Cast manganese crossing frogs
• Flexible tongue rails
1 in 16 - Main Line
1 in 12 - Main line
1 in 10 - Loop Line
1 in 8 - Depot
The layout plans shall be taken as a guide only, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to accurately locate and
identify actual locations of existing signalling infrastructure throughout the project area.
1.3 Environment
Materials & Equipment shall be suitable for operation in the environment of Thailand. Nationally published
criteria in respect of ranges of actual climate conditions experienced in Thailand shall be taken into
account
1.4 List of New extended Stations
The new line will consist of a one-meter (1 m) gauge track with double line with a total of 24 new
stations including 1 modified station (Den Chai Station). Followings are station, depot and change
covered by this contract
No. Station Name Contract Type of Station’s Center (km.)
1 Den Chai C1 Major
Station 529+509
2 Sung Men C1 Minor 547+750
3 Phare C1 Major 560+500
4 Mae Kham Mi C1 Minor 572+025
5 Nong Siao C1 Train Stop 584+200
6 Song C1 Minor 590+900
7 Mae Tip C1 Train Stop 617+925
8 Ngao C1 Minor 636+975
9 Pong Tao C2 Train Stop 642+300
10 Phayao University C2 Minor 670+700
11 Ban Thok Wak C2 Train Stop 677+600
12 Phayao C2 Major 683+425
13 Dong Chen C2 Train Stop 689+800
14 Ban Rong C2 Train Stop 696+600
15 Ban Mai C2 Train Stop 709+900
16 Pa Daet C2 Minor 724+500
17 Pa Ngae C2 Train Stop 732+125
18 Ban Pong Kluea C2 Train Stop 743+025
19 San Pa Hiang C2 Train Stop 756+600
20 Chiangrai C3 Major 771+800

21 Thung Ko C3 Train Stop 785+650
22 Wiang Chiang Rung C3 Minor 796+425
23 Ban Pa Sang Junction C3 Minor 807+400
24 Ban Kiang C3 Train Stop 829+175
25 Sri Don Chai C3 Train Stop 839+200
26 Chiangkhong C3 Minor 853+350
Note: It is expected that there is no staff at “Train Stop” station

The layout plans shall be taken as a guide only, it is the Constructor’ s responsibility to accurately locate
and identify actual locations of infrastructure throughout the project area. The contactor cannot use this
information for any claim against the employer.
Copies of other documents, control tables, cable plans, and design drawings etc., which details the
related existing all interlocking Signalling systems which to be interfaced with the project area can be
made available by arrangement with the S&T Department of SRT.
1.5 Train Control System
1.5.1 General
At present SRT provides for safety of railway transport for passenger and freight traffic using colour light
signals equipped with CBI, all relay or electro mechanical interlockings, and by semaphore signals with
mechanical interlocking.
Automatic block, tokenless block and token block, are currently employed for the safety of trains
travelling between stations.
1.5.2 Interlocking Systems
The type of signal and interlocking equipment is classified by SRT as follows:
Class A Fully Interlocked
A. 1 A = All Relay Interlocking with Colourlight Signals.
A. 1 B = Computer Based Interlocking with Colourlight Signals.
A. 2 = Electromechanical Interlocking.
• Electromechanical Interlocking with Colourlight Signals
• Electromechanical Interlocking but Operated from Lever Frame with Colourlight Signals
A. 3 = Mechanical Interlocking with Semaphore SignalsEquipped with Warner, Home and Starter Signals
A. 4 = Mechanical Interlocking with Semaphore Signals but without Warner Signals, Either Equipped
with Home and Starters or Home Signals only
Class B Semi Interlocking
B = Semi Interlocking with Semaphore Signals and Hand Operated Key Locked Points.
Class C Station with Semaphore Signals Only
Class D Station without Signals but with Hand Operated Key Locked Points
Class E Stopping Place

1.5.3 Types of Signals
The Colour Light System installed in the Project Area is based on three aspect colour light signals, which
show:
Red Light Stop
Yellow Light Indicates the next signal at stop
Green Light Indicates the advanced section is clear and the next signal displaying a proceed aspect.
Home and Starter signals are equipped with route indicators to indicate the routing of the train.
The basic signal indication system is as follows:
WARNER HOME STARTER

For Train Approaching to:
Main Line Y R
Main Line G Y R
Main Line G G G
Loop Line Y Approach Released to Y R
+ Junction Indicator
Any Line Y Call on+R R
WARNER HOME STARTER
For Train Departing From:
Main Line - - G
Loop Line - - G
G +Junction
Indicator
1.5.4 Block Systems

The SRT employs three classes of block working as follows: -
1) Class A: - Tokenless or Automatic Block System interlocked with fixed signals: -
A1 - Double Line Tokenless or Automatic Block System.
A2 - Single Line Tokenless Block System, and
A3 - Single line instrument modified by SRT from Token to Tokenless operation.
2) Class B: - Token Block System.
B1 - Ball Token Block. (Neils)
B2 - Tablet Block. (Tyers)
B3 - Cylinder Token Block.
3) Class C: - Ticket
1.5.6 Level Crossing Facilities

Level crossing facilities fall into three classifications: - Manually operated protection; automatically
operated protection; and unprotected.
Class A Manual Control
A. 0 = Electrical Full width Lifting Barriers with CCTV control from station
A. 1 = Electrical Full width Lifting Barriers
A. 2 = Mechanical Full width Lifting Barriers
A. 3 = Mechanical Full width Hoisting Barriers
A. 4 = Sliding Gate Trolleys
Class B Automatic Control
B. 1 = Automatic Half width Lifting Barriers
B. 2 = Open Crossing with Automatic Flashing Light Only
Class C Traffic Sign Only without Protection
C = Traffic Sign Only without Barriers
UC = Unauthorised Crossing
1.6 Immunisation of Signalling Equipment
It is the intention of SRT to adopt electric traction, probably at 25 kV, single phase, 50Hz on at least it’s
main lines as soon as budget restraints will allow. It is therefore required that as much protection against
electro-magnetic effects of electric traction shall be built into the design as is economically viable at this
time.
1.7 Submission of items in the Proposal
The proposed products, materials include all deliverables and their quantities during the proposal stage
could not be proceeded or implemented in the project until they are submitted and get approval by SRT
during the Construction stage in which such approval shall be based for payments. Nevertheless the “total
prices” of Signalling and Telecommunications in the Volume IIB Schedule of Price are lumpsum and fixed.
END PROJECT AND GENERAL INFORMATION
SCOPE OF WORK
2. SCOPE OF WORKS
2.1 General
The Contractor shall provide and install all necessary designs and equipment of which the detail many
not be specified but which are necessary to complete the works and are required and are consistent with
the intent of the specification for reliability, safety and the operational and technical requirements for
completion of the system.
The Scope of Works covered by this specification and for which the Contractor shall be responsible is for
the furnishing of all labour, supervision, transport, tools, supplies, materials and equipment for the whole
of the works described under Clause 2. 4 below “ Work Included” , but with the exception of those items
and responsibilities defined in clause 2. 5 below “ Work Not Included” , in order to design, manufacture,
fabricate, supply and deliver to site, store, install, set to work, test, commission, and to provide warranty
maintenance, and staff training of the Signalling and Communications system in C1 or C2 or C3 section
complete with all equipment and systems necessary in accordance with these specifications including
stage works, temporary works and the interfacing with the existing systems, adjacent sections and Den
Chai CTC in order to facilitate operation of the Railway.
The Scope of Works shall also cover the works for all stations stated in Provisional Sum ( if any) in which
those stations are under consideration to be cancelled or not by SRT.
The required signalling is described in this specification and shown on the signalling layout plans included
with this specification.
2.2 Contractors Responsibility
The Contractors responsibility shall include the sole responsibility for ensuring that the Work throughout
is performed in the most substantial, professional, proper and workmanlike manner, using only the best
quality and new, or refurbished, materials and conforming to the best engineering practice for the operating
and environmental conditions specified, that the drawings and quality control are performed or made in
accordance with the Contract and that services reasonably expected to be furnished even though not
specifically mentioned in the Contract are furnished; all to the SRTs entire satisfaction.
The Contractor shall ensure that the whole of the signalling equipment and systems provided are
intrinsically safe and that no possible combination of operator action using the signalling equipment
provided under this contract, except drivers disregard of signals, will lead, or could lead to a train
derailment, collision or other unsafe condition, noting that the suitable positioning and siting of signals
and track circuiting limits/ axle counting limits falls within the definition of the Signalling System.
Signalling equipment shall be provided which is failsafe in that it must always fail in a predictable mode
and which the potential of failure is taken into account in designing intrinsically safe arrangements.
The Contractor shall furnish proofs of safety for his system, covering both the hardware design and
software for fixed program and application data.
2.3 Interface between Contracts

Contractors shall make interfaces for all equipment between of 3 sections between Den Chai station –
Chiang Khong station, including interface between modified Den chai station to existing route connecting
to Chiang Mai and to Bang sue through Nakhon Sawan. All systems under this contract should be able to
work with each other seamless with full functions.
The interface table below is a guideline for Contractor to proceed with the interface.
Interface Table
Subsystems C1 C2 C3 Descriptions
SIG and CTC C1 to interface to create safe C2 to interface to create safe C3 to interface to create safe C1 as the contractor providing CTC
transfer of train to/from existing transfer of train at C1/ C3 transfer of train at C1/ C2 equipment shall provide integrated
boundary including route to boundary. C2 to join test to boundary. supervision covering area from C1-
Chiang Mai and to Bang sue, and ensure fully integrated running C3 shall make provision of C3 as per design.
to/from C2 boundary. C1 to lead trough. Interlocking interfacing/ C2 and C3 shall join interface and
test to ensure fully integrated C2 shall make provision of integrating into the new CTC via join test to make overall supervision
running trough. Interlocking interfacing/ C2 area complete via the CTC portal.
C1 interlocking Den chai shall integrating into the new CTC at
include provision/ space/ spare C1 area.
slots/ extension for train route
control for connecting from
Chiang Mai and Pak Nam Pho in
term of additional object
controllers and those I/O
modules into this CBI.
PABX C1 to link to main PABX to C3 C2 to link to main PABX to C1 C3 to interface/ link to C2. C1 To add card at Main PABX at
through C2. and interface/ link to C3. Bangue in order to make
C1 to provide main PABX link communication
pass Nakhon Sawan DTS node to
Bangsue
Interface Table
DTS C1 to provide DTS equipment at C2 to provide DTS equipment at C3 to provide DTS equipment at A new DTS equipment at new CTC
C1 boundary link with existing C2 boundary link with C1 in C3 boundary link passing C2 to including provision of interface with
DTS toward Bangsue as well as order to connect to existing DTS C1 in order to connect to a new DTS at CTC Bang Sue to drop
at new CTC to link in order to toward Bangsue existing DTS toward Bangsue the project traffic of SRT PABX,
connect to existing DTS toward Digital Radio and CTC equipment.
Bangsue OFC using will be from existing
optical network or from any other
OFC network.
Clock C1 provide Synchronisation to C2 provide Synchronisation to C3 to provide Synchronisation to C1 to verify overall synchronisation
existing passing Nakornsawan existing passing C1 to existing passing C1/C2 to via the central control to all C1/C2.
toward Bangsue Nakornsawan toward Bangsue Nakornsawan toward Bangsue
Radio C1 to link to main switch at C3 Installation of Radio system in Installation of Radio system in C1 to link to Bangsue via Fibre.
through C2. C2 boundary and link with C1 C3 boundary and link with C2. Central voice system e.g. voice
and C3. C3 shall make cross coverage/ recorder/ playback provided by C1
C1 shall make cross coverage/ C2 shall make cross coverage/ overlap with C2 boundary, test to be join test with C2/ C3 for
overlap with C2 boundary, test overlap with C1/C3 boundary, to be performed to ensure completion.
to be performed to ensure test to be performed to ensure coverage without loss.
coverage without loss. coverage without loss.
Interface Table
TEL C1 to interface with existing or C2 to interface with existing or C3 to interface with existing or
C2 if the block crossing border. C1/C3 if the block crossing C2 if the block crossing border.
border.
The Contractor who firstly be engaged to provide Signalling and Communication may start providing
and specifying the protocol/ interface. they propose interface shall be of an open standard which can
be interface to the upcoming Contractor in order to interface/ integrate without unsafe/ unreliable
scheme. Anyhow the second Contractor shall be responsible for convert his provided protocol, or any
other equipment in order to fully interface with the fist system. At the end, the join test to prove
compatibility of interfaces are sole responsibility of both Contractors.
2.4 Limits of Contract
Please refer to the Tender Document’s Scope of Works.
2.5 Work Included
The Work to be carried out by the Contractor includes but is not limited to the following. Full details
of requirements are set out in the appropriate sections of the specification which follows.
1) Site survey, planning and detailed setting out of all signals, signs, boards, track circuits etc. in
accordance with signalling plans and SRT standard clearances and distances specified in respect
of signal position, sighting, braking distances, overlaps, level crossing approach warnings and
controls, ETCS level 1 etc. in the optimum and most economically beneficial manner.
2) Alteration to any equipment and accommodation necessary at the limits of the Project and the
design, supply and installation and interconnection with the existing signalling with existing CTC
system and communications systems and the alteration of existing equipment where specified.
The existing block systems operating to the next signal boxes or block post beyond the Project
areas shall be interlocked with the new signalling to be installed by the Contractor.
3) The design, supply and installation of signalling interlockings, ETCS level 1, communication
equipment and all associated lineside equipment and cabling.
4) The design, supply and installation of level crossing protection and control- equipment as
specified.
5) The setting out, excavation, backfilling and compaction to graded elevations of equipment and
building foundations, and cable and earthing trenching and the integration of this equipment into
the existing systems.
6) The supply, forming, placing, curing and protecting of all concrete work required.
7) The design and supply and construction of equipments, and/or design and supply interface work
for equipment buildings, station buildings as agreed by SRT.
8) The relocation or provision and installation especially at the area of existing Den chai station and
its associated routes, of all shunting limit post, speed indication boards, and warning boards and
provision and installation of new posts and boards where required.
9) The relocation, refurbishing and refitting of any keylocks which are to be retained and integrated
into the Project (if required) as agreed by SRT.
10) The design, supply and fitting of any additional signals, point, derailers, keylocks or level crossing
equipment to be added to existing equipment which are to be retained and integrated into the
Project, including the provision of signal lantern units where additional aspects are added to
existing signals with new mounting backgrounds and junction indicators as required, hoods on
existing signals, close-up indication sectors or prisms (if needed).
11) The design, supply and installation of ETCS level 1. The provision of suitable locomotive, DMU,
wayside equipments as agreed by SRT.
12) The design, supply and installation of insulation within track circuited areas for steel bridge
structures, rail gauge tie- bars, insulation of sole plates and point stretcher bars or provision of
insulated sole plates and stretcher bars. The provision of suitable rail/ sleeper insulation for
newly track circuited areas where this is required.
13) Liaison with the Civil Trackworks Contractor. He is responsible for the cutting of rails and supply
and installation of insulated rail joints required by the new signalling arrangements.
14) The supply and installation of any bonding required for track circuits.
15) The supply and installation of electrical lighting of new point indicators and new derailer
indicators.
16) The construction of any recesses in bridges, tunnel, viaduct walls and cuttings, provision of
platforms for signals equipment boxes, cables or other equipment together with handrails and
landings; construction of retaining walls.
17) The interface with the new signalling system of existing level crossing protection facilities.
18) The design, supply integration and installation of the communications equipment throughout the
Contract Area and interface with existing communication systems.
19) The testing and commissioning of the systems installed by the Contractor.
20) The design and supply of any specialised equipment or tools required to maintain any part of
the system.
21) The supply of spare parts.
22) The supply of all drawings, calculations, technical information, tracings and computer disks
specified herein and as deemed by the Engineer as necessary for the complete installation and
effective maintenance during service life of the signalling equipment and systems.
23) The provision of As Built drawings in paper copies for office, paper copies for maintenance
propose and all computer file in PDF and CAD format.
24) The removal, certifying, cataloguing, storage, cleaning and return to the SRT of redundant
equipment.
25) The comprehensive training of the SRT staff to be assigned to the maintenance and operation of
the signalling equipment and systems, together with provision of training/ simulation equipment
at Den Chai CTC or other area as stipulated by SRT.
26) The construction of temporary site offices and depots with accommodation including electric
power and water services, and provision of office equipment as required by the Contractor for
his own use as well as the accommodation and facilities specified for use by the SRT engineers/
representative. These shall be located on provisional sites within the SRT boundary.
27) Construction and security of temporary warehouses on allocated site within the SRT boundary.
28) With the exception of material and services which shall be supplied by SRT the Contractor shall
be responsible for all other material, work and services necessary to provide a complete,
maintainable and operable system whether specifically listed, or omitted but inferred.
29) The care and protection of existing signalling and telecommunications systems.
30) Handover of the system to and from the Contractor.
31) The provision of updated programmes of work, including Critical Path Networks, cash flows and
balances, materials and equipment manufacturing programme, and delivery and progress reports
at monthly intervals.
32) The revision of the cash flow forecast to reflect current programming and future programming
every 3 months.
33) The provision of installed equipment lists which shall describe the type of equipment, location
and its approximate value, and the provision and management of a comprehensive asset register.
34) The supply of key locks for hand operated key locked points, to be purchased from a sub-
contractor nominated by SRT.
35) The provision of adequately trained lookouts, and hand signal men for the protection of train
movements and contractors’ staff and equipment.
36) The provision of vehicles and drivers, including all associated maintenance and running costs.
37) The supply and installation of insulated rail joints.
2.6 Work Not Included
The following will be provided by SRT:
1) The supply of new turnouts complete, rails, concrete sleepers, rail fastenings, track ballast and
station building for Civil Works.
2) The provision of toggle-joint facing point lock mechanisms where required for hand operated key
locked points and sidings.
2.7 Stageworks
The Contractor shall be expected to commission parts of the work in stages before all stations are
completed, in agreement with the Engineer.
The Contractor shall include in the Tender Programme his proposed staging schedule and shall
describe the method of implementing the above objectives.
The contract programme shall include the detailed stagework schedule.
2.8 Provisional Works
General
The work to be carried out by the Contractor under clause 2. 4 above, “ Work Included” , shall also
include any one, or several, or all of the provisional works which SRT at their discretion may select to
include in the contract during the contract period. Tenderers shall complete the Schedule of
Provisional Sums to undertake each individual item of work
2.9 General Details

The Works comprise all that signalling and telecommunications Works specified herein and as shown
on Station and Line side Signalling Plans.
The contractor shall be responsible for all work and everything necessary ( whether specifically
mentioned in this specification or not) including all small parts, items etc. to ensure the successful
implementation and proper operation of the Works in accordance with the specification and contract
documents.
The Works shall include detailed design, manufacture, supply, delivery, installation, setting to work,
testing and commissioning, and the dismantling and recovery from site of all materials and equipment
made redundant by the Works.
The Works shall also include provision of spare parts, special tools and equipment, training and facilities
for factory witnessing and testing by the Engineer.
2.10 Signalling Works
New Signalling Works shall be provided throughout the Project Area as detailed on the Tender drawings
as a guideline purpose, which include Station and Line side Signalling Plans.
The layout plans shall be taken as a guide only, it is the Contracator’ s responsibility to accurately
locate and identify actual locations of signalling infrastructure throughout the project area.
Copies of other documents, control tables, cable plans, design drawings etc., which details the existing
all relay interlocking Signalling systems throughout the project area can be made available by
arrangement with the S&T Department of SRT.
Station and Line side Signalling Plans show general arrangements for signals, points, level crossing
control points, track circuiting, Axle counting etc. The Contractor shall design all final arrangements in
accordance with relevant specification criteria taking into account detailed field surveys, final civil and
track designs, signal sighting and Sighting Committee requirements etc. Such final design shall include
appropriate re-numbering of signalling functions as required.
Signal structures, gantries, Repeater Signals, where these may be required, are generally indicated in
the signalling plans. However, provision of all Repeater Signals and signal structures actually required,
including standard posts, long posts, gantries, cantilevers etc. , based on site conditions, final track
intervals, sighting requirements etc. are the Contractors responsibility and all such signals and structures
shall be deemed to be included in the Contract.
Supply and installation of level crossing type A1for double track operation from bill of Provisional Sum
at the Engineer’s decision. Provision of 48 core fibers optic single mode type optical fibre cable which
are buried between Denchai to Chiang Khong for Signalling equipment network system communications
( so call Signalling fibre) . To reach redundancy requirement, Signalling shall use another fibre ( so call
Communication fibre) for network configuration.
2.11 Telecommunications Works

There Three (3) types of station, i.e. “Major station”, “Minor station” and “Train stop station” are
planned to be introduced in the Project. Therefore, it is expected that the low-usage stations such as
“Train stop station” will be unmanned, or have very few staff. In order to reduce costs these stations
will not have a full implementation of the communications system, instead they will be treated as
‘slave’ stations operating as extensions from the nearest major (‘master’) station.
It is not currently defined as to which of the stations will be classified as ‘slaves’. The Contractor shall
access the requirements during the Tender Bid preparation and propose their engineering solution
accordingly.
Interface and/ or modify of existing telecommunications facilities and provision of additional
telecommunications systems and equipment to cater for the new enhanced signalling arrangements
and stations
Provision of Data Transmission System ( DTS) , telecommunications systems and equipment including
extension of fibre optic carrier systems to provide high quality and reliable integrated system of existing,
modified and new telecommunications networks, which include design, provision and establishment
of new 15 (fourteen) DTS consisting of;
(a) 13 (thirteen) at manned stations,
(b) 1 (one) at Depot, and
(c) 1 (one) at new Den Chai CTC.
The Contractor shall provide DTS equipment located at the following sites to create a Network Node
as part of the project DTS Network.
Item Contract Station English Station English Station Thai Station Thai Station
ID Name Abbreviation Name Abbreviation
New Den chai
1 C1 ศูนย์สั่งการ
CTC
2 C1 Den Chai เด่นชัย
3 C1 Sung Men สูงเม่น
4 C1 Phrae แพร่
5 C1 Mae Kham Mi แม่คำมี
6 C1 Song สอง
7 C1 Ngao งาว
Phayao มหาวิทยาลัย
8 C2
University พะเยา
9 C2 Phayao พะเยา
10 C2 Pa Daet ป่าแดด
11 C3 Chiang Rai เชียงราย
Wiang Chiang
12 C3 เวียงเชียงรุ้ง
Rung
13 C3 Ban Pa Sang บ้านป่าซาง
14 C3 Chiang Khong เชียงของ
15 C3 Depot ศูนย์ซ่อมบำรุง
Given there is an existing PRC ( using for Bang Sue – Den Chai STM- 1 network) at CTC Bang Sue, for
resilience of Den Chai – Chiang Khong section network, Contractor (C1) shall design using this existing
PRC into this project synchronization plan (as 2nd priority).
Provision of 48 core fibers optic single mode type optical fibre cable ( so call Communication fibre)
which are buried between Den chai to Chiang Khong. To provide and reach cable route diversity
concept, the buried fibre should be, where practical preferred on the other track side to that used for
another buried fibre (so call Signalling fibre) route.
Provision of 48 core fibers optic single mode type optical fibre cable which are Aerial between Den
Chai to Pak Nam Pho (C1), then from Pak Nam Pho to Bang Sue shall be connected using existing fibres.
The aerial fibre should be, where practical preferred on the exiting Poles in order to provide data
communication from the project to CTC Bang Sue.
Provision of the following stored programme digital PABX systems and equipment:
(a) Design, Provision and establishment of PABX systems with Central PABX at new Den chai CTC (C1)
with at least 7 sets digital phones and Satellite PABX at each manned station and Depot including
battery chargers and Telephone terminals (by C1).
(b) At each of PABXs, three (3) digital or IP handsets, extension cabling etc. shall be provided in the
station offices at each station. Analogue handsets, long line and local extension cabling etc. shall
be provided in accordance with actual station, Automatic Signal, Level Crossing, etc. requirements.
(c) Full integration between the new PABX’s.
(d) Integration of PABX: satellite PABX shall connect to main PABX at new Den Chai CTC (C1). And this
main PABX will connect to existing SRT PABX at Bang Sue CTC.
For the above PABX systems the Contractors shall coordinate with others and submit the details to
the Engineer during the design phase to finalise the required inter- site trunk circuits, capacity and
system non-blocking requirements.
All C1, C2 and C3 Contactors (led by C1) shall support Integrating and interfacing with the PABX at Bang
Sue CTC as required to support Den Chai – Ngao, Ngao – Chiang Rai and Chiang Rai to Chiang Khong
Operations voice requirements and integration into the SRT national telephone network. Including
expansion and modification works as required at this site.
Provision of local and long-line PABX extensions catering for all the present needs including extensions
at Stations, Intermediate Automatic Signals ( SPTs) in block section between station as shown on
Signalling Arrangement Drawing, and Level Crossings.
With the exception of Intermediate Automatic Signals, all other signals will generally not be equipped
with Signal Post telephones (SPT).
Provision of Line side telephone systems for all signalling location cases covering all lines and stations
over the section Den Chai – Ngao, Ngao – Chiang Rai and Chiang Rai to Chiang Khong and integration
with satellite PABX and Controller requirements.
Provision of the dedicated Digital Voice Recording System ( VRS) for Denchai to Chiang Khong section
located at Den Chai Centralised Traffic Control ( CTC) to provide audio recording of all conversations
with Station Masters, CTC Operators and Dispatcher positions, including configuration and test to all
recorded circuits.
Provision of a central synchronisation Clock source to provide synchronization of DTS, PABX, Radio, VRS
and other systems, including configuration and test. Equipment shall have the capability to support
interface requirement for CBI and CTC. The VRS shall provide sufficient capacity to record with time/
date stamp all required conversations over a continuous 7 days period before any over writing.
Provision of the Digital Radio system, the Contractor shall provide one (1) at each station, fixed station
radio set and three ( 3) handheld portable radio set at each station to enable all required operations
and maintenance staff to have a radio during their duty hours. In addition the Contractor shall provide
other three (3) handheld portable radio set at each station to enable civil construction activities use.
The Provision of the Digital Radio system including configuration and test:
3) Digital Radio Base Stations and/or Repeaters shall be designed to cover all routes in project area.
4) Fixed Station Radio sets at each station
5) Hand Portable Radio sets including batteries and chargers
6) Mobile radio set for train with antenna system
7) Central Digital Radio equipment at CTC i.e., Exchange, NMS, VRS for Radio (if not using same VRS
for PABX), Interface for VRS, etc.
8) Central Attendant Console
9) Antenna tower
Provision of the Dedicated Block Telephone that using copper communication cable for each adjacent
station including configuration and test.
2.12 Design Practice
The Works shall be carried out to international’ s recognized standards and SRT’ s current standards
and practice.
2.13 Centralised Traffic Control: CTC (by C1)
The CTC will be provided by C1, however, the C2 and C3 shall make provision to interface, join testing
and commissioning to enable integrated supervision along the route.
Provision of CTC facilities in accordance with the requirements set out below.
CTC requirements include all features and facilities specified under CTC including provision of
Timetable Management System ( TMS) , Automatic Train Reporting ( ATR) and Automatic Route Setting
(ARS) system. Minimum requirements shall include: -
a) Four(4) Operators Workstation and one(1) Supervisor Workstation, 1 (one) Senior Workstation, 1
(one) Timetable Workstation located at new Den Chai CTC building dedicated to control of all
stations, Den Chai to Chiang Khong inclusive.
b) Four (4) Remote Workstations located at CTC Bang Sue, Chiang Rai Maintenance office, Den Chai
station, and Chiang Khong station.
c) A Train Description System (TDS)
d) One (1) Maintenance Terminal & One (1) hard copy reporting terminal.
Where CTC is not provided under this contract, the Works shall incorporate such features as are
necessary to ensure that they are capable of being readily controlled from a remote CTC at a future
date.
Where CTC, TMS, ATR, ARS etc. provisions are mentioned in the Technical Specifications and they do
not form part of the current Works, they shall be regarded as for reference and information purposes
only.
Remark: Wherever appear in the Tender document “ new Den Chai CTC or new CTC”
shall mean “Den Chai (or other area as stipulated by SRT)”
2.14 European Train Control System (ETCS) Level 1
The Contractor shall supply an ATP system that is fully compatible with European Train Control System
(ETCS) Level 1 standard in respect to ERTMS/ETCS Baseline 2 V. 2.3.0.d for Trackside equipment, and
latest Baseline version where appropriate for Trainborne equipment, subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
The ETCS Level 1 trackside system with Controlled Balises shall be installed in the following stations
(C1+C2+C3 as applicable) and respective interstation:
• Den Chai (in part/ interface to accommodate smooth/ safe running through from existing line
to/from Den Chai station and to/ from Sung Men station)
• Sung Men
• Phrae
• Mae Kham Mi
• Nong Siao
• Song
• Mae Teep
• Ngao (interface for safe running through between C1/C2 boundary)
• Pong Tao
• Phayao University
• Ban Thok Wak
• Phayao
• Dong Chen
• Ban Rong
• Ban Mai
• Pa Daet
• Pa Ngae
• Ban Pong Kluea
• Ban San Pa Hiang
• Chiang Rai (interface for safe running through between C2/C3 boundary)
• Thung Ko
• Wiang Chiang Rung
• Ban Pa Sang
• Ban Kiang
• Si Don Chai
• Chiang Khong
The Contractor shall design and install ETCS onboard ( Train borne) Equipment in 2 ( two) Diesel
Multiple Unit (DMU) and Electrical Diesel Locomotive of existing SRT Rolling Stock.
The ETCS onboard ( Train borne) provided by contractor shall be capable of upgrading from ETCS
Level 1 to ETCS Level 2 on the remaining hardware with the minimal disruption to existing equipment.
The Contractor shall ensure that the Works are fully and completely integrated with standard ETCS
level 1 systems and that all design and construction interface issues are properly identified, addressed
and resolved.
2.15 Local / CTC Control – Operators Workstations
Local Operators Workstations comprising VDU arrangements shall be provided, together with facilities
for transfer of control between Local Workstations and CTC where such CTC arrangements are
provided.
The most efficient and cost effective method for dealing with replacement of local control
arrangements shall be provided.
2.16 Interlockings
A new Computer Based Interlocking ( CBI) shall be installed to provided coverage control of the line.
The tentative interlocking control areas refer to SIG schematic drawings/ equipment layout. Contractor
C1) shall design, confirm the number of Interlocking locations, and its requirements including the
interface/ modification to existing Den chai Interlocking with Sung Men for smooth transfer of trains.
Contractor C1/ C2 as well as C2/ C3 shall provide interface between adjacent interlocking boundary to
allow safe running through of trains without stopping.
The most efficient and cost effective method for dealing with replacement of interlockings shall be
utilized, which must be practical facilities and realistic with the requirement that, except where
specified otherwise, SRT’ s operational facilities remain available during the progress of the various
stages of the work.
2.17 Point Crank Handles
Point crank handles for manual operation of point machines shall be provided at stations to cater for
the double track situation.
2.18 Level Crossings (if any)
Level crossing boom and warning light arrangements not eliminated by over - or under passes shall be
provided as necessary to facilitate the bidirectional train travel with double tracks.
New equipment, systems, huts, line side locations, signals, signs, etc. shall be provided to cater for the
Works including provision for: -
a) Bi-directional signalling
b) line speeds
New boom motors and detector sets at all category A1 level crossings shall be new items.
Level crossing monitoring information and control function shall be provided at Interlockings and at
the CTC, configured and/or supplemented as necessary.
For each unprotected level crossing, a “Crossing Closed” indication, Power alarms and Crossing Failed
alarms, based on category A1 or B1 crossings, shall be provided from the nearest lineside cabinet to
the interlocking. Level crossing indications, and interlocking with signals were required, shall be
provided at Interlockings and at the CTC. Until such time as the level crossings are up- graded, the
above functions shall be “false fed” at the lineside cabinets.
The arrangements shall be such that upgrading of level crossings shall be achieved in the
future without any changes to software being required at Interlockings and/or the CTC.
All necessary negotiations and arrangements with the appropriate roads authorities for relocation of
equipment, temporary protection, stagework, etc. at level crossings shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
2.19 Cable Routes
New main cable routes shall be buried throughout.
2.20 Planning and Execution of Work
The S&T Works shall be planned, coordinated and integrated with Civil Engineering and Track works
contractors such that:
• work is carried out in a safe and secure manner
• any effects on SRT’s train operations are minimised
• the need for temporary signalling works is eliminated as far as possible
• work is progressed expeditiously
• activities are correctly sequenced
• progress is under continuous monitoring and review
• Planning is modified as necessary to take account of progress of dependent Civil Engineering
activities.
Planning and execution of work may be based on the existing signalling at any one station being taken
out of use, and the station manually operated, for a maximum period of 30 continuous days to facilitate
final installation, setting to work, testing and commissioning of the works. Any overrun of the 30 days
allowance shall be to the contractor’s account.
2.21 Interfaces
Systems shall be designed and installed to interface with existing signalling, at each of the ends of the
Area. as well as between each section C1, C2 and C3
Systems shall also be designed and installed to interface with existing telecommunications systems at
each of the ends of the area (project boundary station).
as well as between each section C1, C2 and C3
The new CTC (C1) is situated at the new Chiang Rai station.
2.22 Limit of Works forC1 or C2 or C3
The Limit of Lineside Signalling Works on the C1 or C2 or C3 Line should be as shown on the Station
and Lineside Signalling Plans.
The existing token block system should be retained and interfaced into the new CBI. (if any)
Systems shall be designed to readily interface with a future Automatic Block facility and Block signalling,
including Intermediate Automatic Signals, such that extension shall be achieved in the future without
any changes to software being required at Den Chai Interlocking and/or the CTC.
Use shall be made of the CBI “Blocking” feature to display the missing track as “inhibited”.
Associated telephone communication systems shall be renewed / interfaced accordingly.
Protection and/or relocation of existing cables, cable routes, lineside cabinet etc. should include those
which conflict with the location of the existing track on the Den Chai interconnecting tracks if needed.
If the block is located between section, the first awarded Contractor shall make provision in order to
interface to adjacent section provided by another Contractor. The second contractor shall approach
to coordinate with the first Contractor the relevant interface requirement needed for development of
his interface. The First Contractor shall, without delay, provide necessary support and information.
The completion of work between this boundary is under responsibility of both Contractor.
2.23 All New Systems, Materials and Equipment
All systems, materials and equipment throughout the project area shall be new and all existing systems,
materials and equipment shall be recovered.
The following specific items may be retained, re-used, relocated etc., by the Contractor subject to the
requirements specified and governing such retention, re-use and relocation:
1) Keylocks
2) The Open Wire Pole Route, if needed
3) Transposition bracket/insulator assemblies for open wire pole routes.
2.24 S&T Equipment Rooms (Relay Rooms)
S&T Equipment Rooms ( Relay Rooms) shall be provided and spacing requirements are fully adhered
to be suitable accommodating S&T equipment.
The S&T Equipment Rooms ( Relay Rooms) shall meet current SRT standards, including attention to
roof, floor, doors, wiring, lighting, painting, finishes, and fire protection etc. as necessary. , and subject
to the approval of the Engineer.
New air conditioning systems shall be provided in all S&T Equipment Rooms (Relay Rooms) properly
calculating to meet room size and accommodate heat dissipation of those S&T equipment.
Floor loadings at Power Rooms shall be suitable strengthening to accommodate larger equipment as
needed.
New Stations if they are being constructed by others, the station buildings will include a new relay
room and air conditioning units, battery room and standby generator room.
END SCOPE OF WORKS
PLANS
3. PLANS
The Plans listed below, shall be developed and submitted by the Contractor for the Engineer's review
and approval:
(1) Systems Assurance Plan
(a) System Assurance Plan
(b) System Safety Plans
(c) RAM Plan
(d) EMC Management Plan
(e) Software Quality Assurance Plan
(f) Quality Plan
(2) Detailed Design, Procurement and Manufacturing Plan
(a) Detailed Design Plan
(b) Engineering Verification and Validation Plan
(c) Factory Testing Plan
(d) Operating and Maintenance Manuals Plan
(e) Training Plan
(f) Defect Notification Plan
3.1 System Assurance Plan
The System Assurance plan shall cover the requirements of the System Assurance section of these
Employer’s Requirements and as a minimum are as follows: -
(a) System Assurance Plan
(b) System Safety Plans (Overall and for Signalling and Communications)
(c) RAM Plan
(d) EMC Management Plan
(e) Software Quality Assurance Plan
(f) Quality Plan
(g) Detailed Design, Procurement and Manufacturing Plan
The Detailed Design, Procurement and Manufacturing Plan shall be configured as a family of “stand-
alone” plans and associated documents submitted separately. The plans shall be submitted in
accordance with these Employer’s Requirements and coordinated with each other and shall
collectively define, describe and encompass the Contractor’s proposed methods, procedures,
processes, organization, sequencing of activities, etc. and shall show how these combine together to
assure that the Works fully meet the requirements of these Employer’s Requirements.
3.2 Detailed Design Plan
The Contractor shall perform his Detailed Design for the Works and prepare a Detailed Design plan for
his Detailed Design and clearly show the technical approach for the detailed design.
Detailed Design Reviews shall be arranged during the course of the Detailed Design stage and the
Contractor shall arrange to attend and make presentations at meetings held to accomplish such
Detailed Design Reviews.
Throughout the Detailed Design period, the Contractor shall attend Detailed Design review meetings
with the Engineer. At these Engineer’s review meetings, the Contractor shall present information,
drawings and other documents to the Engineer in respect of all submissions programmed to occur
during the following five-week period. The Contractor’s presentations shall be in sufficient depth to
enable the Engineer to obtain a clear understanding of the Contractor’s proposals and to discuss the
methodology and processes used.
(a) The Contractor shall record all of the Engineer’s observations and any agreed actions resulting
from the Engineer’s review meeting and shall address each of these fully in the Final Detailed
Design submission of the respective documents for the Engineer’s review and approval.
(b) The Detailed Design Plan shall define the policy for the Detailed Design, the Detailed Design
method statement of the Works and shall include, without limitation full details of:
(i) the organization of Detailed Design staff with particular reference to the Detailed Design
interfaces;
(ii) specific allocations of responsibility and authority given to identified Detailed Design
staff with particular reference to the review and verification of Detailed Design
specification, drawings and calculations ;
(iii) the specific Detailed Design methods, in sufficient degree of detail, to be reviewed by
the Engineer; and
(iv) the list of procedures and work instructions to be applied to manage and control the
quality of the Detailed Design work.
3.3 Engineering Verification and Validation Plan
(a) The Engineering Verification and Validation Plan, is supplementary to the Engineering Plan, and
it shall be prepared by the Contractor in order that engineering Verification and Validation
activities are properly directed.
(b) The Contractor shall, by means of an engineering Verification and Validation process,
demonstrate that all requirements within the Technical Specifications and the Employer’s
Requirements have been met. The Contractor shall prepare an Engineering Verification Table
(EVT) that identifies the Contractor's proposed methodology for demonstrating compliance.
(c) The EVT shall be supplied to the Engineer for his review and approval and shall be monitored
throughout the Project. Any changes to the EVT must be submitted to the Engineer for review
before implementation.
(d) The EVT shall identify the proposed Verification and Validation process for each specification
requirement and the acceptance criteria for achieving the requirement. The EVT does not relieve
the Contractor of any other requirements of the Specifications and/or Employer’s Requirements
in relation to Engineering Review, Verification, Validation, conformance or planning.
(e) For each item in the EVT, the Verification and Validation methods to be used shall be listed by
the Contractor. The methods used shall be reviewed by the Engineer. At least one stage of
Verification and Validation shall be performed prior to production of an item.
(f) Subject to review and approval without objection by the Engineer for each application, the
Verification and Validation methods listed below are acceptable if implemented (whether singly
or in combination):
(i) Similarity - equipment and requirements are identical to those successfully applied on
other projects.
(ii) Historical - requirement has been met by numerous previous designs.
(iii) Calculations and drawings - for review.
(iv) Detailed Design Review - either scheduled or specifically targeted.
(v) Mock-Up - actual size representation of Detailed Design.
(vi) Development Test - performance testing on equipment or material under development.
(vii) Type Test - performance testing of the as-built component, assembly or system.
(viii) Routine Test - test every component, assembly or system.
(ix) First Article Inspection (FAI) - acceptance of the exact look and fit of equipment.
(x) Inspection - formal inspection of the finished item.
(xi) In Service - for service demonstration requirements only.
(g) After each Verification or Validation activity, a Verification Report shall be produced including, as a
minimum, the following: The Verification or Validation results, the reasons for failure if there is a
failure, and proposal for remedial actions.
(h) Where independent checking of the Works, or the use of any laboratory or checking engineer is
required or has been specified or directed by the Engineer, then it shall be identified in the plan
and full details submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the execution of such checking or
engagement of such checking Engineer or laboratory.
3.4 Procurement, Manufacturing and Factory Testing Plan
The Contractor shall prepare and submit the Procurement, Manufacturing and Factory Testing Plan to
the Engineer for review and approval.
The Procurement and Manufacturing Plan shall detail and explain process of procurement and
Manufacturing of key products.
The Factory Testing Plan shall detail and explain how the Contractor will plan, perform, and document
all inspections and tests that will be conducted to verify and validate manufactured equipment and/or
Systems prior to delivery to the Site.
The plan shall consist of a narrative description supported by graphics, diagrams and tabulations as
required.
The plan shall contain, but not be limited to, the following topics:
- the Contractor’s strategy for inspection and Factory Acceptance Tests of all
constituent parts of the Works and how this relates to the sequence of delivery;
- the sequencing and interrelationships of the inspections and tests including:
- all Hold Points; and
- all Control Points;
- the type and extent of inspection and Factory Acceptance Tests to be undertaken
and the parts of the Works to be proven by that testing;
- the objective of each inspection or test, what particular Detailed Design and operating
criteria the test or inspection will prove and how the success of the test or inspection
will be demonstrated or measured;
- the plan for the production and submission of the inspection and test procedures to
the Engineer for review and approval including the submission of the inspection and
test reports and records;
- Type Tests, Routine Tests, First Article Inspections and any other tests constituting the
Factory Acceptance Tests.
The Contractor shall be responsible for re-inspecting and re-testing any failed inspection and Factory
Acceptance Test, including regression testing on previously passed items.
Inspections and tests that are to be witnessed by the Engineer, SRT’s staff and the Engineer’s
Representative shall be carried out in multiple trips as directed by the Engineer, sensibly grouped and
scheduled so that as many inspections and tests as possible may be witnessed during visits. The costs,
arrangement and management of Visas, Air fares, Hotel Accommodation, Meals, Travel and Per diem
within the country where the tests are being carried out are the responsibility of the Contractor.
Not less than 288 (two hundred and eighty eight) man-days of tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer,
SRT’s staff and the Engineer’s Representative. A man day in this context is a day witnessing a test,
public holidays, weekends and travel days are not a man day.
The Contractor shall propose for the Engineer’s approval which tests shall be witnessed and how the
288 (two hundred and eighty eight) man-day for C1 or 234 (two hundred and thirty-four) man-days for
C2 or 234 (two hundred and thirty-four) man-days for C3 will be used.
First Article Inspections (FAI) shall be performed jointly by the Engineer and the Contractor on all major
equipment identified by the Engineer. Equipment shall be shipped from the point of manufacture only
after an FAI has been completed or waived by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide a minimum
of 14 (fourteen) working days’ notice to the Engineer before any FAI. Other than the FAI, the Contractor
shall give the Engineer notice of all Control Points and Hold Points involving inspections and/or tests
by the Contractor.
The FAI shall evaluate component and system maintainability. The FAI shall enable the Engineer and
the Contractor to jointly establish the quality of workmanship for the balance of like components.
Prior to each test and as directed by the Engineer, the latest drawings, inspection and test procedures,
specifications and quality documentation required for adequate inspection of the equipment under
inspection shall be submitted to the Engineer. The drawings shall be complete to the lowest level
replaceable unit.
The Contractor shall ensure that he and his Sub-contractors are prepared for all tests. The Contractor
shall not schedule more than one test on the same day without prior approval by the Engineer.
The tests shall not be conducted until the Detailed Design drawings and test procedures of the
equipment have been reviewed and approved. If drawings with outstanding comments are used, the
Engineer’s comments shall be satisfied at the test and represented by the inspected equipment.
Tests shall only be performed on a component built using approved production processes, tooling
and manpower.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost and scheduling, to the Engineer's convenience, of any
tests that fail.
The Contractor shall prepare two copies of an inspection or test report immediately after the
completion of each inspection or test, whether or not witnessed by the Engineer. If the Engineer has
witnessed the inspection or test, he or his delegate will countersign the inspection or test report to
indicate his review of the information and conclusions (i.e. whether or not the equipment being
inspected or tested has passed satisfactorily) contained therein. If the Engineer or his delegate has not
witnessed the inspection or test (i.e. if a waiver has been granted, or the Engineer or his delegate has
not witnessed the inspection or test for some other reason in accordance with the Contract), the
Contractor shall forward two copies of the inspection or test report without delay to the Engineer. The
Engineer or his delegate will countersign the report to indicate his review of the information and
conclusions (i.e. whether or not the equipment being inspected or tested has passed satisfactorily) and
return one copy to the Contractor. Without prejudice to this Employer’s Requirements, where the
results of the inspection or test do not meet the requirements of the Specifications and/or Employer’s
Requirements or with any doubt, the Engineer may call for a re-inspection or re-test.
For standard equipment which is serial or bulk manufactured, manufacturer’s type test certificates (or equivalent)
may, subject to review and approval by the Engineer, be accepted.
Test equipment and instrumentation shall be subject to approved calibration tests within a properly
controlled calibration scheme, and signed valid calibration certificates shall be supplied to the Engineer
in duplicate in the Testing & Commissioning (T&C) procedures submission not later than 30 (thirty) days
prior to the respective tests. Such calibration checks shall be undertaken prior to testing and, if required
by the Engineer, shall be repeated afterwards.
Materials and equipment shall not be released for shipment until all applicable inspections and tests including
Factory Acceptance Tests have been satisfactorily completed.
Once the inspection and any required remedial actions are completed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, the Engineer shall give a notice of no objection for unit shipment. The Engineer will not
withhold his notice of no objection for shipping unreasonably, provided all pre-delivery assembly and
testing has been successfully completed.
Any unit delivered without the Engineer’s notice of no objection shall be rejected at the Site and all
expenses thereby incurred shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Factory Testing Plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval 120 (one-hundred and twenty)
days before the date of the first factory test.
3.5 Operating and Maintenance Manuals Plan
The Contractor shall develop an Operating and Maintenance Manuals Plan to ensure the timely
preparation of the Contractor’s Operating and Maintenance Manuals and the ‘As-Built’ drawings in a
format and to a level of detail reviewed without objection by the Engineer.
3.6 Training Plan
The Contractor shall submit the Training Plan to the Engineer 150 (one hundred and fifty) days after
the Commencement Date in the Notice to Proceed to ensure the timely preparation of the Contractor’s
Training Contractor’s On-site Organisation.
3.7 Defect Notification Plan
The plan shall include the manpower provided, office allocation, spare part preparation, tools and
transport including the methodology to handle the Defects within the time limits as stated in the
Contract.
3.8 Final Acceptance
The Engineer shall finally accept the overall works when the following conditions are satisfied:
(a) All conditions which are required by the Tender documents are fulfilled.
(b) When the SRT has taken over all works and issued the TAKING OVER CERTIFICATE.
(c) Test reports and other required documentation are assembled and approved by the Engineer.
(d) Receipt by SRT of all equipment and materials made redundant by this work and which have to
be handed over to SRT.
(e) Items listed on the discrepancy list attached to each Taking over Certificate have been completed.
(f) If the work has been taken-over in portions or in part and a “PARTIAL TAKING OVER CERTIFICATE”
issued for each portion or part, then when all Partial Taking Over Certificates have been issued.
(g) Contractor’s Demobilisation has been completed.
(h) All spare parts, special tools delivery have been completed.
(i) Trainings, operation and maintenance documents have been completed.
(j) Independent Checking Engineer’s consent with safety and readiness of the system.
END OF PLANS
POWER SUPPLIES & DISTRIBUTION
4. POWER SUPPLIES & DISTRIBUTION

4.1 General
For clarification, a nominal voltage of single phase A.C. to be 230 volts, three phases A.C. to be 400 volts
as IEC 60038 standard.
The Civil Contractor shall provide A.C Supply source at each station and CTC. The A.C. supplies from the
Civil Contractor, from which are derived 230V single phase 50Hz A.C. mains power supplies, to be provided
at Interlockings and Level Crossings. Contractors shall calculate that the capacity derived from supply
points are adequate for the S&T works, including for the temporary additional load if necessary for his pre-
commissioning testing requirements.
4.2 Secure Signalling, CTC & Communications Supplies
The combined arrangement of Mains Supply, Standby Diesel Alternator ( from other) , UPS and Battery
backed supplies shall provide Secure Signalling, CTC and Communications supplies from which all
Signalling, CTC & Communications equipment shall be operated.
Typical power supply arrangements are included in The Drawings.
4.3 Mains Supplies
The 230V incoming mains supply may vary between the following limits: -
1) Voltage : plus or minus 20%
2) Frequency : plus or minus 5%
The incoming power shall be isolated by transformers from the Commercial mains and all signalling
supplies shall be earth free.
The Mains Supply Transformer shall be rated to have 20% spare capacity.
The mains isolating transformer shall have primary windings to suit the commercial voltage being supplied
and secondary winding to provide 230 Volt single phase. The primary and secondary windings shall each
have tapings which independently can adjust for incoming supply voltage and output voltage variation.
The primary winding shall be adjustable by taps to ensure the correct nominal secondary voltage when
the supply voltage received is + / - 10% of the nominal supply volts.
The secondary winding shall be adjustable by taps to provide a main signalling voltage of 95% , 100% ,
105% or 110% of nominal voltage when the supply voltage is at the correct nominal voltage. The Mains
Supply Transformer shall be rated to have 20% spare capacity.
The incoming power supply shall be protected from major voltage variations by an Automatic Voltage
Regulator ( AVR) . The output voltage shall be 230 V ± 5% from no load to full load, and the response
speed shall be less than 0. 2 seconds. The capacity shall be determined by the load demand at each
interlocking. The AVR shall be rated to include 20% spare capacity. The AVR shall be sourced from a
manufacturer in Thailand.
The AVR shall be fully equipped with protection circuits for overload, under/over voltage, surge and output
short circuit etc. A manual/ automatic by pass switch shall also be provided. The AVR status shall be
indicated as an alarm on the VDU at the Workstations.
4.4 Standby Supplies (If any)
Standby supplies shall be provided against the failure of the mains supply at each mains supply point.
The standby supply shall be provided by a 230 Volt, 50 Hz, single phase diesel alternator set which shall
have 20% spare capacity.
An interlocked contactor shall control changeover between main and standby supplies. The interlocked
contactor shall ensure the standby supply is only connected to the signalling load when the mains supply
is isolated, and vice versa.
4.5 Uninterruptable Power Supplies (UPS)
A true on- line, double conversion and isolation transformer free UPS system shall be provided at each
Interlocking and at the CTC, to support Signalling and CTC functions. The capacity shall be determined by
the load demanded at each location and shall be rated to include 20% spare capacity.
The no break UPS systems shall be designed to continuously supply power to the load & continue to
supply power when the incoming primary power supply (either mains or standby generator) is interrupted,
or if the voltage varies beyond acceptable limits. Equipment and systems shall continue to operate
normally and without any disturbance. The UPS system shall include mains conditioning, automatic
control, alarms and switching facilities. The UPS shall be designed to supply the full working Signalling, &
CTC loads, excluding point machine feeders, for a minimum of 4 hours at full load.
The UPS ( ≥ 20kVA) need to be modular design. The power module can support hot- swap and easy
maintenance. Power supply system shall be designed in structure of centralized distribution.
4.6 Control Board
UPS alarms, e. g. Input Mains Failed, Battery low charge, Bypass operated, thermal/ overload breaker
operated etc. shall be separately indicated by latched indications in the power room and a common
alarm shall be indicated visibly and audibly on Workstations.
“UPS Failed”
Also on the Control Board indicators will show: -
“UPS has been on load for 10 minutes”
“UPS has been on load for 50 minutes”
The UPS shall operate automatically when the supply fails. Changeover between “UPS” and “Generator”
supply shall operate after 10 minutes, all changeovers will be “no-break” to load supply.
The Diesel alternator set shall be started automatically when the 'Normal' supply voltage falls below 10%
of normal voltage for a period exceeding 10 seconds, and changeover between " Main" and " Standby"
supply shall operate after run up time of the alternator set has ensured the voltage is maintained at 10%
of nominal and the frequency is maintained at 5% of nominal.
Restoration to ‘Normal’ supply shall occur automatically after the mains power has been restored and is
maintained at nominal voltage for 5 minutes, however changeover shall not occur unless the diesel
generator set has been running for 30 minutes.
The changeover equipment shall have both mechanical and electrical interlocking for the changeover
operation.
Diesel shut down shall be automatic.
The system shall limit diesel generator set attempts to start automatically to three attempts.
Failure to start, failure to generate adequate voltage, high temperature or low oil pressure etc. shall all
be separately indicated by latched indications in the power room and a common alarm (generator failed)
shall be indicated visually and audibly, with optional cancelling of the audible alarm, at the local
Workstations.
A manually operated switch shall be provided in the power room with three positions: -
“Automatic”
“Manual”
“OFF” (inhibits starting)
When in the “off” and “manual start” positions the “generator failed” indication shall show on the VDU
at the local Workstations.
4.7 Generator Rating / Engine and Fuel Tanks (Not used)
The Diesel engine shall be capable of continuous operation in excess of 48 hours without requiring
attention.
Automatic protection against the consequences of oil pressure failure or high engine temperature shall
be provided.
Fuel tanks shall have a capacity adequate to ensure a minimum of 48 hours continuous running. A sight
glass to indicate fuel level shall be provided so as to be visible without entering the power room and a
Low Fuel Warning indication on the VDU at the Local Workstations shall be provided. Refueling shall be
via a locked filler, external to the power room.
4.8 Level Crossing Power Supplies
Power supplies for operation of lineside Level Crossing equipment shall be derived from either the secure
signalling power supply feeder, ( generator/ UPS backed) or from an Electricity Supply Authority power
supply point. Level Crossings within interlocking areas, i.e. between Warner Signals, shall be fed from the
secure signalling power supply feeder.
All Level Crossing power supplies shall include a dedicated automatic charger, battery backed supply.
The charger/ battery shall supply all level crossing Road Warning visual and audible signals, ( including
floodlighting when this is not on the secure signalling feeder) and barrier machines for B1 automatic half
barrier sites.
The battery shall have a minimum capacity sufficient to operate the level crossing equipment and
floodlighting, in the event of mains power failure, for a minimum working period of 6 hours.
Utilities within Level Crossing Huts shall be fed from Electricity Supply Authority power supplies. They
shall not be fed from Signalling supplies.
4.9 Interlocking and Signalling Power Supplies
Unless approved otherwise by the Engineer, relay circuits shall be operated at 50 V D.C.
Transformer/ Rectifier sets shall be provided with capacity to supply the maximum load including re-
charging batteries plus a spare capacity of 20%.
Isolation shall be provided between internal and external supplies and between external supplies in each
direction.
The capacities of transformer / rectifier set etc. to be standardised where reasonable.
Points motor supplies shall not be taken directly from bus bars supplying other signalling equipment
except via isolating transformers.
4.10 Communications Power Supplies
Communications power supplies shall be dedicated automatic charger, battery backed supplies.
Capacity shall be sufficient to support normal equipment operation over a 6 hours period of mains power
failure.
4.11 Voltage Regulation
Transformers and transformer rectifier sets shall be designed and rated such that the output nominal
voltage is maintained under full load conditions with the supply voltage at normal voltage and frequency.
The regulation of transformers and transformer rectifier sets shall ensure the no- load voltage does not
exceed the full load voltage by more than 10%.
4.12 Distribution
All signalling power cables shall have copper conductors.
The voltage at any point along a power feeder shall not be less than 10% below the busbar voltage under
full load conditions when the supply busbar is set at the nominal supply voltage.
Power distribution voltage shall not exceed 440 volts A.C
Power distribution by the use of cores in signalling multicore cables shall not be permitted.
Power distribution is defined as any voltages in excess of 120V (nominal) A.C. and any A.C. or D.C. voltage
of any value used to provide a source of supply for multiple signalling equipment’s.
The AC and DC power supplies from the distribution board shall be divided into Up, Down and Internal
circuits.
Distribution / Switchboards
The secure signalling supply shall be taken directly to a distribution/ switchboard.
The switchboard shall include all necessary protective switching and monitoring arrangements typically
including the following.
1) Incoming Mains isolating/protecting circuit breaker.
2) A lamp indicating incoming power available.
3) A separate voltmeter on the mains supply - continuously monitored.
4) A separate ammeter on the mains supply showing total load continuously monitored.
5) A frequency meter, on the mains supply.
6) Voltmeter and ammeter switchable to monitor voltage and current of A.C. supplies.
7) Voltmeter and ammeter switchable to monitor voltage and current of D.C supplies/feeders.
8) Meters and 3 position spring-centre switches to measure the voltage to earth of each leg of the A.C.
busbars and of the 50volt D.C. supplies.
9) Separate indicator lamps on all A.C. and D.C. supplies to show availability of supplies.
10) Circuit breakers controlling/protecting all submains or subcircuits both internal and external feeders.
The contacts of switches operating switchable meters must be arranged to ensure that there is no
possibility of different supplies being connected together.
Each outgoing supply feeder shall be controlled and protected by its own circuit breaker.
4.13 Load Estimates and Cable Sizes
The Contractor shall estimate and submit for approval all load calculations which shall indicate normal
and estimated maximum load; - for each main power supply point; for each power feeder; for each point
on the power feeder where a load is supplied.
In calculating cable conductor sizes and voltage drop, an allowance of 10% shall be included over the
“measured” cable length for route deviations in addition to specific allowances for the route crossing the
track etc.
An allowance of 20% of the estimated maximum load shall be made to allow for future development.
The existing system of power equipment and cabling includes the above allowances. If more than 75%
of the existing spare capacity will be utilised under this project then additional power equipment and
cables shall be provided which shall again include the above specified allowances.
4.14 Safe Working Procedures
The Contractor shall develop safe working methods for all power supply maintenance and testing and
will instruct SRT in these methods as part of the system training programme.
END POWER SUPPLIES & DISTRIBUTION
SIGNALLING REQUIREMENTS
5. SIGNALLING REQUIREMENTS
5.1 Signalling System - General
The signalling system shall be based on a three aspects system employing colour light signals displaying
Red or Yellow or Green with an aspect sequence to control train movements on a signal to signal basis.
The main running signals shall be supplemented by additional signals such as Junction Indicators for
diverging routes, call-on signals and shunt-ahead signals and speed indication boards.
The Yellow warning aspect shall provide a minimum warning distance of 1000m to the Red stop signal,
this may be extended to suit particular conditions up to a maximum of 1500m.
Warning distance may exceed 1500m through station layouts subject to the approval of the Engineer for
each case.
Where particularly difficult sighting conditions occur, an advance indication of the state of the running
signal ahead shall be provided by a Repeater Signal.
Shunting movements shall be controlled by subsidiary main signals, or ground shunting signals or hand
signals in conjunction with Limit of Shunt Boards and other fixed signals.
Typical location and spacing of signals are shown in The Drawings.
The correct operation of Level Crossing protection shall be indicated by Level Crossing Rail Warning Signals.
The specification signalling Plans indicate the form and position of signals which shall be provided for this
project.
The signal spacing shall be determined so as to enable the longest braking distance train, travelling at its
maximum allowable and attainable speed, applying service braking at the warning signal to come to a
stand at the signal in advance. The sighting distance of the warning signal shall not be included in the
determination of the minimum signal spacing for braking when designing the system.
The Braking Distance for each type of train running on a particular line may be obtained from theoretical
calculation or from dynamic tests performed on the trains themselves or result from a mixture of both
sources of information. The approved Brake Tables shall be used to determine signal design requirements.
The braking distance data used to determine signal spacing shall be based on normal adhesion conditions
and produced or validated by a Vehicle Acceptance Body. Validation shall include demonstration by
representative trials that trains conform to the braking distances as calculated.
5.2 Signal Aspects - Code
• Red – Stop
• Yellow - Proceed on straight route prepared to stop at next signal at Red.
• Yellow with Junction Indicator - Proceed through junction or junctions, regulating the train speed
through the junction to limit given by the speed board, prepare to stop at next signal at Red
• Green - Proceed on straight route, next signal at Yellow or Green.
• Main Red Aspect with Subsidiary Emergency Call-On Signal – Draw ahead to next signal and be prepared
to stop short of any obstruction.
Note – (i) Used only when failure prevents Main Signal Clearing.
• Main Red Aspect with Subsidiary Shunt Ahead Signal and Ground Shunting signal; Draw ahead to next
running signal, ground shunting signal, shunt limit post or hand signal prepared to stop short of any
obstruction.
5.3 Signal Aspects - Displays
• Main Running Signals
Red and/or Yellow and/or Green aspects according to the format required and with the aspects
arranged in a vertical row, Green above Yellow above Red and provided with a long range lens.
• Junction Indicators
Five lunar white lights displayed at an angle of 45 degrees to left or right of the vertical. In the case of
multiple routes to the left, or to the right, only one Junction Indicator shall be provided to indicate all
routes diverging to the left, and one indicator to indicate all routes diverging to the right.
In the case of routes diverging to both left and right, the indicator shall consist of one pivot light, plus
4 lights for the diverging indication to left and right.
• Emergency Call-On Signal
Three lunar white lights in a triangular arrangement with main signal at red.
• Shunt Ahead Signal
Three lunar white lights in an inverted triangular arrangement with main signal at Red.
• Ground Shunt Signal
Horizontal Line of two Red lights - Stop.
Diagonal Line of two lunar white lights (45 degrees) - Shunt ahead.
• Repeater Signal
Main Running Signals
Five lunar white lights arranged to display either three horizontal lights or three diagonal (45 degrees)
lights.
Horizontal - Signal Ahead at Stop (Red)
Horizontal Flashing - Signal Ahead at Caution (Yellow)
Diagonal - Signal Ahead Clear (Green).
• Limit of Shunt Board (L.O.S.)
A black and white post in accordance with the drawing in the Drawings and shall be located to
indicate limit of train movements taking place without the clearance of a main running signal.
• Level Crossing Rail Warning Signal
Five Lunar White lights arranged in an oblique (St. Andrews) cross - all lights flash at 1 second on/1
second off and shall indicate level crossing ahead closed to road traffic - proceed at normal speed.
• Level Crossing Advance Warning and marker Post
A board (with two oblique crosses for an Automatic Crossing) - indicates a protected road crossing at
1 km ahead, be prepared to stop if Crossing Rail Warning Signal not flashing.
5.4 Proving of Signals
The aspect sequences or aspect displayed shall include controls proving the integrity of the signal lamps
in the following manner:
• Lamp Proving of the main aspect of all main running signals shall be provided as: -
a) Two aspect warning (Y/G) signals or three aspect (R/Y/G) signals shall only display a green aspect when
the next signal ahead is proved to be illuminated, and failure of that signals lamp shall restrict the
signal to caution.
b) Two aspect Red/Green signals shall only display a proceed aspect when the next stop signal ahead is
proved to be illuminated or that signals green aspect controls are at clear.
• A junction indicator signal shall have proving that a minimum of 3 out of the 5 lights are illuminated,
and the main running signal shall only display a proceed aspect with the minimum of 3 lights of the
junction indicator are proved alight.
• A call- on and/ or a shunt ahead signals shall only display with the red aspect of the main signal be
proved illuminated. Call-on and/or shunt ahead shall have proving that a minimum of 3 out of the 3
lights are illuminated.
5.5 Indication of Signals
All controlled signals, intermediate automatic signals and warner signals shall be indicated at Workstations
VDUs details of the actual Workstation VDU display are given in clause 4. 12 herein, but the indications
shall essentially consist of a red indication when the signals and its controls are " on" , and a yellow or
green indication when the signal and its controls are "off". Intermediate automatic signals shall be indicated
generally, at the Workstation VDU to which a train approaching the signal would be heading. Separate
indications shall be provided for Junction Indicator Signals, subsidiary Call- on Signals or Shunt Ahead
Signals Repeater Signals and Ground Shunt Signals.
The indications shall, in addition to the signal control relays, be controlled by the Lamp Proving relay such
that the indication is extinguished when the signal is not illuminated.
5.6 Signals Failure
Failure of any signal shall be indicated on the Workstation VDUs.
5.7 Designation of Signals
5.7.1 Controlled Signals
All Running Signals shall be designated as Controlled signals.
Signals shall be classified as controlled signals when they: -
a) Protect the movement of trains over a route which includes points or crossings over which conflicting
train movements may take place.
b) Protect the movements of trains up to signals which have points within the overlap.
c) Control the movements of trains entering a single line section or bi-directional track, whether or not
the conditions of (a) or (b) above apply.
d) Control movements of following trains between stations.
e) Protect the movements of Trains over a level crossing in a station area fitted with Boom Barriers which
are interlocked with the signal.
5.7.2 Automatic Signals
Signals will be classified as Automatic Signals when:
a) They do not display Red Aspects (Warner Signals)
b) When they display Red Aspects but do not fall into the classification of controlled signals.
c) Traffic regulations direct that Warner Signals sited before home signals are considered to be within
the Station Area and are therefore to be numbered accordingly.
5.8 Identification of Signals
5.8.1 Signal Number Plates
All signals shall be identified by a number. A new number plate shall be provided for all new throughout
the contract area and shall include a station code where applicable.
Controlled signals shall be designated by a number referring to the number of the controlling function on
the Workstation VDU. The number shall be preceded by a letter code of the station name.
Automatic signals shall be designated by a number consisting of a kilometre prefix and a number suffix.
Ground Shunt Signals shall be designated by a three digit number.
Even number suffix will designate Down Signals, Odd numbers will designate Up Signals.
The principles of Signal, Point and Track Circuits numbering are shown in “Clause 05.33 Outline of
Numbering System” at the end of this section. These principles shall be followed by the Contractor in the
event of any modifications in the signalling arrangements which may become necessary.
5.8.2 Controlled Signals
Controlled signals shall not have any other form of identification except for signals controlling the
movement of trains entering a single line section or bi- directional track. These shall be designated as
“Absolute Block” entry signals and be identified in addition to the signal number by an identification plate
‘AB’, or Thai letter which will be specified by the Engineer.
5.8.3 Automatic Signals
Automatic signals displaying red aspects shall be identified in addition to the signal number by an
identification plate 'A', or Thai letter which will be specified by the Engineer.
5.8.4 Alternative Designations
With reference to the identification plates defined above, SRT may decide that the designation be in the
form of Thai script, in this event the Contractor shall provide designation plates and signals in the
alternative format.
5.9 Speed Boards

On all main running signals fitted with junction indicators for diverging routes, a speed board plate shall
be provided which indicates the maximum permitted speed for the “straight” route and for the
“diverging” route.
5.10 Local Operators Workstations
5.10.1 General
Local Operators Workstations shall be installed in the Station Masters Office, signal cabin or other
designated space as approved by the Engineer.
Access to Workstations shall be password protected.
Workstations shall consist of Visual Display Units ( VDUs) which will show the status of the interlocking
displayed on a track layout with graphical symbols. The layout, symbols and text shall be adequately
sized consistent with providing clear information and readability from the normal operating position by an
operator with normal vision in normal ambient lighting conditions. The layout shall be in the same
orientation as the external railway and although not to scale shall have track circuits, signals, points, level
crossings and other indicators in a reasonably correct relationship.
The system shall be controlled with a mouse and keyboard and shall include: -
1) Route setting.
2) Point control.
3) Alarm acknowledge.
4) Blocking control.
5) Emergency control.
6) Attendance / Non-attendance control
7) Day/Night control
8) CTC/Local control
The content, style and presentation of visual and audible information shall be in accordance with SRT’s
current principals and practice.
All safely related indication shall be:
1) Laid out logically.
2) Grouped together where appropriate.
3) Grouped in relation to the equipment controlled and supervised.
4) Clearly labelled
Displays shall include significant geographical features affecting the safe operation of the railway (e.g.
tunnels, station platforms, bridges, viaducts etc.) and distances where necessary, to assist correct
judgement.
It shall not be necessary to show all available information all the time. The ability to progressively suppress
items of fixed information, to achieve better clarity, is required. It shall be possible to display certain fixed
information on demand, separately or in any combination, including:-
1) Signal Identities
2) Point Identities
3) Track Circuit identities
Adjacent to all lettering in English there shall be the equivalent in Thai script. The interpretation of the
English to the Thai script will be added to the drawings by the Engineer when the Contractor submits
drawings for review. Numbers shall only be in English and shall be included on the drawings before the
drawings are submitted to the Engineer for approval.
All commands, controls etc. shall be affected from a seated Workstation position which shall be fitted
out with all the necessary operator interfaces including VDU’s, mouse, Keyboards etc.
The user of any VDU shall be able to adjust the brightness, contrast and colour saturation to suit. The
user shall be capable of making the required adjustment from the normal operating position.
Command inputs and Operation of controls etc. shall be by “on-screen” cursor setting methods controlled
by mouse. The number of operator actions required to execute a function shall be kept to a minimum
but shall be consistent with clear, logical and coherent execution of functions.
Safety critical commands, e.g. emergency route release, emergency point operation, call-on route setting,
blocking, removal of “blocking” controls etc. shall require a confirmation command with password.
Independent backup control facilities shall be available from an associated ‘ QWERTY” style keyboard.
Custom designed keyboards are not permitted.
It is preferable to be able to effect and display all control conditions and to display the status of all
indications on a single VDU map display. Where this is not possible sufficient screens shall be provided so
as to enable the Operator to view the whole Local Control area simultaneously.
Clock/Time displays shall be provided. The clocks shall be synchronised to a common controlling source
within a given installation, together with the train control and communications equipment and the data
recording equipment, and shall show the time corresponding to a recognised National Time signal.
A fully redundant system configuration shall be provided; employing duplication of computers, associated
hardware, and communications links etc. , and shall be integrated with the associated redundant CBI
system. Status of each VDU shall be displayed.
A static layout of the interlocking area shall be provided to supplement the Local Operators Workstation
showing all tracks, signals, points, platforms and stations and all other signalling equipment. This shall be
mounted in a frame at a location approved by the Engineer such as it does not cause an obstruction. The
size shall be such that it is clearly readable from the position of the Workstation operator.
Overhead lighting shall be provided in the SM office above the Local Workstation to provide adequate
illumination of the writing area. This facility shall be fed from the secure signalling power supply system.
All terminals and exposed connectors at mains voltage will be covered and labelled.
5.10.2 Route Setting
Routes shall be set from an entrance signal to an exit signal or exit location. It shall be possible to set
“long routes” within an interlocking by selection of an entrance to one route and an exit to a subsequent
route ahead. All routes in between shall then set. Cancellation of long routes shall only be possible by
cancelling each individual route in turn.
Oversetting by main routes shall be provided over ground shunting signals which occur in the line of
route, and also for through traffic passing through stations on the main line.
The status of the routes shall be clearly indicated i.e.: -
a) Quiescent
b) Available to be Set
c) Selected
d) Confirmed
e) Setting
f) Set and Locked
Generally, the colour of the track symbol on the VDU, between entrance signal and exit signal or exit
location shall reflect the status of the route.
The track displayed over those portions of track points shall indicate the direction of the point.
In the event of a track circuit failure (other than the points track circuit) the route, if otherwise available,
shall set but the signal shall not clear.
Where the route set leads over a manually operated level crossing, the setting of the route shall not clear
the signal until such time as both booms are proved down.
The colour of the track symbol shall progressively revert back to its quiescent state as the route is
normalised in conjunction with sectional route releasing.
5.10.3 Clearing of Signals
After a route has been set and locked the signal leading over that route shall automatically clear to the
appropriate aspect, except in the case of approach released signals and call-on indicated signals.
Where the route leads over a manually controlled level crossing the signal will not clear until both booms
are proved down, which shall be indicated by the " crossing closed" indication being steady, when the
signal shall automatically clear.
If the home signal does not clear because of the failure of a track circuit in the route, or its overlap, or a
failure of the main signal or signal ahead, setting the “ CALL ON” route at the Workstation with train
approach shall clear the “CALL ON” signal and cause the “CALL ON COUNTER” to increment by one. The
“CALL ON” command shall be set by operation of a secure function by password.
The “ CALL ON” signal shall be normalised by the route releasing circuit or, if inoperative, by the
“ EMERGENCY ROUTE RELEASE” function that shall be released by operation of a secure function by
password.
5.10.4 Cancellation of Route
Passage of a train shall automatically restore the signal to red. The route shall be sectionally released by
the passage of the train. Points shall remain in their last operated position.
If, the route does not release, operation of the “EMERGENCY ROUTE RELEASE” function shall release the
route after a pre-set time with a maximum of 5 minutes. This operation shall be indicated in a distinctive
and graphic manner and shall advance the “EMERGENCY ROUTE RELEASE COUNTER” one step.
If, following the setting of a route, the signals have cleared but the track circuits are not dropped ie: a
train has not passed the signal, operation of the “SIGNAL CANCEL” function shall change the signal to red.
If the approach locking is not engaged the route shall normalise immediately; if the approach locking is
engaged the preset time delay must expire before the route is normalised. During the timeout period
the individual Signal Lock indication shall flash.
The time delay shall be nominally 2 min. but shall be adjustable for any period between 30 sec.and 5 min.
Signal Dimming & Point Indicator Lighting (Day/Night Switch)
Signal lamp dimming and point indicator lighting functions shall be provided at the Workstation. The signal
lamp dimming function shall dim the lighting of main signal aspects, call-on and shunting signals but shall
not dim junction indicators.
5.11 Operation of Points
5.11.1 By Route Setting
When track circuit free and condition of route setting is available, points shall set and locked by the
operation of the route setting system.
Where a route contains more than one set of points, these shall be set in sequence: -
a) As detailed in the control tables to satisfy interlocking conditions.
b) In order to prevent point machine switch-on surges over loading point power supplies points shall be
called sequentially, separated by an adequate time interval.
c) A maximum of 2 machines at each end of the station may be switched on together at any one time.
5.11.2 Individual Operation
Individual operation of a set of points shall be available from the Workstation. This operation shall cause
the points to assume the opposite position. This operation shall be possible when the points track circuit
is clear, no route is set over them and the points are not “Blocked”.
5.11.3 Emergency Operation of Points
If the points track circuit has failed, points may be thrown individually by operation of the “ POINTS
EMERGENCY” function. This operation shall be indicated in a distinctive and graphic manner and shall
cause the POINTS EMERGENCY COUNTER to be advanced one step.
5.11.4 Point Crank Handles

Crank Handles for the manual operation of point machines shall be provided and shall be normally housed
in an interlocked circuit controller mounted on a wall at the Workstation location.
When the handle is removed signals reading over the points shall be prevented from clearing or shall be
replaced, the points shall be prevented from operating electrically and the points detection shall be
interrupted.
On stations in single track sections separate handles shall be provided for each end of the loop.
On stations in double track sections separate crank handles shall be provided for each end of the station
with separate crank handles for Up and Down tracks. Additional crank handles shall be provided for points
crossovers between Up and Down tracks.
5.11.5 Operation of Key Locked Hand Points/Derailers
Certain points/derailers located in signalled routes or providing flank protection to signals will be provided
with key locked hand operated mechanisms securing the point/ derail normal until released by the key.
Electrical detection will also be provided.
The key will normally be kept in the keylock unit at the Local Workstation, and when not available shall
be electrically locked therein.
When the routes over or protected by the key locked points are normal, operation of the “ Key Lock
Release” button shall permit the key to be turned, extracted and taken to the points.
The turning of the key shall prevent any conflicting route being set.
At the points the key inserted into the key locked mechanism and turned shall release the point for hand
operation.
Once turned the key cannot be removed until the point is returned to and secured in the normal position.
Replacement of the key into the keylock unit on the local Workstation shall free the conflicting routes.
Each key lock at a station shall have a different configuration. The Station name and the point/ derailer
number shall be engraved on each key.
5.12 Signal, Point and Track Circuit Indications
5.12.1 Signal Indications
All signals within an interlocking area shall be indicated on the Local Operators Workstation. All signals
within a Block Section shall be indicated on the Local Operators Workstations at both ends of the Section.
Controlled signals, intermediate automatic signals, and warner signals shall all be indicated. The indication
shall display red for ON, yellow for CAUTION and green for CLEAR. Signal symbols shall be shown as 2
aspects, 3 aspects etc. with individual indications within the signal symbol for each aspect.
A separate indicator shall be provided for Junction Indicator signals, which shall display a white symbol
above, and in addition to, the main signal indication.
A separate indicator shall be provided for ground shunt signals. The indication shall display red for ON
and white for CLEAR.
Repeater signals shall be indicated and shall display a horizontal bar, a flashing horizontal bar and an
inclined (45 degree) bar with the main signal ON, at CAUTION and at CLEAR respectively.
Call- On & Subsidiary Shunt signal symbols shall display white when clear. This shall be displayed in
addition to the red signal indication.
When a route has been correctly set but the signal is waiting to clear until a level crossing is fully closed,
the signal green/yellow, JRI, call-on or subsidiary shunt indication shall flash to indicate route setting and
locking is complete and the signal will clear to a proceed aspect when the crossing is closed. For main
routes the Red signal indication shall be extinguished when the signal actually clears.
The Junction Indicator, call on or subsidiary shunt signal indications shall also flash when the route is set
but the signal is waiting to clear on timed occupation of the berth track circuit.
Signals shall be provided with a signal “ Lock” indication which, when the signal has been replaced but
the approach locking is engaged, shall flash to indicate the signal is at stop, the route has been cancelled,
but has not normalised due to engagement of the approach locking.
Failure of the main filament of a running signal shall result in an individual Signal Lamp Filament Failure
indication being illuminated, for the signal concerned, with the sound of a semi-urgent audible alarm. The
indication shall also appear on the maintenance VDU terminal in the S&T Equipment Room. Failure of
both lamp filaments shall be indicated by a distinctive individual signal indication with the sound of an
urgent audible alarm.
5.12.2 Points Indications
The indications for power operated points shall be within the point mimic and shall consist of an indication
in each leg to indicate detection of the lay of the points. This shall change to red with the track circuit
occupied. The points indications shall be shown even when no route is set. The indications shall be steady
when the points are correctly set and detected and shall flash if the points are not correctly set and
detected.
While the points are being operated the “called for” position shall flash.
A separate indicator shall be provided between the legs of the point mimic to indicate when the points
are locked.
Should the points be trailed both legs of the point indicator shall flash with point trailed indication and
an urgent audible alarm shall sound and the ‘Points Trailed Counter’ shall advance one step.
Once trailed the point mechanism shall be inoperative from the Workstation and shall be hand cranked
to correspond with the interlocking at which time the points trailed indication shall extinguish.
Indications for key locked hand points shall be within the point mimic and shall consist of an indication
in the normal leg of the lay of the points to indicate detection and to complete the line of route indication.
The point indication shall be shown even when no route is set. The point indication shall be extinguished
when the key is removed from the key lock on the Workstation and shall flash when the key is present in
the Workstation key lock but the point electrical detection circuit is not complete.
Removal of the Emergency Point Crank Handle shall be indicated by a suitable indication situated adjacent
to the point mimic.
5.12.3 Track Circuit Indications
Track circuits shall be indicated by a length of track mimic, which shall show red when the track circuit is
occupied and a neutral shade (e.g. grey/black) when the track circuit is clear.
The track circuit shall show green when a route is set with the track circuit clear and red when the track
circuit is occupied.
With a route set, the track indication for points tracks shall show occupied over the direction over which
the points are set. If no route is set, the whole indication within the track circuit area shall show red
regardless of the lay of the points.
All track circuits within station areas and throughout block sections shall be individually indicated.
Track indications shall be provided up to, and including, the overlap of the Home Signal, or Outer Home
Signal if provided, of the adjacent station.
5.13 Automatic Block Operation and Indications
The automatic block shall be normally closed and not set in either direction.
The setting of the block shall be automatic on setting of the route from the Starting signal and shall not
normally require co-operation of the receiving end.
The direction of the block will be set when setting the route. When set the block shall continuously prove
the opposing starting signals, including proving of the signal lamp, and routes normal and free of approach
locking. Where provided, opposing signals in the block section fitted with a red Aspect shall be proved
normal together with any associated track stick relays.
The initial setting and reversing of the block shall prove the complete section clear up to the opposing
starting signal of the next station.
The setting of the block for following train movements shall prove the block section clear up to the
overlap of the Intermediate Automatic signal or Home signal, and shall prove the remaining section of the
block is occupied by a train proceeding towards the next station.
Where Intermediate Automatic signals are provided, for train operated block section, controls shall be
such as to permit a following train to leave a station once the preceding train has cleared the overlap of
the intermediate signal in advance. Intermediate signals shall be allowed to clear for following movements
once the preceding train has cleared the overlap of the Home signal in advance.
In cases where the Block is sectionalised by provision of Intermediate Automatic Signals, a control option
to operate the Block as a single section, i. e. Absolute Block between stations, permitting one train only,
shall be provided. Under operation as a single section, the station Starting or Block entry signals shall
prove the whole of the Block section clear and all Block controls up to the next Station. This control
option shall be selectable via the maintenance function only; it shall not be selectable from the Operators
Workstations. Single or multiple block operation shall be indicated by an “ A” symbol incorporated into
Intermediate Automatic Signal symbols, which shall be illuminated under multiple block operation.
The block shall be normalised automatically when the route from the starting signal is normalised and a
train has not passed the signal and entered the section. If a train has entered the section the block shall
normalise only when the complete block section between the two stations becomes clear. Block
indications shall be provided indicating either no block direction set or indicating the direction in which
the block is set. (Denoted by the letters, G-Going, N-Normal & C-Coming with direction arrows).
The block direction normal indication shall consist of a rectangular bar, situated between direction arrows,
indicating that no direction has been set. The relevant direction arrow shall illuminate and the direction
normal indication shall be extinguished when the relevant direction is set.
The block direction arrows will show when the block is set in the direction of the arrow. The indication
shall remain on until the complete section between the two stations becomes clear and the block
direction normalises. In the adjacent station the relevant direction arrow shall show and the direction
normal indication shall be extinguished. This shall be accompanied by an acoustic signal to announce the
direction has been set from the other side.
In case of a block failure both direction arrows shall flash and an acoustic urgent alarm shall be given,
except in the case of a block track failure, where the track occupied indication will be given.
The block shall continuously prove the Occupation Key at each end of the section. Removal of the
Occupation key at either end of the section shall be indicated by a suitable indication situated adjacent
to the block Indication symbols, on both Workstations, and shall prevent the block being set.
When the Block is set a short acoustic warning shall be given at the receiving Workstation. When the train
passes the LOS at the departing station a Train Approach warning shall be given, and also on arrival of the
train on the track circuit between Home and Warner signals a Train Arrived warning shall be given. These
warnings shall continue until acknowledged or until operation of the appropriate signal function.
An “Illegal Entry” alarm and associated indications shall be given under the following conditions: -
• Train passes Starter at RED with Block Set (Going).
• Train passes LOS with Block Normal or Block Set (Coming).
On Illegal Entry, with the Block Set the associated Directional Arrow shall flash and an Urgent audible
alarm shall be given at both stations. With the Block Normal the Block Normal indication shall flash and
an Urgent audible alarm shall be given at both stations.
Cancellation of the Illegal Entry alarm shall be automatic on clearance of the alarm condition provided
the alarm has been acknowledged at both stations.
5.14 Tokenless Block Operation and Indications

5.14.1 General
Tokenless Block operation and indications shall work generally in the same manner as Automatic Block
function and the block section concerned shall be continuously track circuited. Entry to the block section
shall be registered by the occupation of the track circuit in advance of the starter signal. Exit from the
block section shall be registered by the sequential occupation and clearing of the track circuit in the block
section with rear of and in advance of the home signal and the occupation of the appropriate station track
circuits together with operation of the “AUTOMATIC TRAIN ARRIVED” by Interlocking when the last vehicle
of the train is present.
Track circuit in block section indications shall be provided as an in-line indication.
5.14.2 Cancel facilities
Cancelling facilities shall be provided to allow the block to be normalised, subject to cancelled of that
route in the block.
It shall not be possible to cancel the block with a train in section.
5.14.3 Emergency Block Clearance
An emergency block clearance facility shall be provided at the stations. Operation will be required at both
dispatching and the receiving stations to carry out this procedure. This facility is required in case the
clearance of the block is not possible due to a failure of the train arrival detection. This emergency
operation shall be recorded by advancing the “CANCEL COUNTER” at the dispatching station by one step.
5.14.4 Illegal Entry
An illegal entry alarm shall be provided as specified under Automatic Block.
Cancellation of the Illegal Entry alarm shall require clearance of the alarm condition together with a co-
operative cancel operation.
5.15 Occupation Keys
An Occupation Key shall be provided at each end of each block section.
When the block is normal in both directions, operation of the " OCCUPATION KEY RELEASE" button shall
enable the "OCCUPATION KEY" to be turned, extracted and taken by the man in charge of the works.
When the " Occupation Key Release" button is pushed the white indication light beside the push button
shall indicate that the block is normalised and unoccupied and the key can be removed.
Removal of the "OCCUPATION KEY" shall prevent the block concerned being set in either direction.
The Key shall be engraved with the block section and station name concerned.
Replacement of the key shall free the block concerned.
The occupation key will be given to engineering and other staff to ensure the safety of train operations
and of the staff concerned undertaking engineering works.
The occupation key shall consist of a key of substantial proportions.
It shall be configured with an index such that it is only possible to insert the correct key into the interlocked
circuit controller at the station to which it applies.
The key shall be engraved with the station name to which it belongs and additionally with the name of
the block section to which it applies.
The key shall normally be retained in an interlocked circuit controller which shall be integral with the
local Workstation at the station master’s office.
The circuit controller shall be configured to accept only the correct occupation key, and shall be labelled
with the block section to which it applies.
The circuit controller shall have a minimum of two sets of electrical proving contacts which are closed
only if the occupation key is present in the controller and turned to the "locked" position.
Removal of the key shall not be possible without rotation to an "unlocked" position. Rotation of the key
from the " locked" position shall positively drive the proving contacts open and they shall remain open
until the key is rotated back to the locked position.
The removal of the key shall require the energisation of an electric lock. This will permit the rotation of
the key from the "locked" position. Availability of the release shall be indicated by a release light, and the
lock then energised by operation of a push button both of which shall form part of the interlocked circuit
controller.
The electric lock shall have a minimum of two proving contacts proving the electric lock is in the de
energised and locked position. These contacts shall be wired in series with the contacts proving the
presence of the key.
The electric lock solenoid and indicating lamp shall operate at 50V D.C.
All electrical proving contacts shall be robust and be manufactured of corrosive resistive material, and
the contacts shall impart a self-cleaning wiping action.
The circuit controller case shall be in a dust proof steel or cast housing or similar material such as alloy
with a removable, sealed and lockable cover.
5.16 Blocking
Controls shall be provided by which the Operator at a Workstation can inhibit or block sections to track,
block sections and point movement for the following purposes: -
a) engineers’ possession
b) emergency working
Track/ Block blocking shall cause any control input which would attempt to set a route over the track
section or block section in question to be made unavailable.
Track/Blocking command shall be done by operation of a secure function by password.
Point blocking shall cause any control input which would require the set of points to move to the other
position to be made unavailable. Point blocking command shall be done by operation of a secure function
by password.
The application of such inhibits shall be clearly displayed on VDU screens e.g. by changing the background
colour of the function or its identity or the section of track concerned. Differentiation in displays between
the 2 categories of inhibit shall be provided.
The blocking controls shall be provided as vital interlocking functions.
Blocking which may have been initiated by a Local Workstation may subsequently be unblocked at the
CTC or CTC Workstation and vice versa.
5.17 Key Locks for Hand Operated Points/Derailers
The key is required for the use of operating staff to unlock hand operated points or derailers for shunting.
The construction of the key and construction and operation of the key lock shall be in all essential respects
identical to the details described for the " Occupation Key" except that the key and key lock shall be
engraved with the station name and the points/derailer number to which they apply.
5.18 Electric Points Emergency Crank Handle Controller
In case of electrical failure of a point machine the points will be manually operated by crank handle.
The crank handle will normally be housed in a circuit controller located in the Station Masters Office.
The points crank handle shall be configured with an index, which separated from point detection circuit,
such that it is only possible to insert the handle into the correct point machine and return it into the
correct circuit controller at the station to which it applies.
The crank handle shall be engraved with the station name to which it belongs and additionally with the
number(s) of the points to which it applies.
The crank handle shall normally be retained in a circuit controller which shall be wall mounted in the
Station Masters Office.
The circuit controller shall be configured to accept only the correct crank handle, and shall be engraved
with the station name and the points number to which it applies.
The circuit controller shall have a minimum of two sets of electrical proving contacts which are closed
only if the crank handle is present in the controller and turned to the "locked" position.
Removal of the crank handle from the controller shall not be possible without rotation to an " unlocked"
position. Rotation of the crank handle from the "locked" position shall positively drive the proving contacts
open and they shall remain open until the crank handle is rotated back to the locked position.
The electrical contacts shall be robust and be manufactured of corrosive resistive material, and the
contacts shall impart a self cleaning wiping action.
The circuit controller case shall be in a dust proof steel or cast housing or similar material such as alloy
with a removable, sealed and lockable cover.
5.19 Level Crossing Indications

All Level Crossings within an interlocking area shall be indicated on the Local Operators Workstation. All
Level Crossings within a Block Section shall be indicated on the Local Operators Workstations at both ends
of the Section.
Level crossings shall be labelled with their appropriate category e.g. A1, A4, B1, B2 etc.
Manually controlled A1 level crossings shall be indicated by a green “crossing closed” indication which is
normally extinguished. On initiation of the “Crossing Close” annunciator the indicator shall flash until the
crossing keeper has closed the crossing and the booms are proved down, after which the “crossing closed”
indication shall become steady. On Initiation of raising of the booms, following passage of the train over
the crossing, the indicator shall be extinguished.
Automatically controlled B1 level crossings shall be indicated by a green “ crossing closed” indication
which is normally extinguished. When the “Crossing Close” control has been initiated the indicator shall
flash until the crossing is closed, the booms are proved down and road warning lights are proved operating,
after which the “ crossing closed” indication shall become steady. On Initiation of raising of the booms,
following passage of the train over the crossing, the indicator shall be extinguished.
Automatically controlled B2 level crossings shall be indicated by a green “ crossing activated” indication
which is normally extinguished. When the “ Crossing Activation” control has been initiated the indicator
shall flash until road warning lights are proved to be operating, after which the “ crossing activated”
indication shall become steady. When the road warning lights have ceased to operate, following passage
of the train over the crossing, the indicator shall be extinguished.
Separate Indications on the Workstations shall be provided for alarms related to the Power supply, and
for alarms related to the operation of the level crossing warning equipment.
The “Power alarm” shall indicate: -
a) Mains Power Failure
b) Low Battery Voltage
The “Crossing Failed” alarm shall indicate: -
c) Failure of any of the Road Warning Flashing lights.
d) Failure of any of the Rail warning signals.
e) The continuous operation of the Crossing Warning equipment due to track circuit failure after a preset
time delay adjustable up to 7 minutes.
f) The storage of the “train passed the crossing” condition by failure of the “departing” track circuit after
a preset time delay adjustable up to 5 minutes. The stick circuitry controlling the inhibition of the
crossing protection by a departing train shall also be re-set after expiration of this time delay.
g) Failure of the “Crossing Failed Sign” signal lamp when the crossing is otherwise in an operating state.
Each of the above alarm conditions shall cause a “Crossing Failed” Urgent alarm.
5.20 Alarms and Indications

5.20.1 Other Alarms and Indications
Urgent (U) and Non-Urgent (NU) Alarms and Indications shall also be provided on the Workstations for, at
least: -
1) Mains Supply Not Available (NU)
2) Mains Supply Power On.
3) AVR Status Warning (NU)
4) UPS Power On.
5) Standby Generator Running (NU)
6) Standby Generator Power On.
7) Standby Generator Low Fuel Warning (U)
8) Standby Supply Not Available. Generator shut down by manual switching or fault condition. (U)
9) UPS Not Available, UPS failure or bypass switch operated. (U)
10) Signalling Equipment Failed. Individual power supply failed or Circuit Breaker trip etc. (U)
11) Telecommunication Equipment Failed, Individual power supply failed, transmission line is inoperative
etc. (U)
12) CTC Transmission / Field Equipment Failed (U)
13) CTC Central Equipment Failed (U)
14) Air Conditioning Failed (NU)
15) Up End Intruder Alarm (NU)
16) Down End Intruder Alarm (NU)
17) Signal Failed (U)
18) Point Detection Failed (U)
5.20.2 Alarm Presentation & Acknowledgement
Alarm indications shall be presented on Workstations in a clear and consistant manner.They shall generally
be flashing indications on initiation of the alarm condition, becoming steady when acknowledged and
returning to the quiescent state on restoration of the alarm condition.
Alarms shall be associated with audible warnings which shall be silenced on acknowledgement. They shall
generally require re-acknowledgement on restoration of the alarm condition.
Audible alarms of distinctive tones shall be provided for each of the following conditions: -
1) Urgent - (Continuous)
2) Non-Urgent - (Continuous)
3) Block set to “Coming” - (Short Duration)
4) Train Approach and Train Arrival - (Continuous)
Audible alarms shall sound at the Local Workstation when it is under CTC control.
5.21 Event Recording and Playback Facility
Event Recording and Playback Facilities shall be provided at each local Interlocking and also at the CTC.
All control, command, indication, alarm and fault etc. activity and system information shall be recorded.
The event record shall include date & time tag, event description, object name, priority, class, interlocking,
operator etc.
Outputs shall be available as hardcopy, screen displays, playback etc. It shall be possible to filter outputs
by time span, activity type, event priority etc.
The Playback System shall record events and pictures for later viewing. Operators shall be able to select
starting points, playback speed (typically 0.1, 0.5, x1, x2, x10, x100), pause, reverse etc.
On line data storage of one month shall be provided, enabling users to access and browse the previous
30 days record at any time. The system shall also store records in a suitable manner to permit transfer of
each month’ s records to external processors or onto suitable media for archival storage. The following
factors shall be taken into account: -
1) Separate physical media units required for each month’s records.
2) A simple means of retrieval and display of the archival information is required.
3) Sufficient media for at least 12 months records shall be provided.
The prime storage media shall be duplicated and the system shall be incorporated into the associated
fully redundant systems.
5.22 Control Tables
The Contractor shall prepare full and complete control tables for all stations, including block controls.
The Contractor shall also prepare Control Tables for all Level Crossings in accordance with the principles
of control and interlocking for Level Crossings detailed in the Specification.
Typical Control Tables together with a typical signalling plan are included in The Drawings.
All Control Tables shall be submitted for approval in accordance with an agreed schedule.
5.23 Vital Locking and Controls
5.23.1 General
In addition to incorporating the design features referred to in this specification the following specific design
features shall be incorporated in the vital locking.
Interlocking shall be provided between all conflicting routes. Direct locking shall be applied between
opposing signals. All locking shall be continuously proved. Initial locking shall be maintained until the
route concerned is released. Release may be sectional where appropriate.
Opposing starting signals of adjacent stations shall be interlocked by the block circuit, and additional non-
vital locking shall prevent the attempt to clear the “opposing” starting signal from replacing or normalising
the other starting signal. This shall be the only instance where non-vital locking shall apply.
Conflicting routes which require points in opposite positions may be interlocked indirectly via the points.
Routes shall interlock with all points within the route, with points providing flank protection to the route
and the overlap, and with trailing points within the overlap.
Facing points within the overlap shall be set and locked and overlap swinging shall not be employed.
The overlap in respect of which trailing and flank protection points are interlocked shall be established
by the position in which the facing points lie at time of setting the route. Counter conditional locking to
prevent loss of conditions in the chosen overlap shall apply.
Facing points in the overlap shall be detected at time of clearing of the signal.
Anti-preselection shall be provided for all signal routes, point controls, and releases to prevent storage of
commands if conflicting locking prevents setting of the route, or points, or release at time of the calling
of the route or point. This anti- preselection shall only apply to interlocking conditions and not to point
detection or track circuit occupation other than that which prevents point operation.
On single line sections, no move into the crossing loop shall be allowed simultaneously with a move at
the other end unless trap points or derail protection or a full overlap exist to provide protection to both
trains from each other. In these circumstances the second move shall not be permitted until the first
move has proceeded clear and has come to a stand. Shared overlaps are not permitted.
All main signals shall check track circuits up to the overlap clearance point, including track circuits providing
flank protection to the route and overlap.
Overlap track circuit controls for following trains shall be a minimum length of 200m in station areas. For
intermediate signals overlap track circuit controls or other kind of track vacancy detection (if provided) of
minimum length 500m shall be provided. Actual overlaps are shown on the Signalling Arrangements
Drawings included in The Drawings as guideline.
Emergency Call- on Signals and subsidiary shunt- ahead signals shall have the same interlocking and
controls as the main signal route except the detection of track circuits clear within the route.
Flank protection and fouling track circuits occupied shall however prevent the clearing of these signals.
All controlled signals shall be approach locked.
Main running signals shall be approach locked when clear with approach track circuit or circuits occupied.
The approach locking shall extend back to the sighting point of the warning signal in rear. The sighting
point shall be defined as a minimum distance of 750m on the approach to that signal.
The Approach locking shall be qualified if the signal in rear is a controlled signal and that signal route is
normal and free of approach locking or that signal has not displayed a clear aspect.
The Approach locking shall be released by time delay adjustable to between 2 and 5 minutes if train has
not passed the signal.
Subsidiary Shunt-Ahead signals shall have the same approach locking conditions and releases as the main
signal.
Ground Shunting Signals shall be approach locked when cleared and shall be released by a time delay of
60 seconds, or by the train passing the signal and entering the route.
All main controlled signals shall have signal replacement operated by the track circuit immediately ahead
of the signal and shall prove the replacement controls normal after the passage of each train.
All ground shunt signals within the line of a main route shall be pre-set automatically with the main route.
When pre-set, the ground shunt signal route shall be back locked by the main route and shall be approach
locked back to the main signal. Release of this approach locking shall only be affected by the train passing
the ground shunt signal, or by the “Emergency Route” release.
All signal routes shall normalise automatically after passage of the train.
Route locking shall be provided to hold points and conflicting routes ahead of the train including overlap
locking.
Sectional route release shall be provided behind the rear of the train.
Overlap locking shall be released by time delay after the train has occupied the last track circuit of the
protecting signal for a preset time. The time delay shall be adjustable between 1 and 5 minutes.
Automatic signals shall be controlled by track circuits and the block circuit, so that the automatic signal
shall display its most restrictive aspect when the block is set in the opposite direction, and shall assume
an aspect according to the block conditions ahead when the block is set for train movements in that
direction.
The block circuit and the automatic signals shall continuously prove the opposing signals “ on” and free
of approach locking and all opposing traffic controls normal.
Junction Indicator signals and call-on signals shall be approach released by occupation of the berth track
circuit( s) . Where the berth track circuit exceeds 300m in length, a time delay shall be provided and the
approach release shall operate by time delay after the berth track circuit occupied. The time delay shall
be adjustable between 10 seconds and 120 seconds.
Signals protecting controlled level crossings, or signals within the approach to automatic level crossings
shall have additional controls as specified under Level Crossings.
Electric points shall be direct locked by the track circuit(s) immediately over the points.
Electric points and releases shall be back locked or route locked by route holding.
All approach locking and route locking shall be down proved in the signal controls and before the signal
is allowed to clear.
5.23.2 Power Failure
System design shall ensure that no additional or unwanted locking is applied after the restoration of power
after power failure, and the design or other special provisions shall ensure that no route which has been
set but not yet occupied shall become unlocked or be cancelled as a result of power failure or power
interruption, and that no route that is set and is being traversed by a train shall become unlocked as a
result of a power failure or resumption of supply after a power failure.
5.23.3 System Design

Where vital relay circuits are employed and are contained wholly within the same relay room or housing
they may be single cut.
Non- vital wiring or equipment shall only be employed in vital circuits when all vital wiring, controls and
equipment are in one side of the control circuit(s) and leg of the power supply, and non-vital wiring and
controls are confined to the other leg of the control circuit(s) and leg of the power supply. Non-vital wiring
or equipment shall not be used in both legs of the same power supply, and shall not in any case be used
in double cut circuits.
Where vital external relay circuits are employed they shall be double cut and shall be fed from
independent power supplies isolated from supplies feeding internal single cut circuits, and non- vital
circuits.
All interlocking and control functions shall be in accordance with accepted railway signalling safety
principles.
Circuits having identical function shall be designed and wired in an identical manner to facilitate
understanding and maintenance.
5.24 Inner Home Signals
Where Inner Home signals are employed, controls and indications shall be consistent with those specified
for Main, Shunt and Call-On routes generally throughout this document, subject to the following additional
features: -
1) A Main route and Emergency Call-On route shall be provided from Outer Home signal to Inner Home
signal.
2) On setting of the main route the Outer Home signal main aspect shall be subject to “Approach
Release” unless a forward route is set from the Inner Home signal.
3) Approach release of aspects for Main turnout routes and Shunt routes shall be on timed occupation
of the Inner Home signal berth track circuit.
4) Emergency Call-On routes shall employ a subsidiary Call-On signal on the Outer Home signal and a
subsidiary Call-On signal. Call-on aspects shall be approach released on timed occupation of their
respective signal berth track circuits.
5.25 Interlockings - Computer Based (CBI)
5.25.1 General
Each station or interlocking area as defined shall be provided with a computer based route setting
interlocking ( CBI) which shall be controlled from Local/ CTC Operators Workstations as specified in the
Scope of Works. A distributed interlocking system shall be provided with individual local CBIs installed at
each station.
Computer based interlockings shall be of a type which are well established within the profession, they
shall be well proven, tried and tested and have a substantial successful service history on other recognised
major passenger railways worldwide, including service in locations with a similar climate to Thailand.
CBIs, in the type and form proposed, shall have achieved certification, by independent competent
authority, of successful completion of formal validation and type approval processes.
Full and complete technical and operational information and details shall be provided for all major
components.
Submittals for review by the Engineer shall include comprehensive details of such systems including the
following: -
1) safety philosophy utilised
2) international standards applicable
3) hardware, software and operational descriptions
4) availability strategy and expectation
5) system architecture
6) evidence of formal validation, type approval and acceptance, by competent authority, for use on
other recognised major passenger railways worldwide.
7) service history including locations in use, length of service, references etc.
The description shall also describe how the system caters for the following: -
1) Upgrading from single line to double track operation, and double to triple track operation.
2) Interfacing to the future CTC system.
3) Software interpretation of interlocking principles.
4) Data preparation and data modification.
5) Interfacing to signals, points and track circuits.
6) Testing using simulators.
7) Block control system.
8) Technician terminal facilities.
9) Maintainability and fault diagnosis.
10) System self monitoring and activity recording.
11) Training requirements.
Interlockings shall be microprocessor based.
Processing speed shall be such that, to an operator, actions and associated responses shall appear to be
virtually instantaneous making due allowance for operational times of external equipment. In any case,
the “ major cycle time” for each individual CBI shall not exceed 1. 3 sec. within which time all status,
interlocking, interface and ancillary functions applicable to the CBI shall be properly processed, including
cross- boundary route functions in cases where an interlocking area is made up of a number of CBI units.
The system shall incorporate means to permit the monitoring and display of worse case “ major cycle
time”. Allocation of processor systems within interlocking areas shall be designed accordingly.
A Red aspect retaining feature shall be employed for signals which shall ensure a RED aspect is maintained
under failure conditions or where incomplete or corrupted data is received.
A Fully redundant system configuration shall be provided employing duplication of computers, hardware,
communication links etc. and operating in hot standby mode, to ensure that any single malfunction,
hardware failure, disconnection, etc. shall not shut down an interlocking or any major portion of an
interlocking. Secondary system shall be controlled and indicated suddenly after switching without any
obstruction.
Electronic field units such as input and output of CBI shall be installed in the same room as the CBI,
subject to the specific approval of the Engineer.
Relevant railway industry standards, including those applicable to the following, shall be strictly and
rigorously applied: -
a) protection against hardware conditions creating unsafe operation
b) software configuration, production, validation and version control
c) independent, or evidence of independent, safety verification
Compliance is required with the following requirements for SIL 4 with CENELEC EN 50126, 50128 and
50129.
5.25.2 Local Maintenance Workstation (Technicians Terminal)
Visual Display Unit ( VDU) colour monitor with mouse, Keyboard ( qwerty) and all necessary software for
operation. Routes and signals would not be able to be set but it is to provide a Comprehensive event
logging, recording and replay system.
To be located in the Station Equipment Room to enable maintenance personnel to see the state of the
interlockings on a track- layout plan display. To show track circuits, points, signals and other equipment.
Typically to include:
1) Inhibiting and blocking functions.
2) Log all internal or external change of state.
3) Log all interlocking faults.
4) Log selected and identifiable external failures.
5) Real time display of graphical events.
6) Replay graphical events between times nominated by user at slow, real time and fast speeds. To
include start, stop, pause, fast forward, fast reverse facilities.
7) Display and replay other states in text.
8) Display and replay selected items.
9) Display and replay all or selected changes of state.
10) Keep log files for access purposes.
11) Replay of log files.
12) Printer to copy displayed data.
13) Counters to show on the VDU the readings for operations of the following.
Emergency route release; Points emergency; Call-on; Points trailed; Block cancel up side and Block cancel
down side.
a) Station Name
b) Time
c) Window of controlled command
d) Window of alarm messages
A static layout of the interlocking area showing all tracks, signals, points, platforms and station and all
other signalling equipment shall be provided in the vicinity of the Maintenance Workstation. This to be
mounted in a frame at a location approved by the Engineer such as it does not cause an obstruction. The
size to be such that it is clearly readable.
5.25.3 Remote Diagnostic/Monitoring
Remote Diagnostic/Monitoring graphic display and recording tool for maintenance use. Typically to
include the following functions
1) Real-time display of system status.
2) Track plan displays.
3) System fault messages.
4) To be able to log all system events.
5) Replay of logged data in graphic form.
6) Remote access.
7) To be able to display multiple interlockings.
5.26 Signal Circuits
Where Signals are controlled by line relays they must double cut the signal lighting circuits.
Signal lights of the main running signal. i. e. Red/ Yellow/ Green, shall be fed via a common fuse, whilst
Junction indicators call-on or shunt ahead subsidiary signals shall each be fed by a separate fuse.
Junction Indicators shall have five lamps wired in parallel, except when multiple junction indicators are
provided when the pivot light shall be separately wired.
Shunt ahead and call- on signals shall have lamps wired in series such that a failure of one lamp
extinguishes the signal.
Level Crossing Rail Warning signals shall have lamp wired in parallel.
Repeating Signals shall have lamps wired in parallel except the pivot light which shall be wired separately.
Ground shunt signals shall have lamps wired in series for both horizontal and inclined indications.
5.27 Points Circuits
An automatic time dependent cutout shall be provided to disconnect the motor circuit should the
machine fail to complete its movement within 300% of the normal operating time. The cutout shall
re-set upon reversing the call on the points.
Point motor operating circuits, point detector circuits, and point trailed detection circuits shall be
independent each from the other.
In cases where existing point machines form part of the Works, such point machines shall be modified,
where necessary, to fully comply with these requirements.
Where relays are employed, point control and detection circuits shall be double- cut, polarised circuits
may be employed. All relays shall be supplied as new and the manufacturer’ s approved by SRT before
purchase.
5.28 Level Crossings
5.28.1 General
Level crossings fall into three categories: -
1) Manned and Controlled Level Crossings, classified type A0, A1, A2, A3 and A4.
2) Unmanned - Automatically Operated Protection, classified type B1 and B2.
3) Unmanned and Unprotected except by Road Warning/Stop Signs, classified type C.
5.28.2 Manned and Controlled Level Crossings - Type A0, A1, A2, A3 and A4 Protection
This category must provide staff house and hut building for each type in accordance with the Drawing.
Protection
The Protection to Road users shall be provided by Road warning lights in conjunction with an audible
warning and the lowering of barriers extending over the full width of the roadway, or carriage way.
A Rail Crossing warning signal shall be provided and sited a minimum of 50m on the approach to the
crossing and visible to the train driver at braking distance.
The Rail Crossing warning signal shall prove the barriers correctly lowered across the roadway.
When the barriers are lowered the Road Audible warning shall cease but the Road warning lights continue
to operate. Except in the case when a second train is coming.
Operation
The protection shall be controlled by a Crossing keeper who will raise and lower the barriers as required.
An audible warning shall be given to the crossing keeper when a train approaches and a route is set across
the crossing, advising him that the crossing is to be lowered, this audible warning shall continue until the
barriers are lowered and are proved in the down position. Except in the case when a second train is
coming. This audible warning will continue to sound or commence sounding when a second train is
detected in the holding section.
The crossing keeper shall operate a “Lower Barrier” switches which shall cause the road warning flashing
red lights to operate in conjunction with the audible road warning. Separate switches shall be provided
for “Upside” and “Downside” barriers.
The electric barriers Type A1 shall automatically commence to be driven down electrically approximately 7
seconds later. The crossing keeper shall supervise the lowering of the barriers to ensure the crossing is clear of
road traffic before being fully closed, and he shall control the lowering of the barriers accordingly by a stop
button which controls the electric motor. Separate stop buttons shall be provided for “Up Side” and “Down
Side” Barriers.
The manual barriers type A2 and A3 will be operated by the level crossing keeper.
When the barriers have fully lowered and detected both the road audible warning and the crossing keeper
audible warning shall be silenced, but shall recommence on detection of a second train approaching. An
indication shall be given at the Workstation VDU that the crossing is closed, running signals controlling the
approaching train(s) shall be allowed to clear, and the rail warning signal shall operate as an indication to
the train driver.
If the barrier down detection circuit fails or the barriers cannot be operated, the crossing keeper shall
operate a sealed button designated “crossing closed” which shall complete the detection circuit, silence
the road warning audible alarm, operate the “ crossing closed” indication at the Workstation and allow
the running signals to clear and the rail warning signals to operate. Operation of the “ crossing closed”
button shall cause a counter to advance by on step. The crossing keeper audible warning shall continue
to sound.
Interruption of the barrier detection circuit shall cause the “ crossing closed” indication and rail warning
signals to be extinguished, the running signals to replace to stop, and the crossing keeper audible warning
to sound.
After the passage of the train the crossing keeper shall raise the barriers by operation of a “ raise barrier”
button or manual operation. If the “barrier closed” switch has been operated due to failure of the barrier
detection circuit he shall also operate a “Train Passed” push button to reset the barrier detection circuit
and raising of the barriers shall not be possible until the circuit has been reset.
The train approach warning to the crossing keeper shall be initiated by track circuit in conjunction with
routes set over or approaching the crossing. The approach warning shall be arranged to ensure that a train
approaching at 120 kph will allow sufficient time for the barriers to be lowered and the crossing closed
within a period of 35 seconds, followed by the running signal protecting the crossing to clear to proceed,
and the warning signal in the rear to clear to a green aspect when the train is at a minimum sighting
distance of 300m from the Warning signal which is clearing to green.
Where no protection by running signals is provided the approach warning shall be so arranged to ensure
that a train approaching at 120 kph will allow sufficient time for the barriers to be closed within a period
of 35 seconds followed by the rail crossing warning signal commencing to flash when the train is at
minimum sighting distance of 1,000 metres from the rail crossing warning signal.
The operation of the type A0 crossing shall be similar to that of a type A1 crossing except that the
protection shall be controlled by the Operator from a wall mounted control box situated at the nearest
station. The Operator shall view the crossing via CCTV arrangements.
Protection by Running Signals
Where level crossings are protected by a running signal, these shall not clear to proceed until the crossing
barriers are proved down and/or the crossing closed detection circuit is complete.
The Crossing Rail Warning Signals shall only flash when the running signal is displaying a proceed aspect.
The running signal shall inhibit the approach warning by track circuit when the route is not set in the case
of a controlled signal, or the signal is at danger in the case of an automatic signal.
When the controlled signal route is set or the automatic signal controls have operated, the warning shall
be given when the approach track circuits are occupied.
The Signals shall only inhibit track circuits in rear of the signal. The crossing warning shall always operate
with track circuits occupied between the running signal and the crossing.
Where a controlled signal inhibits approach warning, after the route is set and the track circuits become
occupied, and the “ Barriers Down” control has been initiated; if the route is then cancelled the level
crossing approach warning not again be inhibited, nor the “ Raise Barrier” control be effective until and
unless the route is fully normalised and the approach locking is disengaged.
Where the protecting running signal is an automatic signal, approach locking shall be provided on the
"Raise Barrier" control circuit.
5.28.3 Automatically Operated Crossing Protection Flashing Lights Only - Type B2
Protection
Road warning shall be provided by flashing red road warning lights in conjunction with a direction arrow
indicating the direction in which the approaching train is travelling, and an audible warning.
A Rail Crossing Warning signal shall be provided sited 50m minimum in rear of the crossing and visible to
the train driver at braking distance from the crossing. The Crossing warning signal shall prove the correct
operation of the Road warning signal as an indication to the train driver, including proving that the Road
Warning lights are operating.
Operation
The protection shall operate on the approach of a train initiated by track circuit, and shall provide a
minimum of 27 seconds warning of a train approaching at a design speed of 120Kph, ie: a warning distance
of 900 metres minimum. This may be extended to a standardised maximum of 1000 metres to utilise a
convenient track circuit limit.
The warning shall clear after the train has passed over the crossing and is proceeding away from the
crossing. Special control circuit arrangements shall be provided to automatically reset this condition after
a time delay of 3 minutes in the event of track circuit or other failure storing the “train proceeding away”
condition.
Running Signals within the Approach
Automatic Signals within the approach shall inhibit the approach warning of the track circuits in rear of the
signal when the automatic route is not allowed to set.
The signal aspect shall clear immediately the route is set and providing the approach warning track circuits
in rear of the signal are unoccupied.
If the route is set while the approach track circuits in rear are occupied clearing of the signal aspect shall
be delayed as necessary to ensure the minimum warning to road users is given. Similarly, if the route is
set with the approach track circuits clear and the signal aspect does not clear to proceed due to other
conditions, e. g. : a preceding train, the signal proceed aspect shall be time delayed if the approach track
circuits have become occupied.
When a controlled signal inhibits approach warning, after the route is set and the approach warning track
circuits in rear become occupied, if the route is then cancelled the level crossing warning shall continue
to operate until and unless the route is fully normalised and the approach locking disengaged.
5.28.4 Automatically Operated Crossing Protection Half Boom Barriers-Type B1
Protection
Road warning shall be provided initially by flashing red road warning lights in conjunction with a direction
arrow indicating the direction in which the approaching train is travelling and an audible warning, followed
by the lowering of half boom barriers across the roadway.
A Rail Crossing Warning Signal shall be provided sited 50m minimum in rear of the crossing and visible to
the train driver at braking distance from the crossing Road.
The Rail crossing warning signal shall prove the correct operation of the Road Warning signal including
proving that the Warning lights are operating and the lowering of the barriers has commenced, as an
indication to the train driver.
A “Crossing Failed Signal” to warn Road users when the crossing equipment is failed.
Operation
The protection shall operate on the approach of a train initiated by track circuit, and shall provide a
minimum of 37 seconds warning of a train approaching at a design speed of 120Kph, i.e.: a warning distance
of 1233 metres minimum. This will consist of a pre- warning time of the flashing lights operating for 7
seconds before the booms commence to operate, followed by an allowance for the boom operating time
typically 15 seconds, and allowing a minimum 15 seconds before the train arrives at the crossing.
The warning shall clear and the booms rise after the train has passed over the crossing and is proceeding
away from the crossing. Special control circuits arrangements shall be provided to automatically reset this
condition after a time delay of 3 minutes in the event of track circuit or other failure storing the “ train
proceeding away” condition.
Running Signals Within the Approach
Automatic Signals within the approach shall inhibit the approach warning of the track circuits in rear of the
signal when the automatic route is not allowed to set.
When the route is set the occupation of the approach track circuits shall initiate the warning.
If the route is set with the approach track circuits clear the signal shall clear to a proceed aspect
immediately.
If the route is set with the approach track circuits occupied or if the signal has not cleared to a proceed
aspect due to conditions ahead, the approach warning shall be initiated when the signal controls operate
but the signal shall not clear to a proceed aspect until the barriers are proved down.
When a controlled signal inhibits the approach warning, after the route is set and the approach warning
initiated by track circuit occupation, if the route is then cancelled the crossing warning shall continue to
operate and the barriers shall remain down until and unless the route is fully normalised and the approach
locking is disengaged.
5.28.5 Second Train Approaching
General
The above operating requirements of each of the above types of crossing shall apply equally to single or
double track areas.
The following additional requirements shall apply in:
1) double track areas where a second train may be approaching on the “other track”, or
2) in single track areas where a crossing is either within the passing loop or near to a passing loop where
a second train may approach soon after the first has cleared the crossing.
Double Track Areas
A second train approaching a manually controlled crossing shall cause an audible warning to be given to
the crossing keeper in conjunction with a “Second Train Coming” indication on the level crossing control
panel.
The second train coming indication shall flash and the audible alarm shall sound until the crossing keeper
acknowledges by operation of an “Acknowledge Second Train” push button.
The running signals protecting the crossing shall not clear to proceed until the crossing keeper has
acknowledged the second train approaching.
The “Raise Barrier” control or the “Train Passed” control shall then be ineffective until the crossing keeper
operates a “Second Train Passed” control.
Where a second train approach warning is given after the “ Raise Barrier” control has been initiated, the
crossing keeper will use his judgment to re- close the crossing at an appropriate time depending on road
traffic and no additional controls shall be necessary other than as for the “First Train”
For Automatically Controlled “ Flashing Light” or “ Half Boom Barrier” installations, a Second Train
approach warning initiated whilst the crossing warning system is operating shall maintain the crossing
warning, and the crossing shall remain closed.
A “Second Train Coming” signal shall operate in conjunction with an audible warning in the form of a siren.
The second train coming signal shall be in the form of a single flashing yellow light fitted at the rear of
the road warning lights. The unit shall have a flat black background board upon which shall be inscribed
in Thai script “ warning second train coming” . The flashing yellow light shall operate in conjunction with
the flashing lights and shall give warning to the road users that a second train is coming when the light is
flashing. The rail crossing warning signals of the track upon which the second train is approaching shall
prove the “Second Train” light is illuminated.
The “Directional Arrow” signal shall operate as normal to indicate the direction of the approaching train(s).
Second train approaching after the road warning system has cleared or the boom barriers have begun to
raise to open the crossing after the first train shall cause a new warning cycle to commence.
In the case of automatically operated crossings with flashing lights, the warning for the “ Second train”
shall operate as for the “First train” as such crossings will usually have only light road traffic density.
In the case of automatic “ Half Barriers” , the barriers shall not be allowed to rise to open the crossing,
unless they can remain in the raised open position for a minimum period of 25 seconds before
commencing another road warning and lowering of barriers cycle. Allowing 10 seconds for the barriers to
rise to the fully vertical position, an outer approach track circuit “ holding” section shall ensure that if a
train travelling at the fastest speed is less than 35 seconds from the warning or strike- in point, then the
barriers shall remain down behind the “ First train” , and a “ Second Train Coming” signal shall be
illuminated.
When any running stop signal inhibits the approach warning by track circuit, and the approach track circuits
become occupied whilst the signal controls are normal and the approach warning is thus inhibited the
signal shall only clear to a proceed aspect after the route is set and/ or other control circuits clear if the
barriers are either already in the down position and the crossing is closed, or if the barriers have been in
the raised position and the crossing had been open for the necessary amount of time as above before
commencing another warning cycle.
Additional controls or delayed clearance of the signal shall be provided to ensure the minimum warning
times to road users are achieved.
Additional controls shall be provided for bi-directional working over the double line sections.
5.28.6 Crossing Failed Sign
The Contractor shall supply and install the "Crossing failed" sign by an arrangement consisting of a notice
board of black lettering on a white retro reflecting background and within which a lunar white signal light
of minimum lens diameter 110mm is mounted.
The white light shall be normally lit whilst the crossing protection equipment is in a healthy operating
state. Crossing failure conditions shall cause the white light to be extinguished. The sign shall be in Thai
script and shall say “IF NO LIGHT - CROSSING FAILED”.
The lights shall be fitted with LED type.
The Lights shall have lamp proving and shall be indicated in the “Crossing Failed” Urgent Alarm circuit.
The lens system shall provide a clear indication visible in bright sunlight on an optical axis at a minimum
distance of 100m with the signal lamps operating at maximum 90% of rated voltage and shall be fitted
with spread lite lens to maintain the same degree of intensity at all points within the approach distance
of 100m.
The units shall be fitted with a lamp transformer having sufficient primary and secondary tapings for fine
adjustment of the lamp voltage.
Half-hoods of minimum length of 100mm shall be provided over the lens unit.
5.28.7 Single Track Areas
In any Single Track areas where crossings are located such that “Second Trains” may approach the crossing
under similar conditions as for double track areas, the principles outlined for double track areas shall
apply.
5.29 Track Circuits
To avoid premature release of interlocking due to momentary operation of track circuits caused by track
conditions, a “ delayed pickup” feature shall be employed. The track clear condition shall not be
established until the track relay has been energised for a minimum period of 500ms.
Where track repeat relays are employed, slow to pick relays shall be used to achieve the delayed pick-up
feature. Contacts of Track relays shall only be used in Track Repeat Relay circuits.
5.30 Line Circuits
Where relays are used, line circuits shall have separate return conductors and shall be double-cut.
Line circuits shall be fed from separate and isolated supplies from internal and single cut circuits.
Where polarised relay line circuits are employed, they shall only employ polarised or inherently biased
relays, and external devices such as blocking diodes shall not be employed to achieve either the correct
operation of the polarized circuit or to achieve the operation of the biased relay( s) within its designed
operating voltage.
5.31 Axle Counters
Axle counters shall be installed in the Block Section between stations for the provision of Automatic Block
Working when the distance between the adjacent station warner signals exceeds 5,000 metres.
The Block Section has a high impact on Railway Operations. A fully redundant application shall be provided
in order to maintain high availability on each of the double tracks.
In order to achieve automatic block working, the following function are required;
• For automatic block working, axle counter should have capability for exchanging vital data between
stations.
• For automatic block working an operator interface with necessary signalling indications and
operating buttons must be integrated with axle counter.
• For automatic block working axle counter should be able to provide vital direction output.
• Axle counter at either station should be capable of communicating using dual channel optical fibre
for reliable block working.
• Axle counter reset arrangements should be cooperative type and it should be integrated with
operator interface for automatic block working.
• Axle counter on track side should preferably provided in such that to avoid frequent maintainer
visits for electrical adjustment on trackside.
5.32 European Train Control System (ETCS) Level1
The European Train Control System ( ETCS) is the signalling and control component of the European Rail
Traffic Management System (ERTMS). The standard was also adopted outside Europe and is an option for
worldwide application. In technical terms it is a kind of positive train control.
ETCS is implemented with standard Lineside equipment and unified controlling equipment within the train
cab (trainborne).
Trainborne subsystem can transmit and communicates with the Lineside ETCS subsystem in order to allow
the rolling stock’s safe movement. The trainborne subsystem comprises of EVC (European Vital Computer),
DMI, Odometry and Radar (In case of design speed more than 120 Km/h) etc. Lineside equipment is the
fixed installed part of ETCS installation. According to ETCS Levels the rail related part of installation is
decreasing. For example, in Level 1 sequences with two or more of eurobalises are needed for signal
exchange.
“LEU (Lineside Electronics Unit) shall be provided for connection to the signalling system at all stations in
the project for transmitting information about signal aspect to the installed balise, and then be sent to
the Trainborne equipment to define speed and train movement characteristics as a Movement Authority
(MA) based on ETCS level 1. The Driver can control the train following permission from the MA which will
be shown on the Driver Machine Interface (DMI), based on ETCS level 1. All information for speed control
and signal aspects will show on the DMI".
5.33 Outline of Numbering System
5.33.1 Signals
Controlled Signals
On the 3 Track section using the centre track as reference facing away from Bangkok the Track on the left
of the centre track has been Designated as TRACK 1 and the Track to the Right as TRACK 3. The centre
track is referred to as TRACK 2. Hence TRACK 1 will normally be the Up main line and TRACK 3 will be the
Down main line.
In the Double Track sections the Up main which is the line normally for movements away from Bangkok
will be the left hand running track using Bangkok as a reference point.
All signals in the UP DIRECTION will be designated with the odd number Prefix 1 while signals in the DOWN
DIRECTION will be designated with as even number prefix 2. As such it follows that for TRACK 2 the prefix
will be 3 & 4 and for TRACK 3 the Prefix will be 5 & 6.
As such the first controlled signal in the up direction in an interlocking area will be designated as 1- 3 for
track 1, 3- 3 for track 2, and 5- 3 for track three. The suffix letter 3 is the signal number. Hence the first
controlled signal in the down direction in an interlocking area will be designated as 2-4 for track 1, 4-4 for
track 2, and 6-4 for track 3. In this case the suffix number 4 is the Signal Number.
Other controlled signals on the main tracks in the UP direction will be designated as 1-5, 3-5, 5-5 for the
next group and 1- 7, 3- 7, 5- 7 for the following group and in the drown direction the groups will be
designated an 2- 6, 4- 6, 6- 6 and 2- 8, 4- 8, 6- 8. This numbering exempts all the Platform starter Signals in
both the main tracks and loop tracks.
Warner Signals
These Signals will be designated as 1- 1, 3- 1, 5- 1, for the UP direction and 2- 2, 4- 2, 6- 2 for the Down
direction.
Platform Starters
The Platform Starter Signals in the up direction begin with the number 15 for TRACK 1 and follows up in
odd number sequence as 17, 19 for TRACKS 2 & TRACK 3 respectively.
In the down direction the numbering begins with 16 for TRACK 1 and follows as 18 and 20 for TRACKS 2
& 3 respectively.
The platform Starter signals in the loop tracks in the up direction will commence at 31 and increase in
the odd number sequence as 33, 35, 37 up to 49, for signals to the left of signal No 15. For loop track
signals to the right of signal No 15, the numbering sequence will increase as 17, 19, 21, 23 up to 29.
The same system is followed for platform starter signals in the down direction where signals to the left of
signal No 16 will increase in the even number sequence as 18, 20, 22 up to 30, and signals to the right of
signal No 16 will commence at 32 increasing as 34, 36, 38 up to 50.
In the case of large stations, i.e. 10 or more running tracks, the platform starter signals will be designated
as follows.
In the up direction starting from No 1 and increasing to the right in odd number sequence as 3, 5, 7, 9 up
to 99 and in the down direction starting from No 2 and increasing to the left in the even number sequence
as 4, 6, 8, up to 98.
Advance Starters
Advance Starting signals will be numbered in the sequence specified above for groups of controlled signals.
Automatic Signals
Automatic signals in block sections will be designated with the digit ( s) of the kilometerage reference
together with a TRACK 1, TRACK 2 etc. reference suffix i.e. 25+500 will be 255-1, 255-3, 255-5 etc.
Ground Mounted Shunting Signals
Using the centre line of the station as a reference point all signals on the Down side of the station ( i. e. :
Towards Bangkok) will be designated with odd numbers commencing from 301 to 399, while on the up
side of the station ( i. e. : Away from Bangkok) the numbers will be designated with even numbers
commencing from 302 to 398, with the last 2 digits the same as the last 2 digits on the next point machine
ahead, or the following point machine in the event of the next point machine number already being used.
5.33.2 Point Machines
Using the centre line of the station as a reference point all point machines on the Down side of the station
will be designated with an odd number commencing from 101 upwards to 199, while the up side points
machines will be designated with even numbers commencing from 102 upwards to 198.
The first two point numbers 102 & 101 will be the remotest point machines from the centre line of the
Station.
The outermost loop points ( or first points leaving the main track) will be designated 111 and 112
respectively with other loop points increasing in number to the centre line of the station. Main line
crossovers will maintain the original numbering sequence.
In the case of crossovers where two ends are involved the “ A” end will always be the nearer end to
Bangkok while the “B” end will be the far end from Bangkok.
Derailers
Point Machine driven derailers and Derailers rod driven by point machine will have the same number as
the point machine but with a suffix “D”.
Points and Derailers With or Without Keylocks (Hand Operated)
These will use the same logic as above for points but the numbering will commence from 200 upwards
to 299.
5.33.3 Track Circuits
Platform and Loop Track Circuits
The numbering of the platform track circuits starts from the main station platform or outermost loop
commencing with 61T up to 70T in numerical order.
For large stations the numbering will commence from 401T up to 499T in numerical order. 401T will be
designated as the track circuit leading to the platform starter signal No 1.
Point Machine Track Circuit
This will take the same number as the point machine. If more than one set of points have a common
track circuit the lowest Point machine number will be used.
Track Circuits in Advance of Signal
The number for the signal applies to track circuits in advance of the signal. If more than one track circuit
exists a suffix “ A” is added to the first track circuit number, B, C, etc. to each number in order. This
designation continues until over taken by other criteria. Up direction signal numbers shall apply in the
case of bi-directional lines when all other criteria are equal.
Track Circuits at Shunt Limit Board
Track circuits on the station side of shunt limit boards will be designated 71T Down end of station and
72T Up end of station together with a TRACK 1, TRACK 2 etc. reference prefix. i.e. 1-71T, 3-71T, 5-71T etc.
Track Circuits at Advance Starter Signals
Track circuits on the station side of Advance Starter signals shall be designated with the number of the
opposing Home Signal together with the suffix A, B, C as required.
Additional Track Circuits in Controlled Areas
Using the centre line a reference point any “ orphan” track circuits in the Down side of the station will
commence with the odd number 81T and increase away from the centre line of the station as 83T, 85T
up to 99T while on the upside of the station the numbering will commence with the even number 82T
and increase as 84T, 86T and 88T.
In large station these numbers will correspond to 801T, 803T, up to 899T in the Down side and 802T, 804T
up to 898T in the up side.
Additional Track Circuits in Block Sections
Shall take the kilometerage reference together with track suffix as for Automatic Signals.
Level Crossing Track Circuits
To be designated by the criteria set down above. Suffix’s A, B, C etc. to be used for track circuits created
by the level crossing.
A.B.C Track Circuit Sequencing
Track circuits named after signals follow the direction of the signal.
END SIGNALLING REQUIREMENTS
SIGNALLING Materials and Equipment
6. SIGNALLING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

6.1 General
6.1.1 Materials and Workmanship
All work shall be carried out in a neat, proper and workmanlike manner and in accordance with the best
of current practice by competent and trained personnel.
All material and components used shall be new and shall be the best of its respective kind and appropriate
to the intended application with regard to quality, quantity, duty, performance and arrangement and shall
be suitable in all respects for the particular application.
All equipment shall conform with the best of modern practice and shall be of proven design and
performance, and shall comply with all of the relevant specifications where indicated.
6.1.2 Performance
All material, equipment and systems offered shall be entirely suitable for normal operation for their entire
service life under the general climatic conditions which pertain in Thailand.
6.1.3 Maintainability
All separate identifiable components on sub units where constructed as integral modules shall be easily
and readily removable for replacement in case of failure.
Such units shall be self supporting and rigidly constructed such that during transport, installation,
inspection and repair normal handling without risk of damage is allowable.
6.1.4 Labelling
Self adhesive " Dymo type" embossed labels shall not be used. All labelling shall be either engraved or
shall be printed on durable material using a permanent and indelible process which may be self adhesive
or attached by double sided adhesive tape.
6.1.5 Standardisation
Insofar as it is economic and practicable to do so the project shall be engineered to enable standardisation
of componentry. Performance shall be maintained at normal levels after replacement of components of
equipment with equivalent parts of nominal or specified tolerance.
Wherever practicable, consistent with safety and reliability, similar components used in the installation
shall be interchangeable.
All nuts and bolts screw threads generally shall be to the I.S.O. Metric Series.
6.2 Materials General
6.2.1 Steel Sheets and Strips
Major materials of workstations, control panels, indication panels, relay racks, external cable racks, shall
be of cold rolled carbon steel sheets and strips to BS 1449 or aluminium alloy to BS 2897 or equivalent.
The thickness of the steel sheets and strips of control panels, indication panels and relay racks shall be
1.6 mm. minimum, and for aluminium sheets 2.6 mm. minimum.
6.2.2 Materials for Permanent Magnet

The material used for the magnetic circuit of electrical machinery and apparatus shall have high coercive
force values and residual magnetic flux density, and also shall be resistant to the influences of temperature
and secular variation.
6.2.3 Soft Magnetic Iron Bars
The soft magnetic iron bars and plates used for iron cores, yokes, armatures and similar for electrical
machinery and apparatus shall have low coercive force values, stable magnetic characteristics; and high
values of magnetic permeability and magnetic flux saturation density.
6.2.4 Copper Wires for Windings and Wirings
Copper Wires to be used in the windings and wirings of electric machines and apparatus, electronic
equipment and electrical instruments shall be annealed copper conductor on which the insulating film of
polyvinyl formal or polyester varnish is baked uniformly and perfectly. These films shall be harmless to
the conductor and shall have sufficient durability. Other characteristics shall conform to BS 4516 and BS
4665 or equivalent.
6.2.5 Materials for Springs
The material to be used for springs of relays and the like of electrical machinery and apparatus shall be
of copper beryllium alloy, phosphor bronze and nickel silver- sheets, plates and strip for springs. The
maximum surface stress value thereof under operating conditions shall not exceed the value of two-thirds
the elastic limit of the material. Details shall conform to BS 2870 or equivalent.
6.2.6 Molding Compounds
The molding compounds to be used for relays and the like of electrical machinery and apparatus shall
have high creep and contraction characteristics, and have sufficient dielectric strength against surge
currents.
6.2.7 Concrete
The Contractor shall use ready mixed concrete in accordance with TIS213, ordinary prescribed mix, grade
C15P. On site mixing may be carried out providing it is strictly supervised to ensure the quality of the
concrete. Nominal maximum aggregate size shall be 10mm, and cement to TIS 133.
Concrete strengths shall be tested in accordance with TIS 15. Tests shall be carried out when directed by
the Engineer.
Concrete for foundations of signals, apparatus cases, huts, etc. shall have a minimum 28 days cylinder
compressive strength of 15 N/mm squared.
6.3 Components General
6.3.1 Switches, and Push Buttons
1) Lever switches, pushbuttons and toggle switches on the relevant control panels shall be so
constructed that these components are mounted easily and securely. No slackness shall arise in
any part of these components during operation.
2) The lever switches and pushbuttons shall be equipped with each contact unit located in a visible
place for inspection and with wiring connections of non-soldering type.
3) The contacts shall be fitted with a removable cover.
4) Contact elements shall be silver and a type designed for high reliability; bifurcated contacts shall
be supplied. The material of contact spring shall be of phosphor bronze or nickel silver plates and
strip, to BS 2870 or equivalent.
5) The contact base shall be of stable non- hygroscopic material equivalent to BS 771 or recognized
National or International Standard.
6.3.2 Counter
Counters shall be designed in such a way that no facilities for resetting the counter are available to the
operator.
Counters shall be provided with four or more digits.
6.3.3 Indication Lamps and Sockets
1) The replacement of indication lamps or L.E.D. shall be practical and easy.
2) The sockets shall be designed for wiring connections of a non-soldering type.
3) The terminal metal fittings shall be constructed so not to cause a short circuit during mounting or
demounting.
4) The L. E. D. lamps shall be of tungsten wire and the sockets of lamps shall be of a stable non-
hygroscopic materials equivalent to BS 771 or recognized National or International Standard.
6.3.4 Buzzers
1) The buzzer shall be an electronic type which shall be able to generate continuously an audible
alarm with variable loudness,
2) The buzzer shall be provided with at least four kinds of alarm tones which are generated by the
different oscillating frequencies.
6.3.5 Signal Fuses
1) Fuses shall have suitable capacity and be capable of breaking the circuit automatically when
overload or short-circuit occurs,
2) The fuse shall have sufficient durability electrically and mechanically, and shall be so constructed
that a melted fuse can be confirmed visually.
3) The replacement of fuses shall be practical easy and safe.
6.3.6 Circuit Breakers
1) Circuit-breakers shall be constructed solidly from materials of good quality, that shall ensure smooth
operation, perfect electrical contact, and easy connection.
2) Circuit-breakers shall have a suitable breaking capacity in accordance with the load thereto and shall
not operate by a transient rush current which occurs in the changeover or the restoration of the
electrical power. The inverse time- delay over current release characteristic, shall continuously
protect the apparatus and the circuit thereof from the overload which takes place.
3) Circuit-breakers shall be capable of breaking the circuit instantaneously when a short-circuit occurs,
and shall be capable of securing the re-closing of contacts just after the breaker is tripped by a short-
circuit of overload, provided that the circuit is again normal,
4) The tripping mechanism shall be of a magnetic type independent of thermal conditions.
5) The circuit-breaker shall provide a mechanical trip indicator.
6.3.7 Connectors
All connectors to be used for connecting cables or wires to terminals shall be of compression type without
soldering.
6.3.8 Resistors
1) Resistors shall be of power type coated wire wound resistor in which resistance wire is wound on a
heat- resisting bobbin such as a porcelain tube and coated with enamel or other heat- resisting
material; or of fixed carbon film resistor which is made of a porcelain tube or bar coated with a
carbon film closely adhered as resisting body, whose surface is additionally protected with paint.
2) Resistors shall be equipped with suitable terminations which shall be securely connected to the
resistor body electrically and mechanically, and shall not cause breaking of the terminal wire nor
come loose in service.
3) The tolerance of resistance shall be + / - 5% but may be + / - 10% in case of resistors that have
intermediate resistance tapings.
6.3.9 Electrical Indicating Instruments for Switchboards
The accuracy of electrical indicating instruments such as voltmeters and ammeters shall be +/-2.5% and
that of frequency meters +/- 1% of nominal value.
6.3.10 Locks
All equipment supplied, except that installed in locked equipment huts, shall be provided with built- in
locks or facilities for padlock.
All keys shall be subject to the prior approval of the Engineer.
6.4 Manufacturing
6.4.1 General
The manufacture included in the specification shall be of the highest standard and the work be executed
in a workmanlike manner.
Details of the actual practice for manufacture shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's normal
standards except as stipulated otherwise by the SRT.
1) All coatings shall be commercially smooth, substantially free of flow lines, streaks, blisters, and other
defects that would impair serviceability or detract from general appearance.
2) Screws and nuts used subject to vibration shall be secured with spring washers etc.
6.4.2 Name Plates

Equipment name plates of brass, aluminium or plastic laminate shall be provided with the name plate
engraved or embossed in English, showing name, model number, manufacture number, manufacture year
and manufacturer's name.
6.5 Protection and Surface Finishes
6.5.1 General
All equipment shall be rendered corrosion proof by the methods, and to one or more of the systems,
detailed.
All equipment, casings and structures shall be painted and/ or otherwise treated to positively prevent
corrosion or deterioration under their conditions of use.
The Contractor may submit his standard specifications for general painting and finishes to manufactured
equipment such as workstations, indication panels, racks, terminal boards, external cases and other
housings etc. , based on past experience in countries having a tropical climate similar to that of Thailand.
The specific approval of the Engineer for each standard is required prior to its application to the Works
All steel work and metal work shall be cleaned to bright metal to remove all rust, oil, grease, and other
foreign substances before painting, galvanising or plating.
6.5.2 Applicable Documents
The following specifications and standards or equivalent shall be adhered to and shall form part of this
specification, the latest issue of such documents shall apply: -
Standards Association of Australia or equivalent
AS 1627 - For Degreasing; Hand Cleaning; Abrasive Blast Cleaning; and Pre-treatment of surfaces.
Hand cleaning with power tools shall be carried out to a class 2 standard of surface preparation.
Abrasive Blast Cleaning shall be carried out to a class 3 standard maximum profile height not exceeding
37 microns.
Wash primer pre-treatment shall be a two packs material applied by spraying and a type suitable for
immediate application of a coating of Vinyl Chloride co-polymer paint.
AS K108 or AS K211 Type 1 - for Organic Zinc chromate primers.
AS K127 - for undercoat.
AS K126 - for full gloss enamel finish.
AS 1650 - for application of hot drip galvanising.
Vinyl Paint - where vinyl paint is specified it shall unless otherwise stated be vinyl
chloride co-polymer, VY ROX 260 or equivalent. Application shall be by spraying.
6.5.3 Methods of Workmanship
All painting shall be carried out by qualified tradesmen employing only good painting practices and
techniques and in strict observance to the directions of the paint manufacturer in respect of preparation,
application methods, film thicknesses and re-coat times.
All materials selected for each system shall be fully compatible with each other.
Only spray or brush application methods shall be employed and Roller application will not be permitted
except for the painting of walls and ceilings in buildings and then only after specific agreement by the
Engineer.
Spray painting shall be undertaken with conventional air atomisation painting equipment in strict
accordance with the recommended procedures for operating that equipment.
Brush application of paint shall be confined to patching or touching of damaged paintwork, and the
painting of fittings in buildings by the specific agreement by the Engineer, or for other reasons specifically
Special attention shall be paid to achieve the specified dry film thickness.
Prime coatings shall be applied on the same day as the abrasive blast cleaning and before the steel
surface shows any signs of tarnishing. Cleaned surfaces shall not be left to stand overnight without being
re-cleaned immediately before application of the prime coat.
The Contractor shall exercise the utmost care in the handling and packing of equipment to prevent
damage to paintwork during transport or installation. Where slings are used in the handling of painted
surfaces they shall be adequately padded to avoid damage.
Where damage to paintwork has exposed bare metal, the exposed metal shall be thoroughly cleaned and all
tracings of tarnish or rust and foreign matters removed, and the coatings feathered back and the system
components, reapplied by brush to the required dry film thickness. Where only superficial damage has occurred
and the bare metal has not been exposed the repair shall re-instate the coatings to the required thickness.
6.5.4 Systems
All preparation and protective coating shall be carried out in accordance with one of the following systems.
The system colour and texture for various individual items or equipment shall be as specified in clause
5.0 below or where omitted shall be proposed by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer.
System 1 - Internal Steelwork
1) Hand clean surface with power tool.
2) One coat of red oxide/zinc chromate primer to AS K 108or equivalent.
3) One under coat.
4) Two coats of full gloss enamel paint.
System 2 - Ferrous Metal (Outdoors)
1) Blast clean.
2) Prime coat with inorganic zinc silicate.
3) Apply two coats of vinyl paint each to dry film thickness of 37 microns.
System 3 - Ferrous Metal (Outdoors)
1) Hot dip galvanised.
2) Degrease.
3) Wash prime.
4) Under coat with zinc chromate vinyl paint.
5) Over coat with two coats of vinyl paint each to al minimum dry film thickness of 37 microns.
System 4 - (Non - Ferrous Metalwork)
1) Degrease.
2) Wash prime.
3) Under coat with zinc chromate vinyl paint.
4) Over coat with two coats of vinyl paint each to a minimum dry film thickness of 37 microns.
System 5 - Wood Surfaces.
1) Sand smooth and remove dust.
2) Knots and resinous areas sealed.
3) Prime Coat with wood primer to ASK 109 class l or TIS 323 OR 357.
4) Putty cracks and nail holes.
5) Undercoat with l coat of undercoat to TIS 357.
6) Top coat with 2 coat of enamel gloss to TIS 327.
7) In places which are exposed but which are generally inaccessible for repainting such as under surfaces
of floors and associated structural members they shall be painted with one coat of a suitable primer
followed by one coat of a bituminous solution.
Fine sand-papering shall be carried out between successive coats.
System 6 - Concrete Block Masonry
1) Repair all defects.
2) Remove all loose particles of concrete, mortar or aggregate, by scraping, wire brushing and washing.
3) Remove all dirt, fungus, grease or oil with suitable solvent.
4) Apply one coat of Latex emulsion paint consisting of poly vinyl acetate emulsion with inert plastic
fillers.
5) Apply one coat Latex paint to AS K122 Type 2 – Class A or equivalent
Other Finishes
Certain other finishes to ferrous and non- ferrous materials may be accepted subject to the specific
Typical such finishes are: -
1) Zinc coated, electroplated to AS 1789 or equivalent for equipment of material not directly exposed
to the weather.
2) Anodised aluminium coated to AS 1231or equivalent.
6.5.5 Painting Schedule
Signals - Including Level Crossing Signals
1) Signal structures and tubular single posts, and Backgrounds system 3 - colours as required by the
drawings.
2) Miscellaneous signal fittings and brackets - System 3 - colour gloss grey.
3) Signal aspects and Signal units - system 2 or 4 as appropriate - colours: -

(a) Interior of Signal Lamp Cases - Flat black.
(b) Front of Signal Lamp Cases and Front of Backgrounds - Flat colours Red or Yellow White as
required.
(c) Back of Signal Lamp Cases and Backgrounds - Gloss Black.
(d) Signal Aspect Hoods - Flat Black.
Points
Points machines, detectors, rods and fittings - system 2, 3, or 4 as appropriate, colours: -
1) Machines and Detectors - External Gloss Back. Except covers - Silver grey. - Internal - Silver grey.
2) Except the internal of the lids to be coated with two layers of anti-condensation paint "Silexine
Anticon type M" or equivalent.
3) Rods and Fittings - Gloss Black.
4) Derailers - Gloss Red.
5) Point Indicator - Flat Black.
Level Crossings
1) Level Crossing Signals and Associated Posts and mounting hardware - as for Running Signals clause
5.1 above.
2) Barrier Mechanisms systems 2 or 4 as appropriate, colours: - Internal and External - Silver Grey.
3) Boom Arms - System 4, the colours as required by drawings.
Equipment cupboards
Equipment cupboards and cable junction boxes system 2, or 3, or 4 as appropriate.
External Colour - Gloss Light Grey, or Aluminium. Internal colour - Gloss white.
Where marine grade aluminium sheet or stainless steel is used in the construction the Engineer may
consider an unpainted finish.
Equipment Racks
Equipment Racks, Control Cubicles, Switchboards etc. except Workstations, control Consoles/Panels.
- System 1 - Colour Dark Admiralty Grey.
Workstations, Panels and Consoles
System 1 or 4 as appropriate, colours: -
1) Bodyshell - External - Gloss Dark Admiralty Grey - Internal - Gloss White.
2) Faceplate background - Matt Eau - de-Nil
3) Text - matt Black.
4) Track circuits - matt: -
• Canary Yellow
• French Blue
• Emerald Green
• Mission Brown
Foundations Assemblies and fixing hardware

Hot Dip Galvanised.
6.5.6 Type Approval
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a complete schedule of finishing systems and colours of all
material and equipment, including details for all buildings, for the Approval of the Engineer.
6.6 Workstations
6.6.1 General
Workstations shall be free standing and suitable for operation and monitoring by a single operator working
in a sitting position. Suitable chairs shall be provided.
Reflections and glare from operating displays shall be minimised.
6.6.2 Construction
VDU screens shall be of size not less than LED 32 inches.
VDUs shall be adequately secured.
Local and CTC Operators Workstations shall be housed in a desk unit which also houses communications
facilities, has drawer storage space at least equivalent to 4 standard drawers and has a minimum clear
desk surface area for each operator of 1000 mm x 600 mm.
Senior Controllers Workstations shall be housed in a desk unit which also houses communications facilities,
has drawer storage space at least equivalent to 6 standard drawers and has a minimum clear desk surface
area for each Controller of 1250 mm x 750 mm.
Workstation positions shall be ergonomically designed such that an operator can sit comfortably whilst
observing indications, operating controls and making use of communications or other facilities etc.
Cable entries to the Workstation shall be from floor to underside of workstation, access provided by
lockable doors.
Any non armoured cable installed between the station equipment room and the local control workstation
shall be installed in conduit.
Internal lighting shall be provided to facilitate testing, fault finding and maintenance.
6.6.3 Key Locks/Occupation Keys
Electric Key Locks for manually operated points and “ Occupation Keys” shall be mounted on the
workstation ends suitably recessed so that they do not protrude. The key recesses and the immediate
surrounds shall be faced with suitable scratch-proof material.
6.7 Signals
6.7.1 General
1) Signals shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the specification Schedules and
drawings and shall be classified into: -, Main Running signals, Junction Indicators, subsidiary shunting
and call-on signals, ground shunting signals; repeating signals, Level Crossing Rail Warning Signals.
2) The Contractor shall provide all signal units complete with lamps, brackets, backgrounds and hoods,
signal posts, number plates, terminal boxes, maintenance deck assemblies and all constructional
fittings necessary in respect of the design, manufacture and supply of signals indicated on the plans
and Schedules. Typical running signal general arrangements are shown in The Drawings.
3) The Contractor shall be provided LED modules into Main Running signals, Junction Indicators,
subsidiary shunting and call-on signals, ground shunting signals; repeating signals, Level Crossing Rail
Warning Signals (as determined in this contract).
4) The contractor shall provide current proving of the LED signal.
5) LED signals shall be specifically designed for Railway signalling applications.
6) They shall be housed in a self-contained light module with all electrical and electronic components
housed within the module. The module should be rated IP54.
7) The outer front cover of the modules shall be optically transparent and sufficiently robust to avoid
penetration by small rocks and other objects that might be kicked up by passing trains.
8) The LED module shall be available in nominal power supply voltages, 110 Volts AC 50-60Hz
9) LED modules shall be available in three sighting ranges, Long range, Intermediate range and Short
range. Long range is for main line use, intermediate for JRI’s etc. and Short range for loop lines and
stations areas.
10) All LED modules defined as “long” range shall be fitted with a secondary lens system in addition to
the LED to provide the beam pattern and intensity required. For short, intermediate range and
subsidiary signals a secondary lens system is not mandatory.
11) All LED modules shall be installed from the back of the signal housing via the rear doors so that all
maintenance activities can be conducted from the back of the signal. Access to the front of the signal
is only required for cleaning of the outer transparent cover of the module.
6.7.2 Construction
All signals including subsidiary and junction indicators shall conform with the following standard design
requirements and also with the specific design requirements according to the type of signal - e.g.: Main
Running signal etc.: -
1) All signal lens bezels shall be of a cast construction, cast iron or aluminium alloy.
2) All lens systems shall incorporate fixed focussing between the lamp/lamp holder and the lens, which
after factory setting shall be secured and shall under all foreseeable operating conditions remain
undisturbed.
3) All coloured lenses and roundels of the main optical system shall be glass. Poly- carbonate or other
synthetic materials will not be accepted in the main optical system but may be permitted subject
to the approval of the Engineer for close indications or excluding optical applications.
4) The LED modules shall not reflect any mono- coloured light from their surface when illuminated by
sunlight that could be mistaken by the driver as a lit aspect. No tinting or colouring of any optical
components including the outer cover is permitted
5) All doors shall be rearward opening and shall be secured by a cylinder lock or shall be suitable for
the application of a padlock, in which case the padlock shall be permanently attached to the lamp
case.
6) Signal lamp cases shall be either of a cast construction of cast iron or cast aluminium alloy or shall
be fabricated of cold rolled carbon steel or aluminium. In either event the whole assembly shall be
rigid and shall ensure the focussing of the signal and light beam will not be disturbed by any flexing
or distortion of the case.
6.7.3 Main Running Signals
1) The signals shall be the multiple aspect type, two or three aspects as indicated on the specification
plans.
2) The indications shall be provided by Red, Yellow and Green aspects.
3) Each individual main signal aspect shall be housed in a separate compartment, which shall positively
eliminate spillage of light from one compartment to the other.
4) LED signals shall be provided in diameters as measured at the front lens or cover ( light emitting
surface) of the LED module, as defined by International Railway standards.
5) The LED modules shall not reflect any mono- coloured light from their surface when illuminated by
sunlight that could be mistaken by the driver as a lit aspect. No tinting or colouring of any optical
components including the outer cover is permitted
6.7.4 Lenses
1) The "main line and siding loop line" signal units shall have solid outer lenses of minimum 180mm
and maximum 223mm diameter.
2) The LED Module shall be coloured red, yellow or green as required.
3) All main running signals including existing signals which are retained shall be fitted with a deflecting
sector for close up viewing of the aspect. The deflecting sector or prism shall be capable of being
rotated to any position below the horizontal centre line of the lens.
4) The signal lens assemblies shall be capable of being fitted with additional or alternative outer lens
assemblies such as diverging lenses or spread lite lenses when signals may be sited on a curved
section.
6.7.5 LED’s and LED Drive Details
LED aspects shall be suitable for flashing with no visible flicker or noticeable start-up delay at turn-on or
turn-off. The LED signals shall show an even, uniform and graduated light output with minimal visibility of
‘dots’ or patterns showing from the individual LEDs.
All LEDs shall be of the ‘Water Clear’ type, no tinting or colouring of any optical components is permitted.
There shall be a minimum of 60 LEDs in the 200mm module and a minimum of 30 LEDs in the 125mm
module. The power factor for all AC powered signals shall be >0.90 across the full operating range.
The LEDs shall be driven by an internal power supply that supplies the LEDs with a constant current
independent of supply voltage with the prescribed range. Dimming of the signals is not required.
6.7.6 The power supply shall be designed so that below a defined voltage level the LED module shuts down
and no light is produced.Chromaticity
LED signals shall comply with the AREMA specifications 2013 part. 7. 1. 10 for Chromaticity with typical
dominant wavelengths of
Red 632 - 640nm.
Yellow 588 – 591nm.
Green 500 – 505nm.
Colour shall be achieved by careful selection of the LED’s themselves by a process known as “binning”.
Mixing of different coloured LEDs to achieve the specified result is not acceptable except where approved
or specified by the approving authority; an example being where current LED technology cannot provide
the desired colour. Coloured filters shall not be used except where required by the approving authority.
6.7.7 Surge Protection
All LED modules shall be earth free.
Surge protection shall only be provided for transverse mode surges (Line to Line).
It is permitted to provide additional external protection in the signal head if required, provided that it is
correctly coordinated to work in tandem with the internal protection.
6.7.8 Availability Requirements
All LED modules shall have a design life of minimum 10 years.
All LED modules shall have a 5 years product replacement warranty for defective materials and
workmanship.
All LED modules shall have an MTBF exceeding 100,000 hours.
6.8 Points
6.8.1 General
Points shall be electrically operated or hand operated as shown on Station and Lineside Signalling Plans.
In general, a separate trailable electric point machine shall be provided for each pair of points, each end
of a crossover and for each derailer. The arrangements are shown on Station & Lineside Signalling Plans
6.8.2 Electric Point Machines
Point machines provided on main lines shall be of a non trailable type. All other Point machines shall be
of a trailable type. The point machine, facing point lock, electric point mechanism, actuating mechanism
and all other fixtures and fittings shall suffer no damage when trailed at a speed of 50 kph. This shall be
demonstrated, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, by a site type test utilising a locomotive. If demonstration
has been performed and approved by SRT before, the contractor shall submit the appropriate certificate.
In addition to other specified requirements, acceptance of a type of point machine which has not been
previously employed on SRT shall be subject to the successful completion of a trial installation. The
Contractor shall arrange for the installation, testing, commissioning, maintenance and monitoring of such
a trial installation and shall provide full and comprehensive reports of results of the trial and performance
of the machine.
All-electric operator or electro-hydraulic operation may be offered.
The Contractor shall provide the electric point machines together with throw rods, detector rods, facing
point lock equipment, Back drive and all necessary fittings including insulated sole plates, tie plates,
number plates and fixings to meet the full requirements of the layouts, and subject to the approval of
the Engineer.
6.8.3 Timbers/Bearers
Extended timbers or concrete bearers shall be supplied by the permanent way contractor. Concrete
bearers where provided shall be pre-drilled to carry a point machine cradle.
If the point machine is mounted on a cradle arrangement, the Contractor shall supply and install tie bars
across the bearers to avoid any movement of the bearers.
The Contractor shall undertake all the necessary drilling and cutting for the installation of the point
machines.
6.8.4 Construction
The electric point mechanism shall be self contained and incorporate a motor, clutch to limit transmission
force, retention clutch with locking gear, throw bars, detection slides, switching contacts and with the
facility for manual operation. No relays or contactors shall be housed in the machine case.
Due consideration shall be made of the weight of the mechanism for ease of handling.
The point mechanism shall be designed to permit the safe transit of trains at a speed of 120 kph in both
facing and trailing direction on the straight track.
The mechanism shall be designed such that the operation can be stopped, or obstructed, or reversed at
any point of its movement without suffering damage.
The mechanism shall be housed in a suitable case for mounting across two adjacent long point concrete
bearers for either left-hand or right-hand operation. Bolts for securing the machine to the bearers shall be
at least 20 mm. diameter.
6.8.5 Positioning
Positions of the throw- bar, locking mechanism and detector mechanism shall be standard dimensions
from the planed end of the point rails with the detector nearest to the planed end of the point rails.
The machine shall be so constructed that it can be readily converted on site from right-hand to left-hand
operation and vice versa. Location and Handing shall be determined by the Contractor in consultation
with the Engineer.
The mechanism shall be capable of driving the point indicator and a “ remote” point end or derail via
mechanical drive in addition to the point end which it is operating directly.
The mechanisms controlling movement, locking and the associated control circuits, contactors and relays,
where used, shall be designed in such a way that, with the possible exception of changing of point motors,
no plant will be redundant and no circuit, power cable or control cable modified, except for additional
items or minor modifications when 25 kV 50Hz electrification occurs.
The machine dimensions shall be such that when the machine is fixed on the supporting bearers, no part
shall infringe on the Structure Gauge. The minimum distance from centre of track to any part of the case,
except rod shrouds, shall be 1,350 mm.
The machine shall be capable of manual operation. The drive boss of the gear shall be separately
configured for “ Up End” or “ Down End” machine location. It is preferred that the drive boss can be
readily modified at site for either “Up End” or “Down End” location and both configurations are available
with the spare parts.
The electric machine shall be mounted parallel to the track at a preferred standard distance of 1,500 mm.
from the track centre and the machine centre line. The machine shall be capable of mounting directly
on two long timbers or concrete bearers for which the nominal centre line spacing is 0. 60 m. , without
modification and with the substantial proportion of the machine housing supported on these two timbers
or bearers. Where concrete bearers are provided, a suitable cradle shall be provided to carry the machine.
If the point machine is mounted on a cradle arrangement, the cradle shall consist of a rigid metal fastening,
tie bars linking the bearers are not acceptable as a cradle. The arrangement shall be such as to prevent
any lateral movement of the bearers.
The ballast shall be packed and tamped to provide a firm bed for the timbers or bearers. Drive rods, lock
rods, detector rods etc. shall be securely fitted, adjusted and secured so that operating movements are
achieved, and generally centrally located between switch timbers.
All timbers or bearers supplied and installed by the Contractor shall conform to SRT acceptance standards
and shall be in accordance with SRT Standard Sizes.
A ballast retention box shall be provided at the point machine location to prevent ballast from falling
between sleepers and filling the area occupied by the drive, lock and detector rods.
The Contractor shall provide drawings of this proposed ballast retention box for SRT review.
The Contractor shall provide a suitable gauge plate and tie plate.
6.8.6 Drilling
The general construction of the machine and facing point lock, and the layout including the drilling of
holes in the switches and stock rails, extended sleepers etc. shall be proposed by the Contractor with
detailed drawings for SRT approval.
The Signalling Contractor shall provide the Permanent Way Contractor with the approved drilling details
in order that such drilling may be carried out by the permanent way manufacturer/supplier.
6.8.7 Operation
With the nominal supply voltage applied to the machine the minimum throwing force of 3kN shall be
maintained during the full movement.
In the "locked" position the throw bar linkage and facing point lock mechanism shall maintain the points
locked in the event of a power supply failure and shall prevent the movement of the points due to
vibration or external force other than trailing force applied.
A retention clutch shall firmly hold the throw bar which via the connections with the throw rods to the
switches shall firmly hold the points closed. The retention clutch shall allow the trailing of the points by
releasing once the trailing force applied on the open switch exceeds the retention force.
The retention force shall be a minimum of 5kN.
A throwing force of 3kN shall be maintained during the full movement of the points when the voltage
applied is at the extreme end of the variation and drop given herein.
The operating time for the complete stroke shall not exceed 5 seconds when the points are in a well
maintained condition.
The machine shall operate in the following sequence:
Open Detector Contacts.
Unlock Points.
Operate the Points.
Lock Points.
Close Detector Contacts.
Point control circuitry shall be double cut and shall be arranged such that the point control contactors
are normally de energised and are proved in the detection circuits.
If the mechanism has been trailed, electrical operation shall not be possible until a site inspection of the
layout has been carried out. This shall be enforced by operation of a trip device requiring manual re set
within the machine.
6.8.8 Manual Operation
The point machine shall be able to be operated manually by crank handle. The crank handle aperture
shall have a separate key locked cover. Before the crank handle can be engaged the power to the point
motor circuit shall be disconnected by a contact which shall remain open after the handle has been
removed until manually reset.
6.8.9 Electric Points Emergency Crank Handle
The points crank handle shall be configured with an index such that it is only possible to insert the handle
into the correct point machine and return it into the correct circuit controller at the station to which it
applies.
The crank handle shall be engraved with the station name to which it belongs and additionally with the
number(s) of the points to which it applies.
6.8.10 Machine Case

The machine shall be enclosed in a weatherproof case with a cover which is secured by a cylinder lock
arrangement and which gives free access to all internal parts for maintenance or replacement.
When the cover is opened or removed a contact shall disconnect the electrical circuit to the point motor
and prevent power operation of the machine.
Gaskets and glands/ packings shall be provided at all apertures to prevent ingress of rain water either
directly or via moving parts. The enclosure shall be designed and finished to minimise the formation of
condensation. Drainage holes shall be provided in the base of the machine casing to permit the disposal
of accumulations of oil and water.
Exposed lubricating holes shall be provided with dust and weatherproof caps or covers.
Cables shall be installed via a terminal box before entering the point machine.
Cables shall only enter the point machine housing through suitable galvanised steel conduits or by a
method approved by the Engineer.
Cable entries shall be glanded and conveniently located for access to the outgoing terminals and also for
the running of cables into the machine whether mounted for Left or Right hand operation.
6.8.11 Motor
The motor shall be a suitable type for safe operation and shall be attached to the drive mechanism but
shall be readily removable.
The motor shall be housed in the upper part of the case.
The cable entry to the motor shall be conveniently located and arranged so as to protect the cable from
mechanical damage.
A supply voltage of 230 V AC shall be provided to the motor.
The transmission shall be so designed and constructed that the machine may be stopped, reversed or
obstructed at any position during its operation without damage to the mechanism.
The mechanism shall be so designed that the throw- bar is positively locked upon completion of its
movement in either direction and shall remain so in the event of a power supply failure or when subjected
to the vibration specified for the working environment or when external force is applied to the mechanical
connection other than the trailing force applied.
6.8.12 Throw
The point throw bar travel shall be sufficient to ensure a switch opening of 110mm minimum at the toe
of the switches and shall in any case have sufficient over stroke to cater for variation in track gauge. The
actual travel will be determined by the required stroke of the facing point lock mechanism.
6.8.13 Detector
Detection contacts shall be provided in the point machine housing which shall detect the position of the
point drive mechanism and which shall be included in the detection circuits.
These shall however be independent from detection contacts detecting the position of the point switches
and which ensure the point has followed the movement of the throw bar.
6.8.14 Wiring and Terminals
Terminals for external cable connections shall be robust, incombustible and moisture proof.
Stud type terminals are preferred and the stems shall be secured in the base of the terminal block to
prevent rotation.
The terminals shall be conveniently located adjacent to the cable entry.
Internal wiring shall be double insulated from the case of the machine and shall be stranded conductor,
PVC insulated 1000V grade and shall be adequately rated for the electrical duty of the circuit. All wiring
shall be terminated with crimp lugs with an insulation sleeve which extends over and crimps onto the
outer insulation of the wire.
6.8.15 Mechanism
All Points on running lines, for running over in either direction, shall be locked by an approved facing
point lock mechanism. Such lock mechanisms shall have a substantial successful service history of not
less than 5 years.
6.8.16 Electrical Detection
Electrical detection shall be provided which independently of the electric point mechanism proves the
point has followed the movement of the point operating mechanism.
The following provisions shall apply equally to electrical detectors provided for electrically operated
points and mechanical operated points.
The detector shall detect both switches in the case of points over which signalling movements apply in
both directions; both positions of derailers over which signalled movements occur; the normally closed
switch over which signalled movements occur only in one direction; and the normally closed switch or
derail position of points or derailer which provide only flank protection to signalled movements.
The detector shall also detect the facing point lock mechanism of all power operated points and of
mechanical or hand operated facing points where facing point locks are provided.
The position of the closed switch point blade shall be detected within close limits.
Point blades which sit or move beyond the admissible limits described in the “Tolerance and adjustment”
section of this specification, from their end position, shall open the detector contact.
The actuation of the detector contacts shall be by direct mechanical means initiated and maintained by
the operating mechanism.
The detector contacts shall be capable of handing currents up to 1 amp at 50 V DC. The contracts shall
be effectively non-fusible.
The operation of the detector contacts shall be quick- acting and the contract opening shall not be less
than 5 mm. The movement of the contact members shall ensure a wiping contact.
The detector contact assemblies inclusive of any necessary contact setting adjustment facility shall be of
robust construction and shall be proof against the vibration specified for the working environment.
Construction
The detector boxes and all of the arrangements associated with electrical detection must be of substantial
construction, capable of withstanding considerable vibration for long periods without excessive wear, as
required by Specification Environmental Conditions.
The detector boxes shall be provided with closely fitted gasketed lids, suitable for securing by standard
padlock, and be designed so that dirt and rain water cannot enter. The design shall be such that on
removing the lid all contact surfaces and working parts are readily accessible for inspection, cleaning and
adjustment. The interior of the box shall be treated to prevent the accumulation of moisture due to
condensation.
Gasket arrangements, with rod shapes and packing, shall be such as to prevent the ingress of rain water
where rods enter the detector. Detection circuits shall be double cut. Cable entries shall be suitably
glanded.
Tolerance and Adjustment
Detector contact springs shall be of suitable material, of ample length and fitted with backing springs
where necessary. The design shall provide for varying the degree or fineness of the setting for the open
and closed positions of the switch blades and shall be such that there is no tendency to cause a
permanent set in the springs with a setting 6.4 mm. course.
The degree of adjustment for the contacts shall enable the setting to be adjusted so that the contact will
break when a gauge 3. 0 mm thick is inserted between the closed switch and stock rail at the Toe of the
points but not break with a 2.0 mm. gauge. Contacts for detection of facing point plungers must not make
until the plunger is in a fully locked position.
6.8.17 Derailers
Generally, derailers which exist and are shown on the Signalling arrangement drawings to be retained, shall
remain as motor or mechanically operated. Where necessary mechanically operated derailers may be
modified to provide the connection with electric point machines, and/or to operate electrical detectors.
Drawings shall be submitted of the proposed modifications for review by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide and fit all necessary components for the modifications.
Where new derailers are shown on the signalling arrangement drawings, these shall be provided by the
Contractor and shall be operated directly by a separate electric point machine.
6.8.18 Keylocked Hand Operated Points and Derailers
Keylocked hand operated points are shown on the Signalling Arrangement Plans.
The Keylock and key for locking points shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor including the
Keylock console units.
Where hand operated facing pointlocks are indicated on the Signalling Plans, these will be the Toggle joint
lock mechanism and will be supplied by SRT, however the Contractor shall supply all fixings and install
the keylocks and facing pointlocks.
The key lock console units shall be used for keeping a key electrically locked, preventing extraction
without its authorised use.
The unlocking of keylocking points may only occur through an electrical release from local control
workstation. The “release” and, therefore, the possibility of extracting the key will be visually displayed
on the unit itself by an indicator lamp.
The position and locking of the key shall be detected by means of appropriate contacts. The unit shall
provide a push button which has to be pressed to unlock the key when the indicator lamp is illuminated.
Where electrical detection of keylocked points, and facing point locks is required for control of signals,
the Contractor shall supply and install detector equipment including detector rods, insulated sole plates,
gauge plates and stretcher bars.
The key lock units shall form an integral part of the local control workstation of the interlocking.
Where existing points which are to be keylocked are currently wire operated from the existing signal cabin the
contractor shall provide hand levers for operation of the mechanism. Where there are existing hand operated
points the hand levers shall be retained.
6.8.19 Point Indicators
All points whether power operated or hand worked will be fitted with point indicators.
The Point indicators shall be a signal of a rectangular box shape manufactured of zinc coated and painted
sheet steel. The indicator shall be mechanically connected to the point and shall be rotated by 90 degrees
by the travel of the point. The indicator shall have a white vertical rectangle on a black background on
each of the two opposite sides displayed to the driver when the point is set for the straight route; and
when turned by 90 degrees for the turnout, the side of the “facing” direction shall display white arrow on
a black background at an angle of 45 degrees to left or right and the side in the trailing direction shall
display a white disc on a black background. For electrical control or other technology can be used subject
to approval by the Engineer.
Derailer indicators shall be the same size as point indicators. The indication shall be different in that the
indicator shall have a white disc on a black background on the two faces shown on the approach. When
the derail is “on” a horizontal bar is shown on the disc. When “off” a bar inclined at 45 degrees is shown.
The reverse face of the “on” face displays two small white discs horizontally, and to the “off” face two
small white discs inclined at 45 degrees.
Power operated points shall have “short” indicators and hand operated points shall have “tall” indicators.
Existing indicators shall be retained where their condition renders them suitable to be retained, but shall
be modified or relocated by the Contractor as required for short and tall types for power or hand
operation. The rods and cranks where required on new and existing indicators shall be adjusted so that
the minimum force is required to move the mechanism.
New and existing indicators where retained shall be repainted.
Where existing indicators are unsuitable for retention due to condition or difficulty in modification, new
indicators shall be provided by the Contractor.
All indicators whether new or existing shall be electrically lit.
The type of lamp shall be incandescent, single filament, rough service 230V, 20-30 watts, base IEC61, B22
or LED equivalent.
All cables shall be installed via a terminal box.
6.9 Level Crossings
6.9.1 General
The Contractor shall provide all necessary systems and equipment at those crossings indicated on the
signalling plans and in the Schedules in accordance with the requirements specified in the Scope of Works
section of these documents.
Additionally, the Contractor shall provide level crossing control/ indication panels for all manually
controlled level crossings not so equipped such that automatic approach annunciator warning to the
crossing keeper by track circuit is provided.
The general layout of the level crossing barriers, road warning signals and road warning signs shall be as
shown on drawings included in the Drawings.
Level crossing equipment is categorised as follows: -
Class A: Manual
A0 Electrical Full and Half Width Lifting Barrier with CCTV and controlled from Station.
A1 - Electrical Full and Half Width Lifting Barrier
A2 - Mechanical Full and Half Width Lifting Barrier
A3 -Mechanical Full Width Hoisting Barrier
A4 - Sliding Gate (Trolley)
Class B: Automatic
B1 -Automatic Half Width Lifting Barrier
B2 - Open Crossing with Automatic Flashing Light Warning
Class C: No Protection Traffic Sign Only
Existing level crossings are detailed on the Station and Lineside Signalling Plans.
6.9.2 Barrier Machines
Barrier machines shall be fitted with Contacts to prove that the barrier has been fully lowered, or fully
raised, together with appropriate contacts for motor control.
Full-Barriers
Barrier machines for Full-Barrier installations shall be all-electric and operate from 230V AC supplies.
The mechanism shall drive the barriers in both directions - i.e.: Power Up and Power Down.
The power down arrangements shall be capable of conversion to gravity fall by a simple modification in
the field.
When driving down the mechanism shall be capable of being stopped and held at any position between
the vertical and horizontal. It shall also be capable of reversal in mid-stroke when driving in either direction.
Half-Barriers
Barrier machines for Half-Barrier installations shall be electro-hydraulic and operate from 30V DC supplies.
The mechanisms shall be gravity fall.
6.9.3 Barriers
Booms shall be of tubular steel construction.
Booms at manual and CCTV installations shall be counterbalanced so that they can be driven up and
down by the motor.
Booms exceeding 7. 75 m in length shall be articulated so that the maximum vertical height of the Boom
when raised does not exceed 9. 25 m above road/ rail level to ensure adequate clearance from HT
overhead power lines which may be at minimum clearance of 12.25 m above road level.
Each Boom shall carry three pairs of red lights to face the oncoming road traffic of both directions. The
lights shall be equally spaced over the length of the boom but shall be 0.5m clear of the tip. The lamps
shall be 24V 30W SBC. The two outer pairs of lights shall be flashed alternately. The centre pair of lights
shall remain steady.
The Booms shall have alternate panels of white and red retro-reflecting material.
6.9.4 Road Warning Signals
Flashing red signals 1. 0 secs “ on” , 1. 0 secs “ off” shall be provided for warning to the road user of the
closing of the crossing. A minimum of 4 pairs of lights shall be provided at each crossing with 2 pairs facing
in each direction. Flashing shall be controlled electronically.
Additional lights shall be provided as required for side roads.
The lights shall conform with the construction and performance requirements of AAR specifications Part
166.
The lamps shall be 30V single filament 15W Base IEC 61 BA20S
The distance from which it is desirable that the red flashing lights can be seen will vary according to the
speed value of the road. Recommended minimum visibility distances are shown below, but if these cannot
be achieved, consideration should be given to any further measures which may be justified e. g. the
provision of additional advance warning signs, countdown markers etc.
Recommended minimum visibility distances of the primary road traffic light signal:
85 percentile speed of private car Minimum Visibility distance

Up to 55 kph 60 metres
55 and up to 70 kph 90 metres
70 and up to 85 kph 130 metres
85 kph and over. 200 metres
In addition to the flashing red Road Warning Signals, the Contractor shall supply and install two yellow
flashing lights on each main Road Warning Signal Mast. The yellow flashing Warning signals shall have a
revolving reflector which shall cause the yellow aspect to “flash” and shall operate at the same time as
the Red Road Warning Signals. The flashing yellow signal lamps shall be 24V and each pair of lights per
mast shall be connected in parallel. The position of the flashing yellow light on the main Road Warning
Signal Mast is shown in the drawings in the Drawings.
6.9.5 Audible Warning
An audible warning shall be given by either a Bell or a simulated tone from a loud speaker that a train is
approaching.
Two audible warnings shall be provided for each crossing and shall be silenced when the train has passed.
Shall be heavy duty with the following Characteristics:
(a) Tone oscillator frequency : 400 – 1,000 Hz
(b) Power output : 35 Watts
(c) Output impedance with transformer : 4, 8, 16 ohms
(d) Sound volume : 95 dB/1 m
(e) Number of tones : 30 – 180 Times/Minute
(f) With echo (phase shift) : 180 deg.
(g) Power supply : At least 24 V DC
(h) Temperature : 750C
The barrier mechanism, road warning signals and warning bell and associated signs shall be mounted on
a post constructed to the same standard as for a Rail Main Running Signal but without steps. The mast
shall have alternate panels of Yellow retro-reflecting material on a black painted background.
6.9.6 Road Signs and Markers (for all level crossings)
Road warning signs shall be as follows: -
The “Railway Crossing Signs” which shall be in Thai and attached to the Road Warning Signal post.
The “Danger Train Warning” sign which shall be attached to the Road warning signal post.
The “Road Advance Warning” sign and “Count Down Marker” signs which shall be erected 300m, 200m,
and 100m respectively on the approach to the crossing.
Shall be galvanised steel sheet mounted on old rail post.
All signs shall be retro-reflecting.
6.9.7 Flood Lighting

Each level crossing mast shall be provided with a floodlight on a cantilever arm and shall be controlled
automatically by photo-electric switch.
6.9.8 Rail Warning Signs
Rail Advance warning and marker signs shall be provided for all level crossings.
The “Rail Advance Warning” Sign shall be as per drawing included in Volume IV located 1,000 m on
each approach to the crossing.
6.9.9 Level Crossing Huts
Level crossing keeper’s huts shall be complete with the necessary services including electrical power
with fluorescent lighting.
6.9.10 Control Equipment
Control relays and associated equipment including a solid state flashing supply unit may be housed in
an apparatus case adjacent to the crossing.
The solid state flashing supply unit shall be fed via a fuse from the standby battery.
6.9.11 Control Panel for Manned Level Crossing
Wall mounted or free standing control and indication panels shall be provided in the level crossing hut.
The Panels shall be equipped with the following: -
(a) “Lower Barriers” control button for each boom.
(b) “Raise Barriers” control button for each boom.
(c) “Stop Barriers” control button for each boom.
(d) A button to control the operation of the Road Warning flashing lights in Emergency or when the
barriers are inoperative.
(e) “Crossing Closed” button which shall be fitted with a seal.
(f) A non-volatile, non-resettable counter with 4 digits to register each operation of the “crossing
closed’ button.
(g) “Train Passed” button.
(h) An audible alarm device activated when a route is set over the crossing.
(i) An audible approach annunciator device of different tone to the alarm.
(j) Train Approaching indicator lights - indicating Up - or Down train approaching.
(k) A telephone hand set.
(l) Light control switch (control by photo switch).
On a crossing on a double line section the panel shall be additionally equipped with: -
(a) Additional Train approaching indicator lights indicating upon which track the Up or Down train is
approaching.
(b) A “Second Train Approaching” audible warning of different tone.
(c) An “Acknowledge Second Train” push button.
(d) A “Second Train Approaching” indicating light.
(e) An additional “Train Passed” button for the second track.
The control panel shall have a simplified mimic diagram of the crossing road and rail layout. The approach
indicators shall be located in the mimic diagram thus giving the crossing keeper a simple understanding of
the trains approaching the crossing.
The position of all Running Signals which interface with the crossing controls shall be indicated by a symbol
on the mimic diagram.
All other controls and indicators shall be arranged logically on the panel.
6.9.12 Crossing Barrier Trolley
Two emergency barrier trolleys shall be provided at controlled and automatic level crossings for use in
emergencies when the signals have failed.
The trolleys shall be provided with concrete aprons.
To be provided as shown in the drawings and to the pertinent sections of these specifications.
6.9.13 Existing Barrier Machines Type A1, A2 and A3
The following equipment shall be retained at the existing type A1, A2, and A3 level crossings.
• The Boom Barrier Machine
• At type A2 and A3 level crossings. All mechanical operating equipment.
• Flood lighting where specified.
• Level crossing keepers hut where specified.
• In addition, the Contractor shall supply and install all equipment and cabling and controlling
circuitry required to operate each type of level crossing equipment in a safe and satisfactory
manner. The equipment supplied and installed shall include but not be limited to the following:
• Road Warning Signals where specified.
• Rail Warning Signals where specified.
• Level Crossing Keepers hut where specified.
• Control Panels.
• Rail Approach signs where specified.
• Road Warning signs where specified.
• Additional Controls for bi-directional working over the multiple line section.
6.10 Train detection
6.10.1 Track Circuits
6.10.1.1 General
The Contractor shall prepare track insulation/bonding plans for the whole area to be track
circuited.
Bonding plans for station areas shall be at a scale of 500:1 and for plain line between stations at
a scale of 2000:1.
The bonding plans shall show the type of each track circuit, the relative position of track feeds
and relays, the position of all insulated rail joints and all bonding excepting rail head continuity
bonding.
Dead sections shall be avoided if at all possible, but if unavoidable shall not exceed 3 metres.
In general, all main lines of SRT including station through tracks are continuously welded.
Sidings tracks are not welded and the Contractor shall provide all rail continuity bonding
required.
The Contractor shall utilise existing Insulated Rail Joints where these are correctly located for
the new signalling arrangements.
Turnouts shall be series bonded. Typical bonding arrangements are included in the Drawings.
Wherever practicable insulated rail joints within turnouts shall be in the turnout rail rather than
the main line rail.
The location of insulated rail joints for track circuit limits between points track circuits and the
adjacent track circuit on converging tracks shall ensure that: -
• No vehicle shall be foul unless the points track circuit is occupied, and
• There shall be no significant reduction in train standing room on the adjacent track.
In general, the track circuit limit at clearance point shall be located not less than 3.5 metres
from fouling point.
6.10.1.2 Not used
6.10.1.3 Equipment Immunity
Track circuits shall be D.C. Steady current Double Rail only and all track feed and track relay equipments
shall be inherently immune to interference from 50Hz A.C. currents.
6.10.1.4 D.C Track Circuits
All D.C. track circuits shall be double rail.
The D.C. track circuit equipment shall be identical and shall be capable of operating the lengths of track
circuit shown on the signalling plans with a minimum ballast resistance of 2 ohms per kilometre.
The track circuit shall be of the “low voltage” type with typically between one and two volts across the
relay.
Each track circuit shall be individually fed by a separate feed unit.
The D.C. track feed set shall comply with the B.R.B. specification No. 867 for A.C. immune D.C. track circuit using
a track relay complying to B.R.B. Specification No. 966.
Track circuit rail connections shall be terminated on disconnection terminals for testing purposes.
The track relay shall in all cases be released by an 0. 5ohm train shunt applied at any point within the
track circuit with a minimum ballast resistance of 2 ohms per kilometre. The track circuit system shall be
designed to ensure that there shall be no reduction of train shunt to less than 0. 5 ohm due to the
presence of an alternating current induced from interfering sources.
The polarity of adjacent D.C. track circuits shall be staggered wherever possible. Where this is not possible
and the same polarity across a rail joint cannot be avoided this will only be permitted at Feed- Feed
locations.
Lightning protection in the form of a 3 pole gas discharge tubes shall be installed across the ends of the
track connections in the location and connected to the track side of the disconnection links, or where
track disconnection boxes are provided, in the track disconnection box. The arrestor shall conduct at
250/300v.
Track circuits shown on the Signalling plans are for operational purposes. Any additional track circuits
required for technical reasons shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
6.10.1.5 A.C. Jointless Track Circuits
Not required
6.10.1.6 Insulated Rail Joints
At road level crossings the insulated rail joint shall be a minimum of 8m from the edge of the carriageway.
PART I: DESCRIPTION
1. SCOPE
This Section specifies the provision and testing of Standard Joints and Glued Insulated Joints.
Joint components shall be ready made for assembly at the depot site prior to installation.
Work Includes: Pre-qualification and testing of crews.
2. DEFINITIONS
" Standard Glued Joint" - A fishplate joint that uses a fast setting epoxy resin compound as the
bonding adhesive.
" Glued Insulated Joint" - A glued joint with electrical isolation provided at specific locations for
railway signalling.
“Mechanical Insulated Joint” – An insulated joint without glue used under temporary conditions
only. To be replaced by a permanent joint within 48 hours.
3. QUALITY ASSURANCE
3.1 The Contractor shall implement the Quality assurance process throughout the project. The
Contractor shall maintain adequate records in accordance with the requirements of his quality
3.2 Glued Joint systems shall have an extensive, proven, in- service history of at least 5 years in at
least five railway systems.
3.3 Installation teams shall be pre- qualified in accordance with the requirements of the tests
specified herein.
(a) Each crew and its foreman shall be qualified for installing glued joints by testing one
sample of each type of glued joint in accordance with the longitudinal compression test
specified hereof.
(b) Failure of a test sample disqualifies the responsible foreman for permanent installation
work.
3.4 Tolerances
(a) Dimensional tolerances shall not exceed the tolerances for each product specified in this
Section or in the Drawings of SRT’s Standards.
(b) Where no tolerances are stated the accepted tolerances shall be those of normal
commercial standards for the product.
4. SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in accordance with SECTION 13- DOCUMENTATION
for approval the following:
(a) Name, address and evidence of each manufacturer's product experience together with
Manufacturer's product data and technical specification. Material shall include information on
procedure for "breaking" a bonded joint.
(b) Shop drawings and product data for both types of joint.
(c) From each Manufacturer a Certificate of Compliance with the requirements of this
specification.
(d) Name, address and experience of an independent Inspection Agency engaged by the
Contractor to conduct the tests required by the specifications hereof.
(e) Test results for glued insulated joints and standard joints.
(f) Crew qualification test results.
5.1 Delivery
(a) Packaged products shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original unopened packaging
5.2 Storage
(a) Products shall be stored off the ground with packages under cover and out of direct
sunlight.
(b) Loose materials shall be carefully stored to prevent segregation and be kept free of
contamination from earth and other foreign contaminants.
5.3 Handling
(a) All packages shall be handled in such a manner as to prevent damage to the containers
and contents.
PART II: PRODUCTS
1. Joint Criteria
Minimum criteria applicable to IRJ’s shall be as follows:-
- Tensile strength not lower than 98,000 PSI
- Bending strength not lower than 98,000 PSI
- Compressive strength not lower than 90,000 PSI
- Axle Load not lower than 20 Tons

- Bending / Breaking force not lower than 250 KN
- Elongation not lower than 20 %
- Bolts High Tensile strength
2. Joint Requirements
The Contractor shall arrange any cutting of the rail and provision of all new insulated rail joints
that are required.
2.1. The preferred method for assembling glued joints shall be at the Site Depot, where the joint shall
be installed between two lengths of 100lb rail at least 4.5m each, and after curing installation at
site by welding.
All joints in the main line and in turn-outs shall be depot made glued joints of a type able to
withstand the high tension and compression stresses inherent in continuously welded track and
shall be subject to the specific approval of the Engineer.
Insulated rail joints within non welded track such as station tracks and sidings may be of the
non-glued type, but must in any case utilise steel bar fishplates within the construction to
provide the required strength and urability. Insulated rail joints shall not be installed between
rail of different section.
2.2. Joints may be installed at site only under individually approved circumstances by the Engineer.
2.3. Glued Insulated Joints for track circuits shall be provided at locations specified in SECTION 2 -
SCOPE OF WORKS
2.4. Standard Joints shall be provided in turnouts for joining the turnout components, but permit
components to be changed by "breaking" the bond.
2.5. The design of joints must permit the epoxy glue to flow into the bolt hole and around the
insulating ferule to firmly secure the bolt and ferrule in the holes in the rail and fishplate.
2.6. A set of ready-made parts for assembly for one joint shall include:
- 2 No. Rolled steel joint bars (fish-plates) purpose made to accommodate the rail fastening
system selected;
- 4 or 6 No. Non-shouldered multiple groove locking (MGL) pins with standard collars; or Tension
Control Bolts (TCBs) Grade S10T;
- 2 component epoxy resin glue compound; and additionally for insulated joints:
- 4 or 6 No. Insulating ferrules
- 1 No. Insulating end post;
- 2 No. Glass fibre epoxy resin coated insulating medium.
3. Glued Insulated and Standard Joints
3.1. Fishplates shall be 4 or 6 hole type manufactured from UIC Code 864-4 quenched and tempered
carbon steel. Each fishplate shall be branded with stamped characters on the exposed face of
the bar. The characters shall read SRT BS 100A or SRT BS 80A as appropriate. The fishplates shall
be provided with specially prepared rail fastening cut-outs.
3.2. Glued Joint Adhesive - The Contractor shall demonstrate that the adhesive to be used for
fabrication of the Glued Standard Joint and the Glued Insulated Joint has a proven life in service
in excess of 20 years. The adhesive shall also have properties such that the joints will satisfy the
requirements of the tests described in Clause 3 hereof.
3.3. High strength bolts, either threaded or pin type, shall comply with the requirements of BS 4604.
3.4. Washers shall comply with the requirements of BS 1802.
3.5. Insulating material shall be high pressure, laminated design, impervious to oil, grease, and water,
and shall pass the electrical resistance test specified in Clause 3 hereof.
4. Joint Qualification Tests
4.1. In lieu of qualification testing the Contractor may submit certification by an independent testing
laboratory that the joints have passed the tests specified in this Section or equivalent tests.
4.2. Test sequences
(a) Testing shall not commence until the Engineer has approved products, shop drawings and
installation procedures.
(b) Assemble two each of joint test specimens complete, in accordance with Manufacturer's
instructions, using two pieces each of BS 100A and BS 80A rail, one piece 600mm long, the
other 1,000mm long.
(c) Test specimens shall first be subject to the electrical resistance test (insulated joint only)
followed by the longitudinal compression test on one specimen and the stroke rolling load
test on the other.
4.3. Test Results
(a) The electrical resistance test as described in Part III shall be used. The joint shall pass the
test.
(b) Stroke Rolling Load Test.
(i) The joint shall show no evidence of failure by bending of the joint after 2,000,000 cycles.
(ii) Deflection over the joint shall be equal or less than 1.65mm.
(c) Joint compression test
(i) No indication of slippage of rail joint before total test load reaches 250,000 kilograms.
(ii) Not more than 3mm of any movement in the joint.
(iii) Not more than 0.8mm of differential movement between the original position of
fishplates and rail and the final position after the test load has been released.
(d) The joint shall withstand, without showing any slippage or cracking and without loss of
insulation, a 100 tonne tensile load.
PART III: EXECUTION

1. Assembly
Rail joints shall be end hardened in accordance with the Procedure submitted and approved by
the Engineer.
1.1. Holes for bolts shall be drilled through in one operation using a jig. The fishplates shall not be used
as a jig. Holes shall not be formed by using high speed drills.
(a) Holes shall be clean without burrs on either side, accurate in pitch, and exactly in position and
dimensions required.
(b) Size and position of holes shall be checked by means of gauges.
(c) Holes shall be reamed and chamfered. Broaching is not acceptable.
(d) Holes shall be cold expanded.
(e) Remove all rail drillings from site.
1.2. Preparation
(a) Joints shall be prepared in the Site Depot or in a factory.
(b) End-harden rail ends as specified in the approved Procedure.
(c) Calibrate bolt or pin-tightening equipment.
(d) During the assembly a device capable of applying a compressive end load of 10kN to the joint
is required.
(e) The joint shall be supported on a suitable support and brought to rough line and level. The
compression device shall be placed in position, with all other components close to hand,
ready for assembly.
(f) The rails shall be sand or grit blasted for at least 480mm from the end of to be joined for 6-
hole joints or 270mm for 4-hole joints. The areas to be treated are the end face, the fishing
surfaces and the web. Remove all rail brands and markings that are located under the fishplate
area as required by joint manufacturer.
(g) Not more than one hour before assembling the joint, the inside face and fishing surfaces of
the fishplates and inside of the fishbolt holes shall be sand or grit blasted.
1.3. Assembly
(a) Joints shall be assembled by the qualified installation crew under the supervision of the
qualified foreman.
(b) The rail end faces shall be coated with adhesive.
(c) The rails shall be brought together, trapping the end-post in between, to a fine line and level
using a 1m straight edge, to meet the tolerances.
(d) The rail web, fishing surfaces and bolt holes shall be coated liberally with adhesive, avoiding
air bubbles.
(e) The insulating liners shall be offered up to the rails ensuring alignment of the bolt holes.
(f) Both the inside and outside of the bushes shall be coated with adhesive and inserted into the
fishplate bolt holes.
(g) The rail side of the fishplates, including the fishing surfaces, shall be coated liberally with
adhesive, avoiding air bubbles.
(h) First a steel washer and then an insulating washer shall be placed on the fasteners to be used,
ensuring that the chamfered side of the washer is against the head of the fastener.
(i) The fishplates shall be offered up to the rails, ensuring alignment of the fish boltholes. Some
fasteners may be placed in the first fishplate to be offered up to aid alignment.
(j) The remaining fasteners shall be inserted.
(k) An insulating washer and then a steel washer shall be placed on the protruding ends of the
fasteners.
(l) The protective covering shall be removed from the fasteners and the collars or nuts placed
on them.
(m) An axial compression of 10kN shall be applied to the joint.
(n) With the fasteners numbered 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 as appropriate from one end, they shall be
tightened in the sequence 3-4-5-2-1-6 or 2-3-4-1 as appropriate.
(o) Excessive adhesive shall be scraped away, especially from the rail fastening cut-outs.
(p) The compression device shall be released and removed.
(q) The joint shall not be moved for 24 hours.
(r) After 24 hours any adhesive or portion of the end-post that protrudes above the rail head
shall be ground or filed flush.
2. Electrical Resistance Tests
2.1. An insulation/resistance meter operating at 500VDC shall be used. Its probes or clips shall be clean,
free of grease or any other insulating materials. The point of contact of the clip shall be clean and
free from grease, rust and any other insulating material.
2.2. Test Sequence
(a) The clean dry joint shall be supported on dry, insulating materials.
(b) Both probes shall be attached to the left hand rail; zero ohms shall be indicated.
(c) A probe shall be attached to the left hand rail and contact made with:
(i) the near side fishplate
(ii) the far side fishplate
(iii) not less than 10-kilo ohms shall be indicated in both cases.
(d) Test (c) repeated for the right hand rail, with not less than 10-kilo ohms indicated.
(e) One probe shall be attached to the left hand rail and the other probe to the right hand rail.
Not less than 10-kilo ohms shall be indicated.
(f) Both probes shall be attached to the right hand rail; zero ohms shall be indicated.
(g) A probe shall be attached to the near side fishplate and contact made with each pin or bolt
in turn. Not less than 10-kilo ohms shall be indicated.
(h) A probe shall be attached to the far side fishplate and contact made with each pin or bolt in
turn. Not less than 10 kilo ohms shall be indicated.
3. Alignment Check
After curing, the vertical and lateral alignment of all joints shall be checked using a 1-metre straight
edge centred at the joint centre. Joints shall be rejected unless:
The horizontal distance between the edge of the railhead and the centre of the straight edge does
not exceed 0. 5mm, and the vertical distance between the running surface and the centre of the
straight edge does not exceed 0.5mm.
Joints shall not be bend-straightened.
Where joints are assembled pre- curved, the Contractor shall be responsible for the correct
horizontal offset at the centre of the joint.
4. Performance Test
At the end of the Defects Liability Period, all joints in that Section shall be visually inspected. The
joints shall be fully bonded and uncracked. A joint shall be considered defective if there is any
evidence of movement between fishplate and rail.
Insulated joints shall additionally be given an electrical test identical to that made at the time of
installation. If the test result is inferior to that at the time of installation, the joint shall be considered
defective.
All defective joints shall be replaced at no cost to the Employer, and shall be subject to a further
12 months Defects Liability period.
5. Guarantee
5.1. The Contractor shall guarantee the joints against all defects attributable to faulty manufacture,
workmanship and quality of material requiring withdrawal from service until the two years after the
issue of the Taking-Over Certificate. The record of joint replacement by the SRT shall be accepted
by the Contractor in this connection.
5.2. Joints that fail in service before the expiration of the Defects Liability Period shall be replaced free
of charge by the Contractor. The cost of installing replacement joints shall be borne by the
Contractor. The defective joints withdrawn from service shall be handed over at site to the
Contractor for his disposal off railway property.
5.3. The Contractor shall make good the cost of such replacement within 60 days of advice of defects,
during which period, the Contractor shall inspect the joints, make his observations and carry out
At road level crossings the insulated rail joint shall be a minimum of 8m from the edge of the
carriageway.
6.10.1.7 Track Insulation
The Contractor shall provide the insulations necessary for correct track circuit operation.
The Contractor shall ensure the overall arrangements and the insulating material provided will withstand
the requirements of extended service life without replacement under actual conditions of track
maintenance and traffic frequency of 150 trains daily.
The Contractor shall provide details of his proposals.

Wherever any non insulated gauge tie bars or stretcher bars exist in areas to be track circuited, the
Contractor shall provide the necessary insulating arrangements.
6.10.1.8 Track Circuit Connections and Bonding
The track feed and relay end cable connections to the rail shall be made by a duplicated 4mm diameter
7/19g steel wire rope, blue tint P.V.C. coated, secured at the and utilizing the "Y" connector. The wire
rope shall be protected by orange P.V.C. flexible conduit. The following is an acceptable alternative steel
wire cable. Bare galvanised steel wire cable 4 mm diameter 7/19g, PVC sheathed/insulated. Sheath shall
be 12.2 mm (nominal) OD ie radial thickness 3.85 mm average, 3.47 mm minimum. PVC shall be coloured
orange with UVC stabiliser additive.
The “Y” connector shall be a proprietary product having an extensive, proven, in service history of at least
5 years in at least five systems. The “ Y” connector shall be formed by a bare galvanised stranded steel
wire cable, not less than 4mm diameter 7/19g, not less than 100 mm in length, attached to the inner web
of the rail on the neutral axis by exothermic weld or pinbrazing.
Where pinbrazing methods are utilised for rail connections, the apparatus employed shall embody
automatic means to ensure that specified pinbrazing temperature is achieved prior to application of the
brazing process. This feature shall be tested at regular intervals and shall be demonstrated at the request
of the Engineer.
At the track disconnection box or location end, the wire rope shall be terminated by insulated crimp lug.
Where the trackside equipment location is directly opposite the rail connecting point and is within 7 m of
the running face of the track concerned the rail connections may be run directly into disconnection
terminals at the location. Where these conditions cannot be met, a track disconnection box shall be
provided adjacent to the rail connections. In this instance cable to the feed or relay location shall be via
buried signalling cable.
Rail Connections
The point in the ballast where the track tails emerge shall be arranged to be on the track centre line
approximately 100 mm away from the sleeper, from a rigid gas pipe conduit not less than 20 mm in
diameter.
Each track tail shall be fixed to the top surface of wooden sleepers by at least two appropriate sized
galvanised conduit clips secured by galvanised clout headed nails approximately 30 mm long.
For securing of cables to concrete sleepers the same basic method shall be used, 5 mm threaded studs
inserted into the sleeper with two for each tail to which the galvanised conduit clips shall be secured with
steel 5 mm nuts.
The means of securing studs and repairs of pitting shall be approved by the Engineer.
The gas pipe conduit shall consist of two 90° bends, one at each end of the straight and vertical length of
the conduit, long enough to bury the cable 400 mm below underside of sleepers.
Both ends of the conduit shall be plugged and sealed against ingress of water, insects, etc.
The connections shall be made to the inner web of the rail. The area of the rail to which the stud is to
be attached shall be pre heated.
Studs shall not be attached to the rail in the same bay as a rail joint weld or within 150mm of another
Bond Weld.
A faulty weld or brazing shall not be removed by chiseling or grinding but shall be abandoned and another
weld or brazing made not less than 150mm from the faulty weld.
Welding / Brazing shall be carried out by skilled operators, each of whom shall be examined, passed
proficient and issued with a certificate of competency by the Engineer before being allowed to carry out
work on the running line.
Track tails from trackside case to rail shall be protected by an orange PVC flexible conduit.
The total loop resistance of the rail connection, including wire rope and any associated cable, shall not
exceed one ohm. Where the length of the connection is such that one ohm is likely to be exceeded, the
wire rope shall be terminated in a track disconnection box and the cable from the track disconnection
box to the feed point shall be copper cable sized to contain the resistance to within the specified figure.
6.10.1.9 Disconnection Boxes
Track disconnection boxes shall be cast aluminium boxes fully weather, dust and corrosion proof.
They shall be provided with lockable or bolt down covers.
The box shall be mounted on a 50mm diameter heavy gauge galvanised steel pipe 0. 7m long and a
welded base plate. A minimum distance of two metres (2m) from the running rail.
The box shall be labelled to show track circuit identity and feed or relay end.
The underground track to location connecting cable shall rise and enter the box through the pipe
The Rail connecting cables shall leave the box through the bottom and run underground to the track.
The exit holes shall be fitted with grommets to render them waterproof.
The box shall be fitted with two pairs of stud terminals with captive disconnection links between the
underground cable and rail connecting cables.
Where disconnection boxes are provided on the outside of the double or triple track a ballast retention
box shall be provided to prevent ballast encroaching on the disconnection box.
The Contractor shall provide drawings of his proposed ballast retention box for SRT approval.
6.10.1.10 Track Circuit Cable - Labelling.
A permanent label shall be fixed to the cable end. The label shall show the track circuit number,
whether it is the feed or relay end and the polarity.
6.10.1.11 Rail Continuity Bonding
Where continuity bonding is required at mechanical joints, rail bonding shall be provided by the
Contractor for each joint.
6.10.1.12 Bonding in Points, Turnouts and Crossings

Bonding of switches and frogs etc. shall be carried out by the same method and with the same
materials that are employed for Rail Continuity Bonding.
6.10.1.13 Parallel and Series Bonding
It is preferred that wherever possible and economical series as opposed to parallel bonding shall be
employed. Crossovers connecting tracks with centres of 7.0m or greater shall be series bonded. Typical
bonding arrangements are included in The Drawings.
Bonds shall be a proprietary product having an extensive, proven, in service history of at least 5 years in
at least five railway systems. The bond wire shall be formed by a bare galvanised stranded steel wire
cable, not less than 4 mm diameter 7/19g, attached to the rail be exothermic weld or pin brazing.
All bonds shall be duplicated, with length appropriate to the application for bonding across mechanical
rail joints, or between switches and frogs in turnouts etc.
Bonds less than 10 m in length may be run over the entire length above ground in the P.V.C. insulated
wire rope, protected by orange P.V.C. flexible conduit, providing they can be supported over the entire
length on the sleepers and shall be secured to each sleeper. The Engineer may exercise his discretion
and permit bonds exceeding 10m length to be installed in this fashion, but each instance will be subject
to the specific approval of the Engineer.
Bonds greater than 10m in length shall be installed in 2 core buried signalling cable in accordance with
this specification and the cable shall be run between intermediate track disconnection boxes. The rail
connections between the disconnection boxes and the rails shall be duplicated 4mm P. V. C. insulated
wire rope protected by orange P.V.C. flexible conduit and secured by Y connector.
6.10.2 Axle Counter
Axle Counters or Digital Axle Counting System shall be of a type which are well established within the
profession. They shall be well proven, tried and tested, and have a substantial successful service history
on other recognized major passenger railways worldwide, including service in locations with a similar
climate to Thailand.
Digital Axle Counting device shall have high level of reliability to ensure non-failure operation of controlled
section meeting SRT reliability requirement.
Track clear indication shall only be given when IN count and OUT count are equal and equipment is
functioning all right. This implies that until all axles that enter a section are completely counted out, the
section concerned shall no show as clear.
Adopted system of defining occupancy and vacancy of switch section, track sections, arrival- departure
tracks and open line section using Digital Axle Counting System shall have capacity to allow the
performance of shunting operation upon signals and on restrictive signal aspects with full monitoring of
actual state of sections and tracks.
Logic of the section count system shall be based on the principle of traffic direction recognition relative
to sensors detecting borders of a separate section. Rail sensors and count system shall be reversible.
The Wheel Detection Equipment shall require little maintenance.
The central evaluator and wheel detection equipment shall be provided with testing, measuring and
adjusting facilities for indicating proper functioning of equipment and for facility of maintenance.
The wheel detection equipment shall withstand the effect of lightning and surges incorporating lightning
and surge protection.
The equipment shall conform the Safety Integrity Level 4 (SIL4) as per CENELEC Standard or comparable
standards. The bidder shall submit certificate to this effect.
The equipment shall be capable of working in non-air-conditioned humid and hot/cold climate.
Occurrence of any failure or error of operation, in the axle counter system, component or parts must not
lead to any hazards but shall solely result in transition to distinguished safe state.
Full and complete technical and operational information and details shall be provided for the proposed
equipment.
6.11 Relays and Relay Racks
6.11.1 Relays
Unless otherwise specified, where relays are employed in vital safety circuits, such relays shall be safety
miniature plug-in type in accordance with British Railways Board specifications in the range 930 series.
Time delayed pick-up units shall be fully solid state, developed exclusively for railway signalling purposes
and approved for such use by a major railway.
They shall be fully fail safe and fully stabilised against voltage and temperature variation and the maximum
timing variation shall be guaranteed not to exceed + / - 5% of the set value for the worst conditions of
possible voltage and temperature variation.
The unit shall be housed in a miniature plug- in relay case to the BRB specification 930 series and the
output relay shall comply in all essential respects with the BRB specification 930 series.
In the case of Level Crossing sites, other types of vital relays may be employed in Level Crossing equipment
housings for functions associated with operation of booms, lights etc. subject to type approval of such
relays by the Engineer.
Relays used exclusively in non- vital circuits may be to an alternative and less stringent specification and
may be sub- miniature relays. Any such relays proposed shall be required to meet the following criteria
and shall be subject to the specific approval of the Engineer.
The relay shall be plug-in type. It shall have a sturdy cover of transparent plastic. It shall have bifurcated,
gold- flashed contacts for high reliability and the service life shall be a minimum of 2,000,000 operations.
An integral L.E.D. within the relay shall indicate energy applied to the relay coil.
The insulation of the relay shall withstand a test voltage for one minute equal to 2,000V RMS at 50Hz.
The relay base shall be vertically mounted on the rack and the relay shall be secured by a retaining clip.
6.11.2 Relay Racks
Relay racks shall be of metal construction and suitable to house all of the associated relays and
equipment.
The racks shall not exceed 2.0 metres in overall height.
The equipment shall be mounted on the rack with major related groups of equipment assembled together.
All equipment shall be mounted in positions that facilitate access for regular maintenance, inspection,
testing, or replacement.
Direct access to the back of the racks for rear-wired equipment such as plug-in relays is required.
The racks and wire ways shall be constructed so that the Treeing of wires shall be unnecessary or is kept
to a minimum.
In general, horizontal wireways shall be open type, vertical wire ways may be covered with readily
detachable covers.
No part of any equipment shall be closer than 300mm to the floor nor shall any relays be placed above
1600mm.
6.11.3 Wireways
All wire ways shall have adequate cross-sectional area, and in general wiring must not occupy more than
50% of the capacity of the wire way.
All wire ways, corners or apertures in, round or through which wires and cables pass shall be protected by
suitable edging strip or grommets to prevent damage to the wiring both during installation and for the
service life of the installation. All fixings such as nuts and bolt which secure wire ways shall make use of
dome nuts and shall be assembled with the dome nut internal to the tray.
6.11.4 Future Expansion
The racks shall have a minimum of 25% free space for future expansion - this shall be 25% of the total
rack capacity. Base on the recognised international standard, the design shall clearly demonstrate this free
space by calculations and illustrations.
6.11.5 Pre-Wiring
It is preferred that the racks are designed such that they are completely fitted out, factory pre- wired and
pre- tested prior to delivery to site and shall thus require only external cabling and power supply
connections to be made. Where this approach is adapted it will not excuse the complete re-testing of the
rack after site installation as required by the final testing procedures.
Where several racks may be required for one interlocking and it is not convenient to carry out the complete
wiring at the factory, the pre- wiring of each rack may be undertaken to intermediate pre- wiring terminal,
with inter-rack wiring and cabling completed at site. The pre-wring terminals shall be of the same standard
as all other terminals used for vital circuits but shall not have disconnection facility. The type of pre-wiring
terminal shall be subject to the specific approval of the Engineer.
6.11.6 Cable Rack

A separate wall mounted rack shall be provided for the termination of external cabling.
The rack shall be of metal construction and the height shall not exceed 2. 0 metres. Wire ways shall be
provided for all “internal” wiring and shall conform to the requirements outlined above.
The cable rack shall have 25% of its total capacity left free for future expansion.
The external cable termination rack shall be provided with means for the external cable to enter from
overhead or underneath and of securing the cables firmly to the rack by the outer sheath to positively
ensure that the weight of the cable does not apply stress to the conductors or their terminations.
6.11.7 Fuses and Terminals
All fuse holders and control cable terminal blocks used in vital circuits shall be “Insulation Displacement
Connection” or tension clamp type. The terminal blocks shall also be provided with switch connection,
disconnect link bar and heavy duty switch by blade according to standard IEC 947-7-1 and VDE 0611
(Vibration test) or equivalent standard.
The type of terminal proposed shall be agreed by the Engineer.
Terminal boards provided for CTs and pilots wiring shall preferably be screw clamp with independent
spring load insertion under each wire clamp type terminal blocks. Conforming to ESI standard 12-1 (April
1970 or later) is acceptable. Straight connector crimped cable hook bent lugs shall be used.
Circuit fuses shall be the non rewireable indicating cartridge type, except that in S&T equipment rooms
(relay rooms) indicating "communications" type fuses shall be used for internal circuits.
The circuit design shall pay due regard to minimise the number of circuits emanating from one fuse. In
general, individual circuits, or a common group of circuits for the individual function, shall commence from
separate fuses.
All line circuits shall be individually fused.
The individual circuit fuse shall be 4A except where a higher rating is required by the equipment.
Adequate fuse discrimination shall be provided and in general power distribution circuit breakers shall be
minimum 15 amp.
Prewiring terminals and return busbars shall be the non-disconnect terminal type. All cable terminals shall
be the disconnect type, except terminals for though jointing of cables which shall be the non-disconnect
type.
Terminals in external equipment shall be of spring loaded type except for track mounted equipment such
as points equipment, which shall be spring loaded terminal.
6.11.8 Terminations
All stranded wires and cable conductors shall be terminated by an approved pre-insulated crimp lug. The
connections to all stud type terminals shall use ring grip crimp lugs as opposed to open spade type crimp
lugs. Crimp connectors must grip the insulation and must be applied by the correct ratchet type tool
which shall be tested daily when in use. Soldered connections shall not be used.
Single strand conductors shall be terminated by a preformed eyelet.

Where clamp type terminals are used it is preferred that only one wire is terminated at each termination
point, however a maximum of two wires will be permitted to be terminated subject to the specific
approval by the Engineer of the method of termination.
The type of termination used for non vital wiring shall be subject to the review by the Engineer without
Objection
6.12 Wiring and Cabling
6.12.1 Internal Wiring
Wiring for vital interlocking circuits shall be PVC insulated 9/0.3mm single tinned annealed copper
conductor 1000v grade.
For circuits requiring higher current capacity, e. g. : Points operating or Level crossing warning lights wire
shall be PVC insulated single tinned annealed copper conductor 1000v grade stranded conductor
23/00.76mm or 40/00.76mm conductor according to the load.
Internal power, supply bus, or battery supply wiring shall be minimum 7/0.85mm PVC insulated, 0.6/1kv
grade and shall be coloured blue and comply with TIS Specification for underground cables.
The type of wire used for non-vital internal wiring shall be proposed by the Contractor and shall be subject
to the review of the Engineer without Objection.
Non-vital wiring within vital relay racks shall be double insulated.
6.12.2 External Cabling
External cabling shall be carried out in multicore cable, all cables shall have the same conductor size,
which shall be of a minimum cross section area of 1.5mm squared except track circuit feed and relay
cables which shall have minimum conductor size 2.5 mm squared.
Each core in multicore cables shall be individually numbered or otherwise identified.
Preferred number of cores are:
2c, 4c, 6c, 8c, 10c, 12c, 14c, 15c, 19c, 20c, 21c, 27c, 30c, 32c, 36c, 37c, 40c, 42c, 48c, 56c.
Maximum permitted number of cores is 56.
To reduce the quantity of cable types held in store the Contractors design for the whole system shall
allow for no more than 8 cores make ups for each core size. The Contractor shall consider the use of 2
core and 56 cores make ups and any 6 others cores make ups for both signal and power cables.
For identification purposes all signalling and power cables shall have the outer sheath embossed at
intervals with the type of cable i.e. “2c Power” “56c”.
The conductor size and resistance shall be such that it is possible to operate two signalling vital relays in
parallel at a distance of two kilometres without the use of diode selection.
Track circuit Feed and Relay circuits, including mains power supply to Track Feed/Relay equipment’s shall
not be distributed via cores in Signalling Control circuit cables. Individual Feed and Relay end circuits shall
each be provided with separate cables, and power supplies shall be derived directly from Power Feeders.
6.12.3 Spare Conductors
All main multicore cable routes, between each termination point, shall have spare conductors of a
minimum of 20% of the working conductors. Each cable within the route shall have a minimum of 2 spare
conductors. Spare conductors shall be terminated at both ends.
All local multicore (or tail) cables feeding:
Signals of all types.
Points equipment all types.
Level crossing equipment of all types.
Shall have a minimum of 1 spare conductor or 10% of the working conductors whichever is the greater.
Spare conductors shall be terminated at the location or S&T equipment room (relay room), and wherever
practicable in the equipment. Where spare conductors are not terminated in the equipment they shall
be neatly coiled, labelled, and secured.
When calculating spare conductors, the % of the working conductors shall be rounded up to next whole
number.
6.12.4 Point Machine Cables
The power supply to a point machine may be from a common point feeder supplying upto a maximum
of 4 (Four) machines.
Power supply cables for point machines shall be standardised for size and length based on the
maximum load of the point machine.
(i) Up to and including 600m : Min. 6 mm2
(ii) Over 600m and under 800m : Min. 8 mm2
(iii) 800 m and over : Min. 10 mm2
The distances are the "map" distances and the increase for route deviation and for 10% voltage drop has
been included in the given core size.
6.12.5 Cable Termination
All cables shall be terminated at disconnect type terminals, except through cables which are terminated
for jointing purposes only.
The disconnection device shall be in the form of either a captive link or removable pin which in either
case shall make it impossible to accidentally or deliberately bridge across adjoining terminals.
All multicore cables shall be terminated in numerical order of cores commencing with the lowest core
number on the lowest termination number.
Normally each cable shall be terminated at its own independent disconnect terminals.
Where cables are terminated for jointing purposes only, the terminal shall be a through terminal without
disconnection facility.
All terminations shall be made to leave sufficient length of wire for a minimum of two reterminations in
the event of a wire broken at the point of connection, and to permit access for inspection of apparatus.
6.12.6 Cable and Wire Installation
All wires must be continuous without splices between terminations.
There shall not be more than two wires terminated on any one terminal.
All vital circuit wiring must be kept free of intentional or accidental paths to earth.
All apertures through which wiring or cabling passes shall be suitably protected by grommets or other
suitable protection.
All corners over which wiring or cabling passes shall be suitably radiused, chamfered or protected to
prevent chaffing of the wires and cabling.
Wire and cable entry to housings and signal apparatus shall be through bushings, glands, or specially
formed entrances and shall be sealed to prevent ingress of moisture, rodents and insects.
The seal shall be readily visible and removable for additions or alterations.
The ends of all cables shall be firmly clamped or otherwise secured to the approval of the Engineer, to
prevent intentional or accidental stress being placed on individual conductors.
6.12.7 Cable Jointing
The multicore cable shall be installed between terminating points without any jointing, unless otherwise
specified herein.
Should the Contractor consider in any particular case that a joint is justified by special circumstances he
will obtain the prior approval of the Engineer. Not more than one such joint shall be installed in any one
length of cable.
No intermediate jointing shall be allowed for any tail cable. A certified log of all joints shall be provided
to the Engineer, which shall include particulars of the cable, location, depth, date satisfactorily tested and
name of jointer.
The type of all joints shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall in any case be of the type
whereby conductors are jointed by an insulated crimp window type splice connector, and the whole joint
is fully encapsulated and moisture proof.
6.13 Power Supplies
6.13.1 General
All power supplies required for the equipment for the signalling and telecommunication systems, shall be
supplied and installed by the Contractor except Standby Generator which will be provided by Civil Contractor.
The power supplies shall include all of the equipment and systems between the point where the supply
is delivered from the Electricity supply authority up to the point at which it is required for equipment
installed under this contract.
The whole of the power supply system shall have at least 20% of its capacity as spare to allow future
expansion.
The Contractor shall provide mains isolating transformers, U.P.S standby supply (by Civil Contractor), changeover
switches, switching and distribution boards, battery and charger sets, signalling transformer and transformer
rectifiers and all associated components and fittings.
6.13.2 Standby Alternators
The Contractor shall supply and install all standby alternators complete with automatic control system in
accordance with the following.
The normal supply shall be 230 volts single phase 50Hz. As a standby a diesel alternator set shall be
provided with automatic changeover switching.
The standby supply shall include the Diesel alternator set, automatic start and control unit, mains
changeover contractors, battery charger and starting battery, exhaust system, fuel system.
6.13.3 Control Panel
The control panel shall be provided with a three- positions switch for: " Manual Start" , " Automatic Start" ,
and "Off".
With the switch in the " Manual Start" and " Off" positions the " Standby Not Available" indicator shall be
indicated at the Local Workstation VDU.
With the switch in the "Off" position starting of the engine manually or automatically shall be precluded.
With the switch in the " Automatic" position, the operation of the Alternator Set shall be fully automatic
incorporating automatic starting, running and shut down.
All circuitry for the automatic control operations shall be supplied with power from the 12V motor starting
battery which shall be float charged from the normal or standby mains supply.
The Automatic Start sequence shall commence when the normal mains supply has failed or has dropped
by more than 10% of normal voltage.
Three independent attempts shall be made to start the diesel each approx. 10 seconds duration at approx.
15 second intervals.
Failure to Start shall result in a lock out which shall prevent any further automatic, manual or hand
cranked starts until operation of a manual reset button.
The lock out shall be indicated on the alternator control panel, and shall cause the " Standby NOT
Available" indication to be displayed at the Local Workstation VDU.
Automatic Running shall continue and the Diesel Alternator shall connect itself to the load via a
contactor, which is mechanically and electrically interlocked with the mains supply contactor, when the
alternator terminal voltage has risen to 230 volts and the frequency has stabilised to within 10% of
nominal.
The following conditions shall be continuously monitored:
Engine Lubricating Oil Pressure.
Engine Operating Temperature.
Alternator Output Load (overload not tripped).
Any of these three conditions not being satisfied shall cause the Diesel Alternator to shut down and lock
out; with an appropriate warning indication on the alternator control panel.
The " Standby Not Available" indication and the “ Fuel low” indication shall be displayed at the Local
Workstation VDU. The lock out shall prevent any further attempt to start, automatically, manually or
hand cranked until operation of the manual reset button.
Automatic Shutdown without lockout shall take place after the mains supply has been detected at
normal voltage for a period of five minutes without interruption after which the normal mains supply shall
be reconnected to the load via the interlocked changeover contactor.
The Diesel Alternator shall not however shut down after an automatic start until and unless it has been
running for a period of thirty minutes.
Warning Indications in the form of individual red indication lamps shall be provided on the Alternator
Control panel for:
(a) Engine Failed to Start and Locked Out.
(b) Engine Oil Pressure Low Shut Down and Locked out.
(c) Engine Temperature High Shut down and locked out.
(d) Fuel low with less than 12 hours supply remaining.
Indications (a), (b), and (c) shall not be cleared until the manual reset button has been operated.
Indication ( d) shall only clear when the fuel tank has been replenished to more than 12 hours of fuel
availability.
6.13.4 Diesel Engine
The Diesel Engine shall be water cooled or natural convection fan forced air cooled with flywheel ring
gear, 12V starter motor, dry type air filter, fuel filter, lubricating oil filter, and starting handle.
The engine shall be continuously rated in accordance with specification BS649 taking into account the
derating factors stated therein.
The engine shall be governed to within class A2 limits as set down in BS649.
The diesel engine shall be fitted with a meter to indicate the accumulated hours of operation.
The Environment of the Diesel Alternator will be in a room in which the air temperature prior to the
starting of the engine is likely to range between 10 degrees C and 50 degrees C. The anticipated method
of ventilation would be by air flow between a door or wall louvre to a roof cowl, but the Contractors shall
provide modifications if required by their recommendations.
The Exhaust System shall include a heavy duty exhaust silencer and condensation trap and drain
arrangement.
Contractors shall provide their recommendations for the overall exhaust system including exhaust pipe
diameter and bending radii.
The Fuel System shall consist of a fuel tank of sufficient capacity for 48 hours continuous running.
The Engineer will undertake tests under load conditions to ensure that the specified period of continuous
running is achieved.
The fuel tank shall have:
(a) Visual fuel level gauge which shall be installed to be visible without entering the room.
(b) A contact which operates when the fuel level has fallen and less than 12 hours fuel supply
remains.
(c) A drain cock at the lowest point of the tank.
(d) A metal braided fuel line between the fuel tank and the engine.
(e) A fuel line cock.
(f) A filler with a keylocked cap (automobile type) which shall be installed to enable the tank to
be re fuelled without entering the room. The cap shall be secured by a padlock, which shall be
permanently attached to the tank.
(g) The filler hole shall be provided with a bronze mesh strainer.
A hand operated fuel pump, preferably of the rotary type, shall be provided. The pump shall deliver 60
litres of fuel per minute and shall be complete with a minimum of 2m of hose, and a tailpipe suitable for
a "standard" 200 litre drum.
The Starter Battery shall be 12V Lead Acid type. It shall be capable of starting the set under all
environmental conditions and of supplying the power to the control circuitry, and of maintaining any lock
out circumstances which have occurred after the Diesel has shut down and no mains supply is available.
6.13.5 Alternator
The Alternator shall be 230V single phase 50Hz, self exiting and self regulating.
A brushless arrangement will be preferable.
The Rating and Performance
shall provide:
(a) Full Load Output at 0.8pf lagging.
(b) Full Load Voltage 230V AC 50Hz +/ 3% for any normal load up to full load.
(c) Maximum Waveform Distortion +/ 5%.
The alternator shall be supplied with magnetic and thermal overload protecting devices such that a major
short circuit or continual overload condition shall cause the Diesel Alternator to shut down and lock out.
The Alternator shall be provided with guarding arrangements to protect against injury by contact with
rotating parts.
The Complete Diesel Alternator Set shall be mounted on a rigid base frame constructed from standard
channel section or similar.
6.13.6 Transformers
All mains power supply transformers shall be double wound air cooled and shall comply to the
requirements of Australian Standard specification ASC61 1970 or equivalent.
The windings shall be tapped for nominal voltages to +/ 10% in 5% steps.
Output voltage variation no load to full load shall not exceed 5% at unity power factor.
Mains transformers shall be fully enclosed in a ventilated sheet metal case unless they are a part of other
enclosed equipment.
6.13.7 Transformer Rectifiers
Transformer rectifier sets shall employ double wound transformers and silicon full wave rectifiers.
The transformer rectifiers shall take a 230V input, and tapings shall be provided on the output at + 10%
and + 20% of the nominal D.C. voltage.
The output voltage variation between no load and full load shall not exceed 5% on each tapping.
The units shall be fully enclosed in a ventilated sheet metal case unless they are part of other enclosed
equipment.
6.13.8 Battery Chargers
Where battery backed supplies are required they shall be float charged by chargers of the automatic type.
They shall be capable of maintaining maximum load plus a charging current capable of recharging a fully
discharged battery to a fully recharged condition within 12 hours of power restoration.
The charger shall be fitted with over voltage and under voltage protection.
The Charger/ Battery configuration shall be wired and arranged to protect against over discharge of the
battery should extended mains power failure occur. This shall operate to disconnect the battery from the
load when the battery cell voltage falls below 1.1 volts per cell.
The output voltage shall be adjustable.
Meters shall be provided on the front panel to indicate output voltage and current.
All battery chargers shall be provided with adjustable low voltage alarm relays in addition to a " loss of
charging current" relay. These shall be capable of providing independent alarms of "Charge fail" and "low
voltage".
The chargers shall take mains supply at 230 volts single phase and with supply voltage variation + / 15%
and frequency fluctuation +/ 5% they shall deliver the D.C. output at a voltage variation +/ 5% maximum
and maximum ripple +/ 5% for any combination of no load to full load.
Automatic float/ boost charge shall be provided in the chargers, and an external " boost" charge switch
shall enable the charger to be set manually to "boost”.
6.13.9 Batteries
Unless specified otherwise, all batteries shall be long life ( guarantee a minimum of 10 years) , ultra- low
maintenance Lithium Ion battery. They shall normally be housed on an exclusive IP20 rack in a battery
room, but if they are housed in a room or equipment case together with other equipment they shall be
accommodated in a closed cupboard, which shall be well ventilated and have adequate internal space
for inspection, testing and maintenance.
6.14 Redundant Materials and Equipment
6.14.1 After completion of putting- to- work and prior to the issue of the Taking Over Certificate the Contractor
shall remove all equipment and material made redundant by the Works. Redundant material and
equipment shall be recovered carefully to avoid any damage.
6.14.2 All such redundant materials and equipment including signal and other foundations shall be recovered
with the exception of underground cables, signal and other foundations. Underground cables shall be cut
back to, at least, 300mm below ground level and left in the ground. All protruding bolts and metal from
the face of concrete foundations shall be removed.
6.14.3 All materials and equipment made redundant by the Works shall be identified, categorised, removed,
tested, catalogued, stockpiled and returned to SRT stock as required.
6.14.4 The process shall be managed and supervised by a Working Group comprising the Engineer’ s and
Contractors representatives.
6.14.5 An inventory shall be taken of all materials and equipment made redundant by the Works and all such
materials and equipment shall be listed including signals, points, wire, cable, relays, fuses, components,
telephones, electronic equipment and devices located at each operational room, S&T equipment room
(relay room), location case, etc.
6.14.6 All items shall then be assigned to the following categories as appropriate:
Transfer to SRT stock
Reuse
Scrap
6.14.7 Examination and Testing shall be carried out, as necessary, to confirm the condition of the items.
6.14.8 On recovery from site, materials and equipment shall be disposed of as follows:
(a) Cables, Wire, and Overhead Pole Route Wires
Wires and cables shall be recovered, coiled, delivered to a Depot to be designated by SRT and
unloaded and stacked neatly in a place designated by SRT.
(d) Reusable and Stock Items
reusable and stock items shall be carefully recovered, suitably packed, delivered to Depots to be
designated by SRT and unloaded and stacked neatly by type in places designated by SRT.
(e) Scrap Items
Scrap items shall be delivered to a depot to be designated by SRT.
6.14.9 Auditable documentation and records for the whole process shall be maintained including:
Inventory lists
Categories, schedules
Delivery/receipt dockets etc.
All such documentation shall be certified by the Working Group, approved by the Engineer and signed
by the delivery/receiving agencies.
6.15 ETCS Onboard (Trainborne) and Trackside Equipment
6.15.1 Introduction
This equipment specification details SRT’ s particular requirements for selecting and using ETCS onboard
and trackside equipment.
The ETCS wayside equipment shall be provided for connection to the signaling system at all stations in
the project for receiving information about signal aspect from the installed balise, and then be sent to the
Trainborne equipment to define speed and train movement characteristics as a Movement Authority (MA)
based on ETCS level 1. The Driver can control the train following permission from the MA which will be
shown on the Driver Machine Interface (DMI), based on ETCS level 1. All information for speed control and
signal aspect will show on the DMI.
6.15.2 General
SRT’ s ETCS onboard and trackside equipment will comply with European Community Conventional Rail
Technical Specification for Interoperability (TSI) relating the Control-Command and Signalling (CR CCS TSI).
The equipment shall have the supporting documentation required by European Norms including:
1) European Commission (EC) Declaration of conformity for EMC
2) EC Declaration of conformity for TSI
3) Evidence of assessment of conformity as required by CR CCS TSI 2006/ 679/ EC or later version for
operation in the European Community.
Equipment shall have a documentation set for its Installation, Commissioning, Operation and Maintenance
in accordance with EN50126 Railway Applications- The Specification and Demonstration of Reliability,
Viability, Maintainability and Safety (RAMS).
The equipment shall have evidence of compliance with EN50121-4 Railway Applications- Electromagnetic
compatibility – Part 4: Emission and Immunity of the signalling and telecommunications apparatus.
Evidence of compliance with EN50124- 1 Railway Applications- Insulation Coordination- Part 1: Basic
Requirements-Clearance and Creepage Distance for all Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
6.15.3 Onboard Equipment
(a) European Vital Computer (EVC)
The Contractor shall provide and Install the EVC (European Vital Computer). This equipment is used
for computing the speed profile for a line section ahead, and monitors adherence to the permitted
maximum speed.
EVC ETCS onboard equipment is a computer-base system that supervises the movement of the train
to which it belongs, on basis of information exchange with the trackside sub-system.
The EVC ETCS onboard shall be compliance is required with the following requirements for SIL4
applications.
(b) Driver Machine Interface (DMI)
The Contractor shall provide and Install DMI (Driver Machine Interface). This equipment is the interface
between ETCS system and driver by connected to EVC. DMI enables the control of the trainborne
equipment and provides visual and audible outputs. DMI used for display status such speed and
supervision information (actual / permissible / target speed, braking information, supplementary driving
information) , Target distance, Current orders and announcements, audible alarms using either the
integrated DMI sound or an external speaker and other functions which necessary for driver. DMI is
enable to insert train’s initial information.
DMI will be installed at least 2 sets for 1 train. DMI details will be defined according to
ERA_ERTMS_015560 or ERA_ERTMS_06E225.
The ETCS DMI shall be displayed graphical, alphanumerical and acoustic information to the driver, the
ETCS DMI technology to be used for this project such as soft keys or touch screen where appropriate
The default speed display on the ETCS DMI shall be in Kilometer Per Hour (km/hr).
The DMI installation and position shall be suitable for the driver.
The driver shall be able to interact with the DMI display area without impediment by other cab
equipment, controls or structure.
Manual DMI luminance adjustment and loudspeaker volume control shall be simple to achieve whilst
the vehicle is in motion.
The brightness of the DMI and cab indications shall be sufficiently adjustable to be comfortably viewed
over the full range of ambient cab lighting levels.
The DMI alarms shall be audible above background noised at all speeds and in all operating conditions.
Where existing non – ETCS cab alarms impair the driver’ s recognition of standard DMI alarms, the
existing non – ETCS alarm shall be changed.
The DMI shall not freeze or otherwise fail without the driver being made aware.
Data Entry and Interaction
The DMI data entry process shall be designed to minimize the likelihood of driver error when selecting
the train type or parameters.
The ETCS DMI shall support Alphanumeric entry of the train running number as authorised by the
Technical Specification for Interoperability (TSI).
The need for multiple entry of any particular item of data shall be avoided through the linkage of cab
systems by appropriate interfaces.
The onboard ETCS system shall not impose a timeout limit on the data entry task.
Set Speed Function
When a ‘Set Speed’ automatic speed control function is active, the speed set point shall be displayed
on the DMI speed dial.
Any automatic set speed control shall be disengaged immediately when the ETCS commands a brake
intervention.
Speed Display
The driver shall be presented with vehicle speed information whilst the ETCS onboard system is
isolated.
The ETCS DMI speed display in IS mode, where provided, shall be capable of displaying speed in the
correct units for the location of operation.
Installation
The DMI shall comply with EN ISO 9241:9 “Ergonomic requirements for office work with visual display
terminals or subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The DMI size and location shall be suitable for operation.
The driver shall be able to move his or her hands around the outside of the perimeter of the DMI
without impediment by other cab equipment, control or structure.
(c) Odometry and Doppler Radar
The Contractor shall provide and Install Odometer. This equipment will be used for measuring
accuracy distance and speed.
The Contractor shall provide and Install Doppler Radar. This equipment is used for odometer
purposes. Doppler radar determines the physical travel of the vehicle by contactless measuring. It
sends electromagnetic signals to the track and receives their reflections.
Calibration of the odometry system shall not require additional or more complex measurement of
the wheels beyond that already performed on the vehicle for conventional purposes.
The odometry system shall not require additional wheel turning or renewal to maintain accuracy
further to that necessary for the physical wheel / rail interface.
Wheel diameter calibration shall not require specific additions or changes to the SRT rail network.
(d) Eurobalise Reader (Antenna)
The balise reader must be able to read Eurobalises at all speeds up to the maximum speed of the
train to which it is fitted and beyond by only a sufficient margin to reflect the speeds reasonably
achievable by the train in overspeed conditions.
The Eurobalise reader system shall not require adjustment during maintenance in order to operate
on the train to which it is fitted.
(e) Juridical Recording Unit (JRU)

The Contractor shall provide and Install JRU (Juridical Recording Unit). This equipment is used for as
a data of train movement recorder used for legal evaluation purposes. The JRU will be connected to
the EVC and stores all information which could be used as evidence in the event of an accident. This
search history’s searching shall then display information for operation actions in text format or GUI as
necessary. This information must clearly define and detail the event in order for appropriate action to
be quickly taken.
JRU shall be provided to download data record from the onboard while the train is in service.
The equipment shall have evidence of compliance with Function Interface Specification (FIS) Juridical
Recording SUBSET-027.
(f) Installation Design
General
The ETCS onboard system shall incorporate modularity and the facilities to upgrade or replace parts
of the system separately.
The ETCS onboard system shall minimise the requirements for space on the vehicle.
The ETCS onboard system shall incorporate, to the extent permitted by the requirements of this
specification, proven available components and software.
Introduction of ETCS shall not compromise existing provision of redundancy within other systems.
The Contractor shall Install Limit of Area markers for ETCS level 1 at start and end of the system area.
Environmental
The ETCS onboard system shall meet its reliability requirement in the environmental conditions in
which it will operate.
The ETCS onboard system shall meet its predicted service life in the environmental conditions in
which it will operate.
The ETCS onboard system shall not reduce the reliability or performance of other systems on the
train.
The ETCS onboard system shall not cause discomfort to passengers or train crew.
Equipment shall not be damaged or degraded in appearance by ultraviolet and infrared radiation
experienced by the equipment during its lifetime.
Modifications to the cab layout shall ensure that the driver controls and indications are clearly legible
from the driver’s operating position over the full range of ambient lighting levels and incidence angles.
Shock, Vibration & Noise
The ETCS onboard system shall meet the reliability requirements and predicted service life in the
shock and vibration environment encountered on the vehicle to which it is fitted.
The ETCS onboard system shall not induce other equipment to vibrate or introduce noise, which may
cause discomfort or distraction to train crew or passengers.
Vibration experienced by the vehicle in operation shall not render the DMI or cab indications illegible
at any time.
Electromagnetic Compatibility
The ETCS onboard system shall not degrade any other system or component on the vehicle by
introducing electromagnetic or electrostatic interference.
The ETCS onboard system shall not be adversely affected by electromagnetic or electrostatic
interference from others vehicle system.
6.15.4 Trackside Equipment
(a) Line side Electronic (Encoder) Unit (LEU)
The Contractor shall provide and Install LEU (Lineside Electronic Unit). This equipment will determine
displayed signal aspects and connect to all signal aspects such as green, yellow, red, call-on, junction,
shunting etc. to get information, then sent to balise according to ETCS level 1 standard. If LEU receives
signal aspects that’s not present then it automatically outputs a fault telegram. LEU details will be
defined according to SUBSET-026.
A LEU controls the telegrams transmitted to the train via controlled Eurobalises.
The LEU shall:
a) Be compliance is required with the following requirements for SIL4 applications.
b) Be not reducing the safety of the existing signalling system or interfering with existing lamp
proving systems.
c) Be able to detect lit aspects regardless of lighting state and without the use of additional
devices that might affect safety.
d) Be suitable for use in a case which provides a degree of protection to IP23 or better for on
signal post or fit in line side location case.
e) Have labelling on all interface terminals and any associated plugs.
f) The LEU determines the displayed signal aspects from the currents in the lamp circuits and
route information circuits. The appropriate telegrams for the signal aspect and route
information are then selected and sent to the controlled balises. If the LEU receives signal
aspects or route information that is not present in signal table then it automatically outputs
a fault telegram
g) The LEU meets the ETCS technical specification for interoperability associated with UNISIG
SRS baseline 2.3.0d.
h) The LEU has a modular structure that enables an optimal adaptation to the different
functionalities required by ETCS Level 1. The default LEU configuration is capable of driving
up to 2 balises. Additional LEU sets will be provided in the same location case to support
more connections in event additional balises are required.
i) Comprehensive monitoring circuitry recognizes faults and initiates the necessary remedial
measure. The status of the LEU is displayed on the two seven-segment displays on the “logic
kernel” module and separately on the four status LEDs for each of the two channels.
LEU Reliability, Availability and Maintainability criteria include:
a) A hazard control measure should be provided to prevent operation of the LEU when an
incorrect version of the application data is installed.
b) LEU configuration setting that may need to be set or checked by The Engineer during
equipment replacement must be clearly labeled.
c) LEUs that use Commercial off the shelf (COTS) equipment for the configuration and
maintenance facilities are preferred.
(b) Eurobalises
The Contractor shall provide and Install Balise that used as a lineside transponder for transmitting
data from the line to the train. The balise uses the transponder technology in which power is supplied
and data is transmitted via a vertical electro-magnetic field at different frequencies. This equipment
will install at trackside and can divide to Fixed Balise, Controlled Balise and Infill Balise. In case of
install at sleeper, contractor has to design to submit and approve by SRT. Balise will transmit
information to trainborne. Balise will be defined according to SUBSET-036.
Eurobalise acceptance criteria are:
a) Eurobalises shall compliance is required with the following requirements for SIL4 applications.
b) Class A Eurobalise with certification to SUBSET-036 Issue 2.3.0 or Latest version are accepted.
c) Only the compact or reduced size Eurobalise is accepted.
d) Controlled (also known as transparent, variable, commutable) Eurobalises are accepted with
and without a plug connection for the external cable
e) The Eurobalises provides for transverse mounting on a concrete bearer with fixing on the
centre line of the long axis of the bearer. Transverse mounting has short sides of the
Eurobalise parallel with the rails. That shall be proposed by the Contractor with detailed
drawings for SRT approval.
f) Suitability for the Eurobalise to be mounted directly on the sleeper with no need to increase
height to meet Class A mounting requirements. The use of padding under the Eurobalise for
vibration damping and strain relief is accepted.
g) No configuration of the Eurobalise via wiring, links or switches required during maintenance
activities. Maintenance activities include Eurobalise replacement.
h) Evidence of improved life under high levels of UV from Sunlight.
(c) Cable
Cables from LEU to Eurobalise shall:
a) Be designed for outdoor use in either pit and pipe or direct burial cable routes.
b) Be resistant to rodent attack.
c) Comply with the technical specifications set by the LEU supplier for operation with the cable
distance between LEU and Eurobalise ranging 10m to 800m.
d) Have a Fire Safe, Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH) suitable for tunnel installation.
END SIGNALLING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
SIGNALLING CABLES & WIRES
7. SIGNALLING CABLES & WIRES

7.1 General
All internal wiring for vital interlocking circuits shall be P.V.C. insulated 1000 V grade stranded tinned
annealed copper conductor.
All cables shall generally be in accordance with the requirements of A. S. 3147or equilvalent for P. V. C.
Insulated Electric Cables and Flexible Cables for underground installation, with Conductors insulated with
V- 75 P. V. C. , and sheathed with 4C- 75 P. V. C. compound, but shall in any case fully comply with this
Specification for Signalling Cables as a minimum requirement.
The cable shall be made up with the conductors P. V. C. insulated, and laid up in a P. V. C. inner sheath,
wound with steel tape armouring sheathed with P.V.C., Nylon jacketed and P.V.C. served overall.
The Nylon jacket shall serve as a termite protection and shall be stabilised Nylon 12 or equivalent, and
shall have a minimum radial thickness of 0.5 mm.
All conductors shall be copper.
Each core shall be individually numbered or identified indelibly every 200 mm along the length.
The outer sheath shall be coloured black and shall be indented at a maximum of 1 m interval with: - the
inscription State Railway of Thailand – S & T. Departments and the number and size of the conductors in

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ราชอาณาจักรไทย

บริษัท เอ็ม เอ เอ คอนซัลแตนท จํากัด

บริษัท เอ็ม เอ เอ คอนซัลแตนท2 จำกัด

SECTION 2: EARTHWORKS 2-1

SECTION 3: ROADWORKS 3-1

3.9 SLOPE PROTECTION 3-73

SECTION 4: STRUCTURAL WORKS 4-1

SECTION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

(2) Facilities Provided by SRT

1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

1.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

The off-site function is one of Procurement and Construction Management,

organisation or sub-organisation the c.v.'s of expatriate and local engineers employed on

1.4 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

or supplier. Certification shall be in the form of letter or company-standard forms

(2) Geotechnical Investigation Report

(3) Technical Data

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

(2) Minimum Agenda

1.6 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

(vi) Final inspection and testing;

(h) Slack or float (in calendar days);

1.7 MOBILISATION AND DEMOBILISATION

1.7.3.3 Conditions Prerequisite to Completion Inspections

1.8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

(d) Equipment with the requirement of Section 1.8 Schedule 1.8-1

• Sun shades to windows

• Fence, main gates

(ii) For signalling work: 1 (one) persons.

1.8.3.6 Naked Flame

public. Roads closed to traffic shall be protected by effective barricades and

1.8.3.11 Construction Plant

(c) Refrain from depositing rubbish or causing nuisance or permitting nuisance to be

1.2 Office Containers (Mobile office):

Equipment (Minimum capacity shown) Requirement

Equipment (Minimum capacity shown) Requirement

Equipment (Minimum capacity shown) Requirement

Equipment (Minimum capacity shown) Requirement

(i) For civil work 1 (one) car.

1.9 CONSTRUCTION SURVEYS

1.9.3.3 Existing Conditions Survey

Qty Equipment Description

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING LABORATORY

1.10.1.3 System Description

(b) On-site quality control programme.

1.10.3.3 Control of Suppliers and In-Coming Material

2 - Straight Edge, Steel, 12 inch

10. Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate: AASHTO-T 84

1.11 PROJECT RECORDS

Twenty-five copies of each manual shall be provided.

1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

1.12.3.4 Ground Water Quality

1.12.3.8 Economic and Social Conditions

Representative with proven track record of successful projects conducted in

• Test Results Criteria Sound Transmission Loss

Frequency (Hertz) Sound Absorption Coefficient (Alpha)

SECTION 2: EARTH WORKS

2.1 EARTH WORKS DEFINITIONS AND CLASSIFICATIONS

2.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

- Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates by AASHTO

(2) Suitable Material

2.4 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

(b) Gravel and Crushed Rock

(c) Gravel Filters